QCS 2014 Complete PDF

QCS 2014 Contents Page 1
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 GENERAL
Part 1 Introduction
Part 2 Use and Maintenance of the Site
Part 3 Site Access and Entry onto the Site
Part 4 Protection
Part 5 Interference
Part 6 Project Meetings
Part 7 Submittals
Part 8 Building Demolition
Part 9 Materials
ar
Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety
Engineer’s Site Facilities
at
Part 11
Part 12 Contractor’s Site Facilities-Q
Part 13 Setting Out of the Works
Part 14 Temporary Works and Equipment
Part 15 Temporary Controls
LL
Part 16 Traffic Diversions

Part 17 Project Co-ordination
W
Part 18 Other Contractors

Part 19 Regulatory Requirements
Part 20 Clearance of the Site
s
en
Part 21 Final Inspection and Handover Procedures

Part 22 New Technologies and Innovations
Part 23 Design and Supervision Consultant Quality Requirement
m
Part 24 Construction Dewatering

e
Si
SECTION 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL

Part 1 General
Part 2 Submittals
Part 3 Contractor’s Quality Personnel
Part 4 Document and Data Control
Part 5 Quality Records
Part 6 Quality Audits
Part 7 Inspecting And Testing
Part 8 Materials
Part 9 Nonconformance Monitoring
Part 10 Laboratories
Part 11 Site Meetings And Reports
Part 12 Failure By The Contractor To Meet Acceptable Quality Performance
Part 13 Suspension of Work
Part 14 APPENDIX A – Sampling and Testing Frequencies
Part 15 APPENDIX B – Templates
(Contractors Project Quality Plan Template, Contractors Inspection And Test
Plan Template, and Quality Non-conformance Template)
SECTION 3 GROUND INVESTIGATION

Part 1 General
Part 2 Boreholes
Part 3 Pits and Trenches
Part 4 Soil Sampling
Part 5 in-Situ Testing, Instrumentation and Monitoring
Part 6 Laboratory Testing
SECTION 4 Foundations and Retaining Structures

Part 1 General Requirements for Piling Work
Part 2 Concrete Works for Piling
Part 3 Shadow Foundations
Part 4 Deep Foundations
ar
Part 5 Retaining Structures
at
SECTION 5 CONCRETE -Q
Part 1 General
Part 2 Aggregates
Part 3 Cementitious Materials
LL
Part 4 Water
Part 5 Admixtures
W
Part 6 Property Requirements

Part 7 Concrete Plants
Part 8 Transportation and Placing Of Concrete
s
Part 9 Formwork
en
Part 10 Curing
Part 11 Reinforcement
m
Part 12 Joints
e
Part 13 Inspection and Testing Of Hardened Concrete

Si
Part 14 Protective Treatments for Concrete

Part 15 Hot Weather Concreting
Part 16 Miscellaneous
Part 17 Structural Precast Concrete
Part 18 Prestressed Concrete
Part 19 Testing of Water Retaining Structures
Part 20 Personnel Qualifications and Certification
SECTION 6 ROADWORKS
Part 1 General
Part 2 Site Clearance
Part 3 Earthworks
Part 4 Unbound Pavement Materials
Part 5 Asphalt Works
Part 6 Concrete Road Pavements
Part 7 Asphalt Plants
Part 8 Recycled and Stabilised Road Materials
Part 9 Recycled Aggregate for Roadworks
Part 10 Vehicle Crash Barriers

Part 11 Kerbs, Footways and Paved Areas
Part 12 Fencing
Part 13 Traffic Signs, Markings and Studs
Part 14 Works in Relation To Services
Part 15 Road Lighting
Part 16 Traffic Signals
Part 17 Road Drainage
Part 18 Geosynthetics
Part 19 Miscellaneous
SECTION 7 GREEN CONSTRUCTIONS

Part 1 Introduction
Part 2 Global Sustainability Assessment System - GSAS
Part 3 Energy
ar
Part 4 Water [W]
at
Part 5 Indoor Environment
Part 6 Cultural and Economic Value -Q
SECTION 8 DRAINAGE WORKS
Part 1 General
LL
Part 2 Earthworks
Part 3 Pipes and Fittings Materials
W
Part 4 Pipeline Installation

Part 5 Valves, Penstocks and Appurtenances
s
Part 6 Miscellaneous Metal Works

en
Part 7 Miscellaneous GRP Works

Part 8 Protective Coatings and Painting
m
Part 9 Trenchless Pipeline Construction

Part 10 Pipelines Cleaning and Inspection Survey
e
Part 11 Sewer Rehabilitation

Si
Part 12 Vacuum Sewerage System
SECTION 9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Part 1 General
Part 2 Submersible Pumps
Part 3 Centrifugal Pumps (Dry Well)
Part 4 Centrifugal Pumps (Split Casing)
Part 5 Archimedian Screw Pumps
Part 6 Surge Control System
Part 7 Lifting Equipment
Part 8 Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
Part 9 Odour Control Equipment-Carbon Type
Part 10 Odour Control Equipment-Scrubber Type
Part 11 Screening Equipment
Part 12 Grit Removal Equipment
Part 13 Aeration Equipment
Part 14 Air Blowers and Compressors
Part 15 Settlement Tank Equipment

Part 16 Tertiary Treatment Granular Filters
Part 17 Sludge Thickening and Dewatering Equipment
Part 18 Mixers and Stirrers
Part 19 Chlorination Plant Equipment
Part 20 Washwater Systems
Part 21 Miscellaneous Equipment
Part 22 Ventilation Systems
SECTION 10 INSTRUMENTATION, CONTROL AND AUTOMATION

Part 1 General
Part 2 Telemetry/SCADA
Part 3 Primary Elements
Part 4 Panel Mounted and Miscellaneous Instruments
Part 5 Control Panels and Control Room Hardware
ar
SECTION 11 HEALTH & SAFETY
at
Part 1 Regulatory Document
Part 2 Safety and Accident Prevention Management / Administration System
-Q
(SAMAS)
LL
SECTION 12 EARTHWORKS RELATED TO BUILDINGS

Part 1 General
W
Part 2 Excavations
Part 3 Filling
Part 4 Utility Trenches
s
Part 5 Installation of Protective Membranes

en
m
SECTION 13 MASONRY
Part 1 General
e
Part 2 Mortar and Grout

Si
Part 3 Accessories
Part 4 Unit Masonry
Part 5 Masonry Laying
SECTION 14 ROOFING
Part 1 General
Part 2 Membrane Roofing
Part 3 Metal and Plastic Roofing
Part 4 Roof and Deck Insulation
Part 5 Roofing Tiles
SECTION 15 SECTION 15 INSULATION OF BUILDINGS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Building Insulation
Part 3 Cold Stores
SECTION 16 STRUCTURAL STEELWORKS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Materials
Part 3 Drawings
Part 4 Fabrication
Part 5 Welding
Part 6 Bolting
Part 7 Accuracy of Fabrication
Part 8 Erection
Part 9 Accuracy of Erected Steelwork
Part 10 Protective Treatment
SECTION 17 METALWORK
Part 1 General
Part 2 Materials Classification
Part 3 Metal Doors and Windows
ar
Part 4 Architectural Metal Work
at
Part 5 Light Metal Support and Cladding Support
Part 6 Workmanship -Q
SECTION 18 CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY
Part 1 General
LL
Part 2 Wood Treatment

Part 3 Structural Timber (Rough Carpentry)
W
Part 4 Architectural Timber (Finished Carpentry, Millwork)

Part 5 Joinery
s
Part 6 Fasteners and Adhesives

en
Part 7 Ironmongery (Hardware)

m
SECTION 19 PLUMBING WORK

e
Part 1 General
Si
Part 2 Water Distribution

Part 3 Plumbing Pipework in Trenches
Part 4 Cold Water Storage
Part 5 Hot Water Storage
Part 6 Commissioning of Systems
Part 7 Plumbing for Gases
SECTION 20 DRAINAGE WORKS FOR BUILDINGS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Internal Drainage Works
Part 3 External Drainage Works
Part 4 Drainage Pipes in Trenches
Part 5 Structures Related To Drainage Work
Part 6 Surface Water Drainage
Part 7 Commissioning Of Systems
SECTION 21 ELECTRICAL WORKS

Part 1 General Provisions for Electrical Installation
Part 2 MV Factory Built Assemblies (FBA’s)
Part 3 Protective Devices
Part 4 Motor Starters
Part 5 Low Voltage Variable Speed Controllers
Part 6 Cables and Small Wiring
Part 7 Conduits and Conduit Boxes
Part 8 Trunking
Part 9 Cable Trays
Part 10 Wiring Accessories and General Power
Part 11 Light Fittings
Part 12 Emergency Lighting
Part 13 Telephone Installations
Part 14 Structured Cabling Systems
Part 15 Electric Motors
ar
Part 16 Power Factor Correction Capacitors
Part 17 Standby Diesel Generator Set
at
Part 18 Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems
-Q
Part 19 Sound and Call Systems
Part 20 Elevators/Escalators
Part 21 Lightning Protection
LL
Part 22 Earthing and Bonding

Part 23 Inspection and Testing
Part 24 Documentation Format
W
Part 25 Electrical Identification

Part 26 Electromagnetic Compatibility
s
Part 27 Battery and Battery Charger

en
Part 28 Small Enclosures

Part 29 Underfloor Ducts
m
Part 30 Duct Bank and Manholes

e
Part 31 Power Distribution Transformers

Part 32 11 kv Switchgear
Si
Part 33 Actuators
Part 34 HV Variable Frequency Drive
SECTION 22 AIR CONDITIONING, REFRIGERATION AND VENTILATION

Part 1 General
Part 2 Central Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Equipment
Part 3 Unitary Equipment
Part 4 Air Handling Equipment
Part 5 Chilled Water Pipework
Part 6 Ductwork and Air-Side Equipment
Part 7 Thermal Insulation
Part 8 Exhaust Fans
Part 9 Accessories
SECTION 23 FIRE FIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems
Part 3 Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Systems

Part 4 Fire Fighting System
Part 5 Testing and Commissioning
SECTION 24 FINISHES TO BUILDINGS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Lath and Plaster
Part 3 Dry Lining (Wall Board)
Part 4 Special Wall Surfaces
Part 5 Tiles
Part 6 Terrazzo
Part 7 Stone Flooring
Part 8 Unit Masonry Flooring
Part 9 Floor Screeds and Treatments
Part 10 Joints, Caulking and Sealants
Part 11 Recessed Duct Covers
ar
Part 12 Carpeting
at
Part 13 Other Floor Coverings
Part 14 Ceilings -Q
SECTION 25 GLASS AND GLAZING
Part 1 General
LL
Part 2 Glass
Part 3 Workmanship
W
Part 4 Glazed Curtain Walling System

SECTION 26 PAINTING AND DECORATING
s
Part 1 General
en
Part 2 Surface Preparation for Painting

Part 3 Primers, Paints and Coatings
m
Part 4 Wall Coverings of Decorative Papers/Fabrics

e
Si
SECTION 27 EXTERNAL WORKS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Block Paved Areas
Part 3 Fences and Gates
Part 4 Fountains and Aquatic Features
Part 5 Site Furniture
Part 6 Flag Poles
Part 7 Protective or Shade Cover Systems
Part 8 Play Field and Park Equipment
Part 9 Miscellaneous Other External Works
SECTION 28 LANDSCAPING
Part 1 Landscape Planting
Part 2 Landscape Irrigation System
Part 3 Play Equipment General Specification
SECTION 29 RAILWAYS
Part 1 Design Related Issues Aspects
Part 2 Site Clearance
Part 3 Geotechnical Specifications
Part 4 Tunnel
Part 5 Cut and cover Structure
Part 6 Earthworks and Roadworks
Part 7 Concrete Structures
Part 8 Steel Structures
Part 9 Drainage
Part 10 Railway Track
Part 11 Monitoring and Instrumentation
Part 12 Survey and Setting Out
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
me
Si
QCS 2014 Introduction Page 1
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of the technical regulation QS 27/2014 [Qatar Construction Specifications 2014 (QCS-
2014)] is to provide technical guidance in connection with the execution of constructions in the State of
Qatar. Such guidance includes the establishment of the minimum acceptable material quality and
workmanship for those kinds of work which commonly occur in engineered projects in the State of
Qatar.
Qatar Construction Specifications 2014 (QCS 2014) supersedes Qatar National Construction
Standards 2010 (QCS 2010) in all respects.
While working earnestly to benefit from new engineering developments, Laboratories and
Standardisation Affairs in the Ministry of Environment requests that all those undertaking works
projects in the State of Qatar to implement the specifications contained herein.
We welcome any observations, suggestions or additions for future issues.
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
QCS 2014 Document History Page 1
DOCUMENT HISTORY
The purpose of the Document History is to record changes to Qatar Construction Specifications. In the
event of a revision to the technical regulation, Laboratories and Standardisation Affairs in the Ministry
of Environment will issue the amended pages and re-issue the Document History.
The Document History pages should contain a description of the change, the issue reference and the
date of issue as noted below. The updated Document History should replace the superseded history
and the revised pages of the technical regulation should be placed in the appropriate position in the
technical regulation.
 The technical regulation QS 27/2007 [Qatar National Construction Standards 2007 (QCS 2007)]
replaces Qatar Construction Specification 2002 (QCS 2002) and it supersedes in all respects.
 The technical regulation QS 27/2010 [Qatar Construction Specifications 2010 (QCS 2010)]
replaces the technical regulation QS 27/2007 [Qatar National Construction Standards 2007
(QCS 2007)] and it supersedes in all respects.
ar
 Further, the technical regulation QS 27/2014 [Qatar Construction Specifications 2014 (QCS
at
2014)] replaces the technical regulation QS 27/2010 [Qatar Construction Specifications 2010
(QCS 2010)] and it supersedes in all respects.
-Q
LL
W
Description Issue Date
Qatar Construction Specification Original Issue April 2000

s
Qatar Construction Specification 2002 Revision I November 2002

en
Qatar National Construction Standards 2007 Revision II July 2007

Qatar Construction Specifications 2010 Revision III March 2011
m
Qatar Construction Specifications 2014 Revision IV October 2014

e
Si
QCS 2014 Acknowledgements Page 1
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014) has been drawn upon the technical knowledge and
experience of a number of Governmental Ministries, Departments and Authorities in the State of
Qatar. The QCS technical committee and associated subcommittees whose members are
acknowledged below spearheaded the current revision of QCS 2014.
Dr. Mohammed Saif Al-Kuwari Eng. Khalid Al-Emadi

Assistant Undersecretary Chairman of QCS
ar
Ministry of Environment Manager of Q&S Dept. Ashghal
at
Technical Committee for Preparing and Development of QCS -Q
LL
W
s
Nasser Al- Naimi Abdul Hameed M. Al-Yahri Yousef Mahmoud Ahmed Nooh Meshal Saoud Al Mesallam
Deputy Chairman of QCS Sec. of the committee Asst. Sec. of the committee Ministry Of Energy & Trade
en
Ministry of Environment Ministry of Environment H/ of the Documents Editing

Quality Supervisor -Ashghal
e m
Si
Dr. Noureddin Daas Moaaz Hashim Dr. Khaled Hassan Osman Elhussien
Chairperson of Concrete Committee Chairperson of Road Committee Member of Concrete Committee Chairperson of Rail Committee
Ministry of Environment Member of: Rail committee TRL Member of Road committee
Quality Expert - Ashghal Quality Researcher - Ashghal
Sharif Mohamed Gareth Thomas Ehab G Saleh

Chairperson of Drainage Committee Chairperson of: Quality Committee Chairperson of: Safety Committee
Member of Rail Sub-committee Quality Assurance & Quality Safety Specialist - Ashghal
Design Engineer- Ashghal Control Expert - Ashghal
Sub Committees Members
Abdulrahim Sukik Adel M. Quraan Adrian Black Ahmed Mohd. Sayd Allan McEwan Ahmed Sami
Concrete Committee Reviewers Safety Committee Concrete Committee Quality Committee Roads Committee
ACES CH2M HILL MWH Ministry of Environment KBR Ashghal
Amr Elmotasem Arthur Hannah David Matyus David Lewis Dick Steer Dr.Hany Mohamed
Concrete Committee Roads Committee Concrete Committee Roads Committee Drainage Committee Reviewers
ar
AEB (TRL) London QPMC AMEY Ashghal Ashghal
at
-Q
LL
Effrosyni Plexousaki Elie Khairallah Essam El Sarag Fatih Türk Fraser McCaskill Gary Cook
Quality Committee Concrete Committee Green Building Concrete&RailCommittee Quality Committee Roads Committee
ANAS ACTS GORD Mace / EC Harris Mace / EC Harris ANAS
W
s
en
m
Ghaleb Al Zubi Gireesh Babu Hazem Abdel Rahman Huw Woodyatt Issam A. Sarhan Jaafar. Al-Aloosi
Reviewers Concrete Committee Roads Committee Roads Committee Website Developer Concrete Committee
ACES QDC Ashghal Exova MOE Ashghal
e
Si
Jaafer Mohammed Jose Vellattukudy Karunarathna T A Karen O’Sullivan Kim Catrambone Konstantinos k
Roads Committee Drainage Committee Drainage Committee Roads Committee Roads Committee Roads Committee
MOE Ashghal Ashghal FUGRO Parsons Brinckerhoff Ashghal
Martin Cahalan Mathhar Mustafa Markus Kretschmer Melina Davies Mohammed Adil Mohammed Al-Yahri
Quality Committee Concrete Committee Concrete&RailCommittee Roads Committee Document Controller Drainage Committee
AMEY Hilti Qatar Qatar Rail Parsons Brinckerhoff Ashghal Ashghal
Mohamed El sherbiny Mohanasundaram Michael De Roos Michelle Magbojos Neil Courtman Neil Kirkpatrick
Green Building Concrete Committee Safety Committee Roads Committee Quality Committee Green Building
Ashghal QDC Ashghal Ashghal Mace Parsons Brinckerhoff
Nicholas Ray Packiaraj Petru Ghicu Peter E. Sebaaly Peter Latham Peter Sutton
Quality Committee Drainage Committee Drainage Committee Roads Committee Concrete Committee Safety Committee
CH2MHill Ashgha Ashghal ANAS ReadyMix AMEY
ar
at
Rabih Boukaidbey Rania Hashim Abadi Rawshan Haniffa Rabih Fakih Richard James Ellis Robert Overett
Concrete Committee Roads Committee Document Controller
-Q
Concrete Committee Roads Committee Roads Committee
ACTS Ashghal Ashghal GREY MATTERS Gulf Laboratories Parsons Brinckerhoff
LL
W
Rolando Matias Roy Cupples Salah Mousa Sheik Pahary Saleem Purayil Purayil Shyam Sundar
s
Quality Committee Roads Committee Safety Committee Safety Committee Document Controller Concrete Committee
Parsons Brinckerhoff Ashghal Ministry of Labor QPM Ashghal QDC
en
e m
Si
Srinivasan Samiappan Subrato Mukherjee Tom Baines Yasser Berzan

Concrete Committee Concrete Committee Safety Committee Safety Committee
QDC l QDC EC Harris Ashghal
ar
at
ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
Ministry of Environment
-Q
Dr Mohamed Saif Al-Kuwari
Undersecretary Assistant of MoE
LL
Preparing and Development of Qatar Building Code Committee
Technical Committee for Preparing and Development of QCS
W
Eng. Khalid Al-Emadi
Chairman of QCS
s
en Nasser Al-Naimi
Deputy Chairman of QCS
em
Abdul Hameed M. Al-Yahri, Yousef Mahmoud Ahmed Nooh, Gareth H. Thomas, Noureddin Daas, Moaaz Hashim, Osman Elhussien, Sharif Mohamed, Ehab Saleh
Si
Sub Committees
QUALITY CONCRETE ROADS GREEN BUILDING DRAINAGE SAFETY RAIL
Gareth H. Thomas Noureddin Daas Moaaz Hashim Khalid Al- Emadi Sharif Mohamed Ehab Saleh Osman Elhussien
Effrosyni Plexousaki Khaled Hassan Osman Elhussien Noureddin Daas Dick Steer Yasser Berzan Moaaz Hashim
Neil Courtman Jaafar Isam S. Al-Aloosi Jaafer Mohammed Al Saidi Mohamed El sherbiny Mohammed Homoud Al-Yahri Peter Sutton Sharif Mohamed
Allan McEwan Rabih Fakih Gary Cook Essam El Sarag Petru Ghicu Tom Baines Markus Kretschmer
Martin Cahalan David Matyus Huw Woodyatt Neil Kirkpatrick Jose Vellattukudy Salah Mousa Fatih Turk
Nicholas Ray Peter Latham Richard James Ellis Packiaraj Thangaswamy Michael De Roos
Rolando Matias Gireesh Babu.K.M Arthur Hannah Karunarathna T A. Kithsiri Adrian Black
Fraser McCaskill Srinivasan Samiappan Khaled Hassan Sheik Pahary
Shyam Sundar Rajaram Michelle Magbojos
Mohanasundaram Rangasamy
Ahmed Mohamed El Sayd
Amr Elmotasem Elkady Contributors to
Road Lighting Work Group Website Developer Reviewers Document Controllers
Abdulrahim Mohammed Road Section
Mathhar Ghazi Mustafa
Sabet Hajem Ibrahi Peter E. Sebaaly Kim Catrambone Issam A. Sarhan
Dr.Hany Mohamed Yousef Mahmoud Nooh
Elie Khairallah Karen O’Sullivan Melina Davies Ghaleb Al Zubi Saleem Puthiya Purayil
Subrato Mukherjee Konstantinos Kanellaidis Hazem Abdel Rahman Adel M. Quraan Mohammed Adil
Rabih Bahij Boukaidbey David Lewis Rawshan Haniffa
Fatih Türk Recycling Roy Cupples
Rania Hashim Al-Abadi
Robert Overett
Moaaz Hashim
Osman Elhussien
Gary Cook
Ahmed Sami Sayed Abbas
QCS 2014 Feedback Page 1
FEEDBACK
It is intended that the technical regulation, Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS), will be amended
periodically. Any suggestions for amendments to Qatar Construction Specifications should be sent to
Laboratories and Standardisation Affairs in the Ministry of Environment.
By post: The Coordinator

Qatar Construction Specifications 2014
Laboratories & Standardisation Affairs
PO Box 23277
Doha, Qatar
By e-mail: qcs@moe.gov.qa
Please ensure that the following information are included in all correspondences:
 Section number and title


ar
Part number and title
 Clause and paragraph number
at
 Page
 Your name and contact details -Q
Please use the following feedback form where possible and applicable.
LL
QCS 2014 Feedback

Section name and title
W
Part name and title

Clause and paragraph number
s
en
Page
Name and contact details
e m
Si
Date
Comments / Suggestions / Technical Justifications
QCS 2014 Section 01: General Page1
Part 01: Introduction
1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... 2
1.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

1.1.1 Scope of this Section 2
1.1.2 Scope of the Qatar Construction Specification 2
1.1.3 References 2
1.1.4 Precedence of Specification and Documents 2
1.2 COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Compliance with the Qatar Construction Specification 3
1.2.2 Compliance with the General Conditions of Contract 3
1.3 STANDARDS ................................................................................................. 3
1.3.1 References to Standards 3
1.3.2 Government Published Specifications, Regulations, Notices and Circulars 3
ar
1.3.3 Survey Marks 5
1.4 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS .......................................................................... 5
at
1.4.1 General 5
-Q
1.4.2 Approved 5
1.4.3 Contract 5
1.4.4 Contract Documents 5
LL
1.4.5 Contractor 5
1.4.6 Drawings 6
W
1.4.7 Engineer 6
1.4.8 Engineer’s Representative 6
s
1.4.9 Government 6
en
1.4.10 Government Departments and Utility Services 6

1.4.11 Guarantee 6
m
1.4.12 Independent Agency 6

e
1.4.13 Owner 6
1.4.14 Permanent Works 6
Si
1.4.15 Plant 7
1.4.16 Project Documentation 7
1.4.17 Singular and Plural 7
1.4.18 Site 7
1.4.19 Specifications 7
1.4.20 Specified 7
1.4.21 Temporary Works 7
1.4.22 Works 7
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ............................................................... 7
1.5.1 General 7
1.5.2 Site Conditions 9
1.6 LANGUAGE ................................................................................................. 10
1.6.1 Contract Language 10
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Scope of this Section
1 This Section specifies the general clauses applicable to Works being carried out in
accordance with this Specification.
1.1.2 Scope of the Qatar Construction Specification
1 The clauses in this Specification are applicable to each and every part of the Works. Their
function is to bring together all those statements which are normally common to most types
of work.
2 The Qatar Construction Specification applies to the entire Works, whether on the Site or in
yards, workshops and factories employed elsewhere in connection with the Works.
ar
at
1.1.3 References
1
-Q
The following standards are referred to in this Part:
BS 6100......................Building and civil engineering: Vocabulary
BS ISO 80000 ............Quantities and Units
LL
BS EN 1991-1-4 .........Eurocode 1. Actions on structures. General actions. Wind actions

W
BS EN 1992-1-1 .........Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for
buildings
s
ASCE/SEI 7-05...........Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures

en
Guide to the Design of Concrete Structures in the Arabian Peninsula, 2008

m
Seismic hazard and seismic design requirements for the Arabian Peninsula region. The 14th
e
World Conference on Earthquake Engineering October 2008

Si
Civil Aviation Authority wind records. Ministry of Communication & Transport, Department of
Civil Aviation & Meterology.
1.1.4 Precedence of Specification and Documents
1 The precedence of documents shall be:
(a) Particular Conditions of Contract.

(b) General Conditions of Contract.
(c) Project Specific Specification.
(d) Project Specific and General Drawings.
(e) Qatar Construction Specification.
1.2 COMPLIANCE
1.2.1 Compliance with the Qatar Construction Specification
1 Unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation, the Contractor shall comply with every
requirement of the Qatar Construction Specification that is relevant to the type of work
forming any part of the Contract and shall adopt whichever permissible option or alternative
that is best suited to the needs of the construction work being undertaken.
2 Any information in the Contract documents as to the whereabouts of existing services and
mains is approximate and for the guidance of the Contractor who shall not be relieved of his
obligations under of the General Conditions of Contract .
1.2.2 Compliance with the General Conditions of Contract
1 The Qatar Construction Specification is intended for use with the General Conditions of
Contract.
ar
2 The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract in the
at
course of construction of the Works. -Q
1.3 STANDARDS
LL
1.3.1 References to Standards
1 Any standard referred to in this Specification shall be deemed to be the version and/or
W
standard(s), that was current forty-two days prior to the date of return of Tenders.
s
2 Any standard referred to in this Specification shall be taken as a reference to an equivalent

en
Specification.
m
3 The Contractor shall have copies of all referenced standards applicable to the work being
undertaken. Translations of standards not written in English shall be provided where
e
necessary.
Si
1.3.2 Government Published Specifications, Regulations, Notices and Circulars
1 The works shall be executed in accordance with the following Government specifications,
regulations, notices and circulars:
(a) The General Conditions of Contract.

(b) The Qatar Construction Specification (QCS) issued by the Qatar Standards,
Laboratories and Standardisation Affairs, Ministry of Environment, 2014 and all
revisions and addenda issued by the same ministry prior to the date of the
announcement inviting tenderer.
(c) The Code of Practice and Specification for Road Openings in the Highway prepared by
the Ministry of Industry & Public Works, January 1992.
(d) The Guide for Civil Users of Explosives in Qatar prepared by the former Ministry of
Public Works.
(e) The Qatar Survey Manual prepared by the Survey Section of the former Ministry of
Industry & Public Works.
(f) The Qatar Traffic Manual prepared by the former Ministry of Public Works and the
Qatar Highway Design Manual prepared by MMAA, 1997.
(g) The Traffic Control at Road Works Manual issued by the former Ministry of Industry &
Public Works.
(h) Rules, Regulations and Code of Practice for Design and Installation of Air
Conditioning, Heating, Ventilation & Refrigeration (ACHVR) Systems for Government
Buildings, 2nd Edition, 1989, prepared by Qatar General Electricity and Water
Corporation (QGEWC).
(i) Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring by the former Qatar National
Telephone Services.
(j) The Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air
Conditioning Equipment, Feb 2006 Edition prepared by the Qatar General Electricity
and Water Corporation (QGEWC).
(k) Rules and Regulations for Plumbing Works prepared by the Qatar General Electricity
ar
and Water Corporation (QGEWC).
(l) Any current and relevant regulations, notices or circulars issued by the Public Works
at
Authority, Ministry of Municipal Affairs & Agriculture (including the previous Ministry of
-Q
Public Works and the previous Ministry of Industry and Public Works), Qatar General
Electricity and Water Corporation (QGEWC) (including the previous Ministry of
Electricity and Water), Qatar Telecom (Q-TEL), the Qatar Standards, the Supreme
LL
Council for the Environment and Natural Reserves or the appropriate local Municipality
prior to the date of the announcement inviting tenderer.
W
(m) State of Qatar Law No. 30 of 2002 and all subsequent amendments concerning “The
Environment and Natural Resources Protection” – Articles 6, 17, 19 & 35.
s
(n) State of Qatar Law No. (6) of 1987 and all subsequent amendments concerning
en
Materials and Equipment from Qatar or other CCASG countries.

(o) The Method of Measurement for Road and Bridgeworks published by the Ministry of
m
Industry and Public Works, Civil Engineering Department , 1987.

e
(p) Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works published by the Ministry of

Si
Public Works, Engineering Services Department, 1973.

(q) Safety Rules issued by the Electricity Networks Department of the former Ministry of
Electricity and Water.
(r) The Jointing Manual prepared by the Electricity Networks Department of the former
Ministry of Electricity and Water.
(s) The Labour Law, No. (14) of The Year 2004 Published by Labour Department of
Ministry of Civil Service Affairs & Housing, 2005.
(t) Developer’s Drainage Guide prepared by the Public Works Authority, 2007.
(u) Qatar Traffic Law No. 19 of the Year 2007.
(v) CDD (Civil Defence Department) – Fire Safety Handbook.
(w) Civil Defence Law No. 9 of the Year 2012.
(x) Worker Rights Booklet 2009 (National Human Rights Committee).
2 The Contractor shall be deemed to have his own copy of the Government specifications,
regulations, notices and circulars given at (a) to (t) above.
3 Where any standard publication, specification, regulation, notice, etc or any correspondence
refers to a Government Ministry, department, division, section, etc it will be deemed to be the
same as any successor Ministry, department, division, section, etc which has or may
subsequently be officially promulgated by the Government of the State of Qatar.
1.3.3 Survey Marks
1 The Contractor shall consult the Engineer prior to any earth or other works to determine if the
work is likely to disturb survey marks. If the Engineer requires a survey mark to be moved
the Contractor will be responsible for recreating the survey mark to an approved design and
specification, and for resurveying the point using survey companies approved by the
Engineer authority.
2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the survey marks within the
boundaries of the site for the duration of the contract period, and shall be liable for all costs of
any remedial work required by the Engineer.
ar
3 On the practical completion of the Works the Engineer will issue a certificate stating that all
survey marks, whether disturbed or otherwise by the Contractor, have been reinstated or
at
protected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. -Q
4 In the event of failure to comply with the requirements of this Clause the Engineer, without
prejudice to any other method of recovery, may deduct the costs of any remedial work after
the practical completion date carried out by the Engineer, from any monies in its hands or
LL
which may become due to the Contractor.

W
1.4 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

s
1.4.1 General
en
1 The following terms and conditions shall apply when used within, or in association with, the
m
Qatar Construction Specification. Terms, which are restricted in their application to certain
types of material or workmanship, are dealt with in the appropriate Section.
e
Si
2 The definitions given in the General Conditions of Contract shall apply to this specification.
1.4.2 Approved
1 means terms such as “approved’, “approved by”, “to the approval”, “as directed” and the like
refer always to approval or directions given by the Engineer in writing.
1.4.3 Contract
1 means the binding agreement entered into between the parties and the Contractor for the
construction of the Works.
1.4.4 Contract Documents
1 means documents which together form the Contract
1.4.5 Contractor
1 means the party responsible for the construction of the Works.

1.4.6 Drawings
1 The drawings included in the Project Documentation.
1.4.7 Engineer
1 means the party appointed by the Owner to administer the Contract
1.4.8 Engineer’s Representative
1 means the party appointed from time to time by the Engineer to perform duties on behalf of
the Engineer whose authority and delegated powers shall be notified in writing to the
Contractor by the Engineer.
1.4.9 Government
1 means the Government of the State of Qatar, including its ministries and offices
ar
1.4.10 Government Departments and Utility Services
at
1 means any governmental, semi-governmental, administrative, fiscal or judicial ministry,
-Q
department, commission, authority, tribunal, agency, municipality or body, and shall include
the provider of electricity, gas, water, wastewater and other public services, and any party
with a regulatory function under the laws of the State of Qatar.
LL
1.4.11 Guarantee
W
1 A Guarantee is a written assurance that a material, product, component, item of equipment,

s
finishing or any other part of the Works meets certain defined standards or quality criteria
en
and/or lasts for a certain length of time.
2 A warranty is the same as a Guarantee as defined in Clause 1.4.17.1.

e m
1.4.12 Independent Agency

Si
1 means a party where specified in the Contract Documents or as instructed by the Engineer
as an Approved agency who is responsible for specific tasks assigned to that party by the
Contract Documents
1.4.13 Owner
1 means the party for whom the Project is being undertaken and to whom the handover of the
final product will be made.
1.4.14 Permanent Works
1 means the permanent works, forming part of the Works, to be designed and / or executed
and completed by the Contractor under the Contract.
1.4.15 Plant
1 means, irrespective of ownership, all plant, facilities, temporary structures and

accommodation, equipment, tools, appliances, apparatus, machinery, vehicles and other
things required for the design, execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of
defects, whether imported or locally supplied, but excluding Temporary Works and any other
things intended to form or forming part of the Permanent Works
1.4.16 Project Documentation
1 All documents associated with and applicable to the Project Contract.
1.4.17 Singular and Plural
1 Words importing the singular only also include the plural vice versa where the context
requires.
ar
1.4.18 Site
at
1 Means the places provided by the Owner where the permanent works are to be executed and
-Q
to which Plant and Materials are to be delivered, any other places that may be specified in the
Contract Documents or by an instruction of the Engineer as forming part of the Site
1.4.19 Specifications
LL
1 All specifications contained in the Contract including any modifications or additions thereto as
W
may from time to time be issued or approved in writing by the Engineer.

s
1.4.20 Specified
en
1 Specified in the Project Documentation.

m
1.4.21 Temporary Works

e
Si
1 means temporary works of every kind (other than Plant) required on the Site for the execution
and completion of the Permanent Works and the remedying of Defects.
1.4.22 Works
1 means all works, supplies and services of any kind, including Permanent Works and
Temporary Works, required for the project and to satisfy the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
1.5.1 General
1 Units shall generally be in accordance with the Systèm International d’Unités and the relevant
provisions of BS ISO 80000
2 The following abbreviations are used in this Specification:

µ microns
A ampere
C Celsius
c centi
d day
dia diameter
g gram (me)
h hour
ha hectare
J joule
k kilo
l litre
M mega
m metre
m milli
ar
N Newton
No. number
at
nr number
Pa Pascal
-Q
r radius
sec second
t tonne
LL
V volt
W Watt
W
3 Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority is made in

the Specifications in accordance with the following abbreviations:
s
en
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

ACI American Concrete Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute
m
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

e
ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials

Si
AWS American Welding Society

AWWA American Water Works Association
BS British Standard
BSI British Standard Institution
C & CA Cement and Concrete Association
CEE Commission of approval of Electrical Equipment
CIBSE Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
CIRIA Concrete Industry Research and Information Association
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CS Concrete Society
DIN Deutsches Institute fur Normung (German Institute for Standardization)
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EN European Standards (Euro-Norm)
FHWA Federal Highway Authority
FM Factory Mutual Engineering Division
GS Gulf Standards
ICE Institution of Civil Engineers
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering

ISO International Organization for Standardization
LPC Loss Prevention Council
LPCB Loss Prevention Certification Board
MMAA Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Agency
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
PWA Public Works Authority (Ashghal)
QCS Qatar Construction Specification
QGEWC Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation
QS Qatar Standards (Laboratories and Standardisation Affairs, Ministry of
Environment)
Ooredoo Qatar Telecom Provider
SIS Swedish Standards Institute
UK DOT United Kingdom Department of Transport
UPDA Urban Planning and Development Authority
ar
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association for Electrical, Electronic
at
and Information Technologies)
1.5.2 Site Conditions

-Q
1 The Site conditions shall be assumed to be as follows for tendering purposes:
LL
Maximum ambient temperature .......................... 50C

W
Minimum ambient temperature ........................... 5C

Design ambient temperature ............................... 50C
s
Maximum metal temperature under the sun ....... 85C

en
Maximum ambient humidity ................................ 100%

Minimum ambient humidity ................................. 20%
m
Design ambient humidity ..................................... 100%

e
50-year return period Wind Speed:

Si
(a) Nominal wind speed for 3 sec gust ……… 38 m/s (A per ASCE 7-05 / IBC 2012)
(b) Mean hourly wind speed…………….…… 25 m/s (as per BS 6399-2)
(c) Mean 10 minutes wind speed…………… 27 m/s (as per BS EN 1991-1-4)
Yearly rainfall ....................................................... 80 - 150 mm
2 The wind is very directional and that the W-NNW sector predominates for velocities greater
than 8m/s (30km/h). However, the wind in coastal areas tends to exhibit a diurnal pattern,
with onshore winds during daylight hours changing to offshore at night.
3 The temperature is relatively mild from October to May and hot from June to September.
4 The relative ambient humidity is generally low from October to May and generally high from
June to September.
5 Under certain climatic conditions, considerable condensation may take place.
6 A considerable amount of salt is contained in the atmosphere which together with the
relatively high ambient humidity, can produce sever corrosion problems.
7 Distribution and occurrence of rainfall events are very erratic. Rainfall events are generally of
a high intensity with a short duration and usually occur between December and March.
8 The prevailing wind directions are from the north and west.
9 The seismic design for all building structure shall be based upon local seismic accelerations
recommended as per ASCE 7-10, IBC 2012 or BS EN 1998-1:2004. Local seismic spectral
accelerations based upon uniform hazard response spectra for 475 year and 2475 year
return period as below.
Peak Ground Acceleration 0.2 second Spectral 1 second Spectral

(PGA) Acceleration (g) - Ss Acceleration (g) – S1
475 year 2475 year 475 year 2475 year 475 year 2475 year
0.045 0.10 0.090 0.147 0.045 0.065
10 Wind tunnel test is recommended for buildings under below criteria
ar
(a) Total building height exceeding 120m from ground.
at
(b) Structure with irregular geometry or shape.
-Q
(c) Unusual terrain or surrounding structure in the area.
(d) Any other factor as per design requirements or designer recommendation.
LL
11 The ratio of the wind speed for any return period to the 50 year return period wind speed as
per Peterka & Shahid Equation is
W
VT / V50 = [0.36+0.1 ln (12T)]

s
12 Building structure design working life shall be minimum as specified below

en
Design working Indicative design Examples

m
life category working life (years)

e
1 10 Temporary structures (a)

Si
2 10 to 25 Replaceable structural parts, eg. Gantry girders, bearings
3 15 to 30 Storage and similar structures
4 50 to 75 Building structures and other common structures
5 120 Civil engineering structures like bridges, tunnel etc.
(a) Structures or parts of structures that can be dismantled with intention of being reused, aren’t temporary
structures.
1.6 LANGUAGE
1.6.1 Contract Language
1 All communications, meetings and documentation shall be in English.
END OF PART
QCS 2014 Section 01: General Page 1
Part 02: Use and Maintenance of the Site
2 USE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE ............................................................... 2

2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1 Scope 2
2.2 USE OF THE SITE .................................................................................................. 2
2.2.1 General 2
2.3 MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE................................................................................ 2
2.3.1 General 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 02: Use and Maintenance of the Site
2 USE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the uses and maintenance requirements of the Site.
2 Related Sections and parts are as follows:

This Section Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety
Part 11 Engineer’s Site Facilities
Part 12 Contractor’s Site Facilities
2.2 USE OF THE SITE
2.2.1 General
ar
at
1 The Site shall not be used for any purpose other than that of carrying out the Works.
2
-Q
Temporary camps, housing and cooking facilities shall not be permitted on the Site unless
otherwise stated in the Project Documentation. When temporary camps, housing and
cooking facilities are permitted they shall comply with Section 1 Part 10.
LL
2.3 MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE

W
2.3.1 General
s
1 In accordance with the Conditions of Contract the Site, the equipment used upon it and the
en
Works shall be kept clean at all times.

m
END OF PART
e
Si
Part 03: Site Access and Entry onto the Site
3 SITE ACCESS AND ENTRY ONTO THE SITE ....................................................... 2

3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
3.1.1 Scope 2
3.2 ACCESS ROADS .................................................................................................... 2
3.2.1 Temporary Access Roads 2
3.3 SITE ENTRY ........................................................................................................... 2
3.3.1 Entry onto the Site 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
3 SITE ACCESS AND ENTRY ONTO THE SITE

3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for access to the Site including temporary access roads,
and the Contractor’s entry onto the Site.
2 Related Sections and Parts are as follows:

This Section Part 16 Traffic Diversions
3.2 ACCESS ROADS
3.2.1 Temporary Access Roads
ar
1 The Contractor shall arrange for, construct, maintain and afterwards remove and reinstate
at
any access required for and in connection with the execution of the Works.
-Q
2 Reinstatement shall include restoring the area of any route to at least the degree of safety,
stability, drainage, level, contour and landscaping that existed at the time the Contractor is
LL
given possession of site and all such reinstatements shall meet the minimum requirements of
the QCS
W
3 The Contractor is required to maintain and provide satisfactory temporary access and traffic
flow to, from and within the areas of the works. Temporary traffic signs and lighting for
s
temporary roads and diversions are to be in strict accordance with the requirements of the
en
Qatar Traffic Manual and any additional requirements instructed by the Traffic Police or the
Engineer. Details of proposals for any such measures are to be submitted by the Contractor
m
for approval to the Traffic Police and the Engineer prior to the implementation of the
diversions or temporary roads unless otherwise instructed. Such approval shall not relieve
e
the Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract.

Si
4 The Contractor shall maintain at all times pedestrian access to all properties fronting the
roads affected by the works.
5 The Contractor shall at all times during the Contract maintain safe and proper access to and
from adjacent buildings and properties.
6 The Contractor shall maintain at all times all the traffic signs, lighting, barriers, cones and
whatever additionally required to keep the diversions, temporary roads and pedestrian
access in a very good condition and best workable status.
3.3 SITE ENTRY
3.3.1 Entry onto the Site
1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing 14 days in advance of his intentions to start
work. If construction of the Works includes operations in two or more areas, such
notifications shall apply to each area.
2 Working areas for which access is subject to time constraints shall be as detailed in the
Project Documentation.
3 Any known hazards in the working areas shall be detailed in the Project Documentation.
4 The Contractor shall keep records of the dates of his entry onto and departure from all areas
included in the Works, together with the dates of the erection and removal of temporary
hoarding, and shall furnish copies of these records when required by the Engineer.
5 The Contractor shall make a record to be agreed with the Engineer on the condition of the
Site immediately before entering for the purpose of constructing the Works.
6 Prior to commencing Work in roads the Contractor shall complete, and submit to the
Engineer, the necessary inventory forms (Road Safety Division Site Inventory form, the Street
Name Inventory etc). The Contractor shall be responsible for rectifying any damage to the
above signs in the absence of an approved inventory prior to construction.
ar
7 Where work is required on the Owner’s plant the Contractor shall comply with the Owner’s
permit procedure prior to commencement of work.
at
END OF PART
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 04: Protection
4 PROTECTION ......................................................................................................... 2
4.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
4.1.1 Scope 2
4.2 PROTECTION OF THE WORKS ............................................................................ 2
4.2.1 General Protection 2
4.2.2 Protection of Finishes, Equipment and Surfaces 2
4.3 PROTECTION OF OTHER WORKS ....................................................................... 2
4.3.1 Protection Against Damage 2
4.3.2 Procedure for Complaints and Claims for Damage 3
4.3.3 4.3.3 Protection of Survey Control Points 3
4.4 WATCHING AND LIGHTING................................................................................... 3
4.4.1 Protection of the Public 3
4.4.2 Protection Against Theft 4
4.4.3 Protection Against Damage 4
ar
4.4.4 Protection Against Trespass 4
at
4.4.5 Watchmen 4
4.5 HOARDING ............................................................................................................. 4
-Q
4.5.1 Temporary Site Hoarding 4
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 04: Protection
4 PROTECTION
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements associated with the protection of the Works and other
works, watching and lighting and for Site hoarding.
4.2 PROTECTION OF THE WORKS
4.2.1 General Protection
1 The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the care and protection of the Works and
Temporary Works against damage of any kind for the duration of the Contract.
ar
2 In the event of any damage to the Works or Temporary Works, the Contractor shall
undertake all necessary repairs at his own cost.
at
4.2.2 Protection of Finishes, Equipment and Surfaces
-Q
1 The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the protection of finishes, equipment and
surfaces that form part of the Works. Protective coatings and wrappings shall be left on
LL
items for as long as possible and practicable.

W
2 In the event of any damage to finishes, equipment or surfaces, the Contractor shall all
necessary undertake repairs at his own cost.
s
en
4.3 PROTECTION OF OTHER WORKS

m
4.3.1 Protection Against Damage

e
1 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid causing any unwarranted
Si
damage to roads, land, properties, trees and other features and, during the currency of the
Contract shall deal promptly with any complaints by owners or occupiers.
2 Where any portion of the Works is close to, across, or under any existing apparatus, the
Contractor shall temporarily support and work round, under or adjacent to the apparatus in a
manner designed to avoid damage, leakage or danger, and to ensure uninterrupted operation
of the apparatus.
3 Should any leakages or damage be discovered, the Contractor shall at once notify the
Engineer and the owner concerned, as appropriate and the Contractor shall afford every
facility for the repair or replacement of the apparatus affected.
4 The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage caused by him, his work people,
sub-contractors or suppliers to public or private roads, paved areas, paths, verges, trees,
shrubs, fences, boundary walls, gates, signs, drains, ducts and services during the execution
of the Contract and shall bear the cost of making good any damage to the entire satisfaction
of the local and other authorities and owners. The Contractor shall keep all private roads and
paths clean and free from dirt and debris and any obstruction associated with the works,
which would prejudice the safe and unimpeded normal use of the said roads and paths.
Part 04: Protection
4.3.2 Procedure for Complaints and Claims for Damage
1 .Details of all claims for damage or warning of intended claims for damage which the
Contractor may receive shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer without delay.
Likewise, any such claims or warning, which may be submitted directly to Engineer shall be
passed on to the Contractor without delay
2 A similar exchange of information shall also be made in relation to all complaints which may
be received.
3 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing immediately following any damage or injury
resulting from the execution of the Works.
4 The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the repair of other works due
to damage caused by the Contractor.
4.3.3 4.3.3 Protection of Survey Control Points
ar
1 The Contractor shall protect all Government survey control points within the limits of the site
at
from any damage whatsoever, during the construction of the Works.
-Q
2 All control points shall be clearly marked on Site by the Contractor and any necessary
temporary protection works shall be installed as directed by the Engineer.
LL
3 Should any control point be damaged during the course of the works, its replacement and
any other costs incurred (such as resurveying) shall be borne by the Contractor.
W
4 The Contractor shall consult the Survey Section of the Ministry of Municipality and Urban
Planning (MMUP) prior to the commencement of any works determine if the works is likely to
s
disturb survey marks. If the Survey Section requires a survey mark to be moved the
en
Contractor will be responsible for recreating the survey mark to an approved design and
specification, and for resurveying the point using survey companies approved by the Survey
m
Section.
e
5 The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the survey marks within the
boundaries of the site for the duration of the Contract and shall be liable for all costs of
Si
remedial works required by the survey section if damaged by the Contractor
6 Prior to the issuing of the Certificate of Completion of Works the Survey Section will issue a
certificate stating that all survey marks, whether disturbed or otherwise by the Contractor,
have been reinstated or protected to the satisfaction of the survey section.
7 In the event of failure to comply with the requirements of this clause the Engineer, without
the time for completion carried out by the survey section, from any monies in its hands or
which may become due to the Contractor
4.4 WATCHING AND LIGHTING
4.4.1 Protection of the Public
1 Further to Clause 19 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall provide all
watching and lighting and everything else necessary by day and night for the protection of the
public.
Part 04: Protection
4.4.2 Protection Against Theft
watching and lighting and everything else necessary by day and night for the protection
against theft of goods, materials, plant, etc., from the Site to whomsoever belonging.
4.4.3 Protection Against Damage
watching and lighting and everything else necessary by day and night for the protection
against damage of the Works.
4.4.4 Protection Against Trespass
1 The Contractor shall take all necessary and practicable precautions to prevent trespass onto
the Site whether it is intentional or unintentional.
ar
4.4.5 Watchmen
at
1 The Contractor shall provide watchmen at the Site at all times outside of normal working
-Q
hours.
4.5 HOARDING
LL
4.5.1 Temporary Site Hoarding

W
1 The Contractor shall only provide the temporary site hoarding described in this Clause where
it is stated as a requirement in the Project Documentation.
s
en
2 The site hoarding shall be painted corrugated galvanised sheet or similar, not less than 2
metres high and neat and uniform in appearance. The colour and any logos on the hoarding
m
shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The hoarding shall be a sufficient obstacle to
prevent the access of unauthorised persons or children and shall be complete with all
e
necessary entrance gates, fans, screens, guard rails and gantries as may be required to
Si
ensure the safety of the public, occupiers of adjacent lands and of the Works.
3 The Contractor shall maintain, move and adapt the hoarding as and when required during the
progress of the Works and shall dismantle and remove upon completion of the Works.
END OF PART
Part 05: Interference
5 INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................... 2
5.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
5.1.1 Scope 2
5.2 INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................... 2
5.2.1 Land Interests 2
5.2.2 Existing Properties 2
5.2.3 Existing Roads 2
5.2.4 Apparatus 3
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
5 INTERFERENCE
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements associated with interference with land interests, existing
properties, existing roads and apparatus.

This Section Part 15 Temporary Controls
5.2 INTERFERENCE
5.2.1 Land Interests
ar
1 The Contractor shall confine his construction operations within the Site, or such other area of
at
land as may be negotiated, and shall instruct his employees not to trespass.
-Q
2 Subject to any unavoidable disturbance which may be necessitated by the execution of the
Works, the Contractor shall not interfere with land use which may be enjoyed on or near the
LL
Site.
3 .The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of his intention to utilise any land outside
W
the site and obtain the written approval of the Engineer before approaching any landowner for
use of their land.
s
en
4 Before exercising any right negotiated by him in connection with using land outside the site,
the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of such arrangements. The details of the
m
arrangements shall include drawing and description of the land to be used, purpose of its use
and duration of the Contractor use of the land.
e
Si
5.2.2 Existing Properties
1 .The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer before interfering with access to
any property, and shall also obtain the approval of the Engineer to any alternative access
arrangements.
2 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the relevant owners and occupiers in writing
fourteen(14)days in advance of any such interference and shall confirm to the Engineer that
the alternative arrangements have been agreed with the relevant owners and occupiers.
5.2.3 Existing Roads
1 The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to prevent vehicles entering and leaving the
Site depositing mud or other debris on the surface of adjacent roads or footways, and shall
remove any materials so deposited.
2 The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to public or private roads or streets
arising out of or by reason of the execution of the Works.
3 The Contractor shall not permit tracked vehicles to travel along permanent or temporary
roads without the use of timber mats or other approved precautions to prevent damage.
4 The Contractors shall be held responsible for any damage caused by him, Contractor’s
Employees, sub-contractors or suppliers to public or private roads, paved areas, paths
verges, trees, shrubs, fences, boundary walls, gates, signs, drains and buildings, ducts, and
services arising out of or by reason of the execution of the Works and shall bear cost of
making good any damage to the entire satisfaction of the local , other authorities and owners.
The Contractor shall keep all private roads and paths clean and free from dirt and debris and
any obstruction associated with the Works, which would prejudice the safe and unimpeded
normal use of the said roads and paths.
5.2.4 Apparatus
1 The Contractor shall not obstruct access to any manhole or other surface access cover.
ar
END OF PART
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 06: Project Meetings
6 PROJECT MEETINGS .................................................................................. 2

6.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
6.1.1 Scope 2
6.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING ................................................................ 2
6.2.1 General 2
6.2.2 Topics for Discussion 2
6.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ............................................................................... 4
6.3.1 General 4
6.4 PRE-START UP MEETING ........................................................................... 5
6.4.1 General 5
6.5 POST-CONSTRUCTION MEETING .............................................................. 5
6.5.1 General 5
6.6 RECORD OF MEETINGS .............................................................................. 6
ar
6.6.1 Minutes of Meeting 6
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
6 PROJECT MEETINGS
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the meetings that will take place before, during and after the construction
of the Works.
6.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
6.2.1 General
1 A pre-construction meeting shall be held at the Site. The Engineer shall set the date and time
of the meeting and shall notify the Contractor accordingly.
ar
2 The Owner, the Engineer and the Contractor and their respective representatives shall attend
at
this meeting.
3
-Q
The Engineer shall provide the agenda a minimum of three (3) working days prior to the
meeting.
LL
6.2.2 Topics for Discussion
1 Contractual topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
W
(a) Date of signing Contract Agreement.

s
(b) Contract sum.

en
(c) Starting instructions.

m
(d) Commencing date.

e
(e) Contract Period.

Si
(f) Maintenance period.

(g) Penalties.
2 Contractor’s Obligation topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the
following:
(a) Performance Bond.

(b) Programme of Works.
(c) Insurance.
3 Site related topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a) Possession of the site.

(b) Access to other contractors.
(c) Engineer’s site facilities.
(d) Contractor’s site facilities.
(e) Traffic diversions.

(f) Maintenance of existing access’s.
(g) Over head and underground services.
(h) Sub-contractors and suppliers.
(i) Approved tip off site.
(j) Project sign boards.
(k) Progress photographs.
(l) Health and Safety.
(m) Quality assurance.
(n) Environmental Considerations.
(o) Site personnel.
(p) Site inspections.
ar
(q) Materials on site and material testing.
at
(r) Engineer’s overtime. -Q
(s) Working hours (Fridays/holidays/overtime working).
(t) Co-ordination.
LL
4 Drawing and communication topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited
W
to, the following:
(a) Project correspondence.

s
en
(b) Project Documentation.

(c) Daily reports.
m
(d) Weekly reports.

e
(e) Monthly reports.

Si
(f) Method statements.

(g) Progress meetings.
(h) Material approvals.
(i) Submittals.
5 Miscellaneous topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a) Phased completion dates.

(b) Short term programme.
(c) Variations.
(d) Any other business.
6.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
6.3.1 General
1 Progress meetings shall be held once a month. Where possible and practicable, progress
meetings shall be held at the same time, day of the month and location.
2 The Engineer shall prepare the agenda and submit it to the Contractor a minimum of three
(3) working days prior to the meeting.
3 Progress Meetings shall be attended by the Engineer and his representatives and the
Contractor and his representatives. Sub-contractors may attend when involved in the matters
to be discussed or resolved but only when requested by the Engineer. In addition to the
attendees named herewith, the meeting shall be attended by representatives of utility owners,
Government departments and authorities and any other regulatory agencies having
jurisdiction over the Project, if required, and such other persons the Engineer may designate.
ar
4 The time and location of the progress meetings shall be as directed by the Engineer. The
Engineer shall chair the meetings.
at
5
-Q
The Contractor shall submit the information itemised below to the Engineer at least three (3)
working days prior to each progress meeting:
(a) A list of completed activities.

LL
(b) A list of current activities with an estimate of time required for completion.
W
(c) A list of changes to planned starting dates and durations for all outstanding activities.
(d) Percentage completion for each current activity.
s
en
(e) A list of activities planned to start in the next period.

(f) Health, Safety, Environmental and Quality Data and issues.
m
(g) Any other information required by the Engineer’s Representative.

e
6 If the Contractor requires additional Progress Meetings he shall submit his request in writing
Si
to the Engineer. For any such additional meeting:
(a) The Contractor shall provide a proposed agenda for the meeting.
(b) The Contractor shall provide the names of all personnel who are required to attend.
(c) The Engineer shall chair these meetings.
1 Topics of discussion will include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a) Actual start and finish dates for activities completed during the update period.
(b) Remaining durations and percentage completion for all activities not completed.
(c) Logic, activity duration and cost data for Variation Order work that will be
incorporated into the construction schedule.
(d) Contractor’s proposed measures to recover lost time and place the Project back on
schedule by increasing manpower, materials and equipment resources and working
extended hours, additional shifts, etc.
6.4 PRE-START UP MEETING
6.4.1 General
1 A pre-start up meeting is required prior to starting up any major plant component, sub-system
or system.
2 Pre-start up meetings shall be attended by the Engineer and his representatives and the
Contractor and his representatives. If necessary, equipment manufacturers and/or suppliers
shall also attend.
3 The agenda for the meeting shall be provided by the Engineer a minimum of three (3)
working days prior to the meeting.
ar
at
1
-Q
Topics for discussion will include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a) Start-up and validation prerequisites.

(b) Start-up plan and schedule.
LL
(c) Temporary connections.

W
(d) Spare parts, chemicals, and operating fluids.

(e) Health, Safety, Environmental and Quality Considerations.
s
en
(f) Other items deemed necessary by the Engineer.
6.5 POST-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

e m
6.5.1 General
Si
1 A post construction meeting shall be held prior to final inspection of the Work.
2 Post-construction meetings shall be attended by the Engineer, the Contractor and their
respective representatives.
3 The Agenda for the meeting shall be provided by the Engineer a minimum of three (3)
working days prior to the meeting.
1 Topics for discussion will include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a) Discuss and resolve all unsettled matters.

(b) Guarantees and insurance.
(c) Schedules and procedures for final inspection process.
(d) Correction of defects and deficiencies.
(e) Documents required to be submitted by the Contractor.

(f) Other items deemed necessary by the Engineer.
6.6 RECORD OF MEETINGS
6.6.1 Minutes of Meeting
1 The Engineer will record minutes of each meeting.
2 A copy of the minutes shall be furnished to the Contractor within four (4) working days.
3 If the Contractor has any objections to the minutes he shall submit them in writing to the
Engineer not more than two (2) days after they are presented to him. In the absence of any
objection, it shall be understood and agreed that the Contractor accepts the minutes as true
and complete record of the meeting.
ar
END OF PART
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 07: Submittals
7 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 3
7.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 3
7.1.1 Scope 3
7.1.2 Mistakes in Information 3
7.2 DEFINITIONS/INTERPRETATION .......................................................................... 3
7.2.1 Product Data and Shop Drawings 3
7.2.2 As-Built Survey Drawings 3
7.2.3 As-Built Record Drawings 4
7.2.4 Manufacturer’s Representative 4
7.2.5 Temporary Works Drawings 4
7.2.6 Samples 4
7.2.7 Manuals 4
7.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES .................................................................................. 4
7.3.1 General 4
ar
7.3.2 Schedule of Submittals 5
7.3.3 Method of Submittal 5
at
7.3.4 Contractor's Review and Approval -Q 5
7.3.5 Corrections and Re-submission 5
7.3.6 Check of Returned Submittals 6
7.3.7 Review and Approval 6
LL
7.3.8 Incomplete Submittals 6

7.3.9 Conformance 6
W
7.3.10 Interrelated Submittals 6

7.4 PROGRAMME ......................................................................................................... 7
s
7.4.1 Programme of Works 7

en
7.5 ORGANIZATION CHARTS ...................................................................................... 8

m
7.5.1 Staff Organisation Chart 8

7.5.2 Health and Safety Organisation Chart 8
e
7.5.3 Quality Organisation Plan 8

Si
7.6 PLANS..................................................................................................................... 9
7.6.1 Health and Safety Plan 9
7.6.2 Quality Assurance Plan 9
7.6.3 Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) Schedule 9
7.7 SITE DIARY ............................................................................................................ 9
7.7.1 General 9
7.8 REPORTS ............................................................................................................. 10
7.8.1 General 10
7.8.2 Procurement Status Reports 10
7.8.3 Progress Report 10
7.9 PHOTOGRAPHS ................................................................................................... 10
7.9.1 General 10
7.9.2 Pre-Construction Photographs 11
7.9.3 Monthly Photographs 11
Part 07: Submittals
7.10 DRAWINGS........................................................................................................... 12
7.10.1 Working Drawings and Shop Drawings 12
7.10.2 As-Built Record Drawings 12
7.10.3 As-Built Survey Drawings 12
7.10.4 Data Delivery 13
7.11 MATERIALS APPROVALS .................................................................................... 15
7.11.1 General 15
7.11.2 List of Materials 15
7.11.3 Samples 15
7.11.4 Certificates 16
7.11.5 Manufacturer’s Guarantees and Warranties 16
7.12 INSTRUCTION MANUALS .................................................................................... 16
7.12.1 Final Dossier 16
7.12.2 Structure of Operation & Maintenance (O&M) Manual 17
ar
7.13 SURVEY AND LAYOUT DETAILS ........................................................................ 19
7.13.1 Setting-out of the Works 19
at
7.14 METHOD STATEMENTS ...................................................................................... 19
-Q
7.14.1 General 19
7.15 APPLICATIONS AND INVOICES FOR COMPLETED WORKS ............................ 19
7.15.1 General 19
LL
7.15.2 Measurement of Quantities 19

W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 07: Submittals
7 SUBMITTALS
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the general procedures and requirements for submittals.
2 Related Parts and Sections are as follows:

This Section Part 9 Materials
Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety
Part 13 Setting-out of the Works
Section 2 Quality Assurance and Quality Control

Section 11 Health and Safety
ar
at
7.1.2 Mistakes in Information
1
-Q
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay the extra cost, if any, occasioned by
any discrepancies, errors, or omissions in submittals supplied by him, whether they have
been approved by the Engineer or not.
LL
7.2 DEFINITIONS/INTERPRETATION
W
7.2.1 Product Data and Shop Drawings

s
1 Product Data and Shop Drawings include drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures,
en
schedules, bills of materials and other data prepared specifically for the Works.
m
2 The information may be prepared by the Contractor, his sub-contractors, suppliers or

distributors, manufacturers or fabricators.
e
Si
3 The information must illustrate or describe the manufacture, fabrication, construction and
installation of the Works or a portion thereof.
7.2.2 As-Built Survey Drawings
1 As-Built Surveys are topographical surveys that show changes to topography as a result of
the construction of the Works. Changes to topography include the construction of new
structures and roads, demolition of existing structures and roads and the like. The As-Built
Survey Drawings shall form a comprehensive record of the topographical changes resulting
from the construction of the Works in all respects.
2 As-Built Surveys shall also show all sub-surface elements of the Works. Sub-surface
elements include pipelines, ducts, cables, chambers, manholes and the like. The As-Built
Survey Drawings shall form a comprehensive record of the sub-surface elements of the
Works as constructed in all respects.
Part 07: Submittals
7.2.3 As-Built Record Drawings
1 As-Built Record Drawings are drawings that show the Works as constructed in all respects.
They are in addition to the elements of the Works shown on the As-Built Survey Drawings.
2 In addition to the above, the As-Built record drawings shall include all finished horizontal and
vertical alignments, chainage, setting out, levels, and details. It shall also include all
underground services, utilities, surface features, and any additional information deemed
necessary to comprehensively represent the works.
7.2.4 Manufacturer’s Representative
1 Manufacturer’s representatives are persons actively working at the manufacturer’s factory

with a minimum of 5 years experience. They should be familiar with the actual process of
manufacturing, installing, and operating the product they represent.
2 Sales representatives or agents are not an acceptable alternative to manufacturer’s
ar
representatives.
at
7.2.5 Temporary Works Drawings -Q
1 Temporary Works Drawings are plans for temporary structures and facilities prepared by the
Contractor specifically for the Works.
LL
2 Elements of work that may affect the safety of persons or property shall be checked and
certified by an approved safety inspector.
W
3 Calculations demonstrating adequacy of Contractor’s design shall be submitted with the

s
Temporary Works Drawings.

en
7.2.6 Samples
m
1 Samples are physical examples illustrating materials, equipment, or workmanship and shall
e
be used to establish standards by which the work will be judged.

Si
7.2.7 Manuals
1 Manuals are manufacturer’s written installation, start-up, operating, maintenance and repair
instructions. They shall include parts lists, pictures, sketches and diagrams specific to the
equipment supplied.
7.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
7.3.1 General
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review and approval all drawings and data
as called for in the Project Documentation, this part or subsequently covered by variations.
2 Submittals and their contents shall be properly prepared, identified, and transmitted in
accordance with the Project Documentation or as the Engineer may otherwise direct. Where
possible and practicable, the Contractor shall present submittals on A4 size paper.
Part 07: Submittals
3 All submittals shall be in triplicate and electronic format unless otherwise specified in the
7.3.2 Schedule of Submittals
1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of all submittals, required by the Contract or
otherwise, showing the forecast date for submission of each item within thirty (30) days of the
start of the Contract.
2 Drawings and data shall be submitted to meet the time schedules stipulated in the Project
Documentation and where such time schedules are not specified, to meet the requirements
of the approved programme. Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall allow not less
than thirty (30) days for the review of submittals by the Engineer (excluding the time
necessary for delivery or postage) and shall cause no delay in the work or the work of any
other Contractor.
3 Extension of time will not be granted because of the Contractor's failure to make timely and
ar
correctly prepared and presented submittals with allowance for the checking and review
periods.
at
7.3.3 Method of Submittal
-Q
1 The Contractor shall deliver submittals by means of dated, signed, and sequence numbered
transmittals. The transmittal shall be on the Contractor's letterhead and shall fully describe
LL
the submittal contents. Submittals are not acceptable directly from sub-contractors,
suppliers, or manufacturers.
W
2 In each transmittal the Contractor shall state the Drawing numbers and Specification
s
Sections, Parts, and Paragraphs to which the submittal pertains. Accompanying data sheets,
en
catalogues and brochures shall be identified in the same manner. Where several types or
models are included in a single data sheet, catalogue or brochure, the Contractor shall delete
m
non-applicable portions or specifically indicate which portions are intended and applicable.
e
7.3.4 Contractor's Review and Approval

Si
1 Every submittal shall bear the Contractor's review and approval stamp certifying that the
Contractor has:
(a) Reviewed, checked, and approved the submittal.

(b) Co-ordinated the contents with the requirements of the Works, the Project
Documentation and any related work.
(c) Determined and verified all quantities, field measurements, field construction criteria,
materials, equipment, catalogue numbers, and similar data.
7.3.5 Corrections and Re-submission
1 The Contractor shall make all required corrections and shall resubmit corrected submittals
until approved.
2 The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections
called for on previous submittals.
Part 07: Submittals
3 The Contractor shall identify each re-submission with the sequential number of the original
submittal followed by consecutive letters starting with "A" for first re-submission "B" for
second re-submission etc.
7.3.6 Check of Returned Submittals
1 The Contractor shall check submittals returned to him for correction and ascertain if the
corrections result in extra cost to him above that included and allowed for under the Project
Documentation and the Contract. The Contractor shall give written notice to the Engineer
within five (5) days if, in his opinion, such extra cost results from corrections.
2 By failing to so notify the Engineer or by starting any Work covered by a submittal, the
Contractor waives all claims for extra costs resulting from required corrections.
7.3.7 Review and Approval
1 Submittals will be reviewed only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and
ar
with information given in the Project Documentation. The approval of a separate item as
such shall not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.
at
2
-Q
The approval of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation
from the requirements of the Project Documentation unless otherwise agreed with, and
confirmed in writing by, the Engineer.
LL
3 Any approval from the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or
omissions in the submittals.
W
7.3.8 Incomplete Submittals

s
en
1 Submittals which are incomplete, including those not correctly transmitted, not correctly titled
and identified, or not bearing the Contractor's review and approval stamp, may be returned to
the Contractor without review.
e m
7.3.9 Conformance
Si
1 Work shall conform to the approved submittals and all other requirements of the Project
Documentation and the Contract unless subsequently revised by an appropriate variation
order, in which case the Contractor shall prepare and submit revised submittals as may be
required.
7.3.10 Interrelated Submittals
1 Except where the preparation of a submittal is dependent upon the approval of a prior
submittal, all submittals pertaining to the same portion of the Works shall be submitted
simultaneously.
2 The Contractor shall not proceed with any related work which may be affected by the work
covered under submittals until the applicable submittals have been approved.
Part 07: Submittals
7.4 PROGRAMME
7.4.1 Programme of Works
1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a Programme of Works in
accordance with Clause 14 of the General Conditions of Contract.
2 The Contractor shall update the Programme of Works as required during the construction of
the Works.
3 When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed
programme for a particular section of the Works. The detailed programme shall be an
elaboration of the overall programme and shall be in an appropriate form.
4 The Contractor shall incorporate the times of occupation of all sub-contractors in the
programme and shall make provisions for the access of other contractors as required by the
Engineer.
ar
5 The Contractor shall submit a Programme of Works that shall include, but not be limited to
at
the following: -Q
(a) General description of the arrangements and methods proposed by the Contractor to
carry out the Works.
LL
(b) Detailed list of the Contractor’s resources (plant, equipment, vehicles, materials,
laboratory, workshop, professional personnel, specialists, labour, organization chart,
W
etc.) assigned to the Works.

(c) Time schedule of the mobilisation and deployment of the required resources and their
s
estimated average production rates to complete the Contract within the time for
en
completion.
(d) The Programme required under the General Conditions of Contract.
m
(e) Cash-flow statement showing anticipated payments due under the Contract.
e
6 The Programme shall be a linked and resourced Gantt chart produced on approved project
Si
programming software and shall show the following:
(a) The order in which the Works are to be constructed.

(b) Design periods (if applicable).
(c) Submission and approval periods for design, Operations & Maintenance (O&M)
manuals, record drawings, etc.
(d) Detailed activities for each task such as excavation, pipe laying, backfill, reinstatement,
etc.
(e) Procurement, installation and commissioning periods for Mechanical, Electrical,
Instrumentation, Control and Automation (MEICA) works.
(f) Power and other services connections.
(g) Tests before and after (if applicable) completion.
7 The Contractor shall programme his work in accordance with the Contract and in such a way
that he shall not impede any other Contractor working on or adjacent to the Site.
Part 07: Submittals
8 For sewerage works, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
programme his works such that he commences at the downstream manholes and continues
upstream in a logical sequence.
9 The Programme of Work shall identify when access to areas of live plant are required and
when shutdowns are required.
10 Any Programme of Work submitted with the tender documents shall be fully updated before
the start of the Works.
11 The Engineer shall give his comments on the programme within 7 days of its submission.
The Contractor shall not commence the permanent works until the Engineer has approved
his Programme of Work.
12 The approval by the Engineer of the Programme of Work shall not relieve the Contractor of
any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract.
ar
13 The programme shall be submitted in electronic format and as a paper print. The paper print
may hide (roll up) activities for individual tasks in order to reduce the size and number of
at
prints required. The electronic version shall be fully detailed.
-Q
7.5 ORGANIZATION CHARTS
7.5.1 Staff Organisation Chart

LL
1 The Contractor shall submit a Staff Organisation Chart for the Engineer’s approval within ten
W
(10) days of the start of the Contract.

s
2 The chart shall show the organisation of executive, administrative and supervisory personnel
en
associated with the Project and indicate the relationship between them where appropriate. It
shall include all personnel from Project Manager down to foreman level and give a full
m
description of their duties. The qualifications and experience of all personnel shown on the
chart shall be provided.
e
Si
3 The Engineer may interview any of the personnel proposed by the Contractor prior to
approval.
4 The Contractor shall update the chart whenever key personnel are reassigned.
7.5.2 Health and Safety Organisation Chart
1 The Contractor shall submit a Health and Safety Organisation chart for Engineer’s approval
within Thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
2 The Chart shall be as detailed in Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety, of this section.
7.5.3 Quality Organisation Plan
1 The Contractor shall submit a Quality Organisation Plan to the Engineer for approval no later
than 30 days from the start of the contract.
2 The plan shall be as detailed in Section 2 Quality Assurance and Quality Control
Part 07: Submittals
7.6 PLANS
7.6.1 Health and Safety Plan
1 The Contractor shall submit his Health and Safety Plan to the Engineer for approval no later
than thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
2 The plan shall be as detailed in Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety, of this Section.
7.6.2 Quality Assurance Plan
1 The Contractor shall submit his Quality Assurance Plan to the Engineer for approval no later
than thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
2 The plan shall be as detailed in Section 2 Quality Assurance and Quality Control.
7.6.3 Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) Schedule
ar
1 The Contractor shall submit his ITP Schedule to the Engineer for approval no later 30 days
at
from the start of the contract. -Q
2 The plan shall be as detailed in Section 2 Quality Assurance and Quality Control.
7.7 SITE DIARY

LL
7.7.1 General
W
1 A Site Diary shall be kept on site by the Contractor and entered daily for the duration of the
s
Contract. The diary must be entered neatly and legibly in English and should indicate all
en
visitors to the Site and the reason for the visit. The diary shall also record the following:
(a) Labour on site by trade and its allocation.

m
(b) Sub-contractors working on site.

e
Si
(c) Material and equipment delivered to site.

(d) Material and equipment utilised.
(e) Plant, equipment and tools brought on to or removed from site including hired plant.
(f) Work progress during the day.
(g) Verbal instructions requiring written confirmation.
(h) Temperature and weather conditions.
(i) Details of any occurrence which may affect the progress of the Works.
2 The Contractor shall also supply to the Engineer, weekly returns as to the number of men
and Construction Plant employed and the nature of the Works on which they were employed.
3 The diary shall become the property of the Engineer on completion of the Works
Part 07: Submittals
7.8 REPORTS
7.8.1 General
1 Where relevant, reports should be referenced to the Programme of Works.
2 The Contractor shall submit three copies of each report unless otherwise specified.
7.8.2 Procurement Status Reports
1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Procurement Status Report on a weekly basis for
the duration of the Contract. The report shall include the following:
(a) A list of materials and items procured.

(b) A list of items delivered to the site.
(c) References to all correspondence and transmittals between the Contractor and the
ar
Engineer regarding approval of such materials and items.
at
7.8.3 Progress Report
1
-Q
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Progress Report on a monthly basis for the
duration of the Contract. The report shall be submitted to the Engineer before the seventh
day of each month. The report shall include the following:
LL
(a) Labour employed on the Site divided into supervisory staff, tradesmen and others
giving daily totals.
W
(b) Labour employed on the Site by sub-contractors divided into supervisory staff,
s
tradesmen and others giving daily totals.

en
(c) Plant, tools and equipment in working order on the Site on each day.
(d) Accidents to anyone working on the Site which required medical attention.
m
(e) Details of monthly progress and status of the Works in general terms.
e
Si
(f) The date of commencement and completion of all critical activities.

(g) Details of problem areas.
(h) Details of current or anticipated causes of delay along with their estimated impact on
progress and the corrective measures taken or proposed.
(i) Progress photographs.
7.9 PHOTOGRAPHS
7.9.1 General
1 The Contractor shall obtain a photographic record of the execution of the Works by taking
photographs from various points as the Engineer shall specify from time to time. Any
photograph which is not clear and distinct, double exposed, over exposed, etc. shall be
retaken until approved by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
2 Photographs taken in connection with the Project shall not be utilised by the Contractor for
commercial advertisement either of his organisation or of any materials or equipment used
on the Works, without the written approval of the Engineer.
Part 07: Submittals
3 The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer, two number photographic albums suitable for
mounting all site and progress photographs.
4 All photographic records shall consist of the required number of colour prints on photographic
paper and a digital copy
5 The Contractor shall provide six digital cameras and one digital video camera for the
exclusive use of the Engineer or his designated representative and supply software,
batteries, cables and USB flash drives or external hard drives as required. The Digital
camera shall have a minimum specification of 35-105 zoom, with a minimum of 16.0
megapixels for prints up to 20”×30”, 8GB internal memory and video/audio facility. The
cameras shall be returned to the contractor at the end of the contract period.
7.9.2 Pre-Construction Photographs
1 .The Contractor shall arrange to obtain a photographic and video record of the site before the
start of the works to fully record the existing conditions of the site and other matters of
ar
interest in connection with the works or their surroundings of the project, by taking
photographs and videos films from positions agreed with the engineer within 7 days of the
at
photographs /videos being taken. Any photograph/video which is not clear and distinct,
-Q
double exposed, over exposed, blurred, etc., shall be retaken until approved by the Engineer
at the contractor’s expense.
2 The number of photographs taken shall be sufficient to clearly indicate the condition of
LL
existing conditions.
W
3 After approval, the Contractor shall supply two (2) prints, which shall be mounted and labelled
by the Contractor, and these shall then be signed and dated by the Contractor and the
s
Engineer. One set of prints shall be returned to the Contractor.

en
7.9.3 Monthly Photographs

m
1 .The Contractor shall obtain a photographic record of the execution of the works by taking
e
photographs from various points agreed with the Engineer at the commencement of the
Si
works, and also as he may specify from time to time during the course of the works.
Photographs shall be taken at each of the specified points on a monthly basis until the
completion works. The number of photographs to be taken shall be as specified by the
Engineer. Any photograph which is not clear and distinct, double exposed, over exposed, etc.
shall be retaken until approved by the Engineer at the contractor’s expense. Two number
125×90 mm prints of each photograph and a digital copy on CD shall be submitted to the
Engineer with 7 days of the photographs being taken. The Contractor’s shall also obtain
video records showing the progress of the works, at locations and times as specified by the
Engineer. The quality and length of the video shall be as specified by the Engineer and may
be required to record specialised events or other matters of interest in connection with the
works. The video shall include the actual audio recording taken at the time and it shall be in
sync with the visual recording. Any video which is not clear and distinct, double exposed, over
exposed, blurred, etc. shall be retaken until approved by the Engineer at the Contractor’s
expense. A digital copy of the video on CD shall be submitted to the Engineer within 7 days of
the recordings being taken.
2 .A selection of those photographs as agreed with the Engineer shall be included in the
monthly reports as described in clause 7.8.3 of this part complete with labels and any
pertinent support text.
Part 07: Submittals
7.10 DRAWINGS
7.10.1 Working Drawings and Shop Drawings
1 Each submitted drawing shall be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria,
materials, connections, bases, foundations, anchors, and the like, and shall be accompanied
by technical and performance data and by calculations as necessary to support the
information shown on the drawings.
2 Unless otherwise specified, each submittal shall include six (6) sets of copies and shall be
submitted at least thirty (30) days prior to beginning the work to which the drawings are
related. Three sets of copies will be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required
corrections or approval.
7.10.2 As-Built Record Drawings
1 The Contractor shall prepare As-Built Record Drawings and submit them to the Engineer for
ar
approval. Upon approval, the Contractor shall submit a further four (4) copies of each As-
at
Built Record Drawing to the Engineer. All As-Built Record Drawings shall be prepared on
clear white polyester film or other durable and easily reproducible medium approved by the
-Q
Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall also submit two digital copies of As-Built Record Drawings. The As-Built
LL
Record Drawings shall be accompanied by operation and maintenance manuals, service

literature and list of spare parts where applicable.
W
3 The Contractor must prepare the As-Built drawings according to the latest specifications and
requirements of utility departments, including production and data delivery.
s
en
4 The Contractor may be required to obtain approvals from utility departments on the As-Built
drawings as a pre-requisite for the Engineer’s final approval.
m
5 As-Built Record Drawings and other documents shall be submitted before the expiry of the
e
period of maintenance named in the Contract. The final completion certificate will not be
Si
issued, and therefore the final payment will not be released before the submission by the
Contractor, and approval by the Engineer of all drawings, documents, and records of the
project. One copy of each drawing and document shall be marked for archival storage.
6 No final payment shall be made until the As-Built Record Drawings are complete in all
respects and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra
payment or extension of time for the preparation of the As-Built Record Drawings.
7.10.3 As-Built Survey Drawings
1 The Contractor shall arrange for As-Built Survey Drawings to be prepared. The survey shall
be to the specification of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture and shall be
undertaken by a survey company on the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture’s list of
approved survey companies.
2 Where a permanent feature has been added, changed or removed the Contractor shall
conduct a topographical survey engaging an approved survey company as described in item
1 of this Clause.
Part 07: Submittals
3 The Contractor shall submit one (1) set of As-Built survey Drawings to the Engineer for
approval. Upon approval, the Contractor shall submit a further four (4) sets to the Engineer.
All As-Built Survey Drawings shall be prepared on clear white polyester film or other durable
and easily reproducible medium approved by the Engineer.
4 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documentation, the Contractor shall arrange for the
As-Built Survey Drawings to be prepared in digital (electronic) format. The digital format shall
be in accordance with requirements of the Centre for Geographic Information Systems
(CGIS). The Contractor shall also submit two digital copies of As-Built Survey Drawings. It is
the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the digital data compiled by the approved survey
company is comprehensive and complete. The Contractor shall at all times during
construction, maintain a comprehensive record of all setting-out details and data for
chainage, offsets, levels and all sub-surface elements, including pipe works, ducts, cables
and any other installation required under the Contract. These records shall be verified by the
Engineer. The records shall be incorporated into the As-Built survey undertaken by the
approved survey company to form a comprehensive and complete record of the works.
ar
5 No final payment shall be made until the As-built Survey Drawings are complete in all
respects. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment or extension of time for
at
the preparation of the As-built Survey Drawings. As-Built Survey Drawings and other
-Q
documents shall be submitted before the expiry of the period of maintenance named in the
Contract. The final completion certificate will not be issued, and therefore the final payment
will not be released before the submission by the Contractor, and approval by the Engineer of
LL
all drawings, documents, and records of the project. One copy of each drawing and
document shall be marked for archival storage.
W
7.10.4 Data Delivery

s
1 The mapping co-ordinate system for Public Works Authority projects (horizontal and vertical
en
control) is based on Qatar National Grid 1995. The following parameters shall be applied for
the digital data submittal.
m
(a) The unit of measurement is the International Metre

e
(b) Transverse Mercator projection, International (Hayford Spheroid)

Si
(c) Latitude of Origin 240 27’00” North

(d) Longitude of Origin 510 13’00” East
(e) False Easting 200,000
(f) False Northing 300,000
(g) Semi major Axis 6 378 388.000
(h) Semi minor Axis 6 356 911.945
(i) Scale factor at Central Meridian (51 13’ E) 0.999 99
(j) 1/f 1/297
2
(k) e 0.006 722 670
2 The digital data shall be submitted in the following formats:
(a) DXF files for use in AutoCAD shall be ASCII text files or otherwise agreed with
Engineer. File names should have a maximum of eight characters plus the three-
character extension (DXF).
Part 07: Submittals
(b) DWG files for use in AutoCAD should have a maximum of eight characters plus the
three-character extension (DWG).
(c) A digital terrain model, including break lines and contours shall also be supplied in a
recognised format: ASCII data files, SDR MAP File, MX GENIO file or as otherwise
agreed with the Engineer.
3 The scale used shall be one-to-one scale.
4 The precision shall be double precision.
5 Feature accuracy shall be at least 0.01 metres.
6 In addition to the following and other pertinent requirements, the Contractor shall obtain the
“RD_CGIS LAYERING” *.dxf convention files from the relevant department, and arrange it as
per item 8 hereunder or otherwise agreed with Engineer.
7 Each layer shall contain only one feature type. If necessary, text may be added to a separate
ar
layer to explain the feature type. Colours and line type of features shall be specified by and
not individual entities or blocks. Features shall not be duplicated across layers. The
at
Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer the most current specification detailing colour and
-Q
line type conventions.
8 Features should not be represented with user defined symbols. The following representation
shall be applied.
LL
(a) Polygons must comprise of lines to form closed areas where possible.
W
(b) Line entities must be continuous, not a series of consecutive segments.

s
(c) Arc must be continuous radius, not a series of consecutive segments.

en
(d) Block entities are not allowed.

(e) User defined symbols, fonts or line types must not be used on any layer.
m
9 Layer names should be general descriptions of features (eg. Road centreline, kerb, walls,
e
bollards). A list of all layers and associated descriptions shall be provided in the submittal and
Si
the list shall be stored in an ASCII text file called: “layers.txt”. Layer name should have up to
16 characters only and shall be restricted to letters and digits with the first character of the
name being a letter. Names shall not contain special characters such as: $, -. #. The
Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer the current specification detailing naming
conventions.
10 When the surface and other features are substantially in place, the contractor shall submit
the required *.dxf As-Built drawing files (for CGIS to execute the survey verification and
immediate update of CGIS Vector Database).
11 All information shall be supplied on CDs in the appropriate format.

Part 07: Submittals
7.11 MATERIALS APPROVALS
7.11.1 General
1 Submittals shall be approved before the materials or equipment covered by the submittals
are shipped out in the case of foreign supplies and delivered to the Site in the case of local
supplies.
7.11.2 List of Materials
1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of the materials to be used in the Construction
of the Works within thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract. The materials list shall be
neatly bound and shall have an index listing the contents.
2 The data for each item listed shall be explicit with regard to details of the actual items being
furnished and shall include sufficient information for the Engineer to determine that the
products submitted conform to the requirements of the Project Documentation. Such
ar
information shall include but not be limited to:
at
(a) Manufacturer’s name and address. -Q
(b) Trade or brand name.
(c) Local supplier's name and address.
(d) Catalogues, brochures and cuts, marked to indicate the items proposed the intended
LL
use.
(e) Terms and conditions of the manufacturer's guarantee and warranty.
W
(f) Material inspection and testing agency.

s
(g) Any other information to fully describe the item.

en
(h) Supplementary information as may be required for approval.
3 Unless otherwise specified, five (5) bound copies of the materials list shall be submitted, two
m
(2) of which will be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required corrections or
e
approval.
Si
7.11.3 Samples
1 Unless otherwise specified, each submittal shall include two sets of samples. One set of
approved samples and all disapproved samples will be returned to the Contractor.
2 Samples shall be taken in accordance with the provisions of relevant standards where
appropriate.
3 Unless otherwise specified, samples shall be labelled and properly identified with the
following:
(a) Date.
(b) Part of the Works for which offered.
(c) Specification Section, Part and applicable Paragraph numbers.
(d) Supplier/manufacturer.
(e) Product identification (trade name).
Part 07: Submittals
4 Samples shall be accompanied by an approved transmittal form along with specifications and
other pertinent data required for the Engineer to determine that the material conforms to the
requirements of the Project Documentation.
5 If requested in writing by the Contractor, samples of value will be returned to the

Contractor after completion of the Work.
6 Approved samples returned to the Contractor may only be incorporated into the Works upon
written approval of the Engineer.
7.11.4 Certificates
1 When stated in the Project Documentation or requested by the Engineer in writing, the
Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s certificates indicating that test results, component
manufacture or installation complies with the requirements of the Project Documentation.
2 A statement from the Contractor, sub-contractor, equipment supplier, or agent indicating the
ar
product installation complies with the requirements of the Project Documentation shall not be
considered as a certificate.
at
Manufacturer’s Guarantees and Warranties
7.11.5
-Q
1 Manufacturer’s Guarantees and Warrantees shall be submitted prior to handover and final
acceptance.
LL
7.12 INSTRUCTION MANUALS

W
7.12.1 Final Dossier

s
en
1 The contractor shall submit final dossiers covering all civil, mechanical, electrical activities
and machinery installed in the work.
m
2 Contractor shall submit index of final dossiers to engineer for approval. This index shall be
e
included with the below points but not limited to:

Si
(a) Engineering Documents (detailed as below, but not limited to):

(i) Philosophy.
(ii) Latest revision of the project specifications.
(iii) Geotechnical investigation reports (profile, survey, etc.).
(iv) Technical approvals.
(b) Quality Records:
(i) Construction inspection records as per QC Plan(s) or ITP(s).
(ii) Authorised certifications (i.e. lifting equipment, lab records, etc.).
(iii) Calibration test certificates.
(iv) Process and/or personal qualification records.
(v) Non conformities reports.
Part 07: Submittals
(c) Operation & Maintenance Manuals (soft and hard copy):

(i) Guarantees & warrantees.
(ii) List of equipment (brand name, type, model, range and serial numbers).
(iii) Original catalogues.
(iv) Manufacturers’ final documents and certifications.
(v) Manufacturers’ operation & maintenance guidelines.
(vi) Circuit drawings of brought out electrical equipment i.e. panel, generator, fire
alarm system etc.
(vii) Part lists and equipment drawings.
(viii) Spare part lists (for regular and overhauling maintenance separately and easy to
use).
(d) Health, Safety & Environment (HSE) - Documents & Records
ar
(e) Training
at
(i) Orientation plan.
(ii) Training material.
-Q
(iii) Training records.
(f) As-Built Drawings (soft and hard copy):
LL
(i) List of As-Built drawing including revisions which are to be divided unit wise
and/or discipline wise.
W
(ii) As-Built drawings.

s
(g) Project Commissioning & Handover Records:

en
(i) Commissioning plan.

m
(ii) Commissioning records & certificates.

e
(iii) Handing over records including closed snag lists.

Si
(h) Photographs
7.12.2 Structure of Operation & Maintenance (O&M) Manual
1 This specification defines the production of installation, operation and maintenance manuals
and similar documents so that they provide information about plant and processes in a
consistent and informative way that shall make the documents easy to use. Manuals shall be
presented electronically and on paper. Documents from an electronic source shall, when
printed, conform to the requirements for documents presented on paper.
2 General Requirements:
(a) The plant operating manuals shall contain information relevant to the operation of the
plant installed. This information shall include descriptions of the plant together with
operating instructions and maintenance requirements.
(b) The content shall be suitable for plant operators who are experienced in the operation
of similar equipment and have a basic technical knowledge. The descriptions shall be
clear and concise. Illustrations and schematics shall be used where necessary
Part 07: Submittals
(c) Manuals shall be produced using word processor for text and CAD for drawings.
(d) Text produced by the contractor/consultant describing the specific operation and/or
maintenance of an asset, which is contained within an operations manual, shall be
generated via a word processor and supplied to the Owner in Adobe Acrobat format or
otherwise agreed with Engineer.
(e) Technical manuals when provided on paper shall be contained in A4 size, 4-ring, and
durable, hard-backed, white standard PVC covered binders, strong enough to last the
expected life duration of the plant.
(f) The manual shall be provided in several volumes as appropriate to the size and
complexity of the plant. Each of the volumes shall not be greater than 38mm thick
when printed.
(g) The covers shall have a clear PVC pocket on the front and on the spine for top entry
insertion of a white title card on which shall be printed the following information:
(i) Owner.
ar
(ii) Name of location.
at
(iii) Title of manual (name of the plant).
(iv) Description of manual.
-Q
(v) Volume of manual in the series.
(vi) Reference/sequence number of the manual.
LL
(vii) Content of the volume.

W
(viii) Contract reference number.

(ix) Full name, address, telephone number and fax numbers of the supplier.
s
en
(x) Name of author or editor of the manual.
3 Writing Operating Instructions

m
(a) All operations instructions shall use ‘plain English language’ to reduce reader
e
difficulties. Statements shall be simple and short for easy comprehension; equipment
Si
locations shall be clearly stated.

(b) It may be valuable to begin the instructions with:
(i) A condition:
(ii) “If the pressure drops more than 5 bars, raise the…”
(iii) A time phrase/clause:
(iv) “When the meter displays Y, close the…”
(v) A location phrase/clause:
(vi) “In the control room, turn…”
(vii) A specification of tool or piece of equipment:
(viii) “Using a screwdriver, remove…”
(ix) A sitting phrase/clause:
(x) “At instruments a, switch…”
Part 07: Submittals
4 Page and Sheet Layout
(a) Text sheets shall be A4 size (portrait) having 4 No. punched holes and A3 size
drawings (landscape), folded twice with title in bottom right hand corner.
(b) Full size drawings in plastic wallet placed at rear.
(c) The bottom of each page shall define the manual reference number, issue number
with date (month/year) and page number.
(d) The issue number commences at ‘1' on initial printing and shall be raised each time
the page is altered in any way.
(e) Each page within a volume shall be numbered in sequence, including illustrations
pages, starting at the first page of the contents list.
7.13 SURVEY AND LAYOUT DETAILS
7.13.1 Setting-out of the Works
1 Submittals associated with setting-out of the Works shall comply with the relevant provisions
ar
of Part 13 of this Section, Setting out of the Works.
at
7.14 METHOD STATEMENTS -Q
7.14.1 General
1 There is a legal requirement for Contractor including employers and self employed to develop
LL
and submit for comments to the Engineer suitable and sufficient written method of work
(commonly known as method statement) for his work activities.
W
2 The above is also to be completed as and when instructed by the Engineer for any identified
work activity and submitted as per the timescales to be specified by the Engineer.
s
en
3 The legal requirement is in the Regulatory Document Section 11 Part 1 in particular section
1.1.7 (Risk Assessments and Method Statement).
m
4 Guidance on compliance with the requirement in regards to method statement is found in

e
Section 11 Part 2 in particular section 2.4 (Risk Assessment and Method Statement)
Si
7.15 APPLICATIONS AND INVOICES FOR COMPLETED WORKS
7.15.1 General
1 Applications and invoices for completed Works shall be submitted in accordance with the
Conditions of Contract.
7.15.2 Measurement of Quantities
1 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all assistance, as and when required for the
measurement of all quantities. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and
duplication of all calculations, cross-sections and other drawings related to quantities in
interim payments. These shall be submitted in draft to the Engineer in sufficient time to
enable him to check and agree them before submission for payments.
END OF PART
Part 08: Building Demolition
8 BUILDING DEMOLITION......................................................................................... 2
8.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
8.1.1 Scope 2
8.1.2 References 2
8.1.3 Definitions 2
8.1.4 Records 3
8.1.5 Materials Arising 3
8.1.6 Safety 3
8.1.7 Use Of Explosive 4
8.1.8 Special Investigations 5
8.2 BUILDING DEMOLITION......................................................................................... 5
8.2.1 Scope 5
8.2.2 References 5
8.2.3 General Requirements 6
ar
8.2.4 Standard Demolition 6
8.2.5 Utility Services 8
at
8.2.6 Special Demolition -Q 8
8.2.7 Selective Demolition 9
8.2.8 Temporary Work 9
8.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................... 10
LL
8.3.1 Scope 10
8.3.2 Relevant Authorities 10
W
8.3.3 Method Statement 10

8.3.4 Special Precautions 11
s
8.3.5 Disposal 12
en
e m
Si
8 BUILDING DEMOLITION
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Scope
1 This Section specifies the requirements for demolition work, disposal of materials arising
from demolition work, and procedures for dealing with hazardous materials encountered
during demolition work.
2 Related Sections are as follows:

Section 1 General
Section 6 Roadworks
Section 12 Earthworks Related to Buildings
Section 28 Landscaping
ar
at
8.1.2 References
1
-Q
The following standards are referred to in this Section:
BS 5607 .....................Safe use of explosives in the construction industry
LL
BS 6657 .....................Guide to prevention of inadvertent initiation of electro-explosive

devices by radio-frequency radiation.
W
8.1.3 Definitions
s
en
1 Demolition Work done to dismantle or take apart and remove an existing

building or facility.
m
2 Hazardous Materials General term to encompass any and all materials which have
e
been contaminated by substances which are dangerous or

Si
potentially dangerous to the public. It is inclusive of materials

which if not properly contained could continue to spread and
contaminate soil, ground water or become airborne.
3 Materials Arising Any parts or portions of building materials or accessories

which are removed or salvaged once the demolition process
begins.
4 Method Statement The defined method or process to be followed for demolition

of a specific project.
5 Selective Demolition Typically refers to demolition work done to only parts of

buildings or facilities for retrofit for renovation type work.
6 Unsafe, unstable In reference to this Section, this is interpreted to mean a

building or structure or condition which is dangerous to the
safety of the public.
8.1.4 Records
1 Documentation
(a) All available plans of the structure to be demolished are to be examined and where
the nature of the construction is uncertain a special investigation is to be carried out as
agreed with the Engineer.
(b) Adjacent buildings or structures will be inspected and their existing interior and
exterior condition shall be documented prior to and after demolition in writing or
photographs or both.
8.1.5 Materials Arising
1 General Requirement
(a) All materials arising from the demolitions are to become the property of the Contractor
unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation.
ar
(b) Materials arising shall be cleared from the site as the work proceeds in an approved
at
manner.
(c) Materials arising from the demolitions and alterations are not to be burnt on site.
-Q
(d) Removal operations for materials arising should be conducted with the least
interference to the public and not be started until approved by the Engineer. The
LL
Engineer has the right to reject off-site disposal plans if disposal would leave an
unsightly condition anywhere.
W
8.1.6 Safety
s
1 Safety Requirements
en
(a) The Contractor is to provide safeguards, including warning signs, barricades,

temporary fences as required for the protection of the public and Site personnel during
m
demolition and removal operations. The safeguards are to be maintained until

e
demolition and removal operations are complete.

Si
(b) Within populated or trafficked areas and when adjacent to other structures the
Contractor is to provide enclosed rubbish chutes from each floor to carry debris into
disposal trucks/skips. Overhead bridges of tight board or prefabricated metal
construction to be provided at rubbish chutes to protect persons and property from
falling debris.
(c) The Contractor shall conduct his operations in a manner that minimises the spread of
flying particles and dust. Rubbish and debris shall to be sprinkled with water to keep
dust to a minimum.
(d) In addition, the following safety rules shall be observed in the performance of the
work:
(i) No wall or part of wall shall be permitted to fall outwardly from structures.
(ii) If the building is to be demolished storey by storey, at least one stairway in each
structure shall be maintained in usable condition to highest remaining floor.
(iii) Stairways are to be kept free of obstructions and debris until that level of
structure has been removed.
(iv) Wherever a cutting torch or other equipment that might cause a fire is used,
provide and maintain fire extinguishers nearby ready for immediate use; all
possible users are to be instructed in use of fire extinguishers.
(v) Hydrants are to be accessible at all time; no debris is to be permitted to
accumulate within a radius of 4 metres of fire hydrants.
(e) The Contractor will at all times comply with the requirements of the Civil Defence
Department.
(f) In the case of structures that are to be partly demolished, the condition of those parts
of the structure that are to be retained shall be checked for safety and stability before
any demolition work begins. Similarly, the condition of adjoining properties which may
be affected by the demolition shall be checked for safety and stability before any
demolition work begins.
(g) Independently supported platforms are to be provided to avoid working form that part
of the structure being demolished.
ar
(h) Isolated walls should not be left unshored unless they are structurally stable against
wind and other forces likely to affect them.
at
8.1.7 Use Of Explosive -Q
1 General Description
LL
(a) When the use of explosives is necessary for the carrying out of the work, the
Contractor is to exercise the utmost care not to endanger life or property. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all damage resulting from the use of explosive.
W
(b) All explosives are to be stored in a secure manner in compliance with all the
requirements of the Police, Civil Defence Department and the manufacturer of the
s
explosive. All such storage places are to be clearly marked, “DANGEROUS -

en
EXPLOSIVES”, in English and Arabic and shall be in the care of a competent

watchman.
m
(c) Explosives will not be stored closer than 300 metres from any road, building, camping
e
area or place of human occupancy.

Si
2 Procedures
(a) The Contractor is to notify each public utility department having structures in proximity
to the Site of his intention to use explosive. Such notice shall be given sufficiently in
advance in order to enable the said authorities to take such steps as they may deem
necessary to protect their property from damage.
(b) The written consent of the Engineer is to be obtained for each proposal of the
Contractor to use explosives.
(c) Where blasting is proposed adjacent to a building or other structure, existing or under
construction, the Contractor will satisfy the Engineer that safe values of vibrational
amplitude and peak particle velocity will not be exceeded.
(d) The Contractor is to comply with the provisions of BS 6657 in respect of the use of
electrical detonators in the vicinity of static and mobile radio transmitters, including
normal radio and television broadcasting stations and radar units associated with
aircraft movements.
(e) The handling, transport and use of explosives will be in accordance with the relevant
provisions of BS 5607. Explosives are to be used in the quantities and manner
recommended by the manufacturers.
8.1.8 Special Investigations
1 General Description
(a) The Contractor is to ascertain from the responsible authority whether any mains or
services need to be redirected or cut-off. The Contractor shall conform to any
procedures prescribed by the relevant authority and the Engineer.
(b) Notwithstanding any information supplied by the Engineer, the Contractor is to take all
necessary steps to establish the presence of any stressed components, supporting
walls and the like in the structures to be demolished.
(c) Where special circumstances such as unknown soil conditions exist (which could
reveal hazardous material) or where the structural components of the building support
ar
system are unknown, additional investigations as necessary will be performed. The
cost of such investigations shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise stated in
at
the Project Documentation.
-Q
8.2 BUILDING DEMOLITION
8.2.1 Scope
LL
1 This Part specifies procedures and requirements for demolition and removal of buildings,
W
structures and related service utilities. The scope of demolition or renovation work is
specified for three categories of demolition:
s
(a) Standard Demolition - typical type demolition work

en
(b) Special Demolition - demolition of partially collapsed or unsafe structures

m
(c) Selective Demolition - demolition required for alteration or expansion type work
e

Si
This Section Part 1 General

Part 3 Hazardous Materials
Section 1 General
8.2.2 References
1 The following standards are referred to in this Part:

BS 5607 .....................Safe use of explosives in the construction industry
8.2.3 General Requirements
1 Unless otherwise indicated in the Project Documentation or directed by the Engineer, the
Contractor is to complete the demolition and removal of buildings and structures together
with all foundations and retaining walls, piers, partitions and columns, and associated service
utilities.
2 The demolition is to be carried out in a planned and safe sequence, generally in reverse
order of erection, reducing the shell of the building in small lifts.
3 The Contractor is responsible for the removal and disposal of all debris resulting from
demolition work.
4 Upon hand over of the Site to the Contractor, the Contractor is to take over all responsibility
of the buildings to be demolished.
5 The Contractor is to inspect each building he is to remove and determine for himself the
ar
work involved and the equipment and the materials required for the specified demolition
work.
at
6
-Q
The Contractor shall at his own expense, make good any damage done to other property
during demolition Works.
8.2.4 Standard Demolition

LL
1 Method Statement
W
(a) The Contractor is to prepare a method statement which shall detail all aspects
proposed demolition work and associated procedures before commencing any
s
demolition work. The method statement shall be approved by the Engineer before any
en
demolition work commences. The Method Statement is to incorporate the

requirements of Part 1 of this Section.
m
(b) The Contractor shall establish whether any stressed components are present in the
e
structure. The Contractor shall include a complete statement of his proposed method
Si
of demolition of such components in his method statement.

(c) The Contractor shall establish whether any of the walls of the structure to be
demolished are load bearing and shall establish whether cross walls are bonded into
the abutting walls. The Contractor shall identify such walls in his method statement.
2 Execution
(a) The Contractor shall completely demolish and remove buildings and structures,
including all services related or connected thereto, as noted below:
(i) To minimum depth of 900 mm below finished grade in areas new paving is to be
placed unless greater depth is required for installation of new utility service
lines.
(ii) To full depth within an area defined by hypothetical lines located 1.5 m outside
building lines of new structures.
(iii) To minimum depth of 600 mm below finished grade in all other areas unless
greater depth is required for installation of new utility service lines.
(b) Debris, including brick, concrete, stone, metals and similar materials are to become
the property of contractor and be disposed of by him, off the Site. Concrete slabs
below grade that do not require removal from the site are to be broken up into pieces
2
not exceeding 60 cm .
(c) In removing buildings and structures of more than two stories, demolition work shall
start at the highest level and progressing down to third floor level. Demolition of first
and second stories may proceed simultaneously.
(d) Where explosives are to be used, comply with Part 1 of this Section and BS 5607.
(e) The Contractor is to conduct his operations in such a manner as to avoid danger to
persons and property. Once demolition work has started on any building, the work on
that building is to be continued to completion, promptly and expeditiously.
(f) Where building basements exist and the area is not to be reused, all debris is to be
removed from the basement areas and concrete floors broken. The areas are then to
be filled with backfill material simultaneously with the breaking of the foundation walls
and floors so that the backfill material will be integrated with the pieces of broken
ar
concrete.
at
(g) Concrete slabs resting on earth and forming footpaths, driveways, or the first floor of
buildings without basements are to be broken up and removed from the Site unless
-Q
otherwise specified in the Project Documentation.
(h) The Contractor is responsible for removing any additional small “out” buildings or
LL
miscellaneous structures that have not been indicated in the Project Documentation
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
W
(i) Immediately upon award of the Contract and prior to the demolition of any structures,
the Contractor is required to paint or stencil in contrasting colours of an oil or lead-
s
based paint “BUILDING TO BE DEMOLISHED” on all four sides of each residential

en
building and on two opposite sides of other structures in Arabic and English. The
signs are to be positioned in a prominent location on the structure so that they can be
m
easily seen and read, and at a sufficient height to prevent defacing.

(j) Existing underground storage tanks on the Site or within the buildings to be
e
demolished are to be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. The Contractor is

Si
to take all necessary precautions during the removal of the fluid within the tanks.
Where tanks are removed, the Contractor is to backfill the resulting void with the fine
aggregate. This backfill is to be compacted in accordance with Section 3, Earthworks
Related to Buildings.
(k) Structures designated to become the property of the Contractor are to be removed
from the Site.
(l) Operations necessary for the removal of an existing structure or obstruction, which
may damage new construction, are to be completed prior to placing the new work
unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation.
(m) Where trees have been designated to remain, but are a hindrance to demolition work,
the Contractor is to, at his own expense, temporarily relocate such trees and provide
all maintenance as necessary until such time as replanting is feasible.
(n) Excavation to locate the disused services and backfill after the removal of the services
installation shall be carried out in accordance with applicable Sections in the QCS and
Project Specification.
8.2.5 Utility Services
1 Demolition Related Work
(a) The Contractor is to arrange for the disconnection of all utilities that serve buildings in
accordance with the respective requirements and regulations of the relevant authority.
(b) The Contractor shall liase directly with the service utility authorities to assertion correct
procedures and safe working practices related to disconnection of each particular
utility service.
(c) The Contractor is to disconnect and properly seal, in a manner approved by the
relevant authority and the Engineer, all sewer outlets that serve buildings to be
demolished. The Contractor will keep the Engineer informed of his plans for the
performance of any work in connection with the sealing off of such outlets in order that
proper inspection may be provided at the time the work is performed.
(d) Demolition of utilities shall be in accordance with Part 1 and Clause 2.2 of this Section
unless otherwise required by the Project Documentation.
ar
(e) The Contractor shall demolish and remove external utility service lines as follows:
at
(i) Abandoned portions of utility lines located outside areas of new buildings, or
-Q
new roads, footpaths and parking areas that are less than 650 mm below
proposed finished ground levels.
(ii) Abandoned portions of utility lines which occur within areas of new buildings,
LL
roads, footpaths and parking areas.

W
(iii) Abandoned utility lines that would interfere with installation of new utility lines.
(iv) Other abandoned lines not specified that interface with performance of the work
s
of this contract.
en
(f) Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the Project Documentation, the point of
disconnection of utility services shall be at a point agreed with by the utility owner.
m
8.2.6 Special Demolition

e
Si
1 Scope
(a) This Clause specifies the requirements and precautions to be taken where demolition
and removal of materials is required within buildings or structures which are partially
collapsed or considered unsafe.
2 Method Statement
(a) The requirements as set forth by Clause 2.2 of this Section will apply unless stated
otherwise in the Project Documentation.
3 General Requirements
(a) Where demolition is to be done within partially collapsed or unsafe buildings,

additional site specific investigations will need to be made by qualified engineers or
specialists to determine if temporary shoring or other measures must be taken for
safety of workers, the Public or other adjacent structures of properties. The
Contractor is responsible for arranging for such investigations to be made before any
demolition work commences. The Contractor shall incorporate the findings and
results of the investigation in his method statement. The cost of any specific
investigations, as described in this paragraph, shall be borne by the Contractor unless
otherwise stated in the Project Documentation.
8.2.7 Selective Demolition
1 Scope
(a) This Clause specifies the requirements and precautions to be taken where only parts
of the interior or exterior of buildings are to be demolished, removed or replaced. This
ar
may include renovation or remodelling work, additions or expansions.
at
2 Method Statement -Q
(a) The requirements as set forth by Clause 2.2 of this Section will apply unless stated
otherwise in the Project Documentation.
LL
W
(a) Demolition work in alterations are to be undertaken with the maximum consideration
for the surrounding structure and are to be limited to the minimum required in order to
carry out the work. The manner and order of the work, including the design and
s
provision of any supports and other safety precautions, will be the Contractor’s
en
responsibility and shall be fully detailed in the method statement.

m
(b) The design of any shoring and supports necessary to maintain the stability of any
structure retained after the demolition of adjoining property are to be submitted to the
e
Engineer for approval. The responsibility for the sufficiency of the design is to rest
Si
with the Contractor, notwithstanding the approval of the Engineer.
8.2.8 Temporary Work
(a) The Contractor is to provide temporary works for protection of existing roads,
footpaths, utilities, and structures where and when necessary.
(b) Support is to be provided for members of framed structures before cutting them.
(c) Where a structure’s stability may be affected by the demolition of a member,
temporary bracing, and guys, are to be provided to restrain the remaining members.
8.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
8.3.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies requirements and procedures for the Contractor when encountering
potential or known hazardous or toxic waste.

Section 1 General
ar
8.3.2 Relevant Authorities
at
1 Procedures and Contacts
-Q
(a) The Contractor shall contact and co-ordinate with respective Government agencies in
order to ensure correct implementation of approved methods and procedures to be
LL
carried out by the Contractor in connection with the removal or containment of

hazardous materials. This is especially to be undertaken for the following:
W
(i) Prior to initiation of any work at the Site where known hazardous materials exist.
(ii) Immediately upon question, suspicion, or finding of hazardous materials during
s
demolition; all work should cease under this situation, with exception of
en
immediate precautions taken to provide containment or until further direction or

approval is given by the Engineer.
m
8.3.3 Method Statement

e
Si
1 Hazardous and Toxic Waste
(a) When the Contractor’s operations encounter or expose any abnormal condition which
may indicate the presence of a hazardous or toxic waste, such operations are to be
discontinued in the vicinity of the abnormal condition and the Engineer is to be notified
immediately. The presence of the following may be indicators of hazardous or toxic
wastes and are to be treated with extraordinary caution:
(i) Tanks or barrels.
(ii) Discolored earth, metal, wood, ground water, etc.
(iii) Visible fumes.
(iv) Abnormal odours.
(v) Excessively hot earth.
(vi) Smoke.
(vii) Other conditions which appear abnormal.
(b) Hazardous materials include, but are not limited to the following:
(i) Anhydrous ammonia.
(ii) Combustible liquids, compressed gasses.
(iii) Dip tanks, flammable liquids.
(iv) Hydrogen.
(v) Liquid petroleum gasses.
(vi) Nitrous oxide.
(vii) Spray finishing.
(c) Every effort is to be made by the Contractor to minimise the spread of any hazardous
or toxic waste into uncontaminated areas.
8.3.4 Special Precautions
ar
1 Public Safety Measures
at
(a) The Contractor is to provide all safety measures to protect the public from harmful
hazardous materials as required by respective authorities.
-Q
(b) The Contractor’s operations will not resume until so directed by the Engineer if any
safety measures are found to be inadequate for protection from hazardous material
conditions encountered during work.
LL
2 Environmental Safety Measures

W
(a) The Contractor is to follow and implement all procedures defined or required by
related environmental or public safety authorities. These precautions will be taken at
s
all times during the removal or confinement of hazardous materials, whether known or
en
suspected.
m
(b) The Contractor is to have present at the Site, a representative of the related approval
authority during removal or confinement work, if it is a requirement the approval
e
authority.
Si
(c) If previously defined safety measures are found not to exist for the type of hazardous
materials in question, it will be the Contractor’s responsibility to establish procedures
and methodology to be implemented. The procedures and methodology shall be to
the approval of the Engineer.
(d) Removal or containment work is to be performed under the constant direction and
supervision of pre-approved personnel experienced with working with hazardous
materials.
3 Documentation
(a) The Contractor is to be responsible for processing and approval of any documentation
relating to procedures required by governmental or agencies related to procedures for
removal or containment of hazardous materials.
8.3.5 Disposal
1 Safe Disposal
(a) Disposal of hazardous materials will be made in accordance with the requirements
and regulations of the relevant authority.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 09: Materials
9 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................ 2
9.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
9.1.1 Scope 2
9.1.2 Materials from AGCC States 2
9.1.3 Product Data 2
9.1.4 Quality of Materials 2
9.1.5 Manufacturer’s Instructions 3
9.1.6 Samples 3
9.1.7 Shop Drawings 4
9.1.8 Alternative Materials 4
9.1.9 Owner Furnished Materials 4
9.1.10 Delivery of Materials to Government Stores 4
9.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................ 5
9.2.1 Ordering Materials 5
ar
9.2.2 Delivery of Materials to the Site 5
9.2.3 Handling or Materials 5
at
9.2.4 Storage of Materials on the Site -Q 5
9.2.5 Protection of Materials 6
9.3 TESTING OF MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 6
9.3.1 General 6
LL
9.3.2 In-situ Testing and Nuclear Density Measuring Devices 7

9.3.3 Test Certificates 8
W
9.4 SPECIAL MATERIALS ............................................................................................ 8

9.4.1 Proprietary Articles and Systems 8
s
en
e m
Si
Part 09: Materials
9 MATERIALS
9.1 GENERAL
9.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for materials incorporated in the Works. In the context
of this Part, components and items of equipment are to be considered as materials and all
requirements applicable to materials are likewise applicable to components and items of
equipment.
2 The following Sections and Parts are referred to in this part:

This Section
Part 7 Submittals
ar
9.1.2 Materials from AGCC States
at
1
-Q
All materials and components for the Works shall be obtained from the member states of the
Arab Gulf Co-operation Council unless the Engineer approves the use of alternative sources.
9.1.3 Product Data

LL
1 Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit product data for all
W
materials to be incorporated in the Works.

s
2 Product data shall be explicit with regard to the actual material to be incorporated in the
en
Works.
3 Product data shall include, but not be limited to:

m
(a) Size and dimensions of product.

e
Si
(b) Fittings and fixings associated with product.

(c) Colour and surface finish of product.
4 The product data shall provide sufficient information for the Engineer to determine that the
products submitted conform to the requirements of the Project Documentation.
5 Where product data submittals include manufacturer’s catalogues which detail more than
one product or size, capacity etc. of the same product, the Contractor shall clearly indicate
which product is being presented for approval.
6 Product data shall be presented on A4 size paper and electronic format whenever possible.
9.1.4 Quality of Materials
1 All materials required to comply with a particular national or international standard shall be
marked with the certified trade mark associated with the organisation responsible for the
standard. The mark of conformity of any approved third party certification body or an
equivalent mark shall be an acceptable alternative to this requirement.
Part 09: Materials
2 The requirements of Clause 9.1.4 shall not apply where the Engineer is satisfied and
confirms to the Contractor in writing that third party quality assured materials are not readily
available or appropriate. In such cases, and where materials are required to comply with a
particular standard or its equivalent, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer test
certificates, furnished by the supplier or manufacturer of the materials, indicating compliance
with the relevant standard.
3 As soon as possible after the Contract has been awarded, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for his approval a list of proposed suppliers and sources of materials required for
the execution of the Works.
4 Names of additional suppliers and sources of materials may be submitted by the Contractor
during the execution of the Contract, but no source of supply shall be changed without the
Engineer’s approval.
5 A single source of supply shall be used for materials which have characteristics that:
ar
(a) Differ according to source of supply or manufacture.
at
(b) Could affect the appearance of the completed Works.
(c) Could affect the performance of the completed Works.
-Q
6 All materials and equipment incorporated in the Works shall be designed and manufactured
or constructed to withstand the climatic conditions experienced in Qatar.
LL
9.1.5 Manufacturer’s Instructions

W
1 Unless otherwise described in the Project Documentation, the use, installation, application or
fixing of materials shall be in accordance with all applicable recommendations and
s
instructions of the manufacturers.

en
2 The Contractor shall obtain the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations relating to
m
all materials and proprietary articles and systems to be incorporated in the Works, and shall
keep copies of the same on site at all times for the information of the Engineer. Such
e
instructions and recommendation shall be considered to be part of this Specification.

Si
3 Where appropriate, the Contractor shall make use of any technical advisory service offered
by manufacturers regarding use and installation of materials.
9.1.6 Samples
1 Samples shall be provided when requested by the Engineer or instructed by the Project
Documentation. Materials subsequently supplied shall conform to the quality of the samples
which have been approved by the Engineer.
2 Each sample shall bear a securely fixed label bearing the following information:
(a) Project identification.

(b) Contractor identification.
(c) Sample identification including all information as to manufacturer, model, catalogue
number, finish, etc.
(d) Space for approval signature of the Engineer.
Part 09: Materials
3 Where approval of materials is required, samples or other evidence of suitability shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval. No such material shall be ordered or used until
written approval is received from the Engineer.
4 Where samples of finished work are specified, works shall not proceed until the Engineer has
approved the sample of the finished work. Samples of finished work shall be made under
conditions similar to those which will be experienced during the construction of the Works.
5 Samples which have been approved shall be carefully protected and maintained in a manner
which will not allow them to deteriorate. Unless otherwise specified or forming part of the
finished Works, samples shall be removed when no longer required by the Engineer.
6 All materials and workmanship shall be up to the standard of the approved samples.
7 Samples shall be of sufficient size to indicate the general visual effect. The minimum
acceptable size of sheet materials shall be 300 x 300 mm.
ar
9.1.7 Shop Drawings
at
1 The Contractor shall prepare Shop Drawings in accordance with the relevant provisions of
-Q
Part 7, Submittals, of this Section. The Shop Drawings shall include material description and
identification where applicable.
9.1.8 Alternative Materials

LL
1 The Contractor may propose the use of alternatives to materials specified in the Project
W
Documentation. Such proposals shall be complete with all supporting information showing
that the alternative is equal or better than the specified material in all respects.
s
en
2 The use of alternative materials shall only be permitted if approved by the Engineer in writing.
9.1.9 Owner Furnished Materials

e m
1 Materials to be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor shall be as specified in
Si
2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the collection and delivery to the Site of materials to
be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor. The collection location of such
materials shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation.
3 The Owner reserves the right to place and install items of equipment, furniture, furnishings,
partitions etc., in completed or partially completed parts of the Works upon the understanding
that the exercising of such a right will not substantially interfere with the regular progress and
completion of the Works.
9.1.10 Delivery of Materials to Government Stores
1 Materials to be delivered to the Government stores shall be as detailed in the Project

Documentation.
2 Prior to delivery to store, the Contractor shall make all items available for inspection by the
Engineer's Representative.
Part 09: Materials
3 The Contractor shall be instructed where to deliver the items and the date on which the
delivery is to be made.
4 Each delivery to store shall be accompanied by a detailed delivery note, which shall be
prepared by the Contractor, in a format approved by the Engineer.
5 On arrival at store, all items shall be re-inspected by the Engineer's Representative, before
being accepted.
6 The Contractor shall be issued with a receipt for the delivered items, which have been
accepted.
9.2 MATERIALS
9.2.1 Ordering Materials
1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any material which he is unable to order due to
ar
lack of information, non-availability, or for any other reason, within sixty (60) days of the
acceptance of the Contract.
at
2
-Q
The Contractor shall ascertain the quantities of materials for ordering from the Project
Documentation. The Bill of Quantities alone shall not be used as a basis for ordering
materials.
LL
3 The Contractor shall be responsible for any delays to the Contract due to non-compliance
with this Clause.
W
9.2.2 Delivery of Materials to the Site

s
en
1 Materials shall be new and shall bear complete identification. Such identification shall
include, but not be limited to, the class, model, number and type of the material. Where
m
materials are not so identified, the Contractor shall furnish copies of invoices or certificates
providing complete identification.
e
Si
2 Deliveries shall be programmed to minimise handling and deterioration due to site storage.
9.2.3 Handling or Materials
1 Materials shall be handled in such a manner as to avoid any damage or contamination, and
in accordance with all applicable recommendations of the manufacturers.
2 Particular care shall be taken when handling components with lifting equipment. Slings,
lifting hooks, forks and the like should only be applied at the points indicated as being
suitable for application by the manufacturer.
9.2.4 Storage of Materials on the Site
1 The Contractor shall allow for delivery of all materials & equipment to site, as well as multiple
handling required in the Works. The Contractor shall also provide for adequate storage of all
materials and equipment used in the Works for the whole period of the Contract. The said
storage shall be as per the applicable Specifications of all concerned authorities and
departments.
Part 09: Materials
2 Materials shall be stored in such a manner as to preserve their quality and condition to the
standards required by this Specification. Any recommendations made by the manufacturer
which relate to storage of materials and equipment shall be fully complied with.
3 The quantity of materials and equipment stored on the Site shall be consistent with that
necessary for efficient working.
4 Incompatible materials shall be separately stored.
5 Storage shall be such that any particular consignment can be readily identified by its delivery
ticket, test certificate, etc.
6 Materials which are liable to deteriorate shall be used in the order of delivery.
9.2.5 Protection of Materials
1 Adequate protection against any form of damage or deterioration to materials shall be
ar
provided and shall include protective tapes, casing and the like which shall be cleared away
on completion of the Works. Tarpaulins shall be provided where necessary.
at
2 Particular care shall be taken to protect finished surfaces during the application of adjacent
-Q
work.
3 Materials which are subject to deterioration by ultra violet light shall be stored so that they are
LL
not exposed to direct sunlight.

W
9.3 TESTING OF MATERIALS

s
9.3.1 General
en
1 The Engineer may test any materials before they leave the manufacturer’s premises or after
delivery to the Site.
e m
2 The Engineer may reject any materials after delivery to the Site should he consider them
Si
unsatisfactory, notwithstanding any preliminary test and approval of the materials at the
manufacturer’s premises.
3 The costs of all tests necessary to ensure compliance with the Contract, including the cost of
delivery to the testing laboratory, shall be borne by the Contractor.
4 Should the Engineer not inspect any materials or goods at the place of manufacture, the
Contractor shall without cost to the Contract obtain certificates of test from the supplier of
such goods and shall send such certificates to the Engineer. Such certificates shall certify
that the materials or goods concerned have been tested in accordance with the requirements
of the Specification and shall include the results of all tests carried out. The Contractor shall
provide adequate means of identifying the materials and goods delivered to the site with the
corresponding certificates.
5 The Engineer may require samples of materials to be delivered to the Ministry of

Environment (MOE) for additional tests. The Contractor shall provide attendance as required
by the Engineer to witness sample collection and testing carried out by the Contractor.
Part 09: Materials
6 The Contractor shall be responsible for the organisation and appointment of an approved
Independent Testing Laboratory to carry out all the testing of materials as required by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall supply full details of the testing laboratory he proposes to
appoint including facilities, personnel, etc. for the Engineer’s approval within 7 days of the
Engineer’s order to commence work on site. This Independent Testing Laboratory shall be
chosen from the Ashghal approved labs list
7 All testing for compliance with the Specification shall only be carried out using laboratory
equipment, , which has been calibrated and certified by a calibration service organisation
approved by the MOE. Provision of evidence of compliance with this clause shall be as
directed from time to time by the MOE.
8 All samples and records shall be preserved for as long as the Engineer may direct and they
should be kept and labelled in an orderly fashion. Testing equipment and all samples and
records shall be open to inspection by the Engineer or his representative at all times.
9 The laboratory shall be provided with equipment and trained personnel sufficient for carrying
ar
out all tests referred to in the Specification applicable to the contractor’s scope of work as
defined in the contract. The laboratory shall be capable of carrying out all the relevant tests at
at
the frequency required by the Specification and by the rate of progress required by the
-Q
Contractor’s approved programme for the works.
9.3.2 In-situ Testing and Nuclear Density Measuring Devices

LL
1 No person, company nor organisation will be permitted to determine in-situ density by means
of a nuclear type density measuring device without complying with the following
W
requirements:
(a) Each device held by any organisation shall have a valid calibration certificate issued by
s
the MOE. The validity of any such certificate shall not exceed six months.
en
(b) Calibration certificates will only be issued for any particular device if MOE is satisfied
that the identified storage location of the device is, suitable and safe, and that an
m
approved radiation officer has been appointed by the organisation.

e
(c) General and detailed storage location plan is to be provided to MOE for each device. A
letter of undertaking from the organisation stating that for each device should there be
Si
a need for it to be stored elsewhere at anytime overnight MOE will be so notified in

advance to ensure compliance of safe storage requirements.
(d) Only persons holding a valid user certificate issued by MOE shall be permitted to
operate these devices. Such certificates shall only be issued after the applicant has
demonstrated competence in operating the device both technically and safely. The
validity of any certificate shall not exceed six months.
(e) During operation of the device the operator and any assistance shall wear suitable film
badges or a personnel radiation warning alarms. Evidence of the organisation having
these available during the intended validity of a user certificate shall be required prior
to the issue of such user certificates.
(f) Non-adherence to the above requirements will be reported to the relevant authorities
for suitable action.
Part 09: Materials
9.3.3 Test Certificates
1 Materials which have been tested shall be issued with a test certificate. The test certificate
shall clearly indicate whether the material has passed or failed any test or tests performed.
The test certificates shall also clearly indicate whether the tested material is suitable for use
or inclusion in the Works.
2 Test certificates shall be issued by the manufacturer, the Central Materials Laboratory, an
approved third party testing laboratory or other organisation as designated in the Project
Documentation or as directed by the Engineer.
9.4 SPECIAL MATERIALS
9.4.1 Proprietary Articles and Systems
1 The specification of proprietary articles and systems supplied by particular firms is not
necessarily binding upon the Contractor. If approval is obtained, the Contractor may order
ar
from other sources supplying articles of equal quality.
at
2 The Contractor shall submit full details and samples of the alternatives offered together with
-Q
samples of the items specified to enable a proper comparison to be made. A minimum of
twenty one (21) days shall be allowed from the date all information required by the Engineer
has been submitted for his decision as to the acceptability or otherwise of the alternative
LL
offered.
3 The Contractor shall be deemed to have included for the specified item in the Contract price,
W
not his proposed alternative.

s
4 If so directed, the Contractor shall have the proposed alternative tested for quality, strength,
en
durability, finish or efficiency by an approved testing laboratory.

m
5 If the Engineer accepts an alternative, any costs resulting, including all engineering and
design services, and changes or adjustments in materials or work directly or indirectly
e
brought about by the substitution, shall be borne by the Contractor.

Si
6 On completion of the Contract, all instructions and recommendations for proprietary articles
and systems shall be neatly assembled in suitable folders or binders, provided with a
contents list and handed to the Engineer.
END OF PART
Part 10: Occupational Health and Safety
10 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY .................................................... 3
10.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 3

10.1.1 Scope 3
10.1.2 Responsibility 3
10.1.3 Organisation for Occupational Health and Safety 4
10.1.4 Reporting Accidents 5
10.1.5 General Sanitation 6
10.1.6 Safety Notice Board 6
10.1.7 Compensation for Damage 7
10.1.8 Occupational Health and Safety Performance 7
10.1.9 Occupational Health and Safety Leadership and Accountability 7
10.1.10 Safe-working Arrangements 8
10.1.11 Labour Rights, Benefits & Obligations 8
10.1.12 Language barriers and communications issues 10
ar
10.1.13 Communications, Consultations and Participation 10
10.1.14 Management Review 11
at
10.2 CONTRACTOR OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN ............. 11
-Q
10.2.1 General 11
10.2.2 Occupational Health and Safety Policy 16
LL
10.2.3 Risk Assessment and Job Hazard Analysis 16

10.2.4 Intervention 16
W
10.2.5 Requirement for Training 17

10.2.6 Method Statements 19
s
10.3 EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLAN (ERP) .................................................... 19

en
10.3.1 General 19
m
10.4 EARTHQUAKE EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PLAN ............................... 20

10.4.1 Background 20
e
10.4.2 Requirements 21
Si
10.4.3 Phase One: Gap Analysis (‘as is’) 21

10.4.4 Phase Two: Implementation (‘to be’) 22
10.4.5 Phase Three: Future Requirements 22
10.4.6 What Should We Do During An Earth Quake? 23
10.4.7 What Should We Do After An Earth Quake? 23
10.5 SPECIAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS AND PRECAUTIONS ..................... 24
10.5.1 Permits 24
10.5.2 Guarantee 24
10.5.3 Mechanical Plant, Machinery and Equipment 24
10.5.4 Existing Utilities 25
10.5.5 Excavations 26
10.5.6 Warning Signs 28
10.5.7 Confined Spaces 28
10.5.8 Lifting Operation 30
10.5.9 Lifting Gear 30
10.5.10 Scaffolding 31
10.5.11 Hot work and Welding 32

10.5.12 Compressed Gas Cylinders 33
10.5.13 Working at Height 34
10.5.14 Electrical 36
10.6 FIRST AID ................................................................................................... 37
10.6.1 First Aid and Clinic 37
10.7 FIRE PRECAUTION AND PREVENTION ................................................... 37
10.7.1 General 37
10.7.2 Emergency Equipment 39
10.7.3 Hazardous Substances 40
10.8 SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC ........................................................................... 41
10.8.1 Working in Public Areas 41
10.9 WELFARE, SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF WORKMEN ........................ 42
ar
10.9.1 General 42
at
10.9.2 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) / Attire -Q 42
10.9.3 Safety Equipment 42
10.9.4 Support Facilities for Contractors Staff and Labour 43
10.9.5 Summer Working Conditions and fatigue 45
10.9.6 Additional Environmental Protection and Pollution Control 45
LL
10.9.7 Plant and Equipment Test Certificates 46

W
10.10 LABOUR ACCOMODATION ....................................................................... 46

10.10.1 General 46
s
10.10.2 Quality of Labour Accommodation 46

en
10.10.3 Provision for Fire Safety 47

10.10.4 Provision for Health Care 47
m
10.10.5 Access to Transport 48

10.10.6 Access to Religious, Social and Domestic Facilities 48
e
10.10.7 Access to Communications 49

Si
10.10.8 Number, Quality and Location of Sanitation Facilities 49

10.10.9 Food Preparation Areas 49
10.10.10 Pest and Vermin Control 50
10.10.11 Security at Labour Accommodation 50
10.10.12 Social Issues 50
10.10.13 Competence of Labour Accommodation Management 51
10.10.14 Environmental Conditions at Labour Accommodation 51
10.10.15 Health and Safety for Labour Accommodation Residents 52
10 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY

10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the Health, Safety and Welfare requirements for construction and its
associated practices.
2 Related Sections and Parts are as follows.

This Section Part 4 Protection
Part 9 Materials
Part 11 Engineer’s Site Facilities
Part 13 Setting-out of the Works
ar
at
10.1.2 Responsibility -Q
1 It is the Contractors responsibility to implement an Occupational Health and Safety
Management System meeting as a minimum the requirements of BS OHSAS 18001. It shall
be the duty of the Contractor to provide the following:
LL
(a) Safe plant and equipment;

W
(b) Safe means of handling, transporting and storage of articles and substances;
(c) Adequate training, instruction, information and supervision;
s
en
(d) A safe place of work with safe access to and egress from the place of work;
(e) A safe and healthy environment; and
m
(f) Adequate welfare facilities.

e
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to conduct his operations in such a manner as to prevent

Si
2
injury to persons or damage to property. The Contractor shall take precautions for protection
against risks and shall inspect Occupational Health and Safety conditions where the Works
are being executed.
3 The Contractor shall conform to all Acts, Orders and Regulations made by any official
authority with respect to Occupational Health and Safety.
4 The Contractor shall note that Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) shall be treated with
high importance at all stages of the Contract. Contractor shall understand that the Contract
Price includes the Execution Programme for provision and implementation of an
Occupational Health and Safety Policy and Plan to ensure the highest standards are
enforced throughout Construction, Pre-commissioning and Commissioning.
5 The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the requirements of latest revision of:
(a) Qatar Construction Specification – QCS,

(b) Qatar Law No.14 of the Year 2004 – The Labour Law, and the ministerial decisions
issued in implementation of the provisions of the Labour Law issued by Law No. 14 of
2004,
(c) Qatar Traffic Law No. 19 of the Year 2007,
(d) Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of the Year 2002 and Decision No. (4) for the
year 2005 by issuing the executive regulations of Environmental Protection Law,
(e) Civil Defence Law No. 9 of the Year 2012,
(f) CDD (Department of Civil Defence) – Fire Safety Handbook; and
(g) Worker Rights Booklet 2009 (National Human Rights Committee).
The Contractor is required to fully comply with the stated requirements relating to
Occupational Health and Safety. In the event that legislation is updated the latest version
ar
shall be followed.
at
6 The Contractor shall ensure that Contractor Personnel and Subcontractor’s employees
-Q
comply with all requirements of latest revision of QATAR legislation mention above (but not
limited to). Compliance with the standards shall be considered as a minimum requirement
and Contractor shall establish additional arrangements as circumstances may require. Any
failure by Contractor to obtain copies of that mentioned laws applicable to the Contract shall
LL
in no way relieve the Contractor from any responsibilities or obligation under the Contract.
W
7 The Contractor’s Representative shall be responsible for all Occupational Health and Safety
matters during the performance of the Work up to and including the Completion Date. The
s
Contractor’s Representative shall ensure that an effective Occupational Health and Safety
en
management organization is maintained at all times to undertake the duties to comply with
this requirement.
m
10.1.3 Organisation for Occupational Health and Safety

e
Si
1 The Contractor shall submit an Occupational Health and Safety Organisation Plan detailing
planning and management considerations for construction at an organisational level for the
Engineer’s approval within Thirty (30) days of the award of the Contract.
2 The Occupational Health and Safety Organisation Plan shall provide the names,
qualifications, experience and skills of all the Safety Team and key support staff.
3 The Contractor shall submit the names of the following to the Engineer for approval:-
(a) The details of its proposed competent and experienced Occupational Health and
Safety Manager. The minimum education for the proposed Occupational Health and
Safety Manager are but not limited to Bachelor degree in Engineering / Science or
equivalent with 10 years experiences in the same field as Safety Manager and the
ability to communicate with all nationalities, plus Professional OHS Qualification by
Examination (NEBOSH, IOSH Managing Safely, OSHA 30 hours, ... etc), Management
Qualification prefer certified as BS OHSAS 18001 lead auditor, implementation and
continues improvement Relevant Training Attendance. The Engineer shall review the
details and if necessary interview the proposed individual to assess his/her suitability
for the position prior to giving approval for appointment. The Contractor is not
permitted to execute any form of Work on the Worksite until such time as an approved
Occupational Health and Safety Manager has been deployed on a full time basis to the
Worksite. The Contractor shall not remove the appointed Occupational Health and
Safety Manager without prior approval from the Engineer.
(b) Deputy Occupational Health and Safety Manager who is capable of performing all of
the duties of the Occupational Health and Safety Manager in the event of his absence.
The requirements and procedure outlined in Clause (a) above applies equally to the
appointment of the Deputy Occupational Health and Safety Manager.
4 The Contractor shall appoint Occupational Health and Safety Officers and support staff in
sufficient numbers to ensure the effective function of the Occupational Health and Safety
discipline within the Contractor’s organisation. The minimum education for the Occupational
Health and Safety Officer are HND / HNC with 4 years experiences in the same field as
Safety officer, certified from NEBOSH, IOSH or OSHA 30 hours, Professional in control and
monitoring the site activity. The Contractor shall appoint and deploy full time on the Worksite
one Occupational Health and Safety Officer for each and every 50 persons employed at the
Worksite. For a less than 50 persons employed at the Worksite, a minimum of one (1) Safety
ar
Officer shall be present on site during all working hours each day throughout the Contract
at
period. This is in addition to the Occupational Health and Safety Manager and his Deputy.
5
-Q
The Safety Officers shall have no other duties, either on-site or off-site, other than
Occupational Health and Safety duties, and shall be exclusive to one site.
LL
6 The Contractor shall ensure that each and every Subcontractor employed on the Worksite
appoints suitably competent and experienced qualified Occupational Health and Safety staff
W
to ensure the effective function of the Occupational Health and Safety discipline within the
Subcontractor’s organisation. The requirements and procedure outlined above for contractor
Occupational Health and Safety staff to be applies equally to the appointment of the
s
Subcontractor Occupational Health and Safety Staff. The Subcontractor shall appoint and
en
deploy full time on the Worksite one Occupational Health and Safety Officer for each and
every 50 persons that they employ at the Worksite. Any Subcontractor that employs more
m
than 100 persons will appoint an Occupational Health and Safety Manager. This is in addition
to the Occupation Occupational Health and Safety Officers.
e
Si
10.1.4 Reporting Accidents
1 The Contractor shall promptly report to the Engineer any accident whatsoever arising out of,
or in connection with, the Works whether on or adjacent to the Site which caused death,
personal injury or property damage, giving full details and enclosing statements of witnesses.
2 Promptly shall mean immediately by telephone where it impacts on the operation of the
project and electronically in all cases never more than 24 hours.
3 The Contractor shall implement arrangements for effectively managing any emergency
incident that may occur as a result of Work and/or on the Worksite.
4 The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for emergency preparedness
including, but not limited to, medical equipment and facilities, trained personnel,
communication systems, transportation, search and rescue equipment.
5 The Contractor shall produce and submit to the Engineer monthly performance reports and
incident reports. Reports shall be in the format approved by the Engineer.
6 The Contractor shall refer to, and in particular, QCS 2013 (Section 11, Part 2) for all incident
classifications and definitions.
7 Incident Investigation final reports to be submitted for all lost time major / reportable Incidents
within 10 days of the incident. All incidents that result in lost time from work, near miss,
dangerous occurrence or damage to property (asset) shall be reported. The normal steps to
be taken after an incident shall be;
(a) Submit incident notifications immediately;

(b) Conduct the investigation;
(c) Prepare the report with conclusions and recommendations;
(d) Prepare appropriate plan of corrective action;
(e) Include in monthly Health and Safety statistics report;
(f) Submit to Engineer for review and re-submittal if required.
ar
10.1.5 General Sanitation
at
1 The Contractor shall maintain the Site and all working areas in a sanitary condition and in all
-Q
matters of health and sanitation shall comply with the requirements of the Supreme Council
of Health and the Public Works Authority.
2 The Contractor is responsible for all measures necessary to prevent the breeding of
LL
mosquitoes on the Site for the duration of the Contract.

W
3 The Contractor shall ensure that pests are not permitted to the Site facility by initiating a
routine pest control program. Non-toxic pest control methods shall be used.
s
en
4 The disposal surplus water and the accompanying growth of trees and the proliferation of
insects and rodents. Does the site cause an environmentally danger to the surrounding area?
m
10.1.6 Safety Notice Board

e
Si
1 The Contractor shall set up and maintain (cleaned and legible) throughout the course of the
Contract safety notice boards in prominent places on the Site. These notice boards shall be
located in positions approved by the Engineer such that they are clearly visible to the
Contractor’s employees. They shall be fully illustrated and provide details of key safety
procedures to be followed.
2 The notice boards shall be in Arabic, English and;
(a) In all other languages which are the mother tongue of five or more of the Contractor’s
employees, or
(b) The preferred languages (can be understood) by the workers on the Worksite.
3 The Contractor’s employees shall be made fully aware of the notice boards prior to
commencing duties on Site.
4 The Contractor shall maintain up to date copies of all industry codes and standards that apply
to the Work.
10.1.7 Compensation for Damage
1 Claims for compensation arising from damage or injury caused by the Contractor’s failure to
provide adequate Occupational Health and Safety measures shall be the sole responsibility
of the Contractor.
2 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any claim made against him which is in any way
connected to the Contract.
3 The Contractor is required to copy to the Engineer any formal Occupational Health and
Safety related communication between the Contractor and enforcing authorities or
government organizations.
10.1.8 Occupational Health and Safety Performance
1 The Contractor shall ensure acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of all
Subcontractors, visitors, vendors, public and other parties that may enter the Worksite or the
ar
amounts identified in the Bills of Quantities.
at
2 Should acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance not be maintained by the
-Q
Contractor then the Engineer may, in addition to any other amounts withheld under the
Contract, withhold up to 10% of the amount of any interim invoice issued by the Contractor.
3 The Contractor shall develop and implement programmes which shall act as incentives for
LL
their teams at all levels, to make a positive contribution to good health and safety
performance.
W
10.1.9 Occupational Health and Safety Leadership and Accountability

s
en
1 The Contractor shall be committed to Health and Safety leadership and this is to be achieved
through working in partnership with the main project stakeholders including the Engineer and
the Client.
e m
2 The Contractor shall demonstrate commitment to the safety, health and welfare of all
Si
stakeholders and workers on projects and shall demonstrate leadership in achieving the
following objectives:
(a) A safe, healthy workplace

(b) Be consulted on their working conditions, to be heard, and to influence their working
conditions
(c) Return home from work unharmed at the end of each working day; to which everyone
has a right to.
3 The Contractor shall provide opportunities through forums and meetings involving important
project stakeholders, including the Client, The Engineer, sub-contractors and other relevant
contractors to raise health and safety issues, assist in the development of leadership
programmes, share good practice and be recognised for good performance.
4 The Contractor’s senior management shall visibly demonstrate support, commitment,

Leadership and Accountability on all health and safety issues by the following actions:
(a) The Engineer’s Zero Harm Initiative;

(b) Training employees to work safely;

(c) Recognizing and rewarding employees;
(d) Identify risks to health and safety and develop mitigation/control plans and
communicate these to workers;
(e) Reinforce safe work practices;
(f) Place health and safety as the first item on the agenda at meetings.
(g) Allocate adequate resources for health and safety management and implementation
(h) Develop health and safety targets and objectives and measure and review
performance;
(i) Foster positive health and safety culture and behaviour through their own actions;
(j) Treat health and safety as a core value equal in importance with productivity, quality
and ethical standards;
(k) Participate in health and safety meetings and safety walkabouts;
ar
(l) Develop efficient contingency plans and allocate adequate emergency resources;
at
(m) Provide trained and competent workforce; -Q
(n) Promote personal health and well-being; and
(o) Seek to exceed current legislation in relation to welfare and labour facilities.
LL
10.1.10 Safe-working Arrangements

W
1 The Contractor shall have arrangements to empower their staff to make sensible decisions
about their own safety and the safety of others affected by what they do, and not put
s
themselves or others at risk of harm.

en
2 Contractor to have safe-working arrangement that ensures:

e m
(a) That health and safety concerns can be raised and associated actions taken
Si
(b) Employees can stop work immediately where they believe they or others are at risk of
harm
(c) No disciplinary action is taken against those who use the worksafe arrangement to
raise a genuine health and safety concern
(d) That the process is cascaded to their subcontractors
3 All such arrangements shall be briefed to all staff, including any agency or sub contract staff
before they start work.
4 Where safety concerns are raised or a stop work process has been invoked employers shall
document them and the action taken to resolve them; and shall advise others working on the
project were the issue is likely to impact on them or be similar to those faced by other
organisation
10.1.11 Labour Rights, Benefits & Obligations
1 The Contractor shall document implementation of Labour Law, in particular with respect to
the following:
(a) Recruitment – The Contractor shall maintain an up-to-date list of all agents/agencies
used and should provide copies of licences for same to the Engineer. The Contractor
shall, through their best endeavours, satisfy themselves, and the Engineer, that
recruitment agents/agencies used do not charge recruits any fees inconsistent with
those allowed for under the Labour Law (Qatar Law no.14 of the year 2004).
(b) Contracts – The Contractor shall retain, for inspection by the Engineer, copies of
written employment contracts for all employees working on the project. Such
employment contracts shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Labour Law
and no contract clause may contravene the Labour Law.
(c) Wages – A Wage Register shall be retained in accordance with the requirements of
the Labour Law. The Contractor shall update the Wage Register to ensure that
employee wages, including relevant overtime payments, are paid in a timely fashion
and in a manner consistent with the requirements of the Labour Law. These records
shall be available for inspection by the Engineer and shall clearly identify overtime
payments and rates.
ar
(d) Severance Pay – The Contractor shall retain records to demonstrate that payment of
severance payments have been made, where appropriate, in accordance with Article
at
132 of the Labour Law.
(e)
-Q
Records & Files – These shall be retained in accordance with the Labour Law, and
shall be made available to the Engineer for inspection.
(f) Work Rules & Disciplinary Rules – These shall be in accordance with the Labour Law,
LL
shall be conspicuously displayed, and shall be provided to the Engineer.

(g) Working Hours & Leave - The Contractor shall retain records to demonstrate that all
W
employees’ working hours and leave allowances are consistent with the requirements
of the Labour Law.
s
(h) Collective Labour Disputes - Any/all collective labour disputes shall be dealt with in
en
accordance with the requirements of the Labour Law. Complete records of all such
disputes shall be retained by the Contractor for review by the Engineer. As a
m
minimum, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer immediately, on receipt of

e
complaint/claim from the employees.

Si
(i) Subcontracts As such, obligations, relating to Recruitment, Contracts, Wages,

Records & Files, Work Rules & Disciplinary Rules, Working Hours & Leave and
Collective Labour Disputes shall be passed on to the subcontractor in the event that
works are subcontracted by the Contractor. Similarly, subcontractor records shall be
made available to the Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall provide copies of Contracts, Work Rules, Disciplinary Rules, Pay Slips,
etc. to employees in a range of appropriate languages, as widely understood by the
workforce.
3 The Contractor shall submit a monthly declaration to the Engineer outlining compliance with
Labour Law in relation to payment of wages and working hours for the preceding period.
4 The Contractor shall facilitate contact between project employees and relevant independent
bodies such consulates, NGOs, or other relevant organisations offering social support. A list
of such local contacts shall be provided to new employees during their induction process.
An up-to-date list of contact details for these organisations shall also be displayed in public
areas such as the canteen, recreational areas, etc.
10.1.12 Language barriers and communications issues
1 The Contractors shall ensure that their workforce fully understand site health and safety
requirements, including emergency arrangements and site rules in place. The language
needs of personnel shall be addressed during induction and through training. Emphasis
should be placed on ensuring proper supervision of all staff, but in particular those who may
have difficulties in understanding verbal or written communications. Where practicable,
signage shall make maximum use of pictograms.
2 Those who have responsibility for managing Contractor personnel on construction site shall
be able to communicate in both written and oral English to a standard appropriate to the
tasks being performed. Note that there may be personnel who are not competent in the
English language, and this is permitted provided that the Contractor can demonstrate that:
(a) Such team members are able to give oral instructions and warnings to others
(b) Such team members shall receive the required health and safety training / briefing
(including any emergency procedures) before commencing work in a form that they
ar
understand
at
(c) Appropriate arrangements are made to ensure that instructions are effectively
communicated to and understood by all team members
-Q
(d) Particular attention has been given to the communication requirements of safety
critical workers. ensuring a translator is available who is capable of instructing the non-
LL
English speaking personnel in safety and other operational matters, and

(e) Maintaining a reasonable ratio of non-English speaking personnel to each translator at
W
all times.
3 Special provisions for safety critical instructions conveyed by the translator shall be recorded
s
as being received and clearly understood by each non-English speaking person. Such
en
records shall include those for safety induction, emergency procedures, safety method
statements and safety awareness talks.
m
10.1.13 Communications, Consultations and Participation

e
Si
1 The Contractor shall be required to disseminate and transfer information regarding Health
and Safety issues. Typical information to be communicated should include but not be limited
to; any new policies or procedures and general awareness.
2 The Contractor shall ensure communications arrangements are in place to inform of key
health and safety issues. These will include lessons learnt from incidents, sharing of good
practice, health and safety campaigns and initiatives. Contractors shall have processes in
place to ensure an appropriate cascade to all site personnel.
3 The following methods of communication but not limited to shall be observed;
(a) Meetings; Health and safety meetings shall be conducted on a weekly basis separate
from other meeting that have safety on the agenda
(b) Safety Alerts; Safety alerts shall be produced by the Contractor after a Major
Accident/Incident or when appropriate.
(c) Notice Boards; Information that shall be included as a minimum on an office notice
board is any relevant emergency procedures, policy statement, safety alerts or updates
(d) Campaigns; Health and safety campaigns must be initiated by the Contractor to
implement throughout the year. At least 4 campaigns must be run annually on a pro-
rata basis. One of the campaigns must detail heat stress before the summer months.
(e) Posters/Signs; Must be focused on themes relevant to site specific work
activities/hazards
(f) Safety Awards; The Contractor shall initiate a scheme whereby he recognises and
rewards for positive health and safety related performance by individuals. This shall be
on a monthly basis and communicated throughout the project workforce.
10.1.14 Management Review
1 The Contractor has to supply evidence that their senior management have carried out a
management review, at least annually, of their OHSE systems to ensure continuous
improvement.
2 The review shall include, but not limited to, where appropriate, an evaluation of and / or
ar
changes to:
at
(a) Health and safety policy;
(b) Objectives and targets;
-Q
(c) Action plans;
(d) Follow-up action from previous meetings;
LL
(e) Health and safety system suitability;

(f) Audit results;
W
(g) Preventive and corrective actions;

(h) Regulatory changes;
s
(i) Continual improvement measures;

en
(j) Performance measures;

(k) Major procedure and risk review changes; and
m
(l) Health and safety plans.

e
Si
10.2 CONTRACTOR OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN
10.2.1 General
1 The Contractor shall prepare a Contract specific Occupational Health and Safety Plan (the
“Safety Plan”) and submit a Safety Plan to the Engineer for review and approval within thirty
(30) days of the award of the Contract. The Contractor is not permitted to Work on the
Worksite until such time as the Plan has been approved by Engineer. It will be a condition
precedent to starting the works that the Contractor will have an approved Health and Safety
Plan, Traffic Management Plan, and an Emergency Response Plan.
2 The Safety Plan shall include the Contractor’s proposals for the maintenance of safety on the
Site. These proposals shall address the safety measures applicable with respect to all tasks
to be undertaken in the construction of the Works.
3 The Safety Plan shall include the Contractor’s proposals for accident prevention. Accident
prevention shall include but not be limited to training, monitoring and review of safety related
procedures, enforcement of safety related matters and promoting safety awareness.
4 The Safety Plan shall include a safety organisation chart showing the names and
responsibility of all safety personnel deployed both on and off the Worksite to maintain
acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of the Contract and the Work at all
times, even outside the normal working hours, in particular night-time and holiday working.
(refer to 10.1.3)
5 The Contractor is required to work in areas where dangerous concentrations of gases may
be present in manholes, trench excavations and the like. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to
provide all necessary detection equipment and to ensure that, if toxic or explosive gases are
found, adequate measures are taken to protect his staff, workmen and members of the
public.
6 The Safety Plan shall be specific to one Contract.
7 The Contractor shall regularly review the suitability of the Safety Plan. The Contractor shall
undertake a full formal review of the Safety Plan annually on the date of award of the
Contract or when necessary but no less than 6 monthly intervals and submit the findings of
ar
the review to the Engineer within 14 days of that date along with an amended plan should any
amendment be required.
at
8
-Q
The Safety Plan shall contain the Contractor’s Occupational Health and Safety Policy. (refer
to 10.2.2)
9 The Plan for construction works shall support and supported by the Contractor’s systems for
LL
risk management in particular risk assessment and method statement (refer to the
Regulatory Document Section 11 Part 1 in particular section 1.1.7: Risk Assessments and
W
Method Statement and Guidance document Section 11 Part 2 Section 2.4: Guidance on Risk
Assessment and Method Statement). The plan shall include a schedule of risk assessments
s
for all work activities in relation to the project. The plan shall include a list or schedule of
en
identified work activities for which method statement will be developed before their
execution..
m
10 The Safety Plan shall include the contract risk assessment and detail the arrangements for
e
ensuring that it is updated to reflect any changes throughout the duration of the Work.
Si
11 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for undertaking job hazard analysis and
ensuring that such analysis is included in each and every method statement.
12 The Safety Plan shall detail the management arrangements and standards to be used for
each of the following:
(a) Scaffolding
(b) Suspended Working Platforms
(c) Fall Prevention and Fall Arrest
(d) Prevention of Falling Objects
(e) Excavations
(f) Electricity
(g) Structural Steel Erection
(h) Demolition and Dismantling
(i) False work and Formwork

(j) Reinforcement and Concreting
(k) Cladding and Roof work
(l) Confined Spaces
(m) Lifting Appliances and Lifting Gear
(n) Mobile Plant and Vehicles
(o) Mobile Elevating Working Platforms
(p) Construction Lifts
(q) Machinery and Equipment
(r) Power Tools
(s) Hazardous Substances
(t) Hot Work and Welding
ar
(u) Fire Prevention and Protection
at
(v) Access and Egress -Q
(w) Housekeeping
(x) Warning Signs and Barricades
LL
(y) Material Handling, Transportation and Storage

(z) Lock Out and Tag Out
W
(aa) Temporary Works

s
(bb) Temporary Facilities

en
(cc) Underground and Overhead Utilities

m
(dd) Working Over or Adjacent to Water

e
(ee) Working Environment

Si
(ff) Personal Protective Equipment

(gg) Site Traffic Control (including setting and taking down of all temporary traffic devices)
13 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall use to ensure
acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of all Subcontractors that may enter
the Worksite. It shall detail the arrangements for evaluating Subcontractors prior to them
being contracted to undertake Work. It shall detail the methods that the Contractor shall use
to monitor their work and the penalties that shall be imposed should acceptable standards
not be maintained.
14 The Safety Plan shall detail the manner in which the Contractor shall review, approve and
incorporate all Subcontractor Occupational Health and Safety plans, risk assessments and
method statements and incorporate them into their Occupational Health and Safety
management system.
15 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall use to ensure
acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of all persons on the Worksite. In
particular it shall detail the arrangements for penalties and disciplinary action that shall be
taken should Contractor Personnel, Subcontractor employees or any other person on the
Worksite not comply with Occupational Health and Safety requirements.
16 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall use to control and
ensure acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of visitors and delivery
personnel that may enter the Worksite.
17 The Safety Plan shall detail the Contractor’s arrangements for effectively managing any
emergency incident that may occur as a result of Work or on the Worksite. The detail shall
include the facilities required for emergency preparedness.
18 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for notification and investigation of any incident
that may occur as a result of Work or on the Worksite.
ar
19 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for the Contractor’s monthly performance
reporting and incident reporting.
at
20
-Q
The Contractor shall ensure that their project monthly health and safety statistics report is
completed and submitted by the agreed date to the Engineer and Quality & Safety
Department. The Engineer will provide the necessary format for this report. The information
collected will be submitted to the Engineer and Quality & Safety Department.
LL
21 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for assessing the general Health of employees
W
and any job specific Health checks that may be required.

s
22 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for self-inspection and auditing that shall be
en
used to monitor the Work.
23 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for tracking and effectively closing any
m
Occupational Health and Safety related nonconformity or deficiency that may be identified as
e
a result of monitoring. Written records of inspection, auditing and tracking shall be

Si
maintained and made available to any representative of Client on request.
24 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for ensuring that all Contractor Personnel and
Subcontractor employees are trained and competent to undertake their work in accordance
with the required standards. In particular the Safety plan shall detail the training and
competence requirements for the following employees;
(a) Supervisors
(b) Electricians
(c) Mobile plant and vehicle operators
(d) Crane and lifting appliance operators
(e) Riggers
(f) Excavation Supervisors
(g) Machinery operators
(h) Scaffolders
(i) Scaffolding Supervisors

(j) Confined space workers
(k) Confined space supervisors
(l) All persons working at height
25 The Safety Plan shall detail the training arrangements specify the type and nature of training
to be given including but not limited to induction, pre-work briefings, tool box talks, general
awareness training, skills training and formal training conducted by training professionals or
agencies. Written records of the attendees, training given and assessment of competency
shall be maintained by the Contractor and made available for inspection by any
representative of Client upon request.
26 The Safety Plan shall detail the Contractor’s arrangements for promoting the awareness of
Occupational Health and Safety issues through notices, posters, newsletters, booklets,
Occupational Health and Safety alerts and any other means. All such information shall be
provided in the languages preferred by the training recipients of the training.
ar
at
27 The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall make to reinforce
good performance. Such arrangements shall include incentive schemes to reward Contractor
-Q
Personnel, Subcontractor employees or areas of Work that demonstrate exemplary
Occupational Health and Safety performance.
LL
28 The Safety Plan shall include details of all meetings that are held to specifically deal with
Occupational Health and Safety issues. In particular the Contractor shall hold a monthly
meeting chaired by the Contractor’s Representative, which Client shall be invited to attend,
W
with the following items on the agenda;

s
(a) Suitability of the Contractor’s Occupational Health and Safety organization for the on-
en
going and planned Work;

(b) Effectiveness of the Contractor’s Occupational Health and Safety management
m
system;
e
(c) Significant areas of planned activity and associated risk;

Si
(d) Method statement review and job hazard analysis planning;

(e) Tracking and closure of any identified deficiencies or nonconformities;
(f) Incident review;
(g) Occupational Health and Safety promotion planning;
(h) Training needs assessment;
(i) Auditing and inspection planning;
29 The Occupational Health and Safety Plan shall describe the Contractor’s Safety Management
System that will be used throughout and shall conform with all requirements defined within
the Contract and related documentation The contents shall include but not be limited to the
following:
(a) Front Cover

(b) Table of Contents
(c) Project Scope, Requirements and Occupational Health and Safety Objectives
(d) Occupational Health and Safety Policy and BS OHSAS 18001 Certificate (if applicable)
(e) Control of Occupational Health and Safety Plan
(f) Reference Documentation
(g) Safety Organisation and Responsibilities
(h) Subcontractor Occupational Health and Safety
(i) Risk Assessments and Method Statement
(j) Non-conformance, Corrective and Preventative Action
(k) Incident Reporting
(l) Audits
(m) Training
(n) Key Performance Indicators and Continual Improvement
(o) Management Review
ar
(p) Safety Meetings
at
(q) Monthly Safety Report -Q
(r) Appendices
10.2.2 Occupational Health and Safety Policy

LL
1 The Contractor shall comply with the Client vision, mission and strategic objectives.
W
2 The Contractor shall develop and implement its own written Occupational Health and Safety
Policy which shall be Project specific and demonstrate the Contractor’s understanding of and
s
commitment to maintaining standards of Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) that are
en
consistent with and an integral part of the Contractor’s business strategy.

m
3 The Contractor must set objectives and targets that shall be applicable to SMART - Specific,
Measurable, Achievable, and Realistic and to a Time scale.
e
Si
10.2.3 Risk Assessment and Job Hazard Analysis
1 Refer to Section 11 Part 1 (Regulatory Document) in particular section 1.1.7 and Section 11
Part 2 (SAMAS) in particular section 2.4
10.2.4 Intervention
1 A system of positive intervention shall be used throughout the Project and the Contractor
shall adopt the system by authorizing and requiring all Contractor Personnel and
Subcontractor employees to intervene in any unsafe act or condition and take immediate
corrective action to prevent any incident occurring.
2 Work may be monitored by any representative of Client who may intervene in any unsafe act
or condition and require the Contractor to take immediate corrective action to prevent any
incident occurring.
3 The Contractor is required to acknowledge that the system of positive intervention in use on
the Project is one that shall enhance the following;
(a) levels of understanding and awareness of Occupational Health and Safety issues
throughout the Project;
(b) levels of personal responsibility and accountability for Occupational Health and Safety
issues;
(c) levels of proactively towards Occupational Health and Safety issues;
(d) levels of compliance with contractual requirements and Project Occupational Health
and Safety standards;
(e) incident and injury prevention
4 The Contractor may be the focus of Occupational Health and Safety audits conducted by any
representative of Client. The Contractor is required to cooperate with such audits and to
acknowledge all audit findings. The Contractor shall take all corrective and preventive actions
that may be required to address any nonconformity identified during such auditing.
ar
5 The Contractor may be the focus of Occupational Health and Safety inspections conducted
by any representative of Client. The Contractor is required to cooperate with and
at
acknowledge such inspections and take all corrective and preventive actions that may arise
-Q
as the result of such inspections.
6 The Contractor shall undertake routine Occupational Health and Safety inspections and
audits for the on-going Work. Written records of inspections and audits shall be maintained
LL
and made available to any representative of Client upon request.

W
7 The Contractor may be issued with stop work instructions from the Engineer for any
observed cases of serious or imminent danger associated with the Work. On receipt of a
s
stop work instruction the Contractor shall refrain from work until such time as remedial action
en
has been taken to alleviate the serious or imminent danger and to prevent it reoccurring.
8 The Contractor shall stop work if any unknown or unplanned conditions occur that give rise to
m
serious or imminent danger. In such circumstances the Contractor shall assess the risks
e
associated with any remedial work required and revise the method statements and job
Si
hazard analysis. The revised method statement shall be reviewed and approved by the
Contractor’s Occupational Health and Safety Manager. Revised method statements shall be
approved by the Engineer before recommencing Work.
10.2.5 Requirement for Training
1 The Contractor shall conduct training including contract specific induction, pre-work briefings,
tool box talks, general awareness training, skills training and formal training conducted by
training professionals or agencies. The contract specific induction will be at least 2 hours
duration, approved by the Engineer and provided for all persons that enter the Worksite.
Such induction training will be reviewed, revised and repeated for all persons that enter the
Worksite at periods not exceeding 6 months throughout the duration of the Work. All training
shall be provided in the languages preferred by the recipients of the training.
2 The Contractor is required to provide employees of Client with Occupational Health and
Safety training relating to Work undertaken by the Contractor. Training is an integral part of
job performance.
3 The Contractor shall provide all Contractor Personnel and Subcontractor’s employees with
individually unique Contract specific photo identity cards. Such cards shall be made available
to any representative of Client on request. The Contractor shall not permit any Contractor
Personnel or Subcontractor’s employees to access the Worksite unless they have been
issued with their individually unique photo identity card. Such cards will not be issued prior to
the Contractor Personnel or Subcontractor’s employee attending the Contractor’s induction
training course.
4 The Contractor shall appoint a competent supervisor for each and every area of the following
Work activities
(a) Temporary & permanent electrical installation

(b) Crane and lifting appliance operations
(c) Scaffolding erection, alteration and dismantling
(d) Confined space entry
(e) Excavation
ar
(f) Working at height
at
5 The Contractor shall produce a health and Safety Training Matrix based on training needs
-Q
analysis of all personnel working on the project. The matrix must detail positions against the
training courses required from the analysis. All training courses provided to employees shall
be free of charge, i.e. the cost will be borne by the Contractor.
LL
6 The training topics will be based on a number of factors, such as but not limited to;
W
(a) Trends in monthly statistics;

(b) Objectives that have been set;
s
en
(c) Recurring issues on site; and

(d) Accident/incidents on site.
m
7 Courses designed to meet the needs of specific operatives involved in specialized trades
e
including their roles and responsibilities must be provided through training. The following
Si
training could be consider as specialist, but not limited to:
(a) Safe entry into confined spaces;

(b) Crane operation;
(c) Slingers/banks men;
(d) Scaffolding/ false work/temporary works;
(e) Abrasive wheels;
(f) Woodworking machinery;
(g) Excavation support equipment;
(h) First aid;
(i) Fire Marshall;
(j) Accident Investigation;
Note – any external training must be delivered by a competent organisation (i.e. 3th
Party).
8 The Contractor shall provide training and instruction to their employees in relation to the
performance of their work. This training shall be provided during working hours and
immediately after an employee commences employment. It shall include:
(a) Occupational hygiene.

(b) Essential elements of local laws and regulations.
(c) Policies and procedures concerning aspects of human rights those are relevant to
operations.
9 The Contractor shall actively encourage the following for their workforce:
(a) Creating employment opportunities.

(b) Facilitating training opportunities for employees with a view to improving skill levels.
(c) Ensuring non-discrimination in hiring and promotion practices.
(d) Promoting life-long learning and on-the-job training.
ar
(e) All training shall be provided in appropriate languages, based on the demographics of
the labour accommodation facility.
at
10 The Contractor shall retain records of all training provided to labour accommodation
-Q
residents. Such records shall include, as a minimum, the name, age and nationality of those
attending the training course/session and the type of training provided. These records shall
be available for inspection by the Engineer.
LL
11 The Contractors shall conduct Emergency Drills to thoroughly test its emergency
W
preparedness and response within 6 months of the date of award of the Contract and
thereafter at periods not exceeding 6 months throughout the duration of the Work.
s
en
12 The Contractor shall hold a Contract Specific Occupational Health and Safety Meeting
chaired by the Contractor’s representative on a monthly basis throughout the duration of the
WORK. Additionally the Contractor shall include Occupational Health and Safety as an item
m
on the agenda for each and every meeting held and ensure that the subject is actively
e
discussed.
Si
13 The Contractor shall provide contract specific Safe Practice Booklets for each and every
person employed on the Worksite and provide training on the content of the booklet.
10.2.6 Method Statements
1 Refer to Section 11 Part 1 (Regulatory Document) in particular section 1.1.7 and Section 11
Part 2 (SAMAS) in particular section 2.4
10.3 EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLAN (ERP)
10.3.1 General
1 The Contractor shall prepare an emergency response plans for the project and the following
but not limited to shall be addressed;
(a) Responsibilities;
(b) Risk assessment and hazard identification and controls for potential emergencies;
(c) Hazard identifications and controls;

(d) Coordination with outside emergency response organizations;
(e) Arrival of outside emergency response groups;
(f) Emergency response equipment;
(g) Emergency drills;
(h) Tests of emergency preparedness and response program;
(i) Crisis management plan - major events emergency response plan;
(j) Evacuation procedure;
(k) Medical facilities;
(l) Site fire prevention and response reporting;
(m) Environmental spills and releases;
(n) Security including (bomb threat);
ar
(o) Malicious threats; and
at
(p) Severe weather conditions. -Q
2 It shall be mandatory that all personnel are aware and understand what actions to take and
when to take them in the event of an emergency situation. The Contractor shall provide such
LL
information, instruction and training as may be required to assist the personnel to respond
appropriately, in the event of an emergency.
W
3 The Contractor shall develop ERPs for review by the Engineer in order to verify the suitability
s
and capability of arrangements. The Contractor shall ensure a schedule is produced to

en
conduct drills and exercises on a regular basis at the sites under its control.
m
4 Records of drills and exercises conducted shall to be kept together with details of follow up
actions and performance assessments for audit purpose.
e
Si
5 The first emergency drill shall be conducted within first the 30 calendar days following
commencement of operations; afterwards emergency drills shall be conducted on a 6
monthly basis as a minimum.
6 All ERPs’ shall be reviewed and whenever necessary revised and updated every 6 months,
periodic auditing must be carried out to ensure compliance.
10.4 EARTHQUAKE EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PLAN
10.4.1 Background
1 During the month of April 2013 earthquakes occurred in Iran with varying degrees of tremors
felt in the State of Qatar and the wider Middle East Region.
2 April 16th 2013 was by far the larger earthquake measuring 7.8 on the Richter scale with the
tremors physically being felt in numerous locations and buildings across the region. Whilst
events of this type are rare, the impacts could be serious both from a human and business
scale.
3 Following these events it is clear that should have an earthquake evacuation procedure. This
emergency management plan has been developed; however it requires integration into the
existing emergency and evacuation plans.
4 It is to be advised that the earthquake procedure whilst very important is one element of a
much larger requirement for Emergency Management Planning to ensure that all scenario’s
and eventualities are addressed inclusive of crisis management and business continuity.
10.4.2 Requirements
1 Outlined below is a suggested approach that could be taken to take into account those other
elements of emergency planning starting with a review of the current arrangements for
buildings, towers and associated structures inclusive of car parks.
2 The suggested overall approach would be a three phase priority approach. The first phase
identifying the ‘as is’ situation to the desired outcome of ‘to be’ and the ‘future’ requirements,
but this is not limited and may require additional elements as recommended by other experts.
ar
10.4.3 Phase One: Gap Analysis (‘as is’)
at
1 Engage the relevant technical experts for the various aspects of the review, inclusive of but
-Q
not limited to Fire Design Engineer, Health and Safety Consultant, training providers etc.
2 Review all existing emergency process, procedures, plans and protocols within the
LL
organisation and engage with other stakeholders such as Civil Defence to understand any
wider requirements, etc.
W
3 Review of all buildings physical emergency evacuation systems to ensure they meet relevant
codes and legislative requirements.
s
en
4 Review all evacuation assembly points and engage other building owners nearby the
organisation building.
m
5 Develop work assignments for the organisation personnel and Safety Wardens during
e
earthquakes.
Si
6 Review the organisation buildings maintenance department records.
7 Identify relevant codes, legislative requirements and specific procedures needed for forward
planning.
8 Identify salient issues for consideration namely high rise building, crowded indoor public
places, indoor safety, outdoor safety, automobiles etc.
9 Identify non-structural hazards such as file cabinets, rack storage units, book shelves, HVAC
...etc.
10 Involve other stakeholders such as the organisation Health and Safety Section, Civil Defence,
Ministry of Environment, other building owners in the immediate district etc to ensure their
views, requirements, interests and responsibilities are established.
11 Review existing business resiliency and continuity plans, process and procedure.
12 Review existing crisis management plans, process and procedure.

13 Indicate future planning and requirements inclusive of the proposed new and existing car
park.
14 Include training and awareness plan for the wider organisation based upon the identified
training needs.
15 Undertake training and awareness for any developed process and procedures.
16 Produce gap analysis report detailing all required changes, upgrades to process, procedures,
plans, training requirements, emergency systems etc.
17 Present outcomes of gap analysis.
18 Develop an initial implementation plan, methodology and programme for Phase 2 and 3
based upon the outcomes of the Gap Analysis.
19 Review plans to backup computer records and equipment of vital records.
ar
10.4.4 Phase Two: Implementation (‘to be’)
at
1 Implement agreed gap analysis outputs/approach inclusive of all manuals, procedures,
-Q
technical information required.
2 Develop administrative processes and procedures to support the plan.

LL
3 Communicate the plan to all those affected at different level of the business.
W
4 Include for planning of any associated drills and lessons learnt.

s
5 Implement lessons learnt into plan, processes and procedures.

en
6 Establish periodic review of emergency systems.

m
10.4.5 Phase Three: Future Requirements

e
Si
1 Advise if engagement of further consultants/engineers to undertake seismic survey of

existing buildings.
2 Development of business continuity plans.
3 Development of post-earthquake assessment procedures.
4 Development of crisis management plans.
5 Undertake training and awareness for any developed process and procedures.
6 Include for planning of any associated drills and lessons learnt.
7 Development of all related support materials.
8 Development of coordination procedures with Civil Defence and other authorities during
earthquakes.
9 Periodic review of emergency planning systems.

10.4.6 What Should We Do During An Earth Quake?
1 Stay calm!
2 If you're indoors, stay inside and if you're outside, stay outside.
3 If you're indoors, stand against a wall near the centre of the building, stand in a doorway, or
crawl under heavy furniture (a desk or table i.e. cover your head and neck).
4 Drop down onto your hands and knees.
5 Stay away from windows and outside doors.
6 If you're outdoors, stay in the open away from power lines or anything that might fall. Stay
away from buildings.
7 Don't use matches, candles, or any flame.
ar
8 Broken gas lines and fire don't mix.
at
9 If you're in a car, stop the car and stay inside the car until the earthquake stops.
-Q
10 Don't use elevators or put yourself at risk.
LL
11 For impaired mobility, if you cannot drop to the ground, try to sit or remain seated so you are
not knocked down. If you are in a wheelchair lock your wheels. Protect your head and neck
W
with a large book, a pillow, or your arms.
10.4.7 What Should We Do After An Earth Quake?

s
en
1 Check yourself and others for injuries. Provide first aid for anyone who needs it.
m
2 Check the building, water, and electric lines for damage. If any are damaged, isolate if
possible and report to relevant authorities.
e
Si
3 Turn on the radio. Don't use mobile phones unless it's an emergency.
4 Stay out of damaged buildings.
5 Stay inside buildings unless directed to do otherwise.
6 Evaluate and critique once a crisis situation is stabilised.
7 Expect further aftershocks.
8 Stay away from beaches. Tsunamis sometimes hit after the ground has stopped shaking.
9 If you're at work follow the emergency arrangements and instructions for the particular
building after the earthquake.
10.5 SPECIAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS AND PRECAUTIONS
10.5.1 Permits
1 A permit-to-work system (Hot work, Excavation, Scaffolding & Electric work) shall be
observed (correctly issued, Signed & Client requirement enforced) when undertaking any
work on an existing utility, service, item of equipment or structure.
2 A permit-to-enter system shall be observed (correctly issued, Signed & Client requirement
enforced) when undertaking any work in a confined space.
10.5.2 Guarantee
1 Where the Contract requires work to be carried out within or adjacent to any pipeline or at a
sewage treatment plant, the Contractor shall comply with any requirement of the Public
Works Authority.
ar
10.5.3 Mechanical Plant, Machinery and Equipment
at
1 Sufficient suitable standby plant shall be immediately available in cases where the safety of
-Q
the Works or of personnel depends upon mechanical plant.
2 Test and thorough examination by a competent person of all equipment that is capable of
storing energy, such as air receivers and pressure vessels, is required at periods not
LL
exceeding 12 months. Reports of such test and examination will be held on the Worksite and
made available to the employer on request.
W
3 The Contractor will make arrangements for all mobile plant and vehicles that enter the
s
Worksite to be checked by 3rd party certification to ensure the following are provided and in
en
good working order:
(a) Braking systems

m
(b) Steering systems

e
(c) Gauges and warning lights

Si
(d) Operating controls

(e) Windscreens and wipers
(f) Reversing alarms
(g) Rear view mirrors
(h) Roll over protection devices
(i) Wheels, tyres, track
(j) Pneumatic and hydraulic hoses
(k) Seat belts and anchors
(l) Fuel lines and tanks
(m) Electrical control systems
(n) Suspension and stabilization systems
(o) Bodywork, covers and panels
4 Mobile plant and vehicles that are defective will be removed from use in work areas and
taken to a repair facility on the Worksite or removed from the Worksite.
5 Repair work will only be carried out by trained and authorised mobile plant and vehicle repair
technicians.
6 Whenever maintenance work is ongoing the machinery or equipment will be isolated and de-
energized.
7 All mobile plant and vehicle operators will hold relevant Qatari driving licenses for the
category of plant or vehicle that they operate. In addition operators of mobile plant will be in
possession of a 3rd party training certificate to verify that they have the skills necessary for
safe use of the plant.
8 Operators will use mobile plant and vehicles only in accordance with their operating manuals.
9 The Contractor will conduct a job hazard analysis for each item of machinery and equipment
ar
that will be used.
at
10 The following site rules will be observed by all mobile plant and vehicle operators:
-Q
(a) Mobile plant and delivery vehicles will not be reversed without a banks man in
attendance.
(b) No passengers will be carried on mobile plant or vehicles other that in seats that are
LL
specifically designed for carrying passengers.

W
11 The Contractor shall prevent oil / fuel leak causing environmentally pollution.
12 The Contractor will eliminate or reduce the associated hazards for construction lift such as,
s
construction lift failure, falling persons and falling objects by meeting or bettering these
en
specifications. And:
m
(a) All construction lifts will have flat base plates without holes or openings, enclosed sides
and roof that are designed to prevent from falling objects.
e
Si
(b) All construction lifts will have overload protection devices that prevent movement of the
platform if it is overloaded.
10.5.4 Existing Utilities
1 Prior to excavating in any area, the location of existing utilities shall be confirmed from as-
built drawings, contact with utility authorities and trial holes.
2 Excavation in the vicinity of any utility shall be carried out to the requirements of the utility
owner.
3 Protection for utilities is the least effective means of controlling any associated risk. Where
Contractors use this method the following will be provided:
(a) Marker posts or blocks that clearly indicate the nature, depth and path of all
underground utilities.
(b) Where traffic routes pass over underground utilities temporary protection will be
provided. Warning signs stating the maximum vehicle weight that may safely cross the
utility will be positioned on the access route at each side of the utility.
(c) Temporary barriers or fences that run parallel to the route of any overhead utilities.
Warning signs detailing the nature of any overhead utilities on the barriers or fences.
(d) Where traffic routes pass below overhead utilities warning signs stating the maximum
vehicle height and height restrictors will be positioned on the access route at each side
of the overhead utility.
4 Where any construction activity adjacent to a utility is undertaken the minimum clearance
distances will be clearly established and communicated to each and every person involved
with the construction activity.
5 Traffic routes and material stockpile areas will be clearly identified and established prior to
excavation work commencing. All excavation areas, traffic routes and stockpile areas are to
be surveyed for overhead services. Any services identified are to be removed or clearly
marked with height restrictors and warning information.
10.5.5 Excavations
ar
1 During the planning stage all materials and equipment required for the safe excavation work
at
must be clearly identified. Such equipment and materials may include the following:
(a) Shoring
-Q
(b) Solid Barriers
(c) Vehicle stop blocks
LL
(d) Access ladders or scaffolding

W
(e) Ventilation
(f) Lighting
s
en
(g) Signage
(h) Pumps
m
(i) Generators
e
(j) Air Monitoring Devices

Si
(k) Movement Monitoring Equipment

(l) Rescue Equipment
2 For all excavation work a competent excavation supervisor will be appointed. The level of
training and experience required to determine competence will vary depending on the
complexity of the excavation. He will have previous experience of the type of excavation work
to be undertaken and formal Occupational Health and Safety training relating to the safety of
excavation work.
3 Temporary safety barriers should be used to protect workers and the travelling public from
excavations that are more than 300mm deep in accordance with the Qatar Work Zone Traffic
Management Guide.
4 Once the design requirements are known a job hazard analysis of the excavation work will be
completed by the excavation supervisor with the assistance of Occupational Health and
Safety staff and engineers as required. The Job Hazard Analysis will clearly identify the job
specific risks and control measures for the excavation work.
5 Prior to commencement of any excavation work all persons involved will be given a pre-work
briefing based on the Job Hazard Analysis relating to the risks and required control measures
for the excavation work. The appointed excavation supervisor will be responsible for
presenting and recording the briefing.
6 Prior to commencement of work all materials, plant and equipment will be checked to ensure
that they are in good condition. In particular the condition of all mechanical excavators will be
checked to ensure that:
(a) All windows in the drivers cab are clean, unbroken and unobstructed.
(b) Rear view mirrors are securely attached, unbroken and clean.
(c) All track plates and connectors are in good condition and secured with proprietary
locking pins.
(d) All dipper arm joints and attachments are secured with proprietary pins and locking
pins.
ar
(e) All task and indicator lighting is in working order.
at
7 Trucks will only be operated by persons with valid Qatari driving licenses. Plant such as
excavators, loading shovels etc shall only be operated by trained and competent operators
-Q
that hold valid 3rd Party certification for the type of plant being operated. This certification is
required in addition to Qatari driving license requirements.
LL
8 When the reversing of trucks is necessary for the collection or delivery of materials a banks
man will be in attendance. All banks men will be provided with high visibility clothing and be
W
trained in the safety aspects of reversing vehicles. Where vehicles are reversing up to an
excavation or travelling alongside an excavation vehicle stop blocks or vehicle barriers will be
provided to prevent them falling into the excavation.
s
en
9 Continuous adequate solid barriers will be placed around all excavations over 1.2m deep at a
distance at least of 1.2m. Where night time pedestrian or vehicle access is adjacent to
m
excavation then all solid barriers will be fitted with warning lights.
e
10 Pedestrian access to and from all excavations will be by means of ladder or adequately
Si
constructed staircases. The possibility of a person falling from a height of more than 2m from
the access will be prevented. The horizontal distance between access points will not exceed
15m.
11 All ladders used on the Project will be manufactured in accordance with an internationally
recognised standard. Any ladder that is found to be defective will be removed from use
immediately.
12 All straight ladders will be positioned at an angle to minimize the risk of slipping or falling
backwards. The distance between the base of the vertical plane and the base of the ladder
will be 1 unit out for each 4 units in height of the vertical plane.
13 Ladders that are used to gain access from one level to another will extend at least 1m above
the upper level surface. Where a general access ladder run extends a distance of more than
6m a landing point with a firm level platform and fall prevention measures will be provided at
each and every 6m.
14 Excavations shall be kept clean and tidy at all times. Accumulated waste and unused
materials will be removed from excavations on a daily basis. All excavations will be
thoroughly cleaned prior to any backfilling operations commencing.
15 To prevent the risk associated with falling objects excavated materials, other materials and
equipment shall not be stored at the edge of any excavation. A clear distance of 2m shall be
maintained around all excavations.
10.5.6 Warning Signs
1 The Contractor shall set up and maintain (cleaned and legible) throughout the course of the
Contract enough traffic diversion signs in accordance with the Qatar Work Zone Traffic
Management Guide and additional warning signs & guides.
2 Additional areas that require warnings signs and barriers are:
(a) Excavations over 1.2m deep
ar
(b) Any edge, opening or platform from where a person may fall more than 2m
at
(c) Electrical transformers and substations
(d) Confined space entry points
-Q
(e) Areas below and around working at height and heavy lifting operations
(f) Areas of open water more than 1m deep
LL
(g) Areas where flammable goods are stored

W
(h) Areas where radiation sources are used or stored

(i) Areas within Worksites that are classed as non-construction areas
s
en
(j) Areas within non construction areas where construction activity is on-going
(k) Areas below overhead utilities
m
(l) Areas above underground services

e
(m) Areas where test and commissioning activities are on-going

Si
3 Warning signs will clearly state the nature of the hazard and instruct people of the correct
actions to take. Warning signs will be manufactures in accordance with internationally
recognised standards. All signs will be in English, Arabic and the languages preferred (can
be understand) by the workers on the Worksite.
4 All safety barriers and barricades are to comply with the Qatar Work Zone Traffic
Management Guide..
10.5.7 Confined Spaces
1 Entry into a confined space will only be permitted where a competent person is appointed to
directly supervise the work. The competent person will hold a certificate of training or license
that is issued by a 3rd party. The competent person will be appointed in writing by the
Contractor and the appointment will be copied to the employer.
2 Any person that enters into a confined space will have received formal training in the safe
methods of entry and working in a confined space. Such training will include the
arrangements for emergency communication and response. In addition every person that
enters into a confined space will be given a briefing by the appointed competent person
relating to the specific hazards of the work and the control measures that have been detailed
in the job hazard analysis.
3 Any person that acts as an attendant for confined space work will have received formal
training in the safe methods of rescue from a confined space and the arrangements for
emergency communications with external emergency services.
4 The contractor will only permit trained workers, under the direct supervision of an authorised
competent person, with confined space attendants present, to enter a confined space.
5 Internal combustion engines will not be taken into a confined space or operated in a position
where their exhaust gasses may be drawn into the confined space.
ar
6 Persons entering into a confined space will wear a full body rescue harness that is attached
to a rescue line anchored outside the confined space
at
7
-Q
The contractor will implement a safe working procedure for confined space entry that
includes the following:
(a) Preparation of a confined space entry permit

LL
(b) Provision of all equipment necessary for entering into and working in the confined
space including access, lighting, mechanical ventilation, gas detectors,
W
communication, personal protective equipment and emergency rescue equipment. All

such equipment will be manufactured in accordance with internationally recognised
s
standards
en
(c) Provision of warning signs and barriers around the confined space entry point
m
(d) Setting up emergency communication and rescue equipment

e
(e) Issue of a permit to enter the confined space

Si
(f) Checking of the atmosphere inside the confined space and installation of ventilation
equipment
(g) Installation of lighting
(h) Entry into and work in the confined space.
(i) Monitoring of conditions in the confined space.
(j) Continuous checking and recording of all persons entering into and exiting from the
confined space by the confined space attendant
(k) Completion of work and removal of all equipment from the confined space
(l) Accounting for all persons and equipment that entered the confined space
(m) Securing the entry point to the confined space
(n) Closing the confined space entry permit
10.5.8 Lifting Operation
1 The Contractor will appoint a competent lifting operations supervisor for the Worksite. The
lifting operation supervisor will ensure that the requirements of this specification are met at all
times.
2 Rigging of loads and signalling of cranes will be undertaken only by trained and competent
persons. All riggers will be required to wear a blue construction safety helmet and a red high
visibility vest for the purpose of easy identification on the Worksite.
3 Cranes will only be operated by trained and competent operators who are in possession of an
operator’s license issued by a 3rd party. In addition appropriate Qatari driving licenses are
required for all mobile equipment’s.
4 A thorough examination of each lifting appliance will be made by a 3rd party inspector at
periods not exceeding 12 months and after substantial re-erection, alteration or repair. Load
capacity to be displayed.
ar
5 All lifting appliances on the Worksite will have a copy of the manufacturers operating manual
at
and load rating charts available for use and kept with the operator cabinet or machine.
-Q
6 Before a mobile crane is positioned for a lift, attention will be paid to the condition of the
ground upon which the crane will stand, as this will be subjected to high point-loadings from
outriggers or tyres. Dependent upon the nature of the ground and/or the size of the crane to
LL
be used, a special hard standing may have to be prepared.

W
7 The maximum safe working wind speeds for all construction activity and in particular lifting
operations and Working at height activity is 25 Knots. The construction will monitor the
s
weather conditions and suspend work when wind speeds in excess of the maximum safe
en
working speeds are anticipated.

m
8 Outriggers will be properly set and locked if a locking device is provided. When controlled
remotely from the cab, the operator will make a physical check to ensure that each pad has
e
an adequate bearing before a load is lifted. Sound timber packing or metal plates will be used
Si
under each outrigger pad to distribute the load. It is essential that outriggers are supported at
the jacking points and not under the outrigger beams. Also, lifting location to be barrier off.
9 A method statement and job hazard analysis will be provided to the Engineer for all structural
steel erection activity. No structural steelwork erection will commence prior to approval of the
method statement and job hazard analysis by the Engineer. All structural steel erectors will
be fully conversant with the construction method, sequence and hazard control measures
prior to any work activity commencing.
10.5.9 Lifting Gear
1 Lifting gear means any chain sling, rope sling, or similar gear, and any ring, link, hook, plate
clamp, shackle, swivel or eye bolt, used on the Worksite.
2 All lifting gear will be subjected to a thorough examination by a competent person from 3rd
party at intervals not exceeding 6 months. Identity number and SWL to be check.
3 A wire rope used in raising, lowering or suspension of a load, will not be used if it is kinked,
significantly rusted, the core is visible or the rope has visible broken wires, exceeding 5% of
the total or in any length equal to 10 times the diameter of the rope.
4 Riggers will check the condition of lifting gear prior to each and every lift.
5 Any lifting gear that is found to be defective will be removed from service and sprayed with
red paint to indicate that it is not to be used. All defective equipment will be removed from the
Worksite.
6 A system will be established on the Worksite for storage of all lifting equipment not regularly
in use. Such equipment will not be left in the work areas.
10.5.10 Scaffolding
1 For all scaffolding construction activity and dismantling activity a competent scaffolding
supervisor will be appointed. The level of training and experience required to determine
ar
competence will vary depending on the complexity of the scaffolding structure to be erected
or dismantling. Industry standards and codes detail competency requirements.
at
2
-Q
All employees involved in scaffolding construction activities and dismantling activity will be
trained in the safe methods of working and in particular the manner in which fall prevention or
arrest is to be achieved. Contractors will maintain detailed information of the training provided
and the methods that they have used for assessment of competency and suitability for all
LL
employees undertaking scaffolding construction activities.

W
3 All scaffolding erection areas and dismantling areas will be provided with barriers and
warning signs to exclude all personnel that are not specifically involved with the scaffolding
s
construction and dismantling activity. Where such areas are adjacent to roadways barriers
en
with a capability to prevent vehicles entering the area will be erected or dismantling. Where
such areas are adjacent to members of the public or 3rd parties then screening and falling
m
object protection will be provided. The appointed scaffolding supervisor is to be made

responsible for ensuring that exclusion zones are in place and maintained at all times whilst
e
scaffolding construction and dismantling activity is on-going.

Si
4 All materials being used for scaffolding construction will be checked prior to them being used
to ensure they are in good condition. Any materials found to be defective will be clearly
marked as defective and discarded or removed from the construction area to ensure that
they are not used.
5 Scaffolding that has been constructed in accordance with the design will be inspected for use
by displaying green scaff tag at all access points of the scaffolding detailing the following
information:
(a) the unique identification and location of the scaffolding inspected

(b) the name of the person making the inspection
(c) the date that the inspection was completed
(d) the intended use and capacity of the scaffolding
(e) the required re-inspection frequency for the scaffolding
6 The person making the scaffold inspection will maintain written details of the inspection that
they have conducted to enable them to verify their scaff tag system.
7 All scaffolding that does not display green scaff tag for use will be fitted with red scaff tag
states that the scaffolding is not fit for use and the access points will be removed or made
unusable.
8 Users of scaffolding will at all times conduct their work in a manner that eliminates the
possibility of falling objects.
9 Users of scaffolding are to be prohibited from altering or dismantling any part of scaffolding.
10 Users of scaffolding are required to maintain unobstructed access and egress at all times. All
debris and materials no longer required will be removed from scaffolding on a daily basis. All
materials and equipment used on scaffolding will be stored in a manner that does not
obstruct the free movement of the people using the scaffolding.
11 The frequency of re-inspection of scaffolding – every 7(seven) days – will be displayed on the
green scaff tag. Users of scaffolding are required to check that the period of re-inspection
has not been exceeded before using the scaffolding. In any case where the re-inspection
ar
date has been exceeded the user will request the appointed scaffolding supervisor to make
the re-inspection and to re-sign the green scaff tag for use. The user will not access the
at
scaffolding until such time as the re-inspection has been made.
-Q
12 Before any dismantling activity is undertaken on scaffolding it will be removed from use. All
green scaff tag will be removed and replaced with red scaff tag which is not fit for use and all
scaffolding access points will be removed or made unusable.
LL
10.5.11 Hot work and Welding

W
1 The contractor will only use electric welding equipment in accordance with the following
s
requirements:
en
(a) Welding cables and equipment will be properly maintained and inspected before use.
Defective equipment will be removed from use and arrangement for repair will be
m
made.
e
(b) Electric welding cables are to be kept as short as possible and routed away from
Si
pedestrian walkway areas.

(c) Electric welding operations will only be undertaken with earth return electrodes
connected to the work piece.
(d) All connections between welding equipment and welding cables will be securely bolted.
(e) Pipelines containing flammable liquids or gases, or electrical cables will not be used as
a ground.
(f) When electrode holders are to be left unattended, the electrodes will be removed and
the holder placed where it is protected from unintentional contact.
(g) A fire resistant container will be provided for spent electrode stubs.
(h) Welding machines will be turned off when being moved or when the equipment is not
in use.
2 Tanks, vessels and drums that have contained flammable or toxic liquids will be filled with
water or thoroughly cleaned before hot work or welding is undertaken on them.
3 Where coatings are present on materials to be heated the coating will be removed to prevent
the coating being heated.
4 Suitable portable fire extinguishing equipment will be located within 6 meters of any hot work
location.
10.5.12 Compressed Gas Cylinders
1 The Contractor will only use compressed fuel gasses in accordance with the following
requirements;
(a) Cylinders will not be transported with regulators, gauges and hoses attached.
(b) Cylinders will be transported in an upright position and will not be hauled in equipment
beds or truck beds on their side.
(c) Cylinders lifted from one elevation to another will be lifted only in racks or containers
designed for that purpose. Cylinders will not be hoisted by the valve cap or by means
ar
of magnets or slings.
(d) Cylinders will not be used as, or placed where they may become part of, an electrical
at
circuit. -Q
(e) Cylinders will be protected from extreme heat and from being struck by moving
equipment and falling objects.
LL
(f) Cylinders will not be taken into a confined space.

(g) Cylinders will not be used as rollers; will be transport on appropriate trolley.
W
(h) Damaged or defective cylinders will not be used or be permitted to remain on the
Worksite.
s
(i) Type of gas clearly marked on cylinders and segregation of incompatible gases is
en
required.
m
(j) Oxygen cylinders will be kept free of oil and grease.

e
(k) Cylinders will be secured in place during use and storage. Securing shall be around
the body of the cylinder, securing around the cylinder neck or cap will be prohibited.
Si
(l) Cylinder valves will be closed at all times when cylinders are not in use.
(m) A key wrench is required to be in place on the valve of acetylene cylinders at all times
during use.
(n) Fuel gas and oxygen hoses will be of different colours and will not be interchanged.
(o) All hose, valve and regulator assemblies will incorporate a flashback arrestor.
(p) Hoses are to be kept as short as possible and routed away from walkway areas.
(q) Under no circumstances are damaged hoses or torches to be used.
(r) Torches will be ignited by friction lighters or other approved devices only.
(s) Fuel gases will only be used for the purposes of cutting or heating. They will never be
used for pressure testing or ventilation.
10.5.13 Working at Height
1 Contractors are required to reduce the risk of persons falling from height by providing a
means of fall prevention or arrest for every person on the Worksite that is exposed to a risk
of falling a distance of 2m or more.
2 Supervisors of persons using fall arrest systems will be trained in the correct installation, use
and maintenance of fall arrest systems. Training will be provided by a 3rd party. All persons
required to use fall arrest systems will receive formal training in safe working at height prior to
using such systems.
3 The use of safety belts as part of a fall arrest system is prohibited.
4 Safe access to the point at which a person will attach themselves to a fall arrest system will
be provided. In cases where a person using a safety harness has to detach the lanyard from
the anchor point and reattach it to a different anchor point, whilst being in a position where
the risk of falling exists, double lanyards will be used with one of the lanyards remaining
ar
attached to the anchor point at all times.
at
5 Where any form of fall arrest system is used the contractor will put in place arrangements to
-Q
rescue any person that is caught by the fall arrest system. The rescue system and equipment
will be capable of rescuing any person that may be unconscious whilst suspended and or
suffering from suspension trauma. The system will be capable of rescuing the suspended
person within 3 minutes of the fall being arrested.
LL
6 All edges of working platforms and work areas that objects may fall from will be provided with
W
securely fixed continuous toe boards that are at least 200mm high.
s
7 All holes and openings in floor areas will be fitted with temporary covers to prevent objects
en
falling to lower levels of the structure.
8 Where work is on-going on the exterior faces of structures the working platforms that are
m
used to gain access will be fitted with lightweight mesh or netting to prevent objects falling
e
from them.
Si
9 Materials and equipment will not be stored or located within 2m of edges of working areas or
platforms.
10 All materials and waste that may be blown by the wind from raised structures will be secured
and stored in a manner that prevents them from being blown from the structure.
11 Where designated pedestrian walkways, entrances or exits are located beneath edges or
openings where work is on-going steel framed and sheeted canopies will be erected to
protect pedestrians from falling objects.
12 The contractor will produce a method statement and job hazard analysis for all roof and
canopy work activity. For work on new structures safety information will be obtained from the
designers and incorporated into the method statement and job hazard analysis. For work on
existing structures where design information is not available then a survey of the existing
structure will be made to identify hazards such as:
(a) Fragile coverings

(b) Holes and openings
(c) Exposed edges

(d) Lack of safe access
(e) Damage or disrepair of the existing structure
(f) Adjacent structures, facilities or services
13 A method statement and job hazard analysis will be provided to the Engineer for all roof and
canopy work activity. No work will commence prior to approval of the method statement and
job hazard analysis by the Engineer. All roof and canopy installation workers will be fully
conversant with the construction method, sequence and hazard control measures prior to any
work activity commencing.
14 The contractor will meet the following roof and canopy work specific Occupational Health
and Safety requirements:
(a) The storage of materials on roof surfaces will be minimized at all times
(b) Storage of materials on roof surfaces is not permitted within 2m of any edge or eave
ar
(c) All openings and non-walkable areas will be protected by barriers and signage to
at
prevent pedestrian access -Q
(d) All waste will be removed from the work areas on a daily basis and prior to any areas
being left unattended
(e) All areas of roof or canopy covering will be fully fixed at the time of positioning. The
LL
practice of laying large areas of unfixed coverings is prohibited

W
15 The structure that the suspended working platform is attached to or mounted on will be
surveyed and assessed to ensure that it is capable of supporting the loads that the
equipment will impose on it.
s
en
16 The installation, maintenance, use and dismantling of suspended working platforms will be
under the control of a competent person that is appointed by the Contractor. The competent
m
person will be fully familiar with each and every type of suspended working platform in use on
e
the Worksite. Persons who work from suspended working platforms will have received formal
training to ensure the safety of themselves and of other persons that may be affected by the
Si
operation with particular emphasis on the correct use of the equipment, working at height and
falling object prevention.
17 The following requirements will be met for all use of suspended working platforms;
(a) Users will not alter or interfere with any part of the suspended working platform, control
or safety devices.
(b) The work area below the suspended working platform will be clearly marked a
pedestrian exclusion zone will be created.
(c) The user will check all controls and safety devices on a daily basis to ensure that they
are functioning correctly.
(d) Use will cease whenever wind speed in excess of the maximum permissible is
anticipated.
(e) The suspended working platform will be maintained in a horizontal position whilst it is
in use.
(f) The practice of transferring people or materials from the suspended working platform
is prohibited other than at the designated access points.
(g) Every person working from a suspended working platform shall wear a full body safety
harness that is attached to an independent lifeline.
(h) The platform will be kept free of loose materials or articles liable to endanger or
interfere with the worker’s hand hold or foot hold
(i) The power supply will be disabled whenever the suspended working platform is left
unattended.
10.5.14 Electrical
1 This specification applies to all temporary electrical systems on the Worksite and all electrical
equipment used for construction, commissioning and testing purposes. The requirements
given are minimum requirements and Contractors are required to equal or better them.
2 A competent electrician or electrical engineer will be appointed or employed on every
ar
contract. The competency requirements will be determined by the nature of the temporary
at
electrical system that will be installed on the Worksite
3
-Q
The Contractor will reduce risk by using cordless tools or electrical equipment that is
operated at reduced voltages. Only intrinsically safe electrical equipment will be permitted for
use at any location where flammable atmospheres may exist or confined space.
LL
4 All electrical equipment used on the Worksite will be manufactured in accordance with an
internationally recognised standard.
W
5 Portable Power Tools will be of a double insulated type.

s
en
6 Jointing of all electrical cables and wires shall be by means of proprietary terminations or
connectors. The practice of twisting and taping electrical components together to create a
m
connection is prohibited.
e
7 Temporary power supplies for the Worksite may be provided from generators or via a
Si
Worksite specific transformer connected to the national power network. All generators and
transformers on the Worksite shall be located in areas that are fenced and secured to
prevent any unauthorized entry. Each such location will be provided with portable fire
extinguishers. All electrical systems shall be bonded to the earth.
8 All electrical circuits that are created will be protected by earth leakage circuit breakers
(ELCB). All metal components of an electrical system shall be earthed. Distribution of
electrical power shall be provided through distribution panels and switches that are enclosed
or housed in securely closed and locked boxes or cabinets.
9 Warning signs that clearly indicate electrical hazards shall be fixed to all electrical switch
boxes and distribution panels. Similar signs shall be displayed at all transformers, generators
and overhead power line locations.
10 All signs and notices shall be in English and Arabic and the language preferred (can be
understand) by the workers employed on the Worksite.
11 All electricity supply cables shall be buried or properly supported and protected and shall be
armoured. Flexible cable shall only be allowed for hand lamps and hand held tools and shall
not exceed 6 metres in length. Industrial type plugs and sockets shall be used. All electrical
installations shall be in charge of a competent person who shall accept full responsibility for
its use and any alterations or additions thereto. The name, designation and telephone
number of such person shall be prominently displayed close to the main switch or circuit
breaker of the installation, and also in the Contractor’s site office.
10.6 FIRST AID
10.6.1 First Aid and Clinic
1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain first aid Boxes / Clinic (according to number of
workers as per Qatar Law No.14 of the Year 2004 – The Labour Law) complete with all first
aid kits and equipment (as a minimum but not limited to Clean room with potable water
supply, Stretcher, Ambulance, Standby Vehicle, ... etc) necessary for the initial care of any of
the Contractor’s or Engineer’s personnel who may be injured.
ar
at
2 The box shall be kept in a conspicuous place in the establishment and shall be available to
the workers. -Q
3 The use of the box shall be entrusted to a worker trained in providing first-aid medical
services.
LL
4 As a minimum, there should be a first aid box with Medical record book in all areas where
work is in progress.
W
5 The Contractor shall ensure that the first aid Kits and equipment at each first aid box / clinic
s
is complete and within expiration date in all respects at all times.

en
6 At each first aid box / clinic the names and contact Telephone numbers of the Contractor’s
m
staff who are trained to render first aid shall be displayed.

e
7 The Contractor shall provide and maintain Periodic medical examinations for workers and
Si
follow up (maximum every year from employment date).
10.7 FIRE PRECAUTION AND PREVENTION
10.7.1 General
1 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against fire as required by the insurance
company insuring the Works, the Department of Civil Defence and the Engineer.
2 Quantities of flammable materials on site shall be kept to an absolute minimum and shall be
properly handled and stored. Any handling and storage recommendations made by Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and the manufacturers of flammable materials shall be strictly
adhered to.
3 All flammable materials storage areas will be located at least 20m away from other
structures, areas where combustible materials are stored and areas where sources of ignition
are found. Storage areas will be freely ventilated to eliminate any possible build up of
flammable vapour or gas. Flammable material storage facilities will not be constructed of
combustible materials.
4 Except as otherwise provided herein, the Contractor shall not permit fires to be built or open
type heating devices to be used in any part of the Site.
5 The Contractor shall provide, regularly checked and maintain approved by Department of
Civil Defence fire fighting equipment in the site offices, the stores and about the Works where
applicable. The type, amount and location of fire fighting equipment shall be to the
requirements of the Department of Civil Defence. The Contractor shall confirm to the
Engineer in writing that the requirements of the Department of Civil Defence have been met.
6 The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Department of Civil Defence to inspect the
Works and promptly carry out their recommendations at his own expense if requested to do
so by the Engineer.
7 Combustible fuel oils shall be stored in designated storage areas. Fuel oil shall only be
contained in tanks or containers that are in good condition. Tanks and containers will be
located in bounded areas capable of containing any spillage or leak. Bounded areas will be
kept free of water and debris. All pump equipment and fuel oil lines or hoses will be
ar
maintained regularly to ensure that there no leaking parts. Fuel oil lines and hoses will be
terminated with filler nozzles or valves that stop the flow of fuel oil when the device is not
at
held. Any electrical equipment such as lighting and pumps that is located in fuel oil storage
-Q
areas shall have an operating voltage of 110V or less.
8 Hot work and welding operations at height require particular controls to prevent people or
materials below being exposed to the risks of the work activity, the following controls will be
LL
put in place;
W
(a) All work activity will be coordinated with other activities in areas below
(b) Areas below will be cleared of all combustible and flammable materials.
s
(c) Fire blanket / Fire retardant material will be used to cover any combustible materials
en
that cannot be cleared.

(d) Fire blanket / Fire retardant material must be removed after hot work and welding
m
activities are completed.

e
(e) A fire watchman will remain at the site of hot work activity for 30 minutes after work is
Si
finished.
9 The Contractor will provide training in the correct selection and use of portable fire
extinguishers for every person employed at the Worksite.
10 Portable fire extinguishers will be provided at the following locations:
(a) Every electrical generator, transformer and main distribution panel

(b) Every piece of mobile plant and equipment
(c) Every area of flammable materials storage and use
(d) Every area of hot work activity
(e) Every temporary structure
(f) Every work area where combustible materials are present.
11 Smoking will be prohibited in any areas where flammable or combustible materials are
stored. It will also be prohibited in any temporary structure other than in clearly designated
and defined smoking areas. Smoking areas will be cleaned on a daily basis, a means of
extinguishing cigarettes will be provided.
12 Fire escape routes, exits and assembly areas will be provided for all enclosed temporary
structures and permanent structures under construction. All such areas will be kept free from
obstructions at all times. Wherever possible in permanent structures under construction the
fire escape routes, exits and assembly areas used will be those designed for use in the
occupied structure.
13 Information and warning signs will be provided at the following locations or areas:
(a) Flammable materials stores

(b) Combustible materials stores
(c) Temporary fire systems
(d) Portable fire extinguishers
(e) Fire escape routes, exits and assembly areas.
14 The Contractor shall make all arrangements to keep access for Fire Brigade cleared and
Emergency Alarms audible in all areas.
ar
at
10.7.2 Emergency Equipment
1
-Q
Temporary fire protection equipment for the Worksite will be provided by the Contractor for
the duration of the contract. Such equipment may include but is not be limited to:
(a) Portable fire extinguishers

LL
(b) Fire sand buckets

W
(c) Fire water storage and distribution systems

(d) Fire suppression systems
s
en
(e) Fire / Smoke / Gas detection systems

(f) Fire warning / Alarm / Emergency Evacuation systems
m
(g) Procedures
e
(h) Emergency contact telephone numbers / Communications

Si
(i) Breathing apparatus and / or respirators (if applicable)

(j) Torches
(k) Loud Hailer
(l) Emergency lighting
(m) Adequate and safe Emergency Exit / Doors are provided
(n) Assembly / Muster point
2 Escape routes, access ways to alarm points, extinguishers, hydrants and other fire fighting
equipment and first aid kits kept clear of obstruction at all times
3 All structures that are normally occupied by five to twenty five people will be provided with the
following:
(a) Portable fire extinguisher equipment.

(b) First aid kit.
(c) Trained first aider.

(d) Emergency contact information notices.
(e) Telephone or radio communication equipment.
4 All temporary facility structures that are normally occupied by twenty five to one hundred
people will be provided with the above plus the following:
(a) Smoke detectors

(b) One first aid kit for each 25 people.
(c) Designated emergency evacuation routes.
(d) An emergency preparedness and evacuation plan.
(e) An emergency alarm system.
(f) An emergency evacuation drill at periods not exceeding 6 months.
(g) An area set aside for the heating and consumption of food.
ar
5 All temporary facilities structures that are normally occupied by more than 100 people will be
at
provided with the above plus the following: -Q
(a) A fire water system
(b) An appointed nurse
LL
(c) Emergency lighting system

W
6 All temporary fire protection equipment will be manufactured, inspected, tested and
maintained in accordance with the Department of Civil Defence or internationally recognised
standards.
s
en
10.7.3 Hazardous Substances

m
1 The Contractor will control the use, handling, transportation and storage of hazardous
substances to reduce the associated health risks. These requirements below are the
e
minimum that the Contractor will meet to comply with their contractual Occupational Health
Si
and Safety obligations.
2 Radioactive materials are hazardous substances and any use of such materials on Site will
require a method statement and job hazard analysis to be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to any radioactive material being delivered to the Worksite.
3 Where any spillage of liquid occurs the contractor will take action to immediately clean the
spillage and remove any contaminated materials from the Worksite.
4 To effectively control the hazards associated with the use, storage, handling and
transportation of hazardous substances the Contractor will:
(a) Maintain a register of all hazardous substances on the Worksite

(b) Obtain Material Safety Data Sheets for all hazardous substances
(c) Make an assessment of the health risks associated with the intended use of each
hazardous substance
(d) Provide the control measures required to reduce the risks identifies to acceptable
levels. Acceptability will be based on internationally recognised best practices and
standards
(e) Train people that use, handle or transport hazardous substances in the associated
risks and control measures
(f) Provide routine health checks for employees that are exposed to hazardous
substances
(g) Provide appropriate spill containment and disposal Spill kit
(h) Toxic/ hazardous substance correctly tagged/ labelled/ signage and secured
(i) Adequate storage provided and Class B fire extinguisher near by
10.8 SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC
10.8.1 Working in Public Areas
ar
1 The Contractor must ensure that control measures are in place to protect the public,
at
workforce and assets by providing appropriate lighting, fencing, barricades, and lockable
units. Adequate levels of security including the use of trained security guards will be required.
-Q
The Contractor must also ensure appropriate warning signage is displayed and where
appropriate safe pedestrian walkways are identified and maintained.
LL
2 Safety and security procedures shall be implemented in accordance with the Qatar Work
Zone Traffic Management Guide and as required by the Department of Civil Defence and the
W
police. These shall be included, as a minimum, warning signs and lights, adequate
barricades, railings, road hump for reduced & control speed and other safeguards as
required by the nature and location of the work being undertaken.
s
en
3 Access to all properties shall be maintained by adequately sign posted diversions, temporary
bridges or other facilities.
m
4 A night watchman shall be assigned to ensure that all barricades, lights and other protective
e
apparatus are maintained during the hours of darkness.

Si
5 Designated pedestrian routes will be clearly signed and with firm even surfaces that are free
from distractions. Where such routes traverse level changes they will be slopped at gradients
not exceeding 10% or cut with steps of even height and a tread width of at least 400mm.
Slopes and steps will have anti-slip surfaces. Where the edges of pedestrian routes are
raised more than 1.2m above the surrounding level solid barriers will be provided at each
raised edge to prevent people from falling.
6 All such equipment shall be routed away from pedestrian access areas. Where such
equipment crosses pedestrian areas it will be located under the pedestrian area or over it at a
height of at least 2.5m above the surface. Where such equipment is routed over a pedestrian
area it will be clearly marked with warning signs.
7 No electrical cables, hoses or pipes shall be routed along any staircase, ladder access or
across any doorway. This applies to both temporary and permanent works.
8 Contractor shall provide Client with photocopies of passports, police clearances and any
similar personal security documentation necessary to obtain Client temporary identification
cards and passes for Contractor Personnel to enter Client STP / PTP / premises. Contractor
shall ensure that Contractor Personnel display such identification at all times when they are
on Client STP / PTP / premises.
9 The Contractor will provide a method statement and job hazard analysis for all demolition and
dismantling activities. Everyone involved in the work needs to know what measures are to be
taken to control the risks and a pre work briefing based on the method statement and job
hazard analysis will be given and recorded by the supervisor. Workers will be closely
supervised to ensure that the control measures required are put into practice. An exclusion
zone will be created around the demolition or dismantling area to prevent persons not directly
involved with the work activity around the work area gaining access. The Contractor will not
allow materials to fall into any area where people are working or passing through. Protection
screens, fences or canopies may be needed to control falling objects.
10.9 WELFARE, SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF WORKMEN
ar
10.9.1 General
at
1
-Q
The Contractor must make arrangements for suitable welfare facilities to be present from the
start of the work. There are specific requirements for provision of welfare facilities in the
(Section 11, Part 1 Regulatory Document, 1.1.8, Appendix 1)
LL
10.9.2 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) / Attire

W
1 All the Contractor’s personnel shall be provided with safety helmets, eye protection and foot
protection. Safety helmets, eye protection and foot protection shall be worn at all times by all
Contractor’s personnel on the Site except.
s
en
2 All the Contractor’s personnel shall be provided with gloves, hearing protection, safety
reflecting vests, dust mask and other protective clothing suitable for the nature of work they
m
are performing and their working environment (Shorts and sleeveless shirts are prohibited).
e
All the Contractor’s personnel shall wear high visibility clothing as the outer layer of clothing
Si
3
at all times when working on a road or within a road works zone in accordance with the Qatar
Work Zone Traffic Management Guide.
4 The need for other types of PPE will be identified by the contractor as part of their job hazard
analysis or risk assessment process.
5 The Contractor will display signage detailing the requirements for mandatory PPE throughout
to Worksite. Signage shall be in a format that is easily recognisable to all persons on site
regardless of their preferred language.
10.9.3 Safety Equipment
1 Construction equipment must only be used in the manner and limitations for which it is
designed, inspected regularly with colour code sticker and Qatar license for driver / operators
must be available.
2 Adequate hard barricading, temporary bridges, temporary footpaths, lighting, warning tape
and sign posting shall be provided at all excavations.
3 Adequate bracing and shoring shall be provided at all excavations. 2m spoils clearance from
the excavated pit and sloping shall be maintained (if applicable).
4 Correctly made ladders must be provided for access into excavations and onto scaffolding
and buildings. Contractor’s self-made ladders shall not be used.
5 Scaffolding shall be erected in accordance with the international recognize standard, best
practises and manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be fitted with toe boards, guardrails
(top & mid rail), proper access, fully boarded platforms, tagging system and hand railing
(refer to 10.3.10).
6 The following basic safety equipment is required for any works in confined spaces and shall
be supplied by the Contractor:
(a) gas detectors/monitors complete with carrying case, rechargeable batteries and
battery charger, calibration kit, all to the approval of the Engineer; consumable items
and sensors to be replaced in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
ar
during the course of the Contract (2 No.)
at
(b) full body rescue safety harness with lifelines and shackles (6 No.)
(c) lifting frame complete with fall arrest device (1 No.)
-Q
(d) constant flow escape breathing apparatus complete with storage cases (2 No.)
(e) automatic positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus complete with
LL
storage case (1 No.)

W
7 The Contractor shall maintain all safety equipment in good working order with up to date
calibration and test certificates where appropriate.
s
8 The Contractor shall ensure that any personnel working above 2 m using fall protection
en
devices with valid 3rd party certificate and to provide them proper training in the selection and
use of fall protection devices.
m
9 The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good working order one compressed air escape
e
respirator set (Dräger “Saver Auto PP” or similar) in the Contractor’s site office.
Si
10 One oxygen resuscitation unit shall be provided in the Contractor’s site office.
11 Truck or Trailer Mounted Attenuators (TMAs), or lorry mounted crash cushions must be used
in accordance with the Qatar Work Zone Traffic Management Guide.
10.9.4 Support Facilities for Contractors Staff and Labour
1 The Contractor shall provide, regularly clean and maintain for the duration of the Contract
potable water, washing facilities and sufficient Toilets (with steel exhaust fan) & sanitary
facilities for use by workmen in accommodation areas, at messing facilities and in areas
where work is in progress.
2 The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the duration of the Contract messing facilities
and a separate designated area for the consumption of food for his staff and labourers.
3 Cooking and dining facilities that are provided will be operated and maintained in a clean and
hygienic condition. Food preparation and storage areas will be separated from eating areas.
(a) No person with any communicable disease will be permitted to work in any kitchen or
dining room
(b) Kitchen workers who have cuts or skin conditions on their hands will not be permitted
to work in any kitchen or dining area
(c) Kitchen workers that handle or serve food will wear latex gloves, hairnets and clean
clothing.
4 When allowed for in the Project Documentation, the Contractor may provide accommodation
facilities for his staff and labourers at the Site. Such facilities shall be maintained in a proper
manner and to the satisfaction of the appropriate government departments and the Engineer.
5 The Contractor shall provide transportation between staff accommodation and areas of work
for his staff and labourers.
6 The Contractor shall provide sufficient bins for waste and scrap regularly collected,
segregated and removed from site.
ar
7 Arrangements for the temporary storage of waste on site shall be made in clearly designated
at
and defined areas that have fences and signs to clearly indicate the nature of the waste
where combustible wastes are stored portable fire extinguishers will be provided.
-Q
8 Waste collection points will be provided throughout the work areas and will be clearly marked
with signage to indicate the nature of the waste that is to be collected. Waste will be
LL
separated and collected in the following categories:

W
(a) Metals
(b) Oils
s
(c) Concrete & Stone

en
(d) Tyre & rubber

(e) Glass
m
(f) General
e
(g) Food
Si
(h) Sewage
(i) Chemical
9 Where temporary facilities are created for the storage of materials and equipment such areas
shall be clearly defined and fenced. Notices will be displayed to indicate the nature of the
storage area.
(a) Any hazardous substances that are stored shall only be kept in accordance with the
supplier’s recommendations and the requirements of the Hazardous Substances
Specifications.
(b) Flammable materials and fuel oil storage areas must be separated from other
temporary structures or works under construction by a distance of 30m.
(c) Where materials are stored in stacks they will not be stacked to a height of more than
1.5 m where the materials are to be manually handled. Materials for mechanical
handling that are on pallets or contained in bins will not be stacked more that 3 units
high with the base bin or pallet being on firm level ground.
(d) Circular materials such as pipes and tubes will be stored in a manner that prevents
item from rolling. They will be placed in a container or frame, or have timber wedges of
an adequate size inserted between the materials and the ground to prevent rolling.
10 The Contractors will make arrangements to maintain an adequate working environment and
take into account the requirements of this specification to fulfil their contractual obligations
relating to Occupational Health and Safety. Adequate arrangements will be based on
internationally recognised standards.
(a) Ergonomics and proper layout of work area.

(b) Darkness or poor visibility increases the risk of persons on the Worksite slipping,
tripping or falling. It also increased the risk of operator error for plant, vehicle,
machinery and equipment operations. To reduce such risks the Contractor will provide
the following:
(i) Temporary lighting for all Worksite access areas and roads that will be used
during the hours of darkness.
ar
(ii) Task lighting for all work activity at night or in areas with poor visibility.
at
(iii) Emergency lighting for pedestrian access routes in areas of poor visibility and
those used during night time working.
-Q
(iv) Ensure the absence of glare.
(v) Proper lighting in corridors.
LL
10.9.5 Summer Working Conditions and fatigue

W
1 During the period from June 15th until August 31st, work under direct sun rays is prohibited
from 11:30 am to 3:00 pm unless special arrangement is taken by the Contractor to control
s
and ease effect of the direct sun on the workers. This arrangement should be approved by
en
the Engineer’s Representative and should be agreed upon before implementation.

m
2 High outdoor temperatures expose persons on the Worksite to the risk of dehydration. The
Contractor will provide shaded rest areas, rest periods and drinking water supplies for all
e
persons on the Worksite.

Si
3 Sunlight exposes persons on the Worksite to the risk of skin disorders. Employers will
provide work wear that covers the skin for employees working in direct sunlight. Sunlight may
also cause glare for operators of mobile plant, vehicles, machinery and equipment which
increases the risk of operator errors. The Contractor will provide shaded operating positions
to reduce such risks.
4 Contractor shall develop suitable management arrangements to control working hours and/
or shift patterns in order to address and manage the risk of fatigue.
10.9.6 Additional Environmental Protection and Pollution Control
1 The Contractor shall comply with all conditions of Environmental Clearance issued for the
Contract by the Ministry of Environment (MoE), and also where relevant, the predecessor to
the MoE, the Supreme Council for the Environment and Natural Reserves.
2 The Contractor shall comply with all rules and regulations regarding environmental protection
and pollution control issued by the MoE, and also where relevant, the predecessor to the
MoE, the Supreme Council for the Environment and Natural Reserves.
10.9.7 Plant and Equipment Test Certificates
1 Cranes, whether used to construct the Works or provided as part of the permanent Works,
must have a current test certificate.
2 Each sling, shackle or other item of loose lifting tackle, whether used to construct the Works
of provided as part of the permanent Works, must have either a current manufacturer’s test
certificate or a current test certificate.
3 Test certificates must be issued by a competent testing authority approved by the Engineer.
4 The Contractor must have a copy of each test certificate on site available for inspection by
the Engineer.
5 The following British Standards and Code of Practice shall be complied with:
(a) Mobile and Tower Cranes: BS 1757, BS 2799 and CP 3010
ar
(b) Overhead Cranes: BS 466 and BS 5744
at
(c) Slings: BS 1290
(d) Chain Blocks: BS 3243
-Q
(e) Shackles: Alloy : BS 3551, High Tensile Steel : BS 3032
LL
10.10 LABOUR ACCOMODATION

W
10.10.1 General
s
1 These specifications for workers' accommodation can be accepted for implementation as

en
long as in the interest of the worker provided they do not disturb the labour accommodation
requirements of the decision of the Minister of Labour No. (17) for the year 2005 or any other
m
matters developed in this context.

e
10.10.2 Quality of Labour Accommodation

Si
1 The Contractor shall provide space per person that meets or exceeds what is required by
local legislation or 4.5 m2 per person within each room/accommodation unit.
2 The residential density shall not exceed (the lower of): that specified by appropriate local
regulation or 4 persons per room/accommodation unit.
3 The Contractor shall provide personal storage space for residents’ belongings including
secure storage for valuables.
4 The Contractor shall provide allowances for open spaces and pedestrian movement (e.g.
hard surface walkways with minimum 0.75 m width) and shaded communal areas.
5 Where permissible under local planning guidelines, the Contractor shall provide air
conditioned communal areas such as television/games rooms.
6 The Contractor shall designate pick up and drop off points (for buses) in such a way as to
minimize walking distances for residents and to minimize noise and air quality impacts on
residential buildings.
7 The Contractor shall configure buildings/units in such a way as to create a sense of place
and community.
8 The Contractor shall provide tea and coffee making facilities in kitchen and mess areas.
9 The Contractor shall provide physical barriers (e.g. fencing or landscaping) to visually screen
the camp from adjacent worksites, etc.
10 The Contractor shall provide written evidence that all local planning guidelines have been
adhered to when designing large scale, project related, labour accommodation facilities.
Local planning guidelines indicate the numbers and type of community facilities which should
be provided for a given population. Consideration shall be given at planning stage to the
availability and capacity of communal facilities and spaces in the surrounding area. Where
such facilities are not readily accessible, provision of public transport to access such facilities
shall be considered.
11 The Contractor shall be aware of any changes in law relating to the provision of temporary
ar
labour accommodation.
at
10.10.3 Provision for Fire Safety -Q
1 The Contractor shall provide for adequate fire-fighting equipment in the labour
accommodation (notwithstanding other local laws and regulations requiring same).
LL
2 All relevant signage, notices, documentation and training relating to fire safety at labour
accommodation shall be provided in appropriate languages, based on the demographics of
W
the facility.
s
10.10.4 Provision for Health Care

en
1 The Contractor shall retain detailed records of all medical treatment carried out on-site.
Records shall be retained for all instances of residents being transported for off-site medical
m
attention. Such records shall include, as a minimum, the name, age and nationality of the
e
treated party, and the nature of the complaint. These records shall be used to identify
Si
medical trends and implement proactive treatment to reduce absenteeism.
2 The Contractor shall provide all labour accommodation residents with access to a level of
healthcare beyond basic first aid. Such facilities shall be readily accessible by residents,
staffed by professional medical staff and have appropriate provisions and equipment. The
exact specification of the facility shall be determined on a case-by-case basis, depending on
the location and population of the labour accommodation.
3 The Contractor shall provide a facility to transport those requiring medical attention from the
labour accommodation to and from appropriate off-site medical facilities, free-of-charge and
in a timely manner.
4 The Contractor shall provide medical insurance for all workers in accordance with Qatar
Labour Law.
5 The Contractor shall include a Public Health Training module as part of induction training for
all new labour accommodation residents. As a minimum, this shall address:
(a) Personal hygiene and the appropriate use of the sanitary facilities provided (flush
toilets, showers, hand washing, waste disposal facilities etc.).
(b) Awareness of communicable diseases (including Sexually Transmitted Diseases), their
transmission and prevention.
(c) Practical information regarding residents’ rights and means of access to on-site and
off-site medical facilities.
(d) Food safety.
(e) Littering, safe disposal of waste and related community hygiene standards.
6 The Contractor shall promote public health awareness throughout all facets of the
accommodation. This shall include:
(a) Signage in kitchens, bathrooms etc. promoting hygienic practices.

(b) Educational videos and presentations.
ar
10.10.5 Access to Transport
at
1 The Contractor shall provide access to transport, free-of-charge to/from:
(a)
-Q
Worksites, including backup services from worksite to labour accommodation for those
who failed to access scheduled services.
(b) Availability nearby for community facilities, shops and recreation areas during leisure
LL
time.
W
(c) Religious facilities at suitable times.

(d) Off-site medical facilities, including emergency access at all times.
s
2 Transport services shall be scheduled in such a way as to minimise waiting times and
en
maximise accessibility.
m
3 The Contractor shall use safe modes of transport only. The practice of transporting workers
in open-back trucks is forbidden.
e
Si
10.10.6 Access to Religious, Social and Domestic Facilities
1 The size and number of religious, social and domestic facilities shall be relative to and
appropriate to the population of the labour accommodation.
2 The Contractor shall facilitate access to religious facilities for those required to work on
Fridays.
3 The Contractor shall provide an on-site hall to facilitate religious practices. Alternatively,
transport may be provided to facilitate off-site worship.
4 The Contractor shall provide adequate shaded areas to facilitate social interaction. Similarly,
an appropriately sized, air-conditioned communal area(s) shall be provided (e.g. television
and games room). The size and number of these facilities shall be relative to and
appropriate to the population of the labour accommodation.
5 The Contractor shall provide preferably on-site, open spaces (for sports and recreation).
Where space constraints are such that this is impossible, readily accessible off-site spaces
shall be provided.
6 The Contractor shall provide access nearby to basic domestic amenities. These shall
include, as a minimum:
(a) Access to banking/money transfer services, including transportation to banking/money

transfer facilities.
(b) Laundry facilities.
(c) Retail outlet(s) selling, as a minimum, essential items (e.g. food items, clothing,
toiletries, phone cards, stamps etc.).
(d) Communications.
These services shall preferably be available on or within walking distance of the labour
accommodation.
10.10.7 Access to Communications
1 The Contractor shall provide a telephone, available at all times, for calling the emergency
ar
services. This facility shall be centrally located, conspicuous and all residents shall be aware
of this facility.
at
2 The Contractor shall provide access nearby to the following:
-Q
(a) Retail outlet selling mobile phone credit.
(b) Postal service, both inward and outbound.
LL
(c) Facility for residents to receive emergency messages (e.g. in case of family
emergency abroad).
W
10.10.8 Number, Quality and Location of Sanitation Facilities

s
en
1 The Contractor shall adhere to an appropriate standard for the provision of toilets and
showers etc. These facilities shall be maintained in good working order and shall be cleaned
regularly.
e m
2 The Contractor shall develop and implement a Waste Management Plan for the labour
Si
accommodation. This plan shall address the collection, segregation, storage, transport (off-
site) and disposal (recycling) of wastes.
3 The Contractor shall provide adequate sanitary means for the disposal of waste water
(including sewerage) from labour accommodation. The Contractor shall provide adequate
management of surface water runoff to prevent the accumulation of standing/stagnant water
(and the associated health risks).
4 The Contractor shall provide laundry areas, separate from washrooms and food preparation
areas. Such laundry areas shall be adequately drained.
10.10.9 Food Preparation Areas
1 The Contractor shall adhere to relevant local regulations relating to food preparation facilities.
In the absence of such local regulations, an appropriate regional standard shall be applied
The Contractor shall provide adequate food preparation facilities to allow cultural sensitivities
to be respected such as separate preparation areas for meat and vegetables, and
appropriate labelling and handling of food products.
2 Where meals are provided to residents, the food offered shall be culturally appropriate based
on the demographics of residents.
10.10.10 Pest and Vermin Control
1 The Contractor shall engage a pest control company to service the labour accommodation
site.
2 Self closing doors fitted with fine mesh shall be installed at the entrances to food premises,
washrooms, living areas and any other enclosed spaces.
10.10.11 Security at Labour Accommodation
1 The Contractor shall provide adequate security personnel, based on the size, layout and
population of labour accommodation.
2 The Contractor shall provide Protocols (Codes of Conduct) for the security personnel
ar
operating at labour accommodation. These Protocols shall clearly define the nature and
permitted magnitude of response to security incidents. They shall also set out the
at
circumstances under which security incidents should be handed over to Police control.
-Q
Protocols will be developed in consultation with the Engineer
3 The Contractor shall ensure that all security personnel are adequately trained in the Protocols
for security personnel.
LL
4 The Contractor shall retain records of all security incidents arising at labour accommodation.
W
Such records shall include, as a minimum, the name, age and nationality of all those involved
(including security personnel), and the nature of the incident. These records shall be made
s
available to the Engineer.

en
5 The Contractor shall provide labour accommodation residents with secure facilities for the
storage of personal items and valuables.
e m
6 The Contractor shall manage the movement of goods and personnel onto the
Si
accommodation facility.
7 The Contractor shall maintain adequate lighting on and around the labour accommodation at
all times, therefore making it safer for residents to move around at all times.
10.10.12 Social Issues
1 Any social issues arising at labour accommodation shall be addressed at regular project
Quality, Health, Safety and Environment (QHSE) meetings.
2 The Contractor shall include an Intercultural Understanding module as part of induction

training for all new labour accommodation residents. This shall include:
(a) Basic introduction to cultural norms and practices of other accommodation residents.
(b) An explanation of native or local customs, festivals or religious rites.
3 The Contractor shall enforce a ban on the sale, possession and consumption of solvents,
alcohol and inhalants, for the purposes of intoxication, on labour accommodation sites. The
Contractor shall use its best endeavours to prevent these substances from entering labour
accommodation facilities.
4 The Contractor shall provide residents with contact details for relevant bodies such as
consulates, NGOs, or other relevant organisations offering social support. A list of such local
contacts shall be provided to new employees during their induction process. An up-to-date
list of contact details for these organisations shall also be displayed in public areas such as
the canteen, recreational areas, etc.
5 Any incidents of suicide or attempted suicide shall be investigated as a social issue to try to
determine the root causes with a view to reducing the likelihood of a recurrence. This may
include the engagement of qualified medical personnel to assist in this process (such as
psychiatrists or psychologists).
10.10.13 Competence of Labour Accommodation Management
ar
1 The Contractor shall provide Protocols (Codes of Conduct) for the labour accommodation
at
management personnel. These Protocols shall clearly define the nature of issues and
-Q
incidents which are considered within the remit of labour accommodation management.
They shall also include guidelines outlining appropriate parties to whom incidents should be
referred and at what stage. Protocols will be developed in consultation with the Engineer
LL
2 The Contractor shall retain records of all issues and incidents, at labour accommodation,
which are reported to or dealt with by labour accommodation management. Such records
W
shall include, as a minimum, the name, age and nationality of all those involved (including
members of the accommodation management team), and the nature of the issue or incident.
s
These records shall be made available to the labour accommodation management company.
en
3 The Contractor shall ensure that no member of labour accommodation management accepts
m
any form of payment by way of bribery or extortion or for any reason. Similarly the Contractor
shall commit to permanently removing any member of labour accommodation management,
e
from the accommodation, if they are found to have accepted or demanded such payments.
Si
In this event, the Contractor shall report any such offences to the appropriate local authorities
to determine if a criminal offence has been committed.
4 The Contractor shall maintain labour accommodation facilities to a high standard and not
allow them to fall into disrepair.
10.10.14 Environmental Conditions at Labour Accommodation
1 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of the relevant environmental permits
relating to the construction and operations of their labour accommodation facilities. The
nature of the permitting requirements will be dependent on the jurisdiction of the facility.
2 Where labour accommodation is to be sited on or close to work sites/industrial sites, the

accommodation facilities shall be located up-wind (based on prevailing wind) of the site and
the distance between the camp and air discharge points around the site shall be maximised.
Noise levels shall not exceed the requirements for night time hours – residential areas, as
outlined in local laws and regulations.
3 The accommodation area shall be separate from the work site and shall not be used for any
operation activities (e.g. storage, workshops, etc.).
4 Where on site facilities such as a Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) are located on or close to
the accommodation, planning requirements in relation to buffer zones, etc. shall be respected
and integrated into site layout. Similarly, adequate buffer zones shall be included to ensure
that sleeping accommodation is not immediately adjacent to main roads.
5 Appropriate waste management, storage and disposal facilities shall be provided on site.
There shall be no burning of wastes on site. Similarly, there shall be no fires onsite.
6 Use of labour accommodation facilities shall be restricted to those normally resident in the
accommodation. Where necessary, separate facilities, e.g. toilets, etc., shall be provided for
adjacent work sites, etc.
7 Roads and parking areas shall be paved, or where this is impractical, dust suppression
techniques shall be used to keep dust levels down within labour accommodation.
ar
8 The Contractor shall appoint/engage a team of personnel dedicated to cleaning communal
at
areas around the camp on a regular (daily) basis.
-Q
10.10.15 Health and Safety for Labour Accommodation Residents
1 The Contractor shall extend Workmen’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance to
LL
cover their staff while resident in labour accommodation.

W
2 The Contractor shall extend the accident reporting requirements, to include accidents
occurring at off-site labour accommodation directly associated with the Project.
s
en
END OF PART
e m
Si
QCS 2014 Section 01: General
Part 11: Engineer’s Site Facilities
11 ENGINEER’S SITE FACILITIES .............................................................................. 2

11.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
11.1.1 Scope 2
11.2 ENGINEER’S SITE OFFICES ................................................................................. 2
11.2.1 General 2
11.2.2 Type 1 Offices 2
11.2.3 Type 2 Offices 3
11.2.4 Car Parking Facilities 6
11.3 UTILITY CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................ 6
11.3.1 General 6
11.3.2 Electricity 6
11.3.3 Water 6
11.3.4 Telephone 7
11.3.5 Internet 7
ar
11.4 PROVISION OF EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES ...................................................... 7
at
11.4.1 General 7
11.4.2 Computers and Scanners/Printers -Q 7
11.4.3 Photocopier 8
11.4.4 Measuring and Recording Equipment 9
11.4.5 Stationary Supplies 9
LL
11.4.6 Safety Equipment and Clothing 10

11.4.7 Telephones and Facsimile Machines 10
W
11.5 ATTENDANCE ...................................................................................................... 11

11.5.1 Assistance to the Engineer 11
s
11.5.2 Contract Administration 11

en
e m
Si
11 ENGINEER’S SITE FACILITIES

11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for the Engineer’s temporary site facilities and includes
site offices, utility connections, provision of equipment and supplies and attendance.
2 Related Sections and Parts are as follows

This Section Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety
Part 13 Setting Out of the Works
11.2 ENGINEER’S SITE OFFICES
ar
11.2.1 General
at
1 The Contractor shall provide site offices the type and number as stated in the Project
-Q
Documentation. The position of the site offices shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
2 Upon removal of the site offices, the area occupied or otherwise affected by them shall be
LL
reinstated to its original condition.
11.2.2 Type 1 Offices

W
1 Unless described elsewhere in the Project Documentation the Contractor shall provide,
s
maintain and remove on completion of the Works the Engineer’s site offices described in this
en
Clause.
m
2 The Contractor shall proceed with the provision of a site office for the exclusive use of the
Engineer immediately following the award of the Contract and shall provide temporary
e
alternative accommodation to the Engineer’s approval until such time as the office is made
Si
available.
2
3 The office shall have a minimum area of 20 m and shall comply with the following:
(a) The structure shall be weatherproof.

(b) The windows and doors shall be dust-proof and the windows shall be fitted with fly
screens.
(c) The office shall be air-conditioned to maintain a maximum steady dry bulb temperature
of 25ºC at a relative humidity of 50% under the expected climatic conditions expected
at the Site.
(d) Adequate effective lighting and power outlets shall be installed in accordance with the
latest requirements of the Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation.
(e) The walls and ceilings shall be painted with emulsion paint.
4 The office shall be provided with the following furniture to the approval of the Engineer:
(a) 1 No. kneehole pattern desk with a total of six lockable drawers, approximately 1500 x
800 x 760 mm in size.
(b) 1 No. swivel chair with armrests.

(c) 2 No. stacking or folding chairs.
(d) 1 No. hanging file or plan chest suitable for AO size prints.
(e) 1 No. wastepaper basket.
(f) 1 No. two drawer filing cabinet.
(g) 1 No. wall mounted pin board, 1000 x 2000 mm in size.
5 Sanitary and washing facilities shall be provided for the exclusive use of the Engineer and
shall include a WC and a wash-hand basin an adequate supply of hot and cold water shall be
provided at all times.
6 The Contractor shall insure the site offices against fire, burglary and other risks.
7 The Contractor shall keep on site at all times an adequate supply of clean, fresh, chilled
drinking water for the consumption of the Engineer.
ar
8 The Contractor shall maintain the offices in a clean and sanitary condition.
at
11.2.3 Type 2 Offices
-Q
1 The Engineer’s site offices described in this Clause shall be provided in lieu of Type 1 Offices
only where it is a stated requirement of the Project Documentation.
LL
2 The offices shall be portable units, mounted on skids or similar and where directed in the
W
Project Documentation shall become the property of the Government on completion of the
Contract. On completion of the Contract, the offices which are to become the property of the
s
Government shall be repaired and redecorated to the satisfaction of the Engineer; they shall
en
then delivered to a location designated by the Engineer within 50 km of the Site.

m
3 The buildings shall conform to the general configuration shown below. The number of each
type of unit shall be as stated in the Project Documentation.
e
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
4 The Contractor shall proceed with the provision of the portable offices, which shall be for the
exclusive use of the Engineer immediately following the award of the Contract and shall
provide temporary alternative accommodation to the Engineer’s approval until such time as
s
the offices are made available.

en
5 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a comprehensive specification and
m
drawings showing the accommodation proposed complete with furnishings, equipment and
e
fittings before placing any orders.

Si
6 The units shall be mounted on adequate concrete foundations and shall be provided with
concrete access steps where necessary.
7 The units may be constructed of composite timber framed panels with wood or metal
cladding, any combination of these, or alternative forms or construction which comply with
the following levels of performance:
2
Walls Thermal conductance - 0.60 w/m ºC
Fire resistance - ½ hour
2
Roof Thermal conductance - 0.60 m ºC
Roof resistance - ½ hour
8 Roof coverings shall be selected for durability, freedom from excessive maintenance, and the
ability to withstand extreme exposure to sun, heat and humidity.
9 The units shall be finished internally and externally with low maintenance materials.
10 The offices shall be air-conditioned with wall mounted units to maintain each room at a
maximum steady dry bulb temperature of 25ºC at a relative humidity of 50% under the
expected climatic conditions expected at the Site. Extract fans capable of 10 air changes per
hour shall be provided in the kitchen and toilets.
11 The installation and testing of wiring and electrical equipment in the units shall be in
accordance with the latest requirements of the Qatar General Electricity & Water
Corporation.
12 Each office shall be provided with the following furniture to the approval of the Engineer:
(a) 1 No. kneehole pattern desk with a total of six lockable drawers and
approximately 1500 x 800 x 760 mm in size.
(b) 1 No. swivel chair with armrests.
(c) No. stacking or folding chairs.
(d) 1 No. hanging file or plan chest suitable for AO size prints.
ar
(e) 1 No. wastepaper basket.
at
(f) 1 No. two drawer filing cabinet. -Q
(g) 1 No. wall mounted pin board, 1000 x 2000 mm in size.
13 Each toilet shall be provided with the following sanitary fittings to the approval of the Engineer
LL
and an adequate supply of hot and cold water at all times:
(a) 1 No. low level WC suite.

W
(b) 1 No. Wash-hand basin.

s
(c) 1 No. shower tray, mixer fittings, rose and shower curtain.
en
(d) 1 No. toilet roll holder, towel rail, soap dish and mirror.
m
(e) a suitable number of cups, saucers and drinking glasses.

e
14 The samples and meeting room shall be provided with the following furniture to the approval
Si
of the Engineer:
(a) 2 No. tables, each approximately 1200 x 2000 mm in size.

(b) No. folding or stacking chairs.
(c) 1 No. wall mounted blackboard, 1000 x 2000 mm in size.
(d) 1 No. wall mounted pin board, 1000 x 3000 mm in size.
(e) 1 No. shelf unit for approved samples with 5 tiers of shelves 400 mm wide x 2400 mm
long overall.
15 All furniture and equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed
following completion of the Works unless otherwise noted in the Project Documentation.
16 The Kitchen shall be provided with the following equipment to the approval of the Engineer
(a) 1 No. stainless steel single bowl single drainer sink with hot and cold water and
cupboards underneath
(b) 1 No. floor mounted two door cupboards to match sink.
(c) Cabinets and shelves to match sink, as required.

(d) 2 ring cooker and microwave.
(e) 1 No. Refrigerator/Freezer with a capacity no less than 500 litres.
(f) 1 No. three pint kettle and sufficient crockery and cutlery.
(g) A suitable number of mugs, cups, saucers and drinking glasses.
(h) Table coasters for use on desk tops.
(i) Hand towels and drying up cloths, laundered regularly.
(j) Dishwashing facilities, clothes, sponges and washing up liquid, all replaceable.
(k) Cleaning brushes, mop, bucket and floor clothes.
17 The Contractor shall insure the site offices against fire, burglary and other risks.
18 The Contractor shall keep on site at all times an adequate supply of clean, fresh, chilled
ar
drinking water for the consumption of the Engineer.
at
19 The Contractor shall maintain the Offices in a clean and sanitary condition.
20
-Q
Each type of unit shall be provided with fire extinguishers and water cooler.
11.2.4 Car Parking Facilities

LL
1 Parking areas shall be paved or have a finished surface as approved by the Engineer and
W
shall be covered with a suitable canopy to provide shading.
2 The number of shaded car parking spaces required shall be 2 No. for Type 1 Offices and 6
s
No. for Type 2 Offices unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation.
en
11.3 UTILITY CONNECTIONS

m
11.3.1 General
e
Si
1 The Contractor shall make all arrangements and pay all charges in connection with the
installation, maintenance, operation and removal of the service utilities described in this
Clause.
11.3.2 Electricity
1 The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of an uninterrupted electrical power supply to
the Engineer’s offices during all working hours and any at other time as requested by the
Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
11.3.3 Water
1 The Contractor shall arranged for the provision of an uninterrupted water supply to the
Engineer’s offices during all working hours and at any other time as requested by the
Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
2 The Contractor shall provide inline filters on all water supplies into Employer and Engineer’s
site Facilities. The Contractor shall maintain these at regular intervals as per manufacturer
instruction throughout the duration of the Work order.
11.3.4 Telephone
1 The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of two (2) land lines for the sole use of the
Engineer for Type 1 Offices and three (3) land lines for the sole use of the Engineer for Type
2 Offices.
2 The Contractor may recover the net cost of international calls made by the Engineer.
11.3.5 Internet
1 .The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of a dedicated and uninterrupted internet
access to the Engineer’s offices during all working hours and at any other time as requested
by the Engineer for the duration of the Contract. The internet connection should be provided
ar
with a bandwidth running at a minimum of 1 mbps upload capacity.
at
11.4 PROVISION OF EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES -Q
11.4.1 General
1 The following items of equipment, supplies and associated level of service shall all be
LL
provided unless detailed elsewhere in the Contract Documentation.

W
11.4.2 Computers and Scanners/Printers

s
1 The Contractor shall provide new network/internet capable computers and scanners/printers
en
for the sole use of the Engineer. The number of computers and scanners/printers required
and their performance specification shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation. The
m
Contractor shall also supply and install any computer software as detailed in the Project
Documentation.
e
Si
2 The Contractor shall maintain the computers and scanners/printer for the duration of the
Contract and provide all consumables necessary for its operation.
3 The Contractor shall be responsible for installing legal copies of operating system and
software, trouble shooting, supplying of required consumables and maintenance of the
system.
4 Operating system and software requirements shall be as specified by the Engineer, with the
following as a minimum:
(a) Latest version of Microsoft Windows Operating System

(b) Latest version of Microsoft Office
5 All software must be of latest version and Arabic enabled, to the approval of the Engineer.
6 The Contractor shall ensure that all computers and scanners/printers provided for the
Engineers use are networked within the Engineers facilities to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
7 The Contactor shall provide new desktop computers and laptops as shown in the Schedule
of Rates minimum 20-inch Flat Panel VGA/analogue colour monitors for use by the Engineer.
8 The Desktop and laptop computers shall comply with the following:
(a) Intel Core 2 Duo Processor (1.86GHz,1066MHz,2MB cache)

(b) 1000GB(7200rpm)Serial ATA Hard Drive
(c) 56k Modem
(d) 32X DVD+/-RW Drive
(e) Wireless network adaptor (Wi-Fi)
(f) Wireless Keyboard & Mouse
(g) Card Reader
9 The Desktop and laptop computers shall comply with the following: New licensed copies of
MS Windows, MS Office Professional, MS Project and AUTOCAD, Primavera P6 and
ar
Primavera Contract Manager (PCM) SOFTWARE SHALL BE PROVIDED.
at
10 Colour printer shall be of the laser type suitable for A3 size paper and having scanning and
-Q
copying facilities built in. It shall be quiet in operation (Hewlett Packard Desk Jet (latest
model) or similar).
LL
11 The Computer equipment shall be returned to the Contractor at the end of Maintenance
Period. The Contractor shall be responsible for supply of all necessary cartridges and paper
and for maintenance of the equipment by the manufacture’s agent throughout the period of
W
the Work order.

s
12 The Contractor shall provide all necessary voltage stabilization equipment to ensure trouble-
en
free operation of the computer equipment.

m
13 All computers and printers shall be networked.

e
11.4.3 Photocopier
Si
1 The Contractor shall provide a new photocopier for the sole use of the Engineer. The
performance specification for the photocopier shall be as detailed in the Project
Documentation.
2 The Contractor shall maintain the photocopier for the duration of the Contract and provide all
consumables necessary for its operation.
3 Contractors shall provide a new floor standing, stationary platen, and plain paper colour
photocopier for use and approved by the Engineer.
4 The photocopier shall be provided with an automatic document feeder capable of copying
both sides.
5 The Range of copy sizes of the photocopier shall be from A3 size (297×420mm) to A4 size
(210×297mm), portrait and landscape. Three paper storage trays shall be provided.
6 The photocopier shall be capable of reducing/enlarging originals by 50% to 200% in 1%

increments.
7 The photocopier shall have an A4 size rotating paper cassette and automatic paper
size/zoom ratio selection.
8 Throughput shall be not lesson than 40 A4 copies per minute.
9 The photocopier shall be able to scan and email documents.
10 The photocopier shall be returned to the contractor at the end of period of Maintenance. The
contractor shall be responsible for supplying the necessary paper and maintenance of the
equipment by the manufacture’s agent throughout the work order.
11.4.4 Measuring and Recording Equipment
1 The Contractor shall provide measuring and recording equipment for the sole use of the
Engineer. The following items, which shall be to the approval of the Engineer, shall be
provided for the duration of the Contract:
ar
(a) 1 No. Electronic Distance Measurement (EDM) station.
(b) 1 No. 1” Total Station theodolite (or equivalent) including all necessary tripods, prisms
at
etc. -Q
(c) 1 No. Automatic engineer’s level including tripod.
(d) 1 No. Metric levelling staff.
LL
(e) 1 No. Calibrated steel survey band 50m long.

(f) 2 No. 30m nylon tapes.
W
(g) 2 No. 25 m metal tapes.

s
(h) 4 No. 5m pocket tapes.

en
(i) 6 No. Ranging rods.

1 No. Mason’s Spirit level.
m
(j)
(k) 1 No. Bitmac thermometer.
e
Si
(l) 1 No. digital camera.

(m) Level and field books as required.
2 Other equipment such as pegs, tools, etc, which are necessary for the checking of the Works
shall be provided as requested by the Engineer.
3 The Contractor shall maintain and replace as necessary the equipment for the duration of the
Contract. Surveying instruments shall be new or in as good as new condition, of an approved
make with a current certificate of adjustment.
11.4.5 Stationary Supplies
1 The Contractor shall supply stationary for the Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
Stationary items shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a) Files and file dividers (A4 and A3 size).

(b) Paper (A4 and A3 size).
(c) Writing pens, marker pens, highlighter pens (various colours).
(d) Pencils (various colours).

(e) Pencil sharpeners.
(f) Erasers.
(g) Staplers and staples.
(h) Hole punches.
(i) Paper chips and bull dog clips.
11.4.6 Safety Equipment and Clothing
1 The Contractor shall supply safety equipment and clothing for the Engineer and his staff.
Safety equipment and clothing shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a) Safety helmets, boots, gloves, High visibility vests, safety glasses (Clear and tinted)
(b) Safety belts and harnesses.
ar
(c) Boiler suits.
at
(d) Any other PPE identified by the Contractors job hazard analysis or risk assessment
process -Q
2 The Contractor shall also supply gas detection equipment and breathing apparatus in
accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 10 of this Section, Occupational Health and
Safety.
LL
11.4.7 Telephones and Facsimile Machines

W
1 For Type 1 Offices, the Contractor shall supply and install a telephone and facsimile
s
machine. The telephone and facsimile machine should conform to the relevant provisions of
en
any Telecom Provider standard or requirement.

m
2 For Type 2 Offices, the Contractor shall supply and install a telephone in each office and the
meeting room. Each telephone shall be connected to a private address box exchange
e
(PABX) system. The Contractor shall also supply and install a facsimile machine. The
Si
telephones, PABX system and facsimile shall conform to the relevant provisions of any
Telecom Provider standard or requirement.
3 The Contractor shall provide a new A4 size plain paper desktop facsimile machine complying
with the following:
(a) 2 Line × 24 character LCD Display

(b) ITU compatible
(c) Resolution horizontal scanning 8 pixel/mm
(d) Vertical scanning Standard 3.85 lines/mm
(e) Fine 7.7 lines/mm
(f) 150 sheet paper tray (80g/m2
4 The facsimile machine shall be returned to the contractor at the end of maintenance period.
The Contractor shall be responsible for supply of all necessary toner or ink cartridges and
plain white paper and for maintenance of the equipment by the manufactures’ s agent
throughout the Work order.
5 The Contractor shall provide six digital cameras and one digital video camera for the
exclusive use of the Engineer or his designated representative and supply software,
batteries, cables and USB flash drives or external hard drives as required. The Digital
camera shall have a minimum specification of 35-105 zoom, with a minimum of 16.0
megapixels for prints up to 20”×30”, 8GB internal memory and video/audio facility. The
cameras shall be returned to the contractor at the end of the contract period
11.5 ATTENDANCE
11.5.1 Assistance to the Engineer
1 The Contractor shall provide every assistance to the Engineer in carrying out his duties.
2 The Contractor shall provide for the use of the Engineer’s Representative and his staff, any
chainman/assistants to carry out any duties whatsoever, as required by the Engineer’s
Representative.
ar
11.5.2 Contract Administration
at
1 The Contractor shall provide secretaries, cleaners and tea persons for the exclusive use of
-Q
the Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
END OF PART
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 12: Contractor’s Site Facilities
12 CONTRACTOR’S SITE FACILITIES GENERAL ........................................... 2
12.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

12.1.1 Scope 2
12.1.2 References 2
12.2 CONTRACTOR’S SITE FACILITIES ............................................................. 2
12.2.1 Buildings 2
12.2.2 Site Fabrication Areas 2
12.2.3 Materials Storage Area 2
12.2.4 Power, Water, Lighting and Heating 3
12.2.5 Miscellaneous 3
12.3 PROJECT SIGN BOARD............................................................................... 3
12.3.1 Project Sign Board 3
ar
12.4 ADVERTISING .............................................................................................. 4
at
12.4.1 Photographs 4
12.4.2 Name Boards and Other Advertising 4
-Q
12.5 PROVISION OF HAMAD MEDICAL CORPORATION AMBULANCE SPOKE
STATION ....................................................................................................... 4
LL
12.5.1 General 4
12.5.2 Requirements 4
W
s
en
e m
Si
12 CONTRACTOR’S SITE FACILITIES GENERAL
12.1 GENERAL
12.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for the Contractor’s temporary site facilities.
12.1.2 References
This Section Part 9 Materials.
12.2 CONTRACTOR’S SITE FACILITIES
ar
12.2.1 Buildings
at
1 The Contractor shall provide all offices, sheds, stores and other buildings necessary for him
-Q
to undertake all duties, obligations and activities associated with the construction of the
Works.
LL
2 All buildings shall be supplied and maintained in good condition and shall be of neat
appearance.
W
3 The position of all the Contractor’s temporary site buildings shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
s
en
4 The Contractor shall maintain an office at the Site for the duration of the Contract. This office
shall be open at all times during Site working hours.
m
5 Upon completion of the Contract, all temporary site buildings shall be removed and the area
e
occupied or otherwise affected by them reinstated to its original condition.

Si
6 The Government of Qatar will grant a right of access only within the road reservation. Should
the Contractor need to use adjacent areas of land for camps, plant site etc, he shall arrange
for the right to use the said land himself.
7 This clause in no way invalidates the obligations of the General Conditions of Contract.
12.2.2 Site Fabrication Areas
1 The Contractor shall provide an area suitable for assembly and fabrication purposes.
2 Fabrication areas shall simulate factory conditions if required in the Project Documentation.
12.2.3 Materials Storage Area
1 The Contractor shall provide sufficient and appropriate materials storage areas. The storage
areas shall be suitable for the materials to be stored in them and shall offer necessary
protection where required.
2 The Contractor shall ensure that the storage areas comply with the relevant provisions of
Part 9 of this Section, Materials.
12.2.4 Power, Water, Lighting and Heating
1 The Contractor shall provide, maintain and subsequently remove temporary services for
power supply, water supply, lighting and heating.
2 All electrical installations shall be in the charge of a competent person who shall accept full
responsibility for its use and any alterations or additions thereto. The name, designation and
telephone number of such person shall be prominently displayed close to the main switch or
circuit breaker of the installation, and also in the Contractor’s site office.
3 Site work power tool supplies (except for operation of pumps) shall be of 110 volts (55 volts
to earth). All electricity supply cables shall be buried or properly supported and protected and
shall be armoured. Flexible cable shall only be allowed for hand lamps and hand held tools
and shall not exceed 6 metres in length. Industrial type plugs and sockets shall be used.
ar
4 All site electrical installations shall comply with the requirements of the current regulations of
at
QGEWC. -Q
12.2.5 Miscellaneous
1 The Contractor shall provide, maintain and subsequently remove temporary roads, paths,
LL
parking areas and refuse disposal areas. The area occupied by temporary roads, paths,
parking areas and refuse disposal areas or otherwise affected by them shall be restored to
W
their original condition on completion of the Contract.

s
12.3 PROJECT SIGN BOARD

en
12.3.1 Project Sign Board

m
1 Standard Signboard: The Contractor shall provide and erect a temporary signboard at the
e
location of his approved site compound. In addition he shall provide signboards at the start
Si
and end of each ongoing work location for all works whether major or minor.
2 Project Identification Signboard: Information signboards shall be clearly displayed on

approaches to works in the highway at each ongoing work location for all works whether
major or minor. These shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be positioned so as not
to cause hindrance to the movement of vehicular or pedestrian traffic. The signs shall be
mounted on sturdy metal frames, be mobile and reusable, and shall be illuminated at night.
3 The Project sign boards shall comply with the standard details, as updated by the project
drawings and specifications, and shall be to the approval of the Engineer. In addition, the
Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals from the relevant authorities prior to erection.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the structural stability of the signboards but shall
submit details of his proposals for support to the Engineer for approval.
4 The Contractor shall maintain, move and adapt the signboards as required during the
progress of the Works and shall remove them upon completion.
12.4 ADVERTISING
12.4.1 Photographs
1 The Contractor shall not use photographs or any details of his work in connection with the
Contract in any form of publicity or advertisement in any part of the world without having first
obtained the Engineer’s approval to its content and context.
12.4.2 Name Boards and Other Advertising
1 Details of any further sign boards other than as designed in Clause 12.3.1 or advertisements
that the Contractor may wish to erect on site shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
12.5 PROVISION OF HAMAD MEDICAL CORPORATION AMBULANCE SPOKE

STATION
ar
12.5.1 General
at
1 Ambulance Spoke Station is a temporary structure. This can be relocated quickly to any
location in a rapidly changing infrastructure, which is a vital component of the design. It is
-Q
designed to provide covered parking for up to two ambulances and accommodation for a
small crew room for up to four paramedics. The crew need shelter from the summer heat in a
safe environment in a prime response location to be ready for emergency calls. The stations
LL
are versatile and designed to be completely self-contained. It doesn't require to be connected

to Electricity, Water or Sewerage or require any physical links to service providers. All of its
W
power is provided by solar panels. The cabin can be dismantled and moved to another site
within 48 hours, enabling Hamad Medical Corporation to relocate these small stations. The
s
station does not require any form of building foundations, just level ground. Depending on the
en
location, some stations may require minor works for access to and from the road.
2 The contractor will in no way be relieved of his responsibility under Qatari law to provide
m
medical care, facilities, insurance, etc. to workers on site, and that Hamad Medical
e
Corporations facility is mainly for the purpose of the general public (so that Hamad Medical
Si
Corporation can respond more quickly to emergency incidents in a rapidly changing

infrastructure)
12.5.2 Requirements
1 If instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall make provision within or adjacent his site
facilities for an Ambulance Spoke Station.
2 The Contractor is only required to provide an area for the for the facilities. The Ambulance
Spoke Station and vehicles will be provided and installed by Hamad Medical Corporation or
an entity on their behalf.
3 The area shall be a minimum of 10 metres by 17 metres.
4 The area must be levelled as the surrounding area of the Contractor facilities.
5 The areas shall be provided with clear access to the road network.
6 Access to the Ambulance Spoke Station is required 24hours/day 7 days/week.

7 Ambulance vehicle access is required to at least one long side.
8 Access for maintenance (water resupply, cleaning, removal of waste etc.) is required to one
short side.
9 The allocated area shall be approved in writing by the Engineer after consultation with
Hamad Medical Corporation.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 13: Setting Out of the Works
13 SETTING OUT OF THE WORKS .................................................................. 2

13.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
13.1.1 Scope 2
13.2 SITE INFORMATION AND INSPECTION ..................................................... 2
13.2.1 Site Information 2
13.2.2 Site Inspection 2
13.3 LEVELS AND REFERENCE GRID ................................................................ 2
13.3.1 Temporary Bench Marks 2
13.3.2 Site Grid 3
13.4 SURVEYING .................................................................................................. 3
13.4.1 Site Survey 3
13.5 SETTING OUT ............................................................................................... 3
13.5.1 Setting Out of the Works 3
ar
13.5.2 Setting Out of Works Sited on Private Land 4
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
13 SETTING OUT OF THE WORKS

13.1 GENERAL
13.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for setting out of the Works and includes locating
existing services, surveying the Site and establishment of temporary bench marks.
2 The Engineer reserves the right to order levels to be taken at any time considered necessary
for the full and proper supervision and measurement of the Works.

This Section Part 11 Engineer’s Site facilities.
ar
13.2 SITE INFORMATION AND INSPECTION
at
13.2.1 Site Information -Q
1 Before commencing the setting out of the Works the Contractor shall ascertain the location of
all existing underground services within the Site boundary. The Contractor shall prepare a
LL
plan detailing the location of the services.
2 Any conflict between existing services and any part of the proposed Works shall be brought
W
to the attention to the Engineer without delay.

s
3 Any re-work resulting from the Contractor’s failure to locate and identify services shall be
en
undertaken at the Contractor’s cost.

m
13.2.2 Site Inspection

e
1 Before commencing the setting out of the Works, the Contractor and the Engineer shall
Si
make an inspection of the Site.
2 Where appropriate, the Engineer shall require the Contractor to arrange for surveys to be
undertaken, in conjunction with the owners or occupiers, of the condition of roads, properties,
lands and crops which may be affected by the Works. Before any work affecting such roads,
properties, lands or crops is commenced, the Contractor shall confirm in writing to the
Engineer that the relevant survey is a true and accurate record of their condition.
13.3 LEVELS AND REFERENCE GRID
13.3.1 Temporary Bench Marks
1 . The Contractor shall establish accurate temporary bench marks on permanent blocks from
which the levels to which the Works are to be constructed may be transferred. The location
of temporary bench marks shall be agreed with the Engineer. The level of temporary bench
marks shall be related to the Qatar National Height Datum.
2 The Contractor shall prepare a plan detailing the location of the bench marks and temporary
bench marks and keep it up to date for the duration of the Contract.
3 The Contractor shall protect and maintain the temporary bench marks until the Works are
complete. Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall clear away the temporary
bench marks to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4 The Contractor is responsible for checking the accuracy of temporary bench mark. Any re-
work resulting from incorrect or inaccurate temporary bench marks shall be undertaken at the
Contractor’s cost.
13.3.2 Site Grid
1 When it is a requirement of the Project Documentation, or unless otherwise notified by the

Engineer, the Contractor shall establish a Site Grid. The orientation of the Site Grid shall be
determined by the layout of the proposed works and as agreed with by the Engineer. Grid
spacing shall be 20m in each direction unless otherwise notified by the Engineer. Grid
notation shall be numerical in one direction (y-axis) and alphabetic in the other (x-axis).
2 The grid shall be tied to the Qatar National Grid. An existing control station related to the
ar
Qatar National grid will be indicated by the Engineer for this purpose.
at
13.4 SURVEYING -Q
13.4.1 Site Survey
LL
1 The Contractor shall provide the Site survey and the correctness of that survey shall be
entirely the Contractor’s responsibility.
W
2 The Site survey shall comply with the requirements of the Qatar Survey Manual as a
minimum.
s
en
3 The Contractor shall, within 3 weeks of the date of commencement of the Works, carry out a
check of the co-ordinates and levels of all permanent monuments, bench marks and survey
m
markers used in the determination of the site survey model and proposed to be used for the
setting out of the Works.
e
Si
13.5 SETTING OUT
13.5.1 Setting Out of the Works
1 The Contractor shall carry out at his own cost the setting out of the Works.
2 The Contractor shall be responsible for:
(a) True and proper settings out of the Works in relation to reference data given
in the Project Documentation.
(b) Accurately setting out the positions, levels and dimensions of all parts of the Works.
3 Any delay or loss resulting from errors in the setting out of the Works shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Setting out shall be reviewed by the Engineer before
commencing the Works, but such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the correct execution of the Work.
4 The Contractor shall provide measuring and recording equipment for the Engineer in
accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 11 of this Section, Engineer’s Site Facilities.
The Contractor shall maintain all measuring and recording equipment in good working order
at all times.
5 The Contractor shall provide all assistance which the Engineer may require for checking the
setting out and taking measurements of the Works, including labour, equipment and
transportation.
13.5.2 Setting Out of Works Sited on Private Land
1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing fourteen (14) days in advance of his
intention to set out any of part of the Works that lies in private land.
2 The Contractor shall ensure that all requirements and instructions of private land owners are
strictly adhered to.
ar
END OF PART
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 14: Temporary Works and Equipment
14 TEMPORARY WORKS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................. 2

14.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
14.1.1 Scope 2
14.2 TEMPORARY WORKS ........................................................................................... 2
14.2.1 General 2
14.3 TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT .................................................................................... 2
14.3.1 General 2
14.4 TEST CERTIFICATES FOR CRANES AND LIFTING TACKLE ............................... 3
14.4.1 General 3
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
14 TEMPORARY WORKS AND EQUIPMENT

14.1 GENERAL
14.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for Temporary Works required in connection with
construction of the Works and temporary plant and equipment required in connection with
aiding the construction of the Works. It does not include overpumping activities in respect of
sewers and drains.

ar
3 Occupational Health and Safety concerning temporary works and equipment is covered in
at
4
-Q
Quality Controlling temporary works and equipment’s is covered in Section 2 Quality
Assurance and Quality Control
14.2 TEMPORARY WORKS

LL
14.2.1 General
W
1 Everything used for and in connection with the Temporary Works shall be fit for the purpose,
s
in serviceable condition and in compliance with any relevant standard.

en
2 The Contractor shall design his Temporary Works to be of adequate strength, stability and
m
suitability.
e
3 The Contractor shall submit details of any Temporary Works proposed to the Engineer for
Si
review before commencing the work. Such details shall include, but not be limited to design
calculations and drawings. The submission to the Engineer of any such details shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for sufficiency of the Temporary Works or of his
other duties and responsibilities under the Contract.
4 The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that Temporary Works are not in any way
detrimental to existing structures in any way. Particular care shall be taken with scaffolding to
avoid staining or mechanical damage to finishing.
5 The Contractor shall make safe and reinstate all areas affected by Temporary Works.
14.3 TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT
14.3.1 General
1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good condition on the Site all plant, tools and
vehicles necessary for the proper and safe execution of the Works.
2 Temporary equipment shall be fit for the purpose for which it is to be used.
3 Temporary equipment shall only be operated by personnel who are trained and qualified.
14.4 TEST CERTIFICATES FOR CRANES AND LIFTING TACKLE
14.4.1 General
1 Cranes, whether used to construct the Works or provided as part of the permanent Works,
must have a current test certificate.
2 Each sling, shackle or other item of loose lifting tackle, whether used to construct the Works
or provided as part of the permanent Works, must have either a current test certificate.
3 Test certificates must be issued by a competent testing authority approved by the Engineer.
4 The Contractor must have a copy of each test certificate on site available for inspection by
the Engineer.
ar
5 The following Standards and Code of Practice shall be complied with and where such
documents are replaced or superseded the Contractor shall comply with the latest version:
at
(a) Mobile and Tower Cranes: BS 1757, BS 2799 and CP 3010.
-Q
(b) Overhead Cranes: BS 466 and BS 5744.
(c) Slings: BS 1290, BS EN 1492, ISO 4309 / 3481 Pt 2, ASME B30.9.
LL
(d) Chain Blocks: BS 3243.

W
(e) Shackles: Alloy: BS 3551/ BS 6994.

(f) Chain: BS 4942 part 1 & 6.
s
(g) Hooks: BS 2903, ASME B30.10.

en
(h) Ring and link: BS 2902.

m
6 A monthly inspection of lifting appliances shall be carried out by a competent person

e
employed by the Contractor. Full records of all such inspections and tests shall be kept by the
Si
Contractor in an approved form and shall be made available to the Engineer immediately
upon demand. Copies of monthly inspection reports shall be submitted to the Engineer.
END OF PART
Part 15: Temporary Controls
15 TEMPORARY CONTROLS ..................................................................................... 2

15.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
15.1.1 Scope 2
15.2 TEMPORARY CONTROLS ..................................................................................... 2
15.2.1 Construction Cleaning 2
15.2.2 Dust Control 2
15.2.3 Noise 2
15.2.4 Nuisance and Trespass 2
15.2.5 Pollution Control 3
15.2.6 Surface Water and Groundwater Control 3
15.2.7 Environmental protection 4
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
15 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the Contractor’s responsibilities with respect to temporary controls needed
to protect the Works and the environment.

This Section Part 5 Interference
15.2 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
15.2.1 Construction Cleaning
ar
at
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper upkeep and maintenance of the Site and
Works and shall remove from the Site all rubbish and other waste as it accumulates.
-Q
Materials and equipment shall be positioned, stored and stacked in an orderly manner.
2 Properly constructed rubbish chutes shall be used for clearing the debris from upper floors.
LL
Debris shall be accumulated in suitable pre-determined areas and removed from the Site as
often as is practical.
W
3 On completion of the Works, any protective tape and other temporary coverings shall be
removed and the internal and external surface of the structure shall be thoroughly cleaned to
s
completely remove all dust, dirt, stains, handmarks, paint spots, plaster, mortar droppings
en
and other blemishes.

m
15.2.2 Dust Control

e
1 The Contractor shall conduct his operations and activities in such a manner that no operation
Si
shall be included which will emit into the atmosphere any flying dust or dirt which might
constitute a nuisance.
15.2.3 Noise
1 The Contractor shall restrict the use of plant, machinery, equipment and work practises likely
to produce unacceptable noise levels to normal working hours.
15.2.4 Nuisance and Trespass
1 All reasonable means shall be used to avoid inconveniencing owners and occupiers of
adjacent properties. All plant, machinery or equipment shall be placed and used on the Site
so as to avoid any nuisance or trespass on adjoining property.
2 Should it be necessary for any plant, machinery or equipment to project or operate over
adjoining property, the Contractor shall obtain the permission of the adjoining owner or
occupier. Details of approvals shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing.
3 No workmen employed on the Works shall be allowed to trespass upon adjoining properties.
4 If in the execution of the Works it is necessary for the Contractor to enter adjacent properties,
he shall firstly obtain the permission of the owners of the property. The Contractor shall
ensure that any instructions made by the owners of the properties are strictly adhered to.
5 The Contractor shall be held responsible for and shall indemnify the Employer against all
claims, which may arise out of his failure to comply with provisions of items 1. 2. 3 and 4 of
Clause 1.15.2.4
15.2.5 Pollution Control
1 The Contractor shall ensure that none of his operations or work practises result in the
polluting of the air, underground strata or any existing watercourse, canal, lake, reservoir
borehole and aquifer.
2 The Contractor shall rectify any problem resulting from pollution caused by the Contractor to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
ar
3 The Contractor will be held responsible for and shall indemnify owner against all claims in
connection with noise, vibration, dust, smoke, diesel spillage and any other nuisance arising
at
from the execution of the Works. -Q
15.2.6 Surface Water and Groundwater Control
1 The Contractor shall keep the Work well drained until the Engineer certifies that the whole of
LL
the Works is substantially complete and shall ensure that so far as is practicable all work is
carried out in the dry. Excavated areas shall be kept well drained and free from standing
W
water.
s
2 The Contractor shall construct, operate and maintain all temporary dams, water courses and
en
other works of all kinds including pumping and well-point dewatering that may be necessary
to exclude water from the Works while construction is in progress. Such temporary works
m
shall not be removed without the approval of the Engineer.

e
3 Notwithstanding any approval by the Engineer of the Contractor’s arrangements for the
Si
exclusion of water, the Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency thereof and for
keeping the Works safe at all times, particularly during periods of rainfall that may result in
flooding. Any damage to the Works arising through the Contractor’s failure to provide
sufficient protection against water, including flooding, shall be made good at his own
expense.
4 It is the Contractor’s responsibility to dispose of all extracted groundwater and collected

surface water. The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed disposal methods to the
Engineer for approval. Discharge of groundwater and/or surface water to existing drainage
facilities shall only be permitted if written approval is given by Public Works Authority and/or
concerned other authorities; copies of such approvals shall be submitted to the Engineer.
5 The Contractor is to take all necessary precautions to avoid floatation of any structure.
6 The Contractor shall ensure that his groundwater control activities do not adversely affect any
existing structure or service.
15.2.7 Environmental protection
1 The Contractor shall comply with all conditions of the environmental clearance issued for the
project by the Supreme Council for the Environment and Natural Reserves.
2 The Contractor shall comply with all rules and regulations regarding environmental protection
and pollution control issued by the Supreme Council for the Environment and Natural
Reserves.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 16: Traffic Diversions
16 TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS................................................................................. 2
16.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

16.1.1 Scope 2
16.1.2 Conformance 2
16.1.3 Safety 2
16.1.4 System Description 2
16.1.5 Traffic Police Requirements 2
16.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS ......................................................... 3
16.2.2 Maintenance of Traffic flow 3
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
16 TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS
16.1 GENERAL
16.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies requirements associated with traffic diversions. Traffic diversions include
for work in, or affecting the use of, roads, footpaths and right of ways and may comprise the
construction and maintenance of paved and unpaved detour carriageways including all
earthworks and the provision of adequate drainage, lighting, sign posting, street furniture and
traffic control devices.

This Section Part 4 Protection
16.1.2 Conformance
ar
1 Signs, control and control devices associated with traffic diversions shall conform to the
at
relevant provisions of “Traffic Control at Roadworks” produced by the Ministry of Public
-Q
Works (latest edition/version) and shall be to the approval of the Traffic Police and the Public
Works Authority.
16.1.3 Safety
LL
1 The Contractor is responsible for all safety issues associated with the installation, operation,
W
maintenance and removal of traffic diversions.

s
2 The Contractor shall provide lighting in accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 4 of
en
this Section, Protection.

m
16.1.4 System Description

e
1 Where the diversion of any existing road, footpath or public right or way is temporarily
Si
necessitated by the Works, the Contractor shall provide and maintain an alternative which
shall be operational before interference with the existing facility.
2 Temporary traffic control devices as well as any other traffic management requirement shall
be erected and maintained by the Contractor for the duration of any activity in, or affecting the
use of, roads, footpaths and right of ways.
16.1.5 Traffic Police Requirements
1 Before any work in, or affecting the use of, any road, footpath, and right of way is
commenced, the Contractor’s proposed method of working shall be agreed with, and
confirmed in writing to, the Engineer and the Traffic Police.
2 Throughout the execution of the Works and the maintenance period, the Contractor shall co-
operate with the Traffic Police concerning works in, or access to, roads, footpaths and right of
ways. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any requirements of, or arrangements
made with, the Traffic Police.
16.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS
1 The Contractor shall prepare detailed plans showing any proposed traffic diversions. The
plans shall fully detail the diversion in all respects and shall include construction details if
necessary. The plans shall show the position of ramps, traffic signs, cones, barriers,
demarcation posts and tape, flashing lights and any other traffic control devices. The plans
shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and shall be approved by the Traffic Police.
Traffic diversion apparatus shall not be erected until the Traffic Police have reviewed and
approved the traffic diversion plans.
2 Persons acting as flagmen shall be physically and mentally qualified, trained in their duties
and courteous. Each flagman on duty shall be identified with appropriate and distinctive
apparel approved by the Engineer and equipped with bilingual STOP/GO signs. Reflective
apparel is required for flagging duties during darkness.
ar
3 Where paved carriageways, unpaved carriageways or ramps are required, they shall be
at
provided and maintained to a standard suitable in all respects for the class or classes of
traffic or pedestrians requiring the use of them.
-Q
4 On completion, all traffic diversion works and apparatus shall be removed and land affected
by them reinstated to its original condition.
LL
16.2.2 Maintenance of Traffic flow

W
1 The Contractor shall allow for the construction of temporary diversions to permit all existing
traffic movements for the duration of the Contract period.
s
en
2 All diversions shall be constructed in accordance with the latest edition/version of Qatar
Traffic Manual “Traffic Control at Roadworks” booklet and the Qatar Highway Design Manual,
and shall be approved prior to the implementation by both the Engineer and Traffic Police. It
m
is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that any traffic diversion required is properly
e
signed, demarcated, illuminated, controlled and maintained at all times.

Si
3 Upon the Engineer’s request, the Contractor shall install and commission temporary traffic
signals capable of handling the diverted traffic.
4 Sequential arrow boards operating on a 24-hour basis (engine or solar powered) must be
used at all diversion points.
5 Within the limits of the project where pedestrian traffic is present, all excavated areas,
regardless of depth, must be cordoned off by means of wired mesh panels of height no less
than 1.8m connected together to form a continuous barrier wall.
END OF PART
Part 17: Project Co-ordination
17 PROJECT CO-ORDINATION ........................................................................ 2

17.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
17.1.1 Scope 2
17.1.2 Responsibility 2
17.2 CO-ORDINATION .......................................................................................... 2
17.2.1 Contractor’s Activities 2
17.2.2 Sub-Contractors 3
17.2.3 Other Contractors 3
17.2.4 Other Ministries 3
17.2.5 Liaison with the Public Utility Authorities and other Contractors 3
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
17 PROJECT CO-ORDINATION
17.1 GENERAL
17.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the co-ordination activities for which the Contractor is responsible.

This Section Part 18 Other Contractors
Part 19 Regulatory Requirements
17.1.2 Responsibility
ar
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper co-ordination of all his activities associated
with the construction of the Works including that required between the Engineer, utility
at
owners, government departments, sub-contractors and other contractors.
2
-Q
No major operations shall be commenced or work outside the usual working hours be carried
out without the consent in writing of the Engineer or without full and complete notice also in
writing being given to him sufficiently in advance of the time of operation so as to enable him
LL
to make such arrangements as he may deem necessary for its inspection.

W
17.2 CO-ORDINATION
17.2.1 Contractor’s Activities

s
en
1 The Contractor shall undertake the following co-ordination activities:

m
(a) Co-ordinate construction activities under the various Sections of these Specifications
to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Works.
e
Si
(b) Co-ordinate construction operations included under the various Sections of this
Specification that is dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and
operation.
(c) Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other
components, either before or after its own installation, the Contractor shall prepare
schedules and construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best
results.
(d) Where availability of space is limited, co-ordinate installation of different components
to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair.
(e) Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
(f) Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution of each party involved outlining
special procedures required for co-ordination; include such items as required notices,
reports and attendance at meetings.
(g) Prepare similar memoranda for the Engineer, separate contractors and sub-
contractors where co-ordination of their work is required.
(h) Take special care and precautions for specific co-ordination requirements for the
installation of plant and items of equipment.
(i) Co-ordinate the scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other
construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the work.
17.2.2 Sub-Contractors
1 The Contractor is responsible for co-ordinating the work of his sub-contractors in all respects.
17.2.3 Other Contractors
1 The Contractor shall co-ordinate his work as necessary with other contractors in accordance
with the relevant provisions of Part 18, Other Contractors, of this Section.
17.2.4 Other Ministries
1 The Contractor shall co-ordinate his work as necessary with other Ministries in accordance
ar
with the relevant provisions of Part 19, Regulatory Requirements, of this Section.
at
17.2.5 Liaison with the Public Utility Authorities and other Contractors
-Q
1 The Contractor shall liaise with all public utility authorities for water, electricity, telephones,
etc and shall:
LL
(a) Provide public utility authorities with storage areas where applicable.
(b) Assist in unloading of stores and equipment.
W
(c) Ensure that all services or diversions of services are installed under the carriageway
and footways before they are surfaced.
s
en
(d) Work out an overall programme for any works to be carried out by public utility
authorities and ensure that this programme is maintained.
Keep public utility authorities informed of the Contractor’s own progress.
m
(e)
(f) Arrange for supply of services for all the affected permanent and temporary
e
accommodation, buildings, shops, trading areas etc even if it is not clearly mentioned
Si
in the Project Documentation for the duration for the Contract:

(g) Give the appropriate public utility authority adequate notice in writing that he intends to
install dry ducts so that a representative of the utility concerned may attend the
installation and record the location of the ducts together with the Contractor.
2 The Contractor shall make due allowance for carrying out the works, whilst public utility
authorities are working on the Site, during the Contract period. This due allowance shall
include programming of the works to suit the programmes of the public utility authorities.
3 The Contractor shall at all times be responsible for the compliance with these requirements
of his sub-contractors.
4 Before final surfacing of any carriageways or footways takes place, the Contractor is
responsible for ascertaining from all public utility authorities that their underground works
have been completed. In the event that the Contractor failing to carry out this obligation to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and completed surfacing is subsequently disturbed, the Engineer
may instruct the Contractor to carry out work at his own expense.
END OF PART
Part 18: Other Contractors
18 OTHER CONTRACTORS.............................................................................. 2
18.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

18.1.1 Scope 2
18.2 ACCESS FOR OTHER CONTRACTORS ..................................................... 2
18.2.1 Unhindered Access 2
18.3 CO-OPERATION AND CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS 2
18.3.1 Co-operation at Site Level 2
18.4 FACILITIES FOR OTHER CONTRACTORS ................................................. 2
18.4.1 Site Facilities for Other Contractors 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 18: Other Contractors
18 OTHER CONTRACTORS
18.1 GENERAL
18.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for access to the Site for other contractors, for
co-operation and co-ordination with other contractors and for the provision of facilities with
other contractors.
18.2 ACCESS FOR OTHER CONTRACTORS
18.2.1 Unhindered Access
1 The Contractor shall allow other contractors unhindered access to any part of the Works
when in the opinion of the Engineer those parts are sufficiently completed.
ar
at
18.3 CO-OPERATION AND CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS
18.3.1 Co-operation at Site Level

-Q
1 The Contractor shall carry out his work in a manner that causes the minimum amount of
LL
interference to other contractors working on the Site.

W
2 The Contractor shall co-ordinate his operations with the activities of other contractors where
necessary in order to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Works.
s
3 Those works associated with existing or future service installation shall only be carried out by
en
a contractor or sub-contractor approved by the public utility authority concerned. The

Engineer shall require proof of such approval in writing prior to the commencement of works.
m
18.4 FACILITIES FOR OTHER CONTRACTORS

e
Si
18.4.1 Site Facilities for Other Contractors
1 If specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall provide site facilities for other contractors.
END OF PART
Part 19: Regulatory Requirements
19 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

19.1 GENERAL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
19.1.1 SCOPE --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
19.1.2 REFERENCES ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
19.2 NOTICES ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
19.2.1 GENERAL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
19.2.2 NOTICE OF INTENT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
19.3 MISCELLANEOUS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
19.3.1 W ORK REQUIRED TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE DEPARTMENT ----------------------------------------------- 3
19.3.2 REGULATIONS OF ROAD OPENINGS----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
19.4 PROVISION FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES ----------------------------------------------------- 4
19.4.1 SCOPE --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
19.5 THERMAL COMFORT ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
ar
19.6 THERMAL INSULATION --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
at
19.7 ACOUSTICAL CONTROL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
19.8 W ASTE MANAGEMENT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
-Q
19.8.1 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION W ASTE --------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
19.8.2 BULK W ASTE COLLECTION --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
LL
19.8.3 W ASTE STORAGE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6

19.8.4 W ASTE COLLECTION ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
W
19.8.5 RECYCLABLE W ASTE MANAGEMENT FACILITIES: ------------------------------------------------------------- 6

19.9 BUILDING FACADE/ EXTERNAL CLADDING MATERIAL -------------------------------------------------------- 7
s
en
19.9.1 CERTIFICATION AND APPROVAL ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

19.9.2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
m
19.10 EXTERNAL FACADE CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS -------------------------- 8
e
19.10.1 GENERAL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8

Si
19.10.2 MAINTENANCE MANUAL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

19.10.3 ACCESS OF CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE -------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
19.10.4 CLEANING ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
19.10.5 INSPECTION --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
19.11 PROVISION OF ABLUTION FACILITIES IN PUBLIC BUILDINGS ------------------------------------------------- 9
19 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
19.1 GENERAL
19.1.1 Scope
1 This part specifies the requirements for co-ordination, co-operation and liaison with the
following utility and infrastructure owners:
ASHGHAL- Infrastructure Affairs
ASHGHAL- Building Affairs
ASHGHAL- Assets Affairs
Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation- KAHRAMAA
Qatar Telecom - Provider
Qatar Petroleum, QP
Q Rail
ar
2 This part also specifies the requirements for co-ordination, co-operation and liaison with the
at
following authorities and departments:
-Q
Authorities having Municipal jurisdiction (Ministry of Energy & Industry, New Industrial area,
RLIC, MIC etc.)
Civil Aviation Authority
LL
Ministry of Awqaf and Islamic Affairs

W
Ministry of Interior (Civil Defense Department, Traffic Police, Department of Immigration,

Security Systems Department, etc)
s
Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Urban Planning (MMUP)

en
Private Engineering Office
The above shall collectively be known as “Department” in this Part.

m
3
e

Si
This Section
Part 16 Traffic Diversions
Part 17 Project Co-ordination
Section 7 Green Construction

Section 15 Insulation of Buildings
Section 25 Glass and Glazing
5 Where any requirement(s) conflict with any other requirement(s) of Authorities or

Departments in the State of Qatar, the most stringent requirement(s) shall prevail.
19.1.2 References
Al Wakra City Zoning Plan and Regulations Report, 2008, Ministry of Municipality & Urban
Planning, State of Qatar
Civil Defense Regulations, Fire Prevention Department, General Administration of Civil
Defense, Ministry of Interior, State of Qatar
Code on Barrier-Free Accessibility in Buildings, 2002 (ver 1.0), Building and Construction
Authority, Singapore
Conditions and Descriptions of the Expedient Workers Residences, Resolution of the
Minister of Civil Service and Housing Affairs No. (17) of 2005, State of Qatar
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, 2012 Edition, National Fire Protection Association, U.S.A.
Planning and Building Regulations for Flats & Flat Complexes, 1994, Planning Department,
Ministry of Municipal Affairs & Agriculture, State of Qatar
Planning and Building Regulations for Villas & Villa Complexes, 1995, Planning Department,
Ministry of Municipal Affairs & Agriculture, State of Qatar
Qatar Highway Design Manual, 1997 (Rev 0), Civil Engineering Department, Ministry of
Municipal Affairs & Agriculture, State of Qatar
Qatar Survey Manual, UPDA, The Centre for GIS – State of Qatar.
Qatar Traffic Manual – Vol. 1
Qatar Traffic Manual – Vol. 2
ar
Universal Design Guidelines, 2006, Building and Construction Authority, Singapore
at
19.2 NOTICES
-Q
19.2.1 General
1 All notices required to be given by the Contractor to the Department shall be in writing and
LL
delivered by hand. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a copy of all notices
issued by the Contractor.
W
19.2.2 Notice of Intent

s
1 The Contractor shall give at least seven days notice to the Department of the date upon
en
which it is intended to operate plant or equipment or carry out any work for which permission
has been given in writing by the Department: such operations or work shall only be carried
m
out in the presence a representative of the Department unless written confirmation shall
e
have been obtained that this unnecessary.

Si
19.3 MISCELLANEOUS
19.3.1 Work required to be carried out by the Department
1 If the Department requires work to be carried out on its installations during the execution of
the Works, the Contractor shall provide all facilities to the Department’s contractor or
workmen. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the work of the Department and his own
activities, and when necessary shall amend his programme to suit the requirements of the
Department and shall keep the Engineer informed of all arrangements made.
19.3.2 Regulations of Road Openings
1 For Works including road openings, the Contractor shall comply with all relevant provisions
of the following Parts of this Section or direction of the Engineer.
Part 16 Traffic Diversions.
Part 21 Final Inspection and Handover
19.4 PROVISION FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES
19.4.1 Scope
1 The aim of this provision is to set out the fundamental design and construction requirements
and guidelines for making those buildings specified in Table 1 accessible to persons with
disabilities.
Table 1: Accessibility for Persons with Disabilities
No Types of buildings Accessible areas
1 Residential buildings:
(a) 3-storeys and below All communal areas and facilities at ground floor.
(b) 4-storeys and above All communal areas and facilities.
2 Office buildings All areas intended for access by employees or
public.
ar
3 Shophouses The ground floor for non-residential use shall be
accessible to employees or public.
at
4 Shopping complexes and multipurpose All areas intended for access by employees or
-Q
complexes public.
5 Hotels and boarding houses All areas intended for access by employees or
public.
LL
6 Religious buildings and Mosques All areas intended for access by worshippers or
public.
7 Places of public resort All areas intended for access by employees or
W
public.
8 Cinemas, theatres, concert halls, stadia All areas intended for access by employees or
s
or other places of public resort where public.

en
permanent seating arrangement is

provided
m
9 Schools, colleges, universities or All areas intended for access by employees or

institutions of learning public.
e
10 Hostels, halls of residence or dormitories All areas intended for access by staff, students or
Si
public.
11 Sports complexes and public swimming All areas intended for public access.
pools
12 Restaurants and eating establishments All areas intended for access by employees or
public.
13 Markets and hawker or food centres All areas intended for public access.
14 Hospitals, clinics, dispensaries, nursing All areas intended for access by staff, patients,
homes, homes for the aged and welfare inmates or public.
homes
15 Factories, workshops and industrial All areas intended for access by employees or
buildings 4-storeys and above public.
16 Transport stations, interchanges, All areas intended for access by employees or
passenger terminals and administration public.
buildings in depots
17 Vehicle parks (surface parking or vehicle Prescribed areas.
parking buildings)
2 The Owner is recommended to follow and adopt suitable and relevant international barrier
free access guidelines which will allow persons with disabilities to enter, move around and
leave an establishment without hindrances.
3 Universal Design is a continuous process of innovation targeted at improving usability for

everyone. It is also known that Universal Design is the design of products and environment
to be usable by all people, to the greatest extent possible, without the need for adaptation or
specialised design. It is highly recommended that the Owner adopt Universal Design until the
authority (MMUP) approve reference.
19.5 THERMAL COMFORT
1 The heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) system must be capable of providing
the following range of conditions for 95% of the year
Lower Limit Upper Limit
ar
Dry bulb temperature DB: 22.5 ˚C DB: 25.5 ˚C
Relative humidity RH: 30% (min) RH: 60% (max)
at
2
-Q
For occupant comfort, normal occupied spaces should have a terminal air velocity between
(0.2-0.3) m/s.
LL
19.6 THERMAL INSULATION
1 As specified in section 15
W
19.7 ACOUSTICAL CONTROL

s
en
1 As specified in section 15
m
19.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT

e
19.8.1 Construction and Demolition Waste

Si
1 For all new buildings unless or until specified otherwise, at least fifty percent (50%) by
volume or weight of waste material generated during the construction and/ or demolition of
buildings must be diverted from disposal in landfills. Diverted materials must be recycled or
reused.
2 This should be done through one or more of the following three paths:
(a) Concrete and Asphalt waste must be diverted to Construction Waste Treatment Plant.
(b) Excavated soil, land-clearing debris and hazardous waste must be diverted to places
designated by the concerned Department of MMUP.
(c) Other recyclable materials such as woods plastics and metals can be used at site or
diverted to a Recycling Facility.
3 The following materials are exempt from the calculation of the percentage of waste diverted
from disposal at landfill facilities:
(a) Excavated soil and land-clearing debris; and
(b) Hazardous waste
19.8.2 Bulk Waste Collection
1 For all new residential apartment buildings, an area must be provided for residents to place
items of bulky waste such as furniture, electrical appliances and sanitary ware. The area
2
provided must cover a space of approximately ten square meters (10 m ). The area does not
have to be designated solely for the purpose of bulky waste collection (eg: set aside to the
car park).
2 The bulky waste storage area must be reachable, must not restrict access to the building
and comply with safety and fire requirement.
19.8.3 Waste Storage
1 For all new villas and apartments (single family units), domestic kitchen must be provided
with a minimum storage facility of two ten (10) liter waste receptacles clearly labeled for
‘recyclable’ and ‘non-recyclable’. The storage facility should be in a proper place within the
kitchen.
ar
19.8.4 Waste Collection
at
1
-Q
All new buildings which require chute for general waste, in accordance with Qatar MMUP
Regulations, one of the following must be provided:
(a) A second chute must be provided to handle recyclable material and discharge into a
LL
separate receptacle within the waste management area; or

(b) The garbage room on each floor must have a minimum floor area of two square
W
2
meters (2 m ) where recyclable waste can be stored until collected daily by the
building operator. Waste must be transported through designated medium (chute,
s
service elevator etc.) into the waste management area.

en
2 All new buildings which does not require chute for general waste, in accordance with Ministry
m
of Municipal Affairs and Urban Planning Regulation, the garbage room on each floor must
2
have a minimum floor area of three square meters (3 m ) where non-recyclable and
e
recyclable waste can be stored until collected daily by the building operator. Waste must be
Si
transported in a service left discharge into a designated receptacle within the waste
management.
19.8.5 Recyclable Waste Management Facilities:
1 For all new buildings other than villas, a sorting and storage facility for recyclable materials
must be provided.
2 This facility must be easily accessible and comply with the requirements of the location,
access and specifications of general waste areas in accordance with Qatar Municipality
Building Regulations.
3 The sorting and storage facility may be part of the general waste management facility or a
separate facility.
(a) Recycled waste facility incorporated into the general waste collection:
2
The size of the room must be increased by 10% and not less than 5 m , to allow
additional room to sort and store the recyclable waste.
(b) Recycled waste facility separated from the general waste collection:
The recycled waste facility must be sized as a percentage from the total Built Up Area
(BUA) of the building in accordance with Table 2.
Where the Total Built Up Area (BUA) of the building falls between the figures outlined in the
Table, linear interpolation must be used to determine an appropriate percentage area for the
recyclable storage space.
Table 2: Sizing Requirements for Storage of Recyclables

Built Up Area (BUA) Minimum Space for Storage of Recyclables
2
Less than 500 m2 7.5m
2
500 m 1.5% of BUA
2
1,000 m 0.8% of BUA
2
5,000 m 0.35% of BUA
2
ar
10,000 m or greater 0.25% of BUA
at
19.9 BUILDING FACADE/ EXTERNAL CLADDING MATERIAL -Q
19.9.1 Certification and approval
rd
1 External Cladding material must be tested by an approved 3 party test laboratory. The
LL
manufacturer shall have certified ISO 9000 compliant QMS.

W
2 External Cladding materials that are combustible must be submitted to the Qatar Civil
Defense for review and approval. Submissions shall include copies of relevant test reports
s
and details on the proposed fixings used to secure the material to the building. On approval,
en
a Qatar Civil Defense certificate for the External Cladding material will be issued to the
submitting party.
m
19.9.2 Material properties

e
Si
1 External Cladding Material (ECM) fixed to buildings shall be non-combustible and shall be
composed of environmentally friendly materials and substances.
2 ECM not complying with 19.8.2.1 above must have the following fire propagation and flame
spread properties.
(a) When tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 6:
(i) Fire Propagation index, no greater than 4.0
(ii) any sub index must not be greater than 2.0, and
(b) When tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 7:
(i) flame spread after 10 minutes must be less than 25 mm
3 Alternative test methods and Standards such as AS, BSI and ISO may be used to verify
compliance in test reports provided the method of testing is demonstrated to be equivalent
and verifies an equal or better fire performance result to those nominated in 19.8.2.2 above.
4 Details of the ECM's approval and listings, its method of fixing and the extent of usage shall
be included in the proposed Building Plans fire safety submission for compliance verification.
19.10 EXTERNAL FACADE CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE FOR HIGH RISE

BUILDINGS
19.10.1 General
1. Any building measuring 28 meters or above in height is classified as a high rise building as
per Qatar Civil Defense Department. This section is intended to provide a framework for the
cleaning and maintenance of the façade for high rise buildings. The façade will require both
cleaning and maintenance to achieve its anticipated life and desired purpose. Failure to
undertake this work can considerably reduce the life of materials, components and finishes.
The provision of correct documentation and instruction at the completion of construction will
permit the building owner to gain the best achievable performance from the façade.
19.10.2 Maintenance Manual
1 A maintenance manual should be produced for the completed works. The number and
specific requirements for the manual should be specified at tender stage. The manual should
ar
be developed in parallel with the design and should include, but not be limited to, the
following information:
at
(a) The name, address and telephone number of each firm and/ or sub-contractor
-Q
involved in the supply of materials, components, assemblies and finishes.
(b) A clear and concise description of the construction used to form the various areas of
façade on the particular project.
LL
(c) Copies of material, component and finishes certification and test reports as required
W
by the Specifier.
(d) A method statement showing the means of access to all parts of the wall and safe
s
loadings.
en
(e) A method statement covering the procedures for replacement of damaged or

otherwise defective materials or components, and materials and components that
m
have a design life less than the design of the façade and will therefore require
e
replacement during the life of the façade.

Si
(f) Recommendations for routine maintenance, cleaning, suitable cleaning agents and
any lubrication/adjustments to working parts.
(g) A full set of construction drawings updated to include any changes made up to the
time of completion.
(h) The terms and conditions of any guarantees.
19.10.3 Access of Cleaning and Maintenance
1 The Building Owner/ Specifier should provide a means of access which enables all parts of
the façade to be safely reached for the purpose of cleaning, inspection and maintenance.
The intended method of access should be established at the design stage and the relevant
loads catered for. Particular care should be made to define all possible imposed loads
including impact loads and uplift forces on projections by snagging.
2 The access system should comply with the appropriate British Standards (BS 6037, BS
5974). Specifiers should also make themselves aware of any statutory obligations related to
Occupational Health and Safety at Work.
3 The access system should not be capable of imparting forces upon the cladding system
exceeding those agreed at the design stage. It is important that the various parties agree the
design parameters early in the design process.
4 The access equipment should be maintained, examined periodically by a competent person

and certified in accordance with statutory regulations.
19.10.4 Cleaning
1 The supplier of the façade should provide instruction for the proper cleaning and routine
maintenance of the façade.
2 Cleaning of the façade should be undertaken by trained personnel working to an agreed

procedure, based upon the façade contractor’s recommendations, at a frequency not less
than the recommended intervals.
19.10.5 Inspection
ar
1 The façade should be inspected at regular intervals to an agreed method. The façade
at
contractor, in consultation with the project team, should suggest methods and procedures to
-Q
be utilized. The purpose of this inspection includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the
following:
(a) To review the effectiveness of cleaning methods employed.
LL
(b) To monitor the performance of the materials and components of the façade system
against their anticipated life.
W
(c) Inspecting for damage or failure of any part of the system.

s
(d) Checking on the effectiveness of maintenance or remedial work.

en
2 It is recommended that a detailed inspection plan is drawn up at the time of construction in

m
consultation between the design and construction teams. The inspection plan should include
procedures and recording methods to enable a systematic monitoring of the condition of the
e
Curtain wall and assist in the prediction of the need for preventative maintenance or
Si
replacement of component parts.
3 Inspections should be carried out by suitably experienced persons to the specific procedures
detailed in the inspection plan. The results of these inspections should be compared with
previous inspections where appropriate. The building owner should ensure these results are
available for reference.
19.11 PROVISION OF ABLUTION FACILITIES IN PUBLIC BUILDINGS
1 The public buildings, for the purpose of provision of Ablution facilities are considered to be
Offices, Shopping Centres, Malls and Hypermarkets.
2 The occupant load (population) for each building type shall be calculated as per guidelines of
Qatar Civil Defense Department.
3 Separate Ablution facilities are to be provided for Men and Women close to the Prayer Area.
4 The number of Ablution stalls shall be calculated as per Table 3 below.
Table 3: Provision of Ablution Facility

Facility Type Occupant Population No. of Ablution Stalls
Up to 50 02
Office Building
01
For 51 and above
For each additional 50
Up to 200 02
Shopping Mall
01
For 201 and above
Up to 200 02
Shopping Centre 01
201- 2000 people
Hypermarket For each additional 400
ar
01
For 2001 and above
at
-Q
END OF PART
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 20: Clearance of the Site
20 CLEARANCE OF SITE ............................................................................................ 2

20.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
20.1.1 Scope 2
20.2 FINAL CLEARING ................................................................................................... 2
20.2.1 General 2
20.2.2 Internal and External Surfaces 2
20.2.3 The Site 2
20.2.4 Miscellaneous 3
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
20 CLEARANCE OF SITE
20.1 GENERAL
20.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for the final clearance of the Site.
20.2 FINAL CLEARING
20.2.1 General
1 Final clearing shall be done before the final inspection.
2 All waste materials shall be removed from the Site and disposed of properly.
ar
20.2.2 Internal and External Surfaces
at
1 The Contractor shall clean all interior and external surfaces exposed to view. The Contractor
-Q
shall undertake the following to the satisfaction of the Engineer:
(a) Remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances.

LL
(b) Polish transparent and glossy surfaces.

(c) Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
W
(d) Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces.
s
(e) Broom clean concrete floors and unoccupied spaces.

en
(f) Clean light fixtures and lamps so they operate at maximum efficiency.
(g) Other cleaning tasks as specified by the Engineer.
m
20.2.3 The Site

e
Si
1 The Contractor shall clean the Site and shall undertake the following to the satisfaction of the
Engineer:
(a) Sweep paved areas and rake all other surfaces.

(b) Remove litter and foreign substances.
(c) Remove stains, chemical spills and other foreign deposits.
(d) Any other cleaning tasks as specified by the Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall abide by the latest regulations of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and
Agriculture and relevant municipalities in clearance of construction works refuse.
3 Clearance and transportation of construction works refuse:
(a) The Contractor shall undertake to carry out the following within a maximum period of
30 days after completion of the agreed building or project and preparing it for use or
stoppage of work for an indefinite period.
(i) Removal of the entire Contractor’s equipment, machinery and other belongings
from the work site.
(ii) Clearance of all earth, debris and refuse whatsoever and transporting them to
the location designated by the concerned municipality, delivering the building or
project absolutely clean and free of any such materials and delivery of the
surrounding area levelled to the natural level of the street pavement.
(b) In the case of Contractor’s delay or refusal to carry out such a job, he shall have to pay
a penal compensation as defined in the contract for delay for each day or part of day.
This compensation shall be final and the judiciary shall not be entitled to mitigate it and
it does not require establishing the occurrence of any damage to the owner.
ar
(c) In addition, the Owner shall be entitled to clear the refuse himself and transport it to the
location designated by the concerned municipality. The Owner shall deduct the cost of
at
refuse clearance, transport and any other related costs including the office expenses
-Q
and overhead cost from the payment or the money due to the Contractor. He may also
stop the final payment due to the Contractor until such refuse has been cleared and a
certificate confirming this has been obtained from the concerned Municipality.
LL
20.2.4 Miscellaneous
W
1 The Contractor shall clean or replace all mechanical filters for equipment included in the
Works and for equipment directly affected by the construction of the Works.
s
en
END OF PART
e m
Si
Part 21: Final Inspection and Handover Procedures
21 FINAL INSPECTION AND HANDOVER PROCEDURES .............................. 2
21.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR INSPECTION AND HANDOVER .............. 2

21.1.1 Scope 2
21.1.2 Pre-requisite for Final Inspection 2
21.1.3 Approvals from Public Authorities 3
21.1.4 Hand Over 3
21.2 ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR .................................... 4
21.2.1 Provision of Tools, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 4
21.2.2 Guarantee Warrantees and Bonds 4
21.3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORKS ................................................. 4
21.3.1 Operation Data 4
21.3.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 4
ar
21.3.3 Operational, Field and Performance Testing 5
21.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.............................................................. 5
at
21.4.1 General 5
-Q
21.4.2 Record Drawings 6
21.4.3 Record Specifications 6
21.4.4 Maintenance Period Final Inspection 6
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
21 FINAL INSPECTION AND HANDOVER PROCEDURES

21.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR INSPECTION AND HANDOVER
21.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements and procedures associated with the inspection and
handover of the Works.
2 Related sections and Parts are as follows:

This Section Part 7 Submittals
Part 9 Materials
Part 20 Clearance of Site

Section 9 Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
ar
21.1.2 Pre-requisite for Final Inspection
at
1
-Q
The Contractor shall complete the following to the satisfaction of the Engineer before
requesting the pre-handover Inspection:
(a) Submit final manufacturer certification, guarantees, warranties and similar documents.
LL
(b) Submit occupancy permits, operating certificates, final inspection and test certificates
and similar releases enabling full and unrestricted use of the Works.
W
(c) Submit record drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, final project
photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys and similar physical
s
items.
en
(d) Complete submittal of record documents.

m
(e) Make final changeover of locks and deliver the keys to the Engineer.
e
(f) Complete start-up, testing of system, and training of the Owner’s operations and
Si
maintenance personnel; submit equipment operating data as well as all test reports
and test data required by the Contract.
(g) Dismantle and remove temporary facilities and services from the Site; this includes
utilities, construction tools, buildings and facilities, mock-ups, and similar elements
(h) Complete final cleaning.
(i) Repair and restore exposed finishes which have been marred or otherwise damaged.
(j) Handover all spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment.
(k) In Network Projects, partial handling over would be acceptable, if it completely met all
the above mentioned requirements.
(l) Closure of all identified Non-conformance and deficiencies to the satisfaction of the
Engineer
2 When the Contractor has completed and cleaned the Works to the satisfaction of the
Engineer the Contractor shall request a final inspection. The request shall be forwarded to
the Owner by the Engineer’s Representative and a suitable date for the inspection shall be
arranged. The Contractor, Engineer’s Representative, maintenance department (if any) and
the supervising consultant (if any) shall be present. A list of outstanding items (if any) shall
be agreed and issued to the Contractor.
3 Upon completion of the listed outstanding items a further inspection shall be requested by the
Contractor, the request shall be forwarded to the Owner by the Engineer’s Representative
and a suitable date for the inspection shall be arranged. The Contractor, Engineer’s
Representative, maintenance department (if any) and the supervising consultant (if any) shall
be present.
4 A list of any items still outstanding shall be issued to the Contractor. If any of these are
deemed to be significant the Contractor shall complete these items and then request another
inspection as described in clause 21.1.2-2.
ar
5 In respect of pumping station or Works involving mechanical or electrical equipment if items
outstanding are deemed not to be significant or if no outstanding items remain then a 7 day
at
commissioning and running test shall be initiated. On completion of all tests and agreement
-Q
by the Engineer’s Representative that the plant is considered operable then it shall be
handed over. A 14 day training period for the maintenance department staff on the operation
of the pumping station shall commence.
LL
6 For works that have no mechanical or electrical equipment if the outstanding items are
deemed not to be significant or if no outstanding items remain the Works inspected shall be
W
handed over.
s
21.1.3 Approvals from Public Authorities

en
1 The Contractor shall obtain all clearance certificates and approvals required as a prerequisite
m
to connecting the Works to the permanent water and/or power supply.

e
2 The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Engineer to obtain the necessary documents from
Si
the Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation regarding connection to the permanent
water and/or power supply.
21.1.4 Hand Over
1 When the Contractor considers that the Works are complete he shall submit the following:
(a) A certificate stating that the Works are complete and that all the requirements of the
Project Documentation have been met.
(b) A certificate stating that the Works have been inspected.
(c) A certificate from the appropriate Municipality regarding cleanliness of the Site.
(d) Approval from the PWA regarding satisfactory trench reinstatement in the Highway (if
applicable).
21.2 ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
21.2.1 Provision of Tools, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
1 The Contractor shall provide all tools, spare parts and maintenance materials specified in the
2 The Contractor shall provide an itemised list of all the items to be furnished under this
Clause. Each item to be furnished shall be given a unique reference number. The list shall
include the reference number, a description of the item and the appropriate Specification
Section and Paragraph.
3 All the items furnished under this Clause shall be packaged for long term storage. Any items
requiring special storage conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer.
4 All items furnished under this Clause shall be provided with a mark or tag for identification
purposes. The mark or tag shall include the reference number detailed in Clause 21.2.1-2.
ar
5 Unless otherwise instructed, all items furnished under this Clause shall be delivered to the
at
Government Stores in accordance with the relevant provision of Part 9 of this Section,
-Q
Materials.
21.2.2 Guarantee Warrantees and Bonds

LL
1 The Contractor shall provide notarised copies of all guarantees, warranties and bonds as
required by the Project Documentation. The guarantees, warranties and bonds should be
W
assembled in a binder with a durable plastic cover, complete with a table of contents.
s
2 The start of the warranty or guarantee period shall be either:

en
(a) The date when any item is placed into full time operation for the Government’s benefit
and with the Engineer’s approval.
m
(b) The date of issue of the completion certificate.

e
Si
21.3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORKS
21.3.1 Operation Data
1 The Contractor shall provide all operating data for all mechanical and electrical equipment
supplied under the Contract.
2 The operating data shall be presented on A4 size paper in ring binder with a durable plastic
cover.
21.3.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1 The Contractor shall provide approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance
with the relevant provisions of Section 9, Mechanical and Electrical Equipment and Part 7 of
this Section, Submittals.
21.3.3 Operational, Field and Performance Testing
1 After all construction and starting is complete and before taking-over of any part of the
Works, the Contractor shall perform operational, field and performance tests as called for in
2 The Contractor shall demonstrate operation of the facilities of the Engineer showing proper
sequence of operation as well as satisfactory performance of the system and individual
components. Any improper operation of the system or any improper, neglected or faulty
construction shall be repaired or corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall make such changes, adjustments or replacement of equipment as may be required to
make same comply with the Specifications, or replace any defective parts or material.
3 Failure of the system to perform at the specified level at the time of testing will be the
responsibility of the Contractor. In the event of failure of equipment to meet the specified
performance, the Owner reserves the right to reject such equipment or system, withhold
retention money or make claims on the Performance Bond.
ar
4 The Contractor shall submit a consolidated schedule of operation, field and performance
at
tests no later than three (3) months before the schedule start of the first test and weekly a
-Q
schedule of tests to be carried out the following week. The Contractor shall inform the
Engineer not later than 24 hours in advance of changes in the scheduling of a test.
5 For all specified performance tests, the Contractor shall prepare and submit the following:
LL
(a) A draft test procedure no later than two (2) months in advance of the schedule test
W
date.
(b) A final test procedure no later two (2) weeks in advance of the scheduled test date.
s
(c) A test report within two (2) weeks of the successful completion of the test.
en
21.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

e m
21.4.1 General
Si
1 Project Record Documents shall be kept separate from construction/working documents.
2 Project Record Documents shall be stored in facilities that provide a suitable environment to
prevent damage or deterioration and to prevent loss.
3 Project Record Documents shall include, but not be limited to the following:
(a) Drawings.
(b) Specifications.
(c) Addenda.
(d) Variation orders.
(e) Correspondence.
(f) Transmittals
(g) Inspection and Test Records
21.4.2 Record Drawings
1 Record drawings shall be clearly and correctly “red-marked” by the Contractor to show all
changes made during the construction process. The record drawings shall show the Works
as executed in accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 7 of this Section - Submittals.
21.4.3 Record Specifications
1 Record specifications shall be clearly and correctly annotated to show all changes made
during the construction process.
21.4.4 Maintenance Period Final Inspection
1 During the last month of the period of maintenance the Engineer will notify the maintenance
department that the maintenance period is about to expire. An inspection of the Works by
the Engineer’s Representative, maintenance department, and the Contractor shall be
undertaken to verify that all outstanding items have been completed.
ar
at
END OF PART
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 22: New Technologies and Innovations
22 NEW TECHNOLOGIES AND INNOVATIONS............................................... 2
22.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR APPROVAL............................................... 2

22.1.1 Scope 2
22.1.2 Pre-requisite for Approval 2
22.1.3 Technologies And Innovations Of Interest 2
22.1.4 Documentation 3
22.1.5 Final Inspection And Approval 3
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
22 NEW TECHNOLOGIES AND INNOVATIONS

22.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR APPROVAL
22.1.1 Scope
1 Qatar is committed to researching and using new technology and innovations within
construction industry. Because of this commitment it is open to proposals from outside
agencies in the use of new technologies and innovations.
2 This Part specifies the requirements associated with the proposal and approval of new
technologies and innovations for use in construction in Qatar.
22.1.2 Pre-requisite for Approval
1 New technologies / innovations are allowed for use in any project on experimental or
ar
research basis after getting an approval from National Committee For Construction and
Building materials Specifications (NCCBS) of the Ministry of Environment and any other
at
concerned parties. -Q
2 The period allowed for such an experiment or research shall be limited to a trial period of a
maximum of two years after which it will be evaluated prior to approval or otherwise by the
concerned parties.
LL
3 The supplier will be required to submit a guarantee certificate for an agreed period of time.
W
4 The supplier shall submit a written warranty to bear all fiscal and legal responsibilities as a
result of using the experiment if not meeting the suppliers’ claims/specifications. He shall
s
en
remove any material or debris left from the experiment.
22.1.3 Technologies And Innovations Of Interest

e m
1 The following are of particular interest to Qatar :

Si
(a) Polymer Modified Bitumen (PMB)

(b) Superpave
(c) Performance Grade Binders suitable for the climatic conditions of Qatar (i.e. PG 76-10)
(d) Cold Laid Asphalt
(e) Rubber Recycling
(f) Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA)
(g) Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) pipes
(h) Polyethylene (PE) Plain and Corrugated pipes
(i) Fibre Reinforced Concrete
(j) Recycling of materials from demolished buildings and roads
2 Notwithstanding the above Qatar wishes suppliers to propose technology and innovations
that it believes can benefit Qatar and the environment.
22.1.4 Documentation
1 The technology provider shall be requested to submit with his proposals the following
documents:
(a) Drawings
(b) Specifications
(c) Technology Reference and Manual
(d) Specifications and Source
(e) Reference from previous clients
(f) Transmittals
(g) Inspection and Test Records
(h) Health and Safety requirements
ar
(i) Environmental requirements
(j) Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) regarding but not limited to transportation,
at
handling & storage, and First Aid requirements
-Q
(k) Financial arrangements
LL
22.1.5 Final Inspection And Approval
1 Final approval of the technology will be dependant on NCCBS visits, inspection and tests.
W
Upon satisfaction of the committee, written approval shall be given and the specifications
incorporated into the QCS.
s
en
m
END OF PART
e
Si
Part 23: Design & Supervision Consultant Quality Requirements
23 DESIGN & SUPERVISION CONSULTANT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS................................ 2

23.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
23.1.1 Scope 2
23.1.2 References 2
23.1.3 Definitions 2
23.2 DESIGN CONSULTANT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ............................................ 3
23.2.1 Quality Responsibility and Duties 3
23.2.2 Quality System Documentation 3
23.2.3 Quality Plan 4
23.2.4 Construction Inspection and Test Requirements Specification 5
23.2.5 Design Consultant Verification of Sub Consultants 5
23.2.6 Quality Records 5
23.3 SUPERVISION CONSULTANT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.................................. 5
23.3.1 Quality Responsibilities and Duties 5
ar
23.3.2 Quality System Documentation 7
23.3.3 Quality Plan 8
at
23.3.4 Inspection and Test Plan’s (ITP’S) -Q 9
23.3.5 Technical Procedures, Work Instructions and Method Statements 9
23.3.6 Monitoring by Supervision Consultants 10
23.3.7 Review of Contractor Quality Documentation 10
LL
23.3.8 Inspection Responsibilities 11

23.3.9 Inspections and Test Surveillance Points 11
W
23.3.10 Visits 12
23.3.11 Supervision Consultant Verification 12
s
23.3.12 Interfacing 12
en
23.3.13 Punch Lists 12

23.3.14 Protection of the Works 12
m
23.3.15 Quality Records 12

e
Si
23 DESIGN & SUPERVISION CONSULTANT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

23.1 GENERAL
23.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the Quality Assurance activities to be performed by Design and
Supervision Consultants during all phases of the Contract and should be read in conjunction
with all other parts of the Contract.
2 The purpose of this part is to define Design and Supervision Consultants responsibility for
demonstrating that the work under the contract is executed to the quality standards required
by the contract and to outline verification activities.
23.1.2 References
ar
1 The following standards are referred to in this part:
at
BS EN ISO 9000:2005 Quality Management systems. Fundamentals and vocabulary
BS EN ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management systems. Requirements
-Q
BS ISO 10006:2003 ...Quality Management systems, Guidelines for Quality Management in
Projects
BS ISO 10005:2005 ...Quality Management systems. Guidelines for Quality Plans
LL
BS EN ISO 19011:2011 Guidelines for auditing management systems

W
QCS Qatar Construction Specification
23.1.3 Definitions
s
en
1 Defect or Non-conformance: any part of the Works not executed, provided or completed in
accordance with the Contract. For the avoidance of doubt and without limiting the generality
m
of the expression the term shall be taken to include any item of Plant, material, goods or work
incorporated or used in the Works which does not or may not conform to the relevant quality
e
standards or pass the tests prescribed in or to be inferred from the Contract

Si
2 Owner: The Ministry, Municipality, Department, Affairs, Agency, Authority, or individual for
whom the Project is being undertaken and to whom the handover of the final product will be
made.
3 QA & QC: Quality Assurance & Quality Control and this may be written as QA/QC.
4 QA: Quality Assurance. Part of quality management focused on providing confidence that
quality requirements will be fulfilled. QA involves a continuous evaluation of the adequacy
and effectiveness of the overall Quality Management System in order to evaluate the
deviation from established quality objectives.
5 QC: Quality Control. Part of quality management focused on fulfilling quality requirements.
The QC involves specific control points during design, fabrication or construction stages to
check the fulfilling of design criteria, acceptance criteria (tolerance, etc.), performance criteria
or functional criteria.
6 QMS: Quality Management System. A set of interrelated or interacting processes, activities

or tasks to direct Project resources to achieve established quality policy and objectives.
7 Quality Management: Coordinated activities to direct and control an organization with

regards to quality.
23.2 DESIGN CONSULTANT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
23.2.1 Quality Responsibility and Duties
1 The Design Consultant shall be responsible for setting up implementing and monitoring his
own Contract Specific Quality Management System meeting the requirements of this part.
2 The Design Consultant shall be responsible for quality auditing, monitoring and oversight of
any sub-consultants under their control.
3 The Design Consultant shall perform and or witness any examinations and tests necessary to
ar
demonstrate conformance of the works to the requirements of the Contract and shall accept
at
only works by the Contractor that so conform:
4
-Q
The Design Consultant shall establish and maintain a system of records which shall provide
objectives evidence that the supervision Consultant is meeting the requirements of this
specification and that the Contractors control and inspections are effective in meeting the
LL
minimum standards required under their contract. Records shall be made available to the
Engineer in accordance with the requirements stated herein or elsewhere in the contract.
W
5 The Design Consultant will be subject to monitoring through audit and surveillance by the
Engineer. In both cases the Design Consultant shall promptly rectify any negative findings
s
with their Quality System rectify non-conformities and corrective actions found during audit
en
and surveillance activities directed at them.

m
6 No part of the Quality system shall be used to preclude or otherwise negate the requirement
of any part of the contract, or the obligation of the Design Consultant pursuant to the
e
Contract.
Si
7 The Design Consultant shall appoint a suitably qualified, Quality Manager to verify that the
requirements of this specification are met. The proposed Quality Manager shall be subject to
approval by the Engineer.
23.2.2 Quality System Documentation
1 The Design Consultant Quality system shall Include as a minimum the following
(a) Quality Plan as detailed in 23.2.3 below

(b) Procedures and work instruction: The Design Consultant Quality system must include
all relevant technical procedures and other pertinent documentation to ensure that the
design works are completed in accordance with the contract, with specific reference to
the minimum requirements of standards reference in 23.1.2 above and including the
mandatory procedures required by ISO 9001:2008.
(c) Quality Records: In addition to (and including) quality records identified in the contract
or other applicable codes, standards or procedures, the Design Consultant shall
identify project quality records in compliance with the minimum requirements
standards referenced in 23.1.2 above.
(d) Reference and other related documents.
2 Quality system documents shall be submitted to the owner for review, comment and approval
within 30 days after contract award. In the event that comments are made on the contract
Quality system documentation submitted for review and comment, the design consultant
shall make adjustments, correction, amendment or alteration required. Such comment will be
made on the premise that the adjustment, correction, amendment or alteration is within the
scope of the contract and will not affect the contract conditions, specifications, guarantees,
price or the like in anyway.
3 Adjustments, corrections, amendments or alterations made by the Design Consultant to the

contract quality system shall, after revision be resubmitted by the Design Consultant to the
owner for review and approval.
ar
at
23.2.3 Quality Plan
1
-Q
Design Consultants are required to submit Quality Plan (addressing their design activities)
which are specific (not generic) to the Contract, meeting as a minimum the requirements of
the standards referenced in 23.1.2 above. This plan shall reference, or include other
LL
documentation which is relevant to the Contract. However as a stand-alone document, the

Quality Plan shall clearly indicate how the Quality process shall be applied to meet the
W
requirements of the contract. Particular emphasis is to be placed on the following.
(a) Relevant extracts from the Corporate Quality Manual reference to specifications,
s
standards etc;
en
(b) List of all procedures applicable to the project;

m
(c) QA/QC Organisation;

(d) Document Control;
e
Si
(e) Inspection and Test;

(f) Specific work practices;
(g) List of all procedures applicable to the Consultants Project Quality System;
(h) Audits (including internal and external Audits Plans);
(i) Management Review;
(j) Quality objectives, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)
(k) Allocation of resources;
(l) Responsibilities and authority for all phases of work;
(m) Control of Non-conformance, corrective and preventive actions.
(n) Contract Changes;
(o) Lessons learned and continual improvement;
(p) Purchasing Process e.g. Sub Consultants.
(q) Quality Records
2 The Design Consultants Quality plan will make reference to and take into account applicable
codes, standards, specifications, quality characteristics and regulatory requirements as
necessary. It will identify the criteria by which the design and developments inputs and
outputs should be accepted, and how, at what stage(s) and by whom, the outputs should be
reviewed, verified and validated.
3 The Design Consultants Quality Plan will also state the following.
(a) How request for changes and development will be controlled to meet Contractual
requirements;
(b) Who is authorised to initiate a change request;
(c) How changes will be reviewed in terms of their impact;
(d) Who is authorised to approve or rejects changes;
(e) How the implementation of changes will be verified;
(f) When design and development reviews take place;
ar
23.2.4 Construction Inspection and Test Requirements Specification
at
1
-Q
The Design Consultant shall provide a specification addressing the complete inspection and
testing regime related to their design output, taking into account the requirements of the
QCS. This shall be guiding document by which Supervision Consultants and Contractors will
be held accountable for all on and off site tests and inspections to be performed. The
LL
Inspection and Test Requirements Specifications must be sufficiently detailed to leave no

questions regarding the number of samples required or types of tests to be made over and
W
above the requirements of the QCS and which standards must be complied with.
s
23.2.5 Design Consultant Verification of Sub Consultants

en
1 The Design Consultant is required to perform audits and verification activities at any sub
m
consultants premises to gain assurance that the subcontracted product conforms to specified
requirements.
e
Si
23.2.6 Quality Records
1 In addition to (and including) quality records identified in the contract or other applicable
codes, standards or procedures, the Design Consultant shall determine project Quality
records in compliance with requirements of ISO 9001:2008 and other relevant standards
stated in contract documents and 23.1.2 above.
2 The list of quality records generated during the life of the contract, and made available upon
request for review by the Owner, shall be indexed by the Design Consultant in his Quality
Plan.
3 The Design Consultant shall maintain Registers for all incoming and outgoing documents.
23.3 SUPERVISION CONSULTANT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
23.3.1 Quality Responsibilities and Duties
1 The Supervision Consultant shall be responsible for setting up implementing and monitoring
his own Contract Specific Quality Management System meeting the requirements of this part
2 The Supervision Consultant shall be responsible for quality auditing, monitoring and oversight
of themselves any consultants, contractors, sub-contractors (Including laboratories) under
their control.
3 The Supervision Consultant shall perform and/or witness any examinations and tests
necessary to demonstrate conformance of the works to the requirements of the Contract and
shall accept only works by the Contractor that comply with the specified requirements.
4 The Supervision Consultant shall witness sampling and related testing performed on as well
as testing performed in external Third Party Laboratories.
5 The Supervision Consultant shall establish and maintain a system of records which shall
provide objectives evidence that the supervision Consultant is meeting the requirements of
this specification and that the Contractors control and inspections are effective in meeting the
minimum standards required under their contract. Records shall be made available to the
Engineer in accordance with the requirements stated herein or elsewhere in the contract.
ar
6 The Supervision Consultant will be subject to monitoring through audit and surveillance by
the Engineer. In both cases the Supervision Consultant shall promptly rectify any negative
at
findings with their quality system rectify non-conformities and corrective actions found during
-Q
audit and surveillance activities directed at them.
7 The Supervision Consultants shall follow up on all findings (NCR’s, CAR’s Observations)
issued on the project to, or by the contractor or other entities under the contract.
LL
8 No part of the quality system shall be used to preclude or otherwise negate the requirement
W
of any part of the contract, or the obligation of the Supervision Consultant pursuant to the
Contract.
s
en
9 The Supervision Consultant is responsible for ensuring the contactor’s Work meets all
technical and quality requirements of the contract and shall keep continuous records of
action taken and shall advise the Engineer in writing of significant alteration to construction or
m
manufacturing techniques to ensure that specified requirements are met.

e
Si
10 The Supervision Consultant shall conduct audit and surveillance activities to provide
evidence of the use and effectiveness of the Contractors quality system throughout the
execution of the contract.
11 The Supervision Consultant will ensure that the Contractor has included the quality
assurance requirements of the contract into subcontracts entered into by the Contractor.
12 The Supervision Consultant shall provide an effective audit and surveillance process for
works performed by a Contractor’s Subcontractors..
13 The Supervision Consultant shall verify that the Contractor’s Project Quality Plan, Inspection
and Test Plans and other such quality documentation includes or references the Quality
Plans, and Inspection and Test Plans of subcontractors and vice versa. All of these
documents must be reviewed and approved by the Supervision Consultant.
14 The Supervision Consultant shall hold contract specific QA/QC meetings chaired by the
Consultant on a monthly basis throughout the duration of the Work. Topics to be addressed
at the site quality meeting shall include, but shall not be limited too:
(a) Reviewing of the previous months Quality

(b) Current Performance of the activities
(c) Providing 4 week look ahead of planned activities
(d) Non Conformance of activities
(e) Key performance indicators
(f) Audit schedule
(g) Status of inspection of test plans and method statements
(h) Quality Training
(i) Contractors Project quality plan and quality control plans review and on-going
effectiveness
15 The Supervision Consultant shall be responsible for providing a Monthly Quality Report
template, meeting the Owner requirements, to the Contractor and reviewing the completed
ar
reports submitted by the Contractor.
at
16 The Supervision Consultant shall be responsible for completing any QA/QC Questionnaires
or Reports required by the Owner.
-Q
17 The Supervision Consultant shall appoint a suitably qualified, full time, Quality Manager to
verify that the requirements of this specification are met. The proposed Quality Manager shall
LL
be subject to approval by the Owner.

W
23.3.2 Quality System Documentation
1 The Supervision Consultant Quality System shall include as a minimum the following
s
elements.
en
(a) Quality Plan as detailed in 23.2.3 below

m
(b) Procedures and work instruction: The Supervision Consultant Quality system must
e
include all relevant technical procedures and other pertinent documentation to ensure
Si
that the design works are completed in accordance with the contract, with specific
reference to the minimum requirements of standards reference in 23.1.2 above
including the mandatory procedure required by ISO 9001:2008
(c) Quality Records: In addition to (and including) quality records identified in the contract
or other applicable codes, standards or procedures, the Supervision Consultant shall
identify project quality records in compliance with the minimum requirements
standards referenced in 23.1.2 above
(d) Reference and other related documents
2 These Quality system documents shall be submitted to the Owner for review, comment and
approval within 30 days after contract award. In the event that comments are made on the
contract quality system documentation submitted for review and comment, the Supervision
Consultant shall make adjustments, correction, amendment or alteration required. Such
comment will be made on the premise that the adjustment, correction, amendment or
alteration is within the scope of the contract and will not affect the contract conditions,
specifications, guarantees, price or the like in anyway.
3 Adjustments, corrections, amendments or alterations made by the Supervision Consultant to

the contract quality system shall, after revision be resubmitted by the Supervision Consultant
to the Owner for review and approval.
23.3.3 Quality Plan
1 Supervision Consultants are required to submit Quality Plans (addressing their supervision
activities) which are specific (not generic) to the Contract, meeting as a minimum the
requirements of the standards referenced in 23.1.2 above. This plan shall reference, or
include other documentation which is relevant to the Contract. However as a stand-alone
document, the Quality Plan shall clearly indicate how the Quality process shall be applied to
meet the requirements of the contract. Particular emphasis is to be placed on the following
requirements of ISO 9001:2008.
(a) Relevant extracts from the Corporate Quality Manual reference to specifications,
standards etc;
(b) List of all procedures applicable to the project;
ar
(c) QA/QC Organisation;
at
(d) Document Control; -Q
(e) Inspection and Test;
(f) Specific work practices;
LL
(g) List of all procedures applicable to the Consultants Project Quality System;
(h) Audits (including internal and external Audits Plans);
W
(i) Management Review;

s
(j) Quality objectives, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

en
(k) Allocation of resources;

m
(l) Responsibilities and authority for all phases of work;

e
(m) Control of Non-conformance, corrective and preventive actions.

Si
(n) Contract Changes;

(o) Lessons learned and continual improvement;
(p) Purchasing Process e.g. Sub Consultants.
(q) Quality Records;
2 The Supervision Consultants Quality Plan will make reference to applicable codes,
standards, specifications, quality characteristics and regulatory requirements as appropriate.
It will identify the criteria by which inputs and outputs should be accepted, and how, at what
stage(s), and by whom, the outputs should reviewed, verified and validated.
3 The Supervision Consultants Quality Plan will also address the following:
(a) How request for changes and development will be controlled to meet Contractual
requirements;
(b) Who is authorised to initiate a change request;
(c) How changes will be reviewed in terms of their impact;
(d) Who is authorised to approve or reject changes;

(e) How the implementation of changes will be verified;
(f) When reviews take place;
(g) Redline and As-Built process;
4 Where design is required by the Contractors contract, the Supervision Consultant

responsibilities for the Contractors design work shall be as defined under the contract,
however not withstanding this the Supervision Consultant shall responsible for auditing this
function of the Contractors quality system.
23.3.4 Inspection and Test Plan’s (ITP’S)
1 As per the requirements of QCS, the Supervision Consultants shall require the Contractor to
submit Inspection and Test Plans to the Supervision Consultant a minimum 30 days prior to
the programmed work start date covered by each Inspection and Test Plan.
ar
2 The Minimum requirements for the Contractors Inspection and Test Plan are defined in QCS,
and the supervision Consultant is responsible for ensuring the Contractors Inspection and
at
Test Plan as a minimum meet these requirements or the recommendations of the Design
-Q
Consultants.
3 The Supervision Consultants shall ensure that the Contactors Inspect and Test Plan
LL
adequately cover any Inspections and test points (Hold/Witness/Surveillance/Record Review)

required for the Supervision Consultant to ensure that the works are completed in
accordance with the contract.
W
4 Where the Design Consultant for the Contract has detailed specific specifications or
s
inspection and test requirements, the supervision Consultants shall ensure these have been
en
addressed within the Contractors Inspect and Test Plan. Where a discrepancy exits between
Inspections and Test requirements of the Design Consultant and the requirements of QCS,
m
the more stringent requirements shall be adopted.

e
5 The Supervision Consultant is responsible for reviewing and approving all Inspection and
Si
Test Plans and other such documentation submitted by the Contractor and returning to the
Contractor within two weeks of their receipt unless otherwise agreed.
6 The Supervision Consultant shall ensure that inspection of processes, materials, good,
services and subcontracted works are described in the Inspection and Test plan submitted by
the Contractor.
23.3.5 Technical Procedures, Work Instructions and Method Statements
1 The Supervision Consultants shall verify through audit and surveillance that the Contractor’s
quality system includes all relevant Technical Procedures, Work Instructions Method
Statements and Inspection and Test Plans to ensure that the Works are completed in
accordance with the contract. These shall be submitted by the contractor in accordance with
the submission schedule agreed with the Supervision Consultant including those which form
part of the Contractors Quality System.
2 The Supervision Consultants own Quality system likewise shall include relevant Technical
Procedures, Work Instructions Method Statements and Inspection and Test Plans to ensure
that the works are completed in accordance with the contract with specific reference to the
development and implementation of Quality Procedures specified in ISO 9001:2008. These
shall be submitted to the Owner by the Supervision Consultant in accordance with the
submission schedule agreed with the Owner including those which form part of the
Supervision Consultants corporate quality system.
23.3.6 Monitoring by Supervision Consultants
1 Surveillance by the Supervision Consultants will include a variety of typical activities:
(a) review of contractor documentations

(b) audits of Contractor
(c) attendance at Hold/Witness/Surveillance Points
(d) Record Review
ar
(e) Visits to Contractors off site works etc
at
(f) Factory Acceptance Tests -Q
2 With the exception of visits, these activities will be announced to the Contractors in advance.
The Supervision Consultants shall give reasonable notice to the Contractor who is required to
make or arrange to be made available all facilities, documentations records and personnel,
LL
including those of any subcontractors, which are required for any surveillance activity to be
taken.
W
3 The Supervision Consultants shall advise the Contractor in writing of any deficiency or
s
deviation in the contract quality system which comes to the Supervision Consultant’s
en
attention as a result of surveillance activities. The Contractor shall be required to rectify the
system within as short a period as may be reasonably expected considering the deficiency or
m
deviation. The Supervision Consultant may direct the Contractor in writing to stop the
operation and immediately carry out any corrective action, and the Contractor must comply
e
with such direction at his cost. All deficiencies uncovered shall be documented with a Non-
Si
Conformance Report or Corrective Action Request as appropriate (Refer to QCS, Section 2

for a NCR template).
23.3.7 Review of Contractor Quality Documentation
1 All audits of the Contractor shall be conducted in accordance with a schedule establish by the
Supervision Consultant. These audits are to be performed in accordance with formal
procedures by trained and qualified auditors.
2 The types of audit to be conducted are as follow:
(a) Systems Audit: One System audit will undertaken at or before the start of work on the
contract deliverables (the specified Works). The audit will be conducted against the
requirements of ISO9001:2008
(b) Compliance Audits: A number of compliance audits will be conducted at defined
milestones in the contract deliverable period. The scope of a compliance audit shall be
set by the supervision Consultant to suit the timing of activities, and the findings of the
system audit. For example, the scope of a compliance audit could cover any of the
following:
(i) the complete requirements of the standards and the contract,

(ii) specific elements of the standard
(iii) specific clauses of the contract
(iv) the whole or a part of a single end-to-end process.
(c) Product audit: This is a Quality audit of particular deliverable products to check their
compliance with specified requirements. Such audits should include performance
testing where appropriate.
3 The Audit Notification shall also be copies to the Owner for information and they may attend
these audits as an observes. The Audit Reports shall be submitted to the Owner within 7
days.
23.3.8 Inspection Responsibilities
ar
1 For all work the Supervision Consultant shall:
at
(a) Review and check that the contractors Method statement and Inspection & Test Plans
are in accordance with the contract Surveillance Points.
-Q
(b) Inspect all works to verify Contractors compliance with the Method Statements,
Inspections and Test Plans, Construction Drawings and Specifications.
LL
(c) Verify that notices of nonconformity have been properly actioned.

(d) Oversee the sampling and testing of materials to ensure conformity to the
W
specifications and the contract.

(e) Review all test results and verify that they are in conformity with the Specifications and
s
the Contract.
en
(f) Maintain comprehensive records to verify the above.

m
23.3.9 Inspections and Test Surveillance Points

e
1 The Supervision Consultant shall nominate his own surveillance points to observe the
Si
Contractors and Subcontractors activities and maintain evidence of such surveillance.
(a) Hold Points – Specific critical task in procurement, manufacturing, inspection and
testing for which the Supervision Consultant is pre-notified, in advance of the task and
for which no further work is carried out until the supervision Consultant has verified and
confirmed conformity by signing off the relevant Records Forms
(b) Witness Points- Specific critical task in procurement, manufacturing, inspection and
testing for which the Supervision Consultant is pre-notified in advance of the task and
for which the Supervision Consultant may elect to attend or waive. When attended, the
Supervision Consultant shall confirm conformity by signing off the relevant Record
Forms. When then Supervision Consultant waives his right to inspect, it should be
recorded as such on the appropriate Record Forms.
(c) Surveillance points- Any procurement, manufacturing, inspection and testing task, so
identified on the Inspection and Test Plan, performed on a random basis, without
notification by the supervision Consultant.
(d) Record Review- When specified this point requires the Supervision Consultant to
Collect and review for approval the contractor Inspection & Rest Records.
23.3.10 Visits
1 The Supervision Consultants is empowered to visit any of the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s

work sites for any purpose at reasonable times. The Contractors will assist with such visits
and make available those records and personnel necessary to satisfy the supervision
Consultants requirements. Such visits may include surveillance points identified by the
Contractor and Subcontractors. These visits may include works situated outside of Qatar.
23.3.11 Supervision Consultant Verification
1 The Supervision Consultant has the right to perform verification activities at the Contractor’s
and the Subcontractor’s premises (including the construction site) to gain assurance that the
subcontracted product conforms to specified requirements.
23.3.12 Interfacing
1 The Supervision Consultant is responsible for ensuring that the interfaces between the
ar
contract works and different packages of work and different Contracting entities are managed
appropriately and that technical integrity and configuration control is maintained.
at
23.3.13 Punch Lists
-Q
1 The Supervision Consultants shall be responsible to ensure that the Contractor prepares
punch lists at appropriate inspection and acceptance stages to record the outstanding work.
LL
Defects identified during the punch list walk downs will also require NCR’s to be raised, other
than for minor defects. The Owner or its nominee may at any time add pending items or
W
defects or Nonconformances to Punch Lists.

s
23.3.14 Protection of the Works

en
1 The Supervision Consultant has the responsibility to ensure that the Contractor is taking
m
necessary precautions for the protection of works before the Initial/Final

Acceptance/Handover to owner or its nominee.
e
Si
23.3.15 Quality Records
1 In addition to (and including) quality records identified in the contract or other applicable
codes, standards or procedures, the Supervision Consultant shall determine project Quality
records in compliance with requirements of ISO 9001:2008 and other relevant standards
stated in contract documents and 23.1.2 above.
2 The list of quality records generated during the life of the contract, and made available upon
request for review by the Owner, shall be indexed by the Supervision Consultant in his
Quality Plan.
3 The Supervision Consultant shall maintain Registers for all incoming and outgoing
documents.
END OF PART
Part 24: Construction Dewatering
24 CONSTRUCTION DEWATERING 2
24.1 GENERAL 2
24.1.1 Scope 2
24.2 REQUIREMENTS 2
24.2.1 Current Procedure Requirements 2
24.2.2 Relevant Qatari Laws and Regulations 2
24.2.3 EIA Requirements 3
24.2.4 Air Quality Standards 3
24.2.5 Noise Standards 3
24.2.6 Discharge to Surface and Groundwater Network Standards 3
24.2.7 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) 3
24.2.8 Geotechnical and Geo-Environmental Study Requirements 3
24.2.9 Existing Groundwater Monitoring Documents 4
24.2.10 Risk Assessment of Construction Dewatering 4
24.2.11 Dewatering Monitoring Plan 5
ar
24.2.12 Training Requirements 6
24.3 DEWATERING TECHNIQUES 7
at
24.3.1 Construction Dewatering Methods Guide Lines 7
24.3.2 Sump Pits 8
-Q
24.3.3 Well System 8
24.3.4 Deep Wells 8
24.3.5 Ditches/ French Drains 9
LL
24.3.6 Cut-Off Excavation Barriers 9

24.3.7 Dewatering Effluent Treatment 9
W
24.3.8 Settlement Tank 9

24.3.9 Settlement Tank Types 9
24.3.10 Tank Size 10
s
24.4 OTHER TREATMENT 10

en
24.4.1 Silt and Fine Grained Soils 10

24.4.2 Contamination of Groundwater 12
m
24.5 DISPOSAL OPTIONS 12

24.6 DISCHARGE TO SEA 13
e
24.6.1 Discharge to Sea via Surface and Groundwater Network 13

Si
24.6.2 Direct Discharge to Sea 15

24.6.3 Discharge to Lagoons: 16
24.6.4 Discharge by injection to deep groundwater aquifer (Deep well injection) 17
24.6.5 Groundwater Recycle & Reuse Onsite 18
24.6.6 Integrated Management of Construction Dewatering 19
24.6.7 Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) 19
24.6.8 Monitoring Plan 19
24.6.9 Training Plan 20
24.6.10 Odour Control 20
24.6.11 Health & Safety Considerations 20
24.6.12 Site Investigation 21
24.6.13 Design Considerations 21
24.6.14 Housekeeping Considerations 21
Appendices 22
24 CONSTRUCTION DEWATERING
24.1 GENERAL
24.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the general procedures and requirements for construction dewatering.
2 It should be noted that legislative requirements, standards and requirements detailed in this
Part are minimum standards, and methods should be employed with the intent to continually
improve on these standards.

Section 8 Earthworks
ar
24.2 REQUIREMENTS
at
24.2.1 Current Procedure Requirements
-Q
1 There are four types of construction dewatering disposal options that require licensing in
Qatar, as follows:
LL
(a) Discharge to the Sea via surface and groundwater network; the licensing authority
should be ASHGHAL and MOE.
W
(b) Direct discharge to the Sea; if the discharge is pumped directly to the sea, then the
Ministry of Environment (MOE) should be the licensing authority.
s
en
(i) Discharge to Lagoon totally covered with geotextile from all sides. This method
of disposal requires a license from MOE.
m
(ii) Discharge to Lagoon not covered. This method of disposal requires a license
e
from MOE.
Si
(c) Discharge through Deep Well Injection. This method of disposal requires a license
from MOE.
24.2.2 Relevant Qatari Laws and Regulations
1 The list of parameters required by MoE for dewatering permit is included in Appendix A
together with Annex 4 of Law 30 of 2002 which specifies the limits for the discharged water
into the marine environment (refer to Appendix A). The annex controls the parameters of
pollutants in the water disposed to the marine environment whether via the Surface and
Groundwater Network, or direct discharge to the sea.
2 If the construction dewatering effluent is discharged to foul network, the discharging party is
liable to having committed a criminal offence.
3 In the case of illegal discharge to Surface and Groundwater Network, the discharging party
will be subjected to legal actions taken by the licensing authorities.
24.2.3 EIA Requirements
1 Environmental approvals from the MoE as per Article 7 of the Law No. 30 of 2002.
24.2.4 Air Quality Standards
1 The air quality standards are controlled by the Law No. 30 of 2002 under Annex (3/First).The
standards applicable to dewatering activities may include the following:
2 Maximum limits (of air pollutants) allowed for emissions from the movable sources; and
Ambient air quality standards.
24.2.5 Noise Standards
1 The noise levels are also controlled by the Qatari Legislation under Law No. 30 of 2002
Annex (2/Fifth).
ar
24.2.6 Discharge to Surface and Groundwater Network Standards
at
1 Executive Bylaws of Environment Protection Law Issued under Ordinance Law No. (30) Of
2002. Annex No. (4) Criteria and Specifications of the Hazardous Materials when disposed
-Q
of in the Water Environments (MoE regulations).
24.2.7 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)

LL
1 For projects requiring an EIA at the design stage, the EIA should be carefully reviewed by
W
the Design Consultant / Contractor. The EIA should be forwarded to MoE for their approval
and for issuing the relevant Environmental Permit.
s
en
2 Where available, the EIA will contain details of geotechnical surveys including groundwater,
adopted from the previously mentioned report.
m
3 Although the EIA may not directly contribute to the construction dewatering design, it will
e
document possible contamination in the area and environmental constraints, and should
Si
therefore be considered when preparing construction dewatering application papers. Existing

contamination, or potential for contamination, should be carefully considered and must be
taken into account when dewatered groundwater is tested for compliance.
4 To ensure that dewatering systems are designed to maximise environmental protection and
to assist in expediting license approval processes, the above investigations shall be taken
into consideration as early in the project as possible and included when applying for the
discharge permit.
24.2.8 Geotechnical and Geo-Environmental Study Requirements
1 After the awarding of the Contract to the Contractor and prior to obtaining the discharge
permit, if required by the Contract or requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry
out a geotechnical and geo-environmental investigations in order to confirm the geotechnical
and environmental conditions on site and groundwater levels.
2 The geotechnical and geo-environmental study must as a minimum identify soil types,
permeability, groundwater hydrology, and the required drawdown for the construction
activities. This study is required if the area is suspected for contamination or if the EIA at the
design stage has indicated the existence of contamination.
3 The output of the geotechnical and geo-environmental study should include as a minimum
the following items:
(a) Time required for construction dewatering.
(b) Flow rate of the dewatering discharge.
(c) Required drawdown.
(d) Method of construction dewatering based on all of the above findings.
4 To assist in the approval process all of the above information must be provided in the
application for discharge.
ar
5 It is important to note that the requirements of the Geotechnical and Geo-environmental
study are completely subject to project settings, type of contamination, and MoE’s specific
at
requirements of each project. -Q
24.2.9 Existing Groundwater Monitoring Documents
1 It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure he has been providing the latest existing
LL
groundwater level information from Ashghal and the MoE. This information should be used
by the Contractor to assist in determining the current site conditions.
W
2 All groundwater information gathered during studies by the Contractor, are to be submitted to
s
Ashghal for reference and inclusion in the country database. The collection of this
en
information is paramount to the continuous improvement of government information

databases.
m
24.2.10 Risk Assessment of Construction Dewatering

e
Si
1 It is important to note that risks are site specific and depend on the intent of the Contractor.
The Contractor is responsible for developing, implementing and managing a Risk
Management System and conducting a Risk Assessment in terms of dewatering activities
and otherwise onsite.
2 This Risk Management System and Risk Assessment shall be the submitted to the Engineer
for the approval within the 30 days of the contract award.
3 Risk assessment in this instance can be defined as the identification and characterisation of
the nature of existing and potential adverse effects to humans and the environment resulting
from dewatering activities employed on site.
4 Risk is a function of the probability of an event occurring and the degree of damage that
would result should it happen.
5 Details and information gathered during the concept design and associated site studies
(geotechnical, groundwater & environmental) are needed to assess the risks associated with
the proposed activities. The assessment allows significant risks to be identified so that they
can be targeted for action.
6 The initial risk assessment needs to also be regularly reviewed and will become an integral
part of the Construction Environmental Management Plan. This includes a review of existing
risks and the identification of new risks detected through the surveillance or the monitoring
program.
7 To conduct the Risk Assessment the Contractor should undertake the following key steps:
(a) Information gathering:
A risk assessment requires information about site conditions.

(b) Risk identification:
Hazard identification involves the identification of risks/hazards that could lead to an

adverse effect on the receiving environment and/or health & safety.
(c) Risk analysis:
ar
Risk analysis considers the likelihood of the risk being realised.
(d) Consequence analysis:
at
-Q
Consequence analysis determines the effect on the environment and health & safety
should a risk be realised.
8 The overall risk is a function of the likelihood of the activity or event causing environmental
LL
harm or impacting on health & safety and the consequence should that risk be realised.
W
9 The risks are then ranked according to their magnitude and mitigation strategies developed.
s
10 The objective of this process is to identify and rank all potential risks that may arise from the
en
dewatering of the construction site and then reduce risks to acceptable levels by
implementing a suitable method of dewatering and/or action plan.
m
11 Risks generally associated with dewatering activities onsite include but not limited to the
e
following:
Si
(a) Soil and slope stability and soil erosion due to dewatering activities.
(b) Soil contamination. Whether contamination exists in the project area prior to
commencement of construction or is caused by dewatering activities.
(c) Change of groundwater properties due to dewatering practices.
(d) Excessive abstraction (dewatering) of groundwater which affects nearby groundwater
related activities.
(e) Health and safety related issues.
(f) Risks associated with impacts of dewatering activities on surrounding environment
and sensitive receptors.
(g) Risks associated with failure of dewatering system and/or disposal methods.
24.2.11 Dewatering Monitoring Plan
1 When dewatering activities are included within the project site, the Contractor shall prepare a
Dewatering Monitoring Plan as detailed below.
2 The Dewatering Monitoring Plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within 30
days of contract award.
3 The monitoring plan will assist the licensing authority, as well as the Contractor, in keeping
track of dewatering activities onsite, and identify corrective actions to be carried out.
4 The monitoring plan can also assist in identifying liability issues concerned with reported
dewatering problems and accidents.
5 Outline and components of monitoring plan are as follow:

(a) Identification of opportunities to reuse the dewatering effluent onsite in order to reduce
the amount of disposed effluent.
(b) Dewatering techniques being employed on site
(c) Disposal methods employed on-site and relevant monitoring plan to ensure
compliance with discharge limits.
ar
(d) Copy of discharge limits.
at
(e) Roles and responsibilities of the Environmental Advisor on site.
6
-Q
Roles and responsibilities have to be clearly defined when designing a dewatering system.
These roles and responsibilities are to be submitted as an essential element to satisfy the
Construction Environmental Management Plan requirements when applying for the
LL
dewatering effluent discharge permit.

W
7 Refer to Appendix B for an example of inspection sheet for the dewatering process.
24.2.12 Training Requirements

s
en
1 The Contractor shall prepare a Construction Dewatering Training Plan submitted along with
the necessary documentation for a discharge permit.
m
2 The construction dewatering training plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
e
within 30 days of contract award.

Si
3 The training plan will assist the licensing authority in evaluating the level of knowledge
passed on to the Contractor’s staff, and is therefore an indirect indication on how well the
dewatering process is being executed. The components of the submitted training plan are
detailed below.
4 The integration of construction dewatering training into the Training Plan of the Contractor is
essential to introduce all staff to construction dewatering related information.
5 It is recommended that information on dewatering equipment and related emergencies are

included in the training provided to staff entering or working on the site.
6 The training for all staff does not have to be comprehensive; however, it should include basic
items such as:
(a) Brief explanation of the construction dewatering purpose
(b) Introduction to the dewatering equipment. Inclusion of photos in the training
presentation.
(c) Health and safety related concerns, education on related emergencies, and contact
information of person in charge of dewatering to be provided in the presentation.
24.3 DEWATERING TECHNIQUES
24.3.1 Construction Dewatering Methods Guide Lines
1 The design of effective construction dewatering methods should be based on a number of

information sources:
(a) Geotechnical and groundwater site investigations undertaken at the commencement
of any project;
(b) Information provided by any geotechnical study undertaken during the concept design
stage[if applicable];
(c) Groundwater information sourced from relevant authorities; and,
(d) A site risk assessments.
ar
2 The Contractors choice of dewatering method will depend primarily on the soil type and
at
permeability and the amount of groundwater to be removed. Whilst the Contractor will be
-Q
trying to find the most cost effective method of dewatering (based on the geotechnical report)
he shall implement the most effective dewatering method which minimises environmental
damage, protects the health & safety of on-site personnel and meets all legislative discharge
LL
limits.
3 It is important to note that if contamination exists in the area all precautions need to be
W
implemented. Contamination will be dealt with in coordination with MoE by safe disposal in
designated areas as per the Environmental Law number 30 for 2002.
s
en
4 The figure below demonstrates the range of common dewatering techniques, whilst
accounting for soil permeability and drawdown.
e m
Si
Range of Application of Pumped Well Groundwater Control Techniques

** Source: Preene, M. Roberts, T. Powrie, W. Dyer, M R (2000)- Groundwater Control Design &
Practice (CIRIA C515), London, CIRIA.
5 As seen in the above figure, the choice of dewatering method depends on the required
drawdown and permeability. The drawdown is determined during the design stage of
structures and the groundwater investigation stage at the start of the project and the
permeability is tested during the geotechnical investigation stage.
6 After the drawdown is determined, the Contractor shall choose the method of dewatering
based on the permeability of soil. The method can vary during the stages of the project
depending on the required drawdown. The shaded areas near the methods’ boundaries
indicate that the choices can overlap, and then the Contractor can decide between the two
(or more) options.
7 Filtering and filling materials of aggregate is required by most dewatering methods.

Therefore when required, aggregates to be used shall be free draining, washed and free of
debris (organic or non-organic). Preference is for a single sized aggregate (less than 10%
fines).
8 Whilst the range of dewatering practices varies across sites depending on their size,
ar
construction depth and site conditions, the most commonly used methods of dewatering in
Qatar are indicated below. Each method’s use depends on the requirements and stage of
at
project. -Q
24.3.2 Sump Pits
LL
1 The Sump Pit method is the simplest form of dewatering system on a construction site.
Sump pits are generally utilised as a quick, least cost, solution and can be seen to be used
at the start of projects as the excavation stage commences. Provided with an aggregate
W
lining, as per O&M requirements, sump pits can be an effective means of filtering
groundwater, unless the groundwater has come into contact with silt and/or limestone, which
s
usually results in reported high turbidity.

en
2 If soil has silty characteristics; it is recommended that proper installation of geotextile and
m
aggregates in sump pits be implemented in order to improve the quality of dewatering

effluent and significantly decrease turbidity.
e
Si
24.3.3 Well System
1 The most common practice of dewatering used in Qatar is the implementation of a Well
System. Wells are systematically drilled around the construction area and submersible
pumps placed into these wells. This practice appears to work effectively for many projects,
especially those building projects that require excavations for deep basements.
24.3.4 Deep Wells
1 Deep wells are rarely used in Qatar. Deep wells are usually equipped with filter packs &
submersible pumps, and are operated using a control cabin.
2 Although not found to be present in Qatar at present, deep wells have unlimited drawdown,
they require a minimum spacing of 10 meters, and have far greater efficiency.
24.3.5 Ditches/ French Drains
1 Ditches and French drains (commonly known as trenches in construction projects in Qatar)
are also used on Qatar’s construction sites. The ditches are formed in a pre-planned
manner, allowing groundwater flow to surface in the deeper level trenches. Perforated pipes
are then placed in the trenches, and groundwater extracted through these pipelines to be
filtered. These trenches were particularly common in infrastructure network projects.
2 Graded aggregates and geotextile layer to be used when laying out the pipelines.
24.3.6 Cut-Off Excavation Barriers
1 Cut Off barriers are designed to limit and/or control groundwater entering the construction
site from a neighbouring property. An assessment of groundwater infiltration is required to
determine to what extent barriers are required and how they are constructed.
2 Commonly used excavation barriers in Qatar include structural concrete walls and secant
ar
piles. Both techniques are applicable to most types of soil and provide slope stability for
deep excavated areas.
at
24.3.7 Dewatering Effluent Treatment
-Q
24.3.8 Settlement Tank
LL
1 The settlement tank is the most common and most effective methods of treatment in Qatar.
The settlement tank is primarily used to maximise the distance that the effluent has to travel
W
prior to reaching the discharge point, and therefore increasing the settlement efficiency.
s
2 All projects in Qatar which apply for a discharge permit are obligated to provide a settlement
en
tank.
3 When choosing the settlement tank, the choice should be based on the following factors:
m
(a) The type of soil to be dewatered.

e
Si
(b) Flow rate quantity and frequency.

(c) Possible peak factors flows.
(d) Retention time required for solids to settle. This will also be based on the soil type.
24.3.9 Settlement Tank Types
1 The common types of weir tanks used are Regular tank and V-notch tanks (30°, 60°, and
90°). The V-notch tanks serve to accelerate the passing of the effluent through the tank.
2 For safety purposes, it is recommended that tanks be suitably covered with a top cover or
specific lid, to ensure unauthorised access is not permitted.
3 It is important to note that sometimes these tanks are used onsite as a discharge tanks.
Therefore, it is important that tanks are used as settlement tanks and be marked clearly as
such.
24.3.10 Tank Size
1 In order to make a decision on the tank size, the volume of tank are to be estimated as per
the below equations.
2 The volumes calculated depend primarily on the retention time of water in the tank, and the
flow rate of discharge.
Equation
3
V: Volume (m )
3
Tank volume V=Qt Q: Expected flow rate (m /hour)
t: retention period (hour)
d: depth (m)
3
The tank's depth d = V/A V: volume(m )
2
A: surface area(m )
ar
3 It is important to note that these equations are to be used as a guide only, but do provide a
at
basis for calculating the minimum tank size required based on the flow rate provided by the
-Q
Contractor.
4 For fine grained type of soils, it is preferred to have secondary methods of treatment as
detailed below.
LL
24.4 OTHER TREATMENT

W
24.4.1 Silt and Fine Grained Soils

s
en
1 For the removal of silt and fine grained suspended particles, the following inexpensive
methods can be effectively applied:
m
(a) Dewatering Tank:

e
a dewatering tank can remove sediment (sand, silt, and visible oil). The dewatering
Si
tank is equipped with a fabric filter. The flow passes through the filter before being
discharged at the bottom end of the tank. The tank can be used in addition to the weir
tank or any other treatment method. It is portable, inexpensive and many types of filter
clothes can be used.
Yet, the dewatering tanks should be subjected to periodic cleaning based on the visual
inspection or reduced flow, through lifting the sand and silt from the tank.
(b) Gravity Bag Filter:
(Also known as dewatering bag) is made of geotextile fabric that can filter out silt and
fine grained soil particles. This filter is easy to install, inexpensive, and becomes more
effective as sediment builds up inside the bag. The type of bag should be selected
based on the flow rates of discharge and permeability of soil.
This method is to be used as a secondary treatment for groundwater. It requires

continuous monitoring to avoid hose failure, particularly if sediment builds up in a
manner that interferes with the acquisition of a reasonable flow rate discharge.
The Gravity Bag Filter does not require cleaning, as it is a disposable filter. The filter is
to be disposed of in accordance with the waste management guidelines of the project.
The filter is to be replaced when it starts passing solids, or blocks the passing of water
at a rate that is adequate.
(c) Slurry Water
“The drilling [slurry] muds containing substantial quantities of organic liquids and
water-soluble salts are treated to render them environmentally acceptable for
disposal” (C M Wilwerding 1989)
Slurry water occurrence is common during dewatering processes in Qatar. While there
is filtration equipment and water treatment technology available to treat slurry water,
these are best used in countries with a different climate to that of Qatar’s.
2 The best option for treating slurry by filtration is using a Centrifugal Filter. However, as
previously mentioned, this is not a preferable to be used in Qatar as slurry can be dried
ar
easily in a more environmentally friendly manner.
at
3 It is also important to note that even when treatment equipment is used, the resulting silt will
have to be disposed at a licensed landfill, along with having to dispose of the equipment at
-Q
its end of service life.
4 If the silt contains hazardous material, then a license should be issued from MoE as per the
LL
procedures detailed in Annex (7.2) of the Qatari Law of Environment (Copy of the
procedures together with the form of application is provided in Appendix (C)). And if the silt
W
has no hazardous materials then the license shall be issued from the concerned
Municipality.
s
5 To eliminate the issues with incompatible equipment and hot climates, it is recommended
en
that treatment methods be designed to manage the slurry either onsite by drying the first
instance before transfer to landfill, or by transfer to the landfill directly.
e m
6 The conventional drying process comprises laying out of slurry mud on an air permeable
Si
drying bed lined with suitable material.
7 The drying process must commit to the following environmental considerations:

(a) Amount of slurry generated must not exceed the capacity of the spreading system.
(b) Drying process must not impose nuisance or emit odor.
(c) Drying process must not impose health and safety risks.
8 The choice of drying process, whether by using a centrifuge machine or a drying lagoon is
subject to project settings and expected amount of slurry to be generated.
9 The slurry handling process is to be submitted with the dewatering permit application if
generation of slurry is expected to occur.
24.4.2 Contamination of Groundwater
1 In the event of discovering the contamination of the receiving environment such as

groundwater by dewatering effluent, the contractor is obligated to report the discovery to the
licensing authority (ASHGHAL, MoE) and the effluent is to be dealt with as per the
construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP). Samples of groundwater should be
taken and tested. Reasonable suspicion can be established by one of the following
methods:
(a) Possible history of contamination in the area; such as prior land use (eg. petrol
station), or the area is known to have septic tank issues.
(b) EIA: if there is an EIA prepared for the project, it should be reviewed and approved by
MoE in order to eliminate the possibility of contamination. If the EIA indicates the
presence of contamination, the Contractor is obligated to report the findings to MoE for
their feedback, and test for the type of contamination detected in the EIA.
(c) The Contractor shall use the following Water Quality Assessment to establish the
ar
possibility of contamination in the area.
at
Water Quality Assessment
-Q
The following questions provide n initial assessment of the quality of the water to be
discharged from the dewatering operation.
LL
1. Review the project records. Is there any reason to suspect that the
water may be polluted by something other than sediment?
Common
W
No Yes
Sense Test
2. Is the water located in an area of known contamination?
No Yes
s
Does the water have an abnormal visual feature, such as: (circle)
en
Sight Test Oily Sheen, Floating Foam, Murky Appearance, Unusual

Colour Other
m
Does the water have an odor? No Yes

e
Smell Test Possible odors include gasoline, petroleum, ammonia, sewage,

etc.
Si
If you answered YES to any of the above questions, explain:

If you answered YES to any of the questions in the assessment or suspect that the
water contains pollutants other than sediments, contact the Engineer for assistance
with additional testing and management options.
Water Quality Assessments

** Adapted from Source: The office of Environmental Engineering, California Department of
Transportation (Caltrans), Field Guide to Construction Site Dewatering, USA, 2001.
In the event of discovering groundwater contamination, the Contractor is obligated to report the
discovery to the Engineer and Licensing Authority (MOE / ASHGHAL) and the effluent is to be dealt
with as per the Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP), or as directed by the
Engineer.
24.5 DISPOSAL OPTIONS
1 Qatar construction sites use four (4) common means of disposal, namely:
(a) Discharge to sea via the Surface and Groundwater Network;
(b) Direct Discharge to the sea;

(c) (A) Discharge to lagoon totally covered by geotextile from all sides;
(B) Discharge to lagoon not covered, and;
(d) Discharge by injection to deep groundwater aquifer (Deep well injection).
2 The following section discusses the options available in Qatar in terms of dewatering effluent
disposal, and describes the best option depending on the circumstances of the project.
24.6 DISCHARGE TO SEA
24.6.1 Discharge to Sea via Surface and Groundwater Network
1 Disposal of dewatering effluent to the Surface and Groundwater Network is the most
common practice in Qatar. The Surface and Groundwater Network eventually leads to
outfalls that discharge to Sea.
ar
2 The disposal to the network directly via pipelines, or via tankers, depends on the availability
at
of Surface and Groundwater Network in the project area.
-Q
3 The Surface and Groundwater Network is an acceptable option for disposal given that
Contractor is also reusing the effluent on site whenever possible.
LL
4 If a Contractor chooses to discharge to the Surface and Groundwater Network, obtaining a

license from ASHGHAL is required to allow the discharge of groundwater to the Surface and
W
Groundwater Network. A license from the Ministry of Environment is also required through
the submission of an Environmental Permit Application.
s
5 Measurements of flow rates must be undertaken in order to monitor the discharge flow and
en
ensure that it is within the limits provided to the licensing authority (refer Appendix A for
discharge limits).
e m
6 The Contractor must provide the licensing authority with the maximum expected flow rate (i.e
the peak flow) and the expected average flow rate, in order to avoid back flooding when
Si
flows exceed the capacity of the manhole assigned to the Contractor. Therefore, the
contractor should install a flow meter at the construction site in order to measure the
quantities of groundwater flow.
7 The Contractor should also notify the licensing authority if peak flows are expected to be
reached frequently during the winter season, particularly when heavy rain is forecast, so as
to avoid penalties if the manhole back floods.
8 If a Contractor is operating from an area which is not served by a Surface and Groundwater
Network, and determines that the most cost effective solution is to use tankers to transport
dewatering effluent to the nearest assigned manhole, the Contractor is then obligated to
provide a brief statement demonstrating the traffic impacts caused by their tankers.
9 If the resultant traffic impact proves to be significant, the Contractor is either to consider
other options of disposal, or retain dewatering effluent onsite and then transport the effluent
when traffic is less congested, therefore minimising traffic impacts.
10 In the event that tankers are used to transport dewatering effluent, in order to monitor
discharge to Surface and Groundwater Network the Contractor must record all particulars
associated with its removal, such as:
(a) Installing a flow meter at the construction site in order to measure the quantities of
groundwater flow.
(b) Record of tankers coming to and leaving the site (eg. registration plate no., capacity,
records of water quality)
(c) Volumes of effluent transported.
11 The recording of tanker movements is in addition to the installation of a meter on the

weir/sediment tank.
12 When applying for the discharge permit the following documents are required:
(a) Official letter from the company addressed to: The Manager of Drainage Networks
O&M Dept- Asset Affairs- ASHGHAL. (Includes start and end date of dewatering
ar
works & method of statement for dewatering).
at
(b) Application form for pumping groundwater to be filled and stamped.
(c) Copy of building permit.
-Q
(d) Copy of the site map.
(e) Copy of ID card of the applicant’s engineer.
LL
(f) Copy of the registration company.

W
(g) Copy of Road Opening (RO) Permit.

(h) Copy of Traffic Department Approval, as part of the RO Permit
s
en
(i) Testing of samples, and conformation of compliant results prior to obtaining the two-
month permit. The Contractor must note that the sample testing is to be carried out
m
after obtaining the five-day temporary permit, and is to be submitted after the previous
requirements are submitted and a temporary permit is granted.
e
Si
13 Once the application is submitted, the project is given a reference number which includes a
serial number, type of discharge (e.g groundwater) and the date of application. Drawing and
comments are then returned to the applicant for information and/or action and the applicant
will be advised the applicable disposal option and a manhole to be assigned for the
discharge.
14 The applicant is issued a temporary permit for five days. The purpose of the temporary
permit is to allow the applicant to obtain approvals from the concerned authorities, and install
the equipment in order to take water samples.
15 During the temporary dewatering permit; only discharge is allowed for collecting samples
and to proceed with other department requirements. All samples are taken by laboratory
representative from the list of laboratories approved by ASHGHAL and MOE; it’s prohibited
for samples to be taken by the Contractor. The collected samples should be tested for Total
Suspended Solids (TSS, turbidity and the short list of parameters included in Appendix A.
Test results should be uploaded online to QSD by the laboratory. Yet, it should be
highlighted here that any testing activities are not only limited to the parameters provided on
the short list developed by QSD; it should also cover the list of parameters required by MOE
for dewatering permit. Approval is then granted if the test results meet the requirements of
discharge. The Quality Limits are attached in Appendix A.
16 If the installation requires a road crossing, a RO permit is required. If not, a RO is not

required. The applicant must obtain a license from the concerned authorities for installation
of all tanks and hoses.
17 Following the issuance of the permit, regular inspections by the O&M staff are carried out.
The Contractor is then required to undertake weekly laboratory tests for TSS and turbidity of
ar
effluent samples, and bi-monthly tests prior to renewing the permit. Permit renewal request
at
should be submitted in 7 days advance before expiry day of the previous permit. The bi-
monthly tests are for TSS, turbidity and the short list of parameters included in Appendix A
-Q
together with the parameters listed under Annex (4) of the law of Environment number
30/2002.
LL
18 A copy of the Permitting Application and pro-forms are attached in Appendix C.
19 Refer to Appendix D for a flowchart of the permitting procedure for the discharge to sea via
W
Surface and Groundwater network.

s
24.6.2 Direct Discharge to Sea

en
1 MOE is the licensing authority for discharging dewatering effluent direct to the Sea.
m
2 If a Contractor found that the applicable option for dewatering is the direct discharge to sea,
e
a secondary method of treatment must be installed to allow the dewatering effluent to settle
Si
before reaching the discharge outfall point. The discharge to the outfall point is achieved
through the use of pipelines or transportation via tankers. Based on the number of tankers,
the transportation may be subjected to a traffic impact assessment study based on the
requirements of MOE.
3 The Contractor may therefore be subject to a number of pertinent laws and regulations:
4 When issuing direct sea discharge permits, MOE have the following concerns that need to
be addressed as per Annex 4 of the Qatari Law of Environment and the list of parameters
required by MOE for dewatering permit (included in Appendix A), which includes the test of
the following parameters:
(a) Bacterial counts
(b) Turbidity and TSS levels
(c) Presence of Petroleum compounds.
(d) Presence of heavy metals.
(e) Others, as per MoE requirements.
5 Refer to Appendix D for a flowchart of the permitting procedure for the direct discharge to
sea. A copy of the environmental permit application form is included in Appendix E.
6 For more information, contact MoE on:

Telephone +974 4420 7777
Fax + 974 4420 7000
Email Responsibility@moe.gov.qa
24.6.3 Discharge to Lagoons:
A. Discharge to Lagoon totally covered with geotextile from all sides
1 Lagoons are licensed by MOE.
2 It is recommended that a lagoon totally covered with geotextile from all sides, formed in a
depressive area, is used in locations where it is logistically impossible or cost and socially
ar
prohibitive to deliver effluent to the Surface and Groundwater Network using other means.
at
3 If Contractor chooses to discharge the dewatering effluent to a lagoon, license is given by
-Q
MOE. The dewatering to lagoons is mainly based on the requirements by MOE which is
given for case by case. The use of this option is depending on the water quality. Yet, the
general requirements of MOE can be summarised in the following information:
LL
(a) Dewatering effluent quantity.

W
(b) Detailed Engineering drawings for the lagoon showing the geotextile lining of the
lagoon.
s
(c) Duration of dewatering discharge

en
(d) Dewatering effluent quality. Dewatering effluent quality is tested initially against the list
of parameters required by MoE for dewatering permit (included in Appendix A). And
m
then tested weekly. Monthly testing is also required for selected parameters.
e
(e) Coordinates of lagoon, inclusive of dewatering discharge points.

Si
(f) Location map

(g) Others, as per MOE requirements.
4 Refer to Appendix D for a flowchart of the permitting procedure for the discharge through
the use of lagoons. A copy of the environmental permit application form is included in
Appendix E.
5 For more information, contact MOE on:

Telephone +974 4420 7777
Fax + 974 4420 7000
B. Discharge to Lagoon not covered
6 The discharge to a logon which is not covered is depending on the discharged water quality.
Similar to the above option, the licensing authority for this option is the Ministry of
Environment. The list of parameters required by MOE for dewatering permit is included in
Appendix A. The general requirements of MOE are similar to the above option.
7 Refer to Appendix C for a flowchart of the permitting procedure for the discharge through
the use of lagoons. A copy of the environmental permit application form is included in
Appendix E.
8 For more information, contact MOE on:

Telephone +974 4420 7777
Fax + 974 4420 7000
ar
24.6.4 Discharge by injection to deep groundwater aquifer (Deep well injection)
at
1 Disposal by injection to groundwater aquifer is a common method in Qatar to dispose of
-Q
treated effluent of sewage treatment plants. Yet, the use of deep well injection for the
discharge of dewatering effluent to groundwater aquifer is also done in few big projects.
LL
2 However and prior to the discharge to the deep well, a careful assessment of geological
conditions must be conducted in order to determine the suitable depth and location of porous
W
aquifer reservoirs and identifying the safe rate of injection to the deep aquifer. Generally, the
depth of the deep well should not be less than 400 – 600 m deep, which is the expected
depth of Umm Er Radhumma (UER) aquifer.
s
en
3 In all cases, MOE require the contractor to conduct an Environmental Assessment for the
impact from the project as soon as drilling of the deep well and the analysis of the samples is
m
achieved. This shall be done by a qualified consultant with previous experience in similar
e
projects.
Si
4 The general requirements of MOE for the use of the deep well injection can be summarised
in the following information:
(a) Duration of dewatering discharge.
(b) Dewatering effluent quality. Dewatering effluent quality is tested initially against the
parameters specified in the standards for the water use for irrigation purpose of the
Qatari Law of Environment. And then periodically testing each week based on MoE
requirements.
(c) The parameters required for the physical, chemical, biological, microbiological
analysis includes but not limited to: EC, Temperature, DO, pH, Turbidity, FRC, TPH,
O&G, Sulphide, Metals, BOD, COD, TOC, surfactants, VOC, BETX, TDS, TSS, PAHs,
TAlk, Nitrate, Nitrite, Ammonia, TKN, Phosphorus, Chloride, Sodium, Sulphite, Total
Phenol, Carbonate, E-Coli, Faecal Coliform, Bacteria and SAR.
(d) A0 design map for the whole project including the location of the injection well and
network of shallow trenches connecting the wells.
(e) Comparison study between the use of the shallow networking and the perforated
pipelines.
(f) Drilling of monitoring wells to suitable depth to monitor the impact on the shallow
aquifer.
(g) Providing the injection wells with emergency valves to stop injection in case of
contamination.
5 Refer to Appendix D for a flowchart of the permitting procedure for the discharge through
the use of deep well injection. A copy of the environmental permit application form is
included in Appendix E.
6 As mentioned above, the injection of dewatering effluent to groundwater aquifer is licensed

by MOE and is completely subject to their approval, therefore for further information, please
contact MOE on:
Telephone +974 4420 7777
Fax + 974 4420 7000
ar
24.6.5 Groundwater Recycle & Reuse Onsite
at
1
-Q
It is recommended, where environmentally safe and cost effective, that dewatering effluent is
reused or recycled onsite.
2 The reuse options onsite will depend on a number of factors, including the type of project.
LL
The contractor should propose the treatment in case the water is polluted by organic and
inorganic chemicals or subjected to biological contamination. The treatment should focus but
W
not limited to low DO, presence of Bacteria, elevated levels of TSS or turbidity and presence
of oil.
s
en
3 The CEMP should be used to identify all opportunities of reuse onsite. Yet, the options for
the reuse of the groundwater should be discussed with MOE and shall be subjected to the
m
approval by MOE.
e
4 Options could include but not be limited to:

Si
(a) Control of dust onsite. (Subject to the level of safety and quality of dewatering
effluent).
(b) Reuse of dewatering effluent.
(c) Concrete curing.
(d) Excavation activities requiring water.
(e) Washing of machinery and site equipment.
(f) Watering of onsite landscaping, when the turbidity is very low to avoid compromising
the integrity of the soil.
(g) If the dewatering effluent quality is within limits of soil compaction parameters
requirements (refer to QCS), it can be used for soil compaction purposes.
5 Contractor to conduct a feasibility study to evaluate whether it’s feasible to erect an RO

system for dewatering effluent treatment, in order to use the dewatering effluent instead of
fresh potable water.
6 The feasibility study is to compare both options in terms of financial viability.
24.6.6 Integrated Management of Construction Dewatering
1 Construction dewatering practices are better managed if they are integrated with existing
construction management systems, such as a CEMP, monitoring plan and training
programmes. The dewatering practice will then form part of the regular construction
inspection/monitoring program.
24.6.7 Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP)
1 The CEMP is prepared to minimise the impacts of the project and its activities on the
receiving environment. The CEMP is prepared prior to mobilising to site.
2 The Contractor should uses the geotechnical investigations and previous EIA (if applicable)
as guidelines when preparing the CEMP.
ar
3 When dewatering activities are included within the project site, the preparation of the CEMP
should include the following:
at
(a) Identification of opportunities to reuse the dewatering effluent onsite in order to reduce
-Q
the amount of disposed effluent.
(b) Dewatering techniques being employed on site
LL
(c) Disposal methods employed on-site and relevant monitoring plan to ensure
compliance with discharge limits.
W
(d) Copy of discharge limits.

(e) Roles and responsibilities of the Environmental Advisor on site.
s
en
4 Roles and responsibilities have to be clearly defined when designing a dewatering system.
These roles and responsibilities are to be submitted as an essential element to satisfy the
m
CEMP requirements when applying for the dewatering effluent discharge permit.
e
5 Refer to Appendix B for an example of inspection sheet for the dewatering process.
Si
24.6.8 Monitoring Plan
1 The environmental monitoring plan is used to monitor the anticipated impacts of the project o
the surrounding and receiving environments. It is imperative that, should dewatering
activities exist on site, there is integration all testing and monitoring requirements.
2 Integration of monitoring plans may be between systems within individual sites or between
several sites, depending on management systems or owners
(a) Environmental monitoring plan: The environmental monitoring plan is to outline the
steps required for monitoring of construction dewatering practices. The integration of
dewatering practices into the monitoring plan will pave the way to introduce a
dewatering monitoring plan.
(b) The findings of the dewatering monitoring reports are to be summarised and included
in the environmental monitoring reports.
(c) The dewatering practices monitoring plan: Introduction of a dewatering practices

monitoring plan, sampling points, variables, frequencies and reporting. This plan
should be cyclic which stands to be audited as part of the master environmental
monitoring plan. Corrective actions from audits are to be implemented to ensure
improved performance.
24.6.9 Training Plan
1 The integration of construction dewatering training into the training plan of the Contractor is
essential to introduce all staff to construction dewatering related information.
2 It is recommended that information on dewatering equipment and related emergencies are

included in the training provided to staff entering or working on the site.
3 The training for all staff does not have to be comprehensive; however, it should include basic
items such as:
ar
(a) Brief explanation of the construction dewatering purpose
(b) Introduction to the dewatering equipment. Inclusion of photos in the training
at
presentation. -Q
(c) Health and safety related concerns, education on related emergencies, and contact
information of person in charge of dewatering to be provided in the presentation.
LL
4 Training for dewatering staff, however, should be the responsibility of the Project Consultant
and as per each Project needs and requirements. The training should be comprehensive and
W
should include all components dewatering staff need to be familiar with.
24.6.10 Odour Control

s
en
1 The odour levels have been given a threshold value as indicated in the Qatar Construction
Specifications (QCS). Therefore, it is highly recommended to measure the level of odour
m
parameters, a devise should be installed within the construction site to measure odour
e
parameters (eg: H2S).

Si
2 The QCS has identified two types of odour control equipment; control equipment carbon type
and control equipment scrubber type. Refer to Section 9 Part 9 and Part 10 for details.
24.6.11 Health & Safety Considerations
1 Health and safety issues are the most important part of any construction project. It is
recommended that health and safety measures in relation to dewatering practices are
enforced strictly, in order to prevent and/or minimise on-site accidents.
2 In addition to the conventional health and safety measures implemented in construction

sites, the following considerations are to be incorporated to contribute to the health and
safety practices relating to construction dewatering:
24.6.12 Site Investigation
1 During the initial site investigations, the Contractor has to identify potential health and safety
risks in the project area. Examples of risks are: potential contamination posing health and
safety concern to labour workers and site staff, slope stability issues due to dewatering
practices... etc.
2 Identified risks have to be considered and mitigated against during design and execution of
dewatering.
3 This exercise can be undertaken during the Risk Assessment process as described earlier in
this Guideline.
24.6.13 Design Considerations
1 The design of dewatering stage is the most convenient stage to plan properly in order to
prevent foreseeable health and safety issues arising during operational dewatering.
ar
2 All designs must take into account the health & safety considerations associated with
at
dewatering, which include but are not limited to:
-Q
(a) Preparation of layout plan for dewatering equipment.
(b) Ensure access to dewatering equipment, without compromising the safety of staff.
LL
(c) Ensure that all dewatering equipment –especially equipment placed offsite- is marked
clearly with name of project and Contractor, and contact person details.
W
(d) Provide protective covers for assigned manholes which do not hinder the discharged
flow.
s
(e) The mandatory use of PPE. All staff entering a project’s safe zone have to be wearing
en
appropriate safety gear. This also applies to staff managing dewatering equipment
offsite.
m
(f) The Contractor is to exercise duty of care when designing, installing and operating the
e
dewatering equipment and process.

Si
24.6.14 Housekeeping Considerations
1 It is recommended that during the regular inspection of projects, the licensing authority is to
observe the status of housekeeping of dewatering equipment. Inadequate housekeeping can
expose staff and visitors to injury.
APPENDICES
Appendix A: Short List of Parameters as provided by ASHGHAL- 23

MoE list of Parameters for Dewatering Permit -
Environmental Laws and Regulations- Annex 4, Law 30 of 2002
Appendix B: Dewatering Process Inspection Sheet 32
Appendix C: Discharge Permit Forms 36
Appendix D: Application for Permit- Procedure Flowchart for each Dewatering Option 40
ar
Appendix E: Environmental Permit Application- MoE 45
at
Appendix A
-Q 23
SHORT LIST OF PARAMETERS AS PROVIDED BY ASHGHAL 23
MOE LIST OF PARAMETERS REQUIRED FOR DEWATERING PERMITS 23
LL
ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS AND REGULATIONS‐ ANNEX 4, LAW 30 OF 2002 23

W
Appendix B 32
DEWATERING PROCESS INSPECTION SHEET 32
s
Appendix C 36
en
DISCHARGE PERMIT FORMS 36

m
Appendix D 40
APPLICATION FOR PERMIT‐ PROCEDURE FLOWCHART FOR
e
EACH DEWATERING OPTION 40

Si
Appendix E 45
ENVIRONMENTAL PERMIT APPLICATION‐ MOE 45
ar
at
-Q
LL
Appendix A
W
Short List of Parameters as provided by Ashghal

s
en
MoE list of Parameters required for Dewatering Permits

m
Environmental Laws and Regulations‐ Annex 4, Law 30 of 2002

e
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
em
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
Appendix B
Dewatering Process Inspection Sheet
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
Appendix C -Q
Discharge Permit Forms
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Appendix D
Application for Permit‐ Procedure Flowchart for each Dewatering Option
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
Appendix E -Q
Environmental Permit Application‐ MoE
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
QCS 2014 Section 02: Quality Assurance and Quality Control Page 1
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Scope 2
1.1.2 References 2
1.1.3 Definitions 2
1.1.4 Contractors Responsibility 4
1.1.6 Failure to Perform 5
1.1.7 Management 5
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the Quality Assurance activities to be performed by the Contractor during
all phases of the Contract.
2 Related Parts and Sections are:
This Section
Part 3 ............... Contractor’s Quality Personnel
Section 1
Part 7 ............... Submittals
ar
Part 10 ............. Occupational Health & Safety
Section 11 ....... Health & Safety
at
1.1.2 References -Q
1 The following standards are referred to in this part:
QCS............................Qatar Construction Specification
LL
ISO 9000:2005 ...........Quality Management System- Fundamentals and Vocabulary

ISO 9001:2008 ...........Quality Management Systems – Requirements
W
ISO 9004:2008 ...........QMS Guidelines for Performance Improvement

s
ISO 10005:2005 .........Quality Management Systems - Guidelines for Quality Plans

en
ISO 19011:2011 .........Guidance on Auditing of Quality and Environmental Management

Systems
m
1.1.3 Definitions
e
Si
1 Standard Terms and definitions: are as per ISO 9000, Quality management system-
fundamentals and vocabulary with expanded definitions below
2 Engineer: As defined in the contract
3 Audit: Systematic, independent and documented process for obtaining audit evidence and
evaluating it objectively to determine the extent to which audit criteria are fulfilled
4 Correction: Action to eliminate a defect or non-conformity
5 Corrective Action: Action to eliminate the cause of a defect or non-conformity or other

undesirable situation.
Part 01: General
6 Defect or Non-conformance: any part of the Works not executed, provided or completed in
accordance with the Contract. For the avoidance of doubt and without limiting the generality
of the expression the term shall be taken to include any item of Plant, material, goods or work
incorporated or used in the Works which does not or may not conform to the relevant quality
standards or pass the tests prescribed in or to be inferred from the Contract. Non-compliance
with the approved Quality management system, Project Quality Plan, Inspection and Test
Plan and Method statement.
7 Hold Point: Hold points are mandatory notified verification points identified in the ITP
beyond which work may not proceed until verification and acceptance has taken place by the
relevant party.
8 Management System: System to establish policy and objectives and to achieve those
objectives.
9 PQP: Project Quality Plan.
ar
10 Preventative Action: Action to eliminate the cause of a potential nonconformity or other
at
potential undesirable situation.
11
-Q
QA: Quality Assurance. Part of quality management focused on providing confidence that
quality requirements will be fulfilled. QA involves a continuous evaluation of the adequacy
and effectiveness of the overall Quality Management System in order to evaluate the
LL
deviation from established quality objectives.
12 QA & QC: Quality Assurance & Quality Control and this may be written as QA/QC.
W
13 QC: Quality Control. Part of quality management focused on fulfilling quality requirements.
s
The QC involves specific control points during design, fabrication or construction stages to
en
check the fulfilling of design criteria, acceptance criteria (tolerance, etc.), performance criteria
or functional criteria.
m
14 QMS: Quality Management System. Management system to direct and control an

e
organization with regard to Quality.

Si
15 Quality Management: Coordinated activities to direct and control an organization with

regards to quality.
16 Record Review Point: Record Review Points are verification points identified in the ITP to
review any result of inspections or test reports to ensure it conforms to specified
requirements
17 Surveillance Point: Surveillance Points are verification points identified in the ITP attended
on random basis where work may proceed with or without verification and acceptance by the
relevant party.
18 Witness Point: Witness Points are notified verification points identified in the ITP where
work may proceed with or without verification and acceptance by the relevant party.
Part 01: General
1.1.4 Contractors Responsibility
1 Contractor shall, throughout the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying
defects therein have full regard for the Quality Management System. Contractor shall note
that the Contract Price includes the Execution Programme for provision and implementation
of a Quality Management System to ensure that the appropriate standards are applied and
enforced throughout construction, pre-commissioning and commissioning stages of the
Works.
2 The Contractor shall be responsible for all Quality Assurance and Quality Control matters
during the execution of the Work up to and including the Completion Date including the
defects liability period.
3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the development, implementation and maintenance
of a Quality Management System consistent with the requirements of this Part that assures
workmanship, equipment and material conformance to the applicable requirements of every
Section of the Specification.
ar
4 The Contractor shall implement a Quality Management System to demonstrate compliance
at
with the requirements of the Contract. The Contractor shall operate a Quality Management
-Q
Systems that complies, as a minimum, with the requirements of QCS, ISO 9001 and
Contract Documents as applicable. Such system shall be in accordance with the details
stated in the Contract and that assures workmanship, equipment and material conformance
to the applicable requirements of every Section of the Contract Specification (including but
LL
not limited to the Project Quality Plan mentioned in this section). Compliance with the Quality
Management System shall not relieve the Contractor of his duties, obligations or
W
responsibilities.
s
5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Contractor shall comply with every requirement
en
of the Qatar National Construction Specification (QCS) that is relevant to the type of work
forming any part of the Contract.
m
6 The Contractor shall obtain the necessary approvals from the relevant authorities for all his
e
Works (including Temporary Works and the use of Contractor’s Equipment).

Si
7 The Contractor’s Representative shall observe and inspect the Works for all concerned
project Quality compliance during the performance of the Work up to and including the
Completion Date.
8 The Contractor shall ensure acceptable QA and QC performance and compliance of all Sub-
contractors, vendors and other parties who may enter or perform works at the Worksite.
9 The Contractor shall ensure acceptable QA and QC performance and compliance of all sub-
contractor, vendors and other parties who perform works offsite.
10 The Contractor shall perform all necessary onsite and offsite audits, inspection and factory
acceptance tests to ensure. QA and QC performance and compliance of the work.
11 The Contractor shall provide samples and mock-ups necessary to ensure acceptable QA and
QC performance.
12 The Contractor is required to copy to the Engineer any formal quality related communication
between the Contractor and enforcing authorities or government organisations
Part 01: General
1 The Quality Management System shall assure the quality throughout all applicable areas of
Contract performance, such as the design of temporary works and structures, inspections,
testing, handling, packaging, shipping, storage and construction activities.
2 The Quality Management System shall provide a mode of operation that emphasises the
identification, correction, and prevention of deficiencies and discrepancies.
3 Procedures to implement the Quality Management System shall be developed. Specific

responsibilities shall be assigned, and individual job authorities clearly delineated.
Procedures shall be established to systematically verify compliance with the requirements of
this Section and any other requirements of the Specification necessary to show conformance
with the Project Documentation.
4 The Contractor's Quality Programme shall be subject to evaluation by the Engineer to

determine that the Quality Programme meets contractual requirements. Audits of Contractor,
sub-contractor, and Contractor activities will be performed by the Engineer to verify
ar
compliance with the Specifications and all referenced standards. Audits will be performed on
at
an agreed documented audit plan/ programme or as warranted by general quality trends.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to the Engineer in auditing quality
-Q
assurance activities.
5 Non-conforming work and materials, whether in place or not, will be rejected by the Engineer.
LL
The Contractor shall be notified in writing to correct defective work or remove the defective
material from the Works. If the Contractor fails to respond, the Engineer may order
W
correction, removal, and/or replacement of defective materials by others. The Contractor

shall bear all costs for such work.
s
6 Materials accepted on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance may be sampled and

en
inspected/tested by the Engineer at any time. The fact that the materials were accepted on
the basis of a certificate shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to verify and use
m
materials which comply with the Specifications.

e
7 The Contractor shall impose all quality assurance requirements upon sub-contractors,
Si
suppliers, manufacturers and any other parties associated with the Contractor that are
involved in the Project.
1.1.6 Failure to Perform
1 If the Contractor fails to adequately perform any or all of the provisions of this Section, the
Owner, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to have the Engineer perform any or all of the
provisions of this Section and charge the Contractor for the actual cost of such work as
defined in contract.
1.1.7 Management
1 The Contractor’s most Senior Management will be expected to lead and provide a
commitment to deliver a quality service/product and will be assessed on a regular basis. The
development of a quality focussed culture through awareness training must be supported and
implemented from top to bottom. All Contractors will be required to provide experienced
quality management staff with appropriate qualifications relevant to the position as per
Qualifications & Experience Matrix shown in the Part 3 Contractors Quality Personnel.
END OF PART
Part 02: Submittals
2 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 2
2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1 Project Quality Plan 2
2.1.2 Quality Organisation Plan 3
2.1.3 Inspection and Test Plans 4
2.1.4 Quality Checklists 5
2.1.5 Key Performance Indicators 5
2.1.7 Commissioning Plan 6
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 02: Submittals
2 SUBMITTALS
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Project Quality Plan
1 The Contractor shall prepare the necessary Contract specific Project Quality Plan as
specified in this Section, the Contract Documents and as a minimum meeting the
requirements ISO 9001 and ISO 10005 and submit them to the Engineer for review and
approval within 30 days of the award of Contract. The Contractor is not permitted to Work on
the worksite until such time as the plan has been approved by the Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall regularly review the suitability of the Project Quality Plan. The Contractor
shall undertake a full formal review of the quality plans annually with reference to the date of
award of the Contract and submit the findings of the review to the Engineer within 14 days of
that date along with an amended plan should any amendments be required.
ar
3 The Project Quality Plan shall describe the Contractor’s Quality Management System that will
at
be used throughout the Contract and the contents shall include but not be limited to the
-Q
following:
(a) Front Cover

LL
(b) Table of Contents

(c) Project Scope, Requirements and Quality Objectives
W
(d) Quality Policy and ISO 9001 Certificate (if applicable)

s
(e) Control of Project Quality Plan

en
(f) Reference Documentation

(g) Project Management, Planning and Resources
m
(h) Management, Organisation and Responsibilities

e
Si
(i) Contract Review

(j) Project Deliverables
(k) Communication with the Engineer
(l) Management of Documents, Data and Records
(m) Design (Including Temporary Works)
(n) Procurement of Services, Equipment and Materials
(o) Method Statements
(p) Inspection and Test
(q) Product Identification and Traceability
(r) Owner Supplied Product
(s) Handling, Storage, Packaging and Delivery
(t) Non-conformance, Corrective and Preventative Action
(u) Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment
Part 02: Submittals
(v) Audits
(w) Training
(x) Key Performance Indicators and Continual Improvement
(y) Management Review
(z) Quality Meetings
(aa) Monthly Quality Report
(bb) Commissioning
(cc) Interface Management
(dd) Project Completion and Handover
(ee) Appendices
4 And include as a minimum:
ar
(a) a detailed description of procedures, instructions, and reports to be used to ensure
compliance with the Project Documentation
at
(b) a detailed description of procedures for reviewing shop drawings, samples, certificates
-Q
and other submittals necessary for compliance with the Project Documentation
(c) a detailed description of procedures used to identify, report and resolve problems
LL
(d) a description of the services provided by outside organisations such as testing

laboratories, architects, and consulting engineers
W
(e) a detailed description of inspections and tests required

(f) copies of forms and reports to be used to document quality assurance operations
s
(g) the names of personnel responsible for each part of the Works
en
(h) a submittal status log listing required submittals and action required by the Contractor
m
and Engineer
e
(i) a detailed description of document and submittal control procedures

Si
(j) an inspection and test schedule keyed to the construction programme

(k) procedures to identify and control the use of items and materials
5 No construction shall begin and no requests for payment from the Contractor shall be
processed until the Contractor’s Project Quality Plan is approved.
6 A Contractors Project Quality Plan Template with guidance notes is included in Part 15
Appendix B of this Section. The format of the Contractors Project Quality Plan must follow
this template including all clauses contained within.
2.1.2 Quality Organisation Plan
1 The Contractor shall submit a Quality Organisation Plan to the Engineer for approval no later
than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract.
2 The Quality Organisation Plan shall provide the names, qualifications, experience and skills
of all the QA/QC Team including Corporate QA/QC Manager, Quality Management
Representative and key support staff.
Part 02: Submittals
3 The Quality Organisation Plan shall show the organisation of Contractor’s quality team and
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(a) an organisation chart identifying all personnel responsible for quality

(b) Identify the quality team showing that the team is independent of the job supervisory
staff with clear lines of authority to top tier management.
(c) Indicate and describe the area of responsibility and authority of each individual in the
quality assurance team.
4 The Quality Organisation Plan should also define quality responsibilities of any of the
Contractors team with responsibilities under the Contractors Project Quality Plan.
5 The Contractor’s Quality staff shall have relevant educational and professional qualifications,
and training as defined in 3.1.7 (1). The Contractor is not permitted to execute any form of
the works at the worksite until such time as approved quality personnel have been deployed
on a fulltime basis to the worksite. The Contractor shall not remove or replace the appointed
ar
quality personnel without prior approval from the Engineer.
at
6 The Quality Organisation Plan may form part of the Project Quality Plan or be prepared as a
standalone document and cross-referenced within the Project Quality Plan.
-Q
2.1.3 Inspection and Test Plans
LL
1 As part of the Project Quality Plan the Contractor shall submit an Inspection and Test Plan
Schedule to the Engineer for approval no later than thirty (30) days from the start of the
W
Contract.
2 The Inspection and Test Plan schedule shall define the Inspection and Test Plans to be
s
prepared for the Works and the target dates for their submission to the Engineer for his
en
approval.
m
3 The Inspection and Test Plans shall consider the requirements of each Section of the
Specification and shall identify, as a minimum, the following:
e
Si
(a) Details each activity, inspection and test to be performed

(b) Reference to specifications, standards etc.
(c) the required inspection and testing frequency
(d) the acceptance/rejection criteria
(e) whom from the Contractors team is responsible and qualified to perform the inspection
or test
(f) Quality Records to be generated
(g) Hold, Witness, surveillance and Record Review points of the Contractors team, the
Engineer and any other agencies having jurisdictional authority over the work relating
to each inspection and test to be performed.
4 Each inspection and test shall have a unique reference number.
5 Inspection and Test Plans are required to address the Contractors on and off site Work and
preparation, submission and approval of related documentation.
Part 02: Submittals
6 Inspection and Test Plans are required for all operations including major temporary works
and commissioning.
7 No work covered by the Inspection and Test Plan shall begin until the plan has been
approved by the Engineer.
8 A Contractors Inspection and Test Plan Template with guidance notes is included in
Appendix B of this Section and must be used by the Contractor
2.1.4 Quality Checklists
1 The Contractor shall develop specific quality checklists for all activities to be checked as per
the Inspection and Test Plans and submit to the Engineer for the approval with the Inspection
Test Plans submission prior to the start of the activity.
2 The Contractor shall inspect the work and sign off the relevant checklist and Inspection
Request prior to the final inspection with the Engineer.
ar
3 The checklist shall be attached with the Inspection Request and other relevant attachments
at
and submitted to the Engineer. -Q
2.1.5 Key Performance Indicators
1 The Contractor shall develop and report Key Performance Indicators (KPI’s). KPI’s are a set
LL
of quantifiable measures that are used to gauge performance of the Contractors

Performance.
W
2 The KPI’s shall be defined in the Contractors Project Quality Plan and be subject to
s
Engineers approval.
en
3 The Contractor is responsible for developing his own KPI’s for all elements of his contract
(Contractual, Commercial, Safety etc.) but as a minimum shall address the following KPI’s.
m
(a) Time between identification of a Nonconformance or Corrective Action and actual

e
raising on the system.

Si
(b) Time between opening and closure of Nonconformance Reports (NCR) and Corrective
Action Requests (CAR).
(c) NCR and CAR statistics per areas, sections, discipline, subcontractor etc.
(d) Percentage of reoccurring NCR’s and CAR’s – Trends on NCR’s and CAR’s.
(e) Approval status of critical documentation for the progress of the works (Method
Statements, ITPs etc.).
(f) Statistical data from inspections as per the Inspection & Test Plans (Pass vs failed,
pass first time, etc.).
(g) Completion packages (As-Built folders) progress.
4 Reporting of the KPI’s shall include a graphical bar chart representation on a month by month
basis from the start of the Contract.
Part 02: Submittals
1 Contractor shall ensure that Method Statements address quality issues. Refer to Section 11
Part 1 (Regulatory Document) in particular section 1.1.7 and Section 11 Part 2 (SAMAS) in
particular section 2.4
2.1.7 Commissioning Plan
1 The Contractor shall submit a Commissioning Plan to the Engineer for approval no later than
sixty (60) days unless agreed otherwise with the engineer before the start of the
commissioning of the Works or any part thereof.
2 The Commissioning Plan shall consider the requirements of each Section of the Specification
in turn and shall identify the following:
(a) all required commissioning work required by that Section of the Specification
(b) any prerequisites to commissioning
ar
(c) a list of the commissioning procedure
at
(d) a detailed description of the duties and responsibilities on the personnel involved in the
-Q
commissioning process
(e) a detailed list of the tests/checks/activities that will be performed, linked to the relevant
construction activities and referenced to any links/documents to the ITPs performed
LL
during the construction

(f) specific reference to the witness/hold and review points of the engineer
W
(g) a detailed list of the standards /specifications/regulatory requirements that need to be

performed
s
en
(h) a detailed description of the interactions/communication between different

organization/public service or other legal/regulatory institutions
m
(i) a detailed description of the test/activities of the maintenance needed during the life
e
time of the project, with reference to any special requirements/qualifications of the

personnel involved in the maintenance activities
Si
(j) a detailed description of any spare parts/equipment/fixtures and other type of the of
consumables that might be needed, with an estimation of quantities, for the life time of
the project
(k) a detailed description of the as built project file that will be created after the
commission phase
(l) a procedure for up-date and revision of the commissioning plan
3 No work covered by the Commissioning Plan shall begin until the plan has been approved.
END OF PART
Part 03: Contractor’s Quality Personnel
3 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY PERSONNEL ............................................................. 2

3.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 2
3.1.1 General 2
3.1.2 Quality Assurance Manager 2
3.1.3 Quality Control Manager 2
3.1.4 Quality Engineer 2
3.1.5 Quality Inspector 3
3.1.6 Personnel Qualifications 3
3.1.7 Quality Staff Requirement 3
3.1.8 Quality Training for Contractor’s Employees and Labour 5
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
3 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY PERSONNEL
3.1 INTRODUCTION
3.1.1 General
1 Contractor shall, throughout the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying
defects therein have on his staff at the Site office(s) a dedicated Quality Team dealing only
with matters regarding the quality and protection against damage before, during and after
execution of Works as specified in this section. This team shall be qualified and experienced
in their work and shall have the authority to issue instructions and shall take protective
measures to prevent execution of Works that do not comply with the Specifications.
2 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing prior to re-assigning or replacement of any
of the quality team designated in the Quality Organisation Plan.
ar
3 The Contractor shall have adequate quality personnel on the site during all production
operations, including adequate coverage during night shift operations and off site work.
at
4
-Q
The Contractor's quality team shall have the authority to stop any portion of the work which
does not comply with the requirements of the Project Documentation.
5 Minimum qualifications and experience of the Contractors Quality Personnel shall be as

LL
defined in the Contract.

W
3.1.2 Quality Assurance Manager

s
1 Where required by this section, the Contractor shall designate and assign a full time Quality
en
Assurance Manager who shall be responsible for overseeing the implementation and
operation of the Project Quality Plan at all levels. The Quality Assurance Manager shall report
m
directly to Top Tier Management and be independent of the Contractors organisation

responsible for construction.
e
Si
3.1.3 Quality Control Manager
1 Where required by this section, the Contractor shall designate and assign a full time Quality
Control Manager who reports directly to the Quality Assurance Manager and shall be
responsible for supervision of the construction quality control management activities and
ensuring compliance with the Contractors Inspection and Test Plans and associated
specification and contract documentation.
3.1.4 Quality Engineer
1 Where required by this section, the Contractor shall designate and assign a Quality Engineer
who reports directly to the Quality Assurance Manager or Quality Control Manager and shall
be responsible for assisting them with their day to day responsibilities and may be
assigned to cover several locations or areas of work relating to the Contract. Where a Quality
Assurance Manager or Quality Control Manager are not required by this section the Quality
Engineer shall be assigned all the responsibilities defined in clause 3.1.2, 3.13, and 3.1.7.
3.1.5 Quality Inspector
1 The Contractor shall designate and assign a Quality Inspector for each shift for each location
where work is being performed. Each Quality Inspector shall be qualified by training and
experience in all the construction or fabrication activities being conducted at the location of
work and is directly responsible for ensuring compliance with the Contractors Inspection and
Test Plans and associated specification and contract documentation.
3.1.6 Personnel Qualifications
1 The Contractor shall identify activities requiring qualified production, inspection, and test
personnel and establish their minimum competence level.
2 The Contractor shall maintain records of personnel qualifications as quality records.
3.1.7 Quality Staff Requirement
ar
1 Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer the Contractor shall employ fulltime qualified
quality personnel for the Work as per below tables.
at
-Q
Quality Staff Requirement
No No of workers on Worksite Requirement

LL
1 Quality Inspector (Part time, 15 hours of duty per

W
1. Less than 10
week)
s
en
2. More than 11 but less than 50 1 Quality Inspector

e m
Si
1 Quality Engineer and

3. More than 51 but less than 500
1 Quality Inspector per 100 workers
1 Quality Assurance Manager and

4. More than 501 but less than 1500 1 Quality Engineer per 500 workers and
1 Quality Assurance Manager and

1 Quality Control Manager and
5. More than 1501
1 Quality Engineer per 500 workers and
Quality Management and Control staff Qualifications & Experience Matrix
Minimum Qualifications Minimum Years of Minimum Key

Position
Required Experience Competencies
Quality Degree in relevant 12 years, 5 of which at Qualified Professional who

Assurance Engineering discipline and Management Level and 3 can manage a Quality
Manager related training in Quality years Regional experience Management System and
Management Techniques. coordinate specialised
Internationally recognised activities. Excellent written
Lead Auditor Certificate & verbal communication
skills in English
Quality Control Degree in relevant 12 years, 5 of which at Excellent written & verbal
Manager Engineering discipline and Management Level and 3 communication skills in
related training in Quality years Regional experience English
Management Techniques.
ar
Internationally recognised
at
Lead Auditor Certificate
Quality Engineer Degree in relevant 10 years’ experience in Good written & verbal
-Q
Engineering discipline. related Quality Control communication skills in
Internationally recognised Activities and 3 years English
Lead Auditor Certificate Regional experience
LL
W
Quality Inspector Certificate or Diploma in 5 years’ experience in Good written & verbal
the appropriate related Quality Control and communication skills in
engineering discipline Materials Testing activities English
s
along with 2 years

en
Regional Experience
e m
Si
2 The Contractor shall appoint deputy quality personnel who are capable of performing all the
duties of the quality personnel in the event of their absence.
3 The Contractor shall appoint support staff in sufficient numbers to ensure the effective
function of the quality related work within the Contractor’s organisation.
4 The Contractor shall ensure that every Sub-contractor employed on the Worksite appoints
suitably qualified quality staff to ensure the effective function of the quality related issues
within the Sub-contractor’s organisation. The Sub-contractor shall appoint and deploy fulltime
on the Worksite one Quality Inspector for every 100 workers that they employ at the
Worksite. Any Sub-contractor that employs more than 100 workers will appoint a Quality
Engineer. This shall be in addition to the Contractor’s Quality Team.
3.1.8 Quality Training for Contractor’s Employees and Labour
1 The Contractor shall conduct quality training including Contract specific induction, pre-work
briefings, skills training, tool box talks and formal training conducted by training professionals
or agencies for all the Contractor’s employees. The Contract specific induction will be at least
1 hour duration, approved by the Engineer and provided for all persons involved in the
Works. Such induction training will be reviewed, revised and repeated at intervals not
exceeding 12 months throughout the duration of the Work. All training shall be provided in the
languages preferred by the recipients of the training. Training shall focus on improving
competency and skill for those performing activities that impact quality.
2 The Contractor must conduct regular tool box talks to his Labour workforce Such training
should include as a minimum Health and Safety issues and Construction Method best
practice.
3 The Owner may organise quality related training, meetings, seminars, workshops or similar
events at any time throughout the Contract Period. The Contractor is required to participate
ar
in such events when requested at his own expense.
at
4 The Contractor shall maintain records of all training conducted including details of the training
-Q
given and a list of attendees, including attendee’s signature and ID numbers.
END OF PART
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 04: Document & Data Control
4 DOCUMENT & DATA CONTROL ............................................................................ 2

4.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 2
4.1.1 General 2
4.1.2 Document and Data Approval and Issue 2
4.1.3 Document and Data Changes 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 04: Document & Data Control
4 DOCUMENT & DATA CONTROL
4.1 INTRODUCTION
4.1.1 General
1 The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures to control all documents
and data that relate to the requirements of the Specification. Documents and data can be in
the form of any type of media, such as hard copy or electronic media.
2 The Contractor shall maintain up to date copies of all industry codes and standards that apply
to the Contract.
4.1.2 Document and Data Approval and Issue
1 The documents and data shall be reviewed and approved for adequacy by authorised
ar
personnel prior to issue. A master list or equivalent document control procedure identifying
the current revision status of documents shall be established and be readily available to
at
preclude the use of invalid and/or obsolete documents. This control shall ensure that:
-Q
(a) The pertinent issues of appropriate documents are available at all locations where
operations essential to the effective functioning of the quality system are performed
LL
(b) Invalid and/or obsolete documents are promptly removed from all points of issue or
use, or otherwise assured against unintended use
W
(c) Any obsolete documents retained for legal and/or knowledge preservation purposes
are suitably identified
s
4.1.3 Document and Data Changes

en
1 Where practicable, the nature of the change shall be identified in the document or
m
appropriate attachments.
e
Si
END OF PART
Part 05: Quality Records
5 QUALITY RECORDS..................................................................................... 2
5.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... 2
5.1.1 General 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 05: Quality Records
5 QUALITY RECORDS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
5.1.1 General
1 The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures for identification,
collection, indexing, access, filing, storage, maintenance and disposition of quality records.
2 The Contractor shall supplement these quality records as necessary to monitor quality
throughout the Contract period.
3 Quality records shall be maintained to demonstrate conformance of materials and equipment

to specified technical requirements and the effective operation of the quality system.
4 All quality records shall be legible and shall be stored and retained in such a way that they
ar
are readily retrievable in facilities that provide a suitable environment to prevent damage or
deterioration and to prevent loss.
at
5
-Q
As a minimum, the quality record for any particular item shall include:
(a) name of item

LL
(b) item number

(c) item description
W
(d) suppliers name

(e) serial number or other identification (where applicable)
s
en
(f) Specification reference (where applicable)

(g) verification of receipt of all required supporting documentation
m
(h) quantity of items

e
(i) location and installation of item

Si
(j) inspection/test procedure reference

(k) non-conformance number (if applicable)
(l) Observations / comments.
(m) Signatures of responsible person
END OF PART
Part 06: Quality Audits
6 QUALITY AUDITS ................................................................................................... 2

6.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
6.1.1 Contractor’s Quality Audit 2
6.1.2 Engineer’s Quality Audit 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 06: Quality Audits
6 QUALITY AUDITS
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Contractor’s Quality Audit
1 The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures in line with ISO 190011
for planning and implementing internal quality audits to verify whether quality activities and
related results comply with planned arrangements and to determine the effectiveness of the
quality system.
2 Internal quality audits shall be scheduled on the basis of the status and importance of the
activity to be audited and shall be carried out by personnel independent of those having direct
responsibility for the activity being audited. Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer in
writing, the Contractor shall carry out a full system quality audit every three months.
ar
3 The results of the audits shall be recorded and brought to the attention of the personnel
having responsibility in the area audited. The management personnel responsible for the
at
area shall take timely corrective action on deficiencies found during the audit.
-Q
4 Follow-up audit activities shall verify and record the implementation and effectiveness the
corrective action taken.
LL
5 The results of the Contractor’s quality audits shall be made available for review by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall implement any recommendations made by the Engineer
W
based on the results of the internal audit.

s
6 The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to observe the Contractor’s internal audit upon
en
request.
m
7 Quality audits must be undertaken by suitably qualified personnel with an internationally

recognized audit qualification to recognized standards.
e
Si
6.1.2 Engineer’s Quality Audit
1 The Engineer may undertake a quality audit of any of the Contractor’s activities at any time
during the course of the Contract. The Contractor shall make all personnel and facilities
available to the Engineer as necessary to undertake quality audits.
2 The Engineer shall make the results of his quality audit available to the Contractor for review.
The Contractor shall implement any recommendations made by the Engineer based on the
results of the Engineer’s quality audit.
END OF PART
Part 07: Inspection and Test
7 INSPECTION AND TEST ........................................................................................ 2

7.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 2
7.1.1 General 2
7.1.2 Inspections and Tests 2
7.1.3 Inspection and Test Status 3
7.1.4 Inspections by the Engineer during construction 3
7.1.5 Inspections by the Engineer during Defects Liability Period 4
7.1.6 Workmanship 4
7.1.7 Measuring and Test Equipment 4
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
7 INSPECTION AND TEST
7.1 INTRODUCTION
7.1.1 General
1 The Contractor shall provide equipment, instruments, qualified personnel, and facilities
necessary to inspect the work and perform the tests required by the Project Documentation.
2 The Contractor shall repeat tests and inspections after correcting non-conforming work until
all work complies with the requirements. All re-testing and re-inspections shall be performed
at no additional cost to the Client.
3 The Engineer may elect to perform additional inspections and tests at the place of the
manufacture or the shipping point to verify compliance with applicable Specifications.
Inspections and tests performed by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his
ar
responsibility to meet the Specifications. Inspections and tests by the Engineer shall not be
considered a guarantee that materials delivered at a later time will be acceptable. All costs
at
associated with the foregoing shall be borne by the Contractor.
-Q
4 Inspections and tests conducted by persons or agencies other than the Contractor, shall not
in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and obligation to meet all Specifications
and referenced standards.
LL
7.1.2 Inspections and Tests

W
1 All inspections and tests shall be conducted in accordance with written test procedures as
s
detailed in the Project Quality Plan and Inspection and Test Plans that have been reviewed
en
and approved by the Engineer.
2 Mandatory Products and Materials Sampling and Testing Frequencies are included in Part
m
14, Appendix A of this section. The Contractor shall follow the Sampling and Testing
e
Frequencies stipulated in Appendix A unless otherwise stated in the Contract. The table in
Si
Appendix A shall be read and understood in tandem with the footnotes in Appendix A.
3 Inspection and test procedures submitted for approval shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
(a) inspection/test procedure reference

(b) references to Clauses of this Specification and other standards along with applicable
inspection/test levels specified therein
(c) prerequisites for the given inspection/test
(d) required tools, equipment
(e) necessary environmental conditions
(f) acceptance criteria
(g) data to be recorded
(h) reporting forms
(i) Identification of items inspected and tested.
(j) Contractors and Engineers Hold, Witness, Surveillance and Record Review Points
4 Approved procedures and instructions shall be readily available and used by inspection and
test personnel at the time of inspection or test. All revisions to these procedures and
instructions shall be approved prior to being used to inspect or test the work. No deviations
from the approved procedures and instructions shall be allowed without written authorisation
from the Engineer.
5 Inspection and testing work shall be performed by personnel designated by the Contractor.
Such personnel shall not be the same as those performing the work.
6 The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a signed inspection report for each item of
work inspected and tested. The report shall indicate whether the item of work, material
and/or equipment complies with all the inspection/test criteria. The Contractor shall submit
inspection/test results to the Engineer prior to incorporating the item(s) into the work.
Inspection/test failures shall be reported to the Engineer immediately.
7 Inspection and test reports shall, as a minimum, identify the following:
ar
(a) inspection/test procedure reference
at
(b) name of inspector/tester
(c) observations/comments
-Q
(d) specified requirements
(e) acceptability
LL
(f) deviations/non-conformance
W
(g) corrective action

(h) evaluation of results
s
(i) authorised signature

en
8 The Contractor shall clearly document and identify the inspections and test status of
m
all materials and equipment throughout construction. Identification may be by means of

stamps, tags, or other control devices attached to, or accompanying, the material or
e
equipment.
Si
7.1.3 Inspection and Test Status
1 The inspection and test status of materials, equipment and construction work shall be
identified by suitable means, which indicates the conformance or non-conformance of
materials, equipment and construction work with regard to inspection and tests performed.
The identification of inspection and test status shall be maintained, as defined in the Quality
Assurance Plan and/or documented procedures, throughout the course of construction to
ensure that only materials, equipment and construction work that have passed the required
inspections and tests are used or installed.
7.1.4 Inspections by the Engineer during construction
1 The Contractors Inspection and Test Plans will define Hold, Witness, Surveillance and
Record Review points for the Engineer during construction. The contractor shall prepare,
document and implement a Request for Inspection system that defines how the Engineer will
be given sufficient notice to inspect the works in accordance with the Inspection and Test
Plans.
7.1.5 Inspections by the Engineer during Defects Liability Period
1 The Engineer will give the Contractor due notice of his intention to carry out any inspections
during the defects liability period.
2 The Contractor shall arrange for a responsible representative to be present at the times and
dates named by the Engineer.
3 The Contractor’s representative shall render all necessary assistance and take note of all
matters to which his attention is directed by the Engineer
7.1.6 Workmanship
1 The Contractor shall comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances
or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
2 Only persons qualified to produce workmanship of the required quality shall perform works
ar
3 The Contractor shall comply with manufactures’ published installation instructions / guides in
at
full, including each step in sequence. Should instructions conflict with project documentation,
-Q
the Contractor shall request clarification from the Engineer before proceeding.
7.1.7 Measuring and Test Equipment

LL
1 The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures which conform to
accepted and approved national or international standards to control, calibrate and maintain
W
inspection, measuring and test equipment used by the Contractor to demonstrate the
conformance of materials, equipment and/or construction work with the requirements of the
s
en
2 Inspection, measuring and test equipment shall be used in a manner which ensures that the
measurement uncertainty is known and is consistent with the required measurement
m
capability
e
Si
3 The Contractor shall establish a unique identification number for each item of measuring and
test equipment. This unique identification number shall be permanently affixed to each item
of measuring and test equipment
4 The Contractor shall ensure that each item of inspection, measuring and test equipment is
calibrated at intervals recommended by the manufacturer. Valid calibration certificates for
measuring and testing equipment shall be present and available for inspection during
inspections and tests.
5 The Contractor shall establish a log of all measuring and test equipment and record:
(a) equipment description

(b) identification number
(c) date of the last calibration
(d) date that the next calibration is due.
6 The Contractor shall assess and record the validity of the previous measuring results when
the equipment is subsequently found not to confirm to requirements. The Contractor shall
take appropriate action on the equipment and any product affected.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 08: Materials
8 MATERIALS .................................................................................................. 2
8.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
8.1.1 Plant, Materials, Goods and Workmanship 2
8.1.2 Handling and Storage of Materials 2
8.1.3 Identification and Control of Items and Materials 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 08: Materials
8 MATERIALS
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Plant, Materials, Goods and Workmanship
1 All Plant, materials, goods and workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the
Contract with necessary approvals from the concerned authorities and in accordance with the
Engineer's instructions and shall be subjected from time to time to such tests as the Engineer
may direct at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the Site or at all or any such
places. The Contractor shall provide such assistance, instruments, machines, labour and
material as are normally required for examining, measuring and testing any work and the
quality, weight or quantity of any materials used and shall supply samples of materials before
incorporation in the Works for testing as may be selected and required by the Engineer.
8.1.2 Handling and Storage of Materials
ar
1 The Contractor shall establish procedures for handling and storage of materials and
at
equipment. -Q
2 The Contractor’s storage and handling procedures shall be designed to prevent damage,
deterioration, distortion of shape or dimension, loss, degradation, loss of identification, or
LL
substitution.
3 The handling procedures shall address the use, inspection and maintenance of special
W
devices such as crates, boxes, containers, dividers, slings, material handling and
transportation equipment and other facilities.
s
en
4 The Contractor shall identify equipment and/or material requiring special handling or storage.
m
8.1.3 Identification and Control of Items and Materials

e
1 The Contractor shall establish control procedures to ensure that equipment and materials are
Si
properly used and installed.
2 The Contractor shall identify all items and materials so that they are traceable throughout all
inspections, test activities, and records. For stored items, the identification method shall be
consistent with the expected duration and type of storage.
3 The Contractor shall record equipment and material identifications and ensure that they are
traceable to the location where they are incorporated into the Works.
END OF PART
Part 09: Nonconformance Monitoring
9 NONCONFORMANCE MONITORING .................................................................... 2

9.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 2
9.1.1 General 2
9.1.2 Review and Disposition of Nonconforming Items 2
9.1.3 Corrective Action 3
9.1.4 Identification of Nonconforming Items 3
9.1.5 Acceptance and Approval of Nonconforming items 4
9.1.6 Nonconformance Records 4
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
9 NONCONFORMANCE MONITORING
9.1 INTRODUCTION
9.1.1 General
1 The Contractor shall ensure that product which does not conform to Specification
requirements is identified and controlled to prevent its unintended use or delivery. A
documented procedure shall be established to define the controls and relate responsibilities
and authorities for dealing with nonconforming product:
(a) by taking action to estimate the detected nonconformity

(b) by authorizing its use, release or acceptance under concession by the Engineer
(c) by taking action to preclude its original intended use or application
(d) by taking action appropriate to the effects, or potential effects, of the nonconformity
ar
when nonconformity product is detected after delivery or use has started .
at
2 When Conforming product is corrected it shall be subject to re-verification to demonstrate
-Q
conformity to requirements.
3 Records of the nature of nonconformities and any subsequent actions taken, including
concessions obtained by the engineer, shall be maintained.
LL
4 The monitoring system shall apply to material and equipment as well as installation and
W
construction which fail to conform to the Contract.

s
5 A Contractors Quality Nonconformance Template is included in Part 15 Appendix B of this

en
Section and must be used for recording Nonconformance.
9.1.2 Review and Disposition of Nonconforming Items

e m
1 The responsibility for review and authority for the disposition of nonconforming items shall be
Si
defined in the Quality Plan.
2 Nonconforming items shall be reviewed in accordance with documented procedures. A

nonconforming item may be:
(a) reworked to meet the specified requirements

(b) accepted with or without repair if agreed in writing by the Engineer
(c) re-graded for alternative applications
(d) rejected or scrapped.
3 The proposed use or repair of an item which does not conform to the requirements of the
Project Documentation shall be reported to the Engineer. The description of the
nonconformity and of repairs shall be recorded to denote the actual condition.
4 Repaired and/or reworked products shall be inspected in accordance with the Quality
Assurance Plan and/or documented procedures
9.1.3 Corrective Action
1 The Contractor shall take action to eliminate the causes of nonconformities in order to
prevent recurrence. Corrective actions shall be appropriate to the effects of the
nonconformity encountered.
A documented procedure shall be established to define requirements for:
(a) Reviewing nonconformities (including Engineer complaints)

(b) Determining the causes of nonconformities
(c) Evaluating the need for action to ensure that conformities do not occur
(d) Determining and implementing actions needed
(e) Records of the results of action taken and
(f) Reviewing the effectiveness of the corrective action taken
ar
2 Any corrective or preventive action taken to eliminate the causes of actual or potential
nonconformities shall be to a degree appropriate to the magnitude of problems and
at
commensurate with the risks encountered. -Q
3 The Contractor shall implement and record any changes to the documented procedures for
implementing corrective and preventive action.
LL
4 The Contractor shall take prompt action to identify the causes of each nonconformance and
the corrective action necessary prevent recurrence. The results of failure and discrepancy
W
report summaries, Contractor evaluations, and any other pertinent applicable data shall be
used for determining corrective action. Information developed during construction, tests, and
s
inspections that support the implementation of required improvements and corrections shall
en
be used to support the adequacy of corrective action taken.
5 The procedures for preventive action shall include:

m
(a) the use of appropriate sources of information such as processes and work operations
e
which affect product quality, concessions, audit results, quality records and service
Si
reports to detect, analyse and eliminate potential causes of nonconformities

(b) determination of the steps needed to deal with any problems requiring preventive
action
(c) initiation of preventive action and application of controls to ensure that it is effective
(d) ensuring that relevant information on actions taken is submitted for management
review
9.1.4 Identification of Nonconforming Items
1 The Contractor shall clearly identify each nonconforming item with a status tag or other
distinguishing mark. The Contractor shall establish procedures for installing, monitoring, and
removing these status tags and identify personnel authorised to remove status tags.
9.1.5 Acceptance and Approval of Nonconforming items
1 Acceptance of the Contractors proposed disposition of Nonconforming items should be his

obtained in writing from the Engineer prior to the undertaking of any remedial works by the
his Contractor.
2 Close out of Nonconforming items must be agreed in writing by the Engineer.
9.1.6 Nonconformance Records
1 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the following information for each
nonconformance:
(a) identification of nonconformance

(b) description of nonconformance
(c) evaluation of nonconformance to establish the cause
ar
(d) recommended corrective action
at
(e) date nonconformance was identified
(f) date corrective action was completed
-Q
(g) description of final corrective action.
LL
2 The Contractor shall establish and maintain a nonconformance log. The log shall contain the
following information as a minimum:
W
(a) unique sequential reference number

(b) date issued
s
en
(c) originator
(d) description of item deemed to be in nonconformance
m
(e) description of nonconformance

e
(f) Contractors recommended and final disposition

Si
(g) Engineers acceptance of Contractors recommended and final disposition

(h) date closed
(i) remarks, as applicable
END OF PART
Part 10: Laboratories
10 LABORATORIES ..................................................................................................... 2
10.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
10.1.1 Approved testing Laboratories 2
10.1.2 Government Laboratory 2
10.1.3 Independent Laboratories and Material Testing 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 10: Laboratories
10 LABORATORIES
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Approved testing Laboratories
1 Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer in writing, the Contractor shall submit a list of
laboratories he intends to use for testing purposes during the course of the Contract to the
Engineer for approval no later than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract.
10.1.2 Government Laboratory
1 Where required by the Engineer or directed in the Project Documentation, samples of

materials shall be submitted for testing at the Government Laboratory.
2 The Contractor is responsible for the timely delivery of all samples and materials to the
Materials and Laboratory Division.
ar
10.1.3 Independent Laboratories and Material Testing
at
1 QCS terms and clauses regarding independent laboratories are obligatory and considered to
-Q
be part of the contract conditions.
2 The Contractor shall follow and comply with regular Circulars regarding testing and
laboratories, Quality forms, Safety forms etc. which are issued from the relevant authorities.
LL
3 The Contractor shall only engage independent laboratories from the latest approved
W
laboratory list issued by the relevant authorities for Quality Control testing purposes.
4 The Contractor shall ensure that copies of all testing results are sent directly from the
s
laboratory or testing agency to the Owner and/or to any other party specified in the Contract.
en
5 It is the full responsibility of the Contractor to assure that, project's data base and information
m
made available to the relevant authorities is true and updated with that existing in the site.
e
6 The Contractor shall coordinate, accompany and cooperate with QA/QC staff during site
Si
visits, Quality audits and report all nonconformities to the Owner. He shall also ensure that
proper records are maintained on the issuance of Nonconformities and produce upon request
by the relevant authority.
7 The Contractor shall ensure that the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative shall administer
and witness the sampling and testing process, including sampling locations, collection and
transportation.
8 The Contractor shall ensure that the samples for testing are collected and delivered by the
appointed laboratory or under complete supervision and responsibility of the Engineer. Any
samples collected or delivered to the appointed laboratory by the Contractor not in the
presence of the Engineer or appointed Laboratory will not be considered or approved by the
Engineer.
9 A Field laboratory can only be used for project quality purposes, when operated by one of the
Owner approved laboratories and that satisfies the requirements specified by the Owner.
END OF PART
Part 11: Site Meetings and Reports
11 SITE MEETINGS AND REPORTS .......................................................................... 2

11.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
11.1.1 Contractor Site Quality Meetings 2
11.1.2 Monthly Quality Reports 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 11: Site Meetings and Reports
11 SITE MEETINGS AND REPORTS
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 Contractor Site Quality Meetings
1 The Contractor shall hold Contract specific QA/QC meetings chaired by the Contractor’s
Representative on a monthly basis throughout the duration of the Work which shall be
attended by the Contractor senior management. The Contractor shall include QA/QC as
items on the agenda for every meeting held and ensure that the subject is actively discussed.
Topics to be addressed at the site Quality meeting shall include, but shall not be limited too.
(a) Providing 4 week look ahead of planned quality activities

(b) Reviewing of the previous months Quality Performance
(c) Factory / Off site Inspection activities
ar
(d) Non Conformance of activities
at
(e) Audit schedules -Q
(f) Results of Audits, Inspections and Tests (including Factory / Off site activities)
(g) Status of inspection of test plans and method statements
LL
(h) Quality Training

(i) Project quality plan and quality control plans review and on-going effectiveness Project
W
Deliverables
(j) Key performance indicators
s
en
11.1.2 Monthly Quality Reports

m
1 The Contractor shall produce and submit to the Engineer a Monthly Report in the format
approved by the Engineer taking into account any specific Owner requirements.
e
Si
2 The Monthly Quality Report shall as a minimum address the topics listed in 11.1.1 above.
END OF PART
Part 12: Failure by The Contractor to Meet Acceptable Quality Performance
12 FAILURE BY THE CONTRACTOR TO MEET ACCEPTABLE QUALITY

PERFORMANCE ........................................................................................... 2
12.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... 2
12.1.1 General 2
12.1.2 Penalty for Poor Quality Works 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
12 FAILURE BY THE CONTRACTOR TO MEET ACCEPTABLE

QUALITY PERFORMANCE
12.1 INTRODUCTION
12.1.1 General
1 Should the Contractor not maintain acceptable quality performance then the Owner or
Engineer may, in addition to any other amounts withheld under the Contract, withhold sum of
money from the Contractor equivalent to the work which has not met the required standards.
The criteria used for determining acceptable performance are as defined the Contract and
the Engineer’s decision shall be final. The following items shall be taken into consideration
when assessing non-acceptable performance;
(a) any ‘stop work’ instructions issued to the Contractor
ar
(b) any NCR issued to the Contractor
at
(c) any adverse comments arising from quality inspections or quality audits
(d) any adverse formal communication from the Owner or enforcing authorities or
-Q
government organisations to the Contractor regarding sub-standard quality
performance.
LL
12.1.2 Penalty for Poor Quality Works

W
1 Further to Clause 12.1.1, should the Contractor not maintain acceptable quality performance
s
then the Owner or Engineer may impose penalties on the Contractor. A general Set of
en
Unacceptable performance criterion that may be imposed by the owner or Engineer for poor
quality work is defined in below table. The financial penalties for poor quality work shall be
m
defined within the Contract.

e
Si
Penalty for Poor Quality Work
No Unacceptable performance criteria Penalty (QR)
Commencement of Work on the Worksite without

1 an approved Quality Management System and/or _____ per day worked
Quality Plans after due date
Commencement of Work on the Worksite without
the approved quality staff who are to be appointed
2 _____ per day worked per staff
and employed on a fulltime or part-time basis at the
Worksite
Commencement of Work without an approved
3 _____ per day worked
method statement or Inspection and Test Plan
Failure to follow any of the Quality Assurance or
Quality Control measures mentioned in the
4 _____ per incident
approved Quality Management System or QCS or
ar
Contract Documents
at
Failure to provide Plant, Materials, Goods and
workmanship as per Specification or provision of-Q
sub-standard Plant, Materials, Goods and
workmanship that do not meet the Specification
5 _____ per incident
requirements (this includes Plant, Materials, Goods
and workmanship that have been sent for testing as
LL
per Specification requirements and fail to meet the

specified criteria)
W
Failure to notify the Owner of a quality related

6 incident or failure to provide a quality related incident _____ per incident
report to the Owner in a timely manner
s
en
Failure to provide an accurate monthly quality report

7 or failure to provide a monthly quality report in a _____ per day of delay
timely manner
m
Failure to attend meetings or other events related to

e
8 _____ per instance

quality issues organised by the Owner or Engineer
Si
Failure to provide the required information

requested by the Engineer during quality audits
Failure to conduct quality audits at periods not
exceeding 3 months or as stipulated in the Contract
Documents (whichever the minimum) throughout
the duration of the Work
END OF PART
Part 13: Suspension of Work
13 SUSPENSION OF WORK ............................................................................. 2

13.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
13.1.1 Suspension of Work 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 13: Suspension of Work
13 SUSPENSION OF WORK
13.1 GENERAL
13.1.1 Suspension of Work
1 The Contractor may be issued with stop work instructions from the Engineer for any observed
cases of serious or imminent Quality violation associated with the Work. On receipt of a stop
work instruction the Contractor shall refrain from work until such time as remedial action has
been taken to alleviate the serious or imminent quality violation and necessary measure put
in place to prevent its reoccurrence. The Contractor shall be responsible for the delay
caused due to this stop work instruction and is not entitled to claim extension of time.
2 It is the Contractor own responsibility to stop work if any unknown or unplanned conditions
occur that give rise to serious or imminent quality violations. In such circumstances the
Contractor shall assess the risks associated with any remedial work required and revise the
method statements. The revised method statement shall be reviewed and approved by the
ar
Contractor’s Quality Manager as appropriate. Revised method statements shall be approved
by the Engineer before the recommencement of Work.
at
3 The Contractor shall document Quality violations as per Part 9.
-Q
4 Notwithstanding Part 13.1.1 (1) and (2) Supervision of work shall be in line with the Contract
requirements.
LL
END OF PART
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 14: Appendix A – Sampling and Testing Frequencies
14 APPENDIX A – SAMPLING AND TESTING FREQUENCIES ----------------------- 22

14.1 SOIL INVESTIGATION ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 22
14.1.1 Boreholes (for buildings) ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
14.1.2 Boreholes (for highways, bridges, high cuts, culverts, retaining walls etc) ------- 22
14.2 BENTONITE SLURRY ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 23
14.2.1 Density -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
14.2.2 Viscosity (or Mash Value)6-------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
14.2.3 Yield Stress6 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
14.2.4 Gel Strength6 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 23
14.2.5 Shear Strength6 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
6
14.2.6 Sand Content ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
14.2.7 Filtrate Loss (also known as Fluid or Filter Loss or Filter Press)6 ------------------- 23
6
14.2.8 Bentonite Content ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
14.2.9 pH6 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
ar
14.2.10 Unit Weight --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
14.2.11 Viscosity (or Mash Value)7-------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
at
14.2.12 Slump Cone -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
-Q
14.2.13 Gradation8 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
14.2.14 Density (or Unit Weight Test)8 --------------------------------------------------------------- 23
14.2.15 Permeability8 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
LL
8
14.2.16 Viscosity ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 24
8
14.2.17 pH ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
W
14.2.18 Filtrate Loss (also known as Fluid or Filter Loss or Filter Press)8 ------------------- 24
14.2.19 Bentonite Content8 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
s
14.3 PILING -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25

en
14.3.1 Static Load Test --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25

14.3.2 Cube Test ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
m
14.3.3 Integrity Test (or Low Strain Integrity Test) ----------------------------------------------- 25

e
14.3.4 (Crosshole) Sonic Logging Test------------------------------------------------------------- 25

Si
14.3.5 Calliper Logging --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25

14.3.6 Dynamic Load Test (or High Strain Dynamic Test) ------------------------------------- 25
14.3.7 Static Axial Tensile Load Test --------------------------------------------------------------- 25
14.3.8 Lateral Load Test ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
14.4 EARTHWORKS, SUBGRADE, BASE, SUBBASE, BACKFILL, SUB-
BALLAST ETC, --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
14.4.1 (Modified) Proctor Test - [Optimum Moisture Content (OMC) & Maximum
Dry Density (MDD)] ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
14.4.2 Field Density & Field Moisture Content [also known as (Field) Compaction
Test]------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 26
14.4.3 Gradation (Sieve) Analysis ------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
14.4.4 Atterberg Limits (Index limits) - [Liquid Limit & Plasticity Index] --------------------- 26
14.4.5 Shape (Flakiness Index & Elongation Index) Also known as Fractured
Faces ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
14.4.6 Soundness (or Magnesium Sulphate Test as applicable)----------------------------- 27
14.4.7 Water Soluble Sulphate or Acid Soluble Sulphate as applicable14------------------ 27
14
14.4.8 Water Soluble Chloride or Acid Soluble Chloride as applicable ------------------- 27
14.4.9 Organic Matter Content ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
14.4.10 Sand Equivalent --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
14.4.11 Los Angeles Abrasion or Aggregate Abrasion Value as applicable ---------------- 27
14.4.12 California Bearing Ratio (CBR) test together with the swell criteria ---------------- 27
16
14.4.13 Cone Penetrometer Test -------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
14.4.14 Plate Load Test16 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
14.4.15 Clay Lumps and Friable Particles ----------------------------------------------------------- 27
14.4.16 Layer Thickness Verification (Trial Pit) ---------------------------------------------------- 28
14.4.17 Lightweight Pieces (or Particles) - This includes coal lignite, chert etc.17 --------- 28
14.4.18 Moisture – Density Relations (for Soil-Cement Mixtures etc) as applicable ------ 28
14.4.19 Material Finer than 75 μm -------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
14.4.20 Compressive Strength - Soil-Cement Mixtures etc ------------------------------------- 28
14.4.21 Immersed Compressive Strength - Soil-Cement Mixtures etc ----------------------- 28
14.4.22 Tensile Strength - Soil-Cement Mixtures etc18 ------------------------------------------- 28
ar
14.4.23 Water Absorption17 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
at
14.4.24 Moisture Content -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
14.4.25 Loose Bulk Density and Voids17 ------------------------------------------------------------- 28
-Q
14.4.26 Density or Specific Gravity (of Soil) -------------------------------------------------------- 28
14.4.27 Particle Density (or Unit Weight) ------------------------------------------------------------ 29
14.4.28 Carbonate Content of Soil -------------------------------------------------------------------- 29
LL
14.4.29 Shear Strength by Direct Shear (Small Shear Box) ------------------------------------ 29

14.4.30 Expansion of Aggregates from Hydration Reactions ----------------------------------- 29
W
14.4.31 Layer Thickness Verification (Light Weight Deflector (LWD) ------------------------ 29

14.4.32 Layer Thickness Verification (Ground Penetrating Radar)20 ------------------------- 29
s
20
14.4.33 Layer Thickness Verification (Cone Penetrometer Test) ---------------------------- 29
en
14.4.34 Micro Deval17------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29

14.4.35 Consolidation Test ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 29
m
14.4.36 Permeability -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29

e
14.4.37 Vane Shear in Cohesive Soil----------------------------------------------------------------- 29

Si
14.4.38 Soil Resistivity ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29

14.4.39 Unconfined Compressive Strength --------------------------------------------------------- 29
14.4.40 Point Load Strength Index of Rock --------------------------------------------------------- 30
14.4.41 (Also known as Crushing Strength) -------------------------------------------------------- 30
14.4.42 Compressive Strength and Elastic Moduli of Intact Rock21 (Also known as
Crushing Strength) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30
14.4.43 Cement Bound Granular Mixtures & Soil Treated by Cement (Hydraulically
Bound Mixtures) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30
14.4.44 Soil Treated by Lime (Unbound and Hydraulically Bound Mixtures)---------------- 30
14.4.45 Slag Bound Mixtures & Soil Treated by Slag (Hydraulically Bound Mixtures) ---- 30
14.4.46 Hydraulic Road Binder Bound Mixtures & Soil Treated by Hydraulic Road
Binder (Hydraulically Bound Mixtures) ----------------------------------------------------- 30
14.4.47 Fly Ash Bound Mixtures, Fly Ash for Hydraulically Bound Mixtures & Soil
Treated by Fly Ash (Hydraulically Bound Mixtures) ------------------------------------ 30
14.4.48 Alpha Coefficient of Vitrified Blast Furnace Slag ---------------------------------------- 30
14.4.49 Clay Liner Plates -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30
,,,
14.5 AGGREGATES –, CONCRETE LIGHTWEIGHT ETC ----------------------------- 31
14.5.4 Lightweight Pieces (or Particles) This includes coal lignite, chert etc -------------- 31
14.5.5 Organic Impurities ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 31
14.5.6 Water Absorption (Saturated Surface Dry) ----------------------------------------------- 32
14.5.7 Sand Equivalent --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
14.5.8 Specific Gravity (Apparent) or Bulk Specific Gravity or Unit Weight (Bulk
Density) or Particle Density or Relative Density as applicable ----------------------- 32
14.5.9 Loose Bulk Density and Voids --------------------------------------------------------------- 32
14.5.10 Moisture Content or Water Content as applicable -------------------------------------- 32
14.5.11 Shell Content ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 32
14.5.12 Shape (Flakiness Index & Elongation Index) Also known as Fractured
Faces ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
ar
14.5.13 Water Soluble Sulphate or Acid Soluble Sulphate as applicable-------------------- 33
at
14.5.14 Water Soluble Chloride or Acid Soluble Chloride as applicable --------------------- 33
14.5.15 Soundness (or Magnesium Sulphate Test as applicable)----------------------------- 33
-Q
14.5.16 Los Angeles Abrasion or Aggregate Abrasion Value as applicable ---------------- 33
14.5.17 10% Fines Value -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33
14.5.18 Aggregate Impact Value ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 33
LL
14.5.19 Aggregate Crushing Value ------------------------------------------------------------------- 33

14.5.20 Drying Shrinkage ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33
W
14.5.21 Potential Reactivity (Alkali-Silica, Alkali-Carbonation, Cement-Aggregate

combination etc) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33
s
14.5.22 Plasticity Index ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34

en
14.5.23 Filler, Mineral Filler (for Bituminous Paving Course – AASHTO M17 or
ASTM C51 etc applicable) -------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
m
14.5.24 Density - Lightweight Aggregates ----------------------------------------------------------- 34

e
14.5.25 Physical Properties - Lightweight Aggregates ------------------------------------------- 34

Si
14.5.26 Constituents of Coarse Recycled Aggregates ------------------------------------------- 34

14.5.27 Influence of Recycled Aggregate Extract on the Initial Setting Time of
Cement26 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 34
14.5.28 Polished Stone Value -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
14.5.29 pH Value ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 34
14.5.30 Methylene Blue Value ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
14.5.31 Micro Deval Coefficient ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 34
14.5.32 Iron Staining-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
14.5.33 Surface Moisture Content in Fine Aggregate (Chapman Flask) --------------------- 34
14.5.34 Chemical Analysis of Limestone, Quicklime, and Hydrated Lime ------------------- 35
14.5.35 Petrographic Analysis-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35
14.6 AGGREGATES – COARSE, FINE, MINERAL FILLER, (ASPHALT
WORKS) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36
14.6.4 Organic Impurities ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36

14.6.5 Water Absorption (Saturated Surface Dry) ----------------------------------------------- 36
14.6.6 Sand Equivalent --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
14.6.7 Specific Gravity (Apparent) or Bulk Specific Gravity or Unit Weight (Bulk
Density) or Particle Density or Relative Density as applicable ----------------------- 37
14.6.8 Moisture Content or Water Content as applicable -------------------------------------- 37
14.6.9 Shape (Flakiness Index & Elongation Index) and Fractured Faces ---------------- 37
14.6.10 Acid Soluble Sulphate ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
14.6.11 Acid Soluble Chloride -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
14.6.12 Soundness (Magnesium Sulphate) --------------------------------------------------------- 37
14.6.13 Los Angeles Abrasion or ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
14.6.14 Aggregate Crushing Value ------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
14.6.15 Plasticity Index ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38
14.6.16 Filler, Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Courses ------------------------------------ 38
14.6.17 Petrographic Analysis-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38
ar
14.7 GROUTS ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
at
14.7.1 Mix Proportion ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
14.7.2 Fresh Density ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 39
-Q
14.7.3 Fluid Density (Cone Method)----------------------------------------------------------------- 39
14.7.4 Bleeding Test ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 39
14.7.5 Volume Change, Vertical Shrinkage (Change in Height),
LL
Expansion/Shrinkage -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
14.7.6 Compressive Strength Test ------------------------------------------------------------------ 39
W
14.7.7 Workability---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
14.7.8 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag --------------------------------------------------- 39
s
14.7.9 Flow Consistency ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39

en
14.7.10 Setting Time (Initial & Final Set) ------------------------------------------------------------ 39

m
14.7.11 Bond Strength (at 28 days) ------------------------------------------------------------------- 39

14.7.12 Grout coring and compressive strength testing required where grouting is
e
for increasing soil or rock strength --------------------------------------------------------- 40

Si
14.8 BITUMINOUS (ASPHALT) CONCRETE PAVEMENT, PRIME COAT,

BITUMEN etc., , , -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41
14.8.1 Field Density and Pavement Thickness (using cores) --------------------------------- 41
14.8.2 Extraction and Gradation of Bituminous Concrete Mix and Determination of
Binder Content (or Asphalt Content) Also known as Mechanical Analysis of
Extracted Aggregate --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41
14.8.3 Maximum Specific Gravity (GMM, ST)----------------------------------------------------- 41
14.8.4 Marshall Properties of Bituminous Concrete Mix (Stability, Flow, Air Voids,
VMA) & Loss of Marshall Stability ---------------------------------------------------------- 42
14.8.5 Bitumen (Prime Coat, Tack Coat etc) – Rate of Application ------------------------- 42
14.8.6 Penetration of Bitumen & Penetration of Residue (Also known as Needle
Penetration) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42
14.8.7 Flash Point of Bitumen ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 42
14.8.8 Solubility of Bitumen --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42
14.8.9 Ductility of Bitumen & Ductility of Residue ------------------------------------------------ 42
14.8.10 Rolling Thin Film Oven Test (RTFOT) & Mass Loss – Effects of Short-Term
Ageing (Also known as Effect of Heat and Air on a Moving Film of Asphalt) ---- 42
14.8.11 Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring & Ball) – Temperature Susceptibility ----------- 43
14.8.12 Kinematic Viscosity of Bitumen -------------------------------------------------------------- 43
14.8.13 Determination of Water in Bitumen --------------------------------------------------------- 43
14.8.14 Compaction and Shear Properties of Bituminous Mixtures --------------------------- 43
14.8.15 Effect of Water on Compressive Strength of Bituminous Mixtures (Also
known as Loss of Stability Test) ------------------------------------------------------------ 43
14.8.16 Layer Thickness Verification (Falling Weight Deflectometer - FWD) -------------- 43
14.8.17 Layer Thickness Verification (Ground Penetrating Radar)42 ------------------------- 43
14.8.18 Layer Thickness Verification (Trial Pit) ---------------------------------------------------- 43
14.8.19 Layer Thickness Verification (Cone Penetrometer Test)43---------------------------- 43
14.8.20 Layer Thickness (Volumetric Patch Technique)43--------------------------------------- 44
14.8.21 Layer Thickness Verification (Light Weight Deflector (LWD)43 ---------------------- 44
14.8.22 International Roughness Index - IRI (Ride Quality) using Multi Laser
ar
Profiler (MLP) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 44
at
14.8.23 Ride Quality, Smoothness (using 3m straight edge) ----------------------------------- 44
14.8.24 Rolling Straight Edge Test (Also known as Measurement of Pavement
-Q
Deflection) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 44
14.8.25 Slip/Skip Resistance of Surface ------------------------------------------------------------- 44
14.8.26 Water Sensitivity Test (Lottman Test) Also known as Tensile Strength
LL
Ratio Test ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 44

14.8.27 Elastic Recovery of Modified Bitumen (Ductility) ---------------------------------------- 44
W
14.8.28 Accelerated Aging Using Pressure Aging Vessel (PAV) for Modified
Bitumen – Effects of Long-Term Ageing -------------------------------------------------- 44
s
14.8.29 Flexural Creep Stiffness of Modified Bitumen – Bending Beam Rheometer

en
(BBR) Also known as Low Temperature Flexibility ------------------------------------- 45

14.8.30 Fracture Properties of Modified Bitumen – Direct Tension Test (DTT) ------------ 45
m
14.8.31 Rheological Properties of Modified Bitumen – Dynamic Shear Rheometer

e
(DSR) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 45
Si
14.8.32 Storage Stability of Modified Bitumen------------------------------------------------------ 45

14.8.33 Dynamic Viscosity of Bitumen --------------------------------------------------------------- 45
14.8.34 Flash Point by Pensky-Martens ------------------------------------------------------------- 45
14.8.35 Specific Gravity of Semi-Solid Bituminous Material (Pycnometer Method) ------- 45
14.8.36 Rate of Spread of Coated Chippings ------------------------------------------------------ 45
14.8.37 Viscosity - Bitumen, Asphalt (Vacuum Capillary Viscometer, Saybolt,
Saybolt Fural, Cone & Plate) ----------------------------------------------------------------- 45
14.8.38 Sealants and Fillers for Joints and Cracks in Pavements ----------------------------- 45
14.8.39 Quality Control for Asphalt Manufacturing Plants --------------------------------------- 46
14.8.40 Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving
Materials ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 46
14.8.41 Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials ------------------------------------------------------------ 46
14.8.42 Determination of Cement Content in Cement-Treated Aggregate ------------------ 46
14.8.43 Testing Lime for Chemical Constituents and Particle Sizes -------------------------- 46
14.8.44 Temperature Measurement - Asphalt Mix ------------------------------------------------ 46
14.8.45 Resistance to Plastic Flow -------------------------------------------------------------------- 46
14.8.46 Determination of a Volatile Distillate Fraction - Cold Asphalt Mixtures ------------ 46

14.8.47 Moisture or Volatile Distillates - Bituminous Paving Mixtures ------------------------ 46
14.8.48 Asphalt Content - Bituminous Mixtures by the Nuclear Method --------------------- 46
14.8.49 Accelerated Weathering - Bituminous Materials ---------------------------------------- 47
14.9 REINFORCING STEEL, COUPLERS, WELDED FABRIC, -------------------------- 48
14.9.1 Tensile Test -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48
14.9.2 Bend Test ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48
14.9.3 Re-bend Test ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 48
14.9.4 Chemical Composition------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48
14.9.5 Mechanical Couplers, Splices for Reinforcement Bars -------------------------------- 48
14.9.6 Welded Fabric ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48
14.9.7 Rib Geometry ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 48
14.9.8 Compression - Metallic Materials ----------------------------------------------------------- 48
14.9.9 Hardness (Brinell, Rockwell, Indentation) - Metallic Materials ----------------------- 48
14.9.10 Tests for Stainless Steel Bars --------------------------------------------------------------- 48
ar
14.10 STRUCTURAL STEEL, WELDING -------------------------------------------------------- 49
at
14.10.1 Tensile --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49
-Q
14.10.2 Chemical Analysis ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 49
14.10.3 Hardness------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 49
14.10.4 Notched Bar Impact Test (Also known as Charpy Pendulum Impact Test or
LL
Charpy V-notch Test) -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49

14.10.5 Izod Impact Strength Test -------------------------------------------------------------------- 50
W
14.10.6 Ultrasonic Test - Welds----------------------------------------------------------------------- 50

14.10.7 Radiographic, Digital Radiographic Test51 - Welds ------------------------------------- 50
s
14.10.8 Magnetic Particle Test - Welds -------------------------------------------------------------- 50

en
14.10.9 Penetrating Test, Liquid Penetrant51 - Welds -------------------------------------------- 50

14.10.10 Visual Test - Fusion Welding ---------------------------------------------------------------- 50
m
14.10.11 Automated Ultrasonic Test - Welded Seam of Steel Tubes -------------------------- 50

14.10.12 Welding Procedure Test ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 50
e
14.10.13 Bend Test - Ductility of Welds --------------------------------------------------------------- 50

Si
14.10.14 Transverse Tensile Test - Welds ----------------------------------------------------------- 51

14.10.15 Bend Test - Welds ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 51
14.10.16 Impact Test - Welds---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51
14.10.17 Hardness Test - Welds ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 51
14.10.18 Macroscopic & Microscopic Inspection - Welds ----------------------------------------- 51
14.10.19 Acoustic Emission Test - Welds ------------------------------------------------------------ 51
14.11 PRESTRESSING STEEL, SHEATHS, ANCHORAGES, COUPLERS ------------ 52
14.11.1 Tension, Yield, Elongation, Break Strength - Steel Wire, Strand, Rod ------------ 52
14.11.2 Relaxation - Steel Wire, Strand, Rod ------------------------------------------------------ 52
14.11.3 Bond Strength - 15.24-mm Diameter Steel Prestressing Strand -------------------- 52
14.11.4 Bending, Hardness - Steel Rods, Strands ------------------------------------------------ 52
14.11.5 Chemical Analysis - Steel --------------------------------------------------------------------- 52
14.11.6 Dimensions - Steel Strip Sheaths ----------------------------------------------------------- 52
14.11.7 Flexural Behaviour - Steel Strip Sheaths-------------------------------------------------- 52
14.11.8 To-and-Fro Bending - Steel Strip Sheaths------------------------------------------------ 52
14.11.9 Lateral Load Resistance - Steel Strip Sheaths ------------------------------------------ 52
14.11.10 Tensile Load Resistance - Steel Strip Sheaths ------------------------------------------ 52

14.11.11 Leak Tightness - Steel Strip Sheaths ------------------------------------------------------ 53
14.11.12 Anchorages -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53
14.11.13 Couplers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 53
14.11.14 Rib Geometry ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 53
14.11.15 Compression - Metallic Materials ----------------------------------------------------------- 53
14.11.16 Hardenability, Hardness (Brinell, Rockwell, Indentation) - Bars, Metallic
Materials ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 53
14.11.17 Torsion Test - Wires, Strand ----------------------------------------------------------------- 53
14.11.18 Welding Test - Reinforcement Bars -------------------------------------------------------- 53
,
14.12 WATER ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 54
14.12.1 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) ---------------------------------------------------------------- 54
14.12.2 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) -------------------------------------------------------------- 54
14.12.3 Total Volatile Suspended Solids (TVSS) -------------------------------------------------- 54
14.12.4 Total Volatile Dissolved Solids (TVDS) ---------------------------------------------------- 54
ar
14.12.5 Settleable Solids -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
at
14.12.6 Total Solids --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
14.12.7 Turbidity ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
-Q
14.12.8 Sludge Weight ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
14.12.9 Sludge Volume ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
14.12.10 Sludge Volume Index -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
LL
14.12.11 Oil & Grease ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54

14.12.12 Chloride ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
W
14.12.13 Residual Chlorine ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54

14.12.14 Total Chlorine ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 54
s
14.12.15 Sulphate------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
en
14.12.16 Sulphide ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55

m
14.12.17 Cyanides Concentration ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 55

14.12.18 Phosphorus (Total) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
e
14.12.19 pH -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
Si
14.12.20 Fluoride-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.21 Bromide ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.22 Alkalinity (Total) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.23 Phenolphthalein Alkalinity--------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.24 Hardness (Total) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.25 Conductivity -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.26 Calcium-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.27 Magnesium --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.28 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) ------------------------------------------------------ 55
14.12.29 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) --------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.30 Total Organic Carbon (TOC) ----------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.31 Ammonium Nitrogen --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.32 Nitrate Nitrogen --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.33 Nitrite Nitrogen ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
14.12.34 Total Nitrogen------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 55
14.12.35 Total Organic Nitrogen, Kjeldahl Nitrogen ------------------------------------------------ 56
14.12.36 Phenol Concentration -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56

14.12.37 Total Silicates ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 56
14.12.38 Organic Hydrocarbon (Total)----------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.39 Residual Pesticides ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.40 Heavy Metals Concentrations---------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.41 Mercury-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.42 Arsenic -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.43 Selenium ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 56
14.12.44 Boron ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.45 Aluminium ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.46 Silicon---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.47 Strontium ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.48 Sodium -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.49 Potassium ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.50 Hexavalent Chromium ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
ar
14.12.51 Total Chromium --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
at
14.12.52 Total Coliform ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 56
14.12.53 Fecal Coliform ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
-Q
14.12.54 E Coli ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.55 Giardia --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
14.12.56 Viruses -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
LL
14.12.57 Nematodes (Helminth) Eggs ----------------------------------------------------------------- 56

14.12.58 Microscopic Examination---------------------------------------------------------------------- 57
W
14.12.59 Lead ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 57

14.12.60 Nickel ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 57
s
14.12.61 Zinc ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 57

en
14.12.62 Cadmium------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 57
14.12.63 Copper -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 57
m
14.12.64 Gasoline Range Organics (C6-C10) ------------------------------------------------------- 57

e
14.12.65 Diesel Range Organics (C11-C28) --------------------------------------------------------- 57

Si
14.12.66 Heavy Fraction Range (C29-C40) ---------------------------------------------------------- 57

14.12.67 Water Analysis of Soil or Soil Analysis for Water --------------------------------------- 57
14.13 CEMENT, , ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 58
14.13.1 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement (Mortars) -------------------------------- 58
14.13.2 Chemical Analysis of Cement --------------------------------------------------------------- 58
14.13.3 Setting Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 58
14.13.4 Consistency, Soundness ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 58
14.13.5 Fineness of Cement ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 58
14.13.6 Consistence of Fresh Mortar - Masonry Cement---------------------------------------- 58
14.13.7 Air Content - Masonry Cement -------------------------------------------------------------- 58
14.13.8 Water Retention - Masonry Cement ------------------------------------------------------- 58
14.13.9 Sieve Residue ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 58
14.13.10 Autoclave Expansion (Also known as Cement Shrinkage Test) --------------------- 59
14.13.11 Specific Gravity, Density ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
14.13.12 Pozzolanicity Test for Pozzolanic Cement ------------------------------------------------ 59
14.13.13 Sulphate Resistant Cement ------------------------------------------------------------------ 59
14.13.14 Early Stiffening ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 59

14.13.15 Potential Expansion of Portland-Cement Mortars Exposed to Sulphate ---------- 59
14.13.16 Heat of Hydration ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
14.13.17 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag - Chemical & Physical Properties ------- 59
14.13.18 Fly Ash or Pulverized-Fuel Ash - Chemical & Physical Properties49 -------------- 59
14.13.19 Silica Fume - Chemical & Physical Properties49 --------------------------------------- 59
14.14 INTERLOCKING BLOCKS ------------------------------------------------------------------- 60
14.14.1 Flexural Strength, Tensile Strength, Splitting Strength – Natural Stones,
Dimension Stones, Slate, Concrete Paving Blocks, Concrete Slab Units --------- 60
14.14.2 Water Absorption - Concrete Slab Units, Dimension Stone, Slate ----------------- 60
14.14.3 Dimension, Flatness, Dimensional Stability - Concrete Slab Units,
Agglomerated Stones, Concrete Paving Blocks ---------------------------------------- 60
14.14.4 Density (or Specific Gravity) - Concrete Slab Units, Dimension Stone ------------ 60
14.14.5 Slip Resistance (Dry State) - Precast Paver Units, Natural Stones ---------------- 60
14.14.6 Abrasion Resistance - Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic, Dimension Stone ------- 60
ar
14.14.7 Compressive Strength - Dimension Stone ------------------------------------------------ 60
at
14.14.8 Strength of Individual Stone Anchorages ------------------------------------------------- 60
14.14.9 Cover Measurement - Concrete Slab Units ---------------------------------------------- 60
-Q
14.14.10 Initial Surface Absorption - Concrete Slab Units ---------------------------------------- 60
14.14.11 Carbonation Depth - Concrete Slab Units ------------------------------------------------ 61
14.14.12 Aggregates - Concrete Slab Units ---------------------------------------------------------- 61
LL
14.14.13 Granular Base, Setting Bed for Concrete Pavers, Natural (Stone) Pavers ------- 61
14.14.14 Compressive Strength - Setting Bed, Mortar (for Pavers) ---------------------------- 61
W
14.14.15 Modulus of Rupture - Dimension Stone --------------------------------------------------- 61

14.14.16 Flexural Modulus of Elasticity - Dimension Stone --------------------------------------- 61
s
14.14.17 Petrographic Examination - Dimension Stone ------------------------------------------- 61

en
14.14.18 Weather Resistance - Slate ------------------------------------------------------------------ 61

m
14.14.19 Structural Performance - Exterior Cladding ---------------------------------------------- 61

,
14.15 SURFACES FOR SPORTS AREAS, PLAYGROUND SURFACING ETC ------- 62
e
14.15.1 Slip Resistance ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62

Si
14.15.2 Joint Strength - Synthetic Surfaces -------------------------------------------------------- 62

14.15.3 Water Infiltration Rate ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62
14.15.4 Rotational Resistance ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62
14.15.5 Shock Absorption ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62
14.15.6 Spike Resistance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62
14.15.7 Ball Roll Behaviour ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62
14.15.8 Artificial Weathering Test, Environmental Testing -------------------------------------- 62
14.15.9 Fire Test ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 62
14.16 ADMIXTURES, ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 63
14.16.1 Water Soluble Chloride Content ------------------------------------------------------------ 63
14.16.2 Setting Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 63
14.16.3 Alkali Content of Admixtures ----------------------------------------------------------------- 63
14.16.4 Bleeding of Concrete -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 63
14.16.5 Capillary Absorption ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 63
14.16.6 Testing for Air-Entraining Admixtures ------------------------------------------------------ 63
14.16.7 Corrosion Susceptibility of Reinforcing Steel -------------------------------------------- 63
14.16.8 Infrared Analysis -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 63

14.16.9 Air Voids Characteristics in Hardened Concrete ---------------------------------------- 63
14.16.10 Conventional Dry Material Content --------------------------------------------------------- 63
14.16.11 Suitability of Special Purpose Admixtures ------------------------------------------------ 63
14.17 CONCRETE, SHOTCRETE, CONCRETE PAVEMENT, ----------------------------- 64
14.17.1 Cement -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64
14.17.2 Aggregates (Coarse, Fine, Lightweight etc) and Aggregate Reactivity ------------ 64
14.17.3 Admixtures --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64
14.17.4 Water ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64
14.17.5 Sampling Plastic (Fresh) Concrete, Slump Testing, Temperature
Measurement and Making Test Specimens in the Field ------------------------------ 64
14.17.6 Compressive Strength of Hardened Concrete (Making, Curing and Testing) ---- 64
14.17.7 Density of Hardened Concrete -------------------------------------------------------------- 64
14.17.8 Vebe Test, Flow Table Test, Concrete Compacting Factor - Fresh
Concrete ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 64
ar
14.17.9 Static Modulus of Elasticity in Compression---------------------------------------------- 64
at
14.17.10 Air Content of Fresh Concrete – Pressure Method ------------------------------------- 65
14.17.11 Air Content of Fresh Concrete – Volumetric Method ----------------------------------- 65
-Q
14.17.12 Bleeding ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 65
14.17.13 Density of Hardened, Unhardened Concrete - On Site, Nuclear Method --------- 65
14.17.14 Water Absorption of Hardened Concrete ------------------------------------------------- 65
LL
58
14.17.15 Water Penetration (or Permeability) of Hardened Concrete ----------------------- 65
14.17.16 Rapid Chloride (Ion) Penetration (RCP) or Chloride Migration Test58-------------- 65
W
14.17.17 Sulphate Content of Hardened Concrete58 ----------------------------------------------- 65

14.17.18 Initial Surface (Water) Absorption58 -------------------------------------------------------- 65
s
58
14.17.19 Chloride Ion Concentration, Chloride Content - Hardened Concrete ------------ 65
en
14.17.20 Rebound Hammer - Hardened Concrete ------------------------------------------------- 65

m
14.17.21 Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity Test - Hardened Concrete ---------------------------------- 65

14.17.22 Metal Cover Testing - Hardened Concrete ----------------------------------------------- 65
e
14.17.23 Cold Applied Joint Sealant Systems for Concrete Pavements ---------------------- 66
Si
14.17.24 Hot-Applied Joint Sealant Systems for Concrete Pavements ------------------------ 66

14.17.25 Unit Weight Test (Density) of Fresh Concrete ------------------------------------------- 66
14.17.26 Strain Measurement - Hardened Concrete ----------------------------------------------- 66
14.17.27 Depth of Carbonation - Cores or Broke (on Concrete) -------------------------------- 66
14.17.28 Core Compressive Strength------------------------------------------------------------------ 66
14.17.29 Cement Content of Hardened Concrete--------------------------------------------------- 66
14.17.30 Half-cell Potential - Hardened Concrete, Reinforcement Primer -------------------- 66
14.17.31 Particle Coating --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
14.17.32 Effect of Chemical Admixtures on the Corrosion of Embedded Steel -
Chloride Environment -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
14.17.33 Petrographic Examination on Hardened Concrete ------------------------------------- 66
14.17.34 Tensile Splitting Strength of Test Specimens -------------------------------------------- 66
14.17.35 Flexural Strength of Hardened Concrete-------------------------------------------------- 66
14.17.36 Tensile Strength of Concrete Surfaces ---------------------------------------------------- 66
14.17.37 Pull-Out Strength - Hardened Concrete --------------------------------------------------- 66
14.17.38 Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction - Hardened

Concrete ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 67
14.17.39 Abrasion Resistance of Concrete Surfaces ---------------------------------------------- 67
14.17.40 Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance------------------- 67
14.18 CONCRETE CURING ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
14.18.1 Water Retention - Curing Compound ------------------------------------------------------ 68
14.18.2 Reflectance, Pigments - Curing Compound ---------------------------------------------- 68
14.18.3 Drying Time - Curing Compound ----------------------------------------------------------- 68
14.18.4 Bond Strength Test - Curing Compound -------------------------------------------------- 68
14.18.5 Density (or Relative Density) ----------------------------------------------------------------- 68
14.18.6 Non-volatile Content and Settlement (or Volatile Organic Content - VOC) ------- 68
14.18.7 Sheet Materials ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
14.18.8 Burlap & Cotton --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
14.18.9 Supplementary Strength Tests to Verify Adequacy of Curing ----------------------- 68
14.19 PRECAST CONCRETE ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
ar
14.19.1 Cement -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
at
14.19.2 Bedding Mortar ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
-Q
14.19.3 Bedding Mortar In addition to the above, the mortar Sampling and Testing
Programme to be proposed by the Contractor based on mortar type(s) and
procedure(s); for Engineer’s approval ----------------------------------------------------- 69
LL
14.19.4 Welding Test - Reinforcement Bars -------------------------------------------------------- 69

,,
14.20 WATERPROOFING, ROOFING ---------------------------------------------------------- 70
W
14.20.1 Drainage Fabric (such as Geo-textiles, Geo-membranes, Geosynthetics

etc) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 70
s
14.20.2 Average Thickness, Thickness Tolerance, Overall Thickness (as

en
applicable) - Waterproofing Membrane --------------------------------------------------- 70

14.20.3 Density, Specific Gravity - Waterproofing Membrane, Waterstop ------------------ 70
m
14.20.4 Resistance to Chemicals, Liquids - Waterproofing Membrane ---------------------- 70

e
14.20.5 Tensile Strength & Elongation (at Yield / Break) - Waterproofing

Si
Membrane, Waterstop ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 70

14.20.6 Resistance Under Water Pressure, Water Penetration, Resistance,
Tightness (as applicable) - Waterproofing Membrane --------------------------------- 70
14.20.7 Water Absorption - Waterproofing Membrane ------------------------------------------- 71
14.20.8 Tear Resistance, Propagation Tear Resistance - Waterproofing Membrane ---- 71
14.20.9 Resistance to Puncture Propagation, Static, Dynamic Puncture -
Waterproofing Membrane -------------------------------------------------------------------- 71
14.20.10 Tensile Strength of Welded Seam, Seam Strength, Lap Adhesion (as
applicable) - Waterproofing Membrane --------------------------------------------------- 71
14.20.11 Air Pressure Test - Welded Seam ---------------------------------------------------------- 71
14.20.12 Resistance to Dynamic Water Pressure -------------------------------------------------- 71
14.20.13 Resistance to Rain ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71
14.20.14 Dimensional Stability - Waterproofing Membrane -------------------------------------- 71
14.20.15 Low Temperature Bend Test (or Flexibility) - Waterproofing Membrane ---------- 71
14.20.16 Adhesion to Rigid Substrate, Self (or Peel Strength) - Waterproofing
Membrane ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71
14.20.17 Water Vapour Permeability (or Water Vapour Transmission) -

Waterproofing Membrane -------------------------------------------------------------------- 72
14.20.18 Crack Bridging - Waterproofing Membrane ---------------------------------------------- 72
14.20.19 Pinhole Holiday Test --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72
14.20.20 Water Ponding Test ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72
14.20.21 Resistance to Ageing, Fatigue, Accelerated Weathering (UV Radiation,
Heating), Extensibility, Retention of Properties - Waterproofing Membrane ----- 72
14.20.22 Pliability Degrees - Bitumen-Saturated Felts and Woven Fabrics for
Roofing and Waterproofing ------------------------------------------------------------------ 72
14.20.23 Hardness (Initial-Shore, Rockwell, International) - Waterproofing
Membrane ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72
14.20.24 Set to Touch, Drying Time - Waterproofing Membrane ------------------------------- 72
14.20.25 Capability to Seal Around Fasteners - Waterproofing Membrane ------------------ 72
14.20.26 Test Methods for Emulsified Bitumens Used as Protective Coatings -------------- 72
14.20.27 Dimension of Protection Board -------------------------------------------------------------- 73
ar
14.20.28 Softening Point - Waterproofing Membrane---------------------------------------------- 73
at
14.20.29 Bitumen Content - Waterproofing Membrane -------------------------------------------- 73
14.20.30 Taber Abrasion (or Abrasion Resistance) - Acrylic Polymer, Liquid
-Q
Membrane ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73
14.20.31 Adhesives (Related to Waterproofing)----------------------------------------------------- 73
14.20.32 Viscosity - Roofing Bitumen ------------------------------------------------------------------ 73
LL
14.20.33 Working Time, Initial Setting Time and Service Strength Setting Time -
Epoxy Mortar ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73
W
14.20.34 Compressive Strength - Epoxy Mortar ----------------------------------------------------- 73

14.20.35 Tensile Strength - Epoxy Mortar ------------------------------------------------------------ 73
s
14.20.36 Flexural Strength - Epoxy Mortar ----------------------------------------------------------- 73

en
14.20.37 Bond Strength - Epoxy Resin ---------------------------------------------------------------- 73

14.20.38 Density - Epoxy Resin ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73
m
14.20.39 Coefficient of Linear Expansion - Epoxy Mortar ----------------------------------------- 73

e
14.20.40 Water Absorption - Epoxy Mortar ----------------------------------------------------------- 73

Si
14.20.41 Vapour Transmission - Volatile Liquid ----------------------------------------------------- 74

14.20.42 Voids - Roofing and Waterproofing Membrane ----------------------------------------- 74
14.20.43 Flexibility - Roofing and Waterproofing Materials and Membranes ----------------- 74
14.20.44 Non-volatile Content - Cold Liquid Applied Membrane -------------------------------- 74
14.20.45 Characterizing Thermoplastic Fabrics - Roofing and Waterproofing --------------- 74
14.20.46 Resistance to Wind Load, Uplift- Membrane Roofing Systems --------------------- 74
14.20.47 Impact Resistance - Bituminous Roofing Systems ------------------------------------- 74
14.20.48 Adhesive and Cohesive Strength Between Materials - Roofing or
Waterproofing Membranes and Systems ------------------------------------------------- 74
14.20.49 Resistance to Compaction of Asphalt Layer - Waterproofing Membrane for
Bridge ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 74
14.20.50 Behaviour of Bitumen Sheets During Application of Mastic Asphalt -
Waterproofing Membrane for Bridge ------------------------------------------------------- 74
14.20.51 Compatibility by Heat Conditioning - Waterproofing Membrane for Bridge ------- 75
14.20.52 Peel, Shear Resistance of Joints - Waterproofing Membrane ----------------------- 75
14.20.53 Resistance to Ozone - Waterproofing Membrane -------------------------------------- 75
14.20.54 Testing and Analysis of Asphalt Roll Roofing, Cap Sheets, and Shingles
Used in Roofing and Waterproofing -------------------------------------------------------- 75
14.20.55 Corrosion Resistance of Ferrous Metal Fastener Assemblies Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing ------------------------------------------------------------------ 75
14.21 RESIN, POLYMER/CEMENT COMPOSITION, ----------------------------------------- 76
14.21.1 Compressive Strength ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
14.21.2 Modulus of Elasticity in Flexure, Flexural Strength ------------------------------------- 76
14.21.3 Density of Hardened Resin Compositions ------------------------------------------------ 76
14.21.4 Modulus of Elasticity in Compression ------------------------------------------------------ 76
14.21.5 Tensile Strength--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
14.21.6 Resistance to Liquids -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
14.21.7 Peak Exotherm Temperature ---------------------------------------------------------------- 76
14.21.8 Temperature of Deflection Under Bending Stress -------------------------------------- 76
14.21.9 Creep in Compression ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
14.21.10 Unrestrained Linear Shrinkage, Coefficient of Thermal Expansion ---------------- 76
ar
14.21.11 UV Accelerated Weathering ----------------------------------------------------------------- 76
at
14.21.12 Slant Shear Strength --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
14.21.13 Shear Adhesion Bond ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
-Q
14.21.14 Skid Resistance --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
14.21.15 Taber Abrasion ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
,,
LL
14.22 MASONRY, BRICK, MORTAR ETC AND RELATED ACCESSORIES ---------- 77

14.22.1 Compressive Strength - Masonry Units --------------------------------------------------- 77
W
14.22.2 Density - Masonry Units ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 77

14.22.3 Dimension - Masonry Units ------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
s
14.22.4 Flatness - Masonry Units --------------------------------------------------------------------- 77

en
14.22.5 Water Absorption - Masonry Units---------------------------------------------------------- 77

14.22.6 Bending Tensile Strength - Masonry Units ----------------------------------------------- 77
m
14.22.7 Precast Concrete Masonry Units------------------------------------------------------------ 77

14.22.8 Filler for Movement Joint - Boards ---------------------------------------------------------- 77
e
14.22.9 Movement Joint Sealant ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 77

Si
14.22.10 Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry ------------------------------------ 78

14.22.11 Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry -------------------------------------------------------- 78
14.22.12 Compressive Strength (Average) - Mortar, Screed etc -------------------------------- 78
14.22.13 Flow (Consistency), Flowability -------------------------------------------------------------- 78
14.22.14 Water Absorption - Mortar, Screed etc ---------------------------------------------------- 78
14.22.15 Water Penetration Test ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 78
14.22.16 Flexural Strength - Mortar, Screed etc----------------------------------------------------- 78
14.22.17 Volume Change and/or (Linear) Shrinkage ---------------------------------------------- 78
14.22.18 Water Retention and/or Consistency Retention - Mortar, Screed etc -------------- 78
14.22.19 Stiffening Time - Mortar ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 78
14.22.20 Setting Time - Skim Coat --------------------------------------------------------------------- 78
14.22.21 UV Accelerated Weathering - Self Levelling Screed ----------------------------------- 78
14.22.22 Shear Adhesion Bond - Self-Levelling Screed ------------------------------------------- 78
14.22.23 Slip Resistance (Before and After Accelerated Weathering) - Self Levelling
Screed --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 78
14.22.24 Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength - Self Levelling Screed ----------------------------- 78
14.22.25 Bond Strength of Mortar to Masonry Units ----------------------------------------------- 79

14.22.26 Tensile Pull Off Strength (Before and After Weathering) ----------------------------- 79
14.22.27 Preconstruction & Construction Evaluation - Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry---------------------------------------------------------------------- 79
14.22.28 Abrasion Resistance of Mortar Surfaces -------------------------------------------------- 79
14.22.29 Air Content - Hydraulic Cement Mortar ---------------------------------------------------- 79
14.22.30 Length Change of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution --- 79
14.22.31 Examination and Analysis - Hardened Mortar ------------------------------------------- 79
14.22.32 Total Solids Content - Bonding Agent ----------------------------------------------------- 79
14.22.33 Physical Testing - Lime------------------------------------------------------------------------ 79
14.22.34 Physical Testing - Gypsum ------------------------------------------------------------------- 79
14.22.35 Block Type Insulation -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 79
14.22.36 Calcium Sulphate - Bedding Mortar for Precast, Pavers, Stones ------------------- 79
14.22.37 Water Soluble Chloride - Mortar, Bedding Mortar -------------------------------------- 79
14.23 CONCRETE KERB (OR CURB) & KERBSTONE (CURBSTONE) ----------------- 80
ar
14.23.1 Dimension ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 80
at
14.23.2 Water Absorption ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 80
14.23.3 Bending Strength ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 80
-Q
14.23.4 Compressive Strength ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 80
14.23.5 Transverse Strength --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 80
14.23.6 Flatness ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 80
LL
14.23.7 Core Samples ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 80

GEO-TEXTILE, GEO-MEMBRANE, GEOSYNTHETICS, ---------------------------- 81
W
14.24
14.24.1 Grab Strength, Grab Break Load ----------------------------------------------------------- 81
s
14.24.2 Puncture Strength (CBR Puncture Test), Static Puncture Test --------------------- 81
en
14.24.3 Burst Strength, Trapezoidal Strength, Tear Resistance ------------------------------- 81

14.24.4 Strength, Tensile Strength -------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
m
14.24.5 Elongation & Rapture, Mean Peak Strength --------------------------------------------- 81

14.24.6 Permeability (Water), Water Absorption -------------------------------------------------- 81
e
14.24.7 Dimension, Density, Mass, Mass Per Unit Area ----------------------------------------- 81

Si
14.24.8 Opening Size (Pore Size) --------------------------------------------------------------------- 81

14.24.9 Thickness ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
14.24.10 Ultrasonic Testing - Geomembrane -------------------------------------------------------- 81
14.24.11 Peel Test, Tensile Test, Seam Evaluation, Air Channel Evaluation - Joints,
Seams --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
14.24.12 Shear Test - Seams ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
14.24.13 Resistance to Perforation --------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
14.24.14 Pull-out Resistance in Soil -------------------------------------------------------------------- 82
14.24.15 Carbon Black Content, Carbon Black Dispersion - Geomembrane,
Geosynthetics ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 82
14.24.16 Peel Strength - Needle Punched Geosynthetic------------------------------------------ 82
14.24.17 Moisture Content - Geosynthetic Clay Liners -------------------------------------------- 82
14.24.18 Bentonite Free Swell, Swell Index - Geosynthetic Clay Liners----------------------- 82
14.24.19 Montmorillonite Content - Geosynthetic Clay Liners ----------------------------------- 82
14.25 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT -------------------------------------------------------------- 83

14.25.1 Sampling and Testing Programme to be proposed by the Contractor for
Engineer’s approval ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 83
14.26 FIRE TESTING ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 83
14.26.1 Reaction to Fire Tests - Building Products ----------------------------------------------- 83
14.26.2 Fire Rating Test - All Applicable Material ------------------------------------------------- 83
14.26.3 Where not stated clearly, Sampling and Testing Programme to be
proposed by the Contractor for Engineer’s approval ----------------------------------- 83
14.27 ALUMINIUM, ALUMINIUM ALLOYS – DOORS, WINDOWS, SHEETS,
STRIPS, PLATES ETC ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 83
14.27.1 Chemical Analysis ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 83
14.27.2 Dimensions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 83
14.27.3 Mechanical Properties ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 83
14.27.4 Tension Test - Wrought and Cast Aluminum-Alloy and Magnesium-Alloy
Products ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 84
ar
14.28 STEEL DOORS AND WINDOWS ---------------------------------------------------------- 84
at
-Q
14.29 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTER -------------------------------------------------------------- 84
LL

14.30 TIMBER DOOR, WINDOWS, CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND
W
IRONMONGERY-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 84
s

en
14.31 TILES, GROUTS AND ADHESIVE FOR TILES ETC, -------------------------------- 85

m
14.31.1 Resistance to Surface Abrasion - Tiles ---------------------------------------------------- 85

14.31.2 Resistance to Deep Abrasion - Tiles ------------------------------------------------------- 85
e
14.31.3 Impact Resistance - Tiles --------------------------------------------------------------------- 85

Si
14.31.4 Dimensions, Surface Flatness & Surface Quality - Tiles ------------------------------ 85

14.31.5 Water Absorption, Relative Density - Tiles ----------------------------------------------- 85
14.31.6 Modulus of Rapture and Breaking Strength - Tiles ------------------------------------- 85
14.31.7 Moisture Expansion - Tiles ------------------------------------------------------------------- 85
14.31.8 Chemical Resistance - Tiles ----------------------------------------------------------------- 85
14.31.9 Resistance to Stains - Tiles ------------------------------------------------------------------ 85
14.31.10 Linear Thermal Expansion - Tiles ----------------------------------------------------------- 85
14.31.11 Crazing Resistance - Tiles-------------------------------------------------------------------- 85
14.31.12 Chemical Resistance - Grout for Tiles ----------------------------------------------------- 85
14.31.13 Resistance to Abrasion (or Wear Test) - Grout for Tiles ------------------------------ 85
14.31.14 Bend (or Flexural) and Compressive Strength - Grout for Tiles --------------------- 86
14.31.15 Shrinkage - Grout for Tiles ------------------------------------------------------------------- 86
14.31.16 Water Absorption - Grout for Tiles---------------------------------------------------------- 86
14.31.17 Slip, Adhesion Test - Adhesives for Tiles ------------------------------------------------- 86
14.31.18 Tensile & Shear Adhesion, Bond Strength – Adhesives, Reaction Resin
Adhesives for Tiles ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 86
14.31.19 Open Time - Adhesives for Tiles ------------------------------------------------------------ 86

14.31.20 Shear Testing - Adhesives for Tiles -------------------------------------------------------- 86
14.31.21 Compressive Testing - Adhesives for Tiles----------------------------------------------- 86
14.31.22 Deformation - Adhesives for Tiles ---------------------------------------------------------- 86
14.31.23 Chemical Resistance - Adhesives for Tiles ----------------------------------------------- 86
14.31.24 Tensile Testing - Adhesives for Tiles ------------------------------------------------------ 86
14.31.25 Wetting Capability - Adhesives for Tiles -------------------------------------------------- 86
14.31.26 Terrazzo Tiles - Internal and External Use ----------------------------------------------- 86
14.31.27 Transverse Deformation - Cementitious Adhesives and Grouts-------------------- 86
14.32 SUSPENDED CEILING ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
14.32.1 Dimensions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
14.32.2 Fire Tests ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
14.32.3 Tensile Strength--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
14.32.4 Bend Testing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
14.32.5 Load Capacity ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
ar
14.32.6 Electrical Testing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
at
14.32.7 Noise Control (Acoustic) ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
14.32.8 Thermal Conductivity -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
-Q
14.32.9 Moisture Control -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
14.32.10 Condensation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 87
LL
14.33 GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED CONCRETE --------------------------------------------- 88

14.33.1 Sampling and Testing Program to be proposed by the Contractor to be
W
approved by the Engineer -------------------------------------------------------------------- 88

14.34 GLASS AND GLAZING ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 88
s
14.34.1 Sampling and Testing Program to be proposed by the Contractor to be

en
approved by the Engineer -------------------------------------------------------------------- 88

14.35 PAINT, VARNISH, PIGMENTS FOR COLOURING ------------------------------------ 89
m
14.35.1 Density of Paint --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 89

e
14.35.2 Thickness (Wet & Dry) ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 89

Si
14.35.3 Scrub Resistance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 89

14.35.4 Viscosity------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 89
14.35.5 Sag Resistance (or Sagging Mills) --------------------------------------------------------- 89
14.35.6 Specular Gloss of Non-Metallic Paint Films ---------------------------------------------- 89
14.35.7 Fineness of Dispersion of Pigment-Vehicle Systems ---------------------------------- 89
14.35.8 Colour Measurement of Paint and Varnishes (Also known as Comparison
for Paint) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 89
75
14.35.9 Comparison of Contrast Ratio ------------------------------------------------------------- 89
14.35.10 pH -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 89
14.35.11 Cross-cut Tests of Paints and Varnishes ------------------------------------------------- 89
14.35.12 Adhesion (Pull Off) Strength76 --------------------------------------------------------------- 89
14.35.13 Pigment Content -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 89
14.35.14 Resistance to Liquids -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 89
14.35.15 Pigments for the Colouring of Building Materials --------------------------------------- 90
14.35.16 Fire Resistance ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
14.35.17 Volatile Content --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
14.35.18 Non-Volatile Content --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
14.35.19 Bend Test, Flexibility of Paints and Varnishes ------------------------------------------- 90

14.35.20 Resistance to Abrasion ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 90
14.35.21 Tensile Property--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
14.35.22 Resistance to Weathering, Accelerated Weathering ----------------------------------- 90
14.35.23 Drying Time -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
14.35.24 Rheological Properties ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 90
14.35.25 Hiding Power ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
14.35.26 Average Reflectance --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
14.35.27 Alkali Resistance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
14.36 ROAD MARKING MATERIALS, ------------------------------------------------------------ 91
14.36.1 Yellowness Index - Thermoplastic ---------------------------------------------------------- 91
14.36.2 Thickness - Thermoplastic ------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
14.36.3 Skid Resistance - Thermoplastic ------------------------------------------------------------ 91
14.36.4 Density - Thermoplastic ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
14.36.5 Luminance - Thermoplastic ------------------------------------------------------------------ 91
ar
14.36.6 Drying Time - Thermoplastic ----------------------------------------------------------------- 91
at
14.36.7 Softening Point - Thermoplastic ------------------------------------------------------------- 91
14.36.8 Flowability - Thermoplastic ------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
-Q
14.36.9 Abrasion Resistance - Thermoplastic ------------------------------------------------------ 91
14.36.10 Glass Bead Content ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
14.36.11 Drying Time Test - Paints --------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
LL
14.36.12 Settling Properties - Traffic Paints ---------------------------------------------------------- 91

14.36.13 Calcium Carbonate Content ------------------------------------------------------------------ 91
W
14.36.14 Bond Strength ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91

14.36.15 Binder Content ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
s
14.36.16 Sieve Analysis (Gradation) - Road Marking Materials --------------------------------- 91

en
14.36.17 Performance - Retroreflecting Road Studs ---------------------------------------------- 92

m
14.36.18 Dimensions - Retroreflecting Road Studs------------------------------------------------ 92

14.36.19 Visibility (Night-time) - Retroreflecting Road Studs ------------------------------------- 92
e
14.36.20 Visibility (Daytime) - Retroreflecting Road Studs---------------------------------------- 92

Si
14.36.21 Luminous Intensity - Retroreflecting Road Studs --------------------------------------- 92

14.36.22 Colour, Colorimetry - Retroreflecting Road Studs ------------------------------------- 92
14.36.23 Chromaticity - Retroreflecting Road Studs----------------------------------------------- 92
14.36.24 Resilience - Retroreflecting Road Studs -------------------------------------------------- 92
14.36.25 Fixing - Retroreflecting Road Studs -------------------------------------------------------- 92
14.36.26 Optical Measurement - Retroreflecting Road Studs ----------------------------------- 92
14.37 UPVC, PLASTIC - PIPES, FITTINGS, VALVES ETC--------------------------------- 93
14.37.1 Dimensions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
14.37.2 Pressure Testing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
14.37.3 Thermoplastic Ancillary Fittings ------------------------------------------------------------- 93
14.37.4 Hydrostatic Test --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
14.37.5 Tensile Test -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
14.37.6 Leaktightness ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 93
14.37.7 Hydrostatic Leak Testing --------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
14.37.8 Ultrasonic Leak Testing80 --------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
14.38 PRECAST CONCRETE PIPES, MANHOLES, INSPECTION CHAMBERS

ETC ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 94
14.38.1 Dimensions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 94
14.38.2 Hydrostatic Pressure Test, Pressure Testing, Watertightness Test ---------------- 94
14.38.4 Ultrasonic Leak Testing ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 94
14.38.5 Low Pressure Air Test - Sewerline --------------------------------------------------------- 94
14.38.6 Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum)82 - Sewerline ------------------------------------------ 94
14.38.7 Negative or Positive Air Pressure Test82 - Concrete Sanitary Sewer Pipe -------- 94
14.38.8 Compressive Strength Test ------------------------------------------------------------------ 94
14.38.9 Tensile Test - Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe ------------------------------------- 94
14.38.10 Angular Deflection, Bend Testing ----------------------------------------------------------- 94
14.38.11 Crushing Test ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 94
14.38.12 Shear Testing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 94
14.38.13 Prestressing Steel - Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipes -------------------------- 95
ar
14.38.14 Permeability - Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipes, Concrete Pipes,
at
Manholes ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 95
14.38.15 Coating - Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipes ---------------------------------------- 95
-Q
14.38.16 Standard Tests - Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections ----------------------------------- 95
14.38.17 Hydrogen Embrittlement Resistance - Prestressed Concrete Pipe----------------- 95
,
14.39 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES, JOINTS, MANHOLES ETC ------------------------------- 96
LL
14.39.1 Dimensions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96

14.39.2 Barrel Permeability (Hydrostatic Infiltration) ---------------------------------------------- 96
W
14.39.3 Straightness -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96

14.39.4 Bending Moment Resistance ---------------------------------------------------------------- 96
s
14.39.5 Tensile Testing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96

en
14.39.6 Chemical Resistance -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96

m
14.39.7 Leak Test, Water Test, Pressure Test----------------------------------------------------- 96

14.39.8 Strength (Crushing) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96
e
14.39.9 Angular Deflection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 96

Si
14.39.10 Fatigue Test, Wear Test, Roughness (Surface) Test ---------------------------------- 96

14.39.11 Thermal Testing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96
14.39.14 Ultrasonic Leak Testing85 --------------------------------------------------------------------- 97
,
14.40 GRP PIPES, FITTINGS, JOINTS, PLASTIC PIPING, PRC ETC ------------------ 98
14.40.1 Dimensions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
14.40.2 Visual Inspection -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
14.40.3 Stiffness, Flexibility ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
14.40.4 Hardness------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 98
14.40.5 Crushing Test ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 98
14.40.6 Strain Corrosion --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
14.40.7 Liner Thickness --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
14.40.8 Loss on Ignition --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
14.40.9 Leak Test (Water Test)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 98
14.40.10 Hoop Tensile Strength ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
14.40.11 Longitudinal, Axial Tensile Strength -------------------------------------------------------- 98

14.40.13 Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure ------------------------------------------- 99
14.40.14 Compressive Properties----------------------------------------------------------------------- 99
14.41 DUCTILE IRON (DI) PIPES, FITTINGS, FLANGE, ADAPTOR GASKETS,
,
VALVES -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------100
14.41.1 Dimensions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------100
14.41.2 Operating Pressure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------100
14.41.3 Internal Lining-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------100
14.41.4 External Coating -------------------------------------------------------------------------------100
14.41.5 Wrapping Material -----------------------------------------------------------------------------100
14.41.6 Metal Pipe and Tubing------------------------------------------------------------------------100
14.41.7 Hydrostatic Leak Testing --------------------------------------------------------------------100
14.41.8 Ultrasonic Leak Testing90 --------------------------------------------------------------------100
14.41.9 Rubber Gaskets, Seals, Joint Rings ------------------------------------------------------100
ar
14.41.10 Valves for all Purposes -----------------------------------------------------------------------100
at
14.41.11 Epoxy Coating - Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings and Accessories ----------------------101
14.41.12 Adhesion to Pipe - Internal Lining ---------------------------------------------------------101
-Q
14.41.13 Salt Spray Test - Internal Lining ------------------------------------------------------------101
14.41.14 Pinhole Test, Spark Holiday Test - Internal, External Lining ------------------------101
14.41.15 Sulphuric Acid Immersion Test, Corrosive Environment Test - Internal
LL
Lining ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------101
14.41.16 Impact Resistance - Internal Lining -------------------------------------------------------101
W
14.41.17 Abrasion Resistance - Internal Lining -----------------------------------------------------101

14.41.18 Vapour Permeability - Internal Lining -----------------------------------------------------101
s
14.41.19 Thickness - Internal Lining ------------------------------------------------------------------101

en
14.42 ROAD SIGNS-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------102

m
14.42.1 Performance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------102

14.42.2 Luminance ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------102
e
14.42.3 Chromaticity, Photometry (Light Measurement) ---------------------------------------102

Si
14.42.4 Mechanical Testing, Impact Testing, Wind Loading, Environmental testing,

Loading -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------102
14.42.5 Retroreflective Materials ---------------------------------------------------------------------102
14.42.6 Coefficient of Retroreflection, Reflection Factor ---------------------------------------102
14.42.7 Measurement of Retroreflective Signs----------------------------------------------------102
14.42.8 Colorimetry & Colour --------------------------------------------------------------------------102
14.42.9 Lighting (Road Signs) -------------------------------------------------------------------------102
14.42.10 Galvanise Coating -----------------------------------------------------------------------------102
14.42.11 Dimensions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------102
14.42.12 Anchor Bolts ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------102
14.43 FLOORING, FLOOR COVERINGS, ADHESIVES FOR FLOORING ETC, -----103
14.43.1 Elasticity and Resistance to Wear, Wear Test -----------------------------------------103
14.43.2 Bending Strength Under Static Load - Wood Flooring--------------------------------103
14.43.3 Resistance to Indentation, Impact ---------------------------------------------------------103
14.43.4 Dimensions (Changes, Stability and Curling), Flatness (Surface),
Geometrical Characteristics -----------------------------------------------------------------103
14.43.5 Changes in Appearance, Light Stability --------------------------------------------------103

14.43.6 Resistance to Chemical Agents, Delamination, Cigarettes --------------------------103
14.43.7 Performance, Adhesion, Mechanical, Ageing etc - Adhesives for Floor
Covering -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------103
14.43.8 Electrical Resistance to Earth --------------------------------------------------------------103
14.43.9 Mass, Mass Per Unit Area, Density -------------------------------------------------------103
14.43.10 Overall Thickness, Pile Thickness Above the Backing, Substrate,
Thickness Swelling ----------------------------------------------------------------------------104
14.43.11 Lock Strength - Laminate Floor Coverings ---------------------------------------------104
14.43.12 Scratch Tests, Surface Defects, Humidity - Acrylic Based Surface Layer -------104
14.43.13 Caster Chair Test - Textile Floor Coverings ---------------------------------------------104
14.43.14 Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions, Volatile Loss -----------------------104
14.43.15 Identification of Linoleum and Determination of Cement Content and Ash
Residue - Resilient Floor Coverings -------------------------------------------------------104
14.43.16 Flexibility - Resilient Flooring Materials ---------------------------------------------------104
ar
14.43.17 Seam Strength - Resilient Floor Coverings ----------------------------------------------104
at
14.43.18 Reaction to Fire Tests, Effects of a Small Source of Ignition -----------------------104
14.43.19 Gelling - Resilient Floor Coverings --------------------------------------------------------104
-Q
14.43.20 Conventional Pattern Depths - Resilient Floor Coverings----------------------------104
14.43.21 Spreading of Water, Moisture Content ---------------------------------------------------104
14.43.22 Exudation of Plasticizers - Resilient Floor Coverings ---------------------------------104
LL
14.43.23 Kerosine Number - Roofing and Flooring Felt ------------------------------------------104

14.43.24 Staining of Vinyl Flooring by Adhesives --------------------------------------------------105
W
14.43.25 Static Coefficient of Friction -----------------------------------------------------------------105

14.43.26 Simulated Services - Wood Flooring ------------------------------------------------------105
s
14.43.27 Long-Side Friction - Laminate Floor Coverings-----------------------------------------105

en
14.44 CERAMIC FOR ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES ------------------------------------------106

m
14.44.1 Vitrified Ceramic Materials for Electrical Appliances ----------------------------------106

14.44.2 Flexural Strength - Electronic Grade 3 Ceramic ---------------------------------------106
e
14.45 GULLIES, GRATINGS, MANHOLE COVERS ETC -----------------------------------106

Si
14.45.1 Mechanical testing - Gullies -----------------------------------------------------------------106

14.45.2 Dimensions - Gullies --------------------------------------------------------------------------106
14.45.3 Seals - Gullies ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------106
14.45.4 Pressure Testing Leak Tests Watertightness Tests - Gullies ----------------------106
14.45.5 Odours - Gullies --------------------------------------------------------------------------------106
14.45.6 Thermal-cycling Tests - Gullies ------------------------------------------------------------106
14.45.7 Flow Rates, Flow Measurement, Siphons - Gullies------------------------------------106
14.45.8 Sheet Flooring, Membranes - Gullies -----------------------------------------------------106
14.45.9 Deflection Tests, Strength of Materials - Gullies, Manhole Covers ---------------106
14.45.10 Load Test - Manhole Covers ---------------------------------------------------------------107
14.45.11 Type Testing - Manhole Covers -----------------------------------------------------------107
14.45.12 Epoxy Coating - Manhole Covers ---------------------------------------------------------107
14.46 REFERENCES ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------108
14.46.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) : -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------108
14.46.2 International Organisation for Standardization (ISO): ---------------------------------113
14.46.3 Asphalt Institute (AI): --------------------------------------------------------------------------114

14.46.4 American Petroleum Institute (API): -------------------------------------------------------114
14.46.5 American Concrete Society (ACI): ---------------------------------------------------------114
14.46.6 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): [Note: Where
available/applicable the ASTM version used should be the metric edition,
ie, ‘M version’ (or ASTM D1234M etc).] --------------------------------------------------114
14.46.7 American Welding Society (AWS): --------------------------------------------------------140
14.46.8 British Standards Institute (BSI): -----------------------------------------------------------140
14.46.9 American Public Health Association (APHA): -------------------------------------------169
14.46.10 Deutsches Institut für Normung EV (DIN) : ----------------------------------------------171
14.46.11 Construction Industry Research and Information Association (CIRIA) : ----------171
14.46.12 United States Environmental Protection Agency: --------------------------------------171
14.46.13 Swiss Standard - Normes SN (Suisse): --------------------------------------------------172
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
14 APPENDIX A – SAMPLING AND TESTING FREQUENCIES

1, 2
Material /Section / Activity & the 3 Minimum
Method 4, 5 Remarks
Required Tests Frequency
14.1 SOIL INVESTIGATION

AASHTO R13, T87,  Minimum 3 The spacing could be
14.1.1 Boreholes (for buildings) T146, T206, boreholes per site halved for irregular
ASTM D421, D1586,  1 borehole every conditions or doubled
D1587, 300 m
2 for uniform conditions.
The Engineer shall
BS 1377-9, BS 5930,  Grid at a mutual determine the depth of
BS EN 1997-2, spacing of 20 m the borehole.
BS EN ISO 14688-1,
BS EN ISO 14688-2,
BS EN ISO 14689-1,
BS EN ISO 22475-1,
ar
BS EN ISO 22476-2,
BS EN ISO 22476-3,
at
BS EN ISO 22476-12
AASHTO R13, T87,

-Q  Grid at a mutual The spacing could be
14.1.2 Boreholes (for highways, T146, T206, spacing of 75 m for halved for irregular
bridges, high cuts, ASTM D421, D1586, subgrade survey conditions or doubled
culverts, retaining walls D1587, BS 1377-9,  1 – 3 per pier or for uniform conditions.
LL
etc) BS 5930, abutment The Engineer shall

determine the depth of
BS EN 1997-2,  Minimum 3 to draw a the borehole.
W
BS EN ISO 14688-1, profile (high cuts etc)

BS EN ISO 14688-2,  Grid at a mutual
BS EN ISO 14689-1, spacing of 30 m for
s
BS EN ISO 22475-1, culverts, retaining

en
BS EN ISO 22476-2, walls etc

BS EN ISO 22476-3,
BS EN ISO 22476-12
e m
Si
1
Footnote 1: The testing frequency stipulated herein shall be mandatory unless otherwise stated. The tests are
to be conducted as per the demands of the site as applicable. The same testing sequence and frequency shall
be adopted for the recycled materials as applicable.
2
Footnote 2: All testing will have to be carried out on site or at a designated laboratory irrespective of whether the
materials have been tested by the manufacturer or by an intermediate party (such as asphalt, concrete etc
supplier) or the availability of the conformity certificates.
3
Footnote 3: All the reference standards and documents are listed at the end of this table for ease of reference.
[Note: Where available/applicable the ASTM version used should be the metric edition, ie, ‘M version’ (or ASTM
D1234M etc).]
4
Footnote 4: The Contractor shall carry out the maximum number of tests, ie, whichever condition comes first (ie,
whichever is more frequent). Sampling and testing frequency may be modified as directed by the Engineer.
2
5
Footnote 5: Minimum frequencies shall be deemed to include ‘part thereof’. For example; ‘1 test per 2000 m ’
2
or ‘1 test per 50 units’ shall be interpreted as ‘1 test per 2000 m or part thereof’ or ‘1 test per 50 units or part
thereof’ etc respectively, ie, the Contractor is required to carry out the stipulated testing for amount of work which
is less than the mentioned amount.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.2 BENTONITE SLURRY

6 API RP 13B-1,  2 tests per shift Stage 1
14.2.1 Density
ASTM D4380,  2 tests per day
BS EN 1536
API RP 13B-1  2 tests per shift Stage 1
14.2.2 Viscosity (or Mash
6  2 tests per day
Value)

14.2.3 Yield Stress
ASTM 4832  2 tests per day
14.2.4 Gel Strength
14.2.5 Shear Strength
ar
14.2.6 Sand Content
ASTM D4381,  2 tests per day
at
BS EN 1536
 2 tests per shift
14.2.7 Filtrate Loss (also known
API RP 13B-1,
-Q Stage 1
BS EN 1536  2 tests per day
as Fluid or Filter Loss or
6
Filter Press)
LL
6 Weight-Volume  2 tests per shift Stage 1

14.2.8 Bentonite Content
 2 tests per day
W

14.2.9 pH
s
ASTM D4380  2 tests per shift Stage 2

14.2.10 Unit Weight7
en
 2 tests per day

14.2.11 Viscosity (or Mash
m
7
Value)
e
AASHTO T119,  2 tests per shift Stage 3

14.2.12 Slump Cone8
Si
ASTM C143,  2 tests per day

BS EN 12350-2
 1 test per 2000 m
3
ASTM D1140 Stage 3
14.2.13 Gradation8
Laboratory or field test
ASTM C138, D4380  2 tests per shift Stage 3
14.2.14 Density (or Unit Weight
8  2 tests per day
Test)
ASTM D5084  1 test per 2000 m3 Stage 3

14.2.15 Permeability8
Laboratory test
6
Footnote 6: The Contractor shall carry out these tests for Stage 1 - Initial Bentonite slurry (ie, when the
Bentonite is in the form of slurry before its use).
7
Footnote 7: The Contractor shall carry out these tests for Stage 2 - In-trench Bentonite Slurry (ie, when the
Bentonite is in use inside the trench).
8
Footnote 8: The Contractor shall carry out these tests for Stage 3 - Cement-Bentonite Soil-Bentonite, (backfill)
material (ie, when the Bentonite has been used and recovered for reuse).
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.2.16 Viscosity8
 2 tests per day
API RP 13B-1,  2 tests per shift Stage 3
14.2.17 pH8
API RP 13B-1,  2 tests per shift Stage 3
14.2.18 Filtrate Loss (also known
as Fluid or Filter Loss or
8
Filter Press)
Weight-Volume  2 tests per shift Stage 3

14.2.19 Bentonite Content8
 2 tests per day
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.3 PILING
ASTM D1143,  Minimum of 1 test
14.3.1 Static Load Test BS EN 1997-1 per site
 1% of piles
 As per concrete
14.3.2 Cube Test
testing requirements
14.3.3 Integrity Test (or Low ASTM D5882  All Piles
Strain Integrity Test)
 10-15% of Piles
ASTM D6760, CIRIA 9
Refer to footnote
14.3.4 (Crosshole) Sonic Report 144
Logging Test
ASTM D6167  10-15% of Piles

14.3.5 Calliper Logging
ar
ASTM D4945  5% of piles
14.3.6 Dynamic Load Test (or
at
High Strain Dynamic -Q
Test)
ASTM D3689  As per the

14.3.7 Static Axial Tensile Load
Engineer’s request
Test
LL

14.3.8 Lateral Load Test
W
s
en
e m
Si
9
Footnote 9: Piles bigger than 1000mm diameter shall be tested as per this testing requirement (5 vertical
access tubes shall be attached at constant spacing to the reinforcement cage of the pile). For smaller diameter
piles testing (3 access tubes or as per the Engineer’s discretion)
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
Refer to footnote
14.4 EARTHWORKS, SUBGRADE, BASE, SUBBASE,
BACKFILL, SUB-BALLAST ETC10, 11
D1557,  Each source
14.4.1 (Modified) Proctor Test -
BS 1377-4  (Visible) Change in
[Optimum Moisture
material
Content (OMC) &
 1 test every 1000 m
3
Maximum Dry Density
(MDD)]
 1 test every 200 m Refer to footnote

2
ASTM D1556, D6938,
14.4.2 Field Density & Field
per lift (ie, per
BS 1377-9
Moisture Content [also compacted layer)
known as (Field)  1 every 75m per lane
ar
12
Compaction Test] per layer
 1 test every 20 m of
at
pipe laying or
-Q trenching works per
lift (ie, per
compacted layer)
ASTM D6913,  Each source Refer to footnote
14.4.3 Gradation (Sieve)
BS EN 933-1  Visible change in
LL
13
Analysis
gradation
3
W
ASTM D4318,  Each source

14.4.4 Atterberg Limits (Index
BS 1377-2  (Visible) Change in
limits) - [Liquid Limit &
material
s
Plasticity Index]
3
en
D5821  Each source Refer to footnote

14.4.5 Shape (Flakiness Index &
 (Visible) Change in
m
14
Elongation Index) Also
material
known as Fractured
 Every change in Job
e
Faces Mix Formula (JMF)

Si

3
10
Footnote 11: Earthworks, Subgrade (including porous, prepared etc), Base, Subbase, Backfill (including soil-
cement, structural, pipe bedding, trenching, piping, pervious, porous, reclamation backfill etc), Sub-ballast,
Common fill, Select fill, Technical fill, Embankment fill, Rock fill, Sabkha rock fill, Gravel, Granular Base (for
pavers of all kinds), Setting Bed (for pavers of all kinds) etc and/or products and materials conforming to ASTM
D2940 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement where applicable.
11
Footnote 12: Concrete specifications, testing procedures and frequencies shall be adopted for concrete and
concrete related backfill.
12
Footnote 13: The same testing frequency is to be followed for related backfill works such as manholes,
chambers, thrust blocks, skip shaft etc.
13
Footnote 14: Aggregate gradation standards are included to cater for pervious, porous etc backfill.
14
Footnote 15: 1 test here refers to 1 pair of tests, ie, 1 test each for Flakiness Index and Elongation Index
and/or Fractured Faces as applicable
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
ASTM C88  Each source
14.4.6 Soundness (or
Magnesium Sulphate
material
Test as applicable)
3
AASHTO T290,  Each source Refer to footnote

14.4.7 Water Soluble Sulphate
ASTM C1580,  (Visible) Change in
or Acid Soluble Sulphate
13 BS 812-118, material
as applicable
3
BS 1377-3,
BS EN 1744-1
BS 1377-3,  Each source Refer to footnote
14.4.8 Water Soluble Chloride or
Acid Soluble Chloride as
13 material
applicable
3
BS 1377-3  Each source

14.4.9 Organic Matter Content
ar
material
at
3
ASTM D2419  Each source

14.4.10 Sand Equivalent
-Q  (Visible) Change in
material
3
 Each source
LL
ASTM C131, C535

14.4.11 Los Angeles Abrasion or
Aggregate Abrasion
material
W
Value as applicable
3
ASTM D1883, D4429,  Each source Refer to footnote

14.4.12 California Bearing Ratio BS1377-4,
s
(laboratory testing)
(CBR) test together with BS1377-9
en
15  (Visible) Change in
the swell criteria material (laboratory
testing)
m

3
(laboratory testing)
e
and 1 test every

Si
2
2000 m on the final
layer (in-situ testing)
ASTM D3441, D5778,  Minimum of 3 tests Refer to footnote
14.4.13 Cone Penetrometer Test16 BS 1377-7 per site
2
after compaction of
the final layer
AASHTO T222, ASTM  Minimum of 3 tests Refer to footnote
14.4.14 Plate Load Test16 D1196, BS 1377-9, per site
DIN English 18134  1 test every 3000 m
2
on the final layer

ASTM C142  Each source Refer to footnote
14.4.15 Clay Lumps and Friable
16  (Visible) Change in
Particles
material
3
15
Footnote 16: The Contractor may carry out any one of the tests deemed suitable for the site in consultation
with the Engineer. The tests are to be repeated separately for each final layer, i.e. subgrade, subbase etc.
16
Footnote 17: For aggregates used in the pervious, porous backfill etc as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
Refer to Soil  Minimum of 3 tests
14.4.16 Layer Thickness Investigation Section
per site
Verification (Trial Pit)
2
after compaction of
the final layer
AASHTO T113,  Each source Refer to footnote
14.4.17 Lightweight Pieces (or
ASTM C33, C123,  (Visible) Change in
Particles) - This includes
16 BS EN 1744-1 material
coal lignite, chert etc.
3

14.4.18 Moisture – Density
Relations (for Soil-
material or gradation
Cement Mixtures etc) as
3
applicable
ASTM C117,  Each source
ar
14.4.19 Material Finer than 75 μm
BS EN 933-1  Visible change in
gradation
at
3
14.4.20 Compressive Strength -

ASTM D1632, D1633
-Q  As per the Refer to footnote
Soil-Cement Mixtures
17
etc
LL
ASTM D1632, D1633  As per the Refer to footnote

14.4.21 Immersed Compressive
W
Strength - Soil-Cement
18
Mixtures etc
s
ASTM D1632, D1635  As per the Refer to footnote

14.4.22 Tensile Strength - Soil- Engineer’s request
en
17
Cement Mixtures etc
AASHTO T84, T85,  As per the Refer to footnote

m
14.4.23 Water Absorption16 ASTM C127, C128, Engineer’s request

BS 1377-2,
e
BS EN 1097-3,
Si
BS EN 1097-6
AASHTO T265,  As per the
14.4.24 Moisture Content Engineer’s request
ASTM D2216, D4959,
D4643, BS 812-109,
BS 1377-2
BS EN 1097-3  As per the Refer to footnote
14.4.25 Loose Bulk Density and Engineer’s request
16
Voids
AASHTO T84, T85,  As per the

14.4.26 Density or Specific T100,
Gravity (of Soil) ASTM C127, C128,
D854, BS 1377-2
17
Footnote 18: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of testing shall be 2 sets
per class per day (each set consisting of 2 specimens each for 7, 28 and 90 day testing).
18
Footnote 19: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of testing shall be 2 sets
per class per day (each set consisting of 2 specimens for 28 day testing).
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.4.27 Particle Density (or Unit ASTM C29, Engineer’s request
Weight) BS 1377-2,
BS EN 1097-6
ASTM D4373,  As per the
14.4.28 Carbonate Content of Soil BS 1377-3

14.4.29 Shear Strength by Direct Engineer’s request
ASTM D3080,
Shear (Small Shear Box)
BS 1377-7
14.4.30 Expansion of Aggregates Engineer’s request
from Hydration Reactions
ASTM E2583  As per the Refer to footnote

14.4.31 Layer Thickness
Verification (Light Weight
ar
19
Deflector (LWD)
at
AASHTO R37,  As per the Refer to footnote
ASTM D6432 -Q
Verification (Ground
19
Penetrating Radar)
ASTM D3441, D5778,  As per the Refer to footnote

14.4.33 Layer Thickness BS 1377-7
LL
Verification (Cone
19
Penetrometer Test)
W
AASHTO T327,  As per the Refer to footnote

14.4.34 Micro Deval16 Engineer’s request
ASTM D6928, D7428,
s
BS EN 1097-1
en

14.4.35 Consolidation Test Engineer’s request
ASTM D2435,
m
BS 1377-5
 As per the
e
In situ test method

14.4.36 Permeability Engineer’s request
approved by the
Si
Engineer
AASHTO T223  As per the
14.4.37 Vane Shear in Cohesive Engineer’s request
Soil
ASTM G57,  As per the

14.4.38 Soil Resistivity Engineer’s request
BS 1377-3
ASTM D2166,  As per the
14.4.39 Unconfined Compressive Engineer’s request
BS 1377-7
Strength
19
Footnote 20: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of testing shall be
2
‘Minimum of 3 tests per site’ or ‘1 test every 3000 m after compaction of final layer’ whichever comes first.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
ASTM D5731  As per the Refer to footnote
14.4.40 Point Load Strength
20
Index of Rock
14.4.41 (Also known as Crushing

Strength)
ASTM D7012  As per the Refer to footnote

14.4.42 Compressive Strength
Sampling to be done
and Elastic Moduli of in accordance with
20
Intact Rock (Also ASTM D4543 or
known as Crushing equivalent
Strength)
BS EN 14227-1,  As per the

14.4.43 Cement Bound Granular Engineer’s request
BS EN 14227-10
Mixtures & Soil Treated
ar
by Cement (Hydraulically
Bound Mixtures)
at
BS EN 14227-11  As per the
14.4.44 Soil Treated by Lime
-Q Engineer’s request
(Unbound and
Hydraulically Bound
Mixtures)
LL

14.4.45 Slag Bound Mixtures & Engineer’s request
W
BS EN 14227-12
Soil Treated by Slag
(Hydraulically Bound
s
Mixtures)
en

14.4.46 Hydraulic Road Binder Engineer’s request
BS EN 14227-13
m
Bound Mixtures & Soil

Treated by Hydraulic
e
Road Binder
Si
Mixtures)

14.4.47 Fly Ash Bound Mixtures, Engineer’s request
BS EN 14227-4,
Fly Ash for Hydraulically
BS EN 14227-14
Bound Mixtures & Soil
Treated by Fly Ash
Mixtures)

14.4.48 Alpha Coefficient of
Vitrified Blast Furnace
Slag
ASTM C479  As per the

14.4.49 Clay Liner Plates Engineer’s request
20
Footnote 21: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of testing shall be
2
‘Minimum of 3 tests per site’ or ‘1 test every 1000 m ’ whichever comes first.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
Refer to footnote
14.5 AGGREGATES –, CONCRETE LIGHTWEIGHT ETC21, 22,
23, 24
AASHTO T27,  Each source

ASTM C33, C136,  Visible change in
Analysis
BS EN 933-1, gradation
BS EN 12620  Every change in Job
Mix Formula (JMF)
 1 test daily
3

ASTM C117,  Visible change in
ar
BS EN 933-1 gradation
 1 test daily
at
3

-Q
ASTM C142  (Visible) Change in
Particles
material
 1 test weekly
LL

3

14.5.4 Lightweight Pieces (or
W

Particles) This includes
BS EN 1744-1 material
coal lignite, chert etc
 1 test weekly
s

3
en
AASHTO T21, T71,  Each source

14.5.5 Organic Impurities ASTM C40, C87,  (Visible) Change in
m
 1 test monthly
e
 1 test every 16000

Si
3
m
21
Footnote 22: Aggregates which are to be used for concrete, asphalt, masonry (ASTM C144) and tiling work,
Shotcrete, track ballast, grout, masonry grout (ASTM C404) etc as applicable. The testing shall be carried out
separately for each separate material or item (ie, coarse, fine etc) and the frequency of testing adhered to in
each case mutually.
22
Footnote 23: This includes dune sand, washed sand, air-cooled blast furnace slag aggregate, lightweight
aggregate, crushed materials which are used for the above listed or similar purposes.
23
Footnote 24: Where applicable this testing frequency is to be used for rock, bolder etc testing, or when rocks
are used as backfill material as in shoreline etc works.
24
Footnote 25: Sampling shall be done in accordance with AASHTO T2, T248, ASTM C50, C702, D75, D3665,
BS EN 932-1 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
AASHTO T84, 85,  Each source
14.5.6 Water Absorption ASTM C127, C128,
(Saturated Surface Dry) BS EN 1097-6 material
 1 test daily
3

ASTM D2419,  (Visible) Change in
 1 test weekly
3
for each fine

aggregate type
3
for bituminous
paving courses or
ar
mixtures (the total
amount)
 Each source
at
AASHTO T84, 85,
14.5.8 Specific Gravity
(Apparent) or Bulk
BS EN 1097-6
-Qmaterial
Specific Gravity or Unit
 1 test daily
Weight (Bulk Density) or
3
Particle Density or
LL
Relative Density as
applicable
W
BS EN 1097-3  Each source

14.5.9 Loose Bulk Density and
Voids
s
material
en
 1 test daily
3
m

e
AASHTO T255, Each source

14.5.10 Moisture Content or
ASTM C70, C566,  Change in material
Si
Water Content as
BS 812-109,  1 test daily
applicable
BS EN 1097-5  1 test every 1000 m
3

14.5.11 Shell Content
material
 1 test weekly
3
AASHTO T304,  Each source 1 test here refers to 1

14.5.12 Shape (Flakiness Index & pair of tests, ie, 1 test
ASTM C1252, D5821,  (Visible) Change in
Elongation Index) Also each for Flakiness
BS 812-105.1, material
known as Fractured Index and Elongation
BS 812-105.2,  Every change in Job Index and/or Fractured
Faces Mix Formula (JMF)
BS EN 933-3, Faces as applicable
BS EN 933-4  1 test weekly
3
(ASTM D3398, D4791
may also be used as
applicable)
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.5.13 Water Soluble Sulphate
or Acid Soluble Sulphate
BS 812-118, material
as applicable
BS 1377-3,  1 test weekly
3
BS EN 1744-1
14.5.14 Water Soluble Chloride or
Acid Soluble Chloride as
applicable
BS 1377-3,  1 test weekly
3
BS EN 1744-1,
BS EN 1744-5
14.5.15 Soundness (or
Magnesium Sulphate
Test as applicable)
BS EN 1367-2  1 test weekly
ar
3
 Each source
at
AASHTO T96,
Aggregate Abrasion
BS EN 1097-2
-Qmaterial
Value as applicable
 1 test weekly
3
BS 812-111,  Each source

LL
14.5.17 10% Fines Value

BS EN 1097-2  (Visible) Change in
material
W
 1 test weekly
3
 Each source
s
BS 812-112,
14.5.18 Aggregate Impact Value
en
BS EN 1097-2
material
 1 test weekly
m

3
 Each source
e
BS 812-110,
14.5.19 Aggregate Crushing
BS EN 1097-2  (Visible) Change in
Si
Value
material
 1 test weekly
3

14.5.20 Drying Shrinkage
material
 1 test yearly
3
m
14.5.21 Potential Reactivity
(Alkali-Silica, Alkali- C586, C1260, C1567
material
Carbonation, Cement-
 1 test monthly
Aggregate combination
etc) m
3
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.5.22 Plasticity Index
ASTM D4318,  (Visible) Change in
BS 1377-2 material
 1 test weekly
3

3
(in the case of

combined aggregate
for bituminous
paving courses etc
as applicable)
14.5.23 Filler, Mineral Filler (for ASTM D242, D546,
Bituminous Paving BS EN 197-1,
material
Course – AASHTO M17 or BS EN 1744-4
ASTM C51 etc applicable) Mix Formula (JMF)
ar
 1 test weekly
3
at
14.5.24 Density - Lightweight
BS EN 13055-1,
-Q  Change in material
Aggregates
BS EN 13055-2  1 test per month
14.5.25 Physical Properties -
LL
BS EN 13055-1,  Change in material

Lightweight Aggregates
BS EN 13055-2  1 test per month
 Each source
W
BS EN 933-11 Refer to footnote

14.5.26 Constituents of Coarse
25  Change in material
Recycled Aggregates
 1 test per month
s
BS EN 1744-6  Each source Refer to footnote

en
14.5.27 Influence of Recycled

 Change in material
Aggregate Extract on the
Initial Setting Time of
m
26
Cement
e

Si
14.5.28 Polished Stone Value Engineer’s request

BS 1377-3  As per the
14.5.29 pH Value Engineer’s request
14.5.30 Methylene Blue Value Engineer’s request
14.5.31 Micro Deval Coefficient Engineer’s request
ASTM D6928, D7428,
BS EN 1097-1
14.5.32 Iron Staining Engineer’s request
ASTM C70,  As per the
14.5.33 Surface Moisture Content Engineer’s request
BS EN 933-8
in Fine Aggregate
(Chapman Flask)
25
Footnote 26: In the case of use of Recycled Aggregates, this test is to be carried out in addition to the tests
(physical & chemical properties) stipulated for the normal aggregates as per this section requirement.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.5.34 Chemical Analysis of
Limestone, Quicklime,
and Hydrated Lime

14.5.35 Petrographic Analysis Engineer’s request
BS EN 932-3
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
Refer to footnote
14.6 AGGREGATES – COARSE, FINE, MINERAL FILLER,
(ASPHALT WORKS) 26 27 28 29
 Visible change in
Analysis
gradation
Mix Formula (JMF)
 1 test daily
3

 Visible change in
gradation
ar
 1 test daily
3
at
Particles
-Q
material
 1 test weekly
3
LL

14.6.4 Organic Impurities
W
material
 1 test monthly
3
s
ASTM C127, C128  Each source

en
14.6.5 Water Absorption

(Saturated Surface Dry)
material
m
 1 test daily
3
e
Si
26
Footnote 27: Aggregates which are to be used for concrete, asphalt, masonry (ASTM C144) and tiling work,
Shotcrete, track ballast, grout, masonry grout (ASTM C404) etc as applicable. The testing shall be carried out
separately for each separate material or item (ie, coarse, fine etc) and the frequency of testing adhered to in
each case mutually.
27
Footnote 28: This includes dune sand, washed sand, air-cooled blast furnace slag aggregate, lightweight
aggregate, crushed materials which are used for the above listed or similar purposes.
28
Footnote 29: Where applicable this testing frequency is to be used for rock, bolder etc testing, or when rocks
are used as backfill material as in shoreline etc works.
29
Footnote 30: Sampling shall be done in accordance with AASHTO T2, T248, ASTM C50, C702, D75, D3665,
BS EN 932-1 or equivalent as applicable
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
material
3
for bituminous
paving courses or
mixtures (the total
amount)
14.6.7 Specific Gravity
(Apparent) or Bulk
material
Specific Gravity or Unit
 1 test daily
Weight (Bulk Density) or
3
Particle Density or
Relative Density as
applicable
ar
14.6.8
at
Moisture Content or
Water Content as
BS 812-109,  1 test daily
applicable
BS EN 1097-5
-Q

3
1 test every 2000 m
ASTM D4791, D5821,  Each source 1 test here refers to 1
14.6.9 Shape (Flakiness Index & pair of tests, ie, 1 test
LL
Elongation Index) and each for Flakiness

material
Fractured Faces Index and Elongation
 Every change in Job Index and/or Fractured
W
Mix Formula (JMF) Faces as applicable

 1 test weekly
3
s

en
14.6.10 Acid Soluble Sulphate

material
m
 1 test weekly
3
e

Si
14.6.11 Acid Soluble Chloride

material
 1 test weekly
3

14.6.12 Soundness (Magnesium
Sulphate)
material
 1 test weekly
3

material
 1 test weekly
3

14.6.14 Aggregate Crushing
Value
material
 1 test weekly
3
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.6.15 Plasticity Index
material
 1 test weekly
3

14.6.16 Filler, Mineral Filler for ASTM D242, D546,
Bituminous Paving BS EN 197-1,
material
Courses BS EN 1744-4
Mix Formula (JMF)
 1 test weekly
 1 test every 300t
14.6.17 Petrographic Analysis Engineer’s request
BS EN 932-3
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.7 GROUTS30 Refer to footnote
BS EN 445  Each mix

14.7.1 Mix Proportion
 Change in mix

3
1 test per 25m
14.7.2 Fresh Density
 Change in mix

3
1 test per 25 m
14.7.3 Fluid Density (Cone
 Change in mix
Method)

3
1 test per 25 m
ASTM C940,  Each mix
14.7.4 Bleeding Test
BS EN 445  Change in mix
ar

3
1 test per 25 m

at
ASTM C827, C940, Each mix
14.7.5 Volume Change, Vertical BS EN 445
 Change in mix
Shrinkage (Change in
-Q 1 test per 25 m
3
Height),
Expansion/Shrinkage

LL
ASTM C109, C942, Each mix

14.7.6 Compressive Strength BS EN 196-1,
 Change in mix
Test BS EN 445 
3
1 test per 25 m
W
BS EN 13395-1,  Each mix

14.7.7 Workability
BS EN 13395-2,  Change in mix
s

BS EN 13395-3, 3
1 test per 25 m
en
BS EN 13395-4
Refer to Cement  Refer to Cement
14.7.8 Ground Granulated Blast- Section
Section
m
Furnace Slag
e
ASTM C939, C1437,  Each mix

14.7.9 Flow Consistency
Si
BS 4551  Change in mix


3
1 test per 25 m
14.7.10 Setting Time (Initial &
BS EN 196-3  Change in mix
Final Set)

3
1 test per 25 m
14.7.11 Bond Strength (at 28
 Change in mix
days)

3
1 test per 25 m
30
Footnote 36: All grouts including Portland cement non-shrink grouts (used for pressure grouting, semi-precast
construction, prestressing construction etc) and/or products conforming to BS EN 447 or equivalent shall be
tested in accordance with this section requirement as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
Sampling and Testing  Frequency to be
14.7.12 Grout coring and Methods and proposed by the
compressive strength Programmes are to be Contractor for
testing required where proposed by the Engineer’s approval
grouting is for increasing Contractor Engineer’s
approval
soil or rock strength
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Material /Section / Activity & 3 Minimum
Method 4, 5 Remarks
the Required Tests Frequency
Refer to footnote
14.8 BITUMINOUS (ASPHALT) CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
PRIME COAT, BITUMEN etc.31, 32, 33, 34
ASTM D3549,  1 test per 200t per Refer to footnote
14.8.1 Field Density and
layer for Base Course
BS EN 12697-29,
Pavement Thickness
35 BS EN 12697-36  1 test per 100t per
(using cores) layer for Wearing
Course
AASHTO T30, T37,  1 test per day
14.8.2 Extraction and T164, T168, T308,  1 test per 300 t of
Gradation of ASTM C136, D546, asphalt mix
Bituminous D2172, D5444, D6307,
BS EN 933-1,  Every change in Job
Concrete Mix and
ar
Mix Formula (JMF)
Determination of BS EN 12697-1,
BS EN 12697-2,
at
Binder Content (or
Asphalt Content) BS EN 12697-39 -Q
Also known as
Mechanical Analysis
of Extracted
Aggregate
LL
ASTM D2041,  1 test per day

14.8.3 Maximum Specific
W
BS EN 12697-5  1 test per 300 t of

Gravity (GMM, ST)
asphalt mix
s
Mix Formula (JMF)

en
31
m
Footnote 37: The terms Bitumen and/or Asphalt refers to any material with the similar characteristic as the
common bitumen and/or asphalt. Hence all tests mentioned regarding bitumen and/or asphalt shall be carried
e
out for any material with the similar characteristics as bitumen and/or asphalt at the specified frequency.
Si
32
Footnote 38 Bitumen testing will have to be carried out by the Contractor at the specified frequency,
irrespective of the fact whether the same tests have been carried out by the bitumen manufacturer or supplier.
33
Footnote 39: Sampling of material and preparation of samples shall be in accordance with AASHTO T2, T40,
T168, T248, ASTM C702, D140, D979, BS EN 58 (BS 2000-474), BS EN 12594 (BS 2000-461), BS EN 12697-
27, BS EN 12697-28, BS EN 12697-29, BS EN 12697-30, BS EN 12697-33 or equivalent as applicable.
34
Footnote 40: Materials conforming to Asphalt Binder (ASTM D946), Prime Coat Cutback Asphalt – Slow Curing
Type (ASTM D2026), Medium Curing Type (AASHTO M82, ASTM D2027), Rapid Curing Type (AASHTO M81,
ASTM D2028), Tack Coat Emulsified Asphalt (AASHTO M140, ASTM M208, D977, D2397, BS 434-1), Viscosity-
Graded Asphalt Cement (AASHTO M226, ASTM D3381), Penetration Graded Asphalt Cement (AASHTO M20),
Prime Coat, Bitumen Binder of all penetration grades, Paving Grade Bitumens (BS EN 12591), Hard Paving
Grade Bitumens (BS EN 13924), Cutback Bitumen (BS EN 15322), Polymer Modified Bitumens (BS EN 14023),
Oxidised Bitumens (BS EN 13304), Hard Industrial Bitumens (BS EN 13305) etc or equivalent as applicable.
35
Footnote 41: 1 test (or 1 sample) refers to a pair of adjacent cores (150 mm diameter for intermediate and
base course and 100 mm diameter for wearing course). If asphalt is layed in two or more layers for any of the
course, the coring and testing shall be completed for the first layer before the commencement of asphalt laying
for the subsequent layer(s).
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
AI MS-2, AASHTO T166,  1 test per day
14.8.4 Marshall Properties T209, T245, T269,  1 test per 300 t of
of Bituminous T275, asphalt mix
Concrete Mix ASTM D1188, D2041,
(Stability, Flow, Air D2726, D3203, D6926,
Voids, VMA) & Loss D6927,
of Marshall Stability BS EN 12697-5,
BS EN 12697-6,
BS EN 12697-8,
BS EN 12697-29,
BS EN 12697-34,
BS EN 12697-35
14.8.5 Bitumen (Prime
Coat, Tack Coat etc)
 1 per 250 m
2
– Rate of Application
ar
 1 every 75m per lane
14.8.6 Penetration of
at
 Each batch
Bitumen &
Penetration of
-Q
 1 test per 75 t of
Residue (Also bitumen
known as Needle
LL
Penetration)
W
14.8.7 Flash Point of

ASTM D92, D3143,  Change in material
Bitumen
BS EN ISO 2592 (BS  1 test per 450 t of
2000-36),
s
bitumen
BS EN ISO 2719 (BS
en
2000-34)
14.8.8 Solubility of Bitumen
m
ASTM D2042,  Change in material

BS EN 12592  1 test per 450 t of
e
bitumen
Si

14.8.9 Ductility of Bitumen
& Ductility of
Residue
bitumen
ASTM D2872  Each source It is sufficient to carry
14.8.10 Rolling Thin Film out either TFOT or
Oven Test RTFOT.
(RTFOT) & Mass bitumen
Loss – Effects of
Short-Term Ageing
(Also known as
Effect of Heat and
Air on a Moving
Film of Asphalt)
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.8.11 Softening Point of
 Each batch
Bitumen (Ring &
Ball) – Temperature
Susceptibility
bitumen
14.8.12 Kinematic Viscosity
ASTM D445, D2170,  Change in material
of Bitumen
BS EN 12595 (BS 2000-  1 test per 500 t of
319) bitumen
14.8.13 Determination of
ASTM D95  Change in material
Water in Bitumen
bitumen
ASTM D3387  As per the Engineer’s
14.8.14 Compaction and request
ar
Shear Properties
of Bituminous
at
Mixtures -Q
AASHTO T165,  As per the Engineer’s
14.8.15 Effect of Water on request
ASTM D1075
Compressive
Strength of
LL
Bituminous Mixtures
(Also known as Loss
W
of Stability Test)
AASHTO R32,  Minimum of 3 tests per Refer to footnote

s

site
ASTM D4694, D5858
en
Verification (Falling
2
Weight after compaction of the

Deflectometer -
m
final layer
36
FWD)
e
AASHTO R37,  Minimum of 3 tests per Refer to footnote

Si

site
ASTM D6087, D6432
Verification (Ground
2
42
Penetrating Radar) after compaction of the
final layer
BS 5930 or In situ test  As per the Engineer’s Refer to footnote
14.8.18 Layer Thickness method approved by the
request
Verification (Trial Engineer
37
Pit)
ASTM D3441, D5778  As per the Engineer’s Refer to footnote

request
Verification (Cone
43
Penetrometer Test)
36
Footnote 42: The Contractor may carry out any one of the tests deemed suitable for the
site in consultation with the Engineer.
37
Footnote 43: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of
testing shall be ‘Minimum of 3 tests per site’ or ‘1 test every 3000 m2 after compaction of the
final layer’ whichever comes first.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
BS EN 13036-1  As per the Engineer’s Refer to footnote
request
(Volumetric Patch
43
Technique)
ASTM E2583  As per the Engineer’s Refer to footnote

request
Verification (Light
Weight Deflector
43
(LWD)
ASTM E950, E1170,  Each lane of the road

14.8.22 International E1926 throughout the full
Roughness Index - length of the road
IRI (Ride Quality)
using Multi Laser
Profiler (MLP)
ar
AASHTO R40  1 test every 15 m per Measurements are to be
14.8.23 Ride Quality,
at
lane (longitudinal and taken longitudinally and
Smoothness (using -Qtransverse) transversely
3m straight edge)
AASHTO T256,  1 complete lane (full

14.8.24 Rolling Straight
length of the road) per
ASTM D4695
Edge Test (Also
LL
carriage way in each

known as traffic direction
Measurement of
W
Pavement
Deflection)
s
ASTM E2340  As per the Engineer’s

en
14.8.25 Slip/Skip Resistance request

of Surface
m

14.8.26 Water Sensitivity
request
ASTM D4867
e
Test (Lottman Test)

Si
Also known as
Tensile Strength
Ratio Test
AASHTO T301,  Each source Specific for elastomer or

14.8.27 Elastic Recovery of blend of elastomer-
ASTM D6084  Each batch
Modified Bitumen plastomer polymers
(Ductility)
bitumen
AASHTO R28,  Each source Specific for plastomer
14.8.28 Accelerated Aging type polymers
Using Pressure
Aging Vessel (PAV)
for Modified Bitumen
bitumen
– Effects of Long-
Term Ageing
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
AASHTO T313,  Each source Specific for plastomer
14.8.29 Flexural Creep type polymers
Stiffness of Modified It is sufficient to carry
Bitumen – Bending out either BBR or DTT.
Beam Rheometer
bitumen
(BBR) Also known
as Low Temperature
Flexibility
AASHTO T314  Each source Specific for plastomer

14.8.30 Fracture Properties type polymers
 Each batch
of Modified Bitumen It is sufficient to carry
– Direct Tension out either BBR or DTT.
Test (DTT)
bitumen
14.8.31 Rheological
ar
Properties of
Modified Bitumen –
at
Dynamic Shear -Q bitumen
Rheometer (DSR)

14.8.32 Storage Stability of request
ASTM D4402
Modified Bitumen
LL

14.8.33 Dynamic Viscosity of
W
ASTM D4402 request

Bitumen

s
14.8.34 Flash Point by

request
en
Pensky-Martens

14.8.35 Specific Gravity of
m
ASTM D70 request

Semi-Solid
e
Bituminous Material
Si
(Pycnometer
Method)
BS 598-1  As per the Engineer’s

14.8.36 Rate of Spread of request
Coated Chippings

14.8.37 Viscosity - Bitumen, request
ASTM D88, D2171,
Asphalt (Vacuum D3205, E102
Capillary
Viscometer, Saybolt,
Saybolt Fural, Cone
& Plate)

14.8.38 Sealants and Fillers request
for Joints and
Cracks in
Pavements
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.8.39 Quality Control for request
Asphalt
Manufacturing
Plants

14.8.40 Requirements for
request
Agencies Testing
and Inspecting Road
and Paving Materials
AASHTO T102  As per the Engineer’s

14.8.41 Spot Test of
request
Asphaltic Materials

14.8.42 Determination of
ar
request
Cement Content in
Cement-Treated
at
Aggregate -Q
14.8.43 Testing Lime for
request
Chemical
Constituents and
LL
Particle Sizes
W
 Each Truck
38
BS EN 12697-13 Refer to footnote
14.8.44 Temperature
Measurement -
s
Asphalt Mix
en

14.8.45 Resistance to
request
m
Plastic Flow

e
14.8.46 Determination of a request

Si
Volatile Distillate
Fraction - Cold
Asphalt Mixtures

14.8.47 Moisture or Volatile request
Distillates -
Bituminous Paving
Mixtures

14.8.48 Asphalt Content -
request
Bituminous Mixtures
by the Nuclear
Method
38
Footnote 44: The temperature of the hot asphalt shall be measured for each truck load before the asphalt is
deposited into the hopper. The temperature for the same asphalt truck load shall be checked again before the
compaction (ie, after it has been through the feeder and on the ground ready for compaction).
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
ASTM D4798, 4799  As per the Engineer’s
14.8.49 Accelerated request
Weathering -
Bituminous
Materials
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.9 REINFORCING STEEL, COUPLERS, WELDED

Refer to footnote
FABRIC39, 40
ASTM A370, E8,  1 test per 30 t (3 test
14.9.1 Tensile Test
pieces per diameter)
BS 4449,
BS EN ISO 6892-1,
BS EN ISO 15630-1
14.9.2 Bend Test
BS 4449,
BS EN ISO 6892-1,
BS EN ISO 15630-1
14.9.3 Re-bend Test
BS 4449,
BS EN ISO 6892-1,
ar
BS EN ISO 15630-1
 1 test per 100 t (2
at
ASTM A370, A751,
14.9.4 Chemical Composition E350, test pieces)
BS 4449,
-Q
BS EN ISO 15630-1
ASTM A370, A1034,  1 test per 100
14.9.5 Mechanical Couplers, BS 4449,
splices
LL
Splices for BS EN ISO 6892-1,

 If 3 consecutive tests
Reinforcement Bars BS EN ISO 15630-1, prove satisfactory,
ISO 15835-2 frequency may be
W
reduced to 1 test per

250 splices
 Each source
s
41 AWS D1.4, Refer to footnote

14.9.6 Welded Fabric
 Change in source
en
BS EN ISO 15630-2
ASTM A370,  As per the
14.9.7 Rib Geometry
BS 4449,
m
BS EN ISO 15630-1
e
ASTM E9  As per the

14.9.8 Compression - Metallic
Si
Materials
ASTM E10, E18, E110,  As per the

14.9.9 Hardness (Brinell,
BS EN ISO 6506-1,
Rockwell, Indentation) - BS EN ISO 6508-1
Metallic Materials
BS 6744  As per the

14.9.10 Tests for Stainless Steel Engineer’s request
Bars
39
Footnote 45: Reinforcement bars (BS 4482, 4483 etc), coils etc shall be tested as per this section requirement.
40
Footnote 46: All the mandatory testing will have to be carried out by the Contractor at the specified frequency,
irrespective of the fact whether the same tests have been carried out by the steel manufacturer or supplier and
whether the mill certificate is available or not.
41
Footnote 47: These tests will have to be carried out in addition to the tests stipulated for steel bars (and the
stipulated frequency) as per this section requirement.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.10 STRUCTURAL STEEL, WELDING42 Refer to footnote
ASTM A370, E8,  1 test per 20 t for hot

14.10.1 Tensile rolled products
BS EN 10025-1
 1 test per 40 t for
cast products
heavy sections
(>100 kg / m)
sections / products
greater than 200 t
ASTM A370, A751,  1 test per 20 t for hot
14.10.2 Chemical Analysis E350, E351, rolled products
BS EN 10025-1  1 test per 40 t for
ar
cast products
at
heavy sections
(>100 kg / m)
-Q
sections / products
greater than 200 t
LL
ASTM A370,  1 test per 20 t for hot

14.10.3 Hardness rolled products
BS EN 10025-1
W
cast products
heavy sections
s
(>100 kg / m)
en

sections / products
m
greater than 200 t

ASTM E23,  1 test per 20 t for hot Refer to footnote
14.10.4 Notched Bar Impact Test
e
rolled products
(Also known as Charpy ASTM E812,
Si

Pendulum Impact Test or BS EN ISO 148-1, cast products
43
Charpy V-notch Test) BS EN 10045-1  1 test per 60 t for
heavy sections
(>100 kg / m)
sections / products
greater than 200 t
42
Footnote 48: Materials conforming to ASTM A36 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement.
43
Footnote 49: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM A673 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
BS 131-1  As per the
14.10.5 Izod Impact Strength Test Engineer’s request
AWS D1.1,  20% of welded Refer to footnote
14.10.6 Ultrasonic Test44 - Welds length
BS EN 12517-1,
BS EN 15617,
BS EN ISO 10863,
BS EN ISO 11666,
BS EN ISO 17640,
BS EN ISO 22825,
BS EN ISO 23279
14.10.7 Radiographic, Digital
length
51 BS EN 1435,
Radiographic Test -
BS EN 12517-2,
Welds
BS EN ISO 10893-6,
BS EN ISO 10893-7
ar
14.10.8 Magnetic Particle Test45 - length
ASTM E125, E1444,
at
Welds BS EN ISO 9934-1,
BS EN ISO 17638, -Q
BS EN ISO 23278
14.10.9 Penetrating Test, Liquid length
51 ASTM E165,
Penetrant - Welds
LL
BS EN 571-1,
BS EN ISO 3059,
BS EN ISO 23277
W
AWS D1.1,  100% of welded

14.10.10 Visual Test - Fusion
length
BS EN ISO 17637
Welding
s
en
BS EN ISO 10893-11  100% of welded

14.10.11 Automated Ultrasonic
length
Test - Welded Seam of
m
Steel Tubes
e
BS EN ISO 15614-1,  1 per condition per Welded Coupon

14.10.12 Welding Procedure Test
Si
15614-2, 15614-3, site

15614-4, 15614-5,
15614-6, 15614-7,
15614-8, 15614-10,
15614-11, 15164-12,
15614-13
14.10.13 Bend Test - Ductility of Engineer’s request
Welds
44
Footnote 50: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either the Ultrasonic Test or the Radiographic Test,
whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the Engineer. It may be better to choose Ultrasonic
Test for structural steel. The Engineer has the right to choose the testing frequency specified in any of the
relevant codes.
45
Footnote 51: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either the Magnetic Particle Test or the Penetrating
Test, whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the Engineer. It may be better to choose
Magnetic Particle Test for Carbon Steel. The Engineer has the right to choose the testing frequency specified in
any of the relevant codes.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
BS EN ISO 4136  As per the
14.10.14 Transverse Tensile Test - Engineer’s request
Welds

14.10.15 Bend Test - Welds Engineer’s request
14.10.16 Impact Test - Welds Engineer’s request
BS EN ISO 9015-1,  As per the
14.10.17 Hardness Test - Welds BS EN ISO 9015-2 Engineer’s request
BS EN 1321  As per the
14.10.18 Macroscopic &
Microscopic Inspection -
Welds
ASTM E749, E751  As per the

14.10.19 Acoustic Emission Test - Engineer’s request
ar
Welds
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.11 PRESTRESSING STEEL, SHEATHS, ANCHORAGES,

Refer to footnote
COUPLERS46
ASTM A370, A931,  1 test for each reel of
14.11.1 Tension, Yield, A1061, E8,
wire or strand
Elongation, Break BS 5896,
 1 test per 1000 m of
Strength - Steel Wire, BS EN ISO 15630-3 wire or strand
Strand, Rod  1 test per 30 t for
each rod size
ASTM E328,  1 test for each
14.11.2 Relaxation - Steel Wire, batch/lot of wire or
BS 5896,
Strand, Rod strand
BS EN ISO 15630-3
ar
each rod size
ASTM A981  1 test for each reel of
14.11.3 Bond Strength - 15.24-
at
strand
mm Diameter Steel
-Q
Prestressing Strand strand
ACI 318,  1 test for each reel of
14.11.4 Bending, Hardness -
wire or strand
ASTM A370, E290,
LL
Steel Rods, Strands

BS EN ISO 15630-3  1 test per 1000 m of
wire or strand
W
each rod size

ASTM A751, E350,  1 test for each reel of
14.11.5 Chemical Analysis - Steel
s
BS EN ISO 15630-3 wire or strand

en
wire or strand
m
each rod size

BS EN 524-1  1 test per 7000 m 1 test shall comprise
e
14.11.6 Dimensions - Steel Strip length of 3 samples

Si
Sheaths

14.11.7 Flexural Behaviour - Steel length of 3 samples
Strip Sheaths

14.11.8 To-and-Fro Bending -
length of 3 samples
Steel Strip Sheaths

14.11.9 Lateral Load Resistance - length of 3 samples
Steel Strip Sheaths

14.11.10 Tensile Load Resistance - length of 3 samples
Steel Strip Sheaths
46
Footnote 52: Materials and products conforming ASTM A416, A421, A722, ACI 318, BS 5896 or equivalent
shall be tested as per this section requirement.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.11.11 Leak Tightness - Steel length of 3 samples
Strip Sheaths
As per relevant  1 test per 10

14.11.12 Anchorages standards anchorages
As per relevant  1 test per 60
14.11.13 Couplers standards couplers
ASTM A370,  As per the
14.11.14 Rib Geometry Engineer’s request
BS 4449,
BS EN ISO 15630-1
14.11.15 Compression - Metallic Engineer’s request
Materials
ASTM A255, E10, E18,  As per the

14.11.16 Hardenability, Hardness E110,
ar
(Brinell, Rockwell, BS EN ISO 6506-1, BS
Indentation) - Bars, EN ISO 6508-1
at
Metallic Materials -Q
ACI 318, A938  As per the
14.11.17 Torsion Test - Wires, Engineer’s request
Strand
LL
ACI 318,  As per the

14.11.18 Welding Test -
AWS D1.4
Reinforcement Bars
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.12 WATER47, 48 Refer to footnote
APHA 2540  1 test per week -

14.12.1 Total Dissolved Solids
sewage treatment
(TDS)
 1 test per week -
ground water
14.12.2 Total Suspended Solids
sewage treatment
(TSS)
ground water
14.12.3 Total Volatile Suspended sewage treatment
Solids (TVSS)
ar
14.12.4 Total Volatile Dissolved
sewage treatment
at
Solids (TVDS)

14.12.5 Settleable Solids
APHA 2540
-Q
sewage treatment
14.12.6 Total Solids sewage treatment
LL

14.12.7 Turbidity sewage treatment
W

ground water
s
14.12.8 Sludge Weight sewage treatment

en

14.12.9 Sludge Volume sewage treatment
m

14.12.10 Sludge Volume Index sewage treatment
e

Si
14.12.11 Oil & Grease sewage treatment

¯
APHA 4500-Cl  1 test per week -
14.12.12 Chloride sewage treatment
ground water
14.12.13 Residual Chlorine sewage treatment
14.12.14 Total Chlorine sewage treatment
2¯
APHA 4500-SO4  1 test per week -
14.12.15 Sulphate ground water
47
Footnote 53: This water testing is to be carried out for water that is recovered from the ground due to
excavations (ground water), water that is received and discharged from the sewage treatment plant as
applicable.
48
Footnote 54: The specified tests are to be carried out for each sewage treatment plant at the specified
frequency.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
2¯
APHA 4500-S  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.16 Sulphide request
¯
APHA 4500-CN  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.17 Cyanides Concentration request
APHA 4500-P  1 test per week -
14.12.18 Phosphorus (Total) sewage treatment
+
APHA 4500-H  1 test per week -
14.12.19 pH sewage treatment
¯
APHA 4500-F  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.20 Fluoride request
¯
APHA 4500-Br  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.21 Bromide request
APHA 2320,  1 test per week -
14.12.22 Alkalinity (Total) sewage treatment
BS EN ISO 9963-1 (BS
ar
6068-2.51),
6068-2.52)
at
APHA 2320,  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.23 Phenolphthalein Alkalinity
-Q request
6068-2.51),
6068-2.52)
LL

14.12.24 Hardness (Total) sewage treatment
W
ground water
14.12.25 Conductivity
s
sewage treatment
en

ground water
APHA 3500-Ca  1 test per week -
m
14.12.26 Calcium ground water

e
APHA 3500-Mg  1 test per week -

14.12.27 Magnesium
Si
ground water
APHA 4500-O,  1 test per week -
14.12.28 Biochemical Oxygen
sewage treatment
APHA 5210
Demand (BOD)

14.12.29 Chemical Oxygen Demand sewage treatment
(COD)
APHA 5310  As per the Engineer’s

14.12.30 Total Organic Carbon
request
(TOC)
APHA 4500-NH3  1 test per week -

14.12.31 Ammonium Nitrogen sewage treatment
¯
APHA 4500-NO3  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.32 Nitrate Nitrogen request
APHA 4500-NO2  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.33 Nitrite Nitrogen request
APHA 4500-N  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.34 Total Nitrogen request
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
APHA 4500-Norg  1 test per week -
14.12.35 Total Organic Nitrogen,
sewage treatment
Kjeldahl Nitrogen

14.12.36 Phenol Concentration request
APHA 4500-SiO2  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.37 Total Silicates request
14.12.38 Organic Hydrocarbon
request
(Total)

14.12.39 Residual Pesticides request
14.12.40 Heavy Metals
request
APHA 3120
Concentrations
ar
APHA 3500-Hg  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.41 Mercury
at
request
APHA 3500-As  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.42 Arsenic
-Q request
APHA 3500-Se  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.43 Selenium request
LL
APHA 4500-Br  As per the Engineer’s

14.12.44 Boron request
W

14.12.45 Aluminium request
APHA 3500-Al
s
14.12.46 Silicon request

en
APHA 3500-Sr  As per the Engineer’s

14.12.47 Strontium request
m
APHA 3500-Na  As per the Engineer’s

14.12.48 Sodium request
e
 As per the Engineer’s

Si
APHA 3500-K
14.12.49 Potassium request
APHA 3500-Cr  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.50 Hexavalent Chromium request
14.12.51 Total Chromium request
14.12.52 Total Coliform sewage treatment
14.12.53 Fecal Coliform sewage treatment
14.12.54 E Coli sewage treatment
14.12.55 Giardia request
14.12.56 Viruses request
As per relevant  1 test per week -
14.12.57 Nematodes (Helminth) standards
sewage treatment
Eggs
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
As per relevant  1 test per week -
14.12.58 Microscopic Examination standards sewage treatment
APHA 3500-Pb Lead  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.59 Lead request
APHA 3500-Ni Nickel  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.60 Nickel request
APHA 3500-Zn Zinc  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.61 Zinc request
APHA 3500-Cd  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.62 Cadmium Cadmium request
APHA 3500-Cu Copper  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.63 Copper request
USEPA 5030C, 8015D  As per the Engineer’s
14.12.64 Gasoline Range Organics request
(C6-C10)
ar
14.12.65 Diesel Range Organics
at
request
(C11-C28) -Q
14.12.66 Heavy Fraction Range
request
(C29-C40)
LL
Refer to Soil  Refer to Soil

14.12.67 Water Analysis of Soil or Investigation and Investigation and
Soil Analysis for Water Earthworks Section Earthworks Section
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.13 CEMENT49, 50, 51 Refer to footnote

14.13.1 Compressive Strength of
ASTM C109,  Change in material
Hydraulic Cement
(Mortars)
cement
14.13.2 Chemical Analysis of
Cement
cement
14.13.3 Setting Time
ar
cement
14.13.4 Consistency, Soundness
at
-Q cement
14.13.5 Fineness of Cement ASTM C115, C204,  Change in material
C430,
LL

BS EN 196-6 cement
W
14.13.6 Consistence of Fresh

Mortar - Masonry Cement
s
cement
en

14.13.7 Air Content - Masonry
Cement
m
cement
e

14.13.8 Water Retention - Masonry
Si
Cement
cement
14.13.9 Sieve Residue
cement
49
Footnote 55: Ordinary Portland-Cement (AASHTO M85, ASTM C150, BS EN 197-1), Sulphate Resisting
Portland-Cement (BS 4027), Portland Blast Furnace Slag Cement, Masonry Cement (ASTM C91 or BS EN 413-
1) or equivalent shall be tested in accordance with this section as applicable.
50
Footnote 56: The testing is to be carried out on site irrespective of whether the manufacturers’ certificates are
available or the testing has been done by the ready-mix concrete supplier.
51
Footnote 57: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM C183, BS EN 196-7 or equivalent
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.13.10 Autoclave Expansion (Also
known as Cement
Shrinkage Test)
cement
14.13.11 Specific Gravity, Density
cement
14.13.12 Pozzolanicity Test for
Pozzolanic Cement
cement
BS 4027  Each source
14.13.13 Sulphate Resistant Cement
ar
cement
at
14.13.14 Early Stiffening
-Q
cement
14.13.15 Potential Expansion of
LL
Portland-Cement Mortars
Exposed to Sulphate
cement
W
BS 4550-3.8,  Each source

14.13.16 Heat of Hydration
BS EN 196-2  Change in material
s
cement
en

14.13.17 Ground Granulated Blast-
m
Furnace Slag - Chemical & Refer to footnote

BS EN 15167-2  1 test per 50 t
Physical Properties52
e
ASTM C311, C618,  Each source

Si
14.13.18 Fly Ash or Pulverized-Fuel

Ash - Chemical & Physical
BS EN 450-2,  1 test per 50 t Refer to footnote
Properties52
BS EN 451-1,  1 test per month
BS EN 451-2
14.13.19 Silica Fume - Chemical &
Physical Properties52 Refer to footnote
BS EN 13263-2  1 test per 50 t
52
Footnote 58: Where applicable testing for these materials are to be carried out in addition to the normal tests
which have already been specified in this section for cement.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.14 INTERLOCKING BLOCKS53 Refer to footnote
ASTM C120, C140,  Each type

14.14.1 Flexural Strength, Tensile C880,
 1 test per 12500 units
Strength, Splitting BS EN 1338,
2
Strength – Natural Stones, BS EN 12372
Dimension Stones, Slate,
Concrete Paving Blocks,
Concrete Slab Units
ASTM C97, C121,  Each type 1 test shall

14.14.2 Water Absorption - C642, BS EN 1338 comprise of 3
Concrete Slab Units, samples
2
Dimension Stone, Slate
BS EN 1338,  Each type

14.14.3 Dimension, Flatness,
ar
BS EN 12390-7,  1 test per 12500 units
Dimensional Stability -
BS EN 14617-12 2
Concrete Slab Units,
at
Agglomerated Stones, -Q
Concrete Paving Blocks
ASTM C97, C642,  Each type

14.14.4 Density (or Specific
BS EN 12390-7  1 test per 12500 units
Gravity) - Concrete Slab
LL

2
Units, Dimension Stone
W
ASTM E303,  Each type 1 test shall

14.14.5 Slip Resistance (Dry State) comprise of 3
BS EN 14231  1 test per 12500 units
- Precast Paver Units, samples
2
s
Natural Stones
en
ASTM C241, C1353  Each type

14.14.6 Abrasion Resistance -
m
Stone Subjected to Foot

2
Traffic, Dimension Stone
e
ASTM C170  Each type

Si
14.14.7 Compressive Strength -

Dimension Stone

2
1 test per 1000 m
ASTM C1354  1 test per 100
14.14.8 Strength of Individual
anchorages
Stone Anchorages

14.14.9 Cover Measurement -
request
Concrete Slab Units

14.14.10 Initial Surface Absorption - request
Concrete Slab Units
53
Footnote 59: Precast Concrete Paver Units (Perforated and Non-Perforated), Cement Unit Pavers,
Ferrocement Roof Slabs, Ferrocement Sunbreaker Slabs, Natural Stone Products, Natural Stone Walkway
Pavers, Slate, Dimension Stones and/or materials and products conforming to ASTM C936, BS EN 1469, BS EN
12057, BS EN 12058, BS EN 12059 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirements as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
BS EN 14630  As per the Engineer’s
14.14.11 Carbonation Depth -
request
Concrete Slab Units
Refer to Aggregates  Refer to Aggregates

14.14.12 Aggregates - Concrete Section
Section
Slab Units
Refer to Earthworks,  Refer to Earthworks,

14.14.13 Granular Base, Setting Bed Subgrade Section Subgrade Section
for Concrete Pavers,
Natural (Stone) Pavers
Refer to Concrete or  Refer to Concrete or

14.14.14 Compressive Strength - Masonry section as
Masonry section as
Setting Bed, Mortar (for applicable applicable
Pavers)
ar
ASTM C99
14.14.15 Modulus of Rupture -
request
Dimension Stone
at
ASTM C1352 -Q  As per the Engineer’s
14.14.16 Flexural Modulus of
request
Elasticity - Dimension
Stone
LL
ASTM C1721  As per the Engineer’s

14.14.17 Petrographic Examination - request
Dimension Stone
W

14.14.18 Weather Resistance - Slate request
s

en
14.14.19 Structural Performance - request

Exterior Cladding
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.15 SURFACES FOR SPORTS AREAS, PLAYGROUND

Refer to footnote
SURFACING ETC54, 55
2
BS EN 14837
14.15.1 Slip Resistance

2
BS EN 12228
14.15.2 Joint Strength - Synthetic
Surfaces

2
BS EN 12616
14.15.3 Water Infiltration Rate

2
BS EN 15301-1
14.15.4 Rotational Resistance

2
BS EN 14808
14.15.5 Shock Absorption
ar
2
BS EN 14810
14.15.6 Spike Resistance
at
2
BS EN 12234
14.15.7 Ball Roll Behaviour
-Q
2
BS EN 14836
14.15.8 Artificial Weathering Test,
Environmental Testing
LL

2
BS 7188
14.15.9 Fire Test
W
s
en
e m
Si
54
Footnote 60: Products and materials conforming to BS 7044-1, BS EN 14877, BS EN 14904, BS EN 15330-1,
BS EN 15330-2 or equivalent shall also be tested as per this section requirement.
55
Footnote 61: Sampling shall be done in accordance with BS 7188 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.16 ADMIXTURES56, 57 Refer to footnote
BS EN 480-10  Each Type

14.16.1 Water Soluble Chloride
 Each source
Content
14.16.2 Setting Time
 Each source
14.16.3 Alkali Content of
 Each source
Admixtures
14.16.4 Bleeding of Concrete
 Each source
ar
14.16.5 Capillary Absorption
 Each source
at

-Q Change in material
ASTM C233  Each Type
14.16.6 Testing for Air-Entraining
 Each source
Admixtures
BS EN 480-14  As per the Engineer’s
LL
14.16.7 Corrosion Susceptibility of request

Reinforcing Steel
W

14.16.8 Infrared Analysis request
s

14.16.9 Air Voids Characteristics
en
request
in Hardened Concrete

m
BS EN 480-8
14.16.10 Conventional Dry Material request
Content
e
Si
BS 8443  As per the Engineer’s

14.16.11 Suitability of Special
request
Purpose Admixtures
56
Footnote 62: Admixtures for concrete, mortar, grout, masonry etc as applicable. Admixtures conforming to
ASTM C494, C1017, BS EN 934-1, BS EN 934-2, BS EN 934-3, BS EN 934-4, BS EN 934-5 or equivalent as
applicable.
57
Footnote 63: Reference concrete, mortar, masonry for testing and sampling shall be done in accordance with
BS EN 480-1, BS EN 480-13, BS EN 934-6 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.17 CONCRETE, SHOTCRETE, CONCRETE PAVEMENT58, 59 Refer to footnote
 Refer to Cement
14.17.1 Cement Refer to Cement Section Section
 Refer to Aggregates
14.17.2 Aggregates (Coarse, Fine, Section
Refer to Aggregates
Lightweight etc) and
Section
Aggregate Reactivity
Refer to Admixtures  Refer to Admixtures

14.17.3 Admixtures Section Section
 Each source
AASHTO T26, ACI 318,
14.17.4 Water
ASTM C109, C191, Change in material
3
BS EN 1008
water
ar
AASHTO T23, T119,  Slump & Temperature
14.17.5 Sampling Plastic (Fresh) T309,
at
- 1 test per truck
Concrete, Slump Testing, ASTM C31, C143,
 Slump & Temperature
-Q
Temperature Measurement C172, C1064, C1611, - 1 test per 10 m
3
and Making Test BS EN 12350-1,  Cube - 1 set per mix

Specimens in the Field BS EN 12350-2 per day (6 cubes)
Refer to footnote
(AASHTO R39, ASTM  Cube - 1 set per 30 m
3
LL
C192, BS 1881-125 may (6 cubes)

also be applicable)
 Temperature (for
60
W
mass concrete) - 1
2
test per 50 m of
concrete applied
s
AASHTO T22,  1 test for 7 days (3

14.17.6 Compressive Strength of
en
ASTM C39, cubes) Both (7 & 28 days)

Hardened Concrete
BS EN 12390-1, BS EN  1 test for 28 days (2 tests will have to
(Making, Curing and 12390-2, cubes)
m
be carried out
Testing) BS EN 12390-3
e
ASTM C642,  All the cubes

14.17.7 Density of Hardened
Si
BS EN 12390-7
Concrete
BS EN 12350-3, 12350-  As per the Engineer’s

14.17.8 Vebe Test, Flow Table 4, 12350-5
request
Test, Concrete Compacting
Factor - Fresh Concrete
ASTM C469,  As per the Engineer’s

14.17.9 Static Modulus of Elasticity request
BS 1881-121
in Compression
58
Footnote 64: Cast-in-Place, Ready-mix, Shotcrete, Self Consolidating and/or Concrete conforming to ASTM
C94, BS 8500-1, BS 8500-2, BS EN 206-1 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement as
applicable.
59
Footnote 65: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM C823 or equivalent where applicable.
60
Footnote 66: 1 test shall refer to 3 monitoring points (ie, near the top surface, centre and near the bottom
2
surface of the concrete pour) per 50 m of concrete applied.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.17.10 Air Content of Fresh
request
ASTM C231,
Concrete – Pressure
BS EN 12350-7
Method

14.17.11 Air Content of Fresh
request
ASTM C173
Concrete – Volumetric
Method

14.17.12 Bleeding request
14.17.13 Density of Hardened,
request
ASTM C1040,
Unhardened Concrete - On
BS EN 12390-7
Site, Nuclear Method

3
ar
ASTM C642,
14.17.14 Water Absorption of
61 BS 1881-122 Refer to footnote
Hardened Concrete
at
3
ASTM C803, -Q
14.17.15 Water Penetration (or
BS EN 12390-8, DIN
Permeability) of Hardened 1048-5 Refer to footnote
61
Concrete
LL

3
ASTM C1202, C1543,
14.17.16 Rapid Chloride (Ion) AASHTO T259, T277
Penetration (RCP) or Refer to footnote
W
61
Chloride Migration Test

3
BS 1881-124
s
14.17.17 Sulphate Content of

61 Refer to footnote
en
Hardened Concrete

3
BS 1881-208
14.17.18 Initial Surface (Water)
m
61 Refer to footnote
Absorption
e

3
ASTM C1152, C1218,
Si
14.17.19 Chloride Ion BS 1881-124

 1 test per grade/class
Concentration, Chloride
of concrete per week Refer to footnote
Content - Hardened
Concrete

2
ASTM C805,
14.17.20 Rebound Hammer -
BS 1881-201,
Hardened Concrete
BS EN 12504-2
2
ASTM C597,
14.17.21 Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity
BS EN 12504-4
Test - Hardened Concrete

2
BS 1881-204
14.17.22 Metal Cover Testing -
Hardened Concrete
61
Footnote 67: The required number of samples shall be tested per test as per the relevant
specification.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
BS 5212-3  Each Type
14.17.23 Cold Applied Joint Sealant
 Each source
Systems for Concrete
Pavements
BS 2499-3  Each Type

14.17.24 Hot-Applied Joint Sealant
 Each source
Systems for Concrete
Pavements

14.17.25 Unit Weight Test (Density) request
ASTM C138,
of Fresh Concrete
BS EN 12350-6
14.17.26 Strain Measurement -
request
Hardened Concrete
ar
BS EN 14630
14.17.27 Depth of Carbonation - request
Cores or Broke (on
at
Concrete) -Q
14.17.28 Core Compressive
request
ASTM C42,
Strength
BS EN 12504-1
LL
ASTM C1084,  As per the Engineer’s

14.17.29 Cement Content of
request
BS 1881-124
Hardened Concrete
W

14.17.30 Half-cell Potential -
request
s
Hardened Concrete,
en
Reinforcement Primer

14.17.31 Particle Coating
m
ASTM D2489 request

ASTM G109  As per the Engineer’s
e
14.17.32 Effect of Chemical

request
Si
Admixtures on the
Corrosion of Embedded
Steel - Chloride
Environment

14.17.33 Petrographic Examination request
on Hardened Concrete

14.17.34 Tensile Splitting Strength request
of Test Specimens

14.17.35 Flexural Strength of
request
Hardened Concrete

14.17.36 Tensile Strength of
request
Concrete Surfaces

14.17.37 Pull-Out Strength -
request
Hardened Concrete
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.17.38 Length Change of
request
Concrete Due to Alkali-
Silica Reaction - Hardened
Concrete
ASTM C481, C779,  As per the Engineer’s

14.17.39 Abrasion Resistance of C944, C1138
request
Concrete Surfaces

14.17.40 Time of Setting of
request
Concrete Mixtures by
Penetration Resistance
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.18 CONCRETE CURING62 Refer to footnote
AASHTO T155,  Each Type

14.18.1 Water Retention - Curing
Compound C1315,  Change in material
BS 7542
ASTM E1347  Each Type
14.18.2 Reflectance, Pigments -
 Each source
Curing Compound
AASHTO M148,  Each Type
14.18.3 Drying Time - Curing
Compound
BS 7542  Change in material
14.18.4 Bond Strength Test -
request
Curing Compound
ar
14.18.5 Density (or Relative
at
request
Density) -Q
14.18.6 Non-volatile Content and request
Settlement (or Volatile
Organic Content - VOC)
LL
AASHTO M171,  Each Type

14.18.7 Sheet Materials
W
ASTM C171  Change in material

AASHTO M182  Each Type
14.18.8 Burlap & Cotton
s
As Directed by the  As per the Engineer’s

en
14.18.9 Supplementary Strength Engineer

request
Tests to Verify Adequacy
m
of Curing
e
Si
62
Footnote 68: Products conforming to AASHTO M148, M182, ASTM C171, C309, C1315 or equivalent shall be
tested in accordance with this section as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.19 PRECAST CONCRETE

Refer to Cement Section  Refer to Cement
14.19.1 Cement Section
Refer to Masonry, Mortar  Refer to Masonry,
14.19.2 Bedding Mortar Section Mortar Section
Methods to be proposed  Frequency to be
14.19.3 Bedding Mortar In addition by the Contractor based proposed by the
to the above, the mortar on mortar type(s) and Contractor based on
Sampling and Testing procedure(s); for mortar type(s) and
Programme to be Engineer’s approval procedure(s); for
Proposed program
Engineer’s approval
proposed by the to include flow and
Contractor based on strength testing
mortar type(s) and
procedure(s); for
ar
at
AWS D1.4  As per the Engineer’s
14.19.4 Welding Test - -Q request
Reinforcement Bars
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.20 WATERPROOFING, ROOFING63, 64, 65 Refer to footnote
Refer to Geo-textiles section Refer to Geo-textiles

14.20.1 Drainage Fabric (such section
as Geo-textiles, Geo-
membranes,
Geosynthetics etc)
 1 test per 10,000 m

2
ASTM D412, D751, D1005,
14.20.2 Average Thickness, D5199, D3767, D7635,  1 test per 100 m (for
2
Thickness Tolerance, BS EN 1849-1, wet or dry film for Dry film testing
Overall Thickness (as BS EN 1849-2, liquid applied) shall be non-
applicable) - BS ISO 37  Change in material destructive
Waterproofing
Membrane
ar
 1 test per 10,000 m
2
ASTM D297, D792
14.20.3 Density,
at
Specific
Gravity - Waterproofing
length for waterstop
Membrane, Waterstop
-Q  Change in material
ASTM D297, D543,  1 test per project site
BS EN 1847,  Change in material
LL
Chemicals, Liquids -
BS EN ISO 2812-1, 2812-2,
Waterproofing 2812-3, 2812-4, 2812-5
Membrane
W
 1 test per 10,000 m

2
ASTM D412, D638, D882,
14.20.5 Tensile Strength & D2370, D2523, D4073,  1 test per 1000 m
s
Elongation (at Yield / BS EN 12311-1, length for waterstop

en
Break) - Waterproofing BS EN 12311-2,  Change in material

Membrane, Waterstop BS EN ISO 527-1 (BS 2782-
m
3, ISO 527-1), BS EN 527-3,

BS EN 527-5
e
ASTM C1306, D5385,  1 test per project site

14.20.6 Resistance Under D7281, DIN 1048-5, BS EN
Si
Water Pressure, Water 1928, BS EN 13111, BS EN

Penetration, 15820, BS EN 15817
Resistance, Tightness
(as applicable) -
Waterproofing
Membrane
63
Footnote 69: The testing is to be carried out for all waterproofing works such as tunnels, mined tunnels,
building foundations, roofing, bridge-deck etc whether new construction or repair of existing structures.
64
Footnote 70: The products such as Bonded Membrane, Unbonded Membrane, Butyl Rubber Sheeting,
Thermoplastic Membrane (PVC), Composite (Self-Adhering) Membrane Sheeting, Flexible Cementitious and
Non-Cementitious Membrane, Bituminous Type, Asphalt Primer (ASTM D41), Mastic Asphalt (BS EN 12970),
Polymer Modified Bituminous Coating (BS EN 15814), Flexible Sheet (BS EN 13967), Cold Liquid-Applied
Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane (ASTM C836) or equivalent shall be tested as per this section.
65
Footnote 71: The sampling, preparation of samples shall be done in accordance with ASTM D146, D228,
D2829, D3183, D3617, D5147, D7636, BS EN 13416 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
ASTM D471, D570,  1 test per project site
14.20.7 Water Absorption -
BS EN 14223  Change in material
Waterproofing
Membrane
ASTM D624, D1004, D1922,  1 test per 10,000 m2

14.20.8 Tear Resistance, D4932,  Change in material
Propagation Tear BS EN 12310-1,
Resistance - BS EN 12310-2,
Waterproofing BS ISO 34-2
Membrane
 1 test per 10,000 m

2
ASTM D2582, D5602,
14.20.9 Resistance to Puncture D5635, E154,
Propagation, Static, BS EN ISO 12236
Dynamic Puncture -
Waterproofing
ar
Membrane
at
ASTM D638, D1876, D6365,  1 test per project site
14.20.10 Tensile Strength of D6392, D7379
Welded Seam, Seam
-Q
Strength, Lap
Adhesion (as
applicable) -
LL
Waterproofing
Membrane
W
As per relevant standards  All the welded seams

14.20.11 Air Pressure Test -
Welded Seam
s
en

14.20.12 Resistance to Dynamic request
Water Pressure
m

e
14.20.13 Resistance to Rain request

Si
ASTM D1204,  As per the Engineer’s

14.20.14 Dimensional Stability - request
BS EN 1107-1,
Waterproofing
BS EN 1107-2,
Membrane
BS EN 15818
ASTM D746, D2136, D5636,  As per the Engineer’s
14.20.15 Low Temperature Bend BS EN 1109, request
Test (or Flexibility) - BS EN 15813
Waterproofing
Membrane
ASTM D412, D1000, D429,  1 test per project site

14.20.16 Adhesion to Rigid D903, D4138, D4541, for preformed
Substrate, Self (or Peel D7234, membrane
Strength) - BS EN 13596,  3 test per 1000 m (for
2
Waterproofing BS EN ISO 4624 liquid applied on site)

Membrane  Change in material
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
ASTM D1653, E96, E154,  1 test per project site
14.20.17 Water Vapour BS EN 1931
Permeability (or Water
Vapour Transmission) -
Waterproofing
Membrane
ASTM C1305  1 test per project site

14.20.18 Crack Bridging -
Waterproofing
Membrane
ASTM D4787  The entire surface

14.20.19 Pinhole Holiday Test (100% testing)
ASTM D5957  100% of the horizontal
14.20.20 Water Ponding Test surfaces
ar
ASTM C1522, D573, D822,
14.20.21 Resistance to Ageing, D3045, D5849, E154, G154, request
Fatigue, Accelerated BS EN 1296,
at
Weathering (UV BS EN 1297 -Q
Radiation, Heating),
Extensibility, Retention
of Properties -
Waterproofing
LL
Membrane

W
14.20.22 Pliability Degrees -

request
Bitumen-Saturated
Felts and Woven
s
Fabrics for Roofing

en
and Waterproofing
m
ASTM D785, D1415, D2240,  As per the Engineer’s

14.20.23 Hardness (Initial-Shore, BS ISO 48, request
e
Rockwell, BS ISO 7619-1,

International) - BS ISO 7619-2
Si
Waterproofing
Membrane

14.20.24 Set to Touch, Drying request
Time - Waterproofing
Membrane

14.20.25 Capability to Seal
request
Around Fasteners -
Waterproofing
Membrane

14.20.26 Test Methods for
request
Emulsified Bitumens
Used as Protective
Coatings
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
2
BS 8102
14.20.27 Dimension of
Protection Board
ASTM D36  1 test per project site

14.20.28 Softening Point -
Waterproofing
Membrane

2
ASTM D4
14.20.29 Bitumen Content -
 1 test per 5000 litres
Waterproofing
Membrane
ASTM D4060  1 test per project site if

14.20.30 Taber Abrasion (or
the application
Abrasion Resistance) - 2
exceeds 4000 m
Acrylic Polymer, Liquid
ar
Membrane
at
ASTM D412, D429  As per the Engineer’s
14.20.31 Adhesives (Related to -Q request
Waterproofing)

14.20.32 Viscosity - Roofing
request
Bitumen
LL
ASTM C308  1 test per project site if

14.20.33 Working Time, Initial the amount exceeds
W
Setting Time and 2000 kg

Service Strength
s
Setting Time - Epoxy

en
Mortar

m
the amount exceeds

- Epoxy Mortar 2000 kg
e

Si
14.20.35 Tensile Strength -

the amount exceeds
Epoxy Mortar 2000 kg
14.20.36 Flexural Strength -
the amount exceeds
Epoxy Mortar 2000 kg
14.20.37 Bond Strength - Epoxy the amount exceeds
Resin 2000 kg
ASTM D1475  1 test per project site if
14.20.38 Density - Epoxy Resin the amount exceeds
2000 kg
14.20.39 Coefficient of Linear request
Expansion - Epoxy
Mortar

14.20.40 Water Absorption -
request
Epoxy Mortar
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.20.41 Vapour Transmission - request
Volatile Liquid

14.20.42 Voids - Roofing and request
Waterproofing
Membrane

14.20.43 Flexibility - Roofing
request
and Waterproofing
Materials and
Membranes

14.20.44 Non-volatile Content - request
Cold Liquid Applied
ar
Membrane
at
14.20.45 Characterizing -Q request
Thermoplastic Fabrics
- Roofing and
Waterproofing
LL
ASTM E907,  As per the Engineer’s

14.20.46 Resistance to Wind
request
BS EN 16002
Load, Uplift- Membrane
W
Roofing Systems

s
14.20.47 Impact Resistance -

request
en
Bituminous Roofing
Systems
m

14.20.48 Adhesive and Cohesive request
e
Strength Between
Si
Materials - Roofing or
Waterproofing
Membranes and
Systems
BS EN 14692  1 test per project site

Compaction of Asphalt
Layer - Waterproofing
Membrane for Bridge

14.20.50 Behaviour of Bitumen
Sheets During
Application of Mastic
Asphalt -
Waterproofing
Membrane for Bridge
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.20.51 Compatibility by Heat
Conditioning -
Waterproofing
Membrane for Bridge
BS EN 12316-1,  1 test per project site

14.20.52 Peel, Shear Resistance for bonded system
BS EN 12316-2,
of Joints -
BS EN 12317-1,
Waterproofing
BS EN 12317-2
Membrane

14.20.53 Resistance to Ozone - request
Waterproofing
Membrane
ar
14.20.54 Testing and Analysis of request
Asphalt Roll Roofing,
at
Cap Sheets, and
Shingles Used in
-Q
Roofing and
Waterproofing
LL

14.20.55 Corrosion Resistance
request
of Ferrous Metal
W
Fastener Assemblies
Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.21 RESIN, POLYMER/CEMENT COMPOSITION66, 67 Refer to footnote
BS 6319-2  1 test per 2000 kg if

14.21.1 Compressive Strength the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
BS 6319-3  1 test per 2000 kg if
14.21.2 Modulus of Elasticity in the amount exceeds
Flexure, Flexural Strength 2000 kg in total
BS 6319-5  1 test per 2000 kg if
14.21.3 Density of Hardened Resin the amount exceeds
Compositions 2000 kg in total
BS 6319-6  1 test per 2000 kg if
14.21.4 Modulus of Elasticity in the amount exceeds
Compression 2000 kg in total
 1 test per 2000 kg if
ar
ASTM C307, BS 6319-7
14.21.5 Tensile Strength the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
at
BS 6319-8  1 test per 2000 kg if
14.21.6 Resistance to Liquids -Q the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
BS 6319-9  1 test per 2000 kg if
14.21.7 Peak Exotherm
the amount exceeds
LL
Temperature 2000 kg in total

BS 6319-10  1 test per 2000 kg if
14.21.8 Temperature of Deflection
W
the amount exceeds

Under Bending Stress 2000 kg in total
BS 6319-11  1 test per 2000 kg if
s
14.21.9 Creep in Compression the amount exceeds

en
2000 kg in total
BS 6319-12  1 test per 2000 kg if
14.21.10 Unrestrained Linear
m
the amount exceeds

Shrinkage, Coefficient of 2000 kg in total
e
Thermal Expansion
Si
ASTM G154  1 test per 2000 kg if

14.21.11 UV Accelerated
the amount exceeds
Weathering 2000 kg in total
ASTM C882, BS EN  1 test per 500 litres if
14.21.12 Slant Shear Strength 12615 the amount exceeds
500 litres in total
ASTM C482  1 test per 500 litres if
14.21.13 Shear Adhesion Bond the amount exceeds
500 litres in total
14.21.14 Skid Resistance request
14.21.15 Taber Abrasion request
66
Footnote 72: Acrylic Polymer (for all applications), Elastomeric Joint Sealant (ASTM C920), Acrylic Polymer
(ASTM C881), Latex Agents for Bonding (ASTM C1059) or equivalent shall be tested as per this section
requirement.
67
Footnote 73: Sampling shall be done in accordance with BS 6319-1 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.22 MASONRY, BRICK, MORTAR ETC AND RELATED

Refer to footnote
ACCESSORIES68, 69, 70
BS EN 772-1  Each type
14.22.1 Compressive Strength - 1 test shall
 1 test per batch/lot
Masonry Units comprise of 5
 1 test per 5000 units samples

2
1 test per 1000 m
BS EN 772-4,  Each type
14.22.2 Density - Masonry Units
BS EN 772-13  1 test per batch/lot

2
1 test per 1000 m
14.22.3 Dimension - Masonry Units
ar

2
at
1 test per 1000 m
14.22.4 Flatness - Masonry Units
-Q  1 test per batch/lot

2
1 test per 1000 m
LL

14.22.5 Water Absorption - 1 test shall
BS EN 772-21  1 test per batch/lot
Masonry Units comprise of 3

W
1 test per 5000 units samples


2
1 test per 1000 m
s
14.22.6 Bending Tensile Strength -

en
Masonry Units

2
1 test per 1000 m
m
BS 6073-2  Each type

14.22.7 Precast Concrete Masonry
e
Units
Si

2
1 test per 1000 m
ASTM D1751  Each type
14.22.8 Filler for Movement Joint -
Boards
ASTM C793,  Each type

14.22.9 Movement Joint Sealant
BS EN ISO 11600  Change in material
68
Footnote 74: Masonry, Masonry Units, Precast Concrete Masonry Units, Movement Joint Materials, Mortar,
Screed, Plaster, Skim Coat, Grout for Masonry, Bonding Agent, Lime, Gypsum, Polymer Modified Cement Mortar,
Prepacked Floor Screed, Prepacked Waterproof Screed, Self-Levelling Screed, Prepacked Plaster, Prepacked
Skim Coat, Grouts for Masonry (ASTM C476), Mortar for Masonry (ASTM C144, C270) and/or products or
materials conforming to BS 6073-2, BS EN 771-1, BS EN 771-2, BS EN 771-3, BS EN 771-4, BS EN 771-5, BS
EN 771-6, BS EN 1338 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement.
69
Footnote 75: Each material shall be tested separately as per the specified testing frequency as applicable.
70
Footnote 76: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM C50, C67, C1019, BS EN 13892-1 or
equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.22.10 Water Penetration and
request
Leakage Through Masonry

14.22.11 Flexural Bond Strength of E518 request
Masonry

BS 4551,  Change in mix
(Average) - Mortar, Screed
BS EN 1015-11,
etc
BS EN 12190,
BS EN 13892-2
14.22.13 Flow (Consistency),
BS EN 1015-4  Change in mix
Flowability
ASTM C413  Each mix
ar
14.22.14 Water Absorption - Mortar,
 Change in mix
Screed etc
at
DIN 1048-5  Each mix
14.22.15 Water Penetration Test
-Q
 Change in mix
14.22.16 Flexural Strength - Mortar,
 Change in mix
Screed etc
LL

14.22.17 Volume Change and/or C827
request
W
(Linear) Shrinkage

14.22.18 Water
s
Retention and/or
BS 4551  Change in mix
en
Consistency Retention -
Mortar, Screed etc
m
BS EN 1015-9  Each mix

14.22.19 Stiffening Time - Mortar
 Change in mix
e

Si
14.22.20 Setting Time - Skim Coat

 Change in mix
ASTM G154  Each mix
14.22.21 UV Accelerated
 Change in mix
Weathering - Self Levelling
Screed

14.22.22 Shear Adhesion Bond -
 Change in mix
Self-Levelling Screed

14.22.23 Slip Resistance (Before
 Change in mix
and After Accelerated
Weathering) - Self
Levelling Screed

14.22.24 Tensile Adhesion Bond
request
BS EN 13892-8
Strength - Self Levelling
Screed
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.22.25 Bond Strength of Mortar to request
Masonry Units

14.22.26 Tensile Pull Off Strength request
(Before and After
Weathering)

14.22.27 Preconstruction &
request
Construction Evaluation -
Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry

14.22.28 Abrasion Resistance of
request
Mortar Surfaces
ar
14.22.29 Air Content - Hydraulic
at
request
Cement Mortar -Q
14.22.30 Length Change of
request
Hydraulic-Cement Mortars
Exposed to a Sulfate
LL
Solution

W
ASTM C1324
14.22.31 Examination and Analysis - request
Hardened Mortar
s
BS ISO 124  As per the Engineer’s

en
14.22.32 Total Solids Content -

request
Bonding Agent
m

14.22.33 Physical Testing - Lime request
e

Si
14.22.34 Physical Testing - Gypsum request

14.22.35 Block Type Insulation request
ASTM C265  Each Source
14.22.36 Calcium Sulphate -
Bedding Mortar for
Precast, Pavers, Stones
ASTM C1218  Each Source

14.22.37 Water Soluble Chloride -
Mortar, Bedding Mortar
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.23 CONCRETE KERB (OR CURB) & KERBSTONE

(CURBSTONE)
BS EN 1339,  Each Type
14.23.1 Dimension
14.23.3 Bending Strength
14.23.5 Transverse Strength
ar
14.23.6 Flatness

at
BS EN 1339, As per the Engineer’s
14.23.7 Core Samples request
BS EN 1340 -Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
71, 72
14.24 GEO-TEXTILE, GEO-MEMBRANE, GEOSYNTHETICS Refer to footnote
 1 test per 2,000 m

2
ASTM D4632, D5034
14.24.1 Grab Strength, Grab Break
Load

2
ASTM D751, D3787,
14.24.2 Puncture Strength (CBR D4833, D6241, BS EN
Puncture Test), Static ISO 12236
Puncture Test

2
ASTM D1004, D4533
14.24.3 Burst Strength,
Trapezoidal Strength, Tear
Resistance

2
ASTM D4595, D4885,
14.24.4 Strength, Tensile Strength
ar
D5035, D6693, BS EN  Change in material
ISO 10319
2
at
ASTM D4595, D4632,
14.24.5 Elongation & Rapture, BS EN ISO 10319
Mean Peak Strength
-Q
2
ASTM D570, D4491, BS
14.24.6 Permeability (Water), Water EN 11058, SN 640550
Absorption
LL

2
ASTM D1505, D5261,
14.24.7 Dimension, Density, Mass, D5993 BS EN ISO 9864
W
Mass Per Unit Area

2
ASTM D4595, BS EN 1 test per 2,000 m
14.24.8 Opening Size (Pore Size)
s
ISO 12956, DIN 60500  Change in material

en

2
ASTM D751, D5199, 1 test per 2,000 m
14.24.9 Thickness D5994, BS EN ISO  Change in material
9863-1, BS EN ISO
m
9863-2
ASTM D7006  1 test per 2,000 m2
e
14.24.10 Ultrasonic Testing -

Si
Geomembrane
ASTM D413, D4437,  Non-destructive

14.24.11 Peel Test, Tensile Test, D5641, D6365, D6392, testing to be done for
Seam Evaluation, Air BS EN ISO 10321 each welded joint or
Channel Evaluation - seam
Joints, Seams  Destructive testing is
to done as per the
ASTM D816, D4437,  As per the Engineer’s
14.24.12 Shear Test - Seams D6392 request
BS EN ISO 13433  As per the Engineer’s
14.24.13 Resistance to Perforation request
71
Footnote 77: These tests shall be carried out for geo-textiles, geo-textile related products, geo-membranes,
geo-membrane related products, geosynthetics, geosynthetics clay liners etc wherever its use may be such as in
the tunnels, sea-sides, soil stabilisation, embankment, roofs etc as applicable.
72
Footnote 78: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM D4354 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.24.14 Pull-out Resistance in Soil request
14.24.15 Carbon Black Content,
request
Carbon Black Dispersion -
Geomembrane,
Geosynthetics

14.24.16 Peel Strength - Needle request
Punched Geosynthetic

14.24.17 Moisture Content -
Geosynthetic Clay Liners

14.24.18 Bentonite Free Swell, Swell
ar
Index - Geosynthetic Clay
Liners
at
BS EN ISO 10416  As per the Engineer’s
-Q
14.24.19 Montmorillonite Content - request
Geosynthetic Clay Liners
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.25 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT

14.25.1 Sampling and Testing by the Contractor for
proposed by the
Programme to be Engineer’s approval Contractor for
proposed by the Engineer’s approval
Contractor for Engineer’s
approval
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.26 FIRE TESTING
ar
14.26.1 Reaction to Fire Tests -
 1 test per type
Building Products
at
BS 476  1 test per project site
14.26.2 Fire Rating Test - All
-Q  1 test per type
Applicable Material
14.26.3 Where not stated clearly, by the Contractor for
LL
proposed by the
Sampling and Testing Engineer’s approval Contractor for
Programme to be proposed Engineer’s approval
W
by the Contractor for

s
en
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
m
14.27 ALUMINIUM, ALUMINIUM ALLOYS – DOORS, WINDOWS, SHEETS, STRIPS,

e
PLATES ETC73
Si
BS EN 573-3  1 test per project site

14.27.1 Chemical Analysis
 1 test per type
BS EN 485-1,  1 test per 1000 m
14.27.2 Dimensions
BS EN 755-3,  1 test per type
BS EN 755-4,
BS EN 755-7,
BS EN 755-8,
BS EN 755-9,
BS EN 12020-2
BS EN 485-2,  1 test per 1000 m
14.27.3 Mechanical Properties
BS EN 755-2  1 test per type
73
Footnote 79: Products conforming to BS 3987, BS 4873, BS 6496 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
ASTM B557  As per the Engineer’s
14.27.4 Tension Test - Wrought request
and Cast Aluminum-Alloy
and Magnesium-Alloy
Products
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.28 STEEL DOORS AND WINDOWS

proposed by the
ar
approval
at
Material /Section / Activity
1, 2
& the 3
-Q Minimum
Method 4, 5 Remarks
74
Refer to footnote
14.29
LL
HANDRAILS AND BALUSTER

W
proposed by the
s

en
approval
m
1, 2
Method Remarks
e
4, 5
Si
75
14.30 TIMBER DOOR, WINDOWS, CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY Refer to footnote
proposed by the
approval
74
Footnote 80: Products conforming to ASTM A36, A47, A53, A500 or equivalent as applicable.
75
Footnote 81: Products conforming to BS 4965 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
76, 77
14.31 TILES, GROUTS AND ADHESIVE FOR TILES ETC Refer to footnote
BS EN ISO 10545-7  1 test per 3000 units

14.31.1 Resistance to Surface
 1 test per type
Abrasion - Tiles
14.31.2 Resistance to Deep
 1 test per type
Abrasion - Tiles
14.31.3 Impact Resistance - Tiles
 1 test per type
ASTM C485,  1 test per 3000 units
14.31.4 Dimensions, Surface
BS EN ISO 10545-2  1 test per type
ar
Flatness & Surface Quality
- Tiles
at
ASTM C373,  1 test per 3000 units
14.31.5 Water Absorption, Relative

Density - Tiles
BS EN ISO 10545-3
-Q 1 test per type
14.31.6 Modulus of Rapture and
 1 test per type
LL
Breaking Strength - Tiles

BS EN ISO 10545-10  As per the Engineer’s
W
14.31.7 Moisture Expansion - Tiles request

14.31.8 Chemical Resistance -
s
request
Tiles
en

14.31.9 Resistance to Stains - Tiles request
m

14.31.10 Linear Thermal Expansion
e
 1 test per type

- Tiles
Si
14.31.11 Crazing Resistance - Tiles request
BS EN 12808-1  1 test per type/mix
Grout for Tiles
BS EN 12808-2,  1 test per type/mix

14.31.13 Resistance to Abrasion (or
BS ISO 13007-4  Change in material
Wear Test) - Grout for Tiles
76
Footnote 82: Products and materials conforming to BS 5385-1, BS 5385-2, BS 5385-3, BS 5385-4, BS 5385-5,
BS EN 12004, BS EN 13748-1, BS EN 13748-2, BS EN 13888, BS EN 14411, BS EN 14891, BS EN ISO 10545,
BS ISO 13007-1, BS ISO 13007-3 or equivalent shall also be tested as per this section requirement as
applicable.
77
Footnote 83: Sampling and testing is to be done in accordance with BS EN 13748-1, BS EN 13748-2, BS EN
ISO 10545-1 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
BS EN 12808-3,  As per the Engineer’s
14.31.14 Bend (or Flexural) and request
BS ISO 13007-4
Compressive Strength -
Grout for Tiles

14.31.15 Shrinkage - Grout for Tiles
14.31.16 Water Absorption - Grout
for Tiles
BS ISO 13007-2  1 test per type/mix

14.31.17 Slip, Adhesion Test -
Adhesives for Tiles
ASTM C482,  1 test per type/mix

14.31.18 Tensile & Shear Adhesion,
Bond Strength –
ar
BS EN 1348,
Adhesives, Reaction Resin
BS EN 12003
Adhesives for Tiles
at
BS EN 1346  1 test per type/mix
-Q
14.31.19 Open Time - Adhesives for
Tiles
BS ISO 13007-2  As per the Engineer’s

14.31.20 Shear Testing - Adhesives
LL
request
for Tiles

W
BS ISO 13007-2
14.31.21 Compressive Testing -
request
Adhesives for Tiles
s

en
14.31.22 Deformation - Adhesives request

for Tiles
m

request
e
Adhesives for Tiles

Si

14.31.24 Tensile Testing -
request
Adhesives for Tiles
BS EN 1347  1 test per type/mix

14.31.25 Wetting Capability -
Adhesives for Tiles
BS EN 13748-1,  1 test per 3000 units

14.31.26 Terrazzo Tiles - Internal
BS EN 13748-2  1 test per type
and External Use
14.31.27 Transverse Deformation - request
Cementitious Adhesives
and Grouts
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.32 SUSPENDED CEILING
BS EN 13964  1 test per type

14.32.1 Dimensions
14.32.2 Fire Tests
14.32.3 Tensile Strength
14.32.4 Bend Testing
14.32.5 Load Capacity
14.32.6 Electrical Testing request
ar
14.32.7 Noise Control (Acoustic)
at
14.32.8 Thermal Conductivity -Q
14.32.9 Moisture Control
LL
14.32.10 Condensation
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.33 GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED CONCRETE

14.33.1 Sampling and Testing by the Contractor and to
proposed by the
Program to be proposed by be approved by the Contractor and to be
the Contractor to be Engineer approved by the
approved by the Engineer Engineer
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.34 GLASS AND GLAZING

14.34.1 Sampling and Testing by the Contractor and to
proposed by the
ar
Program to be proposed by be approved by the Contractor and to be
the Contractor to be Engineer approved by the
at
approved by the Engineer Engineer
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.35 PAINT, VARNISH, PIGMENTS FOR COLOURING
ASTM D1475  1 test per type

14.35.1 Density of Paint

2 Non destructive
ASTM D1005, D1212 1 test per 1000 m
14.35.2 Thickness (Wet & Dry)
 1 test per type
14.35.3 Scrub Resistance
14.35.4 Viscosity
14.35.5 Sag Resistance (or
ar
Sagging Mills)
BS EN ISO 2813  1 test per type
at
14.35.6 Specular Gloss of Non-
Metallic Paint Films -Q
14.35.7 Fineness of Dispersion of
Pigment-Vehicle Systems
LL
BS 3900-D9 (ISO 7724-  1 test per type Refer to footnote

14.35.8 Colour Measurement of 2)
W
Paint and Varnishes

(Also known as
Comparison for Paint)
s
en
BS EN ISO 2814 (BS  1 test per type Refer to footnote

14.35.9 Comparison of Contrast 3900-D4)
Ratio
m
BS EN ISO 787-9  1 test per type

14.35.10 pH
e
Si
ASTM D3359,  1 test per type Refer to footnote

14.35.11 Cross-cut Tests of Paints
79 BS EN ISO 2409 (BS  Change in material
and Varnishes 3900-E6)
ASTM D4541,  1 test per type Refer to footnote
14.35.12 Adhesion (Pull Off)
79 BS EN ISO 4624  Change in material
Strength

14.35.13 Pigment Content
ASTM D5401,  1 test per type
14.35.14 Resistance to Liquids
BS EN ISO 2812-1,  Change in material
2812-2, 2812-3, 2812-4,
2812-5
78
Footnote 84: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either one of these Tests, whichever is deemed
suitable for the site in consultation with the Engineer.
79
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.35.15 Pigments for the Colouring
of Building Materials
Refer to fire testing  Refer to fire testing

14.35.16 Fire Resistance section section
14.35.17 Volatile Content request
BS EN 11890-1,
BS EN 11890-2
14.35.18 Non-Volatile Content request
14.35.19 Bend Test, Flexibility of request
BS EN ISO 1519
Paints and Varnishes

14.35.20 Resistance to Abrasion request
ar
14.35.21 Tensile Property
at
request
ASTM D822, D4587 -Q As per the Engineer’s
14.35.22 Resistance to Weathering, request
Accelerated Weathering

14.35.23 Drying Time
LL
request
14.35.24 Rheological Properties
W
request
14.35.25 Hiding Power request
s
As per relevant  As per the Engineer’s

en
14.35.26 Average Reflectance standards request

m
14.35.27 Alkali Resistance request

e
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
80, 81
14.36 ROAD MARKING MATERIALS Refer to footnote
AASHTO M249  1 test per 1000 kg

14.36.1 Yellowness Index -
Thermoplastic
BS 3262-3  1 test per 500 m

14.36.2 Thickness - Thermoplastic
BS EN 1436  1 test per 500 m
14.36.3 Skid Resistance -
Thermoplastic
AASHTO T250, BS  1 test per 1000 kg

14.36.4 Density - Thermoplastic 3262-3  Change in material
AASHTO M249  1 test per 1000 kg
14.36.5 Luminance - Thermoplastic
ar
AASHTO T250  1 test per 1000 kg
14.36.6 Drying Time -
at
Thermoplastic
AASHTO T250,  1 test per 1000 kg

14.36.7 Softening Point -
-Q
ASTM D36  Change in material
Thermoplastic
AASHTO T250  1 test per 1000 kg

LL
14.36.8 Flowability - Thermoplastic

ASTM D968, 4060  1 test per 1000 kg
W
Thermoplastic
 1 test per 1000 kg

s
AASHTO T250,
14.36.10 Glass Bead Content
en
BS EN 1423,
BS EN 1424
ASTM D711  1 test per 500 m
m
14.36.11 Drying Time Test - Paints

e
ASTM D869, D1309

14.36.12 Settling Properties - Traffic request
Si
Paints

14.36.13 Calcium Carbonate
request
Content
ASTM D4796  1 test per 1000 kg

14.36.14 Bond Strength
ASTM D3723  1 test per 1000 kg
14.36.15 Binder Content
ASTM D1214, D7681,  1 test per 1000 kg
14.36.16 Sieve Analysis (Gradation) BS EN 1423,
- Road Marking Materials BS EN 1424
80
Footnote 86: Road marking, Marking, Roads, Studs (road), Cats eyes, Construction systems parts,
Retroreflective materials, Reflective materials, Permanent, Temporary etc as applicable.
81
Footnote 87: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM D7307, D7308 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
BS EN 1463-1,  1 test per 500 m
14.36.17 Performance -
BS EN 1463-2
Retroreflecting Road Studs

14.36.18 Dimensions -
BS EN 1463-2
BS EN 1463-1,  1 test per 500 m

14.36.19 Visibility (Night-time) -
BS EN 1463-2  1 test per 100 pcs
BS EN 1463-1,  1 test per 500 m

14.36.20 Visibility (Daytime) -

14.36.21 Luminous Intensity -
BS EN 1463-2
ar
14.36.22 Colour, Colorimetry -
at
BS EN 1463-2
Retroreflecting Road Studs -Q
14.36.23 Chromaticity -
BS EN 1463-2
LL

14.36.24 Resilience - Retroreflecting
BS EN 1463-2
Road Studs
W
BS EN 1463-1,  1 test per 500 m

14.36.25 Fixing - Retroreflecting
s
Road Studs
en

14.36.26 Optical Measurement -
BS EN 1463-2
m

e
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
82
14.37 UPVC, PLASTIC - PIPES, FITTINGS, VALVES ETC Refer to footnote
As per relevant  Each type

14.37.1 Dimensions standards  Each batch of delivery
 Each diameter
14.37.2 Pressure Testing standards  Each batch of delivery
 Each diameter
BS 4660,  Each type
14.37.3 Thermoplastic Ancillary
BS EN 13598-1  Each batch of delivery
Fittings
 Each diameter
As per relevant  As per Engineer’s
14.37.4 Hydrostatic Test standards request
ASTM D638,  Each type
14.37.5 Tensile Test
ar
BS EN ISO 527-1 (BS  Each batch of delivery
2782-3, ISO 527-1),  Each diameter
at
BS EN ISO 527-2 (BS
2782-3) -Q
BS EN ISO 13845 (BS  Each type
14.37.6 Leaktightness 2782-11)  Each batch of delivery
 Each diameter
LL
ASTM E1003  Each line

14.37.7 Hydrostatic Leak Testing83
 Each line
W
ASTM E1002
14.37.8 Ultrasonic Leak Testing83
s
en
e m
Si
82
Footnote 88: Pipes, fittings, valves etc and/or products and materials conforming to BS 3505, BS EN ISO
1452-1, BS EN ISO 1452-2, BS EN ISO 1452-3, BS EN ISO 1452-4, BS EN ISO 1452-5 or equivalent shall be
tested as per this section requirement as applicable.
83
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
84
Refer to footnote
14.38 PRECAST CONCRETE PIPES, MANHOLES, INSPECTION CHAMBERS ETC
BS EN 639, BS EN 640,  Each batch of delivery

14.38.1 Dimensions BS EN 641, BS EN 642  Each type
BS EN 639, BS EN 640,  Each batch of delivery
14.38.2 Hydrostatic Pressure Test, BS EN 641, BS EN 642
 Each type
Pressure Testing,
Watertightness Test
ASTM E1003,  Each batch of delivery

14.38.3 Hydrostatic Leak Testing
BS EN 639, BS EN 640,  Each type
ASTM E1002  Each line
14.38.4 Ultrasonic Leak Testing
ar
ASTM C924  Each line Refer to footnote
14.38.5 Low Pressure Air Test85 -
at
Sewerline

14.38.6 Negative Air Pressure
-Q
85
(Vacuum) - Sewerline

LL
14.38.7 Negative or Positive Air

85
Pressure Test - Concrete
Sanitary Sewer Pipe
W
BS EN 639,  Each batch of delivery

14.38.8 Compressive Strength Test
BS EN 640, 
s
Each type
BS EN 641 
en
Change in material
BS EN 641  Each batch of delivery
14.38.9 Tensile Test - Reinforced
 Each type
m
Concrete Pressure Pipe

e

14.38.10 Angular Deflection, Bend

Si
BS EN 640 Each type

Testing
ASTM C497,  Each batch of delivery
14.38.11 Crushing Test
14.38.12 Shear Testing
 Each type
84
Footnote 90: Pipes, (Reinforced) Concrete Pressure Pipes, Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipes (Cylinder
and Non-Cylinder Type), Distributed Reinforcement Concrete Pressure Pipes (Cylinder and Non-Cylinder Type),
Fitting, Joints, Covers, Spigot-and-Socket Joints, Welded Joints, Sealing Rings, Pipe Couplings and/or materials
and products conforming to BS 5911-1, BS 5911-3, BS 5911-4, BS 5911-6, BS EN 1916, BS EN 1917 or
equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement as applicable.
85
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.38.13 Prestressing Steel -
 Each type
Prestressed Concrete
Pressure Pipes

14.38.14 Permeability - Prestressed
BS EN 642  Each type
Concrete Pressure Pipes,
Concrete Pipes, Manholes

14.38.15 Coating - Prestressed
 Each type
Concrete Pressure Pipes
ASTM C497  As per Engineer’s
14.38.16 Standard Tests - Concrete request
Pipe, Manhole Sections
ar
ASTM A1032
14.38.17 Hydrogen Embrittlement
request
Resistance - Prestressed
at
Concrete Pipe -Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
86, 87
Refer to footnote
14.39 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES, JOINTS, MANHOLES ETC

14.39.1 Dimensions
 Each Diameter
 Each type
ASTM C1091  Each batch of delivery
14.39.2 Barrel Permeability
 Each Diameter
(Hydrostatic Infiltration)
 Each type
14.39.3 Straightness
 Each Diameter
 Each type
ar
14.39.4 Bending Moment
 Each Diameter
at
Resistance
 Each type

14.39.5 Tensile Testing
 Each Diameter
 Each type
LL
W
14.39.6 Chemical Resistance

BS EN 295-3  Each Diameter
 Each type
s
en

14.39.7 Leak Test, Water Test,
Pressure Test

m
Change in material
14.39.8 Strength (Crushing)
e

Si
 Each type
14.39.9 Angular Deflection
 Each Diameter
 Each type
14.39.10 Fatigue Test, Wear Test, request
Roughness (Surface) Test

14.39.11 Thermal Testing request
86
Footnote 92: Ceramics, Pipes, Pipe fittings, Drainpipes, Pipe couplings, Joints, Sewers etc shall also be tested
in accordance with this section requirement.
87
Footnote 93: Products and materials conforming to BS EN 295-1, BS EN 295-2, BS EN 295-4, BS EN 295-5,
BS EN 295-6, BS EN 295-7, BS EN 295-10 or equivalent as applicable. The sampling shall be done in
accordance with BS EN 295-2, BS EN 295-3 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
ASTM C301  Each batch of delivery
 Each Diameter
 Each type
ASTM E1003  Each line Refer to footnote
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
88
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
89, 90
14.40 GRP PIPES, FITTINGS, JOINTS, PLASTIC PIPING, PRC ETC Refer to footnote
ASTM D2122, D3567,  1 test per 30 pipes

14.40.1 Dimensions BS EN 14636-1,  Each Diameter
ASTM D2563  All of the pipes
14.40.2 Visual Inspection
ASTM D2412,  1 test per 30 pipes
14.40.3 Stiffness, Flexibility
 Each type
14.40.4 Hardness
ar
BS EN 14636-1,  Each Diameter
at

BS EN 14636-1,  1 test per 30 pipes
14.40.5 Crushing Test
 Each type
LL
As per relevant  As per the Engineer’s

14.40.6 Strain Corrosion standards request
W
As per relevant  Each batch of delivery

14.40.7 Liner Thickness standards  Each type
s
en

14.40.8 Loss on Ignition request

m
As per relevant Each batch of delivery

14.40.9 Leak Test (Water Test) standards  Each type
e
Si
ASTM D638, D2290,  1 test per 30 pipes

14.40.10 Hoop Tensile Strength
14.40.11 Longitudinal, Axial Tensile
Strength
89
Footnote 95: Plastic Piping Systems for Non-Pressure Drainage and Sewer, Polyester Resin Concrete (PRC),
Pipes and Fittings with Flexible Joints, Plastic Pipelines, Pipe Couplings, Drainpipes, Manholes and Inspection
Chambers and/or products and materials conforming to BS EN 1796, BS EN 14364 or equivalent shall be tested
as per this section requirement as applicable.
90
Footnote 96: Sample preparation shall be in accordance with ASTM D618 or equivalent as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
ASTM D570  1 test per 30 pipes
 Each Diameter
 Each type
14.40.13 Resistance to Short-Time request
Hydraulic Pressure

14.40.14 Compressive Properties request
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.41 DUCTILE IRON (DI) PIPES, FITTINGS, FLANGE, ADAPTOR GASKETS,

Refer to footnote
91, 92
VALVES

14.41.1 Dimensions
BS EN 598,  Each Diameter
BS ISO 2531  Change in material
14.41.2 Operating Pressure
BS ISO 2531  Change in material
14.41.3 Internal Lining
ar
at
14.41.4 External Coating
BS EN 1092-2, 
-Q Each type
ASTM D1000, BS 2782-  Each batch of delivery
14.41.5 Wrapping Material 0, BS EN 15189  Each type
LL
ASTM E213  Each batch of delivery
W
14.41.6 Metal Pipe and Tubing

 Each Diameter
 Each type

s
Change in material
en

 Each line
m
ASTM E1002 Refer to footnote

e
ISO 4633  Each batch of delivery

14.41.9 Rubber Gaskets, Seals,
Si
 Each Diameter
Joint Rings
 Each type
BS EN 1074-1, 1074-2,  Each batch of delivery
14.41.10 Valves for all Purposes 1074-3, 1074-4, 1074-5,  Each Diameter
1074-6
 Each type
91
Footnote 97: DI Pipes, Spheroidal-graphite cast-iron, Cast-iron, Cast-iron pipelines, Pipe fittings, Pipe
couplings, Pipes and Valves used for Water, Gas and Sewerage Pipelines, Isolating Valves, Check Valves, Air
Valves, Control Valves, Protective Film Materials (BS6076) and/or product and material conforming to BS EN
969, ISO 4633 or equivalent shall be tested in accordance with this section requirement as applicable.
92
Footnote 98: Sampling shall be done in accordance with BS 6001-1 (ISO 2859-1) or equivalent as applicable.
93
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.41.11 Epoxy Coating - Ductile
 Each type
Iron Pipes, Fittings and
Accessories
ASTM D4541  Each batch of delivery

14.41.12 Adhesion to Pipe - Internal
 Each type
Lining
ASTM B117  Each batch of delivery
14.41.13 Salt Spray Test - Internal
 Each type
Lining
ASTM D5162, G6, G62,  Each batch of delivery
14.41.14 Pinhole Test, Spark BS 1344-11 (ISO 2746),
 Each type
Holiday Test - Internal, BS EN ISO 8289
External Lining
ar
ASTM D714, D1654  Each batch of delivery
14.41.15 Sulphuric Acid Immersion
 Each type
Test, Corrosive
at
Environment Test - Internal -Q
Lining

14.41.16 Impact Resistance -
request
Internal Lining
LL

W
request
Internal Lining

s
14.41.18 Vapour Permeability -

request
en
Internal Lining
ASTM G12, D6132,  As per the Engineer’s

14.41.19 Thickness - Internal Lining
m
D7091 request
e
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
94
Refer to footnote
14.42 ROAD SIGNS

14.42.1 Performance
14.42.2 Luminance
BS 8442  As per the Engineer’s
14.42.3 Chromaticity, Photometry
request
(Light Measurement)

14.42.4 Mechanical Testing,
Impact Testing, Wind
Loading, Environmental
testing, Loading
ar
14.42.5 Retroreflective Materials
at
ASTM E810,  Each type
14.42.6 Coefficient of
BS EN 12899-1 
Retroreflection, Reflection
Factor
ASTM E1709, E2540  Each type

LL
14.42.7 Measurement of
Retroreflective Signs
W

14.42.8 Colorimetry & Colour

s
BS EN 12899-1 Each type

14.42.9 Lighting (Road Signs)

en
Change in material
ASTM A90, B487, E376,  Each type
14.42.10 Galvanise Coating BS EN ISO 1461  Change in material
m

14.42.11 Dimensions
e
standards  Change in material

Si

14.42.12 Anchor Bolts standards  Change in material
94
Footnote100: Road signs, Street furniture, Bollards (traffic), Signs, Warning devices, Portable, Fixed, Vertical
Road Traffic Signs, Pedestrian-crossing lights, Flashing lights, Studs (road), Reflective materials, Lighting (road
signs), Schools, Barriers etc and/or materials conforming to (ASTM A123) as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
95, 96
14.43 FLOORING, FLOOR COVERINGS, ADHESIVES FOR FLOORING ETC Refer to footnote

14.43.1 Elasticity and Resistance
to Wear, Wear Test
BS EN 13696
14.43.2 Bending Strength Under
Static Load - Wood
Flooring

14.43.3 Resistance to Indentation,
Impact
BS ISO 24335, BS ISO
24343-1
ASTM F1514,  Each type
ar
14.43.4 Dimensions (Changes,
BS 4682-2, BS 4682-3,  Change in material
Stability and Curling), BS 4682-4, BS 4805,
at
Flatness (Surface), BS 5921, BS EN 426,
Geometrical BS EN 427, BS EN 662,
-Q
BS EN 669, BS EN 986,
Characteristics
BS EN 994,
BS EN 1841, BS EN
1910, BS EN 13329, BS
LL
EN 13647, BS ISO
17984, BS ISO 23999,
W
BS ISO 24341
ASTM F1515,  As per the Engineer’s
14.43.5 Changes in Appearance, request
BS EN 1471
s
Light Stability
en

14.43.6 Resistance to Chemical
Agents, Delamination,
m
BS EN 13442,
Cigarettes
BS EN ISO 11857
e
BS EN 14259,  As per the Engineer’s

Si
14.43.7 Performance, Adhesion,

request
BS EN 14293
Mechanical, Ageing etc -
Adhesives for Floor
Covering
ASTM F150,  As per the Engineer’s

14.43.8 Electrical Resistance to
request
BS 7078
Earth
BS EN 718, BS EN 984,  Each type

14.43.9 Mass, Mass Per Unit Area, BS EN 672, BS ISO
Density 8543
95
Footnote 101: Floor coverings, Laminates, Sheet flooring, Panel flooring and/or materials and products
conforming to BS 4050-2, BS 4592-0, BS EN 685, BS EN 1307, BS EN 1470, BS EN 13297, BS EN 13329, BS
EN 13848, BS EN 14259, BS EN 14293, BS EN 14342, BS EN 14565, BS EN 14978, BS EN 15468, BS ISO
10874 or equivalent shall also be tested as per this section as applicable.
96
Footnote 102: Sampling of material and products shall be in accordance with BS EN 14259, BS EN 14762 or
equivalent as applicable.

14.43.10 Overall Thickness, Pile
BS 5041 (ISO 1765),  Change in material
Thickness Above the
BS 4098, BS 4939 (ISO
Backing, Substrate, 3416), BS EN 428,
Thickness Swelling BS ISO 1766, BS ISO
10834, BS ISO 24336
14.43.11 Lock Strength - Laminate request
Floor Coverings

14.43.12 Scratch Tests, Surface
request
Defects, Humidity - Acrylic
Based Surface Layer

14.43.13 Caster Chair Test - Textile request
Floor Coverings

14.43.14 Volatile Organic
request
BS ISO 10580
ar
Compound (VOC)
Emissions, Volatile Loss
at
14.43.15 Identification of Linoleum
BS ISO 26985
-Q request
and Determination of
Cement Content and Ash
Residue - Resilient Floor
LL
Coverings
ASTM F137  As per the Engineer’s

W
14.43.16 Flexibility - Resilient

request
Flooring Materials
s

14.43.17 Seam Strength - Resilient
en
request
Floor Coverings
m

14.43.18 Reaction to Fire Tests,
BS EN ISO 9239-1  Change in material
e
Effects of a Small Source

of Ignition
Si

14.43.19 Gelling - Resilient Floor request
Coverings

14.43.20 Conventional Pattern
request
Depths - Resilient Floor
Coverings

14.43.21 Spreading of Water,
Moisture Content

14.43.22 Exudation of Plasticizers - request
Resilient Floor Coverings

14.43.23 Kerosine Number - Roofing request
and Flooring Felt

14.43.24 Staining of Vinyl Flooring
by Adhesives

14.43.25 Static Coefficient of
Friction

14.43.26 Simulated Services - Wood request
Flooring
BS ISO 25620  Each type

14.43.27 Long-Side Friction -
Laminate Floor Coverings
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.44 CERAMIC FOR ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES

14.44.1 Vitrified Ceramic Materials
for Electrical Appliances
ASTM F417  Each type

14.44.2 Flexural Strength -
Electronic Grade 3
Ceramic
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
ar
97
14.45 GULLIES, GRATINGS, MANHOLE COVERS ETC Refer to footnote
at
14.45.1 Mechanical testing -
Gullies
-Q
14.45.2 Dimensions - Gullies
LL

14.45.3 Seals - Gullies
W

14.45.4 Pressure Testing Leak
Tests Watertightness Tests
s
- Gullies
en

14.45.5 Odours - Gullies
m

14.45.6 Thermal-cycling Tests -

e
Change in material
Gullies
Si

14.45.7 Flow Rates, Flow
Measurement, Siphons -
Gullies

14.45.8 Sheet Flooring,
Membranes - Gullies

14.45.9 Deflection Tests, Strength
of Materials - Gullies,
Manhole Covers
97
Footnote 103: Gullies, Gullies with light liquids closure, Manholes, Access covers, Waste-water drainage,
Drainage, Surface-water drainage, Water supply, Waste systems, Rainwater control systems etc shall be tested
as per this section requirement as applicable and/or Products and Materials conforming to BS EN 124, BS EN
1253-1, Spheroidal graphite cast irons (ISO 1083), Gray cast iron (ISO 185) or equivalent shall also be tested in
accordance with this section requirement as applicable.
1, 2
Method 4, 5 Remarks
14.45.10 Load Test - Manhole
Covers

14.45.11 Type Testing - Manhole
Covers
ASTM D1005, D6132,  Each type

14.45.12 Epoxy Coating98 - Manhole D7091,
 Change in material Refer to footnote
Covers BS EN 124
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
98
Footnote 104: The minimum thickness of the Epoxy Coating shall be 50 microns unless otherwise specified.
14.46 REFERENCES
The following standards are applicable to this section:
14.46.1 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) :
1 AASHTO M17 - Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
2 AASHTO M20 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement
3 AASHTO M81 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type)
4 AASHTO M82 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type)
5 AASHTO M85 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
6 AASHTO M140 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt.
ar
7 AASHTO M145 - Standard Specification for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
at
Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes
-Q
8 AASHTO M148 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete
LL
9 AASHTO M171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
W
10 AASHTO M182 - Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and
Cotton Mats
s
11 AASHTO M208 - Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt.

en
12 AASHTO M226 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement

m
13 AASHTO M249 - Standard Specification for White and Yellow Reflective Thermoplastic
e
Striping Material (Solid Form)

Si
14 AASHTO R28 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Aging of Asphalt Binder Using a
Pressurized Aging Vessel (PAV)
15 AASHTO R13 - Standard Practice for Conducting Geotechnical Subsurface Investigations
16 AASHTO R32 - Standard Recommended Practice for Calibrating the Load Cell and
Deflection Sensors for a Falling Weight Deflectormeter
17 AASHTO R37 - Standard Practice for Application of Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) to
Highways
18 AASHTO R39 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory
19 AASHTO R40 - Standard Practice for Measuring Pavement Profile Using a Rod and Level
20 AASHTO T2 - Standard Method of Test for Sampling of Aggregates

21 AASHTO T11 - Standard Method of Test for Materials Finer Than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
22 AASHTO T21 - Standard Method of Test for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
Concrete
23 AASHTO T22 - Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
24 AASHTO T23 - Standard Method of Test for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field
25 AASHTO T24 - Standard Method of Test for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete
26 AASHTO T26 - Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete.
ar
27 AASHTO T27 - Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
at
28 AASHTO T30 - Standard Method of Test for Mechanical Analysis of Extracted Aggregate.
-Q
29 AASHTO T37 - Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler for Hot Mix
Asphalt (HMA)
LL
30 AASHTO T40 - Standard Method for Sampling Bituminous Materials.

W
31 AASHTO T44 - Standard Method of Test for Solubility of Bituminous Materials.
32 AASHTO T48 - Standard Method of Test for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup.
s
en
33 AASHTO T49 - Standard Method of Test for Penetration of Bituminous Materials.

m
34 AASHTO T51 - Standard Method of Test for Ductility of Asphalt Materials

e
35 AASHTO T53 - Standard Method of Test for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball
Si
Apparatus)
36 AASHTO T55 - Standard Method of Test for Water in Petroleum Products and Bituminous
Materials by Distillation
37 AASHTO T59 - Standard Method for Testing Emulsified Asphalts.
38 AASHTO T71 - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate
on Strength of Mortar
39 AASHTO T84 - Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine
Aggregate
40 AASHTO T85 - Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse
Aggregate
41 AASHTO T87 - Standard Method of Test for Dry Preparation of Disturbed Soil and Soil-
Aggregate Samples for Test
42 AASHTO T88 - Standard Method of Test for Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
43 AASHTO T89 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils.
44 AASHTO T90 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
45 AASHTO T92 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Shrinkage Factors of Soils.
46 AASHTO T96 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
47 AASHTO T98 - Standard Method of Test for Fineness of Portland Cement by the
Turbidimeter
48 AASHTO T99 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5-
kg (5.5-lb) Rammer and a 305-mm (12-in.) Drop.
ar
49 AASHTO T100 - Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity of Soils
at
50 AASHTO T102 - Standard Method of Test for Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials, Single User
-Q
Digital Publication
51 AASHTO T104 - Standard Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium
LL
Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

W
52 AASHTO T105 - Standard Method of Test for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement
53 AASHTO T106 - Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
s
Mortar (Using 50-mm or 2-in. Cube Specimens)

en
54 AASHTO T107 - Standard Method of Test for Autoclave Expansion of Hydraulic Cement
m
55 AASHTO T112 - Standard Method of Test for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregate
e
Si
56 AASHTO T113 - Standard Method of Test for Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate
57 AASHTO T119 - Standard Specification for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
58 AASHTO T121 - Standard Method of Test for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete
59 AASHTO T129 - Standard Method of Test for Normal Consistency of Hydraulic Cement
60 AASHTO T131 - Standard Method of Test for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat
Needle
61 AASHTO T133 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Hydraulic Cement
62 AASHTO T146 - Standard Method of Test for Wet Preparation of Disturbed Soil Samples for
Test
63 AASHTO T152 - Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
64 AASHTO T153 - Standard Method of Test for Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by Air
Permeability Apparatus
65 AASHTO T155 - Standard Method of Test for Water Retention by Liquid Membrane-Forming
Curing Compunds for Concrete
66 AASHTO T164 - Standard Method of Test for Quantitative Extraction of Bituminous Paving
Mixtures.
67 AASHTO T165 - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Water on Compressive Strength of
Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
68 AASHTO T166 - Standard Method of Test for Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Hot Mix
Asphalt (HMA) Using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens
69 AASHTO T168 - Standard Method of Test for Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
ar
70 AASHTO T176 - Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils
by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test.
at
71 AASHTO T179 - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Heat and Air on Asphalt Materials
-Q
(Thin-Film Oven Test)
72 AASHTO T180 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a
LL
4.54 kg (10 lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop.

W
73 AASHTO T191 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone
Method.
s
74 AASHTO T193 - Standard Method of Test for the California Bearing Ratio.
en
75 AASHTO T195 - Standard Method of Test for Determining Degree of Particle Coating of
m
Asphalt Mixtures
e
76 AASHTO T196 - Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Si
Volumetric Method
77 AASHTO T201 - Standard Method of Test for Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts (Bitumens)
78 AASHTO T202 - Standard Method of Test for Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum Capillary
Viscometer
79 AASHTO T205 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In-Place by the Rubber Balloon
Method.
80 AASHTO T206 - Standard Method of Test for Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of
Soils
81 AASHTO T209 - Standard Method of Test for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and
Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)
82 AASHTO T211 - Standard Method of Test for Determination of Cement Content in Cement-
Treated Aggregate by the Method of Titration
83 AASHTO T216 - Standard Method of Test for One-Dimensional Consolidation Properties of

Soils
84 AASHTO T219 - Standard Method of Test for Testing Lime for Chemical Constituents and
Particle Sizes
85 AASHTO T222 - Standard Method of Test for Non-repetitive Static Plate Load Test of Soils
and Flexible Pavement Components, for Use in Evaluation and Design of Airport and
Highway Pavements
86 AASHTO T223 - Standard Method of Test for Field Vane Shear Test in Cohesive Soil.
87 AASHTO T224 - Standard Method of Test for Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil
Compaction Test.
88 AASHTO T228 - Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity of Semi-Solid Asphalt
Materials
ar
89 AASHTO T236 - Standard Method of Test for Direct Shear Test of Soils under Consolidated
at
Drained Conditions -Q
90 AASHTO T238 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
LL
91 AASHTO T239 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-
Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
W
92 AASHTO T240 - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Heat and Air on a Moving Film of
Asphalt (Rolling Thin-Film Oven Test)
s
en
93 AASHTO T245 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous
Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus
e m
94 AASHTO T248 - Reducing Aggregate Samples to Testing Size

Si
95 AASHTO T250 - Standard Method of Test for Thermoplastic Traffic Line Material
96 AASHTO T255 - Standard Method of Test for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of
Aggregate by Drying
97 AASHTO T256 - Standard Method of Test for Pavement Deflection Measurements
98 AASHTO T259 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Concrete to Chloride Ion
Penetration
99 AASHTO T265 - Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soils.
100 AASHTO T267 - Determination of Organic Content in Soils by Loss on Ignition.
101 AASHTO T269 - Standard Method of Test for Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and
Open Asphalt Mixtures
102 AASHTO T271 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Plastic and Hardened Portland
Cement Concrete In-Place by Nuclear Methods
103 AASHTO T275 - Standard Method of Test for Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Hot Mix
Asphalt (HMA) Using Paraffin-Coated Specimens
104 AASHTO T277 - Standard Method of Test for Electrical Indication of Concrete’s Ability to
Resist Chloride Ion Penetration
105 AASHTO T283 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt
(HMA) to Moisture-Induced Damage
106 AASHTO T290 - Standard Method of Test for Determining Water Soluble Sulphate Ion
Content in Soil.
107 AASHTO T291 - Standard Method of Test for Determining Water-Soluble Chloride Ion
Content in Soil.
108 AASHTO T299 - Standard Method of Test for Rapid Identification of Alkali-Silica Reaction
Products in Concrete
ar
109 AASHTO T301 - Standard Method of Test for Elastic Recovery Test of Asphalt Materials by
at
Means of a Ductilometer -Q
110 AASHTO T304 - Standard Method of Test for Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate.
111 AASHTO T308 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Asphalt Binder Content of Hot
LL
Mix Asphalt (HMA) by the Ignition Method.

W
112 AASHTO T309 - Standard Method of Test for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic
Cement Concrete
s
113 AASHTO T310 - Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil
en
and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth), Single User Digital Publication
m
114 AASHTO T312 - Standard Method of Test for Preparing and Determining the Density of Hot
e
Mix Asphalt (HMA) Specimens by Means of the Superpave Gyratory Compactor

Si
115 AASHTO T313 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Flexural Creep Stiffness of
Asphalt Binder Using the Bending Beam Rheometer (BBR)
116 AASHTO T314 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Fracture Properties of Asphalt
Binder in Direct Tension (DT)
117 AASHTO T315 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Rheological Properties of
Asphalt Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer (DSR)
118 AASHTO T316 - Standard Method of Test for Viscosity Determination of Asphalt Binder
Using Rotational Viscometer
119 AASHTO T327 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to
Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus.
14.46.2 International Organisation for Standardization (ISO):

1 ISO185 - 2005 Grey cast iron - Classification
2 ISO 1083 - Spheroidal graphite cast irons - Classification
3 ISO 4633 - Rubber seals - Joint rings for water supply, drainage and sewerage pipelines-
Specification for materials
4 ISO 15835-2 - Steels for the reinforcement of concrete. Reinforcement couplers for
mechanical splices of bars. Test methods
14.46.3 Asphalt Institute (AI):
1 AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types.
ar
14.46.4 American Petroleum Institute (API):
at
1 API RP 13B-1 - Recommended Practice for Standard Procedure for Field Testing of Water-
Based Drilling Fluids.
-Q
14.46.5 American Concrete Society (ACI):
LL
1 ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
W
2
s
en
14.46.6 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): [Note: Where available/applicable
the ASTM version used should be the metric edition, ie, ‘M version’ (or ASTM D1234M
m
etc).]
e
1 ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

Si
2 ASTM A47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
3 ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless
4 ASTM A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel
Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings
5 ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products
6 ASTM A255 - Standard Test Methods for Determining Hardenability of Steel
7 ASTM A370 - Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of
Steel Products.
8 ASTM A416 - Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for
9 ASTM A421 - Standard Specification for Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for
10 ASTM A426 - Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe
for High-Temperature Service
11 ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
12 ASTM A673 - Standard Specification for Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of
Structural Steel
13 ASTM A722 - Standard Specification for Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bars for
Prestressing Concrete
14 ASTM A751 - Standard Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
Analysis of Steel Products
ar
15 ASTM A931 - Standard Test Method for Tension Testing of Wire Ropes and Strand
at
16 ASTM A938 - Standard Test Method for Torsion Testing of Wire
-Q
17 ASTM A981 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Bond Strength for 0.600-in.
[15.24-mm] Diameter Steel Prestressing Strand, Grade 270 [1860], Uncoated,
LL
Used in Prestressed Ground Anchors

W
18 ASTM A1032 - Standard Test Method for Hydrogen Embrittlement Resistance for
Steel Wire Hard Drawn Used for Prestressing Concrete Pipe
s
19 ASTM A1034 - Standard Test Methods for Testing Mechanical Splices for Steel
en
Reinforcing Bars
m
20 ASTM A1061 - Standard Test Methods for Testing Multi-Wire Steel Strand
e
21 ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
Si
22 ASTM B487 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide Coating
Thickness by Microscopical Examination of Cross Section
23 ASTM B557 - Standard Test Methods for Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products
24 ASTM C25 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Limestone,

Quicklime, and Hydrated Lime
25 ASTM C29 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Density (Unit Weight) and Voids in
Aggregate
26 ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field.
27 ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

28 ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.
29 ASTM C40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
Concrete.
30 ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams of Concrete.
31 ASTM C50 - Standard Practice for Sampling, Sample Preparation, Packaging, and
Marking of Lime and Limestone Products
32 ASTM C51 - Standard Terminology Relating to Lime and Limestone (as used by
the Industry)
33 ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural
Clay Tile
ar
34 ASTM C70 - Standard Test Method for Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate
at
35 ASTM C87 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine
-Q
Aggregate on Strength of Mortar
36 ASTM C88 - Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of

LL
Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.

W
37 ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
38 ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

s
en
39 ASTM C97 - Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of
Dimension Stone
m
40 ASTM C99 - Standard Test Method for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone
e
Si
41 ASTM C109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

Cement Mortars (Using 2 in. or 50 mm Cube Specimens).
42 ASTM C110 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Quicklime, Hydrated
Lime, and Limestone
43 ASTM C114 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement.
44 ASTM C115 - Standard Test Method for Fineness of Portland Cement by the
Turbidimeter.
45 ASTM C117 - Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than 75 m (No. 200) Sieve
in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.
46 ASTM C120 - Standard Test Methods of Flexure Testing of Slate (Breaking Load,
Modulus of Rupture, Modulus of Elasticity)
47 ASTM C121 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Slate

48 ASTM C123 - Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregates.
49 ASTM C127 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
50 ASTM C128 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
51 ASTM C131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size

Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
52 ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
53 ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air
Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
ar
54 ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units.
at
55 ASTM C142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
-Q
Aggregates.
56 ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
LL
57 ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Mortar.

W
58 ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

s
59 ASTM C151 - Standard Test Method for Autoclave Expansion of Portland Cement.
en
60 ASTM C156 - Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing
m
Materials.
e
61 ASTM C157 - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement

Si
Mortar and Concrete
62 ASTM C170 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone
63 ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
64 ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
65 ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Volumetric Method
66 ASTM C183 - Standard Practice for Sampling and the Amount of Testing of
Hydraulic Cement
67 ASTM C185 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Hydraulic Cement Mortar
68 ASTM C187 - Standard Test Method for Normal Consistency of Hydraulic Cement
69 ASTM C188 - Standard Test Method for Density of Hydraulic Cement

70 ASTM C191 - Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by
Vicat Needle.
71 ASTM C192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Laboratory
72 ASTM C203 - Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of
Block-Type Thermal Insulation
73 ASTM C204 - Standard Test Method for Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by Air
Permeability Apparatus.
74 ASTM C217 - Standard Test Method for Weather Resistance of Slate
75 ASTM C227 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-
Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method).
ar
76 ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Pressure Method
at
77 ASTM C232 - Standard Test Methods for Bleeding of Concrete
-Q
78 ASTM C233 - Test Method for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
LL
79 ASTM C241 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to
Foot Traffic
W
80 ASTM C265 - Standard Test Method for Calcium Sulfate in Hydrated Portland
Cement Mortar.
s
en
81 ASTM C266 - Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement Paste
by Gillmore Needles.
m
82 ASTM C270 - 10 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry

e
Si
83 ASTM C289 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of

Aggregates for Concrete.
84 ASTM C295 - Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for

Concrete.
85 ASTM C301 - Standard Test Methods for Vitrified Clay Pipe
86 ASTM C307 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant

Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings
87 ASTM C308 - Standard Test Methods for Working, Initial Setting, and Service
Strength Setting Times of Chemical-Resistant Resin Mortars
88 ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete.
89 ASTM C311 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural
Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete.
90 ASTM C330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural

Concrete.
91 ASTM C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement

Mortars
92 ASTM C349 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic-

Cement Mortars (Using Portions of Prisms Broken in Flexure)
93 ASTM C373 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent
Porosity, and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products
94 ASTM C403 - Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration
Resistance
95 ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout
ar
96 ASTM C413 - Standard Test Method for Absorption of Chemical-Resistant Mortars,
Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
at
97 ASTM C418 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete by Sandblasting
-Q
98 ASTM C430 - Standard Test Method for Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by the 45-
μm (No. 325) Sieve
LL
99 ASTM C451 - Standard Test Method for Early Stiffening of Hydraulic Cement
W
(paste Method).
100 ASTM C452 - Standard Test Method for Potential Expansion of Portland Cement
s
Mortars Exposed to Sulphate.

en
101 ASTM C469 - Standard Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson's
m
Ratio of Concrete in Compression

e
102 ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum
Si
Plasters and Gypsum Concrete
103 ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry
104 ASTM C479 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Liner Plates
105 ASTM C482 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland
Cement Paste
106 ASTM C485 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Warpage of Ceramic Tile
107 ASTM C494 -Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
108 ASTM C497 - Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile
109 ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of
Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings,
and Polymer Concretes
110 ASTM C535 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
111 ASTM C566 - Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of
Aggregate by Drying
112 ASTM C579 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-
Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
113 ASTM C580 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity
of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer
Concretes
114 ASTM C586 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Carbonate
Rocks as Concrete Aggregates (Rock-Cylinder Method)
115 ASTM C597 - Standard Test Method for Pulse Velocity Through Concrete
ar
116 ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
at
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
-Q
117 ASTM C641 - Standard Test Method for Iron Staining Materials in Lightweight
Concrete Aggregates
LL
118 ASTM C642 - Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity, Absorption, and Voids in
Hardened Concrete.
W
119 ASTM C702 - Standard Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
Size.
s
en
120 ASTM C779 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete
Surfaces
e m
121 ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction
Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry
Si
122 ASTM C793 - Standard Test Method for Effects of Laboratory Accelerated
Weathering on Elastomeric Joint Sealants
123 ASTM C803 - Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened
Concrete
124 ASTM C805 - Standard Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete
125 ASTM C823 - Standard Practice for Examination and Sampling of Hardened
Concrete in Constructions
126 ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of
Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures.
127 ASTM C828 - Standard Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay
Pipe Lines
128 ASTM C836 - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied
Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course
129 ASTM C856 - Standard Practice for Petrographic Examination of Hardened

Concrete
130 ASTM C876 - Standard Test Method for Half-Cell Potentials of Uncoated
Reinforcing Steel in Concrete
131 ASTM C880 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone
132 ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete
133 ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems
Used With Concrete By Slant Shear
ar
134 ASTM C900 - Standard Test Method for Pullout Strength of Hardened Concrete
at
135 ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
-Q
136 ASTM C924 - Standard Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-
Pressure Air Test Method
LL
137 ASTM C936 - Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units
W
138 ASTM C939 - Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate
Concrete (Flow Cone Method)
s
139 ASTM C940 - Standard Test Method for Expansion and Bleeding of Freshly Mixed
en
Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory

m
140 ASTM C942 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Grouts for
Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory
e
Si
141 ASTM C944 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete or Mortar Surfaces
by the Rotating-Cutter Method
142 ASTM C952 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Mortar to Masonry Units
143 ASTM C953 - Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Grouts for Preplaced-
Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory.
144 ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for
use in Concrete and Mortars.
145 ASTM C1012 - Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars
Exposed to a Sulfate Solution
146 ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in
Producing Flowing Concrete.
147 ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout
148 ASTM C1040 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density of Unhardened and
Hardened Concrete, Including Roller Compacted Concrete, By Nuclear Methods
149 ASTM C1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh To
Hardened Concrete
150 ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland-
Cement Concrete.
151 ASTM C1072 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond
Strength
152 ASTM C1084 - Standard Test Method for Portland-Cement Content of Hardened
Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
153 ASTM C1091 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Infiltration Testing of Vitrified
Clay Pipe Lines
ar
154 ASTM C1138 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete
at
(Underwater Method) -Q
155 ASTM C1152 - Standard Test Method for Acid-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and
Concrete
LL
156 ASTM C1201 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Dimension Stone Cladding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
W
157 ASTM C1202 - Standard Test Method for Electrical Indication of Concrete's Ability
to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration
s
en
158 ASTM C1214 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Pipe Sewerlines by Negative Air
Pressure (Vacuum) Test Method
e m
159 ASTM C1218 - Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and
Concrete.
Si
160 ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume for Use as a Mineral
Admixture in Hydraulic-Cement Concrete, Mortar, and Grout.
161 ASTM C1250 - 05 Standard Test Method for Nonvolatile Content of Cold Liquid-
Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membranes
162 ASTM C1252 - Standard Test Methods for Uncompacted Void Content of Fine
Aggregate (as Influenced by Particle Shape, Surface Texture, and Grading)
163 ASTM C1260 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates
(Mortar-Bar Method)
164 ASTM C1293 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change of
Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction
165 ASTM C1305 - Standard Test Method for Crack Bridging Ability of Liquid-Applied
Waterproofing Membrane
166 ASTM C1306 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of a
Liquid-Applied Waterproofing Membrane
167 ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds

Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete
168 ASTM C1324 - Standard Test Method for Examination and Analysis of Hardened
Masonry Mortar
169 ASTM C1352 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Modulus of Elasticity of
Dimension Stone
170 ASTM C1353 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Dimension Stone
Subjected to Foot Traffic Using a Rotary Platform, Double-Head Abraser
171 ASTM C1354 - Standard Test Method for Strength of Individual Stone Anchorages
in Dimension Stone
ar
172 ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength
at
173 ASTM C1437 Standard Test Method for Flow of Hydraulic Cement Mortar
-Q
174 ASTM C1506 - Standard Test Method for Water Retention of Hydraulic Cement-
Based Mortars and Plasters
LL
175 ASTM C1522 - Standard Test Method for Extensibility After Heat Aging of Cold
W
Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membranes
176 ASTM C1543 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Penetration of Chloride
s
Ion into Concrete by Ponding

en
177 ASTM C1567 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica
m
Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated

e
Mortar-Bar Method)
Si
178 ASTM C1580 - Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Sulfate in Soil.
179 ASTM C1583 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Concrete Surfaces
and the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of Concrete Repair and Overlay
Materials by Direct Tension (Pull-off Method)
180 ASTM C1611 - Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating
Concrete
181 ASTM C1618 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Sanitary Sewer Pipe by
Negative (Vacuum) or Positive Air Pressure
182 ASTM C1721 - Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Dimension Stone
183 ASTM D4 - Standard Test Method for Bitumen Content
184 ASTM D5 - Standard Test Method for Penetration of Bituminous Materials.

185 ASTM D6 - Standard Test Method for Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic
Compounds
186 ASTM D36 - Standard Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball
Apparatus)
187 ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,
Dampproofing, and Waterproofing
188 ASTM D70 - Standard Test Method for Density of Semi-Solid Bituminous Materials
(Pycnometer Method)
189 ASTM D75 - Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
190 ASTM D88 - Standard Test Method for Saybolt Viscosity
191 ASTM D92 - Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire points by Cleveland Open
ar
Cup.
at
192 ASTM D93 - Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester
-Q
193 ASTM D95 - Standard Test Method for Water in Petroleum Products and
Bituminous Materials by Distillation.
LL
194 ASTM D113 - Standard Test Method for Ductility of Bituminous Materials.
W
195 ASTM D140 - Standard Test Practice for Sampling Bituminous Materials.
196 ASTM D146 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Bitumen-Saturated
s
Felts and Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing

en
197 ASTM D228 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling, Testing, and Analysis of
m
Asphalt Roll Roofing, Cap Sheets, and Shingles Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing
e
Si
198 ASTM D242 - Standard Specification for Mineral Filler For Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
199 ASTM D243 - Standard Test Method for Residue of Specified Penetration.
200 ASTM D244 - Standard Test Methods and Practices for Emulsified Asphalts
201 ASTM D297 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Products-Chemical Analysis
202 ASTM D402 - Standard Test Method for Distillation of Cut-Back Asphaltic
(Bituminous) Products.
203 ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.
204 ASTM D413 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property—Adhesion to Flexible
Substrate
205 ASTM D420 - Standard Practice for Investigating and Sampling Soil and Rock for
Engineering Purposes.
206 ASTM D421 - Standard Practice for Dry Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle-
Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants.
207 ASTM D422 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.
208 ASTM D429 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property—Adhesion to Rigid
Substrates
209 ASTM D445 - Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque
Liquids (and Calculation of Dynamic Viscosity)
210 ASTM D471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Effect of Liquids
211 ASTM D543 - Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to
ar
Chemical Reagents
at
212 ASTM D546 - Standard Test method for Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler for Road
and Paving Materials.
-Q
213 ASTM D522 - Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic
Coatings
LL
214 ASTM D558 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-
W
Cement Mixtures.
215 ASTM D562 - Standard Test Method for Consistency of Paints Measuring Krebs
s
Unit (KU) Viscosity Using a Stormer-Type Viscometer

en
216 ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
m
217 ASTM D573 - Standard Test Method for Rubber—Deterioration in an Air Oven
e
Si
218 ASTM D618 - Standard Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
219 ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized
Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers
220 ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics (Metric).
221 ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics
222 ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Standard Effort (600 kN-m/m3)
223 ASTM D711 - Standard Test Method for No-Pick-Up Time of Traffic Paint
224 ASTM D714 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints
225 ASTM D727 - Standard Test Method for Kerosine Number of Roofing and Flooring
Felt by the Vacuum Method
226 ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact
227 ASTM D751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics
228 ASTM D785 - Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and
Electrical Insulating Materials
229 ASTM D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative
Density) of Plastics by Displacement
230 ASTM D814 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property- Vapor Transmission of
Volatile Liquids
231 ASTM D816 - 06 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Cements
232 ASTM D822 - Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of
ar
Paint and Related Coatings
at
233 ASTM D854 - Standard Test Methods for Specific Gravity of Soil Solids by Water
Pycnometer
-Q
234 ASTM D869 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Settling of Paint
LL
235 ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting
W
236 ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive
Bonds
s
237 ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for
en
use in Pavement Construction.

m
238 ASTM D968 - Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings
by Falling Abrasive
e
Si
239 ASTM D977 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt
240 ASTM D979 - Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
241 ASTM D1000 - Standard Test Methods for Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive-Coated

Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications
242 ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear) of Plastic
Film and Sheeting
243 ASTM D1005 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Dry-Film Thickness of
Organic Coatings Using Micrometers
244 ASTM D1075 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Water on Compressive Strength
of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
245 ASTM D1140 - Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than
No. 200 (75-μm) Sieve
246 ASTM D1143 - Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations Under Static Axial
Compressive Load
247 ASTM D1188 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of
Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Coated Samples
248 ASTM D1196 - Standard Test Method for Non-repetitive Static Plate Load Tests of
Soils and Flexible Pavement Components, for Use in Evaluation and Design of
Airport and Highway Pavements
249 ASTM D1199 - Standard Specification for Calcium Carbonate Pigments
250 ASTM D1204 - Standard Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of Nonrigid
Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated temperatures.
251 ASTM D1210 - Standard Test Method for Fineness of Dispersion of Pigment-
Vehicle Systems by Hegman-Type Gage
ar
252 ASTM D1212 - Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of
at
Organic Coatings -Q
253 ASTM D1214 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Glass Spheres
254 ASTM D1309 - Standard Test Method for Settling Properties of Traffic Paints
LL
During Accelerated Storage.

W
255 ASTM D1415 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-International Hardness
256 ASTM D1461 - Standard Test Method for Moisture or Volatile Distillates in
s
Bituminous Paving Mixtures

en
257 ASTM D1475 - Standard Test Method For Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and
m
Related Products
e
258 ASTM D1505 - Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-
Si
Gradient Technique
259 ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place
by the Sand-Cone Method.
260 ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Modified Effort.
261 ASTM D1586 - Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and
Split-Barrel
262 ASTM D1587 - Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils for
Geotechnical
263 ASTM D1599 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
264 ASTM D1632 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement Compression
and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
265 ASTM D1633 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Moulded Soil-
Cement Cylinders.
266 ASTM D1635 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Soil-Cement Using
Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading.
267 ASTM D1640 - Standard Test Methods for Drying, Curing, or Film Formation of
Organic Coatings at Room Temperature
268 ASTM D1644 - Standard Test Methods for Nonvolatile Content of Varnishes.
269 ASTM D1653 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic
Coating Films
270 ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types)
ar
271 ASTM D1754 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Heat and Air on Asphaltic
at
Materials (Thin-Film Oven Test). -Q
272 ASTM D1876 - Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel
Test)
LL
273 ASTM D1883 - Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of
Laboratory-Compacted Soils
W
274 ASTM D1922 - Test Method for Propagation Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and
Thin Sheeting by Pendulum Method
s
en
275 ASTM D2026 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Slow-Curing Type).
m
276 ASTM D2027 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type).
e
277 ASTM D2028 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type)
Si
278 ASTM D2041 - Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity
and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
279 ASTM D2042 - Standard Test Method for Solubility of Asphalt Materials on
Trichloroethylene.
280 ASTM D2047 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-
Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine
281 ASTM D2122 - Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of

Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
282 ASTM D2136 - Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics-Low-Temperature Bend
Test
283 ASTM D2166 - Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive Strength of
Cohesive Soil
284 ASTM D2170 - Standard Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts
(Bitumins).
285 ASTM D2171 - Standard Test Method for Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum
Capillary Viscometer
286 ASTM D2172 - Standard Test Methods for Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from
Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
287 ASTM D2196 - Standard Test Methods for Rheological Properties of Non-
Newtonian Materials by Rotational (Brookfield type) Viscometer
288 ASTM D2216 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water
(Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock.
289 ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
ar
290 ASTM D2290 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of
Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe by Split Disk Method
at
291 ASTM D2369 - Standard Test Method for Volatile Content of Coatings
-Q
292 ASTM D2370 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings
LL
293 ASTM D2394 - Standard Test Methods for Simulated Service Testing of Wood and
Wood-Base Finish Flooring
W
294 ASTM D2397 - Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt

s
295 ASTM D2412 - Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading
en
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate L

m
296 ASTM D2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate.
e
Si
297 ASTM D2435 - Standard Test Methods for One-Dimensional Consolidation

Properties of Soils Using Incremental Loading.
298 ASTM D2486 - Standard Test Methods for Scrub Resistance of Wall Paints
299 ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System).
300 ASTM D2489 - Standard Practice for Estimating Degree of Particle Coating of
Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures
301 ASTM D2523 - Standard Practice for Testing Load-Strain Properties of Roofing
Membranes
302 ASTM D2563 - Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-
Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts
303 ASTM D2582 - Standard Test Method for Puncture-Propagation Tear Resistance of
Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting
304 ASTM D2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by
Means of a Barcol Impressor
305 ASTM D2584 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins
306 ASTM D2726 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non-
Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
307 ASTM D2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the
Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)
308 ASTM D2829 - Standard Practice for Sampling and Analysis of Existing Built-Up
Roof Systems
309 ASTM D2872 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Heat and Air on a Moving Film
of Asphalt (Rolling Thin-Film Oven Test)
ar
310 ASTM D2939 - Standard Test Methods for Emulsified Bitumens Used as Protective
Coatings
at
311 ASTM D2940 - Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material For Bases or
-Q
Subbases for Highways or Airports
312 ASTM D2950 - Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete In Place
LL
by Nuclear Methods.
W
313 ASTM D2974 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic Matter of
Peat and Other Organic Soils.
s
314 ASTM D2995 - Standard Practice for Estimating Application Rate of Bituminous
en
Distributors
m
315 ASTM D3045 - Standard Practice for Heat Aging of Plastics Without Load
e
316 ASTM D3080 - Standard Test Method for Direct Shear Test of Soils Under
Si
Consolidated Drained Conditions
317 ASTM D3203 -Standard Test Method for Per Cent Air Voids in Compacted Dense
and Open Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
318 ASTM D3205 - Test Method for Viscosity of Asphalt with Cone and Plate
Viscometer
319 ASTM D3143 - Standard Test Method for Flash Point of Cutback Asphalt with Tag
Open-Cup Apparatus.
320 ASTM D3183 - Standard Practice for Rubber—Preparation of Pieces for Test
Purposes from Products
321 ASTM D3359 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
322 ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for
Use in Pavement Construction
323 ASTM D3282 - Standard Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for
Highway Construction Purposes.
324 ASTM D3387 - Standard Test Method for Compaction and Shear Properties of
Bituminous Mixtures by Means of the U.S. Corps of Engineers Gyratory Testing
Machine (GTM)
325 ASTM D3398 - Standard Test Method for Index of Aggregate Particle Shape and
Texture.
326 ASTM D3441 - Standard Test Method for Mechanical Cone Penetration Tests of
Soil.
327 ASTM D3549 - Standard Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted
Bituminous Paving Mixture Specimens
328 ASTM D3567 - Standard Practice for Determining Dimensions of "Fiberglass"
ar
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and Fittings
at
329 ASTM D3617 - Standard Practice for Sampling and Analysis of Built-Up Roof
Systems During Application
-Q
330 ASTM D3665 - Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Materials
LL
331 ASTM D3666 - Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies
Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials
W
332 ASTM D3689 - Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations Under Static Axial
Tensile Load
s
en
333 ASTM D3723 - Standard Test Method for Pigment Content of Water-Emulsion
Paints by Low-Temperature Ashing
e m
334 ASTM D3746 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Bituminous Roofing
Systems
Si
335 ASTM D3767 - Standard Practice for Rubber—Measurement of Dimensions
336 ASTM D3787 - Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textiles-Constant-
Rate-of-Traverse (CRT) Ball Burst Test
337 ASTM D3966 - Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations Under Lateral Load
338 ASTM D4060 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings
by the Taber Abraser
339 ASTM D4073 - Standard Test Method for Tensile-Tear Strength of Bituminous
Roofing Membranes
340 ASTM D4125 - Standard Test Methods for Asphalt Content of Bituminous Mixtures
by the Nuclear Method
341 ASTM D4138 - Standard Practices for Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of
Protective Coating Systems by Destructive, Cross-Sectioning Means
342 ASTM D4218 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Carbon Black Content in
Polyethylene Compounds By the Muffle-Furnace Technique
343 ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
344 ASTM D4354 - Standard Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing
345 ASTM D4373 - Standard Test Method for Rapid Determination of Carbonate
Content of Soils
346 ASTM D4380 - Standard Test Method for Density of Bentonitic Slurries
347 ASTM D4381 - Standard Test Method for Sand Content by Volume of Bentonitic
Slurries
348 ASTM D4400 - Standard Test Method for Sag Resistance of Paints Using a
ar
Multinotch Applicator
at
349 ASTM D4402 - Standard Test Method for Viscosity Determination of Asphalt at
Elevated Temperatures Using a Rotational Viscometer
-Q
350 ASTM D4428 - Standard Test Methods for Crosshole Seismic Testing
LL
351 ASTM D4429 - Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Soils in
Place
W
352 ASTM D4437 - Standard Practice for Non-destructive Testing (NDT) for
Determining the Integrity of Seams Used in Joining Flexible Polymeric Sheet
s
Geomembranes
en
353 ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by
m
Permittivity.
e
354 ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of
Si
Geotextiles
355 ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers
356 ASTM D4543 - Standard Practices for Preparing Rock Core as Cylindrical Test
Specimens and Verifying Conformance to Dimensional and Shape Tolerances
357 ASTM D4561 - Standard Practice for Quality Control Systems for Organizations
Producing and Applying Bituminous Paving Materials
358 ASTM D4587 - Standard Practice for Fluorescent UV-Condensation Exposures of

Paint and Related Coatings
359 ASTM D4595 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the
Wide-Width Strip Method
360 ASTM D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of
Geotextiles
361 ASTM D4643 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Water (Moisture)
Content of Soil by Microwave Oven Heating
362 ASTM D4694 - Standard Test Method for Deflections with a Falling-Weight-Type
Impulse Load Device
363 ASTM D4695 - Standard Guide for General Pavement Deflection Measurements
364 ASTM D4718 - Standard Practice for Correction of Unit Weight and Water Content
for Soils Containing Oversize Particles
365 ASTM D4787 - Standard Practice for Continuity Verification of Liquid or Sheet
Linings Applied to Concrete Substrates
366 ASTM D4791 - Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat
and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
ar
367 ASTM D4792 - Standard Test Method for Potential Expansion of Aggregates from
Hydration Reactions
at
368 ASTM D4796 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Thermoplastic Traffic
-Q
Marking Materials
369 ASTM D4798 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Weathering Test Conditions and
LL
Procedures for Bituminous Materials (Xenon-Arc Method)

W
370 ASTM D4799 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Weathering Test Conditions and
Procedures for Bituminous Materials (Fluorescent UV, Water Spray, and
Condensation Method)
s
en
371 ASTM D4832 - Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled
Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders
e m
372 ASTM D4867 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Moisture on Asphalt Concrete
Paving Mixtures.
Si
373 ASTM D4830 - Standard Test Methods for Characterizing Thermoplastic Fabrics
Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
374 ASTM D4833 - Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of
Geomembranes and Related Products
375 ASTM D4885 - Standard Test Method for Determining Performance Strength of
Geomembranes by the Wide Strip Tensile Method
376 ASTM D4932 - Standard Test Method for Fastener Rupture and Tear Resistance of
Roofing and Waterproofing Sheets, Roll Roofing, and Shingles
377 ASTM D4945 - Standard Test Method for High-Strain Dynamic Testing of Piles
378 ASTM D4959 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Water (Moisture)
Content of Soil By Direct Heating
379 ASTM D4989 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Viscosity (Flow) of Roofing
Bitumens Using the Parallel Plate Plastometer
380 ASTM D5034 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of
Textile Fabrics (Grab Strength).
381 ASTM D5035 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Force and Elongation of Textile
Fabrics (Strip Method)
382 ASTM D5076 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Voids in Roofing and
Waterproofing Membranes
383 ASTM D5084 - Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity
of Saturated Porous Materials Using a Flexible Wall Permeameter
384 ASTM D5095 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Nonvolatile Content
in Silanes, Siloxanes and Silane-Siloxane Blends Used in Masonry Water
ar
Repellent Treatments
at
385 ASTM D5147 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Modified
Bituminous Sheet Material
-Q
386 ASTM D5162 - Standard Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of
Nonconductive Protective Coating on Metallic Substrates
LL
387 ASTM D5199 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Nominal Thickness of
W
Geotextiles and Geomembranes.
388 ASTM D5215 - Standard Test Method for Instrumental Evaluation of Staining of
s
Vinyl Flooring by Adhesives

en
389 ASTM D5261 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of
m
Geotextiles.
e
390 ASTM D5329 - Standard Test Methods for Sealants and Fillers, Hot-Applied, for
Si
Joints and Cracks in Asphaltic and Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
391 ASTM D5385 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of
Waterproofing Membranes
392 ASTM D5401 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Clear Water Repellent
Coatings on Wood
393 ASTM D5444 - Standard Test Method for Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted
Aggregate
394 ASTM D5581 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous
Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus (6 inch-Diameter Specimen)
395 ASTM D5596 - Standard Test Method for Microscopic Evaluation of the Dispersion
of Carbon Black in Polyolefin Geosynthetics
396 ASTM D5602 - Standard Test Method for Static Puncture Resistance of Roofing
Membrane Specimens
397 ASTM D5635 - Standard Test Method for Dynamic Puncture Resistance of
Roofing Membrane Specimens
398 ASTM D5636 - Standard Test Method for Low Temperature Unrolling of Felt or
Sheet Roofing and Waterproofing Materials
399 ASTM D5641 - Standard Practice for Geomembrane Seam Evaluation by Vacuum
Chamber
400 ASTM D5683 - Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Roofing and Waterproofing
Materials and Membranes
401 ASTM D5731 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Point Load Strength
Index of Rock and Application to Rock Strength Classifications
ar
402 ASTM D5778 - Standard Test Method for Electronic Friction Cone and Piezocone
at
Penetration Testing of Soils -Q
403 ASTM D5820 - Standard Practice for Pressurized Air Channel Evaluation of Dual
Seamed Geomembranes
LL
404 ASTM D5821 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured
Particles in Coarse Aggregate.
W
405 ASTM D5849 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Resistance of Modified
Bituminous Roofing Membrane to Cyclic Fatigue (Joint Displacement)
s
en
406 ASTM D5858 - Standard Guide for Calculating In Situ Equivalent Elastic Moduli of
Pavement Materials Using Layered Elastic Theory
e m
407 ASTM D5882 - Standard Test Method for Low Strain Impact Integrity Testing of
Deep Foundations.
Si
408 ASTM D5890 - Standard Test Method for Swell Index of Clay Mineral Component
of Geosynthetic Clay Liners
409 ASTM D5957 - Standard Guide for Flood Testing Horizontal Waterproofing
Installations
410 ASTM D5993 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass Per Unit of Geosynthetic
Clay Liners
411 ASTM D5994 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Core Thickness of Textured
Geomembrane
412 ASTM D6084 - Standard Test Method for Elastic Recovery of Bituminous Materials
by Ductilometer
413 ASTM D6087 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Asphalt-Covered Concrete
Bridge Decks Using Ground Penetrating Radar
414 ASTM D6132 - Standard Test Method for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film
Thickness of Applied Organic Coatings Using an Ultrasonic Gage
415 ASTM D6167 - Standard Guide for Conducting Borehole Geophysical Logging:
Mechanical Caliper
416 ASTM D6241 - Test Method for the Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles and
Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50-mm Probe
417 ASTM D6294 - Standard Test Method for Corrosion Resistance of Ferrous Metal
Fastener Assemblies Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
418 ASTM D6307 - Standard Test Method for Asphalt Content of Hot-Mix Asphalt by
Ignition Method.
419 ASTM D6365 - Standard Practice for the Nondestructive Testing of Geomembrane
Seams using the Spark Test
ar
420 ASTM D6392 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Integrity of
at
Nonreinforced Geomembrane Seams Produced Using Thermo-Fusion Methods
-Q
421 ASTM D6432 - Standard Guide for Using the Surface Ground Penetrating Radar
Method for Subsurface Investigation
LL
422 ASTM D6496 - Standard Test Method for Determining Average Bonding Peel
Strength Between the Top and Bottom Layers of Needle-Punched Geosynthetic
W
Clay Liners
423 ASTM D6521 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Aging of Asphalt Binder Using a
s

en
424 ASTM D6627 - Standard Test Method for Determination of a Volatile Distillate
m
Fraction of Cold Asphalt Mixtures

e
425 ASTM D6693 - Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Properties of
Si
Nonreinforced Polyethylene and Nonreinforced Flexible Polypropylene

Geomembranes
426 ASTM D6760 - Standard Test Method for Integrity Testing of Concrete Deep
Foundations by Ultrasonic Crosshole Testing
427 ASTM D6925 - Standard Test Method for Preparation and Determination of the
Relative Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Specimens by Means of the Superpave
Gyratory Compactor
428 ASTM D6926 - Standard Practice for Preparation of Bituminous Specimens Using
Marshall Apparatus
429 ASTM D6927 - Standard Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow of Bituminous
Mixtures
430 ASTM D6928 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to
Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
431 ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of
Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
432 ASTM D7006 - Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of Geomembranes
433 ASTM D7012 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength and Elastic Moduli
of Intact Rock Core Specimens under Varying States of Stress and Temperatures
434 ASTM D7091 - Standard Practice for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film
Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and Nonmagnetic,
Nonconductive Coatings Applied to Non-Ferrous Metals
435 ASTM D7105 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Adhesive and Cohesive
Strength Between Materials in Roofing or Waterproofing Membranes and Systems
436 ASTM D7175 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rheological Properties of
Asphalt Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer
ar
437 ASTM D7234 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings
at
on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers
-Q
438 ASTM D7281 - Standard Test Method for Determining Water Migration Resistance
Through Roof Membranes
LL
439 ASTM D7307 - Standard Practice for Sampling of Thermoplastic Traffic Marking
Materials
W
440 ASTM D7308 - Standard Practice for Sample Preparation of Thermoplastic Traffic
Marking Materials
s
en
441 ASTM D7349 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Capability of Roofing and
Waterproofing Materials to Seal around Fasteners
e m
442 ASTM D7383 - Standard Test Methods for Axial Compressive Force Pulse (Rapid)
Testing of Deep Foundations
Si
443 ASTM D7379 - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Modified Bitumen Sheet
Material Laps Using Cold Process Adhesive
444 ASTM D7428 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Fine Aggregate to
Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
445 ASTM D7635 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Coatings
Over Fabric Reinforcement
446 ASTM D7636 - Standard Practice for Sampling and Analysis of Modified Bitumen
Roof Systems
447 ASTM D7681 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Gradation of Glass Spheres
Using a Flowing Stream Digital Image Analyzer
448 ASTM E8 - Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials

449 ASTM E9 - Standard Test Methods of Compression Testing of Metallic Materials at

Room Temperature
450 ASTM E10 - Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials
451 ASTM E18 - Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness of Metallic Materials
452 ASTM E23 - Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic
Materials
453 ASTM E30 - Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Steel, Cast Iron, Open-Hearth
Iron, and Wrought Iron
454 ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
455 ASTM E102 - Test Method for Saybolt Furol Viscosity of Bituminous Materials at
High Temperatures
ar
456 ASTM E110 - Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Metallic Materials by
at
Portable Hardness Testers
-Q
457 ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact
with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover
LL
458 ASTM E165 - Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General
Industry
W
459 ASTM E190 - Test Method for Guided Bend Test for Ductility of Welds
s
460 ASTM E213 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of Metal Pipe and Tubing
en
461 ASTM E290 - Test Methods for Bend Testing of Material for Ductility
m
462 ASTM E303 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties
e
Using the British Pendulum Tester.

Si
463 ASTM E328 - Standard Test Method for Relaxation Tests for Materials and
Structures.
464 ASTM E350 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Carbon Steel, Low-
Alloy Steel, Silicon Electrical Steel, Ingot Iron, and Wrought Iron
465 ASTM E351 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Cast Iron-All Types
466 ASTM E376 - Standard Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-
Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Examination Methods
467 ASTM E514 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through
Masonry
468 ASTM E518 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry
469 ASTM E810 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Retroreflection of

Retroreflective Sheeting Utilizing the Coplanar Geometry
470 ASTM E812 - Test Method for Crack Strength of Slow-Bend Precracked Charpy
Specimens of High-Strength Metallic Materials
471 ASTM E907 - Standard Test Method for Field Testing Uplift Resistance of Adhered
Membrane Roofing Systems
472 ASTM E950 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Longitudinal Profile of
Travelled Surfaces with an Accelerometer Established Inertial Profiling Reference
473 ASTM E1002 - Standard Practice for Leaks Using Ultrasonics
474 ASTM E1003 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Leak Testing
475 ASTM E1170 - Standard Practices for Simulating Vehicular Response to

Longitudinal Profiles of Traveled Surfaces
476 ASTM E1347 - Standard Test Method for Color and Color-Difference Measurement
ar
by Tristimulus (Filter) Colorimetry.
at
477 ASTM E1444 - Standard Practice for Magnetic Particle Testing
-Q
478 ASTM E1709 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Retroreflective Signs
Using a Portable Retroreflectometer at a 0.2 Degree Observation Angle
LL
479 ASTM E1926 - Standard Practice for Computing International Roughness Index of
Roads from Longitudinal Profile Measurements
W
480 ASTM E2340 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Skid Resistance of
Pavements and Other Trafficked Surfaces Using a Continuous Reading, Fixed-
s
Slip Technique
en
481 ASTM E2540 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Retroreflective Signs
m
Using a Portable Retroreflectometer at a 0.5 Degree Observation Angle

e
482 ASTM E2583 - 07 Standard Test Method for Measuring Deflections with a Light
Si
Weight Deflectometer (LWD)
483 ASTM F137 - Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials
with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus
484 ASTM F150 - Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of Conductive and
Static Dissipative Resilient Flooring
485 ASTM F386 - Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials
Having Flat Surfaces
486 ASTM F925 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient
Flooring
487 ASTM F1514 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Heat Stability of Resilient
Flooring by Color Change
488 ASTM F1515 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient
Flooring by Color Change
489 ASTM F2048 - Standard Practice for Reporting Slip Resistance Test Results
490 ASTM G6 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Pipeline Coatings
491 ASTM G12 - Standard Test Method for Nondestructive Measurement of Film
Thickness of Pipeline Coatings on Steel
492 ASTM G57 - Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Soil Resistivity Using
the Wenner Four-Electrode Method
493 ASTM G62 - Test Methods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings
494 ASTM G90 - Standard Practice for Performing Accelerated Outdoor Weathering of
Nonmetallic Materials Using Concentrated Natural Sunlight
495 ASTM G109 - Standard Test Method for Determining Effects of Chemical
Admixtures on Corrosion of Embedded Steel Reinforcement in Concrete Exposed
ar
to Chloride Environments
at
496 ASTM G154 - Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
-Q
14.46.7 American Welding Society (AWS):
LL
1 AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel

W
2 AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel (Where to use this code, especially
s
in precast?)
en
14.46.8 British Standards Institute (BSI):

m
1 BS 65 - Specification for vitrified clay pipes, fittings and ducts, also flexible mechanical joints
e
for use solely with surface water pipes and fittings

Si
2 BS 434-1 - Bitumen road emulsions. Specification for anionic bitumen road emulsions
3 BS 476 - Fire tests on building materials and structures
4 BS 598-1 - Sampling and examination of bituminous mixtures for roads and other paved
areas. Methods for the measurement of the rate of spread of coated chippings and the
temperature of bituminous mixtures using non-contact temperature-measuring devices and
for the assessment of the compaction performance of a roller
5 BS 598-110 - Sampling and examination of bituminous mixtures for roads and other paved
areas. Methods of test for the determination of wheel-tracking rate and depth
6 BS 812-105.1 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of particle shape. Flakiness

index
7 BS 812-105.2 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of particle shape. Elongation

index of coarse aggregate
8 BS 812-109 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of moisture content
9 BS 812-110 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of aggregate crushing value

(ACV)
10 BS 812-111 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of ten per cent fines value
(TFV)
11 BS 812-112 - Testing aggregates. Method for determination of aggregate impact value (AIV)
12 BS 812-117 - Testing aggregates. Method for determination of water-soluble chloride salts
13 BS 812-118 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of sulphate content
14 BS 812-121 - Testing aggregates. Method for determination of soundness
15 BS 812-124 - Testing aggregates. Method for determination of frost heave
ar
16 BS 1344-11, ISO 2746 - Methods of testing vitreous enamel finishes. High voltage test for
at
enamelled articles for service under highly corrosive conditions
-Q
17 BS 1377-1 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. General requirements
and sample preparation
LL
18 BS 1377-2 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. Classification tests
W
19 BS 1377-3 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. Chemical and electro-
chemical tests
s
20 BS 1377-4 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. Compaction-related tests
en
21 BS 1377-5 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. Compressibility,
m
permeability and durability tests

e
22 BS 1377-7 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. Shear strength tests
Si
(total stress)
23 BS 1377-9 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. In-situ tests
24 BS 1881-121 - Testing concrete. Method for determination of static modulus of elasticity in

compression
25 BS 1881-122 - Testing concrete. Method for determination of water absorption
26 BS 1881-124 - Testing concrete. Methods for analysis of hardened concrete
27 BS 1881-125 - Testing concrete. Methods for mixing and sampling fresh concrete in the
laboratory
28 BS 1881-201 - Testing concrete. Guide to the use of non-destructive methods of test for
hardened concrete
29 BS 1881-204 - Testing concrete. Recommendations on the use of electromagnetic

covermeters
30 BS 1881-206 - Testing concrete. Recommendations for determination of strain in concrete
31 BS 1881-208 - Testing concrete. Recommendations for the determination of the initial

surface absorption of concrete
32 BS 2499-3 - Hot-applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavements. Methods of test
33 BS 2782-0 - Methods of testing plastic. Introduction
34 BS 3262-3 - Hot-applied thermoplastic road marking materials. Specification for application of

material to road surfaces
35 BS 3505 - Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pressure pipes for cold
potable water
36 BS 3900-D9, ISO 7724-2 - Methods of test for paints. Optical tests on paint films.
Determination of colour and colour difference: measurement
ar
37 BS 3987 - Specification for anodic oxidation coatings on wrought aluminium for external
at
architectural applications
-Q
38 BS 4027 - Specification for sulfate-resisting Portland cement
39 BS 4050-2 - Specification for mosaic parquet panels. Classification and quality requirements
LL
40 BS 4051, ISO 1765 - Method for determination of thickness of textile floor coverings
W
41 BS 4098 - Method for the determination of thickness, compression and recovery

characteristics of textile floor coverings
s
en
42 BS 4449 - Steel for the reinforcement of concrete. Weldable reinforcing steel. Bar, coil and
decoiled product. Specification
m
43 BS 4482 - Steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete products. Specification

e
Si
44 BS 4483 - Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete. Specification
45 BS 4550-3.8 - Methods of testing cement. Physical tests. Test for heat of hydration
46 BS 4551 - Mortar. Methods of test for mortar. Chemical analysis and physical testing
47 BS 4592-0 - Industrial type flooring and stair treads. Common design requirements and
recommendations for installation
48 BS 4660 - Thermoplastics ancillary fittings of nominal sizes 110 and 160 for below ground
gravity drainage and sewerage
49 BS 4682-2 - Methods of test for dimensional stability of textile floor coverings. Determination
of dimensional changes due to changes in ambient humidity
of dimensional changes after exposure to heat
of dimensional changes after immersion in water
52 BS 4790 - Method for determination of the effects of a small source of ignition on textile floor
coverings (hot metal nut method)
53 BS 4805 - Method for determination of the dimensions of rectangular textile floor coverings
54 BS 4873 - Aluminium alloy windows and doorsets. Specification
55 BS 4939, ISO 3416 - Method for determination of thickness loss of textile floor coverings
after prolonged heavy static loading
56 BS 4965 - Decorative laminated plastics sheet veneered boards and panels
57 BS 5212-3 - Cold applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavements. Methods of test
ar
58 BS 5385-1 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of ceramic, natural stone and
mosaic wall tiling in normal internal conditions. Code of practice
at
59 BS 5385-2 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of external ceramic and mosaic wall
-Q
tiling in normal conditions. Code of practice
60 BS 5385-3 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of internal and external ceramic floor
LL
tiles and mosaics in normal conditions. Code of practice

W
61 BS 5385-4 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of ceramic and mosaic tiling in
special conditions. Code of practice
s
62 BS 5385-5 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of terazzo, natural stone and
en
agglomerated stone tile and slab flooring. Code of practice

m
63 BS 5896 - Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for the prestressing of concrete
e
64 BS 5911-1 - Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products. Specification for unreinforced
Si
and reinforced concrete pipes (including jacking pipes) and fittings with flexible joints
(complementary to BS EN 1916)
and reinforced concrete manholes and soakaways (complementary to BS EN 1917)
and reinforced concrete inspection chambers (complementary to BS EN 1917)
67 BS 5911-6 - Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products. Specification for road gullies
and gully cover slabs
68 BS 5921 - Methods for determination of size, squareness and straightness of edge of textile
floor covering tiles
69 BS 5930 - Code of practice for site investigations
70 BS 6001-1, ISO 2859-1 - Sampling procedures for inspection by attributes. Sampling

schemes indexed by acceptance quality limit (AQL) for lot-by-lot inspection
71 BS 6073-2 - Precast concrete masonry units. Guide for specifying precast concrete masonry
units
72 BS 6076 - Specification for polymeric film for use as a protective sleeving for buried iron
pipes and fittings (for site and factory application)
73 BS 6319-1 - Testing of resin and polymer/cement compositions for use in construction.

Method for preparation of test specimens

Method for measurement of compressive strength

Methods for measurement of modulus of elasticity in flexure and flexural strength

Methods for determination of density of hardened resin compositions
ar
at
Method for determination of modulus of elasticity in compression
-Q
Method for measurement of tensile strength
LL

Method for the assessment of resistance to liquids
W

Method for measurement and classification of peak exotherm temperature
s
en

Method for measurement of temperature of deflection under a bending stress
e m

Methods for determination of creep in compression and in tension
Si
83 BS 6496 - Specification for powder organic coatings for application and stoving to aluminium
alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections for external architectural purposes, and for
the finish on aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections coated with powder
organic coatings
84 BS 6744 - Stainless steel bars for the reinforcement of and use in concrete. Requirements
and test methods
85 BS 7044-1 - Artificial sports surfaces. Classification and general introduction
86 BS 7078 - Method for determination of the electrical resistance to earth of an installed textile
floor covering
87 BS 7188 - Impact absorbing playground surfacing. Performance requirements and test

methods
88 BS 7542 - Method of test for curing compounds for concrete

89 BS 7941-1 - Methods for measuring the skid resistance of pavement surfaces. Sideway-force
coefficient routine investigation machine
90 BS 7941-2 - Methods for measuring the skid resistance of pavement surfaces. Test method
for measurement of surface skid resistance using the GripTester braked wheel fixed slip
device
91 BS 8102 - Code of practice for protection of below ground structures against water from the
ground
92 BS 8420 - Methods of measuring irregularities on surfaces of roads, footways and other

paved areas using straightedges and wedges
93 BS 8442 - Miscellaneous road traffic signs and devices. Requirements and test methods
94 BS 8443 - Specification for establishing the suitability of special purpose concrete admixtures
ar
95 BS 8500-1 - Concrete. Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1. Method of
specifying and guidance for the specifier
at
96 BS 8500-2 - Concrete. Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1. Specification for
-Q
constituent materials and concrete
97 BS EN 58, BS 2000-474 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Sampling bituminous binders

LL
98 BS EN 124 - Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas. Design
W
requirements, type testing, marking, quality control
99 BS EN 196-1 - Methods of testing cement. Determination of strength

s
en
100 BS EN 196-2 - Methods of testing cement. Chemical analysis of cement

m
101 BS EN 196-3 - Methods of testing cement. Determination of setting time and soundness
e
102 BS EN 196-5 - Methods of testing cement. Pozzolanicity test for pozzolanic cement
Si
103 BS EN 196-6 - Methods of testing cement. Determination of fineness
104 BS EN 196-7 - Methods of testing cement. Methods of taking and preparing samples of
cement
105 BS EN 197-1 - Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for low heat
common cements
106 BS EN 206-1 - Concrete. Specification, performance, production and conformity
107 BS EN 295-1 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and sewers.
Requirements
108 BS EN 295-2 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and sewers. Quality
control and sampling
109 BS EN 295-3 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and sewers. Test
methods
Requirements for special fittings, adaptors and compatible accessories
Requirements for perforated vitrified clay pipes and fittings
Requirements for vitrified clay manholes
Requirements for vitrified clay pipes and joints for pipe jacking
Performance requirements
115 BS EN 413-1 - Masonry cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria
ar
116 BS EN 413-2 - Masonry cement. Test methods
at
117 BS EN 426 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of width, length, straightness and
flatness of sheet material
-Q
118 BS EN 427 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of the side length, squareness and
straightness of tiles
LL
119 BS EN 428 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of overall thickness

W
120 BS EN 445 - Grout for prestressing tendons. Test methods

s
121 BS EN 447 - Grout for prestressing tendons. Basic requirements

en
122 BS EN 450-1 - Fly ash for concrete. Definition, specifications and conformity criteria
m
123 BS EN 450-2 - Fly ash for concrete. Conformity evaluation

e
Si
124 BS EN 451-1 - Method of testing fly ash. Determination of free calcium oxide content
125 BS EN 451-2 - Method of testing fly ash. Determination of fineness by wet sieving
126 BS EN 480-1 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test methods. Reference concrete
and reference mortar for testing
127 BS EN 480-2 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test methods. Determination of
setting time
bleeding of concrete
capillary absorption
130 BS EN 480-6 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test methods. Infrared analysis
the conventional dry material content
water soluble chloride content
air void characteristics in hardened concrete
the alkali content of admixtures
135 BS EN 480-13 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test methods. Reference
masonry mortar for testing mortar admixtures
the effect on corrosion susceptibility of reinforcing steel by potentiostatic electro-chemical test
ar
137 BS EN 485-1 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate. Technical conditions
at
for inspection and delivery -Q
138 BS EN 485-2 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate. Mechanical
properties
LL
139 BS EN 524-1 - Steel strip sheaths for prestressing tendons. Test methods. Determination of
shape and dimensions
W
flexural behaviour
s
en
141 BS EN 524-3 - Steel strip sheaths for prestressing tendons. Test methods. To-and-fro
bending test
e m
lateral load resistance
Si
tensile load resistance
leaktightness (determination of water loss)
145 BS EN 545 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water pipelines.
Requirements and test methods
146 BS EN 571-1 - Non-destructive testing. Penetrant testing. General principles
147 BS EN 573-3 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical composition and form of wrought
products. Chemical composition and form of products
148 BS EN 598 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for sewerage
applications. Requirements and test methods
149 BS EN 639 - Common requirements for concrete pressure pipes including joints and fittings
150 BS EN 640 - Reinforced concrete pressure pipes and distributed reinforcement concrete
pressure pipes (non-cylinder type), including joints and fittings
151 BS EN 641 - Reinforced concrete pressure pipes, cylinder type, including joints and fittings
152 BS EN 642 - Prestressed concrete pressure pipes, cylinder and non-cylinder, including joints,
fittings and specific requirement for prestressing steel for pipes
153 BS EN 661 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of the spreading of water
154 BS EN 662 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of curling on exposure to moisture
155 BS EN 663 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of conventional pattern depths
156 BS EN 664 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of volatile loss
157 BS EN 665 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of exudation of plasticizers
ar
158 BS EN 666 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of gelling
at
159 BS EN 669 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of dimensional stability of linoleum tiles
-Q
caused by changes in atmospheric humidity
160 BS EN 670 - Resilient floor coverings. Identification of linoleum and determination of cement
LL
content and ash residue

W
161 BS EN 672 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of apparent density of agglomerated

cork
s
162 BS EN 684 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of seam strength

en
163 BS EN 685 - Resilient, textile and laminate floor coverings. Classification

m
164 BS EN 718 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of mass per unit area of a
e
reinforcement or a backing of polyvinyl chloride floor coverings

Si
165 BS EN 755-2 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles.
Mechanical properties
166 BS EN 755-3 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Round
bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
167 BS EN 755-4 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Square
bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
Hexagonal bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
170 BS EN 755-8 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Porthole
tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
171 BS EN 755-9 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Profiles,
tolerances on dimensions and form
172 BS EN 771-1 - Specification for masonry units. Clay masonry units
173 BS EN 771-2 - Specification for masonry units. Calcium silicate masonry units
174 BS EN 771-3 - Specification for masonry units. Aggregate concrete masonry units (dense
and light-weight aggregates)
175 BS EN 771-4 - Specification for masonry units. Autoclaved aerated concrete masonry units
176 BS EN 771-5 - Specification for masonry units. Manufactured stone masonry units
177 BS EN 771-6 - Specification for masonry units. Natural stone masonry units
178 BS EN 772-1 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of compressive strength
ar
179 BS EN 772-4 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of real and bulk density and
at
of total and open porosity for natural stone masonry units
-Q
180 BS EN 772-6 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of bending tensile strength
of aggregate concrete masonry units
LL
181 BS EN 772-11 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of water absorption of
aggregate concrete, autoclaved aerated concrete, manufactured stone and natural stone
W
masonry units due to capillary action and the initial rate of water absorption of clay masonry
units
s
182 BS EN 772-13 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of net and gross dry
en
density of masonry units (except for natural stone)

m
183 BS EN 772-16 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of dimensions

e
184 BS EN 772-20 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of flatness of faces of
Si
masonry units
185 BS EN 772-21 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of water absorption of clay
and calcium silicate masonry units by cold water absorption
186 BS EN 932-1 - Tests for general properties of aggregates. Methods for sampling
187 BS EN 932-3 - Tests for general properties of aggregates. Procedure and terminology for
simplified petrographic description
188 BS EN 933-1 - Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates. Determination of particle size
distribution. Sieving method
189 BS EN 933-3 - Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates. Determination of particle

shape. Flakiness index
190 BS EN 933-4 - Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates. Determination of particle

shape. Shape index
191 BS EN 933-7 - Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates. Determination of shell

content. Percentage of shells in coarse aggregates
192 BS EN 933-8 - Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates. Assessment of fines. Sand
equivalent test
193 BS EN 933-9 - Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates. Assessment of fines.

Methylene blue test
194 BS EN 933-11 - Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates. Classification test for the
constituents of coarse recycled aggregate
195 BS EN 934-1 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Common requirements
196 BS EN 934-2 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Concrete admixtures. Definitions,
requirements, conformity, marking and labelling
ar
197 BS EN 934-3 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Admixtures for masonry mortar.
Definitions, requirements, conformity and marking and labelling
at
198 BS EN 934-4 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Admixtures for grout for
-Q
prestressing tendons. Definitions, requirements, conformity, marking and labelling
199 BS EN 934-5 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Admixtures for sprayed concrete.
LL
Definitions, requirements, conformity, marking and labelling

W
200 BS EN 934-6 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Sampling, conformity control and
evaluation of conformity
s
201 BS EN 969 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for gas pipelines.
en
Requirements and test methods

m
202 BS EN 984 - Textile floor coverings. Determination of the mass per unit area of the use
e
surface of needled floor coverings

Si
203 BS EN 985 - Textile floor coverings. Castor chair test
204 BS EN 986 - Textile floor coverings. Tiles. Determination of dimensional changes due to the
effects of varied water and heat conditions and distortion out of plane
205 BS EN 994 - Textile floor coverings. Determination of the side length, squareness and
straightness of tiles
206 BS EN 1008 - Mixing water for concrete. Specification for sampling, testing and assessing
the suitability of water, including water recovered from processes in the concrete industry, as
mixing water for concrete
207 BS EN 1015-4 - Methods of test for mortar for masonry. Determination of consistence of
fresh mortar (by plunger penetration)
208 BS EN 1015-9 - Methods of test for mortar for masonry. Determination of workable life and
correction time of fresh mortar
209 BS EN 1015-11 - Methods of test for mortar for masonry. Determination of flexural and
compressive strength of hardened mortar
210 BS EN 1015-12 - Methods of test for mortar for masonry. Determination of adhesive strength
of hardened rendering and plastering mortars on substrates
211 BS EN 1074-1 - Valves for water supply. Fitness for purpose requirements and appropriate
verification tests. General requirements
verification tests. Isolating valves
verification tests. Check valves
verification tests. Air valves
ar
at
verification tests. Control valves -Q
verification tests. Hydrants
LL
217 BS EN 1092-2 - Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and
accessories, PN designated. Cast iron flanges
W
218 BS EN 1097-1 - Tests for mechanical and physical properties of aggregates. Determination
of the resistance to wear (micro-Deval)
s
en
219 BS EN 1097-2 - Tests for mechanical and physical properties of aggregates. Methods for the
determination of resistance to fragmentation
e m
of loose bulk density and voids
Si
of the water content by drying in a ventilated oven
of particle density and water absorption
of the polished stone value
224 BS EN 1107-1 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of dimensional stability.

Bitumen sheets for roof waterproofing
225 BS EN 1107-2 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of dimensional stability.

Plastic and rubber sheets for roof waterproofing
226 BS EN 1109 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Bitumen sheets for roof waterproofing.
Determination of flexibility at low temperature
227 BS EN 1253-1 - Gullies for buildings. Requirements
228 BS EN 1253-2 - Gullies for buildings. Test methods
229 BS EN 1296 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Bitumen, plastic and rubber sheets for
roofing. Method of artificial ageing by long term exposure to elevated temperature
230 BS EN 1297 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Bitumen, plastic and rubber sheets for roof
waterproofing. Method of artificial ageing by long term exposure to the combination of UV
radiation, elevated temperature and water
231 BS EN 1307 - Textile floor coverings. Classification of pile carpets
232 BS EN 1321 - Destructive test on welds in metallic materials. Macroscopic and microscopic
examination of welds
233 BS EN 1324 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of shear adhesion strength of dispersion
ar
adhesives
at
234 BS EN 1338 - Concrete paving blocks. Requirements and test methods
-Q
235 BS EN 1339 - Concrete paving flags. Requirements and test methods
236 BS EN 1340 - Concrete kerb units. Requirements and test methods

LL
237 BS EN 1346 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of open time

W
238 BS EN 1347 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of wetting capability

s
239 BS EN 1348 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of tensile adhesion strength for cementitious
en
adhesives
m
240 BS EN 1367-2 - Tests for thermal and weathering properties of aggregates. Magnesium
sulfate test
e
Si
241 BS EN 1367-4 - Tests for thermal and weathering properties of aggregates. Determination of
drying shrinkage
242 BS EN 1399 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of resistance to stubbed and burning
cigarettes
243 BS EN 1423 - Road marking materials. Drop on materials. Glass beads, antiskid aggregates
and mixtures of the two
244 BS EN 1424 - Road marking materials. Premix glass beads
245 BS EN 1426, BS 2000-49 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of needle

penetration
246 BS EN 1427 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of the softening point. Ring
and Ball method
247 BS EN 1435 - Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic examination of welded

joints
248 BS EN 1436 - Road marking materials. Road marking performance for road users
249 BS EN 1463-1 - Road marking materials. Retroreflecting road studs. Initial performance
requirements
250 BS EN 1469 - Natural stone products. Slabs for cladding. Requirements
251 BS EN 1470 - Textile floor coverings. Classification of needled floor coverings except for
needled pile floor coverings
252 BS EN 1471 - Textile floor coverings. Assessment of changes in appearance
253 BS EN 1533 - Wood flooring. Determination of bending strength under static load. Test
methods
254 BS EN 1534 - Wood flooring. Determination of resistance to indentation. Test method
ar
255 BS EN 1536 - Execution of special geotechnical works. Bored piles
at
256 BS EN 1548 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Plastic and rubber sheets for roof
waterproofing. Method for exposure to bitumen
-Q
257 BS EN 1744-1 - Tests for chemical properties of aggregates. Chemical analysis
LL
258 BS EN 1744-4 - Tests for chemical properties of aggregates. Determination of water

susceptibility of fillers for bituminous mixtures
W
259 BS EN 1744-5 - Tests for chemical properties of aggregates. Determination of acid soluble
chloride salts
s
en
260 BS EN 1744-6 - Tests for chemical properties of aggregates. Determination of the influence
of recycled aggregate extract on the initial setting time of cement
m
261 BS EN 1796 - Plastics piping systems for water supply with or without pressure. Glass-
e
reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) based on unsaturated polyester resin (UP)

Si
262 BS EN 1841 - Adhesives. Test methods for floor coverings and wall coverings. Determination
of dimensional changes of a linoleum floor covering in contact with an adhesive
263 BS EN 1847 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Plastics and rubber sheets for roof
waterproofing. Methods for exposure to liquid chemicals, including water
264 BS EN 1849-1 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of thickness and mass per
unit area. Bitumen sheets for roof waterproofing
265 BS EN 1849-2 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of thickness and mass per
unit area. Plastic and rubber sheets
266 BS EN 1910 - Wood and parquet flooring and wood panelling and cladding. Determination of
dimensional stability
267 BS EN 1916 - Concrete pipes and fittings, unreinforced, steel fibre and reinforced
268 BS EN 1917 - Concrete manholes and inspection chambers, unreinforced, steel fibre and
reinforced
waterproofing. Determination of watertightness
waterproofing. Determination of water vapour transmission properties
271 BS EN 1963 - Textile floor coverings. Tests using the Lisson Tretrad machine
272 BS EN 1997-1 - Eurocode 7. Geotechnical design. General rules
273 BS EN 1997-2 - Eurocode 7. Geotechnical design. Ground investigation and testing
274 BS EN 10025-1 - Hot rolled products of structural steels. General technical delivery
conditions
ar
275 BS EN 10045-1 - Charpy impact test on metallic materials. Test method (V- and U-notches)
at
276 BS EN 12002 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of transverse deformation for cementitious
-Q
adhesives and grouts
277 BS EN 12003 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of shear adhesion strength of reaction
LL
resin adhesives
W
278 BS EN 12004 - Adhesives for tiles. Requirements, evaluation of conformity, classification and
designation
s
279 BS EN 12020-2 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in alloys EN
en
AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Tolerances on dimensions and form

m
280 BS EN 12057 - Natural stone products. Modular tiles. Requirements

e
281 BS EN 12058 - Natural stone products. Slabs for floors and stairs. Requirements
Si
282 BS EN 12059 - Natural stone products. Dimensional stone work. Requirements
283 BS EN 12105 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of moisture content of agglomerated

composition cork
284 BS EN 12190 - Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures.
Test methods. Determination of compressive strength of repair mortar
285 BS EN 12228 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of joint strength of synthetic
surfaces
286 BS EN 12234 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of ball roll behaviour
287 BS EN 12310-1 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of resistance to tearing

(nail shank). Bitumen sheets for roof waterproofing
288 BS EN 12310-2 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of resistance to tearing

(nail shank). Plastic and rubber sheets for roof waterproofing
289 BS EN 12311-1 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of tensile properties.

290 BS EN 12311-2 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of tensile properties.

291 BS EN 12316-1 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of peel resistance of joints.
292 BS EN 12316-2 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of peel resistance of joints.
293 BS EN 12317-1 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Bitumen sheets for roof waterproofing.
Determination of shear resistance of joints
294 BS EN 12317-2 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of shear resistance of

joints. Plastic and rubber sheets for roof waterproofing
ar
295 BS EN 12350-1 - Testing fresh concrete. Sampling
at
296 BS EN 12350-3 - Testing fresh concrete. Vebe test
-Q
297 BS EN 12350-2 - Testing fresh concrete. Slump-test
LL
298 BS EN 12350-4 - Testing fresh concrete. Degree of compactability

W
299 BS EN 12350-5 - Testing fresh concrete. Flow table test
300 BS EN 12350-6 - Testing fresh concrete. Density

s
en
301 BS EN 12350-7 - Testing fresh concrete. Air content. Pressure method

m
302 BS EN 12372 - Natural stone test methods. Determination of flexural strength under
concentrated load
e
Si
303 BS EN 12390-1 - Testing hardened concrete. Shape, dimensions and other requirements for
specimens and moulds
304 BS EN 12390-2 - Testing hardened concrete. Making and curing specimens for strength
tests
305 BS EN 12390-3 - Testing hardened concrete. Compressive strength of test specimens
306 BS EN 12390-5 - Testing hardened concrete. Flexural strength of test specimens
307 BS EN 12390-6 - Testing hardened concrete. Tensile splitting strength of test specimens
308 BS EN 12390-7 - Testing hardened concrete. Density of hardened concrete
309 BS EN 12390-8 - Testing hardened concrete. Depth of penetration of water under pressure
310 BS EN 12504-1 - Testing concrete in structures. Cored specimens. Taking, examining and
testing in compression
311 BS EN 12504-2 - Testing concrete in structures. Non-destructive testing. Determination of

rebound number
312 BS EN 12504-4 - Testing concrete. Determination of ultrasonic pulse velocity
313 BS EN 12517-1 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Evaluation of welded joints in steel, nickel,
titanium and their alloys by radiography. Acceptance levels
314 BS EN 12517-2 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Evaluation of welded joints in aluminium

and its alloys by radiography. Acceptance levels
315 BS EN 12591 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Specifications for paving grade bitumens
316 BS EN 12592 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of solubility
317 BS EN 12593, BS 2000-80 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of the Fraass
breaking point
ar
318 BS EN 12594, BS 2000-461 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Preparation of test samples
at
319 BS EN 12595, BS 2000-319 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of kinematic
-Q
viscosity
320 BS EN 12607-1, BS 2000-460.1 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of the

LL
resistance to hardening under influence of heat and air. RTFOT method

W
321 BS EN 12607-2, BS 2000-460.2 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of the

resistance to hardening under influence of heat and air. TFOT Method
s
en
Test methods. Determination of slant shear strength

m
323 BS EN 12616 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of water infiltration rate
e
324 BS EN 12617-4 - Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures.
Si
Test methods. Determination of shrinkage and expansion
325 BS EN 12620 - Aggregates for concrete
326 BS EN 12697-1 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Soluble binder
content
327 BS EN 12697-2 - Bituminous mixtures. Test method for hot mix asphalt. Determination of
particle size distribution
328 BS EN 12697-5 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Determination of
the maximum density
bulk density of bituminous specimens
void characteristics of bituminous specimens
the affinity between aggregate and bitumen
the water sensitivity of bituminous specimens
333 BS EN 12697-13 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Temperature
measurement
334 BS EN 12697-17 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Particle loss of
porous asphalt specimen
335 BS EN 12697-18 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Binder drainage
336 BS EN 12697-22 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Wheel tracking
337 BS EN 12697-24 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Resistance to
ar
fatigue
at
338 BS EN 12697-26 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Stiffness
-Q
339 BS EN 12697-27 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Sampling
340 BS EN 12697-28 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Preparation of
LL
samples for determining binder content, water content and grading

W
the dimensions of a bituminous specimen
s
342 BS EN 12697-30 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Specimen
en
preparation by impact compactor

m
preparation by gyratory compactor
e
Si
prepared by roller compactor
345 BS EN 12697-34 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Marshall test
346 BS EN 12697-35 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Laboratory mixing
the thickness of a bituminous pavement
348 BS EN 12697-39 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Binder content by
ignition
349 BS EN 12808-1 - Grouts for tiles. Determination of chemical resistance of reaction resin
mortars
350 BS EN 12808-2 - Grouts for tiles. Determination of resistance to abrasion
351 BS EN 12808-3 - Grouts for tiles. Determination of flexural and compressive strength
352 BS EN 12808-4 - Grouts for tiles. Determination of shrinkage
353 BS EN 12808-5 - Grouts for tiles. Determination of water absorption
354 BS EN 12878 - Pigments for the colouring of building materials based on cement and/or lime.
Specifications and methods of test
355 BS EN 12899-1 - Fixed, vertical road traffic signs. Fixed signs
356 BS EN 12970 - Mastic asphalt for waterproofing. Definitions, requirements and test methods
357 BS EN 13036-1 - Road and airfield surface characteristics. Test methods. Measurement of
pavement surface macrotexture depth using a volumetric patch technique
358 BS EN 13036-4 - Road and airfield surface characteristics. Test methods. Method for
measurement of slip/skid resistance of a surface. The pendulum test
ar
359 BS EN 13036-7 - Road and airfield surface characteristics. Test methods. Irregularity
measurement of pavement courses. The straightedge test
at
360 BS EN 13055-1 - Lightweight aggregates. Lightweight aggregates for concrete, mortar and
-Q
grout
361 BS EN 13055-2 - Lightweight aggregates. Lightweight aggregates for bituminous mixtures

LL
and surface treatments and for unbound and bound applications

W
362 BS EN 13111 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Underlays for discontinuous roofing and
walls. Determination of resistance to water penetration
s
363 BS EN 13263-1 - Silica fume for concrete. Definitions, requirements and conformity criteria
en
364 BS EN 13263-2 - Silica fume for concrete. Conformity evaluation

m
365 BS EN 13286-44 - Unbound and hydraulically bound mixtures. Test method for the
e
determination of the alpha coefficient of vitrified blast furnace slag

Si
366 BS EN 13297 - Textile floor coverings. Classification of needled pile floor coverings
367 BS EN 13302, BS 2000-505 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of dynamic

viscosity of bituminous binder using a rotating spindle apparatus
368 BS EN 13303, BS 2000-506 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of the loss in
mass after heating of industrial bitumen
369 BS EN 13304 - Bitumen and bituminous binders – Oxidised bitumens
370 BS EN 13305 - Bitumen and bituminous binders – Framework specification for hard industrial
bitumens
371 BS EN 13329 - Laminate floor coverings. Elements with a surface layer based on
aminoplastic thermosetting resins. Specifications, requirements and test methods
Test methods. Determination of workability. Test for flow of thixotropic mortars
Test methods. Determination of workability. Test for flow of grout or mortar
Test methods. Determination of workability. Test for flow of repair concrete
Test methods. Determination of workability. Application of repair mortar overhead
376 BS EN 13398, BS 2000-516 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of the elastic
recovery of modified bitumen
377 BS EN 13399, BS 2000-517 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of storage

stability of modified bitumen
378 BS EN 13823 - Reaction to fire tests for building products. Building products excluding
floorings exposed to the thermal attack by a single burning item
ar
at
waterproofing. Rules for sampling -Q
380 BS EN 13442 - Wood and parquet flooring and wood panelling and cladding. Determination
of the resistance to chemical agents
LL
381 BS EN 13589 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of the tensile properties of
modified bitumen by the force ductility method
W
382 BS EN 13596 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Waterproofing of concrete bridge decks
and other concrete surfaces trafficable by vehicles. Determination of bond strength
s
en
383 BS EN 13598-1 - Plastics piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage and
sewerage. Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U), polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene
m
(PE). Specifications for ancillary fittings including shallow inspection chambers

e
384 BS EN 13647 - Wood flooring and wood panelling and cladding. Determination of
Si
geometrical characteristics
385 BS EN 13696 - Wood flooring. Test methods to determine elasticity and resistance to wear
and impact resistance
386 BS EN 13702, BS 2000-513 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of dynamic

viscosity of modified bitumen by cone and plate method
387 BS EN 13738 - Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination of pullout

resistance in soil
388 BS EN 13748-1 - Terrazzo tiles. Terrazzo tiles for internal use
389 BS EN 13748-2 - Terrazzo tiles. Terrazzo tiles for external use
390 BS EN 13808 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Framework for specifying cationic
bituminous emulsions
391 BS EN 13888 - Grout for tiles. Requirements, evaluation of conformity, classification and
designation
392 BS EN 13892-1 - Methods of test for screed materials. Sampling, making and curing
specimens for test
393 BS EN 13892-2 - Methods of test for screed materials. Determination of flexural and
compressive strength
394 BS EN 13892-8 - Methods of test for screed materials. Determination of bond strength
395 BS EN 13924 - Bitumen and bituminous binders – Specifications for hard paving grade
bitumens
396 BS EN 13964 - Suspended ceilings. Requirements and test methods
397 BS EN 13967 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Plastic and rubber damp proof sheets
ar
including plastic and rubber basement tanking sheet. Definitions and characteristics
at
398 BS EN 14023 - Bitumen and bituminous binders – Specification framework for polymer
modified bitumens
-Q
and other concrete surfaces trafficable by vehicles. Determination of water absorption
LL
400 BS EN 14227-1 - Unbound and hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Cement bound
W
granular mixtures
401 BS EN 14227-2 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Slag bound mixtures

s
en
402 BS EN 14227-3 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Fly ash bound mixtures
m
403 BS EN 14227-4 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Fly ash for hydraulically bound
mixtures
e
Si
404 BS EN 14227-10 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Soil treated by cement
405 BS EN 14227-11 - Unbound and hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Soil treated by
lime
406 BS EN 14227-12 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Soil treated by slag
407 BS EN 14227-13 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Soil treated by hydraulic road
binder
408 BS EN 14227-14 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Soil treated by fly ash
409 BS EN 14231 - Natural stone test methods. Determination of the slip resistance by means of
the pendulum tester
410 BS EN 14259 - Adhesives for floor covering. Requirements for mechanical and electrical
performance
411 BS EN 14293 - Adhesives. Adhesives for bonding parquet to subfloor. Test methods and
minimum requirements
412 BS EN 14342 - Wood flooring. Characteristics, evaluation of conformity and marking
413 BS EN 14364 - Plastics piping systems for drainage and sewerage with or without pressure.
Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) based on unsaturated polyester resin (UP).
Specifications for pipes, fittings and joints
414 BS EN 14411 - Ceramic tiles. Definitions, classification, characteristics and marking
415 BS EN 14565 - Resilient floor coverings. Floor coverings based upon synthetic thermoplastic
polymers. Specification
416 BS EN 14617-12 - Agglomerated stone. Test methods. Determination of dimensional stability
ar
Test methods. Determination of carbonation depth in hardened concrete by the
phenolphthalein method
at
418 BS EN 14636-1 - Plastics piping systems for non-pressure drainage and sewerage. Polyester
-Q
resin concrete (PRC). Pipes and fittings with flexible joints
419 BS EN 14636-2 - Plastics piping systems for non-pressure drainage and sewerage. Polyester
LL
resin concrete (PRC). Manholes and inspection chambers

W
and other concrete surfaces trafficable by vehicles. Compatibility by heat conditioning
s
en
and other concrete surfaces trafficable by vehicles. Determination of the resistance to

compaction of an asphalt layer
e m
and other concrete surfaces trafficable by vehicles. Determination of the behaviour of
Si
bitumen sheets during application of mastic asphalt
and other concrete surfaces trafficable by vehicles. Determination of resistance to dynamic
water pressure after damage by pre-treatment
424 BS EN 14762 - Wood flooring. Sampling procedures for evaluation of conformity
425 BS EN 14769, BS 2000-535 - Methods of test for petroleum and its products. Bitumen and
bituminous binders. Accelerated long-term ageing conditioning by a pressure ageing vessel
(PAV)
426 BS EN 14770, BS 2000-536 - Methods of test for petroleum and its products. Bitumen and
bituminous binders. Determination of complex shear modulus and phase angle. Dynamic
Shear Rheometer (DSR)
427 BS EN 14771, BS 2000-533 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of the flexural
creep stiffness. Bending Beam Rheometer (BBR)
428 BS EN 14808 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of shock absorption
429 BS EN 14891 - Liquid applied water impermeable products for use beneath ceramic tiling
bonded with adhesives. Requirements, test methods, evaluation of conformity, classification
and designation
430 BS EN 14810 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of spike resistance
431 BS EN 14836 - Synthetic surfaces for outdoor sports areas. Exposure to artificial weathering
432 BS EN 14837 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of slip resistance
433 BS EN 14877 - Synthetic surfaces for outdoor sports areas. Specification
434 BS EN 14901 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings and accessories. Epoxy coating (heavy duty) of
ductile iron fittings and accessories. Requirements and test methods
ar
435 BS EN 14904 - Surfaces for sports areas. Indoor surfaces for multi-sports use. Specification
at
436 BS EN 14978 - Laminate floor coverings. Elements with acrylic based surface layer, electron
beam cured. Specifications, requirements and test methods
-Q
437 BS EN 15167-1 - Ground granulated blast furnace slag for use in concrete, mortar and grout.
Definitions, specifications and conformity criteria
LL
438 BS EN 15167-2 - Ground granulated blast furnace slag for use in concrete, mortar and grout.
W
Conformity evaluation
439 BS EN 15189 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings and accessories. External polyurethane coating for
s
pipes. Requirements and test methods

en
440 BS EN 15301-1 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of rotational resistance

m
441 BS EN 15322 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Framework for specifying cut-back and
e
fluxed bituminous binders

Si
442 BS EN 15330-1 - Surfaces for sports areas. Synthetic turf and needle-punched surfaces
primarily designed for outdoor use. Specification for synthetic turf
443 BS EN 15330-2 - Surfaces for sports areas. Synthetic turf and needle- punched surfaces
primarily designed for outdoor use. Specification for needle-punched surfaces
444 BS EN 15468 - Laminate floor coverings. Elements with directly applied printing and resin
surface layer. Specifications, requirements and test methods
445 BS EN 15617 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Time-of-flight diffraction technique (TOFD).

Acceptance levels
446 BS EN 15813 - Polymer modified bituminous thick coatings for waterproofing. Determination
of flexibility at low temperatures
447 BS EN 15814 - Polymer modified bituminous thick coatings for waterproofing. Definitions and
requirements
448 BS EN 15816 - Polymer modified bituminous thick coatings for waterproofing. Resistance to
rain
449 BS EN 15817 - Polymer modified bituminous thick coatings for waterproofing. Water
resistance
450 BS EN 15820 - Polymer modified bituminous thick coatings for waterproofing. Determination
of watertightness
451 BS EN 16002 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of the resistance to wind
load of mechanically fastened flexible sheets for roof waterproofing
452 BS EN 60893-2 - Insulating materials. Industrial rigid laminated sheets based on

thermosetting resins for electrical purposes. Methods of test
453 BS EN ISO 148-1 - Metallic materials. Charpy pendulum impact test. Test method
ar
454 BS EN ISO 527-1, BS 2782-3, ISO 527-1 - Plastics. Determination of tensile properties.
General principles
at
455 BS EN ISO 527-2, BS 2782-3 - Plastics. Determination of tensile properties. Test conditions
-Q
for moulding and extrusion plastics
456 BS EN ISO 527-3, BS 2782-3 - Plastics. Determination of tensile properties. Test conditions
LL
for films and sheets

W
457 BS EN ISO 527-5 - Plastics. Determination of tensile properties. Test conditions for
unidirectional fibre-reinforced plastic composites
s
458 BS EN ISO 787-9 - General methods of test for pigments and extenders. Determination of
en
pH value of aqueous suspension

m
459 BS EN ISO 1452-1 - Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and above-
e
ground drainage and sewerage under pressure. Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U).
General
Si
Pipes
Fittings
Valves
Fitness for purpose of the system
464 BS EN ISO 1461 - Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
Specifications and test methods
465 BS EN ISO 1519 - Paints and varnishes. Bend test (cylindrical mandrel)
466 BS EN ISO 2409, BS 3900-E6 - Paints and varnishes. Cross-cut test
467 BS EN ISO 2592, BS 2000-36 - Determination of flash and fire points. Cleveland open cup
method
468 BS EN ISO 2719, BS 2000-34 - Determination of flash point. Pensky-Martens closed cup
method
469 BS EN ISO 2812-1 - Paints and varnishes. Determination of resistance to liquids. Immersion
in liquids other than water
470 BS EN ISO 2812-2 - Paints and varnishes. Determination of resistance to liquids. Water
ar
immersion
at
471 BS EN ISO 2812-3 - Paints and varnishes. Determination of resistance to liquids. Method
using an absorbent medium
-Q
472 BS EN ISO 2812-4 - Paints and varnishes. Determination of resistance to liquids. Spotting
methods
LL
473 BS EN ISO 2812-5 - Paints and varnishes. Determination of resistance to liquids.

W
Temperature-gradient oven method
474 BS EN ISO 2813 - Paints and varnishes. Measurement of specular gloss of non-metallic
s
paint films at 20°, 60° and 85°

en
475 BS EN ISO 2814, BS 3900-D4 - Paints and varnishes. Comparison of contrast ratio (hiding
m
power) of paints of the same type and colour

e
476 BS EN ISO 3059 - Non-destructive testing. Penetrant testing and magnetic particle testing.
Si
Viewing conditions
477 BS EN ISO 4136 - Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Transverse tensile test
478 BS EN ISO 4624, BS 3900-E10 - Paints and varnishes. Pull-off test for adhesion
479 BS EN ISO 5173 - Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Bend tests
480 BS EN ISO 6506-1 - Metallic materials. Brinell hardness test. Test method
481 BS EN ISO 6508-1 - Metallic materials. Rockwell hardness test. Test method (scales A, B, C,
D, E, F, G, H, K, N, T)
482 BS EN ISO 6892-1 - Metallic materials. Tensile testing. Method of test at ambient
temperature
483 BS EN ISO 9015-1 - Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Hardness testing.
Hardness test on arc welded joints
484 BS EN ISO 9015-2 - Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Hardness testing.
Microhardness testing of welded joints
485 BS EN ISO 9016 - Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Impact tests. Test
specimen location, notch orientation and examination
486 BS EN ISO 9239-1 - Reaction to fire tests for floorings. Determination of the burning
behaviour using a radiant heat source
487 BS EN ISO 9863-1 - Geosynthetics. Determination of thickness at specified pressures.

Single layers
488 BS EN ISO 9863-2 - Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination of thickness

at specified pressures. Procedure for determination of thickness of single layers of multilayer
products
489 BS EN ISO 9864 - Geosynthetics. Test method for the determination of mass per unit area of
ar
geotextiles and geotextile-related products
at
490 BS EN ISO 9934-1 - Non-destructive testing. Magnetic particle testing. General principles
-Q
491 BS EN ISO 9963-1, BS 6068-2.51: - Water quality. Determination of alkalinity. Determination
of total and composite alkalinity
LL
492 BS EN ISO 9963-2, BS 6068-2.52 - Water quality. Determination of alkalinity. Determination

of carbonate alkalinity
W
493 BS EN ISO 10319 - Geosynthetics. Wide-width tensile test

s
494 BS EN ISO 10321 - Geosynthetics. Tensile test for joints/seams by wide-width strip method
en
495 BS EN ISO 10416 - Petroleum and natural gas industries. Drilling fluids. Laboratory testing
m
496 BS EN ISO 10545-1 - Ceramic tiles. Sampling and basis for acceptance
e
Si
497 BS EN ISO 10545-2 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of dimensions and surface quality
498 BS EN ISO 10545-3 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of water absorption, apparent porosity,
apparent relative density and bulk density
499 BS EN ISO 10545-4 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of modulus of rupture and breaking
strength
500 BS EN ISO 10545-5 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of impact resistance by measurement of

coefficient of restitution
501 BS EN ISO 10545-6 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of resistance to deep abrasion for
unglazed tiles
502 BS EN ISO 10545-7 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of resistance to surface abrasion for
glazed tiles
503 BS EN ISO 10545-8 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of linear thermal expansion

504 BS EN ISO 10545-10 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of moisture expansion
505 BS EN ISO 10545-11 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of crazing resistance for glazed tiles
506 BS EN ISO 10545-13 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of chemical resistance
507 BS EN ISO 10545-14 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of resistance to stains
508 BS EN ISO 10863 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Ultrasonic testing. Use of time-of-flight
diffraction technique (TOFD)
509 BS EN ISO 10893-6 - Non-destructive testing of steel tubes. Radiographic testing of the weld
seam of welded steel tubes for the detection of imperfections
510 BS EN ISO 10893-7 - Non-destructive testing of steel tubes. Digital radiographic testing of
the weld seam of welded steel tubes for the detection of imperfections
ar
511 BS EN ISO 10893-11 - Non-destructive testing of steel tubes. Automated ultrasonic testing of
the weld seam of welded steel tubes for the detection of longitudinal and/or transverse
at
imperfections
-Q
512 BS EN ISO 11058 - Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination of water
permeability characteristics normal to the plane, without load
LL
513 BS EN ISO 11600 - Building construction. Jointing products. Classification and requirements
for sealants
W
514 BS EN ISO 11666 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Ultrasonic testing. Acceptance levels
s
515 BS EN ISO 11857 - Textile floor coverings. Determination of resistance to delamination

en
516 BS EN ISO 11890-1 - Paints and varnishes. Determination of volatile organic compound
m
(VOC) content. Difference method

e
517 BS EN ISO 11890-2 - Paints and varnishes. Determination of volatile organic compound
Si
(VOC) content. Gas-chromatographic method
518 BS EN ISO 12236 - Geosynthetics. Static puncture test (CBR test)
519 BS EN ISO 12956 - Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination of the

characteristic opening size
520 BS EN ISO 13433 - Geosynthetics. Dynamic perforation test (cone drop test)
521 BS EN ISO 13845, BS 2782-11 - Plastics piping systems. Elastomeric-sealing-ring-type

socket joints for use with unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) pipes. Test method for
leaktightness under internal pressure and with angular deflection
522 BS EN ISO 14688-1 - Geotechnical investigation and testing. Identification and classification
of soil. Identification and description
of soil. Principles for a classification
of rock. Identification and description
525 BS EN ISO 15614-1 - Specification and qualification of welding procedures for metallic
materials. Welding procedure test. Arc and gas welding of steels and arc welding of nickel
and nickel alloys
materials. Welding procedure test. Arc welding of aluminium and its alloys
materials. Welding procedure test. Fusion welding of non-alloyed and low-alloyed cast irons
materials. Welding procedure test. Finishing welding of aluminium castings
ar
materials. Welding procedure test. Arc welding of titanium, zirconium and their alloys
at
materials. Welding procedure test. Arc and gas welding of copper and its alloys
-Q
materials. Welding procedure test. Overlay welding
LL
W
materials. Welding procedure test. Welding of tubes to tube-plate joints
s
materials. Welding procedure test. Hyperbaric dry welding

en
m
materials. Welding procedure test. Electron and laser beam welding

e
Si
materials. Welding procedure test. Spot, seam and projection welding
materials. Welding procedure test. Resistance butt and flash welding
537 BS EN ISO 15630-1 - Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete. Test
methods. Reinforcing bars, wire rod and wire
methods. Welded fabric
methods. Prestressing steel
540 BS EN ISO 17637 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Visual testing of fusion-welded joints
541 BS EN ISO 17638 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Magnetic particle testing

542 BS EN ISO 17640 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Ultrasonic testing. Techniques, testing
levels, and assessment
543 BS EN ISO 22475-1 - Geotechnical investigation and testing. Sampling methods and
groundwater measurements. Technical principles for execution
544 BS EN ISO 22476-2 - Geotechnical investigation and testing. Field testing. Dynamic probing
545 BS EN ISO 22476-3 - Geotechnical investigation and testing. Field testing. Standard
penetration test
546 BS EN ISO 22476-12 - Geotechnical investigation and testing. Field testing. Mechanical cone
penetration test (CPTM)
547 BS EN ISO 22825 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Ultrasonic testing. Testing of welds in
austenitic steels and nickel-based alloys
ar
548 BS EN ISO 23277 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Penetrant testing of welds. Acceptance
levels
at
549 BS EN ISO 23278 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Magnetic particle testing of welds.
-Q
Acceptance levels
550 BS EN ISO 23279 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Ultrasonic testing. Characterization of

LL
indications in welds
W
551 BS ISO 34-2 - Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of tear strength. Small
(Delft) test pieces
s
552 BS ISO 37 - Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of tensile stress-strain

en
properties
m
553 BS ISO 48 - Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of hardness (hardness

e
between 10 IRHD and 100 IRHD)

Si
554 BS ISO 124 - Latex, rubber. Determination of total solids content
555 BS ISO 1766 - Textile floor coverings. Determination of thickness of pile above the substrate
556 BS ISO 2531 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water applications
557 BS ISO 7619-1 - Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of indentation hardness.

Durometer method (Shore hardness)
558 BS ISO 7619-2 - Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of indentation hardness.

IRHD pocket meter method
559 BS ISO 8543 - Textile floor coverings. Methods for determination of mass
560 BS ISO 10580 - Resilient, textile and laminate floor coverings. Test method for volatile
organic compound (VOC) emissions
561 BS ISO 10834 - Textile floor coverings. Non-destructive measurement of pile thickness
above the backing. WRONZ gauge method
562 BS ISO 10874 - Resilient, textile and laminate floor coverings. Classification
563 BS ISO 11475 - Paper and board. Determination of CIE whiteness, D65/10° (outdoor
daylight)
564 BS ISO 13007-1 - Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives. Terms, definitions and specifications
for adhesives
565 BS ISO 13007-2 - Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives. Test methods for adhesives
566 BS ISO 13007-3 - Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives. Terms, definitions and specifications
for grouts
567 BS ISO 13007-4 - Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives. Test methods for grouts
568 BS ISO 17984 - Machine-made textile floor coverings. Determination of dimensional changes
after exposure to heat and/or water
ar
569 BS ISO 23999 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of dimensional stability and curling
at
after exposure to heat
-Q
570 BS ISO 24334 - Laminate floor coverings. Determination of locking strength for mechanically
assembled panels
LL
571 BS ISO 24335 - Laminate floor coverings. Determination of impact resistance

W
572 BS ISO 24336 - Laminate floor coverings. Determination of thickness swelling after partial
immersion in water
s
573 BS ISO 24341 - Resilient and textile floor coverings. Determination of length, width and
en
straightness of sheet
m
574 BS ISO 24343-1 - Resilient and laminate floor coverings. Determination of indentation and
residual indentation. Residual indentation
e
Si
575 BS ISO 25620 - Laminate floor coverings. Determination of long-side friction for mechanically
assembled panels
576 BS ISO 26985 - Resilient floor coverings. Identification of linoleum and determination of
cement content and ash residue
14.46.9 American Public Health Association (APHA):
1 APHA 2130 - Turbidity
2 APHA 2320 - Alkalinity
3 APHA 2340 - Hardness
4 APHA 2510 - Conductivity
5 APHA 2540 - Solids

6 APHA 2710 - Tests on Sludges
7 APHA 3110 - Metals by Atomic Absorption Spectrometry
8 APHA 3120 - Metals by Plasma Emission Spectroscopy
9 APHA 3500-Al - Aluminium
10 APHA 3500-As - Arsenic
11 APHA 3500-Ca - Calcium
12 APHA 3500-Cd - Cadmium
13 APHA 3500-Cu - Copper
14 APHA 3500-Hg - Mercury
ar
15 APHA 3500-K - Potassium
at
16 APHA 3500-Na - Sodium -Q
17 APHA 3500-Ni - Nickel
LL
18 APHA 3500-Mg - Magnesium

W
19 APHA 3500-Pb - Lead
20 APHA 3500-Se - Selenium

s
en
21 APHA 3500-Sr - Strontium

m
22 APHA 3500-Zn - Zinc

e
23 APHA 4500-Br - Boron

Si
24 APHA 4500-Br¯ - Bromide
25 APHA 4500-Cl - Chlorine (Residual)
26 APHA 4500-Cl¯ - Chloride
27 APHA 4500-CN¯ - Cyanide
28 APHA 4500-F¯ - Fluoride
29 APHA 4500-H+ - pH Value
30 APHA 4500-N - Nitrogen
31 APHA 4500-Norg - Nitrogen (Organic)
32 APHA 4500-NH3 - Nitrogen (Ammonia)

33 APHA 4500-NO2¯ - Nitrogen (Nitrite)
34 APHA 4500-NO3¯ - Nitrogen (Nitrate)
35 APHA 4500-O - Oxygen (Dissolved)
36 APHA 4500-P - Phosphorus
37 APHA 4500-S2¯ - Sulphide
38 APHA 4500-SiO2 - Silica
39 APHA 4500-SO42¯ - Sulphate
40 APHA 5210 - Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)
41 APHA 5520 - Oil and Grease
ar
42 APHA 5310 - Total Organic Carbon (TOC)
at
43 APHA 5530 - Phenols -Q
44 APHA 6200 - Volatile Organic Compounds
LL
45 APHA 6630 - Organochlorine Pesticides

W
46 APHA 9222 - Membrane Filter Technique for Members of the Coliform Group
47 APHA 9223 - Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test

s
en
48 APHA 9510 - Detection of Enteric Viruses

m
49 APHA 9711 - Pathogenic Protozoa

e
Si
14.46.10 Deutsches Institut für Normung EV (DIN) :
1 DIN 1048-5 - Testing concrete; testing of hardened concrete (specimens prepared in mould)
2 DIN English 18134 - Determination of Deformation and Strength Characteristics of Soils by

the Plate Loading Test.
3 DIN 60500 - Geotextiles and geotextile related products
14.46.11 Construction Industry Research and Information Association (CIRIA) :
1 CIRIA Report 144, Integrity Testing in Piling Practice
14.46.12 United States Environmental Protection Agency:
1 USEPA 6010C - Inductively Coupled Plasma - Atomic Emission Spectroscopy (ICP-AES)

2 USEPA 5030C - Purge and Trap for Aqueous Samples
3 USEPA 8015D - Nonhalogenated Organics Using GC/FID
14.46.13 Swiss Standard - Normes SN (Suisse):
1 SN 640550 – Essais sur les sols et divers relatif à la mécanique des sols - Géotextiles,
définitions et descriptions d’exécution
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 15: Appendix B - Templates
15 TEMPLATES ................................................................................................. 2
15.1 CONTRACTORS PROJECT QUALITY PLAN TEMPLATE ........................... 2
15.2 CONTRACTORS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN TEMPLATE ................. 16
15.3 QUALITY NON-CONFORMANCE TEMPLATE ........................................... 17
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
15 TEMPLATES
15.1 CONTRACTORS PROJECT QUALITY PLAN TEMPLATE
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
15.2 CONTRACTORS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN TEMPLATE
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
15.3 QUALITY NON-CONFORMANCE TEMPLATE
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
END OF PART
QCS 2014 Section 03: Ground Investigation Page 1
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Scope 2
1.1.2 References 2
1.1.3 Definitions 2
1.2 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Programme of Works 3
1.2.2 Preliminary Logs 3
1.2.3 Exploratory Hole Logs 4
1.2.4 Preliminary Laboratory Test Results 5
1.2.5 Digital Data 5
1.2.6 Form of Report 5
1.2.7 Approval of Report 6
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................... 6
ar
1.4 GENERAL PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS .............................................................. 7
at
1.4.1 General 7
1.4.2 Working Areas -Q 7
1.4.3 Turf and Topsoil 7
1.4.4 Paved Areas 7
1.4.5 Paving Slabs and Blocks 7
LL
1.4.6 Claims for Damage 8

1.4.7 Geotechnical and Environmental Personnel 8
W
1.4.8 Location of Exploratory Holes 8

1.4.9 Ground Elevation of Exploratory Holes 8
s
1.4.10 Exploratory Work 8

en
1.4.11 Methods of Investigation 8

1.4.12 Safety and Management 9
m
1.4.13 Anomalous Conditions 9

e
1.4.14 Surface Water Control 9

Si
1.4.16 Facilities for the Engineer 10
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 General requirements and information for the execution of ground investigations.
Section 1 ......... General

Section 2 ......... Quality Assurance and Quality Control
Section 4 ......... Foundations and Retaining Structures
Section 6 ......... Roadworks
Section 8 ......... Drainage Works
Section 12 ....... Earthworks Related to Buildings
ar
1.1.2 References
at
1 The following standards and other documents are referred to in this Part:
-Q
BS 5930......................Code of practice for site investigations
BS EN 1997................Ground Investigation and testing
ASTM D 420 ...............Site Characterization for Engineering, Design, and Construction
LL
Purposes
ASTM D 2488 .............Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)
W
Deere D. U. et al., Design of surface and near-surface construction in rock. Proc. 8th US
s
symposium on rock mechanics. AIME, New York, 1967

en
Code of Practice and Specifications for Road Openings in the Highway issued by the
Government.
m
1.1.3 Definitions
e
Si
1 Topsoil: the surface layer of earth that contains organic material and can also support
vegetation.
2 Soil: earthen material not classified herein as topsoil or hard stratum.
3 Hard stratum and obstruction: The words 'hard stratum' and 'obstruction' shall mean
natural or artificial material, including rock, which cannot be penetrated except by the use of
chiselling techniques, rotary drilling, blasting or powered breaking tools. The term 'hard
stratum' shall apply during boring, where it is shown that condition (1) or condition (2) below
are fulfilled, provided that the boring rig involved is in good working order and is fully manned:
(a) Condition (1) 100 mm diameter undisturbed sample tubes cannot be driven more
than 300 mm
(b) Condition (2) a standard penetration resistance test shows a resistance in excess
of 35 blows/75 mm.
Part 01: General
4 Fill: deposits or embankments which have been formed by persons, as distinct from
geological agencies.
5 Exploratory Hole/Trench/Excavation: any boring, pit trench, ditch or shaft formed for the
purpose of ground investigation.
6 Boring: hole in earth, excavated by either percussion or auger equipment.
7 Drilling: any hole in rock, excavated by rotary equipment.
8 Borehole: exploratory hole excavated by boring or drilling techniques.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 Programme of Works
1 The Geotechnical Investigation Contractor shall prepare a programme of works for the
ar
investigation which will give a detailed schedule showing proposed time schedule for all
at
aspect of the work, details of all plant and equipment to be used in addition to a list of
personnel who will work on the project. -Q
1.2.2 Preliminary Logs
LL
1 The Geotechnical Investigation Contractor shall prepare a preliminary log of each exploratory
hole. For trial pits and trenches, a trial pit or trench map showing each face of the pit or
trench shall be provided, as appropriate. Preliminary logs shall be submitted to the Engineer
W
in duplicate within seven working days of completion of the explorations to which they refer
to, and shall contain the information required for the exploratory hole logs.
s
en
2 Geotechnical Investigation Contractor activities shall fully comply with Ministry of Environment
(MOE) requirements and/or those of other Government Departments, Ministries and
m
Statutory Organizations.
e
3 The Geotechnical Investigation Contractor shall obtain all necessary work permits and
Si
security permits prior to commencement of Geotechnical investigation of the site.
4 The investigation shall provide detailed information on the nature of the sub-strata, superficial
deposits and ground water table at the site together with general recommendations for
designing foundations and earthworks, new road pavements, culverts, retaining walls, etc.
5 The geotechnical investigation Exploratory Boreholes shall be spaced as mentioned in

Section 2.
Part 01: General
6 The geotechnical investigation Exploratory Boreholes depths shall be as mentioned in Table

1.1.
Table 1.1: Minimum Depth of Boreholes
No of floors Depth of Boreholes (m)
3 or Less 6
4 8
5 9
6 10
7 12
8 13
0.7
>8 3S
Notes:
ar
 The depth of boreholes is measured from foundation level.
 S is the number of floors.
at
 For structures small in plan area, exploration should be made at a minimum of three points,
-Q
unless other reliable information is available in the immediate vicinity. Where a structure
consists of a number of adjacent units, one exploration point per unit may suffice.
 For piles the depth of Boreholes is at least below the depth of pile tip by 5m or 5D (D is the
LL
diameter of the pile at the toe) whichever is greater.

 For roads, the depth of Boreholes shall be greater than 2m below the proposed formation
W
Level.
 For trenches, pipeline and Tunnels, the depth of Boreholes shall be the larger value of:
s
en
 2m below the inverted level;

 1.5width of excavation.
m
 2D (D=Diameter or equivalent diameter of the tunnel/underground structure.

e
1.2.3 Exploratory Hole Logs

Si
1 The exploratory hole logs shall be prepared and presented to a suitable vertical scale. The
logs shall include all the information that follows, such information having been updated as
necessary in the light of laboratory testing and further examination of samples and cores.
2 Information for exploratory hole logs:
Static
Rotary Pit and and
Drilling
Borehole Trench Dynamic
Probing
All the designated information    

National grid co-ordinates    
Ground level related to the datum    
Elevation of each stratum referred to the datum    ()
Part 01: General
Static
Rotary Pit and and
Drilling
Borehole Trench Dynamic
Probing
Description of each stratum in accordance with BS
5930 and initials of person who carried out the
   ()
logging (and responsible Supervisor if under
training)
Details of groundwater observations    ()
Symbolic legend of strata in accordance with BS
   ()
5930
Core recovery as percentage of each core run 
Rock Quality Designation, RQD (Deere et al. 1967) 
_____
Note:  means information required; () means information required if applicable.
ar
1.2.4 Preliminary Laboratory Test Results
at
1 Laboratory test results shall be submitted to the Engineer in batches at the completion of
-Q
each week's testing. Legible photocopies of work sheets are acceptable.
1.2.5 Digital Data

LL
1 Data from the investigation shall be provided in digital form to the approval of the Engineer.
W
1.2.6 Form of Report

s
1 The report shall comprise of a factual or interpretative or both types of reports as required by
en
the Employer or Engineer. Reports shall begin with a cover page showing the name of the
Contract and the names of the Employer, Engineer and Geotechnical Investigation
m
Contractor. Report pages shall be numbered consecutively.

e
2 The factual report shall contain, as a minimum, the following information:

Si
(a) A statement from the Engineer on the purpose and rationale of the investigation.
(b) A description of the work carried out, including reference to specification and
standards adopted and any deviations from them.
(c) Exploratory hole logs.
(d) In-situ test records.
(e) Laboratory test results.
(f) Plan with locations of exploratory holes.
(g) Site location plan.
(h) Geological cross-sections (if appropriate).
The plans shall be to a stated scale and shall include a north arrow. Additional information
shall be provided as designated.
Part 01: General
3 The interpretative report shall contain the following information:
(a) A written appraisal of the ground and water conditions.

(b) Analysis and recommendations as designated.
When so designated, the Geotechnical Investigation Contractor shall supply the calculations
and analyses on which recommendations are based.
1.2.7 Approval of Report
1 A draft copy of the factual report and the interpretative report shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval before submission of the final report.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 Only Geotechnical Investigation Contractors holding a current approval certificate from the
Central Materials Laboratory shall be permitted to carry out ground investigations.
ar
2 The work shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant British Standards or equivalent.
at
3
-Q
Where specifically designated, all work shall be carried out in accordance with a quality
management system established in accordance with Section 2 Quality Assurance and Quality
Control of the QCS. Records to indicate compliance with quality management shall be made
available to the Engineer on request.
LL
4 The Geotechnical Investigation Contractor shall provide full time professional attendance on
W
site. The professional attendant shall be approved by the Engineer, and shall be responsible
for the technical direction of all fieldwork.
s
en
5 The Geotechnical Investigation Contractor’s geotechnical and environmental personnel

employed on the Contract shall be competent to undertake the work required. Categories of
m
personnel who may be required by the Contract are as follows:

e
(a) Technician.
Si
(b) Graduate Engineer/Geologist/Environmental Scientist.

(c) Graduate Engineer/Geologist/Environmental Scientist with at least three years of
relevant experience since graduation.
(d) Professional Engineer/Geologist/Environmental Scientist with at least five years of
relevant experience.
(e) Professional Engineer/Geologist/Environmental Specialist with at least ten years of
relevant experience.
6 All drillers employed on the Contract shall be experienced and competent in percussion or
auger boring or rotary drilling, to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. One competent
drilling supervisor per site shall be permanently on the Site during borehole operations.
Part 01: General
1.4 GENERAL PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.4.1 General
1 Geotechnical Investigation Contractor shall only use access routes to and between
exploration sites that are approved by the Engineer.
2 Where the presence of underground services is likely, exploratory holes shall be started by
means of a hand excavated inspection pit.
3 In addition to any designated notice, at least one working day's notice of the intended time of
entry shall be given to the land owner and occupier of the exploration site.
4 All work shall be carried out with the least possible damage to the Site and its environs.
5 All barriers breached or otherwise disturbed during the execution of site operations shall be
immediately repaired or replaced to the same standard.
ar
6 Working hours shall be restricted to those designated.
at
7
-Q
Daily allocation sheets detailing the work carried out shall be submitted in duplicate at the
end of each day’s work.
1.4.2 Working Areas

LL
1 Operations shall be confined to the minimum area of ground required for the Works. Unless
W
otherwise designated, on completion of each exploration all equipment, surplus material and
rubbish of every kind shall be cleared away and removed from the Site. Damage to land or
s
property in the vicinity of the exploratory hole and on access routes shall be made good. The
en
whole of the Site and any ancillary works shall be left in a clean and tidy condition.
m
1.4.3 Turf and Topsoil

e
1 Turf and topsoil shall be stripped from the site of each exploration and stockpiled for future
Si
replacement. Vegetation and topsoil adjacent to the exploration which may be damaged by
the operations shall either be removed and stockpiled as above, or otherwise protected from
damage. After completion of the exploration all topsoil shall be replaced and the Site
restored to its original condition.
1.4.4 Paved Areas
1 Pavement from paved areas (other than paving slabs and blocks) shall be broken out to the
minimum extent necessary for each exploration. After completion of the exploration and
backfill of the excavation, the disturbed subgrade shall be compacted and the paving
replaced.
2 Restoration of highway pavement shall be in accordance with the current Code of Practice
and Specification for Road Openings in the Highway issued by the Government.
1.4.5 Paving Slabs and Blocks
1 Paving slabs and blocks shall be removed from the Site, as required for each exploration,
and stored for reuse.
Part 01: General
2 Contiguous paving slabs and blocks which are liable to be damaged by the operations shall
either be removed and stored as above or otherwise protected from damage.
3 After completion of the exploration and backfill of the excavation, the disturbed subgrade
shall be compacted and the paving slabs and blocks relayed.
1.4.6 Claims for Damage
1 Any damage, or claim for compensation for damage by owners or occupiers of the Site, shall
be reported to the Engineer.
1.4.7 Geotechnical and Environmental Personnel
1 In addition to the provision of the designated personnel by the Geotechnical Investigation

Contractor, the Engineer may specifically require the services of geotechnical and
environmental personnel for advice, assistance or preparation of interpretative reports. The
form of interpretative reports shall be agreed with the Engineer. Details of the qualifications
ar
and experience of the personnel shall be supplied to the Engineer.
at
1.4.8 Location of Exploratory Holes -Q
1 The location of each exploratory hole shall be measured from an approved grid co-ordinate
system, and shall be accurate to within 1 m, and the position recorded on a plan as
LL
designated.
1.4.9 Ground Elevation of Exploratory Holes

W
1 The elevation of the ground at each exploratory hole shall be established, on the basis of the
s
Qatar National Datum unless otherwise designated or approved by the Engineer, to the
en
nearest 0.05 m.
m
1.4.10 Exploratory Work

e
1 The location and depth of each exploratory hole shall be as designated. The Engineer may,
Si
after consultation with the Geotechnical Investigation Contractor, vary the location and depth
of any exploratory hole and the sequence or quantity of in-situ testing depending on the
actual ground conditions encountered. When the position of an exploratory hole has been
varied, the Geotechnical Investigation Contractor shall take all necessary measurements and
shall inform the Engineer of the revised co-ordinates and ground elevation or other
measurements required to locate the exploratory hole.
1.4.11 Methods of Investigation
1 The Engineer will have the option to require any of the following methods of investigation.
These options will comprise, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a) Desk study.

(b) Geological mapping.
(c) Topographic survey.
(d) Aerial photographs.
or any other methods described in this Section.
Part 01: General
1.4.12 Safety and Management
1 The Geotechnical Investigation Contractor shall submit detailed Job Hazard Analysis (JHA)
to all site activities including but not limited to potential hazard, who/what might be harmed,
control/ recovery measure, responsible person…etc.
2 The presence and nature of known areas of hazardous or contaminated ground are
designated, based on available records. If evidence of further hazardous or contaminated
ground is encountered, the Geotechnical Investigation Contractor shall immediately so inform
the Engineer. If required by the Engineer, the Geotechnical Investigation Contractor’s work
plan shall be revised appropriately to take into account the nature and level of contamination
encountered. Where contaminated land is present or suspected the Geotechnical
Investigation Contractor shall take the appropriate health and safety precautions as directed
by the Engineer and where appropriate by the Civil Defence Department of the Government.
Care shall be taken to avoid contaminating the egress from the Site.
3 A method statement indicating the safety procedures to be followed during the investigation
ar
of hazardous or contaminated ground shall be provided by the Geotechnical Investigation
Contractor before beginning the investigation in the hazardous or contaminated ground.
at
4
-Q
Traffic safety and management measures shall be provided, in accordance with the
provisions of traffic control of Section 1, General. Where the circumstances of any particular
case are not designated, proposals for dealing with such situations shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
LL
1.4.13 Anomalous Conditions

W
1 Where anomalous or unexpected features are revealed, the Geotechnical Investigation

s
Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer.

en
1.4.14 Surface Water Control

m
1 Surface water or other water shall be prevented from entering the exploratory hole, except as
e
permitted by the Engineer.

Si
1.4.15 Photographs
1 Colour photographs shall be taken and supplied by the Geotechnical Investigation Contractor
as designated. Each photograph shall clearly show all necessary details, and shall have its
scale identified.
2 A single gloss colour print (size 150 mm by 100 mm) copy of each photograph shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his approval, within seven working days of the photography. In
the event that the photographs are of a quality unacceptable to the Engineer, they shall be
retaken.
3 On acceptance of the quality of the photograph, two complete sets of prints of all the
photographs shall be presented, annotated and submitted in bound volumes, together with
the original photograph digital format with the factual report.
4 Particular requirements for photographs of cores and pits and trenches are given in Parts 3
and 4
Part 01: General
1.4.16 Facilities for the Engineer
1 When required by the particular contract documentation, facilities to the designated standard
shall be provided for the use of the Engineer, as described in Section 1.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 02: Boreholes
2 BOREHOLES .......................................................................................................... 2
2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1 Scope 2
2.1.2 References 2
2.2 BOREHOLES GENERALLY .................................................................................... 2
2.2.1 Method and Diameter 2
2.2.2 Addition of Water to the Borehole 3
2.2.3 Backfilling 3
2.3 PERCUSSION BORING .......................................................................................... 3
2.3.1 Hard Stratum or Obstruction in Percussion Boring 3
2.4 AUGER BORING ..................................................................................................... 3
2.4.1 Hand Auger 3
2.4.2 Continuous Flight Auger Boring 3
2.4.3 Hollow Stem Flight Auger 3
ar
2.5 ROTARY DRILLING ................................................................................................ 3
at
2.5.1 General 3
2.5.2 Drilling Fluid 4
-Q
2.5.3 Rotary Drilling with Core Recovery 4
2.5.4 Rotary Drilling without Core Recovery 6
2.5.5 Backfilling 6
LL
2.5.6 Photographs 6
W
2.6 BOREHOLES OVERWATER .................................................................................. 6

s
en
e m
Si
Part 02: Boreholes
2 BOREHOLES
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 Advancement of boreholes by percussion boring, auger boring, and rotary drilling.

This Section
Part 1 ............... General
Section 4, ........ Foundations and Retaining Structures

Section 6, ........ Roadworks
Section 8, ........ Drainage Works
Section 12, ...... Earthworks Related to Buildings
ar
2.1.2 References
at
1
-Q
The following standards and other documents are referred to in this Part:
BS 5930 ......................Code of practice for site investigations.
BS EN 1997 ................Ground Investigation and testing
LL

Purposes
W

Engineering Group of the Geological Society Working Party Report The logging of rock cores
s
for engineering purposes (1970).

en
m
2.2 BOREHOLES GENERALLY

e
2.2.1 Method and Diameter

Si
1 The method of advancement and the diameter of a borehole shall be such that the boring
can be completed and logged to the designated depth, and samples of the designated
diameter can be obtained, in-situ testing carried out and instrumentation installed.
2 The following methods may be employed for advancement of a borehole unless otherwise
designated:
(a) Percussion boring.

(b) Auger boring (If hollow stem augering is proposed, the Contractor shall satisfy the
Employer that the SPT values obtained are not effected by disturbance of the soil by
the auger head, or the presence of material within the hollow stem.).
(c) Rotary drilling.
Part 02: Boreholes
2.2.2 Addition of Water to the Borehole
1 Jetting with water shall not be used to assist the advance of the borehole, except where
approved by the Engineer. Where the borehole penetrates below the water table and
disturbance of the soils is likely, a positive hydraulic head shall be maintained in the borehole.
2.2.3 Backfilling
1 The Contractor shall backfill boreholes in such a manner as to minimise subsequent

depression at the ground surface due to settlement of the backfill. In some circumstances,
grout or special infilling may be required by the Engineer. Where artesian or other water
conditions make normal backfilling impracticable, the Contractor shall consult and agree with
the Engineer a procedure for sealing the borehole.
2.3 PERCUSSION BORING
2.3.1 Hard Stratum or Obstruction in Percussion Boring
ar
1 In a borehole where percussion boring is employed and a hard stratum or obstruction is
at
encountered, the Contractor shall employ chiselling techniques for a period of up to 1 h.
-Q
Should this not penetrate through the hard stratum or obstruction the Contractor shall inform
the Engineer, who may instruct the use of one or more of the following:
LL
(a) continuation of chiselling techniques

(b) rotary or other approved drilling until the stratum is penetrated
W
(c) abandonment of the borehole.

s
2.4 AUGER BORING

en
2.4.1 Hand Auger

m
1 Hand auger boring may be appropriate in suitable self-supporting strata.

e
Si
2.4.2 Continuous Flight Auger Boring
1 Where continuous flight auger boring is used, it shall be carried out under the full-time
supervision of a person meeting the requirements of Part 1 Clause 1.5 Paragraph 5 Item (c)
who shall produce, as boring proceeds, a record of the material and groundwater
encountered.
2.4.3 Hollow Stem Flight Auger
1 Where hollow stem flight auger boring is used, the equipment used shall be such as to bore
and recover samples as designated. Sampling shall be carried out through the hollow stem.
2.5 ROTARY DRILLING
2.5.1 General
1 Rotary drilling may be required for the recovery of cores, or for the advancement of a hole in
rock, with or without core recovery.
Part 02: Boreholes
2.5.2 Drilling Fluid
1 The drilling fluid shall normally be clean water, air or air mist. However, with the approval of
the Engineer, drilling muds, additives or foam may be used.
2.5.3 Rotary Drilling with Core Recovery
1 Unless otherwise designated rotary core drilling shall be carried out by a double or triple tube
coring system incorporating a removable inner liner or split tube. The triple tube system may
be affected by use of a double tube barrel with an approved semi-rigid liner.
2 Rotary core drilling shall produce cores of not less than the designated diameter throughout
the core length. Care shall be exercised in the drilling so as to optimise core recovery.
3 The first drill run in each hole shall not exceed 1 m in length. Subsequent drill runs shall not
normally exceed 3 m in length and the core barrel shall be removed from the drill hole as
ar
often as is required to obtain the best possible core recovery or alternatively the core
samples shall be retrieved by means of wireline. The Engineer may designate in-situ testing
at
between drill runs.
-Q
4 Removal of cores and labelling of liners shall be carried out as follows:
(a) All operations entailed in recovering the cores from the ground after completion of
LL
drilling shall be carried out in a manner such as to minimise disturbance to the cores.
(b) Core barrels or inner tube in case of wireline shall be held horizontally while the
W
innermost liner containing the core is removed without vibration and in a manner to
prevent disturbance to the core. The core should be rigidly supported at all times while
s
it is being extruded and during subsequent handling, and the liner containing the core
en
must not be allowed to flex

(c) Immediately after removing the liner the top and bottom shall be marked in indelible
m
ink. The ends of liners shall be capped and sealed using adhesive tape. Liners shall
e
be cut to the length of the enclosed core. Alternatively, should a metallic split tube be
used, the samples shall be placed in half cut PVC pipes sealed with the second half
Si
after core samples description with marking of the core run on the PVC tube and the
core box.
(d) Where the length of core recovered from any single core run is such that it cannot be
accommodated in one channel of the core box, the liner shall be cut to coincide, if
possible, with existing fractures. The liner either side of the cut shall be marked 'cut'
and the ends capped as above.
(e) Each section of liner shall be marked with the contract title, exploratory hole reference
number, date and the depths of the top and bottom of the drill run.
(f) Core obtained without a liner and that from within the core catcher but not inside the
liner shall be wrapped in two layers of plastic cling film and labelled to indicate the
depth and exploratory hole reference number.
5 Core boxes, packing, labelling, storing shall be carried out as follows:
(a) Core boxes shall be soundly constructed and fitted with stout carrying handles,
fastenings and hinged lids. The total weight of the cores and box shall together not
exceed 60 kg.
Part 02: Boreholes
(b) Cores shall be rigidly and securely packed at the site of drilling and during all
subsequent handling and storage the cores shall remain packed unless required for
examination or testing. Cores shall be placed in the box, in their liners where used,
with the shallowest core to the top left hand corner, the top being considered adjacent
to the hinged section. Cores from the core catcher shall also be placed in the core
boxes at the correct relative depth.
(c) Depth shall be indicated on the core box by durable markers at the beginning and end
of each drill run. Rigid core spacers shall be used to indicate missing lengths. The
contract title, exploratory hole reference number and the depth of coring contained in
each bore shall be clearly indicated in indelible ink inside, on top and on the right-hand
end of the box and on the inside of the box lid.
(d) Core boxes containing core shall be kept horizontal and moved and handled with care
at all times. Cores shall be protected from direct sunlight. At the end of each day's
work, core boxes shall be stored secure from interference and protected from the
weather.
ar
6 Cores shall be prepared for examination as follows:
at
(a) Cores shall be prepared for examination by the removal of sealing materials and
splitting of liners in such a way as not to damage the cores. Plastic liners shall be cut
-Q
lengthways such that at least half the core circumference is exposed. If half PVC is
used, care should be taken while removing and replacing the split half.
(b) Before examination of the core, the Contractor shall photograph the cores. The time
LL
between beginning preparation and the examination of the prepared and photographed
cores shall be minimised to prevent loss of moisture from the core samples.
W
(c) Cores shall be examined and described on site by a person meeting the requirements
of Part 1 Clause 1.5 Paragraph 5 Item (c) in accordance with BS 5930 or ASTM D
s
2488 and the recommendations of the Engineering Group of the Geological Society
en
Working Party Report The logging of rock cores for engineering purpose (1970).
m
7 When the examination of the cores has been completed, the Contractor may be required to
retain separately designated core sub-samples for possible laboratory testing. The Contractor
e
shall cut the liner and cap and seal the core sub-samples in such a way as to prevent loss of
Si
moisture and sample disturbance. They shall be clearly labelled so that the location, depth
and origin of the sub-samples can be readily identified. Cores in their liners remaining after
the designated sub-samples have been removed shall be end-capped and resealed and
replaced in the original core box location. Rigid spacers shall be placed in the spaces in the
cores boxes previously occupied by the core sub-samples to prevent movement of adjacent
cores and these shall be labelled identically to the core sub-samples that they replace. The
core sub-samples shall be retained in separate core boxes clearly marked to indicate the
origin of the cores contained within.
8 The Contractor shall protect all cores and transport them including loading and unloading to
(a) The Contractor's premises.

(b) For a number of selected cores, to the designated address.
9 After submittal of the approved final report, the Contractor shall retain cores, other than those
delivered to the designated address, for a period of time required by the Engineer. The
Engineer's written permission shall be obtained before disposal of the cores, but the required
retention period will normally not exceed three months.
Part 02: Boreholes
2.5.4 Rotary Drilling without Core Recovery
1 Rotary blind bit or rotary percussive drilling may be used to advance a hole. The hole
diameter shall be as designated.
2 When used for the purpose of locating mineral seams, mineworkings, adits, shafts, other
cavities or anomalous conditions, drilling shall be under the full-time supervision of a person
meeting the requirements of Part 1 Clause 1.5 Paragraph 5 Item (c). As drilling proceeds a
systematic record shall be made of the drilling methods, rate of penetration, loss of flushing
medium, the material penetrated and any cavities or broken ground encountered.
2.5.5 Backfilling
1 Except where otherwise designated, the Contractor shall backfill rotary drill holes with clean,
well graded aggregate. The aggregate size and gradation shall be approved by the Engineer.
Under special circumstances grout may be required to backfill the holes. The grout shall
consist of equal portions by weight of ordinary Portland cement and bentonite mixed by
ar
machine or hand to a uniform colour and consistency before placing, with a moisture content
at
not greater than 250 %. The grout shall be introduced at the bottom of the hole by means of
a tremie pipe, which shall be raised but kept below the grout surface as the filling proceeds.
-Q
2 Where artesian water conditions or voids make normal grouting impracticable, the Contractor
shall consult and agree with the Engineer a procedure for sealing the drill hole.
LL
2.5.6 Photographs
W
1 In addition to the requirements of Part 1, the Contractor shall photograph cores where
required in a fresh condition before logging and ensure that the following criteria are fulfilled:
s
en
(a) A graduated scale in centimetres is provided.

(b) Labels and markers are clearly legible in the photograph.
m
(c) A clearly legible reference board identifying the project title, exploratory hole number,
e
date, and depth of drill runs shall be included in each photograph.

Si
(d) Core boxes are evenly and consistently lit.

(e) The length of the core box in each photograph fills the frame.
(f) The focal plane of the camera and the plane of the core box are parallel.
(g) The camera is placed in the same position with respect to the core box in every
photograph.
(h) The resolution of the camera is not less than 8Mpixels.
(i) The photograph taken should be in focus along all the core samples length.
2.6 BOREHOLES OVERWATER
1 When boreholes are required overwater the method of drilling and sampling shall comply in
general with the other requirements given in this Section, with the exception of backfilling.
2 Overwater boreholes shall be undertaken by the use of overwater staging, work over platform
(WOP) jack-up vessels, anchored floating vessels or any other methods agreed with the
Engineer.
Part 02: Boreholes
3 Control of the elevation related to the borehole/seabed surface or varying stratums shall be
related to the top of the casing installed. Anchored floating vessels will keep a constant
record of tidal movement between the vessel and the fixed casing elevation and make any
allowances necessary.
4 Boring or drilling operations will cease when the wave height exceeds the designated
maximum value relating to standing time due to inclement weather, if this item is applicable
to the Contract under the contract specific documentation.
5 An accurate method of measuring wave height from trough to crest will be installed on the
drilling vessel or platform and calibrated and approved by the Engineer before beginning
drilling operations.
6 All overwater operations will comply with all local government regulations related to such
work and will also comply fully with any Safety of Lives at Sea (SOLAS) regulations in force at
the time.
ar
END OF PART
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 03: Pits and Trenches
3 PITS AND TRENCHES ........................................................................................... 2

3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
3.1.1 Scope 2
3.1.2 References 2
3.1.3 Quality Assurance 2
3.2 PITS AND TRENCHES GENERALLY ..................................................................... 2
3.2.1 Pit and Trench Dimensions 2
3.2.2 Contaminated Ground 2
3.2.3 Groundwater 3
3.2.4 Protection to Pits and Trenches Left Open 3
3.2.5 Backfilling and Restoration 3
3.2.6 Photographs 3
3.3 INSPECTION PITS .................................................................................................. 3
3.3.1 Excavation Method 3
ar
3.3.2 Services 3
3.3.3 Sidewall Stability 4
at
3.4 TRIAL PITS AND TRENCHES ................................................................................ 4
-Q
3.4.2 Services 4
LL
3.4.4 Trial Pits Examination 4

3.5 OBSERVATION PITS AND TRENCHES ................................................................. 4
W

3.5.2 Services 5
s

en
e m
Si
3 PITS AND TRENCHES
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
1 Inspection pits, trial pits and trenches, observation pits and trenches.

This Section
Part 1, .............. General
Section 1, ....... General

Section 4, ....... Foundations and Retaining Structures
Section 6, ....... Roadworks
Section 8, ....... Drainage Works
ar
Section 12, ..... Earthworks Related to Buildings.
at
3.1.2 References -Q
BS 5930 ...................... Code of practice for site investigations
LL
BS EN 1997 ................Ground Investigation and testing

W

Purposes
s

en
Code of Practice and Specifications for Road Openings in the Highway issued by the
Government.
m
3.1.3 Quality Assurance

e
Si
1 Trial pits and trenches and observation pits and trenches shall be examined and described
by a geotechnical person meeting the requirements of Part 1 Clause 1.5 Paragraph 5 Item
(c) and photographed, if required.
3.2 PITS AND TRENCHES GENERALLY
3.2.1 Pit and Trench Dimensions
1 Unless otherwise designated

2.
(a) Trial pits and observation pits shall have a minimum base area of 1.5 m
(b) Trial trenches and observation trenches shall not be less than 1 m wide.
3.2.2 Contaminated Ground
1 Ground that is suspected of being contaminated shall be described by an environmental or

geotechnical person, as appropriate, meeting the requirements of Part 1 Clause 1.5
Paragraph 5 Item (c).
3.2.3 Groundwater
1 The Contractor shall divert surface water runoff from entering pits and trenches.
2 Groundwater shall be controlled by the use of wellpoints or sump pumps to permit continuous
work if required.
3.2.4 Protection to Pits and Trenches Left Open
1 Where pits and trenches are required to be left open and unattended, the Contractor shall
provide fencing together with all necessary lighting and signing.
2 Precautions shall be taken to protect the pits and trenches from the adverse effects of
weather during this period.
3.2.5 Backfilling and Restoration
ar
1 Pits and trenches shall be backfilled as soon as practicable and reinstated to their original
condition.
at
2 The backfill shall be placed in lifts of 150 mm thickness and compacted in such a manner as
-Q
to minimise any subsequent settlement of the ground surface.
3 The use of sand backfill compacted by flooding may be permitted, but this method requires
LL

W
4 In paved areas, the pavement shall be restored.
3.2.6 Photographs
s
en
1 In addition to the requirements of Part 1, photographs shall clearly show details of the ground
conditions in the pit and trench with any support in place and shall contain a graduated scale.
e m
2 Material derived from the excavation shall be photographed, when directed by the Engineer.
Artificial lighting shall be used where necessary.
Si
3 Unless directed otherwise by the Engineer, three photographs will normally be required at
every pit and trench.
3.3 INSPECTION PITS
3.3.1 Excavation Method
1 Inspection pits for the location of underground services shall be excavated by hand to a
depth of 1.2 m unless otherwise designated.
2 Hand-operated power tools may be used to assist excavation where necessary.
3.3.2 Services
1 The locations, depths and dimensions of all services encountered shall be measured and
recorded in the daily report with other designated information.
3.3.3 Sidewall Stability
1 Due care shall be exercised to ensure the stability of the sides of the excavation at all times.
3.4 TRIAL PITS AND TRENCHES
1 Trial pits and trenches shall be excavated by hand to a maximum depth of 1.2 m or by
machine to the required depth to enable visual examination and sampling from outside the pit
or trench as required.
2 Where dewatering is required, the pumping equipment used shall be adequate to lower the
water table to the required level.
3.4.2 Services
ar
at
-Q
1 Excavations deeper than 1.2 m shall be braced if necessary.
LL
3.4.4 Trial Pits Examination

W
1 All recovered materials from the Trial Pits shall be examined in accordance with BS 5930 or
ASTM D 2488 and the recommendations of the Engineering Group of the Geological Society
s
Working Party.
en
2 Disturbed samples shall be obtained from the trial pits for laboratory testing and geological
m
description purposes. The samples shall be taken to be representative of the actual site
conditions (i.e. from each layer) and placed in airtight bags, labeled and taken to laboratories
e
for examination and testing.

Si
3 Color photographs shall be taken for each excavated trial pit with a metric scale laid into the
pit after cleaning it, indicating the pits details such as trial pit number, date and depth.
3.5 OBSERVATION PITS AND TRENCHES
1 Observation pits and trenches shall be excavated by hand or machine and shall be
adequately supported to enable personnel to enter safely and to permit in-situ examination,
soil sampling and testing as required. In areas where dewatering is required, the equipment
and methods proposed must be approved by the Engineer before beginning the work.
2 All recovered materials from the pit/trench shall be examined in accordance with BS 5930 or
ASTM D 2488.
3 Disturbed samples shall be obtained for laboratory testing and geological description
purposes (if required). The samples shall be taken to be representative of the actual site
conditions (i.e. from each layer) and placed in airtight bags, labeled and taken to laboratories
for examination and testing.
4 Color photographs shall be taken for each excavated pit with a metric scale laid into the pit
after cleaning it, indicating the pits details such as trial pit number, date and depth.
3.5.2 Services
1 Due care shall be exercised to ensure the stability of the sides of the excavation at all times.
ar
END OF PART
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 04: Soil Sampling
4 SOIL SAMPLING ..................................................................................................... 2

4.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
4.1.1 Scope 2
4.1.2 References 2
4.2 SAMPLING GENERALLY ........................................................................................ 2
4.2.1 Sampling and Testing Frequency 2
4.2.2 Recording depths of samples 3
4.2.3 Description of samples 3
4.2.4 Labelling, Protection and Transportation of Samples 3
4.2.5 Retention and Disposal of Samples 3
4.3 SOIL SAMPLES....................................................................................................... 3
4.3.1 Small Disturbed Samples 3
4.3.2 Bulk Disturbed Samples 3
4.3.3 Open Tube and Piston Samples 4
ar
4.3.4 Standard Penetration Test Samples 4
at
4.4 GROUNDWATER SAMPLES .................................................................................. 4
4.5 SAMPLES OF SUSPECTED CONTAMINATED GROUND, GROUNDWATER AND
-Q
LEACHATE FOR CHEMICAL ANALYSIS ................................................................ 4
4.6 GAS SAMPLING...................................................................................................... 5
LL
4.7 SPECIAL SAMPLING .............................................................................................. 5

W
s
en
e m
Si
4 SOIL SAMPLING
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 Taking of samples of soil, groundwater, gas and contaminants. Sample handling,

transportation, storage, retention and disposal.

This Section
Part 1, .............. General
Part 2, .............. Boreholes
Part 3, .............. Pits and Trenches.
4.1.2 References
ar
1 The following documents are referred to in this Part:
at
-Q
Purposes
LL
BS 5930 ......................Code of practice for site investigations

BSI –DD 175 ..............Code of practice for the identification of potentially contaminated land
W
and its investigation (draft for development).

BS EN 1997--- ............ Ground Investigation and testing
s
en
ICE et al, Soil Investigation Steering Group (SISG) Publication, Soil investigation in
construction, Part 4, Guidelines for the safe investigation by drilling of landfills and
m
contaminated land, Thomas Telford, (1993).

e
Si
4.2 SAMPLING GENERALLY
4.2.1 Sampling and Testing Frequency
1 The frequency of sampling and in-situ testing is dependent on the ground conditions. In the
absence of designated requirements the intervals observed shall be as follows:
(a) in boreholes
(i) first open tube sample (generally in clay soils) or standard penetration test
(SPT) (generally in granular soils) at 0.5 m depth, the next at 1.0 m depth,
thereafter at 1 m intervals to 5 m depth then at 1.5 m intervals.
(ii) small disturbed samples shall be taken from the topsoil, at each change in soil
(iii) type or consistency and midway between successive open tube samples or
SPT’s.
(iv) Bulk disturbed samples shall be taken of each soil type.
(b) in pits and trenches
(i) Small disturbed samples shall be taken of the topsoil, at each change in soil
type or consistency and between successive bulk disturbed samples.
(ii) Bulk disturbed samples shall be taken at 1 m depth intervals, with at least one
large bulk disturbed sample of each soil type.
4.2.2 Recording depths of samples
1 The depths below ground level at which samples are taken shall be recorded. For open tube
and piston samples the depth to the top and bottom of the sample, and the length of sample
obtained shall be given. For bulk samples the limits of the sampled zone shall be recorded.
4.2.3 Description of samples
1 All samples shall be examined and described by a geotechnical person meeting the
requirements of Part 1, Clause 1.3.1, Paragraph 5 Item (c) in accordance with BS 5930.
Samples of suspected contaminated ground and leachate shall be described by an
ar
environmental or geotechnical person meeting the requirements of Part 1, Clause 1.5,
Paragraph 5 Item (c) in accordance with DD 175. Descriptions shall include colour and smell
at
with reference to specific inclusions.
-Q
4.2.4 Labelling, Protection and Transportation of Samples
1 Samples shall be clearly labelled in accordance with BS 5930. Samples of fill, groundwater,
LL
leachate or contaminated ground suspected to be toxic or hazardous shall be tagged with a

red label.
W
2 Samples shall be protected from direct heat and sunlight.

s
3 Samples shall be transported to the Contractor's premises. Where required by the Engineer,
en
selected samples shall be delivered to the designated address.

m
4.2.5 Retention and Disposal of Samples

e
1 Samples shall be kept for the designated period after submission of the approved final report.
Si
This period shall not exceed three months, unless specifically designated otherwise. The
Contractor shall ultimately dispose of all samples other than those delivered to the
designated address.
4.3 SOIL SAMPLES
4.3.1 Small Disturbed Samples
1 Small disturbed samples shall weigh not less than 0.5 kg. They shall be placed immediately
in airtight containers, which they should sensibly fill.
4.3.2 Bulk Disturbed Samples
1 Bulk disturbed samples shall be representative of the zone from which they have been taken.
2 Normal bulk disturbed samples shall weigh not less than 10 kg.
3 Large bulk disturbed samples shall weigh not less than 30 kg.
4.3.3 Open Tube and Piston Samples
1 Open tube and piston samples shall be taken using the sampling equipment and procedures
as described in BS 5930. The diameter shall be 100 mm unless otherwise designated.
2 Before an open tube or piston sample is taken, the bottom of the hole shall be carefully
cleared of disturb materials and where a casing is being used the sample shall be taken
below the bottom of the casing. Following a break in the work exceeding one hour, the
borehole shall be advanced by 250 mm before open tube or piston sampling is resumed.
3 Where an attempt to take an open tube or piston sample is unsuccessful the hole shall be
cleaned out for the full depth to which the sampling tube has penetrated and the recovered
soil saved as a bulk disturbed sample. A fresh attempt shall then be made from the level of
the base of the unsuccessful attempt. Should this second attempt also prove unsuccessful
the Contractor shall agree with the Engineer as to alternative means of sampling.
4 The samples shall be sealed immediately to preserve their natural moisture content and in
ar
such a manner as to prevent the sealant from entering any voids in the sample.
at
5 Soil from the cutting shoe of an open tube shall be retained as an additional small disturbed
-Q
sample.
4.3.4 Standard Penetration Test Samples

LL
1 When a standard penetration test (SPT) is made, the sample from the split barrel sampler
shall be retained as a small disturbed sample.
W
4.4 GROUNDWATER SAMPLES

s
en
1 Groundwater samples shall be taken from each exploratory hole where groundwater is
encountered. Where more than one groundwater level is found, each one shall be sampled
m
separately. Where water has been previously added, the hole shall be bailed out before
e
sampling so that only groundwater is present. The sample volume shall be not less than 0.25
Si
l.
4.5 SAMPLES OF SUSPECTED CONTAMINATED GROUND,

GROUNDWATER AND LEACHATE FOR CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
1 Samples of suspected contaminated ground, groundwater and leachate shall be taken in

accordance with DD 175 and the SISG publication under the supervision of an environmental
or geotechnical person meeting the requirements of Part 1, Clause 1.5, Paragraph 5 Item (c).
2 The size and type of sample and container, method of sampling and time limitations for
carrying out specific analyses shall be commensurate with the range of analyses to be
carried out or as designated.
4.6 GAS SAMPLING
1 Samples of gas for chromatographic analysis shall be obtained from exploratory holes or
standpipes in accordance with DD 175 and the SISG publication. The sampling method shall
relate to the volume of gas available and the type of laboratory analysis. The sampler
receptacle shall be airtight and may include lockable syringes, Teflon-lined bags or gas
bombs.
4.7 SPECIAL SAMPLING
1 The Engineer may require special sampling. This work will normally require supervision on
site by a geotechnical person and shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5930 or as
designated.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 05: In-Situ Testing, Instrumentation and Monitoring
5 IN-SITU TESTING, INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING............................... 2

5.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
5.1.1 Scope 2
5.1.2 References 2
5.2 TESTING, INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING GENERALLY ...................... 2
5.2.1 Testing 2
5.2.2 Instrumentation and Monitoring 3
5.3 TESTS ..................................................................................................................... 3
5.3.1 Tests in accordance with BS 1377 or BS EN 1997 3
5.3.2 Tests in accordance with BS 5930 4
5.3.3 Geophysical Methods of Investigation 4
5.3.4 Special In-Situ Testing 4
5.3.5 Hand Penetrometer and Hand Vane for Shear Strength 5
5.3.6 Self-boring Pressuremeter 5
ar
5.4 INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING .............................................................. 6
at
5.4.1 Groundwater 6
5.4.2 Installation of Standpipes and Piezometers -Q 6
5.4.3 Installation of Gas Monitoring Standpipes 6
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
5 IN-SITU TESTING, INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
1 Testing of soils in place, and provision of instrumentation and monitoring of groundwater and
subsurface gases.

This Section
Part 1 ............... General
Part 2 ............... Boreholes
Part 3 ............... Pits and Trenches.
5.1.2 References
ar
at
-Q
Purposes
BS 1377......................Methods of tests for soils for civil engineering purposes
LL
BS 5930......................Code of practice for site investigations

W
BS 7022......................Geophysical logging of boreholes for hydrogeological purposes

BS EN 1997................Ground Investigation and testing
s
en
The Geological Society Engineering Group Working Party Report on Engineering

Geophysics, Quarterly Journal of Engineering Geology, 21, pp. 207-271, 1988.
m
Clarke B.G. and Smith A., A model specification for radial displacement measuring
e
pressuremeters, Ground Engineering, Volume 25, No. 2, March, 1992.

Si
5.2 TESTING, INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING GENERALLY
5.2.1 Testing
1 The following information shall be submitted for each test record to be included in the daily
report, preliminary log and factual report:
(a) Date of test.

(b) Project name, exploratory hole number and location.
(c) Depth and location of test or depths covered by test.
(d) Information on water levels in exploratory hole during testing.
(e) Original ground level at test site.
(f) Soil type and description as identified from the sample.
2 All results shall be reported in SI units.

3 Where load, displacement or other measuring equipment is used which necessitates regular
calibration, then this shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant standard (the
preferred method) or the manufacturer's instructions, by a calibration service approved by the
Central Materials Laboratory. Evidence of calibrations and copies of calibration charts shall
be supplied to the Engineer prior to commencing work and when otherwise requested.
5.2.2 Instrumentation and Monitoring
1 The top of each standpipe, gas monitoring standpipe and piezometer tube shall be protected
by a cover. The type of protective cover shall be approved by the Engineer.
2 When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall install a protective fence around the
top of a standpipe or piezometer. The fence shall be constructed of corrosion treated angle
iron, galvanised wire, and corrosion resistant wire mesh fencing suitable for use in the
climate of Qatar or a fence as a agreed upon with the Engineer.
3 Daily readings of depths to water in groundwater monitoring standpipes and piezometers
ar
shall be made by the Contractor, with an instrument approved by the Engineer.
at
4 Where the presence of gas is suspected or when directed by the Engineer, gas
-Q
measurements, using an approved in-situ meter, shall be made by the Contractor during
construction of exploratory holes and in gas monitoring standpipes. The depth to water and
barometric pressure shall be measured immediately after each gas measurement.
LL
5 Unless otherwise designated, piezometers, and standpipes protection shall not be removed
from the site.
W
6 Other instrumentation and monitoring shall be carried out as designated.

s
en
5.3 TESTS
m
5.3.1 Tests in accordance with BS 1377 or BS EN 1997

e
1 The following in-situ tests shall be carried out and reported in accordance with BS 1377 or
Si
BS EN 1997:
(a) in-situ density by

(i) Small pouring cylinder method.
(ii) Large pouring cylinder method.
(iii) Water replacement method.
(iv) Core cutter method.
(v) Nuclear method.
(b) Static cone penetration test (CPT), capacity to suit scheduled depths unless otherwise
designated
(c) Dynamic probing (DPH or DPSH).
(d) Standard penetration test (SPT).
(e) Plate loading test.
(f) Shallow pad maintained load test.
(g) California bearing ratio (CBR).

(h) Vane shear strength.
(i) Apparent resistivity of soil.
(j) Redox potential.
(k) Pressurementer or Self-boring Pressuremeter (PMT)
(l) Pocket Penetrometer.
5.3.2 Tests in accordance with BS 5930
1 The following in-situ tests shall be carried out where applicable and reported in accordance
with BS 5930:
(a) Constant head permeability test.
(b) Variable head permeability test.
(c) Packer permeability test.
ar
5.3.3 Geophysical Methods of Investigation
at
1 Geophysical testing shall be carried out as designated. The Contractor shall submit to the
-Q
Engineer a full description of equipment and procedure for each geophysical method
required.
2 The equipment and procedure, and information to be submitted for the following geophysical
LL
methods of investigation, shall be as described in BS 5930, BS 7022 and the Geological

Society Engineering Group Working Party Report on Engineering Geophysics:
W
3
s
en
(a) electrical resistivity method

(b) seismic refraction and reflection method
m
(c) magnetic method

e
(d) gravity method

Si
(e) electromagnetic method

(i) Ground conductivity.
(ii) Transient electromagnetic.
(iii) Ground probing radar (optional).
(f) Borehole geophysical logging.
(g) Cross-hole seismic method.
(h) Multi Channel Analysis of Surface Waves (MASW)
(i) Refraction Microtremor (ReMi)
5.3.4 Special In-Situ Testing
1 Special in-situ testing shall be carried out as designated.
2 The Contractor shall allow for the excavation of boreholes, trenches or trial pits necessary for
the execution of inspection tests.
3 Inspection tests shall be decided as directed by the Engineer. These tests shall include but
not limited to those in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2: Quality Assurance Tests for Completed Work
Recommended Test per Layer
Shallow Fill Deep Fill

(trench or test pit) (boreholes)
In-situ CBR Field density
Plate load Test Layer Thickness
Field density DCP Test
Layer Thickness SPT
DCP Test Pressure meter
ar
Large Scale Loading
at
5.3.5 Hand Penetrometer and Hand Vane for Shear Strength
-Q
1 Hand penetrometer and hand vane tests shall be carried out where required to give a
preliminary estimate of undrained shear strength of the soil tested.
LL
2 Hand (or pocket) penetrometer equipment shall be of an approved proprietary make with
2
W
stainless steel tip of end area 31 mm with an engraved penetration line 6 mm from the tip.
The scale shall be suitably graduated. The procedure for the test shall be in accordance with
s
the manufacturer's instructions. Both unconfined compressive strength and estimated shear
en
strength shall be reported for the soil tested.
3 Hand vane equipment shall be of an approved proprietary make with stainless steel vanes
m
having a length of 19 mm or 33 mm and a length-to-diameter ratio of 2:1. The scale shall be

e
suitably graduated. The procedure for test shall be in accordance with BS 5930 and the
Si
manufacturer's instructions. Peak shear strength and residual shear strength shall be
recorded.
4 The reported shear strengths for the hand penetrometer and handvane shall be the average
of 3 tests in close proximity. Tests giving inconsistent results shall be reported and
comments on the relevance of the tests noted.
5.3.6 Self-boring Pressuremeter
1 The equipment shall be of the Cambridge type (soft ground) self-boring pressuremeter (SBP)
unless otherwise designated. The instruments, calibration, operator, installation, testing
procedure, on-site data processing and analysis, information to be submitted, report data
processing and analysis and information to be submitted in the report shall be as described
by Clarke and Smith (1992) and as designated..
5.4 INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING
5.4.1 Groundwater
1 When groundwater is encountered in exploratory holes, the depth from ground level of the
point of entry shall be recorded together with depth of any casing. Exploratory hole
operations shall be stopped and the depth from ground level to water level recorded with an
approved instrument at 5 minutes intervals for a period of 20 minutes. If at the end of the
period of 20 minutes the water level is still rising, this shall be recorded together with the
depth to water below ground level, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, and the
exploratory hole shall then be continued. If casing is used and this forms a seal against the
entry of groundwater, the Contractor shall record the depth of casing at which no further entry
or only insignificant infiltration of water occurred.
2 Water levels shall be recorded as required by the Contract and at the beginning and end of
each shift. On each occasion when groundwater levels are recorded, the depth of the
ar
exploratory hole, the depth of any casing and the time shall also be recorded.
at
3 Where artesian conditions are encountered, the Contractor shall immediately inform the
Engineer and agree a method for dealing with the conditions.
-Q
5.4.2 Installation of Standpipes and Piezometers
LL
1 Standpipes for monitoring groundwater levels and changes in groundwater levels shall be
installed in exploratory holes, as instructed by the Engineer. They shall be to the designated
W
form and detail, and appropriate dimensions and depths shall be recorded at the time of
installation.
s
2 Standpipe piezometers for monitoring groundwater levels in exploratory holes shall be

en
installed as instructed by the Engineer. They shall be to the designated form and detail, and
appropriate dimensions. The installation details of the standpipe piezometers shall be
m
recorded.
e
3 The Contractor shall install piezometers of the hydraulic, electrical or pneumatic type
Si
described in BS 5930 or as designated by the Engineer.
5.4.3 Installation of Gas Monitoring Standpipes
1 Standpipes for monitoring gas concentration in exploratory holes shall be installed as

instructed by the Engineer. Warning signs or other safety measures required by the Civil
Defence Department of the Government shall be complied with. Standpipes shall be of the
designated form and detail. All dimensions and depths shall he recorded at the time of
installation.
END OF PART
Part 06: Laboratory Testing
6 LABORATORY TESTING ........................................................................................ 2

6.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
6.1.1 Scope 2
6.1.2 References 2
6.2 SCHEDULE OF TESTS ........................................................................................... 2
6.3 TESTING PROCEDURES ....................................................................................... 3
6.3.1 General 3
6.3.2 Geotechnical Testing on Contaminated Samples 3
6.3.3 Soil Testing 3
6.3.4 Rock Testing 3
6.4 CHEMICAL TESTING FOR CONTAMINATED GROUND ....................................... 4
6.4.2 Laboratory Testing On Site 6
6.4.3 Special Laboratory Testing 6
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
6 LABORATORY TESTING
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
1 Geotechnical tests and testing procedures carried out in the laboratory or, when designated,
on site.

This Section
Part 1, .............. General
Part 3, .............. Soil Sampling
Section 6, ........ Roadworks

Section 8, ........ Drainage Works
ar
Section 12, ...... Earthworks Related to Buildings
at
6.1.2 References -Q
LL
Purposes
W
ASTM SP 402.............Special Technical Publications No. 402

s
BS 1377 ......................Methods of tests for soils for civil engineering purposes

en
BS 1881 ......................Analysis of hardened concrete

m
BS 812 ........................Testing aggregates

BS EN 1997--------- .....Ground Investigation and testing
e
Si
Brown E.T. (Editor). Rock characterisation testing and monitoring. International Society for
Rock Mechanics Suggested Methods. 1981. Pergamon Press.
C2 through C25 and C27 through C31, Methods for examination of waters and associated
materials, HMSO
IRSM Commission on Testing Methods. Suggested method for determining Point Load
Strength (revised version). Int. J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. Abst., 22,
51-60 (1985).
6.2 SCHEDULE OF TESTS
1 The Contractor shall prepare a schedule of tests for approval by the Engineer. It may be
necessary to designate additional testing after the results of the original tests are available.
Unless otherwise agreed, testing schedules are to be provided within six working days of the
receipt by the Engineer of the relevant preliminary logs. The Contractor shall inform the
Engineer within six working days from the receipt of the approved testing schedule if a
sample referred to in the schedule is not available for testing.
6.3 TESTING PROCEDURES
6.3.1 General
1 Where applicable, all preparation, testing and reporting shall be in accordance with the
relevant Qatar National Standard or British Standards or ASTM Standards. Where tests are
not covered by these Standards, they shall be performed in accordance with the procedures
in the references or as designated.
2 Calibration of load-displacement or other measuring equipment shall be carried out in

accordance with the relevant standard (the preferred method) or the manufacturer’s
instructions by a calibration service approved by the Central Materials Laboratory. Evidence
of current calibrations shall be supplied to the Engineer.
6.3.2 Geotechnical Testing on Contaminated Samples
1 Where geotechnical testing is required on samples of suspected contaminated material,
ar
indicative chemical testing shall be carried out and a safe method of working approved by the
at
Engineer before any such work is started. It should be noted that this may include but is not
limited to the safe storage, transportation and handling of all suspect material.
-Q
6.3.3 Soil Testing
LL
1 Soil testing shall be carried out and reported in accordance with BS 1377 or ASTM Standards
unless otherwise designated.
W
6.3.4 Rock Testing

s
1 Rock testing shall be carried out and reported in accordance with the following references
en
and as designated:
(a) Classification.
m
(i) Natural water content - Brown (1981).

e
(ii) Porosity/density - Brown (1981).

Si
(iii) Void index - Brown (1981).

(iv) Carbonate content - BS 1881.
(v) Petrographic description -Brown (1981).
(b) Durability.
(i) Slake durability index - Brown (1981).
(ii) Soundness by solution of magnesium sulphate - BS 812.
(c) Hardness.
(i) Shore sclerometer -Brown (1981).
(ii) Schmidt rebound hardness - Brown (1981).
(d) Aggregates.
(i) Aggregate crushing value - BS 812.
(ii) Ten percent fines - BS 812.
(iii) Aggregate impact value - BS 812.
(iv) Aggregate abrasion value - BS 812.

(v) Polished stone value - BS 812.
(vi) Aggregate frost heave - BS 812.
(e) Strength.
(i) Uniaxial compressive strength - Brown (1981).
(ii) Deformability in uniaxial compression -Brown (1981).
(iii) Tensile strength-Brown (1981).
 Direct tensile strength.
 Indirect tensile strength by the Brazilian method.
(iv) Undrained triaxial compression without measurement of porewater pressure-
Brown (1981).
(v) Direct shear strength - Brown (1981).
(vi) Swelling pressure - Brown (1981).
ar
 Swelling pressure index under conditions of zero volume change.
 Swelling strain index for a radially confined specimen with axial surcharge.
at
 Swelling strain developed in an unconfined rock specimen.
(vii)
-Q
Point load test - IRSM Commission on Testing Methods (1985).
(f) Geophysical.
(i) Seismic velocity-Brown (1981).
LL
6.4 CHEMICAL TESTING FOR CONTAMINATED GROUND

W
1 Chemical testing for contaminated ground shall be carried out and reported in accordance
with the following references and as designated:
s
en
(a) Primary contaminants in soil.

(i) Arsenic total - C4.
m
(ii) Cadmium total - C2.

e
(iii) Chromium total - C2.

Si
(iv) hexavalent chromium (undertaken if total chromium content >25 mg/kg dry
Mass) -C2.
(v) Lead total - C2.

(vi) Mercury total - C3.
(vii) Selenium total - C4.
(viii) Boron, water-soluble - C5.
(ix) Copper total - C2.
(x) Nickel total - C2.
(xi) Zinc total - C2.
(xii) Cyanide total (alkali extraction methods) - C6.
(xiii) Cyanide complex - C6.
(xiv) Cyanide free - C6.
(xv) Thiocyanate - C6.
(xvi) (Tests xiii, xiv and xv undertaken if total cyanide >25 mg/kg dry mass. Methods
shall follow alkali extraction.)
(xvii) Phenols total - C7.
(xviii) Sulphide - C8.
(xix) Sulphate - total, acid, soluble - C9.
(xx) Sulphate - water soluble, 2 : 1 extract - C9.
(xxi) Sulphur free - C10.
(xxii) PH value - C9.
(xxiii) Toluene extractable matter - Cl1.
(xxiv) Coal tar/polyaromatic hydrocarbons (undertaken if toluene extractable matter>
2000 g/kg dry mass of soil) - C12.
(xxv) Asbestos. Asbestos content determination shall be carried out by visual
examination and polarised light microscopy.
ar
(b) Secondary contaminants in soil.
(i) Antimony total - C13.
at
(ii) Barium total - C13. -Q
(iii) Beryllium total - C15.
(iv) Vanadium total - C13.
LL
(v) Cyclohexane extractable matter - C14.

(vi) Freon extractable matter - C15.
W
(vii) Mineral oils - C31.

(viii) Chloride - C9.
s
(c) Contaminants in water.

en
(i) Arsenic - C4.

m
(ii) Cadmium - C2 and C23.

e
(iii) Chromium - C2 and C24.

Si
(iv) Hexavalent chromium - C2.

(v) Lead - C2 and C25.
(vi) Mercury - C3.
(vii) Selenium - C4.
(viii) Boron - C5 and C6.
(ix) Copper - C2 and C27.
(x) Nickel - C2 and C28.
(xi) Zinc - C2 and C29.
(xii) Cyanide total - C6.
(xiii) Cyanide complex - C6.
(xiv) Cyanide free - C6.
(xv) Thiocyanate - C6.
(xvi) Phenols total - C7.
(xvii) Sulphide - C8.
(xviii) Sulphate - C9.

(xix) Sulphur free - C10.
(xx) PH value - C9.
(xxi) Polyaromatic hydrocarbons - C 12.
(xxii) Antimony-C13.
(xxiii) Barium-C13.
(xxiv) Beryllium-C15.
(xxv) Vanadium - C 13.
(xxvi) Chloride - C9.
(xxvii) Ammoniacal nitrogen - C16.
(xxviii) Nitrate nitrogen - Cl7.
(xxix) Chemical oxygen demand - C18.
(xxx) Biochemical oxygen demand - C19.
ar
(xxxi) Total organic carbon - C20.
at
(xxxii) Volatile fatty acids - C21. -Q
(xxxiii) Iron - C22.
(xxxiv) Manganese - C22.
(xxxv) Calcium - C31.
LL
(xxxvi) Sodium - C31.

W
(xxxvii) Magnesium - C31.

(xxxviii) Potassium - C21.
s
(d) Constituents of gas samples.

en
(i) Carbon dioxide - C30.

m
(ii) Hydrogen - C30.

(iii) Hydrogen sulphide - C30.
e
Si
(iv) Methane - C30.

(v) Nitrogen - C30.
(vi) Oxygen - C30.
(vii) Ethane- C30.
(viii) Propane- C30.
(ix) Carbon monoxide - C30.
6.4.2 Laboratory Testing On Site
1 When designated, tests listed under laboratory testing shall be carried out on site.
6.4.3 Special Laboratory Testing
1 When designated, special laboratory testing shall be carried out.
END OF PART
QCS 2014 Section 04: Foundations and Retaining Structures Page 1
Part 01: General Requirements for Piling Work
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PILING WORK ................................................. 2

1.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Scope 2
1.1.2 References 2
1.1.3 General Contract Requirements 2
1.1.4 Submittals 3
1.1.5 Records 3
1.2 GROUND CONDITIONS ......................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Ground Investigation Reports 3
1.2.2 Unexpected Ground Conditions 4
1.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP........................................................................ 4
1.3.1 General 4
1.3.2 Sources of Supply 4
1.3.3 Rejected materials 5
ar
1.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES .............................................................................. 5
at
1.4.1 Setting Out 5
1.4.2 Position -Q 6
1.4.3 Verticality 6
1.4.4 Rake 6
1.4.5 Tolerance Variations 6
LL
1.4.6 Forcible Corrections to Pile 6

1.5 NUISANCE AND DAMAGE ..................................................................................... 6
W
1.5.1 Noise and Disturbance 6

1.5.2 Damage to Adjacent Structures 7
s
1.5.3 Damage to Piles 7

en
1.5.4 Temporary Support 7

m
1.6 SAFETY .................................................................................................................. 7

1.6.1 General 7
e
1.6.2 Life-Saving Appliances 7

Si
1.6.3 Driving 7
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PILING WORK
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Part is concerned with all works associated with installation of piles by any of the
recognised techniques.
1.1.2 References
1 The following standards and codes of practice are referred to in this Part:
BS 5228......................Noise control on construction and open sites
Part I, Code of practice for basic information and procedures for noise
control
ar
Part IV, Code of practice for noise and vibration control applicable to
piling operations
at
BS 8008......................Safety precautions and procedures for the construction and descent of
-Q
machine-bored shafts for piling and other purposes
BS EN 1997................Eurocode 7, Geotechnical Design.

LL
W
1.1.3 General Contract Requirements
1 The following matters, where appropriate, are described in the contract specific
s
documentation for the Works:

en
(a) general items related to Works

m
(i) Nature of the Works.

e
(ii) Classes of loads on piles.

Si
(iii) Contract drawings.

(iv) Other works proceeding at the same time.
(v) Working area.
(vi) Order of the Works.
(vii) Datum.
(viii) Offices for the Engineer's Representative.
(ix) Particular facilities and attendance items where not included in this section.
(x) Details of soil investigation reports.
(b) specific items related to particular type of pile

(i) Soil sampling, laboratory testing and in-situ soil testing.
(ii) Designed concrete or grout mixes, grades of concrete or grout, type of cement
and aggregate, grout or concrete admixtures, concreting of piles.
(iii) Grades and types of reinforcement and prestressing tendons.

(iv) Pile dimensions, length and marking of piles.
(v) Type and quality of pile shoe/splice.
(vi) Type and quality of permanent casing.
(vii) Specified working loads.
(viii) Sections of proprietary types of pile, grades of steel, minimum length to be
supplied, thickness of circumferential weld reinforcement.
(ix) Surface preparation, types and thickness of coatings.
(x) Test piles, driving resistance or dynamic evaluation and penetration.
(xi) Detailed requirements for driving records.
(xii) Acceptance criteria for piles under test.
(xiii) Disposal of cut-off lengths.
ar
(xiv) Preboring.
at
1.1.4 Submittals -Q
1 The Contractor shall supply for approval all relevant details of the method of piling and the
plant he proposes to use. Any alternative method to that specified shall be subject to
approval.
LL
2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer on the first day of each week, or at such longer
W
periods as the Engineer may from time to time direct, a progress report showing the current
rate of progress and progress during the previous period on all important items of each
s
section of the Works.

en
3 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer each day of the intended programme of piling for
m
the following day and shall give adequate notice of his intention to work outside normal hours
and at weekends.
e
Si
1.1.5 Records
1 The Contractor shall keep records, as indicated by an asterisk in Table 1.1, of the installation
of each pile and shall submit two signed copies of these records to the Engineer not later
than noon of the next working day after the pile is installed. The signed records will form a
record of the work. Any unexpected driving or boring conditions shall be noted briefly in the
records.
1.2 GROUND CONDITIONS
1.2.1 Ground Investigation Reports
1 Factual information and reports on site investigations for the Works and on the previous
known uses of the Site will be provided by the Engineer where they exist as part of the
specific contract documentation. However, even if a full report is given, including
interpretations, opinions or conclusions, no responsibility is accepted by the Engineer for any
opinions or conclusions which may be given in the reports.
2 Before the start of work the Contractor shall be given a copy of any subsequent information
which may have been obtained relating to the ground conditions and previous uses of the
Site.
1.2.2 Unexpected Ground Conditions
1 The Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer any circumstance which indicates
that in the Contractor's opinion the ground conditions differ from those reported in or which
could have been inferred from the site investigation reports or test pile results.
1.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
1.3.1 General
1 All materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the appropriate British Standards,
codes of practice and other approved standards current at the date of tender except where
the requirements of these standards or codes of practice are in conflict with this Section in
ar
which case the requirements of this Section shall take precedence.
at
1.3.2 Sources of Supply -Q
1 The sources of supply of materials shall not be changed without prior approval.
Table 1.1
LL
Records to be Kept (Indicated by an Asterisk)

W
Driven steel, precast
Driven cast-in-place
Bored cast-in-place
concrete and steel
auger concrete or
Driven segmental
Continuous flight
concrete piles
concrete piles
concrete piles
s
sheet piles
grout piles
en
Data
e m
Si
Contract * * * * *
Pile reference number (location) * * * * *
Pile type * * * * *
Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter * * * * *
Nominal diameter of underream/base - - - * -
Length of preformed pile * * - - -
Standing groundwater level from direct observation or given site
- - * * *
investigation data.
Date and time of driving, redriving or boring * * * * *
Date of concreting - - * * *
Ground level/sea bed level at pile position at commencement of
* * * * *
installation of pile (commencing surface)
Working elevation of pile driver * * * * *
Depth from ground level at pile position to pile tip * * * * *
Tip elevation * * * * *
Driven steel, precast
Driven cast-in-place
Bored cast-in-place
concrete and steel
auger concrete or
Driven segmental
Continuous flight
concrete piles
concrete piles
concrete piles
sheet piles
grout piles
Data
Pile head elevation, as constructed * * * * *

Pile cut-off elevation * * * * *
Length of temporary casing - - * * -
Length of permanent casing - - * * -
Type, weight, drop and mechanical condition of hammer and
* * * - -
equivalent information for other equipment
Number and type of packings used and type and condition of

* * * - -
dolly used during driving of the pile
ar
Set of pile or pile tube in millimetres per 10 blows or number of
* * * - -
at
blows per 25 mm of penetration
-Q
If required, the sets taken at intervals during the last 3 m of
* * * - -
driving
If required, temporary compression of ground and pile from time

LL
of a marked increase in driving resistance until pile reached its * * * - -

final level
W
If required, driving resistance taken at regular intervals over the

* * * - -
last 3 m of driving
s
Soil samples taken and in-situ tests carried out during pile
en
* * * * *
installation
Length and details of reinforcements - - * * *

m
Concrete mix - - * * *
e
Volume of concrete supplied to pile - - * * *

Si
All information regarding obstructions delays and other

* * * * *
interruptions to the work
1.3.3 Rejected materials
1 Rejected materials are to be removed promptly from the Site.
1.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
1.4.1 Setting Out
1 Setting out of the main grid lines shall be by the Contractor. The installation of marker pins at
pile positions, as required by the Contract, shall be located by the Contractor from the main
grid lines of the proposed structure. Before installation of the pile, the pile position relative to
the main grid lines shall be verified.
1.4.2 Position
1 For a pile cut off at or above ground level the maximum permitted deviation of the pile centre
from the centre-point shown on the drawings shall be 75 mm in any direction. An additional
tolerance for a pile head cut off below ground level will be permitted in accordance with
Clauses 1.4.3 and 1.4.4.
1.4.3 Verticality
1 At the commencement of installation, the pile, or pile-forming equipment in the case of a

driven pile, or the relevant equipment governing alignment in the case of the bored pile, shall
be made vertical to a tolerance of within 1 in 100. The maximum permitted deviation of the
finished pile from the vertical is 1 in 75.
1.4.4 Rake
1 As in clause 1.4.3, the pile, or driving or other equipment governing the direction and angle of
ar
rake shall be set to give the correct alignment of the pile to within a tolerance of 1 in 50. The
piling rig shall be set and maintained to attain the required rake. The maximum permitted
at
deviation of the finished pile from the specified rake is 1 in 25 for piles raking up to 1:6 and 1
-Q
in 15 for piles raking more than 1:6.
1.4.5 Tolerance Variations

LL
1 In exceptional circumstances where these tolerances are difficult to achieve, the tolerances
of Clauses 1.4.2, 1.4.3 and 1.4.4 may be relaxed by the Engineer, subject to consideration of
W
the implications of such action.

s
1.4.6 Forcible Corrections to Pile

en
1 Forcible corrections to concrete piles to overcome errors of position or alignment shall not be
m
made. Forcible corrections may be made to other piles only if approved and where the pile
shaft is not fully embedded in the soil.
e
Si
1.5 NUISANCE AND DAMAGE
1.5.1 Noise and Disturbance
1 The Contractor shall carry out the work in such a manner and at such times as to minimise
noise, vibration and other disturbance in order to comply with current environmental
legislation.
2 The Contractor shall endeavour to ascertain the nature and levels of noise produced by the
mechanical equipment and plant that will be used. He shall than take steps to reduce either
the level or the annoying characteristics, or both, of the noise. Reference should be made to
BS 5228 Part 1 for prediction of noise level due to different types of mechanical equipment
and plant, and to BS 5228 Part 4 for noise and vibration control techniques applicable to
piling operations.
1.5.2 Damage to Adjacent Structures
1 If in the opinion of the Contractor, damage will be, or is likely to be, caused to mains, services
or adjacent structures, he shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for making
preconstruction surveys, monitoring movements or vibrations, and minimising or avoiding
such damage.
1.5.3 Damage to Piles
1 The Contractor shall ensure that during the course of the work, displacement or damage
which would impair either performance or durability does not occur to completed piles.
2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposed sequence and timing for driving or
boring piles, having the intent of avoiding damage to adjacent piles.
1.5.4 Temporary Support
ar
1 The Contractor shall ensure that where required, any permanently free-standing piles are
temporarily braced or stayed immediately after driving to prevent loosening of the piles in the
at
ground and to ensure that the pile will not be damaged by oscillation, vibration or ground
-Q
movement.
1.6 SAFETY
LL
1.6.1 General
W
1 A competent person, properly qualified and experienced, should be appointed to supervise

the piling operations. This person should be capable of recognising and assessing any
s
potential dangers as they arise; e.g., unexpected ground conditions that may require a
en
change in construction technique, or unusual smells which may indicate the presence of
noxious or dangerous gases.
m
2 Safety precautions throughout the piling operations shall comply with BS 8008 and BS EN
e
1997. Refer Section 1 for general safety standards to be adopted at a construction site.
Si
1.6.2 Life-Saving Appliances
1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the Site sufficient, proper and efficient life-
saving appliances to the approval of the Engineer. The appliances must be conspicuous and
available for use at all times.
2 Site operatives shall be instructed in the use of safety equipment and periodic drills shall be
held to ensure that all necessary procedures can be correctly observed.
1.6.3 Driving
1 Before any pile driving is started, the Contractor shall supply the Engineer with two copies of
the code of signals to be employed, and shall have a copy of the code prominently displayed
adjacent to the driving control station on the craft, structure or site from which the piles will be
driven.
END OF PART
Part 02: Concrete Works for Piling
2 CONCRETE WORKS FOR PILING ......................................................................... 2

2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1 Scope 2
2.1.2 References 2
2.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................ 2
2.2.1 Cementitious 2
2.2.2 Aggregate 2
2.2.3 Water 2
2.2.4 Admixtures 2
2.2.5 Steel Reinforcement and Prestressing Steel 2
2.3 CONCRETE MIXES FOR PILING WORK ............................................................... 3
2.3.1 General 3
2.3.2 Grade Designation 3
2.3.3 Designed Mix 3
ar
2.3.4 Durability 3
2.3.5 Exposure Classes 3
at
2.4 PLACING CONCRETE ............................................................................................ 3
-Q
2.4.1 General 3
2.4.2 Inspection 4
2.4.3 Cleanliness of Pile Bases 4
LL
2.4.4 Workability of Concrete 4

2.4.5 Compaction 4
W
2.4.6 Placing Concrete in Dry Borings 5

2.4.7 Placing Concrete under Water or Drilling Fluid 5
s
en
e m
Si
2 CONCRETE WORKS FOR PILING
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This part applies to cast in-situ as well as precast concrete work.

This Section
Part 1, General Requirements for Piling Work
Part 3 Shallow Foundations
Part 4 Deep Foundations
Part 5 Retaining Structures
ar
Section 5 Concrete.
at
2.1.2 References -Q
1 The following Standards are referred to in this Part:
BS 8008......................Safety precautions and procedures for the construction and descent of
LL
machine-bored shafts for piling and other purposes

All Standards mentioned in Section 5
W
2.2 MATERIALS
s
2.2.1 Cementitious
en
1 All cementitious materials shall comply with the requirements of Section 5, Part 3.
m
2 All cementitious materials shall be stored in separate containers according to type in

e
waterproof stores or silos.

Si
2.2.2 Aggregate
1 Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of Section 5, Part 2.
2.2.3 Water
1 If water for the Works is not available from a public supply, approval shall be obtained
regarding the source of water. For quality of water refer to Section 5, Part 4.
2.2.4 Admixtures
1 Admixtures shall comply with the requirements of Section 5, Part 5
2.2.5 Steel Reinforcement and Prestressing Steel
1 Steel reinforcement shall be stored in clean and dry conditions. It shall be clean, and free
from loose rust and loose mill scale when installed in the Works. For requirements of steel
reinforcement refer to Section 5, Part 11.
2 The number of joints in longitudinal steel bars shall be kept to a minimum. Joints in
reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of each bar is effective across the joint and
shall be made so that there is no detrimental displacement of the reinforcement during the
construction of the pile.
3 For requirements of prestressing steel refer to Section 5, Part 18.
2.3 CONCRETE MIXES FOR PILING WORK
2.3.1 General
1 For general requirements of concrete mixes, trial mixes, batching, mixing and transportation
of fresh concrete and testing of hardened concrete refer to Section 5.
2.3.2 Grade Designation
1 Grades of concrete shall be as given in Section 5, Part 6.
ar
2.3.3 Designed Mix
at
1
-Q
The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting the mix proportions to achieve the required
strength and workability..
2 Complete information on the mix and sources of aggregate for each grade of concrete and
LL
the water/cementitious ratio and the proposed degree of workability shall be approved before
work commences.
W
3 Where low-alkali, sulphate-resisting cement to BS EN 197 is specified, the alkali content

s
(equivalent sodium oxide) of the cement shall not exceed 0.6 % by weight.
en
4 The Contractor shall submit the slump value for approval before work commences.
m
2.3.4 Durability
e
Si
1 For piles exposed to aggressive ground or groundwater, approved measures shall be taken
to ensure durability. Reference shall be made to Section 5, Part 6.
2.3.5 Exposure Classes
1 The minimum cementitious content and type and the concrete grades shall be specified
based on the exposure classes as given in Table 6.8, Section 5, Part 6.
2.4 PLACING CONCRETE
2.4.1 General
1 The workability and method of placing and vibrating the concrete shall be such that a
continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross-section is formed.
2 The concrete shall be placed without such interruption as would produce a cold joint in the
pile. The method of placing shall be approved.
3 The Contractor shall take all precautions in the design of the mix and placing of the concrete
to avoid arching of the concrete in a temporary casing. No soil, liquid or other foreign matter
which would adversely affect the performance of the pile shall be permitted to contaminate
the concrete.
2.4.2 Inspection
1 Each pile bore which does not contain standing water or drilling fluid shall be inspected
directly or indirectly before to concrete is placed in it. This inspection shall be carried out from
the ground surface in the case of piles of less than 750 mm diameter. Torches or other
approved means of lighting, measuring tapes, and a means of measuring verticality shall be
provided. For piles of 750 mm diameter or larger, equipment shall be provided by the
Contractor to enable his representatives and the Engineer to descend into the bore for the
purpose of inspection. Any method of descent and the equipment used shall comply with the
requirements of BS 8008.
2.4.3 Cleanliness of Pile Bases
ar
at
1 On completion of boring and where inspection of a dry pile bore indicates the necessity,
loose, disturbed or softened soil shall be removed from the bore. Where pile bores contain
-Q
water or drilling fluid, a cleaning process shall be employed before concrete is placed, or the
concrete shall be placed by tremie method. Large debris or accumulated sediment, or both
of them, shall be removed using appropriate approved methods, which shall be designed to
LL
clean while at the same time minimising ground disturbance below the pile bases. Water or
drilling fluid shall be maintained at such levels throughout and following the cleaning
W
operation that stability of the bore is preserved.
2.4.4 Workability of Concrete

s
en
1 Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile bore shall be in accordance with the
standards shown in Table 2.1.
m
2.4.5 Compaction
e
Si
1 Internal vibrators may be used to compact concrete, with the approval of the Engineer
obtained in advance for each specific use.
Table 2.1
Standards for Concrete Slump
Slump
Piling mix
Minimum Range Typical conditions of use
workability
mm mm
Placed into water-free unlined or permanently lined bore
of 600 mm diameter or over, or where concrete is placed
A 75 75-150 below temporary casing, and where reinforcement is
widely spaced leaving ample room for free movement of
concrete between bars.
Where reinforcement is not spaced widely, where
B 100 100-200 concrete is placed within temporary casings, where pile
bore is water-free, and the diameter less than 600 mm
Where concrete is to be placed by tremie under water or
C 150 150 or more drilling mud, or by pumping
2.4.6 Placing Concrete in Dry Borings
1 Approved measures shall be taken to ensure that the structural strength of the concrete
placed in all piles is not impaired through grout loss, segregation or bleeding.
2 Concrete shall be placed by “elephant trunk”, and the free fall shall not exceed 1.2 m.
2.4.7 Placing Concrete under Water or Drilling Fluid
1 Before placing concrete, measures shall be taken in accordance with Clause 2.4.3 to ensure
that there is no accumulation of silt or other material at the base of the boring, and the
Contractor shall ensure that heavily contaminated bentonite suspension, which could impair
the free flow of concrete from the tremie pipe, has not accumulated in the bottom of the hole.
2 Concrete to be placed under water or drilling fluid shall be placed by tremie and shall not be
discharged freely into the water or drilling fluid. Pumping of concrete may be approved where
appropriate.
ar
3 A sample of the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the boring using an
at
approved sampling device. If the specific gravity of the suspension exceeds 1.20 the placing
-Q
of concrete shall not proceed. In this event the Contractor shall modify or replace the
bentonite as approved to meet the specification.
4 The concrete shall be a rich, coherent mix and highly workable, and cement content shall be
LL
in accordance with Clause 2.3.5.

W
5 The concrete shall be placed in such a manner that segregation does not occur.
s
6 The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout. The pipe shall
en
extend to the base of the bore and a sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the pipe to
prevent direct contact between the first charge of concrete in the tremie and the water or
drilling fluid. The pipe shall at all times penetrate the concrete which has previously been
m
placed and shall be withdrawn at a rate such that there shall be a minimum concrete cover of
e
2 m over the end of the tremie pipe, until completion of concreting. A sufficient quantity of
Si
concrete shall be maintained within the pipe to ensure that the pressure from it exceeds that
from the water or drilling fluid. The internal diameter of the tremie pipe shall be not less than
150 mm, and the maximum sized aggregate shall be 20 mm. It shall be so designed that
external projections are minimised, allowing the tremie to pass within reinforcing cages
without causing damage. The internal face of the pipe of the tremie shall be free from
projections.
END OF PART
Part 03: Shallow Foundations
3 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS .................................................................................... 2

3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
3.1.1 Scope 2
3.1.2 Definition 2
3.1.3 References 2
3.1.4 Limit States Considerations 2
3.2 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS .................................................................................. 3
3.2.1 General 3
3.2.2 Allowable Bearing Pressure 3
3.2.3 Selection of Types of Shallow Foundation 3
3.2.4 Pad foundations 4
3.2.5 Strip foundations 4
3.2.6 Raft foundations 5
3.3 BASIS OF GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN .................................................................... 5
ar
3.3.1 Design Requirements 5
3.3.2 Design Situations 7
at
3.3.3 Durability -Q 8
3.4 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN BY CALCULATION ...................................................... 9
3.4.1 General 9
3.4.2 Actions 10
LL
3.4.3 Ground Properties 12

3.4.4 Geometrical Data 13
W
3.4.5 Characteristic and Representative Values of Actions 13

3.4.6 Characteristic Values of Geotechnical Parameters 13
s
3.4.7 Characteristic Values of Geometrical Data 14

en
3.4.8 Geotechnical Design Report 14

3.4.9 Actions and Design Situations 15
m
3.4.10 Design and Construction Considerations 15

e
3.4.11 Foundations on Rock; Additional Design Considerations 16

Si
3 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
1 The provisions of this Section apply to shallow foundations including isolated, pads, strips and
rafts.
3.1.2 Definition
1 Shallow foundations are taken to be those where the depth below finished ground level is
less than 3 m and include isolated, pad, strip and raft foundations. The choice of 3 m is
arbitrary; shallow foundations where the depth/breadth ratio is high may need to be designed
as deep foundations.
ar
3.1.3 References
at
BS 8004,.....................Code of practice for foundations.
-Q
BS EN 1990................Eurocode 0: Basis of Structural Design
BS EN 1991................Eurocode 1: Actions on structures
BS EN 1992................Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures -
LL
BS EN 1993................Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures

BS EN 1994................Eurocode 4: Design of composite steel and concrete structures
W
BS EN 1995................Eurocode 5: Design of timber structures

BS EN 1996................Eurocode 6: Design of masonry structures
s
BS EN 1997-1 ............Eurocode 7, Geotechnical design Part 1: General Rules

en
BS EN 1997-2 ............Eurocode 7, Geotechnical design Part 2: Ground investigation and

testing
m
BS EN 1998................Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance

e
BS 5930......................Code of Practice for Site Investigation

Si
3.1.4 Limit States Considerations
1 The following limit states shall be considered and an appropriate list shall be compiled:
(a) Loss of overall stability;

(b) Bearing resistance failure, punching failure, squeezing;
(c) Failure by sliding;
(d) Combined failure in the ground and in the structure;
(e) Structural failure due to foundation movement;
(f) Excessive settlements;
(g) Excessive heave due to swelling, frost and other causes;
(h) Unacceptable vibrations.
3.2 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
3.2.1 General
1 The depth to which foundations should be carried depends on two principal factors:
(a) Reaching an adequate bearing stratum;

(b) Penetration below the zone in which trouble may be expected from seasonal weather
changes.
2 Other factors such as ground movements, changes in groundwater conditions, long-term

stability and heat transmitted from structures to the supporting ground may be important.
3 Shallow foundations are particularly vulnerable to certain soil conditions, e.g. loose water-
bearing sands and soils that change structure when loaded. Specialist advice should be
sought where such conditions are indicated by ground investigation.
ar
3.2.2 Allowable Bearing Pressure
at
1 The center of area of a foundation or group of foundations should be arranged vertically
-Q
under the centre of gravity of the imposed loading. If this is not possible, the effects on the
structure of rotation and settlement of the foundation need to be considered.
2 Where foundation support is provided by a number of separate bases these should, as far as
LL
practicable, be proportioned so that differential settlement is minimal.

W
3.2.3 Selection of Types of Shallow Foundation

s
1 The selection of the appropriate type of shallow foundation will normally depend on the
en
magnitude and disposition of the structural loads, the bearing capacity and settlement
characteristics of the ground and the need to found in stable soil.
m
2 A pad foundation is used for the purpose of distributing concentrated loads. Unless special
e
conditions control the design, relatively heavy column loads make it advantageous to use pad
Si
foundations.
3 Strip foundations may be more appropriate where column loads are comparatively small and
closely spaced or where walls are heavy or heavily loaded.
4 Adjacent pad foundations can be combined or joined together with ground beams to support
eccentric loads, to resist overturning or to oppose horizontal forces. Walls between columns
may be carried on ground beams spanning between the pad foundations.
5 Where the allowable bearing pressure would result in large isolated foundations occupying
the majority of the available area, it may be logical to join them to form a raft and spread the
loads over the entire area. The combination of isolated foundations to form a raft sometimes
results in a complex design and a large increase in the reinforcement requirement.
6 In connection with the provision of foundations to an extension of an existing building,

allowance should be made for differential movement of the foundations between the new and
existing structure; such movement affects the structure above foundations. Where a degree
of cracking and subsequent remedial work is not acceptable, provision for a joint between the
extension and existing building should be considered. Where the foundations of an extension
about the foundations of the existing building, the stability of the existing foundations should
be ensured.
3.2.4 Pad foundations
1 For buildings such as low rise dwellings and lightly framed structures, pad foundations may
be of unreinforced concrete provided that the angle of spread of load from the pier or base
plate to the outer edge of the ground bearing does not exceed one (vertical) in one
(horizontal) and that the stresses in the concrete due to bending and shear do not exceed
tolerable limits. For buildings other than low rise and lightly framed structures, it is customary
to use reinforced concrete foundations.
ar
2 The thickness of the foundation should under no circumstances be less than 150 mm and will
generally be greater than this to maintain cover to reinforcement where provided.
at
3
-Q
Where concrete foundations are used they should be designed in accordance with the design
method appropriate to the loading assumptions.
3.2.5 Strip foundations

LL
1 Similar considerations to those for pad foundations apply to strip foundations. On sloping
W
sites strip foundations should be on a horizontal bearing, stepped where necessary to

maintain adequate depth.
s
en
2 In continuous wall foundations it is recommended that reinforcement be provided wherever

an abrupt change in magnitude of load or variation in ground support occurs. Continuous wall
m
foundations will normally be constructed in mass concrete provided that the angle of spread
of load from the edge of the wall base to the outer edge of the ground bearing does not
e
exceed one (vertical) in one (horizontal). Foundations on sloping ground, and where
Si
regarding is likely to take place, may require to be designed as retaining walls to

accommodate steps between adjacent ground floor slabs or finished ground levels. At all
changes of level unreinforced foundations should be lapped at the steps for a distance at
least equal to the thickness of the foundation or a minimum of 300mm. Where the height of
the step exceeds the thickness of the foundation, special precautions should be taken. The
thickness of reinforced strip foundations should be not less than 150mm, and care should be
taken with the excavation levels to ensure that this minimum thickness is maintained. For the
longitudinal spread of loads, sufficient reinforcement should be provided to withstand the
tensions induced. It will sometimes be desirable to make strip foundations of inverted tee
beam sections, in order to provide adequate stiffness in the longitudinal direction. At corners
and junctions the longitudinal reinforcement of each wall foundation should be lapped.
3 Where the use of ordinary strip foundations would overstress the bearing strata, wide strip
foundations designed to transmit the foundation loads across the full width of the strip may be
used. The depth below the finished ground level should be the same as for ordinary strip
foundations.
4 Where the nature of the ground is such that narrow trenches can be neatly cut down to the
bearing stratum, an economical foundation may be achieved by filling the trenches with
concrete. When deciding the trench width, account should be taken of normal building
tolerances in relation to setting out dimensions. Where the thickness of such a foundation is
500mm or more, any step should be not greater than the concrete thickness and the lap at
such a step should be at least 1 m or twice the step height, whichever is the greater?
5 Where fill or other loose materials occur above the bearing stratum adequate support is
required to any excavation. Consideration may be given to the use of lean mix mass concrete
replacement under ordinary strip footings placed at shallow depth. This mass concrete can
be poured against either permanent or recoverable shuttering. This form of foundation
provides a method of dealing with local areas where deeper foundations are required.
3.2.6 Raft foundations
1 General. Suitably designed raft foundations may be used in the following circumstances.
ar
(a) For lightly loaded structures on soft natural ground where it is necessary to spread the
load, or where there is variable support due to natural variations, made ground or
at
weaker zones. In this case the function of the raft is to act as a bridge across the
weaker zones. Rafts may form part of compensated foundations.
-Q
(b) Where differential settlements are likely to be significant. The raft will require special
design, involving an assessment of the disposition and distribution of loads, contact
LL
pressures and stiffness of the soil and raft.
3.3 BASIS OF GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN

W
3.3.1 Design Requirements

s
en
1 For each geotechnical design situation it shall be verified that no relevant limit state is
exceeded.
m
2 When defining the design situations and the limit states, the following factors should be
e
considered:
Si
(a) Site conditions with respect to overall stability and ground movements;
(b) Nature and size of the structure and its elements, including any special requirements
such as the design life;
(c) Conditions with regard to its surroundings (e.g.: neighboring structures, traffic, utilities,
vegetation, hazardous chemicals);
(d) Ground conditions;
(e) Ground-water conditions;
(f) Regional seismicity;
(g) Influence of the environment (hydrology, surface water, subsidence, seasonal changes
of temperature and moisture).
3 Limit states can occur either in the ground or in the structure or by combined failure in the
structure and the ground.
4 Limit states should be verified by any appropriate method such as calculation method as
described in 3.4;
5 In practice, experience will often show which type of limit state will govern the design and the
avoidance of other limit states may be verified by a control check.
6 Buildings should normally be protected against the penetration of ground-water or the

transmission of vapor or gases to their interiors.
7 If practicable, the design results should be checked against comparable experience.
8 In order to establish minimum requirements for the extent and content of geotechnical
investigations, calculations and construction control checks, the complexity of each
geotechnical design shall be identified together with the associated risks. In particular, a
distinction shall be made between:
(a) L ight and simple structures and small earthworks for which it is possible to ensure that
ar
the minimum requirements will be satisfied by experience and qualitative geotechnical
investigations, with negligible risk;
at
(b) Other geotechnical structures. -Q
9 For structures and earthworks of low geotechnical complexity and risk, such as defined
above, simplified design procedures may be applied.
LL
10 To establish geotechnical design requirements, three Geotechnical Categories, 1, 2 and 3,

may be introduced.
W
11 A preliminary classification of a structure according to Geotechnical Category should

s
normally be performed prior to the geotechnical investigations. The category should be

en
checked and changed, if necessary, at each stage of the design and construction process.
12 The procedures of higher categories may be used to justify more economic designs, or if the
m
designer considers them to be appropriate.

e
Si
13 The various design aspects of a project can require treatment in different Geotechnical
Categories. It is not required to treat the whole of the project according to the highest of these
categories.
14 Geotechnical Category 1 should only include small and relatively simple structures:
(a) For which it is possible to ensure that the fundamental requirements will be satisfied on
the basis of experience and qualitative geotechnical investigations;
(b) With negligible risk.
15 Geotechnical Category 1 procedures should be used only where there is negligible risk in
terms of overall stability or ground movements and in ground conditions, which are known
from comparable local experience to be sufficiently straightforward. In these cases the
procedures may consist of routine methods for foundation design and construction.
16 Geotechnical Category 1 procedures should be used only if there is no excavation below the
water table or if comparable local experience indicates that a proposed excavation below the
water table will be straightforward.
17 Geotechnical Category 2 should include conventional types of structure and foundation with
no exceptional risk or difficult soil or loading conditions
18 Designs for structures in Geotechnical Category 2 should normally include quantitative

geotechnical data and analysis to ensure that the fundamental requirements are satisfied.
19 Routine procedures for field and laboratory testing and for design and execution may be used
for Geotechnical Category 2 designs.
(a) the following are examples of conventional structures or parts of structures complying
with Geotechnical Category 2:
(i) Shallow foundations;
(ii) Pile foundations;
(iii) Walls and other structures retaining or supporting soil or water;
(iv) Excavations;
ar
(v) Bridge piers and abutments;
at
(vi) Embankments and earthworks;
(vii)
-Q
Ground anchors and other tie-back systems;
(viii) Tunnels in hard, non-fractured rock and not subjected to special water tightness
or other requirements.
LL
20 Geotechnical Category 3 should include structures or parts of structures, which fall outside
W
the limits of Geotechnical Categories 1 and 2.
21 Geotechnical Category 3 should normally include alternative provisions and rules to those in
s
this standard.
en
(a) Geotechnical Category 3 includes the following examples:

m
(i) Very large or unusual structures;

e
(ii) Structures involving abnormal risks, or unusual or exceptionally difficult ground

Si
or loading conditions;
(iii) Structures in highly seismic areas;
(iv) Structures in areas of probable site instability or persistent ground movements
that require separate investigation or special measures.
3.3.2 Design Situations
1 Both short-term and long-term design situations shall be considered.
2 In geotechnical design, the detailed specifications of design situations should include, as

appropriate:
(a) The actions, their combinations and load cases;

(b) The general suitability of the ground on which the structure is located with respect to
overall stability and ground movements;
(c) The disposition and classification of the various zones of soil, rock and elements of
construction, which are involved in any calculation model;
(d) Dipping bedding planes;

(e) Mine workings, caves or other underground structures;
(f) In the case of structures resting on or near rock:
(i) inter bedded hard and soft strata;
(ii) faults, joints and fissures;
(iii) possible instability of rock blocks;
(iv) solution cavities, such as swallow holes or fissures filled with soft material, and
continuing solution processes;
(g) The environment within which the design is set, including the following:
(i) effects of scour, erosion and excavation, leading to changes in the geometry of
the ground surface;
(ii) effects of chemical corrosion;
ar
(iii) effects of weathering;
at
(iv) effects of long duration droughts;
(v) variations in ground-water levels, including, e.g. the effects of dewatering,
-Q
possible flooding, failure of drainage systems, water exploitation;
(vi) the presence of gases emerging from the ground;
LL
(h) Earthquakes;
(i) Ground movements caused by subsidence due to mining or other activities;
W
(j) The sensitivity of the structure to deformations;

s
(k) The effect of the new structure on existing structures, services and the local
en
environment.
m
3.3.3 Durability
e
1 At the geotechnical design stage, the significance of environmental conditions shall be

Si
assessed in relation to durability and to enable provisions to be made for the protection or
adequate resistance of the materials.
2 In designing for durability of materials used in the ground, the following should be considered:
(a) For concrete:

(i) Aggressive agents in the ground-water or in the ground or fill material, such as
acids or sulfate salts;
(b) For steel:
(i) Chemical attack where foundation elements are buried in ground that is
sufficiently permeable to allow the percolation of ground-water and oxygen;
(ii) Corrosion on the faces of sheet pile walls exposed to free water, particularly in
the mean water level zone;
(iii) The pitting type of corrosive attack on steel embedded in fissured or porous
concrete, particularly for rolled steel where the mill scale, acting as a cathode,
promotes electrolytic action with the scale-free surface acting as an anode;
(c) For timber:

(i) Fungi and aerobic bacteria in the presence of oxygen;
(d) For synthetic fabrics:
(i) The ageing effects of UV exposure or ozone degradation or the combined
effects of temperature and stress, and secondary effects due to chemical
degradation.
3 Reference should be made to durability provisions in construction materials standards.
3.4 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN BY CALCULATION
3.4.1 General
1 Design by calculation shall be in accordance with the fundamental requirements of EN 1990

and with the particular rules of this specification. Design by calculation involves:
ar
(a) Actions, which may be either imposed loads or imposed displacements, e.g. from
at
ground movements; -Q
(b) Properties of soils, rocks and other materials;
(c) Geometrical data;
LL
(d) Limiting values of deformations, crack widths, vibrations etc;

(e) Calculation models.
W
2 It should be considered that knowledge of the ground conditions depends on the extent and
quality of the geotechnical investigations. Such knowledge and the control of workmanship
s
en
are usually more significant to fulfilling the fundamental requirements than is precision in the
calculation models and partial factors.
m
3 The calculation model shall describe the assumed behavior of the ground for the limit state
e
under consideration.
Si
4 If no reliable calculation model is available for a specific limit state, analysis of another limit
state shall be carried out using factors to ensure that exceeding the specific limit state
considered is sufficiently improbable. Alternatively, design by prescriptive measures,
experimental models and load tests, or the observational method, shall be performed.
5 The calculation model may consist of any of the following:
(a) An analytical model;

(b) A semi-empirical model;
(c) A numerical model.
6 Any calculation model shall be either accurate or err on the side of safety.
7 A calculation model may include simplifications.
8 If needed, a modification of the results from the model may be used to ensure that the design
calculation is either accurate or errs on the side of safety.
9 If the modification of the results makes use of a model factor, it should take account of the
following:
(a) The range of uncertainty in the results of the method of analysis;

(b) Any systematic errors known to be associated with the method of analysis.
10 If an empirical relationship is used in the analysis, it shall be clearly established that it is

relevant for the prevailing ground conditions.
11 Limit states involving the formation of a mechanism in the ground should be readily checked
using a calculation model. For limit states defined by deformation considerations, the
deformations should be evaluated by calculation or otherwise assessed.
NOTE: many calculation models are based on the assumption of a sufficiently ductile
performance of the ground/structure system. A lack of ductility, however, will lead to an
ultimate limit state characterized by sudden collapse.
12 Numerical methods can be appropriate if compatibility of strains or the interaction between
ar
the structure and the soil at a limit state are considered.
at
13 Compatibility of strains at a limit state should be considered. Detailed analysis, allowing for
-Q
the relative stiffness of structure and ground, may be needed in cases where a combined
failure of structural members and the ground could occur. Examples include raft foundations,
laterally loaded piles and flexible retaining walls. Particular attention should be paid to strain
compatibility for materials that are brittle or that have strain-softening properties.
LL
14 In some problems, such as excavations supported by anchored or strutted flexible walls, the
W
magnitude and distribution of earth pressures, internal structural forces and bending
moments depend to a great extent on the stiffness of the structure, the stiffness and strength
s
of the ground and the state of stress in the ground.

en
15 In these problems of ground-structure interaction, analyses should use stress-strain

m
relationships for ground and structural materials and stress states in the ground that are
sufficiently representative, for the limit state considered, to give a safe result.
e
Si
3.4.2 Actions
1 The definition of actions shall be taken as:
(a) Set of forces (loads) applied to the structure (direct action);

(b) Set of imposed deformations or accelerations caused for example, by temperature
changes, moisture variation, uneven settlement or earthquakes (indirect action).
The values of actions shall be taken from EN 1991 or equivalent international standard,
where relevant.
2 The values of geotechnical actions to be used shall be selected, since they are known before
a calculation is performed; they may change during that calculation.
NOTE: Values of geotechnical actions may change during the course of calculation. In such
cases they will be introduced as a first estimate to start the calculation with a preliminary,
known value.
3 Any interaction between the structure and the ground shall be taken into account when
determining the actions to be adopted in the design.
4 In geotechnical design, the following should be considered for inclusion as actions:
(a) the weight of soil, rock and water;

(b) stresses in the ground;
(c) earth pressures and ground-water pressure;
(d) free water pressures, including wave pressures;
(e) ground-water pressures;
(f) seepage forces;
(g) dead and imposed loads from structures;
(h) surcharges;
(i) mooring forces;
(j) removal of load or excavation of ground;
ar
(k) traffic loads;
(l) movements caused by mining or other caving or tunneling activities;
at
(m) swelling and shrinkage caused by vegetation, climate or moisture changes;
-Q
(n) movements due to creeping or sliding or settling ground masses;
(o) movements due to degradation, dispersion, decomposition, self-compaction and
LL
solution;
(p) movements and accelerations caused by earthquakes, explosions, vibrations and
W
dynamic loads;
(q) temperature effects, including frost action;
s
en
(r) imposed pre-stress in ground anchors or struts;

(s) down drag.
m
5 Consideration shall be given to the possibility of variable actions occurring both jointly and
e
separately.
Si
6 The duration of actions shall be considered with reference to time effects in the material
properties of the soil, especially the drainage properties and compressibility of fine-grained
soils.
7 Actions, which are applied repeatedly, and actions with variable intensity shall be identified
for special consideration with regard to, e.g. continuing movements, liquefaction of soils,
change of ground stiffness and strength.
8 Actions that produce a dynamic response in the structure and the ground shall be identified
for special consideration.
9 Actions in which ground- and free-water forces predominate shall be identified for special
consideration with regard to deformations, fissuring, variable permeability and erosion.
NOTE Unfavorable (or destabilizing) and favorable (or stabilizing) permanent actions may in
some situations be considered as coming from a single source. If they are considered so, a
single partial factor may be applied to the sum of these actions or to the sum of their effects.
3.4.3 Ground Properties
1 Properties of soil and rock masses, as quantified for design calculations by geotechnical
parameters, shall be obtained from test results, either directly or through correlation, theory
or empiricism, and from other relevant data.
2 Values obtained from test results and other data shall be interpreted appropriately for the limit
state considered.
3 Account shall be taken of the possible differences between the ground properties and
geotechnical parameters obtained from test results and those governing the behavior of the
geotechnical structure.
4 The above differences can be due to the following factors:
(a) many geotechnical parameters are not true constants but depend on stress level and
mode of deformation;
ar
(b) soil and rock structure (e.g. fissures, laminations, or large particles) that may play a
different role in the test and in the geotechnical structure;
at
(c) time effects;
-Q
(d) the softening effect of percolating water on soil or rock strength;
(e) the softening effect of dynamic actions;
LL
(f) the brittleness or ductility of the soil and rock tested;

W
(g) the method of installation of the geotechnical structure;

(h) the influence of workmanship on artificially placed or improved ground;
s
(i) the effect of construction activities on the properties of the ground.

en
5 When establishing values of geotechnical parameters, the following should be considered:

m
(a) published and well recognized information relevant to the use of each type of test in
e
the appropriate ground conditions;

Si
(b) the value of each geotechnical parameter compared with relevant published data and
local and general experience;
(c) the variation of the geotechnical parameters that are relevant to the design;
(d) the results of any large scale field trials and measurements from neighboring
constructions;
(e) any correlations between the results from more than one type of test;
(f) any significant deterioration in ground material properties that may occur during the
lifetime of the structure.
6 Calibration factors shall be applied where necessary to convert laboratory or field test results
according to EN 1997-2 into values that represent the behavior of the soil and rock in the
ground, for the actual limit state, or to take account of correlations used to obtain derived
values from the test results.
3.4.4 Geometrical Data
1 The level and slope of the ground surface, water levels, levels of interfaces between strata,
excavation levels and the dimensions of the geotechnical structure shall be treated as
geometrical data.
3.4.5 Characteristic and Representative Values of Actions
1 Characteristic and representative values of actions shall be derived in accordance with EN

1990:2002 and the various parts of EN 1991.
3.4.6 Characteristic Values of Geotechnical Parameters
1 The selection of characteristic values for geotechnical parameters shall be based on results
and derived values from laboratory and field tests, complemented by well-established
experience.
ar
2 The characteristic value of a geotechnical parameter shall be selected as a cautious estimate
of the value affecting the occurrence of the limit state.
at
3
-Q
The selection of characteristic values for geotechnical parameters shall take account of the
following:
(a) geological and other background information, such as data from previous projects;
LL
(b) the variability of the measured property values and other relevant information, e.g.
from existing knowledge;
W
(c) the extent of the field and laboratory investigation;

s
(d) the type and number of samples;

en
(e) the extent of the zone of ground governing the behavior of the geotechnical structure
at the limit state being considered;
m
(f) the ability of the geotechnical structure to transfer loads from weak to strong zones in
e
the ground.
Si
4 Characteristic values can be lower values, which are less than the most probable values, or
upper values, which are greater.
5 For each calculation, the most unfavorable combination of lower and upper values of
independent parameters shall be used.
6 The zone of ground governing the behavior of a geotechnical structure at a limit state is
usually much larger than a test sample or the zone of ground affected in an in situ test.
Consequently the value of the governing parameter is often the mean of a range of values
covering a large surface or volume of the ground. The characteristic value should be a
cautious estimate of this mean value.
7 If the behavior of the geotechnical structure at the limit state considered is governed by the
lowest or highest value of the ground property, the characteristic value should be a cautious
estimate of the lowest or highest value occurring in the zone governing the behavior.
8 When selecting the zone of ground governing the behavior of a geotechnical structure at a
limit state, it should be considered that this limit state may depend on the behavior of the
supported structure. For instance, when considering a bearing resistance ultimate limit state
for a building resting on several footings, the governing parameter should be the mean
strength over each individual zone of ground under a footing, if the building is unable to resist
a local failure. If, however, the building is stiff and strong enough, the governing parameter
should be the mean of these mean values over the entire zone or part of the zone of ground
under the building.
9 If statistical methods are employed in the selection of characteristic values for ground
properties, such methods should differentiate between local and regional sampling and
should allow the use of a prior knowledge of comparable ground properties.
10 If statistical methods are used, the characteristic value should be derived such that the
calculated probability of a worse value governing the occurrence of the limit state under
consideration is not greater than 5%.
ar
NOTE : In this respect, a cautious estimate of the mean value is a selection of the mean
value of the limited set of geotechnical parameter values, with a confidence level of 95%;
at
where local failure is concerned, a cautious estimate of the low value is a 5% fractal.
11
-Q
When using standard tables of characteristic values related to soil investigation parameters,
the characteristic value shall be selected as a very cautious value.
LL
3.4.7 Characteristic Values of Geometrical Data
1 Characteristic values of the levels of ground and ground-water or free water shall be
W
measured, nominal or estimated upper or lower levels.

s
2 Characteristic values of levels of ground and dimensions of geotechnical structures or

en
elements should usually be nominal values.

m
3.4.8 Geotechnical Design Report

e
1 The assumptions, data, methods of calculation and results of the verification of safety and
Si
serviceability shall be recorded in the Geotechnical Design Report.
2 The level of detail of the Geotechnical Design Reports will vary greatly, depending on the
type of design. For simple designs, a single sheet may be sufficient.
3 The Geotechnical Design Report should normally include the following items, with cross-
reference to the Ground Investigation Report :
(a) a description of the site and surroundings;

(b) a description of the ground conditions;
(c) a description of the proposed construction, including actions;
(d) design values of soil and rock properties, including justification, as appropriate;
(e) statements on the codes and standards applied;
(f) statements on the suitability of the site with respect to the proposed construction and
the level of acceptable risks;
(g) geotechnical design calculations and drawings;
(h) foundation design recommendations;

(i) a note of items to be checked during construction or requiring maintenance or
monitoring.
4 The Geotechnical Design Report shall include a plan of supervision and monitoring, as
appropriate. Items, which require checking during construction or, which require maintenance
after construction shall be clearly identified. When the required checks have been carried out
during construction, they shall be recorded in an addendum to the Report.
5 In relation to supervision and monitoring the Geotechnical Design Report should state:
(a) the purpose of each set of observations or measurements;

(b) the parts of the structure, which are to be monitored and the locations at which
observations are to be made;
(c) the frequency with which readings is to be taken;
(d) the ways in which the results are to be evaluated;
ar
(e) the range of values within which the results are to be expected;
at
(f) the period of time for which monitoring is to continue after construction is complete;
-Q
(g) the parties responsible for making measurements and observations, for interpreting
the results obtained and for maintaining the instruments.
LL
6 An extract from the Geotechnical Design Report, containing the supervision, monitoring and
maintenance requirements for the completed structure, shall be provided to the owner/client.
W
3.4.9 Actions and Design Situations

s
1 Design situations shall be selected in accordance with 3.3.2.

en
2 The actions listed in 3.4.2(4) should be considered when selecting the limit states for
m
calculation.
e
3 If structural stiffness is significant, an analysis of the interaction between the structure and
Si
the ground should be performed in order to determine the distribution of actions.
3.4.10 Design and Construction Considerations
1 When choosing the depth of a shallow foundation the following shall be considered:
(a) reaching an adequate bearing stratum;

(b) the depth above which shrinkage and swelling of clay soils, due to seasonal weather
changes, or to trees and shrubs, may cause appreciable movements;
(c) the level of the water table in the ground and the problems, which may occur if
excavation for the foundation is required below this level;
(d) possible ground movements and reductions in the strength of the bearing stratum by
seepage or climatic effects or by construction procedures;
(e) the effects of excavations on nearby foundations and structures;
(f) anticipated excavations for services close to the foundation;
(g) high or low temperatures transmitted from the building;
(h) the possibility of scour;

(i) the effects of variation of water content due to long periods of drought, and subsequent
periods of rain, on the properties of volume-unstable soils in arid climatic areas;
(j) the presence of soluble materials, e.g. limestone, clay stone, gypsum, salt rocks;
2 In addition to fulfilling the performance requirements, the design foundation width shall take
account of practical considerations such as economic excavation, setting out tolerances,
working space requirements and the dimensions of the wall or column supported by the
foundation.
3 One of the following design methods shall be used for shallow foundations:
(a) a direct method, in which separate analyses are carried out for each limit state. When
checking against an ultimate limit state, the calculation shall model as closely as
possible the failure mechanism, which is envisaged. When checking against a
serviceability limit state, a settlement calculation shall be used;
ar
(b) an indirect method using comparable experience and the results of field or laboratory
measurements or observations, and chosen in relation to serviceability limit state loads
at
so as to satisfy the requirements of all relevant limit states;
-Q
(c) a prescriptive method in which a presumed bearing resistance is used.
3.4.11 Foundations on Rock; Additional Design Considerations

LL
1 The design of shallow foundations on rock shall take account of the following features:
W
(a) the deformability and strength of the rock mass and the permissible settlement of the
supported structure;
s
(b) the presence of any weak layers, for example solution features or fault zones, beneath
en
the foundation;
(c) the presence of bedding joints and other discontinuities and their characteristics (for
m
example filling, continuity, width, spacing);

e
(d) the state of weathering, decomposition and fracturing of the rock;

Si
(e) disturbance of the natural state of the rock caused by construction activities, such as,
for example, underground works or slope excavation, being near to the foundation.
2 Shallow foundations on rock may normally be designed using the method of presumed
bearing pressures. For strong intact igneous rocks, gneissic rocks, limestone and
sandstones, the presumed bearing pressure are limited by the compressive strength of the
concrete foundation.
3 The settlement of a foundation may be assessed on the basis of comparable experience

related to rock mass classification.
END OF PART
Part 04: Deep Foundations
4 DEEP FOUNDATIONS ............................................................................................ 4

4.1 PRECAST REINFORCED AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES .................... 4
4.1.1 General 4
4.1.2 Limit States Considerations 4
4.1.3 Precast Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Piles 4
4.1.4 Materials and components 5
4.1.5 Prestressing 7
4.1.6 Driving Piles 8
4.1.7 Risen Piles 10
4.1.8 Repair and lengthening of piles 10
4.1.9 Cutting off pile heads 10
4.2 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE SEGMENTAL PILES............................... 10
4.2.1 Scope 10
4.2.2 References 11
ar
4.2.3 Submittals 11
at
4.2.5 Tolerances in Pile Dimensions 11
-Q
4.2.6 Handling, Transportation, Storage and Acceptance of Piles 12
4.2.7 Materials and components 12
LL
4.2.8 Driving piles 13

W
4.2.10 Repair and lengthening of piles 15

s
4.3 BORED CAST IN PLACE PILES ........................................................................... 15

en
4.3.1 Scope 15
4.3.2 References 16
m

4.3.4 Materials 16
e
Si
4.3.5 Boring 17
4.3.6 Extraction of casing 19
4.4 BORED PILES CONSTRUCTED USING CONTINUOUS FLIGHT AUGERS AND
CONCRETE OR GROUT INJECTION TROUGH HOLLOW AUGER STEMS ....... 21
4.4.1 Scope 21
4.4.2 Materials 21
4.4.3 Boring 22
4.4.4 Placing of concrete or grout 23
4.5 DRIVEN CAST IN PLACES PILES ........................................................................ 23
4.5.1 Scope 23
4.5.2 Submittals 24
4.5.4 Materials 24
4.5.5 Driving piles 25
4.5.7 Extraction of casing 26

4.6 STEEL PILES ........................................................................................................ 28
4.6.1 Scope 28
4.6.2 References 28
4.6.3 Submittals 28
4.6.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling 29
4.6.6 Materials 29
4.6.7 Acceptance Standards For Welds 30
4.6.8 Acceptability and inspection of coatings 31
4.6.9 Driving of piles 31
4.6.11 Preparation of pile heads 33
4.7 MICROPILES (TO BE ADDED LATER) ................................................................. 33
ar
4.8 REDUCTION OF FRICTION ON PILES ................................................................ 33
4.8.1 Scope 33
at
4.8.2 Submittals -Q 33
4.8.3 Friction Reducing Methods 33
4.8.4 Inspection 34
4.8.5 Driving resistance 35
LL
4.9 PILE LOAD TESTING ........................................................................................... 35

4.9.1 Static Load Testing of Piles 35
W
4.9.2 Presentation of results 45

4.9.3 Low strain Integrity test 47
s
4.9.4 Grosshole Sonic Logging Test 48

en
4.9.5 Calliper Logging Test 48

4.9.6 Axial Tensile Load Test 48
m
4.9.7 Lateral Load Test 48

e
4.9.8 Alternative Methods for Testing Piles 48

Si
4.10 DESIGN METHODS AND DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ...................................... 51

4.10.1 Design method 51
4.10.2 Verification of Resistance for Structural and Ground Limit States in Persistent and
Transient Situations 51
4.10.3 Design Considerations 51
4.11 AXIALLY LOADED PILES ..................................................................................... 52
4.11.1 Limit state design 52
4.11.2 Compressive Ground Resistance 53
4.11.3 Ultimate compressive resistance from static load tests 54
4.11.4 Ultimate compressive resistance from ground test results 55
4.11.5 Ultimate compressive resistance from dynamic impact tests 56
4.11.6 Ultimate compressive resistance by applying pile driving formulae 56
4.11.7 Ultimate compressive resistance from wave equation analysis 56
4.11.8 Ground tensile resistance 57
4.11.9 Ultimate tensile resistance from pile load tests 57
4.11.10 Ultimate tensile resistance from ground test results 57
4.11.11 Vertical displacements of pile foundations 58

4.11.12 Pile foundations in compression 58
4.11.13 Pile foundations in tension 58
4.12 TRANSVERSELY LOADED PILES ....................................................................... 58
4.12.1 Design method 58
4.12.2 Transverse load resistance from pile load tests 59
4.12.3 Transverse load resistance from ground test results and pile strength parameters 59
4.12.4 Transverse displacement 60
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
4 DEEP FOUNDATIONS
4.1 PRECAST REINFORCED AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES
4.1.1 General
1 The provisions of this Part apply to end-bearing piles, friction piles, tension piles and
transversely loaded piles installed by driving, by jacking, and by screwing or boring with or
without grouting.
4.1.2 Limit States Considerations
1 The following limit states shall be considered and an appropriate list shall be compiled:
(a) Loss of overall stability;

(b) bearing resistance failure of the pile foundation;
ar
(c) Uplift or insufficient tensile resistance of the pile foundation;
at
(d) Failure in the ground due to transverse loading of the pile foundation;
-Q
(e) Structural failure of the pile in compression, tension, bending, buckling or shear;
(f) combined failure in the ground and in the pile foundation;
(g) combined failure in the ground and in the structure;
LL
(h) Excessive settlement;

W
(i) Excessive heave;

(j) Excessive lateral movement;
s
(k) Unacceptable vibrations.

en
4.1.3 Precast Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Piles

m
1 Scope
e
(a) This Part applies to precast concrete driven piles usually supplied for use in a single
Si
length without facility for joining lengths together.

(b) Related Sections and Parts are as follows:
2 References
(a) The following Standards are referred to in this Part:

BS 7613,.....................Hot rolled quenched and tempered weldable structural steel plates
BS 3100,.....................Steel castings for general engineering purposes
BS 2789,.....................Spheroidal graphite or nodular graphite cast iron
BS 8110,.....................Structural use of concrete.
3 Submittals
(a) The Contractor shall order the piles to suit the construction programme and seek the
Engineer's approval before placing the order. When preliminary piles are specified,
the approval of the piles for the main work will not necessarily be given until the results
of the driving and loading tests on preliminary piles have been received and evaluated.
4 Quality Assurance
(a) After a pile has been cast, the date of casting, reference number, length and, where
appropriate, the prestressing force shall be clearly inscribed on the top surface of the
pile and also clearly and indelibly marked on the head of the pile. Lifting positions shall
be marked at the proper locations on each pile.
5 Tolerances in Pile Dimensions
(a) The cross-sectional dimensions of the pile shall be not less than those specified and
shall not exceed them by more than 6 mm. Each face of a pile shall not deviate by
more than 6 mm from any straight line 3 m long joining two points on that face, nor
shall the centre of area of the pile at any cross section along its length deviate by more
than 1/500 of the pile length from a line joining the centres of area at the ends of the
pile. Where a pile is less than 3 m long, the permitted deviation from straightness shall
be reduced below 6 mm on a pro rata basis in accordance with actual length.
ar
6 Handling, Transportation and Storage of Piles
at
(a) The method and sequence of lifting, handling, and storage of piles transporting and
-Q
storing piles shall be such as to avoid shock loading and to ensure that the piles are
not damaged. Only the designated lifting and support points shall be used. During
transport and storage, piles shall be appropriately supported under the marked lifting
points or fully supported along their length.
LL
(b) All piles within a stack shall be in groups of the same length. Packing of uniform
W
thickness shall be provided between piles at the lifting points.

(c) Concrete shall at no time be subjected to loading, including its own weight, which will
s
induce a compressive stress in it exceeding 0.33 of its strength at the time of loading
en
or of the specified strength, whichever is the lesser. For this purpose the assessment
of the strength of the concrete and of the stresses produced by the loads shall be
m
subject to the agreement of the Engineer.

e
(d) Pile may be rejected when the width of any transverse crack exceeds 0.3 mm. The
Si
measurement shall be made with the pile in its working attitude.
4.1.4 Materials and components
1 Fabricated Steel Components
(a) In the manufacture of precast concrete piles, fabricated steel components shall comply
with BS 7613 grades 43A or 50B, cast steel components with BS 3100 grade A, and
ductile iron components with BS 2789.
2 Pile Toes
(a) Pile toes shall be constructed so as to ensure that damage is not caused to the pile
during installation. Where positional fixity is required on an inclined rock surface or in
other circumstances, an approved shoe may be required.
3 Pile Head Reinforcement
(a) The head of each pile shall be so reinforced or banded as to prevent bursting of the
pile under driving conditions.
4 Main Reinforcement
(a) The main longitudinal reinforcing bars in piles not exceeding 12 m in length shall be in
one continuous length unless otherwise specified. In piles more than 12 m long, lap
splicing will be permitted in main longitudinal bars at 12 m nominal intervals, with no
more than 25 % of the bars lapped at one location, and laps staggered by a minimum
of 1.2 m. Laps in reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of the bar is
effective across the joint.
(b) Lap or splice joints shall be provided with sufficient link bars to resist eccentric forces.
(c) Sufficient reinforcement shall be provided for lifting and handling purposes.
5 Concrete
(a) Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall be compacted with the
assistance of vibrators. Internal vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than
ar
150 Hz and external vibrators not less than 50 Hz. Internal vibrators shall operate not
at
closer than 75 mm to shuttering.
(b)
-Q
Vibrators shall be operated in such a manner that neither segregation of the concrete
mix constituents nor displacement of reinforcement occurs.
(c) Immediately after compaction, concrete shall he adequately protected from the harmful
LL
effects of the weather, including wind, rain, rapid temperature changes and frost. It
shall be protected from drying out by an approved method of curing.
W
(d) Piles shall not be removed from formwork until a sufficient pile concrete strength has
been achieved to allow the pile to be handled without damage.
s
(e) The period of curing at an ambient temperature of 10 °C shall not be less than that
en
shown in Table 4.1. If the temperature is greater or less than 10 °C, the periods given
m
shall be adjusted accordingly and shall be approved.

e
(f) When steam or accelerated curing is used the curing procedure shall be approved.
Four hours must elapse from the completion of placing concrete before the
Si
temperature is raised. The rise in temperature within any period of 30 min shall not
exceed 10 °C and the maximum temperature attained shall not exceed 70 °C. The rate
of subsequent cooling shall not exceed the rate of heating.
Table 4.1
Period of Curing at 10 °C
Wet curing time after
Type of cement
completion of placing concrete, d
Ordinary Portland 4
Sulphate-resisting Portland 4
Portland blast-furnace 4
Super-sulphated 4
Rapid-hardening Portland 3
6 Formwork
(a) shaped point or shoe, then the end of the pile shall be symmetrical about the
longitudinal axis of the pile. Holes for handling or pitching, where provided in the pile,
shall be lined with steel tubes; alternatively, approved inserts may be cast in.
(b) Formwork shall be robust, clean and so constructed as to prevent loss of grout or
aggregate from the wet concrete and ensure the production of uniform pile sections,
free from defects. The piles are to be removed from the formwork carefully so as to
prevent damage.
4.1.5 Prestressing
1 General
(a) Tensioning shall be carried out only when the Engineer is present, unless otherwise
approved. In cases where piles are manufactured off site, the Contractor shall ensure
that the Engineer is given adequate notice and every facility for inspecting the
manufacturing process.
ar
(b) Prestressing operations shall be carried out only under the direction of an experienced
at
and competent supervisor. All personnel operating the stressing equipment shall have
been trained in its use. -Q
(c) The calculated extensions and total forces, including allowance for losses, shall be
agreed with the Engineer before stressing is commenced.
(d) Stressing of tendons and transfer of prestress shall be carried out at a gradual and
LL
steady rate. The force in the tendons shall be obtained from readings on a recently
calibrated load cell or pressure gauge incorporated in the equipment. The extension of
W
the tendons under the agreed total forces shall be within 5 % of the agreed calculated
extension.
s
2 Concrete Strength
en
(a) The Contractor shall cast sufficient cubes, cured in the same manner as the piles, to
m
be able to demonstrate by testing two cubes at a time, with approved intervals between
pairs of cubes, that the specified transfer strength of the concrete has been reached.
e
Si
(b) Unless otherwise permitted, concrete shall not be stressed until two test cubes attain
the specified transfer strength.
3 Post-Tensioned Piles
(a) Ducts and vents in post-tensioned piles shall be grouted after the transfer of prestress.
4 Grouting Procedure
(a) Grout shall be mixed for a minimum of 2 min and until a uniform consistency is
obtained.
(b) Ducts shall not be grouted when the air temperature in the shade is lower than 3 °C.
(c) Before grouting is started all ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned by means of
compressed air.
(d) Grout shall be injected near the lowest point in the duct in one continuous operation
and allowed to flow from the outlet until the consistency is equivalent to that of the
grout being injected.
(e) Vents in ducts shall be provided in accordance with Clause 8.9.2 of BS 8110.
5 Grout
(a) Unless otherwise directed or agreed by the Engineer

(i) the grout shall consist only of ordinary Portland cement, water and approved
admixtures; admixtures containing chlorides or nitrates shall not be used
(ii) the grout shall have a water/cement ratio as low as possible consistent with the
necessary workability, and the water/cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45 unless
an approved mix containing an expanding agent is used
(iii) the grout shall not be subject to bleeding in excess of 2 % after 3 h, or in excess
of 4% maximum, when measured at 18 C in a covered glass cylinder
approximately 100 mm in diameter with a height of grout of approximately 100
mm, and the water shall be reabsorbed after 24 h.
6 Records
(a) The Contractor shall keep detailed records of times of tensioning, measured
extensions, pressure gauge readings or load cell readings and the amount of pull-in at
ar
each anchorage. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Engineer within
such reasonable time from completion of each tensioning operation as may be
at
required, and in any case not later than noon on the following working day.
-Q
(b) The Contractor shall keep records of grouting, including the date, the proportions of
the grout and any admixtures used, the pressure, details of interruption and topping up
required. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Engineer within such
LL
reasonable time after completion of each grouting operation as may be required, and
in any case not later than noon on the following working day.
W
4.1.6 Driving Piles

s
1 Strength of Piles
en
(a) Piles shall not be driven until the concrete has achieved the specified strength.
m
2 Leaders and Trestles

e
(a) At all stages during driving and until incorporation into the substructure, the pile shall
Si
be adequately supported and restrained by means of leaders, trestles, temporary

supports or other guide arrangements to maintain position and alignment and to
prevent buckling. These arrangements shall be such that damage to the pile does not
occur.
3 Performance of Driving Equipment
(a) The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer regarding the suitability, efficiency and
energy of the driving equipment. Where designated, dynamic evaluation and analysis
shall be provided.
(b) Where a drop hammer is used, the mass of the hammer shall be at least half that of
the pile unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. For other types of hammer the
energy delivered to the pile per blow shall be at least equivalent to that of a drop
hammer of the stated mass. Drop hammers shall not be used from floating craft in
such a manner as to cause instability of the craft or damage to the pile.
4 Length of Piles
(a) The length of pile to be driven in any location shall be approved prior to the
commencement of driving.
5 Driving Procedure and Redrive Checks
(a) The driving of each pile shall be continuous until the specified depth or resistance
(set), or both, has been reached. In the event of unavoidable interruption to driving,
the pile will be accepted provided it can subsequently be driven to the specified depth
or resistance (set), or both, without damage. A follower shall not be used unless
approved, in which case the Engineer will require the set where applicable to be
revised in order to take into account reduction in the effectiveness of the hammer blow.
(b) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer without delay if an unexpected change in
driving characteristics is noted. A detailed record of the driving resistance over the full
length of the nearest available pile shall be taken if required.
(c) At the start of the work in a new area or section, a detailed driving record shall be
made over the full length of the first pile and during the last 3 m of subsequent piles
until consistency of behaviour is established. Where required, detailed driving records
shall also be made for 5 % of the piles driven, the locations of such piles being
ar
specified by the Engineer.
(d) The Contractor shall give adequate notice and provide all necessary facilities to enable
at
the Engineer to check driving resistance. A set or resistance measurement shall be
-Q
taken only in the presence of the Engineer unless otherwise approved.
(e) Redrive checks, if required, shall be carried out to an approved procedure.
LL
6 Final Set
(a) When driving to a set criterion, the final set of each pile shall be recorded either as the
W
penetration in millimetres per 10 blows or as the number of blows required to produce

a penetration of 25 mm.
s
(b) When a final set is being measured, the following requirements shall be met:
en
(i) The exposed part of the pile shall be in good condition without damage or
distortion.
m
(ii) The helmet, dolly and any packing shall be in sound condition.
e
Si
(iii) The hammer blow shall be in line with the pile axis and the impact surfaces shall
be flat and at right angles to the pile and hammer axis, and the head of the pile
protected against damage from hammer impact.
(iv) The hammer shall be in good condition, delivering adequate energy per blow,
and operating correctly.
(v) The temporary compression of the pile shall be recorded, if required.
7 Preboring
(a) If preboring is specified, the diameter and depth of prebore shall be as designated.
8 Jetting
(a) Jetting shall be carried out only when the Contractor's detailed proposals have been
approved.
4.1.7 Risen Piles
(a) Piles shall be driven in an approved sequence to minimise the detrimental effects of
heave and lateral displacement of the ground.
(b) When required, levels and measurements shall be taken to determine the movement
of the ground or of any pile resulting from the driving process.
(c) When a pile has risen as a result of adjacent piles being driven, the Engineer may call
for redriving or other testing to demonstrate that the performance of the pile is
unimpaired. If required, the Contractor shall make proposals for correcting
detrimentally affected piles and for avoidance or control of heave effects in subsequent
work.
4.1.8 Repair and lengthening of piles
1 Repair of Damaged Pile Heads
(a) If it is necessary to repair the head of a pile during driving, the Contractor shall carry
ar
out such repair in an approved way which allows the pile-driving to be completed
at
without further damage. If the driving of a pile has been accepted but sound concrete
of the pile is below the required cut-off level, the pile shall be made good to the cut-off
-Q
level, using an approved method so that it will safely withstand the imposed design
load.
2 Lengthening of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Piles

LL
(a) Any provision for lengthening piles incorporated at the time of manufacture shall be as
W
designed or approved.
(b) If no provision for lengthening piles was incorporated at the time of manufacture, any
s
method for lengthening shall be such that splices are capable of safely resisting the
stresses during driving and under service load and shall be subject to approval.
en
3 Driving Repaired or Lengthened Piles

m
(a) Repaired or lengthened piles shall not be driven until the added concrete has reached
e
the specified strength of the concrete of the pile.

Si
4.1.9 Cutting off pile heads
1 Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, when the driving of a pile has been approved the
concrete of the head of the pile shall be cut off to the designated level. The length of splice
reinforcing bars projecting above this level shall be as designated.
2 Care shall be taken to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Any
cracked or defective concrete shall be cut away and the pile repaired in an approved manner
to provide a full and sound section at the cut-off level.
4.2 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE SEGMENTAL PILES
4.2.1 Scope
1 This Part applies to piles made of elements cast at a precasting works away from the site,
where work cannot normally be closely supervised by the Engineer. The elements are joined
together as necessary on site during driving using special proven steel joints incorporated
into the pile elements when cast.
This Section
Part 1, .............. General Requirements for Piling Works
Part 2, .............. Concrete Works for Piling
Section 5, Concrete.
4.2.2 References
1 The following Standards are referred to in this Part:

Eurocode 7, EN1997-1, Section 7 Pile foundation
BS 7613,.....................Hot rolled quenched and tempered weldable structural steel plates
BS 3100,.....................Steel castings for general engineering purposes
BS 2789,.....................Spheroidal graphite or nodular graphite cast iron
BS 8110,.....................Structural use of concrete.
ar
4.2.3 Submittals
at
1 The Contractor shall order the piles to suit the construction programme and seek the
-Q
Engineer's approval before placing the order. When preliminary piles are specified the
approval for the piles for the main work will not necessarily be given until the results of the
driving and tests on preliminary piles have been received and evaluated.
LL

W
1 A certificate of quality from the pile manufacturer shall be provided to the Engineer when
required stating that the designated requirements have been fulfilled during manufacture.
s
en
2 Each pile element shall be marked in such a manner that it can be identified with the records
of manufacture, which shall state the date of casting, the cement type, concrete grade,
m
element length and any other relevant data. On delivery, the pile elements shall be
accompanied by records of manufacture.
e
Si
4.2.5 Tolerances in Pile Dimensions
1 The cross-sectional dimensions of the pile shall be not less than those designated.
2 The head of a pile element or the end of the pile upon which the hammer acts shall be
square to the pile axis within a tolerance of 1 in 50.
3 Each pile joint shall be square to the axis of the pile within a tolerance of 1 in 150. The
centroid of the pile joint shall lie within 5 mm of the true axis of the pile element.
4 Each face of a pile element shall not deviate by more than 6 mm from any straight line 3 m
long joining two points on that face, nor shall the centre of area of the pile at any cross-
section along its length deviate by more than 1/500 of the pile length from a line joining the
centres of area at the ends of the element. Where a pile element is less than 3 m long the
permitted deviation from straightness shall be reduced below 6 mm on a pro rata basis in
accordance with actual length.
4.2.6 Handling, Transportation, Storage and Acceptance of Piles
1 The method and sequence of lifting, handling, transporting and storing piles shall be such as
to avoid shock loading and to ensure that the piles are not damaged. Only designed lifting
and support points shall be used. During transport and storage, piles shall be appropriately
supported under the marked lifting points or fully supported along their length.
2 All pile elements within a stack shall be in groups of the same length. Packing of uniform
thickness shall be provided between piles at the lifting points.
3 Concrete shall at no time be subjected to loading, including its own weight, which will induce
a compressive stress in it exceeding 0.33 of its strength at the time of loading or of the
specified strength, whichever is the less. For this purpose the assessment of the strength of
the concrete and of the stresses produced by the loads shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
4 A pile element shall be rejected when the width of any transverse crack exceeds 0.3 mm.
ar
The measurement shall be made with the pile in its working attitude.
at
4.2.7 Materials and components -Q
1 Fabricated Steel Components
(a) In the manufacture of jointed precast concrete segmental piles, fabricated steel
LL
components shall comply with BS 7613 grades 43A or 50A, cast steel components
with BS 3100 grade A, and ductile iron components with BS 2789.
W
2 Pile Splices
s
(a) The splice joints shall be close-fitting face to face and the locking method shall be
en
such as to hold the faces in intimate contact. The design and manufacture of the
splicing system shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the
m
Contract.
e
(b) A spliced pile shall be capable of withstanding the same driving stresses or service
axial loads, moments and shear stresses as a single unspliced pile of the same cross-
Si
sectional dimensions and materials.

(c) The welding of a joint to main reinforcement in lieu of a lapped connection with
projecting bars affixed to the joint will not be permitted.
3 Pile Toes
(a) Pile toes shall be constructed so as to ensure that damage is not caused to the pile
during installation. Where fixity is required or socketing into rock, or in other
circumstances, an approved shoe may be required.
4 Pile Head Reinforcement
(a) Where the pile head is not furnished with a joint, it shall be so reinforced or banded as
to prevent bursting of the pile under driving conditions.
5 Main Reinforcement
(a) The main longitudinal reinforcing bars shall be in one continuous length. Splicing of
bars will not be permitted except at element ends.
(b) Concrete cover to steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with the requirements of
BS 8110.
(c) In very aggressive ground or exposure conditions, cover greater than 25 mm may be
required, but alternative protection methods may be approved.
6 Formwork
(a) If a pile is constructed with a shaped point or shoe, then the end of the pile shall be
symmetrical about the longitudinal axis of the pile.
(b) Holes for handling or pitching, where provided in the pile, shall be lined with steel
tubes; alternatively, approved inserts may be cast in.
(c) Formwork shall be robust, clean and so constructed as to prevent loss of grout or
aggregate from the wet concrete and ensure the production of uniform pile sections.
The piles are to be removed from the formwork carefully so as to prevent damage.
4.2.8 Driving piles
ar
1 Strength of Piles
at
(a) Piles shall not be driven until the concrete has achieved the specified characteristic
-Q
strength.

LL
(a) At all stages during driving and until incorporation into the substructure, the pile shall
be adequately supported and restrained by means of leaders, trestles, temporary
W
supports or other guide arrangements to maintain position and alignment and to

prevent buckling. These arrangements shall be such that damage to the pile does not
s
occur.
en

m
energy of the driving equipment. Where required in the particular specification,
e
dynamic evaluation and analysis shall be provided.

Si
the pile at the moment of driving unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. For
other types of hammer, the energy delivered to the pile per blow shall be at least
equivalent to that of a drop hammer of the stated mass. Drop hammers shall not be
used from floating craft in such a manner as to cause instability of the craft or damage
to the pile.
4 Length of Piles
(a) The length of pile supplied to be driven in any location and any additional lengths to be
added during driving shall he approved prior to the commencement of pile-driving.
During the execution of the Works, any changes to the supplied lengths shall be
approved.
(a) Except when making field splices, the driving of each pile shall he continuous until the
specified depth or resistance (set), or both, has been reached. In the event of
unavoidable interruption to driving, the pile will be accepted provided it can
subsequently be driven to the specified depth or resistance (set), or both, without
damage. A follower shall only be used when approved, in which case the Engineer will
require the set where applicable to be revised in order to take into account reduction in
the effectiveness of the hammer blow.
driving characteristics is noted. A detailed record of the driving resistance over the full
length of the nearest available pile shall be taken if required.
(c) At the start of the work in a new area or section a detailed driving record shall be made
over the full length of the first pile and during the last 3 m of subsequent piles until
consistency of behaviour is established. Where required, detailed driving records shall
also be made for 5 % of the piles driven, the positions of such piles being specified by
ar
the Engineer.
at
(d) The Contractor shall give adequate notice and provide all necessary facilities to enable
-Q
(e) Redrive checks, if required, shall be carried out to an approved procedure.
LL
6 Final Set
W
penetration in millimetres per ten blows or as the number of blows required to produce
s
en
(i) The exposed part of the pile shall be in good condition, without damage or
m
distortion.
e
(ii) The helmet, dolly and any packing shall be in sound condition.
Si
be flat and at right angles to the pile and hammer axis.
(v) The temporary compression of the pile shall be recorded if required.
7 Preboring
(a) If preboring is specified, the diameter and depth of prebore shall be as designated.
8 Jetting
approved.
4.2.9 Risen Piles
(a) Piles shall be driven in an approved sequence to minimise the detrimental effects of
heave and lateral displacement of the ground.
(b) When required, levels and measurements shall be taken to determine the movement
of the ground or of any pile resulting from the driving process.
(c) When a pile has risen as a result of adjacent piles being driven, the Engineer may call
for redriving or other testing to demonstrate that the performance of the pile is
unimpaired. If required, the Contractor shall make proposals for correcting piles
detrimentally affected and for avoidance or control of heave effects in subsequent
work.
4.2.10 Repair and lengthening of piles
1 Repair of Damaged Pile Heads
(a) If it is necessary to repair the head of a pile during driving, the Contractor shall carry
out such repair in an approved way which allows the driving of the pile to be completed
without further damage. If the driving of a pile has been accepted but sound concrete
of the pile is below the required cut-off level, the pile shall be made good to the cut-off
level, using an approved method so that it will safely withstand the imposed design
ar
load.
at
2 Lengthening of Piles -Q
(a) Where piles are required to be driven to depths exceeding those expected, leaving
insufficient projection for bonding into the following works, the piles shall be extended
or replaced as required by the Engineer using approved materials and methods.
LL

W
1 Unless otherwise specified, when the driving of a pile has been approved the concrete of the
head of the pile shall be cut off to the designated level. The length of splice reinforcing bars
s
projecting above this level shall be as designated.

en
2 Care shall be taken to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Any
m
cracked or defective concrete shall be cut away and the pile repaired in an approved manner
to provide a full and sound section at the cut-off level.
e
Si
4.3 BORED CAST IN PLACE PILES
4.3.1 Scope
1 This Part applies to bored piles in which the pile bore is excavated by rotary or percussive
means, or both, using short augers, buckets, grabs or other boring tools to advance the open
bore. Where the open bore is unstable, temporary or permanent casing or bentonite
suspension may be used to support the wall of the bore prior to concreting.
This Section
Section 3, Ground Investigation

Section 5, Concrete
4.3.2 References
1 The following codes of practice are referred to in this Part:

BS 5573,.....................Code of practice for safety precautions in the construction of large
diameter boreholes for piling and other purposes
BS 5930,.....................Code of practice for site investigation.
1 Inspection
(a) Each pile bore which does not contain standing water or drilling fluid shall be inspected
directly or indirectly prior to concrete being placed in it. This inspection shall be carried
out from the ground surface in the case of piles of less than 750 mm diameter.
Torches or other approved means of lighting, measuring tapes, and a means of
measuring verticality shall be provided. For piles of 750 mm diameter or larger,
equipment shall be provided, by the Contractor to enable his representatives and the
ar
Engineer to descend into the bore for the purpose of inspection. Any method of
at
descent and the equipment used shall comply with the requirements of BS 5573.
2 Cleanliness of pile bases

-Q
(a) On completion of boring and where inspection of a dry pile bore indicates the
necessity, loose, disturbed or softened soil shall be removed from the bore. Where
LL
pile bores contain water or drilling fluid, a cleaning process shall be employed before
concrete is placed. Large debris and accumulated sediment shall be removed using
W
appropriate approved methods, which shall be designed to clean while at the same
time minimising ground disturbance below the pile bases. Water or drilling fluid shall
s
be maintained at such levels throughout and following the cleaning operation that
en
stability of the bore is preserved.
3 Samples and Testing

m
(a) If required in the Contract, soil, rock or groundwater samples shall be taken or soil
e
tests carried out in-situ while the pile is being bored. The samples shall be taken to an
Si
approved laboratory for testing as specified.

(b) The taking of samples and all subsequent handling, transporting and testing shall be
carried out in accordance with Section 3, Ground Investigation.
4.3.4 Materials
1 Permanent Casings
(a) Permanent casings shall be as specified.
2 Drilling Fluid Supply
(a) A certificate shall be obtained by the Contractor from the manufacturer of the bentonite
powder showing the properties of each consignment delivered to the Site. This
certificate shall be made available to the Engineer on request. The properties to be
given by the manufacturer are the apparent viscosity range (in Pascal seconds) and
the gel strength range (in Pascal) for solids in water.
3 Drilling Fluid Mixing
(a) Bentonite shall be mixed thoroughly with clean fresh water to make a suspension
which will maintain the stability of the pile bore for the period necessary to place
concrete and complete construction. The temperature of the water used in mixing the
bentonite suspension, and of the suspension when supplied to the borehole, shall be
not lower than 5 C.
(b) Where saline or chemically contaminated groundwater occurs, special precautions
shall be taken to modify the bentonite suspension or prehydrate the bentonite in fresh
water so as to render it suitable in all respects for the construction of piles.
4 Drilling Fluid Tests
(a) The frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure of sampling shall
be proposed by the Contractor for approval prior to the commencement of the work.
The frequency may subsequently be varied as required, depending on the consistency
of the results obtained, subject to approval.
(b) Control tests shall be carried out on the bentonite suspension, using suitable
apparatus. The density of freshly mixed bentonite suspension shall be measured daily
ar
as a check on the quality of the suspension being formed. The measuring device shall
be calibrated to read to within 0.005 g/ml. Tests to determine density, viscosity, shear
at
strength and pH value shall be applied to bentonite supplied to the pile bore. For
-Q
average soil conditions the results shall generally be within the ranges in Table 4.2.
Table 4.2.Tests on Bentonite

LL
Property to be measured Range of results at 20 C Test method
Density Less than 1.10 g/ml Mud density balance

W
30 - 90 s Marsh cone method

Viscosity or
s
less than 0.020 Pa • s Fann viscometer*

en
1.4-10 Pa Shear meter

Shear strength
Or
m
(10 minute gel strength)

4-40 Pa Fann viscometer
e
pH indicator paper strips

pH 9.5 - 12
or electrical pH meter
Si
* Where the Fann viscometer is specified, the fluid sample should be screened by a
number 52 sieve (300 m) prior to testing.
(c) The tests shall be carried out until a consistent working pattern has been established
account being taken of the mixing process, any blending of freshly mixed bentonite
suspension and previously used bentonite suspension, and any process which may be
used to remove impurities from previously used bentonite suspension. When the
results show consistent behaviour, the tests for shear strength and pH value may be
discontinued, and tests to determine density and viscosity shall be carried out as
agreed with the Engineer. In the event of a change in the established working pattern,
tests for shear strength and pH value shall be reintroduced for a period if required.
4.3.5 Boring
1 Boring Near Recently Cast Piles
(a) Piles shall not be bored so close to other recently completed piles as to damage them.
2 Temporary Casings
(a) Temporary casing of approved quality or an approved alternative method shall be used
to maintain the stability of a pile bore which might otherwise collapse.
(b) Temporary casings shall be free from significant distortion. They shall be of uniform
cross-section throughout each continuous length. During concreting they shall be free
from internal projections and encrusted concrete which might adversely affect the
proper formation of piles.
(c) The use of a vibrator to insert and withdraw temporary casing may be permitted by the
Engineer subject to compliance with Noise and Disturbance and Damage to Adjacent
Structures of this section and to the method not causing disturbance of the ground
which would adversely affect the construction or the capacity of piles.
(d) Where piles are bored under water or bentonite suspension in an unlined state, the
insertion of a full-length loosely fitting casing to the bottom of the bore prior to placing
concrete will not be permitted.
ar
(e) Where permanent casing is specified to ensure the integrity of a pile, the Contractor
shall submit for approval his proposals regarding the method of installation.
at
3 Stability of Pile -Q
(a) Where boring takes place through unstable water-bearing strata, the process of
excavation and the depth of temporary casing employed shall be such that soil from
LL
outside the area of the pile is not drawn into the pile section and cavities are not
created outside the temporary casing as it is advanced.
W
(b) Where the use of drilling fluid is specified or approved for maintaining the stability of a
bore, an adequate temporary casing shall be used in conjunction with the method so
s
as to ensure stability of the strata near ground level until concrete has been placed.
en
During construction the level of drilling fluid in the pile excavation shall be maintained
within the cased or stable bore so that it is not less than 1.0 m above the level of
external standing groundwater at all times.
m
(c) In the event of a rapid loss of drilling fluid from a pile excavation, the bore shall be
e
backfilled without delay and the instructions of the Engineer shall be obtained before
Si
boring at that location is resumed.
4 Spillage and Disposal of Drilling Fluid
(a) All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of bentonite suspension on
the Site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of boring. Discarded bentonite shall be
removed from the Site without undue delay. Any disposal of bentonite shall comply
with the regulations of the local controlling authority.
5 Pumping from Pile Bores
(a) Pumping from pile bores shall not be permitted unless the bore has been sealed
against further water entry by casing or unless the soil is stable and will allow pumping
to take place without ground disturbance below or around the pile.
6 Continuity of Construction
(a) For a pile constructed in a stable cohesive soil without the use of temporary casing or
other form of support, the pile shall be bored and the concrete shall be placed without
such delay as would lead to significant impairment of the soil strength.
7 Enlarged Pile Bases
(a) A mechanically formed enlarged base shall be no smaller than the dimensions
specified and shall be concentric with the pile shaft to within a tolerance of 10 % of the
shaft diameter. The sloping surface of the frustum forming the enlargement shall make
an angle to the axis of the pile of not more than 35 .
4.3.6 Extraction of casing
1 Workability of Concrete
(a) Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains
sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted. During extraction the
motion of the casing shall be maintained in an axial direction relative to the pile.
2 Concrete Level
(a) When the casing is being extracted, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be
ar
maintained within it to ensure that pressure from external water, drilling fluid or soil is
exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated.
at
(b) The concrete level within a temporary casing shall be topped up where necessary
-Q
during the course of casing extraction in such a way that the base of the casing is
always below the concrete surface until the casting of the pile has been completed.
(c) Adequate precautions shall be taken in all cases where excess heads of water or
LL
drilling fluid could occur as the casing is withdrawn because of the displacement of
water or fluid by the concrete as it flows into its final position against the walls of the
W
pile bore. Where two or more discontinuous lengths of casing (double casing) are
used in the construction the proposed method of working shall be approved.
s
3 Pile Head Casting Level Tolerances

en
(a) For piles cast in dry bores using temporary casing and without the use of a permanent
m
lining, pile heads shall be cast to a level above the specified cut-off so that, after
trimming, a sound concrete connection with the pile can be made. The casting level
e
shall be within the tolerance above the cut-off level shown in Table 4.3, but shall not be
Si
above the original ground level. No pile shall be cast with its head below standing
water level unless approved measures are taken to prevent inflow of water causing
segregation of the concrete as temporary casing is extracted, and, where approved by
the Engineer, the groundwater level for each pile shall be treated as the cut-off level for
the purpose of calculating tolerance.
(b) For piles cast in dry bores within permanent lining tubes or permanent casings, or
where their cut-off levels are in stable ground below the base of any casing used, pile
heads shall be cast to a level above the specified cut-off so that, after trimming, a
sound concrete connection with the pile can be made. The casting level shall be within
the tolerance above the cut-off level shown in Table 4.4, but shall not be above the
original ground level.
(c) For piles cast under water or drilling fluid, the pile heads shall be cast to a level above
the specified cut-off so that, after trimming to remove all debris and contaminated
concrete, a sound concrete connection with the pile can be made. The casting level
shall be within the tolerance above the cut-off level shown in Table 4.4, but shall not be
above the commencing surface level. Cut-off levels may be specified below the
standing groundwater level, and where this condition applies the borehole fluid level
shall not be reduced below the standing groundwater level until the concrete has set.
(d) Where the cut-off level of piles lies at depths greater than 10 m below the original
ground level, then the tolerances given in Tables 4.3, 4.4 and 4.5 will be varied after
discussion with the Contractor and before the commencement of the piling to take
account of the special conditions which apply.
Table 4.3
Casting Tolerance above Cut-off Level for Piles Cast In Dry Bores Using Temporary Casing
and Without the Use of a Permanent Lining
ar
Cut-off distance below commencing surface, Casting tolerance above cut-off level, m
H, m
at
0.3 + H/12 + C/8
-Q where C = length of temporary casing
0.15-10.00 below the commencing surface*
* If H is greater than C, then this tolerance is no longer applicable and the tolerances in
Table 4.4 will apply.
LL
Table 4.4
W
Casting Tolerance above Cut-off Level for Piles Cast in Dry Bores within Permanent Lining
Tubes or Permanent Casings, or Where Their Cut-Off Levels is in Stable Ground below the
Base of Any Casing Used
s
en
H, m
m
0.15-10.00 0.3 + H/10

e
Si
Table 4.5
Casting Tolerance above Cut-off Level for Piles Cast Under Water or Drilling Fluid**
H, m
1.0 + H /12 + C/8

0.15-10.00 where C = length of temporary casing
below the commencing surface
** In cases where a pile is cast so that the cut-off is within a permanent lining tube, the appropriate
tolerance is given by deletion of the casing term C/8 in the table.
4 Water levels
(a) During extraction of temporary casings, where circumstances are such that newly
placed unset concrete is brought into contact with external groundwater, precautions
shall be taken to ensure that the internal concrete pressure at all levels within the pile
exceeds the external groundwater pressure.
5 Temporary backfilling above pile casting level
(a) After each pile has been cast, any empty bore remaining shall be protected and shall
be carefully backfilled as soon as possible with approved materials.
6 Disposal of excavated material
(a) Disposal of excavated material shall be carried out by the Contractor as necessary to
facilitate the Works and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
7 Cutting off pile heads
(a) When cutting off and trimming piles to the specified cut-off level, the Contractor shall
take care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Any cracked
or defective concrete shall be cut away and the pile repaired in an approved manner to
provide a full and sound section at the cut-off level
4.4 BORED PILES CONSTRUCTED USING CONTINUOUS FLIGHT AUGERS

AND CONCRETE OR GROUT INJECTION TROUGH HOLLOW AUGER
ar
STEMS
at
4.4.1 Scope
-Q
1 This Part applies to bored piles which employ a continuous flight auger for both advancing
the bore and maintaining its stability. The spoil-laden auger is not removed from the ground
until concrete or grout is pumped into the pile bore from the base of the hollow-stemmed
LL
auger to replace the excavated soil.

W
This Section
s

en

m
Section 3, Ground Investigation.

e
Section 5, Concrete
Si
4.4.2 Materials
1 Concrete Mix Design and Workability
(a) Where not otherwise stated in this Part, the concrete shall comply with Section 5. The
design and workability of concrete to be used in the formation of a pile shall produce a
mix which is suitable for pumping. It shall have a minimum slump of 150 mm unless
3
otherwise approved and a minimum cement content of 340 kg/m . The mix shall be
designed so that segregation does not occur during the placing process, and bleeding
of the mix shall be minimised.
2 Grout Mix Design and Workability
(a) Mix design of grout shall be subject to approval. Cement, water and aggregates for
grout shall be according to Section 5. Course aggregate to be used shall be of 6 mm
nominal size and shall be rounded and evenly graded.
(b) The workability of grout mixes, where used, shall be measured by a suitable and
approved means. The procedure for monitoring the suitability of grout throughout the
Works shall be stated in writing to the Engineer before beginning of the Works and
shall be subject to approval.
(c) Additives to the grout shall require prior approval of the Engineer.
3 Reinforcement
(a) All reinforcement shall be placed with the minimum delay after the completion of the
concreting or grouting operation. It shall be designed and fabricated in cages to permit
it to be placed in the correct position and to the depth specified through the concrete or
grout of the pile. Suitable approved spacers shall be provided to maintain the specified
concrete or grout cover to steel.
(b) The transverse reinforcement of any reinforcing cage shall be approved and may
consist of either spirals, hoops or links.
(c) Longitudinal main steel reinforcement shall be continuous over the specified length.
ar
Where splices are necessary, the number of laps shall be kept to a minimum and bars
shall be welded or joined together in an approved manner.
at
(d) Reinforcement shall be supported and centred so that it will provide the required
-Q
projection above the cut-off level, and the proper concrete cover.
4.4.3 Boring
LL
1 General
W
(a) During uncased boring with continuous flight auger, the feed forward and speed
(revolutions per minute) are to be adjusted according to the soil conditions in a way
s
that the excavation of soil will be limited to a quantity that the lateral support of the
en
uncased borehole wall will be ensured.
2 Boring Near Recently Cast Piles

m
(a) Piles shall not be bored so close to other piles which have recently been cast as to
e
damage them.
Si
3 Removal of Augers from the Ground
(a) Augers shall not be extracted from the ground during the boring or construction of a
pile in such a way that an open unsupported bore or inflow of water into the pile section
would result. While withdrawing the continuous flight auger, the auger shall be rotated
in the same direction as during drilling into the soil or shall be withdrawn without
rotation.
4 Depth of Piles
(a) Any failure of a pile to reach the designated depth shall be reported to the Engineer
without delay and a full statement of the reasons given.
5 Suitability of Boring Equipment
(a) The piles shall be bored using approved and suitable equipment capable of
penetrating the ground without drawing surrounding soils laterally into the pile bore.
4.4.4 Placing of concrete or grout
1 Equipment for Supply of Concrete or Grout to Piles
(a) Grout or concrete shall be supplied to the pile through suitable tubing and the hollow
auger stem. All pipe fitments and connections shall be so constructed that grout does
not leak during the injection process.
2 Commencement of Concrete or Grout Supply to Each Pile
(a) The base of the auger stem shall be fitted with a suitable means of sealing it against
ingress of water and soil until concrete or grout placing begins.
(b) At the beginning of concrete or grout placement this sealing device shall be removed
by the application of concrete or grout pressure. Care shall be taken to ensure that the
auger is lifted only sufficiently to initiate the flow of concrete or grout, and that water
inflow and soil movement at the base of the auger are minimised. The technique and
equipment used to initiate and maintain the concrete or grout flow shall be such that a
pile of the full specified cross-section is obtained from the maximum depth of boring to
the final pile cut-off level.
ar
3 Rate of Supply of Concrete or Grout
at
(a) The concrete or grout shall be supplied to the pile at a sufficient rate during auger
-Q
withdrawal to ensure that a continuous monolithic shaft of the full specified cross-
section is formed, free from debris or any segregated concrete or grout.
(b) The rate of withdrawal of the auger, the injection pressures and the rate of supply of
LL
concrete or grout shall be measured and recorded throughout the phase of auger
withdrawal for each pile.
W
(c) The Contractor shall submit proposals for his method of monitoring construction for
approval before beginning the Works.
s
4 Completion of Piles
en
(a) If the concrete or grout placing in any pile cannot be completed in the normal manner,
then the pile shall be rebored before concrete has hardened and shall be completely
m
replaced.
e
5 Casting Level of Pile Head

Si
(a) Concrete or grout shall be cast to the original ground level in all cases, and the
reinforcing cage set, as appropriate.
1 When cutting off and trimming piles to the specified cut-off level, the Contractor shall take
care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Any laitance, or
contaminated, cracked or defective concrete shall be cut away and the pile repaired in an
approved manner to provide a full and sound section up to the cut-off level.
4.5 DRIVEN CAST IN PLACES PILES
4.5.1 Scope
1 This Part applies to piles for which a permanent casing of steel or concrete is driven,
reinforcement placed within it if required, and the casing filled with concrete. It also applies to
piles in which a temporary casing is driven, reinforcement placed within it and the pile formed
in the ground by filling the temporary casing with concrete before and during its extraction.
This Section
Section 5, Concrete
4.5.2 Submittals
1 Where the Contractor wishes to form a pile with an enlarged base, details of the proposed
method of forming the base and the materials to be used shall be submitted at the time of
tendering.
1 Before placing concrete in a pile casing, the Contractor shall check in an approved manner
ar
that the casing is undamaged, and free from water or other foreign matter. In the event of
water or foreign matter having entered the pile casing, either the casing shall be withdrawn,
at
repaired if necessary and re-driven, or other action shall be taken as may be approved to
-Q
continue the construction of the pile.
4.5.4 Materials
LL
1 Permanent Casings
W
(a) Permanent casings shall be as specified. Where a permanent casing is to be made

from a series of short sections it shall be designed and placed so as to produce a
continuous water-free shaft. The dimensions and quality of the casing shall be
s
adequate to withstand the stresses caused by handling and driving without damage or
en
distortion.
m
2 Temporary Casings
e
(a) Temporary casings shall be free from significant distortion. They shall be of uniform
Si
external cross-section throughout each continuous length. During concreting they

shall be free from internal projections and encrusted concrete which might prevent the
proper formation of piles.
3 Pile Shoes
(a) Pile shoes shall be manufactured from durable material capable of withstanding the
stresses caused by driving without damage, and shall be designed to give a watertight
joint during construction.
4 Reinforcement
(a) This type of pile shall normally be reinforced over its full length unless permanently
cased. The use of shorter reinforcement in piles which are not permanently cased
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(b) The number of splices in longitudinal steel bars shall be kept to a minimum. The full
strength of each bar shall be effective across each splice, which shall be made so that
there is no detrimental displacement of the reinforcement during the construction of
the pile.
4.5.5 Driving piles
1 Piling Near Recently Cast Piles
(a) Casings shall not be driven or piles formed so close to other piles which have recently
been cast as to damage them.
energy of the driving equipment
(b) Drop hammers shall not be used from floating craft in such a manner as to cause
instability of the craft.
3 Length of Piles
(a) The length of pile to be driven in any location shall be approved.
ar
4 Driving Procedure
at
(a) Each pile casing shall be driven continuously until the specified or approved depth or
resistance (set), or both, has been reached. In the event of unavoidable interruption to
-Q
driving, the pile will be accepted provided on resumption the casing can be driven to
the specified depth or resistance (set), or both, without damage.
LL
driving characteristics is encountered. A detailed record of the driving resistance over

the full length of the nearest available subsequent pile shall be taken if required.
W
(c) At the start of the work in a new area or section a detailed driving record shall be made
over the full length of the first pile to be installed and over the last 3 m of the driving of
s
subsequent piles until consistency of behaviour is established. Where required,

en
detailed driving records shall also be made for 5 % of the piles driven, the positions of
such piles being specified by the Engineer.
m
(d) The Contractor shall give adequate notice and provide all facilities to enable the
e
Engineer to check driving resistance. A set shall be taken only in the presence of the
Si
Engineer unless otherwise approved.
5 Final Set
(a) Where piles are driven to a set, the final set of each pile, pile shell or casing shall be
recorded either as the penetration in millimetres per ten blows or as the number of
blows required to produce a penetration of 25 mm.
(i) The exposed part of the pile casing shall be in good condition, without damage
or distortion.
(ii) The dolly, helmet and packing, if any, shall be in sound condition.
(v) Temporary compression of the pile casing shall be recorded if required.
6 Preboring
(a) If preboring is specified the pile casing shall be pitched after preboring to the
designated depth and diameter.
7 Jetting
approved by the Engineer
8 Internal Drop Hammer
(a) Where a casing for a pile without an enlarged base is to be driven by an internal drop
hammer, a plug consisting of concrete grade 20 with a water/cement ratio not
exceeding 0.25 shall be placed in the pile. This plug shall have a compacted height of
not less than 2.5 times the diameter of the pile. Fresh concrete shall be added to
ensure that this height of driving plug is maintained in the casing throughout the period
of driving, and in any event a plug of fresh concrete shall be added after 1.5 h of
ar
normal driving or after 45 min of hard driving, or, should the driving of a pile be
interrupted for 30 min or longer, fresh concrete shall be added prior to driving being
at
resumed.
4.5.6 Risen Piles

-Q
1 Piles shall be driven in an approved sequence to minimise any detrimental effects of heave
LL
and lateral displacement of the ground.

W
2 When required, levels and measurements shall be taken to determine the movement of the
ground or any pile resulting from the driving process.
s
3 When a pile has risen with detrimental effects as a result of adjacent piles being driven the
en
Contractor shall, if required, submit to the Engineer his proposals for correcting or
compensating for this and for avoidance or control of heave effects in subsequent work.
m
4.5.7 Extraction of casing

e
Si
1 Workability of Concrete
(a) Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains
sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted.
2 Concrete Level
(a) When the casing is being extracted, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be
maintained within it to ensure that pressure from external water or soil is exceeded and
that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated.
(b) Concrete shall be topped up as necessary while the casing is extracted until the
required head of concrete to complete the pile in a sound and proper manner has been
provided. No concrete is to be placed once the bottom of the casing has been lifted
above the top of the concrete.
3 Vibrating Extractors
(a) The use of vibrating casing extractors will be permitted subject to Part 1 (Noise and
Disturbance) and (Damage to Adjacent Structures).
4 Concrete Casting Tolerances
(a) For piles constructed without the use of a rigid permanent lining, pile concrete shall be
cast to the original ground level.
(b) Where piles are constructed inside rigid permanent lining tubes or permanent casings,
pile heads shall be cast to a level above the specified cut-off so that, after trimming, a
sound concrete connection with the pile can be made. In this case, the tolerance of
casting above the cut-off level shall be determined according to Table 4.6.
Table 4.6
Casting Tolerance above Cut-off Level for Piles Constructed Inside Rigid Permanent Lining
Tubes or Permanent Casings
Cut-off distance below original Casting tolerance above cut-off level

ground, H, (m) (m)
ar
0.15 to any depth 2.2 + H/10
at
5 Repair of damaged pile heads and making-up of piles to the correct level
-Q
(a) When repairing or extending the head of a pile, the head shall be cut off square in
sound concrete, and all loose particles shall be removed by wire brushing, followed by
LL
washing with water.

(b) If the driving of a pile has been accepted but sound concrete of the pile is below the
W
cut-off level, the pile shall be made good to the cut-off level with concrete of a grade
not inferior to that of the concrete of the pile.
s
6 Lengthening of cast-in- place piles after driving

en
(a) When it is required to extend a cast-in-place driven pile above ground, the materials to
m
be used and procedures to be adopted shall be subject to the approval of the

Engineer.
e
Si
7 Lengthening of permanent pile casings during construction
(a) The lengthening of permanent steel pile casings by adding an additional length of the
same steel casing during construction shall be carried out in accordance with the
relevant clauses of this Section or by other approved methods. The use of casing
extension materials and methods other than those specified shall be subject to
approval.
8 Temporary backfilling above pile casting level
(a) After each pile has been cast, any hole remaining shall be protected and shall be
carefully backfilled as soon as possible with approved materials.
9 Cutting off pile heads
(a) When cutting off and trimming piles to the specified cut-off level, the Contractor shall
take care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Any cracked
or defective concrete shall be cut away and the pile repaired in an approved manner to
provide a full and sound section to the cut-off level.
4.6 STEEL PILES
4.6.1 Scope
1 This Part applies to driven steel piles designed to act as bearing piles.
This Section

Section 5, Concrete
4.6.2 References
ar
at
BS 4, ..........................Structural steel sections
BS 3100, ....................Steel casting for general engineering purposes.
-Q
BS 5135, ....................Process of arc-welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels
BS 6265, ....................Resistance steam welding of uncoated and coated low carbon steel
LL
BS 7613, ....................Hot rolled quenched and tempered weldable structural steel plates
API 5L,........................Interpretation of non-destructive testing.
W
4.6.3 Submittals
s
1 Where coatings are specified, the Contractor shall submit for approval full details of the
en
coating procedure and surface preparation according to relevant British or Swedish

Standards.
m

e
Si
1 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with Works test certificates, analyses, and mill
sheets, together with a tube manufacturer's certificate showing details of the pile number,
cast number of the steel and a record of all tests and inspections carried out. The Engineer
has the right to inspect any stage of the manufacturing processes and shall be given
adequate notice by the Contractor of such processes and production tests, provided that,
once he has been notified, any delay in his attendance does not cause delay to, or disrupt,
the manufacturing process. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with samples for
independent testing when requested.
2 The Contractor shall submit for approval full details of the welding procedures and
electrodes, with drawings and schedules as may be necessary. Tests shall be undertaken as
may be required by the relevant British Standard or as may be required by the Engineer.
Only welders who are qualified in the approved welding procedure in accordance with the
tests laid down in the relevant British Standard, or who have a proven record over the
previous six months, or who have attained a similar standard, shall be employed on the
Works. Proof of welders' proficiency shall be made available to the Engineer on request.
4.6.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 The Contractor shall
(a) Order the piles to suit the construction programme.

(b) Obtain the Engineer's approval before placing the order.
2 When preliminary piles are specified, the approval for the piles for the main work will not
necessarily be given until the results of the driving and tests on preliminary piles have been
received and evaluated.
3 Each pile shall be clearly numbered and its length shown near the pile head using white
paint. In addition, before being driven, each pile shall be graduated at appropriate intervals
along its length and at intervals of 250 mm along the top 3 m.
4 All piles within a stack shall be in groups of the same length and on approved supports. All
operations such as handling, transporting and storing of piles shall be carried out in a manner
ar
such that damage to piles and their coatings is minimised.
at
4.6.6 Materials -Q
1 Pile Shoes
(a) Cast steel shoes shall be of steel to BS 3100, grade Al. Flat plate and welded
LL
fabricated steel shoes shall be grade 43A or 50A, conforming to BS 7613 and related
standards.
W
2 Strengthening of Piles
s
(a) The strengthening to the toe of a pile in lieu of a shoe or the strengthening of the head
en
of a pile shall be made using material of the same grade as the pile unless otherwise
approved.
m
3 Manufacturing Tolerance
e
(a) All piles shall be of the type and cross-sectional dimensions specified. For standard
Si
rolled sections the dimensional tolerances and weight shall comply with the relevant
standard. The tolerance on length shall be -0 and +75 mm unless otherwise specified.
For proprietary sections the dimensional tolerances shall comply with the
manufacturer's standards. The rolling or manufacturing tolerances for proprietary
sections shall be such that the actual weight of section does not differ from the
theoretical weight by more than +4 % or -2½ % unless otherwise agreed. The rolling
or manufacturing tolerances for steel tubular piles shall be such that the actual weight
of section does not differ from the theoretical weight by more than ±5 %.
4 Straightness of Piles
(a) For standard rolled sections the deviation from straightness shall be within the
compliance provisions of BS 4, Part 1. When two or more rolled lengths are joined by
butt-jointing, the deviation from straightness shall not exceed 1/600 of the overall
length of the pile.
(b) For proprietary sections made up from rolled sections, and for tubular piles, the
deviation from straightness on any longitudinal face shall not exceed 1/600 of the
length of the pile nor 5 mm in any 3 m length.
5 Fabrication of Piles
(a) For tubular piles where the load will be carried by the wall of the pile, and if the pile will
be subject to loads that induce reversal of stress during or after construction, the
external diameter at any section as measured by using a steel tape on the
circumference shall not differ from the theoretical diameter by more than ±1.
(b) The ends of all tubular piles as manufactured shall be within a tolerance on ovality of
±1 % as measured by a ring gauge for a distance of 100 mm at each end of the pile
length.
(c) The root edges or root faces of lengths of piles that are to be shop butt-welded shall
not differ by more than 25 % of the thickness of pile walls not exceeding 12 mm thick
or by more than 3 mm for piles where the wall is thicker than 12 mm. When piles of
unequal wall thickness are to be butt-welded, the thickness of the thinner material shall
be the criterion.
6 Matching of Pile Lengths
ar
(a) Longitudinal seam welds and spiral seam welds of two lengths of tubular piles being
at
joined shall, whenever possible, be evenly staggered at the butt. However, if in order
to obtain a satisfactory match of the ends of piles or to meet specified straightness, the
-Q
seams cannot be staggered evenly, then they shall be staggered by at least 100 mm.
7 Welding
LL
(a) Welding of H-piles and piles that will be subjected to stress reversal, during or after
construction, shall be in accordance with BS 5135.
W
(b) For a tubular pile where the load will be compressive and non-reversible and will be
carried by the wall of the pile or by composite action with a concrete core, the welding
s
shall be to BS 5135 or BS 6265.

en
8 Coating Piles for Protection against Corrosion

m
(a) Where coatings are specified they shall be provided in accordance with the Particular
e
Specification. In general, coatings will not be called for where piles are fully in contact
Si
with undisturbed natural soils or below the standing water table. Cathodic protection
may be called for when there is a possibility of stray electrical current from the
supported structure flowing to earth through the piles.
4.6.7 Acceptance Standards For Welds
1 Acceptance Standards for Shop Welds
(a) Longitudinal or spiral welds made in the manufacture of tubular piles are subject to the
acceptance standard for interpretation of non-destructive testing specified in latest
edition of API 5L. The maximum projecting height of weld reinforcement shall not
exceed 3 mm for wall thicknesses not exceeding 13 mm and 5 mm for wall
thicknesses greater than 13 mm.
(b) Longitudinal welds joining the constituent parts of the box or proprietary section shall
be in accordance with the manufacturer's specification.
(c) The maximum projecting height of weld reinforcement for circumferential welds in
tubular piles shall be the same as specified above for longitudinal welds in tubular
piles.
2 Acceptance Standards for Site Butt Welds
(a) Welds shall comply with the requirements of the Weld Quality Acceptance Standards
for Site Butt Welds in Steel Bearing Piles published by British Steel Corporation,
General Steels Group.
4.6.8 Acceptability and inspection of coatings
1 The finished coating shall be generally of smooth and uniform texture and free from sharp
protuberances or pin holes. Excessive sags, dimpling or curtaining will not be acceptable.
2 Any coat damaged by subsequent processes, or which has deteriorated to an extent such
that proper adhesion of the coating is in doubt, shall be removed and the surface shall be
cleaned to the original standard and recoated with the specified number and thicknesses of
coats.
3 The completed coating shall be checked for thickness by an approved magnetic thickness
ar
gauge. Areas where the thickness is less than that specified shall receive approved
additional coating.
at
4 Average measured thickness should be equal to or greater than the specified thickness and
-Q
no single reading should be less than 85 % of the specified thickness. The completed
coating shall also be checked for adhesion by the cross-hatching method with lines spaced at
ten times the thickness of the coating. Adhesion tests should not be carried out prior to
LL
seven days after coating.

W
5 The tests shall be made on 10 % of the piles. Areas where the adhesion is not approved
shall be sand blasted and recoated. The coating shall be approved before pitching and
driving of the piles.
s
en
4.6.9 Driving of piles

m

e
(a) At all stages during driving and until incorporation in the superstructure, the free length
Si
of the pile shall be adequately supported and restrained by means of leaders, trestles,
temporary supports or other guide arrangements to maintain position and alignment
and to prevent buckling. In marine works, lengths which remain unsupported after
driving shall be adequately restrained until incorporated into the permanent Works.
These constraint arrangements shall be such that damage to piles and their coatings is
minimised.
energy of the driving equipment. Where required in the Contract, dynamic evaluation
and analysis shall be provided.
the pile unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. For other types of hammer the
energy delivered to the pile per blow shall be at least equivalent to that of a drop
hammer of the stated mass. Drop hammers shall not be used from floating craft in
such a manner as to cause instability of the craft.
3 Length of Piles
(a) The length of pile to be driven and any additional lengths of pile to be added during
driving shall be approved by the Engineer.
(a) The driving of each pile shall be continuous until the specified depth or resistance
(set), or both, has been reached. In the event of unavoidable interruption to driving,
the pile will be accepted provided it can be driven to the specified depth or resistance
(set), or both, without damage.
(b) A follower shall not be used unless approved, in which case the Engineer will require
the set where applicable to be revised in order to take into account reduction in the
effectiveness of the hammer blow.
(c) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer as soon as an unexpected change in driving
characteristics is noted. A detailed record of the driving resistance over the full length
of the nearest subsequent pile shall be taken, if required by the Engineer.
ar
(d) At the start of the work in a new area or section a detailed record shall be made over
at
the full driving length of the first pile, and during the last 3 m of the driving of
subsequent piles, to establish the driving behaviour. Where required, detailed driving
-Q
records shall also be made for 5 % of the piles driven, the locations of such piles being
specified by the Engineer.
LL
(e) The Contractor shall give adequate notice and provide all necessary facilities to enable
W
(f) Redrive checks, if required, shall be carried out in accordance with an approved
s
procedure.
en
5 Final Set or Resistance

m
penetration in millimetres per ten blows or as the number of blows required to produce
e
Si
(b) When a final set or resistance is being measured, the following requirements shall be
met:
(i) The exposed part of the pile shall be in good condition, without damage or
distortion.
(ii) The dolly and packing, if any, shall be in sound condition.
(iv) The hammer shall be in good condition, delivering adequate energy per blow
(v) The temporary compression of the pile shall be recorded, if required by the
Engineer.
6 Preboring
(a) If preboring is specified the pile shall be pitched after preboring to the designated
depth and diameter.
7 Jetting
approved.
4.6.10 Risen Piles
1 Piles shall be driven in an approved sequence to minimise any detrimental effects of heave
and lateral displacement of the ground.
2 When required by the Engineer, levels and measurements shall be taken to determine the
movement of the ground or any pile resulting from the driving of adjacent piles.
3 When a pile has risen as a result of adjacent piles being driven, the Engineer may call for
redriving or other testing to demonstrate that the performance of the pile under load is
unimpaired. If required, the Contractor shall make proposals for correcting detrimentally
affected piles and for avoidance or control of heave in subsequent work.
ar
4.6.11 Preparation of pile heads
at
1 If a steel superstructure is to be welded to piles, the pile cut-off shall be square and to within
-Q
5 mm of the elevations shown on the Drawings. If pile heads are to be encased in concrete
they shall be cut to that same tolerance and protective coatings shall be removed from the
surfaces of the pile heads down to a level 100 mm above the soffit of the concrete.
LL
4.7 MICROPILES (TO BE ADDED LATER)

W
4.8 REDUCTION OF FRICTION ON PILES

s
en
4.8.1 Scope
1 This Part includes preapplied bituminous or other proprietary friction-reducing coating, pre-
m
applied low-friction sleeving, formed-in-place low-friction surround, and preinstalled low-

e
friction sleeving.
Si
2 Related Parts are as follows:
This Section
4.8.2 Submittals
1 Where the particular method of reducing friction is not specified, the Contractor shall submit
full details of the method which he proposes.
4.8.3 Friction Reducing Methods
1 General
(a) Where a means of reducing friction on any specified length of pile is required by the
Contract, the Contractor shall provide a suitable interface between pile and soil by one
of the following, or other approved, methods
(i) Preapplied bituminous or other proprietary friction-reducing coating.

(ii) Preapplied low-friction sleeving.
(iii) Formed-in-place low-friction surrounds.
(iv) Preinstalled low-friction sleeving.
2 Preapplied Bituminous or other Friction-Reducing Coating Materials
(a) Where a proprietary product is specified, the process of cleaning pile surfaces, and the
conditions and methods of application shall conform to the manufacturer's current
instructions. All materials shall conform to the manufacturer's specification, which
shall be given to the Engineer before any coating is applied.
(b) Where a friction-reducing material has been applied to a preformed pile prior to
installation, it shall be protected from damage during handling and transportation. In
the event of inadvertent damage to the coating, it shall be repaired on site, prior to the
pile being driven, to the same specification as the original coating. Where bituminous
ar
materials are involved, precautions shall be taken as necessary in hot weather to
prevent excessive flow or displacement of the coating. The coated piles shall be
at
adequately protected against direct sunlight and, if stacked, they shall be separated to
prevent their coatings sticking together. -Q
(c) In the case of applied coatings, the piles shall not be driven when the air temperature
is such that the coating will crack, flake or otherwise be damaged prior to entry into the
ground. Where bituminous materials are involved, driving shall be carried out while
LL
the temperature is at or above 5 °C unless otherwise approved or called for in the

manufacturer's instructions.
W
3 Preapplied Low-Friction Sleeving

s
(a) Piles may be driven with a preapplied low-friction sleeving subject to the approval of
en
the detailed design and method by the Engineer.

m
4 Formed-In-Place Low-Friction Surround

e
(a) Where a hole is bored in the ground and filled with low-friction material through which a
Si
pile is subsequently driven or placed, the method and the properties of the low-friction
material both above and below standing groundwater level, together with the
dimensions of the prebored hole in relation to the pile, shall be approved by the
Engineer.
5 Preinstalled Low-Friction Sleeving
(a) Where a system is employed involving placing a low-friction sleeve in the ground prior
to pile installation, the detailed materials and method of installation of the sleeving shall
be approved by the Engineer.
4.8.4 Inspection
1 The Engineer may call for piles to be partially exposed or extracted at the commencement of
a contract in order to demonstrate that the method of installation does not impair the
effectiveness of the system in the circumstances of use on the particular site. Where damage
is found to have occurred, or is likely to occur in the opinion of the Engineer, additional
measures or variation of the method may be called for. At the discretion of the Engineer,
further inspections shall be carried out to ascertain the effectiveness of the additional
measures.
4.8.5 Driving resistance
1 Allowance shall be made in driving piles to a required resistance or set for any differences
between the short-term driving resistance and the long-term static resistance of the coating
or surrounding low-friction material which is in use.
4.9 PILE LOAD TESTING
4.9.1 Static Load Testing of Piles
1 Scope
(a) This Part deals with the testing of a pile by the controlled application of an axial load. It
covers vertical and raking piles tested in compression (i.e. subjected to loads or forces
in a direction such as would cause the piles to penetrate further into the ground) and
vertical or raking piles tested in tension (i.e., subjected to forces in a direction such as
would cause the piles to be extracted from the ground).
ar
2 References
at
The following standard is referred to in this Part:-Q
BS 1881, ....................Methods of testing concrete.
3 Submittals
LL
(a) When required, the design and full details of the proposed load application system
shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the commencement of testing. The load
W
application system shall be satisfactory for the required test.

s
4 Definitions
en
(a) Allowable pile capacity: a load which is not less than the specified working load and
which takes into account the pile's ultimate bearing capacity, the materials from which
m
the pile is made, the required factor of safety, settlement, pile spacing, downdrag, the
overall bearing capacity of the ground beneath the piles and any other relevant factors.
e
The allowable pile capacity indicates the ability of a pile to meet the specified loading
Si
requirements.
(b) Compression pile: a pile which is designed to resist compressive (downward) axial
load.
(c) Constant rate of penetration (CRP) test: a test in which the pile is made to penetrate
the soil at a constant controlled speed, while the loads applied at the top of the pile in
order to maintain the constant rate of penetration are continuously measured. The
purpose of the test is to derive the ultimate bearing capacity of a pile and not its load
settlement characteristics.
(d) Constant rate of uplift (CRU) test: the same in principle as the CRP test, but the pile is
subject to tension rather than compression. The purpose of the test is to determine
the 'pull-out' capacity of a pile.
(e) Design verification load (DVL): a test load, in lieu of a specified working load, applied
to a single pile at the time of testing to determine that site conditions conform to design
assumptions. This load will be peculiar to each preliminary (test) pile and should equal
the maximum specified working load for a pile of the same dimensions and material,
plus allowances for soil-induced forces and any other particular conditions of the test.
(f) Kentledge: ballast used in a loading test.

(g) Maintained load test: a loading test in which each increment of load is held constant
either for a defined period of time or until the rate of settlement falls to a specified
value.
(h) Preliminary pile: a test pile installed before the commencement of the main piling
works or a specific part of the Works for the purpose of establishing the suitability of
the chosen type of pile and for confirming its design, dimensions and bearing capacity.
(i) Proof load: a load applied to a selected working pile to confirm that it is suitable for the
load at the settlement specified. A proof load should not normally exceed the design
verification load plus 50 % of the specified working load.
(j) Raking pile: a batter pile, installed at an inclination to the vertical.
(k) Reaction system: the arrangement of kentledge, piles, anchors or rafts that provides a
resistance against which the pile is tested.
(l) Specified working load (SWL): the designated load on the head of a pile.
ar
(m) Tension pile: a pile which is designed to resist a tensile (upward) axial force.
at
(n) Test pile: any pile, preliminary or part of the works, to which a test is applied.
-Q
(o) Ultimate bearing capacity: the load at which the resistance of the soil becomes fully
mobilised through friction, end bearing or a combination thereof.
(p) Working pile: one of the piles forming the foundation of a structure.
LL
5 Construction of a preliminary pile to be tested

W
(a) Notice of Construction

s
(i) The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 48 hours' notice of the
en
commencement of construction of any preliminary pile which is to be test-

loaded.
m
(b) Method of Construction

e
(i) Each preliminary test pile shall be constructed in a manner similar to that to be
Si
used for the construction of the working piles, and by the use of similar
equipment and materials. Any variation will be permitted only with prior approval.
(c) Boring or Driving Record
(i) For each preliminary pile to be tested, a detailed record of the conditions
experienced during boring and of the progress during driving, shall be made and
submitted to the Engineer daily, not later than noon on the next working day.
Where the Engineer requires soil samples to be taken or in-situ tests to be
made, the Contractor shall include that in the daily report, as well as the test
results.
(d) Concrete Test Cubes
(i) In the case of concrete piles, four test cubes shall be made from the concrete
3
used in the manufacturer of each preliminary test pile and from each 50 m of
the concrete used in the manufacture of working piles. If a concrete pile is
extended or capped for the purpose of testing, an additional four cubes shall be
made from the corresponding batch of concrete. The cubes shall be made and
tested in accordance with BS 1881.
(ii) The pile test shall not be started until the strength of the cubes taken from the
pile exceeds twice the average direct stress in any pile section under the
maximum required test load, and the strength of the cubes taken from the cap
exceeds twice the average stress at any point in the cap under the same load.
Variation of procedure will be permitted only if approved by the Engineer.
(e) Preparation of a Working Pile to be Tested
(i) If a test is required on a working pile the Contractor shall cut off or otherwise
prepare the pile for testing as required by the Engineer.
(f) Cut-off Level
(i) The cut-off level for a preliminary test pile shall be approved by the Engineer.
6 Supervision
(a) The setting-up of pile testing equipment shall be carried out under competent
supervision and the equipment shall be checked to ensure that the set-up is
ar
satisfactory before the commencement of load application.
(b) All tests shall be carried out only under the direction of an experienced and competent
at
supervisor experienced with the test equipment and test procedure. All personnel
-Q
operating the test equipment shall have been trained in its use.
7 Safety precautions
LL
(a) General
(i) Design, erection and dismantling of the pile test reaction system and the
W
application of load shall be carried out according to the requirements of the

various applicable statutory regulations concerned with lifting and handling
s
heavy equipment and shall safeguard operators and others who may from time
en
to time be in the vicinity of a test from all avoidable hazards.

(b) Kentledge
m
(i) Where kentledge is used, the Contractor shall construct the foundations for the
e
kentledge and any cribwork, beams or other supporting structure in such a

Si
manner that there will not be differential settlement, bending or deflexion of an

amount that constitutes a hazard to safety or impairs the efficiency of the
operation. The kentledge shall be adequately bonded, tied or otherwise held
together to prevent it becoming unstable because of deflexion of the supports or
for any other reason.
(ii) When kentledge constitutes the principal component of a reaction system, its
weight for each test shall be at least 25% greater than the maximum test load
for that test. The weight may be determined by scale or the density and volume
of the constituent materials. In adding kentledge, care shall be taken to properly
position the centre of gravity of the stack.
(c) Tension Piles, Reaction Piles and Ground Anchorages

(i) Where tension piles, reaction piles or ground anchorages constitute the principal
components of a reaction system, they shall be so designed that they will resist
the forces applied to them safely and without excessive deformation which could
cause a safety hazard during the work. Such piles (which, unless approved, will
not be working piles) or anchorages shall be driven in the specified locations,
and all bars, tendons or links shall be aligned to provide a stable reaction in the
direction required. Any welding employed to extend or to fix anchorages to a
reaction frame shall be carried out so that the full strength of the system is
adequate and unimpaired.
(d) Testing Equipment
(i) In all cases the Contractor shall ensure that when the hydraulic jack and load-
measuring device are mounted on the pile head the whole system will be stable
up to the maximum load to be applied.
(ii) If in the course of carrying out a test any unforeseen occurrence should take
ar
place, further loading shall not be applied until a proper engineering assessment
of the condition has been made and steps have been taken to rectify any fault.
at
Reading of gauges should, however, be continued where possible and if it is
-Q
safe to do so.
(iii) Where an inadequacy in any part of the system might constitute a hazard,
means shall be provided to enable the test to he controlled from a position
LL
remote from of the kentledge stack or test frame.

(iv) The hydraulic jack, pump, hoses, pipes, couplings and other apparatus to be
W
operated under hydraulic pressure shall be capable of withstanding a pressure

of 1.5 times the maximum pressure used in the test without leaking. The
s
maximum test load expressed as a reading on the gauge in use shall be

en
displayed and all operators shall be made aware of this limit.

(e) Pile Head for Compression Test
m
(i) For a pile that is tested in compression, the pile head or cap shall be formed to
e
give a plane surface which is normal to the axis of the pile, sufficiently large to
Si
accommodate the loading and settlement measuring equipment and adequately

reinforced or protected to prevent damage from the concentrated load applied
by the loading equipment.
(ii) Any test pile cap shall be concentric with the test pile; the joint between the cap
and the pile shall have a strength equivalent to that of the pile.
(iii) Sufficient clear space shall be made under any part of the cap projecting beyond
the section of the pile so that, at the maximum expected settlement, load is not
transmitted to the ground by the cap.
(f) Pile Connection for Tension Test
(i) For a pile that is tested in tension, means shall be provided for transmitting the
test load axially without inducing moment in the pile. The connection between
the pile and the loading equipment shall be constructed in such a manner as to
provide strength equal to 1.5 times the maximum load which is to be applied to
the pile during the test.
8 Reaction systems
(a) Compression Tests

(i) The reaction for compression tests shall be provided by kentledge, tension piles
or specially constructed anchorages. Kentledge shall not be used for tests on
raking piles except where the test set-up has been specifically designed to
conform to Item 7(g). and has been approved by the Engineer.
(ii) Where kentledge is to be used, it shall be supported on cribwork and positioned
so that the centre of gravity of the load is as close as possible to the axis of the
pile. The bearing pressure under supporting cribs shall be such as to ensure
stability of the kentledge stack.
(b) Tension Tests
(i) The reaction for tension tests shall be provided by compression piles, rafts or
grillages constructed on the ground. In all cases the resultant force of the
reaction system shall be coaxial with the test pile.
ar
(ii) Where inclined piles or reactions are proposed, full details shall be submitted for
at
approval prior to the commencement of testing.
(c) Working Piles
-Q
(i) Working piles shall not be used as reaction piles without approval from the
Engineer.
LL
(ii) Where working piles are used as reaction piles their movement shall be
measured and recorded to with an accuracy of 0.5 mm, and recorded.
W
(d) Spacing
(i) Where kentledge is used for loading vertical piles in compression, the distance
s
from the edge of the test pile to the nearest part of the crib supporting the
en
kentledge stack in contact with the ground shall be not less than 1.3 m.
m
(ii) The centre-to-centre spacing of vertical reaction piles from a test pile shall
conform to Paragraph 1 above, but shall be not less than three times the
e
diameter of the test pile or the reaction piles or 2 m, whichever is the greatest,
Si
except in the case of piles of 300 mm diameter (or equivalent) or less, where the
distance may be reduced to 1.5 m. Where a pile to be tested has an enlarged
pile cap, the same criterion shall apply with regard to the pile shaft, with the
additional requirement that no surface of a reaction pile shall be closer to the
pile cap of the test pile than one half of the pile cap plan dimension.
(iii) Where ground anchorages are used to provide a test reaction for loading in
compression, no section of fixed anchor length transferring load to the ground
shall be closer to the test pile than three times the diameter of the test pile.
Where the pile to be tested has an enlarged pile cap, the same criterion shall
apply with regard to the pile shaft, with the additional requirement that no section
of the fixed anchor transferring load to the ground shall be closer to the pile cap
than a distance equal to one half the pile cap plan dimension.
(e) Adequate Reaction
(i) The reaction frame support system shall be adequate to transmit the maximum
test load in a safe manner without excessive movement or influence on the test
pile. Calculations shall be provided to the Engineer when required to justify the
design of the reaction system.
(f) Care of Piles

(i) The method employed in the installation of the reaction system shall be such as
to prevent damage to any test pile or working pile.
9 Equipment for applying load
(a) The equipment used for applying load shall consist of a hydraulic ram or jack. The
jack shall be arranged in conjunction with the reaction system to deliver an axial load
to the test pile. Proposals to use more than one ram or jack will be subject to approval
by the Engineer of the detailed arrangement. The complete system shall be capable of
safely transferring the maximum load required for the test. The length of stroke of a
ram shall be sufficient to account for deflexion of the reaction system under load plus a
deflection of the pile head by up to 15 % of the pile shaft diameter unless otherwise
specified or agreed prior to commencement of test loading.
10 Measurement of load
ar
(a) A load measuring device shall be used and in addition a calibrated pressure gauge
included in the hydraulic system. Readings of both the load measuring device and the
at
pressure gauge shall be recorded. In interpreting the test data the values given by the
load measuring device shall normally be used; the pressure gauge readings are
-Q
required as a check for gross error.
(b) The load measuring device may consist of a load measuring column, pressure cell or
other appropriate system. A spherical seating of appropriate size shall he used to
LL
avoid eccentric loading. Care shall be taken to avoid any risk of buckling of the load
application and measuring system. Load measuring and application devices shall be
W
short in axial length in order to secure stability. The Contractor shall ensure that axial
loading is maintained.
s
(c) The load measuring device shall be calibrated before and after each series of tests,
en
whenever adjustments are made to the device or at intervals appropriate to the type of
equipment. The pressure gauge and hydraulic jack shall be calibrated together.
m
Certificates of calibration shall be supplied to the Engineer.

e
11 Control of loading
Si
(a) The loading equipment shall enable the load to be increased or decreased smoothly or
to be held constant at any required value.
12 Measuring pile head movement
(a) Maintained Load Test

(i) In a maintained load test, movement of the pile head shall he measured by one
of the methods in Items 11 (d), (e), (f), (g) in the case of vertical piles, or by one
of the methods in 11 (d), (f), (g) in the case of the raking piles, as required.
(b) CRP and CRU Tests
(i) In a CRP or a CRU test, the method in Item 11 (d) shall be used. Check-
levelling of the reference frame or the pile head shall not be required. The dial
gauge shall be graduated in divisions of 0.02 mm or less.
(c) Reference Beams and Dial Gauges

(i) An independent reference beam or beams shall be set up to enable
measurement of the movement of the pile to be made to the required accuracy.
The supports for a beam shall be founded in such a manner and at such a
distance from the test pile and reaction system that movements of the ground
do not cause movement of the reference beam or beams which will affect the
accuracy of the test. The supports of the beam or beams shall be at least three
test pile diameters or 2 m from the centre of the test pile, whichever distance is
the greater.
(ii) Check observations of any movements of the reference beam or beams shall be
made and a check shall be made of the movement of the pile head relative to a
remote reference datum at suitable intervals during the progress of the test.
(iii) The measurement of pile movement shall be made by four dial gauges rigidly
mounted on the reference beam or beams, bearing on prepared flat surfaces
fixed to the pile cap or head and normal to the pile axis. Alternatively, the
ar
gauges may be fixed to the pile and bear on prepared surfaces on the reference
beam or beams. The dial gauges shall be placed equidistant from the pile axis
at
and from each other. The dial gauges shall enable readings to be made to an
accuracy of at least 0.1 mm and have a stem travel of at least 25 mm.
-Q
Machined spacer blocks may be used to extend the range of reading. Equivalent
electrical displacement-measuring devices may be substituted.
LL
(d) Optical Levelling Method

(i) An optical levelling method by reference to a remote datum may be used.
W
(ii) Where a level and staff are used, the level and scale of the staff shall be chosen
to enable readings to be made to within an accuracy of 0.5 mm. A scale
s
attached to the pile or pile cap may be used instead of a levelling staff. At least
en
two reliable independent datum points shall be established. Each datum point
shall be so situated as to permit a single setting-up position of the level for all
m
readings.
e
(iii) No datum point shall be located where it can be affected by the test loading or
Si
other operations on the Site.

(e) Reference Wires and Scales
(i) Two parallel reference wires, one on either side of the pile, shall be held under
constant tension at right angles to the test pile axis between supports formed as
in the method in Item 11 (d). The wires shall be positioned against scales fixed
to the test pile head in an axial direction and the movements of the scales
relative to the wires shall be determined.
(ii) Check observations of any movements of the supports of the wires shall be
made and a check shall be made on the movement of the pile head at approved
time intervals. Readings shall be taken to within an accuracy of 0.5 mm.
(f) Other Methods
(i) The Contractor may submit for approval any other method of measuring the
movement of the test pile head.
13 Protection of testing equipment
(a) Protection from Weather

(i) Throughout the test period all equipment for measuring load and movement
shall be protected from exposure to adverse effect of weather.
(b) Prevention of Disturbance
(i) Construction activity and persons who are not involved in the testing process
shall be kept at a sufficient distance from the test to avoid disturbance to the
measuring apparatus. Full records shall be kept of any intermittent unavoidable
activity that might affect the test set-up.
14 Notice of test
(i) The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours' notice of the
commencement of the test. No load shall be applied to the test pile before the
commencement of the specified test procedure.
ar
15 Test procedure
at
(a) Proof Load Test Procedure (working compression piles)
-Q
(i) The maximum load which shall be applied in a proof test shall normally be the
sum of the design verification load (DVL) plus 50 % of the specified working load
(SWL). The loading and unloading shall be carried out in stages as shown in
LL
Table 4.7. Any particular requirements given in the particular contract

documentation shall be complied with.
W
(ii) Following each application of an increment of load, the load shall be maintained
at the specified value for not less than the period shown in Table 4.7 and until
s
the rate of settlement is less than 0.25 mm/h and decreasing. The rate of
en
settlement shall be calculated from the slope of the line obtained by plotting
values of settlement versus time and drawing a smooth curve through the
m
points.
e
(iii) Each decrement of unloading shall proceed after the expiry of the period shown
Si
in Table 4.7.
(iv) For any period when the load is constant, time and settlement shall be recorded
immediately on reaching the load, at not more than 5 min intervals up to 15 min;
at approximately 15 min intervals up to 1 h; at 30 min intervals between 1 h and
4 h; and 1 h intervals between 4 h and 12 h after the application of the increment
of load.
(v) Where the methods of measuring pile head movement given in Item 11 is used,
the periods of time for which loads must be held constant to achieve the
specified rates of settlement shall be extended as necessary to take into
account the lower levels of accuracy available from these methods and to allow
correct assessment of the settlement rate.
Table 4.7
Load * Minimum time of holding load
25% DVL 1h
50% DVL 1h
75% DVL 1h
100% DVL 1h
75% DVL 10 min
50% DVL 10 min
25% DVL 10 min
0 1h
100% DVL 6h
100% DVL + 25% SWL 1h
100% DVL + 50% SWL 6h
100% DVL + 25% SWL 10 min
100% DVL 10 min
75% DVL 10 min
ar
50% DVL 10 min
25% DVL 10 min
at
0 1h
100% DVL 6h
100% DVL + 50% SWL
-Q 6h
100% DVL + 75% SWL 1h
100% DVL + 100% SWL 6h
LL
100% DVL + 75% SWL 10 min Applicable

100% DVL + 50% SW 10 min to tests on
100% DVL + 25% SW 10 min Preliminary
W
100% DVL 10 min Pile only

75% DVL 10 min
s
50% DVL 10 min

en
25% DVL 10 min

0 1h
m
* SWL denotes specified working load; DVL denotes design verification load.
e
(b) Test Procedure for Preliminary Compression Piles

Si
(i) The procedure to be adopted for carrying out load tests on preliminary
compression piles shall be either the extended proof load test procedure or the
constant rate of penetration testing procedure given below. A normal proof load
test will constitute the first stage of such a test unless otherwise specified.
(ii) Extended proof load test procedure. Where test pile is to be loaded up to the
sum of design verification load (DVL) plus 100 % of the specified working load,
the loading procedure may be carried out as a continuation of the proof load
testing procedure given in Item 14 (a).
(iii) Following the completion of the proof load test, the load shall be restored in two
stages (DVL, DVL +50 % SWL), and shall subsequently be increased by stages
of 25 % of the specified working load. Following each application of an
increment of load, the load shall be maintained at the specified value for the
period shown in Table 4.7 and until the rate of settlement is decreasing and is
less than 0.25 mm/h.
(iv) Where verification of required minimum factor of safety is called for or the pile is
to be tested to failure, the loading procedure shall be continued after reaching
DVL +100 % SWL stage by increasing the load in increments of 25 % of the
specified working load or other specified amount until the maximum specified
load of the test is reached. Following each application of increment of load, the
load shall be maintained at the specified value for not less than 1 h and until the
rate of settlement is decreasing and is less than 0.25 mm/h, or other approved
rate appropriate to the stage of loading and its proximity to a failure condition.
Permissible settlement at the load corresponding to the required minimum factor
of safety called for in the design will not normally be specified.
(v) The rate of settlement shall be calculated from the slope of the line obtained by
plotting values of settlement versus time and drawing a smooth curve through
the points. Reduction of load at the end of the test shall be gradual as required
by Item 14 (a).and the final rebound of the pile head shall be recorded.
(vi) Constant rate of penetration (CRP) testing procedure. Where it is required to
determine the ultimate load of a preliminary compression pile, and particularly
ar
where piles are largely embedded in and bearing on clay soils, the CRP testing
at
procedure will normally be specified.
(vii) The rate of movement of the pile head shall be maintained constant in so far as
-Q
is practicable and shall be approximately 0.01 mm/s.
(viii) Readings of loads, penetration and time shall be made simultaneously at regular
LL
intervals; the interval chosen shall be such that a curve of load versus
penetration can be plotted without ambiguity.
W
(ix) Loading shall be continued until one of the following results is obtained
1. The maximum required test load.
s
2. A constant or reducing load has been recorded for an interval of

en
penetration of 10 mm.
m
3. A total movement of the pile base equal to 10 % of the base diameter, or

any other greater value of movement specified, has been reached.
e
(x) The load shall then be reduced in five approximately equal stages to zero load,
Si
penetration and load being recorded at each stage.

(c) Testing of Piles Designed to Carry Load in Tension
(i) The testing of piles designed to carry load in tension shall follow the same
procedure as specified in 4.9.1
(ii) In testing by the constant rate of uplift method, overall movements of the pile
head will normally be less than those expected in a constant rate of penetration
test. The rate of movement of the pile head shall be maintained at approximately
0.005 mm/s in so far as is practicable.
16 Completion of a test
(a) Removal of Test Equipment

(i) On completion of a test and subject to the approval of the Engineer, all
measuring equipment and load application devices shall be dismantled and
checked. All other test equipment, including kentledge, beams and supporting
structures shall be removed from the test pile location. Measuring and other
demountable equipment shall be stored in a safe manner so that it is available
for further tests, or removed from the Site as approved by the Engineer.
(ii) Temporary tension piles and ground anchorages shall be cut off below ground
level, and off-cut materials removed from the Site. The ground shall be restored
to the original contours.
(b) Preliminary Test Pile Cap
(i) Unless otherwise specified, the head of each preliminary test pile shall be cut off
below ground level, off-cut material shall be removed from the Site and the
ground restored to the original contours.
(c) Proof Test Pile Cap
ar
(i) On completion of a test on a proof pile, the test pile cap shall be prepared as
specified and left in a state ready for incorporation into the Permanent Works.
at
Any resulting off-cut materials shall be removed from the Site.
4.9.2 Presentation of results

-Q
1 Results to be submitted
LL
(a) During the progress of a test, all records taken shall be available for inspection by the
Engineer.
W
(b) Results shall be submitted as

s
(i) Preliminary report of the test results to the Engineer, unless otherwise directed,
en
within 24 hours of the completion of the test, which shall show.

1. For a test by maintained load: for each stage of loading, the period for
m
which the load was held, the load and the maximum pile movement at the
end of the stage.
e
Si
2. For a CRP or CRU test: the maximum load reached and a graph of load
against penetration or load against uplift.
(ii) The final report of recorded data as prescribed in Item 15 (b).within ten days of
the completion of the test.
2 Schedule of Recorded Data
(a) The Contractor shall provide information about the test pile in accordance with the
following schedule where applicable.
(i) General.
1. site location contract identification
2. proposed structure
3. main contractor
4. piling contractor
5. engineer client/employer
6. date and time of test
(ii) Pile details.

1. all types of pile
2. identification (number and location)
3. specified working load (SWL)
4. design verification load (DVL)
5. original ground level at pile location
6. head level at which test load was applied
7. type of pile
8. vertical or raking, compression or tension
9. shape and size of cross-section of pile, and position of any change in
cross-section
10. shoe or base details
ar
11. head details
at
12. length in ground -Q
13. tip Elevation
14. dimensions of any permanent casing
LL
15. concrete piles

 concrete mix/grade
W
 aggregate type and source

 cement type and cement replacement and type where used
s

en
admixtures
 slump
m
 cube test results for pile and cap

e
 date of casting of precast pile

Si
 reinforcement
16. steel piles

 steel quality
 coating
 filling or core materials type and quality, if applicable
(iii) Installation details.

1. all piles
 dates and times of boring, driving and concreting of test pile
 difficulties and delays encountered
 date and time of casting concrete pile cap
2. bored piles
 type of equipment used and method of boring
 temporary casing - diameter, type and length
 full log of pile borehole

 method of placing concrete
 Volume of concrete placed
 driven preformed and driven cast-in-place piles
 Method of support of hammer and pile driven length of pile or
temporary casing at final set
 Hammer type, and size or weight
 Dolly and packing, type and condition
 Driving log (depth, hammer drop, blows per 250 mm,
interruptions or breaks in driving)
 Final set in number of blows to produce penetration of 25 mm
 Redrive check, time interval and set in number of blows to
produce penetration of 25 mm or other agreed amount at final
set and at redrive set, for a drop hammer or for a single acting
ar
hammer the length of the drop or stroke, for a diesel hammer
the length of the stroke and the blows per minute, for a double
at
acting hammer the operating pressure and the number of blows
per minute
-Q
 condition of pile head or temporary casing after driving
 use of a follower
LL
 use of preboring

W
use of jetting
 lengthening
s
 method of placing concrete

en
(iv) Test procedure.

m
1. mass of kentledge
e
2. tension pile, ground anchorage or compression pile details

Si
3. plan of test arrangement showing position and distances of kentledge

supports, rafts, tension or compression piles or ground anchorages, and
supports to pile movement reference system
4. jack capacity
5. method of load measurement
6. method(s) of penetration or uplift measurement
(v) Test results.
1. in tabular form
2. in graphical form: load plotted against pile head movement
3. ambient temperature records during test.
4.9.3 Low strain Integrity test
1 This test shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM D5882 in a frequency as mentioned in
Section 2
4.9.4 Grosshole Sonic Logging Test
1 This test shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM D4428, D6760 in a frequency as
mentioned in Section 2
4.9.5 Calliper Logging Test
Section 2
4.9.6 Axial Tensile Load Test
Section 2
4.9.7 Lateral Load Test
ar
Section 2
at
4.9.8 Alternative Methods for Testing Piles
-Q
1 Scope
LL
(a) This Part outlines the alternative methods for testing piles. A significant advance in
identifying the existence of defects in construction of piles has been the development
W
and adoption of modern integrity testing systems which may be employed to check the
quality of construction when required by the Engineer.
s
(b) Dynamic pile-testing is normally used to evaluate the pile capacity, soil resistance
en
distribution, and immediate settlement characteristics, hammer transfer energy

(efficiency), and pile stresses during driving. The results obtained relate directly to
m
dynamic loading conditions.

e
(c) Related Sections and Parts are as follows:

Si
This Section
Section 2
2 Quality Assurance
(a) The testing shall be carried out by an approved firm.

(b) The interpretation of tests shall be carried out by persons competent in the test
procedure, and the full test results and findings shall normally be given to the Engineer
within 10 d of the completion of each phase of testing. Full details of the ground
conditions, pile dimensions and construction method shall be made available to the
specialist firm when required in order to facilitate interpretation of the tests.
3 Integrity-testing of piles
(a) General
(i) Integrity-testing of piles is designed to give information about the physical

dimensions, continuity and consistency of materials used in piles, and not to
give direct information about the performance of piles under the conditions of
loading. The methods available are normally applied to preformed concrete piles
made in a single length, to steel piles and to cast-in-place concrete piles.
(ii) This type of testing will not be regarded as a replacement for static load testing,
but as a source of supplementary information.
(iii) There is normally a limit to the length: diameter ratio of pile which can be
successfully and fully investigated in this way, depending on the ground
conditions.
(iv) In the event that any anomaly is found in the results of such testing, the
Engineer may call for further testing to be carried out in order to investigate the
cause, nature and extent of the anomaly and whether the pile is satisfactory for
its intended use.
(b) Method of Testing
ar
(i) Where integrity-testing is called for but the method is not specified, the method
at
to be adopted shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be one of the
following
-Q
1. The sonic method.
2. The vibration method.
LL
3. The sonic logging method.

W
(ii) Other methods may be adopted subject to the approval of the Engineer and
subject to satisfactory evidence of performance.
s
(c) Age of Piles at Time of Testing

en
(i) In the case of cast-in-place concrete piles, integrity tests shall not be carried out
until 7 d or more have elapsed after pile-casting, unless otherwise approved by
m
the Engineer.
e
(d) Preparation of Pile Heads

Si
(i) Where the method of testing requires the positioning of sensing equipment on
the pile head, the head shall be clean, free from water, laitance and loose
concrete and readily accessible for the purpose of testing.
4 Dynamic pile-testing
(a) General
(i) Dynamic pile-testing involves monitoring the response of a pile to a heavy
impact applied at the pile head. The impact is often provided by the pile-driving
hammer and response is normally measured in terms of force and acceleration
or displacement close to the pile head.
(ii) The results directly obtained refer to dynamic loading conditions. Interpretation
in terms of static loading requires soil- and pile-dependent adjustments, and
corroboration from experience may be required to correlate dynamic testing with
normal static load tests as specified in clause 4.9.1 of this Section.
(iii) Details of the equipment to be used and of the method of analysis of test results
shall be provided to the Engineer before the commencement of testing.
(b) Measuring Instruments

(i) All instruments affixed to the pile for the purpose of measuring stress and
movement, and all equipment for receiving and processing data shall be suitable
for the purpose. The equipment required to be attached to the pile shall be
appropriately positioned and fixed to the approval of the Engineer.
(c) Hammer
(i) The hammer and all other equipment used shall be capable of delivering an
impact force sufficient to mobilise the equivalent specified test load without
damaging the pile.
(d) Preparation of the Pile Head
(i) The preparation of the pile head for the application of the dynamic test load shall
involve, where appropriate, trimming the head, cleaning and building up the pile
using materials which will at the time of testing safely withstand the impact
stresses. The impact surface shall be flat and normal to the axis of the pile.
ar
(e) Time of Testing
at
(i) Dynamic load tests shall be carried out at appropriate and approved times after
pile installation. The time between the completion of installation and testing for
-Q
a preformed pile shall normally be more than 12 h, and in the case of a cast-in-
place concrete piles shall be after the concrete has reached 75 % of its specified
28 day strength so that the pile is not damaged under the impact stresses.
LL
(f) Set Measurements

W
(i) Where required and appropriate, the permanent penetration per blow and
temporary compression of the pile and soil system shall be measured
independently of the instruments being used to record the dynamic test data.
s
en
(g) Results
(i) Initial the results shall be provided to the Engineer within 24 hours of the
m
completion of a test. These shall include

e
1. The maximum force applied to the pile head.

Si
2. The maximum pile head velocity.

3. The maximum energy imparted to the pile.
(ii) Normally within 10 d of the completion of testing final report shall be given to the
Engineer which includes:
1. Date of pile installation.
2. Date of test.
3. Pile identification number and location.
4. Length of pile below ground surface.
5. Total pile length, including projection above commencing surface at time
of test.
6. Length of pile from instrumentation position to tip.
7. Hammer type, drop and other relevant details.
8. Blow selected for analysis.
9. Test load achieved (i.e. total mobilised deduced static load).

10. Pile head movement at equivalent design verification load.
11. Pile head movement at equivalent design verification load plus 50 % of
specified working load.
12. Pile head movement at maximum applied test load.
13. Permanent residual movement of pile head after each blow.
14. Temporary compression.
4.10 DESIGN METHODS AND DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
4.10.1 Design method
1 The design shall be based on one of the following approaches:
(a) The results of static load tests, which have been demonstrated, by means of
ar
calculations or otherwise, to be consistent with other relevant experience;
at
(b) Empirical or analytical calculation methods whose validity has been demonstrated by
static load tests in comparable situations;
-Q
(c) The results of dynamic load tests whose validity has been demonstrated by static load
tests in comparable situations;
LL
(d) The observed performance of a comparable piles foundation, provided that this
approach is supported by the results of site investigation and ground testing.
W
2 Design values for parameters used in the calculations should be in general accordance with
design parameters from geotechnical investigations report, but the results of load tests may
s
also be taken into account in selecting parameter values.

en
3 Static load tests may be carried out on trial piles, installed for test purposes only, before the
m
design is finalized, or on working piles, which form part of the foundation.

e
4.10.2 Verification of Resistance for Structural and Ground Limit States in Persistent and
Si
Transient Situations
1 When considering a limit state of rupture or excessive deformation of a structural element or

section of the ground (Structural and Geotechnical), it shall be verified in accordance with
(Eurocode1997-1) or equivalent.
4.10.3 Design Considerations
1 The behavior of individual piles and pile groups and the stiffness and strength of the structure
connecting the piles shall be considered.
2 In selecting calculation methods and parameter values and in using load test results, the
duration and variation in time of the loading shall be considered.
3 Planned future placement or removal of overburden or potential changes in the ground-water

regime shall be considered, both in calculations and in the interpretation of load test results.
4 The choice of type of pile, including the quality of the pile material and the method of
installation, shall take into account:
(a) the ground and ground-water conditions on the site, including the presence or
possibility of obstructions in the ground;
(b) the stresses generated in the pile during installation;
(c) the possibility of preserving and checking the integrity of the pile being installed;
(d) the effect of the method and sequence of pile installation on piles, which have already
been installed and on adjacent structures or services;
(e) the tolerances within, which the pile can be installed reliably;
(f) the deleterious effects of chemicals in the ground;
(g) the possibility of connecting different ground-water regimes;
(h) the handling and transportation of piles;
(i) the effects of pile construction on neighboring buildings.
5 In considering the aspects listed above, the following items should receive attention:
ar
(a) the spacing of the piles in pile groups;
at
(b) displacement or vibration of adjacent structures due to pile installation;
-Q
(c) the type of hammer or vibrator used;
(d) the dynamic stresses in the pile during driving;
LL
(e) for those types of bored pile where a fluid is used inside the borehole, the need to
keep the pressure of the fluid at a level to ensure that the borehole will not collapse
and that hydraulic failure of the base will not occur;
W
(f) cleaning of the base and sometimes the shaft of the borehole, especially under
s
bentonite, to remove remolded materials;

en
(g) local instability of a shaft during concreting, which may cause a soil inclusion within
the pile;
m
(h) ingress of soil or water into the section of a cast-in-situ pile and possible disturbance
e
of wet concrete by the flow of water through it;

Si
(i) the effect of unsaturated sand layers around a pile extracting water from the
concrete;
(j) the retarding influence of chemicals in the soil;
(k) soil compaction due to the driving of displacement piles;
(l) soil disturbance due to the boring of a pile shaft.
4.11 AXIALLY LOADED PILES
4.11.1 Limit state design
1 The design shall demonstrate that exceeding the following limit states is sufficiently
improbable:
(a) ultimate limit states of compressive or tensile resistance failure of a single pile;
(b) ultimate limit states of compressive or tensile resistance failure of the pile foundation
as a whole;
(c) ultimate limit states of collapse or severe damage to a supported structure caused by
excessive displacement or differential displacements of the pile foundation;
(d) serviceability limit states in the supported structure caused by displacement of the piles.
2 Normally the design should consider the margin of safety with respect to compressive or
tensile resistance failure, which is the state in which the pile foundation displaces significantly
downwards or upwards with negligible increase or decrease of resistance.
3 For piles in compression it is often difficult to define an ultimate limit state from a load
settlement plot showing a continuous curvature. In these cases, settlement of the pile top
equal to 10% of the pile base diameter should be adopted as the "failure" criterion.
4 For piles that undergo significant settlements, ultimate limit states may occur in supported
structures before the resistance of the piles is fully mobilized. In these cases a cautious
estimate of the possible range of the settlements shall be adopted in design.
ar
4.11.2 Compressive Ground Resistance
at
1 To demonstrate that the pile foundation will support the design load with adequate safety
-Q
against compressive failure, the following inequality shall be satisfied for all ultimate limit
state load cases and load combinations:
Fc ≤ Rc
LL
Where
W
Fc: design axial compression load on a pile or a group of piles

s
Rc: design value

en
2 In principle Fc should include the weight of the pile itself and Rc should include the
m
overburden pressure of the soil at the foundation base. However these two items may be
e
disregarded if they cancel approximately. They need not cancel if:

Si
(a) downdrag is significant;

(b) the soil is very light,
(c) the pile extends above the surface of the ground.
3 For piles in groups, two failure mechanisms shall be taken into account:
(a) compressive resistance failure of the piles individually;

(b) compressive resistance failure of the piles and the soil contained between them acting
as a block.
NOTE: The design resistance shall be taken as the lower value caused by these two
mechanisms.
4 The compressive resistance of the pile group acting as a block may be calculated by
treating the block as a single pile of large diameter.
5 The stiffness and strength of the structure connecting the piles in the group shall be
considered when deriving the design resistance of the foundation.
6 If the piles support a stiff structure, advantage may be taken of the ability of the structure
to redistribute load between the piles. A limit state will occur only if a significant numbe r of
piles fail together; therefore a failure mode involving only one pile need not be considered.
7 If the piles support a flexible structure, it should be assumed that the compressive
resistance of the weakest pile governs the occurrence of a limit state.
8 Special attention should be given to possible failure of edge piles caused by inclined or
eccentric loads from the supported structure.
9 If the layer in which the piles bear overlies a layer of weak soil, the effect of the weak layer
on the compressive resistance of the foundation shall be considered.
10 The strength of a zone of ground above and below the pile base shall be taken into
account when calculating the pile base resistance.
ar
NOTE: This zone may extend several diameters above and below the pile base. Any weak
ground in this zone has a relatively large influence on the base resistance.
at
-Q
11 Punching failure should be considered if weak ground is present at a depth of less than 4
times the base diameter below the base of the pile.
LL
12 Where the pile base diameter exceeds the shaft diameter, the possible adverse effect
shall be considered.
W
13 For open-ended driven tube or box-section piles with openings of more than 500 mm in
any direction, and without special devices inside the pile to induce plugging, the base
s
resistance should be limited to the smaller of:

en
(a) the shearing resistance between the soil plug and the inside face of the pile;
m
(b) the base resistance derived using the cross-sectional area of the base.
e
4.11.3 Ultimate compressive resistance from static load tests

Si
1 The manner in which load tests are carried out shall be in accordance with 4.11.2 and shall be
specified in the Geotechnical Design Report.
2 Trial piles to be tested in advance shall be installed in the same manner as the piles that will
form the foundation and shall be founded in the same stratum.
3 If the diameter of the trial pile differs from that of the working piles, the possible difference in
performance of piles of different diameters should be considered in assessing the
compressive resistance to be adopted.
4 In the case of a very large diameter pile, it is often impractical to carry out a load test on a full
size trial pile. Load tests on smaller diameter trial piles may be considered provided that:
(a) the ratio of the trial pile diameter/working pile diameter is not less than 0,5;
(b) the smaller diameter trial pile is fabricated and installed in the same way as the piles
used for the foundation;
(c) the trial pile is instrumented in such a manner that the base and shaft resistance can be
derived separately from the measurements.
NOTE: This approach should be used with caution for open-ended driven piles because of
the influence of the diameter on the mobilisation of the compressive resistance of a soil plug
in the pile.
5 In the case of a pile foundation subjected to downdrag, the pile resistance at failure, or at a
displacement that equals the criterion for the verification of the ultimate limit state determined
from the load test results, shall be corrected. The correction shall be achieved by subtracting
the measured, or the most unfavorable, positive shaft resistance in the compressible stratum
and in the strata above, where negative skin friction develops, from the loads measured at
the pile head.
6 During the load test of a pile subject to downdrag, positive shaft friction will develop along the
total length of the pile. The maximum test load applied to the working pile should be in excess
of the sum of the design external load plus twice the downdrag force.
ar
7 When deriving the ultimate characteristic compressive resistance from values measured in
at
one or several pile load tests, an allowance shall be made for the variability of the ground and
the variability of the effect of pile installation.
-Q
8 The systematic and random components of the variations in the ground shall be recognized
in the interpretation of pile load tests.
LL
9 The records of the installation of the test pile(s) shall be checked and any deviation from the
normal execution conditions shall be accounted for.
W
10 The characteristic compressive resistance of the ground may be derived from the
s
characteristic values of the base resistance and of the shaft resistance in accordance with
en
Eurocode1997-1.
m
4.11.4 Ultimate compressive resistance from ground test results

e
1 Methods for assessing the compressive resistance of a pile foundation from ground test
Si
results shall have been established from pile load tests and from comparable experience.
2 A model factor may be introduced as described as following to ensure that the predicted
compressive resistance is sufficiently safe :
(a) the range of uncertainty in the results of the method of analysis;

(b) any systematic errors known to be associated with the method of analysis
3 In assessing the validity of a model based on ground test results, the following items should
be considered:
(a) soil type, including grading, mineralogy, angularity, density, pre-consolidation,

compressibility and permeability;
(b) method of installation of the pile, including method of boring or driving;
(c) length, diameter, material and shape of the shaft and of the base of the pile (e.g.
enlarged base);
(d) method of ground testing.
4.11.5 Ultimate compressive resistance from dynamic impact tests
1 Where a dynamic impact (hammer blow) pile test [measurement of strain and acceleration
versus time during the impact event is used to assess the resistance of individual
compression piles, the validity of the result shall have been demonstrated by previous
evidence of acceptable performance in static load tests on the same pile type of similar
length and cross-section and in similar ground conditions.
2 When using a dynamic impact load test, the driving resistance of the pile should be
measured directly on the site in question.
NOTE A load test of this type can also include a process of signal matching to
measured stress wave figures. Signal matching enables an approximate evaluation of shaft
and base resistance of the pile as well as a simulation of its load-settlement behaviour.
3 The impact energy shall be high enough to allow for an appropriate interpretation of
the pile capacity at a correspondingly high enough strain level.
ar
4 The design value of the compressive resistance of the pile could be calculated and
at
verified according to Eurocode1997-1.
4.11.6
-Q
Ultimate compressive resistance by applying pile driving formulae
1 Pile driving formulae shall only be used if the stratification of the ground has been
LL
determined.
W
2 If pile driving formulae are used to assess the ultimate compressive resistance of individual
piles in a foundation, the validity of the formulae shall have been demonstrated by previous
experimental evidence of acceptable performance in static load tests on the same type of
s
pile, of similar length and cross-section, and in similar ground conditions.

en
3 For end-bearing piles driven into non-cohesive soil, the design value of the compressive
m
resistance shall be assessed by the same procedure as in 4.11.5.

e
4 When a pile driving formula is applied to verify the compression resistance of a pile, the pile
Si
driving test should have been carried out on at least 5 piles distributed at sufficient spacing in
the piling area in order to check a suitable blow count for the final series of blows.
5 The penetration of the pile point for the final series of blows should be recorded for each pile.
4.11.7 Ultimate compressive resistance from wave equation analysis
1 Wave equation analysis shall only be used where stratification of the ground has been determined
by borings and field tests.
2 Where wave equation analysis is used to assess the resistance of individual compression piles,
the validity of the analysis shall have been demonstrated by previous evidence of acceptable
performance in static load tests on the same pile type, of similar length and cross- section, and in
similar ground conditions.
3 The design value of the compressive resistance derived from the results of wave equation analysis
of a number of representative piles, shall be assessed by the same procedure as in 4.11.3.
NOTE Wave equation analysis is based on a mathematical model of soil, pile and driving
equipment without stress wave measurements on site. The method is usually applied to
study hammer performance, dynamic soil parameters and stresses in the pile during driving.
It is also, on the basis of the models, possible to determine the required driving resistance
(blow count) that is usually related to the expected compressive resistance of the pile.
4.11.8 Ground tensile resistance
1 The design of piles in tension shall be consistent with the design rules given in 4.11.2, where
applicable. Design rules that are specific for foundations involving piles in tension are presented
below.
2 To verify that the foundation will support the design load with adequate safety against a failure in
tension, the following inequality shall be satisfied for all ultimate limit state load cases and load
combinations in accordance with Eurocode1997-1.
3 For isolated tensile piles or a group of tensile piles, the failure mechanism may be governed by the
ar
pull-out resistance of a cone of ground, especially for piles with an enlarged base or rock socket.
at
4 When considering the uplift of the block of ground containing the piles the shear resistance along
the sides of the block may be added to the resisting forces.
-Q
5 Normally the block effect will govern the design tensile resistance if the distance between the piles
is equal to or less than the square root of the product of the pile diameter and the pile penetration
LL
into the main resisting stratum.

W
6 The group effect, which may reduce the effective vertical stresses in the soil and hence the shaft
resistances of individual piles in the group, shall be considered when assessing the tensile
resistance of a group of piles.
s
en
7 The severe adverse effect of cyclic loading and reversals of load on the tensile resistance shall be
considered.
e m
8 Comparable experience based on pile load tests should be applied to appraise this effect.
Si
4.11.9 Ultimate tensile resistance from pile load tests
1 Pile load tests to determine the ultimate tensile resistance of an isolated pile shall be carried out in
accordance with 4.9.1 and with regard to 4.11.3.
2 The design tensile resistance could be calculated and verified according to Eurocode1997-1.
4.11.10 Ultimate tensile resistance from ground test results
1 Methods for assessing the tensile resistance of a pile foundation from ground test results shall
have been established from pile load tests and from comparable experience.
2 A model factor may be introduced as following to ensure that the predicted tensile resistance is
sufficiently safe.
(a) the range of uncertainty in the results of the method of analysis;

(b) any systematic errors known to be associated with the method of analys is
3 The design value of tensile resistance of a pile could be calculated and verified according to
Eurocode1997-1.
4.11.11 Vertical displacements of pile foundations
1 Vertical displacements under serviceability limit state conditions shall be assessed and checked.
2 When calculating the vertical displacements of a pile foundation, the uncertainties involved in the
calculation model and in determining the relevant ground properties should be taken into account.
Hence it should not be overlooked that in most cases calculations will provide only an approximate
estimate of the displacements of the pile foundation.
NOTE For piles bearing in medium-to-dense soils and for tension piles, the safety
requirements for the ultimate limit state design are normally sufficient to prevent a
serviceability limit state in the supported structure.
4.11.12 Pile foundations in compression
ar
1 The occurrence of a serviceability limit state in the supported structure due to pile settlements shall
at
be checked, taking into account downdrag, where probable.
-Q
NOTE When the pile toe is placed in a medium-dense or firm layer overlying rock or very
hard soil, the partial safety factors for ultimate limit state conditions are normally sufficient to
satisfy serviceability limit state conditions.
LL
2 Assessment of settlements shall include both the settlement of individual piles and the settlement
due to group action.
W
3 The settlement analysis should include an estimate of the differential settlements that may occur.
s
en
4 When no load test results are available for an analysis of the interaction of the piled foundation with
the superstructure, the load-settlement performance of individual piles should be assessed on
empirically established safe assumptions.
e m
4.11.13 Pile foundations in tension

Si
1 The assessment of upward displacements shall be done and Particular attention should be paid to
the elongation of the pile material.
2 When very severe criteria are set for the serviceability limit state, a separate check of the upward
displacements shall be carried out.
4.12 TRANSVERSELY LOADED PILES
4.12.1 Design method
1 The design of piles subjected to transverse loading shall be consistent with the design rules given
in 4.10, where applicable. Design rules specifically for foundations involving piles subjected to
transverse loading are presented below.
2 To demonstrate that a pile will support the design transverse load with adequate safety against
failure, the following inequality shall be satisfied for all ultimate limit state load cases and load
combinations:
Ftr ≤ Rtr
Where;
Ftr: design value of the transverse load on a pile or a pile foundation
Rtr : design resistance of transversally loaded pile
3 One of the following failure mechanisms should be considered:
(a) for short piles, rotation or translation as a rigid body;

(b) for long slender piles, bending failure of the pile, accompanied by local yielding and
displacement of the soil near the top of the pile.
ar
4 The group effect shall be considered when assessing the resistance of transversely loaded piles.
at
5 It should be considered that a transverse load applied to a group of piles may result in a
-Q
combination of compression, tension and transverse forces in the individual piles.
4.12.2 Transverse load resistance from pile load tests

LL
1 Transverse pile load tests shall be carried out in accordance with 4.9.6.
W
2 Contrary to the load test procedure described in 4.9 tests on transversely loaded piles need not
normally be continued to a state of failure. The magnitude and line of action of the test load should
s
simulate the design loading of the pile.

en
3 An allowance shall be made for the variability of the ground, particularly over the top few meters of
the pile, when choosing the number of piles for testing and when deriving the design transverse
m
resistance from load test results.

e
Si
4 Records of the installation of the test pile(s) should be checked, and any deviation from the normal
construction conditions should be accounted for in the interpretation of the pile load test results.
For pile groups, the effects of interaction and head fixity should be accounted for when deriving the
transverse resistance from the results of load tests on individual test piles.
4.12.3 Transverse load resistance from ground test results and pile strength parameters
1 The transverse resistance of a pile or pile group shall be calculated using a compatible set of
structural effects of actions, ground reactions and displacements.
2 The analysis of a transversely loaded pile shall include the possibility of structural failure of the pile
in the ground.
3 The calculation of the transverse resistance of a long slender pile may be carried out using the
theory of a beam loaded at the top and supported by a deformable medium characterized by a
horizontal modulus of subgrade reaction.
4 The degree of freedom of rotation of the piles at the connection with the structure shall be taken
into account when assessing the foundation’s transverse resistance.
4.12.4 Transverse displacement
1 The assessment of the transverse displacement of a pile foundation shall take into account:
(a) the stiffness of the ground and its variation with strain level;
(b) the flexural stiffness of the individual piles;
(c) the moment fixity of the piles at the connection with the structure;
(d) the group effect;
(e) the effect of load reversals or of cyclic loading
2 A general analysis of the displacement of a pile foundation should be based on expected degrees
of kinematic freedom of movement.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
QCS 2014 Section 04: Foundations & Retaining Structures Page 2
Part 05: Retaining Structures
5 RETAINING STRUCTURES ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
5.1 GENERAL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
5.2 LIMIT STATES ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

5.2.2 Ultimate Limit State ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
5.2.3 Serviceability Limit State ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
5.3 ACTIONS AND GEOMETRICAL DATA -------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
5.3.1 Actions -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
5.3.2 Geometrical data ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
5.3.3 Design Situations ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
5.4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS ------------------------------------------------- 5
5.5 DETERMINATION OF EARTH PRESSURES ------------------------------------------------------------ 6

5.5.1 General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
5.5.2 At rest values of earth pressure------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
ar
5.5.3 Limiting values of earth pressure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
at
5.5.4 Intermediate values of earth pressure ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
5.5.5 Compaction effects ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
-Q
5.6 WATER PRESSURES ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
5.7 ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE DESIGN -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

LL
5.7.1 General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

5.7.2 Overall stability ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
W
5.7.3 Foundation failure of gravity walls ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

5.7.4 Rotational failure of embedded walls ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
s
5.7.5 Vertical failure of embedded walls --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9

en
5.7.6 Structural design of retaining structures -------------------------------------------------------------------- 9

5.7.7 Failure by pull-out of anchorages ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
m
5.8 SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE DESIGN ----------------------------------------------------------------- 9

e
5.8.1 General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9

Si
5.8.2 Displacements ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9

5 RETAINING STRUCTURES
5.1 GENERAL
1 The provisions of this Part 5 apply to retaining structures in general. These are structures
used to retain ground comprising soil, rock or backfill and water and this at an angle steeper
than the angle they would normally adopt without the presence of those structures. Common
retaining structures used within the state of Qatar taking into account the prevailing geologic
conditions are:
(a) Sheet Piles

(b) Bored and Cast in Place Concrete Piles
(i) Contiguous Piles
(ii) Secant Piles
ar
(c) Diaphragm Walls
at
(d) Composite Shoring Systems -Q
(e) Concrete Retaining Walls
(i) Cantilever Retaining Wall
LL
(ii) Counter Fort Retaining Wall

(iii) Gravity Retaining Wall
W
(iv) Buttressed Retaining Wall

s
(f) Reinforced Soil Retaining Structures

en
(i) Geogrid and Geotextile Reinforced Earth Systems

m
(ii) Galvanized Strips Reinforced Earth System

(g) Soil and Rock Nailing Systems
e
Si
2 This revision of Section 4 – Part 5 is considered preliminary and shall be reviewed and
amended as needed in the next revision to elaborate on various subjects not covered herein.
3 This revision of Section 4 – Part 5 is based generally on “EN1997-1:2004+A1:2013”

Eurocode 7.
4 Section 4 – Part 5 will cover at this stage the general design aspects knowing that the
construction procedures shall be added in future revisions of this Section. Hence, at this
stage, the construction related subjects of the retaining structures will follow relevant Parts of
the QCS.
5.2 LIMIT STATES
1 During the design of retaining structures the following typical limit states should be
considered:
5.2.2 Ultimate Limit State
1 Loss of overall stability: it should be demonstrated that an overall stability failure is unlikely.
2 Foundation failure of retaining structures with footings: it should be demonstrated that the
foundation pressures (lateral and vertical) do not exceed neither the ground allowable
bearing capacity nor the sliding resistance. Uplift pressures under the foundation due to
water seepage should also be included in the analysis.
3 Foundation failure of gravity walls, which is the loss of equilibrium of the wall considered as a
rigid body.
4 Failure of embedded walls by rotation or horizontal translation or by lack of vertical

equilibrium.
5 Failure of a structural element such as a wall, anchorage, wale or strut, including failure of
the connection between those elements.
6 Failure of a retaining structure by hydraulic heave, internal erosion or piping, unacceptable

leakage of water, or transport of soil particles through or under the wall caused by excessive
hydraulic gradients.
ar
5.2.3 Serviceability Limit State
at
1
-Q
Unacceptable movement of the retaining structure, which may affect the appearance or
functionality of the structure itself, or other neighbouring structures or utilities influenced by
the movement.
LL
2 Unacceptable change in the groundwater regime.

W
5.3 ACTIONS AND GEOMETRICAL DATA

s
5.3.1 Actions
en
1 Generally, the forces exerted on retaining structure with values assumed known at the
m
beginning of the calculation are considered as 'actions', while forces with initially unknown
values, to be determined by the interaction of the retaining structure with support elements
e
(ground springs, anchorages, struts, etc.), are considered as 'reactions'. The following
Si
actions are to be taken into account:
(a) Weight of backfill material

(b) Surcharges
(c) Weight of water
(d) Wave forces for marine projects
(e) Seepage forces
(f) Collision forces
(g) Temperature effects
(h) Forces from propping elements (i.e. post-tensioned anchors)
(i) Siesmic related effects
2 The above actions should result in the determination of various earth pressures acting on the
retaining structure.
5.3.2 Geometrical data
1 This paragraph covers the uncertainties in the geometrical data namely excavation and water
levels. In general, small variations in geometrical data are considered to be covered by the
safety factors included in the calculations. However, since the design of retaining structures
is sensitive to ground and water levels, special requirements are included in this paragraph,
mainly for unforeseen over-dig in front of the wall and groundwater levels change on both
sides of the wall.
2 Unforeseen over-dig in front of the wall
In Ultimate Limit State design calculations, where the wall stability depends on the earth
resistance in front of the wall, the level of the resisting soil should be lowered below the
nominally expected level by an amount which depends on the degree of control on the
excavation level. With a normal degree of control the expected difference in resisting soil
level should be:
(a) Equal to 10% of the wall height above excavation level (up to a maximum of 0.5 m), for
ar
cantilever walls;
(b) Equal to 10% of the distance between the lowest support and the excavation level (up
at
to a maximum of 0.5 m), for supported walls.-Q
3 Groundwater levels in front of and behind the wall
The selection of the levels of the phreatic surfaces in front of and behind the wall must
LL
consider long-term variations of the groundwater regime and/or the ground permeability, the
presence of perched or artesian aquifers and the possibility that drainage behind the wall
may cease to function with time.
W
5.3.3 Design Situations

s
en
1 The following conditions shall be considered during the design of retaining structures:
(a) Anticipated variations in soil properties

m
(b) Variations in actions and the ways they are combined

e
(c) Excavation, scour or erosion in front of the retaining structure

Si
(d) The effect of compaction of the backfill behind the retaining structure
(e) The effect of anticipated future structures and surcharge loads/unloads
(f) Anticipated ground movements
(g) Inclination of the wall to the vertical
(h) Variations in groundwater table and the seepage forces in the ground
(i) Horizontal as well as vertical equilibrium for the entire retaining structure
(j) The shear strength and weight density of the ground
(k) The rigidity of the wall and the supporting system
(l) The wall roughness
(m) Seismic effect on the various forces
5.4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS
1 The design of retaining structures requires consideration of all relevant Ultimate Service
States and Service Limit States.
2 For retaining structures without strict serviceability requirements, the geometry is usually
determined by Ultimate Limit State design calculations and checked by Service Limit State
calculations (if relevant). For the retaining structures with strict serviceability requirements,
the Service Limit State requirements often govern the design.
3 The design and construction considerations should cover the following:
(a) Demonstrate that vertical equilibrium can be achieved for the assumed pressure
distributions and actions on the wall.
(b) Verification of vertical equilibrium may be achieved by reducing the wall friction
parameters.
ar
(c) Retaining walls should be designed in such a way that there are visible signs of the
approach of an ultimate limit state. The design should prevent brittle failure of the
at
structure, e.g. sudden collapse without conspicuous preliminary deformations.
-Q
(d) A critical limit state should be considered to occur if the wall has displaced enough to
cause damage to nearby structures or services. Although collapse of the wall may not
be imminent, the degree of damage may considerably exceed a serviceability limit
LL
state in the supported structure.

(e) The design methods and partial factor values recommended by “EN1997-
W
1:2004+A1:2013” are usually sufficient to prevent the occurrence of ultimate limit

states in nearby structures, provided that the soils involved are of at least medium
s
density or firm consistency and adequate construction methods and sequences are
en
adopted. Special care should be taken, however, with some highly over-consolidated
clay deposits in which large at rest horizontal stresses may induce substantial
m
movements in a wide area around excavations.

(f) The complexity of the interaction between the ground and the retaining structure
e
sometimes makes it difficult to design a retaining structure in detail before the actual
Si
execution starts. In this case, use of the observational method for the design should be
considered. The observational method consists of setting criteria enabling monitoring
during construction, allowing necessary corrective actions to be taken to rectify the
design. Hence, the following requirements shall be set before construction:
(i) Acceptable limits of behaviour
(ii) The range of potential behaviour shall be analysed showing acceptable
probability that the actual behaviour will be within the acceptable limits
(iii) A plan of monitoring shall be established (including necessary instruments and
procedures) enabling the comparison of the actual behaviour to the acceptable
limits. The monitoring shall allow early detection of nonconformities, allowing
enough time for corrective actions to be taken successfully.
(iv) A list of contingency actions shall be established which could be used if the
actual observed behaviour is outside of the acceptable limits.
(g) The effects of constructing the wall, including:
(i) The provision of temporary support to the sides of excavations;
(ii) The changes of in situ stresses and resulting ground movements caused both
by the wall excavation and its construction;
(iii) Disturbance of the ground due to driving or boring operations;
(iv) Provision of access for construction;
(h) The required degree of water tightness of the finished wall;

(i) The practicability of constructing the wall to reach a stratum of low permeability, so
forming a water cut-off. The resulting equilibrium ground-water flow problem shall be
assessed;
(j) The practicability of forming ground anchorages in adjacent ground;
(k) The practicability of excavating between any propping of retaining walls;
(l) The ability of the wall to carry vertical load;
(m) The ductility of structural components;
ar
(n) Access for maintenance of the wall and any associated drainage measures;
at
(o) The appearance and durability of the wall and any anchorages;
(p)
-Q
For sheet piling, the need for a section stiff enough to be driven to the design
penetration without loss of interlock;
(q) The stability of borings or slurry trench panels while they are open;
LL
(r) For fill, the nature of materials available and the means used to compact them
adjacent to the wall.
W
(s) Drainage systems

s
If the safety and serviceability of the designed structure depend on the successful
en
performance of a drainage system, the consequences of its failure shall be

considered, taking into account both safety and cost of repair. One of the following
m
conditions (or a combination of them) shall apply:

e
(i) A maintenance program for the drainage system shall be specified and the
Si
design shall allow access for this purpose;

(ii) It shall be demonstrated both by comparable experience and by assessment of
any water discharge that the drainage system will operate adequately without
maintenance.
The quantities, pressures and eventual chemical content of any water discharge
should be taken into account.
5.5 DETERMINATION OF EARTH PRESSURES
5.5.1 General
1 The Determination of the earth pressures shall take into account the acceptable mode and
amount of any movement and strain, which may occur at the limit state under consideration.
2 In the following context the words "earth pressure" should also be used for the total earth
pressure from soft and weathered rocks and should include the pressure of ground-water.
3 Calculations of the magnitudes of earth pressures and directions of forces resulting from
them shall take account of the issues highlighted under paragraph “5.3.3”.
4 The amount of mobilized wall friction and adhesion should be considered as a function of:
(a) The strength parameters of the ground

(b) The friction properties of the wall-ground interface
(c) The direction and amount of movement of the wall relative to the ground
(d) The ability of the wall to support any vertical forces resulting from wall friction and
adhesion
5 A concrete wall or steel sheet pile wall supporting sand or gravel may be assumed to have a
design wall ground interface parameter  d  k. cv ;d . k should not exceed 2/3 for precast
concrete or steel sheet piling. For concrete cast against soil, a value of k = 1.0 may be
assumed. For a steel sheet pile in clay under undrained conditions immediately after driving,
no adhesive or frictional resistance should be assumed. Increases in these values may take
ar
place over a period of time.
at
6 In the case of structures retaining rock masses, calculations of the ground pressures shall
-Q
take into account the effects of discontinuities, with particular attention to their orientation,
spacing, aperture, roughness and the mechanical characteristics of any joint filling material.
LL
7 Account shall be taken of any swelling potential of the ground when calculating the pressures
on the retaining structure.
W
5.5.2 At rest values of earth pressure

s
1 When no movement of the wall relative to the ground takes place, the earth pressure shall be
en
calculated from the at rest state of stress. The determination of the at-rest state shall take
into account the stress history of the ground.
m
5.5.3 Limiting values of earth pressure

e
Si
1 Limiting values of earth pressures shall be determined taking into account the relative
movement of the soil and the wall at failure and the corresponding shape of the failure
surface.
5.5.4 Intermediate values of earth pressure
1 Intermediate values of earth pressure occur if the wall movements are insufficient to mobilize
the limiting values. The determination of the intermediate values of earth pressure shall take
into account the amount of wall movement and its direction relative to the ground.
2 The intermediate values of earth pressures may be calculated using, for example, various
empirical rules, spring constant methods or finite element methods.
5.5.5 Compaction effects
1 The determination of earth pressures acting behind the wall shall take into account the
additional pressures generated by any placing of backfill and the procedures adopted for its
compaction.
5.6 WATER PRESSURES
1 Determination of characteristic and design water pressures shall take account of water levels
both above and in the ground.
2 When checking the ultimate and serviceability limit water pressures shall be accounted for in
the combinations of actions considering the possible risks of flooding or change in
groundwater levels from either sides of the retaining structure.
3 For structures retaining earth of medium or low permeability (silts and clays), water pressures
should normally be assumed to act behind the wall. Unless a reliable drainage system is
installed, or infiltration is prevented, the values of water pressures should normally
correspond to a water table at the surface of the retained material.
4 Where sudden changes in a free water level may occur, both the non-steady condition
occurring immediately after the change and the steady condition shall be examined.
ar
5 Where no special drainage or flow prevention measures are taken, the possible effects of
water-filled tension or shrinkage cracks shall be considered.
at
5.7 ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE DESIGN
-Q
5.7.1 General
LL
1 The design of retaining structures shall be checked at the ultimate limit state for the design
situations appropriate to that state, as specified in 5.3.3, using the design actions or action
W
effects and design resistances.

s
2 All relevant limit modes shall be considered. These will include, as a minimum, limit modes of
en
the types illustrated in Figures 5.1 to 5.6 for the most commonly used retaining structures.
m
3 Calculations for ultimate limit states shall establish that equilibrium can be achieved using the
design actions or effects of actions and the design strengths or resistances. Compatibility of
e
deformations shall be considered in assessing design strengths or resistances.

Si
5.7.2 Overall stability
1 Principles and calculations should be used as appropriate to demonstrate that an overall

stability failure will not occur and that the corresponding deformations are sufficiently small
taking into account progressive failure and liquefaction into account as relevant.
5.7.3 Foundation failure of gravity walls
1 The principles of foundation design shall be used as appropriate to demonstrate that a

foundation failure is sufficiently remote and that deformations will be acceptable. Both
bearing resistance and sliding shall be considered. Failure modes shown in Figure 5.2 should
be verified as a minimum.
5.7.4 Rotational failure of embedded walls
1 It shall be demonstrated by equilibrium calculations that embedded walls have sufficient

penetration into the ground to prevent rotational failure. As a minimum, limit modes of the
types illustrated in Figure 5.3 should be considered.
2 The design magnitude and direction of shear stress between the soil and the wall shall be
consistent with the relative vertical displacement, which would occur in the design situation.
5.7.5 Vertical failure of embedded walls
1 It shall be demonstrated that vertical equilibrium can be achieved using the design soil
strengths or resistances and design vertical forces on the wall. As a minimum, the limit mode
of the type illustrated in Figure 5.4 should be considered.
2 Where downward movement of the wall is considered, upper design values shall be used in
the calculation of pre-stressing forces, such as those from ground anchorages, which have a
vertical downward component. The design magnitude and direction of shear stress between
the soil and the wall shall be consistent with the check for vertical and rotational equilibrium.
If the wall acts as the foundation for a structure, vertical equilibrium shall be checked using
the principles of Pile Foundations Design.
5.7.6 Structural design of retaining structures
ar
1 Retaining structures, including their supporting structural elements such as anchorages and
at
props, shall be verified against structural failure in accordance with EN1997-1:2004+A1:2013
-Q
“2.4 Geotechnical Design by Calculation” and EN1992, EN1993, EN1995 and EN1996. As a
minimum, limit modes of the types illustrated in Figure 5.5 should be considered.
5.7.7 Failure by pull-out of anchorages

LL
1 It shall be demonstrated that equilibrium can be achieved without pull-out failure of ground
W
anchorages. Anchors shall be designed in accordance with Anchorage Design procedures

with minimum the limit modes of the types illustrated in Figure 5.6 (a, b) should be
s
considered. For dead-man anchors, the failure mode illustrated in Figure 5.6 (c) should also
en
be considered.
m
5.8 SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE DESIGN

e
5.8.1 General
Si
1 The design of retaining structures shall be checked at the serviceability limit state using the
appropriate design situations as specified in 5.3.3. The assessment of design values of earth
pressures should take account of the initial stress, stiffness and strength of the ground and
the stiffness of the structural elements.
2 The design values of earth pressures should be derived taking account of the allowable
deformation of the structure at its serviceability limit state. These pressures need not
necessarily be limiting values.
5.8.2 Displacements
1 Limiting values for the allowable displacements of walls and the ground adjacent to them
shall be established for a particular deformation is the value at which a serviceability limit
state, such as unacceptable cracking or displacement of adjacent structures or utilities, is
deemed to occur. This limiting value shall be agreed during the design, taking into account
the tolerance to displacements of supported structures and services.
2 If the initial cautious estimate of displacement exceeds the limiting values, the design shall be
justified by a more detailed investigation including displacement calculations.
3 It shall be considered to what extent variable actions, such as vibrations caused by traffic
loads behind the retaining wall, contribute to the wall displacement.
4 Displacement calculations should also be considered in the following cases:
(a) where the wall retains more than 6m of cohesive soil of low plasticity,
(b) where the wall retains more than 3m of soils of high plasticity;
(c) where the wall is supported by soft clay within its height or beneath its base.
5 Displacement calculations shall take into account the stiffness of the ground and structural
elements and the sequence of construction.
6 The effect of vibrations on displacements shall be considered with regard to the following:
ar
(a) Foundations for structures subjected to vibrations or to vibrating loads shall be
designed to ensure that vibrations will not cause excessive settlements.
at
(b) Precautions should be taken to ensure that resonance will not occur between the
-Q
frequency of the dynamic load and a critical frequency in the foundation-ground
system, and to ensure that liquefaction will not occur in the ground.
(c) Vibrations caused by earthquakes shall be considered using the guidelines of the
LL
designated section of the QCS.

W
s
en
e m
Si
Figure 5.1 – Examples of Limit Modes for Overall Stability of Retaining Structures
(EN 1997-1:2004+A1:2013)
ar
at
Figure 5.2 – Examples of Limit Modes for Foundation Failures of Gravity Walls
-Q
(EN 1997-1:2004+A1:2013)
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Figure 5.3 – Examples of Limit Modes for Rotational Failures of Embedded Walls
(EN 1997-1:2004+A1:2013)
ar
Figure 5.4 – Example of a Limit Mode for Vertical Failure of Embedded Walls
(EN 1997-1:2004+A1:2013)
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Figure 5.5 – Examples of Limit Modes for Structural Failure of Retaining Structures
(EN 1997-1:2004+A1:2013)
ar
Figure 5.6 – Examples of Limit Modes for Failure by Pull-out of Anchoes
at
(EN 1997-1:2004+A1:2013)
-Q
LL
END OF PART
W
s
en
e m
Si
QCS 2014 Section 05: Concrete Page 1
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2
1.1 INTRODUCTION --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

1.1.1 Scope ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
1.1.2 References----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
1.1.3 Definitions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
1.1.4 Approved Products ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4
1.2 IMPLEMENTATION ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

1.2.1 Approved Installers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4
1.2.2 Field Quality Control ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
1.2.3 Rejected materials ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
1.2.4 Records --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Section includes the requirements for concrete work for pipelines, roadworks, runways,
structures, water retaining structures, foundations and bases for structures and equipment.
2 This Part includes relevant standards, definitions, abbreviations, and requirements for testing
facilities, rejected materials, and record keeping.

This Section:
Part 2, Aggregates
Part 3, Cementitious Materials
ar
Part 4, Water
Part 5, Admixtures
at
Part 6, Property Requirements -Q
Part 7, Concrete Plants
Part 8, Transportation and Placing of Concrete
Part 9, Formwork
LL
Part 10, Curing

Part 11, Reinforcement
Part 12, Construction Joints
W
Part 13, Inspection and Testing of Hardened Concrete

Part 14, Protective Coatings to Concrete
s
Part 15, Hot Weather Concrete

en
Part 16, Miscellaneous

Part 17, Precast Concrete
m
Part 18, Prestressed Concrete

Part 19, Water Retaining Structures
e
Si
Section 1, General
Section 2, Quality Assurance and Quality Control
Section 4, Foundations and Retaining Structures
Section 6, Roadworks
Section 8, Drainage Works
Section 9, Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
1.1.2 References

ASTM C31 ..................Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field
ASTM C39 ..................Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens
ASTM C143 ................Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement C Concrete
ASTM C1064 ..............Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-
Cement Concrete
Part 01: General
BS 6100, ....................Glossary of Building and civil engineering terms

BS EN 932-1 ..............Tests for general properties of aggregates. Methods for sampling
BS EN 932-2 ..............Tests for general properties of aggregates. Methods for reducing
laboratory samples
BS EN 12350-1 ..........Method of sampling fresh concrete in site
BS EN 12350-2 ..........Testing fresh concrete. Slump-test
BS EN 12390-1 ..........Shape, dimensions and other requirements for specimens and moulds
BS EN 12390-2 .......... Making and curing specimens for strength tests
GSO ISO 1920-1 ........Testing of concrete —Part 1: Sampling of fresh concrete
GSO ISO 1920-2 ........Testing of concrete – Part 2: Properties of fresh concrete
GSO ISO 1920-3 ........Testing of concrete – Part 3: Making and curing test specimens
1.1.3 Definitions
1 Definitions used in this Section.
ar
The following are terms and abbreviations used:
C
at
degree Celsius
cal calorie -Q
cm centimetre
d day
fck,cyl Characteristic compressive strength of concrete determined by testing cylinders
LL
fc,cyl Compressive strength of concrete determined by testing cylinders

fck,cube Characteristic compressive strength of concrete determined by testing cubes
W
fc,cube Compressive strength of concrete determined by testing cubes

fcm Mean compressive strength of concrete
fcm,j Mean compressive strength of concrete at the age of (j) days
s
GGBS ground granulated blast furnace slag

en
GUTS guaranteed ultimate tensile strength

h hour
m
kg kilogram
e
kJ kilojoule
Si
kN kilonewton
l litre
m metre
2
m square metre
3
m cubic metre
mg milligram
min minute
mm millimetre
2
mm square millimetre
months months
MPa mega Pascal
kPa kilo Pascal
MSRPC moderate sulphate resisting Portland cement
OPC ordinary Portland cement
PFA pulverised fuel ash
PVC polyvinylchloride
s second
SF silica fume
SRPC sulphate resisting Portland cement
Part 01: General
ton 1000 kg
ppm part per million
-6
micron 10
-6
µm 10 meter
2 Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority is made in

accordance with the following abbreviations.
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
BS British Standard
BSCP British Standard Code of Practice
BSI British Standards Institution
C & CA Cement and Concrete Association
CIRIA Construction Industry Research and Information Association
ar
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
at
CS Concrete Society
DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.
-Q
EN Euro Norm
FHWA Federal Highway Authority
GSO GCC Standardization Organization
LL
ICE Institution of Civil Engineers

ISO International Organization for Standardization
W
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute

QCS Qatar Construction Specifications
QS Qatar Standards
s
UK DfT United Kingdom Department for Transport

en
Products
m
1.1.4 Approved Products

e
1 The contract specific documentation may identify approved products and approved or
Si
prequalified manufacturers and suppliers of products used in concrete work.
1.2 IMPLEMENTATION
1.2.1 Approved Installers
1 The contract specific documentation may identify approved or prequalified providers of

concrete construction services.
1.2.2 Field Quality Control
1 The Contractor shall carry out the test procedures required by this Section and any other
tests and test procedures as directed by the Engineer from time to time. The test procedures
shall be carried out using the facilities of an approved independent testing laboratory.
2 Supply, storage, sampling and testing of all materials shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor, unless the Contract specifies otherwise.
Part 01: General
3 The Engineer may also require the Contractor to take samples of materials and deliver them
to the Central Materials Laboratory for additional tests to be carried out by the Employer.
Sampling procedures shall be in accordance with BS EN 932 or relevant ASTM Standards,
and sample sizes shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 1.1.
4 The minimum equipment required for testing on Site is given in Table 1.2. This equipment
shall be maintained on Site at all times during concreting operations together with the
necessary scoops, buckets, sample containers, and other items required for sampling. The
cube curing tank shall be located in an air-conditioned area as stated in part 06.
1.2.3 Rejected materials
1 Any material rejected by the Engineer, in particular cement which has deteriorated or
aggregates which have segregated or become contaminated, shall be immediately removed
from the Site.
1.2.4 Records
ar
1 The Contractor shall maintain on the Site full records of all work carried out accurately
related to the location of the work on site, which shall include:
at
(a) the time and date when all concrete was poured, formwork removed and when
-Q
formwork props were fully removed
(b) all cubes and other tests
LL
(c) daily maximum and minimum temperatures.
2 One copy of all test results shall be sent to the Engineer immediately upon completion of the
W
tests
Table 1.1
s
Sampling Procedure and

en
Minimum Sample Sizes for Central Materials Laboratory

Material Test Min. Sample
m
Composite sample of 7 kg
e
Cement Full range of tests

taken from at least 12 bags
Si
Full range of tests 200 kg

Sieve analysis
Chemical analysis
Soundness test
Aggregate Water absorption
Particle density 50 kg
Flakiness index
Fines content
LA Abrasion value
Tensile test 500 mm

Reinforcement
Bend test 300 mm
Water Full range of tests 5 litres

Part 01: General
Table 1.2
Minimum Testing Equipment for Each Site*
Minimum Number
Test Equipment to be Provided
Required
Slump cone with base plate 1
Slump test BS EN
Compacting rod, circular cross-section 1
12350-2
and round ends 1
or
Remixing container, 300 mm ruler, 1
GSO ISO 1920-2
moist cloth 1
or
Scoop and shovel
ASTM C143
Timer
Cube making 100 or 150 mm cubical or cylindrical 6
1
BS EN 12390-1 moulds
and Compacting rod or bar Set of tools for 1
BS EN 12350-1:2000 assembling and stripping moulds
or Remixing container 1
ar
GSO ISO 1920-1 Trowel, Scoop, Shovel and Mallet -
and Mould release agent in closed -
at
GSO ISO 1920-3 container with brush 1
or ASTM C31 and C39
-Q
Hessian or sacking, impervious sheet lot
Cube curing BS EN Maximum/minimum thermometer 1
12390-2 Waterproof marking crayon/paint or
LL
or equivalent 1
GSO ISO 1920-3 Curing tank (in air conditioned room) 1
W
or ASTM C39 Supply of packing materials for sending

cubes to commercial laboratory Lot
s
ASTM C1064 Concrete thermometer 1

en
1 - The use of 100 mm cube and cylinder moulds are permitted when the nominal maximum aggregate
m
size is not greater than 20mm

e
END OF PART
Si
Part 02: Aggregates
2 AGGREGATES ....................................................................................................... 2
2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1 Scope 2
2.1.2 References 2
2.1.3 Definitions 3
2.1.4 Source Approval 4
2.1.5 Sampling 4
2.2 QUALITY AND TESTING ........................................................................................ 5
2.3 STORAGE AT CONTRACTOR PLANT ................................................................... 5
2.4 FINE AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE AND MORTAR ........................................... 7
2.5 COARSE AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE............................................................. 8
2.6 COMBINED AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE......................................................... 8
2.7 WASHING AND PROCESSING .............................................................................. 9
ar
2.8 LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATES.............................................................................. 9
at
2.9 COARSE RECYCLED AGGREGATES ................................................................... 9
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 02: Aggregates
2 AGGREGATES
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This part covers the requirements of aggregates for use in structural concrete.
This Section.....
Part 3, .............. Cementitious Materials
Part 4, .............. Water
Part 6, .............. Property Requirements
Part 7, .............. Concrete Plants
Part 8, .............. Transportation and Planning of Concrete
ar
Part 15, ............ Hot weather Concreting
Part 17, ............ Structural Precast Concrete
at
Part 18, ............ Prestressed Concrete -Q
2.1.2 References
ASTM C33 ..................Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
LL
ASTM C40 ..................Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete
ASTM C88 ..................Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulphate
W
or Magnesium Sulphate
ASTM C123 ................Test Method for Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate
s
ASTM C127 ................Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
en
ASTM C128 ................Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C131 ................Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
m

e
ASTM C136 ................Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Si
Aggregate
ASTM C142 ................Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates.
ASTM C535 ................Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse
ASTM C702 ................Standard Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size
ASTM D75 ..................Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
BRE Digest 330-2.......Alkali-Silica Reaction in Concrete – Detailed Guidance for New

Construction.
BS 933-3 ....................Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates Determination of

particle shape. Flakiness index
BS 933-7 ....................Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates Determination of shell
content. Percentage of shells in coarse aggregates
BS 933-9 ....................Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates Assessment of fines.
Methylene blue test
Part 02: Aggregates
BS 933-11 ..................Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates Classification test for

the constituents of coarse recycled aggregate
BS 1097-6 ..................Tests for mechanical and physical properties of aggregates
Determination of particle density and water absorption
BS 8500 part 2 ...........Concrete. Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1.
Specification for constituent materials and concrete
BS EN 12620 ..............Aggregates for concrete
BS EN 1744-1 ............Tests for chemical properties of aggregates, Chemical analysis
BS EN 1744-5 ............Tests for chemical properties of aggregates. Determination of acid
soluble chloride salts
BS EN 1367-2 ............Tests for thermal and weathering properties of aggregates.
Magnesium sulphate test. BS EN 1367-4 Determination of drying
shrinkage
BS EN 933 ..................Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates
BS EN 1097-2 ............Tests for mechanical and physical properties of aggregates. Methods
ar
for the determination of resistance to fragmentation
at
-Q
BS EN 1097-6 ............Tests for mechanical and physical properties of aggregates.
Determination of particle density and water absorption
BS EN13055-1 ...........Lightweight aggregates. Lightweight aggregates for concrete, mortar
and grout.
LL
BS PD 6682-1 ............Aggregates for concrete. Guidance on the use of BS EN 12620

W
BS PD 6682-4 ............Aggregates Lightweight aggregates for concrete, mortar and grout.

Guidance on the use of BS EN 13055-1
s
en
EN 13139 ..................Aggregates for mortar

EN 998-1 ...................Specification for mortar for masonry Rendering and plastering mortar
m
EN 998-2 ...................Specification for mortar for Masonry mortar

e
Si
ISO 9001:2008 ...........Quality management systems -- Requirements

ISO 17025 ..................General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration
laboratories
RILEM AAR1 ..............RILEM Recommended Test Method AAR-1 “Detection of potential
alkali-reactivity aggregates”, Petrographic method
RILEM AAR3 ..............RILEM Recommended Test Method AAR-3 “Detection of potential
alkali-reactivity - 38°C test method for aggregate combinations using
concrete prisms
2.1.3 Definitions
1 Aggregate: granular material used in construction and may be natural, manufactured or

recycled.
2 Natural aggregate: aggregate from mineral sources which has been subjected to nothing
more than mechanical processing.
Part 02: Aggregates
3 Manufactured aggregate: aggregate of mineral origin resulting from an industrial process

involving thermal or other modification.
4 Recycled aggregate: aggregate resulting from the processing of inorganic material previously
used in construction.
5 Lightweight aggregate: aggregate of mineral origin having a particle density not exceeding
2,000 kg/m3 or a loose bulk density not exceeding 1,200 kg/m3.
2.1.4 Source Approval
1 The Contractor shall use only those imported materials sourced from an Accredited Quarry
Producer or Accredited Supplier and which have been approved by Qatar Standards or their
representatives.
2 The accredited aggregate suppliers shall provide the source name(s) for every shipment of
aggregates delivered to the concrete supplier.
ar
3 The source of material supply may be changed by the Contractor during the project, provided
at
that the replacement materials shall be sourced from an Accredited Quarry Producer and the
-Q
replacement materials are not significantly different in terms of physical and chemical
properties, thus ensuring that the resultant concrete continues to comply fully with the
specified requirements.
LL
4 When considering whether an aggregates supplier and aggregates producer are suitable to
be Accredited, preference will be given to organisations with a proper quality management
W
system, such as ISO 9001 or another quality management system approved by Qatar
Standards.
s
en
5 When requested by the engineer, the aggregate supplier shall provide a geotechnical
analysis on the rock samples before blasting and grinding to ensure the proper quality of
materials.
e m
6 The aggregates shall be properly stocked and labelled without intermingling at any storage
Si
area.
7 When requested by the engineer, the aggregates supplier shall provide data for the past 6
months that shows the consistency of materials and conformity with this specification.
8 The supplier shall verify the compliance of aggregates as per QCS by an independent
qualified testing agency accredited to ISO 17025, and approved by Qatar Standards.
2.1.5 Sampling
1 The Contractor shall provide samples of both fine and course aggregate to the Engineer, in
accordance with the requirements of relevant standards in QCS for sampling, sample
reducing and testing of Aggregates, for testing at least two weeks before beginning deliveries
to the Site.
2 All samples shall be taken in the presence of the Engineer or an approved testing agency
assigned by the Engineer.
3 Aggregate sampling and testing shall be conducted by qualified staff.

Part 02: Aggregates
2.2 QUALITY AND TESTING
1 Aggregates shall consist of tough, hard, durable and uncoated particles containing no
harmful material in quantities sufficient to adversely affect the concrete or reinforcing steel,
and shall contain no materials likely to cause staining or otherwise disfigure the concrete
surface.
2 Aggregates shall be obtained from a source approved by the Engineer.
3 Aggregate shall meet the requirements given in Table 2.1. Additional tests detailed in BS EN
12620 with BS PD 6682, EN 13139, EN 998-1, EN 998-2, or relevant ACI and ASTM
standards and codes of practice may be required by the Engineer to satisfy certain
requirements.
4 Contractor shall provide all data as specified in QCS.
5 Sampling of the aggregates shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS
ar
EN 12620, BS EN 933, or ASTM D75 and ASTM C702.
at
6 Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or manufactured crushed rock sand. Crushed rock
-Q
sand shall be the direct product of a manufacturing process, not the by-product of coarse
aggregate production.
7 Beach sand shall not be permitted for use in concrete mixes.

LL
8 The use of clean Dune Sand, blended with coarser sand, may be permitted providing it can
W
be shown that the sand is free from contaminants. The use of local Dune sand shall be
preapproved by the Ministry of Environment.
s
en
9 Samples of aggregates shall be taken in accordance with the requirements of Table 1.1- Part
1.
m
10 Frequency of routine testing shall meet the requirements as listed in Section 2. Frequency of
e
testing may be increased by the engineer’s request if testing results show inconsistency, and
Si
frequency may be reduced if approved by the engineer if materials are highly consistent.
11 Mineralogical tests are to be carried out as instructed by the Engineer.
12 No aggregate deliveries shall be made to the Site until the Engineer has approved the
samples as complying with this specification.
2.3 STORAGE AT CONTRACTOR PLANT
1 Aggregate shall be stored as follows:
(a) each nominal size of coarse aggregate and fine aggregate shall be kept separated and
clearly labelled at all times.
(b) The height of stockpiles shall be controlled to prevent harmful segregation and
breakage of the aggregate.
(c) stockpiles shall be on hard and clean surfaces with not more than 5 % slope
Part 02: Aggregates
(d) contamination of the aggregates by the ground or other foreign matter shall be
effectively prevented at all times
(e) each heap of aggregate shall be capable of draining freely
(f) stockpiles shall be protected from direct sunlight
(g) unloading of aggregate shall be controlled to prevent harmful segregation and
breakage.
2 The Contractor shall maintain the stockpiles of coarse aggregate in separate gradings.
3 At the construction site, the preparation, location and size of any stockpile shall be approved
by the Engineer.
Table 2.1
Limits for Physical, Chemical and Mechanical Properties of Aggregates for Normal Concrete
1
Test Methods Permissible Limits
No. Requirement
ar
BS / EN ASTM Fines Coarse
at
1. Grading 933-1 -Q Standard Standard
2. Natural: materials finer than 0.063 mm. 933-1 3% max 2% max

Crushed rock: materials finer than 7% max 2% max
0.063mm.
LL
3. Fines quality
a) Structural concrete
2
Sand Equivalent (%) 933-8 60% min
W
b) Non-structural concrete
Methylene blue adsorption 933-9 1.0 (g/kg)
s
3
value (0/2mm) max
en
4. Clay lumps and friable particles C142 2% max 2% max
5. Lightweight pieces C123 0.5% max 0.5% max

m
6. Organic impurities for fine aggregates C40 Colour NA

e
standard not
darker than
Si
4
plate No. 3
7. Water absorption (saturated surface 1097-6 2.3% max 2.0% max
dry)
8. Particle density for normal weight 1097-6 2.0 min 2.0 min
concrete
9. Shell Content: 933-7 3% max 3% max
10. Flakiness index 933-3 35% max
11. Acid-soluble chlorides: 1744-5
a) Reinforced and mass concrete 0.06% max 0.03% max
b) Prestressed concrete and steam

5
cured structural concrete 0.01% 0.01%
Part 02: Aggregates
1
Test Methods Permissible Limits
No. Requirement
BS / EN ASTM Fines Coarse
12. Acid-soluble sulphate 1744-1 0.4% max 0.3% max
13. Soundness by magnesium sulphate (5 1367-2 15% max 15% max

cycles)
Resistance to fragmentation: Los

14. Angeles abrasion 1097-2 30% max
15. Drying shrinkage 1367-4 0.075% max
16. Potential reactivity: See Note 6 below
ar
Notes:
1. Use of BS EN or relevant GSO standards.
at
2. If the Sand Equivalent value is less than 60% and greater than or equal to 50%, the sand shall be
considered non-harmful and is accepted provided that the Methylene Blue value is less than or equal to
-Q
1.0 (g/kg).
3. Not required when the fines content in the fine aggregate, or in the all-in aggregate, is 3% or less.
4. Organic impurities: use of a fine aggregate failing in the test is not prohibited, provided that:
LL
a. The discoloration is due principally to the presence of small quantities of coal, lignite, or similar
discrete particles.
W
b. When tested for the effect of organic impurities on strength of mortar, the relative strength at 7
days, calculated in accordance with ASTM C87, is not less than 95 %.
5. If the chloride content is higher than 0.01% the following steps may be taken:
s
a- The aggregates may be washed by suitable water (Sec 5 Part 4) before mixing to lower the chloride
en
content to the specified value (0.01%).

b- If the washing process does not reduce the chloride content to the required value, then the Acid
Soluble Chloride content in the concrete ingredients (the sum of the contributions from the
m
constituent materials) shall be tested as mentioned in BS 8500-2. The allowable Acid Soluble
chloride content limit shall not exceed the values given in Section 5, Part 6, Para 6.5.3.
e
6. The alkali-aggregate reactivity shall be assessed at source in accordance with BS 206-1 and BS 8500-
Si
2. Certification shall be obtained from the aggregate source indicating absence of deleterious
expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
2.4 FINE AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE AND MORTAR
1 Fine aggregate consist of natural clean sand, stone screenings or a combination and can be
produced from natural disintegration of rock or gravel and/or by the crushing of rock or gravel
or processing of manufactured aggregate or artificial, conforming to the requirements of
physical and chemical properties complying with Table 2.1 and subject to the Engineer's
acceptance.
2 Crushed fine aggregates may be blended with local washed sand provided that the final
aggregate complies with the requirements in Table 2.1.
3 The gradation of fine aggregate for concrete and mortar shall be in accordance with the
gradation designations in BS EN 12620 with BS PD 6682, EN 13139 , EN 998-1 , EN 998-2,
or relevant ACI and ASTM standards and codes of practice and subject to the Engineer’s
acceptance.
Part 02: Aggregates
4 Each batch of aggregate delivered to the Site shall be kept separate from previous batches,
and shall be stored to allow for inspection and tests to be carried out.
5 Local natural sand shall be mechanically washed to remove salts and other impurities in
order to meet the specified requirements.
6 The storage area for the clean washed sand shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun
and shall be screened for protection from dust. The area in the neighbourhood of
stockpile/mixing plant shall be watered as necessary, to reduce the rising of dust.
7 The usage of Dune sand shall be accepted as governed by the regulations of Qatar Ministry
of Environment and shall be:
(a) Not used for any reinforced concrete

(b) Used only for blocks, block mortar, plasters, soil cement, shotcrete and insulation
concrete.
ar
2.5 COARSE AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE
at
1 The coarse aggregate is granular material and may be natural, manufactured, recycled or a
-Q
combination. It shall be free from deleterious matter and conforming to the requirements of
physical and chemical properties in Table 2.1 as a minimum requirements and subject to the
Engineer's acceptance within BS EN 12620, BS PD 6682 or ASTM C33
LL
2 For imported aggregate, Qatar Standards may publish more requirements and stringent limits
than specified in Table 2.1.
W
3 For other types of concrete mixes and subject to Engineer's acceptance, coarse aggregate
s
shall comply with the relevant BS EN or relevant ACI and ASTM standards and codes. The
en
nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be not larger than: (a) 1/5 the narrowest
dimension between sides of forms, nor (b) 1/3 the depth of slab, nor (c) 3/4 the minimum
m
clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires, bundles of bars, individual
tendons, bundled tendons, or ducts.
e
Si
4 These limitations shall not apply if, in the judgment of the licensed design professional,
workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without
honeycombs or voids.
5 As requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall mechanically wash the aggregates to
remove salts and other impurities in order to meet the requirements specified.
2.6 COMBINED AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE
1 The material passing the 0.063mm sieve shall not exceed 3.0 % of the combined aggregate
(by weight). The combined aggregate gradation used in the work shall be as specified,
except when otherwise approved or directed by the Engineer.
2 Changes in the approved gradation shall not be made during the progress of the works
unless approved or directed by the Engineer.
Part 02: Aggregates
2.7 WASHING AND PROCESSING
1 Where aggregates have been washed shortly before delivery to the Site, or if stockpiles have
been sprayed to cool them, samples of the aggregate shall be taken frequently to determine
the correct amount of water to add to the mix.
2.8 LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATES
1 Lightweight aggregates are those having particle densities not exceeding 2,000 kg/m3 or
3
loose bulk densities not exceeding 1200 kg/m .
2 Lightweight aggregates include natural aggregate, aggregate manufactured from natural

materials and/or a by product of industrial processes, and some recycled aggregate.
3 Lightweight aggregates shall be in accordance with BS EN13055-1 and BS PD 6682-4, or

equivalent ASTM standards.
ar
2.9 COARSE RECYCLED AGGREGATES
at
1 Excavation Waste (EW), coarse recycled aggregates (RA), and coarse recycled concrete
-Q
aggregates (RCA) shall meet with the requirements of Table 2.1, with the exception that
water absorption shall not exceed;
LL
(a) 3% for structural concrete

(b) 4% for non-structural concrete.
W
2 For structural concrete EW and/or RCA may be used in designated concrete of maximum
C30. Its proportion shall be not more than a mass fraction of 20% of coarse aggregate (BS
s
8500-2 sec 6.2.2), except where approved by Qatar Standards to use a higher proportion.
en
3 For non-structural concrete, such as crash barriers and soakaways, EW and/or RCA may be
m
used in designated concrete of maximum C40. Its proportion shall be not more than a mass
fraction of 50% of coarse aggregate (BS 8500-2 sec 6.2.2), except where approved by Qatar
e
Standards to use a higher proportion.

Si
4 For non-structural concrete RA may be used in designated concrete of maximum C25. Its
proportion shall be not more than a mass fraction of 20% of coarse aggregate (BS 8500-2
sec 6.2.2), except where approved by Qatar Standards to use a higher proportion.
5 When the composition of coarse RCA and coarse RA is tested in accordance with BS EN
933-11, the test result obtained for each type of particle shall not exceed the maximum value
specified in Table 2.2.
6 EW aggregate shall meet the same requirements for RCA, as given in Table 2.2.
Part 02: Aggregates
Table 2.2
Requirements for coarse RCA and coarse RA, (mass fraction, %)
1
Requirement
Maximum
Type of
foreign Maximum
Aggregate Maximum Maximum
Maximum Maximum material acid soluble
masonry lightweight
fines 2 Asphalt e.g. glass, sulphate
content material
plastic, (SO3)
metals
1, 3
RCA 5.0 5.0 0.5 5.0 1.0 1.0
RA 100 3 1.0 10.0 1.0 -4
ar
1. Where the material to be used is obtained by crushing hardened concrete of known
composition that has not been in use, e.g. surplus precast units or returned fresh concrete,
at
and not contaminated during storage and processing, the only requirements are those for
grading and maximum fines. -Q
2. Material with a density less than 1,000 kg/m3
3. The provisions for coarse RCA may be applied to mixtures of natural coarse aggregates
blended with the listed constituents.
4. The appropriate limit and test method needs to be determined on a case-by-case basis (see
LL
Note 6 to 4.3 of BS 8500-2).

3
7 The floating material (FL) content, as per BS EN 933-11, shall not exceed 5.0 cm /kg.
W
8 RCA should be treated as highly reactive aggregate. The alkali contribution from RCA shall
s
be determined as given in BS 8500-2.

en
9 For manufacturing of masonry concrete blocks, the usage of recycled aggregates is

permitted up to 100% as given in Sec. 13 in accordance with ACI 555.
e m
Si
END OF PART
Part 03: Cementitious Materials
3 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS................................................................................. 2
3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
3.1.1 Scope 2
3.1.2 References 2
3.1.3 Terms and Definitions: 3
3.2 SOURCE APPROVAL ............................................................................................. 3
3.3 SAMPLING .............................................................................................................. 3
3.4 QUALITY AND TESTING ........................................................................................ 3
3.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ................................................................ 4
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
3 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
1 This Part covers the requirements for the testing and use of cement in structural concrete.

Part 6 Property Requirements
3.1.2 References

ASTM C10 ..................Standard specification for natural cement
ar
ASTM C91 ..................Specification for Masonry cement
ASTM C114 ................Test methods for chemical analysis of Hydraulic Cement
at
ASTM C115, ...............Test method for fineness of Portland cement by the Turbidimeter
-Q
ASTM C150 ................Standard specification for Portland cement
ASTM C183 ................Standard Practice for sampling and the amount of testing of Hydraulic
cement
LL
ASTM C188 ................Test method for density of Hydraulic cement

ASTM C186 ................Test method for heat of hydration of Hydraulic cement
W
ASTM C204 ................Test method for fineness of Hydraulic cement by air permeability
s
ASTM C348 ................Test method for flexural strength of Hydraulic cement mortar
en
ASTM C349 ................Test method for compressive strength of Hydraulic cement mortar
using portion of prism broken in flexure
m
ASTM C430 ................Test method for fineness of Hydraulic cement by the 45mm (No.325)
ASTM C595 ................Standard specification for blended Hydraulic cement
e
Si
ASTM C618 ................Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C845 ................Specification for Expansive Hydraulic cement
ASTM C989 ..............Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and
Mortars
ASTM C1157 ..............Standard performance specification for Hydraulic cement
ASTM C1240 .............Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM C1328 ..............Specification for plastic cement (Stucco)
ASTM C1329 ..............Specification for Mortar cement
BS 146 ........................Portland blast furnace cement

BS 1370 ......................Low heat Portland cement
BS 4027 ......................Sulphate-resisting Portland cement
BS EN 196, .................Methods for testing cement

BS EN 197-1, .............Cement, Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for

common cements.
BS EN 197-4 .............Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for low
early strength blastfurnace cements
3.1.3 Terms and Definitions:
1 Cementitious Materials: Portland cement in combination with one or more of the following:
blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag,
silica fume and Metakaolin; subject to compliance with requirements of this specification.
2 PC: shall mean Portland cement or CEM I.
3 FA or PFA: shall mean fly ash or pulverised fuel ash.
4 GGBS: shall mean ground granulated blast furnace slag.
ar
3.2 SOURCE APPROVAL
at
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval full details of the proposed source of
-Q
cement. These sources of cement supply shall be regularly and thoroughly investigated to
ensure that the quality of the material supply is satisfactory and that it does not deteriorate
during the performance of the project.
LL
2 The cement source shall not be changed without the Engineer's acceptance.
W
3 The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with the manufacturer’s test certificates certifying
that the cement is in compliance with the relevant standards.
s
en
4 For imported cement the manufacturer’s test certificates shall be provided with each
consignment. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the date of manufacture and proof
m
that the specifications have been complied with, certified by an independent agency in the
country of origin.
e
Si
5 Cement manufacturers shall label their packaging and delivery documents and shall provide,
where applicable, information on the packing/dispatch date, storage conditions and the
storage period appropriate to maintaining the activity of any reducing agent and to keeping
the content of soluble chromium (VI) below the 2 ppm limit. The Engineer has the right to test
the cement for presence of chromium at the contractor’s expense.
3.3 SAMPLING
1 The methods of obtaining samples of cement for testing shall be carried out as described in
EN 196 or ASTM C183
1 The cementitious material shall fully comply with the relevant standard(s) from the following
list:
ASTM C150 ................Standard specification for Portland cement
ASTM C595 ................Standard specification for blended Hydraulic cement
ASTM C618 ...............Standard specification for coal fly ash and raw natural pozzolan for use
in concrete
ASTM C989 ...............Standard specification for ground granulated blastfurnace slag for use
in concrete and mortars
ASTM C1157 ..............Standard performance specification for Hydraulic cement
ASTM C1240 ..............Standard specification for silica fume used in cementitious mixtures
BS 146 ........................Portland-blast furnace cement

BS 1370 ......................Low heat Portland cement
BS 4027 ......................Sulphate-resisting Portland cement
BS EN 197-1, ............minimum grade 42.5
BS EN 450 .................Fly ash for concrete.
BS EN 15167 .............Ground granulated blastfurnace slag for use in concrete, mortar and
grouts.
ar
EN 12363 ..................Silica fume for concrete.
Relevant GSO
at
2 The water-soluble chromium (VI) content shall not exceed 2ppm (0,0002%) by total dry
-Q
weight of cementitious materials.
3.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

LL
1 Cement shall be delivered to the Site in sealed and branded bags, or in the manufacturer’s
W
containers, bearing the manufacturer’s name, cement type and date of manufacture, in
batches not exceeding 100 tons.
s
en
2 Cement shall be stored at the site in such a manner, as to prevent its deterioration, intrusion
of moisture and foreign matter. It must be kept dry at all times. Immediately upon arrival at
m
the Site the Contractor shall store the cement in

e
(a) bins or silos designed for the purpose. It shall be tight and provide for free movement
Si
to discharge opening, or
(b) dry, weather tight and properly ventilated structures with floors raised a minimum of
450 mm above the ground with adequate provision to prevent absorption of moisture.
3 All storage facilities shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, and shall be such as to
permit easy access for inspection and identification. Prolonged storage of cement at site is to
be avoided.
4 For bagged cement, each consignment of cement shall be kept separately, and the
Contractor shall use the consignments in the order in which they are received.
5 The Contractor shall keep records of the various consignments of cement in store, giving
quantities received and used, and the sections of the work in which the cement has been
used, on a daily basis and make a weekly return to the Engineer accordingly. Cement used in
the Works shall be free flowing and free from lumps.
6 In no case shall bagged cement be stored in stacks more than eight bags high.
7 A free passage of at least 1 m shall be left between the cement and the side walls of the
structure.
8 Different types of cement shall be kept in clearly marked separate storage facilities.
9 Cement delivered to Site in drums or bags by the supplier or manufacturer shall be stored in
the drums or bags until used in the Works.
10 Any cement in drums or bags which have been opened shall be used immediately.
11 Cement that has partially or fully caked in storage will not be permitted in work and shall be
immediately removed from the storage area. Any bag or package or sample of cement which
has been damaged, or rebagged or in any way has deteriorated shall be rejected either as an
individual bag or package or as the whole consignment in which such bag, package or
sample is contained, as advised by the Engineer.
12 Where Site limitations preclude the storage of cement on Site, cement shall be stored at a
ar
central location and shall be delivered daily as required to specific job sites.
at
13 The Contractor shall provide weighing machines which shall be kept permanently in each
-Q
shed for checking the weight of the bags or barrels of cement. The weighing machines shall
be calibrated by an independent agency. The Engineer shall have access at all times to the
cement storage sheds.
LL
14 During transport and storage the cement shall be fully protected from all weather elements.
W
15 Any consignment of cement not used within two months from the date of manufacture and
cement which in the opinion of the Engineer is of doubtful quality shall not be used in the
s
Works until it has been retested and test result sheets showing that it complies in all respects
en
with the specification and relevant standards have been delivered to the Engineer.
Cement stored for longer than 28 days shall be tested for “loss on ignition" prior to use to
m
16
check for deterioration, and any cement which fails the test shall not be used in the works.
e
Si
END OF PART
Part 04: Water
4 WATER ................................................................................................................... 2
4.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
4.1.1 Scope 2
4.1.2 References 2
4.2 QUALITY OF WATER ............................................................................................. 3
4.2.1 General 3
4.2.2 pH of Water 3
4.2.3 Permissible Temperatures 3
4.2.4 Supply and Storage 3
4.3 TESTING AND SAMPLING ..................................................................................... 3
4.3.2 Health and Safety 5
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 04: Water
4 WATER
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes water used for concrete mixtures, washing of aggregates and equipment,
wetting of surfaces or ponding during curing or for wetting formwork and washing
reinforcement.
This Section
Part 2, .............. Aggregates
Part 9, .............. Formwork
ar
Part 10, ............ Curing
Part 11, ............ Reinforcement
at
4.1.2 References
-Q
ASTM C109 ................test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
LL
(using 2-in or 50 mm Cube Specimens)

W
BS 1377 ......................Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes.

s
BS 2690 ......................Methods of testing water used in industry

en
BS 6068 ......................Water quality

m
BS EN ISO 9963-1 .....Determination of total and composite alkalinity

e
BS EN ISO 9963-2 .....Determination of carbonate alkalinity

Si
EN 196-1 ....................Determination of strength

EN 196-2 ....................Methods of testing cement - Part 2: Chemical analysis of cement
EN 196-3 ....................Determination of setting time and soundness
EN 1008 .....................Mixing water for concrete, Specification for sampling, testing and
assessing the suitability of water, including water recovered from
processes in the concrete industry, as mixing water for concrete
SM 5220 B ................. Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)
SM 4500 ....................Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater
ISO 7890 ...............Water quality -- Determination of nitrate -- Part 1: 2,6-Dimethylphenol
spectrometric method
SM 3125B (ICP/MS) ...Metals by Inductively Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectrometry
Part 04: Water
4.2 QUALITY OF WATER
4.2.1 General
1 Potable water is suitable for use in concrete, while water of other origin such as underground
water, natural surface water, recovered water, as well as municipal treated water or mixed
water shall be tested to prove that its quality shall conform to water quality requirements as
given below in 4.3.
2 On site, where a permit is issued for Municipal Treated Effluent use for concrete, the effluent
shall be treated by tertiary treatment stage: Reverse Osmosis (R.O.), and disinfection
(Ultraviolet Radiation, or ozonation).
3 The water shall be examined in accordance with the test procedures stated in Table 1, EN
1008. Water not conforming to one or more of the requirements in Table 1, EN 1008 may be
used only, if it can be shown to be suitable for use in concrete, in accordance with the
physical tests of Table 1 below.
ar
4 The site health and safety services and Treated Effluent Quality shall fulfil the requirements
at
of 5 -Q
4.2.2 pH of Water
LL
1 The pH of water used in concrete works shall be as shown in Table 4.2.
4.2.3 Permissible Temperatures

W
1 Temperature of water for concrete shall not be less than 5 °C and not more than 40 °C
s
en
2 Water may be cooled to not less than 5 °C by the gradual addition of chilled water or ice as
follows:
m
(a) no ice particles shall be present in the mix

e
Si
(b) alternatively, flaked ice may be used

(c) ice to be used shall be crushed and shall be a product of frozen water which
complies with the acceptance criteria of Tables 4.1 and 4.2 and 4.3.
3 Every effort should be made to protect water pipes and tanks from the sun; e.g., burying,
shading, insulation or painting white.
4.2.4 Supply and Storage
1 The Contractor shall make his own arrangements and obtain the approval of the Engineer for
the supply of water.
2 Storage of water should be such that contamination is prevented from occurring. Any
measures taken to avoid contamination of the water shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
4.3 TESTING AND SAMPLING
1 Whenever required to do so by the Engineer, the Contractor shall take samples of the water
being used, or which it is proposed to use, for mixing concrete and test them for quality.
Part 04: Water
2 Samples of water of not less than 5 l shall be taken, sealed and sent for testing at an
approved independent laboratory, prior to the approval of any water source, and whenever
the sources of water is changed periodically during the continuance of its use.
3 Water of questionable quality should comply with the physical tests of Table 4.1 and chemical
limitations listed in Table 4.2 & Table 4.3.
4 No source of water shall be used until the required tests have demonstrated its suitability for
concreting.
5 The use of water from a municipal or government supply does not preclude the requirement
for testing.
Table 4.1
Acceptance Criteria and Physical Tests for Mixing Water
ar
Test Method Limits
at
Compressive strength at 7 d, min % of control EN 196-1 90 %
Setting time, max. deviation from control, (h:min)

-QEN 196-3 from 1:00 early to 1:30 later
LL
Table 4.2
Chemical Limitations for Mixing Water
W
Maximum Limit,
Parameter Test Method
mg/l
s
en
(a) Chloride (as CI) BS 6068-1.37 (ISO

9297)
m
(a-1) for Prestressed concrete. 500

e
(a-2) for reinforced concrete. 1000

Si
(a-3) for concrete without reinforcement. 4500
2-
(b) Sulphates (as SO4 ) EN 196-2 2000
(c) Alkali BS 6068-2.51
(c-1) Alkali carbonates and bicarbonates BS EN ISO 9963-1

BS EN ISO 9963-2 500
(c-2) Alkali equivalent sodium oxides EN 196-2 1500
(d) Total dissolved ions, including BS 1377 : Part 3

a, b and c above
(d-1) for prestressed concrete 1000

(d-2) reinforced concrete. 2000
(d-3) for concrete without reinforcement. 5000
(e) pH BS 6068-2.50 6.5 - 9.0

Part 04: Water
Table 4.3
Maximum limit of Harmful Contaminants
Parameter Test Method Maximum Limit, mg/l
COD SM 5220 B 50
SM 4500 P B, C, SM 4500
Phosphate; expressed as PO4 - P 30
PD by subtraction
-
Nitrate; expressed as NO3 -N ISO 7890-1 100
2+
Lead; expressed as Pb SM 3125B (ICP/MS) 100
2+
Zinc; expressed as Zn SM 3125B (ICP/MS) 100
ar
at
SM: Standards Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater.
-Q
4.3.2 Health and Safety
LL
1 On site, where a permit is issued for Municipal Treated Water use in construction works, the
W
effluent should be treated by tertiary treatment stage including filtration and disinfectant
(Chlorine alone, or Ultraviolet Radiation, or ozonation). Furthermore, the following site health
and safety services and the Treated Effluent Quality shall be fulfilled:
s
en
(a) Residual chlorine level shall be within the range of 0.5 – 1.0 mg/l. For water to be used
for concrete, the disinfectant shall be Ultraviolet Radiation, or ozonation.
m
(b) Coliform level shall fulfil one of the following:

e
(i) Fecal Coliform < 200 CFU/100 ml, in case there is no direct exposure on site
Si
labour.
(ii) Total Coliform < 23 CFU/100 ml, in case there is direct exposure on site labour.
(c) The site shall be facilitated by health and safety guidelines signs, where it is indicated
by Arabic, English, and any other languages where there are 5 workers or more on the
site, that “Water not for Human Consumption”
(d) The site shall be facilitated by health and safety equipment, as well as, personal health
and safety protection equipment.
(e) Labour shall follow health and safety guidelines and instructions and use their health
and safety personal protection equibment.
END OF PART
Part 05: Admixtures
5 ADMIXTURES ......................................................................................................... 2
5.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
5.1.1 Scope 2
5.1.2 References 2
5.1.3 Definitions 2
5.1.4 Submittals 2
5.2 USE OF ADMIXTURES ........................................................................................... 3
5.2.1 General 3
5.2.2 Trials 3
5.3 WATER PROOFING ADMIXTURES ....................................................................... 3
5.3.1 General 3
5.3.2 Water resisting admixtures 4
5.3.3 Permeability reducing admixture 4
5.3.4 Submittals 4
ar
5.3.5 General 4
5.3.6 Organic Corrosion Inhibitors 4
at
5.3.7 Inorganic Corrosion Inhibitors -Q 5
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 05: Admixtures
5 ADMIXTURES
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes materials added to the concrete materials during mixing.
This Section
Part 1 ............... General
Part 6 ............... Property Requirements
Part 7 ............... Concrete Plants
Part 16 ............. Miscellaneous
ar
5.1.2 References
at
-Q
ACI 212.3R-10............Report on Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ACI 302 ......................Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
ACI 305 ......................Hot Weather Concreting
LL
ACI 308 ......................Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

W
ASTM C494, ...............Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C1582, .............Standard Specification for Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-Induced
s
Corrosion of Reinforcing Steel in Concrete

en
BS EN 934 ..................Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout (Parts: 2, 6)

m
BS EN 196, ................Methods of testing cement

BS EN 14889 .............Fibres for concrete Polymer fibres. Definitions, specifications and
e
conformity
Si
NSF ............................ Standard 61
5.1.3 Definitions
1 Admixtures are materials added during the mixing process of concrete to modify the
properties of the concrete mix in the fresh and/or hardened state.
5.1.4 Submittals
1 In addition to the specified general requirements for approval of materials, approval of

admixtures shall be subject to extensive trials to demonstrate the suitability, adequacy of
dosing arrangements and performance.
Part 05: Admixtures
5.2 USE OF ADMIXTURES
5.2.1 General
1 Admixtures are materials added to the concrete materials during the mixing process to
modify its properties in the fresh and/or hardened state.
2 Where approved and or directed by the Engineer, admixtures shall be used as a means of:
(a) enhancing concrete durability

(b) increasing workability of the concrete without increasing the water:cement ratio
(c) controlling retardation and setting time.
3 Admixtures shall comply with the following BS EN 934 – 2 requirements or the equivalent
ASTM C494:
(a) water reducing/plasicizing admixture
ar
(b) high range water reducing/plasticizer admixture
at
(c) set retarding admixtures -Q
4 The methods and the quantities of admixture used shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instruction and subject to the Engineer’s approval after evaluation in trial
mixes and shall in no way limit the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract to produce
LL
concrete with the specified strength, workability and durability.

W
5 The effects of accidental overdose of the admixture and measure to be taken if an overdose
occurs shall be provided by the Contractor to the Engineer.
s
en
6 No admixtures containing chlorides shall be used. In particular, the use of acceleration

admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used.
m
7 The use of the admixtures shall be controlled; i.e., strict quality control to ensure correct
e
dosages as prescribed by the manufacturer and justified by trial mixes to be used. A

Si
calibrated dispenser or flowmeter shall be used for the addition of the admixture.
5.2.2 Trials
1 In addition to the standard requirements for the approval of materials, approval of admixtures
shall be subject to extensive trials to demonstrate the suitability, adequacy of dosing
arrangements and performance, when a proven history of performance cannot be provided to
5.3 WATER PROOFING ADMIXTURES
5.3.1 General
1 The admixture shall be suitable for use in the Gulf condition, and specially formulated for
higher ambient temperature.
Part 05: Admixtures
2 The admixture shall be added as per manufacturer’s datasheet. Approved third party
laboratory verification shall be conducted prior to use of material for the works. The
manufacturer’s technical representative shall be present to ensure proper dosage of
admixture during the trial mix.
5.3.2 Water resisting admixtures
1 Water resisting admixtures may be used with the permission of the Engineer and shall
comply with the requirements of BS EN 934-2.
2 The admixture is to be added as per the Manufacturer’s supplier data sheet at the time of
mixing. An approved lab verification shall be made prior to use,
5.3.3 Permeability reducing admixture
1 The admixture shall be a permeability reducing admixture for Non-Hydrostatic Conditions

(PRAN) and for hydrostatic conditions (PRAH) as indicated by ACI 212.3R-10, or crystalline
ar
waterproofing admixture.
at
2 For PRAH, independent testing shall be performed according to NSF Standard 61 and
-Q
approval for use of waterproofing material on structures holding potable water shall be
evidenced by NSF certification.
5.3.4 Submittals
LL
1 The Contractor shall submit manufacturers' specifications, installation instructions and other
W
data to show compliance with the requirements of this part of the specification and the
Contract Documents.
s
en
2 The Contractor shall submit comprehensive test results for the water proofing admixture as
per the tests in the specification, and evidence of their ability to meet all the requirements
specified.
e m
3 The Contractor shall submit a guarantee for the water proofing admixture. The guarantee
Si
shall be worded to reflect the required performance of the material and shall be approved by
the Engineer.
4 CORROSION INHIBITING ADMIXTURES
5.3.5 General
1 Where reinforced concrete structures are exposed to aggressive environment such as

underground and marine structures, the use of a corrosion inhibiting admixture shall be used.
2 Corrosion Inhibiting Admixtures shall comply with ASTM C1582 Standard Specification for
Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-Induced Corrosion of Reinforcing Steel in Concrete.
5.3.6 Organic Corrosion Inhibitors
1 The admixture shall be based on either aqueous emulsion of amines and esters or amine
carboxylates and shall be capable of forming a protective corrosion resistant film around the
steel reinforcement.
Part 05: Admixtures
2 The corrosion inhibitor shall be capable of effecting protection to the steel where concrete
has cracked and allows access to the elements responsible for corrosion.
3 Organic corrosion inhibitors have a fixed dosage rate independent of chloride levels and shall
be incorporated at the dosage rate recommended and tested by the Manufacturer.
5.3.7 Inorganic Corrosion Inhibitors
1 Inorganic corrosion inhibitors shall be based on calcium nitrites capable of oxidizing steel to a
more stable form increasing its passivity in the presence of chlorides.
2 Dosage of inorganic corrosion inhibitors ranges from 10 to 30L/m3 depending on the

expected chloride levels as defined by ACI 212 Table 13.1.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 06: Property Requirements
6 PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 2

6.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
6.1.1 Scope 2
6.1.2 References 2
6.1.3 Definitions: 6
6.1.4 Submittals 7
6.2 EXPOSURE CLASSES ......................................................................................... 10
6.2.1 General 10
6.2.2 Reinforcement corrosion and sulphate classes 10
6.3 FRESH CONCRETE ............................................................................................. 12
6.3.1 General 12
6.4 GRADES OF CONCRETE..................................................................................... 13
6.5 DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 13
6.5.1 General 13
ar
6.5.2 Maximum acid soluble chloride content 14
at
6.5.3 Type of cementitious material 14
6.5.4 Resistance to alkali-silica reaction 15
-Q
6.5.5 Recommendations to resist reinforcement corrosion 15
6.5.6 Recommendations to resist sulphate attack 16
6.5.7 Durability-Related Properties 16
LL
6.6 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES .......................................................................... 17

W
6.6.1 Concrete 18
6.7 TRIAL MIXES ........................................................................................................ 25
s
6.8 QUALITY AND TESTING ...................................................................................... 27

en
6.8.1 General 27
6.8.2 Tests for Concrete 27
m
6.8.3 Hardened Tests for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete 29

e
6.8.4 Quality Control charts 29

Si
6.9 WORKS TEST CUBES ......................................................................................... 30

6.10 REJECTION OF CONCRETE MIXES ................................................................... 30
6.10.1 Rejection of Concrete Mixes: 30
6.10.2 Unsatisfactory Concrete Works 31
6 PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes Grades 15 MPa and above of concrete to be used in the civil works, with
the requirements for workability, permeability, and drying shrinkage.

This Section
Part 2, ........... Aggregates
Part 3, ........... Cementitious Materials
Part 4, ............ Water
Part 5, ........... Admixtures
ar
Part 7, ............ Concrete Plants
Part 8, ........... Transportation and Placing of Concrete
at
Part 9, .............. Formwork
Part 13, ............ Inspection and Testing of Hardened Concrete
-Q
6.1.2 References
LL
1 The following standards are referred to in this Part. The designer along with contractor are
responsible to use the latest update standard as published by the organization:
W
ACI 207.1R .................Guide to Mass Concrete

s
ACI 207.2R .................Report on Thermal and Volume Change Effects on Cracking of Mass
en
Concrete
ACI 207.5R .................Roller - Compacted mass concrete
m
ACI 213, .....................Guide for Structural Lightweight-Aggregate Concrete

e
ACI 214, .....................Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete

Si
ACI 221, .....................Guide for Use of Normal Weight and Heavyweight Aggregates in
Concrete
ACI 237R 07 ..............Self Consolidating Concrete
ACI 301, .....................Specifications for Structural Concrete
ACI 304, .....................Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
ACI 304.2, ..................Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods
ACI 318, .....................Metric Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete &
Commentary
ACI 506, ....................Guide to Shotcrete
ACI 506.1, ..................Guide to Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete
ACI 506.2, ..................Specification for Shotcrete
ACI 555, .....................Removal and Reuse of Hardened Concrete
ASTM A 820, ..............Specification for Steel Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete

ASTM C 31, ................Practice for making and curing concrete test specimens in the field
ASTM C 33, ...............Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 39, ................Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens
ASTM C 42, ................Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete
ASTM C 94, ................Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C192, ...............Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory
ASTM E 119, ..............Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
ASTM C 138, ..............Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete
ASTM C 150, .............Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C 172, ..............Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 173, ..............Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
ASTM C 231 ...............Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
ar
Pressure Method
at
ASTM C 232, .............Test Methods for Bleeding of Concrete
-Q
ASTM C 311, .............Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans
for Use in Portland-Cement Concrete
ASTM C 387, ..............Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and
Concrete
LL
ASTM C 597, ..............Test Method for Pulse Velocity through Concrete

W
ASTM C 617, .............Practice for Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C 618, .............Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
s
for Use in Concrete

en
ASTM C 637, ..............Specification for Aggregates for Radiation-Shielding Concrete

ASTM C 638, .............Descriptive Nonmenclature of Constituents of Aggregates for
m
Radiation-Shielding Concrete
e
ASTM C 803, .............Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete

Si
ASTM C 805, .............Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete

ASTM C 856, .............Practice for Petrographic Examination of Hardened Concrete
ASTM C 900, .............Test Method for Pullout Strength of Hardened Concrete
ASTM C 989, ..............Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and
Mortars
ASTM C 1018, ............Test Method for Flexural Toughness and First-Crack Strength of Fiber-
Reinforced Concrete
ASTM C 1116, ...........Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete
ASTM C 1140, ............Practice for Preparing and Testing Specimens from Shotcrete Test
Panels
ASTM C 1152 .............Standard Test Method for Acid-Soluble Chloride in Morter and
Concrete.
ASTM C 1218 .............Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Morter and
Concrete.
ASTM C 1231, ............Practice for Use of Unbonded Caps in Determination of Compressive
Strength of Hardened Concrete Cylinders
ASTM C 1240, ............Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures

ASTM C 1385, ............Practice for Sampling Materials for Shotcrete
ASTM C 1399, ............Test Method for Obtaining Average Residual-Strength of Fiber-
Reinforced Concrete
ASTM C 1480, ............Specification for Packaged, Pre-Blended, Dry, Combined Materials for
Use in Wet or Dry Shotcrete Application
ASTM C 1550, ............Test Method for Flexural Toughness of Fiber Reinforced Concrete
(Using Centrally Loaded Round Panel)
ASTM C 1604, ............Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores of Shotcrete
ASTM C 1609, ............Test Method for Flexural Performance of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete
(Using Beam With Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C 1611, ............Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-Compacting Concrete
ASTM C 1666, ............Specification for Alkali Resistant (AR) Glass Fiber for GFRC and
Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Cement
ASTM D 5759, ............Guide for Characterization of Coal Fly Ash and Clean Coal
ar
Combustion Fly Ash for Potential Uses
at
ASTM D 6942, ............Test Method for Stability of Cellulose Fibers in Alkaline Environments
-Q
BRE digest 433, .........Recycled Aggregates
LL
BS 4027, ....................Specification for Sulphate-Resisting Portland Cement

BS 6073-2:2008, ........Precast concrete masonry units. Guide for specifying precast concrete
W
masonry units
BS 8500, ....................Concrete, Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1.
s
BS 8666,.....................Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of

en
steel reinforcement for concrete

BS EN 206-1, ............Concrete. Specification, Performance, Production And Conformity
m
BS EN 450,.................Fly Ash for Concrete. Definition, Specifications And Conformity Criteria

e
BS EN 771-3, .............Specification for masonry units. Aggregate concrete masonry units

Si
(dense and light-weight aggregates

BS EN 772-2, ............. Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of percentage area
of voids in masonry units (by paper indentation)
BS EN 12350,.............Testing Fresh Concrete
BS EN 12350-1, .........Testing fresh concrete - Part 1: Sampling
BS EN 12350-2, .........Testing fresh concrete - Part 2: Slump test
BS EN 12350-3, .........Testing fresh concrete - Part 3: Vebe test
BS EN 12350-4, .........Testing fresh concrete - Part 4: Degree of compactability
BS EN 12350-5, .........Testing fresh concrete - Part 5: Flow table test
BS EN 12350-6, .........Testing fresh concrete - Part 6: Density
BS EN 12350-7, .........Testing fresh concrete - Part 7: Air content - Pressure methods
BS EN 12390,.............Testing Hardened Concrete
BS EN 12390-1, .........Testing hardened concrete - Part 1: Shape, dimensions and other
requirements for specimens and moulds
BS EN 12390-2, .........Testing hardened concrete - Part 2: Making and curing specimens for
strength tests
BS EN 12390-3, .........Testing hardened concrete - Part 3: Compressive strength of test

specimens
BS EN 12390-4, .........Testing hardened concrete - Part 4: Compressive strength -
Specification for testing machines
BS EN 12390-5, .........Testing hardened concrete - Part 5: Flexural strength of test
specimens
BS EN 12390-6, .........Testing hardened concrete - Part 6: Tensile splitting strength of test
specimens
BS EN 12390-7, .........Testing hardened concrete - Part 7: Density of hardened concrete
BS EN 12390-8, .........Testing hardened concrete - Part 8: Depth of penetration of water
under pressure
BS EN 12620,.............Aggregate For Concrete
BS EN 15167 .............Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag For Use In Concrete, Mortar
And Grout. Conformity Evaluation
BS EN 1744, ..............Tests For Chemical Properties Of Aggregates
ar
BS EN 1992-3:2006 ...Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures. Liquid retaining and
at
containing structures
BS EN 1992-3:2006 ...UK National Annex to Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures.
-Q
Liquid retaining and containment structures
BS PD 6682-1, ...........Aggregates for Concrete. Guidance on the Use of BS EN 12620

LL
W
Concrete Society Report No. 31, Permeability testing of site concrete

s
EN 1011, .................... Welding. Recommendation for welding of metallic materials

en
EN 1992-1-1, ..............Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for
buildings
e m

Si
GSO ISO 1920-2 ........Testing of concrete – part 2: properties of fresh concrete

GSO ISO 1920-3 ........Testing of concrete – part 3: Making and curing test specimens.
GSO ISO 1920-4 .......Testing of concrete – part 4: strength of hardened concrete.
GSO ISO 1920-5 .......Testing of concrete – part 5: properties hardened concrete other than
strength.
GSO ISO 1920-6 ........Testing of concrete – part 6: sampling, preparing and testing of
concrete core .
GSO ISO 1920-7 .......Testing of concrete – part 7: Non –destructive test on hardened
concrete.
ISO 1920-8 .................Testing of concrete -- Part 8: Determination of drying shrinkage of

concrete for samples prepared in the field or in the laboratory
ISO 1920-9 .................Testing of concrete -- Part 9: Determination of creep of concrete
cylinders in compression
ISO 1920-10 ...............Testing of concrete -- Part 10: Determination of static modulus of
elasticity in compression
CSTR11......................Concrete core testing – The concrete Society

RILEM CPC 11.3 .......Absorption of water by immersion under vacuum
The Concrete Society CS163. Guide to the design of concrete structures in the Arabian
Peninsula.
The European Guidelines for Self-Compacting Concrete Specification, Production and Use
6.1.3 Definitions:
1 Exposure conditions will apply as follows:
(a) Class X0: No risk of corrosion or attack. Non saline conditions. Blinding concrete, non-
reinforced concrete or slab on ground.
(b) Class X1: Mild exposure – Non saline conditions (dry or wet, rarely dry) External
concrete at least 3m above ground level, internal concrete in dry conditions, concrete
permanently submerged in non-saline water or non-aggressive groundwater.
ar
(c) Class X2: Moderate exposure – Non saline conditions (Cyclic wet and dry). External
reinforced concrete less than 3m above ground level, water-retaining structures
at
exposed to fluctuating water levels.
(d) Class X3: Aggressive exposure – Permanently submerged or wet (rarely dry) Concrete
-Q
in contact with groundwater including capillary rise zone, concrete containing or
permanently exposed to saline water.
(e) Class X4: Severe exposure – Moderate humidity External concrete within 1km from
LL
the sea or in contact with high saline water table or sabkhas. Concrete not affected by
condensation, irrigation or leakage, which are more than 3m above ground level.
W
(f) Class X5: Extreme exposure – Cyclic wet and dry, external concrete within 1km from
the sea or in contact with high saline groundwater or sabkhas. Concrete affected by
condensation, irrigation or leakage, which are less than 3m above ground level or
s
within capillary zone. Concrete surfaces exposed to sea water splash or in sea water
en
tidal zone.
(g) Sulphate exposure classes S1 to S4: the exposure classes are related to sulphate
m
attack in relation to sulphate and pH of the ground water.

e
2 Concrete is a mixture (mix) of cementitious materials, coarse and fine aggregate, and water,
Si
with or without admixtures, which develops its properties by cement hydration.
3 "Cementitious Materials": Portland cement in combination with one or more of the following:
blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag
and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements of this specification.
4 “Water/Cementitious Ratio” shall mean the ratio between the total weight of water in the
concrete (less the water absorbed by the aggregate) and the weight of cementitious
materials, expressed as a decimal fraction.
5 “Admixtures” shall mean a material other than water, aggregate, cementitious materials or
fiber reinforcement, used as an ingredient of concrete or mortar. Admixtures are added
during the mixing process of concrete to modify the properties of the concrete mix in the
fresh and/or hardened state.
6 “Hot Weather” shall mean any combination of the following conditions that tends to impair the
quality of freshly mixed or hardened concrete by accelerating the rate of moisture loss and
rate of cement hydration, or otherwise causing detrimental results such as: a. High ambient
temperature (when the shade temperature is above 40 deg C on a rising thermometer, 43
deg C on a falling thermometer), b. High concrete temperature, c. Low relative humidity, d.
2
High wind speed and e. whenever the rate of evaporation exceeds 0.75 kg/m /h
7 “Mass concrete” is defined as any volume of concrete with dimensions large enough to
require that measures be taken to cope with generation of heat form hydration of the cement
and attendant volume change to minimize cracking. Reinforced Massive concrete structures
include pile caps, transfer plates, and structural members where the least dimension
exceeds 1.5 meters.
8 “Coarse Aggregate” shall be considered as that size passing a 20mm sieve (or larger sieve
size) and predominately retained on a 4mm sieve.
9 “Fine Aggregate” shall be considered as that size predominately passing a 4mm sieve and
predominately retained on a 0.063mm size.
10 “PC” shall mean Portland cement or CEM I.
11 “FA” shall mean pulverised fuel ash or fly ash.
12 “GGBS” shall mean ground granulated blastfurnace slag.
13 “SF” shall mean silica fume. Other names are condensed silica fume and microsilica
ar
14 “Gap-graded aggregate” shall mean graded aggregate without one or more of the
at
intermediate sizes. -Q
15 “Single-size aggregate” shall mean aggregates containing a major proportion of particles of
one sieve size.
LL
16 “Target Mean Strength” shall mean the specified characteristic strength plus the margin.
17 “Margin” shall mean the difference between the specified characteristic strength and the
W
target mean strength.

s
18 “Acceptable or Accepted” shall mean acceptable or accepted by the Engineer.

en
19 “Approval or Approved” shall mean approval from the Engineer.

m
20 “All-in” aggregate shall mean the materials composed of a mixture of coarse and fine
aggregates.
e
Si
21 Self-Compacting Concrete (SCC): concrete that is able to flow and consolidate under its own
weight, completely fill the formwork even in the presence of dense reinforcement, whilst
maintaining homogeneity and without the need for any additional compaction.
6.1.4 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit details of mix designs to the Engineer for approval.
2 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS or equivalent for all products. test results and other
information as required to prove compliance with the specification shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval according to the relevant sections of QCS on at least the following
products
3 Cement:
(a) Recent independent test results acceptable to the Engineer confirming compliance
with the specified requirements and referenced standards.
(b) Manufacturer's certificates shall also be supplied for each batch of production of
cement or on a weekly basis, whichever is more frequent, certifying compliance with
the BS EN 197 or other equivalent standard.
(c) The early compressive strength of each consignment of cement shall conform to the
requirements of QCS part 3 at the independent site laboratory. Deviation of more than
10% from either the previous consignment value or the rolling average shall be
immediately reported to the Engineer. Testing at an independent laboratory shall be as
instructed by the Engineer.
4 GGBS:
(b) Manufacturer's certificates with all information necessary to verify compliance shall
also be supplied for each consignment of GGBS or on weekly basis, whichever is
more frequent.
(c) The early compressive strength of each consignment of GGBS shall be determined in
accordance with BS EN 197 and BS EN 15167 or ASTM C989 at the independent site
laboratory based on a blend of 50/50 % GGBS and CEM 1. Deviation of more than 5%
in strength from either the previous consignment value or the rolling average shall be
immediately reported to the Engineer. Testing at an independent laboratory shall be in
ar
accordance with per BS EN 197 and BS EN 15167 standards, and approved by the
Engineer.
at
5 FA: -Q
with specified requirements of BS EN 450 or ASTM C618.
(b) Manufacturer's certificates with all information necessary to verify compliance with
LL
internationally recognized standards shall also be supplied with each consignment of

FA.
W
(c) The materials shall comply with QCS part 3. Deviation of the strength factor by more
than 5% from either the previous consignment value or the rolling average shall be
immediately reported to the Engineer and the Technical Manager of the premix
s
company.
en
6 Silica fume:
m
e
with specified requirements and referenced standards.

Si
(b) Manufacturer's certificates with all information necessary to verify compliance with
internationally recognized standards shall also be supplied with each consignment of
silica fume.
(c) 7 day pozzolanic activity test in accordance with BS EN 13263-1 or ASTM C 1240 on
each consignment of silica fume at the Independent site laboratory. Deviation of the
activity index by more than 5% from either the previous consignment value or the
rolling average shall be immediately reported to the Engineer and the Technical
Manager of the premix company.
7 Aggregates:
(b) Full details of the proposed sources of aggregates.
8 Water: Recent independent test results acceptable to the Engineer confirming compliance
9 Admixtures: Manufacturer’s technical specifications and recommendations. Recent trial

results acceptable to the Engineer illustrating the efficiency of the product for its particular
application. Tests on specific gravity and solids content shall be conducted at the
Independent site laboratory on each consignment.
10 Mix Designs: Submit concrete mix designs for each type and strength of concrete required at
least thirty (30) days before placing concrete.
11 New mix designs, with historic data less than 6 months, shall be verified by an approved
independent testing laboratory in accordance with requirements of QCS Part 05 and shall be
coordinated with design requirements and Contract Documents.
12 Submit complete mix design data for each separate mix to be used on the Project in a single
submittal with at least the following information:
(a) Type of cement*.

(b) Portland cement content*.
(c) Cementitious content* (GGBS, FA, natural pozzolan, rice husk ash and/or silica fume).
ar
(d) Max. aggregate size*.
at
(e) Combined grading curve for coarse aggregate
(f) Quantities of all individual materials*
-Q
(g) Type of admixture(s)*
(h) Target slump/slump flow (at discharge)* as per BS EN 12350-2
LL
(i) Initial and final concrete setting time for each mix design as per ASTM C403 or
equivalent BS EN standards, if specified
W
(j) Fresh density of concrete as per BS EN 12350-6

(k) Air content as per BS EN 12350-7
s
en
(l) Target temperature*

(m) Bleeding, if specified
m
(n) Chloride and sulphate (SO3) contents

e
(o) Details of calculated water/cementitious material (w/c) ratio*

Si
(p) Compressive strength grade*

(q) Hardened density
(r) Water absorption (%) and water penetration (mm), if specified
(s) Rapid chloride permeability - Coulomb value, if specified
2
(t) Chloride migration coefficient (m /sec), if specified
*Include on delivery ticket as a minimum
13 Data shall be from the same production facility that will be used for the Project.
14 Mix Design data shall include but not be limited to the following:
(a) Locations on the Project where each mix design is to be used corresponding to
Structural General Notes on the Drawings.
3
(b) Proportions: Concrete constituent materials shall be proportioned to yield 1 m
(c) Submit strength test records, mix design materials, conditions, and proportions for
concrete used for record of tests, standard deviation calculation, and determination of
required average compressive strength, if required by the Engineer.
(d) If early concrete strength is required, contractor shall submit trial mixture results as
required.
(e) Test records to support proposed mixtures shall be no more than 12 months old and
use current cement and aggregate sources. Test records to establish standard
deviation may be older if necessary to have the required number of samples.
(f) Manufacturer's product data for each type of admixture.
(g) Manufacturer’s certifications that all admixtures used are compatible with each other.
(h) All information indicating compliance with Contract Documents including method of
placement and method of curing.
15 Mass Concrete:
(a) Submit mix design for mass concrete elements in conformance with requirements of
ACI 301 Section 8. The concrete mix design shall not be designed with a high early
strength unless otherwise demonstrated by the Contractor for capability of maintaining
proper temperature and approved by the Engineer.
(b) Submit proposed methods of temperature control, including cementitious material
ar
content control in mix design to reduce heat-generating potential of concrete,
precooling of ingredients to lower concrete temperature as placed, and methods to
at
protect mass concrete elements from excessive temperature differentials.
-Q
(c) Submit analysis of anticipated thermal development within mass concrete elements
with the proposed mix design for these elements. Results of the analysis, using
methods in ACI 207.1R and ACI 207.2R such as the Schmidt model and site specific
data, shall address the maximum differential temperature and the maximum
LL
temperature during curing

(d) Submit proposed number and locations of temperature monitoring devices to record
W
temperature development between the interior and the exterior of mass concrete
elements.
s
6.2 EXPOSURE CLASSES

en
6.2.1 General
m
1 The exposure classes are related to the environmental conditions surrounding the concrete
e
in service.
Si
2 The concrete may be subject to more than one of the classes described below, and the
environmental conditions to which it is subjected need to be expressed as a combination of
exposure classes.
3 Where two or more aggressive characteristics lead to the same class, the exposure shall be
classified into the next higher class; unless a special study for this specific case proves that it
is not necessary.
4 For a given structure, different concrete elements may be subject to different environmental
classes.
6.2.2 Reinforcement corrosion and sulphate classes
1 The classification system described below is based on the approach in BS EN 206-1, BS

8500-1, and the Concrete Society CS 163.
2 The exposure classes related to reinforcement corrosion are associated with carbonation and
chlorides as per Table 6.1.
3 The exposure classes related to sulphate attack are given in Table 6.2 in relation to sulphate
and pH of the ground water.
4 The sulphate content as S04 mg/l shall be determined as per BS EN 196-2.
5 The pH shall be determined as per ISO 4316.
Table 6.1.
Exposure classes for reinforcement corrosion
Exposure Class Class description
X0 No risk of corrosion or attack. Non saline conditions. Blinding concrete,

non-reinforced concrete or slab on ground
X1 Mild exposure – Non saline conditions (dry or wet, rarely dry). External
concrete at least 3m above ground level, internal concrete in dry
conditions, concrete permanently submerged in non-saline water or non-
aggressive groundwater (Class S1).
ar
X2 Moderate exposure – Non saline conditions (cyclic wet and dry). External
reinforced concrete less than 3m above ground level, water-retaining
at
structures exposed to fluctuating water levels.
-Q
X3 Aggressive exposure – Permanently submerged or wet (rarely dry).
Concrete in contact with groundwater including capillary rise zone,
concrete containing or permanently exposed to saline water.
X4 Severe exposure – Moderate humidity. External concrete within 1km from
LL
the sea or in contact with high saline water table or sabkhas. Concrete not
affected by condensation, irrigation or leakage, which are more than 3m
above ground level.
W
X5 Extreme exposure – Cyclic wet and dry. External concrete within 1km from
the sea or in contact with high saline groundwater or sabkhas. Concrete
s
affected by condensation, irrigation or leakage, which are less than 3m

en
above ground level or within capillary zone. Concrete surfaces exposed to

sea water splash or in sea water tidal zone.
e m
Table 6.2.
Sulphate exposure classes
Si
1
Sulphate and magnesium Natural soil Brownfield
Exposure
2:1 water/soil or groundwater Static
class Static Mobile Mobile
2 water 2
water pH water pH water pH
SO4 (mg/l) Mg (mg/l) pH
S1 < 1500 > 3.5 Not mobile > 5.5 Not mobile
S2 1500-3000 > 3.5 Not mobile > 5.5 Not mobile
S3 3001-6000 ≤ 1000 > 3.5 Not mobile > 5.5 Not mobile
S4 > 6000 ≤ 1000 > 3.5 > 5.5 > 5.5 > 6.5
S5 > 6000 > 1000 > 3.5 > 5.5 > 5.5 > 6.5
Notes
1. Brownfield sites are those previously occupied and contain chemical residues into the ground
or groundwater
2. The mobility of water shall be determined as described in the Concrete Society CS 163.
6.3 FRESH CONCRETE
6.3.1 General
1 Where adequate workability is difficult to obtain at the maximum water/cementitious ratio

allowed, the use of plasticisers or water reducing admixtures may be considered.
Alternatively an increase in cementitious content may be considered where this will not
adversely affect the durability of the concrete.
3
2 Cementitious contents in excess of 400 kg/m shall not be used unless special consideration
has been given to the effect for heat of hydration and reduce thermal stress in the concrete,
and approval has been obtained from the Engineer. The maximum cementitious content shall
not exceed 500kg/m³
3 The proportioning, mixing and placing of the mixture shall be in accordance with Parts 7 and
8 of this Section
ar
4 Temperature (at placement):
at
(a) Maximum fresh concrete temperature shall not exceed 32°C unless construction
-Q
testing to verify a proposed concrete mixture will function satisfactorily at a concrete
temperature greater than 32°C. No concrete shall be placed if the concrete
temperature is above 35°C
LL
(b) For mass concrete, the concrete producer shall demonstrate that temperature of
concrete due to hydration shall comply with the maximum fresh concrete temperature
W
specified. The supplier may use in his demonstration testing heat sensors and
simulation technologies which measure the concrete heat of hydration and its rate
s
versus concrete curing age.

en
5 The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the concrete is able to be fully compacted
within the concrete element regardless of reinforcing density or other limitations. This may
m
involve reducing the maximum aggregate size, increase the level of concrete workability or
use self-compacting concrete.
e
Si
6 Where the consistence of concrete is to be determined, it shall be measured either by means

of:
(a) Slump test conforming to BS EN 12350-2

(b) Flow table test conforming to BS EN 12350-5
7 The consistence of concrete shall be determined at the time of use of the concrete or in the
case of ready-mix concrete, at the time of delivery.
8 The tolerances for the different consistence tests and target values are given in Table 6.3.
Table 6.3.
Tolerances for target values of consistence
Target value (mm) ≤ 40 50 to 90 ≥ 100
Slump*
Tolerance (mm) -30, +40 -40, +50 -50, +60
Target value (mm) All values
Flow diameter*
Tolerance (mm) -60, +70
* For spot samples taken from initial discharge.

6.4 GRADES OF CONCRETE
1 Where strength is classified with respect to compressive strength, Table 6.4 gives the
concrete grade with the requirements for w/c ratio and cementitious content.
2 The characteristic compressive strength at 28 days of 150mm cubes (f ck, cube) or 150mm
diameter by 300mm cylinders (fck, cyl) may be used for the classification.
3 Exception will be made for concrete mixtures containing fly ash, silica fume or GGBS, where
testing shall be requested at 56 days, or 90 days as approved by the Engineer.
Table 6.4:
Concrete grades and composition requirements
Minimum Maximum
Concrete Grade
Minimum
characteristic Minimum cementitious
characteristic cube
ar
cylinder strength content Water : Cementitious
strength (fck, cube) Ratio
(fck, cyl)
at
2 2 3
(N/mm ) (N/mm )
-Q (kg/m ) (w/c)
B 15 15 12 - -
LL
B 20 20 16 - -
C 25 25 20 260 0.60
W
C 30 30 25 300 0.58
s
C 35 35 28 320 0.55
en
C 40 40 32 335 0.50
C45 45 35 355 0.47

m
C 50 50 40 370 0.45
e
Si
C 60 60 50 380 0.40
C 75 75 60 390 0.35
6.5 DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS
6.5.1 General
1 Constituent materials shall not contain harmful ingredients in such quantities as may be
detrimental to the durability of concrete or cause corrosion of the reinforcement.
2 For reinforced concrete in the ground, the need for protection from chlorides must be
balanced against the need for protection from sulphates.
3 Protective measures include the use of surface treatment, alternative reinforcement and
increasing the concrete cover. In every case, the need for good quality concrete with low
permeability is paramount.
6.5.2 Maximum acid soluble chloride content
1 The chloride content of the concrete, expressed as the percentage of chloride ions by mass
of cementitious materials, shall not exceed the values given in Table 6.5.
2 Calcium chloride and chloride based admixtures shall not be used in concrete containing
steel reinforcement or other embedded metal.
3 The determination of the chloride content in the concrete shall be conducted by the sum of
the contributions from the constituent materials as described in BS EN 206-1 and BS 8500-2.
Table 6.5.
Maximum chloride content of concrete (by weight of cementitious materials)
Concrete made with sulphate Concrete made with other cementitious
Concrete type
resisting Portland cement materials than SRPC
Reinforced concrete 0.15 % 0.3 %
ar
Pre-stressed concrete 0.08 % 0.10 %
at
6.5.3 Type of cementitious material
-Q
1 Different types of cementitious materials offer different resistance to sulphate attack and
penetration of chlorides
LL
2 The minimum cementitious content for different concrete grades is given in Table 6.4.
W
3 Table 6.6 gives the different types of cementitious materials and their combinations.
s
en
Table 6.6.
Cementitious materials and combinations
m
BS EN 197-1 ASTM
Cementitious material Percentage of components
designation standard
e
Si
Portland cement 100% PC CEM I Type 1
Sulphate-resistance Portland
100% SRPC - Type 5
cement
65-79% PC
PC/fly ash CEM II/B-V
35-21% FA
PC/ground granulated 35-65% PC

CEM III/A
blastfurnace slag 65-35% GGBS
55-70% PC
Triple blend
35-25% FA
PC/FA/SF
10-5% SF
30-45% PC
Triple blend PC/GGBS/SF 60-50% GGBS
10-5% SF
6.5.4 Resistance to alkali-silica reaction
1 Alkali-silica reaction is the most common form of alkali-aggregate reaction.
2 Dry concrete is not prone to cracking by alkali-silica reaction, as it needs an external source
of water to develop sufficiently to cause cracking.
3 Where aggregate contain varieties of silica susceptible to attack by alkalis from cement and
other sources and the concrete is exposed to humid conditions, actions shall be taken to
prevent deleterious alkali-silica reaction using recommendations and procedures given in BS
EN 206-1 and BS 8500-2.
6.5.5 Recommendations to resist reinforcement corrosion
1 Durability design should start at the concept design stage, continuing through the design,
detailing, specification and execution phases.
ar
2 This section covers the concrete grade, cementitious type, and minimum concrete cover for
various exposure classes as given in Table 6.1.
at
3 Table 6.7 provided recommended values of concrete grade and cover thickness to resist
-Q
reinforcement corrosion at different exposure classes.
LL
Table 6.7.
Recommended durability requirement to resist reinforcement corrosion
W
Cementitious type
Exposure Class Minimum concrete cover (mm)
(Table 6.6)
s
en
No risk of
X0 25 All
corrosion
e m
X1 Mild 45 40 35 30 All
Si
X2 Moderate - 50 45 40 35 All
 PC/FA
X3 Aggressive - 70 65 60 55  PC/GGBS
 Triple blend
 PC/FA
X4 Severe* - 75 70 65 60  PC/GGBS
 Triple blend
X5 Extreme* - 80 75 70 65  Triple blend
Minimum concrete
C30 C40 C50 C60 C75
grade
 *High level of cement replacement is required for severe and extreme exposure conditions.
Other protection measures such as coated reinforcement or surface treatment may be
considered.
6.5.6 Recommendations to resist sulphate attack
1 The exposure classification shall be identified based on the sulphate and magnesium
contents in the ground and groundwater, pH and mobility of groundwater as given in Table
6.2.
2 The recommended concrete specification requirements in terms of concrete grade and

cementitious type are given in Table 6.8.
3 Unless stated otherwise by the Engineer or project designs, all concrete below ground shall
have surface protection to prevent the movement of moisture from the ground, through the
foundations into the superstructure. The method of protection shall be in accordance with
Section 15 of the QCS or as approved by Qatar Standards.
Table 6.8
Recommended durability requirement to resist sulphate attack
ar
at
Exposure class Minimum concrete grade Cementitious type
S1 C35
-Q All
C40 Triple blend

S2
LL
C50 SRPC, PC/FA, PC/GGBS

C50 Triple blend
S3
W
C60 SRPC, PC/FA, PC/GGBS

C60
s
S4 Triple blend
C75
en
1
S5 See Note See Note
m
Note:
1
S5 requires special treatment when the sulphate content exceeds 6000 mg/l and the magnesium
e
content exceeds 1000 mg/l.

Si
6.5.7 Durability-Related Properties
1 The durability of concrete is greatly influenced by the ability of the concrete cover to resist the
movement of liquid and gas through concrete.
2 The commonly used test for assessing the transport properties of concrete are listed in Table
6.9 together with typical values. Lower value indicates more durable concrete.
3 No values are currently specified for various exposure classes, but may be requested by the
Engineer. Table 6.9 gives the recommended durability-related properties and typical values
for the development of mix design and comparative performance as given in the Concrete
Society CS163.
4 For Severe and Extreme exposures, it is recommended to use high durable concrete (Table
6.9)
Table 6.9
Recommended properties and typical values for concrete
Age range between 28 and 90 days
Concrete property Test method
High durability Minimum durability
Water absorption BS 1881: Part 122 2% 4%
Water penetration, BS EN 12390-8 5 mm 30 mm
Rapid chloride permeability (RCP), ASTM C 1202 500 coulombs 4000 coulombs
-12 2 -12 2
Chloride migration NT Build 492 2.0 x10 (m /s) 9.0 x10 (m /s)
1. Concrete shall be tested for any of the transport properties when requested by the Engineer and shall
be tested at 28 days.
2. Exception will be made for concrete mixtures containing fly ash, silica fume or GGBS, where testing
shall be requested at 56 days, or 90 days.
6.6 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES
ar
1 At the start of the construction period, the Contractor shall design a mix for each grade of
at
concrete as stated hereafter.
-Q
2 Each mix design shall be such that:
(a) the aggregate shall comprise fine aggregate and coarse aggregate with size specified
LL
in Section 5, Part 2.
(b) the combined aggregate grading shall be continuous
W
(c) the aggregate quantity shall be calculated by weight.
3 Where a concrete production facility has strength test records not more than 12 months old,
s
a sample standard deviation, Ss, shall be established. Test records from which Ss is
en
calculated shall consist of at least 30 consecutive tests or two groups of consecutive tests
totalling at least 30 tests
m
4 Where a concrete production facility does not have strength test records meeting
e
requirements of 6.6 (3) above, but does have test records not more than 12 months old
Si
based on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, a sample standard deviation Ss shall be established as

the product of the calculated sample standard deviation and modification factor of Table 6.10
Table 6.10
Modification Factor for Sample Standard Deviation When Less Than 30 Tests Are Available
Modification factor for sample standard
No. of tests
deviation
Less than 15 Use para 7. Below
15 1.16
20 1.08
25 1.03
30 1.00
1- Interpolate for intermediate number of tests
2- Modified sample standard deviation, Ss, to be used to determined required
average strength f’cr
5 To determine the correction factor between cube strength and cylinder strength, the
contractor shall establish at least 30 consecutive strength tests from each proposed mix
design. This correction will remain valid thru the project providing that no change in the
properties of the materials and no change in source occurred.
6 Required average compressive strength (Target Mean Strength) f’cr used as the basis for
selection of concrete proportions shall be determined from Table 6.11 using the sample
standard deviation, Ss
Table 6.11:
Required Target Mean Strength when data are available
to establish a sample Standard Deviation
Specified compressive strength, Required average compressive strength, Target

2
N/mm2 or MPa Mean Strength, N/mm or MPa
ar
F’c < 35 MPa --- see footnote F’cr = f’c + 1.34Ss ------------------ Eq. 1
at
F’cr = f’c + 2.33Ss – 3.5 ---------- Eq. 2
-Q
F’c > 35 MPa --- see footnote F’cr = f’c + 1.34Ss ------------------ Eq. 1
LL
F’cr = 0.90f’c + 2.33Ss ------------ Eq. 3
Note: Use the larger value computed from any equation

W
7 When a concrete production facility does not have field strength test records for calculation of
s
Ss, Required average strength (Target Mean Strength) f’cr shall be determined as follow:
en
(a) F’cr = f’c + 8.5 MPa when 20 < f’c < 35 MPa
m
(b) F’cr = 1.10f’c + 5 MPa when f’c > 35 MPa

e
Si
6.6.1 Concrete
1 Portland cement concrete shall consist of a mixture of cementitious materials, fine aggregate,
coarse aggregate, water, and additives (when required). It shall be classified as in Table 6.4
unless otherwise stated hereafter and requested by the Engineer.
2 Blinding concrete
(a) Blinding concrete shall be of minimum Grade C15 and above.

(b) The thickness of the blinding concrete shall be as shown on the Drawings, but shall in
no instance be less than 75 mm.
(c) The surface finish to blinding concrete shall be Class U4 as specified in Clause 9.3.1
of Part 9 of this Section or as directed by the Engineer.
3 Mass Concrete
(a) The fresh concrete temperature at placing shall not exceed 21°C to minimise thermal
cracking. A higher temperature of up to 27°C may be accepted with a demonstration of
the satisfactory performance of concrete including mock up and thermal calculations.
The maximum allowable differential temperature between the interior and the exterior
of the mass concrete element shall not exceed 20 ° C. The maximum temperature in
any location within the mass concrete structure during curing shall not exceed 70 °C.
The drop in concrete surface temperature during, and at the conclusion of the
specified curing period, shall not exceed 11 °C in any 24 hour period.
4 Self-Compacting Concrete
(a) General: Self-Compacting Concrete (SCC) is a special concrete that requires

minimum or no vibration for placing and compaction. It is able to flow under its own
weight, completely filling formwork and achieving full compaction, even in the presence
of congested reinforcement. The hardened concrete is dense, homogeneous and has
the same engineering properties and durability as traditional vibrated, fully compacted
ar
concrete.
at
(b) Self-Compacting Concrete Supplier: SCC shall be supplied by a competent concrete
-Q
producer with a record of successfully producing this type of concrete at considerable
volume and with high consistency.
(c) Constituent Materials, General: The constituent materials for SCC are the same as
LL
those used in traditional concrete conforming to EN 206-1, as specified in part 2 of this

section.
W
(d) To achieve these requirements the control of the constituent materials needs to be
increased and the tolerable variations restricted, so that daily production of SCC is
s
within the conformity criteria without the need to test and/or adjust every batch.
en
(e) Recommended Test Requirements for SCC:

m
Laboratory tests Field Tests
Slump-flow 600 – 750 mm 550 – 750 mm

e
Si
V-Funnel 6 – 25 sec N.A
L-Box (3 bars) > 0.80 N.A

J-Ring < 10mm N.A
(f) Concrete specimens shall be moulded in single layer without rodding and tapping
(g) Slump flow and VSI testing shall be performed as outlined in the European Guidelines
for SCC, BS EN 12350-8 and BS EN 12350-9 or ACI 237R 07 and ASTM C 1611/C
1611M
5 Pile Concrete
3
(a) The cementitious content shall not be less than 380 kg/m , as specified in Section 4.
(b) The water-cementitious ratio shall not exceed 0.45
(c) The concrete mixture shall be designed of high slump not less than 150 mm allowing
proper free fall with excellent homogeneity. When concrete mixture requires slump of
greater than 230 mm, it shall be designed as Self-Compacting Concrete or as
instructed by the Engineer.
(d) The concrete slump shall have adequate workability retention using approved type of
retarder and shall be submitted in the design mix.
(e) The increase in workability shall not permit any decrease in the specified design
strength
(f) The concrete in a pile shall, if at all possible, be placed in one continuous operation.
6 Underwater Concrete
(a) Shall comply with ACI 304 Chapter 8

3
(b) The Cementitious content shall not be less than 390 kg/m
ar
(c) The water-cementitious ratio must not exceed 0.40
at
(d) Fine aggregate contents of 45 to 55% by volume of total aggregate and air contents of
up to approximately 5% are generally specified.
-Q
(e) Concrete shall be more cohesive and less prone to washout of cement or fines from
the concrete during placement. Antiwashout admixtures or alternative concrete mix
shall be used for underwater concrete.
LL
(f) Trial placements shall be conducted to verify that the concrete proportioned with the
W
antiwashout admixture can maintain adequate slump life and can flow for the required
distance.
s
(g) The concrete mixture shall be designed of high slump not less than 150 mm allowing
en
proper free fall with excellent homogeneity. The use of air-entraining admixture shall
be evaluated as it increases the workability. When concrete mixture requires slump of
m
greater than 230 mm, it shall be designed as Self Compacted Concrete. The increase
in slump shall be made using proper admixtures.
e
(h) The concrete slump shall have adequate retention using approved type of retarder and
Si
shall be submitted in the design mix.

(i) The increase in workability shall not permit any decrease in the specified design
strength
(j) The concrete shall be placed in one continuous operation
(k) The final selection of a concrete mixture shall be based on test placements made
under water in a placement box or in a pit that can be dewatered after the placement.
Test placements shall be examined for concrete surface flatness, amount of laitance
present, quality of concrete at the extreme flow distance of the test, and flow around
embedded items, if appropriate.
7 Shotcrete
(a) The classification of shotcreting shall be in accordance to the process used (wet-mix
or dry-mix) and the size of aggregates used.
(b) All materials shall be as per QCS except for aggregate where gradation shall be as per
ACI 506R and 506.2R
(c) Steel and synthetic fibers will be used to reduce propagation of cracks. Fibers shall be
as per Manufacturer supplier data sheet and shall conform to ASTM A 820 for steel
fibers and ASTM C1116 for synthetic fibers.
(d) The nozzle operator should be certified (refer to ACI CP-60) and have completed at
least one similar application as a nozzle operator on a similar project. The nozzle
operator should also be able to demonstrate, by test, an ability to satisfactorily perform
the required duties and to apply shotcrete as required by specifications
(e) Before shotcreting the surface shall be prepared and maintained before and during
shotcrete application. Surface preparation shall conform to ACI 506 R chap. 5
3
(f) The cementitious content shall not be less than 360 kg/m where wet-mix is applied
the slump shall be in the range of 40 to 80 mm
(g) Normal testing ages for compressive strength are 7 and 28 days; however, shorter
periods may be required for particular applications or conditions as directed by the
3
Engineer. Testing shall be on daily production or every 30 m whichever is greater.
ar
(h) Sampling and testing, however, should be varied according to the size and complexity
of the project. Sampling should be done in accordance with ASTM C 1385. Making
at
extra cylinders or panels shall be at the request of Engineer if testing results vary.
(i)
-Q
Testing for water absorption and drying shrinkage shall be at the request of the
Engineer.
(j) Fiber-reinforced shotcrete requires fiber washout tests or flexural toughness testing
LL
according to ASTM C 1018.

(k) Acceptance of shotcrete should be based on results obtained from drilled cores or
W
sawed cubes (ASTM C 42). The use of data from nondestructive testing devices, such
as impact hammers or probes (ASTM C 805, ASTM C 803), ultrasonic equipment
s
(ASTM C 597), and pull-out devices (ASTM C 900) may be useful in determining the
en
uniformity and quality of the in-place shotcrete. These tests, however, may not provide
reliable values for compressive strength.
m
(l) Core grading is a method used to evaluate encasement of reinforcement. Core

e
grading shall be used for nozzle operator evaluation. Core grading should not be used
Si
to evaluate structures.
8 No-Fines Concrete and Pervious concrete
(a) No-fines concrete shall be made using a coarse aggregate conforming QCS section 5
part 3
(b) Proportion of aggregate, cement and water shall be determined by trial mixes by the
Contractor and to be accepted by the Engineer.
(c) All the aggregate particles are to be coated with a film of cement grout.
(d) No-fines concrete when placed shall contain no layers of laitance.
(e) No-fines concrete shall not be mixed by hand.
(f) Mechanical vibration shall not be used to compact no-fines concrete.
(g) Three test cubes of no-fines concrete shall be made of each preliminary mix.
(h) Minimum crushing strength of the chosen mix shall be 5 MPa at 28 days.
(i) The porosity of no-fines concrete shall be such that water will pass through a slab
2
300 mm thick at the rate of not less than 7 l/m • s of slab with a constant 100 mm
depth of water on the slab.
(j) Where a slab incorporating vertical weep holes or drain holes is casted above a layer
of no-fines concrete; any polyethylene sheeting shall be pierced below the pipes
forming such drain holes and the edges of the sheeting sealed to the lower end of the
pipe to prevent the ingress of grout and fine particles from the slab concrete into the
no-fines concrete.
(k) The limit for the maximum height of drop while placing is not applicable for no fines
concrete.
(l) Formwork shall remain in place until the no fines concrete has gained adequate
strength to support itself as per the requirements of Part 10 of this Section.
(m) Curing shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of Part 11 of this Section
(n) The fresh density of Pervious concrete shall be tested as per ASTM C1688 and the
ar
infiltration rate shall be tested as per ASTM C1701 and to follow ACI 522.1R for testing
and quality control scheme.
at
9 Concrete with recycled aggregates shall be generally approved once the source of recycled
-Q
aggregates is identified based on type and approved by the Engineer.
(a) The recycled aggregates shall meet with BS EN 12620 and QCS requirements.
LL
(b) The concrete made with recycled aggregates shall be limited to design strength of C40
MPa cube strength; unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. BS EN 206-1 shall be
W
the code of practice and guide for the usage of recycled concrete aggregates in
concrete or ACI 555 and BRE digest 433.
s
(c) The Water-cementitious ratio shall not exceed 0.50

en
(d) To determine a target mean strength on the basis of a required strength, a higher
standard deviation (increased by 40%) shall be used when designing a concrete with
m
recycled aggregates of variable quality than when recycled aggregate of uniform

e
quality or virgin aggregates are used

Si
(e) Specific gravity, unit weight, and absorption of aggregates should be determined
before mixture proportion studies
(f) The mixture proportion should be based on the measured density of the recycled
aggregates intended in the job concrete
(g) Trial mixes shall be made to verify the requirements with project specification and
QCS.
10 Heavyweight and radiation shielding concrete
(a) The quality of the aggregates should comply with the requirements of QCS for normal
weight aggregates, ASTM C 637 for heavyweight aggregates and ASTM C638 for
aggregates to be used in radiation-shielding concrete.
(b) When ferrophosphorous aggregates are used, tests shall be made to determine if
gases (nontoxic) might be released during construction.
(c) Aggregates shall be checked for every delivery to ensure that they conform completely
with purchase specifications
(d) Aggregates shall be frequently evaluated for the effects of deleterious substances or
aggregate coatings on concrete strength or the promotion of corrosion in metallic
aggregates or embedment’s
(e) The chemical properties of all high-density aggregates must be provided to the
Engineer for evaluation before use with due consideration given to chemical reactivity,
particularly in highly alkaline environment as found in cement paste.
(f) Tests for alkali-aggregate reactivity shall be determined from each source and supplier
and shall be made every 3 months.
(g) The fresh density of high-density concrete shall be made from each truck
(h) Lead shot concrete shall not be use for structural concrete.
(i) Thermal conductivity, elastic behaviour and shrinkage, hardened density, strength as
well as other hardened concrete properties shall be tested and verified before the use
of concrete.
11 Fiber-Reinforced Concrete
ar
(a) Classification of fiber-reinforced concrete shall be made based on the material type of
at
the fiber incorporated: -Q
(i) Type I Steel Fiber-Reinforced Concrete—Contains stainless steel, alloy steel, or
carbon steel fibers conforming to Specification of BS EN 14889-1 or ASTM
A820 /A820M .
LL
(ii) Type II Glass Fiber-Reinforced Concrete—Contains alkali-resistant (AR) glass

fibers conforming to Specification C 1666/C 1666M.
W
(iii) Type III Synthetic Fiber-Reinforced Concrete— Contains synthetic fibers for
which documentary evidence can be produced confirming their long-term
s
resistance to deterioration when in contact with the moisture and alkalis present
en
in cement paste and the substances present in admixtures and shall conform to
BS EN 14889-2
m
(iv) Type IV Natural Fiber-Reinforced Concrete— Contains natural fibers for which
e
documentary evidence can be produced confirming their long-term resistance to

Si
deterioration when in contact with the moisture and alkalis present in cement
paste and the substances present in admixtures. Test Method ASTM D 6942
shall be used to determine the susceptibility of these fibers to deterioration as a
result of exposure to alkalis in concrete
(v) When the purchaser chooses to permit the use of fibers other than those
complying with the above classifications, the manufacturer or supplier shall
show evidence satisfactory to the purchaser that the type of fiber proposed for
use shows long-term resistance to deterioration when in contact with the
moisture and alkalis present in cement paste and the substances present in
admixtures
(b) The contractor shall submit:
(i) Type of fiber-reinforced concrete required
(ii) Designated size, or sizes, of coarse aggregates
(c) Slump or time of flow required at the point of delivery, or when appropriate the point of
placement, subject to the tolerances hereinafter specified Slump shall be specified
when it is anticipated to be 50 mm or more. Except as otherwise specifically permitted
by the Engineer, cement, supplementary cementitious materials, fine and coarse
aggregates, mixing water, and admixtures shall be measured in accordance with the
applicable requirements of QCS
(d) Fibers shall be measured by mass. When the fibers are to be measured by mass,
bags, boxes, or like containers are acceptable provided that such like containers are
sealed by the fiber manufacturer and have the mass contained therein clearly marked.
No fraction of a container delivered unsealed, or left over from previous work, shall be
used unless weighed.
(e) Prepackaged, dry, combined materials, including fibers, shall comply with the
packaging and marking requirements of Specification ASTM C 387 or C 1480 and
shall be accepted for use provided that after addition of water, the resulting fiber
reinforced concrete meets the performance requirements of this specification
ar
(f) Batching plant used for the preparation of continuously mixed fiber-reinforced concrete
shall comply with the applicable requirements of NRMCA. Fiber-reinforced concrete
at
shall be added directly to the concrete at the time of batching in amounts in accord
with approved submittals for each type of concrete required. Mix concrete in strict
-Q
accord with fiber-reinforced concrete manufacturer, instructions and recommendations
(g) Fiber-reinforced concrete shall be free of fiber balls when delivered
LL
(h) The manufacturer of the fiber-reinforced concrete shall furnish to the purchaser a
delivery ticket or statement of particulars on which is printed, stamped, or written,
W
information with details of the type, brand, and amount of fibers used.
(i) The contractor shall afford the inspector all reasonable access, without charge, for the
s
procurement of samples of freshly mixed fiber-reinforced concrete at the time of

en
placement to determine compliance with the requirements of this specification.

(j) Samples of batch-mixed fiber-reinforced concrete shall be obtained in accordance with
m
Practice ASTM C 172 or C 1385/C 1385M for shotcrete as appropriate, except that
e
wet-sieving shall not be permitted. Sampling for uniformity tests shall be in accordance
Si
with specification ASTM C 94/C 94M

(k) If the measured slumps, time of flow, or air content fall outside the limits permitted by
this specification, make a check test immediately on another portion of the same
sample. If the results again fall outside the permitted limits, the material represented by
the sample fails to meet the requirements of this specification
(l) The following shall apply to all forms of fiber-reinforced concrete except dry-mix
shotcrete. When applicable, the slump shall be in tolerance with this section para
6.4.2.5 (a) and (b).
(m) The time of flow shall be in the tolerances as follow:
(i) When the project specifications for time of flow are written as a “minimum” or
“not less than” requirement
Specified time of flow

If 15sec or less If more than 15 sec
Plus Tolerance 5s 10s
Minus Tolerance 0s 0s
(ii) When the project specifications for time of flow are not written as a “minimum”
or “not less than” requirement:
Tolerances for time of flow
For specified time of flow Tolerance
8 to 15 s + 3s
More than 15 s + 5s
(n) Finishability - Pre-project trials shall be utilized to determine acceptable surface

finishability by the Engineer. The manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified
technician to instruct the concrete supplier in proper batching and mixing of materials
to be provided.
(o) Provide fibers for concrete reinforcing capable of achieving a two hour fire resistance
rating when tested under ASTM E 119. Fire tests must be certified.
12 Lightweight concrete
(a) This clause of the specification refers to lightweight concrete with improved insulation
ar
properties where the practical range of densities is between about 300 and 1850
kg/m3.
at
(b) The required density and strength of the lightweight concrete will be specified on the
-Q
drawings or directed by the Engineer.
(c) The method of production of lightweight concrete will be shown on the drawings or
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit full technical details of the
materials and method of production for the lightweight concrete along with a list of
LL
previous projects where the particular system has been used.

W
(d) After source approval of the material and system the Contractor shall submit a mix
design for the lightweight concrete for the approval of the Engineer. After the review
and approval of the mix theoretical mix design the Contractor shall carry out a trial mix
s
to check the workability of the fresh concrete and to allow samples to be made for
en
compressive strength and density.

(e) The Engineer may also instruct that tests are carried out for abrasion resistance and
m
thermal insulation properties.

(f) Iightweight concrete shall be made with lightweight aggregates as approved in part 2 of
e
section 05 in QCS for its use in concrete

Si
(g) The performance of lightweight concrete shall follow ACI 213R
6.7 TRIAL MIXES

1 As soon as the Engineer has approved the concrete mix design for each grade of concrete
and during or following the carrying out of the preliminary tests, the Contractor shall prepare a
trial mix of each grade in the presence of the Engineer at least 35 days before
commencement of concreting. Trial mix shall be mixed and handled by means of the same
plant which the Contractor proposes to use in the Works. The trial mix shall comprise not
3
less than 50% from the central mixing drum capacity but not less than 3.0 m of concrete.
The trial mix can be exempted if concrete supplier provides through an independent
approved testing agency adequate history on strength:
(a) Not less than 30 strength test results as in para 6.6 of this specification
(b) The results shall valid by no more than 6 months from the date of approval
2 Batch the field concrete trial mixture within -5°C of the proposed maximum allowable fresh
3
concrete temperature in a truck-mixer with a minimum batch size of 3 m .
3 The concrete mixture shall be held in the mixer for 120 minutes, unless otherwise specified
by the Engineer. During the entire 120-minute period, agitate the mixer at 1 to 6 rpm. At the
end of 120 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the
manufacturer (6 to 18 rpm) for 2 minutes.
4 For each trial mix, a plant production trial shall be carried out and the slump of the concrete
checked immediately after discharge from the mixer and thereafter at 30 min intervals up to
the maximum time period envisaged for delivery and standing on site. Based on this trial the
mix design shall identify any adjustments to the range of plasticiser for acceptable workability
for different times after batching. Where ready mix concrete is being used, the above
requirement may be waived at the discretion of the Engineer if the Contractor has
documented previous experience of a particular mix design with test results available.
5 The proportions of cement, aggregate and water shall be carefully determined by weight in
accordance with the Contractor's approved mix design (or modified mix design after
preliminary tests).
6 Each sample shall consist of at least 9 specimens for strength analysis where 3 specimens
for each age will be tested to determine the concrete strength at the required age.
ar
7 If either or both the average value of the strength of the three cubes tested at 28 d is less
at
than the required strength (target strength) or the difference between the greatest and the
-Q
least strengths is more than 15 % of the average strengths, as per BS EN 206-1, the
Contractor shall take measures as deemed necessary such as:
(a) Propose new mix design

LL
(b) Provide new materials and prepare and test further trial mixes until specified
requirements are achieved.
W
8 Additionally, the Contractor shall measure the temperature, workability of concrete in each
batch.
s
en
3
9 When requested by engineer, a mock-up of 2x2x2 m shall be made at jobsite and full scale
tests of the workability of each trial mix shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of
m
the Engineer. The following tests shall be made on the Site by filling trial moulds to confirm
the suitability of:
e
(a) mix for the works

Si
(b) type of plant used for mixing

(c) face intended for use in the works
(d) type of form oil
(e) type of protective coatings.
10 Redesign of the concrete mixes and trial mixes of concrete shall be repeated for each grade
of concrete until the concrete meets the requirements in this specification and it is verified by
full scale mockup test as described above.
11 Approval of the job-mix proportions by the Engineer or his assistance to the Contractor in
establishing those proportions, in no way relieves the Contractor of the responsibility of
producing concrete which meets the requirements of this Specification.
12 All costs connected with the preparations of trial mixes and the design of the job mixes shall
be borne by the Contractor.
13 The Contractor shall declare any change in the source of the material and any changes in the
cement content consumption greater than 20.0kg/m³ from that used in the trial mixes.
6.8.1 General
1 In order to ensure that the quality of materials and mix proportions are maintained throughout
concreting operations, sampling and testing shall be carried out using the relevant standard
procedures and all other relevant codes quoted in this specification in accordance with a
routine testing program that shall be agreed with the Engineer before the start of concrete
work.
2 The Contractor, through a third party approved testing agency, shall supply all necessary
tools for tests, shall cast all concrete specimens, strip and store them in water as stated in
BS EN 12390-2. The Contractor shall also arrange for the transport of samples to the place
of testing and shall supply the Engineer with duplicate copies of all test certificates.
6.8.2 Tests for Concrete
1 Unless the Engineer directs otherwise, the program shall include at least the tests specified
ar
below.
at
2 Tests on aggregates shall be as described in Part 2 of this Section.
3
-Q
Concrete shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this specification by qualified
field testing technicians or engineer. Concrete testing laboratory personnel shall be certified
from a recognised Institution. Field personnel’s in charge of sampling concrete; testing for
slump, and temperature; and making and curing test specimens shall be certified from a
LL
recognised Institution too.

W
4 Slump tests (and VSI testing when applicable) shall be carried out at the rate of one test per
3
load of concrete delivered to the Site, or one test per 10 m whichever is the lesser for the
3 3
first 50 m of concrete then at a rate of 1 slump test for every 50 m if concrete was
s
consistent during production. In the event of inconsistent slump values, the Engineer may
en
instruct the Contractor to check the slump test on each truck of concrete at the plant. The
Contractor shall carry out an investigation to establish the cause of the high variation in slump
and shall take any necessary corrective measures. The slump requirements for the fresh
m
concrete are to be approved by the Engineer.

e
5 The adjustment for the slump of concrete to fit the job requirement can be conducted only
Si
one time using a proper additive at jobsite provided that such addition does not increase the
water-cement ratio and setting time above the maximum permitted by the specifications. This
addition will only be made at the approval of Engineer.
6 Concrete shall be available within the permissible range of slump for a period of 30 min
starting either on arrival at the job site or after the initial slump adjustment as permitted
3
above, whichever is later. The first and last quarter m discharged are exempt from this
requirement. If the user is unprepared for discharge of the concrete from the vehicle, the
producer shall not be responsible for the limitation of minimum slump after 30 min have
elapsed starting either on arrival of the vehicle at the prescribed destination or at the
requested delivery time, whichever is later.
7 When air-entrained concrete is desired the purchaser shall specify the total air content of the
concrete. The air content of air-entrained concrete when sampled from the transportation unit
at the point of discharge shall be within a tolerance of +1.5% of the specified value.
8 Concrete strength test:
(a) Each concrete strength sample shall consist of at least seven specimens, two to be
tested at 7 days, three at 28 days and two to be tested at the discretion of the
Engineer. Additional samples may be prepared as directed by the Engineer to be
tested at the discretion of the Engineer for strength and/or durability.
(b) When concrete cylinders have been specified, the concrete specimens shall not be
capped using sulphur for environmental effect. The Contractor shall follow one of the
following procedures and as approved by the Engineer:
(i) Cap the specimens in accordance with ASTM C617 using neat cement paste
and/or High-strength gypsum cement paste
(ii) Saw cut and Grind the surface of the concrete to the desired planeness and
perpendicular
(iii) Test the concrete cylinders using Unbonded Caps in accordance with ASTM
C1231
(iv) For field specimens, the contractor has the right to either use the conversion
listed in EN 206 or determine the conversion factor for each specified concrete
ar
mix design by testing at least 36 comparative specimens (i.e. 18 cubes versus
18 cylinders sampled from 3 consecutive batch trial mix).
at
(c) A minimum of one sample shall be taken of each mix every day the mix is used
-Q
(d) Samples shall be taken at the average rate of the followings:
3
(i) One sample every 30 m3, if the pour is less than or equal to 90 m
LL
3
(ii) One sample every 100 m3, if the pour is greater than 90m and equal to or less
than 2000 m3,
W
3
(iii) One sample every 200 m3, if the pour exceeds 2000 m .
(e) Test specimens for compressive strength testing shall be prepared and cured in
s
accordance with BS EN 12390-2. The compressive strength of the specimens shall be

en
determined in accordance with BS EN 12390-3.

(f) A test shall be the average of the strength of the specimens tested at the age
m
specified. If a specimen shows definite evidence other than low strength, of improper
e
sampling, moulding, handling, curing, or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength
of the remaining cubes shall then be considered the test result.
Si
(g) Identity criteria of concrete strength shall be assessed for each individual test result
and the average of non-overlapping results as per BS EN 206-1 and explained below:
(i) The average strength tests (average of two specimens or more) shall be equal
to or greater than the characteristic (fck) + 2 MPa, and
(ii) Any individual test result shall be equal to or greater than fck – 4 MPa. The test
result shall be that obtained from the average of the results of two or more
specimens made from one sample for testing at the same age.
9 If works test specimens fail at 28 days the Contractor shall suspend concreting operations
and shall not proceed further without approval. The Contractor shall carry out in-situ testing
of the suspect concrete in accordance with Part 13 of this Section, in the presence of the
Engineer. All defective work shall be replaced and retested to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
6.8.3 Hardened Tests for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete
(a) When post-crack flexural performance is used as the basis for acceptance of fiber-
reinforced concrete, make, condition, and test sets of test specimens in accordance
with Test Method ASTM C1399, C1550 or C1609/C1609M as specified.
(b) When flexural strength is used as the basis for acceptance, make and test sets of at
least three test specimens in accordance with the requirements for sampling and
conditioning given in Test Method ASTM C1609/C1609M. Test specimens
representing thin sections, as defined in C1609/C1609M, or specimens representing
fiber-reinforced shotcrete of any thickness, shall be tested as cast or placed without
being turned on their sides before placement on the support system. Acceptance shall
not be based on flexural strength alone when post-crack performance is important.
Test Method C1609/C1609M provides for the determination of first peak flexural
strength when required by the purchaser. For many type-amount fiber combinations,
the first peak flexural strength is not significantly greater than the peak strength in
flexure.
ar
(c) When compressive strength is used as part of the basis for acceptance of fiber-
reinforced concrete, make sets of at least two test specimens in accordance with the
at
applicable requirements of Practices ASTM C31/C31M and C192/C192M and as
-Q
specified in this section, or Test Methods C42/C42M or C1604/C1604M and condition
and test in accordance with Test Methods BS EN 12390, C39/C39M, C42/ C42M, or
C1604/C1604M. Acceptance shall not be based on compressive strength alone.
LL
(d) The frequency of tests on hardened fiber-reinforced concrete shall be in accordance

with the following requirements:
W
(i) Batch-Mixing: Tests shall be made with same frequency as in conventional

concrete. Each test shall be made from a separate batch. On each day fiber-
s
reinforced concrete is mixed, at least one test shall be made for each class of
en
material.
(ii) When fibers are added, subject for approval of the Engineer, at the truck mixer
m
3
the tests shall be made for each 20 m or fraction thereof, or whenever
significant changes have been made in the proportioning controls. On each day
e
fiber-reinforced concrete is mixed, at least one test shall be made for each class
Si
of material.
3
(iii) For Shotcrete: Tests shall be made for each 38 m placed using specimens
sawed or cored from the structure or from corresponding test panels prepared in
accordance with Practice ASTM C1604 and C 1140. On each day fiber-
reinforced shotcrete is prepared; at least one test shall be made for each class
of material.
6.8.4 Quality Control charts
1 The Contractor shall submit a continuous statistical analysis, on a monthly basis, for strength
showing the potential strength of the concrete, variations in measured strength by
determining the standard deviation (margin), batch-to-batch variations of the proportions and
characteristics of the constituent materials in the concrete, the production, delivery, and
handling process, and climatic conditions; and variations in the sampling, specimen
preparation, curing, and testing procedures (within-test).
2 The Contractor shall provide in his analysis the mean strength, calculated standard deviation,
the normal distribution of concrete strength and the frequency histogram. The Contractor
shall draw the upper and lower lines for warning line (Target mean strength + 2 x standard
deviation) and control line (Target mean strength + 3 x standard deviation)
3 The contractor shall use the methods, of computing standard deviation along with coefficient
of variation and factors for computing within-test standard deviation from range, addressed in
ACI 214
4 This recalculated margin, if adopted by the Engineer, becomes the current margin for the
judgement of compliance with the specified characteristic strength of concrete
6.9 WORKS TEST CUBES
1 Test cubes shall be taken as specified from fresh mixed concrete which is being used in the
Works and which has been prepared in the normal way.
ar
2 Cubes shall be numbered sequentially and marked:
at
(a) Time, date and name of individual -Q
(b) Section of work from which samples are taken
(c) Mix reference and delivery note number
LL
(d) Name of technician

(e) and any other relevant information.
W
3 Tests for slump, as per BS EN 12350-2, and temperature shall be made and recorded
whenever samples are taken.
s
en
4 The cube manufacture shall be in accordance with BS EN 12390-2.

m
5 When Self Compacting Concrete is used, the concrete specimens shall not be consolidated
in moulds and it shall be placed in a single lift then levelled with minimum manipulation.
e
Si
6 All samples shall be moulded at jobsite on a levelled surface area to within 20 mm per meter
7 Immediately after moulding and finishing, the specimens shall be stored for a period up to 48
°
h in a temperature range from 20 to 26 C and in an environment preventing moisture loss
from the specimens
8 Specimens shall not be transported or handled until at least 14 h after casting
9 Transportation time from site to laboratory for final curing and strength testing shall not
exceed 4 hours. Specimens shall be protected from direct sun or rapid evaporation and
placed on cushion layer to reduce vibration
6.10 REJECTION OF CONCRETE MIXES
6.10.1 Rejection of Concrete Mixes:
1 Concrete mixes shall be rejected if they fail to meet one or more requirements, which cannot
be brought into compliance as related to any of the following:
(a) Improper class or grade of concrete

(b) Slump or temperature not within specified limits
(c) Oversized aggregate
(d) Maximum water-cementitious ratio is exceeded
2 Concrete shall not be rejected unless it has been visually inspected by the Engineer or
representatives.
6.10.2 Unsatisfactory Concrete Works
1 A test shall be the average of the strengths of the specimens tested at the age specified. If a
specimen shows definite evidence other than low strength, of improper sampling, moulding,
handling, curing, or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength of the remaining specimens
shall then be considered the test result and where the range of the test values is more than
15 % of the mean, the results shall be disregarded unless an investigation reveals an
acceptable reason to justify disregarding an individual test value. To conform to the
ar
requirements of this specification, strength tests representing each class of concrete must
at
meet the following requirements:
(a)
-Q
The average of any three consecutive strength tests shall be equal to, or greater than,
the specified strength, f ‘c, and
(b) When the specified strength is 35 MPa or less, no individual strength test (average of
LL
at least two specimen tests) shall be more than 3.5 MPa below the specified strength, f
‘c
W
(c) When the specified strength is greater than 35 MPa, no individual strength test
(average of two specimen tests) shall be less than 0.90 f ‘c.
s
2 Should any of the test results be unsatisfactory, the Engineer may order the work to be
en
stopped pending his further instructions. Executed work for which test results are
unsatisfactory shall be liable to rejection and if so advised the work shall be rebuilt at the
m
Contractor's expense.
e
Si
3 In the case of the 7-day works cube tests proving unsatisfactory, the work may be stopped
liable to rejection pending the result of the 28-day test. If the test results fail to comply with
the requirements, the work represented shall be immediately liable to rejection.
4 The cost of all such cuttings, preparation of specimens, transportation and testing, and of
making good the portions of the structure affected shall be borne by the Contractor.
5 Regardless of satisfactory test cube results, any concrete work which, in the Engineer's
opinion, is excessively honeycombed or in any other way is defective, shall be liable to
rejection. Minor defects apparent on stripping the formwork must be made good at the
Contractor's expense. No such repair work shall be carried out until after inspection by the
Engineer and his acceptance of the proposed treatment has been given. Work which has
not been previously inspected but which shows signs of such treatment shall be liable to
rejection as defective work.
6 The cost of all delays on site due to faulty concrete work shall be met by the Contractor.
END OF PART
Part 07: Concrete Plants
7 CONCRETE PLANTS.............................................................................................. 2
7.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
7.1.1 Scope 2
7.1.2 References 2
7.2 BATCHING .............................................................................................................. 3
7.2.1 General 3
7.2.2 Plant Type 5
7.2.3 Bins and Weight Batchers 5
7.2.4 Tolerances of Measuring Equipment 5
7.2.5 Batching Tolerances 6
7.2.6 Charging the Mixer 7
7.3 MIXING.................................................................................................................... 7
7.3.1 Charging Concrete Materials 7
7.3.2 Mixing Time for Stationary Mixers 7
ar
7.3.3 Mixing 8
7.3.4 Limitation of Water : Cement Ratio 8
at
7.4 READY-MIXED CONCRETE ................................................................................... 9
-Q
7.4.1 General 9
7.5 APPENDIX A: CONCRETE PLANT INSPECTION – CHECKLIST ........................ 11
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
7 CONCRETE PLANTS
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Scope
1 This Part covers batching and mixing of concrete together with inspection of concrete plants.

This Section
Part 1 ............... General
Part 2 ............... Aggregates
Part 3 ............... Cementitious materials
Part 4 ............... Water
Part 5 ............... Admixtures
ar
Part 8 ............... Transporting and Placing of Concrete
at
Part 15 ............. Hot Weather Concreting -Q
7.1.2 References
ACI 304 ......................Guides for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
LL
ASTM C94 ..................Specification for ready-mixed concrete

W
BS 1881......................Testing concrete
s
BS 8500......................Concrete Specification complementary to EN 206

en
BS EN 12390..............Testing of hardened concrete

m
BS EN 12390-1:2000 .Testing hardened concrete — Part 1: Shape, dimensions and other

e
requirements for specimens and moulds

Si
BS EN 12390-2:2000 .Testing hardened concrete — Part 2: Making and curing specimens

for strength tests
BS EN 12390-3:2000 .Testing hardened concrete — Part 3: Compressive strength of test
specimens
BS EN 12390-4:2000 .Testing hardened concrete — Part 4: Compressive strength -
Specification for testing machines
BS EN 12390-5:2000 .Testing hardened concrete — Part 5: Flexural strength of test
specimens
BS EN 12390-6:2000 .Testing hardened concrete — Part 6: Tensile splitting strength of test
specimens
BS EN 12390-7:2000 .Testing hardened concrete — Part 7: Density of hardened concrete
BS EN 12390-8:2000 .Testing hardened concrete — Part 8: Depth of penetration of water
under pressure
BS EN 12350..............Testing fresh concrete

BS EN 12350-1:2000 .Testing fresh concrete - Part 1: Sampling
BS EN 12350-2:2000 .Testing fresh concrete - Part 2: Slump test

BS EN 12350-3:2000 .Testing fresh concrete - Part 3: Vebe test
BS EN 12350-4:2000 Testing fresh concrete - Part 4: Degree of compatibility
BS EN 12350-5:2000 Testing fresh concrete - Part 5: Flow table test
BS EN 12350-6:2000 Testing fresh concrete - Part 6: Density
BS EN 12350-7:2000 Testing fresh concrete - Part 7: Air content - Pressure methods
GSO EN 206-1, ..........Concrete. Specification, performance, production and conformity

GSO ISO 1920-2 ........Testing of concrete – part 2: properties of fresh concrete
GSO ISO 1920-3 ........Testing of concrete – part 3: Making and curing test specimens.
GSO ISO 1920-4 ........Testing of concrete – part 4: strength of hardened concrete.
GSO ISO 1920-5 ........Testing of concrete – part 5: properties hardened concrete other than
strength.
ar
GSO ISO 1920-6 ........Testing of concrete – part 6: sampling, preparing and testing of
at
concrete core.
GSO ISO 1920-7 ........Testing of concrete – part 7: Non–destructive test on hardened
-Q
concrete.
ISO 1920-8 .................Testing of concrete -- Part 8: Determination of drying shrinkage of
concrete for samples prepared in the field or in the laboratory
LL
ISO 1920-9 .................Testing of concrete -- Part 9: Determination of creep of concrete

cylinders in compression
W
ISO 1920-10 ...............Testing of concrete -- Part 10: Determination of static modulus of

elasticity in compression
s
en
7.2 BATCHING
m
7.2.1 General
e
1 During measurement operations, aggregates shall be handled in a manner to maintain their

Si
desired grading, and all materials shall be weighed to the tolerances required for the desired
reproducibility of the selected concrete mix.
2 The coarse aggregate shall be controlled to minimize segregation and undersized material.
Fine aggregate shall be controlled to minimize variations in gradation, giving special attention
to keeping finer fractions uniform and exercising care to avoid excessive removal of fines
during processing
3 Avoid blending two sizes of fine aggregate by placing alternate amounts in bins or stockpiles
or when loading cars or trucks. Satisfactory results are achieved when different size fractions
are blended as they flow into a stream from regulating gates or feeders. A more reliable
method of control for a wide range of plant and job conditions, however, is to separate
storage, handling, and batching of the coarse and fine fractions
4 Stockpiling of coarse aggregate shall be kept to a minimum because fines tend to settle and
accumulate. When stockpiling is necessary use of correct methods minimizes problems with
fines, segregation, aggregate breakage, excessive variation in gradation, and contamination.
Stockpiles shall be built up in horizontal or gently sloping layers, not by end-dumping. Trucks,
loaders, and dozers, or other equipment shall not be operated on the stockpiles because, in
addition to breaking the aggregate, they frequently track dirt onto the piles
5 Stockpiles located to prevent contamination; arranged to assure that each aggregate as

removed from its stockpile is distinct and not intermingled with others. The concrete supplier
is asked to separate storage bins or compartments for each size and type of aggregate
properly constructed and charged to prevent mixing of different sizes or types
6 Sequencing and blending of the ingredients during charging of the mixers shall be carried out
in such a way as to obtain uniformity and homogeneity in the concrete produced as indicated
by such physical properties as unit weight, slump, air content, strength and air-free mortar
content in successive batches of the same mix proportions and as stated in ASTM C94
Annex A.
ar
7 The mix recipe for the mixes to be produced shall be readily available to the mixer operator.
at
Only authorised personnel shall be allowed to make changes to the mix design.
-Q
8 All cement bags shall be stored in weathertight, properly ventilated structures to prevent
absorption of moisture.
LL
9 Storage facilities for bulk cement shall include separate compartments for each type of
cement used. The interior of a cement silo shall be smooth, with a minimum bottom slope of
W
50 degrees from the horizontal for a circular silo and 55 to 60 degrees for a rectangular silo.
Silos shall be equipped with non-clogging air-diffuser flow pads through which small
s
quantities of dry, oil-free, low-pressure air can be introduced intermittently at approximately 3

en
to 5 psi (20 to 35 kPa) to loosen cement that has settled tightly in the silos. Storage silos shall
be drawn down frequently, preferably once per month, to prevent cement caking.
m
10 Each bin compartment from which cement is batched shall include a separate gate, screw
e
conveyor, air slide, rotary feeder, or other conveyance that effectively allows both constant
Si
flow and precise cutoff to obtain accurate batching of cement
11 Fly ash, ground slag, or other pozzolans shall be handled, conveyed, and stored in the same
manner as cement. The bins, however, shall be completely separate from cement bins
without common walls that could allow the material to leak into the cement bin.
12 All bins and silos shall be properly tagged at silos, bins and near charging hose.
13 Bags of cement should be stacked on pallets or similar platforms to permit proper circulation
of air. For a storage period of less than 60 days, stack the bags no higher than 14 layers, and
for longer periods, no higher than seven layers.
14 The water batcher and the water pipes should be leak-free. If ice is used, the ice facilities,
including the equipment for batching and transporting to the mixer, should be properly
insulated to prevent the ice from melting before it is in the mixer.
7.2.2 Plant Type
1 Manual control batching. Manual plants are acceptable for small jobs having low batching
3 3
rate requirements, generally for jobs up to a total concrete quantity of 1000 m and 10 m /h.
2 Semi-automatic control batching. In this system, aggregate bin gates for charging batchers
are opened by manually operated push buttons or switches. Gates are closed automatically
when the designated weight of material has been delivered.
3 Automatic control batching. Automatic batching of all materials is electrically activated by a

single starter switch. However, interlocks shall interrupt the batching cycle when the scale
has not returned to 0.3 % of zero balance or when weighing tolerances detailed in
Clause 7.2.5 of this Part are exceeded.
7.2.3 Bins and Weight Batchers
1 Batch plant bins shall be of sufficient size to effectively accommodate the production capacity
ar
of the plant. Compartments in bins separate the various concrete materials, and the shape
and arrangement of aggregate bins shall prevent aggregate segregation and leakage.
at
2
-Q
Weight batchers shall be charged with easy-operating clam shells or undercut radial-type bin
gates.
3 Gates used to charge semi-automatic and fully automatic batchers shall be power operated
LL
and equipped with a suitable in flight correction to obtain the desired weighing accuracy. They
shall be calibrated by the plant supplier for the types of aggregate used at the standard range
W
of moisture contents.
s
4 Weigh batchers shall be accessible for obtaining representative samples, and they shall be
en
arranged to obtain the proper sequencing and blending of aggregates during charging of the
mixer.
m
5 The amount of concrete mixed in any one batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the
e
mixer.
Si
6 All mixing and batching plants shall be maintained free of set concrete or cement and shall
be clean before commencing mixing.
7 For each different type of cement at use at the plant a separate silo shall be provided.
7.2.4 Tolerances of Measuring Equipment
1 Scales for weighing concrete ingredients shall be accurate when in use within 3 % and
1.5 % for additives. Standard test weights shall be available to permit the checking of scale
accuracy.
2 Testing of the weighers shall be at three-month intervals. If water is dispensed by flow meter
the frequency of testing shall be at three-month intervals. Such testing shall be undertaken by
a calibration company approved by the Central Materials Laboratory, and calibrated to
recognized international standards.
3 Test certificates shall be displayed in the plant in prominent positions.

7.2.5 Batching Tolerances
1 Operation of batching equipment shall be such that the concrete ingredients are consistently
measured within the following tolerances. The plant shall have the ability to flag values that
are outside these limits. The operator shall make manual adjustments to the batching and
the final weights shall be within the given limits stated in table 7.1. Any adjustments shall be
displayed on the batch weight printouts.
2 Cementitious materials shall be measured by mass. When supplementary cementitious

materials are used in the concrete mixtures, the cumulative mass is permitted to be
measured with hydraulic cement, but in a batch hopper and on a scale which is separate and
distinct from those used for other materials.
3 Aggregate shall be measured by mass. Batch mass measurements shall be based on dry
materials and shall be the required masses of dry materials plus the total mass of moisture
(both absorbed and surface) contained in the aggregate
ar
4 Mixing water shall consist of water added to the batch, ice added to the batch, water
occurring as surface moisture on the aggregates, and water introduced in the form of
at
admixtures. The added water shall be measured by weight or volume.
-Q
5 Added ice shall be measured by weight. In the case of truck mixers, any wash water retained
in the drum for use in the next batch of concrete shall be accurately measured; if this proves
impractical or impossible the wash water shall be discharged prior to loading the next batch
LL
of concrete
W
6 Chemical admixtures in powdered form shall be measured by mass. Liquid chemical

admixtures shall be batched by mass or volume
s
Table 7.1
en
Typical batching tolerances Ingredient

Batch weights greater than Batch weights less than
m
Typical batching
30% of scale capacity 30% of scale capacity
tolerances
e
Ingredient Individual Cumulative Individual Cumulative

Si
batching batching batching batching

Cement and other ±1% of required mass or
Not less than required weight or 4%
cementitious ±0.3% of scale capacity,
more than required weight
Materials whichever is greater
Water (by volume or Not

±1 ±1 Not recommended
weight), % recommended
±0.3% of scale
capacity or
±3% of required
Aggregates, % ±2 ±1 ±2
cumulative
Weight, whichever is
less
Admixtures (by Not
±3 ±3 Not recommended
volume or weight), % recommended
7 Cement supplied in bags shall be placed directly from the bag into the intake of the mixing
plant and each batch must contain one or more complete bags of cement. No mixer having
a rated capacity of less than a one-bag batch shall be used and the mixer shall not be
charged in excess of its rated capacity.
7.2.6 Charging the Mixer
1 Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some of the water will enter in advance of
the cement and aggregates. Controls shall be provided to prevent batched ingredients from
entering the mixer before the previous batch has been completely discharged.
2 The first batch of concrete through the mixer shall contain an excess of cement to allow for
coating of the inside of the mixing drum without reducing the required mortar content of the
mix.
3 Mixing plant that has been out of action for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned
before any fresh concrete is mixed in it.
ar
4 When a change of mix is made to one using a different type of cement, the mixing plant shall
at
be thoroughly cleaned of all traces of the previously used cement, whatever is the time
-Q
interval between successive mixes.
7.3 MIXING
LL
7.3.1 Charging Concrete Materials

W
1 Water shall enter the mixer first with continuous flow while other ingredients are entering the
mixer. Water charging pipes must be of the proper design and of sufficient size so that water
s
enters at a point well inside the mixer and charging is completed within the first 25% of the
en
prescribed mixing time and where concrete uniformity shall be verified by approved inspector.
m
2 Admixtures shall be charged to the mixer in accordance with the instructions of the
manufacturer. Automatic dispensers shall be used.
e
Si
7.3.2 Mixing Time for Stationary Mixers
1 The mixing time required shall be based upon the ability of the mixer to produce uniform,
homogeneous, consistent mixture throughout the batch and from batch to batch.
2 Final mixing times shall be based on the results of mixer performance tests made at the start
of the project and the time fixed unless a change is authorised by the Engineer. The time
shall however not be less than 60 Sec unless otherwise verified as stated hereafter. Where
no mixer performance tests are made, the acceptable mixing time for mixers having
3
capacities of 0.75 m or less shall be not less than 1 min. For mixers of greater capacity, this
minimum shall be increased 15 s for each cubic meter or fraction thereof of additional
capacity.
3 Where mixer performance tests have been made on given concrete mixtures in accordance
with the testing program ASTM C94 Annex A and NRMCA certification, and the mixers have
been charged to their rated capacity, the acceptable mixing time is permitted to be reduced
for those particular circumstances to a point at which satisfactory mixing defined in ASTM
C94 and NRMCA certification for central mixing plants shall have been accomplished. When
the mixing time is so reduced the maximum time of mixing shall not exceed this reduced time
by more than 60 s for air-entrained concrete. The mixing time shall be measured from the
time all ingredients are in the mixer.
4 Batch mixers with audible indicators used in combination with interlocks which prevent mixer
discharge prior to completion of a preset mixing time shall be provided on automatic plants
and are also desirable on manual plants.
5 The mixer shall be designed for starting and stopping under full load.
7.3.3 Mixing
ar
1 All structural concrete to be placed in-situ shall be manufactured in a computer controlled
batching plant of the types described in Clause 7.2.2 of this Part.
at
2
-Q
The plant shall be complete with suitable water chilling or ice making facilities, or both, to
ensure concrete temperatures are maintained as specified in Parts 6 and 15 of this Section.
3 Concrete shall be mixed in batches in plant capable of combining the aggregates, cement
LL
and water (including admixtures, if any) into a mixture of uniform colour and consistency and
of discharging the mixture without segregation.
W
4 Automatic moisture content probes, set in the hoppers shall be used to continuously
s
determine the moisture content of the aggregates.

en
5 Contractor shall make due allowance for the water contained in the aggregates when
determining the quantity of water to be added to each mix.
e m
6 The amount of water added to each mix shall be adjusted to maintain the constant approved
Si
water : cement ratio of the mixed concrete.
7.3.4 Limitation of Water : Cement Ratio
1 No concrete shall exceed the water : cement ratio as given in Part 6 of this Section.
2 The quantity of water used in mixing shall be the least amount that will produce a workable
homogeneous plastic mixture which can be worked into the forms and around the
reinforcement.
3 Excess water over the maximum allowed by the mix design shall not be permitted and any
batch containing such excess will be rejected.
7.4 READY-MIXED CONCRETE
7.4.1 General
1 The manufacture of readymix concrete for use in government projects may only be carried
out in batching plants that have an approval certificate issued by the Central Materials
Laboratory. When this certificate is under renewal process by the readymix concrete
manufacturer, other certificate such as NRMCA shall be considered by the Engineer as
approval on the uniformity and consistency of the facility. The engineer may request to re-
validate the uniformity tests under his supervision. In addition, the use of readymix concrete
in any part of the work shall require the Engineer’s written approval.
2 The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer on the following:
(a) materials used in ready-mixed concrete comply with the specification in all respects
(b) manufacturing and delivery resources of the proposed supplier are adequate to ensure
ar
proper and timely completion.
3 The specified requirements as to the sampling, trial mixing, testing and quality of concrete, of
at
various grades as described in Part 6 of this Section, shall apply equally to ready-mixed
-Q
concrete.
4 Every additional facility, including but not limited to testing equipment, labour, laboratory
LL
facilities and transport, which the Engineer or persons authorised by him may require for the
supervision and inspection of the batching, mixing, testing and transporting to Site of ready-
mixed concrete shall be provided by the Contractor at no extra cost.
W
5 Copies of all delivery notes shall be submitted to the Engineer in duplicate, on computer
s
generated forms and shall include at least the following information.

en
(a) name of supplier, serial number of ticket and date

m
(b) truck number

e
(c) name of Contractor

Si
(d) name of Contract and location of office

(e) grade of concrete
(f) specified workability
(g) type and source of cement
(h) source of aggregate
(i) nominal maximum size of aggregate
(j) quantity of each concrete ingredient
(k) type of admixture and quantity
(l) water content
(m) time of loading and departure from ready-mix plant
(n) arrival and departure times of truck
(o) time of completion of discharge
(p) notations to indicate equipment was checked and found to be free of contaminants
prior to batching.
6 A copy of the delivery note shall be given to the Engineer's site representative for each load.
7 Unless approved otherwise in advance of batching all concrete of single design mix for any
one day's pour shall be from a single batch plant of a single supplier.
8 Ready-mix concrete shall conform to BS 8500 in addition to GSO EN 206-1, except

materials, testing and mix design shall be as specified in this Section.
9 Transit mixers equipped with automatic devices for recording the number of revolutions of
the drum shall be used.
10 Excess water over the maximum allowed by the mix design shall not be added.
11 Each mixer truck shall arrive at the job site with its water container full.
ar
12 In the event that a container is not full or concrete tests give a greater slump than acceptable,
at
the load shall be rejected.
13
-Q
Shade temperature and concrete temperature shall be recorded at the point of discharge of
the mixer and at placement for each load of concrete delivered to site.
LL
14 Maximum and minimum temperatures and wet bulb temperatures shall be recorded daily.
W
15 Slump tests shall be performed in accordance with BS EN 12350 or relevant GSO standard
at the point of placement as stated in Part 6.
s
16 No water shall be added at the Site.

en
e m
END OF PART
Si
7.5 APPENDIX A: CONCRETE PLANT INSPECTION – CHECKLIST
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Qatar General Organization for Standards and Standardization
CONCRETE PLANT INSPECTION CHECK LIST
New Approval ☐ Renewal ☐ Regular Inspection ☐
1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION OF PLANT

1.1 Company Name :
1.2 Inspection Date : AM / PM
1.3 Plant Location :

1.4 Plant No/s :
ar
1.5 Plant Manufacturer :
at
1.6 Plant ID No. : -Q
1.7 Approval Certificate No :
1.8 Contact a Plant :

LL
2.0 FACTORY CONDITION

W
2.1 Concrete Floor Under Mixer and silos Yes ☐ No ☐
2.2 Concrete floor with Slope under materials Yes ☐ No ☐

s
2.3 Hard and stable surface for Access and ramps Yes ☐ No ☐
en
2.4 Floors Clean Yes ☐ No ☐

em
2.5 Cleaning plan implements Yes ☐ No ☐
2.6 Drainage System Yes ☐ No ☐

Si
2.7 Separated Place of Waste materials Yes ☐ No ☐
2.8 Separated Place of wash tank Yes ☐ No ☐
3.0 MATERIAL STORAGE AND HANDLING

3.1 Cement and Cementations materials (including blended cements, fly ash, GGBS, silica fume..)
3.1.1 The Silos of Cement
A. Outside Cleaning for Cement silo Yes ☐ No ☐
B. Cement scale calibration Current ☐ Expired ☐
C. Reflective color for cement silo Yes ☐ No ☐
D. Board clarify the cement type Yes ☐ No ☐
3.1.2 The silos of cementations materials

A. Outside Cleaning for Cementations silo Yes ☐ No ☐
Page 12 of 15
B. Cementations scale calibration Current ☐ Expired ☐
C. Reflective Color for Cementations Silo Yes ☐ No ☐
D. Board Clarify the Cementations Type Yes ☐ No ☐

E. All Cementations Materials Excess of use
Yes ☐ No ☐
protected under shad
3.2 Aggregates:
A. Aggregate Shading Yes ☐ No ☐
B. Aggregate Separation under shad Yes ☐ No ☐
C. Aggregate Separation in bins Yes ☐ No ☐
D. Aggregate scale calibration Current ☐ Expired ☐
E. Cover for Conveyer Belts Yes ☐ No ☐
ar
F. Board Clarify the Aggregate Type Yes ☐ No ☐
at
G. Effective method for checking the level of
Yes ☐ No ☐
material inside the bins
-Q
4.0 Water & Admixture Supply
LL
4.1 Water supply
A. Water pipe insulated Yes ☐ No ☐

W
B. Chiller using Yes ☐ No ☐

s
C. Ice plant or Nitrogen cooling Yes ☐ No ☐

en
D. Water gauge calibration Current ☐ Expired ☐

em
4.2 Admixture supply

A. Additive storage silos Yes ☐ No ☐
Si
B. Additive Gage calibration Current ☐ Expired ☐
C. Board Clarify the Admixture Type Yes ☐ No ☐

D. All admixture excess of use protected under
Yes ☐ No ☐
shad
E. Agitation system for all storage tanks or silos
Yes ☐ No ☐
more than 5000 liter
5.0 Requirements of the Concrete batching plant

5.1 Certificate validity Yes ☐ No ☐
5.2 Computer controlled Yes ☐ No ☐
5.3 Plant type Wet mix ☐ Dry mix ☐
5.4 Computer printout Yes ☐ No ☐
5.5 Calibration validity Current ☐ Expired ☐
5.6 Cleaning of plant blades Yes ☐ No ☐
Page 13 of 15
6.0 Laboratory
6.1 Records for raw materials and cube tests
Frequency
Was Test of Tests
Required Tests to QCS 2014 Comments of Inspection
Performed?
D W M
6.1.1 Grading Yes ☐ No ☐
6.1.2 Fines content (%) Yes ☐ No ☐
6.1.3 Fines quality Yes ☐ No ☐
6.1.4 Clay lumps and friable

Yes ☐ No ☐
particles
6.1.5 Lightweight pieces Yes ☐ No ☐
ar
6.1.6 Organic impurities Yes ☐ No ☐
at
6.1.7 Water Absorption Yes ☐ No ☐ -Q
6.1.8 Particle density Yes ☐ No ☐
6.1.9 Shell Content Yes ☐ No ☐

LL
6.1.10 Flakiness Index (%) Yes ☐ No ☐

W
6.1.11 Chloride content (%) Yes ☐ No ☐
6.1.12 Sulphate content (%) Yes ☐ No ☐

s
en
6.1.13 Soundness (%) Yes ☐ No ☐
6.1.14 Los Angeles abrasion Yes ☐ No ☐

em
6.1.15 Moisture Content (%) Yes ☐ No ☐

Si
6.1.16 Compressive Strength Yes ☐ No ☐
6.1.17 Other test*
*Such as recycled aggregate
6.2 Specimens testing at inspection time

ITEMS CASE COMMENTS
6.2.1 Method of slump test Yes ☐ No ☐
6.2.2 Curing of samples Yes ☐ No ☐
6.2.3 Water Temperature Of Curing Tank Yes ☐ No ☐
6.2.4 Concrete Temperature at plant Yes ☐ No ☐
6.2.5 Concrete Slump at plant Yes ☐ No ☐
Page 14 of 15
6.3 Laboratory equipment calibration
EQUIPMENT CASE COMMENTS
6.3.1 Compression Testing Machine Yes ☐ No ☐
6.3.2 Sieves Yes ☐ No ☐
6.3.3 Balance Yes ☐ No ☐
6.3.4 Thermometers Yes ☐ No ☐
7.0 Recommendations
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
8.0 Plant representative information

s
Name of representative :
en
Contract number :
em
Signature :
Si
9.0 Inspector team

Inspected by Signature
Page 15 of 15
Part 08: Transportation and Placing of Concrete
8 TRANSPORTATION AND PLACING OF CONCRETE ............................................ 2

8.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
8.1.1 Scope of Work 2
8.1.2 References 2
8.1.3 Submittals 2
8.2 TRANSPORTATION ............................................................................................... 3
8.2.1 General 3
8.2.2 Pumped Concrete 3
8.2.3 Records 4
8.3 PLACING CONCRETE ............................................................................................ 4
8.3.1 General 4
8.3.2 Preparation 4
8.3.3 Placing 5
8.3.4 Compaction 7
ar
8.3.5 Continuity of Concrete Work 8
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
8 TRANSPORTATION AND PLACING OF CONCRETE
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Scope of Work
1 This part deals with the transportation, placing and compaction of concrete.

This Section
Part 1 ............... General
Part 9, .............. Formwork
Part 15, ............ Hot Weather Concreting
Part 16, ............ Miscellaneous
ar
8.1.2 References
at
ACI 304, ............. Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
ASTM C94, ......... Specification for ready-mixed concrete
-Q
BS 8500,............. Concrete, Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1.
BS EN 206-1, ..... Concrete. Specification, performance, production and conformity
EN 1992-1-1 ....... Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for
LL
buildings
8.1.3 Submittals
W
1 Should the Contractor propose to use concrete pumps for the transportation and placing of
s
concrete, he shall submit details of the equipment and operating techniques he proposes to
en
use for the approval of the Engineer.

m
2 A method statement shall be submitted for approval for major concrete placements, which
shall address
e
Si
(a) the planned rate of placing

(b) number of batching plants
(c) number of trucks
(d) number and positioning of pumps
(e) pour sequence
(f) quality control measures
(g) spare equipment
(h) any other factors that might affect the placing of concrete.
3 The method statement should be submitted at least three days in advance of the planned
pour. If required by the Engineer or any other concerned party a prepour planning meeting
may be arranged with representatives from the ready-mix supplier, Contractor and Engineer.
4 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval details of his proposed operations
and standby equipment.
8.2 TRANSPORTATION
8.2.1 General
1 Transportation delivery and handling shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS

8500 and BS EN 206-1.
2 Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to its place in the Works as rapidly as possible by
methods which will prevent segregation or drying out and ensure that the concrete is of the
required workability at the point and time of placing.
3 Should segregation occur in the concrete then the materials shall be remixed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer or discarded. Furthermore the cause of the segregation shall be
determined and further occurrences prevented.
4 The Contractor shall ensure that the time between placing of different lifts or layers of
concrete is short enough to prevent the formation of cold joints. The Contractor shall ensure
ar
that there is a back up plant that can be used in the event of a breakdown, and that adequate
provision has been made for the number of delivery trucks.
at
5
-Q
The concrete shall be transported to the site in an approved type of truck mixer or agitator
truck which apart from the cab and chassis shall be painted white and kept clean at all times.
The discharge chute and other dirty areas shall be washed down after delivery to prevent
LL
spillage on the roads.
6 If a truck mixer or a truck body with an agitator is used for central-mixed concrete, limit the
W
volume of concrete charged into the truck to 80% of the drum or truck volume as per ASTM
C94 and NRMCA requirements. if shrink mixing is approved by the engineer limit the volume
s
of concrete charged into the truck to 63% of the drum volume.

en
7 All trucks shall be rotated 30 revolutions at mixing speed before discharging concrete to
m
assure uniformity.
e
8 The insides of concrete mix trucks shall be inspected periodically, and any build up of
Si
concrete removed that may impair the efficiency of the mixing action. All trucks shall be
NRMCA certified or any equivalent certification
9 Discharge of the concrete shall be completed within 90 min, or before the drum has revolved
300 revolutions, whichever comes first, after the introduction of the mixing water to the
cement and aggregates or the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. These limitations
are permitted to be waived by the purchaser if the concrete is of such slump or slump flow
after the 90 min time or 300-revolution limit has been reached that it can be placed, without
the addition of water, to the batch. In hot weather, or under conditions contributing to quick
stiffening of the concrete, a time less than 90 min is permitted to be specified by the Engineer
8.2.2 Pumped Concrete
1 Access for the pump shall be checked prior to the pour. If access cannot be assured, the
Contractor shall not continue with concreting operations.
2 If approval is obtained for pumped concrete, the Contractor shall ensure that shock is not
transferred from the pipeline to the formwork and previously laid concrete.
3 During placing concrete by pumping the end hose must never reach into the concrete. All
measures shall be taken to avoid blockage of the delivery hose system. The Compaction of
concrete shall be carried out as per standard practice procedures.
4 Grout shall be pumped through the concrete pump to provide initial lubrication. The initial
discharge of any pumped concrete shall not be incorporated in the permanent works.
5 Where concrete is conveyed by chuting or pumping the plant shall be of a size and design to
ensure continuous flow in the chute or pipe. The slope of the chute or the pressure of the
pump shall allow the concrete to flow without the use of any water additional to that approved
by the Engineer to produce the required consistency and without segregation of the
ingredients. The delivery end of the chute or pipe shall be thoroughly flushed with water
before and after each working period and kept clean. The water used for this purpose shall
be discharged outside and away from any permanent works.
8.2.3 Records
ar
1 Within 24 h of delivery, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with delivery notes giving
the information required under Paragraph 7.4.1.5 of this Section.
at
8.3 PLACING CONCRETE
-Q
8.3.1 General
LL
1 The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer to his proposed arrangements
before beginning concreting.
W
2 All placing and compacting of concrete shall be carried out under the direct supervision of a
s
competent member of the Contractor’s staff with a minimum of five years of experience in
en
concreting works, and in a manner to produce a watertight concrete of maximum density and
strength.
m
3 For night concreting operations, the Contractor shall arrange adequate suitable lighting.
e
Si
4 The Contractor shall provide safe secure access for all personnel on concreting operations.
5 Where the thickness of the concrete section exceeds 600 mm the Contractor shall adopt
special precautions, to be approved by the Engineer, to avoid thermal cracking due to
external and core temperature differentials.
6 Concrete shall not be placed in adverse weather conditions such as dust storms or heavy
rain.
8.3.2 Preparation
1 No concrete shall be placed until the Engineer has inspected and approved in writing the
surfaces upon which the concrete is to be placed, the formwork, and reinforcing steel. The
Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours notice to enable this inspection to be
carried out. If concrete is not placed within 24 hours of approval being given, approval shall
be obtained again before concreting. An inspection shall be made immediately prior to
concreting to check the cleanliness of the forms.
2 Wood forms, unless lined, shall be oiled or wetted with water in advance of placing concrete
so that joints will tighten and prevent seepage of cement grout from the mix.
3 The reinforcement shall be sprayed with a small amount of water prior to starting the pour.
Reinforcement shall be secured in position, inspected, and accepted by the Engineer before
placing the concrete.
4 All inserts, anchor bolts, sleeves and other embedded items shall be accurately located,
using templates where appropriate, and held securely to prevent displacement during the
placing of the concrete. Aluminium items shall be completely covered and protected when
embedded in the concrete.
5 Except where shown on the drawings, no fixtures shall be attached to the concrete by shot
fixing or drilling without acceptance by the Engineer. Notwithstanding any such authorisation,
the Contractor shall be responsible for all damage so caused to the concrete and make good
at his own expense.
ar
6 Water shall be removed from excavations before concrete is deposited. Any flow of water
shall be diverted through proper side drains and shall be removed without washing over
at
freshly deposited concrete. All dewatering works shall be continued as long as required.
-Q
Hardened concrete, debris, and foreign materials shall be removed from interior of forms and
from inner surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment.
7 Runways or other means accepted by the Engineer shall be provided for wheeled equipment
LL
to convey the concrete to the points of deposit. Equipment used to deposit concrete shall not
be wheeled over reinforcement nor shall runways be supported on reinforcement.
W
8 Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has set, existing surfaces shall
s
be thoroughly roughened and cleaned of laitance, foreign matter and loose particles. Forms
en
shall be re-tightened and existing surfaces slushed with a grout coat of mortar consisting of
cement and fine aggregate in the same proportion in the mix, but not leaner than one (1) part
m
cement to two (2) parts fine aggregate, after the existing surface has been moistened. New
concrete shall be placed before the grout has attained initial set. Horizontal construction
e
joints shall be given a brush coat of grout consisting of cement and fine aggregate in the
Si
same proportion as concrete to be placed, followed by approximately 75mm of concrete of

regular mix, except that the proportion of coarse aggregate shall be reduced 50%.
9 High strength grout for precision support of machine base and soleplates, including
equipment subject to thermal movement, tanks, column baseplates, bridge seats, anchor
bolts and dowels, etc., shall be a non-shrink, ready-to-use, fluid precision grout material,
proportioned, premixed and packaged at the factory, delivered to the job site to be placed
with only the addition of water, formwork, and curing shall be as specified.
8.3.3 Placing
1 Concrete shall be placed in its final position before initial set has commenced and shall not
be subsequently disturbed. All concrete shall be placed within 15 min of mixing unless carried
in purpose made agitators.
2 Concrete shall be carefully placed in horizontal layers which shall be kept at an even height
throughout the work. The depth of layers and time between placement of layers shall be such
that each layer can be properly merged into the preceding layer before initial set takes place,
the depth of layer shall be determined from the type of plant the Contractor proposes to use.
3 Concrete shall be allowed to slide or flow down sloping surfaces directly into its final position
from skips, down pipes or other placing machines or devices or, if this is not practical, it
should be shovelled into position, care being taken to avoid separation of the constituent
materials.
4 Concrete placed in horizontal slabs from barrows or other tipping vehicles shall be tipped into
the face of the previously placed concrete.
5 Concrete dropped into place shall be dropped vertically. It shall not strike the formwork
between the point of its discharge and its final place in the Work, and except by approval of
the Engineer it shall not be dropped freely through a height greater than 1.5 m. Chutes and
conveyor belts shall be also designed so that there is no segregation or loss of mortar and
shall be provided with a vertical tapered down pipe, or other device, to ensure that concrete is
discharged vertically into place.
6 Concrete shall not be placed in standing water in the formwork.
ar
7 Concrete that has attained its initial set or has contained its water content for more than 1.5
at
hours or 300 drum revolutions, whichever comes first, shall not be deposited in the work.
8
-Q
Cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with EN 1992-1-1 or CIRIA Report 67 and
ACI 306.
LL
9 Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with Part 15 of this section.
10 Special care shall be taken to protect new concrete from the harmful effects of drying winds.
W
11 During wet weather, the concrete shall be adequately protected as soon as it is in position.
s
en
12 No concreting shall be carried out during periods of continuous heavy rain unless it is
completely covered during mixing, transporting and placing.
m
13 No concrete shall be carried out during dust storms.

e
Si
14 Underwater placing of concrete is allowed only for unreinforced components, the placing
being effected exclusively with stationary tremies or with a bottom-opening watertight boxes
and shall be in accordance with the requirements of design or equivalent as accepted.
15 Underwater concrete is to be placed continuously without interruption. For water depths up to

1 m the concrete may be placed without tremie. In the case of water depths exceeding 1 m
the concrete is to be placed in such a way that it does not fall freely through the water. The
tremies must at all times dip sufficiently far into the freshly placed concrete to ensure that the
concrete emerging from the tremie does not come into contact with the water.
16 All work connected with the placing of concrete under water shall be designed, directed and
inspected with due regard to local circumstances and purposes. Work shall not proceed until
all phases and methods to be used in the placing operations have been accepted by the
Engineer.
17 Stops in concrete, at the end of a period of work, shall be made only at construction joint
locations shown on the drawings and/or positions accepted. Where the positions of
construction joints are not indicated on the drawings, these may be assumed, for estimating
purposes, to occur at 5 metre intervals in foundations and retaining walls and at one-third to
one-quarter of span in slabs and beams subject to a maximum spacing of approximately 9
metres.
18 At construction joint location the surface of the completed concrete shall be prepared by
spraying, wire brushing or chipping so that it is free from all laitance, scum and loose material
and shows a slightly roughened texture and tips of the coarse aggregate exposed. Before
continuing concreting the exposed concrete face shall be thoroughly wetted.
19 In the ground floor slab (where ground bearing), construction joints, crack inducer joints,
contraction joints and expansion joints shall be incorporated into the work as appropriate.
The spacing of construction joints, crack induced joints, contraction joints and expansion
joints in water retaining structures shall be shown on the design drawings
ar
20 Where the positions or type of joints are not indicated on the drawings in the ground floor
slab, the slab shall be cast in strips not more than 4.0 metres wide, in alternating sequence,
at
across the width of the building. A minimum of 3 days shall elapse between the casting of
-Q
adjacent strips. Within each strip, crack induced joints shall be provided at not more than 5.0
metre spacing, and contraction joints shall be provided at not more than 15.0m spacing.
Across the width of the building, construction joint shall be provided between adjacent strips
th
with contraction joint at every 4 construction joint.
LL
21 Wherever necessary and as required by the Engineer, waterstops of a type acceptable to the
W
Engineer shall be embedded in the concrete. The waterstop should be made of a high
quality material, which must retain its resilience through the service life of the structure for the
s
double function of movement and sealing. The surface of waterstops should be carefully
en
rounded to ensure tightness of the joint even under heavy water pressure. To ensure a good
tightness with or without movement of the joints, the waterstop should be provided with
m
anchor parts. The cross-section of the waterstops should be determined in accordance with
the presumed maximum water pressure and joint movements. The complete works of fixed
e
and welded connections must be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
Si
instructions.
22 Engineer’s acceptance shall be obtained by the Contractor, prior to start of work, on the
casting sequence and the layout of joints.
23 Waterstops shall be carefully maintained in position prior to concreting on accurately profiled

stop boards to create rigid conditions.
24 The type of waterbar to be used shall suit the joint and purpose according to water bar
manufacturers recommendations
8.3.4 Compaction
1 Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration during the operation of placing and
thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded fixtures and into corners or
the formwork to form a solid mass free from voids.
2 When vibrators are used to compact the concrete, vibration shall be applied continuously
during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased
and in a manner that does not promote segregation of the constituents of the concrete.
3 Immersion type vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than 10000 cycles per
minute, and external vibrators not less than 3000 cycles per minute.
4 A sufficient number of vibrators in serviceable condition shall be on site to ensure that spare
equipment is always available in the event of breakdown.
5 Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted into the uncompacted concrete vertically and at
regular intervals. Where the uncompacted concrete is in a layer above freshly compacted
concrete the vibrator shall penetrate vertically for about 100 mm into the previous layer.
Vibrators shall not come into contact with the reinforcement or the formwork. They shall be
drawn back slowly from the mass concrete so as to leave no voids. Internal type vibrators
shall not be placed in the concrete in a random or haphazard manner nor shall concrete be
moved from one part of the work to another by means of the vibrators.
ar
6 Operators shall be trained in the use of vibrators. Foremen shall have a minimum of five
at
years of experience in the supervision of placing concrete
-Q
7 Vibration of the concrete shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement.
8 Compaction shall commence as soon as there is sufficient concrete to immerse the vibrator
LL
and continue during the placing operations so that at no time shall there be a large volume of
uncompacted concrete in the formwork.
W
9 The duration of vibration shall be limited to that required to produce satisfactory compaction
s
without causing segregation. Vibration shall on no account be continued after water or

en
excess grout has appeared on the surface.
10 During the placing of all reinforced concrete, a competent steel fixer and a competent
m
carpenter shall be in attendance on each concreting gang. They shall ensure the
e
reinforcement embedded fittings and forms are kept in position as work proceeds.
Si
8.3.5 Continuity of Concrete Work
1 Whenever instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the work in such a
manner that the placing of the concrete in any particular section of the structure shall be
executed without any interruption whatsoever from the beginning to the end of the operation.
2 Casting of concrete shall not begin until a sufficient quantity of approved material is at hand
to ensure continuity of operation, nor shall work begin until there is sufficient equipment in
reserve in case of breakdown.
END OF PART
Part 09: Formwork
9 FORMWORK ........................................................................................................... 2
9.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
9.1.1 Scope 2
9.1.2 References 2
9.1.3 Submittals 2
9.2 FORMWORK MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 5
9.2.1 General 5
9.3 CLASS OF FINISH AND MATERIALS: .................................................................... 5
9.3.1 Unformed surfaces 5
9.3.2 Surface Finish Classifications 7
9.3.3 Formwork Materials 7
9.3.4 Exposed Concrete Surface Finishes 7
9.3.5 Form Ties 8
9.3.6 Coating and Accessories 8
9.4 FORMWORK EXECUTION ..................................................................................... 9
ar
9.4.1 General 9
9.4.2 Trial Panels 9
at
9.4.3 Formwork Face in Contact with Concrete -Q 9
9.4.4 Sloping Surfaces 10
9.4.5 Temporary Openings 10
9.4.6 Form Windows 10
9.4.7 Co-ordination 10
LL
9.4.8 Conduits 10
9.4.9 Ties and Bolts 11
W
9.4.10 Chamfers 11
9.4.11 Cambers 11
s
9.4.12 Exterior Angles 11

en
9.4.13 Surface Retarders 11

9.4.14 Detection of Movement During Concrete Placement 11
9.4.15 Building in Pipes 12
m
9.4.16 Working Platform 12

e
9.4.17 Safe Access 12

Si
9.4.18 Kickers 12
9.4.19 Cover Spacers 12
9.4.20 Water Bars 12
9.5 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK................................................................................. 13
9.5.1 General 13
9.5.2 Stripping of Formwork 13
9.5.3 Holes to be Filled 14
9.5.4 Repair to Damaged Concrete Surfaces 14
9.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE .................................................................................. 14
9.6.1 Delivery 14
9.6.2 Storage 14
9.7 TOLERANCES ...................................................................................................... 15
9.8 EARLY LOADING .................................................................................................. 15
Part 09: Formwork
9 FORMWORK
9.1 GENERAL
9.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes permanent forms, temporary formwork, and falsework for structural and
architectural cast-in-place concrete including form liners, coatings, and accessories.

This Section
Part 8, .............. Transportation and Placing of Concrete
Part 10, ............ Curing
Part 17, ............ Structural Precast Concrete.
ar
Section 11: Health and Safety
Part 1, ............. Regulatory document
at
Part 2, ............. Safety and accident prevention
-Q management/administration system
(SAMAS)
9.1.2 References
LL
1 The following standards and other document are referred to in this Part:
W
ACI Committee 117 ....“Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials” (ACI
117-90), American Concrete Institute, Detroit, 22 pp.
s
ACI Manual of Concrete Practice, Parts 2 and 5.

en
BS 8500......................Concrete
m
BS 5975......................Code of practice for false work

e
BS EN 12812..............Falsework. Performance requirements and general design CP3

Si
chapter V-2: 1972

EN 1992-1-1 ...............Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for
buildings
GSO EN 206-1 ...........Concrete. Specification, performance, production and conformity
Concrete Society Technical Report No. 13
9.1.3 Submittals
1 Shop drawings shall include plans and sections, giving the following minimum information for
each level:
(a) details of individual panels

(b) position, size and spacing of adjustable steel shores
(c) position, size and spacing of joists, soldiers, ties
(d) details of formwork for columns, beams, parapets, slab and kickers
Part 09: Formwork
(e) details of construction joints and movement joints

(f) details of retaining walls and deep beams showing the position and size of ties, joints,
soldiers and sheeting, together with detailed information on erection and casting
sequences and construction joints
(g) general assembly details
(h) full calculation sheets
(i) proposals at all penetrations through the concrete
(j) proposed sequence of shoring and reshoring beams and slabs for different spans and
floor heights and number of floors shored, and the stripping time for supported and
suspended structural elements, clearly identifying the supported element and
suspended element.
2 Scales of shop drawings shall be as follows:
(a) details: 1:1, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20
ar
(b) construction: 1:50, 1:100
at
(c) layout and Site Plan: 1:100 or 1:200 -Q
3 The Contractor shall submit samples of all proposed formwork materials and samples of ties
proposed for use in general situations above the water table and for fair faced concrete.
LL
4 The Contractor shall allow 14 days for Engineer’s review of submittals or samples.
W
5 Supply and delivery of built-in pipework should be clearly shown on the detailed construction
program to be submitted by the Contractor.
s
6 Method Statements for erection and removal of formwork shall be submitted by the
en
Contractor before the start of the works for the Engineer’s review and approval. The Method
Statement shall include the Risk Assessments related to the activity.
m
7 When the formwork is to be carried out by a sub-contractor, then the pre-qualification

e
documents shall be submitted for the Engineer’s review and approval.

Si
1 Formwork shall comply with the requirements of BS 5975 and EN 1992-1-1
2 The erection of formwork and associated falsework shall be executed and supervised by fully
qualified personnel having a minimum of five years experience.
3 The Contractor shall obtain approval to load any particular section of the works from the
Engineer.
4 Formwork design shall be carried out in accordance with the Concrete Society Technical
Report No. 13.
5 The erected formwork shall be watertight from the ingress of external liquids and the egress
of internal liquids. Adjustable steel supports and shores shall allow formboards and
framework to be accurately adjusted to line and level. The Contractor shall ensure that
adequate ground support for falsework is available, and if not shall take measures to make
them suitable.
Part 09: Formwork
6 Formwork shall be designed to be sufficiently rigid to maintain the correct position, shape and
profile so that the final concrete structure is within the dimensional tolerances specified
Subpart 9.7 of this Part.
7 Formwork shall be designed to be demountable without causing shock, disturbance or

damage to the concrete.
8 Soffit formwork, properly supported on shores only, shall be capable of being retained in
position during the concrete maturing period.
9 The design shall allow free movement and accessibility under the formwork.
10 Shores for abnormal ceiling heights shall be specially designed.
11 The forms shall be designed to incorporate 20 mm chamfers on exposed corners of

columns, walls and beams.
ar
12 The design of formwork shall take into account the following:
at
(a) height and rate of pour
(b) thickness of the member
-Q
(c) concrete slump and density
(d) placing temperature
LL
(e) texture of finish

W
(f) construction joints

(g) wind load
s
en
(h) on soffit forms (in addition to concrete weight)

(i) an additional live load of 2.5 kPa, or
m
(ii) if a motorised cart is used, an additional live load of 3.75 kPa

e
(i) minimum design load for combined dead and live load
Si
(i) 6.50 kPa

(ii) if a motorised cart is used, 7.75 kPa
(j) the worst combination of:
(i) self-weight
(ii) formwork forces
(iii) reinforcement weight
(iv) wet concrete weight
(v) construction loads
(vi) wind loads,
(vii) incidental dynamic effects caused by placing, vibrating and compacting
concrete
(viii) the use of externally applied vibrators
Part 09: Formwork
(k) method of concrete discharge

(l) access for concrete placement and vibration.
13 Before beginning related formwork operations the Contractor shall erect a job mock-up, to a
reasonable size including all items such as sheeting, stiffeners, soldiers, ties etc. (and
including release agents, where used) for the following types of formwork, and shall obtain
the approval the Engineer before proceeding:
(a) columns
(b) slabs and beams
(c) staircases
(d) fair-faced concrete (show method used to conceal tie holes) cove ties not required.
14 Upon prior consultation, agreement of location and approval, the job mock-ups may remain
as part of the finished work.
ar
9.2 FORMWORK MATERIALS
at
9.2.1 General -Q
1 Forms shall be of wood; metal or other material acceptable to the Engineer.
LL
2 The design of formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3 Formwork shall conform to the requirements of EN 1992-1-1

W
4 Form oil and form sealer shall be of quality as acceptable to the Engineer.
s
en
9.3 CLASS OF FINISH AND MATERIALS:

m
9.3.1 Unformed surfaces

e
1 Unformed surfaces shall be classified as either:

Si
(a) U4, timber trowel finish

(b) U3, steel trowel finish
(c) U2, brush finished
(d) U1 other finish designated by the Engineer, such as:
(i) Screeded Finish - Where the floor slab is to receive a screeded finish, the slab
shall be laid to the slopes and levels shown on the drawings and the top surface
shall be tamped whilst unset, to produce a suitable keyed surface for the receipt
of the appropriate finishing materials.
(ii) Floated Finish - Where a floated finish is required to the floor slabs the top
surface shall be leveled and floated whilst unset to an uniform finish to the
slopes and levels shown on the drawings. The floating shall be done in such a
manner as not to bring an excess of mortar to the surface.
Part 09: Formwork
(iii) Dustproof Finish - Where concrete surfaces are required to provide a dustproof
finish these shall be treated with two coats of accepted material. Each coat
shall be applied with a soft brush on a clean and dry surface in accordance with
the manufacturer's printed instructions.
(iv) Non-slip Finish - Concrete surfaces described on the drawings as having a non-
slip finish shall be treated with carborundum dust, evenly sprinkled on whilst the
concrete is still green, at a rate of 1½ kg/m² and lightly trowelled in before final
finishing. Alternatively, the carborundum dust may be incorporated into the finish
by means of a mechanical power float.
(v) Hardened Finish - Where a hardened finish is required to the floor slabs these
shall be treated with three coats of accepted material. Each coat shall be
applied with a soft brush on a clean and dry surface in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
(vi) Finishing Unformed Surfaces - Finishing unformed surfaces shall be tamped,
floated, trowelled or brushed as defined below and shown on the drawings.
ar
1. Type T - Tamped surfaces shall be formed by levelling and tamping the
concrete to produce a uniform plain or ridged surface, surplus concrete
at
being struck off by a straight edge immediately after compaction. It is
-Q
also the first stage of the following finish.
2. Type F - Floated surfaces shall be uniform surface which has been
worked no more than is necessary to remove screed marks by hand with
LL
a wood float or by power float of a type acceptable to the Engineer. The

surface shall not be floated until the concrete has hardened sufficiently.
W
3. Type ST - Steel trowelled shall be a hard, smooth finish, free from trowel
marks and formed with a steel trowel under firm pressure. Trowelling shall
s
not commence until the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete
en
has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess laitance from being worked to

the surface. If laitance is brought to the surface it shall be removed.
m
4. Type BR - Brushed shall be formed before the concrete has hardened by

e
drawing a wire broom over the concrete surface at right angles to the
Si
traffic flow to give an average texture depth of 1mm.

5. For ground slab concrete shall be treated with sodium silicate or a similar
dust preventive coating. This must be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
2 The type of finish will be specified on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Before
beginning any concrete pour with unformed surfaces, the Contractor shall obtain confirmation
of the type of finish required from the Engineer.
3 Initial finishing of unformed surfaces shall commence immediately after the placing and
compaction have taken place.
4 Suitable access boards or platforms shall be provided to allow access to all parts of
unformed surfaces to be finished.
5 Where a protective treatment or topping layer is to be applied to the concrete the

manufacturers and suppliers recommendations shall be followed concerning the required
finish.
Part 09: Formwork
6 Brush to finish shall be obtained by carrying out a steel trial finish and then using a suitable
stiff nylon brush dragged lightly across the surface.
7 The addition of small quantities of water to the finishing trowel will be permitted to aid
finishing.
9.3.2 Surface Finish Classifications
1 Finishes to formed surfaces of concrete shall be classified as F1, F2 and F3, or such other
special finish as may be designated.
2 Where the class of finish is not designated:
(a) all internal concrete shall be finished to Class F3

(b) external concrete below ground shall be finished to Class F1
(c) where surfaces are to be tanked by covering with paint or sheeting, the formwork
ar
shall be capable of achieving a finish suitable for the proposed tanking as directed by
the Engineer.
at
9.3.3 Formwork Materials -Q
1 Formwork for Class F3 finish shall be lined with as large panels as possible of non-staining
material with a smooth unblemished surface such as sanded plywood or hard compressed
LL
fibre board, arranged in a uniform approved pattern and fixed to back formwork by oval nails.
(a) the same type of lining shall be used throughout any one structure
W
(b) unfaced wrought boarding or standard steel panels shall not be permitted.
s
2 Formwork for Class F2 finish shall be faced with wrought tongued and grooved boards or
en
plywood arranged in a uniform approved pattern free from defects likely to detract from the
appearance of the surface.
m
3 Formwork for Class F1 finish shall be constructed of timber, or of any suitable materials
e
which will prevent loss of grout when the concrete is vibrated.

Si
9.3.4 Exposed Concrete Surface Finishes
1 Exposed concrete surfaces shall have a Class F3 finish.
2 Care shall be taken to ensure that the finish to the exposed concrete on the external and
internal surfaces are of the highest quality to produce a smooth concrete surface of uniform
texture and appearance without visible imprint of grains, steppings or ridges.
3 The resulting concreting shall be free from honeycombing, stains, fins, lipping, nail and screw
marks, raised grain marks or any other imperfections and shall be of a uniform surface
texture and colour. Only very minor surface blemishes caused by entrapped air or water will
be accepted provided that they do not exceed 0.5% by area of each square metre considered
separately and in addition they shall not be concentrated in a manner such that they are
noticeable.
4 Formwork to the wetted surfaces of water retaining structures shall be Class F3
5 All exposed concrete corners and edges shall have 20 mm by 20 mm chamfers.

Part 09: Formwork
6 Grooves in exposed concrete shall be formed by attaching tapered planed timber battens
accurately aligned to the face of formwork.
9.3.5 Form Ties
1 Form ties shall conform to the following requirements:
(a) factory-fabricated
(b) adjustable in length
(c) use removable or snap-off metal form ties
(d) designed to prevent formwork deflection and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces on
removal
(e) no metal shall be left closer than the applicable level of cover to the surface of the
concrete
(f) holes larger than 10 mm diameter in the concrete surface, when using snap ties shall
ar
not be permitted
at
(g) form ties shall have a factor of safety not less than 1.5.
-Q
9.3.6 Coating and Accessories
LL
1 Form coatings shall be commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond
with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede the
wetting of surfaces to be cured, shall be used. The use of form coatings shall be strictly in
W
accordance with the manufacturer instructions.

s
2 Formwork in contact with the concrete shall be treated with a suitable non-staining mould oil
en
to prevent adherence of the concrete.

m
3 Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with oil before reinforcement is placed. Forms
for unexposed surfaces may be thoroughly wetted with water in lieu of oiling, immediately
e
before placing of concrete except during freezing weather.

Si
4 Excessive oiling of the forms shall not be permitted in order to prevent discoloration of the
cement plaster. Where concrete surface is to be painted, the form-oil must not affect the
bond between concrete and paint.
5 Care shall be taken to prevent the oil from coming in contact with reinforcement or with
concrete at construction joints. Any oil on reinforcing steel shall be removed.
6 Release agents shall not be used where concrete surfaces receive special finishes or applied
coatings which may be affected by the agent, unless approved by the Engineer.
7 Fillet and chamfer strips shall be PVC or timber to the approval of the Engineer.
8 Tapes to be used to seal joints of formwork panels for smooth finish concrete shall be plastic
faced adhesive tape to the approval of the Engineer.
9 Precast concrete moulds shall be rigid steel, wood or fibreglass moulds.
10 Flashing reglets shall be galvanised steel of the longest possible length.

Part 09: Formwork
9.4 FORMWORK EXECUTION
9.4.1 General
1 Where formwork to external faces will be permanently exposed, all horizontal and vertical
formwork joints shall be so arranged that joint lines will form a uniform pattern on the face of
the concrete.
2 Where the Contractor proposes to make up the formwork from standard sized manufactured
formwork panels, the size of such panels shall be approved by the Engineer before they are
used in the construction of the Works.
3 The finished appearance of the entire elevation of the structure and adjoining structures shall
be considered when planning the pattern of joint lines caused by the formwork and by the
construction joints to ensure continuity of horizontal and vertical lines.
4 Masonry nails or similar items shall not be used to fix formwork of the like to permanent
ar
concrete works.
at
9.4.2 Trial Panels -Q
1 The trial panels shall comprise surfaces that have unformed surfaces and formed surfaces
F1, F2 and F3.
LL
2 The concrete cast from the job mock-up shall be used to assess the acceptability of the
Contractor’s workmanship for finishing.
W
3 If the finishing is deemed unacceptable by the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare a
s
further mock-up with a particular class of finish.

en
4 The job mock-ups shall be retained during the course of the works to allow comparative
m
inspection, with production concreting and finishing and for the purpose of colour comparison
to ensure colour consistency.
e
Si
9.4.3 Formwork Face in Contact with Concrete
1 Faces of formwork in contact with concrete shall be free from adhering foreign matter,
projecting nails and the like, splits or other defects, and all formwork shall be clean and free
from standing water, dirt, shavings, chippings or other deleterious matter.
2 Joints between forms and tie holes shall be watertight to prevent the escape of mortar or the
formation of fins or other blemishes on the face of the concrete.
3 The Contractor shall verify lines, levels and measurement before proceeding with formwork
erection.
4 The formwork surface shall be made clean and free from any foreign and deleterious matter,
prior to start the concrete pour.
5 In hot weather, the surface of the formwork shall be sprayed with water in order to lower the
temperature, prior to start the pour.
Part 09: Formwork
9.4.4 Sloping Surfaces
1 Formwork shall be provided for the top surfaces of sloping work where the slope exceeds
15  from the horizontal (except where any such top surface is specified as a spaded finish).
2 The formwork shall be anchored to enable the concrete to be properly compacted and to
prevent flotation.
3 Care shall be taken to prevent air being trapped under the sloping formwork.
9.4.5 Temporary Openings
1 The Contractor shall provide temporary openings for inspection of the inside of the formwork
and for the removal of water used for washing down. The openings shall be formed as to be
easily closed before placing concrete.
2 Temporary opening shall be avoided in the case of fair faced concrete.
ar
9.4.6 Form Windows
at
1
-Q
The Contractor shall provide windows in forms wherever directed by the Engineer or
necessary for access for concrete placement and vibration.
2 The windows shall be of a size adequate for tremies and vibrators spaced at maximum 1.8 m
LL
centres horizontally.
W
3 Any windows shall be tightly closed and sealed before proceeding to place concrete at a
higher level.
s
en
9.4.7 Co-ordination
1 The Contractor shall ensure that the work of other trades in forming and setting openings,
m
slots recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts is fully co-ordinated.
e
Si
9.4.8 Conduits
1 Conduits or pipes shall be located so as not to reduce the strength of the construction.
2 In no case shall pipes other than conduits be placed in a slab 125 mm or less in thickness.
3 Conduits embedded in a concrete slab shall not have an outside diameter greater than
one-third the thickness of the slab nor be placed below the bottom reinforcing steel or over
the top reinforcing steel.
4 Conduits may be embedded in walls provided they are not larger in outside diameter than
one-third the thickness of the wall, are not spaced closer than three diameters on centre, and
do not impair the strength of the structure.
5 Embedded pipes and conduits shall be supported independently from reinforcing steel in a
manner to prevent metallic contact and thereby prevent electrolytic deterioration.
6 Pipes and conduits where embedded shall be placed as nearly as possible to the centre line
of the concrete section.
Part 09: Formwork
7 Conduits, piping, and other wall penetrations or reinforcements shall be subject to the
Engineer’s review and approval.
8 Conduits shall be fixed properly to avoid any displacement during concreting and prevent
coming in contact with the forms.
9.4.9 Ties and Bolts
1 The position of ties passing through concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2 Ties, bolts or other devices shall not be built into the concrete for the purpose of supporting
formwork without the prior approval of the Engineer. The whole or part of any such supports
shall be capable of removal so that no part remaining embedded in the concrete shall be
nearer to the surface than the cover required for reinforcement.
9.4.10 Chamfers
ar
1 Chamfer moulding strips shall be positioned on the exposed corners of columns and beams.
at
9.4.11 Cambers -Q
1 If required, cambers shall be as shown on the Drawings.
2 The depth of beams at all points in the span, where cambers are used, shall be as shown on
LL
the Drawings.
W
3 Allowance shall be made for compression and settlement of the formwork on line and level.
9.4.12 Exterior Angles

s
en
1 All exterior angles to concrete exposed to view in the completed structure shall be cast to the
true angles evenly throughout the length.
e m
2 Care shall be taken to ensure that no waviness occurs along the angle and that no spalling
occurs to the concrete on removal of the formwork.
Si
9.4.13 Surface Retarders
1 Surface retarders shall not be used on any formwork surface in contact with concrete unless
expressly authorised by the Engineer.
9.4.14 Detection of Movement During Concrete Placement
1 Devices of telltale type shall be installed on supported forms and elsewhere as required to
detect formwork movements and deflection during concrete placement.
2 Where required slab and beam cambers shall be checked and correctly maintained as
concrete loads are applied on forms.
3 Workmen shall be assigned to check forms during concrete placement and to promptly seal
all mortar leaks.
Part 09: Formwork
4 The forms shall be checked during concreting in order to identify any displacement and
provide corrective actions immediately.
9.4.15 Building in Pipes
1 Pipes and pipe specials through concrete walls and floors shall as far as possible be
positioned and built in during construction. They shall be located exactly in the positions
shown on the Drawings and shall be true to line and level.
2 The Contractor shall take particular care to ensure that fully compacted concrete is in contact
with the pipe at all points.
3 Where it is not practicable to cast pipes and specials in the concrete, boxholes shall be
formed in the shuttering.
4 The box shall have six or eight sides, depending on the pipe diameter, and shall be no larger
in size than will give adequate clearance for the subsequent positioning and grouting in of the
ar
pipe. The sides of the boxhole shall be provided with a tapered central annular recess to
provide a positive key. The boxhole shall be provided with a grout hole and, at the top of the
at
central annular recess, a vent hole. The boxhole shall be stripped with the main shuttering
-Q
and the concrete surface thoroughly cleaned and roughened.
5 When the pipe is later fixed, the remaining hole shall be reshuttered and filled with non-shrink
epoxy grout or non-shrink concrete. In the case of water retaining structures, the Contractor
LL
shall ensure that the measures adopted shall provide a finished joint which is resistant
against and free from leakage.
W
9.4.16 Working Platform

s
en
1 Safe working platform shall be provided according to Section 11 (Health and Safety).
9.4.17 Safe Access

e m
1 Safe access shall be provided for the workers, inspectors, and other users according to
Si
Section 11 (Health and Safety).
9.4.18 Kickers
1 Kickers shall be provided for walls and columns
2 The kickers shall be water tight in order to prevent any grout loss.
9.4.19 Cover Spacers
1 Cover spacers shall be used in order to maintain the required cover between the formwork
and reinforcement.
9.4.20 Water Bars
1 In the case of watertight constructions water bars or equivalent, as approved by the Engineer,
shall be used at joints.
Part 09: Formwork
9.5 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK
9.5.1 General
1 The Engineer shall be notified in writing before the removal of any formwork.
2 The Contractor, under no circumstances, shall strike the formwork until the concrete has
attained adequate strength to resist damage, in particular to arises and features.
3 Concrete shall be thoroughly wetted as soon as the forms are first loosened and shall be kept
wet during the removal operations and until the curing media is applied.
4 A potable water supply with hoses having fine fog spray attachments shall be ready at each
removal location before operations are commenced.
5 The forms after removal shall be cleaned and prepared for subsequent use.
ar
9.5.2 Stripping of Formwork
at
1 The period of time elapsing between the placing of the concrete and the striking of the
-Q
formwork shall be approved by the Engineer after consideration of the loads likely to be
imposed on the concrete and shall in any case be not less than the periods shown in
Table 9.1
LL
2 Stripping of the formwork within the time limits listed above does not relieve the Contractor
from successfully crushing test cubes and achieving the specified compressive strength
W
results.
s
3 Notwithstanding the foregoing the Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage
en
arising from removal of formwork before the structure is capable of carrying its own weight
and any incidental loading.
m
4 Where finished surfaces have re-entrant angles, the formwork shall be removed as early as
e
possible, within the time limits set above, to avoid shrinkage cracks.
Si
5 The formwork shall be carefully stripped to avoid sudden shocks from the removal of
wedges, or vibration which might cause damage to the concrete.
6 Reshoring to beams and slabs shall be placed immediately after stripping formwork.
Table 9.1
Stripping Times of Formworks
Minimum Period Before
Type Of Formwork Stripping (Times Are From
Concrete Placement)
Beam sides, walls and column 1d
Soffits of slabs (props left under) 4d
Soffits of beams, joists and girders (props left under) 10 d
Props to slabs 11 d
Props to beams 15 d
Part 09: Formwork
9.5.3 Holes to be Filled
1 Holes formed in concrete surfaces by formwork supports or the like shall be filled neatly with
non-shrink grout.
2 The Contractor shall clean and scarify any hole that is to be filled with non-shrink grout.
9.5.4 Repair to Damaged Concrete Surfaces
1 Where the concrete surface has been damaged, the Contractor shall break out any loose,
broken or cracked concrete or aggregate.
2 The concrete surrounding the hole shall be then be thoroughly soaked after which the
surface shall be dried so as to leave a small amount of free water on the surface. The
surface shall then be dusted with ordinary Portland cement by means of a small dry brush
until the whole surface that will come into contact with the dry-pack mortar has been covered
and darkened by absorption of the free water by the cement. Any dry cement in the hole shall
ar
be removed
at
3 Dry-pack material shall then be placed and packed in layers having a compacted thickness in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Compaction shall be carried out by the use
-Q
of a hardwood stick and a hammer and shall extend over the full area of the layer, particular
care being taken to compact the dry-pack against the side of the hole. After compaction the
surface of each layer shall be scratched before further loose material is added
LL
4 The hole shall not be over-filled and the surface shall be finished by layering a hardwood
W
block against the dry-pack fill and striking the block several times. Steel finishing tools shall
not be used and water shall not be added to facilitate finishing.
s
en
5 The surface of the concrete shall be rubbed down smooth with carborundum and water in an
approved manner within three days of removing the formwork. Holes left after removal of
such supports shall be neatly filled with non-shrink grout of a suitable consistency and
m
matching colour.
e
Si
9.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
9.6.1 Delivery
1 The delivery of formwork materials shall be done in such a manner that damage can be
prevented.
9.6.2 Storage
1 Formwork should be stored, after cleaning and preparing for reuse if used before, in such a
manner that access to all different materials is available.
2 Materials which can be affected by weathering shall be stored in appropriate buildings or

under cover.
Part 09: Formwork
9.7 TOLERANCES
1 The concrete work shall be constructed to an accuracy which shall permit the proper
assembly of components and installations and shall be compatible with the finish. The
accuracy of the work shall be within the tolerances shown on the Drawings or specified
elsewhere and, in the absence of any other requirements, shall comply with the following:
All laying out dimensions 5 mm
Sections of concrete members 5 mm
Surface of foundations against ground 10 mm
Top surfaces of foundations, bases and piers 20 mm
Surface level of floor slabs (5m straight edge) 5 mm

Surface level of floor slabs to datum 10 mm
ar
Plumb of columns and walls in storey height 5 mm
at
Plumb of columns and walls in full building height (for each
-Q
storey) above the top of foundation:
20m ≥ building height 20 mm
150m ≥ building height ≥ 20 m (1/1000) of height
LL
building height ≥ 150 m  150 mm

W
Inside faces of elevator shafts in storey height 5 mm

s
Inside faces of elevator shafts in full building height (for each

en
storey) above the top of foundation:

20m ≥ building height 10 mm
m
150m ≥ building height ≥ 20 m (0.5/1000) of height

building height ≥ 150 m  75 mm
e
Si
9.8 EARLY LOADING
1 The Contractor should note that the loading from the falsework and wet concrete, during the
construction of a floor, will not exceed the permissible loading on the floor immediately below.
Consequently two of the floors immediately below the one being constructed will need to be
used, to share the loading.
2 While propping through two floors, the Contractor shall ensure, that the props beneath the
floor last constructed are released over its full extent as soon as the concrete has achieved
sufficient strength to support itself plus any superimposed loading, but not sooner than the
periods given in Table 9.1. The props shall then be re-tightened so that these may be used
to share the construction loading from the floor above.
3 Not withstanding the requirements of this Section for the removal times for formwork, the
following provisions shall apply to early loading of concrete.
Part 09: Formwork
4 Concrete shall at no time be subject to loading including its own weight which will induce a
compressive stress in excess of 0.33 of the actual compressive strength of the concrete at
the time of loading or 0.33 of the specified 28 d characteristic strength whichever is the lower.
For the purpose of this clause the assessment of the strength of the concrete and the stress
produced by the loads shall be subject to the agreement of the Engineer.
5 If, due to his method of construction, the Contractor wishes to place an imposed load on the
structure, he shall arrange for additional cubes to be cast at the point of the structure to be
loaded and these cubes will be crushed to monitor the compressive strength in accordance
with BS EN 12390-3 Compressive strength of test specimens. The Contractor shall submit
calculations showing the stresses induced by any proposed temporary loads to be placed on
the structure.
6 No superstructure load shall be placed upon finished piers or abutments until the Engineer
has given his approval in writing and in no case shall any load be placed until the curing
period is complete.
ar
7 Deck slabs of bridges shall only be opened to traffic or construction equipment and plant
when authorised by the Engineer and in no case until the curing period is complete.
at
END OF PART
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 10: Curing
10 CURING .................................................................................................................. 2
10.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
10.1.1 Scope 2
10.1.2 References 2
10.1.3 Submittals 2
10.1.5 Storage 2
10.2 CURING .................................................................................................................. 2
10.2.1 General 2
10.2.2 Water for Curing 3
10.2.4 Curing of Formed Surfaces 4
10.2.5 Curing of Unformed Surfaces 4
10.2.6 Moisture Curing 4
ar
10.2.7 Moisture Retaining Cover Curing 4
10.2.8 Liquid Membrane Curing 5
at
10.2.9 Steam Curing -Q 5
10.2.10 Pavements and other slab on ground 5
10.2.11 Buildings, bridges, and other structures 5
10.2.12 Mass concrete 6
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 10: Curing
10 CURING
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Scope
1 This part covers the requirements for the curing of concrete.

This Section
Part 1, ............ General
Part 4, ............ Water
Part 6, ............ Property Requirements
Part 15, ........... Hot Weather Concreting
Part 16, ........... Miscellaneous.
ar
10.1.2 References
at
AASHTO M 148.74, ...Liquid Membrane Curing -Q
ACI 308 ..................... Guide to Concrete Curing
ASTM C 309, .............. Specification for Liquid Membrane-forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
LL
BS 7542,..................... Method of test for curing compounds for concrete.

ISO 9001: 2008 Quality management systems -- Requirements
W
10.1.3 Submittals
s
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the proposed method of curing for approval.
en

e m
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the details of proposed curing
media, if any. Details shall include chemical tests for the product in accordance with
Si
BS 7542 and details of quality assurance procedures, including ISO 9001 certificates if held.
10.1.5 Storage
1 Chemical curing compounds shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.
10.2 CURING
10.2.1 General
1 The Contractor shall ensure that curing is provided for 24 hours per day including holidays
and that all related necessary plant and labour resources are also available.
2 Special attention shall be given to the curing of vertical and overhanging surfaces to ensure
satisfactory curing.
Part 10: Curing
3 The Contractor shall adopt curing measures that preclude the possibility of thermal shock to
the concrete during curing. This may be achieved by ensuring that the temperature of the
water used for curing does not differ from that of the concrete by more than 15 C.
4 Curing shall continue for at least 7 days and until it attains an in-place compressive strength
of the concrete of at least 70% of the specified compressive or flexural strength, whichever
period is longer. Curing shall not stop unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
5 When low W/cm is used, the concrete shall be preferably cured by water.
10.2.2 Water for Curing
1 Water used for any curing purposes shall conform to the requirements of Part 4 of this
Section.
ar
1 Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from sun, wind, rain, exposure and excessive
drying out.
at
2
-Q
All concrete shall be cured for a period of time required to obtain the full specified strength,
but not less than seven consecutive days. The method of curing shall be by water for the first
seven days and by water or membrane until the concrete has reached the full specified
strength.
LL
3 For mixtures with a low to zero bleeding rate, or in the case of aggressively evaporative
W
environments, or both, the curing shall start at early anytime between placement and final
finishing of the concrete. The curing shall be by reducing the moisture loss from surface
s
using fogging systems and the use of evaporation reducers such as monomolecular water
en
curing compound.
4 Exposed surfaces shall be protected from air blown contamination until 28 d after the
m
concrete is placed.
e
Si
5 The method of curing shall ensure that sufficient moisture is present to complete the
hydration of the cement, and shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The method of curing
shall not:
(a) disfigure permanently exposed surfaces

(b) affect bonding of subsequent coatings
(c) increase the temperature of the concrete.
6 During the curing period, exposed concrete surface shall be protected from the direct rays of
the sun.
7 When liquid membrane is used to cure the concrete, it shall not be applied if bleeding water
is present on the surface of the concrete.
8 The applied film of the liquid membrane shall be continuous and protected from rain and any
damages for at least 14 days.
Part 10: Curing
10.2.4 Curing of Formed Surfaces
1 Formed surfaces, including the underside of beams, girders, supported slabs and the like, by
moist curing with the forms in place for the full curing period, or until the forms are removed.
2 When the forms are stripped, curing shall continue by any approved method.
3 When liquid membrane curing is used, it shall be applied immediately after de-shuttering. In
such cases the concrete surface shall be prepared prior to the application of the membrane
as recommended by the manufacturer.
4 Water curing is not required when liquid membrane is used.
10.2.5 Curing of Unformed Surfaces
1 Unformed surfaces shall be protected as soon as possible after the concrete has been
placed by polythene sheeting. When sufficiently hard, hessian or other absorbent material
ar
shall be placed on the concrete surface and shall be kept wet for the required period. The
hessian shall be overlaid with a sheet of 1000 gauge polythene to assist in the retention of
at
water. Alternatively a curing method approved by the Engineer may be used.
-Q
2 Once the concrete is sufficiently hard, the top exposed surface of walls, columns and beams
shall be water cured and covered with wet hessian for the required curing period.
LL
10.2.6 Moisture Curing

W
1 Moisture curing shall be performed by :
(a) covering the surface of the concrete with water and keeping it continuously wet
s
en
(b) continuous use of fine fog water sprays

(c) covering the surface with a saturated absorptive cover and keeping it continuously
m
wet.
e
(d) Burlap, cotton mats, and other absorbent materials can be used to hold water on
Si
horizontal or vertical surfaces.

(e) Wet straw or hay can be used for wet-curing small areas, but there is the danger that
wind might displace it unless it is held down with screen wire, burlap, or other means
2 Where method (a) is employed, the bunds used shall not be made from fill from excavations
or any other areas where there is the possibility of chloride contamination.
10.2.7 Moisture Retaining Cover Curing
1 The concrete surface shall be covered with a suitable absorptive covering, such as wet
hessian.
2 The absorptive covering shall be overlaid with a 1000 gauge polythene sheet.
3 The cover shall be in the widest practical widths and shall have 100 mm side and end laps.
4 Any penetrations or tear in the covering shall be shall be repaired with the same material and
waterproof tape.
Part 10: Curing
10.2.8 Liquid Membrane Curing
1 Liquid membrane curing shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 7542, ASTM
C 309 or C1315 when tested at the rate of coverage use on the job.
2 ASTM C 156 shall be used as a test method to evaluate water-retention capability of liquid
membrane forming compounds. ASTM C 1151 provides an alternative laboratory test for
determining the efficiency of liquid membrane-forming compounds.
3 Membrane forming curing compounds shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations immediately after any water sheen which may develop after finishing has
disappeared from the surface and within 2 h of stripping formwork on formed surfaces.
4 Membrane forming curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces against which additional
concrete or other material is to be bonded unless:
(a) it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent bond, or
ar
(b) positive measures are taken to remove it completely from those areas which are to
receive bonded applications
at
(c) on fair faced concrete surfaces.
-Q
10.2.9 Steam Curing
LL
1 An enclosure shall be formed around the concrete using tarpaulin or other suitable means.
2 Application of steam shall not be commenced until at least 2 h after final placement of
W
concrete.
s
3 Steam shall be applied at a temperature between 65 C and 80 C.

en
4 Excessive rates of heating and cooling shall be prevented during steam curing and
m
temperatures in the enclosure shall not be allowed to increase or decrease by more than
22 C per hour.
e
Si
5 The maximum steam temperature shall be maintained in the enclosure until concrete has
reached its specified strength.
10.2.10 Pavements and other slab on ground
1 Curing shall ensure that no plastic shrinkage crack will occur, this can be done by protective
measures such as sun shields, wind breaks, evaporation reducers, or fog spraying should be
initiated immediately to reduce evaporation.
2 Mats used for curing can either be left in place and kept saturated for completion of the
curing, or can be subsequently replaced by a liquid membrane-forming curing compound,
plastic sheeting, reinforced paper, straw, or water
10.2.11 Buildings, bridges, and other structures
1 Additional curing shall be provided after the removal of forms

Part 10: Curing
2 After the concrete has hardened and while the forms are still in place on vertical and other
formed surfaces, form ties may be loosened when damage to the concrete will not occur and
water applied to run down on the inside of the form to keep the concrete wet.
3 Care shall be taken to prevent thermal shock and cracks when using water that is
significantly cooler than the concrete surface. Curing water should not be more than about
o
11 C cooler than the concrete.
4 Immediately following form removal, the surfaces shall be kept continuously wet by a water
spray or water-saturated fabric or until the membrane-forming curing compound is applied.
Curing
10.2.12 Mass concrete
1 Mass concrete is often cured with water for the additional cooling benefit in warm weather;
however, this can be counterproductive when the temperature gradient between the warmer
interior and the cooler surface generates stress in the concrete.
ar
2 Horizontal or sloping unformed surfaces of mass concrete can be maintained continuously
at
wet by water spraying, wet sand, or water saturated fabrics.
-Q
3 For vertical and other formed surfaces, after the concrete has hardened and the forms are
still in place, the form ties may be loosened and water supplied to run down the inside of the
form to keep the concrete wet
LL
4 Care shall be taken to prevent thermal shock and cracks when using water that is
W
significantly cooler than the concrete surface. Curing water should not be more than about
o
11 C cooler than the concrete.
s
en
5 Curing shall start as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent surface
damage.
m
6 For unreinforced massive sections not containing ground granulated blast-furnace slag or
e
pozzolan, curing shall be continued for not less than 2 weeks. Where ground granulated
Si
blast-furnace slag or pozzolan is included in the concrete, the minimum time for curing shall
be not less than 3 weeks.
7 For reinforced mass concrete, curing shall be continuous for a minimum of 7 days or until
70% of the specified compressive strength is obtained, if strength is the key concrete
performance criterion. For construction joints, curing shall be continued until resumption of
concrete placement or until the required curing period is completed.
8 Curing shall not stop until favourable differential temperature is attained and at the approval
of the Engineer.
9 For mass concrete, thermocouples shall be used to monitor the temperature differential of
the concrete.
END OF PART
Part 11: Reinforcement
11 REINFORCEMENT ................................................................................................. 2
11.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
11.1.1 Scope 2
11.1.2 References 2
11.1.3 Submittals 3
11.1.5 Delivery Storage and Handling 3
11.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS .................................................................................. 4
11.2.1 Reinforcing Bars 4
11.2.2 Welded Steel Wire Fabric 4
11.2.3 Tie Wire 5
11.3 INSPECTION, SAMPLING AND TESTING.............................................................. 5
11.3.2 Sampling 5
11.3.3 Testing 6
ar
11.4 CUTTING AND BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT ................................................. 6
at
11.5 FIXING OF REINFORCEMENT ............................................................................... 6
11.5.1 General 6
-Q
11.5.2 Welding 7
11.5.3 Mechanical Splices 8
11.5.4 Bundling and Splicing of Bundled Bars 8
LL
11.5.5 Examination 8
11.5.6 Electrolytic Action 8
W
11.5.7 Cover 8
11.5.8 Reinforcement 8
s
11.5.9 Forms and Linings 9

en
11.5.10 Tanking 9
m
11.5.11 Adjustment and Cleaning 9

11.6 PROTECTIVE COATINGS TO REINFORCEMENT ................................................ 9
e
11.6.2 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bars 9

Si
11.6.3 Handling of Epoxy Coated Reinforcement 11

11.6.4 Testing of Epoxy Coated Reinforcement 11
11 REINFORCEMENT
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes tension, compression, and temperature reinforcing steel, including welded
wire fabric, and epoxy coated reinforcing. The work includes furnishing, fabrication, and
placement of reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete, including bars, welded wire fabric,
ties, and supports.

This Section
Part 17 ............. Structural Precast Concrete
ar
11.1.2 References
ASTM A416/A416M....Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for
at
Prestressed Concrete -Q
ASTM 615/615M ........Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A706, ...............Specification for Low-allow Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
LL
Reinforcement
ASTM A881/A881M ...Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, Stress-Relieved or
Low-Relaxation for Prestressed Concrete Railroad Ties
W
ASTM A882/A882M- ..Standard Specification for Filled Epoxy-Coated Seven-Wire

Prestressing Steel Strand
s
ASTM A955/A955M-14 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Stainless-Steel Bars
en
for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A1022/A1022M-14a Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Stainless Steel
m
Wire and Welded Wire for Concrete Reinforcement

e
ASTM A1035/ A1035M Deformed and Plain, Low-carbon, -Chromium, -Steel Bars for
Si
Concrete Reinforcement:
BS 4449 : 2005...........Specification for Carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 4482: 2005,...........Specification for Cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of
concrete
BS 4483: 2005............Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 5896,.....................Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for the prestressing
of concrete.
BS 8666,.....................Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of
steel reinforcement for concrete
EN 1011, ....................Welding. Recommendation for welding of metallic materials

EN 1992-1-1 Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for buildings
ISO 14654, .................Epoxy- coated steel for the reinforcement of concrete

ISO 14656, .................Epoxy powder and sealing material for the coating of steel for the
reinforcement of concrete
ISO 3766 ...................Construction drawings -- Simplified representation of concrete

reinforcement
ISO 9000, ..................Quality management systems. Fundamentals and vocabulary
QS ISO 6935-1:2007, .Steel for the reinforcement of concrete -Part 1: Plain bars
QS ISO 6935-2:2007 ..Steel for the reinforcement of concrete Part 2: Ribbed bars
QS ISO 6935-3:2007 ..Steel for the reinforcement of concrete Part 3: Welded fabric
11.1.3 Submittals
1 Product data including the manufacturer’s specification and installation instructions for
proprietary materials and reinforcement accessories shall be provided.
2 The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s records of chemical and physical properties
of each batch of billet steel bars and a certificate that the respective material furnished meets
the requirements for the steel reinforcement specified. The manufacturer’s records shall
include certificates of mill as well as analysis, tensile and bend tests of the reinforcement.
ar
at
3 Three copies of the steel test report shall be furnished with each consignment of steel
reinforcement. The steel shall be tagged and cross-referenced with mill certificates.
-Q
LL
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for source approval details of the proposed
source of supply of the reinforcement. Details shall include chemical and physical tests for
W
the past six months production and any independent test results for this period. Details of
quality assurance procedures, including ISO 9000 certificate if held, shall also be given.
s
2 The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a certificate of compliance for each shipment
en
of epoxy coated bars. The certificate of compliance shall state that representative samples of
the epoxy coated bars have been tested and that the test results comply with the
m
requirements herein specified. Test results shall be retained by the Contractor for seven
years. A complete set of test results shall also be handed to the client at the completion of
e
reinforcement works, and shall be made available to the Engineer upon request.
Si
11.1.5 Delivery Storage and Handling
1 On delivery, bars in each lot shall be legibly tagged by the manufacturer. The tag shall show
the manufacturer’s test number and lot number and other applicable data that will identify the
material with the certificate issued for that lot of steel. The fabricator shall furnish three
copies of a certification which shows the batch number or numbers from which each size of
bar in the shipment was fabricated.
2 Storage of reinforcement shall be on suitable structures a minimum of 450 mm above the

ground surface to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt, rust and other deleterious
matter. Storage facilities shall be such as to permit easy access for inspection and
identification. Reinforcement bundles shall be clearly tagged with bar schedule and bar mark
reference.
3 The reinforcement shall not be roughly handled, dropped from a height, or subjected to shock
loading or mechanical damage. Steel reinforcing bars shall be kept clean and shall be free
from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, oil, grease, earth, paint, or any other material which may
impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement. The reinforcement shall be
covered to ensure protection from wind blown dust, condensation and other deleterious
materials.
11.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
11.2.1 Reinforcing Bars
1 Reinforcement shall be from an acceptable source. All steel reinforcement bars shall comply
with the requirements of:
(i) QS ISO 6935 with minimum grade of B500 MPa or

(ii) BS 4449 with minimum grades of B500 MPa ; or..
ar
(iii) ASTM A615 / A615M with minimum grade of 75 [520MPa]; or
at
(iv) Deformed and Plain, Low-carbon-Chromium-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement: ASTM A1035/ A1035M-Q
(v) ASTM A1022/A1022M-14a Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain
Stainless Steel Wire and Welded Wire for Concrete Reinforcement
LL
(vi) ASTM A955/A955M-14 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain

Stainless-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
W
(vii) Other types of reinforcement, as approved by Qatar Standards
2 As per project design, other steel grades of less than B500MPa may be used only for stirrups
s
and secondary reinforcement of diameter of 10mm or less.

en
3 If the steel has excessive surface rust, dust or other deleterious material then the steel shall
m
be sand blasted. Sand for blasting shall not contain materials deleterious to the durability of
e
the reinforcement or concrete. Dune sand shall not be used for the sandblasting of
reinforcement.
Si
4 For extreme exposure class X5; protection measures such as epoxy coated bars; Low-
carbon-chromium-steel bars; or Stainless Steel may be considered.
11.2.2 Welded Steel Wire Fabric
1 Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of QS ISO 6935-3 or BS 4483
and shall be delivered to Site in flat mats.
2 Welded intersections shall not be spaced more than:
(a) 300 mm for plain round bars

(b) 400 mm apart for deformed high yield bars in direction of calculated stress except
when used as stirrups.
11.2.3 Tie Wire
1 Tie wire shall conform to the requirements of BS 4482.
2 1.6 mm black annealed mild steel shall be used for tie wire.
3 No wires smaller than size D-4 shall be used.
11.3 INSPECTION, SAMPLING AND TESTING
1 Inspection of reinforcing steel and the installation thereof will be conducted by the Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall give 24 hour notice to the Engineer before closing forms or placing
concrete.
ar
3 The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to break out and remove completely all sections of
the work already constructed under any of the following circumstances:
at
(a) reinforcing steel sample under test fails to meet the specification requirements at any
-Q
time
(b) the Engineer considers that samples which were presented to him for test were not
truly representative
LL
(c) a previously rejected reinforcing steel has been used in the Works.
W
11.3.2 Sampling
s
1 Representative samples of all reinforcing steel proposed for use in the Works must be
en
submitted by the Contractor, before work is commenced, to the Engineer for his written
approval.
m
2 Manufacturer's certificates stating clearly for each sample:

e
(a) place of manufacture

Si
(b) expected date and size of deliveries to site

(c) all relevant details of composition, manufacture, strengths and other quality of the
steel.
3 The Engineer reserves the right to sample and inspect reinforcement steel upon its arrival at
the work site.
4 Frequency of sampling and the method of quality control shall be in accordance with steel
bars manufactured standard QS ISO 6935 or BS 4449 .
5 Where epoxy coated steel is used, a sample of the coating material shall be supplied with
each batch in an airtight container and identified by the batch number.
6 Allow 14 days for Engineer’s review of samples.

11.3.3 Testing
1 Tests shall be carried out when directed by the Engineer.
2 Tests shall be carried out in accordance with QS ISO 6935 or BS 4449.
3 The following information shall be provided with each delivery of reinforcement:
(a) elastic limit

(b) ultimate strength
(c) stress/strain curve
(d) cross-sectional area
(e) deformation/bond characteristics of deformed bars.
4 The Contractor shall allow for dimensions and weight measurements, tensile, bend and/ or
rebend tests at own cost, for each size of bar to be used in the concrete construction.
ar
at
5 Test results for each bar size shall be submitted to the Engineer three weeks before concrete
work commences on Site. -Q
6 Full testing shall be required if the source of supply of reinforcement changes, in which case
the cost of such extra testing will be borne by the Contractor.
LL
7 When any test results do not conform to the relevant standard the reinforcement steel shall
be removed from the Site and all costs resulting therefrom shall be borne by the Contractor.
W
11.4 CUTTING AND BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT

s
en
1 Cutting and bending of reinforcement shall be in accordance with ISO 3766 or BS 8666 and
shall be done without the application of heat. Bends shall have a substantially constant
m
curvature. For epoxy coated steel the provisions of Clause 11.6.1 of this Part shall apply
e
2 Steel bars manufactured according to the approved ASTM standards shall be bent according
Si
to the same standard.
3 Reinforcement shall not be straightened or rebent without the approval of the Engineer. If
permission is given to bend projecting reinforcement care shall be taken not to damage the
concrete and to ensure that the radius is not less than the minimum specified in ISO 3766 or
BS 8666.
11.5 FIXING OF REINFORCEMENT
11.5.1 General
1 All reinforcement shall be securely and accurately fixed in positions shown on the Drawings
to ensure that the reinforcement steel framework as a whole shall retain its shape. The
framework shall be supported to retain its correct position in the forms during the process of
placing and consolidating the concrete.
2 The ends of all tying wires shall be turned into the main body of the concrete and not allowed
to project towards the surface.
3 No part of the reinforcement shall be used to support access ways, working platform or for
the conducting of an electric current.
4 The Contractor’s specific attention is drawn to the following general requirements:
(a) lapped joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings and/or in accordance with the
requirements of EN 1992-1-1 or BS 8666
(b) hooks shall be semicircular with a straight length of at least:
(i) four bar diameters for mild steel
(ii) six bar diameters for high yield steel.
11.5.2 Welding
1 Welding shall not be used unless authorised by the Engineer and recommended by the
reinforcement manufacturer.
ar
2 Where welding is approved it shall be executed under controlled conditions in a factory or
workshop.
at
3 Welding shall not take place on site without the approval of the Engineer and unless suitable
-Q
safeguards and techniques are employed and the types of steel employed have the required
welding properties.
LL
4 Welding if approved, may be used for:

W
(a) fixing crossing or lapping reinforcement in position

(b) fixing bars to other steel members
s
(c) structural welds involving transfer of loads between reinforcement or between bars
en
and other steel members.

m
5 The length of run deposited in a single pass shall not exceed five times the bar diameter. If a
longer welded length is required, the weld shall be divided into sections with the space
e
between runs made not less than five times the bar diameter.
Si
6 Butt welds shall be formed by flash butt welding or metal-arc welding. Other methods may be
approved, subject to their satisfactory performance in trial joints.
7 Metal-arc welding or electrical resistance welding may be used for fixing suitable steels or for
lapped joints.
8 Flash butt welding shall be executed with the correct combination of flashing, heating,
upsetting and annealing, using only machines which automatically control this cycle of
operations.
9 Metal-arc welding shall comply with EN 1011 and the recommendations of the reinforcement
manufacturer.
10 Welded joints shall not be made at bends in the reinforcement. Joints in parallel bars of
principle reinforcement shall be staggered, unless otherwise approved. The distance
between staggered joints shall be not less than the end anchorage length joints.
11 Weldable reinforcement where shown on the Drawings shall conform to ASTM A706.
11.5.3 Mechanical Splices
1 Mechanical splices shall comply with EN 1992-1-1 or BS 8666, and shall be used as and
where indicated on the Drawings.
2 Details of mechanical splices shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
11.5.4 Bundling and Splicing of Bundled Bars
1 Bundling and splicing of bundled bars shall be in accordance with EN 1992-1-1 or BS 8666.
2 Splicing, except where indicated on the Drawings or approved shop drawings, will not be
permitted without the approval of the Engineer.
11.5.5 Examination
1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours before commencing the fixing of
ar
reinforcement in order to facilitate the inspection of formwork.
at
2 The Contractor shall ensure that areas to receive reinforcement are cleaned before fixing.
-Q
11.5.6 Electrolytic Action
1 Reinforcement shall not be fixed or placed in contact with non-ferrous metals.

LL
11.5.7 Cover
W
1 Correct concrete cover to reinforcement shall be maintained with the aid of approved spacer
pieces.
s
en
2 The cover shall not be less than given in Section 5 Part 6.

m
3 Spacers, chairs and other supports shall be provided as necessary to maintain the
e
reinforcement in its correct position.

Si
4 In a member where the nominal cover is dimensioned to the links, spacers between the links
and formwork shall be the same dimension as the nominal cover.
5 Spacer bars shall be of the same diameter as longitudinal bars, but not less than 25 mm in
diameter, and shall be fixed between two layers at 1.5 m centres except where bundled bars
are detailed.
6 Spacers, chairs and other supports shall be made of concrete, plastic or other material to the
approval of the Engineer. Where supports are made of concrete they shall have at least the
same cube strength as the concrete in the host member.
11.5.8 Reinforcement
1 Placing of all reinforcement steel bars will be checked by the Engineer and in no case is
concrete to be placed around any reinforcement steel that has not been approved by the
Engineer. Insertion of bars into or the removal of bars from concrete already placed will not
be permitted.
2 Reinforcement steel temporarily left projecting from the concrete at the joints shall not be
bent without the prior approval of the Engineer.
11.5.9 Forms and Linings
1 Damage to forms and linings shall be avoided.
11.5.10 Tanking
1 Reinforcement shall not be fixed until completion of placing tanking (membrane) protection.
11.5.11 Adjustment and Cleaning
1 Check position of reinforcement before and during placing concrete:
(a) pay particular attention to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever sections
(b) ensure that reinforcement is clean and free from corrosive pitting, loose rust, loose mill
ar
scale, oil and other substances which may adversely affect reinforcement, concrete, or
the bond between the two.
at
2 Protect projecting reinforcement from the weather where rust staining of exposed concrete
-Q
surfaces may occur.
3 At the time of concreting, all reinforcement steel shall have been thoroughly cleaned and
LL
freed from all mud, oil or any other coatings that might destroy or reduce the bond:
W
(a) clean all set or partially set concrete which may have been deposited thereon during
the placing of a previous lift of concrete
s
(b) all uncoated rust bars shall be again sand blasted and pressure washed.
en
4 Immediately before concrete placing the reinforcing steel shall be washed thoroughly with
high pressure potable water jets to remove any deposited salts.
e m
11.6 PROTECTIVE COATINGS TO REINFORCEMENT

Si
1 All the forgoing clauses of this part apply equally to epoxy coated reinforcing bars.
11.6.2 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bars
1 Reinforcing steel which are to be coated shall be free of slivers, scabs, excessive pitting,
rust, grease, oil and other surface defects detrimental to proper coating.
2 The surface shall be prepared in accordance with ISO 14654.
3 Coating shall be applied to the cleaned surface as soon as possible after cleaning and before
any visible oxidation to the surface occurs.
4 Reinforcing steel shall not have surface defects that would be detrimental to coating.
5 Coating material shall be epoxy resin powders as specified in ISO 14654 and ISO 14656 for
coating of reinforcing bars and as follows:
(a) epoxy resin powders which do not meet the above requirements must be tested by an
approved independent testing laboratory and accepted by the Engineer before use
(b) only fusion bonded epoxy-coated reinforcing steel will be accepted

(c) no other means of epoxy coating will be approved.
6 Patching material shall be:
(a) furnished by the epoxy coating manufacturer

(b) compatible with the coating
(c) inert in concrete
(d) suitable for repairs to the coated reinforcing bars to be made by the coating applicator
and the Contractor at the project site.
7 Fabrication shall be performed before coating except as hereinafter specified for bent bars
and straight bars less than 7.6 m long.
8 Bent reinforcing steel bars shall be coated after bending, unless the fabricator can show that
satisfactory results can be obtained by coating before bending.
ar
9 Any visible cracks in the coating on the outside of the bend or damage to coating resulting in
at
debonding of the coating after bending shall be rejected.
-Q
10 Bars less than 7.6 m long may be sheared or sawn to length after coating, provided:
(a) end damage to coating does not extend more than 12 mm back
LL
(b) cut end is patched before any visible oxidation appears.

W
11 Flame cutting will not be permitted.

s
12 Epoxy coating shall be checked visually after cure for continuity of coating and shall be free
en
from holes, contamination, cracks and damaged areas.
13 There shall not be more than two holidays (pinholes not visually discernible) in any 300 mm
m
of the epoxy coated bar.

e
Si
14 A holiday detector shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction to check
the epoxy coating for holidays. A 67.5 V detector such as the Tinker and Rasor Model M-1 or
its approved equivalent shall be used.
15 Patching of holidays is not required if there are less than three holidays per 300 mm length.
Bars having three or more holidays per 300 mm shall be cleaned and recoated or replaced
as directed by the Engineer.
16 Epoxy coating film shall be cured and/or post cured to a fully cured condition. A
representative proportion of each production lot shall be checked by the epoxy coating
applicator, using the method most effective for measuring cure to ensure that the entire
production lot of epoxy coating is supplied in the fully cured condition.
17 Contractor shall repair all coating damaged by fixtures used to handle or support the bars in
the coating process as follows:
(a) patching shall be done as soon as possible and before visible oxidation occurs
(b) excessive patching from other causes will not be permitted
(c) satisfactory correction shall consist of proper adjustment of process, and rerunning
the bars through the plant.
18 The Engineer reserves the right for access to the epoxy coating applicator’s plant to witness
epoxy coating processes for project work and to obtain specimens from test bars for any
testing desired.
19 All chairs, tie wires and other devices used in connecting, supporting, securing or fastening
epoxy coated reinforcement steel shall be made of or coated with a dielectric material.
20 Before the reinforcement is lowered into place and before placement of the concrete, the
coated bars shall be inspected by the Engineer for damage to the epoxy coating.
21 Sheared ends of bars and other areas requiring limited repair due to scars and minor defects
shall be repaired, using the specified patching or repair materials.
11.6.3 Handling of Epoxy Coated Reinforcement
ar
1 Reinforcement steel bars shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent damage to bars
at
or, where used, the epoxy coating.
-Q
2 Bars, or where used epoxy coating, damaged in handling or other operations shall be
satisfactorily repaired at no additional cost to the Employer.
LL
3 Where epoxy coated bars are used all handling systems shall have plastic mandrel and
padded contact areas wherever possible.
W
4 Where epoxy coated bars are used all bundling bands shall be padded.
s
5 All bundles shall be lifted with a strongback, multiple supports or a platform bridge so as to
en
prevent bar to bar abrasion from sags in the bar bundle.

m
6 Bars or bundles shall not be dropped or dragged.

e
7 During vibration care shall be taken to ensure that the epoxy-coated reinforcement is not
Si
damaged by the pokers.
11.6.4 Testing of Epoxy Coated Reinforcement
1 Adhesion and flexibility of the epoxy coating shall be evaluated on test bars coated with each
production lot.
2 At least 1 % of the length or 6 m, whichever is less, of each size of bar to be coated shall be
furnished as test bars.
3 Test bars may be in one length or multiple lengths as required to have one test bar of each
size with each production lot.
4 The production epoxy coated test bars shall be evaluated by bending 120  (after rebound)
around a mandrel of a diameter corresponding to size of bar indicated in Table 11.1.
Table 11.1
Mandrel Diameter for Bar Diameter for
Evaluation Test of Epoxy Coated Test Bars
Bar Diameter Diameter of Mandrel
(mm) (mm)
10 79
12 95
13 103
14 111
16 127
18 143
20 159
22 175
24 191
25 198
ar
26 206
28 222
at
30 238
32 254
-Q
34 270
36 286
LL
5 Bend shall be made at a uniform rate and may take up to one minute to complete.
W
6 Bend test shall be conducted at a room temperature of between 20 °C and 30 °C after the
s
specimen has been exposed to room temperature for a sufficient time to ensure that it has
en
reached thermal equilibrium.
7 No cracking of the epoxy coating shall be visible to the naked eye on the outside radius of the
m
bent bar.
e
Si
END OF PART
Part 12: Joints
12 JOINTS.................................................................................................................... 2
12.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
12.1.1 Scope 2
12.1.2 References 2
12.1.3 Submittals 2
12.2 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ...................................................................................... 4
12.2.1 General 4
12.2.2 Construction Joints in Water Retaining Structures 4
12.3 MOVEMENT JOINTS .............................................................................................. 5
12.3.1 General 5
12.3.2 Joint Filler 6
12.3.3 Joint Sealants 6
ar
12.4 SLIP BEARINGS ..................................................................................................... 7
at
12.4.1 General 7
12.5 WATERSTOPS ....................................................................................................... 7
-Q
12.5.1 General 7
12.5.2 Waterstops 7
12.5.3 Butyl Rubber Waterstops 8
LL
12.5.4 Water Swelling Gaskets 8

W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 12: Joints
12 JOINTS
12.1 GENERAL
12.1.1 Scope
1 This part deals with movement and construction joints, slip bearings, waterstops and
associated sealants and filler materials.
This Section
Part 1 ............... General
Part 10, ............ Curing
Part 15, ............ Hot Weather Concreting
Part 16, ............ Miscellaneous
ar
12.1.2 References
at
ASTM D1751 ..............Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
-Q
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types)
ASTM D2240 ..............Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness
LL
ASTM D3575 ..............Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials Made From
Olefin Polymers
W
BS 903........................Physical testing of rubber

s
BS 2571......................General purpose flexible PVC compounds for moulding and extrusion

en
BS 2782,.....................Methods of testing plastics

BS 6093,.....................Design of joints and joining in building construction
m
BS 7164,.....................Chemical tests for raw and vulcanized rubber

e
BS EN 1992-3 ............Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures. Liquid retaining and

Si
containing structures
BS EN ISO 7214 ........Cellular plastics. Polyethylene. Methods of test
CRD-C572 ..................Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop
ISO 9001 ....................Quality management systems. Requirements
12.1.3 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer as soon as practicable after
acceptance of his Tender and not less than three weeks before commencement of
concreting, drawings showing his proposals for the position of construction joints having due
regard to any that may be shown on the Contract Drawings.
Part 12: Joints
2 For slide bearings the Contractor shall provide at least three samples of the proposed
material, together with the manufacturer's technical specifications and recommendations in
respect of application and performance.
3 For slip joints the Contractor shall provide at least three samples of materials proposed,
together with manufacturer's technical specifications and recommendations in respect of
application and performance.
4 For waterstops the Contractor shall provide at least three samples of proposed types,
including prefabricated joints and junctions, if applicable. If joints are to be made up on site,
provide worked samples, including samples for each make of waterstop, where samples
from different manufacturers are provided.
5 The Contractor must supply a certificate of compliance for the joint sealant, stating that it
meets the requirements of the specification. The Contractor shall also supply the
Manufacturer’s technical and installation data for the proposed material. The Contractor shall
provide details of previous installations of the product, with the client name, structure name,
ar
type of joint and value of contract.
at
6 The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings that show the layout of the waterstops, specials
-Q
and joints.

LL
1 The joint sealant, including primers and debonding materials shall be compatible with each
other and shall be supplied from a manufacturer operating the ISO 9001 or 9002 Quality
W
Assurance Scheme.
s
12.1.5 Definitions
en
1 Construction Joint: The surface where two successive placements of concrete meet, across
which it is desirable to develop and maintain bond between the two concrete placements, and
m
through which any reinforcement which may be present is not interrupted.

e
Si
2 Contraction Joint: Formed, sawed, or tooled groove in a concrete structure to create a

weakened plane and regulate the location of cracking resulting from the dimensional change
of different parts of the structure. (See also Isolation Joint.)
3 Expansion Joint: A separation between adjoining parts of a concrete structure which is

provided to allow small relative movements such as those caused by thermal changes to
occur independently.
4 Isolation Joint: A separation between adjoining parts of a concrete structure provided to

isolate and element and thus allow independent movement.
5 Joints Fillers: Materials that are used to fill space within movement joints during construction.
They may provide support to a sealant applied subsequently.
Part 12: Joints
12.2 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
12.2.1 General
1 Where construction joints are required in slabs or beams (designed by Direct Design Method
DDM) they shall be located within the middle third of their spans, and at one-third to one-
quarter of span in slabs and beams subject to a maximum spacing of approximately 9
metres. Where slabs are supported by beams then the beams and slabs shall be constructed
in one operation.
2 In all cases vertical stop boards of a form to be approved by the Engineer shall be provided
by at the end of each section of work which is to be concreted in one operation and the
concrete shall be thoroughly compacted against these stop boards.
3 Where slabs, beams and walls incorporate construction joints, panels shall generally be
constructed consecutively. Where this is not possible a gap not exceeding one metre shall be
formed between adjacent panels. This gap shall not be concreted until a minimum interval of
ar
7 d has expired since the casting of the most recent panel.
at
4 The size of bays for reinforced floors, walls and roofs shall be as shown on the drawings but
-Q
in no event shall they exceed 7.5 m in either direction and 6 m when unreinforced or with
nominal reinforcement.
LL
5 Horizontal construction joints in walls will only be permitted when the wall is continuous with
the floor slab. Walls shall be keyed on cast kickers 150 mm high or on the tops of walls
meeting the soffits of suspended members.
W
6 Construction joints in monolithic structures shall be aligned with each other whenever
s
practicable.
en
7 Before placing new concrete against concrete which has already set the latter shall be
m
treated to expose the aggregate over the full section and leave a sound irregular surface.
This shall be done while the concrete is still fresh by means of water spray and light brushing
e
or other means approved by the Engineer.

Si
8 Immediately before the new concrete is placed all foreign matter shall be cleaned away and
the surface moistened.
9 If during the course of the Contract it should become apparent that the Contractor’s methods
of forming construction joints are not proving effective the Engineer may order the Contractor
to execute at the Contractor’s expense such preventative measures as the Engineer may
consider necessary to ensure the watertightness of the construction joints in further work.
12.2.2 Construction Joints in Water Retaining Structures
1 The floor may be designed as fully restrained against shrinkage and thermal contraction and
should be cast directly onto the blinding concrete.
2 In large structures, the floor shall be designed as a series of continuous strips with transverse
induced contraction joints provided to ensure that cracking occurs in predetermined
positions. Longitudinal joints between the strips should form contraction joints.
Part 12: Joints
3 Waterstops shall be incorporated into construction joints, crack induced joints, contraction
joints and expansion joints in water retaining structures. The Contractor shall ensure that all
such joints are watertight and any joints which may leak or weep shall be rectified by the
Contractor to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
4 The spacing of construction joints, crack induced joints, contraction joints and expansion
joints in water retaining structures shall be shown on the design drawings.
5 Where the positions or type of joints are not indicated on the drawings, the spacing of
construction joints or crack induced joints in water retaining structures shall not exceed 5 m.
6 Where the positions or type of joints are not indicated on the drawings in the ground floor
slab, construction joints, crack induced joints, contraction joints and expansion joints shall be
incorporated into the works as appropriate. for slabs on grade, construction joints or crack
induced joints should be provided at areas where differences in subgrade and slab support
may cause cracks. The slab shall be cast in strips not more than 15 metres wide across the
width of the building. Within each strip for both directions, crack induced joints shall be
ar
provided at areas where cracks are expected and not more than 5.0 metre spacing, and
construction or contraction joints shall be provided at not more than 15.0m spacing.
at
7
-Q
Construction or contraction joints shall be provided between adjacent strips.
8 Waterstops of a type acceptable to the Engineer shall be embedded in the concrete. The
waterstop should be made of a high quality material, which must retain its resilience through
LL
the service life of the structure for the double function of movement and sealing. The surface
of waterstops should be carefully rounded to ensure tightness of the joint even under heavy
W
water pressure. To ensure a good tightness with or without movement of the joints, the
waterstop should be provided with anchor parts. The cross-section of the waterstops should
s
be determined in accordance with the presumed maximum water pressure and joint
en
movements. The complete works of fixed and welded connections must be carried out
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
m
9 Engineer’s acceptance shall be obtained by the Contractor, prior to start of work, on the
e
casting sequence and the layout of joints.

Si
12.3 MOVEMENT JOINTS
12.3.1 General
1 Movement joints for expansion and contraction shall be constructed in accordance with the
details and to the dimension shown on the Drawings or where otherwise ordered by the
Engineer and shall be formed of the elements specified.
2 Movement Joints in Water Retaining Structures shall be in accordance with the details and to
the dimension shown on the Drawings and EN 1992-3.
3 The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the effects of climatic extremes on any
material which he may desire to use on any movement joint and shall submit for approval by
the Engineer his proposals for the proper storage, handling and use of the said materials
having due regard for any recommendations made by the manufacturer in this connection.
Part 12: Joints
12.3.2 Joint Filler
1 Joint fillers shall conform to the requirements of BS 6093 or ASTM D1751 or equivalent if
they are bituminous type or to the requirements of ASTM D3575 or BS EN ISO 7214 or
equivalent if they are polymer foam type.
2 The joint filler shall be fixed to the required dimensions of the joint cross-section and shall
provide a firm base for the joint sealer.
3 When required between two concrete surfaces as a resilient movement joint, the filler shall
be an approved granulated cork bound with insoluble synthetic resin.
4 When required between blockwork and concrete as a low density movement joint filler or for
building details it shall be an approved bitumen impregnated fibreboard or preformed closed
cell polyethylene.
12.3.3 Joint Sealants
ar
1 All joints to be sealed shall be formed and the groove grit blasted to remove all traces of
at
deleterious materials such as form oil or curing compounds and also to remove any surface
-Q
laitance from the sides of the joint. The joint shall be dry prior the application of priming.
Where the use of grit blasting is not possible the Contractor may propose alternative
methods subject to the approval of the Engineer.
LL
2 The back of the joint shall receive a debonding tape or polyethylene foam backer cord in
order to provide the correct depth to width ratio and prevent three sided adhesion.
W
3 The areas adjacent to the joint shall be protected using masking tape.
s
en
4 The sides of the joint shall be primed with the relevant primer as recommended by the
sealant manufacturer and the sealant material applied in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
e m
5 The sealant material shall be a non-biodegradable multicomponent pitch polyurethane

Si
elastomeric joint sealant, carefully selected as appropriate for the specific climatic and
environmental exposure conditions expected. Alternative types of sealant will be considered,
including epoxy-polyurethane, rubber bitumen and acrylic, subject to the requirements of the
specification and the approval of the Engineer.
6 Where the joint sealant is to be in contact with a protective coating the Contractor shall
satisfy the Engineer that the sealant and protective coating are compatible
7 Sealants shall exhibit the following properties:
(a) Movement accommodation factor 25 %

(b) Shore ‘A’ hardness 20 - 25
(c) Solids content 100 %
o o
(d) Service temperature range 0 C to 90 C
(e) Chemical resistance to Sewage, Sabkha, Mineral acids and Alkalis
(f) Width to depth ratio 2:1
Part 12: Joints
8 Where shown on the Drawings sealants shall also be suitable for use with potable water.
9 All surface preparation, priming, mixing and application shall be carried out in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
10 The sealant shall have a proven track record of no less than ten years under similar local
conditions.
12.4 SLIP BEARINGS
12.4.1 General
1 Slip bearings shall be preformed low friction bearing strips to form a thin sliding joint.
2 They shall be extruded from specially formulated polyethylene to form a durable lamina
resistant to sewage, mineral acids and alkalis, solvents and weathering.
ar
3 Slip bearings shall be applied in two layers with the bottom layer bonded to the substrate with
a high quality solvent borne adhesive based on polychloroprene rubber. The substrate shall
at
be clean and free from deleterious materials such as form oil or curing compounds and
-Q
surface laitance. The surface shall be level and even along the full length of the joint
4 The applied loads for slip bearings shall not exceed 0.7 MPa.
LL
5 Operating temperatures shall be up to 80 C

W
6 The coefficient of friction shall not exceed 0.15

s
12.5 WATERSTOPS
en
12.5.1 General
m
1 Waterstops and associated materials shall be by a manufacturer with a minimum of ten years
e
experience in the field of engineering waterproof products.

Si
2 PVC waterstops shall be suitable for storage, handling, installation and service within a range
of 15 C to 65 C.
12.5.2 Waterstops
1 The waterstop shall be a high performance system forming a continuous network as shown
on the Drawings.
2 Site jointing is to be limited to butt joints and shall be performed strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
3 Centrally placed waterstops shall employ centre bulbs/shutter stop with ribs on the web
sections.
4 Externally placed waterstops shall have ribs on either side of the centre of the waterstop. The
water bar used at the location of expansion joints shall have a bulb in the centre to
accommodate the movements.
Part 12: Joints
5 Waterstops shall have a minimum thickness of 3 mm.
6 The minimum test performance data for PVC waterstops shall be as follows:
Tensile strength >12 MPa
Elongation at break 300 %
Hardness Shore ‘A’ 80 to 90
7 The materials shall be tested in accordance with BS 2571 or BS 2782 or CRD–C572 or
ASTM D2240.
12.5.3 Butyl Rubber Waterstops
1 Butyl rubber waterstops shall have the properties stated in Table 12.1 when tested in
accordance with BS 903.
Table 12.1
Properties Requirements of Butyl Rubber Waterstops
ar
BS 903 Property Requirements
at
3
Part A1 Density 1100 kg/m (± 5 %)
-Q
Part A26 Handness 60-70 IRHD
2
Part A2 Tensile Strength Not less than 17.5 N/mm
LL
Part A2 Elongation at break point Not less than 450 %

Part A/6 Water Absosption (48 hours immersion) Not exceeding 5 %
W
2 Butyl rubber waterstops shall be suitable for storage, handling, installation and service within
a temperature of 0 °C to 40 °C
s
en
12.5.4 Water Swelling Gaskets

m
1 Where active sealing is required for critical areas, waterstops shall be hydrophilic polymer
modified chloroprene rubber strips. The rubber strips shall conform to the following properties
e
as applicable:
Si
(a) Water pressure resistance : 5 Bar (50 m)

(b) Expansion in contact with water : 2 x original SRE
(c) : Reversible
(d) Application Temperatures : - 30 to + 70 °C
2 The selected rubber strips shall be available for three exposures:
(a) Fresh Water

(b) Seawater
(c) Chemicals (if the condition demands or upon the Engineer’s request)
The supplier shall furnish references upon request of the Engineer.
END OF PART
Part 13: Inspection and Testing of Hardened Concrete
13 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF HARDENED CONCRETE .................................. 2

13.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
13.1.1 Scope 2
13.1.2 References 2
13.1.3 Submittals 2
13.1.5 Non-Compliance of Work 3
13.1.6 General Fieldwork Requirements 4
13.2 CONCRETE CORES ............................................................................................... 4
13.2.1 General 4
13.2.2 Drilling Cores 5
13.2.3 Testing for Strength 6
13.2.4 Assessment of Strength 7
13.3 REINFORCEMENT COVER MEASUREMENTS ..................................................... 7
ar
13.4 ULTRASONIC PULSE MEASUREMENTS .............................................................. 8
at
13.4.1 General 8
13.4.2 Selection of Test Locations -Q 8
13.4.3 Execution of Tests 8
13.4.4 Estimated In-Situ Cube Strength 9
13.5 RADIOGRAPHY OF CONCRETE ........................................................................... 9
LL
13.6 SURFACE HARDNESS ........................................................................................... 9

W
13.6.1 General 9
13.6.2 Method of Test 9
s
13.6.3 Equipment 10
en
13.6.4 Reporting 10
13.7 CHEMICAL CONTENT .......................................................................................... 10
m
13.7.1 Sampling 10
e
13.7.2 Laboratory Testing 11

Si
13 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF HARDENED CONCRETE
13.1 GENERAL
13.1.1 Scope
1 This Part of the specification covers the inspection, sampling and testing of hardened
concrete.
2 Related Section and Parts are as follows:
This Section
13.1.2 References
ar
1 The following standards are referred to in this part of the specification:
ACI 214.4R .................Guide for Obtaining Cores and Interpreting Compressive Strength
at
Results -Q
ACI 318 ERTA ............Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-08) and
Commentary
ASTM C42 ..................Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
LL
Sawed Beams of Concrete

ASTM C823 ................Standard Practice for Examination and Sampling of Hardened
W
Concrete in Constructions
BS 1881-124 ..............Testing concrete. Methods for analysis of hardened concrete
s
BS 1881-204, .............Testing concrete. Recommendations on the use of electromagnetic

en
covermeters
m
BS EN 12504-1 ..........Testing concrete in structures cored specimens taking, examining and

e
testing in compression
Si
BS EN 12504-2 ..........Non-destructive testing. Determination of rebound number

BS EN 12504-3:2005 Testing concrete in structures. Determination of pull-out force
BS EN 12504-4 ..........Determination of ultrasonic pulse velocity
BS EN 13791..............Assessment of in-situ compressive strength in structures and precast
concrete components
GSO ISO 1920-6 ........ Testing of concrete – part 6: sampling, preparing and testing of
concrete core .
13.1.3 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his quality assurance procedures for the
particular parts of the testing work that will be carried out.
2 The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval the curriculum vitae (CV) of the
supervisor proposed for the work.
3 The Contractor shall through testing agency prepare a factual report that identifies the test
methods used and the test results. The report shall also identify any unusual results or
pertinent information relating to the testing. The report shall be presented in hard and
electronic copies.
4 For each of the test results the Contractor shall identify the precision or repeatability of the
particular sampling and testing method. This shall be as given from experience of the
particular test by the laboratory or as expected from information in the particular test
standard.
5 In-place tests will be valid only if the tests have been conducted using properly calibrated
equipment in accordance with recognized standard procedures and acceptable correlation
between test results and concrete compressive strength has been established and is
submitted.
6 Non-destructive tests shall not be used as the sole basis for accepting or rejecting concrete,
but they may be used to “evaluate” concrete when the standard-cured strengths fail to meet
ar
the specified strength criteria
at
13.1.4 Quality Assurance -Q
1 All field and laboratory testing of concrete shall be carried out by an independent laboratory
LL
2 The evaluation of concrete in structure is needed when an existing structure is to be modified

or redesigned; to assess structural adequacy when doubt arises about the compressive
W
strength in the structure due to defective workmanship, deterioration of concrete due to fire or
other causes;when an assessment of the in-situ concrete strength is needed during
s
construction; to assess structural adequacy in the case of non-conformity of the compressive

en
strength obtained from standard test specimens; assessment of conformity of the in-situ
concrete compressive strength when specified in a specification or product standard.
m
13.1.5 Non-Compliance of Work

e
Si
1 If the 28 d works test cubes as defined in clause 6.6 of this Section fail to meet the minimum
criteria, the Engineer shall direct the Contractor to carry out in-place methods to estimate the
concrete strength by non-destructive testing, in-situ drilling of concrete cores or load testing.
2 The parts or elements of the structure made from the defective batch or batches of concrete
as represented by the works test cubes shall be identified by the Engineer and based on this
information the Engineer shall instruct the Contractor on the required number and position of
concrete cores.
3 The Engineer shall review the concrete core test results in conjunction with BS EN 13791 or
ACI 318 whichever is applicable to the structural design.
4 Based on this assessment the Engineer shall decide the acceptability of the concrete in the
structural element and may either:
(a) accept the concrete

(b) instruct that certain remedial works are carried out
(c) instruct that the element is replaced.
13.1.6 General Fieldwork Requirements
1 The Contractor shall make all arrangements to provide safe stable access to testing
locations.
2 When gaining access to testing locations and whilst testing the Contractor shall take care not
to damage the structure or leave it in an untidy or unclean state.
3 The Contractor shall take precautions to ensure that cooling water from concrete coring/other
operations is discharged such as not to cause a mess or damage the interior or exterior parts
of the structure.
4 The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the water supply required for testing.
5 The Contractor shall arrange for a suitable power supplies. Where testing is being carried out
on an occupied structure a power supply from the building services may not available and the
Contractor shall make arrangements for power supply and extension leads of adequate
ar
length.
at
6 The Contractor shall appoint a qualified field supervisor to co-ordinate and manage the field
-Q
work. The supervisor shall have not less than five years experience of such work.
7 Before starting the work, the Engineer with the Contractor’s supervisor will mark the positions
where field testing is to be carried out. A unique referencing system to identify each sample
LL
or testing location will be adopted, and this will either be referenced on sketch plans or
drawings or by a detailed description used throughout the report to identify test locations.
W
8 If testing is being carried out on an occupied structure the Contractor shall co-ordinate with
s
the owner or operator of the structure to arrange the detailed programme for the works and
en
gain access to the various parts of the structure.
9 As soon as laboratory test results are available these shall be submitted by hand or faxed to
m
the Engineer in draft form. The testing laboratory, or technical bureau assigned by the testing
e
agency, assigned by the contractor shall provide a technical report providing visual
Si
information and analysing the tests conducted.
10 All core holes, dust sample holes and exploratory investigation areas shall be reinstated with
a proprietary non shrink cementitious repair mortar. The preparation of the hole or area
before reinstatement shall be carried out as per the recommendation of the repair mortar
supplier.
11 Before filling any core holes, dust sample holes or exploratory investigation areas, the
Contractor shall allow the Engineer time to inspect these areas and obtain written
confirmation from the Engineer before filling.
13.2 CONCRETE CORES
13.2.1 General
1 The drilling and testing of cores shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 13791 & BS
EN 12504-1, or GSO ISO 1920-6 or ASTM C42 and ACI 214.4 whichever is applicable to the
structural design.
2 All of the supplementary information listed by the relevant standards shall be included in the
test report with photographs of the cores.
3 An assessment of in-situ compressive strength for a particular test region shall be based on
at least 3 cores. Consideration shall be given to any structural implications resulting from
taking cores. The diameter of concrete core shall be at least 100 mm for strength evaluation
unless clear spacing of reinforcement is less than 100 mm and approved by Engineer.
4 The preferred minimum core diameter is three times the nominal maximum size of the
coarse aggregate, but it shall be at least two times the nominal maximum size of the coarse
aggregate
5 The Engineer will advise the required number and locations of cores. If the results of the
initial coring are inconclusive, the Engineer may instruct that further cores be taken at certain
locations.
6 Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall ensure that coring does not
ar
cut through any reinforcing steel. The required diameter and depth of concrete cores shall be
as stated in table 13.1
at
Table 13.1
-Q
1
Minimum Depth of Sampling of Concrete for Testing Purposes (ASTM C823)
LL
Thickness of Minimum Depth to Be

Types of Construction
Section, m Sampled, m
W
Slabs, pavements, walls, linings, foundations, 0.3 or less entire depth

structural elements accessible from one side 0.3 or greater 0.3
s
only
en
2
Suspended slabs , walls, conduits, 0.15 or less entire depth
foundations, structural elements exposed to
m
the atmosphere at two or more sides; 0.15 – 0.6 one half the thickness or
concrete products 0.15 whichever is greater
e
Massive sections 0.6 or greater 0.6

Si
1 The requirements of table 13.2.1 may not provide the quantities or dimensions of samples
that are required for all tests, in that case, the necessary additional quantity of concrete in
pieces of appropriate minimum size should be taken at each sampling location.
2 When suspended slabs are cored, it is desirable to leave the lower 25 mm uncored, so as
not to lose the core by its falling from the barrel and to make it easier to patch the core hole.
13.2.2 Drilling Cores
1 Before beginning coring operations the Contractor shall use a proprietary cover meter to
identify the position of steel reinforcing bars at the testing location.
2 The Engineer may instruct that the core is taken through the concrete without hitting any
reinforcement or the Engineer may instruct that the core is taken in a position where it is
expected reinforcement will be cut in order to provide a sample of the reinforcement to check
its condition. The locations of all drilling points shall be chosen so that the core contains no
steel parallel to its length.
3 Before capping, the core shall have a length of at least 95 % of its diameter. Once prepared
for test the core shall have a length at least equal to the diameter and not more than 1.2
times its diameter.
4 Cores of both 100 mm and 150 mm nominal diameters may be tested provided that the
aggregate size does not exceed 20 mm and 40 mm respectively. Where possible 150 mm
cores should be taken to reduce the variability due to drilling and increase the reliability of the
testing, unless reinforcement is congested and the use of 100 mm cores will reduce the
possibility that the core will contain steel or it is necessary to restrict the sampling to a length
of less than 150 mm.
ar
5 Where the size of the section precludes the use of 100 mm or 150 mm cores, smaller cores
may be used with the permission of the Engineer.
at
6
-Q
During drilling operations, a log of observations that may affect the interpretation of core
samples shall be prepared.
7 If instructed by the Engineer, immediately after the core has been cut and removed and the
LL
structure a carbonation test will be carried out by using a 1 or 2 % solution of phenolphthalein

poured over the cut surface. A photograph shall be taken of the cut core with the
W
phenolphthalein solution applied to provide a record of the test.

s
8 If during the drilling of the core, the core collapses due to weak honeycombed or defective
en
concrete, the Contractor shall stop the drilling operation and carry out testing at an adjacent
location as advised by the Engineer. If when testing at the second location, the core again
m
breaks due to honeycombed or defective concrete the freshly cut core shall be retained for
reference and a note made of the condition.
e
Si
13.2.3 Testing for Strength
1 The compressive strength of field concrete cores shall be assessed in accordance with BS
EN 13791.
2 The details of the concrete core in accordance with BS EN 13791 shall be recorded and two
photographs on either side of the core taken.
3 Where there is reinforcement in the core, the size and the type of bar shall be noted along
with its cover to the concrete surface, the condition of reinforcing bars shall be noted with a
detailed description of any corrosion of the reinforcement.
4 Before carrying out the compressive strength testing of the cores, the Contractor shall inform
the Engineer to allow him to witness the testing if required.
5 Crushed core samples shall be retained by the laboratory and only disposed of after written
13.2.4 Assessment of Strength
1 The estimated in-situ strength of the concrete shall be calculated from the core result using
BS EN 13791, ACI 214.4 or ACI 318 whichever is applicable by the structural design.
13.3 REINFORCEMENT COVER MEASUREMENTS
1 The measurement of cover to reinforcing steel and other metallic items in concrete shall be
carried out in accordance with BS 1881 Part 204 using an electromagnetic device that
estimates the position depth and size of the reinforcement.
2 The locations for checking cover and the spacing between measurements shall be advised
by the Engineer based on the objective of the investigation. The Contractor shall carry out
calibrations of the electric magnetic device for a particular bar size to allow the bar diameter
to be measured.
3 While testing, the orientation of steel bars shall be checked.
ar
4 The electromagnetic device shall incorporate scale or digital display range and shall be
at
calibrated in accordance with BS 1881 Part 204. When calibrated in this manner the
-Q
indicated cover to steel reinforcement shall be accurate to within 5 % or 2 mm which ever
is the greater over the working range given by the manufacturer.
LL
5 The cover meter shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and checks
on the zero carried out as specified.
W
6 The search head shall be traversed systematically across the concrete, and, where
reinforcement is located, rotated until the maximum disturbance with electromagnetic field is
s
indicated by the meter.

en
7 The cover to the reinforcement shall be noted along with the axis of the reinforcement. The
m
cover shall also be recorded on the concrete surface with chalk or a suitable non-permanent
marking pen.
e
Si
8 Care should be taken to avoid interference from other metallic sources or magnetic material.
9 The cover meter checks shall be carried out by an operator with five years experience.
10 The test report on cover shall include the following information:
(a) date
(b) time and place of test
(c) description of the structure or component under investigation
(d) location of test areas
(e) make and type of cover meter used
(f) date of last laboratory calibration of cover meter
(g) details of site calibration of cover meter, indicated values of cover
(h) estimated accuracy of quantitative measurements
(i) configuration of steel reinforcement
13.4 ULTRASONIC PULSE MEASUREMENTS
13.4.1 General
1 The ultrasonic velocity test equipment shall be capable of measuring the transit time of a
pulse vibration through concrete. The length of the pulse part between the transducer
equipment shall be measured, and the pulse velocity calculated.
2 Ultrasonic pulse velocity testing shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of BS
EN 12504-4.
3 Velocities shall be measured at a number of locations around a structure and a velocity

contour of the structure established. A minimum of 40 velocities shall be measured for each
structural element.
13.4.2 Selection of Test Locations
ar
1 Wherever possible direct transmission arrangements shall be used. The transducers shall be
mounted on a specially formed moulded surface.
at
2
-Q
The minimum path length shall be 100 mm for concrete in which the nominal maximum size
of aggregate is 20 mm or less and 150 mm for concrete in which the nominal maximum size
of aggregate is between 20 mm and 40 mm. but the path length shall not be longer than
required to detect small regions of bad concrete.
LL
3 Where concrete contains steel the pulse velocity shall be adjusted in accordance with the
W
requirement of BS EN 12504-4.
s
4 Locations that contain reinforcement directly along or close to the pulse paths shall be
en
avoided.
m
5 Where repositioning is not possible the semi-direct transmission measurement, where

transducers are placed on adjacent faces of the concrete, may be used.
e
Si
13.4.3 Execution of Tests
1 Positions chosen for the test locations shall be clearly and accurately marked on the surface
of the concrete.
2 The surface of the concrete shall be shall be cleaned and free from grit and dust. Path
lengths shall be determined to an accuracy of 1 % and a suitable couplant (such as grease)
applied to each of the test points.
3 Pulse transit times shall be measured by a skilled operator, with a minimum of five years
experience in the use of the equipment.
4 Pulse velocity measurement equipment shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS

EN 12504-4.
5 Test results shall be examined and any unusual readings repeated carefully for verification or
amendment.
13.4.4 Estimated In-Situ Cube Strength
1 A correlation shall be established between the cube crushing strength of the particular mix
used in the structure and the pulse velocity.
2 Where it is not possible to obtain cubes with the same mix design as the original structure a
combination of coring and ultrasonic pulse velocity testing may be carried out at the direction
of the Engineer, where the cores are used to provide the correlation information required for
the interpretation of the ultrasonic pulse velocity tests.
13.5 RADIOGRAPHY OF CONCRETE
1 Gamma rays and high energy X-rays, which illustrate by radiographs the concrete defects:
The testing shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS 1881-205 or
equivalent.
13.6 SURFACE HARDNESS
ar
at
13.6.1 General
1
-Q
Testing of concrete surfaces for hardness using rebound hammers shall be carried out in
accordance with BS EN 12504-2.
LL
2 The rebound hammer shall only be used for estimation of concrete strength where a specific
correlation is carried out of the concrete from the structure being tested; this shall be from
W
works test cubes or cores taken from the structure.
3 The correlation between concrete strength and the rebound number shall be carried out in
s
accordance with BS EN 12504-2. The precision of the correlation curve between the mean
en
rebound number and strength shall be stated and this shall be used when reporting any
strength interpretations from surface hardness readings. The use of general manufacturers’
m
correlation or calibration curve for strength shall not be used.

e
4 It should be noted that the rebound hammer number only provides information on a surface
Si
layer of approximately 30 mm in depth of the concrete and that this should be quoted in the
test report.
5 The rebound hammer maybe used to establish the uniformity of the finish products or similar
elements in a structure at a constant age, temperature, maturity and moisture condition.
13.6.2 Method of Test
1 A minimum of 12 readings shall be taken to establish a single surface hardness at a

particular location.
2 The reading shall be on a regular grid between 20 mm to 50 mm spacing over an area not
exceeding 300 mm by 300 mm.
3 The mean of each set of readings shall be calculated including abnormally high and
abnormally low results unless there is good reason to doubt the validity of a particular
reading.
4 The coefficient of variation and the standard deviation of the readings shall be reported.
13.6.3 Equipment
1 The rebound hammer shall be a proprietary type that has been used successfully and
serviced for a minimum of five years.
2 The hammer shall comprise of a mass propelled by a spring that strikes a plunger in contact
with the surface.
3 The manufacturers’ literature shall identify the impact energy and contact area of the plunger
for the hammer.
13.6.4 Reporting
1 The test report shall affirm that the hardness was determined in accordance with BS EN
12504-2 and shall provide the following information:
(a) date time and place of test
ar
(b) description of structure and location of test
at
(c) details of concrete
(d) type of cement
-Q
(e) cement content
(f) type of aggregate
LL
(g) type of curing

W
(h) age of concrete

(i) type of compaction of concrete
s
en
(j) forming of surface

(k) moisture condition of the surface
m
(l) carbonation state of surface

e
(m) any suspected movement of the concrete under test

Si
(n) direction of test

(o) any other factors that are considered significant in influencing the hardness readings.
2 The details of the rebound hammer correlation with strength including the mean, range,
standard deviation and coefficient and variation of each reading shall also be included.
13.7 CHEMICAL CONTENT
13.7.1 Sampling
1 The Engineer shall instruct the depth increments over which the dust samples are to be
taken, the types of chemical testing to be carried out and the quantity of sample required.
2 The depth of sample shall not be less than the concrete cover to the reinforcement and at
least 50 mm from the surface of concrete. In presence of reinforcement, the chemical
content shall be tested at least at two levels before and after the depth of reinforcement from
the surface of concrete.
3 To provide uniform samples of cement matrix and aggregate, three separate holes shall be
drilled at one location. The diameter of the holes shall be between 12 and 20 mm.
4 Care shall be taken to discard the material from any render or finish unless this is specifically
required under the investigation.
5 Care shall be taken to ensure that dust increments are accurately measured by marking the
drill bit.
6 The dust samples increments shall be carefully transferred to plastic bags and sealed to
avoid contamination. Each sealed bag shall be uniquely identified by the sample identification
and depth increment.
13.7.2 Laboratory Testing
1 Residual split samples of dust from the field investigation shall be retained until the Engineer
has reviewed the chloride test results. The Engineer may instruct that repeat tests are carried
ar
out on certain samples.
at
2 Chloride testing of concrete dust samples shall be by an acid soluble method in accordance
-Q
with BS 1881 Part 124. The results shall be reported to two decimal places.
3 Sulphate testing of concrete dust samples shall be in accordance with BS 1881 Part 124,
using an acid soluble method.
LL
END OF PART
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 14: Protective Treatments for Concrete
14 PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS FOR CONCRETE ................................................... 2

14.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
14.1.1 Scope 2
14.1.2 References 2
14.1.3 Submittals 2
14.1.5 Preinstallation and Co-ordination 4
14.1.7 Protection 4
14.1.8 General Requirements for all Treatments 5
14.1.9 Final Inspection 5
14.2 EPOXY COATING ................................................................................................... 5
14.2.1 General 5
14.2.2 Surface Preparation 5
ar
14.2.3 Materials 6
14.2.4 Application 6
at
14.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE ................................................................................. 6
-Q
14.3.1 General 6
14.3.2 Materials 7
14.3.3 Waterproof Membrane 7
LL
14.4 PENETRATIVE PRIMER ......................................................................................... 8
W
14.4.1 General 8
14.4.2 Material 8
s

en
m
14.5 PROTECTIVE COATING ........................................................................................ 9

14.5.1 General 9
e

Si
14.5.3 Material 10
14.6 PLASTIC SHEET LINER FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES ................................. 11
14.6.1 General 11
14.6.2 Shop Drawings and Submittals 11
14.6.3 Liner Material Requirements 11
14.6.4 Plastic Sheet Liner Strip Properties 12
14.6.5 Basic Sheet Dimensions 12
14.6.6 Liner Details 12
14.6.7 Installation 13
14.6.8 Testing Requirements 13
14.6.9 Special Requirements 14
14.6.10 Joints in Lining for In-Situ Concrete Structures 15
14.6.11 Testing and repairing damaged surfaces 15
14 PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS FOR CONCRETE
14.1 GENERAL
14.1.1 Scope
1 This Part covers the materials and application requirements for coatings for concrete
surfaces including epoxy coatings, waterproof membranes, penetrative primers, protective
coatings, and coatings and treatments for specialist applications where there is a harsh
environment.

This Section
Part 1, ............. General
14.1.2 References
ar
at
ASTM D412 ................Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers
-Q
Tension
ASTM D543 ................Test Method for Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents
ASTM D570 ................Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
LL
ASTM D638 ................Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics (Metric)

W
ASTM D746 ................Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers
by Impact
ASTM D882 ................Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting
s
en
ASTM D1000 ..............Test Method for Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Coated Tapes Used for
Electrical and Electronic Applications
m
ASTM D1004 ..............Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting
ASTM D4541 ..............Test Method for Pull Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion
e
Testers
Si
ASTM E 96 .................Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

ASTM E154 ................Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover
BS 1881......................Testing Concrete
CIRIA Technical Note 130, Protection of Reinforced Concrete by Surface Treatments.

ISO 9000 ....................Quality management and quality assurance standards
ISO 9001 ....................Quality systems - Model for quality assurance in design, development,
production, installation and servicing
14.1.3 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit manufacturers' specifications, installation instructions and other
data to show compliance with the requirements of this part of the specification and the
Contract Documents.
2 The Contractor shall submit samples of all materials to be used in the works before delivery
of material to Site. Samples of membrane waterproofing shall be 300 mm square. Samples
of liquid components shall be a minimum of one litre.
3 The Contractor shall submit comprehensive test results for the protective coating system as
per the tests in the specification which shall clearly indicate whether the values are mean
values measured in current production or minimum values which the property does not fall
below.
4 The Contractor shall clearly state the chemical composition of the material and the process
by which protection is given to the concrete.
5 In addition to the test methods identified in this clause of this specification, the Engineer may
require the Contractor to carry out further tests to different standards.
6 If the Contractor wishes to propose a material which has been tested to alternative
standards, the Contractor shall submit correlation tests showing the comparable values of the
ar
two test methods. These test results shall be comprehensive giving full details of the sample
conditioning, preparation, method of test, criteria for assessment etc.
at
7
-Q
The Contractor shall submit comprehensive information of previous applications of the
material in similar conditions and environments. This information shall include: project name,
type/grade of material used, quantity of material used, name of client, name of consultant,
name of Contractor. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply the contact
LL
details of the client, consultant or Contractor where the material was previously installed.
W
8 The Contractor shall submit a guaranty for the protective coating system and the
workmanship. The guaranty shall be worded to reflect the required performance of the
s
material and shall be approved by the Engineer. The guaranty shall be worded to include the
en
phrase ‘the Contractor shall, at the convenience of the Employer, effect all repairs and
replacements necessary to remedy defects all to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer’.
m
Unless stated otherwise in the contract specific documentation, the performance guaranty
shall be for a period of ten years except for the penetrative primer which shall be for a period
e
of five years.
Si
9 The use of alternatives may be considered by the Engineer. If the Contractor wishes to
propose such systems, a technical submission shall be made which shall include a
comprehensive justification giving an explanation of why the proposed system is equivalent
or superior to the one designated.
1 The protective coating system shall be supplied by a manufacturer who is certified to the
ISO 9000 series of quality standards. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a copy of
the ISO 9000 series certificate that clearly states the scope of the certification.
2 The protective coating system shall be supplied by a manufacturer who provides technical
assistance on the suitability for the application and installation for the material. For the initial
use of the material on Site, the Contractor shall arrange for the technical representative of
the manufacturer to be present to demonstrate the correct use of the material.
3 The protective coating system shall be applied by a contractor or subcontractor who is

certified to the ISO 9000 series of quality standards. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a copy of the ISO 9000 certificate that clearly states the scope of the certification.
the Engineer may permit the use of an applicator who is not certified to ISO 9000 if the
applicator works to a quality system that is approved by the Engineer.
4 The works shall be executed by an approved specialist subcontractor having a minimum of 5

years successful experience in the installation of the specified material. Only tradesmen
experienced with the installation of the materials specified shall be used.
14.1.5 Preinstallation and Co-ordination
1 After approval of all materials and before installation, a prework conference with the Engineer
shall be held at the Site. The meeting shall be attended by representatives of the Engineer,
Contractor, subcontractor, and manufacturer.
2 The parties shall:
ar
(a) review drawings, specifications and approved materials
at
(b) correct conflicts, if any, between approvals and specification requirements
-Q
(c) examine Site conditions, including inspection of substrate, material labels and
methods of storing materials
LL
(d) review installation procedures and scheduling

(e) review protection methods for finished work from other trades.
W
3 Before applying the coating system to the permanent works the Contractor shall carry out a
small trial of the coating system for the review and approval of the Engineer.
s
en

m
1 Materials shall be delivered in their original, tightly sealed containers or unopened packages,
all clearly labelled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, and number and batch
e
number of the material where appropriate. Materials and equipment shall be stored as
Si
directed in a neat and safe manner.
2 Storage areas shall comply with the manufacturers requirements with regard to shade,
ventilation and temperature limits and shall be located away from all sources of excess heat,
sparks or open flame. Containers of liquid material shall not be left open at any time in the
storage area.
3 Materials not conforming to these requirements will be rejected by the Engineer and shall be
removed from the Site and replaced with approved materials.
4 The Contractor shall deliver materials to Site in ample time to avoid delay in job progress and
at such times as to permit proper co-ordination of the various parts.
14.1.7 Protection
1 The Contractor shall protect the protection system installation from damage during the
construction period so that it will be without any indication of abuse, defects or damage at the
time of completion.
2 The Contractor shall protect the building/structure from damage resulting from spillage,
dripping and dropping of materials.
3 The Contractor shall prevent any materials from running into and clogging drains.
4 Materials and plant shall not be stored on any newly constructed floor without the permission
of the Engineer.
5 Impervious membranes shall be laid as protection to all concrete surfaces in contact with the
soil and shall consist of tanking or similar accepted material, based on soil investigation
report.
6 All foundations shall be provided with protection such as epoxy coatings or similar other
accepted equivalents so that concrete is not exposed to harmful effects of soil, chlorides etc.
14.1.8 General Requirements for all Treatments
ar
1 Protective treatments shall be applied where designated in the contract specific
documentation.
at
2 All protective coating systems to be used shall be applied strictly in accordance with the
-Q
manufacturers recommendations.
3 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during
LL
delivery, storage and installation of flammable materials specified herein and comply any
regulations imposed by the Civil Defence Department of the Ministry of the Interior in respect
W
of the storage and use of hazardous materials required under this section.
4 The Engineer shall specify the required final colour of the coating and the Contractor shall
s
en
submit samples showing the colour before ordering the materials.
14.1.9 Final Inspection

e m
1 Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by a representative of the

Si
material manufacturer in order to ascertain that the system has been properly installed.
14.2 EPOXY COATING
14.2.1 General
1 The coating shall be a decorative flexible high solids, epoxy polyurethane coating applied in
two coats to a dry film thickness of 200 m minimum.
14.2.2 Surface Preparation
1 The surface of the concrete shall be free from oil, grease, loose particles, decayed matter,
moss or algae growth and general curing compounds. All surface contamination and surface
laitance shall be removed by high pressure water jetting or sweep blasting.
2 Blow holes and areas of substantial pitting shall then be filled with a solvent free thixotropic
epoxy resin fairing coat. The mixing and application of this coat shall be in accordance with
the product manufacturer’s recommendations.
3 Where surface cracking is apparent these cracks shall be chased, by an approved

mechanical means, to the depth of the crack. A thixotropic epoxy resin shall be applied using
a trowel, scraper or filling knife ensuring that full compaction is achieved into the chased
section and providing a flush finish with the concrete surface. A minimum period of 24 h shall
be allowed before applying any subsequent protective coating systems.
14.2.3 Materials
1 External above ground coating materials shall provide protection against chlorides and
carbonation, and be UV and abrasion resistant.
2 The above ground coating shall be applied over the below ground coating and shall continue
for a minimum of 150 mm above the ground level.
3 The epoxy coating shall be UV stable.
4 The finished coating shall be pinhole free and have a total minimum dry film thickness of
ar
200 m.
at
5 The materials used in the coating system shall comply with the following requirements:
-Q
Solids content > 85 %
Service temperature -20 C to 70 C
Tensile strength (DIN 53504) 4 MPa
LL
Resistance against crack (DIN 53515) 6 MPa

Adhesion to concrete (ASTM D-4541) greater than 3.5 MPa
W
Compressive strength (ASTM D-695) 90 MPa (neat resin)

Tensile elongation (ASTM D-638) 6-8 % (neat resin)
Water absorption (MIL D-24613) Nil
s
Abrasion resistance (ASTM C-501) 50 mg

en
Compressive strength (ASTM C-579) 97 MPa @ 7 days

-6
Thermal coefficient of expansion (ASTM C-531) 46.8 x 10 mm/mm/degree C
m
14.2.4 Application
e
Si
1 Where required by the Engineer, trial areas not exposed in the finished work shall first be
treated using the selected materials.
2 The exposed concrete surfaces as defined in the documents or as agreed with the Engineer
shall be treated with the material.
3 The coating shall be applied by spray, roller or brush to achieve a finish acceptable to the
Engineer.
4 In all operations of storage, mixing and application, the Contractor is to comply with the
health and safety recommendations of the manufacturer and governing authorities.
14.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
14.3.1 General
1 This Subpart covers the use of waterproof membrane for general protection to buried
concrete.
2 Where indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, concrete in contact with the
ground shall be protected by a preformed flexible self-adhesive bituminous type membrane.
3 The laying, lapping and sealing of the membrane shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
14.3.2 Materials
1 The material shall be an externally applied waterproof membrane shall be an impervious,

cold applied flexible laminated sheet, consisting of multilayer high density cross-laminated
polyethylene film with a backing of self-adhesive rubber bitumen compound, protected with
silicone coated release paper.
2 Primer for Sheet Membrane: As recommended by the manufacture of the sheet membrane.
3 Protection Board: Provide a minimum 6 mm thick asphalt protection board manufactured

from selected aggregates, bound in modified bitumen encased between two layers of
ar
strengthened asphalt paper. The bituminous material shall be a minimum of 1.0 mm thick
and the membrane shall be capable of bridging crack widths in the substrate up to 0.6 mm
at
wide. -Q
14.3.3 Waterproof Membrane
1 The material shall be suitable for use in the Gulf region the compound shall be specially
LL
formulated for hot climates and shall have proven experience in the Middle East.
W
2 The waterproofing material shall conform to the standards detailed in Table 14.1
s
Table 14.1
en
Waterproof Membrane Property Requirements

m
Property Standard Value

Longituduial 210 %
e
Elongation Film ASTM D638

Transverse 160 %
Si
Longitudinal 340 MPa

Tear resistance ASTM D1004
Transverse 310 MPa
Adhesion to primed concrete ASTM D1000 1.8 MPa
Elongation compound ASTM D1000 1.8 MPa
Puncture resistance ASTM E154 220 N over 65 mm

After 24 h. 0.14 %
Water resistance ASTM D570
After 35 d 0.95 %
Environmental resistance ASTM D543
2
Moisture vapour transmission rate ASTM E96 0.3g/M 24 h
Minimum thickness 1.0 mm.
14.3.4 Application
1 Waterproofing membranes placed on vertical concrete faces shall be protected by preformed

asphalt board.
2 Boards shall be bonded onto position with high quality solvent borne contact adhesive based
on polychloroprene rubber.
3 The Contractor shall co-ordinate the installation of waterproofing membrane with floor drains,
equipment bases and other adjacent work and mask adjacent work to prevent soil marks.
4 Areas where waterproofing is applied shall be protected from all traffic and where necessary
backfilling. All damage to finished portions of the waterproofing membrane shall be either
repaired or replaced, or both, in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
14.4 PENETRATIVE PRIMER
14.4.1 General
1 The system shall be a penetrating hydrophobic treatment that protects concrete from both
water and chloride intrusion, while permitting water vapour transmission.
ar
2 The treatment shall significantly reduce the absorption of water and water borne salts but
allow the transmission of water vapour from the substrate.
at
3
-Q
The treatment shall not produce any discoloration of the substrate and shall have excellent
resistance to weathering.
14.4.2 Material
LL
1 The material shall be a low viscosity silane-siloxane system which penetrates deeply into a
W
porous substrate and reacts to produce a bonded hydrophobic lining to the pores.
s
2 The material shall be resistant to petrol, oil, and atmospheric contaminants such as car
en
exhaust fumes and industrial exhausts.

m

e
1 The surface shall be dry, free from oil and grease, loose particles, decayed matter, algae
Si
growth and curing compounds.
2 If the concrete surface is newly cast and has a very smooth finish, the surface shall be
roughened by sand or grit blasting, water blasting or some mechanical means. The Engineer
shall decide if this means of preparation is required.
3 Moss or algae growth on the surface shall be removed using a proprietary fungicidal wash in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4 Concrete finishing required shall be completed before the application of the treatment.
5 Cracks of width greater than 0.2 mm shall be filled in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
14.4.4 Application
1 Unless directed otherwise by the Engineer the treatment shall be applied a minimum period
of 24 h after the wet curing period, and shall be surface dry.
2 The Contractor shall carry out tests to verify the depth of penetration of the material. These
tests shall be carried out on specimens of the actual mix design and shall use coloured dyes
to trace the penetration of the material.
3 Where fine cracking has occurred in the concrete (at a width not greater than 0.3 mm for
reinforced concrete and 0.2 mm for water retaining structures) an additional four 'stripe coats'
of the treatment shall be applied before the main treatment.
4 The application of the material on surfaces shall be by a low pressure spray direct from the
can. Under no circumstances should thinning of the material be carried out.
5 The rate of application shall ensure that the surface is completely saturated. The
impregnated coating shall be applied to two or more flood coats each flood coat shall be a
2
minimum of 0.4 l/m .
6 The material shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and
as follows:
ar
(a) the material shall be applied by a fine nozzle spray
at
(b) application will not be permitted when the ambient air temperature is above 35 C or
-Q
in windy conditions
(c) the surface shall be cleaned by a stiff brush or compressed air to remove all loose
deposits
LL
(d) concrete to be treated shall be surface dry for a minimum period of 24 h before
impregnation
W
(e) membranes, joint sealers and cast in concrete ancillaries shall be masked off before
treatment
s
en
(f) application shall be made by saturation flooding

(g) the interval between application shall be at least 6 h
m
(h) treated areas shall be protected from sea water and rain for 6 h after treatment.
e
Si
14.5 PROTECTIVE COATING
14.5.1 General
1 The coating system shall be used for the protection of new or existing reinforced concrete
structures against carbonation or chloride induced corrosion.
2 The system shall comprise of a penetrating, reactive primer and an acrylic polymer top coat
system to minimise ingress of acidic gases, chlorides and water.
1 Before application, all surfaces must be dry and free from oil, grease, loose particles,
decayed matter, moss or algae growth and general curing compounds.
2 All such contamination and laitence must be removed by the use of grit blasting, high
pressure water jetting or equivalent mechanical means.
3 Before proceeding to apply the protective coatings, all surfaces which are not to be coated
but which may be affected by the application of the coating shall be fully masked and, in
particular, flora and fauna shall be protected.
4 Blow holes and areas of pitting shall be made good with a one part modified cementitious
material and allowed to cure in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In
particular, the application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
with respect to the maximum application thickness.
14.5.3 Material
1 The materials are required to provide in-depth protection against carbonation and chloride
penetration whilst permitting water vapour transmission from the concrete.
2 The primer shall be a low viscosity silane-siloxane system which penetrates deeply into a
porous substrate and reacts to produce a bonded hydrophobic lining to the pores.
ar
3 The material employed for the coating shall comply with the following requirements:
at
Wet film thickness 400 µm
Dry film thickness -Q 200 µm
Carbon Dioxide diffusion resistance R Value at 325 microns > 161 metres.
(Taywood Engineering Laboratories)
Water vapour transmission
2
(Taywood Engineering Laboratories) Shall be more than 13 g/m .d
LL
Reduction in chloride ion penetration 94 % minimum at 28 d

(BS 1881 : Part 124)
2
W
Tear Resistance (ASTM D624) 7.3 kN/mm

Crack bridging (BRE Method) 5.1 mm
Chloride Ion Diffusion
s
-10 2
(Taywood Engineering Labororatories) 3.63 x 10 cm /sec.
en
4 Where test methods are not specified, the procedure for establishing compliance with the
above criteria shall be agreed with the Engineer.
m
5 The Contractor is required to adhere strictly to the manufacturer's recommendations

e
regarding the use, storage, application and safety rules in respect of the approved materials.
Si
14.5.4 Application
1 Where required by the Engineer, trial areas not exposed in the finished work shall first be
treated using the selected materials. These trial areas shall be noted on the Drawings and
shall be carried out using the type of materials, mixing procedures and applications that will
be used on the contract and shall be approved by the Engineer before the Contractor
commences with the general work.
2 The exposed concrete surfaces as defined in the documents or as agreed with the Engineer
shall be conditioned by the application of a penetrating hydrophobic treatment. The primer
shall be allowed to dry in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
3 The Contractor shall then apply two coats of pigmented topcoat in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. The finished coating shall be pinhole free and have a total
minimum dry film thickness of 150 m. The colour and finish is to be as agreed with the
Engineer.
4 The coating shall be applied by spray, roller or brush to achieve a finish acceptable to the
Engineer.
5 In all operations of storage, mixing and application the Contractor shall comply with the health
and safety recommendations of the manufacturer and governing authorities.
14.6 PLASTIC SHEET LINER FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
14.6.1 General
1 This Subpart covers the supply and installation of sheet liners in reinforced concrete
structures.
2 The liner must be continuous and free of pinholes both across the joints and in the liner itself.
3 All work for and in connection with the installation of the lining in concrete pipe and structure,
and the field sealing and welding of joints, will be done in strict conformity with all applicable
ar
specifications, instructions, and recommendations of the lining manufacturer.
at
14.6.2 Shop Drawings and Submittals -Q
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the following:
(a) liner schedule

LL
(b) material certifications

W
(c) test results

(d) material samples
s
(e) the manufacturer of the lining will submit an affidavit attesting to the successful use
en
of its material as a lining for sewer pipes and structures for a minimum period of
five years in service conditions recognised as corrosive or otherwise detrimental to
m
concrete.
e
14.6.3 Liner Material Requirements

Si
1 The sheet liner shall be manufactured from, high molecular weight PVC or PE resin and
other components necessary to make a material of permanent flexibility suitable for a liner in
concrete pipes and structures in sewerage service. The weld strips and the joint strips shall
be made from like material. For PVC and PE sheet liners, the actual resin used in
manufacture must constitute not less than 99 % of the resin used in the formulation.
2 Copolymer resins will not be permitted.
3 All plastic sheets including locking extensions, all joints and welding strips shall be free of
cracks, asperities and other defects that may affect the protective properties of the material.
4 The properties of PVC and PE sheet are shown in Table 14.2

Table 14.2
Properties of PVC and PE Sheet Liners
Property Test Method Requirement

PVC
Elongation at break ASTM D638/882 300 %
Tensile Strength ASTM D638/412 15 MPa
Low Temp. Brittleness ASTM D746 0°C
PE
Elongation at break ASTM D638/882 Exceeds 600 %
Tensile Strength ASTM D638/412 10-20 MPa
Low Temp. Brittleness ASTM D746 -75 °C
14.6.4 Plastic Sheet Liner Strip Properties
1 Except at shop welds, all plastic sheet liners and strips shall have the properties shown in
Table 14.3 when tested at 25 °C.
ar
at
Table 14.3
Properties of Plastic Sheet Liner Strips
-Q
Property Requirement
Tensile strength 15 MPa
LL
Elongation at break 200 %

1 s 50 - 60 5 (with respect to 10 s
Shore Durometer
35 - 50 5)
W
Weight change 1.5 %

s
en
14.6.5 Basic Sheet Dimensions

m
1 The minimum thickness of the material shall be as shown in Table 14.4

e
Si
Table 14.4
Plastic Sheet Liner Minimum Dimensions
Material Thickness Structures
Sheet with locking extensions 4.0 mm
Sheet, plain 2.3 mm
Joint strip 1.9 mm
Weld strip 2.4 mm
14.6.6 Liner Details
1 Locking extensions (T-shaped) shall be of the same materials as that of the liner and shall be
integrally extruded with the sheet.
2 Locking extensions shall be approximately 65 mm apart and shall be at least 10 mm high.
3 Sheets not used for shop fabrication into larger sheets shall be shop tested for pinholes using
an electrical spark tester set at 9000 V per 1.0 mm thickness of lining minimum. Holes shall
be repaired and retested.
14.6.7 Installation
1 Installation of the lining, including preheating of sheets in cold weather and the welding of all
joints, shall be performed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
2 The lining to be held snugly in place against inner forms by means of steel banding straps or
other means recommended by the manufacturer.
3 Concrete that is to be poured against the lining shall be vibrated, spaded, or compacted in a
careful manner to protect the lining and produce a dense, homogenous concrete, securely
anchoring the locking extensions into the concrete.
4 In removing forms care shall be taken to protect the lining from damage. In particular:
(a) sharp instruments not to be used to pry forms from lined surfaces.
(b) when forms are removed, any nails that remain in the lining to be pulled, without
tearing the lining, and the resulting holes clearly marked.
ar
(c) form tie holes to be marked before ties are broken off and all areas of serious
at
abrasion or damage shall be marked.
5
-Q
All nail and tie holes and all cut, torn, and seriously abraded areas in the lining shall be
patched as follows:
(a) patches made entirely with welding strip to be fused to the liner over the entire patch
LL
area
W
(b) larger patches may consist of smooth liner sheet applied over the damaged area with
adhesive
s
(c) all edges must be covered with welding strip fused to the patch and the sound lining
en
adjoining the damaged area.
6 Hot joint compounds, such as coal tar, shall not be poured or applied to the lining.
e m
7 The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to prevent damage to the installed lining
Si
from equipment and materials used in or taken through the work.
14.6.8 Testing Requirements
1 Samples taken from sheets, joints or weld strips shall be tested to determine material
properties. Determination of tensile strength and elongation shall be in accordance with
ASTM D 412 using Die B. Determination of indentation hardness shall be in accordance with
ASTM D 2240 using a Type D Durometer, except that a single thickness of material and
indentation hardness shall be made on 25 mm by 75 mm specimens. Thickness of
specimens shall be the thickness of the sheet or strip.
2 The measurement of initial physical properties for tensile strength, weight, elongation and
indentation hardness shall be determined before chemical resistance tests.
3 Chemical resistance tests shall be carried out to determine the physical properties of the
specimens after exposure to chemical solutions. Test specimens shall be conditioned to
constant weight at 43 °C before and after submersion in the solutions detailed in Table 14.5
for a period of 112 d at 25  3 °C.
4 Volumetric percentages of concentrated reagents of CP grade: At 28 day intervals,

specimens shall be removed from each chemical solution and tested. If any specimen fails to
meet the 112 day exposure, the material will be subject to rejection.
5 Pull test for locking extensions: Liner locking extensions embedded in concrete shall
withstand a test pull of at least 18 kN/m, applied perpendicularly to the concrete surface for a
period of 1 min, without rupture of the locking extensions or withdrawal from embedment.
This test shall be made at a temperature between 21 °C to 27 °C inclusive.
6 Shop-welded joints: Shop-welded joints, used to fuse individual sections of liner together,
shall be a least equal to the minimum requirements of the liner for thickness, corrosion
resistance and impermeability. Welds shall show no cracks or separations and shall be
tested for tensile strength. Tensile strength measured across the welded joint in accordance
with ASTM D 412 using Die B shall be at least 15 MPa. Test temperature shall be 25  3 C
and the measured minimum width and thickness of the reduced section shall be used.
7 Spark test: All liner shall be shop tested for holes with a spark tester set to provide from
ar
15 000 to 20 000 V. Sheets having holes shall be satisfactorily repaired in the shop before
shipment from the manufacturer’s plant.
at
8
-Q
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with certified copies of test reports before the
shipment of the product to the Site.
Table 14.5
LL
Chemical Resistance Tests
Chemical Solutions Concentration

W
Sulphuric Acid 20 %
s
Sodium Hydroxide 5%
en
Ammonium Hydroxide 5%
Nitric Acid 1%
m
Ferric Chloride 1%
Soap 0.1 %
e
Si
Detergent (Linear alkyl benzyl sulphonate or LAS) 0.1 %

Bacteriological BOD not less than 700 mg/l
Phosphoric Acid 50 %
14.6.9 Special Requirements
1 Liner sheets to be closely fitted and properly secured to the inner forms.
(a) sheets that are to be cut to fit curved and warped surfaces shall use a minimum
number of separate pieces
(b) a 50 mm wide water resistant tape or welding strip shall be welded on the back of butt
joints to prevent wet concrete from flowing around the edges.
2 Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the lining will be returned at least 75 mm at the
surfaces of contact between the concrete structure and items not of concrete and
(a) the same procedure will be followed at joints where the type of protective lining is
changed or the new work is built to join existing unlined concrete
(b) at each return, the returned liner will be sealed to the item in contact with the plastic
lined concrete with an adhesive system
(c) if the liner cannot be sealed with this adhesive because of the joint at the return being
too wide or rough or because of safety regulations, the joint space shall be densely
caulked with lead wool or other approved caulking material to a depth of 50 mm and
finish with a minimum of 25 mm of an approved corrosion resistant material.
14.6.10 Joints in Lining for In-Situ Concrete Structures
1 Field joints and Lining at joints shall be free of all mortar and other foreign material and shall
be clean and dry before joints are made.
2 All welding is to be in strict conformance with the specifications of the lining manufacturer.
14.6.11 Testing and repairing damaged surfaces
1 All surfaces covered with lining, including welds, will be tested with an approved electrical
ar
holiday detector with the instrument set at 9000 V per 1.0 mm of lining minimum:
at
(a) all welds shall be physically tested by a non-destructive probing method
-Q
(b) all patches over holes, or repairs to the liner wherever damage has occurred.
2 Each transverse welding strip which extends to a lower edge of the liner will be tested by an
approved testing agency at the cost of the Contractor.
LL
(a) the welding strips will extend 50 mm below the liner to provide a tab.
W
(b) a 5 kg pull will be applied to each tab. The force will be applied normal to the face of
the structure by means of a spring balance
s
en
(c) liner adjoining the welding strip will be held against the concrete during application of
the force
m
(d) the 5 kg pull will be maintained if a weld failure develops until no further separation
occurs.
e
Si
(e) defective welds will be retested after repairs have been made
(f) tabs shall be trimmed away neatly by the installer of the liner after the welding strip has
passed inspection.
(g) inspection will be made within two days after joints has been completed in order to
prevent tearing the projecting weld strip and consequent damage to the liner from
equipment and materials used in or taken through the work.
END OF PART
Part 15: Hot Weather Concreting
15 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING ............................................................................. 2

15.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
15.1.1 Scope 2
15.1.2 References 2
15.1.3 Definition of Hot Weather 2
15.1.5 Submittals 3
15.2 PLACING TEMPERATURE ..................................................................................... 3
15.3 PLANNING CONCRETING ..................................................................................... 4
15.4 MIX DESIGN ........................................................................................................... 4
15.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ................................................................................... 4
15.5.1 General 4
15.5.2 Aggregates 4
15.5.3 Water 5
ar
15.5.4 Cement 5
at
15.5.5 Addition of Ice 5
15.5.6 Liquid Nitrogen 6
-Q
15.6 BATCHING AND MIXING ........................................................................................ 6
15.7 TRANSPORTATION ............................................................................................... 6
LL
15.8 PLACING AND FINISHING ..................................................................................... 6

15.9 CURING AND PROTECTION.................................................................................. 7
W
15.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING .................................................................................. 7

s
en
e m
Si
15 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 Scope
1 This Part covers the precautions to be taken for hot weather concreting for all structural
concrete except blinding concrete, where a minimum compressive strength is specified.
This Section
Part 8 .............. Transportation and Placing of Concrete
Part 10 ............. Curing
ar
15.1.2 References
at
ACI 305R-91...............American Concrete Institute , Hot Weather Concreting
-Q
ASTM C1064 ..............Measuring the Temperature of Concrete
BS EN 1992-1-1 .........Eurocode 2, Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for
LL
buildings
BS EN 480..................Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test methods
W
BS EN 934..................Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout

s
15.1.3 Definition of Hot Weather

en
1 The requirements of the following clauses of the specification are applicable during the hot
m
weather period in Qatar.

e
2 The hot weather period shall be defined as starting when the maximum ambient air shade
Si
temperature on the Site exceeds 35 C for three consecutive days. The end of the hot
weather period shall be defined as the period when the maximum air shade temperature is
below 35 C on three consecutive days.
3 The Contractor shall establish a thermometer on Site that records the ambient air shade
temperature. The thermometer shall be established at a position to provide representative air
temperature for the Site conditions. If requested by the Engineer the Contractor shall arrange
for the calibration of the Site thermometer.
4 Hot Weather” shall mean any combination of the following conditions that tends to impair the
quality of freshly mixed or hardened concrete by accelerating the rate of moisture loss and
rate of cement hydration, or otherwise causing detrimental results such as:
(a) High ambient temperature (when the shade temperature is above 40 deg C on a rising
thermometer, 43 deg C on a falling thermometer),
(b) High concrete temperature,
(c) Low relative humidity,
(d) High wind speed
2
(e) the rate of evaporation exceeds 0.75 kg/m /h
1 The Contractor shall undertake hot weather concreting procedures that are effective in
controlling the following potential problems associated with concreting in hot weather:
(a) increased water demand of the mix

(b) increased rate of slump loss
(c) increased rate of setting
(d) increased tendency for plastic shrinkage cracking
(e) decreased long-term strength
(f) increase tendency for drying shrinkage and cracking
(g) increased tendency for differential thermal effects with consequent cracking
ar
(h) decreased durability from cracking where there is increased permeability.
at
15.1.5 Submittals
1
-Q
The Contractor shall prepare weekly in advance his proposed concreting programme
showing the quantities to be placed and the anticipated placing hours.
LL
2 At least one month before the start of the hot weather period the Contractor shall submit his
specific proposals for the control of the concrete temperature for the constituent materials;
W
cement, water aggregates.
3 Where required the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for the use of liquid
s
nitrogen for cooling which shall include details of previous project application and the
en
intended methods to be used and quantities of liquid nitrogen.

m
15.2 PLACING TEMPERATURE

e
1 This Subpart of the specification applies at all times of the year and at all times of the day.
Si
2 Maximum fresh concrete temperature (at placement) shall not exceed 32°C unless
construction testing to verify a proposed concrete mixture will function satisfactorily at a
concrete temperature greater than 32°C. No concrete shall be placed if the concrete
temperature is above 35°C
3 Concrete shall not be placed if the shade temperature exceeds 40ºC.
4 The temperature of each truck of concrete shall be measured using either a glass, dial type
or electronic thermometer, just before the placing of the concrete and the temperature
recorded on the delivery ticket. The maximum temperature at placing shall apply to the entire
load of concrete in the truck or conveyer.
5 The Contractor shall allow for the increase in concrete temperature in the period from
dispatch from the plant while in transportation or whilst awaiting placement on Site and take
adequate measures to ensure the maximum temperature is not exceeded.
15.3 PLANNING CONCRETING
1 During the hot weather period as defined in Clause 15.1.3 of this Part, the Contractor shall
plan concreting operations such that no concreting takes place between the hours of
10:00 hours and 17:00 hours.
2 The Contractor shall arrange concrete pours such that the programme of works can be
achieved without concreting during the period from 10:00 hours to 17:00 hours.
3 The Contractor shall nominate one member of his staff to be the co-ordinator for the supply
of concrete. The co-ordinator’s responsibilities shall include ensuring the batched rate
matches that of delivery and placement and the preparations needed before commencing a
concrete pour.
15.4 MIX DESIGN
1 In the hot weather period, the Contractor shall review all concrete mix designs to ensure that
ar
the design slump or workability specified is achieved without increase in the mix water
at
content. The Contractor shall make modifications to the mix design to allow for increased
slump loss during transportation in hot weather.
-Q
2 This shall be achieved by adjusting the proportion of admixture, plasticiser or super
plasticiser. The permitted range of admixture shall be clearly stated on the concrete mix
LL
design with nominal values for cold weather and hot weather use.
3 Under no circumstances will the addition of extra water that increases the water cement ratio
W
be permitted during hotter weather.

s
4 All concrete materials and proportions used in periods of hot weather shall be those that have
en
a satisfactory record of use in such conditions.

m
15.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

e
15.5.1 General
Si
1 The Contractor’s specific proposals for the control of the concrete temperature shall include
extent and type of shading of aggregates, method of chilling mix water and procedures for
batching and mixing, transportation, placing and finishing, curing and protection.
2 These shall include calculations in accordance with ACI 305R, clause 3.1 “estimating
concrete temperature”. The Contractor shall calculate the temperature of freshly produced
concrete based on the input temperatures of the constituent materials and the weights from
particular mix designs. The calculations shall make allowance for the rise in temperature
between mixing and placing due to the transportation and waiting period. The calculations
shall successfully demonstrate that the temperature can be maintained below 32 C at the
point of placing.
15.5.2 Aggregates
1 All practical means shall be employed to keep the aggregates as cool as possible.
2 Stockpiles of aggregates shall be shaded from direct sunlight. Shades shall extend beyond
the edge of aggregate storage areas and stockpile layouts shall be such that direct sunlight is
not incident on the aggregates. Shades shall be constructed to allow access for mechanical
shovels or means of conveyance. Shades and stockpiles shall be constructed so as to permit
the free flow of air over the aggregates. Embedded cooling pipes may also be used to cool
the aggregate.
3 Sprinkling of coarse aggregates to reduce temperature by evaporation or direct cooling shall

not be permitted.
15.5.3 Water
1 Mix Water shall be cooled by storing in underground tanks or insulated tanks above ground.
2 The water shall be chilled by the use of proprietary chillers or the addition of ice to the water
tank. Measures shall be taken to ensure that ice pieces are not inadvertently deposited
directly into the mixer.
ar
3 Water shall not be chilled below a temperature of 5 C.
at
4
-Q
Tanks, pipes or trucks used for the storage or transportation of water shall be insulated and
painted white.
5 The mechanical refrigeration equipment and insulated water storage shall be adequate for
LL
the anticipated hourly and daily production rates of concrete during the hot weather period.
W
6 Mixing water may also be chilled by injection of liquid nitrogen into an insulated holding tank,
such procedures shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
s
en
7 Ice shall be completely melted in mixing water prior to adding water to the mixer.
15.5.4 Cement
e m
1 The use of freshly ground cement at very high temperatures is not permitted.
Si
2 The cement shall be kept below the temperature which there is a tendency of false set.
3 Under no conditions shall the temperature of the cement exceed 75 C when it enters the
mixture.
4 The Contractor shall make arrangements for storage on Site to allow cooling of freshly
ground and delivered cement.
15.5.5 Addition of Ice
1 Crushed shaved or chipped ice can be used as part of the mixing water for reducing the
concrete temperature.
2 The maximum nominal size of ice particles shall be 10 mm and all the ice must be melted
before the completion of mixing of the concrete in the pan.
3 To ensure proper concrete mixing the maximum proportion by substitution shall be 75 % of

the batch water requirement.
4 Crushed ice shall be stored at a temperature that will prevent lumps from forming by
refreezing of particles.
5 The batching plant shall incorporate a mechanical system for correctly proportioning and
weighing the ice to be added to the mixture.
6 The quantity of ice shall be deducted from the total batch water.
7 The Contractor shall ensure there are adequate quantities of ice in suitable refrigerated
storage on the Site at the plant to meet the anticipated daily and hourly production rates of
concrete during the hot weather period.
15.5.6 Liquid Nitrogen
1 Freshly mixed concrete maybe cooled by the injection of liquid nitrogen.
2 Care shall be taken to ensure that the concrete directly adjacent the injection nozzle is not
ar
frozen.
at
3 The use of liquid nitrogen for cooling concrete shall include a nitrogen supply vessel and
injection facility for the batching plant or one or more injection stations for truck mixers.
-Q
4 The system may be set up at the Site for injection just before placing.
LL
5 Proper safety precautions as advised by the supplier of the liquid nitrogen shall be used.
W
15.6 BATCHING AND MIXING

s
1 The drums of concrete mixer trucks shall be painted white to minimise solar heat gain.
en
2 Where a truck mixer has been left standing in the sun, the empty drum shall be sprayed with
water and the drum flushed out with cold water before batching. Care shall be taken to
m
ensure all water is removed from the drum before batching.

e
Si
3 The temperature of the concrete shall be checked after discharge from the mixer and written
on the delivery ticket. Temperature check shall be carried out at the plant on the concrete
3
floor for every 50 m produced or every hour which ever is the minimum.
4 A water-reducing, set-retarding chemical admixture conforming to the requirements of BS EN

480 Parts 1, 2 and 4 may be used in varying proportions under different air temperature
conditions.
15.7 TRANSPORTATION
1 The transportation, placing, compaction and finishing of concrete shall be at the fastest
possible rate. Delivery of concrete to the Site shall be properly scheduled to match the rate of
placement and compaction.
15.8 PLACING AND FINISHING
1 If the temperature of the first truck of concrete of a particular pour is above the specification
maximum temperature limit then placing shall not commence.
2 If a pour is in progress and the temperature of a particular truck exceeds the maximum
permitted temperature the placing may be allowed to continue at the discretion of the
Engineer in order to avoid the possible development of a cold joint.
3 However, no further concreting pours shall take place until the Contractor has submitted
revised calculations, in accordance with ACI 305R clause 3.1 to demonstrate that the
maximum temperature will not be exceeded in the future. Before beginning new pours the
temperature of the concrete constituent materials shall be monitored to verify that they meet
the assumptions of the calculations.
15.9 CURING AND PROTECTION
1 Curing and protection shall conform to the requirements of Part 10 of this Section.
2 Evaporation shall be minimised, particularly during the first few hours subsequent to placing
concrete, by suitable means such as applying moisture by fog spraying or any other means
acceptable to the Engineer.
ar
at
15.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING
1
-Q
All thermometers used for the measurement of concrete temperature shall be calibrated
weekly against a glass mercury thermometer. Calibration shall be carried out over the
temperature range of 10 C to 100 C using a water bath with ice or heating.
LL
2 The method used to determine acceptance of temperature controlled concrete should be in

W
accordance with ASTM C1064.
3 All concrete test specimens for strength or other purposes shall be carefully protected and
s
cured.
en
4 Specimens shall be protected from accidental damage by plant personnel or equipment on

m
Site.
e
5 Specimens shall be kept moist by the addition of water or covering by suitable curing
Si
materials.
6 The exact time of preparation of the specimen on Site shall be noted and the time when it is
transferred to the laboratory. These times shall be written on the test report.
END OF PART
Part 16: Miscellaneous
16 MISCELLANEOUS .................................................................................................. 2
16.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
16.1.1 Scope 2
16.1.2 References 2
16.2 PAVEMENT QUALITY CONCRETE ........................................................................ 3
16.2.1 Scope 3
16.2.2 Mix Designs 3
16.2.3 Cement 4
16.2.4 Water 4
16.2.5 Aggregates 5
16.2.6 Admixtures 5
16.2.7 Air content 5
16.2.8 Density 5
16.3 CEMENTITIOUS GROUT ........................................................................................ 6
ar
16.3.1 General 6
16.3.2 Material 6
at
16.3.3 Workmanship -Q 6
16.4 SCREEDS ............................................................................................................... 7
16.4.1 Scope 7
16.4.2 General 7
LL
16.5 CELLULAR CONCRETE ......................................................................................... 9

W
16.6 REPAIR OF CONCRETE ........................................................................................ 9

16.6.1 General 9
s
16.6.2 Honeycombing or Spalling 9

en
16.6.3 Crack injection 11

16.7 POLYESTER RESIN CONCRETE (PRC) - PIPING SYSTEMS FOR NON-
m
PRESSURE DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE ......................................................... 13

e
16.7.1 General 13
Si
16.7.2 Resin 13
16.7.3 Minimum strength 14
16 MISCELLANEOUS
16.1 GENERAL
16.1.1 Scope
1 This Part deals with miscellaneous items related to concrete works including pavement
quality concrete, no fines concrete, lightweight concrete, cementitious grout, screeds, repair
of concrete and guniting.

This Section
Part 2, .............. Aggregate
Part 3, .............. Cementitious Material
Part 4, .............. Water
ar
Part 5, .............. Admixture
at
Part 7, .............. Concrete Plants -Q
Part 8, .............. Transportation and Placing of Concrete
Part 9, .............. Formwork
Part 10, ............ Curing
Part 15, ............ Hot Weather Concreting.
LL
16.1.2 References
W

s
ACI 506, .....................Guide to Shotcrete

en
ASTM C989 –10, ........Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and
Mortars
m
BS 146,.......................Portland-blast furnace cement

e
BS 812,.......................Testing aggregates
Si
BS 1881,.....................Testing concrete
BS 2782,.....................Methods of testing plastics
BS 3892,.....................Pulverised fuel ash
BS 4551,.....................Methods of testing mortars, screeds and plasters
BS 5075,.....................Concrete admixtures
BS 6319,.....................Testing of resin and polymer / cement compositions for use in
construction
BS 6610,.....................Specification for pozzolanic pulverised-fuel ash cement.
BS 8203,.....................Code of practice for installation of resilient floor coverings.
BS 8500,.....................Concrete
BS EN 197-1, .............Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for
common cements
BS EN 480,.................Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test methods (parts: 1, 2,
4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 11, and 12)
BS EN 934,.................Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout (parts: 2, 6)
BS EN 998,.................Specification for mortar for masonry
BS EN 1744-1, ...........Tests for chemical properties of aggregates. Chemical analysis

BS EN 12350,.............Testing fresh concrete
BS EN 12390-5, .........Flexural strength of test specimens
BS EN 12620,............. Aggregates for concrete
EN 197-4:2004 ...........Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for low

EN 197-4, ...................Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for low
EN 12350, ..................Testing fresh concrete
EN 1744-1, .................Tests for chemical properties of aggregates. Chemical analysis
GSO EN 206-1, ..........Concrete Specification, performance, production and conformity
SHW 1000 ..................Specification for Highway Works – UK ROAD PAVEMENTS –
CONCRETE MATERIALS
ar
16.2 PAVEMENT QUALITY CONCRETE
at
16.2.1 Scope -Q
1 This Subpart covers the mix design for concrete used for aircraft aprons and roadworks as
surface slabs, continuously reinforced concrete roadbase, and wet lean mix except cement
LL
bound granular material used as a roadbase or sub-base or as a backfill material for

excavations.
W
16.2.2 Mix Designs

s
1 Concrete in rigid or composite pavements shall be one of the grades given in Table 16.1
en
below, in accordance, with the pavement design shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
m
2 All concrete for use in pavements shall be designed mixes or equivalent standard mixes in
e
accordance with the relevant clauses of BS 8500 and GSO EN 206-1, except where
Si
otherwise specified.
3 Prescribed mixes may be used for rapid construction with the approval of the Engineer.
Table 16.1
Pavement Grades
BS 8500 and
BS 8500 and
GSO EN 206-
Pavement Layer GSO EN 206-1
1Designed
Standard Mix
Mix
Surface Slabs
Unreinforced Concrete C40
Jointed Reinforced Concrete ( JRC ) C40
Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement ( CRCP ) C40
Continuously Reinforced Concrete Roadbase ( CRCR ) C40
Ground Anchorage Beam C40
BS 8500 and
BS 8500 and
GSO EN 206-
Pavement Layer GSO EN 206-1
1Designed
Standard Mix
Mix
Wet Lean Mix Concrete 4 C20 ST4

Wet Lean Mix Concrete 1 C7.5 ST1
16.2.3 Cement
1 The general term 'cement' in this Part means the materials shown below.
Cement Complying with
ar
Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for EN 197-1
common cements
at
Portland blast furnace cement -Q BS 146 or EN 197-4
Specification for pozzolanic pulverised-fuel ash cement (grades BS 6610

C20 or below)
LL
2 The use of a combination of Portland cement and ground granulated blast furnace slag is
permitted subject to the approval of the Engineer. In such cases, the Engineer will stipulate
W
the minimum combined cementitious material content required for the mix.
s
3 The use of a combination of Portland cement and pulverised fuel ash (PFA) is permitted
en
subject to the approval of the Engineer. In such cases, the Engineer will stipulate the
minimum combined cementitious material content required for the mix. PFA shall be in
e m
4 The use of microsilica in the mix designs will be permitted if approved by the Engineer.
Si
5 The Engineer will stipulate the minimum combined cementitious material content required for
the mix where PFA or GGBFS are used.
6 The maximum proportion of ground granulated blastfurnace slag with Portland cement shall
be as per Table 6.6 of Part 5.6.
7 In combination with Portland cement, the proportion of PFA by mass to the total cement shall
be as per Table 6.6 of Part 5.6.
8 The limit of chloride content of the concrete shall be as stated in Table 6.5 of Part 5.6.
9 The minimum cement content for concrete pavements shall be preapproved by Qatar
Standards.
16.2.4 Water
1 Water for use in the making and curing of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Part
4 of this Section.
2 The water content shall be the minimum required to provide the agreed workability for full
compaction of the concrete to the required density, as determined by trial mixes or other
means approved by the Engineer..
16.2.5 Aggregates
1 The requirements of Part 2 of this specification will govern, except as modified below.
2 Aggregates for all pavement concrete shall be complying with BS EN 12620
3 Alternatively coarse aggregate of recycled and secondary aggregate materials may be used
to replace up to 50% by mass of coarse aggregate
4 The nominal size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 40 mm. When the spacing between
longitudinal reinforcement is less than 90 mm, the nominal size of coarse aggregate shall not
exceed 20 mm.
ar
5 If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out tests on the proposed aggregate
combination to check for the possibility of alkali silica reaction. Such tests shall be carried out
at
in accordance with the procedure laid down in Part 2 of this Section.
-Q
16.2.6 Admixtures
1 Plasticisers or water reducing admixtures shall comply with BS 5075, BS EN 480 and BS EN
LL
934. Admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used.

W
2 Other chloride-free admixtures may be used with the approval of the Engineer.
16.2.7 Air content

s
en
1 The total quantity of air in air-entrained concrete as a percentage of the volume of the mix
shall be 5  1.5 % for mixes of nominal aggregate size 20 and be 4  1.5 % for mixes of
m
nominal aggregate size 40.

e
Si
2 The air content shall be determined at the point of delivery by a pressure type air meter in
accordance with BS EN 12350-7, at the rate of one determination per 300 m2 of slab or at
least six times per day whichever is the greater, in conjunction with tests for workability and
strength. For areas less than 300 m2, the rate shall be at least one determination to each 20
m length of slab or less constructed at one time or at least three times per day. If the air
content is outside the specified limits, a further determination shall be made immediately on
the next available load of concrete before discharging. If the air content is still outside the
limit, the Contractor shall immediately adjust the air content of the concrete to improve its
uniformity, before further concrete is used in the Works.
3 The air-entraining agent shall be added at the mixer, by an apparatus capable of dispensing
the correct dose within the tolerance for admixtures given in EN 206-1, and so as to ensure
uniform distribution of the agent throughout the batch during mixing.
16.2.8 Density
1 The density of concrete Grades greater than C30 shall be such that without air-entrainment
the total air voids are not more than 3 %. With air entrainment, the total air voids shall be not
more than 8 %, for 20 mm aggregate or 7 % for 40 mm aggregate.
2 The density of concrete Grades B15 and B20, mix ST4 or below shall be at least 95 %, of the
theoretical maximum dry density.
16.3 CEMENTITIOUS GROUT
16.3.1 General
1 This Subpart covers a general purpose non-shrink cementitious grout. The grout shall be
used to where it is necessary to eliminate shrinkage when filling the void between a base
plate and a substrate such as in the grouting of stanchion bases, anchorage fixings, including
masts, anchor bolts and fence posts.
2 The grout shall be supplied by a reputable construction chemical company as a single pack
prepackaged cement based product which is chloride free.
3 For a particular application, the Contractor shall submit a method statement detailing how the
formwork will be placed and the points where the grout will be poured.
ar
4 Before beginning work on large repetitive works, the Contractor shall arrange for a site trial of
at
the materials and methods with the suppliers representative being present to train the
-Q
Contractor’s personnel in the correct use of the material.
16.3.2 Material
LL
1 The grout shall be suitable for filling gaps of thickness up to 100 mm and shall be free flowing
and non shrink.
W
2 Positive volumetric expansion shall take place while the grout is plastic by means of gaseous
s
expansion to avoid shrinkage and cracking.

en
3 The compressive strength of the grout when tested in accordance with BS EN 12390-3 shall
m
be a minimum of 25 MPa at 24 h, 40 MPa at 7 d and 50 MPa at 28 d.

e
4 The grout shall exhibit a high early strength gain yet not be subject to cracking or other
Si
detrimental effects.
5 At ambient temperatures above 35 C, cool water shall be used for mixing the grout before
placing.
16.3.3 Workmanship
1 The storage handling and pouring of the grout shall be in strict accordance with the
2 The substrate surface shall be free from oil grease or loose or partially bonded material.
3 If the concrete surface is defective or has laitance it shall be cut back to a sound base.
4 Bolt holes and fixing pockets shall be blown clean of dirt or debris.
5 The substrate shall be soaked with fresh potable water before grouting, although immediately
before grouting, free water shall be removed and blown out of bolt holes or pockets.
6 Grout shall not be placed in a gap of less than 25 mm for base plates larger than 1 m wide.
For larger base plates or flow areas the manufacturers instructions shall be followed.
7 Base plates and metallic items shall be clean and free from oil, grease, or scale.
8 Vent holes shall be provided to allow the release of air from isolated spots.
9 Formwork shall be made leak proof by the use of form rubber strip or mastic sealant between
the constructive formwork and joints. Formwork shall extend above the required pour height
and if necessary shall be extended to allow a hydrostatic head to aid placement.
10 The grout shall be mixed mechanically with a slow speed drill fitted with a high-shear mixer.
11 The quantity of water to be added to the preweighed bags shall be enough to give the
desirable consistency as trowelable or flowable.
12 Mixing shall take place for a minimum of 5 min.
ar
13 The grout shall be placed within the time limit specified by the manufacturer depending on
at
the actual application temperature.
-Q
14 Grout shall be poured from one side and it shall be verified that the grout has flowed under all
of the base plate with no voids. Pouring from several sides shall not be permitted.
LL
15 Exposed areas of grout shall be thoroughly cured in accordance with Part 10 of this Section.
W
16.4 SCREEDS
s
16.4.1 Scope
en
1 This Subpart covers screeds that provide by means of a layer of mortar a level surface in
flooring applications and to provide falls on flat concrete roofs.
e m
16.4.2 General
Si
1 Screeds shall be suitable for application onto a concrete substrate.
2 The screeds shall be suitable for receiving surface finishes which may arrange from thin
flexible sheeting to ceramic tiling. The screed is not intended to be the final wearing surface.
3 Screed mortars shall generally comprise sand and cement modified by additives or
substituted by other materials such as polymers in order to provide specific performance
requirements.
4 For screeds of thickness greater than 40 mm it is permissible to incorporate a proportion of

10 mm aggregate.
5 Aggregates used for screeds shall not contain deleterious materials such as coal or iron
particles which may affect the finish the surface of the screed.
6 Admixtures for mortar screeds shall assist workability or alter rates of setting and hardening
and shall comply with the appropriate part of BS EN 480 and BS EN 934.
7 Polymer based additives may be used to improve adhesion and strength of thin or featured
screeds, these shall be based on polyvinyl acetate (PVA) styrene bituene rubber (SPR) or
acrylic polymers.
8 Ready to use sand cement screeds shall comply with the material requirements BS EN 998.
9 Screeds with a rapid drying time to enable earlier floor finishes to be applied shall be used
strictly in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions.
10 The interface of the screed in the concrete substrate shall be specified as one of the
following options by the Engineer:
(a) Monolithic with the concrete base: The screed shall be applied within 3 hours of
placing the concrete base.
(b) Bonded to the concrete base: Screed shall be laid onto a concrete base which is
hardened and is subsequently been prepared to receive the screed, the minimum
thickness of the screed shall be 25 mm and the maximum thickness 40 mm.
ar
(c) As an unbonded screed: The screed shall be laid on a separating layer.
at
(d) As a floating screed: The screed shall be laid on an insulating material.
-Q
11 The cement and sand screed mix shall have the minimum amount of water added to give
sufficient workability and allow the material to be thoroughly compacted.
LL
12 Pan type mixes shall be used to ensure efficient mixing of materials, the cement to aggregate
ratio shall be between 1 to 3 and 1 to 4.5 by weight. The mixing of the sand cement, water
W
and admixtures shall ensure a thorough homogeneous mixture with no balling up of the
cement.
s
en
13 Screeds shall be laid either between carefully levelled and trued batons or between strips of
screed laid and compacted to a finished level.
m
14 For bonded screed where a high degree of bond is required the surface laitance of the
e
concrete base shall be mechanically removed to expose the coarse aggregate. A thin layer
Si
of neat cement grout shall be applied to the prewetted or dampened concrete and the screed
applied and compacted while the grout is wet.
15 Screeds shall be fully compacted by heavy hand or mechanical tamping. The screed at joints
around the perimeter shall be particularly well compacted to avoid breaking out and curling.
16 Screeds thicker than 50 mm shall be laid in two approximately equal layers; screed shall be
kept protected by waterproof sheeting for at least 7 days after laying.
17 Sheet and non ceramic tiling finishes shall only be applied after the screed has cured and
necessary strength achieved.
18 If requested by the Engineer the Contractor shall carry out a soundness and impact test in
19 Screeds shall be laid in bays of a size to minimise thermal moisture contraction. Contraction
or movement joints shall be provided as appropriate, where shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. Bays shall be laid alternatively.
20 Bay sizes shall be approximately 15 m2 for 100 mm thick screed and 12 m2 for 75 mm thick
screed.
16.5 CELLULAR CONCRETE
1 Cellular Concrete (CC) is conventional concrete, where natural aggregate (gravel) is

exchanged for an insulation medium, namely air, embedded in an organic and bio-
degradable foam. It behaves, like conventional concrete, in particular concerning curing,
hardening and most important "ageing ". CC infinitely increases its strength by hydration as
long as exposed to humidity in the atmosphere.
2 CC offer more thermal insulation and a substantially higher fire-rating than conventional
concrete.
3 Minimum compressive strengths shall be 4.0 MPa.
4 The required density and strength of the CC shall be specified on the drawings and approved
ar
by the Engineer.
at
5 The method of production of Cellular Concrete shall be shown on the drawings or directed by
-Q
the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit full technical details of the materials and method of
production for the CC along with a list of previous projects where the particular system has
been used.
LL
6 After source approval of the material and system the Contractor shall submit a mix design for
the CLC for the approval of the Engineer. After the review and approval of the mix theoretical
W
mix design the Contractor shall carry out a trial mix to check the workability of the fresh
concrete and to allow samples to be made for compressive strength and density.
s
en
7 The Engineer may also instruct that tests are carried out for abrasion resistance and thermal
insulation properties.
m
8 Cellular Concrete shall not be used for structural reinforced members.

e
Si
16.6 REPAIR OF CONCRETE
16.6.1 General
1 The extent and nature of the defects in concrete shall be established in accordance with Part
15 of this Section. Based on these results the Engineer shall confirm the acceptability of the
work and whether remedial works are required.
2 If remedial works are required the Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement
identifying the specific materials to be used and the sequence of activities for the repair.
3 Only proprietary proven materials that form part of a standard repair system shall be used.
16.6.2 Honeycombing or Spalling
1 Where there is honeycombed concrete or concrete damaged by physical forces such as

impact that has caused spalling, the concrete shall be replaced using a high strength free
flowing cementitious micro-concrete.
2 The areas of repair shall be marked out and agreed with the Engineer.
3 All honeycombed, loose, cracked or friable concrete in these areas shall be removed until
sound concrete is reached. Due account shall be taken of propping or other instructions
given by the Engineer regarding sequences of removal and repair.
4 The equipment and methods used to break out the concrete shall be such that no reinforcing
steel or other embedded items such as conduits, lifting sockets, or other inserts are loosened
or damaged unless so directed by the Engineer.
5 Where the removal of concrete by mechanical means is difficult due to reinforcement

congestion, then the use of high pressure water jetting shall be considered and necessary
provisions for protecting the rest of the structure shall be made.
6 The prepared void shall be profiled so that entrapment of air is avoided during the repair
process using fluid micro-concrete.
7 The minimum depth of repair shall be 40 mm throughout. The perimeter of the area to be
repaired shall first be cut to a depth of 10 mm using a suitable tool. Feather edges will not be
accepted.
ar
8 The prepared concrete surface shall be sound and clean and free of loose particles, dust and
at
debris.
9
-Q
Where exposed reinforcement is sound, it shall be mechanically cleaned of rust and loose
millscale.
LL
10 Reinforcement damaged during the removal of concrete or the preparation process shall, if
required by the Engineer, be repaired or replaced.
W
11 Adequate formwork shall be provided in accordance with of Part 9 of this Section. This shall
be securely fixed to withstand the hydraulic pressures of the fluid micro-concrete repair
s
material without distortion or movement during placement.

en
12 The formwork shall be watertight at all joints between panels and between the formwork and
the existing concrete surface so as to prevent grout leakage.
e m
13 The formwork shall be constructed from appropriate materials as agreed with the Engineer to
achieve the required finish.
Si
14 Formwork surfaces that are to be in contact with the repair micro-concrete shall be treated
with a suitable mould release agent. This shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
15 The entry point of the feed pipe into the form shall be at the lowest point of the void. Sufficient
hydrostatic head or pumping pressure shall be maintained to ensure that the void is filled
completely and no air remains entrapped.
16 Where necessary, provision shall be made for controllable bleed points to prevent air
entrapment and enable the extent of flow of the repair material to be assessed.
17 The formwork shall be inspected by the Engineer and, if approved, filled with clean water
which demonstrates that the formwork is grout-tight and saturates the prepared concrete
surfaces. The formwork shall be then be completely drained and resealed
18 In situations where the completed repair will be subjected to constant immersion an epoxy
bonding agent shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions.
19 Both the Compressive strength and Flexural strength shall be at a water:powder ratio of 0.18
and tested at 20 oC
20 The thermal conductivity and the elastic modulus of the repair material shall be compatible
with the host concrete.
21 If requested by the Engineer, recent test results of the material for the following properties
shall be submitted:
(a) thermal conductivity

(b) elastic modulus, BS 1881
(c) expansion characteristics, ASTM C 827, CRD 621-82A
(d) flow characteristic, UK DOT BD 27/86 paragraph 4.6 B.
22 The micro-concrete shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, particularly with regard to water content, mixing equipment and placing
time.
ar
23 As far as possible the placing of the micro-concrete shall be continuous. The mixing
at
operation shall be timed so that there is minimal interruption in the material flow. If, however,
placing is interrupted, the operation shall recommence as soon as possible while the repair
material retains its flow characteristics.
-Q
24 The formwork shall not be removed until the repair micro-concrete has achieved a
LL
compressive strength of at least 10 MPa or as directed by the Engineer.
25 Immediately after removal of the formwork the repair area shall be cured in accordance with
W
Part 10 of this Section.

s
26 The repair material shall:

en
(a) be shrinkage compensated in both liquid and cured states

m
(b) contain no metallic expansion system

(c) be prepacked and factory quality controlled
e
Si
(d) be a free-flowing cementitious material that has a coefficient of thermal expansion fully
compatible with the host concrete and which complies with the requirements of Table
16.3.
Table 16.3
Property requirements of micro concrete
Property Test Method Minimum Value
Compressive strength BS EN 12390-3 @ 28 d 50 MPa

Flexural strength BS 4551 @ 28 d 10 MPa
Anchorage bond BS 8110 Passes
16.6.3 Crack injection
1 This clause of the specification covers non-active cracks within concrete elements caused by
shrinkage or other structural movement. Non-active cracks shall be injected with a low-
viscosity epoxy resin to fill and seal the crack and restore the structural integrity.
2 Before to starting the injection operation it shall be established by testing and investigation
work that cracks manifest within concrete elements due to either or both shrinkage or
structural movement are non-active.
3 The extent of the cracks to be filled will be as directed by the Engineer. The cracks to be
filled shall be marked out in detail on the concrete elements by the Contractor and agreed
with the Engineer before proceeding.
4 The extent of the work may be adjusted by the Engineer as the project proceeds, according
to the conditions found.
5 Grease, oil or other contaminants shall be removed. Algae and other biological growth shall
also be removed by scrubbing with bactericide or detergent and clean water. If necessary,
wire brushes shall be used.
6 Loose or spalling areas of concrete, laitance, traces of paint or other coating materials within
the marked out scope of the work shall be removed.
ar
7 All cracks shall be thoroughly cleaned out using clean, oil-free compressed air. Both the
at
concrete surface and the cracks shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before continuing.
-Q
8 The injection nipples shall be fixed at intervals along the length of each crack. The distance
between each nipple will depend on the width and depth of the crack.
LL
9 Spacing shall be close enough to ensure that the resin will penetrate along the crack to the
next point of injection. This will normally be between 200 mm and 100 mm.
W
10 Each nipple shall be firmly bonded to the concrete surface by using a sealant. The sealant
s
shall be supplied in two pans (liquid base and hardener system). The two components shall
en
be thoroughly mixed together for 3 to 4 min until a putty-like consistency is achieved.
11 The mixed sealant shall be applied to the metal base of each surface-fixed nipple. They shall
m
be pressed firmly into place and held for several seconds until secure. The mixed sealant
e
shall be applied around each embedded nipple, ensuring a complete seal is made. In this
Si
way, all the nipples shall be fixed along the length of the crack.
12 In the case of a wall or slab which is cracked all the way through, nipples shall be located on
both sides with those at the back placed at midway points between those it the front.
13 The surface of the cracks between the nipples shall be sealed with a band of sealant 30 to
40 mm wide and 2 to 3 mm thick. Both sides if cracks which go all the way through a wall or
slab shall be sealed in this way.
14 The prepared cracks shall be allowed to cure for 12 to 24 h. At low ambient temperatures
(5 °C to 12 °C) the curing time will be extended and the Contractor shall ensure that the
surface sealant has adequately cured before continuing.
15 One end of the injection hose shall be attached to the lowest nipple on vertical cracks or to
either end of horizontal cracks.
16 Each crack shall be treated in a single, continuous operation. Sufficient material shall
therefore be made ready before the commencement of the work.
17 The Contractor shall to ensure that sufficient cracks are prepared to provide effective use of
the mixed material.
18 The preparation, mixing and application of the materials shall be undertaken in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor is to ensure that all
necessary tools and equipment are on Site.
19 Both the compressive strength and flexural strength shall be tested at 7 d.
20 The material shall exhibit excellent bond to concrete and when tested for tensile adhesion the
failure shall be in the concrete and not at the interface.
21 The injection resin shall be of a prepackaged or preweighed type and only the use of full units
will be allowed. No part packs or on-Site batching will be allowed under any circumstances.
22 In all operations of storage, mixing and application, the Contractor shall comply with the
health and safety recommendations of the manufacturer and governing authorities.
ar
23 The injected system shall be allowed to cure for 24 h and shall be left undisturbed for this
at
time. -Q
24 The nipples and bands of surface sealant shall then be removed and damaged areas made
good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
LL
25 The injection material shall be compatible with the host concrete and shall have the
properties shown in Table 16.4 when tested in accordance with the relevant standards.
W
Table 16.4
Property Requirement for Epoxy Crack Injection Material
s
en
Property Method Minimum Value
Compressive strength BS 4551, BS 2782 BS 6319 70 MPa

m
Flexural strength BS EN 12390-5

e
Si
16.7 POLYESTER RESIN CONCRETE (PRC) - PIPING SYSTEMS FOR NON-

PRESSURE DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE
16.7.1 General
1 Polyester resin concrete is a mixture formed from aggregates and fillers which are bound
together using a polyester resin (also called Polymer concrete pipes), as defined in ISO
18672-1 or ASTM D 6783 with the amendments given below.
2 Polyester resin concrete is permitted for use in infrastructure drainage and sewage systems
(pipes, manhalls, soakways).
16.7.2 Resin
1 The resin used in the pipe system and manufactured as per ISO 18672-1shall have a
temperature of deflection of at least 85 °C, when tested in accordance with Method A of
ISO 75-2 with the test specimen in the edgewise position. It shall also conform to the
applicable requirements of EN 13121-1.
2 The resin used in the pipe system and manufactured as per ASTM D 6783 shall have a
minimum deflection temperature of 85°C when tested at 1.82 MPa following Test Method
D648. The resin content shall not be less than 7 % of the weight of the sample as determined
by Test Method D2584.
16.7.3 Minimum strength
1 The minimum strength classes for different pipe shapes are given below.
Table 16.4
Minimum strength classes for pipes designated PRC-OC or PRC-TC

Strength class
Nominal size Sc
DN N/mm
PRC-OC PRC-TC
150 ≤ DN ≤ 500 180 180
ar
600 ≤ DN ≤ 1000 145 160
at
1200 ≤ DN≤ 3000 120 -Q 145
Table 16.5
Minimum strength classes for pipes designated PRC-OE or PRC-TE
LL
Strength class
Nominal width/height Sc
W
WN/HN
N/mm
s
PRC-OE PRC-TE
en
300/450 ≤ WN/HN ≤ 600/900 180 180

m
700/1050 ≤ WN/HN ≤ 1000/1500 145 160

e
1200/1800 ≤ WN/HN ≤ 1400/2100 120 145

Si
Table 16.6
— Minimum strength classes for pipes designated PRC-OK or PRC-TK
Strength class
Sc
Nominal size
DN N/mm
PRC-OK PRC-TK
800 ≤ DN ≤ 1000 145 160
1200 ≤ DN ≤ 1800 120 145
END OF PART
Part 17: Structural Precast Concrete
17 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE .................................................................. 2

17.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
17.1.1 Scope 2
17.1.2 References 2
17.1.3 Submittals 3
17.1.4 Qualifications 4
17.1.6 Quality Control 5
17.1.7 Testing 6
17.1.9 Design Loadings, Actions and Structural Members Selection 7
17.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................ 8
17.2.1 General 8
17.2.2 Reinforcing Bars 8
ar
17.2.3 Bearing Pads 8
17.2.4 Embedded Steel 8
at
17.3 FORMING ............................................................................................................... 8
-Q
17.3.1 General 8
17.3.2 Tolerances 9
17.4 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 9
LL
17.4.1 General 9
17.4.2 Survey 9
W
17.4.3 Guying, Bracing and Shoring 9

17.4.4 Adjustment and Correction 9
s
17.4.5 Erection Tolerances 10

en
17.4.6 Welding 10
17.4.7 Grouting 10
m
17.4.8 Field Cutting 10

e
Si
17 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
17.1 GENERAL
17.1.1 Scope
1 The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Structural Precast
Concrete Work.
This Section
Part 3 ............... Cementitious materials
Part 5 ............... Admixtures
ar
Part 6 ............... Property requirements
Part 7 ............... Concrete Plants
at
Part 8 ............... Transportation and placing of concrete
-Q
Part 9 ............... Formwork
Part 10 ............. Curing
Part 11 ............. Reinforcement
Part 15 ............. Hot weather concreting
LL
17.1.2 References
W
s
AASHTO ....................Standard Specification for Highway Bridges, Section 25

en
ACI 523.2R .................Guide for Precast Cellular Concrete Floor, Roof, and Wall Units
m
ACI 533R ....................Guide for Precast Concrete Wall Panels

e
ACI 533.1R .................Design Responsibility for Architectural Precast-Concrete Projects

Si
ACI 543R ....................Design, Manufacture, and Installation of Concrete Piles

ACI 550.1R-09............Guide to Emulating Cast-in-Place Detailing for Seismic Design of
Precast Concrete Structures
ASCE/SEI 7-05...........Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures
ACI 318-11 .................Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
BS 8110......................The structural use of concrete.

BS EN 1991-1-4 .........Eurocode 1. Actions on structures. General actions. Wind actions
BS EN 1992-1-1 .........Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for
buildings
ISO 9000, ..................Quality management systems. Fundamentals and vocabulary
Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) , Manual 116

17.1.3 Submittals
1 Manufacturer's Literature:
(a) the Contractor shall provide copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation
instructions for each item of proprietary material to be used, showing compliance with
this specification. Information on equipment, embedded items and other accessories
shall also be provided.
2 Design Mixes:
(a) copies of mix designs with support material

(b) the requirements of the mix design shall be in accordance with Parts 6 and 7 of this
Section.
3 Product Design Criteria:
(a) loadings for design:

(i) initial handling and erection stresses
ar
(ii) all dead and live loads as specified on the contract drawings or as required
at
(iii) all other loads specified for the member where they are applicable.
-Q
4 Product Design Calculations:
(a) the design calculations shall be performed by a Structural Engineer experienced in

precast concrete design. They shall cover all stages of handling, transportation and
LL
erection. The design shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS
EN 1992-1-1 or relevant ACI codes, and shall be accepted by the Engineer.
W
(b) calculations for the design of precast members shall be supported by a statement
explaining the principle of design and type of analysis adopted
s
(c) the influence of individual members in achieving the overall stability of the structure
en
should be considered
(d) computer programmes used in the designs shall be fully described and details of input
m
and printout shall be presented in a manner which can be readily understood and the
following requirements shall be met:
e
(i) programme manuals and instructions to programme users shall be made

Si
available to the Engineer upon request

(ii) where such programme cannot be demonstrated by the Contractor to have been
fully checked or where the Engineer considers it necessary, the Contractor shall
run such test examples as the Engineer may choose, in order to verify the
completeness and accuracy of the programme
(e) members that are exposed to the weather shall be designed to provide for the
movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on
fasteners or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night
temperature ranges
(f) precast systems shall be designed to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection
of other building structural members and the clearance of intended openings
(g) calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with BS 8110 or BS
EN 1992-1-1, or relevant ACI codes.
5 Shop Drawings. The Contractor shall provide the following information for the approval of the
Engineer:
(a) layout plans and detailed fabrication and placement drawings for each structural
precast element
(b) shop drawings are to include the following information:

(i) size, grade, profile and dimensions of all materials used
(ii) connection and anchorage details
(iii) lifting devices, locations and handling limitations
(iv) steel reinforcement details
(v) all openings, sleeves, inserts and other provisions in full co-ordination with all
trades in the Contract
(vi) identification marks.
6 Erection Procedures:
(a) detailed outline of sequence and methods of erection including but not limited to types,
capacities and numbers of cranage, methods of support and transportation.
7 Fabrication Records:
(a) A record shall be kept for every piece of precast element produced showing the
ar
following:
at
(i) type and number
(ii) date of pour
-Q
(iii) concrete test results
(iv) shop drawing reference number
LL
(v) type and duration of curing

(vi) date of delivery to Site
W
(vii) date of fixing in position.

s
8 Test Reports:
en
(a) copies of all testing and inspection reports.

m
9 Trial Panels:
e
(a) the Contractor shall produce trial panels in accordance with the requirements of
Si

(b) trial panels shall be retained for reference purposes for the acceptance of the
production work.
17.1.4 Qualifications
1 Structural precast work shall be executed by an approved specialist Subcontractor for casting
and also for transportation, handling and erection.
2 The Contractor may execute this work himself if he can satisfy the Engineer that he has
sufficient experience and expertise in this field. As a minimum the Contractor shall:
(a) provide satisfactory evidence that his tradesmen and their supervisory personnel
engaged in such work have successful experience with work comparable to that
shown and specified
(b) provide details of organised quality control and testing procedures.
1 The precast concrete supplier shall have a quality assurance scheme that meets ISO 9000 or
equivalent.
2 All work shall be performed to secure for the project homogeneous concrete having the
required strength, surface finish, materials, durability, and weathering resistance, without
planes of weakness or other structural defects, and free of honeycombs, air pockets, voids,
projections, offset of plane and other defacements of concrete.
3 No alterations or substitutions of the structural systems shown on the Drawings are permitted
unless otherwise specified.
4 The Contractor shall supervise and co-ordinate all phases of the structural precast concrete
construction process and be responsible for the complete manufacturing process.
5 All methods of manufacture and practices of handling raw materials and manufactured
concrete shall be reviewed by the Engineer before execution of the structural precast
concrete work, at least 14 days before the beginning of precasting work.
6 Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work.
7 All materials shall be properly selected, reviewed and approved by the Engineer before use,
and maintained during shipment, storage and use.
ar
8 Construction systems and techniques shall be properly selected, reviewed and approved by
at
the Engineer before use, and maintained throughout the complete structural precast concrete
construction phase.
-Q
9 Adequate spare equipment, parts, additional components and repair facilities shall be
available for all tools and equipment.
LL
10 Regardless of approvals by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be responsible for all materials
and methods of structural precast concrete work.
W
11 If work does not meet the specified requirements, the Contractor shall at no additional cost to
s
the Employer:
en
(a) implement removal, replacement or remedial work

(b) revise procedures or materials to prevent recurrence of unacceptable work.
m
17.1.6 Quality Control

e
Si
1 The Contractor shall prepare and provide his quality control programme for structural precast
concrete work with particular attention to details, pre-checking processes, procedures and
close supervision, and in particular the Contractor shall:
(a) in order to assure that proper work is performed to prevent later corrective actions,
assign at least one experienced supervisor full time to provide quality control for
structural precast concrete work
(b) the assignment will not relieve the Contractor's other quality control personnel of their
duties relative to the quality control of the structural requirements and surface finish of
the structural precast concrete work.
2 The Contractor shall arrange for the training of his quality control personnel who will perform
quality control of structural precast concrete work and whose training shall include but not be
limited to:
(a) materials evaluation

(b) special mix design techniques
(c) mix placement
(d) vibrator selection and use

(e) formwork details formwork protection
(f) release agent use
(g) reinforcing steel
(h) detailing and installation
(i) finishing equipment and techniques
(j) corrective procedures and protection of completed work.
3 The Contractor's quality control personnel shall be responsible for verifying all details
necessary to produce the final structural design objectives.
4 The Contractor's quality control personnel shall also verify the quality of the structural precast
concrete work and guide the production of results which will be within acceptable physical
tolerances
ar
17.1.7 Testing
at
1 Concrete shall be tested as specified in Part 6 of this Section.
-Q
2 The Contractor shall:
LL
(a) furnish labour required to facilitate testing

(b) inform the Engineer with at least one day's advance notice when concrete is to be
W
placed
(c) provide storage facilities for concrete test cubes
s
(d) provide material samples and access to materials as required for testing.
en
3 Should the batching plant be located more than 500 meters away from the site offices, the
m
Contractor shall provide suitable transport acceptable to the Engineer, for the sole use of the
Engineer's staff.
e
Si
4 The Contractor shall station a qualified technician at the casting site to continuously test,
inspect and report on the following:
(a) that concrete testing is being carried out in accordance with the requirements of Part 6
of this Section
(b) check the following and verify conformance with specified requirements and approved
shop drawings:
(i) all reinforcing bars
(ii) all embedded items
(iii) all formwork
(c) check all openings and provisions for co-ordination with all trades in the Contract as
shown on approved shop drawings.
5 The Contractor shall provide facilities and equipment for the conducting of all tests specified
herein except for the strength test which should be carried out by an approved independent
testing agency.
1 The structural precast elements shall be removed from the form without damaging or over
stressing and stored or placed for transportation on a stable bed that will not allow distortion
of the member.
2 Separate stacked members with suitable battens and bracing.
3 Mark each member with an identifying reference or piece mark, and the date of casting.
4 All piece marks are to be correlated with test reports and plan layouts or erection drawings.
5 The structural precast element shall be transported with sufficient battens, bracing, and
supports so as to prevent over-stress by vibration or impact loadings. The Contractor shall
submit his proposed method of transportation to the Engineer for approval.
6 Structural precast units shall be stored, handled and transported in a manner that will avoid
ar
undue strains, hair cracks, staining, or other damage.
at
7 The Contractor shall deliver the units from the casting site to the project Site in accordance
with schedule and proper setting sequence.
-Q
8 Structural precast units shall be stored free of the ground and protected from wind or rain
splashes.
LL
9 The units shall be covered and protected from dust, dirt or other staining materials.
W
10 During fabrication, construction and after erection, the Contractor shall protect the castings to
avoid the possibility of damage.
s
en
17.1.9 Design Loadings, Actions and Structural Members Selection

m
1 The provisions of this Clause shall apply if the Contractor is responsible for the design of the
e
structural precast units.

Si
2 The precast elements shall be designed to withstand all loading conditions against which
strength and serviceability must be measured.
3 Vertical loads shall include the self-weight of precast elements, floor coverings and live loads
as indicated on the contract drawings.
4 The wind loads shall be calculated based on the wind speed provided in Section 1 part 1
clause 1.5.2.
5 Account shall be taken of the loads and deformation caused by temperature and time
dependent deformations. For such purpose 55 °C temperature variation and 90 % relative
humidity should be considered for all members, except exterior elements and facade
o
elements shall consider 85 C.
6 Precast elements shall be designed in accordance with BS EN 1992-1-1 or relevant ACI

code. Design tensile stresses should not exceed the design flexure tensile stress of concrete,
at the particular age of the concrete.
7 Nominal cover to steel including links must meet the durability requirement of severe
condition of exposure and to meet requirement for 2 h period of fire resistance, as provided
for in BS EN 1992-1-1 or relevant ACI code.
8 Total deflection of precast elements should be limited to 1/350 of the span of this element.
9 Plan and design for openings for building services, where required or necessary.
17.2 MATERIALS
17.2.1 General
1 The Contractor shall obtain cement, aggregates and water from a single source, sufficient to
complete the entire structural precast concrete work to assure regularity of appearance and
uniformity of colour.
2 The Contractor shall provide all materials in accordance with and meet all applicable
ar
requirements of this section.
at
17.2.2 Reinforcing Bars -Q
1 Reinforcing bars shall conform to the requirements of Part 11 of this Section
17.2.3 Bearing Pads

LL
1 These shall be Elastomeric neoprene, conforming to AASHTO Standard Specifications for

W
Highway Bridges (Section 25) with the following stipulations:
(a) use unfactored loads for design

s
en
(b) maximum compressive stress, 0.70 MPa

(c) maximum shear stress, 0.07 MPa
m
(d) maximum shear deformation, 1/2 thickness

e
(e) maximum compressive strain, 15 %

Si
17.2.4 Embedded Steel
1 All embedded items shall be of stainless steel Grade 316L.
17.3 FORMING
17.3.1 General
1 Forms and casting beds are to be firmly seated so as not to deflect or be displaced under
concreting or tensioning loads.
2 Correct for thermally induced strains or forces.
3 For member penetrations larger than 150 mm, coring or field cutting is not permitted unless
4 Clean and coat forms with release agent before installation or reinforcing or embedments.
17.3.2 Tolerances
1 Permissible deviations of formed surfaces are not to exceed tolerances outlined in PCI
Manual 116, with items as summarised or modified in Table 17.1
Table 17.1
Tolerances for Structural Precast Concrete
Description Tolerance
Dimensions
Length: 5 mm
Width: 3 mm
Thickness: Stem 3 mm; Flange 2.0 mm.
Embedment or penetration location: 0.2 %
ar
Straightness: 3 mm. for 300 cm
3 mm
at
End squareness:
-Q
17.4 INSTALLATION
LL
17.4.1 General
1 The Contractor’s erection responsibilities include the safe and proper placing, aligning, and
W
levelling of the structural precast elements on the accepted bearing surfaces and affecting
their proper fastening.
s
en
17.4.2 Survey
m
1 Before placement of the structural precast elements the Contractor shall survey and maintain
all temporary supports shown or required to control alignment, and deflection.
e
Si
2 Temporary supports shall be retained until framing elements braced thereby have attained
integral stability in accordance with the design.
17.4.3 Guying, Bracing and Shoring
1 The Contractor shall install in proper sequence and maintain all temporary supports shown or
required to control alignment, deflection and stress levels.
2 Temporary supports shall be retained until framing elements braced thereby have attained
integral stability in accordance with the design.
17.4.4 Adjustment and Correction
1 The Contractor shall compensate and correct for the misaligning affect of temperature, draw
from welding, bolting or erection sequence or grouting.
17.4.5 Erection Tolerances
1 The following erection tolerances shall apply unless otherwise specified in the Contract:
(a) Variations from plumb 6 mm in 6 m run;

12 mm total in a12 m or longer run
(b) Variation from level or elevation 6 mm in runs;
12 mm in 12 m run; maximum 12 mm at
single locations
(c) Variation from position in plan 12 mm maximum.
(d) Offsets in alignment of adjacent
members at joints 1.5 mm in 3 m run, 6 mm maximum.
ar
17.4.6 Welding
at
1 Where permission for welding is given by the Engineer, the following shall apply:
(a)
-Q
welding shall not take place until all adjacent elements to be connected have been
aligned, firmly seated and braced
(b) control of heat build-up by limiting voltage, electrode size, and rate
LL
(c) spalled or heat damaged concrete around weldments shall not be acceptable.
W
17.4.7 Grouting
s
1 Joints, gaps and connections shall be filled with grout as shown on the Drawings and as
en
17.4.8 Field Cutting

e m
1 Field cutting of holes may be done only with the Engineer's concurrence, and only with power
Si
saws or core drills. Steel reinforcement or prestressing strand shall be avoided, where the
reinforcement or strand is damaged the unit shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, or rejected.
2 The maximum hole size shall be 150 mm diameter or as limited by member size or strand
location
3 Any cracks, spalls and sharp corners created by field cutting are to be ground, eased, and
patched with epoxy type bonding and patching compounds.
END OF PART
Part 18: Prestressed Concrete
18 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ................................................................................. 2

18.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
18.1.1 Scope 2
18.1.2 References 2
18.1.3 Submittals 3
18.1.4 Storage and Handling 3
18.2 PRESTRESSING .................................................................................................... 3
18.2.1 General 3
18.2.2 Wires and Strands 4
18.2.3 Sheaths, Cores and Ducts 5
18.2.4 Anchorages 5
18.2.5 Jacking Equipment 5
18.2.6 Tensioning 6
18.2.7 Grouting 7
ar
18.2.8 Grout Mixer 7
18.2.9 Grout Trials 8
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
18 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
18.1 GENERAL
18.1.1 Scope
1 This section describes the requirements for prestressed post-tensioned concrete, including
materials and procedures for installation, stressing and grouting.

This Section
Part 3 ............... Cementitious Material
Part 4, ........... Water
Part 5, ........... Admixtures
ar
Part 6, ............ Property requirements
Part 7, ........... Concrete Plants
at
Part 8, ............ Transportation and placing of concrete
-Q
Part 9, ........... Formwork
Part 10, ........... Curing
Part 11, ........... Reinforcement
Part 15, ........... Hot weather concreting
LL
Part 16, ........... Miscellaneous

W
18.1.2 References
ACI 325.7R ------------- Recommendations for Designing Prestressed Concrete Pavements
s
ACI 343R ---------------- Analysis and Design of Reinforced Concrete Bridge Structures
en
ACI 350.3R ------------- Seismic Design of Liquid-Containing Concrete Structures

ACI 358.1R ------------- Analysis and Design of Reinforced and Prestressed-Concrete
Guideway Structures
m
ACI 372R ---------------- Design and Construction of Circular Wire- and Strand-Wrapped
Prestressed-Concrete Structures
e
ACI 373R ---------------- Design and Construction of Circular Prestressed Concrete Structures
Si
with Circumferential Tendons

ACI 423.3R ------------- Recommendations for Concrete Members Prestressed with Unbonded
Tendons
ASTM A881/A881M -- Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, Stress-Relieved or

Low-Relaxation for Prestressed Concrete Railroad Ties
ASTM A882/A882M--- Standard Specification for Filled Epoxy-Coated Seven-Wire
Prestressing Steel Strand
ASTM A641/A641M – Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel
Wire
ASTM A416/A416M-10 Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for
AWWA D110-------------Wire- and Strand-Wound, Circular, Prestressed Concrete Water

Tanks
BS 1881......................Testing Concrete.
BS EN 12350,.............Testing fresh concrete
BS EN 12390,.............Testing hardened concrete

BS 5896,.....................Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for the prestressing
of concrete.
BS EN 1992 Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures
GSO ISO 1920, .......... Testing of concrete
18.1.3 Submittals
1 Samples
(a) a 1 m length sample of strand shall be taken from every 1000 m of strand to be
installed in the works with a minimum of one sample of strand per reel, on Site in the
presence of the Engineer for strength test at an independent laboratory approved by
the Engineer. A reel shall only be accepted if both the breaking load and the 0.1 %
proof load of the sample exceed the characteristic load given in BS 5896 Table 6
(b) a minimum of three samples of strand shall be taken at random from each reel of
prestressing steel on Site in the presence of the Engineer. The reels on Site shall only
be accepted if the relaxation values determined by the tests are equal to or lower than
ar
the specified relaxation class of BS 5896.
(c) Sample requirements and frequency for prestressing wire shall meet the requirements
at
of AWWA D110 and ACI 372R.
2
-Q
Technical details of the proposed materials and equipment shall be submitted. Details of the
jack type and size shall be submitted to allow for clearances to be checked. A calibrated
stress-recording device shall be used. Design Data. The Contractor shall submit:
LL
(a) details of the proposed grout mix design

(b) tendon extension calculations
W
(c) vent pipe spacing and location details.

(d) detailed execution and shop drawings
s
en
(e) calculation notes
3 Other Submittals. The Contractor shall also submit:

m
(a) Curriculum vitae and experience record of the supervisor proposed, who shall have a
e
minimum of five years experience in such a position

Si
(b) Safety procedures, including warning signs, barricades and communication between
different stressing locations
(c) The name of the proposed the prestressing company, giving details of previous
projects.
18.1.4 Storage and Handling
1 Prestressing steel shall be stored on palettes at least 300 mm above the ground, and be
protected from contamination by wind blown sand or rain.
2 Prestressing strand shall be in coils of sufficiently large diameter to ensure that the strand
pays off straight.
18.2 PRESTRESSING
18.2.1 General
1 Prestressing operation shall be carried out only under the direction of an experienced and
competent supervisor and all personnel operating the stressing equipment shall have been
properly trained in its use.
2 In addition to the normal precautions against accident, which should be taken at all times for
the whole of the Works, special care shall be taken when working with or near tendons which
have been tensioned or are in the process of being tensioned.
3 The system of prestressing used shall be a system approved by the Engineer. Such system
shall be used strictly in accordance with the recommendations of the system manufacturer.
4 Under no circumstances shall equipment or fittings designed for use with one system of
prestressing be used in conjunction with equipment and fittings designed for use with another
system.
5 Prestressing components shall be stored in clean dry conditions. They shall be clean and
free form loose rust and lose mill scale at the time of fixing in position and subsequent
concreting. Slight rusting of the steel, which can be removed by moderate rubbing, is
acceptable, but the surface shall not show signs of pitting.
18.2.2 Wires and Strands
ar
1 All prestressing strands shall be seven-wire super stabilised low relaxation strands with a
at
Guaranteed Ultimate Tensile Strength (GUTS) of not less than 1770 MPa, complying with BS
-Q
5896 or relevant ASTM standards.
2 All prestressing wire shall be cold-drawn, high-carbon wire meeting the requirements of
ASTM A821/A821M, Type B having a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 1,448 MPa
LL
(210,000 psi) prior to galvanizing. Zinc coating for galvanizing shall meet the requirements of
ASTM A641/A641M, with a minimum weight per unit area of uncoated wire surface of 259
W
g/m2 (0.85 oz/ft2). The minimum ultimate strength of the wire after galvanizing shall be no
less than 1,241 MPa (180,000 psi).
s
en
3 All wires or strands to be stressed at the same time shall be taken from the same parcel. The
coil numbers of the steel used for each tendon shall be recorded.
m
4 Welding of tendons shall not be permitted.

e
Si
5 All cutting of strands shall be carried out using a high-speed abrasive cutting wheel or friction
saw at not less than one diameter from the anchor. Cutting shall take place only after the
Contractor has submitted the stressing records and the Engineer has approved them in
writing. Flame cutting will not be permitted.
6 Tendons shall be built into the Works strictly in accordance with the system which is being
employed.
7 Sufficient strand shall project from the anchorage to allow jacking to take place at the
stressing end of the tendon.
8 The cable (tendons) or individual strands comprising the cable shall not be kinked or bent.
No strand that has become unravelled shall be used.
18.2.3 Sheaths, Cores and Ducts
1 Sheaths shall be accurately located both vertically and horizontally as described in the
Specific Project Specification. Unless otherwise described in the Specific Project
Specification the tolerance in the location of the centre line of the sheath shall be within
5 mm.
2 All sheaths and cores shall be maintained in their correct positions during the placing of the
concrete. Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, sheaths shall be rigidly supported at
points not less than 50 mm and not more than 500 mm apart. The method of support shall be
to the approval of the Engineer.
3 Where sheaths are used, the number of joints shall be kept to a minimum and sleeve
connectors shall be used for jointing. Each joint shall be adequately sealed against the
ingress of material. Joints in adjacent sheaths shall be staggered by at least 300 mm
4 Sheaths shall be kept free of matter detrimental to the bond between the grout and the
ar
sheath and, except for material sealing a sheath joint, between the sheath and concrete.
at
5 Within 24 hours of the concrete being placed the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that
-Q
the tendons are free to move if they are in ducts or that the ducts are free from obstruction.
6 The number and position of grout vents for entry and outlet points and for checking that the
entire length of duct has been adequately grouted, shall be agreed with the Engineer before
LL
the ducts are formed.

W
7 Vents shall be provided at low points in the tendon profile to allow the disposal of water that
may have collected as a result of rain or curing, for example. The vents shall be sealed
s
before grouting operations beginning.

en
18.2.4 Anchorages
m
1 Anchorages, end blocks and plates shall be positioned and maintained in position during
e
concreting so that the centre line of the duct passes axially through the anchorage assembly.
Si
2 All bearing surfaces shall be clean before concreting and tensioning.
3 Anchoring of prestressing wires shall meet the requirements of AWWA D110 and ACI 372R.
18.2.5 Jacking Equipment
1 All jacking equipment used for stressing operations shall be of the type applicable to the
system adopted.
2 Jack and pumps shall be calibrated at an independent facility, in the presence of the
Engineer, before beginning stressing operations. Calibration of the equipment shall take
place at six-month intervals for equipment permanently present on Site. Whenever new
equipment is brought to the Site, or equipment is removed and returned, or serviced,
recalibration of the equipment as described will be required.
3 All gauges, load cells, dynamometers and other devices used for measurement shall have a
reading accuracy of within 2 %.
4 Stressing equipment for prestressing wires shall meet the requirements of AWWA D110 and
ACI 372R.
18.2.6 Tensioning
1 The Contractor shall submit details of the proposed stressing loads and stressing sequence
to the Engineer for approval.
2 Tensioning shall be carried out only in the presence of the Engineer or his representative
unless permission has been granted to the contrary.
3 The Contractor shall ensure that personnel carrying out the stressing are provided with
particulars of the required tendon loads, order of stressing and extensions.
4 Immediately before tensioning, the Contractor shall prove that all tendons are free to move
between jacking points.
5 Unless otherwise permitted in the Contract, concrete shall not be stressed until it has
reached at least the age at which two test cubes taken from it attain the specified transfer
strength. The cubes shall be made and tested as described in BS 1881 , BS EN 12350, BS
ar
EN 12390 or GSO ISO 1920. They shall be cured in similar conditions to the concrete to
which they relate to, and in a manner approved by the Engineer.
at
6
-Q
The friction factors assumed for the calculation of tendon extension shall be verified by on
Site measurement of the force-extension relationship of a typical sample of installed tendons.
7 The Contractor shall establish the datum point for measuring extension and jack pressure to
LL

W
8 The tendons shall be stressed at a gradual and steady rate until they attain the force
required.
s
en
9 The maximum force exerted on the shall not exceed 75 % of the GUTS of the strand. For the
purposes of cable detensioning, where the installed strand is to be discarded the jacking
force may be increased to 80 % GUTS.
e m
10 The force in the tendons shall be obtained from the readings on a load cell or pressure gauge
Si
and the extension of the tendons measured. The two readings shall conform to the limits set
by the Engineer but in all cases the force in the tendon as computed from the extension
measurement shall be within +5 % to -2 % of the force indicated by the gauging system.
11 When stressing from one end only the pull in at the dead end shall be accurately measured
and the appropriate allowance made in the measured extension at the live end.
12 If the calculated and measured extensions vary from each other by more than 6 % then
corrective action shall be taken. This may involve detensioning and retensioning of the
tendons if required by the Engineer.
13 When the required force, including overloads of short duration, has been applied to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, the tendons shall be anchored. The jack pressure shall then be
relieved in such a way as to avoid shock to the anchorage or tendons.
14 If the pull-in of tendons at the completion of anchoring is greater than that acceptable to the
Engineer, the tendons shall be detensioned and the tendon tensioned again.
15 The Engineer may direct that the force in any tendon be tested by rejacking. This will only be
instructed if there is doubt that the calibration of tensioning equipment is accurate. Care shall
be exercised by the Contractor during the retensioning to ensure that the jacking load does
not exceed more than 80 % of the GUTS of the strand.
16 If it is necessary to crop the tendons to enable the ducts to be grouted, this shall be delayed
as long as is practicable up to the time of grouting. In all other cases, unless otherwise
agreed with the Engineer, the tendons shall not be cropped less than three days after
grouting.
17 The Contractor shall keep full records of all tensioning operations, including the measured
extensions, pressure gauge or load cell readings and the amount of pull-in at each
anchorage. Copies of these records, on suitable forms, shall be supplied to the Engineer
within 24 hours of each tensioning operation.
18 Tensioning prestressing wires shall meet the requirements of AWWA D110 and ACI 372R
ar
18.2.7 Grouting
at
1 Grouting shall take place only with the written approval of the Engineer.
-Q
2 All ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned by means of compressed air and all anchorages shall
be sealed before grouting.
LL
3 Ducts shall be grouted as soon as practicable after the tendons in them have been stressed
and the Engineer’s written permission to commence has been obtained. Grout shall be
W
injected in one continuous operation and allowed to flow from the vents until the consistency
is equivalent to that being injected. The maximum time between mixing and injection shall not
s
exceed 30 min.
en
4 The ducts shall be completely filled with grout.

m
5 Vents shall be sealed consecutively in the direction of flow and the injection tube sealed
e
under pressure until the grout has set. The filled ducts shall be protected to the satisfaction of
Si
the Engineer to ensure that they are not subject to shock or vibration for one day.
6 Two days after grouting, the level of grout in the injection and vent tubes shall be inspected
and made good if necessary.
7 The Contractor shall keep full records of grouting including the date each duct was grouted,
the proportions of the grout and admixtures used, the pressure, details of interruptions and
topping up required. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Engineer within three
days of grouting.
8 Prestressing wires shall be protected against corrosion and other damage by a shotcrete
cover coat meeting the requirements of AWWA D110 and ACI 372R
18.2.8 Grout Mixer
1 The grout mixer shall produce a grout of colloidal consistency. The grout injector shall be
capable of continuous operation with a sensibly constant pressure up to 0.7 MPa and shall
include a system of circulating or agitating the grout whilst the actual grouting is not in
progress. All baffles to the pump shall be fitted with sieve strainers size BS 14.
2 The equipment shall be capable of maintaining pressure on completely grouted ducts and
shall be fitted with a nozzle which can be locked off without loss of pressure in the duct.
3 The pressure gauges shall be calibrated before they are first used in the Works and
thereafter as required by the Engineer. All equipment shall be thoroughly washed with clean
water at least once every three hours during grouting operations and at the end of use for
each day.
4 The Contractor shall ensure that standby grouting equipment is available in the event of a
breakdown.
18.2.9 Grout Trials
1 The Contractor shall carry out grouting trails to the satisfaction of the Engineer before actual
grouting taking place.
2 Unless otherwise directed or agreed as a result of grouting trials, the grout shall:
ar
(a) consist only of ordinary Portland cement, water and an approved expansion agent
at
(b) have a water: cement ratio as low as possible consistent with the necessary
-Q
workability. Under no circumstances shall the water: cement ratio exceed 0.4
(c) not be subject to bleeding in excess of 2 % after 3 h or 4 % maximum when measured
o
at 18 C in a covered glass cylinder approximately 100 mm diameter with a height of
LL
approximately 100 mm and the water shall be reabsorbed after 24 h.

W
3 Admixtures containing chloride or nitrates shall not be used. Other admixtures shall be used
only with the written permission of the Engineer and shall be used strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
s
en
4 The grout shall be mixed for a minimum of 2 minutes and until a uniform consistency is
obtained.
e m
END OF PART
Si
Part 19: Testing of Water Retaining Structures
19 TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES................................................ 2

19.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
19.1.1 Scope 2
19.1.2 References 2
19.1.3 Submittals 2
19.1.4 General 2
19.2 TESTING ................................................................................................................. 2
19.2.1 General 2
19.2.2 Cleaning 3
19.3 TESTING PROCEDURE ......................................................................................... 4
19.3.1 Walls 4
19.3.2 Roofs 5
19.3.3 Disposal of Water Used for Testing 5
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
19 TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES
19.1 GENERAL
19.1.1 Scope
1 This Part of the specification applies to the testing of structures that are designed with the
intention of retaining water.
This Section
Part 1 ............... General
Part 13 ............. Inspection and Testing of Hardened Concrete
Part 14 ............. Protective Treatments for Concrete
ar
19.1.2 References
BS 8007......................Code of Practice for Design of concrete structures for the retaining of
at
aqueous liquids -Q
19.1.3 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall record and submit to the Engineer within 24 hours the results of the
LL
watertightness tests carried out.

W
19.1.4 General
1 Water retaining structures shall be watertight when subjected to external groundwater

s
en
pressures or to tests as specified in this Part.
19.2 TESTING
e m
19.2.1 General
Si
1 The Contractor shall test watertightness of water retaining structures including storage
reservoirs and other miscellaneous structures that require to be watertight.
2 All water used for testing shall be potable or irrigation water and the Contractor shall make
arrangements for the supply and disposal of this water.
3 Water retaining structures shall be tested for watertightness after completion, in accordance
with the following method or as directed by the Engineer:
(a) the structure shall be filled with potable or irrigation water in stages not exceeding 1 m
in 24 h held at each water level for such time as the Engineer may require. Should
dampness or leakage occur, the water shall be drawn off and the defects remedied to
the satisfaction of the Engineer
(b) in the case of structures which are subdivided into individual tanks, each individual
tank shall be tested separately. In the case of underground or partially underground
structures, the testing shall take place before application of water proofing membrane,
liner material or perimeter drain, filter material or backfilling is placed against the walls
(c) in the case of hopper bottomed tanks, this shall be taken to mean that no material is
placed against the vertical external walls of the tank, the sloping walls of the hopper
bottoms of the tanks being assumed built directly against the excavation apart from the
blinding concrete
(d) no placing of material against the walls shall take place until the Engineer has given
his written approval and acceptance of the water retaining structures as watertight
(e) filling shall not take place earlier than 28 d after the casting of the final sections of the
structure which will be stressed by the filling of the structure.
(f) testing shall not be undertaken until the structure to be tested has been; completed
structurally including roof, if any, and has been passed by the Engineer in writing as
satisfactory in all respects other than watertightness, especially in regard to the final
finish of the work
(g) not withstanding the satisfactory completion of the seven day test, leakage, cracks,
and damp patches and sweating visible on the outside faces of the structure shall be
rectified from the water face by an injection system to the approval of the Engineer
ar
(h) repair making the outer face only watertight wall not be accepted, this applies to bobbin
at
holes also
(i)
-Q
the structure shall be retested until the watertightness is approved by the Engineer.
(j) should the structure fail a test in the above respects, the Contractor shall immediately
take such steps as may be necessary to:
LL
(i) ascertain the nature and positions of defects or leakage's

W
(ii) empty the structure

(iii) remedy the defects in a manner approved by the Engineer, employing workers
s
who are specialists in this class of work

en
(k) when the remedial work has been completed in the manner approved by the Engineer,
the testing and if necessary rectification shall be repeated until a satisfactory test is
m
achieved.
e
(l) if necessary, in extreme cases of lack of watertightness, the Engineer may reject the
Si
structure or portions thereof.
19.2.2 Cleaning
1 All water retaining structures shall, on completion, be carefully cleaned of all debris, to the
complete satisfaction of the Engineer as follows:
(a) shall be brushed down on all internal faces with a stiff broom while still dry
(b) all resulting debris removed
(c) all associated reservoir pipe work shall be cleaned in accordance with the specified
requirements
(d) the structure shall then be flooded with approximately 75 mm of clean water
(e) whole of internal faces shall be carefully brushed down with stiff brooms using the
water continuously until all faces are clean
(f) water shall then be drained off
(g) walls and floors hosed and flushed with clean water until perfectly clean.
19.3 TESTING PROCEDURE
19.3.1 Walls
1 After completion and cleaning of the structure and all associated pipe work, if any, the
Contractor shall fill the structure up to the top water level and leave for a stabilising period of
21 d in order to allow for absorption and autogenous healing to take place.
2 Water shall be added over this period to maintain the top water level.
3 The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes and specials are available in ample time ahead of
testing.
4 Two sets of evaporation trays shall be provided along with two sets of rain gauges.
5 Levels in the trays and structure shall be made and recorded by a hook gauge with vernier
attachments.
ar
6 Before and during testing, flows in the structure under drainage, if any, shall be monitored,
at
measured and recorded. -Q
7 Each under drain shall be numbered and observations reported by under drain number to
facilitate analysis of the data.
LL
8 All leaks shall be repaired within one month of their detection.

W
9 On the twenty-second day, two shallow watertight evaporation trays of area 0.4 m2 shall be
filled with 75 mm of water and placed to float in the structure.
s
en
10 The water level in the structure shall be recorded and the test commenced and carried out
over the next 7 d.
m
11 Readings of water levels in the structure and trays shall be made and recorded every 24 h
e
over this period.

Si
12 If the water level in the tank falls by more than indicated by the evaporation trays, or other
sign of leakage occurs by the end of the test period then the Contractor shall search and
mark all areas of defect.
13 The structure shall then be emptied and the defects made good as specified herein.
14 After completion of remedial measures the structure shall be refilled and the test repeated.
15 This process shall be repeated until the structure is watertight to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
16 The fall of water level in the structure over the test period of 7 d, minus the fall accounted for
by evaporation and rainfall shall not exceed 1/500 of the average water depth of the full
structure or 10 mm whichever is less.
19.3.2 Roofs
1 The roofs of structures shall be tested for watertightness before laying of roof membrane.
2 Roof and fittings shall be hosed down vigorously and this shall be repeated in such a way as
to keep the roof wet for three successive days.
3 Roof and fittings shall be deemed satisfactory for watertightness if no discernible leaks or
damp patches show in the soffit.
4 Roof covering shall be completed as soon as possible after testing.
19.3.3 Disposal of Water Used for Testing
1 The Contractor shall provide suitable means for disposal of water used for testing, such that
no damage results to facilities, structures or property.
ar
2 These means shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and local authorities.
at
3 Details shall be submitted to Engineer on request.
-Q
4 The Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by his filling, testing, flushing and
wastewater disposal operations.
LL
END OF PART
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 20: Personnel Qualifications and Certification
20 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS ..................................... 2

20.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
20.2 AUDITORS .............................................................................................................. 2
20.3 READY MIXED CONCRETE COMPANIES ............................................................. 2
20.3.1 Technical Department 2
20.3.2 Production and Operation Department 4
20.4 TESTING LABORATORIES .................................................................................... 5
20.4.1 Concrete Laboratory Department 5
20.5 CONTRACTORS ..................................................................................................... 6
20.5.1 Concrete Construction Department 6
20.6 CONSULTANTS ...................................................................................................... 7
20.6.1 Site Supervision Department 7
20.6.2 Site Supervision / Design Office Department 7
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
20 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS
20.1 GENERAL
1 The qualification requirements given in this part are optional unless otherwise mentioned
below. The purpose of the qualifications is to prepare the industry to cope with the required
quality of construction. The requirements will become compulsory as and when stated by
Qatar Standards.
2 Qualifications shall be approved by Qatar Standards or their representatives.
20.2 AUDITORS
1 Qatar Standards auditors and their approved representatives shall be qualified for inspecting
concrete ready mix plants and testing laboratories.
ar
20.3 READY MIXED CONCRETE COMPANIES
at
20.3.1 Technical Department
-Q
1 Position: Technical Manager / QC Manager
LL
Qualifications:
W
(a) Concrete specification review and concrete mixture proportioning

(b) Concrete constituent materials, their characteristics, and effects on concrete properties
s
(c) Fresh and hardened concrete properties

en
(d) Durability of concrete

m
(e) Production and delivery of Ready Mixed Concrete

e
(f) Handling, placing and curing of concrete

Si
(g) Specifying and evaluation of concrete strength

(h) Testing of concrete and its constituents
(i) Quality control procedures and statistical analysis
(j) Hot weather concreting
(k) Troubleshooting concrete problems
2 Position: Site Supervisor
Qualifications:
(a) The supervisor shall be capable of satisfactorily reading, understanding and
performing the below fresh concrete tests:
BS EN 12350-1 ..........Testing fresh concrete - Sampling

ASTM C1064/C1064M Temperature of freshly mixed hydraulic-cement concrete
BS EN 12350-2 ..........Testing fresh concrete – Slump test

BS EN 12350-6 .........Testing fresh concrete – Density
BS EN 12390-2 .........Testing hardened concrete – Making and curing specimens for
strength tests
ASTM C1611/C1611M Standard test method for slump flow of self consolidating concrete
3 Position: Lab Supervisor
Qualifications:
performing the below fresh and hardened concrete tests:
BS EN 12350-1 .........Testing fresh concrete - Sampling

ar
BS EN 12350-2 .........Testing fresh concrete – Slump test
at
BS EN 12350-7 .........Testing fresh concrete – Air content (Pressure Method)
-Q
strength tests
LL
BS EN 12390-3 ..........Testing hardened concrete - Compressive strength of test specimens

BS EN 932-1 .............Aggregates - Methods of sampling
W
BS EN 932-2 .............Aggregates – Methods of reducing laboratory samples

BS EN 933-1 .............Aggregates – Determination of particle size distribution (and dust
s
content)
en
BS EN 1097-6 ...........Aggregates – Determination of particle density and water absorption

m
BS EN 1097-3 ...........Aggregates – Determination of loose bulk density and voids

ASTM C566 – ............Method of determination of moisture content
e
Si
4 Position: Site Technician (compulsory if requested by the Engineer)
Qualifications:
(a) The technician shall be capable of satisfactorily performing the below fresh concrete
tests:

strength tests
5 Position: Lab Technician (compulsory if requested by the Engineer)
Qualifications:
(a) The technician shall be capable of satisfactorily performing the below fresh and
hardened concrete tests:

strength tests
ar
BS EN 12390-3 .........Testing hardened concrete - Compressive strength of test specimens
at
-Q
content)
LL

W
s
20.3.2 Production and Operation Department

en
1 Position: Plant/Production/Operation Manager and/or Supervisor

m
Qualifications:
e
(a) Properties of concrete and its constituents

Si
(b) Materials management

(c) Plant design, function and maintenance
(d) Batching operations, procedures and dispatching
(e) Materials management and inventory
(f) Safety regulations and procedures
2 Position: Plant Operator
Qualifications:
(a) Basic concrete properties and characteristics of its constituents
(b) Scales, meters and batching sequence and control system
(c) Central mixing and discharging
(d) Tolerances, overweight/underweight controls
(e) Troubleshooting scales, gates and other plant components

(f) Safety procedures
20.4 TESTING LABORATORIES
20.4.1 Concrete Laboratory Department
1 Position: Laboratory Manager / QC Manager
Qualifications:
ar
at
(f) Handling, placing and curing of concrete -Q
(g) Evaluation of concrete strength
LL

W

s
en
2 Position: Supervisor
m
Qualifications:
e

Si
performing the below fresh and hardened concrete tests:

strength tests
content)

3 Position: Technician (compulsory if requested by the Engineer)
Qualifications:
(a) The technician shall be capable of satisfactorily performing the below fresh and
hardened concrete tests:

ar
at
strength tests
-Q
LL

W

content)
s

en

e m
20.5 CONTRACTORS
Si
20.5.1 Concrete Construction Department
1 Position: Site Engineer
Qualifications:
(a) The site engineer shall be capable of satisfactorily reading, understanding and
strength tests
2 Position: QC Manager/ QC Engineer/ Material Engineer
Qualifications:
(g) Specifying and evaluating of concrete strength
ar
at
-Q
20.6 CONSULTANTS
LL
20.6.1 Site Supervision Department
1 Position: Site Inspector/ Material Inspector

W
Qualifications:
s
(a) The site engineer shall be capable of satisfactorily reading, understanding and
en

m

e

Si

strength tests
20.6.2 Site Supervision / Design Office Department
1 Position: Material Engineer
Qualifications:

(g) Specifying and evaluating of concrete strength
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
QCS 2014 Section 06: Road Works Page 1
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS & REGULATIONS ................................................ 2
1.2 BENCH MARKS AND MONUMENTS............................................................ 2
1.2.1 General 2
1.2.2 Permanent Monuments 2
1.2.3 Setting Out 3
1.3 EXISTING GROUND LEVELS....................................................................... 3
1.4 MATERIALS TESTING .................................................................................. 4
1.5 NUCLEAR DENSITY TESTING DEVICES .................................................... 5
1.6 TEMPORARY FENCING ............................................................................... 5
1.7 ROAD OPENING ........................................................................................... 5
1.8 CONCRETE WORKS .................................................................................... 5
1.9 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE ................................................. 6
1.10 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT ............................................................................. 6
1.11 ARMED FORCES .......................................................................................... 6
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS & REGULATIONS
1 The information given in this Part is supplemental to QCS Section 1 - General. Reference
should be made to Section 1 – General prior to referring to the clauses in this part of the
specification which cover specific requirements for roadworks and are additional to Section 1
- General.
2 The Government specifications, regulations, notices and circulars mentioned in QCS Section
1 – General are amended and complemented by this Specification as detailed hereafter. In
the case of any ambiguity or discrepancy the provisions of this Specification shall prevail over
the provisions of the aforementioned Government published specifications.
1.2 BENCH MARKS AND MONUMENTS
ar
1.2.1 General
at
1 The Contractor shall consult the Survey Section of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and
-Q
Agriculture prior to any earthworks or site clearance to determine if the work is likely to
disturb survey marks.
LL
2 If the survey section require a survey mark to be moved the Contractor will be responsible for
recreating the survey mark to an approved design and specification, and for re surveying the
point using survey companies approved by the Survey Section.
W
3 On the Practical Completion of the Works the Survey Section will issue a certificate stating
s
that all survey marks, whether disturbed or otherwise, by the Contractor have been reinstated
en
or protected to the satisfaction of the Survey Section.

m
4 In the event of failure to comply with the requirements of this Clause the Government, without
e
the Practical Completion date, carried out by Survey Section from any monies in its hands
Si
due to or which may become due to the Contractor.
5 All pertinent levels, lines and locations must be checked and verified by the Contractor before
commencing the Works.
1.2.2 Permanent Monuments
1 At the time of substantial completion of the whole of the works, a schedule and plan drawings
of all remaining Project related and supplementary bench marks and monuments shall be
prepared and transmitted to the Engineer. All project related bench marks and monuments
made permanent as above will be shown on the as-built plans, including the co-ordinates and
level information for each.
2 Certain bench marks and monuments determined by the Engineer shall be made into
permanent bench marks and monuments.
Part 01: General
3 Fabrication and installation of bench marks and monuments shall be as shown on the
drawings or in the specifications and shall include attaching warning reflectors and painting if
required. Each bench mark and monument shall be set accurately at the required location
and elevation and in such manner as to ensure its being held firmly in place.
4 The Contractor may request the Engineer's approval for concrete monuments, markers and
posts supplied by an established commercial manufacturer, whose capability of producing
survey monuments has been well established by both testing and performance. Written
approval shall be obtained prior to installation of the units on the project.
1.2.3 Setting Out
1 The level datum for the works shall be the Qatar Datum as defined by the PWA.
2 The works shall be set out to the Qatar national grid as defined by the PWA. The Contractor
will be supplied with the details and grid reference of setting out monuments.
ar
3 The works shall be set out in accordance with the standard specification of the PWA.
at
4 Before commencing the works the Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer all information
-Q
pertaining to project related bench marks and monuments bearing local grid co-ordinates.
5 After the Contractor takes possession of the Contract Drawings and has noted all the existing
bench marks, he shall carry out at his own expense the setting out of the works, definition of
LL
levels, centre lines and slopes, all in accordance with the Drawings.
W
6 The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the work in relation
to original points, lines and levels of references given in the Drawings and for the accuracy of
s
the positions, levels, dimensions and alignment of all parts of the work, and for any delay or
en
loss resulting from errors made in completing the setting out of the work.
7 The Contractor shall protect, preserve and be responsible for all existing bench narks, pegs
m
and boundary marks and shall keep these in place or replace them when necessary either in
e
their positions or in other approved positions.

Si
8 Setting out shall be approved by the Engineer before commencing the Works, but such
approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the correct execution of
the works.
1.3 EXISTING GROUND LEVELS
1 The Contractor will survey cross-sections of the site prior to the commencement of works in
any section.
2 The Contractor shall include in his critical path programme the date by which survey work
should be completed in each section of the site. No works may commence in any section
prior to the programme date without the written approval of the Engineer.
3 Sections will be prepared at such intervals as are necessary to give a representative record
of existing conditions and in no case will the intervals exceed 50 metres.
Part 01: General
4 The Engineer may choose to carry out his own survey of the site and in such cases will give
the Contractor 48 hours notice of his intention to carry out survey work in any particular
section of the Site.
5 The Contractor may nominate a representative to be present to observe the survey. If, having
been given such notice, the Contractor fails to appoint a representative or if the
representative should fail to be present during the survey work, the Engineer shall proceed
with the survey which shall be deemed to have been prepared in the presence of the
Contractor.
6 The Contractor shall prepare drawings showing the various cross-sections obtained from the
above survey.
7 The original of the drawings shall be signed by the Engineer and the Contractor as an agreed
record of the existing ground levels.
8 A copy transparency of each original drawing will then be given to the Engineer. These
ar
drawings shall be deemed to be the Contract Drawings replacing the original.
at
1.4 MATERIALS TESTING -Q
1 Reference should be made to the requirements for the provision of facilities and equipment
for the testing of materials given in Section 1.
LL
2 In addition to these requirements the Contractor shall provide a fully equipped site laboratory
or shall arrange for materials and samples to be transported to the Ministry of Environment
W
(MOE) for testing or otherwise specified by the Engineer or the Project Documentation.
s
3 In addition the Contractor shall provide suitable facilities at the asphalt batching plants to
en
enable the Engineer to carry out all necessary tests on the raw materials and mixes. Such
facilities will be subject to the Engineer's approval and the preparation of asphalt mixes shall
m
not be allowed until the facilities have been approved by the Engineer.
e
4 Approved equipment shall be maintained on site at all times to:

Si
(a) Determine the laying and rolling temperature of bituminous materials.

(b) Check surface tolerance by using a straightedge and wedges or rolling straightedge.
(c) Carryout soil grading shape, classification, moisture content and compaction tests, as
required.
(d) Carryout in situ dry density tests.
(e) Carryout bitumen extraction.
5 Equipment shall also be made available when required by the Engineer to take 150 mm
diameter cores from the carriageway.
6 The Engineer may require samples of materials to be delivered to the MOE for additional
tests.
Part 01: General
1.5 NUCLEAR DENSITY TESTING DEVICES
1 No person or company will be permitted to determine in-situ density by mean of a nuclear

density measuring device without complying with the following regulations:
(a) Each device shall have a valid Calibration Certificate issued by the MOE.
(b) Persons operating the device shall hold a valid authorised user certificate issued by the
MOE.
(c) During the operation of the device the person operating it and any assistants shall
wear a suitable film badge or a personal radiation warning alarm. Copies of radiation
exposure report of the film badges should be submitted on monthly basis to the MOE.
1.6 TEMPORARY FENCING
1 Temporary fencing shall be appropriate to the usage of the adjoining land and unless
otherwise described on the drawings may be of a type selected by the Contractor taking into
ar
account the usage of the adjoining land subject to the approval of the Engineer.
at
2 As soon as the Contractor is placed in possession of any part of the site he shall immediately
-Q
erect fencing on the boundaries of the land as shown on the Drawings. In places where
permanent fencing cannot be erected immediately or where none is required, the Contractor
shall erect, and when and where required re-erect and maintain, temporary fencing and
subsequently take down and remove as necessary.
LL
3 The Contractor shall not use barbed wire in areas accessible to the general public. Access
W
shall be made in temporary fencing as necessary for the use of the occupiers of adjacent
lands.
s
en
4 If temporary fencing is removed temporarily for the execution of any part of the Works it shall
be reinstated as soon as possible and in the meantime, subject and without prejudice to the
Conditions of Contract, the gap in the fencing shall be patrolled so that no unauthorised entry
m
onto adjoining land takes place.

e
Si
5 Temporary fencing shall remain in position either until it is replaced by permanent fencing or
until its removal on completion of the Works, unless otherwise described in the contract or
directed by Engineer.
1.7 ROAD OPENING
1 Road openings shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures laid down in The Code
of Practice and Specification for Road Openings in the Highway, prepared by the Ministry of
Industry and Public Works, January 1992.
2 Newly compacted bituminous courses shall not be opened to traffic until they have cooled to
ambient temperature. Longer periods may be applied during the summer months for heavily
trafficked roads at the discretion of the supervising engineer
1.8 CONCRETE WORKS
1 All concrete works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Section 5.
Part 01: General
2 Concrete works shall include; mass concrete, reinforced concrete, in-situ concrete, precast
concrete and prestressed concrete.
3 Concrete works shall be deemed to include reinforcement, formwork and all the other
materials procedures and requirements covered by Section 5 - Concrete.
1.9 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE
1 The standards, codes of practice and other reference documents referred to in the roadworks
section of the specification are listed in the first clause of each of the parts of the
specification.
2 Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer a full set of these documents shall be provided by
the Contractor within 30 days of the commencement of the contract. These documents shall
be kept at the site and shall be available at all times for the use of the Engineer and his staff.
1.10 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
ar
at
1 The Contractor shall comply with all instructions given by the Qatar Traffic Police in relation to
traffic management and road safety. -Q
1.11 ARMED FORCES
LL
1 The Contractor shall comply with all reasonable instructions given by the Qatar Armed
Forces to allow them access to the Works and with the PWA.
W
END OF PART
s
en
e m
Si
Part 02: Site Clearance
2 SITE CLEARANCE .................................................................................................. 2

2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
2.1.2 References 2
2.1.3 Submittals 2
2.2 PROTECTION TO EXISTING SERVICES AND INSTALLATIONS.......................... 3
2.3 RECOVERY OF MATERIALS ................................................................................. 4
2.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING .................................................................................. 4
2.5 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 5
2.6 REMOVAL OF STREET FURNITURE ..................................................................... 6
2.7 REMOVAL OF FENCES .......................................................................................... 6
2.8 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENTS ................................................................. 6
ar
2.8.2 Cutting Back Pavement 6
2.8.3 Stockpiling Asphalt Pavement 7
at
2.8.4 Stockpile Site -Q 7
2.9 MEASURES FOR STATUTORY UNDERTAKERS .................................................. 8
2.10 REMOVAL OR TREATMENT TO BURIED UTILITIES ............................................ 8
2.10.1 General 8
LL
2.10.2 Underground Storage Tanks 8

W
2.10.3 Removal of Culverts 8

2.10.4 Abandoned Pipes and Culverts 9
2.10.5 Total Removal of Pipelines 9
s
en
2.10.6 Grouting of Pipelines 9

2.10.7 Plugging of Pipelines 10
m
2.10.8 Cut-off Walls and Capping Slabs 10

2.10.9 Manholes and Access Shafts 10
e
2.10.10 Drainage Inlets and Gullies 10

Si
2.11 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS.................................................................................. 10

2 SITE CLEARANCE
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope of Work
1 This Part includes:
(a) Excavating for, demolishing and removing wholly or in part and disposing of
designated redundant pavements, fences, buildings, culverts, manholes, inlets, gullies,
pipelines or any other obstructions.
(b) Associated earthworks to uncover facilities to be demolished, removed or recovered
and to backfill and compact all trenches, holes, pits or excavations resultant from
demolition, removal and recovery works.
(c) Recovering designated materials for storage and reuse.
ar
(d) Removing and, where required, recovery of designated water, gas and sewage
pipelines and fittings and of underground cables.
at
(e) Disposal of materials not recovered. -Q
(f) Removal of vegetation and surface boulders and rocks.

LL
This Section: Part 3 Earthworks

W
Part 11 Works in Relation to Services

s
Section 2 Building Demolition

en
Section 5 Concrete
Section 8 Sewerage
m

e
2.1.2 References
Si

BS 5228......................Code of practice for noise control on construction and demolition sites
BS 6187......................Code of practice for demolition
The Guide for Civil Users of Explosives in Qatar prepared by the former Ministry of Industry
and Public Works.
2.1.3 Submittals
1 Where existing services are to remain and are in close proximity to the works the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer details of proposed measures to ensure that the existing
services are kept in a safe and stable condition for the duration of the Works.
2 Structures and installations to be dismantled or demolished shall be surveyed by the

Contractor to ascertain exposed constructional dimensions and details. The Contractor shall
prepare sketches of the structures and installations and submit these to the Engineer. This
information shall be used by the Engineer to confirm the scope of the dismantling or
demolition and confirm materials or equipment to be recovered.
3 The method of dismantling and demolition including the sequence of operations and any
special procedural requirements shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration not less
than seven days before the work is due to begin. Demolition work shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 6187, and the submittal shall include information demonstrating the
Contractor’s proposed methods to attain compliance.
4 Before any blasting operation the Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement for the
work. Blasting work shall be carried out in accordance with The Guide for Civil Users of
Explosives in Qatar, prepared by the former Ministry of Industry and Public Works. Approvals
for blasting work shall be obtained as per the requirements of part 3 of the specification for
rock excavation.
5 The Contractor shall submit for approval his proposed method of grouting pipes to be
abandoned.
6 Before commencing work on the construction of reinforced concrete cut-off walls and
reinforced concrete capping slabs the Contractor shall submit details for the Engineer's
ar
approval.
at
2.2 PROTECTION TO EXISTING SERVICES AND INSTALLATIONS
-Q
1 The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a manner as to avoid hazards to
persons, property and vehicles. After work is started on any structure, work on that structure
LL
shall be continued to completion promptly and expeditiously.
2 Services to unused installations shall be safely disconnected before demolition. Notification

W
of disconnection shall be given to the appropriate authorities.

s
3 Drains, manholes and gullies that are to remain shall be protected and kept clear of debris at
en
all times. They shall be left clean and in working order.

m
4 Details of any underground caverns, chambers, wells or voids discovered during the
demolition operation shall be reported to the Engineer. Dangerous openings shall be
e
protected and illuminated.

Si
5 Precautions shall be taken to prevent leakage or formation of flammable, explosive,

unhealthy or environmentally hazardous gas or vapour.
6 Pits, drains and manholes shall be checked before entry to ensure that the atmosphere is fit
for respiration.
7 The quantity of dust in the atmosphere shall be minimised by spraying the demolition works
with water.
8 The recommendations of BS 5228: Part 2 shall be followed in minimising noise and vibration.
Silencing devices on plant shall be fitted where practicable and ear defenders shall be
provided for site personnel where noisy machinery is used.
9 The location of any survey stations shall be reported to the Engineer. The Engineer may
require the Contractor to transfer existing survey stations to new locations and carry out a
survey to verify the level and co-ordinates of the new survey stations.
10 All existing structures, paving, services, fittings, and other features which are not to be
demolished, dismantled, removed or otherwise dealt with shall be protected from damage by
a means approved by the Engineer.
11 Adjacent structures shall be surveyed for movement, cracks or deformations before and after
demolition. The definition of adjacent structures in this context will be decided by the
Engineer dependent on the type of structure to be demolished and the method of demolition
proposed by the Contractor and the risk of damaging adjacent property.
12 A photographic record of the adjacent structures before and after demolition shall be taken.
13 Where structures, paving, services, fittings or other features are damaged by the Contractor,
they shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.3 RECOVERY OF MATERIALS
1 Where required the Contractor shall recover designated materials without undue damage,
ar
carry out any required cleaning and shall deliver the recovered materials to locations
designated by the Engineer and unload and place them into storage.
at
2
-Q
Where on-site reuse is designated recovered materials shall be stored on site before their
incorporation in the Works.
3 Materials to be recovered shall be handled and stored in such a manner as to avoid any
LL
damage which will impair their reinstallation and reuse. Where the absence of care results in
damage, the Contractor shall repair the damage at his expense. If repairs are deemed to be
W
impracticable the Contractor shall provide replacements at his expense.

s
2.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

en
1 The Contractor shall excavate and remove surface material such as debris, windblown sand,
m
vegetation and any other unsuitable material in the areas and to the thickness instructed by
the Engineer. Clearing and grubbing shall be restricted to removal of surface material and
e
debris and shall not include the excavation of natural ground unless directed by the Engineer.
Si
2 The removed material shall be loaded and transported to an approved dumping area.
3 All surface objects, trees, stumps, roots and other protruding obstructions not designated to
remain shall be grubbed and cleared as follows:
(a) In areas inside of the grading limits of cut and embankment areas, stumps and non
perishable solid objects shall be cut off not less than one metre below the subgrade
level in the area.
(b) In areas outside of the grading limits of cut and embankment areas, stumps and non-
perishable solid objects shall be cut off not less than 500 mm below finished ground
level.
(c) In areas to be rounded at the top of cut slopes, stumps shall be cut off flush with or
below the surface of the final slope line.
(d) Grubbing of pits and ditches will be required only to the depth necessitated by the
proposed excavation within such areas.
(e) Except in areas to be excavated, stump holes and other holes from which obstructions
are removed shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted.
(f) Where designated the Contractor shall carefully remove existing trees, plants or
shrubs and carefully transport these to a location designated by the Engineer.
2.5 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES
1 Unless otherwise directed the Contractor shall demolish and remove all buildings and
structures within the limit of works limits together with all foundations and retaining walls,
piers, partitions and columns down to a plane not less than one metre below the finished
ground level or one metre below the subgrade level in the area.
2 Upon receipt of notification by the Engineer, the Contractor shall take over all responsibility of
the building or buildings then acquired and vacant and shall proceed with the demolition and
removal thereof.
3 All structures shall be neatly trimmed off and the reinforcement shall be cut or trimmed off
ar
close to the concrete and made safe; basement floor slabs shall be broken into pieces;
at
excess debris and other foundations, concrete floor slabs, sidewalks, driveways, signs,
sheds, garages, fences and other facilities shall be removed.
-Q
4 The Contractor shall arrange for the discontinuance and disconnection of any services to the
structure or structures in accordance with the requirements of the agency concerned. The
LL
Contractor shall disconnect and properly seal in an approved manner any sewer outlets that
serve any structure he is to remove. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer informed of his
W
plans for the performance of any work in connection with the sealing off of such outlets in
order that proper inspection can be provided at the time the work is performed.
s
5 Any additional small out-buildings or temporary structures even if not shown on the Drawings
en
shall also be removed if directed by the Engineer.

m
6 Demolition and removal works shall be carried out mechanically or by hand as necessary in
such a manner as to cause no undue damage to the public, property, vehicles, pavements,
e
services and structures, and the Contractor shall provide temporary works for protection
Si
when necessary, in accordance with any special requirements of the concerned authorities.
7 Blasting or other operations necessary for the demolition and/or removal of facilities which
may damage new construction shall be completed before placing the new work, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
8 In all cases the Contractor shall be responsible for all claims resulting from damage, of any
nature, caused by carelessness or negligence on the part of the Contractor, his
subcontractors or agents.
9 Demolition or removal operations for any particular facilities shall not be started until written
approval is obtained from the Engineer.
10 Throughout the demolition period the Contractor shall provide and maintain sufficient and
adequate temporary supports.
2.6 REMOVAL OF STREET FURNITURE
1 Where designated, street furniture shall be recovered, cleaned and either delivered to and
placed into storage at the stores of the designated authority or set aside for re-erection as
part of the Works, or shall be removed and disposed of.
2 The Works shall include the excavation, removal and disposal of all foundations.
3 Before proceeding with the removal of any of the above installations the Contractor shall
contact the relevant authority and obtain approval.
4 The recovery of existing street lighting installations shall form part of the Works and shall be
in accordance with the requirements of the Public Works Authority.
2.7 REMOVAL OF FENCES
1 Where designated, fencing, including all support posts, gates, other accessories and
ar
foundations shall be removed.
at
2 The Contractor shall provide suitable termination's for remaining fencing whether inside or
-Q
outside the right-of-way limits.
3 Unless otherwise directed all fencing, posts, gates and other accessories shall remain the
LL
property of the Employer and shall be carefully dismantled and delivered to and place into
storage on site or at the Employer's stores, the location of which shall be obtained from the
Engineer. The supporting posts and supports shall be carefully cleaned of concrete, avoiding
W
damage to the posts.

s
4 Foundations and sections of fencing which are designated unsuitable for recovery by the
en
Engineer shall be disposed of.

m
2.8 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENTS

e

Si
1 On sections of redundant existing roadway (and detours and diversions that are no longer
needed for traffic) the existing pavement structure together with all kerbs, kerb base and
backing, sidewalk paving, edging or kerb to sidewalk paving including base and backing to
same and other items shall be broken out and removed.
2 Non-asphaltic pavement, kerbs, kerb base and backing, gutters and other associated debris
shall be disposed of unless such items are designated for recovery.
3 Where designated side drainage ditches and excavations shall be filled and the roadway
rough graded to restore approximately the original contour of the ground or to produce
natural, rounded slopes. After the rough grading is completed, the area of the old roadbed
shall be scarified or ploughed to mix the remaining road material thoroughly with earth and
then shall be harrowed and smoothed.
2.8.2 Cutting Back Pavement
1 The Contractor shall cut back all existing construction in such a manner to avoid damage to
the construction which is to remain.
2 Any damage to the existing pavement and other work areas which are to remain shall be
restored to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3 The details and dimensions of the cutting back of the existing pavement construction shall be
as designated subject to a minimum benching step of 300 mm between each pavement
course.
4 The method of cutting back all existing construction shall be as approved by the Engineer.
5 Once cut back all pavement edges shall be suitably protected against damage from
construction traffic. Any such damage shall be made good before proceeding with pavement
construction.
2.8.3 Stockpiling Asphalt Pavement
1 During the recovery and stockpiling operations asphalt pavement containing soil or other
debris shall be kept separate from recovered pavement which does not contain soil or other
ar
debris.
at
2 Existing pavement designated for recovery shall be removed and stockpiled by methods
-Q
which will minimise losses and prevent it being contaminated with other materials. Especially,
the Contractor shall ensure that the material is reasonably free of soil and other matter when
it is stockpiled.
LL
2.8.4 Stockpile Site

W
1 The Engineer may direct that removed asphalt or concrete pavement is stockpiled for
possible future use and the Contractor will transport all removed asphalt or concrete
s
pavement to the designated stockpile location.

en
2 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least seven (7) days before he is ready to
commence stockpiling operations and obtain written approval from the Engineer.
e m
3 If not previously protected, the Contractor shall provide a protective enclosure around the
Si
stockpile site to prevent unauthorised dumping by other Contractors and ensure that material
is not removed without authorisation. The protective enclosure around the stockpile site shall
include a suitable lockable gate for entry.
4 The Contractor shall assure responsibility for maintenance of the stockpile site during the
time he is depositing and removing material from the stockpile.
5 Maintenance responsibility shall include but not be limited to:
(a) Furnishing plant when directed by the Engineer to spread the material and shape the
stockpile as successive loads of salvaged material are delivered.
(b) Ensuring by whatever means required that no unauthorised dumping is allowed.
(c) Consolidating and reshaping of stockpile from time to time and when final operations
are complete.
6 When directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall permit other contractors access to the
stockpile site to deliver or remove materials.
2.9 MEASURES FOR STATUTORY UNDERTAKERS
1 The Contractor shall take all measures required by any statutory undertaker, the
management of other publicly owned services, or owners of privately owned services or
supplies, for disconnection and proper sealing off of all redundant drains, services and
supplies.
2 The Contractor shall observe and comply with all the safety regulations that are in force for
work associated with various services.
3 Before commencing work on the removal or treatment to any utilities the Contractor shall
contact the statutory undertakers and obtain their written approval.
4 The removal of overhead power lines shall be carried out by the QGEWC or by a specialist
contractor approved by the QGEWC.
2.10 REMOVAL OR TREATMENT TO BURIED UTILITIES
ar
at
2.10.1 General
1
-Q
Designated existing underground storage tanks, culverts, box culverts, pipelines, pipes,
manholes, inlets, gullies and similar facilities for drainage or other designated utilities shall be
totally or partially demolished as designated, all debris removed, the facility thoroughly
LL
cleaned out and the resultant void backfilled with suitable material (as defined in Section 6
Clause 3.3) and compacted.
W
2 Underground utilities, pits, chambers, cesspools and similar facilities shall be demolished to a
depth of one metre below the finished subgrade level in the area, and shall be properly
s
cleaned out to full depth and backfilled with approved compacted materials.
en
3 Where designated, manhole and access shaft covers and frames and drainage inlet covers
m
and frames shall be carefully removed, cleaned and transported to and placed into storage at
designated storage areas.
e
Si
4 Materials not recovered for reuse shall be disposed of.
2.10.2 Underground Storage Tanks
1 Existing underground storage tanks on the site or under structures designated for removal
shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. The Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions during the removal and disposal of any fluid within the tanks and of the tanks
themselves.
2.10.3 Removal of Culverts
1 Where the total demolition of a culvert is designated the culvert top slab, walls, base slab and
all manhole shafts, shall be broken out and all debris removed and disposed of.
2 Where the partial demolition of the culvert is designated the top slab of the culvert shall be
removed together with all manhole shafts. The side walls shall be broken out to the
designated level or to a minimum of one metre below the subgrade level or the finished
ground level in the area. The walls shall he neatly trimmed off and the reinforcement shall be
cut or burned off close to the concrete.
2.10.4 Abandoned Pipes and Culverts
1 Pipes and culverts no longer required which are designated to be abandoned in place shall
either be filled with grout or concrete, as designated by the Engineer.
2 All ends of abandoned pipes with a nominal diameter greater than 100 mm and less than 600
mm and all ends of abandoned culverts with a cross-sectional area of 1.0 m2 or less shall be
plugged by either mass concrete or a reinforced blockwork wall.
3 All ends of abandoned pipes with a nominal diameter of 600 mm or greater and all ends of
abandoned culverts with a cross-sectional area greater than 1.0 m2 shall be provided with a
cut-off wall as designated.
2.10.5 Total Removal of Pipelines
1 Where designated, pipelines, manholes and fittings together with any plain or reinforced
concrete bed, haunch or surround shall be broken out, removed and disposed of.
ar
at
2 Designated pipes and ring fittings to be reused shall be recovered in such a way as to leave
them undamaged and suitable for reuse. -Q
3 The method of taking apart the pipes and fittings shall be agreed with the Engineer before the
start of the work.
LL
4 Materials damaged in the process of recovery shall be repaired by the Contractor.

W
5 The pipes and fittings recovered shall have all extraneous material including concrete
surround carefully removed, they shall then be thoroughly cleaned and delivered to the
s
designated storage area and placed into storage.

en
2.10.6 Grouting of Pipelines

m
1 Where designated, abandoned-in-place pipelines 300 mm or less in diameter shall he

e
completely filled with a sand-cement grout.

Si
2 The cement, fine aggregate and water used for the grout shall comply with the requirements
of section 5 of the Qatar Construction Specification. The sand used for the grout shall be a
fine graded rounded sand that produces a free flowing grout.
3 The grout shall comprise of one part cement to two parts fine aggregate with enough water to
produce a free flowing and pumpable mix. The use of admixtures to improve the flow and
setting characteristics of the grout will be permitted subject to the prior approval of the
Engineer.
4 Each end of the pipe shall be plugged. No grouting shall commence until the Engineer's
approval has been obtained.
5 The Contractor may propose alternative methods of filling the pipe for the approval of the
Engineer. The Engineer shall retain the right to designate certain pipes that shall be filled with
grout irrespective of any approval to alternative methods of filling.
2.10.7 Plugging of Pipelines
1 Designated pipes shall be plugged by mass concrete as per section 5 of Qatar Construction
Specification to a minimum of one metre lateral extent into the pipe.
2 The method of constructing the plug to ensure a solid watertight seal shall be approved by
the Engineer.
2.10.8 Cut-off Walls and Capping Slabs
1 Where designated the Contractor shall construct a reinforced blockwork cut-off wall to box
culverts and pipelines and a reinforced concrete capping slab to manholes and access
shafts.
2 Reinforced blockwork cut-off walls shall extend beyond the edges of the pipe and shall be
founded on a mass concrete of grade 20 as per section 5 of Qatar Construction
Specification.
ar
2.10.9 Manholes and Access Shafts
at
1
-Q
Unless otherwise designated, manholes and access shafts shall be broken out to a plane not
less than one metre below the subgrade level or the finished ground level in the area or to
immediately below the manhole and/or access shafts cover slab, whichever is the lower.
LL
2 Manhole and access shaft walls shall be neatly trimmed off and reinforcement shall be cut or
burned off close to the concrete and made safe.
W
3 Manholes and access shafts shall be cleaned out and all debris, sediment and refuse and
s
other unsuitable material disposed of, and backfilled with approved compacted material.
en
2.10.10 Drainage Inlets and Gullies

m
1 Unless shown otherwise, all redundant drainage inlets, gullies and similar facilities shall be
e
broken out to full depth.

Si
2.11 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
1 Materials removed but not recovered shall be disposed of in a lawful manner at approved
dumping areas. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the location of the
dumping area as well as the necessary permits and approvals from the relevant authorities.
END OF PART
QCS 2014 Section 06: Roadworks Page 1
Part 03: Earthworks
3 EARTHWORKS ....................................................................................................... 3
3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 3
3.1.2 References 3
3.1.3 Definitions 4
3.1.4 Submittals 4
3.2 EARTHWORKS BY OTHERS ................................................................................. 6
3.3 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................ 6
3.3.1 General 6
3.3.2 Unsuitable Materials 7
3.3.3 Fill and Subgrade Materials 7
3.3.4 Rock Fill 8
3.3.5 Water 9
ar
3.3.6 Performance Indicators 9
at
3.4 MAIN PLANT FOR EARTHWORKS ........................................................................ 9
3.4.1 General -Q 9
3.4.2 Compaction Trials 10
3.4.3 Rotary Cultivators 10
3.4.4 Water Sprinklers 10
LL
3.4.5 Bulldozers 10
3.4.6 Motor Graders 11
W
3.4.7 Shovel Tractors 11

3.4.8 Compacting Equipment 11
s
3.5 EXCAVATION GENERAL ..................................................................................... 12

en
3.5.1 Removal of Unsuitable Soil and Soft Spots 12

m
3.5.2 Excavating High Level Areas 12

3.5.3 Rock Excavation 13
e
3.5.4 Manual Excavation 13

Si
3.5.5 Excavation for Pits and Trenches 14

3.5.6 Double Handling 14
3.6 FILLING GENERAL ............................................................................................... 14
3.6.1 General 14
3.6.2 Filling Around Utilities 15
3.6.3 Fill Supplied by Qatar National Transport Organization (QNTO) 15
3.6.4 Contractors Imported Fill 15
3.6.5 Rock Fill 16
3.6.6 Compaction 17
3.6.7 Filling of Pits and Trenches 18
3.6.8 Work Over Sabkha 18
3.6.9 Trimming Side Slopes 19
3.7 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND FILLING .......................................................... 19
3.7.1 General 19
3.7.2 Excavation Supports 20
3.7.3 Dewatering 20
Part 03: Earthworks
3.7.4 Excavation for Structures 20

3.7.5 Use of Materials 21
3.7.6 Cofferdams 21
3.7.7 Backfill Adjacent to Structures 22
3.8 FORMATION PREPARATION............................................................................... 22
3.8.1 Scope 22
3.8.2 Protection 23
3.8.3 Rectification 23
3.9 TOPSOIL ............................................................................................................... 23
3.10 TESTING ............................................................................................................... 23
3.10.1 General 23
3.10.2 Testing Degree of Compaction 24
3.10.3 California Bearing Ratio 24
3.10.4 Testing Levels and Evenness of the Formation 25
ar
3.10.5 Testing Formation Works after Completion 25
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 03: Earthworks
3 EARTHWORKS
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope of Work
1 This Part includes all the earthworks required to construct and maintain the roadway facilities
as follows:
(a) Removing unsuitable materials.

(b) Excavating selected material from the roadway and borrow pits for use as specified.
(c) Placing and compacting of selected material.
(d) Structure excavation.
(e) Backfilling.
ar
(f) Supplying and placing topsoil (sweet soil).
at
(g) Laying and compaction of fill for shallow embankments where additional slope
protection measures are not required. -Q
This Section
LL
Part 1, .............. General

Part 2, .............. Site Clearance
W
Part 4, .............. Unbound Pavement Materials

Part 5, ............. Asphalt Works
Part 6, ............. Concrete Road Pavements
s
Part 19, ........... Miscellaneous

en

m
Section 12, Earthworks Related to Buildings

e
Si
3.1.2 References

ASTM D1556 .............Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1557 .............Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
3 3
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft lbf/ft (2,700 kN m/m ))
ASTM D4718 .............Standard Practice for Correction of Unit Weight and Water Content for
Soils Containing Oversize Particles
ASTM D1883 .............Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of
Laboratory Compacted Soils
ASTM D4318 ..............Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils
ASTM D6913 .............Standard Test Methods for Particle Size Distribution (Gradation) of
soils using Sieve Analysis
Part 03: Earthworks
ASTM D4429 ..............Standard Test Method for (California Bearing Ratio) CBR of Soils in
Place
ASTM D4944 ..............Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water (Moisture)
Content of Soil by the Calcium Carbide Gas Pressure Tester
ASTM D6938 ..............Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil
and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D1140 ..............Standard Test Method for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than No.
200 (75-μm) Sieve
ASTM E1703 ..............Standard Test Method for Measuring Rut-Depth of Pavement Surfaces
Using a Straightedge
AASHTO T307 ..........Standard Method of Test for Determining the Resilient Modulus of
Soils and Aggregate Materials
BS 1377 - Part 3 ........Methods of test for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes: Chemical and
electro-chemical tests
ar
3.1.3 Definitions
at
1 LSA: Laboratories and Standardization Affairs – Ministry of Environment.
-Q
2 Suitable material: material which is acceptable in accordance with Clause 3.3.3.
LL
3 Imported material: suitable material obtained from outside of the Site.
4 Optimum moisture content (OMC): the moisture content of soil at which a specified
W
compaction effort will produce the maximum dry density when determined in accordance with
ASTM D1557.
s
en
5 Maximum dry density (MDD): The dry density of soil obtained using a specified compaction
effort at the optimum moisture content when determined in accordance with the modified
m
compaction test ASTM D1557. Unit weight and moisture content of materials containing more
than 5% by mass of oversize fraction tested in accordance with ASTM D1557 should be
e
corrected following ASTM D4718.

Si
6 Subgrade: the compacted existing ground or fill for 500mm beneath formation.
7 Formation: the completed earthworks level shaped in accordance with the Drawings in
readiness to receive the sub-base.
3.1.4 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval his proposals for the compaction of
each type of material to be used in embankments detailing the type of plant, number of
passes and maximum loose depth of layer.
2 The contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval method statements for the following:
(a) Materials production, handling, storage, identification, marking and traceability to

source of production.
(b) Quality assurance and quality control plans for all construction activities.
(c) Quality control testing plan.
Part 03: Earthworks
(d) Equipment and its suitability to fulfill all construction activities to the required quality.
(e) Personnel capability.
(f) Safety and environment preservation measures.
3 Before commencing any structural excavation work greater than 1.5 m in depth, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review details of proposals for supporting
excavated faces.
4 The proposals shall be submitted in the form of calculations and drawings which clearly
indicate the extent of excavation at all points along the structure relative to adjacent
properties, roads and services.
5 In the case of supported excavations the proposals shall, for the actual soil properties,
comprise detailed drawings of the support system stating method of installation and showing
support member materials, sizes, spacing and engineering calculations to validate the design
of the above, including the maximum theoretical deflections of the support members. The
ar
support system shall be designed in such a manner that no support members extend through
surfaces exposed in the finished construction and no shoring or bracing is placed under
at
permanent structures.
-Q
6 The engineering calculations shall be in English and shall show lateral earth pressures for the
full excavation depths, faces at various stages of support during installation and removal and
concrete placement, the anticipated equipment loads, anchorage loads of any description,
LL
the maximum design loads to be carried by various members of the support system and strut
preload forces.
W
7 If the structure support system proposed includes tie-back anchors, the Contractor's
submittal drawings shall show the profile of the soil in which each anchor is to be installed,
s
the design load for the full depth of the excavation, the maximum design and proof loads,
en
surcharge loads of any description; equipment loads, forces at various stages, support during
installation and removal, and the criteria proposed for deformations under proof loads.
e m
8 In addition to the approval submittal, shop drawings of the support system are to be
Si
submitted. Where a proposed system of tie-back anchors projects onto adjoining property
beyond the vertical projection of the designated limits of the Contract, the permission of the
owner shall be obtained in writing and documentation of such permission shall be included in
the submittal.
9 Complete working drawings showing the type of dewatering and groundwater control system
proposed shall be submitted for review. The submittal drawings shall show the arrangement,
location and depths of the proposed dewatering system if required. A complete description of
the equipment and materials to be used and the procedure to be followed shall be shown
together with the standby equipment, standby power supply, and the proposed location or
locations of points of discharge of water. Details of methods of cofferdam construction shall
be included in the submittal.
10 The method and the type of equipment to be used for advancing dewatering wellpoints shall
be submitted for review.
Part 03: Earthworks
1 The designs of the structure excavation support systems and the dewatering system shall be
prepared by and signed by a professional engineer specializing in this type of design work.
2 Blasting work shall be carried out by a specialist company with the appropriate license as
detailed in clause 3.5.3.
3.2 EARTHWORKS BY OTHERS
1 Where earthworks have been carried out by others before commencement of the Works, the
Contractor shall carry out all tests he considers necessary to satisfy him that the work already
executed complies with this specification.
2 Should the Contractor consider the result of the tests unsatisfactory he shall immediately
provide full details of all such tests carried out for the Engineer's review as to the remedial
work to be undertaken.
ar
3 The Contractor will be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the adequacy of any previous
at
earthworks when he proceeds with his own work, and he shall be responsible for repairs to or
-Q
replacement of any defective layer or surface where such failure was due to a fault in the
previously executed work which would have been revealed by normal testing procedures.
LL
3.3 MATERIALS
3.3.1 General
W
1 All excavated material shall be the property of the Owner and shall not be removed from the
s
Site without the written consent from the Owner.

en
2 Suitable and approved excavated material from any part of the Site shall be hauled and used
m
for filling in any other section of the Site. The Contractor shall store such material when
necessary until the need arises for its use in filling as required by the phases of construction,
e
or as directed by the Engineer.

Si
3 Where the amount of suitable material exceeds the amount of fill required for the Works, the
Contractor shall dispose of the surplus material at designated locations. The Contractor shall
off-load, spread, level, water and carry out other related operations at the disposal site as
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure that the disposal site has been
approved by the Municipality concerned.
4 Any excavation greater than the net volume required for the Works in length or width, shall be
made up with suitable compacted fill material at no cost to the Owner and subject to
inspection and approval of the Engineer.
5 Any additional excavation to remove unsuitable material at or below the bottom of foundation
level or construction layers shall be replaced with mass concrete.
6 Before using material resulting from excavation for filling, the Contractor shall carry out field
and laboratory testing to establish the suitability of said material for filling work. Whenever
such excavated material indicates a change in characteristics the Contractor shall carry out
additional testing.
Part 03: Earthworks
7 Where the contract provides for the supply of fill material by others the Contractor shall
remain responsible for checking each load received to ensure that it is in accordance with the
specification requirements and for rejecting unsuitable material. The Contractor shall be
responsible for maintaining all records of deliveries and documentation relating to the quality
of such material.
3.3.2 Unsuitable Materials
1 Unsuitable materials shall mean materials other than suitable materials and include;
(a) Material from marshes.

(b) Tree and plant stumps.
(c) Perishable material.
(d) Deposits of sabkha with more than 5% water-soluble salts.
(e) Material subject to spontaneous combustion.
ar
3.3.3 Fill and Subgrade Materials
at
1 The subgrade material and the material used for filling and compacting below the formation
-Q
level of the roadway, sidewalks, hard shoulder, drainage ditches and other areas on site shall
consist of material approved for filling resulting from the excavation works.
LL
2 In the event that such material is unsuitable or insufficient, the Contractor shall obtain and
use filling material from borrow pits.
W
3 This material shall be clean and free from any unsuitable material and complies with the
requirements listed in Table 3.1.
s
en
4 The maximum particle size of fill material shall be 75 mm unless the material is classified as
rock as per this part of the specification and the placing and compaction are carried out
m
according to the requirements for rock fill.

e
5 Unit weight and moisture content of materials containing more than 5% by mass of oversize
Si
fraction tested in accordance with ASTM D1557 should be corrected following ASTM D4718.
6 When nuclear gauge is used for field density and moisture content testing, 3 readings shall
be made at each test location within a radius of 2 meters. The average of the 3 readings is
considered to be the density for that test location. Individual density readings shall not be less
than the target relative density by more than 0.5%.
7 Recycled aggregate produced from excavating natural ground and from demolition wastes
can be used for filling purposes provided that the specifications stated in Section 6 - Part 9
are complied.
Part 03: Earthworks
Table 3.1
1
Fill and Subgrade Materials and Construction Specifications
Parameter Standard Specification Limits Minimum Frequency
Percent passing the

ASTM D6913 100%
75mm sieve
Percent passing the
ASTM D1140 30% max.
0.075mm sieve - Each Source
ASTM D4318
Liquid limit 30% max. - Visible change in
Method A
material
Plasticity Index ASTM D4318 10 % max.
3
- 1 per 1000 m
California Bearing
ASTM D1883 15% min. at 95% MDD
Ratio (CBR)
(Soaked)
ar
Swelling 2% max.
ASTM D6938
at
2
Field Density Min. 95% of MDD - 1 per 200 m per
ASTM D1556 -Q layer
In Place Moisture ASTM D6938 - 1 every 75m per

2  2% of OMC
Content ASTM D4944 lane per layer
LL
In Place California 2
ASTM D4429 15% min. 1 per 2000 m
Bearing Ratio (CBR)
W
Acid soluble Chloride

BS 1377 Part 3 2% max.
Content
s
en
3
Acid soluble sulphate 1 per 3000 m
BS 1377 Part 3 3% max.
content
m
Organic Matter BS 1377 Part 3 2% max.

1
e
Loose materials for testing and acceptance shall be sampled from the un-compacted in- place layer.
2
During compaction.
Si
3.3.4 Rock Fill
1 Rock shall be defined as any naturally formed solid matter encountered in excavation having
2 2
a crushing strength of not less than 7 N/mm when dry and not less than 4 N/mm after
submergence in water for 24 hours.
2 This shall be determined on samples of 100 mm x 100 mm x 100 mm cubes obtained from
the material (equivalent cores in lie u of cubes may be considered for testing at the discretion
of the Engineer and the method of testing and acceptance criteria will be advised by the
Engineer in such cases).
3 Individual masses of solid material found in excavation and weighing less than 500 kg shall
not be considered as rock.
4 Any artificially formed solid matter such as block work or concrete shall not be considered as
rock.
Part 03: Earthworks
5 The Contractor shall supply any equipment and labor necessary to obtain suitable samples
and carry out testing of rock or suspected rock. The Engineer shall determine the location
and quantity of samples necessary to determine the extent of the rock. These samples shall
be taken in the presence of the Engineer.
6 In the event that the tests prove that the material is rock, the Engineer shall determine the
extent of such material and shall instruct the Contractor accordingly.
3.3.5 Water
1 Potable or brackish water shall be used for all earthwork operations except that only potable
water shall be used for compaction of backfill material within one meter from all surfaces of
the structure and for the backfill of all service trenches.
2 Brackish water shall have a maximum total dissolved solids (TDS) of 5000 ppm, a maximum
chloride content of 1500 ppm and a maximum sulphate content (as SO3) of 2000 ppm.
ar
3.3.6 Performance Indicators
at
1 Upon the request of the Engineer, the following performance indicators shall be determined
-Q
from loose in place materials for verification of the pavement structural design following the
AASHTO Mechanistic-Empirical Pavement Design Guide:
(a) Resilient Modulus (MR) in accordance with AASHTO T307 at optimum moisture
LL
content and maximum density as per ASTM D1557.

(b) Parameters and moduli required for determining the Permanent Deformation Potential
W
in accordance with AASTHO Mechanistic Empirical Design Guide.

(c) Parameters and moduli required for measuring the Fatigue Cracking Potential for
s
stabilized and surface layers in accordance with AASHTO Mechanistic Empirical

en
Design Guide.
m
3
2 For performance testing, one sample shall be tested every 10,000 m , and for constructions
3
having less than 10,000 m volume, one sample shall be tested every 50% of the total
e
volume.
Si
3.4 MAIN PLANT FOR EARTHWORKS
3.4.1 General
1 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of catalogues, technical data and
charts of the machinery to be used on site before the commencement of the work.
2 The Engineer will inspect the machinery and tools before the commencement of work. The
machinery and tools used in carrying out earthworks and other related works for the road
construction and in maintenance of the work shall be in good working condition, and the
Contractor shall maintain them in such condition for the whole duration of the Work.
3 The Contractor shall use power screens equipped with clay reject screen with sufficient
screen area and clay reject conveyor belt when processing subgrade materials. Static
screens shall not be used to produce subgrade materials. Any deviations from this process
must be approved by the Engineer.
Part 03: Earthworks
4 The Contractor shall supply an adequate type and number of machines and tools for the
proper and timely execution of the Works. The number of machines shall not be limited to the
types of equipment or recommended minimum number stipulated in the Contract
Documents, which shall be used for guidance purposes only.
5 The Contract is awarded on the understanding that the actual numbers of machines and
other plant will not be reduced below the numbers shown in the Contract.
6 No plant shall be removed from the site without the specific written approval of the Engineer.
3.4.2 Compaction Trials
1 Before commencing construction of the permanent works, unless otherwise agreed with the
Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out compaction trial, after submitting a method
statement, for each type of fill material and construction situation of the earthworks to
establish an approved rolling/compaction procedure which shall then be used as a minimum
requirement for the permanent works unless otherwise directed or agreed by the Engineer.
ar
2 The compaction trials shall involve all procedures specified for the permanent works
at
including testing and any equipment, processes or procedures as proposed by the Contractor
-Q
which are not included as a part of these specifications. Compaction trials for each main type
of material shall be carried out on areas having dimensions of approximately 50 meters by 10
meters.
LL
3 Construction of the permanent works shall not commence until a compaction procedure has
been approved in writing by the Engineer.
W
3.4.3 Rotary Cultivators

s
en
1 Rotary Cultivators shall have axles rotated by a powerful motor and be equipped with metal
teeth or plates. They shall be designed in such a way as to ensure proper pulverization and
mixing of soil. They must be equipped with apparatus to lift and lower the axles so as to be
m
always to the required depth.

e
Si
3.4.4 Water Sprinklers
1 Water sprinklers shall be borne by trucks with pneumatic tires and shall be equipped with a
pressure pump and water sprinkling distribution equipment. The pump shall be powered in
such a manner that the pump pressure will remain uniform regardless of variations in truck
speed. The distributors shall be so designed as to allow sprinkling and adding of water to the
soil uniformly and in controlled quantities and shall be equipped with an approved gauge to
control the quantity of water added during operation. Special spray bar attachments shall be
provided and used in order to sprinkle water on sloped sections. The activation of the water
system shall be controlled from the cab by the driver.
3.4.5 Bulldozers
1 Bulldozers may be tracked or pneumatic-tire vehicles and shall be equipped with a blade for
earth moving and levelling. Ripper attachments shall be provided when necessary. The blade
level shall be hydraulically controlled to raise or lower it so that the work surface can be
formed and adjusted as required.
Part 03: Earthworks
3.4.6 Motor Graders
1 Motor graders shall be pneumatic-tire and shall be equipped such that it is possible to lift,
lower and adjust the angle of the blade as required to control the grading operation and to
perform grading without making undulations.
3.4.7 Shovel Tractors
1 Shovel tractors shall be tractors equipped with a shovel for earth hauling or moving and may
be either on tracks or on pneumatic tires. The shovel shall be hydraulically controlled to raise
and lower it as required.
3.4.8 Compacting Equipment
1 Rolling compacting equipment shall consist of pneumatic-tire and steel wheeled rollers as
described below:
ar
(a) Pneumatic-tire rollers shall be equipped with tires of equal size and diameter which
shall be uniformly inflated so that the air pressure of the tires shall not vary
at
significantly, from one another. The wheels shall be spaced so that one pass will
accomplish one complete coverage equal to the rolling width of the machine. There
-Q
shall be a minimum of 6mm overlap between the tracks of the front and rear tracking
wheels. Self-propelled, pneumatic-tire rollers shall have a minimum weight of
9 tons without ballast and a minimum weight of 18 tons with ballast.
LL
(b) Steel wheeled rollers shall be of the following types:

W
(i) Three-wheeled rollers shall be self-propelled and equipped with a reversing

clutch, a differential drive and with adjustable scrapers to keep the wheel
s
surface clean.
en
(ii) Tandem rollers shall be self-propelled and equipped with reversing clutches and
adjustable spring scrapers fitted to the driving and steering roller to scrape in
m
both directions.
e
(iii) Vibratory steel tandem rollers shall have the requirements of the foregoing steel
Si
tandem rollers with a static weight of at least 5000 kg and a vibrating frequency
between 1500 and 2000 cycles per minute.
(iv) Single drum vibratory steel rollers shall be double axle, self-propelled units with
the rear axle equipped with pneumatic flotation wheels, they shall have vibrating
frequency capabilities between 1500 and 2000 cycles per minute.
2 Portable vibratory compaction rollers shall be double axle tandem single-drum self-propelled
equipped with a vibrating element delivering an impact of not less than 1590 kg at a
frequency of about 5000 cycles per minute. The roller shall be easily maneuvered, of
adequate width and suitable for rolling ditches with their side slopes having grades of up to
1:3.
3 Hand plate compactors shall be capable of delivering an impact of between 750 to 1500
kilograms.
Part 03: Earthworks
3.5 EXCAVATION GENERAL
3.5.1 Removal of Unsuitable Soil and Soft Spots
1 If during the progress of the work the soil encountered has characteristics, as determined by
tests conducted under the direction of the Engineer, that render it unsuitable for incorporation
in the road embankment, the Contractor shall excavate and remove such unsuitable material
to the extent directed by the Engineer.
2 Where contractor finds isolated soft spots during excavation, this material shall be removed
to the extent directed by the Engineer.
3 No excavated suitable material shall be removed from the Site without the approval of the
Engineer. Should the Contractor be permitted to remove suitable material to suit his
operational procedure then he shall make good any consequent deficit of fill material arising
therefrom.
ar
4 Where the excavation reveals a combination of suitable and unsuitable material the
excavation shall, unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, be carried out in such a manner
at
that the suitable materials are excavated separately for use in the Works without
-Q
contamination by the unsuitable material.
5 The hauling of excavated material to areas of fill shall proceed only when sufficient spreading
LL
and compacting plant are operating at the place of deposition to ensure placing and
compaction.
W
6 Unsuitable excavated material shall be removed and carted away to an approved dumping
area after approval from the Engineer.
s
en
7 The Contractor shall replace this unsuitable material by other suitable surplus or imported
material in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness to the density specified.
m
8 If the contractor considers in some situations it is impractical to replace unsuitable material

e
with imported material he may elect to use granular material, which shall comply with the
Si
requirements of part 4 of this specification.
9 Granular material placed beneath water shall not require compaction, granular material
placed above water shall be compacted and tested as per the requirements of part 4 of this
specification.
10 If any solution cavities are found in lime stone material they shall be brought to the attention
of the Engineer. The Engineer shall advise what treatment is to be carried out in such
situations.
3.5.2 Excavating High Level Areas
1 The Contractor shall excavate high level areas in all materials including rock for the full width
of the road construction down to the top of the required subgrade.
2 The Contractor shall then scarify a layer not less than 150 mm deep except that this
requirement shall not apply where rock is present.
Part 03: Earthworks
3 The soil shall be pulverized, watered as required, mixed, shaped and compacted to 95 %
maximum dry density, as per ASTM D1557, to a depth of 150 mm.
4 In all excavations the groundwater level shall be maintained at least 300 mm below the
formation level during the works.
3.5.3 Rock Excavation
1 Excavation in rock shall be as defined in clause 3.3.4 of the specification.
2 Excavation in rock may be carried out by a tracked bulldozer and ripper or by the use of
blasting with explosives or any other method approved by the Engineer.
3 Blasting using explosives shall only be permitted if authorized by the civil defense, police and
any other statutory authority. The Contractor’s method statement shall be agreed before any
blasting operation.
ar
4 Blasting work shall be carried out in accordance with The Guide for Civil Users of Explosives
in Qatar prepared by the former Ministry of Industry and Public Works.
at
5
-Q
For any blasting work involving the use of explosives the Contractor shall use a specialist
company, licensed to carry out such work by the former Ministry of Industry and Public
Works.
LL
6 The specialist company shall possess the appropriate license for the required scope of work.
W
7 The purchase and delivery of each consignment of explosives for blasting work should be
covered by a separate application for a possession license.
s
en
8 The transportation of explosives shall only be carried out after notification to the police and
civil defense.
m
9 For each planned blasting operation the Contractor shall arrange for advance notification to
e
be made to the police and civil defense authorities.

Si
10 After it has been established that the excavated material is rock and after the area where
such rock exists has been defined, the Contractor shall incorporate the rock in the
embankment.
11 When excavated material contains more than 25 % of rock larger than 150 mm in greatest
diameter the rock shall be crushed, pulverized and further broken down. The resultant
material from the excavation shall be placed on the embankment in accordance with clause
3.6.5.
3.5.4 Manual Excavation
1 The Contractor shall excavate manually in the vicinity of all services, structures, and any
other areas, and if necessary uncover them, all as directed by the Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall take all precautions to prevent damages to services, properties and
persons, and any damage resulting from the negligence of the Contractor, his agents, or his
employees. Any such damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense.
Part 03: Earthworks
3.5.5 Excavation for Pits and Trenches
1 All trenches and pits under roads shall, where possible, be excavated, backfilled and
compacted before road construction commences.
2 The sides of the excavation shall be adequately supported at all times.
3 Trenches and pits shall be kept free of water.
4 In tidal and high water table areas the excavation shall be kept free from standing water at all
times during construction.
5 Trenches for pipes or ducts shall be excavated to the levels and gradients indicated in the
contract documents.
3.5.6 Double Handling
1 It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to assess at the start of the contract the quantity of
ar
suitable material available from an excavation for use as fill material and the requirement for
imported fill material.
at
2 The Contractor shall plan earthworks operations to minimize the handling of fill material and
-Q
disruption due to dust and noise from transportation operations.
3 The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for double handling of any
LL
excavated material from the site for imported fill.

W
4 If it is necessary to double handle the material the Contractor shall take all measures to avoid
degradation or contamination of fill material.
s
5 The Engineer may instruct that the tests to assess the properties of the fill material are taken
en
at any point during the transportation, placing and compaction process.

m
3.6 FILLING GENERAL

e
3.6.1 General
Si
1 Filling low-level areas shall be to the level of subgrade as designated. After completion of
clearing and grubbing, the Contractor shall carry out the necessary levelling in order to
control the thickness of the layers of fill.
2 The existing natural ground shall then be scarified in place to a minimum depth of 150 mm
for the full width of the embankment except where the material is classified as rock. The
scarified material shall be watered as required, thoroughly mixed, shaped and compacted to
a minimum of 95 % maximum dry density.
3 Where an existing embankment is being widened, the existing embankment slope shall be
trimmed and compacted into benches of minimum width 1m and depth 500mm before
placing and compacting each layer of new embankment material unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer to suit particular circumstances.
4 The Contractor shall not proceed with filling and compacting any subsequent layer before
testing and securing the approval of the Engineer for the previous layer.
5 All fill material for a depth of 500 mm below the formation level must meet the requirements
provided in clause 3.3.3.
Part 03: Earthworks
3.6.2 Filling Around Utilities
1 Filling around culverts, storm water and sewerage pipes, utility and structures, and between
building plot and footpath areas shall be done in accordance with the specific requirements of
the relevant utility authority and the following additional requirements.
2 Filling for these areas shall be from surplus excavated material obtained on site and
approved by the Engineer. In the case of insufficiency of such material then approved
material shall be obtained from borrow pits and filled to the designated levels. The maximum
size of particle allowed in the backfill within one meter of culverts, storm water and sewage
pipes, utilities and structures shall be 25 mm.
3 The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect bridge columns and lighting equipment
when filling between median barriers and any damage to these items arising from the filling
works shall be repaired by the Contractor.
4 The Contractor shall agree the type of plant or equipment to be used with the Engineer
ar
before undertaking this work.
at
3.6.3 Fill Supplied by Qatar National Transport Organization (QNTO)
-Q
1 If instructed under the projects specification, fill will be imported from other sources using the
Qatar National Transport Organization (QNTO).
LL
2 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to monitor and control both the quality and the
quantity of this imported fill.
W
3 The Contractor shall ensure that all delivery notes for such material are verified and
s
authenticated and then collated for submission to the Engineer.

en
3.6.4 Contractors Imported Fill

m
1 The project specifications shall designate areas for the Contractor to obtain borrow material
e
for use in the construction of the Works. It is the Contractor's responsibility to satisfy himself
Si
that there is sufficient borrow material of suitable types.
2 The Contractor may elect to use alternative sources of borrow material.
3 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain all permits or permission and make any
payments that may be required in acquiring the rights to borrow material whether the
Contractor uses the designated areas or elects to use alternative areas. The Contractor shall
ensure that the source of all borrowed material has been approved by the Municipality
concerned.
4 The Contractor shall obtain and supply to the Engineer representative samples from the
borrow pits he intends to use. The Engineer will be afforded the opportunity to be present
during the sampling operations.
5 The Contractor will carry out the necessary laboratory and, if required, field testing to
establish the suitability of the material for filling work and will advise the Engineer of the
results. The Engineer will advise the Contractor whether such material is acceptable and
whether the borrow pit is an approved source of borrow material.
Part 03: Earthworks
6 The Contractor will test samples of the approved borrow pits material actually being imported
onto the site, and should such material fail to meet the requirements of these Specifications,
approval to the use of the borrow pits will be withdrawn and the Contractor shall immediately
cease importation from the borrow pits until such time as the Engineer may approve
alternative sources of material from within the same borrow pits based on sampling and
testing as specified above.
7 The Engineer will decide whether the material already imported from the concerned borrow
pits can remain as placed on the site, or whether the Contractor shall remove and replace the
said material at his own expense.
8 Overburden and any unsuitable top layers at the borrow pit shall be stripped and stockpiled to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. Upon completion of excavation the Contractor shall replace
the overburden and unsuitable material, smooth the surface and leave the area clean and
tidy to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
9 The Contractor's haul and traffic arrangements will be subject to the Engineer's approval
ar
before the work may be commenced.
at
3.6.5 Rock Fill -Q
1 Material consisting predominantly of rock fragments of such a size that it cannot be placed in
layers of the thickness allowed without crushing, or further breaking down, may be placed in
the embankment in layers not exceeding twice the average size of the larger fragments.
LL
2 No layer of rock fill shall exceed 800 mm loose thickness.

W
3 Rock fill shall be placed and spread so that the largest boulders and fragments are evenly
s
distributed, with the voids in-between completely filled with smaller fragments, sand or gravel,
en
watered in if necessary.
4 Each layer shall be bladed and leveled by a track laying tractor.

e m
5 Quality control tests will not normally be performed on this material but each layer must be
Si
approved in writing by the Engineer before the next is placed.
6 Embankment layers which consist of material that contains rock but also has sufficient
compatible finer material other than rock shall be placed and compacted as for soil
embankments. Quality control tests will be made wherever the Engineer determines they are
feasible.
7 Compaction shall be carried out by a vibratory roller with the following minimum mass:
Mass per Meter Width of Depth of Fill Minimum number of Passes of the
Vibration Roll (kg/m) Layer ( mm ) Roller on each Layer
2300 - 2900 400 5
2900 - 3600 500 5
3600 - 4300 600 5
4300 - 5000 700 5
>5000 800 5
Part 03: Earthworks
3.6.6 Compaction
1 The Contractor shall carry out the required compaction specified after grading and leveling
the surface to be compacted. In areas to be filled, compaction shall include adding necessary
soil, water and compacting the first layer in addition to subsequent layers up to the proposed
levels.
2 In areas already excavated down to the required level, compaction shall include adding the
necessary water, and compacting the surface, in accordance with the procedure outlined in
paragraphs 3 to 12 below.
3 After carrying out the grading, leveling, scarifying and pulverizing of the soil layer the
Contractor shall add the necessary amount of water to permeate the pulverized soil.
4 The soil shall then be thoroughly turned after each addition of water so as to achieve
homogeneous moisture content in the whole thickness of the layer.
ar
5 Before compacting, samples of the pulverized soil shall be tested using a 'Speedy Moisture
Device' (ASTM D4944) or similar instrument to measure the moisture content. If the moisture
at
content is not within  2 % of the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557,
-Q
the area represented by this sample shall be scarified and aerated or water added until the
moisture content is within  2 % of the optimum moisture content. The soil shall then be
primarily leveled in order to commence earth compaction.
LL
6 After primary levelling referred to above, compaction shall be commenced by means of the
W
approved rolling pattern.
7 Filling shall be in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness.

s
en
8 All areas including embankment roadway, medians, shoulders, sidewalks and verges shall be
compacted to 95 % of Maximum Dry Density as determined by ASTM D1557 unless
m
otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer.

e
Si
9 The rolling shall be carried out in the direction of the road axis until the soil reaches the
required density. In crowned sections, rolling shall start from both edges of the road in the
direction of the road axis. If the road is super elevated, rolling shall commence from the lower
side and continue to the higher side. In order to compensate for the amount of water loss in
evaporation during the course of compaction, additional quantities of water shall be added as
required.
10 Each layer shall be levelled and rolled to achieve uniform compaction free from undulations,
soft spots and depressions.
11 No layer shall be covered by the next layer until it has been tested, inspected and approved
by the Engineer.
12 The Contractor shall be responsible for reinstatement to the satisfaction of the Engineer of
any layer damaged or disturbed after compaction and approval, by any means or cause,
before placing the next layer.
Part 03: Earthworks
3.6.7 Filling of Pits and Trenches
1 The bottom of all excavations shall be formed to the lines and levels shown on the drawings.
2 Any pockets of soft soil or loose rock in the bottom of pits and trenches shall be removed and
the resulting cavities and any large fissures filled with suitable material and compacted to a
minimum relative compaction of 95 % based on ASTM D1557.
3 Prior to proceeding with filling, the base of the excavation shall be compacted to a minimum
relative compaction of 95 % based on ASTM D1557.
4 The full width of the compaction plant shall fit inside the surface area of the backfilling with
sufficient space to permit adequate compaction. Under no circumstance shall compaction be
carried out with plant straddling backfilled and existing surfaces.
5 Trenches and pits shall be backfilled in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness
unless otherwise directed by the engineer.
ar
3.6.8 Work Over Sabkha
at
1 Where the road embankment passes over Sabkha areas with a high water table the
-Q
contractor shall take special precautions during the construction.
2 These precautions shall include but shall not be limited to the construction of suitable
LL
temporary haul roads for all construction plant operating in the area.
W
3 Haul roads shall be constructed using rock fill and geotextiles as necessary to ensure a safe
stable surface.
s
4 The use of geotextiles and geosynthetics shall be in accordance with Part 15 when used for
en
the permanent embankment.

m
5 If directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall construct embankments over Sabkha areas
e
with a surcharge of excess material that shall remain in place till all appreciable settlement
Si
has stopped. The Contractor shall provide a means of monitoring the settlement. The
Engineer shall decide when appreciable settlement has stopped.
6 Unless a specific treatment in using geotextiles or geosynthetics is described elsewhere in

the contract, work over Sabkha shall comprise of initially stabilizing the existing Sabkha area
by laying and rolling rock fill layer type 1 according to Table 3.2. This operation should be
continued by adding and rolling type 1 rock fill layer with steel vibratory roller till the layer is
completely stabilized.
7 A layer of geotextile fabric should be laid over the compacted type 1 pervious backfill.
8 A layer of 50mm pervious backfill type 2 according to Table 3.2 should be laid over the
stabilized layer to protect the geotextile fabric.
9 Layer of 200mm thick rock fill type 1 should be laid over type 2 pervious backfill to receive the
required road layers after the above operation.
Part 03: Earthworks
Table 3.2
Definition of Type 1 & 2 backfill materials
Percentage Passing
Size (mm)
Type 1 Type 2
152.0 Max. -
125.0 85 - 100 -
100.0 75 - 90 -
50.0 45 - 65 -
37.5 35 - 55 -
19.0 20 - 35 100
12.5 10 - 25 95 – 100
9.5 5 - 20 70 – 100
4.75 - 0 – 55
ar
2.36 - 0 – 10
at
0.075 - -Q 0–3
3.6.9 Trimming Side Slopes
1 Embankment side slopes shall be trimmed to the profiles and dimensions shown on the
LL
contract drawings.
W
2 The earthworks shall be trimmed to within  20 mm of the designated profile.

s
3 The side slopes shall be thoroughly compacted after trimming to ensure a hard surface.
en
4 Side slopes shall be tested for compaction in accordance with this part of the specification
m
and the minimum density requirement shall be 95% of the maximum dry density as per
ASTM D1557.
e
Si
3.7 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND FILLING
3.7.1 General
1 In addition to the work specified, the Contractor shall include all operations necessary to
excavate and backfill as required for the construction of any structure’s installations and
utilities.
2 This work shall include necessary, pumping, dewatering, draining, sheeting, bracing, and the
necessary supply and construction of cribs and cofferdams and their subsequent removal.
3 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, to
prevent loss of natural cementation in the existing subsoil during, and as a consequence of,
dewatering operations.
4 This work shall also include the furnishing and placing of approved foundation fill material or
concrete to replace unsuitable material encountered below the foundation elevation of
structures.
Part 03: Earthworks
3.7.2 Excavation Supports
1 Battered excavation slopes greater than 1.5 m high shall not be used without the express
written permission of the Engineer. Where such permission is not granted or where only a
part of the overall depth of an excavation is permitted to be with battered slopes all faces of
excavations greater than 1.5 m high shall be supported.
2 The Contractor shall submit his proposals for supporting excavated faces.
3 Before commencing any structural excavation work greater than 1.5 m in depth, the
Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of his proposals for supporting excavated
faces.
3.7.3 Dewatering
1 At locations where the excavation extends below the groundwater table, a dewatering system
shall be provided. This will effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure and lower the
ar
groundwater levels below excavation levels, as required for the safe and proper excavation of
the work. It will result in obtaining a stable, dry subgrade for the execution of subsequent
at
operations. -Q
2 The Contractor shall design dewatering methods and settling basins so that no critical
amounts of soil, sand or silt are removed during either the initial operations or the
construction operations. Complete working drawings showing the type of dewatering and
LL
groundwater control system proposed shall be submitted to the Engineer for his review.
W
3 The Contractor's submitted drawings shall show the arrangement, location and depths of the
proposed dewatering system if required. A complete description of the equipment and
s
materials to be used and the procedure to be followed shall be shown, together with the
en
standby equipment, standby power supply, and the proposed location or locations of points of
discharge of water.
m
4 Any required dewatering system design shall also include the measures taken to prevent
e
damage due to settlement of pavement, utilities, sewers, buildings and other structures
Si
outside the excavation but within the area affected by the dewatering procedures.
5 Dewatering shall not be terminated without the approval of the Engineer and in the case of
structures retained by ground anchors dewatering shall not be terminated until the ground
anchors have been stressed to the full working load and approved by the Engineer.
3.7.4 Excavation for Structures
1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the beginning of any
excavation so that cross-sectional elevations and measurements may be taken of the
undisturbed ground.
2 Trenches or foundation pits for structures or structure footings shall be excavated to the
designated lines and grades or elevations. They shall be of sufficient size to permit the
placing of structures or structure footings of the full width and length shown. The designated
elevations of the bottoms of footings shall be considered as approximate only and the
Engineer may order, in writing, such changes in dimensions or elevations of footings as may
be deemed necessary, to secure a satisfactory foundation.
Part 03: Earthworks
3 Boulders, logs, and any other unsuitable material encountered in excavations shall be
removed from the site.
4 Unless otherwise designated structure excavation shall be carried out for a width of at least
500 mm beyond the horizontal outside limits of the foundation, footing, box culvert or
structural member to which the excavation relates. Concrete blinding or sub-foundations are
not to be considered as structure for the purpose of defining such excavation.
5 If during the progress of the work, loose or improperly compacted soil or such other material
as the Engineer considers would be detrimental to load distribution of new foundations to the
underlying soil is encountered below the structure foundation level such material shall be
removed within the limits as directed by the Engineer.
6 The resulting void shall be backfilled with either blinding concrete or with suitable material
compacted to a density not less than 95 % of the maximum dry density as per ASTM D1557.
The Engineer shall specify the type of backfill to be employed at each location.
ar
7 After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer to that effect,
at
and no footing, bedding material or pipe culvert shall be placed until the Engineer has
approved the depth of excavation and the character of the material on which the foundations
-Q
will bear.
8 All rock or other hard foundation material shall be cleaned of all loose material and cut to a
LL
firm surface, either level, stepped, or serrated as directed by the Engineer. All seams or
crevices shall be cleaned and grouted. All loose and disintegrated rock and thin strata shall
be removed. When the footing is to rest on material other than rock, excavation to final grade
W
shall not be made until just before the footing is to be placed.

s
3.7.5 Use of Materials

en
1 All excavated material, so far as it is suitable, shall be used as backfill or roadway fill.
m
2 All excavated material shall be approved by the Engineer before being used as fill. All surplus
e
excavated material and excavated material rejected by the Engineer for use on the site shall
Si
be removed from the site and disposed of in locations approved by the Engineer.
3 Where the Engineer designates a disposal location this shall be within a 50 km radius of the
site of the Works.
3.7.6 Cofferdams
1 Suitable and practically watertight cofferdams shall be used wherever water-bearing strata
are encountered above the elevation of the bottom of the excavation.
2 Cofferdams or cribs for foundation construction shall, in general, be carried well below the
bottoms of the footings and shall be well braced and as nearly watertight as practicable. In
general, the interior dimensions of cofferdams shall be such as to give sufficient clearance
for the construction of forms and the inspection of their exteriors, and to permit pumping
outside of the forms. Cofferdams or cribs which are tilted or moved laterally during the
process of sinking shall be righted or enlarged so as to provide the necessary clearance.
Part 03: Earthworks
3 When conditions are encountered which, as determined by the Engineer, render it

impracticable to dewater the foundation before placing the footing, the Engineer may require
the construction of a concrete foundation seal of such dimensions as he may consider
necessary, and of such thickness as to resist any possible uplift. The concrete for such a seal
shall be placed as directed by the Engineer. The foundation shall then be dewatered and the
footing placed.
4 If weighted cribs are employed and the weight is used to overcome partially the hydrostatic
pressure acting against the bottom of the foundation seal, special anchorage's such as
dowels or keys shall be provided to transfer the entire weight of the crib to the foundation
seal. When a foundation seal is placed under water, the cofferdam shall be vented or ported
at low water level as directed.
5 As an alternative to a cofferdam, the Contractor may propose a wellpoint dewatering system,

for approval by the Engineer, to keep structural excavation works dry. Such proposal shall
include, but not be limited to, sufficient calculations, sketches and drawings, to justify the
wellpoint positions and lengths in addition to pumping capacity required. The use of a
ar
wellpoint dewatering system may not preclude the use of support or shoring within the
excavation to provide adequate stability and safety to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
at
3.7.7 Backfill Adjacent to Structures
-Q
1 Excavated areas around structures shall be backfilled with suitable excavated materials or
imported materials as approved by the Engineer. Backfill materials shall be placed in
LL
horizontal layers not over 150 mm in depth and compacted to a minimum of 95% of the
maximum dry density obtained by ASTM D1557.
W
2 Material used for backfill adjacent to structures shall have a sulphate content of less than
s
2.5 g/L when tested in accordance with BS 1377.

en
3 Each layer shall be moistened or dried as required and thoroughly compacted as specified.
m
The maximum size of particle allowed in the backfill within one meter of structures shall be 50
mm.
e
Si
4 Backfill and embankment behind walls of any culvert shall not be placed until the top slab of
the culvert has been placed and cured.
5 Backfill to culvert walls shall be carried out simultaneously behind opposite walls.
3.8 FORMATION PREPARATION
3.8.1 Scope
1 This work shall consist of the preparation of the graded formation upon which sub-base, base
course or pavement materials are to be placed, all in accordance with these Specifications.
2 All subgrade shall be compacted to the previous requirements of these Specifications.
3 Preparation and surface treatment of the formation shall be carried out after all duct and pipe
installations in the subgrade have been completed.
Part 03: Earthworks
4 Any non-compliant subgrade material shall be excavated, replaced, and compacted to the
required density.
3.8.2 Protection
1 Once prepared, the formation shall be maintained in the finished condition until the first
succeeding course of sub-base, base, or asphalt pavement material has been placed.
2 The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect the formation from damage:
hauling over finished subgrade shall be limited to that which is essential for construction
purposes.
3 Any equipment used for hauling over the prepared subgrade which in the opinion of the
Engineer is causing undue damage to the prepared subgrade or to the underlying materials
shall be removed from the Works at the request of the Engineer.
4 All cuts, ruts and breaks in the surface of the subgrade shall be repaired by the Contractor
ar
before placing any subsequent layer. The Contractor shall protect the prepared subgrade
from both his own and public traffic.
at
5
-Q
The Contractor shall maintain the subgrade by blading and rolling as frequently as may be
necessary to preserve the subgrade in a completely satisfactory condition.
3.8.3 Rectification
LL
1 Any surface area of the formation which is too high shall be graded off, scarified and re-
W
compacted to the full depth of the affected layer.

s
2 Any surface area of the formation which is too low shall be scarified and corrected by the
en
addition of subgrade material of the same classification and moisture content.
3 The Contractor shall carry out additional testing as required by the Engineer to ensure that
m
the standard of compaction is satisfactory through the full depth of a layer or previously
e
placed layers.
Si
3.9 TOPSOIL
1 Topsoil (sweet soil) shall be fertile, free draining, non-toxic soil capable of sustaining healthy
plant growth.
2 The material proposed for use as topsoil shall be approved by the Agricultural Department of
the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture.
3 Topsoil shall be loosely placed at the designated thickness.
3.10 TESTING
3.10.1 General
1 For verification of material, moisture content, compaction, thickness and other properties of
the materials or workmanship the Engineer shall at all times have access to all portions of the
works and sites. All sampling and testing of material and work shall be carried out under the
direction of the Engineer.
Part 03: Earthworks
2 The minimum frequency of testing shall follow the frequencies mentioned in Table 3.1 unless
more frequent tests are shown elsewhere in the contract documents or directed by the
Engineer. Other testing shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer.
3.10.2 Testing Degree of Compaction
1 Testing shall be done in accordance with ASTM methods of testing, or other approved
equivalent test or designated procedure.
2 The density-in-place of earthworks layers shall be tested by the sand replacement method
(ASTM D 1556) or nuclear method (ASTM D6938).
3 Nuclear density gauge testing should only be carried out by personnel who have approved
user certification issued by the Ministry of Environment.
4 Each in-situ density nuclear gauge shall be calibrated and a calibration form issued. The
Contractor shall maintain on site and with the instrument a copy of the Ministry of
ar
Environment safety and training manual for the use of nuclear density gauges.
at
5 When nuclear gauge is used for field density and moisture content testing, the density and
-Q
moisture content for each material shall be verified by measurements in accordance with
ASTM D1556 and ASTM D2216, respectively. The mean value of the replicate readings shall
be used as the calibration point value for each material.
LL
6 When determining the laboratory maximum dry density the method described in ASTM
D1557 shall be applied.
W
7 No person or company will be permitted to determine in situ density by means of a nuclear

s
type density measuring device without complying with the requirements of the Ministry of
en
Environment. Refer to clause 1.5 of part 1 of this Section.
8 The density of any layer requiring compaction shall be determined in accordance with the
m
specifications mentioned in Table 3.1.

e
Si
9 If a layer does not conform to the required density, additional tests may be taken to
determine the limits of the failing area, after which the Contractor shall rework the area until
the specified density is obtained. The Contractor shall allow enough time in his daily work
program to permit the performance and checking of the above tests, before he proceeds into
any subsequent operations.
3.10.3 California Bearing Ratio
1 The soaked value of the California Bearing Ratio shall be determined on specimens
compacted at the optimum moisture content and 95 % of the maximum dry density as per
ASTM D1557 after soaking for 4 days in accordance with ASTM D1883. CBR value shall
comply with the minimum requirement as per Qatar Highway Design Manual (QHDM).
2 The test surcharge to be used for the equivalent pavement thickness shall be designated by
the Engineer.
Part 03: Earthworks
3.10.4 Testing Levels and Evenness of the Formation
1 The Engineer shall test the levels and evenness of the finished formation surface to ascertain
compliance.
2 The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer a three-meter straight-edge and a crown
template of sturdy and approved design and the necessary labor to assist in the checking
operations.
3 When tested in accordance with ASTM E1703 by a three-meter straight-edge placed at right
angles to, or parallel to, the road centerline or when tested by a crown template placed
centrally at right angles to the road centerline, the maximum gap between the road formation
surface and the testing edge shall not be greater than 20 mm. Measurements shall be carried
out at maximum spacing of 50m of road length for each lane.
4 The subgrade shall be prepared to the levels shown on the contract drawings to a tolerance
of between  15 mm and  20 mm when checked by a level instrument.
ar
5 Variation in the falls to cross-sections of the road shall not exceed 0.4 %.
at
6
-Q
These tests shall be made at any point requested by the Engineer. In the event of any failure,
the Contractor shall correct the unevenness of the surface and resubmit the area for approval
by the Engineer.
LL
3.10.5 Testing Formation Works after Completion

W
1 All completed works shall be inspected at any time as directed by the Engineer in order to
verify the compliance of the executed work to the requirements of the contract as per
s
requirement of Part 5 in Section 3.

en
e m
END OF PART
Si
Part 04: Unbound Pavement Materials
4 UNBOUND PAVEMENT MATERIALS ..................................................................... 2

4.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
4.1.1 Scope 2
4.1.2 References 2
4.1.3 Definitions 3
4.1.4 Submittals 3
4.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................ 4
4.2.1 Sources of Materials 4
4.2.2 Storage and Handling of Materials 4
4.2.3 Inspection Testing and Control 5
4.2.4 Fine Aggregate 5
4.2.5 Coarse / Combined Aggregate 6
ar
4.2.6 Recycled Aggregate 7
4.2.7 Water 8
at
4.2.8 Performance Indicators -Q 8
4.3 MAIN EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................. 8
4.3.1 General 8
4.3.2 Paving Machines 9
LL
4.3.3 Central Mixers 9

4.4 MIX DESIGNS ......................................................................................................... 9
W
4.5 SCREENING AND MIXING ..................................................................................... 9

s
4.6 SPREADING AND COMPACTION ........................................................................ 10

en
4.7 CORRECTIVE ACTION......................................................................................... 11

4.8 PROTECTION OF SURFACE ............................................................................... 11
m
4.9 TESTING ............................................................................................................... 12

e
4.9.1 General 12
Si
4.9.2 Thickness 12
4.9.3 Evenness and Level 12
4 UNBOUND PAVEMENT MATERIALS
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes materials, equipment and construction requirements for unbound layers
(aggregate Subbase and Road Base courses).
2 Related Parts are:

Part 1 General
Part 3 Earthworks
4.1.2 References
ar
at
-Q
ASTM C88 ..................Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium
Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate
ASTM C131 ................Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
LL
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles

Machine
W
ASTM C136 ................Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
s
ASTM C535 ................Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size

en

Machine
m
ASTM D1556 ..............Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
Sand-Cone Method
e
Si
ASTM D1557 ..............Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))
ASTM D1883 ..............Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of
Laboratory-Compacted Soils
ASTM D2216 ..............Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture)
Content of Soil and Rock by Mass
ASTM D2419 ..............Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate
ASTM D4318 ..............Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils
ASTM D4429 ..............Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Soils in
Place
ASTM D4791 ..............Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat
ASTM D4944 ..............Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water (Moisture)
ASTM D5821 ..............Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured
Particles in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D6913 .............Standard Test Methods for Particle Size Distribution (Gradation) of
Soils Using Sieve Analysis
ASTM D6938 ..............Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil
ASTM E1703 ..............Standard Test Method for Measuring Rut-Depth of Pavement Surfaces
Using a Straightedge
AASHTO T307 ...........Standard Method of Test for Determining the Resilient Modulus of
Soils and Aggregate Materials
BS 1377 Part 3 ...........Methods of test for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes: Chemical and
4.1.3 Definitions
ar
2 Optimum moisture content (OMC): the moisture content of soil at which a specific
at
compaction effort will produce the maximum dry density when determined in accordance with
-Q
the ASTM D1557.
3 Maximum dry density (MDD): The dry density of soil obtained using a specified compaction
effort at the optimum moisture content when determined in accordance with the modified
LL
compaction test ASTM D1557. Unit weight and moisture content of materials containing more
than 5% by mass of oversize fraction tested in accordance with ASTM D1557 should be
W
corrected following ASTM D4718.

s
4 Subgrade: the compacted existing ground or fill for 500mm beneath formation.
en
5 Formation: the compacted subgrade level shaped in readiness to receive the Subbase or
Road Base courses.
e m
6 Subbase: It is the layer between the subgrade and the Road Base. It consists of compacted
Si
selected granular materials.
7 Road Base: It is the layer directly beneath the asphalt course layers and above the subbase
or subgrade layer. It consists of compacted selected materials. It can be untreated or treated
with suitable stabilizing admixtures.
4.1.4 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit recent test results for the proposed sources of materials for all
quality requirements of the Contract. The Contractor shall submit a test certificate that proves
that the raw materials that are purchased/used comply with specifications. The testing may
be performed by an approved private laboratory or by the laboratory associated with the plant
itself.
(a) Materials production, handling, storage, identification, marking and traceability to

(b) Quality assurance and quality control plans for all construction activities.
(c) Materials production, handling, storage, identification and marking, traceability to

(d) Quality control testing plan.
(e) Equipment and its suitability to fulfill all construction activities to the required quality.
(f) Personnel capability.
(g) Safety and environment preservation measures.
1 If requested the Contractor shall arrange for the Engineer to visit the source of the materials
and jointly take samples for testing. The Contractor shall carry out testing as directed by the
Engineer.
4.2 MATERIALS
ar
4.2.1 Sources of Materials
at
1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the proposed sources of materials. The
-Q
Contractor shall ensure that the sources of all aggregates have been approved by the
Municipality concerned.
2 The Engineer shall approve the sources before delivery of materials to the site.
LL
3 Where a proposed source of material is not approved, the Contractor shall propose an
W
alternative source of material.

s
4.2.2 Storage and Handling of Materials

en
1 Materials shall be so stored and handled as to assure the preservation of their quality and
fitness for use in the works. Even after source approval has been given materials may again
m
be inspected and tested before use in the work.

e
Si
2 Stored material shall be located so as to facilitate prompt inspection.
3 All storage sites shall be restored to their original condition before acceptance of the Works.
4 Handling and stockpiling of aggregates shall at all times be such as to eliminate segregation
or contamination of the various sizes. Stockpiles shall be kept flat, and the formation of high
cone-shaped piles shall not be permitted. When conveyor belts are used for stockpiling
aggregates the Engineer may require the use of baffled chutes or perforated chimneys.
5 When trucks are used to construct stockpiles, the stockpiles shall be constructed one layer at
a time with trucks depositing their loads as close to the previous load as possible. The use of
tractors or loaders to push material deposited at one location to another location in the
stockpile shall not be allowed during the construction of the stockpile and their use shall be
limited to levelling the deposited material only.
6 The Contractor shall take all necessary protection measures in the storage, handling and
stockpiling of materials to prevent contamination of materials by dust. The measures that the
Contractor proposes to take shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
4.2.3 Inspection Testing and Control
1 Loose materials for testing and acceptance shall be sampled from the un-compacted in-place
layer.
2 For verification of plant weights and measures, character of materials used in the preparation
of the mixes, testing and other quality control requirements, the Engineer shall at all times be
provided access to all portions of the mixing plant, aggregate plant, storage yards, crushers
and other facilities used for producing and processing the materials of construction.
3 The Engineer shall have authority to take samples and perform tests on any material
supplied to the site from any source whatsoever in order to establish compliance and to
accept or reject as he deems necessary. Samples shall also be taken from completed work
to determine compliance. The frequency of all sampling and testing shall be as designated by
the Engineer.
4 The Contractor shall provide suitable facilities at the quarry or plants to carry out all
ar
necessary tests on the raw materials and mixes.
at
5 The Contractor shall arrange for obtaining specimens of materials and samples taken from
-Q
stockpiles, including the provision of any necessary equipment and plant. This work shall be
performed in the presence of the Engineer if so directed by the Engineer.
6 Materials that are not in compliance shall be rejected and removed immediately from the site
LL
of the works unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

W
7 Where defects in the materials or the completed work have been corrected, the Contractor
shall not proceed with subsequent work until approval has been given by the Engineer.
s
en
4.2.4 Fine Aggregate
1 Fine aggregate (passing the 4.75 mm sieve) shall consist of crushed mineral aggregate
m
and/or natural sand.

e
Si
2 The fine aggregate shall be clean and free from clay-balls and other extraneous or
detrimental materials.
3 Where the source of fine aggregate does not meet the requirements listed in Table 4.1, the
Contractor may, with the Engineer's approval, add fine aggregate and filler to correct the
gradation or to change the characteristics of the material passing the 0.425mm sieve so as to
meet the requirements. Such additional material shall be added in a manner which ensures a
completely homogeneous material.
Table 4.1
Specifications of fine aggregates for Road Base and Subbase layers
Specification Limits
Parameter Standard Minimum Frequency
Road Base Subbase
Liquid Limit ASTM D4318 25%max. 25% max.
- Each source
Plasticity Index ASTM D4318 6 % max. 6 % max.
- Visible change in material
3
Sand equivalent ASTM D2419 35 min. 25 min. - 1 test every 1000m
Organic content BS 1377

0.5% max. 0.5% max.
ar
Part 3
at
4.2.5 Coarse / Combined Aggregate -Q
1 Coarse aggregate (retained on the 4.75 mm sieve) shall consist of crushed stone or crushed
gravel and shall be free from organic matter, clay and other extraneous or detrimental
materials.
LL
2 The required properties of coarse aggregates for Road Base and Subbase layers are listed in
W
Table 4.2.
Table 4.2
s
Specifications of coarse aggregates for Road Base and Subbase layers

en
m

Road Base Subbase
e
Si
Fractured Faces ASTM D5821 50% min. 50% min.

- Each source
Flat and Elongated
ASTM D4791 10% max. 15% max.
Particles (5:1) - Visible change in
ASTM C131 material

Loss by Abrasion 30% max. 40% max.
ASTM C535 3
- 1 test every 3000m
Soundness
ASTM C88 15% max. 20% max.
(5 cycles by MgSO4)
3 Loose materials for testing and acceptance shall be sampled from the un-compacted in-
place layer.
4 The required properties of combined aggregate for Road Base and Subbase layers are listed
in Table 4.3.
5 Unit weight and moisture content of materials containing more than 5% by mass of oversize
fraction tested in accordance with ASTM D1557 should be corrected following ASTM D4718.
6 When nuclear gauge is used for field density and moisture content testing, 3 readings shall
be made at each test location within a radius of 2 meters. The average of the 3 readings is
considered to be the density for that test location. Individual density readings shall not be less
than the target relative density by more than 0.5%.
7 When nuclear gauge is used for field density and moisture content testing, the density and
moisture content for each material shall be verified by measurements in accordance with
ASTM D1556 and ASTM D2216, respectively. The mean value of the replicate readings shall
be used as the calibration point value for each material.
8 In case abnormally high relative density values are encountered, it will be required to re-
evaluate the related field and laboratory density values.
9 Gradation requirements of combined aggregate for Road Base and Subbase layers are listed
in Table 4.4.
4.2.6 Recycled Aggregate
ar
1 Recycled aggregate produced from excavating natural ground and from demolition wastes
at
can be used in subgrade and subbase layers provided that the specifications stated in
-Q
Section 6 - Part 9 are complied.
Table 4.3
1
Specifications of combined aggregates for Road Base and Subbase layers
LL
W

Road Base Subbase
3 3
2.15 Mg/m 2.05 Mg/m
s
Maximum Dry Density ASTM D1557 - Each source.

min. min.
en
Gradation ASTM D6913 Table 4.4 Table 4.4 - Visible change in

m
California Bearing material

ASTM D1883 80% min. 70% min.
Ratio (CBR) 3
e
(Soaked) - 1 test per 1000m

Swelling 0.5% max. 1.0% max.
Si
ASTM D6938 - 1 per 200 m per

2
Field Density 100% of MDD 100% of MDD
ASTM D1556 layer
In Place Moisture ASTM D6938 - 1 every 75m per
2  1.5% of OMC  2% of OMC lane per layer
Content ASTM D4944
In Place California 2
ASTM D4429 80% min. 70% min. 1 per 2000 m
Bearing Ratio (CBR)
Acid soluble Chloride
BS 1377 Part 3 2% max. 2% max.
Content 3
1 per 3000 m
Acid soluble sulphate
BS 1377 Part 3 3% max. 3% max.
content
1
Loose materials for testing and acceptance shall be sampled from the un-compacted in- place layer.
2
During compaction.
Table 4.4
Gradation limits for Road Base and Subbase layers
Sieve Size Road Base Subbase
50.0 mm 100 100

37.5 mm 95 – 100 90 – 100
19.0 mm 70 – 92 70 – 90
9.5 mm 50 – 70 45 - 75
4.75 mm 35 – 55 30 – 60
0.600 mm 12 – 25 10 – 30
0.075 mm 0–8 0 – 12
ar
4.2.7 Water
at
1 Sea, brackish or saline water shall not be used in the mixing, spreading and compacting
operations for Road Base / Subbase layers.
-Q
4.2.8 Performance Indicators
LL
1 Upon the request of the Engineer, the following performance related indicators shall be
determined from loose in place materials for verification of the pavement structural design
W
following the AASHTO Mechanistic-Empirical Pavement Design Guide:
(a) Resilient Modulus (MR) in accordance with AASHTO T307 at optimum moisture
s
content and maximum density as per ASTM D1557.

en
(b) Parameters and moduli required for determining the Permanent Deformation Potential
m
in accordance with AASTHO Mechanistic Empirical Design Guide.

(c) Parameters and moduli required for measuring the Fatigue Cracking Potential for
e
stabilized and surface layers in accordance with AASHTO Mechanistic Empirical

Si
Design Guide.
3
2 For performance testing, one sample shall be tested every 10,000 m , and for constructions
3
having less than 10,000 m volume, one sample shall be tested every 50% of the total
volume.
4.3 MAIN EQUIPMENT
4.3.1 General
1 Unless otherwise stipulated herein the provisions of Section 6, Part 3 (Earthworks), in respect
of the main machinery and tools used in earthworks construction, shall be adhered to,
subject to the modifications and additions in this clause.
2 The Contractor shall not be allowed to use any equipment or plant before obtaining the
approval of the Engineer, and the Contractor shall undertake sound technical methods in
operation and to engage skilled and trained operators, mechanics and labor to carry out the
works.
3 The Engineer shall have the right to stop the use of any equipment or plant which he deems
to be inferior to the quality required and to instruct the removal of such equipment and to
have it replaced by suitable equipment or to alter the method of operation at any time he so
desires.
4 The Contractor shall immediately comply with such instructions without being entitled to any
indemnities or extensions as a result of such instructions.
5 The Engineer shall have the right to expel any operators, mechanics or labor and to instruct
suitable replacement thereof at any time he deems such action is necessary.
4.3.2 Paving Machines
1 Paving machines shall be self-propelled and shall be capable of spreading the Subbase and
Road Base materials in one operation so as to make it ready for compaction with minimum
shaping.
ar
2 The paving machines shall be provided with a screed that strikes off and distributes the
material to the required width and level.
at
3
-Q
The width of each spread shall not be less than a traffic lane wide.
4 The screed shall be adjustable to the required width being laid.

LL
5 Screed action includes any practical motion that produces a finished surface texture of
uniform appearance.
W
4.3.3 Central Mixers

s
1 A central mixing plant shall be either of an approved drum or pugmill type with a moisture
en
control system so that the material may be spread without further mixing or processing.
m
2 Means shall be provided for regulating the flow of material to the mixer. The various feeds
e
shall be calibrated to allow adjustments to the mix design to be carried out.

Si
4.4 MIX DESIGNS
1 Aggregate Subbase and Road Base courses shall consist of crushed mineral aggregates or
natural mineral aggregates of the designated gradation and thickness.
2 The maximum dry density and the optimum moisture content of the material shall be
ascertained as per the test procedure given in ASTM D1557 and this shall be used to assess
the degree of compaction of the mix after rolling.
3 The pavement layer designated as sub-base may be substituted by any of the materials
designated to be laid on it subject to the approval of the Engineer.
4.5 SCREENING AND MIXING
1 Screening shall be required for the materials used in Subbase and Road Base courses to
ensure that the designated gradation is attained.
2 Screens shall be of the size and number required to remove oversize aggregate and to
separate the materials into two or more fractions so that they may be combined to meet the
required gradation.
3 A central mixing plant shall be used for the mixing of materials.
4 Mixing of separate materials on the roadway by motor grader will not be permitted.
4.6 SPREADING AND COMPACTION
1 Before commencing the construction of the Subbase and Road Base courses, a written
approval for the Engineer must be obtained that the subgrade is in compliance.
2 The optimum moisture content of the material shall be noted from the mix design and the
actual moisture content determined at the plant after mixing.
3 If the natural moisture content is less than the optimum moisture content, the necessary
ar
amount of water must be added to obtain the optimum content.
at
4 Allowance shall be made for the quantity of moisture which may be lost by evaporation in the
-Q
process of raking, levelling and compacting, depending on atmospheric temperature.
5 The compacted layer shall have moisture content within  1.5% of the optimum moisture
content for Road Base layers and within  2% for Subbase layers.
LL
W
6 The moisture content shall be uniform in all parts of the section where the work is being
carried out and in the various depths of the layer thickness.
s
7 Subbase and Road Base courses shall be laid by a paving machine with a spreader box.
en
8 Loose samples of materials for testing and acceptance shall be obtained from behind the
m
paving machine upon the approval of the Engineer.

e
9 Compaction shall start immediately the material has been laid and as per the approved rolling
Si
pattern.
10 Work on the Subbase and Road Base courses shall not be permitted during rainy weather.
11 Material shall be spread to a thickness that would result in layers not more than 150 mm thick
after compaction. Where the finished compacted thickness exceeds 150 mm placing shall
be executed in composite layers each layer not exceeding 150 mm in compacted thickness
12 The course shall not be rolled when the underlying material is soft or yielding or when the
rolling causes a wave-like motion in this course.
13 When the rolling develops irregularities, the irregular surface shall be loosened, then refilled
with the same kind of material as used in constructing the course and again rolled.
14 Along places inaccessible to rollers, the Subbase and Road Base courses material shall be
tamped thoroughly with suitable mechanical tampers to achieve the required density and
finish.
15 Rolling must continue until a relative density of not less than 100 % of the maximum dry
density has been obtained as determined by the moisture-density relationship in ASTM
D1557.
16 Care shall be taken so that layers already compacted under the layer being executed are not
damaged, or that the formation is not damaged.
17 This aspect must be given special attention in places where rolling equipment makes turns to
change direction.
18 Any such damage resulting in mixing the various layers constituting the different subgrades,
Subbase and Road Base courses shall be carefully made good by the Contractor at his own
expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.7 CORRECTIVE ACTION
1 Any material that fails to meet test requirements shall either be reworked or removed and
ar
replaced and then retested to check for compliance.
at
2 Any soft spots, irregularities or depressions that develop in the surface of the Subbase or
-Q
Road Base courses, shall either be corrected by loosening the surface of such areas and
adding further material, or by removing the material in such areas and replacing with further
approved material.
LL
3 In the event of heave occurring during compaction, caused either by excessive build-up of
W
pore water pressure or the groundwater table being sufficiently high to affect construction
techniques, either of the following procedures shall be adopted subject to the approval of the
Engineer:
s
en
(a) Sufficient time shall be allowed to elapse enabling the excess pore water to dissipate
before further construction or compaction is carried out
m
(b) The affected material shall be removed, and approved alternative construction layers
e
substituted.
Si
4 For correction of low density or incorrect level, the top 75 mm shall be scarified, reshaped
with material added or removed as necessary and re-compacted to the designated
requirement. The area treated shall not be less than 30 metres long and 2 metres wide or
such area determined by the Engineer as necessary to attain compliance.
5 Where the surface of the sub-base is covered in a very thin smooth skin composed of fine
particles cemented together acting as a barrier to the prime coat the top 75 mm shall be
scarified, reshaped, watered if necessary, and re-compacted prior to the application of prime
coat.
6 The Contractor shall carry out additional testing if required by the Engineer to ensure that the
standard of compaction is satisfactory through the full depth of the layer.
4.8 PROTECTION OF SURFACE
1 The Contractor shall protect the Subbase and Road Base courses so that it shall be
maintained sound during work progress, after its completion and before receiving the
bituminous layers or before laying the surface overlay thereon.
2 Any damage caused to the layer if exposed to traffic or natural conditions resulting in damage
to its surface shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
3 The Engineer has the right to stop all hauling over completed or partially completed Subbase
and Road Base courses when in his opinion such hauling is causing damage.
4 Following the completion of the Subbase or Road Base courses the Contractor shall perform
all maintenance work necessary to keep the course in a condition for priming.
4.9 TESTING
4.9.1 General
1 Loose materials for testing and acceptance shall be sampled from the un-compacted in-place
layer.
ar
2 All testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM, AASHTO and BS standards listed in
section 4.2.
at
3
-Q
Testing frequency for the properties of Subbase or Road Base layers are listed in Tables 4.1,
4.2 and 4.3.
4 At any stage in the mixing, transportation, spreading or compaction process, the Engineer
LL
may instruct that these tests are carried out.

W
5 Before the application of any prime coat or any other paving course, the aggregate Subbase
or Road Base courses shall have been tested for compliance with the requirements of this
s
clause on testing and approved by the Engineer.

en
4.9.2 Thickness
m
1 The thickness of the material shall be derived from checking the level by dipping from string
e
lines stretched across the roadway between pins or kerbs. Unless agreed otherwise with the
Si
Engineer dipping shall be carried out at intervals of not less than 10m.
2 The thickness of the material shall be measured at the location where the material is
removed from the roadway for gradation analysis.
3 Wherever the thickness of compacted aggregate Subbase or Road Base courses is found to
vary from the thickness specified in the project drawings or specification by more than 10 %
the area involved shall be satisfactorily corrected to provide the required thickness
constructed to the designated grade level.
4.9.3 Evenness and Level
1 The final surfaces of the Subbase or Road Base courses shall be tested by means of a 3
meter long straight edge in accordance with ASTM E1703 and no rises or depressions in
excess of 10 mm shall appear in the surface. Measurements shall be carried out at
maximum spacing of 30m of road length for each lane.
2 The finished surface shall also be checked by dips or spot levels and shall be constructed to
the designated grade levels to within  10 mm.
3 Where these requirements are not met, the Contractor shall determine the full extent of the
area which is out of tolerance and shall make good the surface of the course by scarifying to
a minimum depth of 75 mm or 4 times the maximum particle size, whichever is greater,
reshaping by adding or removing material as necessary, adding water if necessary and re-
compacting.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 05: Asphalt Works
5 ASPHALT WORKS.................................................................................................. 3
5.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 3
5.1.1 Scope 3
5.1.2 References 3
5.1.3 Definitions 7
5.1.4 Submittals 7
5.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................ 8
5.2.1 Unacceptable Materials 8
5.2.2 Fine Aggregate 9
5.2.3 Coarse Aggregate 9
5.2.4 Recycled Aggregate 10
5.2.5 Mineral Filler 10
5.2.6 Asphalt Binder 11
ar
5.2.7 Prime Coat 13
5.2.8 Tack Coat 13
at
5.2.9 Delivery, Storage and Handling -Q 13
5.2.10 Inspection and Control 14
5.3 MARSHALL MIX DESIGN ..................................................................................... 14
5.3.1 General 14
LL
5.3.2 Marshall Mix Design Criteria 15

5.3.3 Quality Control Testing 17
W
5.4 DENSE BITUMEN MACADAM .............................................................................. 20

5.5 SUPERPAVE MIX DESIGN ................................................................................... 22
s
en
5.6 PERFORMANCE EVALUATION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE ................................ 24

5.7 DELIVERY, SPREADING AND FINISHING ........................................................... 25
m
5.7.1 Delivery of Mixes 25

e
5.7.2 Spreading and Finishing 25

Si
5.7.3 Compaction of Mixes 26

5.7.4 Transverse Joints 27
5.7.5 Longitudinal Joints 28
5.7.6 Paving Edges 28
5.7.7 Breakdown Rolling 28
5.7.8 Intermediate Rolling 29
5.7.9 Finish Rolling 29
5.7.10 Protection of Laid Courses 29
5.8 COLD PLANING .................................................................................................... 29
5.9 PRIME COAT ........................................................................................................ 30
5.9.1 General 30
5.9.2 Equipment Required 30
5.9.5 Maintenance and Traffic 31
5.10 TACK COAT .......................................................................................................... 31

5.10.1 General 31
5.10.5 Maintenance and Traffic 32
5.11 THICKNESS AND LEVEL...................................................................................... 32
5.11.1 Thickness 32
5.11.2 Transverse Evenness 33
5.11.3 Evenness and Rideability 33
5.12 PAVEMENT EVALUATION TECHNIQUES ........................................................... 35
5.13 PRODUCTION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE COURSES ........................................ 35
5.13.1 Weather Limitations 35
ar
5.13.3 Survey and Preparation 35
5.13.4 Heating of Asphalt Binder 36
at
5.13.5 Heating of Mineral Aggregate -Q 36
5.13.6 Proportioning and Mixing 36
5.14 HAULING EQUIPMENT......................................................................................... 37
5.15 OTHER EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................ 37
LL
5.15.1 Spreading and Finishing Equipment 37

5.15.2 Rolling Equipment 38
W
5.15.3 Liquid Asphalt Distributor 39

APPENDIX .......................................................................................................................... 40
s
en
e m
Si
5 ASPHALT WORKS
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
1 Materials, equipment, and construction of bituminous paving works including prime coating
and tack coating.
2 Related Parts
Part 1, ............. General

Part 3, ............. Earthworks
Part 4, ............. Unbound Pavement Materials.
5.1.2 References
ar
at
ASTM C40 ..................Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
-Q
Concrete
ASTM C50 ..................Standard Practice for Sampling, Sample Preparation, Packing and
Marking of Lime and Limestone Products
LL
ASTM C51 ..................Terminology Relating to Lime and Limestone (as used by the industry)
W
ASTM C88 .................Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium
Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate
ASTM C117 ................Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve
s
en
in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

ASTM C127 ...............Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity),
m
and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate

ASTM C128 ...............Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity),
e
and Absorption of Fine Aggregate

Si
ASTM C131 ...............Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small Size
Machine
ASTM C136 ...............Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
ASTM C142 ...............Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates
ASTM C150 ................Specifications for Portland Cement
ASTM C535 ...............Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large Size
Machine
ASTM D5 ....................Standard Test Method for Penetration of Bituminous Materials
ASTM D6 ....................Standard Test Method for Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic
Compounds
ASTM D36 ..................Standard Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball
Apparatus)
ASTM D75 .................Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates

ASTM D92 .................Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open
Cup Tester
ASTM D113 ................Standard Test Method for Ductility of Bituminous Materials
ASTM D140 ...............Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Materials
ASTM D242 ................Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
ASTM D402 ................Standard Test Method for Distillation of Cutback Asphaltic
(Bituminous) Products
ASTM D546 ................Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler for
ASTM D946 ...............Standard Specification for Penetration Graded Asphalt Cement for
ASTM D977 ................Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D979 ................Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ar
ASTM D995-95...........Standard Specification for Mixing Plants for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid
at
-Q
ASTM D1188: ............Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of
Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Coated Samples
ASTM D2027 ..............Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type)
LL
ASTM D2041 .............Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and
Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
W
ASTM D2042 ..............Standard Test Method for Solubility of Asphalt Materials in

Trichloroethylene
s
ASTM D2172 .............Standard Test Methods for Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from
en

ASTM D2419 .............Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
m
Aggregate
ASTM D2726 .............Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non
e
Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures

Si
ASTM D2872 .............. Standard Test Method for Effect of Heat and Air on a Moving Film of
Asphalt (Rolling Thin Film Oven Test)
ASTM D2950 ..............Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by
Nuclear Methods
ASTM D2995 ..............Standard Practice for Estimating Application Rate of Bituminous
Distributors
ASTM D3319 ..............Standard Practice for the Accelerated Polishing of Aggregates Using
the British Wheel
ASTM D3549 ..............Standard Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted
Bituminous Paving Mixture Specimens
ASTM D4318 .............Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils
ASTM D4402 .............Standard Test Method for Viscosity Determination of Asphalt at
Elevated Temperatures Using a Rotational Viscometer
ASTM D4791 .............Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat
ASTM D5361 ..............Standard Practice for Sampling Compacted Bituminous Mixtures for
Laboratory Testing
ASTM D5444 ..............Standard Test Method for Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted
Aggregate
ASTM D5546 .............Standard Test Method for Solubility of Asphalt Binders in Toluene by
Centrifuge
ASTM D5581 ..............Standard Test Method for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous
Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus (6 inch-Diameter Specimen)
ASTM D5821 .............Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured
Particles in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D6307 ..............Standard Test Method for Asphalt Content of Hot-Mix Asphalt by
Ignition Method
ASTM D6373 ..............Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder
ASTM D6521 .............Standard Practice for Accelerated Aging of Asphalt Binder Using a
ar
ASTM D6648 .............Standard Test Method for Determining the Flexural Creep Stiffness of
Asphalt Binder Using the Bending Beam Rheometer (BBR)
at
ASTM D6723 ..............Standard Test Method for Determining the Fracture Properties of
-Q
Asphalt Binder in Direct Tension (DT)
ASTM D6926 .............Standard Practice for Preparation of Bituminous Specimens Using
Marshall Apparatus
LL
ASTM D6927 ..............Standard Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow of Bituminous
Mixtures
W
ASTM D6931 ..............Standard Test Method for Indirect Tensile (IDT) Strength of
Bituminous Mixtures
s
ASTM D7173 .............Standard Practice for Determining the Separation Tendency of

en
Polymer from Polymer Modified Asphalt

ASTM D7175 .............Standard Test Method for Determining the Rheological Properties of
m
Asphalt Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer

e
ASTM D7405 .............Standard Test Method for Multiple Stress Creep and Recovery
Si
(MSCR) of Asphalt Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer

ASTM E11 .................Standard Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
ASTM E274 ................Standard Test Method for Skid Resistance of Paved Surfaces Using a
Full-Scale Tire
ASTM E303 ................Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties
Using the British Pendulum Tester
ASTM E950................. Standard Test Method for Measuring the Longitudinal Profile of
Travelled Surfaces with an Accelerometer Established Inertial Profiling
Reference
ASTM E965 ................Standard Test Method for Measuring Pavement Macrotexture Depth
Using a Volumetric Technique
ASTM E1926............... Standard Practice for Computing International Roughness Index of
Roads from Longitudinal Profile Measurements
AASHTO M82.............Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type)

AASHTO M92.............Standard Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
AASHTO M140...........Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt

AASHTO M208...........Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt (ASTM D2397-
02)
AASHTO M320...........Standard Specification for Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder
AASHTO M332...........Standard Specification for Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder Using
Multiple Stress Creep Recovery (MSCR) Test, Single User Digital
Publication
AASHTO R28 .............Standard Practice for Accelerated Aging of Asphalt Binder Using a
AASHTO R35 ............ Standard Practice for Superpave Volumetric Design for Hot-Mix Asphalt
(HMA)
AASHTO T44 .............Standard Method of Test for Solubility of Bituminous Materials
AASHTO T48 .............Standard Method of Test for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open
ar
Cup
at
AASHTO T240 ...........Standard Method of Test for Effect of Heat and Air on a Moving Film of
Asphalt Binder (Rolling Thin-Film Oven Test)
-Q
AASHTO T313 ...........Standard Method of Test for Determining the Flexural Creep Stiffness
of Asphalt Binder Using the Bending Beam Rheometer (BBR)
LL
AASHTO T283 ........... Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Compacted Asphalt Mixtures
to Moisture-Induced Damage
W
AASHTO T314 ...........Standard Method of Test for Determining the Fracture Properties of
Asphalt Binder in Direct Tension (DT)
AASHTO T315 ...........Standard Method of Test for Determining the Rheological Properties of
s
Asphalt Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer (DSR)

en
AASHTO T316 ...........Standard Method of Test for Viscosity Determination of Asphalt Binder
m
Using Rotational Viscometer

AASHTO T350 ...........Standard Method of Test for Multiple Stress Creep Recovery (MSCR)
e
Test of Asphalt Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer (DSR)

Si
AASHTO PP60 ........... Standard Practice for Preparation of Cylindrical Performance Test
Specimens Using the Superpave Gyratory Compactor (SGC)
AASHTO PP61 .......... Standard Practice for Developing Dynamic Modulus Master Curves for
Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Using the Asphalt Mixture Performance Tester
(AMPT)
AASHTO TP79 .......... Standard Method of Test for Determining the Dynamic Modulus and
Flow Number for Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Using the Asphalt Mixture
Performance Tester (AMPT)
BS 812-110 ................Testing aggregates Methods for determination of aggregate crushing

value (ACV)
BS EN 12697-13 ........Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt. Temperature
measurement
5.1.3 Definitions
2 Base Course: One or more bituminous layers beneath Wearing Course and above the
unbound Road Base Layer. It usually consists of a mixture of aggregates and bituminous
materials and functions as a structural portion of pavement.
3 Wearing Course: Top surface bituminous course, which resists skidding, traffic abrasion, and
the disintegrating effects of climate.
5.1.4 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit for approval a proposed Job Mix Formula (JMF) together with all
applicable design data at least one month before beginning the work. The JMF shall give a
combined gradation showing a single definite percentage passing each sieve as well as a
percentage of each material to be used in the mix. The JMF shall also establish the mixing
ar
and compaction temperature values and a compaction reference density. The Engineer will
test samples of the materials proposed for use in order to check their quality and to check the
at
proposed mix design. The Contractor shall report all the values obtained in the laboratory
-Q
design and shall submit these together with a copy of the plotted curves resulting from the
tests in an approved form to the Engineer. The Engineer may require verification of the
submitted design before giving approval. The Engineer shall approve the optimum binder
content based upon the design values submitted by the Contractor and shall notify the
LL
Contractor of the value. No asphalt works will be allowed to commence before the
Contractor receives written approval from the Engineer for his JMF.
W
2 The asphalt mix design submission shall include a copy of valid calibration certificates from a
s
calibration service agency approved by the Laboratories and Standardization Affairs (LSA) for
en
the batching plant and the relevant laboratory equipment such as but not limited to balances,
proving rings, and load devices. Approval certificates for mix designs will not be issued if the
m
above requirements have not been complied with.

e
3 Based on the Engineer request, the Contractor shall submit the pertinent certifications of
Si
materials, equipment, plants, personnel and processes in relation to the project. Certificates
must be issued by a competent authority approved by the Engineer.
(a) Bituminous and asphalt materials production, storage, transportation, identification and
marking procedure and traceability to source of production.
(b) Quality assurance and quality control plans for laying, compaction and all construction
activities.
(c) Quality control testing plan.
(d) Equipment and its suitability to fulfil all construction activities to the required quality.
(e) Personnel capability.
(f) Safety and environment preservation measures.
5 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a complete report on the origin and
composition of all stone and/or gravel aggregates to be used in the work (Aggregate
Resources Report). All materials shall comply with the specified requirements for the various
aggregates.
6 Delivery of materials produced from commercial manufacturing process shall be

accompanied by the manufacturer’s certification and test reports from local approved
laboratory showing the materials compliance with the specification for which it is stipulated.
7 After receiving the approval of specific sources of material the Contractor cannot change
these sources without prior written approval of the Engineer.
1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the sources of materials and the Engineer shall
approve the sources. All materials shall be tested and approved before use.
2 Where the quality of material from a source of material does not comply with the designated
requirements, the Contractor shall furnish material that does comply from other sources.
Delivery of materials produced from commercial manufacturing processes shall be
accompanied by the manufacturer's certification and test report showing that the materials
comply with the designated requirements.
ar
3 No change shall be permitted in the source of any of the materials until the technical
at
submissions listed in the specification have been made and approved by the Engineer.
4
-Q
All processed materials shall be tested and approved before being stored at the site or
incorporated in the works and may be inspected and tested at any time during the progress
of their preparation and use. Questionable materials, pending laboratory testing subsequent
LL
approval shall not be unloaded and incorporated with materials previously approved and
accepted.
W
5 It is the full responsibility of both the asphalt mixture producer and the Contractor to obtain a
certificate which proves that the asphalt binder complies with the specifications. Furthermore,
s
both the asphalt mixture producer and the Contractor shall perform all the required tests in an
en
approved private laboratory to make sure that the asphalt binder being purchased complies
with the specifications. The LSA will, at any time, take samples from the asphalt mixtures
m
producer’s plants and test them as part of its quality practice.

e
5.2 MATERIALS
Si
5.2.1 Unacceptable Materials
1 Materials that do not conform to the designated requirements shall be rejected and
immediately removed from the site of the works unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
No rejected material, the defects of which have been corrected, shall be used until approval
has been given by the Engineer.
2 Bituminous paving courses shall consist of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, filler material,
and bitumen binder. Mixture of two different types of rocks, e.g. igneous and sedimentary
having different engineering properties shall not be permitted.
3 During execution of works, variations in the specific gravity of any individual fraction of
aggregates used in the asphalt mixes by more than 1% shall cause the Engineer to request
for evaluation of aggregates consistency and compliance and/or mix design validation.
5.2.2 Fine Aggregate
1 Fine aggregate is that portion of the mineral aggregate passing the 2.36mm ASTM sieve for
the Marshall mix design and passing the 4.75mm sieve for the Superpave mix design.
2 Fine aggregate shall consist of crushed hard durable rock and shall be of such gradation that
when combined with other aggregates in proper proportions, the resultant mixture will meet
the required gradation. Fine aggregate shall be non-plastic and chemically stable.
3 The source of natural fine aggregate is considered to be the crusher site at which it is
produced. Crushed fine aggregate shall be produced by crushing clean coarse aggregate
and shall not be thin, flaky or elongated. Sampling of fine aggregate shall be in accordance
with ASTM D75.
4 Fine aggregate shall be clean and free from organic matter, clay, cemented particles and
other extraneous or detrimental materials.
ar
5 Unless permitted elsewhere in the contract, the aggregate type for wearing course shall be
Gabbro. The aggregate type for Base Course shall be either Gabbro or Limestone.
at
6
-Q
The Contractor shall ensure that the sources of all fine aggregates have been approved by
the Municipality concerned.
7 The specifications of fine aggregates for asphalt mixtures are listed in Table 5.1.
LL
Table 5.1
W
Fine Aggregate Specifications for Marshall Mixes
Parameter Standard Specification Limits Minimum Frequency

s
4% max. (stockpile)
en
Plasticity index ASTM D 4318

Non Plastic (hot bins)
m
Sand equivalent value ASTM D2419 45% min. - Each source

Soundness by magnesium
e
ASTM C88 18% max. - Visible change in

sulphate
Si
material
Acid soluble chloride content BS 1377 Part 3 0.1% max. 3
- 1 test every 2000m
Acid soluble sulphate content BS 1377 Part 3 0.5% max.
Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C142 None
Organic Impurities ASTM C40 No Impurities
5.2.3 Coarse Aggregate
1 Coarse aggregate is that portion of the mineral aggregate retained on the 2.36mm ASTM
sieve for the Marshall mix design and retained on the 4.75mm ASTM sieve for the
Superpave mix design. Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed natural stones and gravel.
Crushed particles shall be cubic and angular in shape and shall not be thin, flaky or
elongated. The gradation shall be such that when combined with other aggregate fraction in
proper proportions, the resultant mixture will meet the required gradation.
2 The source of crushed aggregate is considered to be the crushing site from which it is
produced. Sampling of coarse aggregate shall be in accordance with ASTM D75.
3 Coarse aggregate shall be clean and free from organic matter, clay, cemented particles and
other extraneous or detrimental material.
4 The specifications of coarse and combined aggregates for asphalt mixtures are listed in
Table 5.2.
5 Unless permitted elsewhere in the contract, the aggregate type for wearing course shall be
Gabbro. The aggregate type for Base Course shall be either Gabbro or Limestone.
6 If directed by the Engineer, the polished stone value (PSV) should be determined for wearing
course aggregates of main lane as per ASTM D3319. The PSV shall not be less than 45.
5.2.4 Recycled Aggregate
1 Recycled aggregate produced from excavating natural ground can be used in asphalt
mixtures for temporary roads and for roads, which serve agricultural areas provided that the
specifications stated in Section 6 - Part 9 are complied.
ar
Table 5.2
at
Coarse and Combined Aggregate Specifications for Marshall Mixes
-Q
Minimum
Parameter Standard Base Course Base Course Wearing Frequency
(Class A) (Class B) Course
One or more Fractured
LL
ASTM D5821 100% min. 100% min. 100% min.

Faces
1
Two or more Fractured
ASTM D5821 85% min. 85% min. 85% min.
W
Faces
Table 5.7, Job Mix gradation and Table
Gradation (Combined) ASTM C136 - Each source
5.10 tolerances
s
Flat and Elongated - Visible change

en
ASTM D4791 15 % max. 15% max. 10 % max.

Particles (5:1) in material
Soundness
ASTM C88 15 % max. 15% max. 10 % max. - 1 test every
m
(5 cycles by MgSO4) 3
2000m
ASTM C131
e
Los Angeles Abrasion 30% max. 30% max. 25% max.

ASTM C535
Si
Water absorption ASTM C127 2.0% max. 2.0% max. 1.5% max.
Aggregate Crushing BS 812
25 % max. 25 % max. 20% max.
Value (ACV) Part 110
1
Higher values can be recommended by the engineer based on the design ESAL.
5.2.5 Mineral Filler
1 Mineral filler when separately supplied from an external source shall consist of finely ground
mineral matter in accordance with ASTM D242 such as rock dust, hydrated lime, cement or
other material which can satisfy the Engineer will produce asphalt mixes of at least equal
quality. It shall be free from organic substances and clay, shall be thoroughly dry and free
from agglomerations, shall be non-plastic and shall meet the grading requirements shown in
Table 5.3.
2 Hydrated lime shall conform to the definitions given in ASTM C51. Sampling, packaging and
marking of hydrated lime shall be in accordance with ASTM C50. Storage and use of the
hydrated lime shall at all times be such as to protect the material from the weather.
Table 5.3
ASTM Sieve % Mass Passing
600 µm 100
300 µm 95 - 100
150 µm 90 – 100
75 µm 70 – 100
3 The grading of mineral filler shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM D546.
4 When cement is used as mineral filler, it shall meet the requirements of ASTM C150.
5.2.6 Asphalt Binder
1 The asphalt binder specified for use in the asphalt mixes shall be either of the following:
(a) Penetration grade 60-70: This binder type shall be graded in accordance with ASTM
ar
D946. The 60-70 binder specifications are listed in Table 5.4. Sampling shall be in
at
accordance with ASTM D140. The 60-70 penetration graded binder is generally
equivalent to PG 64-10 performance graded binder.
-Q
(b) PG 76-10: Based on the Engineer approval, the PG76-10 binder can be used in
asphalt mixes. This binder type shall be a polymer-modified binder (PMB) meeting
AASHTO M320 and ASTM D6373 specifications in addition to separation test criteria
as listed in Table 5.5. Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D140.
LL
2 Prior to the commencement of the mix design, the Contractor shall provide a certificate
W
indicating conformance of binder with the specifications stated above. This certificate shall be
obtained from an approved laboratory.
s
3 The asphalt binder shall be prepared by the refining of petroleum and shall be uniform in
en
character. Blending of asphalt binders from different refineries will be permitted only with the
m
Table 5.4
e
Specifications of Bitumen Penetration Grade 60 – 70

Si
60 – 70 Pen
Min. Max.
Penetration (0.1 mm) at 25C - Each source
ASTM D5 60 70
-100g, 5 Sec
Softening Point Ring & Ball
ASTM D36 46 - - 1 test per 75t of asphalt
Apparatus, C binder per layer
Flash Point, Cleveland Open
ASTM D92 230 -
Cup, C
Ductility at 25 C, cm ASTM D113 100 - - Each source
Solubility Trichloroethylene, % ASTM D2042 99 -
Loss on heating, % ASTM D6 - 0.2
Penetration of Residue of - 1 test per 450t of asphalt
ASTM D5 52 -
original after TFOT, % binder per layer
Ductility of Residue after
ASTM D113 50 -
TFOT at 25 C, 5cm/min, cm
Table 5.5
Specifications of Performance Graded Binders / Polymer Modified Binders (PMB)
Standard Minimum
Parameter Specification
AASHTO ASTM Frequency
Tests on Original Binder
Average 7 days maximum pavement
o - - < 76
design temperature, ( C)
Minimum pavement design - - - Each source
o >-10
temperature,( C)
o
- Visible change in
Flash Point Temperature, Minimum ( C) T48 D92 230 material
Rotational Viscosity, Maximum 3 Pa.s,
o T316 D4402 135 - 1 test per 450t of
Test Temperature ( C)
asphalt binder per
Dynamic Shear, G*/sinδ, Minimum, 1.00
o T315 D7175 76 layer
kPa , Test Temperature ( C) at 10 rad/s
Solubility, min, % T44 D5546 99
ar
1
Separation Test: Absolute Difference
o
between G* @ 76 C and 10 rad/s of Top - D7173 20
at
and Bottom Specimens, Maximum, % -Q
Requirements of the Rolling Thin Film Oven Residue ( T240 / D2872)
Mass Loss, Maximum, Percent T240 D2872 1
Dynamic Shear, G*/sinδ, Minimum, 2.20
o T315 D7175 76
LL
kPa , Test Temperature ( C) at 10 rad/s

- Each source
Pressure Aging Vessel Residue (D6521 / R28)
o - Visible change in
W
PAV Aging Temperature , ( C) R28 D6521 110

Dynamic Shear, G*.sinδ, Maximum 5000 material
o T315 D7175 37
kPa , Test Temperature ( C) at 10 rad/s - 1 test per 450t of
s
Creep Stiffness, S, Maximum 300 MPa asphalt binder per

en
and m-value, Minimum 0.300 at 60 T313 D6648 0 layer

o
seconds , Test Temperature ( C)
m
2
Direct Tension , Failure Strain, Minimum,
e
1.0% (loading rate of 1.0 mm/min),Test T314 D6723 0

o
Si
Temperature( C)
1
Absolute Difference = Abs(100x(top-bottom)/top).
2
If the creep stiffness is below 300 MPa, the direct tension test is not required. If the creep stiffness is
between 300 and 600 MPa, the direct tension failure strain requirement can be used in lieu of the creep
stiffness requirement. The m-value requirement must be satisfied both cases.
4 Based on the Engineer approval, when bitumen grades PG76-10 H, V or E are specified for
heavy, very heavy, and extra heavy loading, the bitumen shall meet the requirements of
AASHTO M332 and will be required to indicate elastic response in percent recovery when
tested in accordance with AASHTO T350 / ASTM D7405.
5 Binders modified using Crumb Rubber and other binders containing particulate materials,
which are graded according to AASHTO M320 and/or AASHTO M332, shall not include
particles with longest dimensions of more than 250μm. In addition, the requirements listed in
Table 5.5 shall be satisfied.
5.2.7 Prime Coat
1 Liquid asphalt for use as prime coat shall be MC-70 medium curing cutback asphalt in
accordance with ASTM D2027 or AASHTO M82.
2 The prime coat shall be a cutback consisting of a 60/70 penetration grade bitumen and
kerosene. The residue from the distillation test, carried out to 360 C in accordance with
ASTM D402, shall be a minimum of 55 % (by volume), as determined by the difference
method. Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D140. One sample shall be tested
every 5 tons.
5.2.8 Tack Coat
1 Emulsified asphalt for use as tack coat in asphalt works may be CSS 1h or CRS-2 cationic
emulsified asphalt in accordance with AASHTO M 208 or SS 1h anionic emulsified asphalt in
accordance with ASTM D977 or AASHTO M140 unless otherwise designated.
ar
2 Emulsified asphalt shall be of the slow-setting cationic or anionic type of the CSS-1h or SS-
1h grades respectively and shall conform to the designated requirements. Sampling shall be
at
in accordance with ASTM D140. One sample shall be tested every 5 tons.
-Q
1 Materials shall be so stored and handled as to assure the preservation of their quality and
LL
fitness for use. Materials, even though approved before storage or handling, may again be
inspected and tested before use in the Works.
W
2 Stored material shall be located so as to facilitate their prompt inspection. All storage
s
locations on land not owned by the Contractor shall be restored to their original condition at
en
the Contractor's expense.

m
3 Handling and stockpiling of aggregates shall at all times be such as to eliminate segregation
or contamination of the various sizes and to prevent contamination of materials by dust.
e
Stockpiles shall be kept flat and the formation of high cone-shaped piles shall not be
Si
permitted. When conveyor belts are used for stockpiling aggregates, the Engineer may
require the use of baffle-chutes or perforated chimneys.
4 Where trucks are used to construct stockpiles, the stockpiles shall be constructed one layer
at a time with trucks depositing their loads as close to the previous load as possible. The use
of tractors or loaders to push material deposited at one location to another location in the
stockpile shall not be allowed during the construction of the stockpile, and their use shall be
limited to levelling the deposited material only.
5 Stockpiles of aggregate located at permanent asphalt plant sites shall be separated by bin
walls and shall be constructed on asphalt or concrete floors. Stockpile locations and
procedures at temporary asphalt plant sites shall be as approved by the Engineer.
6 Intermediate storage of hydrated lime and commercial mineral filler for equipment feeding the
asphalt plant shall be silos of adequate size to ensure a minimum of one day's continuous
operation.
5.2.10 Inspection and Control
1 For verification of weights and measures, character of materials and determination of

temperatures used in the preparation of the asphalt mixes, the Engineer shall at all times
have access to all portions of the mixing plant, aggregate plant, storage yards, crushers and
other facilities used for producing and processing the materials of construction.
2 The Engineer shall have authority to instruct sampling and testing of any material supplied to
the site from any source whatsoever in order to establish their compliance and to accept or
reject as he deems necessary. Samples shall also be taken from completed work to
determine compliance. The frequency of all sampling and testing shall be as designated.
3 The Contractor shall arrange for obtaining specimens of materials, asphalt mixes and
samples cut from the paving courses after compaction, including the provision of necessary
equipment and plant for obtaining these specimens and samples. This work shall be
performed in the presence of the Engineer. The Engineer shall take possession of the
samples upon their removal from the roadway unless the Contractor is authorised otherwise
ar
4 In particular, the Contractor shall provide a portable coring machine and bits for taking 150
at
mm diameter full depth cores of all bituminous paving courses. The coring machine shall be
-Q
available to the Engineer upon request.
5 In addition to the foregoing, one set of three laboratory compacted specimens and one
uncompacted coated sample for each mix type and mixer plant for each day’s production,
LL
shall be delivered to LSA no later than 12 hours after compaction of the specimens together
with the mix type and project details.
W
6 Upon the first erection of the batching plant and at least once every three months thereafter,
s
the plant shall be calibrated by a calibration service organisation approved by the LSA.
en
5.3 MARSHALL MIX DESIGN

m
5.3.1 General
e
Si
1 The types of bituminous paving mixes shall be as designated on the project drawings or in
the contract documents.
2 The LSA shall act as the engineer for the approval of asphalt mix designs and materials
submitted by the Contractor.
3 The contractor shall prepare the mix design with all necessary supporting documentation
which shall include the results of the Contractor’s own laboratory procedures.
4 The Contractor shall carry out a trial batching and trial laying of the particular mix design.
5 The testing and sampling of the mix design by the LSA will take place for both the laboratory
verification and the trial batching and laying.
6 Based on the results of the trial batching and laying the contractor may be required to make
amendments to the mix design. Providing the mix design conforms to the specification the
mix shall be approved by the LSA.
7 The LSA shall issue a certification for the job standard mix to the Contractor.
8 The approved Job Mix Formula may be amended as a result of experience in the execution
and performance of the permanent asphalt works. Such an amendment may be submitted by
the Contractor for the Engineer's approval in which case the Contractor shall submit full
details of the proposed amendment together with such data as is necessary to support his
submittal. Amendment may also be directed by the Engineer.
9 Approval by the Engineer of the Job Mix Formula or amendments thereto shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the Contract, and the Contractor shall be
responsible for the soundness of the asphalt paving mixes and the satisfactory execution and
performance of the asphalt paving courses.
5.3.2 Marshall Mix Design Criteria
1 The Asphalt Institute MS-2 “Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix
Types” shall be used in designing the bituminous mixtures using Marshall design method.
2 The recommended compacted layer thicknesses are shown in Table 5.6.
ar
Table 5.6
at
Recommended Compacted Layer Thicknesses
-Q
Base Course Base Course Wearing
(Class A) (Class B) Course(WC)
LL
80 to 100 mm 60 to 80 mm 45 to 55 mm
3 When tested according to ASTM C136, the combined mineral aggregate shall conform to
W
Table 5.7 for asphalt concrete mixes.

Table 5.7
s
Combined Aggregate Gradation for Asphalt Concrete Marshall Design Mixes

en
Percentage Passing (By Weight)

m
ASTM Sieve Size

Base Course Base Course
Wearing Course
e
(Class A) (Class B)
Si
37.5 mm 100 - -
25.0 mm 80 - 100 100 100
19.0 mm 62 - 92 80 - 100 86-100
12.5 mm - 63 - 85 69 - 87
9.5 mm 45 - 75 57 - 77 58 - 78
4.75 mm 30 - 55 40 - 60 40 - 60
2.36 mm 20 - 40 25 - 45 25 - 45
0.850 mm 15 - 30 15 - 30 15 - 30
0.425 mm 10 - 22- 10 - 22 10 - 22
0.180 mm 6 - 15 6 - 15 6 - 15
0.075 mm 2-8 2-8 2-8
4 The "Laboratory Designed Mixture" for all types of bituminous coated courses shall comply
with the requirements given in Table 5.8. Note that any deviation from these requirements
shall be approved by LSA.
Table 5.8
Design Criteria for Marshall Design Mixes
Base Course Base Course
Parameter Wearing Course
(Class A) (Class B)
Aggregate Properties Tables 5.1 and 5.2
Aggregate Grading Table 5.7
Number of Compaction blows at each
75 75 75
end of specimen (see paragraph 5)
Binder Content (% of total mix)
3.2 – 4.4 3.4 – 4.4 3.4 – 4.4
inclusive of tolerances
Stability minimum (kN) 9.5 min. 9.5 min. 11.5 min.
Flow (mm) 2 to 4 2 to 4 2 to 4
Marshall Quotient (Stability/Flow)
4.75 min. 4.75 min. 4.75 min.
(kN/mm)
Voids in Mix (Air Voids) (%) 4 to 8 4.5 to 8 5 to 8
ar
Voids in Mineral Aggregate VMA (%) Table No.5.9
Voids Filled with Asphalt VFA (%) 50 to 70 50 to 75 50 to 75
at
Voids in Marshall Specimen at 400 -Q
Blows per face at optimum binder 3.2 min. 3.4 min. 4.0 min.
content (%)
Retained Stability (%) 75 min. 75 min. 75 min.
LL
(Filler/Binder) Ratio 0.8 to 1.5 0.8 to 1.5 0.75 to 1.35

Note: Relevant ASTM standards shall be used for testing.
W
5 Base Course (Class B) and Wearing Course samples shall be prepared and tested using
Marshall apparatus in accordance with ASTM D6926 and ASTM D6927, respectively, while
Base Course (Class A) samples shall be prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM
s
en
D5581. However, based on the Engineer approval, samples having aggregate sizes larger
than 25mm can be prepared and tested according to ASTM D6926 and ASTM D6927 by
substituting all aggregate sizes over 25mm with an equal weight of aggregate sizes in the
m
next lower grading sizes.

e
Si
6 Upon the request of the Engineer, the Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) in accordance with
ASTM D6931 shall be obtained for the mix for quality control purposes. The TSR acceptance
limits shall be determined at mix design stage and approved by the Engineer.
Table 5.9
Minimum Percent Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA)
Minimum VMA, Percent
Nominal Maximum 3
1, 2
Particle Size (mm) Design Air Voids, Percent
3.0 4.0 5.0
1.18 21.5 22.5 23.5
2.36 19.0 20.0 21.0
4.75 16.0 17.0 18.0
9.5 14.0 15.0 16.0
12.5 13.0 14.0 15.0
19.0 12.0 13.0 14.0
25.0 11.0 12.0 13.0
37.5 10.0 11.0 12.0
50 9.5 10.5 11.5
63 9.0 10.0 11.0
1
Standard Specification for Wire Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes, ASTM E11 (AASHTO M92).
2
The nominal maximum particle size larger than the first sieve to retain more than 10 percent.
3
Interpolate minimum voids in the mineral aggregate (VMA) for design air voids values between
those listed.
7 After the Job Mix Formula has been established and approved, all mixes furnished shall
conform thereto within the following tolerances:
Table 5.10
Job Mix Tolerances For Field Mixtures
Base Course Base Course Wearing
(Class A) (Class B) Courses
Description
Aggregate retained on 4.75mm sieve
 5%  4%  4%
or larger
Aggregate passing 4.75mm sieve

 4%  3%  3%
and retained on 850m sieve
ar
Aggregate passing 850m sieve and
 3%  2%  2%
at
retained on 75m sieve
Aggregate passing 75m sieve  1.5%

-Q  1.0%  1.0%
Binder Content  0.3%  0.2%  0.2%

LL
8 The ‘Job Standard Mix Density’ shall be obtained by making six standard Marshall specimens
from samples of the approved ‘Job Standard Mixture’ determining the bulk specific gravity of
W
each and comparing them with the mean value of the six. Any individual result which differs
from the mean by more than 0.015 shall be rejected, and provided that not more than two
s
results are so rejected the mean of the remaining result shall be designated the ‘Job
en
Standard Mixture Density’. The absolute density shall be considered as the theoretical
specific gravity calculated in accordance with ASTM D2041.
m
5.3.3 Quality Control Testing

e
Si
1 The Contractor shall submit a testing plan to the Engineer for approval that demonstrates
how he shall prove compliance with the requirements for compaction, mix composition, level,
evenness and all other requirements of Section 6. Each lot shall be approved by the
Engineer before placing any subsequent asphalt concrete course. In cases where the asphalt
course is laid in more than one layer, each layer shall be tested and approved before placing
the subsequent asphalt concrete layer.
2 In addition to the following requirements one set of three laboratory-compacted specimens

and one uncompacted coated sample for each mix type and mixer plant for each day’s
production shall be delivered to the LSA no later than 12 h after compaction of the
specimens. Details of compaction date, time and temperature of mix shall be provided with
the specimens together with mix type and project details.
3 The Contractor shall cut samples from each completed asphalt course during the progress of
the work and before final acceptance as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall
determine the location of the samples.
4 When testing for compaction at joints the edge of the core shall not be more than 50 mm or
less than 25 mm from the joint.
5 Compacted samples shall be taken by coring in accordance with ASTM D5361, for testing by
an approved laboratory. The core diameter shall be 150 mm. where the Contractor fails to
provide cores as required by the Engineer, the Engineer may arrange for the taking of cores
on behalf of the Contractor at his cost. Samples shall be taken of the asphalt mix for the full
depth of the course. A sample shall comprise a pair of adjacent cores and the average
density of these shall be the density of the sample.
6 Whenever deficiencies are noted in loose mix samples or core samples, the Engineer may
direct the taking of additional cores at the Contractor's expense in order to define the area of
pavement involved.
7 Hot asphalt mix of the same type shall be placed and compacted in holes left by sampling.
The mixture shall be compacted to the percentage compaction required for the layer using a
vibrating hammer.
8 Quality control testing of the asphalt mixtures during construction shall follow the frequencies
shown in Table 5.12 for Marshall Mixtures:
ar
9 Base Course (Class B) and Wearing Course samples shall be prepared and tested using
at
Marshall apparatus in accordance with ASTM D6926 and ASTM D6927, respectively, while
-Q
Base Course (Class A) samples shall be prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM
D5581. However, based on the Engineer approval, samples having aggregate sizes larger
than 25mm can be prepared and tested according to ASTM D6926 and ASTM D6927 by
substituting all aggregate sizes over 25mm with an equal weight of aggregate sizes in the
LL
next lower grading sizes.

W
10 Upon the request of the Engineer, the Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) in accordance with
ASTM D6931 shall be tested for quality control purposes. The TSR acceptance limits shall be
s
based on the mix design obtained limits approved by the Engineer.

en
11 If it appears from the analysis of samples of loose mix or cores that the asphalt content or
m
aggregate gradation are beyond the permissible tolerances specified for the Job Mix Formula
(established for each respective asphalt course mix) and that, such variation affects the
e
characteristics of the asphalt mix conformity to the designated requirements is concerned,

Si
this shall be considered a major defect in the work. The portion of the asphalt course
represented by these samples shall be rejected.
12 The density of the compacted mixes shall be related to the daily Marshall density determined
by making minimum four Marshall specimens from samples collected from behind the paver.
The density of each sample shall be determined and compared with the mean value. Any
3
individual result, which varies from the mean by more than 0.015gm/cm shall be rejected.
The daily Marshall density shall not differ from the Job Mix Design Density by more than
1.0%.
13 The field density, as determined from each core sample and related to the daily Marshall
Density, obtained as shown above, shall be as follows:
Table 5.11
Layer Relative Density (%)

Base Course 97 – 101.8
Wearing Course 98 – 101.8
14 The finished road surface shall be inspected visually techniques and if directed by the
Engineer the structural ability of the pavement in terms of layer modulus shall be assessed
by using the Falling Weight Deflectometer (FWD) and Light weight Deflectometer (LWD).
15 For safety purposes the pavement surface friction shall be measured by the pendulum
portable tester or locked wheel tester in accordance with ASTM E303.
Table 5.12
Quality Control Testing of the Marshall Mixtures
Item / Parameter Standard Specification Limits Minimum Frequency
Aggregate conformance Sections 5.2.1, 5.2.2 and 5.2.3

Mineral Filler conformance Section 5.2.5 Every 300t
Prime Coat conformance Section 5.2.7
Tack Coat conformance Section 5.2.8
ar
Asphalt Binder conformance Section 5.2.6
2
0.45 – 0.75 kg/m 2
at
Rate of application for Prime Coat ASTM D2995 - 1 per 250 m
at 60 – 85 C
2 - 1 every 75m per
0.15 – 0.38 kg/m
Rate of application for Tack Coat ASTM D2995
-Q lane
at 10 – 60 C
Sampling of bituminous mixtures ASTM D979 - Test based
 10 C of JMF
LL
temperature in truck
BS EN 12697
 135 C min. at paver
1
Temperature of bituminous mixture Each truck
W
Part 13
 120 C min. prior
rolling
s
2
ASTM D2726 1.0% of Job
Daily Bulk density (See paragraph 12) Daily
en
3
ASTM D1188 Standard Density
Table 5.7, Job Mix
ASTM D5444
Gradation of extracted aggregates gradation and Table
m
ASTM C117
5.10 tolerances
e
ASTM D2172 Job Mix value with

Binder content
ASTM D6307 Table 5.10 tolerances
Si
Marshall Stability, Flow and ASTM D6927 - Each source

4 Table 5.8
Stability/Flow Ratio ASTM D5581 - Visible change in
ASTM C127 material
Voids in mineral aggregate (VMA) Table 5.9 - 1 test per 300t per
ASTM C128
ASTM D2726
2 layer for Base
Voids filled with asphalt (VFA) 3 Course
ASTM D1188
- 1 test per 150t per
Voids in Mix (Air Voids) (%) layer for Wearing
ASTM D2041
Voids in Marshall Specimen at 400 ASTM D2726
2 Course
3 Table 5.8
Blows per face at optimum binder ASTM D1188
content (%)
ASTM D2172
(Filler/Binder) Ratio ASTM D6307
ASTM C136
- 1 test per 600t per
layer for Base
ASTM D2041
2 Course
In-place air voids ASTM D2726 5 – 8%
3 - 1 test per 300t per
ASTM D1188
layer for Wearing
Course
Item / Parameter Standard Specification Limits Minimum Frequency

ASTM D6927 1 test per 3000t per
Retained Stability (%) (Paragraph 16) 4 75 min.
ASTM D5581 layer
5 At 50m intervals in
Field density (nuclear gauge) ASTM D2950 Table 5.11
alternate wheel tracks
ASTM D5361 - 1 test per 200t per
5 2
Field density (2 cores) ASTM D2726 Table 5.11 layer for Base Course
3
ASTM D5361 layer for Wearing
Thickness Section 5.11.1 Course
ASTM D3549
Evenness of surface Section 5.11.2 & 5.11.3
1
As per polymer manufacturer recommendation and mix design for polymer modified binders
2
If water absorption ≤ 2%
3
If water absorption > 2%
4
For samples containing more than 25mm size aggregates
5
For acceptance of in-situ compaction
ar
16 The Retained Stability is the percentage of the average stability of 3 samples conditioned for
at
24 hours at 60  1C water bath and the average stability of 3 samples conditioned for 4
hours in 60  1C air bath. These two sets of samples shall be prepared at the optimum
-Q
binder content by applying 75 blows and kept at ambient temperature for 17 – 20 hours and
shall have similar average densities.
LL
17 Each day the produced mixes shall be tested for checking their compliance with the approved
W
Job Standard Mix criteria. When unsatisfactory results or changed conditions make it
necessary, a new job-standard following approval of new mix design shall be established.
s
5.4 DENSE BITUMEN MACADAM

en
1 The mix properties for Dense Bitumen Macadam are listed in Table 5.13.
m
Table 5.13
e
Properties of Mix for Dense Bitumen Macadam

Si
Parameter Base Wearing
Course Course
Number of Compaction blows at each end of specimen 75 75
Binder Content (% of total mix) inclusive of tolerances 3.2 – 4.0 3.5 – 4.1
Stability minimum (kN) 7.5 10.0
Flow (mm) 2-4 2–4
Marshall Quotient (Stability/Flow) (kN/mm), min 3.7 4.9
Voids in Mix (Air Voids) (%) 7 - 11 6–9
Voids in Mineral Aggregate VMA (%) 14 - 20 14 - 20
Voids Filled with Asphalt VFA (%) 47 - 60 48 - 60
Retained stability 75 min. 75 min.
2 When tested according to ASTM C136, the combined mineral aggregate shall conform to
Tables 5.14, 5.15 and 5.16.
Table 5.14
Aggregate Gradation for Dense Bitumen Macadam Road Base (Unbound)
B.S Sieve Aggregate, Crushed Rock or Gravel
(mm) Percentage by mass passing
50.0 mm 100
37.5 mm 95 - 100
28.0 mm 70 - 94
14.0 mm 56 - 76
6.3 mm 44 - 60
3.35 mm 32 - 46
0.300 mm 7 - 21
0.075 mm 2- 8
Table 5.15
Aggregate Gradation for Dense Bitumen Macadam Asphalt Base Course
ar
Aggregate, Crushed Rock or Gravel
B.S Sieve
(mm) Percentage by Mass Passing for Finished Thickness of Base Course
at
80 - 100 mm 70 - 90 mm
-Q 50 - 70 mm
50.0 100 - -
37.5 95 - 100 100 -
28.0 70 - 94 95 - 100 100
LL
20.0 - 71 - 95 95 - 100
14.0 56 - 76 58 - 82 65 - 85
W
10.0 - - 52 - 72
6.3 44 - 60 44 - 60 39 - 55
3.35 32 - 46 32 - 46 32 - 46
s
en
0.300 7 - 21 7 - 21 7 - 21
0.075 2 - 8 2 - 8 2 - 8
m
Table 5.16
e
Aggregate Gradation for Dense Bitumen Macadam Asphalt Wearing Course

Si
Aggregate, Crushed Rock or Gravel

B.S Sieve
(mm) Percentage by Mass Passing for Finished Thickness of Wearing Course
50 - 60 mm 40 - 50 mm 30 - 40 mm
28.0 100 - -
20.0 95 - 100 100 -
14.0 70 - 90 95 - 100 100
10.0 55 - 75 70 - 90 95 - 100
6.3 40 - 60 45 - 65 55 - 75
3.35 25 - 40 30 - 45 30 - 45
1.18 15 - 30 15 - 30 15 - 30
0.075 2 - 6 2 - 6 2 - 6
5.5 SUPERPAVE MIX DESIGN
1 Based on the Engineer approval, the Superpave Mix Design Method can be used to design
the asphalt mixtures for Wearing Course and Base Course layers. The design of the
Superpave asphalt mixtures shall follow the method outlined in AASHTO R35 and SP-2
“Asphalt Institute Superpave Mix Design Method” in liaison with LSA.
2 The contractor shall prepare the mix design with all necessary supporting documentation
which shall include materials production and handling specifications, plant quality procedures,
construction quality control and quality assurance procedures, quality control tests, mix
acceptance criteria and performance evaluation testing program. All documentations shall be
submitted to LSA for review and approval.
3 Based on the Engineer approval, the PG76-10 binder can be used in asphalt mixes. This
binder type shall be a polymer-modified binder (PMB) meeting AASHTO M320 and ASTM
D6373 specifications and the criteria listed in Table 5.5.
ar
4 Based on the Engineer approval, when bitumen grades PG76-10 H, V or E are specified for
at
heavy, very heavy, and extra heavy loading, the bitumen shall meet the requirements of
AASHTO M332 and will be required to indicate elastic response in percent recovery when
-Q
tested in accordance with AASHTO T350.
5 Based on the Engineer approval, the guidelines shown in the Appendix can be used for the
LL
mix design. Note that software (ePAVE3) shall be validated prior use.
6 The recent editions of the references shown in the Appendix are recommended to be used
W
for preparation of mix design and quality control schemes.

s
7 Table 5.17 can be used as a guide for sampling and testing frequency for quality control of
en
Superpave mixtures.
m
8 Performance tests shown in Table 5.18 can be used to evaluate performance of Superpave
asphalt concrete mixtures.
e
Si
9 Before producing bituminous concrete mixtures, the Contractor shall submit in writing to the
Engineer for approval, detailed information for each mix which he proposes to furnish. The
information shall include, but not be limited to the following:
(a) Copy of mix certificate approval obtained from LSA and the mix design report.
(b) The source(s) of the aggregate for each mix as well as the pertinent test data and a
written certification that the aggregates conform to all of the quality requirements.
(c) Type of Asphalt modifier intended to be used in the project along with the Certificate of
Conformity of the modified asphalt binder to the required grade according to the
Superpave Performance Based Grading System.
(d) Pertinent test data on the type and properties of the aggregates, asphalt binder,
modified asphalt binder, mineral filler, and chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers to be
furnished.
(e) The type and location of plant to be used for mixing each mix.
(f) Any other support data and information special to the project (e.g. technical data
sheets of a polymer in case it was used).
Table 5.17
Sampling and Testing Frequency of Superpave Field Mixtures
Item / Parameter Standard Specification Minimum Frequency
Aggregate Conformance Sections 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.2.3 and Table 6 - Appendix
Mineral Filler conformance Section 5.2.5 Every 300t
Prime Coat conformance Section 5.2.7
Tack Coat conformance Section 5.2.8
Asphalt Binder conformance Section 5.2.6
2
0.45 – 0.75 kg/m 2
Rate of application for Prime Coat ASTM D2995 - 1 per 250 m
at 60 – 85 C
2 - 1 every 75m per
0.15 – 0.38 kg/m
Rate of application for Tack Coat ASTM D2995 lane
at 10 – 60 C
Sampling of bituminous mixtures ASTM D979 - Test based
 ±10 C of JMF
temperature in truck
 Min. JMF compaction
Temperature of bituminous mixture
BS EN 12697 temperature +20 C at Each truck
Part 13 paver
ar
 Min. JMF compaction
temperature prior rolling
at
-Q (sec. 1.5.4 – Appendix)
ASTM D2172
Binder content (%) JMF value ±0.40
ASTM D6307
Table 9
Gradation of extracted aggregates ASTM D5444
Appendix
LL
Effective Specific Gravity of ASTM D6857

Gsb < Gse < Gsa - Each source;
Aggregates (Gse) ASTM D2041
- Visible change in
W
Voids in mineral aggregate (VMA) AASHTO T312 ±1.5 material

Voids in Mix (Va) ASTM D6857 or - 1 test per 500t per
ASTM D2041 ±1.3 layer for Base
s
(Min 2 Gyratory specimens at Ndes)

Density (% of Gmm) at Nmax (Eq. 2) Table 5 Course
en
(Min 1 Gyratory specimens at Nmax) ASTM D2726 Appendix - 1 test per 250t per
ASTM D6857 / layer for Wearing
m
ASTM D2041 Course

Table 5
Dust to binder ratio (P0.075 / Pbe) ASTM D2172 /
e
Appendix
ASTM D6307
Si
ASTM D5444
Indirect tensile strength (IDT) ASTM D6931 IDT of JMF min.
ASTM D6931
Sec. 1.5.8
Moisture Sensitivity (Retained IDT) Sec. 1.5.8 Weekly
Appendix
Appendix
Dynamic Modulus at 10 Hz, 45 C,
AASHTO PP60 Min. 1920 MPa
0kPa confinement
AASHTO TP79
Flow Number (Fn) at 54.4 C, 600kPa Procedures A, B Every 10,000t
deviatory stress, and 0kPa AASHTO PP61 Min. 740
confinement
In-place air voids 6 – 8%
ASTM D2726 layer for Base
Course;
Thickness Section 5.11.1
ASTM D3549 layer for Wearing
Course
At 50m intervals in
Field density (nuclear gauge) (%Gmm) ASTM D2950 92 – 94% alternate wheel
tracks
Evenness of surface Section 5.11.2 & 5.11.3
5.6 PERFORMANCE EVALUATION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE
1 Based on the Engineer request, the asphalt mixture performance properties can be
determined.
2 The performance properties of asphalt mixtures shall be measured for every asphalt
concrete layer at least on the following frequencies:
(a) Prior asphalt laying on a laboratory prepared sample at the asphalt binder content
specified in the JMF.
(b) Asphalt mix sampled from behind the paver every 10000t of mix.
3 The purpose of the performance testing is to allow for pavement performance evaluation and
verification of pavement structural design through the AASHTO Mechanistic-Empirical
Pavement Design Guide. Performance models, references, test conditions are shown in table
5.18 below:
ar
Table 5.18
at
Performance Models Criteria
Performance Test
-Q
Test Conditions Applications / Use
Model Reference
100X150mm cylindrical
The E* is used in mechanistic
LL
AASHTO PP60, sample under uniaxial

Dynamic Modulus analysis to evaluate the structural
TP79 Procedure stress, zero confining
Master Curve responses of the asphalt
A, & PP61 pressure and sinusoidal
W
concrete layers
deviator stress
s
AASHTO PP60 100X150mm cylindrical To evaluate the rutting

en
Rutting Model & TP79 sample under triaxial characteristics of the asphalt
Procedure B stress mixture in the form of a rutting
m
model or Flow Number (FN)

e
64x50x380mm beam The initial flexural stiffness is

Si
specimen is subjected to measured at the 50th load cycle.

a 4-point bending with Fatigue life or failure shall be
Fatigue Model AASHTO T321 free rotation and defined as the number of cycles
horizontal translation at corresponding to 50% reduction
all load and reaction in the initial stiffness.
points
Conduct asphalt binder Viscosity-temperature relationship
A-VTS test in the (A-VTS) of the asphalt binder is
Rheometer (DSR) to determined in order to assess the
Aging Model ASTM D7175 measure G* and  in impact of binder aging on the E*
accordance with ASTM property of the asphalt mix at
D7175 at multiple various stages of the pavement
temperatures life
4 Modelling methods adopted by Asphalt Institute and Shell or equivalent shall be used. The
contractor shall submit a proposal includes performance modelling testing and interpretation
procedures to the Engineer for approval.
5.7 DELIVERY, SPREADING AND FINISHING
5.7.1 Delivery of Mixes
1 Sufficient plant capacity, haul vehicles and storage shall be provided so that adequate
supplies of mixture are delivered to site to ensure that continuous paving can be achieved.
2 The dispatching of the hauling vehicles to the job site shall be so scheduled that all material
delivered may be placed in daylight, unless the Engineer has approved the use of artificial
light. Delivery of material shall be at a uniform rate and in an amount well within the capacity
of the paving and compacting equipment.
3 All precautions shall be taken to protect the mix from the weather during transit and while
waiting to discharge.
4 Hauling vehicles shall not be permitted to carry out tight turns on the laying surface.
ar
5 The mixture at delivery to the paver shall be within 10 C of the Job Mix Formula temperature
at
and above an absolute minimum temperature of 135 C. Material which has fallen below the
minimum temperature of 135 C before discharge shall be rejected and immediately removed
-Q
from site. Delivery temperature shall not exceed the maximum temperature specified for
mixing at the plant
LL
6 Should a significant proportion of the mixture delivered to the paver fail to meet this
requirement, or should cold lumps be found in the mixture, the Engineer shall order that
W
paving operations be suspended until measures are taken, to the approval of the Engineer, to
ensure compliance.
s
en
5.7.2 Spreading and Finishing

m
1 The Contractor shall prepare a paving plan and obtain approval of the Engineer to ensure
adequate equipment and paving sequences.
e
Si
2 Based on the approved paving plan and prior to the commencement of delivery of the mix the
Contractor shall erect and maintain an approved reference guide wire for controlling the
levels of the laid mix. The reference guide wire shall be supported at intervals of not more
than 5m.
3 The mix shall be laid upon an approved surface and only when weather conditions are
suitable and as designated. Upon arrival at the point of use, the asphalt mix shall be spread
and struck off to the grade, elevation and cross-section shape intended, either over the entire
width or over such partial width as may be required. If the material does not conform to the
requirements, it shall not be used and shall be discarded.
4 The laid material shall be compacted as soon as rolling can be effected without causing
undue displacement and while the temperature does not fall below 120 C for unmodified
asphalt mixes. Materials still uncompacted and below this temperature shall be rejected.
5 The compaction temperature for the laid polymer-modified asphalt binder mixes shall be
selected based on one of the following:
(a) As specified in the JMF.
(b) As established from the trial section.
6 The Contractor shall supply accurate calibrated thermometers suitable for measuring the
inner and surface temperature of the material. The material temperature shall be checked
immediately before rolling and at least every 30 minutes thereafter during forward progress.
A record of these temperatures shall be passed to the Engineer at the end of each day’s
work.
7 While paving is in progress, the output of the batching plant shall be exclusively reserved for
the operations and no mixture shall be supplied to other sites or projects.
8 If during laying, the paver is repeatedly delayed because of lack of mixture or if the paver
stands at one location for more than thirty minutes (for any reason), a transverse joint shall
be constructed. Paving shall not recommence until the Engineer is satisfied that paving will
proceed uninterrupted and until at least four loaded vehicles have arrived at the paving site.
9 The asphalt course shall be constructed to proposed levels and shall be homogeneous,
ar
providing after compaction an even surface free from undulations, rises or depressions and
within the tolerances stipulated.
at
10
-Q
In no case shall construction of a new asphalt concrete course begin until the previously laid
course has been tested and approved.
11 When the same asphalt course is to be laid in more than one layer the second layer shall be
LL
placed as soon as practicable after the first layer has been finished, rolled and cooled, and
the Engineer may at his discretion request cleaning of the first layer and the application of a
W
tack coat thereon if he so deems necessary.

s
12 Transverse joints in succeeding layers shall be offset at least 2 m. Longitudinal joints shall
en
be offset at least 300 mm.
13 The use of motor grader or hand spreading of the asphalt mix shall not be permitted except
m
in places where it is impractical to use pavers and shall be only with the specific permission
e
of the Engineer. The asphalt mix shall comply with all conditions regarding trueness of level,
Si
thickness, and homogeneity of the mix.
14 Automatic electronic screed controls shall be required on all pavers and shall be used with a
9 m long articulated averaging beam or grade wire control as approved by the Engineer.
5.7.3 Compaction of Mixes
1 At least three rollers shall be required at all times, one self-propelled pneumatic-tire and two
self-propelled steel-wheeled. As many additional rollers shall be used by the Contractor as
necessary to provide specified asphalt course density and surface characteristics in an
orderly, efficient and continuous manner.
2 Before beginning construction of the permanent works, unless otherwise agreed with the
Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out compaction trials for each type and thickness of
asphalt course to establish an approved compaction procedure which shall then be used as a
minimum requirement for the compaction of the permanent works unless otherwise directed
or agreed by the Engineer.
3 The compaction trials shall involve all procedures specified for the permanent works
including testing as specified for the asphalt course under consideration and any equipment,
processes or procedures proposed by the Contractor which are not designated. Construction
of the permanent works shall not commence until a compaction procedure has been
approved in writing by the Engineer. Such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
his responsibilities and obligations stipulated in the Contract.
4 Immediately after the asphalt mix has been spread and struck off, the surface shall be
checked and any irregularities adjusted and then compacted thoroughly and uniformly by
rolling.
5 To prevent adhesion of the mix to steel-wheeled rollers, the wheels shall be kept properly
moistened but excess water shall not be permitted.
6 After the longitudinal joints and edges have been compacted, rolling shall start longitudinally
at the sides of the road and shall gradually progress towards the centre. On super elevated
sections, rolling shall begin on the low side and progress to the high side, overlapping on
ar
successive trips by at least one-half the width of tandem rollers and uniformly lapping each
proceeding track. The rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed with the drive wheels
at
nearest the paver. The speed shall not exceed 4-5 km/h for steel-wheeled rollers or 8 km/h
-Q
for Pneumatic-tire rollers. The operating speed shall be approved by the Engineer.
7 The line of rolling shall not be changed suddenly or the direction of rolling reversed suddenly.
LL
If rolling causes displacement of the material, the affected areas shall be loosened at once
with hand tools and restored to the original grade of the loose material before being rerolled.
W
Heavy equipment or rollers shall not be permitted to stand on the finished surface before it
has been compacted and has thoroughly cooled.
s
8 When paving in a single width, the first lane placed shall be rolled in the following order:
en
(a) Transverse joints.

m
(b) Longitudinal joints.

e
(c) Outside edge.

Si
(d) Initial or breakdown rolling, beginning on the low side and progressing towards the high
side.
(e) Intermediate rolling.
(f) Final rolling.
1 When paving in echelon, 50 mm to 100 mm of the edge which the second paver is following
shall be left unrolled. When paving in echelon the edges between the first and the second
paver shall not be exposed more than 15 minutes nor 50m by distance without being rolled.
Particular attention shall be given to the construction of the transverse and longitudinal joints
in all courses.
5.7.4 Transverse Joints
1 Transverse joints shall be carefully constructed and thoroughly compacted to provide a

smooth riding surface. Joints shall be checked with a straightedge to assure smoothness and
true alignment. Joints shall be formed with a bulkhead, such as a board, to provide a straight
line and vertical face.
2 If the joint has been distorted by traffic or by other means, it shall be trimmed to line and the
face shall be painted with thin coating of emulsified asphalt before the fresh material is
placed against it. To obtain thorough compaction of these joints the material placed against
the joint shall be tightly pushed against the vertical face with a steel-wheeled roller.
3 The roller shall be placed on the previously compacted material transversely so that not more
than 150 mm of the rear rolling wheel rides on the edge of the joint. The roller shall be
operated to pinch and press the mix into place at the transverse joint. The roller shall
continue to roll along this line, shifting its position gradually across the joint, in 150 to 200 mm
increments, until the joint has been rolled with the entire width of the roller wheel. Rolling
shall be continued until a thoroughly compacted, neat joint is obtained.
5.7.5 Longitudinal Joints
1 Longitudinal joints shall be rolled directly behind the paving operations. The first lane placed
shall be true to line and grade and have a vertical face. The material being placed in the
abutting lane shall then be tightly pushed against the face of the previously placed lane.
ar
Rolling shall be done with a steel-wheeled roller.
at
2 The roller shall be shifted over onto the previously placed lane so that not more than 150 mm
-Q
of the roller wheel rides on the edges of the newly laid lane. The rollers shall then be
operated to pinch and press the fine material gradually across the joint. Rolling shall be
continued until a thoroughly compacted, neat joint is obtained.
LL
3 When the abutting lane is not placed in the same day, or the joint is distorted during the day's
work by traffic or by other means, the edge of the lane shall be carefully trimmed to line,
W
cleaned and painted with a thin coating of emulsified asphalt before the adjacent lane is
placed.
s
en
4 The longitudinal joints in the surface course shall be along the same line as the traffic lane
markers.
m
5.7.6 Paving Edges

e
Si
1 The edges of the asphalt course shall be rolled concurrently with or immediately after rolling
the longitudinal joint.
2 Care shall be exercised in consolidating the course along the entire length of the edges.
Before it is compacted, the material along the unsupported edges shall be slightly elevated
with hand tools. This will permit the full weight of the roller wheel to bear on the material to
the extreme edges of the mat.
5.7.7 Breakdown Rolling
1 Breakdown rolling shall immediately follow the rolling of the longitudinal joints and edges.
Rollers shall be operated as close to the paver as possible to obtain adequate density without
causing undue displacement. In no case shall the mix temperature be allowed to drop below
120 C before breakdown rolling.
2 If the breakdown roller is steel wheeled, it shall be operated with the drive wheel nearest the
finishing machine. Pneumatic-tire rollers may be used as breakdown rollers.
5.7.8 Intermediate Rolling
1 Pneumatic-tire rollers or Steel wheeled rollers shall be used for the intermediate rolling.
2 The intermediate rolling shall follow the breakdown rolling as closely as possible and while
the paving mix is still hot. Rollers shall be used continuously after the initial rolling until all of
the mix placed has been thoroughly compacted. Turning of rollers on the hot paving mix
which causes undue displacement shall not be permitted.
5.7.9 Finish Rolling
1 The finish rolling shall be performed with three-axle tandem rollers unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer. Finish rolling shall be accomplished while the material is still warm
enough for the removal of roller marks.
2 All rolling operations shall be conducted in close sequence.
ar
3 In places inaccessible for the operation of standard rollers as specified, compaction shall be
performed by manual or mechanical tampers of such design as to give the desired density.
at
4
-Q
After final rolling, the smoothness, levels, crossfalls, density and thickness shall be checked
and any irregularity of the surface exceeding the specified limits and any areas defective in
texture, density or composition shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer, including
removal and replacement as directed by the Engineer.
LL
5.7.10 Protection of Laid Courses

W
1 Sections of the newly finished work shall be protected from traffic of any kind until the mix
s
has been properly compacted and cooled. In no case shall traffic be permitted less than 24 h
en
after completion of the asphalt course unless a shorter period is authorised by the Engineer.
5.8 COLD PLANING

e m
1 The cold planing plant shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

Si
2 Cold planing plant shall have sufficient power, traction and stability to maintain the required
depth of cut and slope. The control of the depth of cut and the slope shall be by an automatic
system based on reference wires.
3 Cold planing shall be carried out to straight crossfalls to the designated thickness. Planing
shall be to a tolerance of  5 mm of the designated amount. The average thickness of
planing achieved shall be at least the thickness designated.
4 In areas where there is severe deformation of the existing pavement, it may be necessary to
vary the depth of planing.
5 Existing kerbs, gullies, manholes and other features shall not be disturbed by the planing
process. This may require the use of smaller plant or removal by hand tools.
6 Any joints at the edge of planed areas shall be cut vertically and straight using asphalt saws.
7 Cold planing shall be carried out in a longitudinal direction.

8 After planing the prepared surface shall be thoroughly brushed and suction swept by
mechanical means to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface shall be free from
gouges, ridges, continuous grooves and shall have a reasonably uniform finish.
9 Cold planing shall be performed so that at the end of a day’s work the termination line does
not present a hazard to traffic that may use the road.
10 Any cracks noted in the pavement shall be blown clean with compressed air. The Engineer
will inspect the planed surface and may instruct that further work is carried out for treating
cracks in the pavement.
5.9 PRIME COAT
5.9.1 General
1 The work shall consist of furnishing and applying liquid asphalt and blotter material, if
required, to a previously prepared and approved subgrade or granular base/sub-base course
ar
as designated and to the full designated width.
at
2 Prime coat shall not be applied when the ambient temperature is less than 13 C nor during
-Q
rain, fog, dust storms or other unsuitable weather.
5.9.2 Equipment Required

LL
1 The equipment used by the Contractor shall include a liquid asphalt distributor as described
in clause 5.17.3.
W
2 If the surface is covered in wind-blown dust or fine aggregate then a power broom shall be
s
provided. The power broom shall be self-propelled and equipped with a cylindrical, rotating
en
nylon bristle brush of not less than 760 mm in diameter and not less than 1800 mm in length.
The brush shall be capable of being angled to the right and left with adjustable ground
m
pressure. Where necessary for the proper preparation of the surface, motor graders, rollers
and water trucks shall also be provided.
e
Si
1 Immediately before applying the prime coat, all loose dirt, earth and other objectionable
material shall be removed from the surface with a power broom of approved design and/or a
power blower as required, and any ruts, soft spots or unacceptable irregularities in the
surface shall be repaired in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer. If the Engineer
so requires, the surface shall be lightly bladed and rolled immediately before the application
of the prime coat, in which case brooming or blowing may not be required.
2 Priming will not be permitted when there is free water present on the surface.
5.9.4 Application
1 After preparing the road surface as above, the prime coat shall be applied by means of the
distributor at the temperature and rate shown in Table 5.12. Hand-spraying of restricted,
inaccessible areas is permitted, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2 The surface of structures, kerbstones and other appurtenances adjacent to areas being
treated shall be protected in such a manner as to prevent their being spattered or marred.
3 The prime coat shall usually be applied to 1/3 or 1/2 of the road width at a time. When
applied in two or more lanes, there shall be a slight overlap of asphalt material along
adjoining edges of the lanes. It should be noted that no overlapping is allowed at the
transverse joints and that thick paper shall be used at the joint to protect the previous
application and the joining application shall begin on the paper. The paper used shall be
removed and satisfactorily disposed of by the Contractor after use. Care shall be taken that
the application of prime coat material at the junctions of spread is not in excess of the
specified amount. Excess bituminous material shall be removed from the surface.
5.9.5 Maintenance and Traffic
1 Traffic shall not be permitted on the primed surface until the asphalt material has penetrated
and dried and, in the judgement of the Engineer, will not be picked up under traffic. If it
becomes necessary to permit traffic before that time, but in no case sooner than 48 hours
after the application of the asphalt material, blotter material shall be applied as directed by
the Engineer and traffic shall be permitted to use the lanes so treated.
ar
2 Blotter material shall be spread from trucks operated backward so that the wheels will not
travel in uncovered wet asphalt material. When applying blotter material to an asphalt treated
at
lane that adjoins a lane that has not been treated, a strip at least 200 mm wide along the
-Q
adjoining edge shall be left devoid of blotter material in order to permit an overlap of asphalt
material.
3 The Contractor shall maintain the primed surface in good clean condition and before the
LL
application of the next course, any surface irregularities shall be corrected and all excessive
blotter material, dirt or other objectionable materials shall be removed.
W
5.10 TACK COAT

s
en
5.10.1 General
m
1 This work shall consist of furnishing and applying diluted emulsified asphalt to a previously
prepared Base or Wearing courses, to provide bond for a superimposed course to the full
e
designated width.
Si
2 Tack coat shall not be applied when the ambient temperature is less than 13C nor during
rain, fog, dust storms or other unsuitable weather.
1 The equipment used by the Contractor shall include liquid asphalt distributor as well as a
power broom and a power blower. Power broom shall be self-propelled and equipped with a
cylindrical, rotating nylon bristle Brush of not less than 760 mm in diameter and not less than
1800 mm in length. The brush shall be capable of being angled to the right and left with
adjustable ground pressure. In addition, the Contractor shall supply and use efficient and
approved equipment for diluting the emulsified asphalt with water.
1 The full width of the surface to be treated shall be cleaned with a power broom or power
blower to remove dust, dirt or other objectionable materials. All faulty or unsuitable patches,
excess cracks or joint filler and all surplus bituminous material shall be corrected in
accordance with the instructions of the Engineer. The surface shall be dry when treated.
5.10.4 Application
1 Immediately after cleaning the surface, the tack coat shall be applied by means of the
distributor at the temperature and rate directed by the Engineer. Hand spraying of restricted,
inaccessible areas is permitted, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2 The diluted emulsion shall be applied at a rate shown in Table 5.12. The Contractor shall
ensure that excessive application of tack coat is avoided.
3 The surface of structures, kerbstones and other fixed objects adjacent to areas being treated
ar
shall be protected in such a manner as to prevent their being spattered or marred.
at
5.10.5 Maintenance and Traffic -Q
1 After application, the surface shall be allowed to dry until it is in a proper condition of
tackiness to receive the superimposed course. Tack coat shall be applied only so far in
advance of the superimposed course placement as is necessary to obtain this proper
LL
condition of tackiness.
W
2 Until the superimposed course is placed, the Contractor shall protect the tack coat from
damage.
s
en
3 If the tack coat is unavoidably damaged by rain or dust, it shall be allowed to dry, shall be
cleaned again by a power broom or power blower and, if required by the Engineer, a
subsequent light application of tack applied to the surface. Where, in the opinion of the
m
Engineer, a tack coat is not necessary between layers of freshly placed courses, he may give
e
instructions in writing to omit the tack coat. Any cleaning required in these areas shall be
Si
carried out before the application of the next course.
5.11 THICKNESS AND LEVEL
5.11.1 Thickness
1 Cores shall be taken to determine the thickness of asphalt paving courses. As determined
from each core, the thickness of a paving course shall not be less than that specified by more
than 5 mm in the case of a single-layered construction. Furthermore, the thickness of the
Wearing course shall not be less than that specified by more than 5 mm and the total
thickness of all asphalt paving courses combined shall not be less than that specified by
more than 10 mm.
2 In addition, the variations in the falls to cross sections of the road shall not vary from the
required value by more than 0.3 %. Any asphalt paving course containing deviations or
variations exceeding these tolerances shall be corrected or removed and replaced by the
Contractor, in accordance with the instructions and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3 Where any individual course is marginally out of tolerance on the low side, the Engineer may
allow adjustment in the succeeding course to correct the overall thickness of the pavement.
4 The tolerances herein specified shall not invalidate the tolerances set forth for the evenness
of surface of the asphalt paving course.
5 As directed by the engineer the laid thickness shall be checked by cutting test pits and/or
using Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) for the determination of the structural capacity of the
pavement.
5.11.2 Transverse Evenness
1 The Engineer shall test the evenness of surface for each course of the various asphalt
paving courses to determine compliance.
2 The Contractor shall put at the disposal of the Engineer a 3m long straight edge and a crown
template of sturdy and approved design and enough labour to assist in the checking
ar
operations. The maximum allowable differences between the pavement surface and the
straight edge shall be 3mm. Transverse measurements shall be carried out every 20m of
at
road length for each lane. -Q
3 Any layer containing deviations or variations exceeding the tolerances specified here shall be
corrected or removed and replaced in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer and to
his satisfaction.
LL
5.11.3 Evenness and Rideability

W
1 Smoothness is a measure of the evenness and rideability of the pavement surface. It shall be
s
measured on the driving surface of the completed pavement for all major roads before
en
opening to the traffic.
2 Any section containing deviations or variations exceeding the criteria specified here or by the
m
Engineer shall be corrected or removed and replaced in accordance with the instructions of
e
the Engineer and to his satisfaction at the Contractor’s cost.

Si
3 The minimum length of the rectification work undertaken shall be 100m.
4 All rectified segments shall be re-tested following the completion of rectification work at no
additional cost to the client.
(a) Evenness
5 The evenness of the driving surface of road pavements shall be measured with a 3m rolling
straight edge along any line or lines parallel to the center line of the pavement on sections of
300m selected by the Engineer, whether or not it is constructed in shorter lengths. Sections
shorter than 300m forming part of a longer pavement shall be assessed using the number of
irregularities for a 300m length prorated to the nearest whole number. Where the total length
of pavement is less than 300m the measurements shall be taken in 75m lengths.
6 The number of deviations (from the bottom face of the straight edge) over the length of the
section greater than or equal to 4mm shall be counted. None of the measured deviations
shall exceed 6mm. The evenness of the driving surface of the tested section shall be within
the relevant limits given in Table 5.19.
Table 5.19
Evenness of Driving Surface
Section Length (m) Allowed number of deviations ≥4mm
300 20
75 9
(b) Rideability
7 For major roads the International Roughness Index (IRI) shall be used to monitor the
roughness and condition of the pavement surface. The acceptable IRI for ride quality shall be
decided by the Engineer.
8 The rideability of the driving surface of the completed pavement shall be measured in terms
of the International Roughness Index (IRI) which shall be tested with a certified and
calibrated Inertial Profiler meeting the requirements of ASTM E950–Class 1.
ar
9 The testing method shall be in accordance with ASTM E950. The IRI shall be calculated
according to ASTM E1926.
at
10
-Q
Calibration checks on the inertial profiler shall be conducted using test methods in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, at the beginning of the day of
operation and at any other time the operator may suspect changes of system performance
since the last calibration.
LL
11 Calibration checks on the inertial profiler and all other quality checks shall be submitted in a
W
method statement to the Engineer for approval.

s
12 The selected measuring speed shall be the posted speed and within the range
en
recommended by the manufacturer and shall remain nearly constant during testing, not to
exceed +/-5 km/h of the selected speed.
m
13 The profiler system shall stabilize at the test speed prior to entering the test sections. This
e
requires bringing the profiler vehicle to the desired test speed at least 100 m prior to the
Si
beginning of the test location. Any Features along the test section such as bridges, culverts,
milepost or other pertinent information shall be identified. The test shall be conducted in the
paving direction.
14 The start and end point of the test section shall be automatically identified by using a photo
detector. The coordinates of the test section shall be identified by using a GPS.
15 Three runs of data collection (both wheel tracks in each lane) shall be conducted. The
processing of the data for IRI shall include calculating the average IRI value of the three runs
for the two wheel tracks. The processed data shall be reported on 25m and 400m sub-
sections calculated using the Moving Average statistical method and applying a 250mm
filtering.
5.12 PAVEMENT EVALUATION TECHNIQUES
1 Pavement evaluation tests shall be carried out for the completed pavement structure at any
point of the road as directed by the Engineer to assess the serviceability condition of the
pavement and verify compliance with specifications.
2 Pavement evaluation methods can be grouped into two main categories, destructive and
non-destructive.
3 The Contractor shall allow and provide all necessary arrangements for the execution of all
pavement evaluation test required by the Engineer.
4 As directed by the Engineer the structural ability of the pavement in terms of load-deflection
response and layer modulus shall be assessed by using the Falling Weight Deflectometer
(FWD).
5 The pavement surface friction shall be measured based on the Engineer request using the
ar
portable pendulum tester (ASTM E303), locked wheel tester (ASTM E274) or the sand patch
method (ASTM E965).
at
5.13 PRODUCTION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE COURSES
-Q
5.13.1 Weather Limitations
LL
1 Production and spreading of asphalt Concrete mix shall not be permitted when the ambient
temperature is less than 8 C, nor during rain, fog, dust-storms or other unsuitable weather.
W

s
en
1 The equipment required for construction of the asphalt concrete courses shall include but not
be limited to the equipment mentioned in Clauses 5.3 to 5.6 of this Part, together with such
m
miscellaneous equipment and tools as required for the satisfactory preparation and
e
performance of the work.

Si
2 All equipment shall be checked, calibrated and approved by the Engineer before use. The
equipment shall be satisfactorily maintained and shall be used in an approved manner.
3 Adequate equipment and labour shall be used so that there is continual production and
distribution of the asphalt course being constructed.
5.13.3 Survey and Preparation
1 The area to be paved shall be true to line and grade and shall have a properly prepared
surface before the start of paving operations.
2 When an asphalt concrete pavement course is to be placed on top of an existing pavement,

the existing pavement surface shall be prepared as designated by the Engineer.
3 Priming or tacking of surfaces to be paved shall be carried out as designated.

4 The surface of kerbs, vertical faces of existing pavements and all structures in actual contact
with asphalt mixes shall be painted with a thin and complete coating of tack coat as
instructed by the Engineer to provide a closely bonded, watertight joint.
5 All openings or structures in the road for water, drainage and other specified utilities shall be
constructed and their positions and levels determined before the start of paving operations.
5.13.4 Heating of Asphalt Binder
1 The 60/70 penetration grade bitumen shall be heated to a temperature of between 150 to 165
degrees centigrade.
2 Bitumen of other penetration grade shall be heated to yield viscosity's in the range of 150 to
300 centistokes (175 to 150 seconds Saybolt-Furol) when delivered to the mixer, as
determined from the Temperature Viscosity Chart of the product used.
3 Penetration Graded Asphalt Binders shall not be used if foaming occurs or shall it be heated
ar
above 175 C at any time.
at
4 Polymer-modified binder shall be heated to a temperature specified by the supplier.
-Q
5.13.5 Heating of Mineral Aggregate
LL
1 When using 60/70 penetration grade asphalt binder the materials shall be thoroughly dried
and heated so that their temperature is 165 to 180 degrees centigrade.
W
2 When using asphalt binder of other penetration grade the materials shall be thoroughly dried
and heated so that their temperature is within ± 8 C of the temperature needed to satisfy the
s
viscosity requirements of the asphalt cement.

en
3 The moisture content of the heated and dried materials shall not exceed 1%.
m
4 The quantity of materials fed through the drier shall in all cases be held to an amount which
e
can be thoroughly dried and heated within the limits specified.

Si
5 The heated materials shall be screened into sizes such that they may be combined into a
gradation meeting the requirements of the Job Mix Formula and the hot aggregate storage
bins shall be such as to minimise segregation and loss of temperature of aggregate.
6 Hot bins shall be drawn and cleaned of material at the end of each day's operation.
5.13.6 Proportioning and Mixing
1 The heated ingredients together with the mineral filler and bitumen shall be combined in such
a manner so as to produce a mixture which complies with the requirements of the Job Mix
Formula. Plant settings, once established, shall not be changed without the approval of the
Engineer.
2 Mineral filler, in a cool dry state, shall be proportioned into the mixer either with the aggregate
or after the introduction of the bitumen to avoid loss of fines that may occur in dry mixing as a
result of turbulence in the mixer.
3 In batch type plants a dry mixing period of not less than four seconds shall precede the
addition of the bitumen to the mix. Excess wet mixing shall be avoided. Wet mixing shall
continue as long as it is necessary to obtain a thoroughly blended mix but shall not exceed 75
seconds nor be less than 30 seconds.
4 Once approved, mixing times shall not be altered unless so ordered or further approved by
the Engineer.
5.14 HAULING EQUIPMENT
1 Vehicles used for the transport of aggregates or bituminous mix shall have tight, clean and
smooth insulated metal bodies and shall be free from dust, screenings, petroleum oil and
volatile or other mineral spirits which may affect the material being hauled. The vehicle metal
bed shall, if required, be sprayed with a minimum amount of soapy water or lime solution to
prevent the bituminous mix from adhering to the bed. After spraying, the truck shall be raised
and thoroughly drained and no excess solution shall be permitted. Use of diesel or other
solvents to spray in the truck bed is prohibited.
ar
at
2 Provision shall be made for covering truck loads with canvas or other suitable material of
such size that the bituminous mix is fully covered.
-Q
3 Any truck causing excessive segregation of material by its spring suspension or other
contributing factors, or that shows oil leaks in detrimental amounts, or that causes undue
LL
delays, shall, upon the instruction of the Engineer, be removed from the work until such faults
are corrected.
W
4 End dump trucks shall be equipped with chains on the tail gates for control when dumping
the mix into the paving machine. Hauling trucks shall not be routed over wet or muddy
s
access ways such that tires accumulate dirt that is deposited on the laying surface.
en
5 The Contractor shall provide an adequate number of trucks of such size, speed and condition
m
to ensure orderly and continuous progress of the work all to the approval of the Engineer.
e
5.15 OTHER EQUIPMENT

Si
5.15.1 Spreading and Finishing Equipment
1 The asphalt mixture shall be fed to the paver by end tipping of the truck or by means of a
windrow elevator. The equipment for spreading and finishing the asphalt mixtures shall be of
an approved mechanical, self-powered electronic controlled floating screed type, capable of
spreading and finishing the mixture true to line, grade and required crown.
2 The pavers shall be self-propelled and equipped with hoppers and distributing screws of the
reversing type to place the mixture uniformly in front of adjustable electronic controlled
screeds. The pavers shall be so designed to allow a minimum paving width of 2 m, although
paving in widths of less than 3 m will require the approval of the Engineer.
3 Pavers shall be equipped with such provisions and attachments to suit paving widths
specified for road widening as well to as to suit paving on sloped sections. They shall be
equipped with fast and efficient steering devices and shall have reverse as well as forward
travelling speeds. The operational speed of the pavers shall be adjustable from 3 to 6 m/min
in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.
4 The pavers shall employ mechanical devices as equalising runners, straight edge runners,
evener arms or other compensating devices to maintain trueness of grade and to confine the
edges of the pavement to true lines without the use of stationary side forms. The equipment
shall include blending or joint levelling devices for smoothing and adjusting longitudinal joints
between lanes. The assembly shall be designed and operated in such a manner that it will
place the material at the required compacted thickness.
5 Electronic screeds shall include automatic feed controls to maintain a constant level of
material along the full length of the screed, automatic grade control and automatic slope
control. Unless waived by the engineer, on projects with smoothness (IRI) requirements, the
paver shall carry minimum 9.0m long average beam equipped with an ultrasonic sensors
capable of sensing a pavement section at several spatially separated spots. The automatic
slope control shall be equipped with a proportioning manual override to enable smooth
transition of changing slope rate. Automatic screed controls shall be approved by the
Engineer before use.
6 Screeds shall be provided with devices for heating the screeds to the temperature required
ar
for the laying of the mixture without pulling or marring. Pavers shall also be provided with the
standard attachable screed extensions. All screeds shall be of the vibrating type that permits
at
material to be tamped into position. -Q
7 The term "screed" includes any cutting, crowning or other physical action that is effective in
producing a finished surface of the evenness and texture specified, without tearing, shoving,
LL
or gouging.
8 If, during construction, it is found that the spreading and finishing equipment in operation
W
leaves in the pavement surface tracks or indented areas or other objectionable irregularities
that are not satisfactorily corrected by scheduled operations, the use of such equipment shall
s
be discontinued and other satisfactory spreading and finishing equipment shall be provided
en
by the Contractor.
m
5.15.2 Rolling Equipment

e
1 Rolling equipment shall consist of vibratory steel-wheeled rollers, dead weight steel-wheeled
Si
rollers and pneumatic-tire rollers as required for proper compaction and finishing of the
asphalt surface. Unless otherwise permitted, rollers shall be equipped with reversible or dual
controls to allow operation both forward and backward with the operator always facing in the
direction of movement.
2 Steel-wheeled rollers shall be two-axle tandem rollers or three-axle tandem rollers. These
rollers shall be self-propelled and equipped with power units of not less than four cylinders
and under working conditions shall develop contact pressures under the compression wheels
of 45 to 65 kg/cm of width. Each two-axle roller shall have a minimum weight of 10,000 kg
each and three-axle roller shall have a minimum weight of 13,000 kg. Vibrating steel-wheeled
rollers shall have dual drums with a minimum weight of 7000 kg. Vibrating frequency shall be
between 2000 and 3000 cycles per minute with individual controls for each tandem drum.
Rollers shall be in good working condition and shall be equipped with a reversing clutch.
Rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers to keep the wheel surface clean and with
efficient means of keeping them wet to prevent mixes from sticking. These surfaces shall
have no flat areas or projections which will mark the surface of the asphalt courses. The
three-axle rollers shall be equipped with a centre axle which may be operated either fixed or
floating. The three-axle tandem roller shall be so constructed that when locked in a position
for all treads to be in one plane, the roller wheels are held with such rigidity that, if either front
or centre wheel is unsupported the other two wheels will not vary from the plane by more than
6 mm. All steel-wheeled rollers shall be in good condition and the Contractor shall furnish to
the Engineer the manufacturer’s technical data for each roller and no roller shall be used
except after approval of the Engineer.
3 Pneumatic-tire rollers shall be self-propelled. The rollers shall be equipped with pneumatic
tires of equal size and diameter which are capable of exerting varying average contact
pressure. Pneumatic-tire rollers shall be in good condition and with enough ballast space to
provide uniform wheel loading as may be required. The Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer charts or tabulations showing the contact areas and contact pressures for the full
range of tire inflation pressures and for the full range of tire loading for each type and size
compactor tire furnished and used in pneumatic-tire rollers. The total operating weight and
tire pressure may be varied by the order of the Engineer to obtain contact pressures which
will result in the required asphalt course density.
ar
5.15.3 Liquid Asphalt Distributor
at
1 The liquid asphalt distributor truck shall be of the pressure type with insulated tanks. The use
of gravity distributors will not be permitted. The distributor shall have pneumatic tires of such
-Q
width and number that the load produced on the road surface shall not exceed 100 kg/cm tire
width.
LL
2 Spray bars shall have a minimum length of 2.4 m and shall be of the full circulating type.
Spray bar extensions shall also be of the full circulating type. The spray bar shall be
W
adjustable to maintain a constant height above the surface to be treated.
3 The spray bar nozzles shall be slotted and shall be of such design so as to provide a uniform
s
unbroken spread of asphalt material on the surface. The valves shall be operated by levers
en
so that one or all valves may be quickly opened or closed in one operation. The distributor
shall be equipped with a hose and nozzle attachment to be used for spotting areas
m
inaccessible to the distributor. The distributor and booster tanks shall be so maintained at all
times as to prevent dripping of liquid asphalt material from any part of the equipment.
e
Si
4 The distributor shall be equipped with devices and charts to provide for accurate and rapid
determination and control of the amount of liquid asphalt material being applied and with a
tachometer of the auxiliary wheel type reading speed in m/min. The spreading equipment
shall be provided with a separate power unit for the pump or a variable displacement pump
driven by a hydrostatic transmission so that a uniform application of liquid asphalt material, in
2
controlled amounts, may be made ranging from 0.15 to 5.0 kg/m . The distributor shall have
satisfactory heating equipment and thermometers in order to provide the full range of
application temperatures for the liquid asphalt material being used.
5 Before commencing the work and as required by the Engineer, the liquid asphalt distributor
shall be checked and calibrated such that the rate of transverse spread or longitudinal spread
shall not vary more than 10 % from the required rate of application.
ar
at
APPENDIX
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1 APPENDIX - ASPHALT WORKS........................................................................... 42

1.1 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................ 42
1.2 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................... 44
1.3 SUPERPAVE DESIGN PARAMETERS ................................................................. 44
1.3.2 Traffic 44
1.3.3 Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size (NMAS) 45
1.4 SELECTION OF HMA PROPERTIES & REQUIREMENTS ................................... 46
1.5 OVERVIEW OF SUPERPAVE MIX DESIGN PROCESS....................................... 47
1.5.2 Step1: Selection of Materials 47
1.5.3 Step2: Selection of a Design Aggregate Structure (DAS) 48
1.5.4 Work Instructions of Step 2 Selection of DAS 50
1.5.5 Step 3: Selection of the Design Asphalt Content 51
ar
1.5.6 Work Instruction of Step 3- Selection of DAC 52
1.5.7 Nmax and Ndes Verification 52
at
1.5.8 Step 4: Evaluation of the Strength and the Moisture Sensitivity of the Mixture
-Q 53
1.5.9 Work Instructions of Step 4 Evaluation of Strength and the Moisture Sensitivity 54
1.6 JOB MIX DESIGN PROPOSAL ............................................................................. 54
1.6.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula 55
LL
1.6.3 Construction Quality Control: 56

1.7 REFERENCES ...................................................................................................... 57
W
s
en
e m
Si
1 APPENDIX - ASPHALT WORKS
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1 Superpave: Is an abbreviation of Superior Performing Asphalt Pavement. Superpave

system consist the following steps:
(a) Performance-Based Asphalt Binder Grading System

(b) Performance-Based Specifications of Materials & HMA.
(c) Test methods and practices for material selection & mix design.
(d) Performance prediction of HMA.
2 Asphalt Binder Content (Pb): the percent by weight of asphalt binder in the total mixture.
3 Initial Trial Asphalt Binder (Pbi): the percent by weight of the asphalt binder in the total
ar
mixture for each trial blend in the selection of the Design Aggregate Structure (DAS).
at
4 Bulk Specific Gravity (G1, 2, to n; … Gsb, Gmb): the ratio of the weight in air of a unit volume
-Q
of a permeable material (including both permeable and impermeable voids connected to
the surface of the aggregate particle) at a stated temperature relative to the weight in air of
an equal volume of gas-free distilled water at the stated temperature. This definition
LL
generally applies to individual aggregate stockpiles (Gl through Gn), the blended
aggregate (Gsb, AASHTO T84, T85 and T100) or the compacted mix (Gmb, AASHTO T166 or
T275).
W
5 Effective Binder Content (Pbe): the volume of the asphalt binder that is not absorbed into
s
the aggregate but remains in the mixture to coat the aggregate particles.
en
6 Effective Specific Gravity (Gse): the ratio of the weight in air of a unit volume of a
em
permeable material (excluding voids permeable to binder) at a stated temperature relative to

the weight in air of an equal volume of gas-free distilled water at the stated temperature.
Si
7 Maximum Specific Gravity (Gmm): the ratio of the weight of a given volume of voidless
(Va=0) loose HMA at a stated temperature (usually 77 °F (25°C)) to a weight of an equal
volume of gas-free distilled water at the same temperature (AASHTO T209).
8 Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA): It is the total space between the aggregate particles
in the compacted paving mixture which includes 1) the air voids (Va) and 2) the effective
binder volume . The VMA is defined as the volume of void space between the aggregate
particles before adding the binder. Note: mineral aggregate is the aggregate which does not
include any or organic material but it is the material that consists of minerals and compounds
such as calcium, silicon, etc ….
9 Air Voids (Va): The total volume of the small pockets of air between the coated aggregate
particles throughout a compacted paving mixture, expressed as percent of the bulk
volume of the compacted paving mixture.
10 Voids Filled with Asphalt (VFA): the percentage portion of the volume of intergranular void
space between the aggregate particles (i.e. VMA) that is occupied by the effective asphalt
binder volume. It is expressed as the ratio of (VMA-Va) to the VMA.
11 Volume of Absorbed Binder (Vba): the volume of binder absorbed into the aggregate (equal
to the difference in aggregate volume when calculate with the bulk specific gravity and
effective specific gravity).
12 Dust to Binder Ratio (P0.075/Pbe): ratio by weight of the percentage of the aggregate
passing the 0.075 mm sieve (P200) to the effective binder content (Pbe).
13 Standard Axle: is 8.2 ton (18,000 lb) single axle with dual wheels; the center to center
distance of dual wheels is 34.29 cm (13.5 in); the tire pressure is 0.517 MPa (75 psi).
14 ESAL's: is an abbreviation of Equivalent Single Axle Load. The equivalency factor is the
number of repetition of the standard axle required to induce the same damage as the given
axle. AASHTO Road Test has shown that an equivalent number of the standard axle
can represent the damaging effect of the passage of an axle of any mass. This means that
the ESAL is the number of applications of the standard axle that is equivalent in the damage
to the pavement to an axle of any mass. The relationship is non-linear and is a fourth
degree. For example, one application of a 16.2 ton single axle (36,000 lb twice as the
ar
standard axel) was found to cause damage equal to approximately sixteen applications of
at
the standard axle; or one application of a 16.2 tons axle were required to cause the same
damage or reduction in the pavement serviceability as sixteen applications of the
-Q
standard axle. Also, one application of a 5.47 ton single axle (12,000 lb two thirds of the
standard axel) was found to cause damage equal to approximately 0.2 applications of the
standard axle; or five applications of a 5.47 tons axle were required to cause the same
LL
damage or reduction in the pavement serviceability as one applications of the standard

axle.
W
15 Standard Sieves: Superpave standard sieve sizes are 50.0, 37.5, 25.0, 19.0, 12.5, 9.5,
4.75, 2.36, 1.18, 0.6, 0.3, 0.15 and 0.075 mm
s
en
16 Maximum Aggregate Size (MS): one standard size larger than the nominal maximum
aggregate size (This definition applies only to Superpave mix design.)
em
17 Nominal maximum aggregate size (NMAS): one standard size larger than the first sieve
that retains more than 10 percent of the aggregate (this definition applies only to Superpave
Si
mix design).
18 Nini, Ndes and Nmax: These are the number of gyrations of the gyratory compactor at
three compaction levels simulating the construction traffic for N ini, the design traffic for Ndes
and the maximum anticipated densification by the highest traffic for Nmax
19 Design Aggregate Structure (DAS): the aggregate blend meeting all Superpave
requirements.
20 Design Asphalt Content (DAC): the percent by weight of the asphalt binder in the total mix
selected at 4.0 % air voids in the mix meeting all Superpave requirements.
21 ePAVE3: is a user-friendly menu driven Excel program for the Superpave mix design
system. It is a decision making program that includes all the computations, requirements
and comparisons to design hot mix asphalt for a given project. ePAVE3 includes Superpave
requirements based on the latest (to date) Asphalt Institute Superpave Mix Design –
Superpave Series No. 2 (SP-2), third Edition 2001 and last edition of AASTO 2005
including M323 specification "Standard Practice for Designing Superpave HMA", and R35.
22 Polymer: An organic substance that is originated from petroleum gases. It is the product of
a complicated chemical process. The word “polymer” originally consists of two words
“poly” which means numerous and “meros” which means parts; therefore, polymer means
the substance with many parts. Polymers can be either copolymers or homopolymers. The
most common polymers that are used to modify the asphalt binder for road applications are
either “Elastomers” such as SBS or “Plastomers” such as EVA and Polyethylene.
23 Neat and Polymer Modified Binder (PMB): neat binder is a black or dark brown material
produced from refining of petroleum oil in petroleum refineries. The polymer modified binder
is a neat binder that has been modified by the addition of polymers. The purpose of blending
polymer and other chemical substances is to improve the neat binder Rheological properties
to achieve the Performance Grade (PG) requirements of Superpave grading system. This
process is complicated and involves accurate control of the process parameters such as
mixing mechanism, temperature, time, concentration and blending details
1.2 INTRODUCTION
ar
1 This guide, which is based on ref. 1, should be considered as a guide to assist Engineers,
at
consultants and contractors to design Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA) using Superpave system. It is
the contractor full responsibility to select the applicable parameters for his project in liaison
-Q
with the Engineer and LSA. This system was developed using the last editions of the Asphalt
institute “Superpave Mix Design”, 2001, and AASHTO, 2005.
LL
1.3 SUPERPAVE DESIGN PARAMETERS

W
1 Before starting any HMA design using Superpave system for any project, the mixture and
materials specifications and requirement must be identified. Superpave mix design system
requires three parameters in order to design a mix. These Parameters are:
s
en
(a) Expected traffic volume in the project.

(b) Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size (NMAS).
em
(c) Location of the project.

Si
2 The contract documents shall specify and define the design parameters for the project. A
brief description of the basic design parameters is given in the following sections.
1.3.2 Traffic
1 In Superpave, Traffic is defined as the total anticipated project level equivalent single
axle load (ESALs) on the design lane for a period of 20 years. To simplify the design
process, traffic class designations for each ESALs that appears in the Superpave system is
specified herein. If the contract documents do not specify the ESALs applicable to the
project, the Engineer can use the information provided in Table 1 to select the traffic classes
needed to establish Superpave criteria.
Table 1
ESAL and Traffic Designation
Class Designation ESALs Range Applications
Agricultural roads with light traffic , local

VL Very Light Less than 300,000
and city streets without trucks
L Light 300,000 to 3 million Agriculture, Feeder and collector roads
M Medium 3 million to 10 million Main roads and city streets
H Heavy 10 million to 30 million Highways and Expressway
Heavily trafficked highways, industrial

VH Very Heavy More than 30 million
areas ...
1.3.3 Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size (NMAS)
ar
at
1 Six Nominal Maximum Aggregate Sizes (NMAS) are identified in the Superpave system;
these are 37.5, 25.0, 19.0, 12.5, 9.5 and, 4.75 mm as specified in Table 2.
-Q
Table 2
SUAERPAVE Standard NMAS mixtures
LL
Nominal Maximum Size Maximum Size

(NMAS) (MS)
W
37.5 mm 50.0 mm
s
en
25.0 mm 37.5 mm
19.0 mm 25.0 mm
em
12.5 mm 19.0 mm
9.5 mm 12.5 mm
Si
4.75 mm 9.5 mm
2 The selection of design NMAS for a specific layer is based on the general rule that the
NMAS does not exceed half to one-third (1/2 to 1/3) the layer thickness. If the
contract documents do not specify the NMAS for the project, the Engineer can use the above
criteria and the information provided in Table 3 to select the NMAS of the project.
Table3
Recommended NMAS for Different Layer Types
Layer Recommended NMAS
Sand Mix 4.75 mm
Wearing coarse 9.5 or 12.5 or 19.0 mm
Base coarse 25.0 or 37.5 mm

1.4 SELECTION OF HMA PROPERTIES & REQUIREMENTS
1 Based on the specified design parameters (Traffic in ESAL, NMAS, geographic

location of the project and location of required layer to be designed), the mixture properties
and requirements can be selected. These properties include compaction level, which can be
identified from Table 4 and the properties of HMA, which can be identified from Table 5.
Table 4
Superpave Gyratory Compactive Effort (SGCE)
Traffic Gyrations
(ESAL, million) Nini Ndes Nmax
VL (< 0.3) 6 50 75
L (0.3 to 3) 7 75 115
ar
M to H (3 to < 30) 8 100 160
at
VH (> 30) 9 125 205
-Q
Table 5
LL
Superpave Criteria for the Mixture Design

W
Traffic Class Designation (or ESAL,

Criteria million)
s
VL L M H VH
en
Ninitial < 91.5 < 90.5 < 89.0
Ndesign
em
Required Density (% Gmm) 96.0

Nmax < 98.0
Si
37.5 11.0 %
Voids in the Mineral 25.0
Aggregate (VMA %min) 12.0 %
Nominal
Maximum 19.0 13.0 %
Important Note: mixtures Size, mm
with VMA greater than 2.0% 12.5
above the minimum should 14.0 %
be avoided. 9.5 15.0 %
4.75 16.0%
37.5 64-80 64-78 64-75
25.0 67-80 65-78 65-75
19.0 70-80 65-78 65-75

Voids Filled with Asphalt, %
12.5 70-80 65-78 65-75
9.5 70-80 65-78 65-75
4.75 70-80 65-78 65-75

Traffic Class Designation (or ESAL,

Criteria million)
VL L M H VH
Dust Proportion (DP) Ratio, if gradation line is For all NMAS DP = 0.6 - 1.2, for NMAS 4.75
above the PCS DP = 0.9 - 2.0
Dust Proportion (DP) Ratio, if gradation line is 0.8 – 1.6

below the PCS.
Average Indirect Tensile Strength of the Dry Set Report

in the Moisture Sensitivity Evaluation, kPa
1.5 OVERVIEW OF SUPERPAVE MIX DESIGN PROCESS
1 According to SP-2 and AASHTO R 35, there are four major steps in the volumetric mix
design process. These steps consist of
ar
(a) Material Selection, (Type of binder and aggregate).
at
(b) Selection of Design Aggregate Structure (DAS).
-Q
(c) Selection of Design Asphalt Content (DAC).
(d) Evaluation of Strength and Moisture Sensitivity of the Mix.
LL
W
Step 4:
Strength and Moisture Sensitivity
s
Evaluation
en
Step 3:
Selection of DAC
em
Step 2:
Si
Selection of DAS
Step 1:
Selection of Materials
(Binder, Aggregate and Modifiers)
2 ePAVE3 program should be used to assist in the preparation of the mix design and obtain the
mix deign report summarizing the computations and test results. ePAVE3 mix design report
shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance then to LSA for approval.
1.5.2 Step1: Selection of Materials
1 This process includes the selection of the asphalt binder PG (ABPG) and the aggregates that
meet all Superpave criteria.
2 The selection of ABPG necessitates an understanding of the climatic condition (e.g.,

temperature) in which the pavement will be constructed and operated. This includes both
the average seven-day maximum high temperature and the single-day minimum low
temperature for the last twenty years and the latitude for that particular geographic location.
3 To account for traffic volume and speed or both, adjustments should be made to the selected
ABPG using AASHTO M332.
4 The requirements of the aggregate are selected based on the anticipated traffic and position
of the layer within the pavement. The quality criteria for Superpave aggregates are
summarized in Table 6. In order to be used in Superpave mixtures, the aggregate blends
must meet two sets of criteria known as source properties and consensus properties. Source
property requirements apply to each aggregate stockpile, but consensus properties apply
to the combined blend of multiple stockpiles. The consensus properties are mandatory
for all Superpave aggregate blends while; source properties are left to the contracts.
(a) Consensus Properties (Superpave Requirements):
ar
i. Coarse Aggregate Angularity, (CAA) ASTM D5821
at
ii. Fine Aggregate Angularity, (FAA) AASHTO T304-Method A
iii. Flat and Elongated Particles (F&E) -Q ASTM D4791
iv. Sand Equivalent, (SE) AASHTO T176
(b) Source Properties (QCS Requirements):
LL
QCS General Specifications, source properties are considered specific to the geology
of a particular region and the experience with local materials.
W
i. Toughness AASHTO T96

ii. Soundness AASHTO T104
s
iii. Clay lumps & friable particles AASHTO T112

en
iv. Others.
Table 6
em
Superpave Criteria for Aggregate Consensus Properties

Traffic Class Designation (or ESAL, million) Layer Depth,
Si
Property
VH(>30) H(10to<30) M (3 to<10) L (0.3 to 3) VL (< 0.3) mm
100/100 95/90 85/80 75/- 55/- < 100 mm CAA, %

min.
100/100 80/75 60/- 50/- -/- > 100 mm
45 45 45 40 - < 100 mm FAA, %

min.
45 40 40 40 - > 100 mm
50 45 45 40 40 SE, % min
10 10 10 10 - F&E, % max
Note: CAA values (X/Y) denotes that X% of the coarse aggregate has one fractured face and Y%
has two or more fractured faces
1.5.3 Step2: Selection of a Design Aggregate Structure (DAS)
1 Once a group of aggregates has been identified, these aggregates are combined at
different percentages to produce at least three distinct blends conforming to Superpave
gradation requirements presented in Table 7 according to designed NMAS.
Table 7
Aggregate Gradation Requirements – Control Points
Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size, mm - Control Point (Percent Passing)
Sieve Size 37.5 mm 25.0 mm 19.0 mm 12.5 mm 9.5 mm 4.75 mm
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
50.0 mm 100 - - - - - - - - - - -
37.5 mm 90 100 100 - - - - - - - - -
25.0 mm - 90 90 100 100 - - - - - - -
19.0 mm - - - 90 90 100 100 - - - - -
12.5 mm - - - - - 90 90 100 100 - 100 -
9.5 mm - - - - - - - 90 90 100 95 100
ar
4.75 mm - - - - - - - - - 90 90 100
2.36 mm 15 41 19 45 23 49 28 58 32 67 - -
at
1.18 - - - - - - -Q - - - - 30 60
0.075 mm 0 6 1 7 2 8 2 10 2 10 6 12
2 Primary Control Sieve (PCS) shown in Table 8 can be used to determine if the nominated
LL
blend is fine or coarse gradation. If the gradation line passes below the PCS, it is considered
as coarse graded and it is considered fine gradation if the line passes above the PCS.
W
Table 8
Gradation Classification - PCS Control Points
s
en
9.5mm 12.5mm 19mm 25mm 37.5 mm Nominal Maximum Size

em
2.36mm 2.36mm 4.75mm 4.75mm 9.5mm Primary Control Sieve Size
47% 39% 47% 40% 47% %Passing PCS

Si
3 Typically, three blends are developed ranging from the coarse to the fine side of the
Superpave control points for a given nominal maximum size (note: control points and PCS
differ for different NMAS). After selecting a blend (i.e. from the three trial blends), the
aggregate consensuses properties must be confirmed to meeting Superpave criteria by
actual testing.
4 The most difficult part of designing an aggregate structure is the creation of the VMA
necessary to meet the volumetric criteria. The procedure is typically a trial and error
process; however, there are some general guidelines that will assist in obtaining the
VMA. The following recommendations may be tried to increase VMA:
(a) Move the gradation away from the maximum density line;
(b) Use highly angular particles;
(c) Use particles with a rough surface texture;
(d) Reduce the percent of natural sand and use more percent of the crushed sand;
(e) Reduce the amount of P200 used in the HMA; and
(f) Use S-shaped gradation curve.
5 A good design aggregate structure is one that is economical and meets Superpave
volumetric criteria.
1.5.4 Work Instructions of Step 2 Selection of DAS
1 To select the design aggregate structure, do the following:
(a) Obtain representative hot bin specimens from the plant.

(b) Determine the consensus properties, water absorption, bulk and apparent specific
gravities for each aggregate fraction.
(c) Grade the specimens using Superpave standard sieve set.
(d) Input the values from two and three into ePAVE3 or combine manually. to
develop three blends that meet the Superpave criteria (i.e. within the control points for
the design NMAS)
ar
(e) Estimate the initial trial asphalt binder content using ePAVE3 or by using formulas
at
presented in ASSHTO R35.
(f)
-Q
For unmodified asphalt binders, determine the mixing and compacting temperature for
the proposed asphalt binder as follows:
(i) Measure the rotational viscosity using AASHTO T316 or ASTM D4402 at 135 C
LL
and 165 C.
(ii) Input the measured viscosities into ePAVE3. ePAVE3 will generate the viscosity-
W
temperature relationship.
s
(iii) From the graph, determine:

en
2 The mixing temperature at a rotational viscosity of 0.17 ± 0.02 Pa.s.

3 The compaction temperature at a rotational viscosity of 0.28 ± 0.03 Pa.s.
em
(g) For modified asphalt binders, determine the mixing and compaction temperature in
accordance with one of the methods presented in NCHRP 648.
Si
(h) Prepare enough hot mix to make two 150 mm (or 100 mm) gyratory specimens and
two specimens to measure the Maximum Specific Gravity (Gmm) for each blend at the
estimated initial trial asphalt content.
Note: small specimen size of 100 mm is used for mixes having NMAS of 19.0 mm or below.
(i) Leave the mix in the oven for two hours at the compaction temperature then
compact two 150.0 mm (or 100 mm) specimens for each blend using the Superpave
Gyratory Compactor (SGC) to Ndes according to AASHTO T312 (minimum number of
specimens is six).
(j) For the specimens that were compacted to Ndes, measure the bulk specific gravity
(Gmb), and obtain the specimen height at Nini and Ndes from the gyratory compactor
that is automatically recording the specimen height for each gyration.
(k) Measure the Maximum Specific Gravity (Gmm) for two specimens for each blend
according to ASSHTO T209.
(l) Input the measured values into ePAVE3. ePAVE3 will perform the computations,
display results, and check them against the criteria of the project.
(m) Check the results given by ePAVE3 for the three blends and select the most
conforming blend as the DAS; in case none of the three blends meets Superpave
criteria, repeat the design by developing additional aggregate blends from the same
source ; if the criteria is not met change the sources.
2 Preparation of the binder and aggregate mixtures for the gyratory compactor (SGC) should
be timed such that a minimum of 20 minutes is allowed between batches. Batched
specimens should be conditioned in a closed draft oven for a minimum of 2 hours ± 5
minutes prior to compacting them in the SGC. Refer to AASHTO R30 for more details. The
short time oven aging is performed to permit time for the aggregate to absorb the
binder. All specimens including those for SGC and maximum specific gravity tests, should
be cured the same amount of time.
1.5.5 Step 3: Selection of the Design Asphalt Content
1 The selected aggregate blend (DAS) will then be mixed with four different proportions of the
binder as follows:
ar
(a) Estimated asphalt binder content corrected to give 4.0% air voids.
at
(b) Estimated asphalt binder content corrected to give 4.0% air voids minus 0.5 %.
-Q
(c) Estimated asphalt binder content corrected to give 4.0% air voids plus 0.5 %.
(d) Estimated asphalt binder content corrected to give 4.0% air voids plus 1.0 %.
LL
2 A sufficient amount of the proposed aggregate blend will need to be prepared to

permit two specimens to be compacted in the SGC according to Superpave system for
W
gyrations equal (Ndes), and the maximum specific gravity to be determined at each of the
four binder contents.
s
3 Preparation of the binder and aggregate mixtures for the SGC specimens should be timed
en
such that a minimum of 20 minutes is allowed between batches. Batched specimens should
be conditioned in a closed draft oven for a minimum of 2 hours ± 5 minutes prior to
em
compacting them in the SGC. Refer to AASHTO R30 for more details. The short time oven
aging is performed to permit time for the aggregate to absorb the binder. All
Si
specimens including those for SGC and maximum specific gravity tests, should be cured the
same amount of time.
4 The procedure used for design in the laboratory will need to closely match the field conditions
at the time of construction. Failure to consistently test the materials at the same time interval
may result in a highly erratic all specific gravity values and possibly failure to achieve the
required VMA. After the necessary testing has been accomplished, the calculation of the
volumetric parameters can begin. The averaged results of the various volumetric calculations
need to be plotted relative to the corresponding binder content. The design binder content is
selected as that which satisfies the specified volumetric criteria at 4 percent air voids (refer to
AASHTO R35 for more details).
1.5.6 Work Instruction of Step 3- Selection of DAC
1 To select the deign asphalt content, do the following:
(a) After selecting the most conforming blend (DAS) from step 2, prepare enough
hot mix to make two 150 mm (or 100 mm) gyratory specimen and two specimens to
measure the Maximum Specific Gravity (Gmm) for four trial mixes using DAS of the
selected blend and four asphalt binder levels as specified in item (5.5.4) herein.
(b) Compact two 150.0 mm (or 100 mm) specimens for each mix using the Superpave
Gyratory compactor to Ndes according to AASHTO T312 (total number of specimens
are eight)
(c) For the specimens that were compacted to Ndes, measure the bulk specific gravity
(Gmb), and obtain the specimen height at Nini and Ndes from the gyratory compactor
that is automatically recording the specimen height for each gyration.
(d) Input the measured values into ePAVE3. The program will perform all calculations,
produce the results and compare the results with required mix design properties for the
ar
project.
at
(e) ePAVE3 will generate the design curves, these are:
-Q
(i) % air voids vs. asphalt content.
(ii) % VMA vs. asphalt content.
LL
(iii) % VFA vs. asphalt content.

(iv) % Gmm at Nini vs. asphalt content.
W
(f) From the percentage, air voids vs. asphalt content curve determine the design asphalt
content (DAC) which corresponds to 4.0 % air voids.
s
en
(g) Use the %VMA vs. asphalt content, %VFA vs. asphalt content % and %Gmm vs.
asphalt content graphs to obtain the VMA, FVA and the % Gmm @ Nini values at the
em
design asphalt content.

(h) Input the DAC, %VMA, %VFA % and Gmm @ Nini into the appropriate cells in
ePAVE3. ePAVE3 will perform the computations, display results, and check them
Si
against the criteria of the project.

(i) If the mix properties at the design asphalt content conform to the Superpave criteria
then go to the Nmax verification; if not then analyze, evaluate and modify the
design as needed until the mix properties at the design asphalt content (DAC)
conform to the criteria.
1.5.7 Nmax and Ndes Verification
1 After conforming to Superpave criteria, then do the Nmax verification as follows:
(a) Prepare enough hot mix at the selected gradation from (DAS) step 2 and the selected
design asphalt content (DAC) from step 3, to compact two 150 mm (or 100 mm)
specimens and two Gmm specimens.
(b) Compact the specimens to Nmax using the gyratory compactor according to AASHTO
T312.
(c) Measure the Gmb at Nmax for the two specimens that were prepared using SGC and
measure the Gmm.
(d) Input the values into ePAVE3, which will perform the computations, provide the results,
and compare them with the Superpave criteria.
(e) Check the results of ePAVE3, if acceptable then the design is concluded if not
then redesign the mix.
2 After conforming that the mix properties at Nmax meet Superpave criteria, then do the Ndes
verification as follows:
(a) Prepare enough hot mix at the selected gradation from (DAS) step 2 and the selected
design asphalt content (DAC) from step 3, to compact two 150 mm (or 100 mm)
specimens and two Gmm specimens.
(b) Compact the specimens to Ndes using the gyratory compactor according to AASHTO
T312.
(c) Measure the Gmb at Ndes for the two specimens that were prepared using SGC and
use the Gmm from the previous step. Obtain the specimen height at Ndes and Nini from
ar
the gyratory compactor that is automatically recording the specimen height for each
gyration.
at
(d) Input the values into ePAVE3, which will perform the computations, provide the results,
-Q
and compare them with the Superpave criteria.
(e) Check the results of ePAVE3, if acceptable then the design is concluded if not
then redesign the mix.
LL
1.5.8 Step 4: Evaluation of the Strength and the Moisture Sensitivity of the Mixture
W
1 The identification of the combination of a design aggregate structure and design binder
content is now complete. The mixture now needs to demonstrate that it is capable of
s
resisting the moisture induced damage. This evaluation is performed in accordance with
en
AASHTO T283.
em
2 Moisture sensitivity evaluation requires that a total of six specimens consisting of the
proposed aggregate blend and binder at the design binder content, be prepared and
compacted to approximately 7 ± 0.5% air voids. This group of specimens is divided into
Si
two subsets with three of the specimens being identified as the control specimens and
the other three being identified as conditioned specimens.
3 At the end of the conditioning period all of the specimens are loaded to failure in indirect
tension. Report the average Indirect Tensile Strength (IDT) of the dry subset in the mix
design report (see Table 5); and if the ratio of the average strength of the conditioned subset
to the control subset (retained strength) is more than or equal to 80% , then the mixture
passes the test. If the retained strength is less than 80%, then the mixture fails. The retained
strength can be increased by substituting part of the material finer than 0.075 mm by
mineral admixtures or by using chemical anti-stripping agents. Prepare another six (6)
specimens and test them as previously described. If this procedure does not improve the
retained strength to more than 80%, then the design process should be repeated using
different source.
1.5.9 Work Instructions of Step 4 Evaluation of Strength and the Moisture Sensitivity
1 To check the Strength and the moisture sensitivity of the designed mix, do the following:
(a) Prepare enough hot mix to make six 150 mm (or 100 mm) gyratory compactor
specimens using the selected gradation (DAS) and the design asphalt content (DAC).
(b) Use the Nmax verification densification data to identify the number of gyrations required
to achieve 7.0 ± 0.5% % air voids (i.e. %Gmm = 92.5 to 93.5 %).
(c) Compact six 150.0 mm (or 100 mm) specimens using the Superpave Gyratory
Compactor according to AASHTO T312 compactor (total number of specimens are
six) to a number of gyrations that will provide approximately 7.0 ± 0.5 % air voids.
(d) Use ASSHTO T283 to test the six specimens.
(e) Input the measured values into ePAVE3. ePAVE3 will perform the computations and
provide the results and compare them with the Superpave criteria
ar
(f) Check the results given by ePAVE3. Report the average IDT of the Dry group in the
mix design report (see Table 5). If the ratio of the average IDT of the conditioned
at
subset to the control subset is 80% or more, then the mixture passes the test if not
consider redesigning the mix and use some additives.
-Q
1.6 JOB MIX DESIGN PROPOSAL
LL
1 A proposed Job Mix Formula (JMF) shall be formulated by the Contractor and submitted to
the Engineer and LSA for approval. The JMF shall be prepared by the Contractor in precise
W
compliance with Superpave system. The Contractor shall select his sources of aggregate
and bituminous material and, after sufficient quantities have been stockpiled or are available
for use, obtain representative specimens of the materials and test to determine if they
s
conform to the requirements of the specifications.

en
2 Before producing bituminous concrete mixtures, the Contractor shall submit in writing to the
em
Engineer, detailed information for each mix which he proposes to furnish. The information
shall include, but not be limited to the following:
Si
(a) Copy of mix certificate approval obtained from LSA.

(b) The source(s) of the aggregate for each mix.
(c) Pertinent test data and a written certification that the aggregates conform to all of the
quality requirements specified herein and in section 5.2.
(d) Type of Asphalt modifier intended to be used in the project. The Asphalt binder
modifier shall be an approved modifier; along with the Certificate of Conformity of the
modified asphalt binder to the required grade according to the Superpave Performance
Based Grading System.
(e) Pertinent test data on the type and properties of the asphalt binder, modified asphalt
binder, mineral filler, and chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers to be furnished.
(f) Superpave mix design report in ePAVE3 format.
(g) The type and location of plant to be used for mixing each mix.
(h) Type of Asphalt modifier intended to be used in the project. The Asphalt binder
modifier shall be an approved modifier; along with the Certificate of Conformity of the
modified asphalt binder to the required grade according to the Superpave Performance
Based Grading System.
(i) Pertinent test data on the type and properties of the asphalt binder, modified asphalt
binder, mineral filler, and chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers to be furnished.
(j) Superpave mix design report in ePAVE3 format.
(k) The type and location of plant to be used for mixing each mix.
(l) The proposed beginning date for producing bituminous concrete mixtures.
(m) Any other support data and information special to the project (e.g. technical data
sheets of a polymer in case it was used).
3 The Engineer shall be provided access to the materials sampling and testing operations at all
times.
ar
4 At the same time that the above information is provided, the Engineer shall obtain one
at
hundred (100) kilogram specimens of each individual aggregate size, eight (8) liters of
bituminous material and, when used, sufficient quantities of the mineral filler and the
-Q
chemical admixture/asphalt modifier to complete two (2) proposed mix design checks,
all representing the materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish. The final job
mix formula shall be made by using hot-bins aggregate.
LL
1.6.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula

W
1 The Engineer shall review the JMF to determine that it contains all required information. If it
does not contain all required information, it shall be returned within seven (7) days to the
s
Contractor for further action and resubmission by the Contractor.

en
2 If the proposed JMF contains all required information but fails to meet all of the requirements
m
specified, it shall not be accepted by the Engineer and will be returned to the Contractor
within fourteen (14) days. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a new
e
JMF conforming to the requirements specified and propose a new date for beginning
Si
production of the bituminous mixtures.
3 When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms to all the
requirements of the specifications, he shall order the Contractor to construct a minimum of
two hundred (200) meter long field test strip; but, not exceeding one day's production. The
test strip is used for three purposes:
(a) To check the contractor ability to produce the approved mix within tolerances.
(b) To check the contractor ability to construct and compact the mix to satisfy job
specifications.
(c) To check the riding quality according to project specifications.
4 The Engineer shall evaluate the test strip as to its constructability and compactability and the
mix for conformance to the laboratory tested JMF within the tolerances listed in Table 9. Five
(5) specimens shall be obtained from the test strip and tested.
5 If the Engineer is not satisfied with the results of the test strip, he shall state his
objections in writing and request a revised JMF and a new test strip.
6 When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms to all
requirements of the specifications and the test strip results are acceptable, he will issue
written acceptance to the Contractor to begin producing the proposed mixes. Production of
bituminous concrete mixtures shall not begin until the Engineer has given written acceptance
of the Job Mix Formula.
7 Acceptance of the JMF by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to
produce bituminous concrete mixtures conforming to all specified requirements.
1.6.3 Construction Quality Control:
1 Testing to control the quality of bituminous concrete mixtures produced shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
2 For each class of bituminous concrete produced and each day's production, the Contractor
shall perform one (1) complete Superpave analysis at Ndes including gradation and asphalt
binder content, air voids, %VMA, %VFA, DP ratio, Indirect tensile strength on a specimen
ar
obtained from the discharge gate or hauling vehicle. In addition, the Contractor shall
evaluate on a weekly basis the strength and moisture sensitivity of the mix from a specimen
at
obtained from the discharge gate or hauling vehicle.
-Q
3 No mixture conditioning is required when conducting quality control or quality
assurance testing on plant-produced mixture.
LL
W
Table 9
Superpave Job Mix Formula Tolerances for HMA Plant Mix
s
Mix Composition Property Tolerance Limit

en
Asphalt Binder Content (Pb) ±0.40

m
Gradation Passing 4.75 mm and Larger Sieves ±5

e
Si
Gradation Passing 2.36mm to 150μm Sieve ±4
Gradation Passing 75μm Sieve ±1.2
Air Voids (Va) ±1.3
Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA) ±1.5
Field Density 92 to 94 (%Gmm)

1.7 REFERENCES
1) Hot Asphalt Mix Design System Using Superpave System Detailed in Asphalt Institute
SP-2 and the AASHTO 2005 Standards – MOT – Saudi Arabia, 2006.
2) AASHTO M323: Standard Specification for Superpave Volumetric Mix Design.
3) (NCHRP) Report 567: Volumetric Requirements for Superpave Mix Design.
4) (NCHRP) Report 409: Quality Control and Acceptance of Superpave-Designed Hot
Mix Asphalt.
5) (NCHRP) Report 539: Aggregate Properties and the Performance of Superpave-
Designed Hot-Mix Asphalt.
6) (NCHRP) Report 513: Simple Performance Tester for Superpave Mix Design.
7) (NCHRP) Report 648: Mixing and Compaction Temperatures of Asphalt Binders in
Hot-Mix Asphalt.
8) AASHTO T320: Standard Method of Test for Determining the Permanent Shear Strain
and Stiffness of Asphalt Mixtures Using the Superpave Shear Tester (SST).
ar
9) AASHTO T321: Standard Method of Test for Determining the Fatigue Life of
at
Compacted Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA) Subjected to Repeated Flexural Bending.
10)
-Q
AASHTO T322: Standard Method of Test for Determining the Creep Compliance and
Strength of Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA) Using the Indirect Tensile Test Device.
11) AASHTO T340: Standard Method of Test for Determining the Rutting Susceptibility of
LL
Hot Mix Asphalt (APA) Using the Asphalt Pavement Analyzer (APA).
W
s
en
e m
END OF PART
Si
Part 06: Concrete Road Pavements
6 CONCRETE ROAD PAVEMENTS .......................................................................... 3

6.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 3
6.1.1 Scope 3
6.1.2 References 3
6.1.3 Quality Control of Concrete Strength 4
6.2 TRIAL LENGTH ....................................................................................................... 5
6.2.1 General Requirements for Trial Length 5
6.2.2 Assessment of Trial Length 6
6.2.3 Approval and Acceptance of Trial Length 7
6.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVEMENT QUALITY CONCRETE .................................. 7
6.3.1 Materials and Mix Designs for Pavement Quality Concrete 7
6.3.2 Workability of Pavement Quality Concrete 7
6.3.3 Trial Mixes 8
6.3.4 Separation Membrane 8
ar
6.3.5 General Requirements for Steel Reinforcement 8
6.3.6 Jointed Reinforced Concrete Slabs 9
at
6.3.7 Continuously Reinforced Concrete Slabs (CRCP or CRCR) -Q 10
6.3.8 General Requirements for Transverse Joints 10
6.3.9 Transverse Contraction Joints 11
6.3.10 Transverse Expansion Joints 11
LL
6.3.11 Transverse Warping Joints 11

6.3.12 Transverse Construction Joints 11
W
6.3.13 General Requirements for Longitudinal Joints 12

6.3.14 Longitudinal Construction Joints 13
s
6.3.15 Dowel Bars 13

en
6.3.16 Joint Grooves 16

6.3.17 Groove Formers and Bottom Crack Inducers 17
m
6.3.18 Joint Filler Board 18

e
6.3.19 Preparation and Sealing of Joint Grooves 18

Si
6.3.20 Sealing with Applied Sealants 19

6.3.21 Sealing with Compression Seals 20
6.3.22 Joint Seals 21
6.3.23 Joints at Manhole and Gully Slabs 21
6.3.24 Inspection of Dowel Bars 22
6.3.25 Side Forms, Rails and Guide Wires 22
6.3.26 Delivery, Storage and Batching of Concreting Materials 23
6.3.27 Mixing Concrete 24
6.3.28 Transport and Delivery 24
6.3.29 General Requirements for Construction by Machine 24
6.3.30 Construction by Fixed Form Paving Machines 25
6.3.31 Construction by Slip-Form Paving Machine 26
6.3.32 Construction by Small Paving Machines or Hand Guided Methods 26
6.3.33 Surface Textures 28
6.3.34 Strength 29
6.3.35 Trial Mixes 29
6.3.36 Trial Length 29
6.3.37 Surface Finish 30

6.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR CEMENT BOUND MATERIALS ....................................... 30
6.4.1 General Requirements for Cement Bound Materials 30
6.4.2 Batching and Mixing 31
6.4.3 Transporting 31
6.4.4 Laying 31
6.4.5 Compacting 32
6.4.6 Curing 32
6.4.7 Preliminary Trial 33
6.4.8 Cement Bound Material Category 1 (CBM1) 33
6.4.12 Testing of Cement Bound Materials 35
6.4.13 Special Requirements for Cement Bound Materials 35
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
6 CONCRETE ROAD PAVEMENTS
6.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6.1.1 Scope
1 This part of the specification covers the; materials, mix designs, production and laying of
pavement quality concrete, lean mix concrete and cement bound materials.
2 Related Sections and Parts are:
This Section
Part 3 ............... Earthworks
Part 4 ............... Unbound Pavement Materials
Part 5 ............... Asphalt Works
ar
Section 5 - Concrete
Part 16 ............ Miscellaneous - Pavement Quality Concrete
at
6.1.2 References
-Q
1 The following standards are referred to in this part of the specification
BS 1377: Part 9 ..........Methods of testing soils – in-situ tests
LL
BS 1881...................... Methods of testing concrete -

W
BS 1924: Part 1 & 2.... Stabilised materials for civil engineering purposes
BS 2499 & BS EN 14188 Hot applied joint sealants for road pavements
s
BS 2752...................... Chloroprene rubber compounds

en
BS 3900: Part F12 ...... Determination of resistance to neutral salt spray

BS 3963...................... Method for testing the performance of concrete mixers
m
BS EN ISO 11600 ...... Two part polysulphide sealants

e
BS 4449...................... Reinforcing bars

Si
BS 4482...................... Cold drawn steel wire for reinforcing concrete

BS 4483...................... Reinforcing mesh
BS 5212: Part 1 & 2.... Cold applied joint sealants for concrete pavements
BS EN 206 & BS 8500 Supply of concrete
BS 7542...................... Methods for test of curing compounds for concrete
BS 812........................ Testing methods for aggregates
ASTM D3406 .............. Specification for joint sealant - hot applied elastomeric types
ASTM 7116 ................ Specification for joint sealant - hot applied elastomeric types (jet
fuel resistant)
ASTM D2628-91......... Specification for preformed joint seals
DTP ............................ Manual of contract documents for highway works -Volume 1

specification for highway works
6.1.3 Quality Control of Concrete Strength
1 Sampling and testing for, and compliance with the specified characteristics strength of
designed mixes shall be in accordance with BS EN 206 & BS 8500, except that it shall be at
the following rates of sampling and testing and meet the following requirements:
(a) Concrete cubes of the appropriate size shall be made, cured and tested in accordance
with BS 1881 respectively from concrete delivered to the paving plant, each group
being from a different delivery of concrete. At least 3 cubes shall be made per group
2
for each 600 m of concrete slab and not less than 6 groups shall be made each day,
2
for each type of mix. For areas less than 600 m , at least 4 cubes shall be made for
2
each 100 m or less. This rate of sampling and testing may be reduced at the
Engineer's discretion.
2
(b) For areas of 600 m or more, one cube shall be tested in compression at 7 days and
the other two at 28 days after mixing. Groups of four consecutive results at 28 days
ar
shall be used for assessing the strength for compliance with BS EN 206 & BS 8500.
2
For areas less than 600 m , two cubes shall be tested at 7 days and two tested at 28
at
days and assessed in accordance with BS EN 206 & BS 8500.
-Q
(c) The ratio R between 7 and 28 day strengths shall be established for the mix to be used
in the slab by testing pairs of cubes at each age on at least six batches of the
proposed mix or it shall be quoted by the supplier of the concrete. The average
LL
strength of the 7 day pair of cubes shall be divided by the average strength of the 28-
day pair of cubes for each batch and the ratio R shall be the average of these six
W
values. The ratio R shall be expressed to three decimal places.

(d) If during the construction of the trial length or during normal working, the average value
s
of any 4 consecutive 7 day test results falls below the strengths required then the
en
cement content of the concrete shall be increased by 5 % by mass or by an amount

agreed by the Engineer. The increased cement content shall be maintained at least
m
until the four corresponding 28-day tests have been assessed. If the cement content is
increased, the concrete mix shall be adjusted to maintain the required workability.
e
Si
(e) The values in columns 3 and 4 of Table 6.1 may only be used with the permission of
the Engineer when sufficient test results on trial mixes for calculating the ratio are not
available. Once sufficient results are available from normal working the ratio R shall be
calculated from the results available on Site.
(f) To assess the time for use of a concrete slab by traffic, the strength development rate
may be predetermined by trial mixes. Alternatively pairs of cubes shall be made for
2
each 600 m or less and stored alongside the pavement in containers or in such a way
that their sides are well insulated. If thermal insulation is used for accelerated curing
the cubes shall be similarly insulated. Pairs of cubes shall be tested at intervals
decided by the Engineer. Tests for compliance with the specified strength shall be
made in the normal way.
Table 6.1
7 Day Cube Strength
All Mixes, R PC Mixes, R not PFA or ggbs mixes, R

Grade of Concrete 2
available available not available N/mm
C40 43R 35 29
C30 33R 27 22
C20 22R 18 14
C15 17R 13 11
C10 10R 8 7
C7.5 7R 5.5 4.5
ar
6.2 TRIAL LENGTH
at
6.2.1 General Requirements for Trial Length
-Q
1 Except in rapid construction projects, at least one month prior to the construction of the trial
length of surface slabs or CRCR (Continuously Reinforced Concrete Road Base) the
LL
Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval a detailed description of the proposed
materials, mix proportions, plant, equipment and construction methods.
W
2 No trials of new materials, plants, equipment or construction methods; nor any development
of them shall be permitted either during the construction of the trial length or in any
s
subsequent paving work, unless they form part of further approved trials.
en
3 The Contractor shall demonstrate the materials, mix proportions, plant, equipment and
m
method of construction that are proposed for concrete paving, by first constructing a trial
e
length of slab, at least 150m but not more than 300 m, long for mechanised construction, and
Si
at least 30m long for hand guided methods, or otherwise as directed by the Engineer.
4 The mix proportions decided by trial mixes may be adjusted during the trial but shall not be
changed once the trial length has been approved except with the agreement of the Engineer.
5 The trial length shall be constructed in two parts over a period comprising at least part of two
separate working days, with a minimum of half the proposed trial lengths constructed each
day. The trial length shall be constructed at a similar rate to that which is proposed for the
main construction in the permanent works.
6 At least two transverse joints and one longitudinal joint of each type that are proposed for
unreinforced concrete slabs and jointed reinforced concrete slabs in the main construction in
the permanent works shall be constructed and assessed in the trial length.
7 If in the trial length expansion joints are not demonstrated, the first 2 expansion joints and at
least the first 150 m of longitudinal construction joint for mechanised paving, or 30 m for hand
guided method of construction laid in the main construction in the permanent works, shall be
considered the trial length for these joints.
8 One construction joint shall be demonstrated in each trial length of CRCP or CRCR.
6.2.2 Assessment of Trial Length
1 The trial length shall comply with the Specification in all respects, with the following additions
and exceptions provided in (a) through (d) below.
(a) Surface Levels and irregularity

(i) in checking for compliance the levels shall be taken at intervals of not more than
2.5 m along any line or lines parallel to the longitudinal centre line of the trial
length.
(ii) The maximum number of permitted irregularities of pavement surfaces shall
comply with the requirements for asphalt pavements as per Part 5
for 300 m lengths. Shorter trial lengths shall be assessed pro-rata based on
values for a 300 m length.
ar
(b) Joints
at
(i) At least 3 cores of minimum diameter 100 mm shall be taken from the slab at
joints to check the lateral and vertical location of joint grooves and bottom crack
-Q
inducers.
(ii) After a minimum of 24 hours following construction the removable part of the
LL
joint groove former shall be taken out and at least three joints and the sides of
the groove shall be inspected for compaction. If there are voids the size and
number should be compared with a similar size section of the photograph for 3%
W
excess voidage in BS 1881. If there is excess voidage, additional

compaction shall be provided and further joints inspected. The joints so
s
exposed shall be temporarily or permanently sealed

en
(iii) Alignment of dowel bars shall be inspected in any two consecutive transverse
joints. If the position or alignment of the dowel bars at one of these joints does
m
not comply after the next 3 consecutive joints of the same type have been
e
inspected then the method of placing dowels shall be deemed to be satisfactory.

Si
(iv) If there are deficiencies in the first expansion joint constructed as a trial,
the next expansion joint shall be a trial joint. Should this also be deficient further
trial expansion joints shall be made as part of a trial length which shall not form
part of the Permanent Works, unless agreed by the Engineer.
(c) Density
(i) Density shall be assessed from at least 3 cores drilled from each part of the trial
length.
(d) Position of Reinforcement and Tie Bars
(i) Compliance for the position of steel reinforcement and for the position and
alignment of tie bars shall be checked by drilling additional cores from the slab
unless they can be determined from cores taken for density assessment.
6.2.3 Approval and Acceptance of Trial Length
1 Approval of the materials, mix proportions, plant, equipment and construction methods will be
given when a trial length complies with the specifications. The Contractor shall not proceed
with normal working until the trial length has been approved and any earlier defective trial
lengths have been removed, unless they can be remedied to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2 When approval has been given, the materials, mix proportions, plant, equipment and
construction methods shall not thereafter be changed, without the approval of the Engineer
except for maintenance of plant. Any changes in materials, mix proportions, plant,
equipment, and construction methods shall entitle the Engineer to require the Contractor to
lay a further trial length as described in this Clause to demonstrate that these changes will
not adversely affect the permanent works.
3 Trial lengths which do not comply with the Specification, with the exception of areas within
the pavement surface which can be remedied shall be removed immediately upon notification
of deficiencies by the Engineer and the Contractor shall construct a further trial length.
ar
6.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVEMENT QUALITY CONCRETE
at
6.3.1
-Q
Materials and Mix Designs for Pavement Quality Concrete
1 The constituent materials and mix designs for pavement quality control shall be as per
LL
Section 5: Part 16.
6.3.2 Workability of Pavement Quality Concrete

W
1 The workability of the concrete at the point of placing shall enable the concrete to be fully
s
compacted and finished without undue flow. The optimum workability for the mix to suit the
en
paving plant being used shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
m
2 The workability shall be determined by the compacting factor test, or the Vebe test or
e
alternatively for concrete grade C20 or below, by the slump test, all in accordance with BS
Si
1881, at the minimum rate of one determination per 300 m2 of slab laid or 6 times per day,
whichever is greater. For areas less than 300 m2 the rate shall be at least one determination
to each 20 m length of slab or at least 3 times per day.
3 Alternatively the volumetric method of determining the Compacting Factor in BS 1881 may be
used. Tests for workability shall be carried out at the point of placing, in conjunction with
tests for strength and any tests for air content. The workability shall be maintained at the
optimum within the following tolerances.
Compacting Factor (CF) +0.03
Slump +20mm
Vebe +3 seconds or as agreed by the Engineer as a results of trial
mixes.
4 Any alteration to the optimum workability necessitated by a change in conditions shall be
agreed beforehand by the Engineer.
5 If any determination of workability gives result outside the tolerance, a further test shall be
made immediately on the next available load of concrete. The average of the two consecutive
results and the difference between them shall be calculated. If the average is not within the
tolerance or the difference is greater than 0.06 for CF or 20 mm for slump, or 6 seconds for
Vebe or other value agreed with the Engineer, subsequent samples shall be taken from the
delivery vehicles, which shall not be allowed to discharge into the Works until compliance
with the Specification has been established.
6.3.3 Trial Mixes
1 For concrete grades C15 and above the Contractor shall carry out laboratory trials of
designed mixes with the materials from all sources to be used in the Works, in accordance
with BS EN 206 & BS 8500 unless recent data relating entirely to the proposed mix is
2 The trial mixes shall be repeated if necessary until the proportions of ingredients are
determined which will produce a concrete which complies in all respects with the
ar
Specification.
at
3 Apart from minor adjustments to the mix as permitted by BS EN 206 & BS 8500 any changes
-Q
in sources of materials or mix proportions that are proposed by the Contractor during the
course of the Works shall be assessed by making laboratory trial mixes and the construction
of a further trial length unless otherwise approval is given by the Engineer.
LL
6.3.4 Separation Membrane

W
1 A separation membrane shall be used between jointed reinforced concrete surface slabs or
unreinforced concrete surface slabs and the sub base.
s
en
2 Separation membranes shall be impermeable plastic sheeting 125 microns thick laid flat
without creases. Where an overlap of plastic sheets is necessary, this shall be at least
m
300 mm. There shall be no standing water on or under the membrane when the concrete is
e
placed upon it.

Si
3 Under CRCP and CRCR a waterproof membrane shall be provided, which shall be a
bituminous spray before concreting. Where a bituminous spray has been used to cure
cement bound material or wet lean concrete then only those areas which have been
damaged shall be resprayed after making good. The waterproof membrane shall be
bituminous cutback in accordance with clause 5.12 of this Section.
6.3.5 General Requirements for Steel Reinforcement
1 Reinforcement shall comply with any of the following standards and be in prefabricated
sheets or cages, or bars assembled on site and shall be free from oil, dirt, loose rust and
scale:
(a) (Carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete) BS 4449

(b) (Cold-reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete) BS 4482
(c) (Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete) BS 4483
(d) When deformed bars are used they shall conform to Type 2 bond classification of BS
4449.
2 Spacing of bars shall not be less than twice the maximum size of aggregate used. Laps in
longitudinal bars shall be not less than 35 times bar diameters or 450 mm which ever is
greater. In continuously reinforced concrete slabs (CRCP or CRCR) only one third of the
laps may be in any one transverse section, except in single bay width construction where half
the laps may be in any one transverse section. There shall be a minimum of 1.2 m
longitudinally between groups of transverse laps or laps in prefabricated reinforcement
sheets. Alternatively the reinforcement may be butt welded by a process approved by the
Engineer.
3 Laps in a transverse reinforcement shall be a minimum of 300 mm. Where prefabricated

reinforcement sheets are used and longitudinal and transverse laps would coincide, no lap is
required in the transverse bars within the lap of the longitudinal reinforcement. These
transverse bars may be cropped or fabricated shorter so that the requirements for cover are
ar
met.
at
4 If the reinforcement is positioned prior to concreting, it shall be fixed on approved metal
supports and retained in position at the required depth below the finished surface and
-Q
distance from the edge of the slab so as to ensure that the required cover is achieved.
Reinforcement assembled on site shall be tied, or firmly fixed, by a procedure agreed with the
Engineer, at sufficient intersections to provide sufficient rigidity to ensure that the
LL
reinforcement remains in the correct position during construction of the slab.

W
5 Alternatively, when a reinforced concrete slab (JRC, CRCP or CRCR) is constructed in two
layers, the reinforcement in the form of prefabricated sheets may be placed on or into the
s
bottom layer which shall be spread and compacted to such a level that it will support the
en
reinforcement without distortion at the required position in the slab. The sheets shall be tied
together at overlaps and after the second layer has been spread and compacted, the
reinforcement shall have the required cover.
e m
6 When a reinforced concrete slab is constructed at maximum width the transverse

Si
reinforcement in the centre of each slab width shall be a minimum of 12 mm nominal

diameter bars at 600 mm centres. This reinforcement shall be at least 600 mm longer than
one third of the width of the slab and be lapped to other transverse reinforcement bars or
sheets, or be continuous across the whole width of each slab.
6.3.6 Jointed Reinforced Concrete Slabs
1 The reinforcement shall be so placed that after compaction of the concrete, the cover below
the finished surface of the slab is 50 + 10 mm for slabs less than 200 mm thick, 60 + 10 mm
for slabs 200 mm or more but less than 270 mm thick and 70+20 mm for slabs 270 mm thick
or more.
2 The negative vertical tolerance shall not be permitted beneath road stud recesses.
3 Where traffic signal detector loops are to be installed, the minimum cover to the
reinforcement from the surface shall be 100 mm.
4 The vertical cover between any longitudinal joint groove forming strip and any reinforcement
or tie bars shall be at a minimum of 30 mm.
5 Any transverse bars shall be at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway. Any
transverse reinforcement shall terminate at 125+25 mm from the edges of the slab and
longitudinal joints, where tie bars are used.
6 No longitudinal bars shall lie within 100 mm of a longitudinal joint. The reinforcement shall
terminate 300 mm + 50 mm from any transverse joint, excluding emergency construction
joints.
6.3.7 Continuously Reinforced Concrete Slabs (CRCP or CRCR)
1 The reinforcement shall be Grade 460 deformed steel bars as detailed on the Contract
Drawings.
ar
2 The reinforcement shall consists of bars assembled on site, or of prefabricated sheets.
at
3 Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings the longitudinal bars shall be parallel to the
-Q
centre line of the road.
4 The reinforcement shall be positioned so that, after compaction of the concrete, it shall be at
the mid depth of the specified thickness of the slab + 25 mm. No longitudinal bar shall lie
LL
within 100mm of a longitudinal joint.

W
5 In reinforcement assembled on site, longitudinal bars shall be placed immediately above any
transverse bars, which shall be at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway.
s
Any transverse reinforcement shall terminate 125+25 mm from the edges of the slab and
en
longitudinal joints where tie bars are used.

m
6.3.8 General Requirements for Transverse Joints

e
1 Transverse joints shall be provided in unreinforced and jointed reinforced concrete slabs and
Si
shall be contraction, expansion or warping joints at the spacing shown on the Drawings such
that for unreinforced concrete slabs the length/width ratio shall be not greater than 2.0.
2 Joints in the surface slab and sub-base shall be staggered so that they are not coincident
vertically and are at least 1m apart.
3 Transverse joints shall be straight within the following tolerances along the intended line of
the joint, which is the straight line transverse to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway at the
position proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer, except at road junctions or
roundabouts where the positions shall be as shown on the Drawings:
(a) Deviations of the filler board or bottom crack inducer from the intended line of the
joint shall be not greater than ± 10 mm.
(b) The best fit straight line through the joint groove as constructed shall be not more
than 25 mm from the intended line of the joint.
(c) Deviations of the joint groove from the best fit straight line of the joint shall be not
greater than 10 mm.
(d) When top groove formers and bottom crack inducers are used, the joint groove
as constructed shall be located vertically above the bottom crack inducer within a
horizontal tolerance of ± 25 mm.
4 Transverse joints on each side of a longitudinal joint shall be in line with each other and of
the same type and width. The position of the joints relative to manholes and gullies shall be in
accordance with the Drawings.
5 Transverse joints shall have a sealing groove which shall be sealed in compliance with
Clause 6.3.20 of the specification.
6.3.9 Transverse Contraction Joints
1 Contraction joints shall consist of:
(a) Either a sawn joint groove, or

(b) a wet formed joint groove and a bottom crack inducer
ar
(c) dowel bars
at
(d) a sealing groove. -Q
6.3.10 Transverse Expansion Joints
1 Expansion joints shall consist of:

LL
(a) a joint filler board

W
(b) dowel bars

(c) a sealing groove.
s
en
2 The filler board shall be positioned vertically within the prefabricated joint assemblies along
the line of the joint and at such depth below the surface as will not impede the passage of the
m
finishing beams on the paving machines.

e
3 The joint filler board together with the sealing groove shall provide a complete separation of
Si
adjacent slabs and any spaces around dowel bars and between the sub-base and the filler
board shall be packed with a suitable compressible material after fixing the joint assembly.
6.3.11 Transverse Warping Joints
1 Warping joints shall consist of:
(a) Either a sawn joint groove, or

(b) a wet formed joint groove and a bottom crack inducer
(c) tie bars
(d) a sealing groove.
6.3.12 Transverse Construction Joints
1 Construction joints made at the end of a working day in unreinforced concrete slabs and
jointed reinforced concrete slabs shall be expansion joints or contraction joints. In the event
of mechanical breakdown of the concreting machinery, or at the onset of adverse weather,
emergency joints may be formed.
2 Emergency joints in unreinforced concrete slabs shall be either contraction or expansion

joints not less than 2.5 m from the preceding or succeeding joint position.
3 Emergency joints in jointed reinforced concrete slabs shall be not less than 2.5 m from the
preceding or succeeding joint position. The stop end formwork shall be sufficiently rigid to
ensure that dowel bars, tie bars or reinforcement will be held in position in compliance with
the specification, and placed in such a position that it permits the longitudinal reinforcement
to project through the joint for a distance of at least 750 mm.
4 Construction joints in continuously reinforced concrete slabs (CRCP and CRCR) in an

emergency shall not be constructed within 1.5 m of any lap in the longitudinal reinforcement
without the approval of the Engineer. The stop end formwork shall be sufficiently rigid to
ensure that the longitudinal reinforcement and the tie bars projecting through the joint are
held in the correct position.
6.3.13 General Requirements for Longitudinal Joints
ar
at
1 Longitudinal joints shall be provided in surface slabs between or at the centre of traffic lanes
within the allowable positions as shown on the Drawings, so that bay widths are not greater
-Q
than 4.2 m (or 5.0 m with limestone aggregate) for unreinforced slabs, or 6 m (or 7.6 m with
limestone aggregate) for reinforced concrete surface slabs with transverse reinforcement.
LL
2 Longitudinal joints shall be provided in CRCR between lanes or at the centre of lanes, within
a tolerance of +150 mm so that bay widths are not greater than 6 m (or 7.6 m with limestone
W
aggregate).
s
3 Joints in the surface slab, road base or sub-base shall be staggered so that they are not
en
coincident vertically and are least 300 mm apart. The positions of all longitudinal joints in any
slab shall be agreed by the Engineer prior to construction of the slab.
m
4 Wet-formed longitudinal joints shall consists of wet-formed joint grooves, bottom crack
e
inducer and tie bars except where transverse reinforcement is permitted in lieu.
Si
5 Longitudinal joints shall be constructed in the positions agreed by the Engineer within the
following tolerances:
(a) Deviations of the bottom crack inducer from the intended line of the joint parallel
to the axis of the road shall not be greater than +13 m.
(b) The joint groove shall be located vertically above the bottom crack inducers within
a horizontal tolerances of +25 mm.
(c) The best fit line along the constructed joint groove, shall be not more than 25 mm
from the intended line of the joint.
(d) Deviations of the joint groove from the best fit line of the joint shall be not greater
than 10 mm.
6 Tie bars may be replaced by continuous transverse reinforcement across the joints in
continuously reinforced concrete slabs, which are constructed in more than one lane width in
one operation, provided that the transverse reinforcement is a minimum of 12 mm diameter
bars at 600 mm centres.
6.3.14 Longitudinal Construction Joints
1 Longitudinal construction joints between separate slabs shall have tie bars with a joint
groove. Alternatively, if split forms are used, the transverse reinforcement, if 12 mm diameter
or more, may be continued across the joint for a minimum of 500 mm or 30 times the
diameter of the transverse reinforcement bars, whichever is greater.
2 A joint sealing groove is not required in construction joints in continuously reinforced concrete
road bases. Where the edge of the concrete slab is damaged it shall be made good to the
approval of the Engineer before the adjacent slab is constructed.
ar
6.3.15 Dowel Bars
at
1 Dowel bars shall be Grade 250 steel complying with BS 4449 and shall be free from oil, dirt,
-Q
loose rust and scale. They shall be straight, free of burrs and other irregularities and the
sliding ends sawn or, if approved by the Engineer, cropped cleanly with no protrusions
outside the normal diameter of the bar. For expansion joints, dowel bars shall be 25mm
LL
diameter at 300 mm spacing, 600 mm long for slabs up to 239 mm thick and 32 mm diameter
for slabs 240 mm thick or more. For contraction joints, dowels shall be 20 mm diameter at
W
300 mm spacing 400 mm long for slabs up to 239 mm thick and 25 mm diameter for slabs
240 mm thick or more.
s
en
2 Dowel bars shall be supported on cradles in prefabricated joint assemblies positioned prior to
construction of the slab. For contraction joints, as an alternative to prefabricated assemblies,
m
dowel bars may be mechanically inserted with vibration into the concrete by a method which
e
shall ensure full recompaction of the concrete around the dowel bars and the surface finished
by a diagonal finishing beam. Or a longitudinal oscillating float travelling across the slab.
Si
3 Dowel bars shall be positioned at mid-depth from the surface level of the slab ± 20 mm.
They shall be aligned parallel to the finished surface of the slab, to the centre line of the
carriageway and to each other within the following tolerances:
(a) for bars supported on cradles prior to construction of the slab and for inserted
bars in two layers construction prior to placing the top layer:
(i) All bars in a joint shall be within ± 3 mm per 300 mm length of bars.
(ii) Two thirds of the bars shall be within ± 2 mm per 300 mm length of bar.
(iii) No bar shall differ in alignment from an adjoining bar by more than 3 mm per
300 mm length of bar in either the horizontal or vertical plane.
(b) for all bars, after construction of the slab:

(i) Twice the tolerances for alignment as in (i) above.
(ii) Equally positioned about the intended line of the joint within a tolerance of ± 25
mm.
4 Cradles supporting dowel bars shall not extend across the line of the joint.
5 Dowel bars, supported on cradles in assemblies, when subjected to a load of 110N applied at
either end and in either the vertical or horizontal direction (upwards and downwards and both
directions horizontally) shall not deflect more than the following limits:
6 Two thirds of the number of bars of any assembly tested shall not deflect more than 2 mm
per 300 mm length of bar.
7 The remainder of the bars in that assembly shall not deflect more than 3 mm per 300 mm
length of bar.
8 The assembly of dowel bars and supporting cradles, including the joint filler board in the case
ar
of expansion joints shall have the following degree of rigidity when fixed in position:
at
9 For expansion joints the deflection of the top edge of the filler board shall be not
greater than 13 mm, when a load of 1.3 kN is applied perpendicular to the vertical
-Q
face of the joint filler board and distributed over a length of 600 mm by means of
a bar or timber packing at mid depth and midway between individual fixings, or
LL
300 mm from either end of any length of filler board, if a continuous fixing is used.
The residual deflection after removal of the load shall be not more than 3 mm.
W
10 The joint assembly fixings to the sub-base shall not fail under the 1.3kN load
s
applied for testing the rigidity of the assembly but shall fail before the load
en
reaches 2.6 kN.
11 The fixings for contraction joints shall not fail under a 1.3 kN load and shall fail
m
before the load reaches 2.6 kN when applied over a length of 600 mm by means
e
of a bar or timber packing placed as near to the level of the line of fixings as
Si
practicable.
12 Failure of the fixings shall be deemed to be when there is displacement of the

assemblies by more than 3 mm with any form of fixing, under the test load. The
displacement shall be measured at the nearest part of the assembly to the centre
of the bar or timber packing.
13 Dowel bars shall be covered by a thin plastic sheath over the whole length of the bar. The
sheath shall be tough, durable and of an average thickness not greater than 1.25 mm. The
sheathed bar shall comply with the following pull out test:
14 Four bars shall be taken at random from stock and without any special
preparation shall be covered by sheaths. The dowel bars which have been
sheathed shall be cast centrally into concrete specimens 150x150x450 mm,
made of the same mix proportions to be used in the pavement, but with a
maximum nominal aggregate size of 20 mm and cured in accordance with
BS 1881. At 7 days a tensile load shall be applied to achieve a movement
of the bar at least 0.25 mm. The average bond stress to achieve this movement
shall be not greater than 0.14 N/mm2.
15 For expansion joints a closely fitting cap 100 mm long consisting of waterproofed cardboard
or an approved synthetic material shall be placed over one end of each
dowel bar. An expansion space 10 mm greater than the thickness of the joint filler board shall
be formed between the end of the cap and the end of the dowel bar.
16 Tie Bars
ar
17 Tie bars in transverse or longitudinal joints shall be Grade 250 steel or Grade 460 deformed
at
steel bars complying with BS 4449, in accordance with the requirements given below and
Table 6.2. Deformed bars shall have Type 2 bond classification. Tie bars shall be free from
-Q
oil, dirt, loose rust and scale. Tie bars which are to be cranked and later straightened shall be
Grade 250.
LL
18 Tie bars projecting across a longitudinal joint shall be protected from corrosion by a flexible
polymeric corrosion resistant coating, bonded onto the previously cleaned centre section,
W
leaving between 250 mm and 300 mm of each of the bars uncoated.

s
19 Where tie bars are cranked for construction joints and later straightened the coating shall be
en
shown to be capable of being straightened through 90 degrees without cracking. The coating
shall also be able to withstand 250 hours immersion in a salt fog cabinet complying with BS
m
3900 : Part F12, without showing any visible cracking, or corrosion of the protected part of
the bar. Any damage observed on the coating after straightening shall be made good before
e
the concrete is placed.

Si
20 Tie bars in warping joints and wet-formed longitudinal joints shall be made up into rigid
assemblies with adequate supports and fixings to remain firmly in position during the
construction of the slab.
21 Alternatively, tie bars at longitudinal joints may be mechanically inserted by vibration from
above using a method which ensures recompaction of the concrete around the tie bars.
22 At longitudinal construction joints, tie bars may be adequately fixed to side forms or inserted
into the side of the slab by a method which ensures recompaction of the concrete around the
tie bars and adequate bond and which shall be approved by the Engineer.
23 Tie bars shall be positioned and remain within the middle third of the slab depth,
approximately parallel to the surface and approximately perpendicular to the line of the joint,
with the centre of each bar on the intended line of the joints within a tolerance of ± 50 mm,
and with a minimum cover of 30 mm below any top crack inducer or joint groove for slabs
200 mm thick or more, or 20 mm for slabs up to 200 mm thick.
24 At transverse construction joints in continuously reinforced concrete, tie bars shall be 1.5 m
long and of the same grade and size as the longitudinal reinforcement, and shall be fixed at
twice the normal spacing midway between the longitudinal reinforcement bars so that
750 mm ± 50 mm extends each side of the joint at the same level as the longitudinal
reinforcement and be tied to the transverse reinforcement. Where paving from a construction
joint is not resumed within 5 days, and extra longitudinal reinforcement bar at 8 m long shall
be lapped and tied to each tie bar. These extra bars may be combined with the tie bars.
Where the spacing between longitudinal reinforcement and the extra 8 m long bars is less
than 90 mm, the nominal size of aggregate shall be 20 mm for a sufficient number of
concrete batches to complete that section of pavement.
25 Where tie bars are used in longitudinal joints in continuously reinforced concrete they shall be
placed at the same level as the transverse reinforcement and tied to the longitudinal
reinforcement.
ar
Table 6.2
at
Tie Bar Details
-Q
Joints Diameter (mm) Grade of Steel Length (mm) Spacing (mm)
LL
Transverse Twice the

construction joints As for main spacing of
460 1500
W
in continuously reinforcement main

reinforced concrete reinforcement
Emergency
s
construction joints
en
in jointed reinforced
250 or 1000 600
concrete slabs 12
m
460 deformed 750 600

other than at
contraction or
e
expansion joints
Si
250 or 1000 300

Warping joints 12
Longitudinal.
All joints, except
250 or 1000 600
where transverse 12
reinforcement is
permitted in lieu
Note: The transverse reinforcement may be continued across the joint in reinforced concrete
with the approval of the Engineer if the bars are of a minimum nominal diameter of
12 mm and the bars are protected from corrosion and the cover is as required in this
Clause.
6.3.16 Joint Grooves
1 Transverse contraction or warping joint grooves shall be sawn in the hardened concrete.
2 Transverse joint grooves which are initially constructed less than the full width of the slab
shall be completed by sawing through to the edge of the slab and across longitudinal joints as
soon as any forms have been removed and before an induced crack develops at the joint.
3 Sawn transverse joint grooves shall be undertaken as soon as possible after the concrete
has hardened sufficiently to enable a sharp edged groove to be produced without disrupting
the concrete and before random cracks develop in the slab. The grooves shall be between
1/4 and 1/3 of the specified depth of the slab and of any convenient width not less than 3mm.
The sealing groove may be constructed at the same time to be sawn to the required width
later. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, expansion joint sealing grooves shall be
sawn immediately before sealing.
4 Construction Joint Grooves in Surface Slabs shall be formed by fixing a groove-former, strip
or cork seal along the top edge of the slab already constructed, before concreting the
adjacent slab. Where the edge of the concrete is damaged it shall be ground or made good
to the approval of the Engineer before fixing the groove forming strip.
ar
5 Alternatively the subsequent slab may be placed adjacent to the first and a sealing groove
sawn later in the hardened concrete to the minimum depth required in Table 6.3 or to the
at
manufacturer's instructions if greater, and to sufficient width to eliminate minor spalling of the
-Q
joint arris, up to a maximum of 25mm for longitudinal joints and 40mm for transverse joints.
The joints shall be sealed.
6.3.17 Groove Formers and Bottom Crack Inducers

LL
1 Except where joint grooves are sawn, a bottom crack inducer shall be provided at each
W
contraction, warping or longitudinal joint position.

s
2 The bottom crack inducer shall be an approved triangular or inverted Y-shaped fillet, with a
en
base width not less than the height, made of timber or rigid synthetic material. It shall be
firmly fixed to the sub-base so as to remain in position during the whole process of
m
constructing the slab.

e
3 The combined depth of groove formers and bottom crack inducers shall be between 1/4 and
Si
1/3 of the depth of the slab and the difference between the depth of the groove former and
the height of the bottom crack inducer shall not be greater than 20mm.
4 The groove former for wet formed transverse joint grooves shall be made of an approved
rigid material of a width not greater than the required width of sealing groove as in Table 6.3.
The groove former shall be smooth sides with rounded protrusions no greater than 3mm. Any
removable part of the groove former may be tapered with a maximum difference in width of
2mm in 20mm depth.
5 Groove forming sealing strips for wet formed longitudinal joints shall be of firm compressible
strips of ethylene vinyl acetate foam of a minimum density of 90kg/m3, or synthetic rubber, or
equivalent material subject to approval by the Engineer. They shall have a minimum
thickness of 5mm and shall be sufficiently rigid to remain vertical and straight in the concrete
without curving or stretching. They shall be inserted continuously along the joint.
6 For CRCP Universal Beam Anchorage Transverse Joints one side of the beam shall be
separated from the CRCP slab by an expansion joint filler board against the vertical face and
ethylene vinyl acetate foam or similar compressible material, between 5 mm and 10mm thick,
stuck under the top flange.
6.3.18 Joint Filler Board
1 Joint filler board for expansion joints and manhole and gully slab joint shall be 25mm
thickness unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, within a tolerance of ± 1.5mm.
2 It shall be self expanding cork seal or a firm compressible material or a bonded combination
of compressible and rigid materials of sufficient rigidity to resist deformation during the
passage of the concrete paving plant.
3 The depth of the joint filler board for manhole and gully slabs shall be the full depth of the
slab minus the depth of the sealing groove. In expansion joints, the filler board shall have a
ridged top as shown on the Drawings, except where a sealing groove former is permitted by
the Engineer.
4 Holes for dowel bars shall be accurately bored or punched out to form a sliding fit for the
sheathed dowel bar.
ar
6.3.19 Preparation and Sealing of Joint Grooves
at
1 All transverse joints in surface slabs, except for construction joints in CRCP shall be sealed
-Q
using one of the joint seals described. Additionally longitudinal joints which are sawn or
widened shall be sealed.
2 Joint grooves shall be prepared in accordance with BS 5212: Part 2 and in compliance with
LL
(a) through (g) below:

W
(a) that part of the groove former used to form the sealing groove or any temporary seal
shall be removed cleanly without damaging the joint arises to a minimum depth of
25 mm where compression seals are used or otherwise to such depth as will provide
s
en
an applied seal to the dimensions as will provide in Table 6.3.

(b) if joint grooves are not initially constructed to provide the minimum dimensions for the
m
joint seals as given in Table 6.3, they shall be widened by sawing. Joint grooves
formed by tapered formers need not to be widened. The sealing grooves shall be
e
cleaned out immediately after sawing using high pressure water jets, to remove all
Si
slurry from the joint, before the slurry hardens.

(c) if rough arrises develop when grooves are made they shall be ground to provide a
chamfer approximately 5mm wide. If the groove is at an angle up to 10 degrees from
the perpendicular to the surface, the overhanging edge of the sealing groove shall be
sawn or ground perpendicular. If spalling occurs or the angle of the former is greater
than 10 degrees the joint sealing groove shall be sawn wider and perpendicular to the
surface to encompass the defects up to a maximum width, including any chamfer, of
40 mm for transverse joints and 25mm for longitudinal joints. If the spalling cannot be
so eliminated then the arris shall be repaired by an approved thin bonded arris repair
using cementitious materials.
(d) for applied sealants the sides of the joint sealing groove shall be scoured by dry
abrasive blasting. This shall not be carried out before the characteristics compressive
2
strength of the concrete is expected to reach 15 N/mm . When compression seals are
used, the sides of the groove may be ground or wire brushed.
(e) for hot and cold applied sealants, compressible caulking material, debonding strip or
tape or cord compatible with the sealant, of a suitable size to fill the width of the sealing
groove shall be firmly packed or stuck in the bottom of the sealing groove to such a
depth so as to provide the correct depth of seal as described in Table 6.3 with the top
of the seal at the correct depth below the surface of the concrete.
(f) all grooves shall be cleaned of any dirt or loose material by air blasting with filtered, oil
free compressed air. The groove shall be clean and dry at the time of priming and
sealing.
(g) for applied sealants the joint grooves shall be primed with the relevant primer for the
hot or cold applied sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and with BS 5212: Part 2, except that when necessary the joint grooves may be
primed and sealed earlier than 14 days after construction, as soon as the grooves
have been grit-blasted and cleaned.
6.3.20 Sealing with Applied Sealants
ar
1 Sealing shall be carried out continuously along the full length of joint in any one rip, except for
remedial areas. When hot or cold applied sealants are used the sealant shall be applied
at
within the minimum and maximum drying times of the primer recommended by the
-Q
manufacturer. Priming and sealing with applied sealants shall not be carried out when the
naturally occurring temperature in the joint groove to be sealed is below 10 C except
between 8 C and 10 C it may be carried out when the temperature is rising.
LL
2 Hot applied sealants shall be heated in and applied from a thermostatically controlled,
W
indirectly heated dispenser with the recirculating pump. The sealant shall not be heated to a
temperature higher than the safe heating temperature nor for a period longer than the safe
heating period, both as specified by the manufacturer. The dispenser shall be cleaned out at
s
the end of each day and reheated materials shall not be used.
en
3 The components of cold-applied sealants shall be thoroughly mixed in the correct proportions
m
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions using an automatic metering and mixing
dispenser approved by the Engineer or, for hand application, using a power operated paddle
e
mixer for sufficient time to produce homogenous mix without entrapped air. As soon as
Si
possible after mixing and within the worklife of the sealant, the material shall be dispensed
into the joint, or applied using a caulking gun, to the correct level below the concrete surface.
The tack-free time shall be achieved within 3 hours, for machine dispensed material, or within
12 hours for hand applied material.
4 Test certificates shall be supplied from an approved testing laboratory stating that the sealant
complies with the relevant standard. Site testing of cold applied sealants shall be in
accordance with BS 5212: Part 2. Hot-applied sealants shall be sampled at the same rate
and checked for dimensions as in BS 5212: Part 2 and by the penetration test of the relevant
standard for the material.
Table 6.3
Dimensions of Applied Joint Seals
Type and Minimum Cold Hot Impregnated Depth of Seal

Spacing of Width (mm) Applied Applied Foam Below the
Joints (m) (mm) (mm) Compression Concrete
Strips (mm) Surface(mm)
Contraction:
15 and under 13 (Note 2) 13 15 30 5+2
Over 15 to 20 20 15 20 30 5+2
Over 20 to 25 30 20 25 40 5+2
Expansion All 30 20 25 40 7+2
Transverse 10 10 13 30 5+2
Warping
Longitudinal 10 10 13 30 0 to 5
Joints (if
ar
sealed)
Gully and 20 15 20 30 0 to 3
at
Manhole Slabs
-Q
Note: (1) The depth of seal is that part in contact with the vertical face of the joint groove.
The depth of seal below the surface shall be taken at the centre of an applied
seal relative to a short straight edge, 150mm long, placed centrally across the
LL
joint within 7 days of sealing.

W
Note: (2) For cork seals other than in construction joints, grooves shall be 20 mm wide and
50 mm deep.
6.3.21 Sealing with Compression Seals
s
en
1 When compression seals are used, the widths of the seal shall be selected in relation to the
width of the sealing groove, the bay lengths and manufacturer's recommendations so that the
m
estimated maximum width of the joint opening shall be not more than 70% of the original
e
width of the seal, the estimated maximum width being calculated on the basis of a movement
Si
of 4mm per 10m run of slab.
2 The maximum calculated width of sealing groove shall be 30mm.
3 The depth of groove shall be such that the contact face of the seal with the side of the groove
shall be not less than 20mm and that the top of the seal shall be a minimum of 3mm below
the surface of the concrete.
4 Compression seals shall be inserted into the grooves without prior extension or rotation and,
where recommended by the manufacturer, with a lubricant adhesive which is compatible with
the seal and the concrete. The adhesive shall be applied to both sides of the sealing groove
or the seal, or to both. The seal shall be positioned with its axis perpendicular to the concrete
surface. Excess adhesive on top of the seal shall be removed to prevent adhesion of the top
faces of the seal under compression.
5 Except when compression seals are used in longitudinal joints the transverse joint seal shall
be continuous across the slab and the longitudinal joint groove forming strips shall be cut to
the required depth after the concrete has hardened for the transverse seal to be inserted.
6 If compression seals are used in longitudinal joints where the grooves have been sawn after
construction of the slab they shall be continuous across transverse joints, with the transverse
seals butted and fixed to the longitudinal seals with adhesive.
6.3.22 Joint Seals
1 Joint seals shall consist of hot or cold applied sealants or compression seals or self
expanding cork seals.
2 Hot-applied sealants shall comply with ASTM Standard D3406, or D7116 (for fuel-resistant
sealant).
3 For joints between concrete surface slabs and bituminous surfacing, polymer modified
bitumen sealing strips shall be used and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Hot-applied sealants complying with BS 2499 & BS EN 14188 may be used for
such joints and in joints in asphalt kerbs laid on concrete pavements.
ar
4 Cold applied sealants shall be Type N complying with BS 5212: Part 1 except that Type F
shall be used for lay-bys and hardstandings.
at
5
-Q
For joints in kerbs and joints other than in pavements, seals may be any of the pavement
sealants if they have the suitable characteristics for the application. Also, gunning grade cold
applied plasticised bituminous rubber sealant or gunning grades of two part polysulphid-
based sealants complying with BS EN ISO 11600 may be used.
LL
6 Alternatively, polyurethane-based sealing compounds may be used provided their

W
performance is not inferior to BS EN ISO 11600 material.

s
7 Compression seals shall be pre-compressed neoprene impregnated expanding foam sealing

en
strip, or rubber seals made of polychloroprene elastomers complying with BS 2752 and
conforming to the requirements of ASTM Standard D2628-91.
m
8 Compression seals shall be shaped so that they will remain compressed at all times and
e
shall have a minimum of 20mm contact face with the sides of the sealing groove. If lubricant
Si
adhesive is used, it shall be compatible with the seal and the concrete and shall be resistant
to abrasion, oxidisation, fuels and salt.
9 Self Expanding Cork seals may be used in longitudinal joints, joints for manhole and gully
slabs and for transverse joints in short lengths of individual slabs or for replaced slabs.
6.3.23 Joints at Manhole and Gully Slabs
1 Manhole covers, gullies and their frames shall be isolated from the pavement slabs and be
contained in separate small slabs, which shall be larger than the exterior of the manhole and
gully shafts, including any concrete surround less than 150mm below the underside of the
sub-base layer. The joint around the manhole or gully slab shall be vertical and incorporate
joint filler board but without dowel bars and tie bars.
2 Gully slabs in unreinforced concrete slabs shall be adjacent to or straddle a transverse joint,
extending the gully slab as necessary to a maximum of 2m. Where this is impractical, an
extra tied warping joint shall be provided adjacent to or within the gully slab and at least 2m
from the next transverse joint. If the edge of an isolator slab is within 1m of any longitudinal
joint the isolator slab shall be extended to that joint.
3 Manhole slabs in unreinforced concrete slabs shall be adjacent to or straddle transverse or

longitudinal joints. If the manhole is within the middle third of the bay length a warping joint
shall be constructed on one side of the manhole slab across the whole width of the bay to the
nearest longitudinal joint.
4 Reinforcement as shown on the Drawings shall be placed in the main concrete slabs in the
corners between the manhole and gully slab and the transverse or longitudinal joints. Extra
reinforcement as described in the Contract shall be placed in reinforced concrete slabs
around the manhole or gully slabs.
5 Manhole and gully slabs shall have oblique corners, minimum 200mm long, at approximately
45 degrees to the axis of the pavement at all corners which are not adjacent to a transverse
or longitudinal joint in the main slab.
6 Reinforcement as shown on the Drawings shall be placed in the gully or manhole slab and
concrete grade C40 shall be placed by hand in the space between the main slab and the
manhole frame. The concrete shall be fully compacted and finished.
ar
7 A sealing groove shall be made directly above the joint filler board and sealed.
at
6.3.24 Inspection of Dowel Bars
-Q
1 The position and alignment of dowel bars at contraction and expansion joints shall be
checked by measurement relative to the side form or guide wires.
LL
2 When the slab has been constructed, the position and alignment of dowel bars and any filler
W
board shall be measured after carefully exposing them across the whole width of the slab.
When the joint is an expansion joint the top of the filler board shall first be exposed
s
sufficiently in the plastic concrete to permit measurement of any lateral or vertical

en
displacement of the board. During the course of normal working these measurements shall
be carried out at a rate of one joint per 1500m length of slab or one per 5 working days
m
whichever occurs the sooner. For small areas the rate shall be decided by the Engineer.
e
3 If the position or alignment of the bars in a single joint in the slab is unsatisfactory then the
Si
next two joints shall be inspected. If only one joint of the three is defective, the rate of
checking shall be increased to one joint per day until the Engineer is satisfied that
compliance is being achieved. In the event of non-compliance in two or more successive
joints, the Contractor shall revert to the construction of trial lengths and make any necessary
alterations to the concrete mix, paving plant or methods until the dowel bar position and
alignment is satisfactory.
4 After the dowel bars have been examined, the remainder of the concrete shall be removed
500mm on each side of the line of the joint, and reinstated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Alternatively if the dowels are examined in the penultimate joint of a day's work that joint shall
be made a construction joint for the next day's work and the remainder of the concrete in the
last slab may be discarded.
6.3.25 Side Forms, Rails and Guide Wires
1 All side forms and rails shall be made of steel and be sufficiently robust and rigid to support
the weight and pressure caused by the paving equipment. Side forms for use with wheeled
paving machines shall incorporate metal rails firmly fixed at a constant height below the top
of the forms.
2 The forms shall be secured by using not less than three pins for each 3m length having one
pin fixed at each side of every joint. Forms shall be tightly joined together by a locked joint,
free from play or movement in any direction. Forms shall be cleaned and oiled immediately
before each use. The rails or running surface shall be kept clean in front of the wheels of any
paving machine. The forms shall be straight within a tolerance of 3mm in 3m.
3 The forms shall be bedded on low moisture content cement mortar or concrete grade C7.5
and set to the pavement surface level as shown on the Drawings within a tolerance of +3mm.
The bedding shall not extend under the slab. There shall be no vertical step between the end
of adjacent forms greater than 3mm. The horizontal alignment for forms shall be to the
required alignment of the pavement edge as shown on the Drawings within a tolerance of +
10mm. The mortar or concrete bedding shall be broken out after use.
4 Side forms shall not be removed earlier than 6 hours after the completion of the construction
of the slab. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to the concrete and any projecting tie
bars during the removal of the forms. If the removal of forms results in any damage to the
concrete the period of 6 hours shall be increased to that which is necessary to avoid further
ar
damage and the Contractor shall make good the damaged areas.
at
5 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, a guide wire shall be provided along each side of
-Q
the slab to be constructed by slip form paving plant. Each guide wire shall be at a constant
height above and parallel to the required edges of the slab as shown on the Drawings, within
a vertical tolerance of + 3mm. Additionally one of the wires shall be at a constant horizontal
distance from the required edge of the pavement as shown in the drawings within a lateral
LL
tolerance of + 10mm.
W
6.3.26 Delivery, Storage and Batching of Concreting Materials

s
1 Aggregate for roadworks shall be delivered to and stored on the Site in one of the following
en
ways:
(a) in separate nominal single sizes of coarse aggregate and fine aggregate.
m
(b) as graded coarse aggregate of appropriate size and fine aggregate.

e
Si
(c) as all-in aggregate for grades C20 to below.
2 If the Contractor proposes to blend aggregate off the site from two separate sources, he shall
obtain the Engineer's approval for the blending process, and for the arrangements for
inspection during the course of the work.
3 Aggregate brought on to the Site shall be kept free from contact with deleterious matter. Fine
aggregate nominally below 5 mm sieve size shall have been deposited at the site for at least
8 hours before use.
4 Batching plant and storage for aggregate shall comply with the following requirements as
appropriate to the method of delivery:
(a) if separate gradings of aggregate are stockpiled, separate accommodation shall

be provided for each nominal size of coarse aggregate or blend of fine
aggregate. The base for stockpiles shall be suitably surfaced to prevent
contamination of the aggregate. Drainage of the stockpile bases shall be
provided.
(b) aggregate shall be measured by mass and provision shall be made for batching
each nominal size or blend of aggregate separately, to the tolerances specified in
BS EN 206 & BS 8500.
(c) all-in aggregate shall be delivered and stockpiled in such a manner and to a
height that avoids segregation.
6.3.27 Mixing Concrete
1 Mixing concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 5 Part 7 except as amended
herein.
2 Concrete shall be mixed on site in a stationary batch type mixer in compliance with BS EN
206 & BS 8500 unless with the approval of the Engineer, ready mixed concrete is supplied
from an approved source.
3 The drums or blades of all mixers shall be operated at the speed using for testing, in
accordance with BS 3963 for the mix proportions required, within a tolerance of ± 1 revolution
ar
per minute. The mixing blades of a pan mixer shall be maintained within the tolerances
at
specified by the manufacturers of the mixer and the blades shall be replaced when it is no
longer possible to maintain the tolerances by adjustment. All drums or pans which have
-Q
been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh
concrete is mixed in them.
LL
4 The rated output of the batching and mixing plant shall exceed by at least a third the amount
of concrete that is required at a constant rate to enable the paving train to move forward
continuously, at the planned rate of progress.
W
6.3.28 Transport and Delivery

s
en
1 Transportation, delivery of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 5 Part 8.

m
6.3.29 General Requirements for Construction by Machine

e
1 The concrete slab shall be constructed in a continuous process by either slip-form or by fixed
Si
form paving plant or by small paving machines or hand guided methods.
2 The slab may be constructed in either one or two layers. In two layer construction the
thickness of the top layer shall be not less than 50mm or twice the maximum size of the
coarse aggregate whichever is greater, and shall be at least 15 mm thick than the depth of
the groove former, if used.
3 While the concrete is still plastic its surface shall be brush-textured and the surface and
edges shall be cured.
4 The spreading, compacting and finishing of the concrete shall be carried out as rapidly as
possible and the paving operation shall be so arranged as to ensure that the time between
the mixing of the first batch of concrete in any transverse section of the slab and the
application of the sprayed curing membrane to the surface of that section shall not exceed
those given in Table 6.4.
5 Each bay in jointed concrete surface slabs shall be consecutively numbered near the verge
next to a transverse joint while the concrete is plastic. In continuously reinforced concrete
pavement the slab shall be marked with the chainage at intervals not greater than 50m apart.
6.3.30 Construction by Fixed Form Paving Machines
1 A fixed form paving train shall consist of separate, powered machines which spread compact
and finish the concrete in a continuous operation.
2 Concrete shall be discharged without segregation into a hopper spreader which is equipped
with the means of controlling its rate of deposition onto the sub-base or onto the lower layer.
The concrete shall be spread in each layer without segregation and to a uniform
uncompacted density over the whole area of the slab.
3 The deposited concrete shall be struck off to the necessary level by the underside of the
hopper as it is traversed across the spreading machine.
4 The machine shall be capable of being rapidly adjusted for changes in average and
differential surcharge necessitated by changes in slab thickness or crossfall. When the slab
is constructed in two layers, the spreading of the concrete in the top layer shall follow the
completion of the bottom layer within the times given in Table 6.4.
ar
5 Prior to being compacted, the surface level of each loose spread layer shall be adjusted to
at
the correct surcharge by means of rotating strike-off blades or a screw device.
-Q
6 The concrete shall be compacted by vibration or by a combination of vibration and
mechanical tamping throughout the full depth of the slab. Poker vibrators shall be used in
each layer adjacent to the side forms and the edge of a previously constructed slab.
LL
7 The initial regulation and finish to the surface of the slab shall be effected by means of a
W
beam oscillating transversely or obliquely to the longitudinal axis of the pavement. This beam
shall be readily adjustable for both height and tilt.
s
en
8 When grooves are wet-formed the concrete shall be recompacted around the former by a
hand held vibrating plate compactor drawn along or on each side of the joint, prior to
regulation of the surface by the diagonal finishing beam. Or recompacted and finished if the
m
former is inserted after the finishing beam.

e
Si
9 The regulation and finishing of the surface of the slab shall be carried out by a machine which
incorporates twin oblique oscillating finishing beams which shall be readily adjustable for both
height and tilt. The beams shall weigh not less than 170 kg/m, be of rectangular section and
span the full width of the slab. The leading beam shall be vibrated. The beams shall be
supported on a carriage, the level of which shall be controlled by the average level of not less
than four points evenly spaced over at least 3.5m of the supporting rail, beam or slab, on
each side of the slab that is being constructed. After the final regulation and before texture is
applied any excess concrete on top of the groove former shall be removed.
10 When a concrete slab is constructed in more than one width, flanged wheels on the paving
machines shall not be run directly on the surface of any completed part of the slab. The
second or subsequent slabs shall be constructed either by supporting machines with flanged
wheels on flat bottom section rails weighing not less than 15 kg/m laid on the surface of the
completed slab, or by replacing the flanged wheels on that side of the machines by smooth
flangeless wheel.. Flangeless wheels or rails shall be positioned sufficiently far from the
edge of the slab to avoid damage to that edge.
6.3.31 Construction by Slip-Form Paving Machine
1 A slip-form paving train shall consist of powered machines which spread, compact and finish
the concrete in a continuous operation.
2 The slip-form paving machine shall compact the concrete by internal vibration and shape it
between sliding side forms or over fixed side forms by means of either a conforming plate or
by vibrating and oscillating finishing beams.
3 The concrete shall be deposited without segregation in front of the slip-form paver across its
whole width and to a height which at all times is in excess of the required surcharge. The
deposited concrete shall be struck off to the necessary average and differential surcharge by
means of a strike-off plate or a screw auger device extending across the whole width of the
slab. The equipment for striking off the concrete shall be capable of being rapidly adjusted
for changes of the average and differential surcharge necessitated by changes in slab
thickness or crossfall.
ar
4 The level of the conforming plate and finishing beams shall be controlled automatically from
the guide wires by sensors attached at the four corners of the slip form paving machine. The
at
alignment of the paver shall be controlled automatically from the guide wire by at least one
-Q
sensor attached to the paver. The alignment and level of ancillary machines for finishing,
texturing and curing of the concrete shall be automatically controlled relative to the guide wire
or to the surface and edge of the slab.
LL
5 Slip-form paving machines shall have a vibration of variable output, with a maximum energy
output of not less than 2.5 kW per metre width of slab per 300mm depth of slab for a laying
W
speed of up to 1.5m per minute or pro rata for higher speeds. The machines shall be of
sufficient mass to provide adequate reaction on the traction units to maintain forward
s
movements during the placing of concrete in all situations.

en
6 Where grooves are wet-formed the concrete shall be compacted around the former by a
m
separate vibrating plate compactor with twin plates. The groove former shall be compacted to
the correct level by a vibrating pan which may be included with the transverse joint finishing
e
beam. In addition a hand held vibrating float, at least 1m wide, shall be drawn over the
Si
surface along the joint. Alternatively the surface shall be regulated with a longitudinal
oscillating float travelling across the slab. Any excess concrete on top of the groove former
shall be removed before the surface is textured.
7 Where a concrete surface slab is constructed in more than one width or where the edge
needs to be matched for level to another section of surface slab, and the surface levels at the
edges are not achieved, paving shall be carried out over separate fixed side forms to support
the edge to the required levels.
6.3.32 Construction by Small Paving Machines or Hand Guided Methods
1 As an alternative to fixed form or slip-form paving trains, the concrete slab may be
constructed using parts of trains, small paving machines, truss type finishing beams or hand
guided methods. Hand tamping beams may only be used for short lengths or infill bays or
tapers. Reinforcement, dowel bars and tie bars shall be supported in position, except where
two layer construction is used and reinforcement is placed on the bottom layer in a method of
construction approved by the Engineer.
2 The concrete shall be spread uniformly without segregation or varying degrees of

precompaction, by conveyor, chute, blade or auger. The concrete shall be struck off by a
screed or auger so that the average and differential surcharge is sufficient for the surface of
the slab to be at the correct levels after compaction of the concrete.
3 The concrete shall be compacted by vibrating finishing beams across the slab and with
vibrating pokers adjacent to the side forms or the edge of a previously constructed slab. In
addition, internal poker vibration shall be used for slabs thicker than 200mm and may be
used for lesser thicknesses. When used, the pokers shall be at points not more than 500mm
apart over the whole area of the slab, or drawn continuously across the slab in front of the
finishing beams.
4 The finishing beams shall be metal with a contact face at least 50mm wide. They shall be
rigid or supported by a frame or truss without sag across the width of slab being paved. The
beams shall be supported on rails or forms or an adjacent slab and shall be moved forward
at a steady speed of 0.5m to 2m per minute whilst vibrating, to compact the concrete and to
produce a smooth surface finished to the correct crossfalls, crowns and levels relative to the
ar
top of the forms or adjacent slab.
at
5 Any irregularities at wet-formed joint grooves shall be rectified by means of a vibrating float at
-Q
least 1.0 m wide drawn along the line of the joint. The whole area of the slab shall be
regulated by two passes of a scraping straight edge not less than 1.8m wide or by a further
application of a twin vibrating finishing beam. All slabs shall be checked for level using a
straight edge at least 4m long. Any excess concrete on top of the groove former shall be
LL
removed before the surface is textured.

W
6 The surface shall be brush textured.

s
7 The surface shall be cured within the time to completion given in Table 6.4
en
Table 6.4
m
Maximum Working Times

e
Si
Reinforced Concrete Slabs

All other Concrete Slabs
Temperature of Consumed in Two layers
concrete at discharge
Mixing first Mixing first
from the delivery between
layer to between layer to
vehicle layers in 2
finishing layers finishing
layer work
concrete concrete
Not more than 25 °C 3 hours 1/2 hour 3 hours 1 1/2 hours
Exceeding 25 °C 2 hours 1/2 hour 2 hours 1 hour
unacceptable
unacceptable
Exceeding 30 °C for paving
for paving
6.3.33 Surface Textures
1 After the final regulation of the surface of the slab and before the application of the curing
membrane, the surface of concrete slabs to be used as running surfaces shall be brush
textured in a direction at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway.
2 The texture shall be applied evenly across the slab in one direction by a brush not less than
450 mm wide. The texture shall be uniform both along and across the slab.
3 Curing
4 Immediately after the surface treatment, the surface and exposed edges of surface slabs
shall be cured for a minimum period of 7 days (unless the Engineer agrees to a shorter
period). This will be by the application of an approved resin based aluminised curing
compound, or polythene sheeting or an approved sprayed plastic film which hardens into a
peelable plastic sheet. It shall be removed before road marking and opening to traffic.
ar
5 Resin based aluminised curing compound shall contain sufficient flake aluminium in finely
at
divided dispersion to produce a complete coverage of the sprayed surface with a metallic
finish. The compound shall become stable and impervious to evaporation of water from the
-Q
concrete surface within 560 minutes of application and shall have an efficiency index of 90%
when tested as described in BS 7542.
LL
6 The curing compound shall not react chemically with the concrete to be cured and shall not
crack, peel or disintegrate within three weeks after application.
W
7 Prior to application, the contents of any containers shall be thoroughly agitated. The curing
compound shall be mechanically applied using a fine spray onto the surface at a rate of at
s
least 0.221L/m2. For the sides of slip-formed slabs or when the side forms are removed
en
within 24 hours and for small areas where mechanical application cannot be used, the
compound shall be sprayed by hand lance at a rate of at least 0.271/m2. The rate of spread
m
shall be checked during construction of each trial length and subsequently whenever required
by the Engineer.
e
Si
8 The mechanical sprayer shall incorporate an efficient mechanical device for continuous
agitation and mixing of the compound in its container during spraying.
9 Continuously reinforced concrete road bases shall also be cured. Wet lean concrete road
bases and sub-bases shall also be cured.
10 REQUIREMENTS FOR WET LEAN CONCRETE
11 Materials and Mix Designs
12 The constituent materials and the grades of concrete for wet lean mix shall comply with the
requirements of Section 5: Part 16.
13 Placing
14 Wet lean concrete shall be spread uniformly without segregation and without varying degrees
of pre-compaction.
15 The concrete shall be struck off to a level so that the surcharge is sufficient to ensure that
after compaction the surface is at the required level.
16 Compaction
17 The spread wet lean concrete shall be compacted using internal or external vibration, or
combination of both to meet the required density.
18 Compaction and finishing to level shall be completed within the times given in Table 6.4.
19 Joints
20 At transverse and longitudinal construction joints between two separately constructed slabs,
the previously laid slab end or edge shall present a vertical face before construction of
subsequent slabs.
21 Longitudinal joints in wet lean concrete shall be staggered by at least 300mm from the
ar
position of longitudinal joints in any superimposed concrete slab, and by 1m for transverse
joints.
at
6.3.34 Strength
-Q
1 From each sample, three cubes of the appropriate size shall be made, cured and tested in
compliance with BS 1881.
LL
2 One of each group shall be tested at 7 days and the other two at 28 days. The cubes shall
W
be assessed for compliance on groups of four 28-day test results in accordance with BS EN
206 & BS 8500 for compliance with the grade required.
s
3 If the average value of any four consecutive results of tests at 7 days falls below the required
en
values the cement content of the mix shall be increased by an amount agreed with the
Engineer which shall be maintained until the corresponding 28-day test results have been
m
assessed.
e
Si
6.3.35 Trial Mixes
1 Trial mixes complying with the requirements for pavement quality concrete shall be required
for designed mixes for Grade C15 and above, unless recent data relating to the proposed
mix is approved by the Engineer.
6.3.36 Trial Length
1 At least 10 days before the start of the main wet lean concrete works a trial length of at least
400 m2 for mechanised construction and 30m for hand guided methods shall be constructed.
2 The trial length shall be laid to assess the suitability of the proposed material, plant,
equipment and construction methods to meet the requirements of the Specification.
3 The main construction in the permanent works shall not start until the trial length has been
4 If any trial length does not conform to the Specification another trial length shall be
constructed. Trial lengths not complying with the Specification shall be removed unless they
can be rectified to comply with the Specification to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5 After approval has been given, the material plant, equipment and construction methods shall
not be changed without the approval of the Engineer.
6 Any proposed changes shall entitle the Engineer to require the Contractor to lay a further trial
length to assess the suitability of the proposed changes.
6.3.37 Surface Finish
1 The surface of the wet lean concrete after compaction and finishing and before overlaying
shall be free from ridges, loose material, pot holes, ruts or other defects.
2 The surface texture shall comply with the sub-Clause for pavement quality concrete, Section
5: Part 16.
ar
6.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR CEMENT BOUND MATERIALS
at
6.4.1 General Requirements for Cement Bound Materials
-Q
1 Cement bound materials shall be made and constructed as described in the following
clauses.
LL
2 Cement bound materials shall be tested in accordance with this specification for the
W
requirements of Table 6.5

s
3 Cement water and aggregates shall comply with the requirements of the Section 5: Part 16.
en
4 Cement for use in all cement bound materials and aggregates for use in CBM3 and CBM4
shall be delivered and stored in compliance with the requirements of Section 5: Part 16.
m
Table 6.5
e
Cement Bound Materials Field Requirements

Si
Method of Moisture Minimum

Category Mixing Plant
Batching Content Compaction
mix in place or
CBM 1 volume or mass NOTE 1 NOTE 2
mix in the plant
mix in place or
mix in the plant
CBM 3 mix in the plant mass NOTE 1 NOTE 2
mix in place or
mix in the plant
NOTE 1 to suit the requirements for strength surface, level regularity and finish
NOTE 2 95% of cube strength
Table 6.6
Cement Bound Materials Specimen Requirements
Minimum 7 days Cube

Strength
Compressive Strength
Category Curing
Testing Average Individual
(Note1) (Note2)
(MPa) (MPa)
BS 1924 Part 2 1990

CBM 1 BS 1924 Part 2 1990 4.5 2.5
or BS 1881Part 116
BS 1924 Part 2 1990

CBM 2 BS 1924 Part 2 1990 7.0 4.5
or BS 1881 Part 116
ar
CBM 3 BS 1881 Part 111 BS 1881 Part 116 10.0 6.5
at
CBM 4 BS 1881 Part 116
-Q 15.0 10.0
NOTE 1 The average strength of 5 cubes shall not be less than the stated figure
LL
NOTE 2 The strength of any individual cube shall not be less than the stated figure
6.4.2 Batching and Mixing
W
1 Batching and mixing shall be carried out in the appropriate manner described in Table 6.5.
s
en
2 Where the mix-in plant method is used and materials are batched by mass, the materials
shall be batched and mixed in compliance with BS EN 206 & BS 8500. Where continuous
m
mixers are used and materials are batched by mass, the continuous mixers shall comply and
tested in accordance with BS 3963.
e
Si
6.4.3 Transporting
1 Plant-mixed cement bound material shall when mixed be removed at once from the mixer,
transported directly to the point where it is to be laid and protected from the weather both
during transit from the mixer to the laying site and whilst awaiting tipping.
6.4.4 Laying
1 All cement bound material shall be placed and spread evenly in such manner as to prevent
segregation and drying.
2 Spreading shall be undertaken either concurrently with placing or without delay.
3 Road base cement bound material shall be spread using a paving machine or a spreader box
approved by the Engineer and operated with a mechanism which levels off the cement bound
material to an even depth.
4 Cement bound material shall be spread in one layer so that after compaction the total
thickness is as specified.
5 At longitudinal or transverse construction joints, unless vertical forms are used, the edge of
compacted cement bound material shall be cut back to a vertical face where the correct
thickness of properly compacted cement bound material has been obtained.
6 In the case of cement bound sub bases under a concrete surface slab or continuously
reinforced concrete road base, longitudinal construction joints in the sub-base shall be
staggered by at least 300mm from the position of the longitudinal joints in the concrete
surface slab or continuously reinforced concrete road base, and by 1m for transverse joints.
6.4.5 Compacting
1 Compaction shall be carried out immediately after the cement bound material has been
spread and in such a manner as to prevent segregation.
2 Special care shall be taken to obtain full compaction in the vicinity of both longitudinal and
transverse construction joints.
ar
3 Compaction shall be carried out in compliance with Table 6.5 and be completed within
2 hours of the addition of the cement. The 2 hours may be varied at the discretion of the
at
Engineer if the preliminary trial indicates that this is necessary or appropriate. After
-Q
compaction has been completed, compacting equipment shall not bear on cement bound
material for the duration of the curing period.
LL
4 The surface of any layer of cement bound material shall on completion of compaction and
immediately before overlaying, be well closed, free from movement under compaction plant
and from ridges, cracks, loose material, pot holes, ruts or other defects. All loose, segregated
W
or otherwise defective areas shall be removed to the full thickness of the layer and new
cement bound material laid and compacted.
s
en
6.4.6 Curing
m
1 Immediately on completion of compaction, the surface of concrete or wet lean concrete or

cement bound road bases and sub-bases shall be cured for a minimum period of 7 days
e
(unless the Engineer agrees to a shorter period) by one of the following methods:
Si
2 Covering with an impermeable sheeting with joints overlapping at least 300 mm and set to
prohibit egress of moisture. The sheeting shall be removed at the end of the curing period.
3 Bituminous spraying which shall only be applied when there is no visible water. When the
cement bound material is likely to be exposed to high temperatures and solar radiation, the
bituminous spray shall be blinded with light coloured material.
4 Spraying with a curing compound.
5 Spraying with an approved plastic film which when hardened shall be removed before
applying any other pavement layer.
6 Whichever method is used, immediately prior to overlaying with any bituminous layer in
cationic bituminous tack coat shall be applied at a rate between 0.351/m2 to 0.551/m2.
6.4.7 Preliminary Trial
1 At least 10 days before the start of the main cement bound material works a trial area of at
least 400 m2 shall be laid to asses the suitability of the proposed materials, mix proportions,
mixing, laying, compaction plant and construction procedures.
2 When applicable the area shall include one longitudinal and one transverse construction joint.
The location and area of the trial shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3 The rate of testing for the trial area shall not be less than that required in this section of the
specification.
4 The trial area will only be accepted for main construction in the Permanent Works if it
complies with the Specification.
5 The main construction in the Permanent Works shall not start until the trial has been
ar
6 After approval has been given, the materials, mix proportions, mixing, laying compaction
at
plant and construction procedures shall not be changed without the approval of the Engineer
-Q
who may require the Contractor to lay a further trial area to assess the suitability of the
proposed changes.
LL
6.4.8 Cement Bound Material Category 1 (CBM1)
1 CBM1 shall be made from material which has a grading finer than the limits of Table 6.7
W
2 In addition to the requirements of Table 6.6 the average compressive strength determined
s
after immersion in water of five test specimens of CBM1 shall not be less than 80% of the
en
average compressive strength of five control specimens when subjected to the test
procedure described in BS 1924: Part 2: 1990, clause 4.3.
m
3 After the 7 days immersion period the specimens shall not show any signs of cracking or
e
swelling.
Si
Table 6.7
Material for CBM1 - Limit of Grading
BS Sieve Size (mm) Percentage by Mass Passing
50 100
37.5 95
20 45
10 35
5 25
0.600 8
0.300 5
0.075 0
NOTE: The particle size distribution shall be determined by the washing and sieving
method of BS812:
1 CMB2 shall be made from gravel sand, a washed or processed granular material, crushed
rock, all in aggregate, blastfurnace slag or any combination of these. The material shall fall
within the grading limits of Table 6.8.
2 The material shall have 10 % fines value of 50 kN or more when tested in accordance with
BS 812 with samples in a soaked condition.
3 In addition to the requirements of Table 6.6 the average compressive strength determined
after immersion in water of five test specimens of CBM2 shall not be less than 80% of the
average compressive strength of five control specimens when subjected to the test
procedure described in BS 1924: Part 2: 1990, clause 4.3. After the 7 days immersion period
the specimen shall not show any signs of cracking or swelling.
Table 6.8
ar
Material For CBM2 - Range Of Grading
at
BS Sieve Size Percentage by Mass Passing
-Q
50 100
37.5
LL
95-100
20 45-100
W
10 35-100
5 25-100
s
2.36 15-90
en
0.600 8-65
0.300 5-40
m
0.075 0-10
e
Si
method of BS 812.
1 CBM3 shall be made from aggregates as in the sub-Clause 6.5.9.
2 The grading of the aggregate shall be within the limits of Table 6.9.
1 CBM4 shall be made from aggregates as in sub-Clause 6.5.9
2 The grading of the aggregate shall be within the limits of Table 6.9.
Table 6.9
Material for CBM3 and CBM4 - Range of Grading
Percentage by Mass Passing.

BS Sieve Size (mm)
Nominal Maximum Size
40 mm 20 mm
50 100 -
37.5 95-100 100
20 45-80 95-100
5 25-5- 35-55
0.600 8-30 10-35
0.150 0.8* 0-8*
0.075 0.5 0-5
ar
method of BS 812.
at
*0-10 for crushed rock fines -Q
6.4.12 Testing of Cement Bound Materials
1 Samples shall be provided in accordance with BS 1924: Part 1: 1990 Clause 5 from the laid
LL
cement bound material before compaction. One group of five samples shall be provided from
five locations equally spaced along a diagonal that bisects each 800 mm2 or part thereof laid
W
each day. The number of groups may be increased if required by the Engineer.
2 One 150 mm cube shall be made from each sample taken in accordance with sub-clause 1
s
of this clause. The cubes shall be made in accordance with BS 1924: Part 2: 1990, clause
en
4.2.5 without further mixing of the material and within 2 hours of the addition of the cement.
Cubes shall be cured and tested in accordance with Table 6.6.
m
3 To determine the wet density of cubes the mould shall be weighed prior to making the cube
e
and the mass recorded. Immediately after completion of compaction, the cube and mould
Si
shall be weighed and the mass recorded. These masses together with the nominal volume of
the mould shall be used to derive the wet density of the cube.
4 The in-situ wet density of a layer of cement bound material shall be taken as the average of
the wet densities at five locations equally spaced along a diagonal that bisects each 800 m2
or part thereof laid each day. The wet density at each location shall be the average of two
readings obtained using a nuclear density gauge complying with BS 1377: Part 9. The two
readings shall be taken at 180 degrees to each other using the same source rod hole. The
source rod shall be lowered to within 25mm of the bottom surface of the layer. Readings
shall be taken within two hours of completing final compaction.
6.4.13 Special Requirements for Cement Bound Materials
1 Where specified in the contract documents or on the project drawings cement bound road
base in flexible composite construction shall be laid in individual widths with longitudinal
construction joints in locations as detailed below:
(a) Single All purpose. One longitudinal construction joint at the centre lane line marking.
(b) Dual 2 lane All-purpose. One longitudinal construction joint at the lane line marking.
(c) Dual 3 lane All-purpose. Two longitudinal construction joints, one at each of the lane
line markings.
(d) Dual 2 lane Motorway. Two longitudinal construction joints, one at the lane line
marking and one at the edge line marking between hard shoulder and left hand
lane.
(e) Dual 3 lane Motorway. Three longitudinal construction joints, one at each lane line
marking and one at the edge line markings between hard shoulder and left hand lane.
(f) Dual 4 lane Motorway. Four longitudinal construction joints, one at each lane line
marking and one at the edge line marking between hard shoulder and left hand lane.
2 Longitudinal constructions joints shall not be more than 150 mm from the centre of the centre
line, lane line, or edge line marking, with individual widths not exceeding 4.75 m.
3 Longitudinal construction joints shall not be located within the left hand lane or dual
ar
carriageways. At tapers and other changes in section the construction joint layout shall be
at
agreed with the Engineer, and where necessary joints shall also be permitted within 150 mm
of the mid-point of the traffic lane.
-Q
END OF PART
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 07: Asphalt Plants
7 ASPHALT PLANTS ................................................................................................. 3

7.1 ASPHALT BINDERS DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE .............................. 3
7.2 ASPHALT PLANTS PRODUCTION CONTROL ...................................................... 4
7.2.1 Factory Production Control (FPC) 4
7.2.2 Factory Production Control Quality Plan 4
7.2.3 Organizational Structure 5
7.2.4 Internal Audits 5
7.2.5 Management Review 5
7.2.6 Document Control 5
7.3 PRODUCT REALISATION ...................................................................................... 6
7.3.1 Constituent Materials 6
7.3.2 Customer Supplied Product 6
7.3.3 Process Control 6
ar
7.3.4 Handling, Storage and Delivery 7
7.3.5 Plant Calibration and Maintenance 7
at
7.3.6 Plant Quality Control Laboratory -Q 8
7.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING .................................................................................. 9
7.4.1 General 9
7.4.2 Incoming constituent materials 9
LL
7.4.3 Finished Asphalt Mixture 9

7.5 NON-CONFORMITY ............................................................................................. 10
W
7.5.1 General 10
7.5.2 Non-conformity of Material or Asphalt Mixtures 10
s
7.6 INSPECTION, MEASURING AND TEST EQUIPMENT ......................................... 11

en
7.7 PLANT GENERALLY ............................................................................................. 11

m
7.8 ASPHALT PLANT .................................................................................................. 12

e
7.8.1 General 12
Si
7.8.2 Automatic Operation 12

7.8.3 Cold Bins System 12
7.8.4 Drier 13
7.8.5 Dust Collector 13
7.8.6 Screens 13
7.8.7 Hot Bins 13
7.8.8 Asphalt Binder Storage 14
7.8.9 Thermometric Equipment 14
7.8.10 Control of Mixing Time 14
7.8.11 Pugmill 14
7.8.12 Temporary Storage of Mix 15
7.8.13 Safety Requirements 15
7.8.14 Weigh-Box 15
7.8.15 Scales or Meters 16
7.8.16 Plant Control System 16
APPENDICES
APPENDIX “A” .................................................................................................................... 17
APPENDIX “B” .................................................................................................................... 22
APPENDIX “C” .................................................................................................................... 25
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
7 ASPHALT PLANTS
7.1 ASPHALT BINDERS DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
1 Before loading, the bitumen manufacturer shall examine the shipping container and remove
all remnants of previous cargos that may contaminate the material to be loaded.
2 The manufacturer shall furnish with each shipment two (2) copies of the delivery ticket
containing the following:
(a) Consignees’ details.

(b) Net liters.
(c) Net weight.
(d) Type and amount of anti-stripping agent (if any).
ar
(e) Identification number (truck, car tank, etc.)
at
(f) Destination.
(g) Date.
-Q
(h) Loading temperature, and the recommended delivery temperature range.
(i) Specific gravity.
LL
3 The bitumen manufacturer shall deliver a signed Certificate of Compliance to cover the
W
quality and quantity of material and the condition of container for each shipment. Test results
shall be provided with the shipment.
s
4 Bituminous materials furnished without a Certificate of Compliance should not be introduced

en
into the work until the Contractor has had sufficient time to sample and test the delivered
materials.
m
5 The delivery tanker shall be insulated with a rock wool or similar material. Burner tubes shall
e
be designed so that the bituminous material is evenly heated with no hot spots within the
Si
tanker. Temperature gauges shall be calibrated and positioned such that the maximum
temperature in the tanker shall be indicated. The temperature of unmodified and modified
bitumen during delivery shall be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer
recommendations. Tankers shall be designed to enable the safe sampling of the bitumen
from the top of the tanker or from a sampling valve. Sampling shall not take place whilst the
tank is under pressure.
6 The Contractor shall obtain acceptance samples of bituminous material according to ASTM
D140 at the applicable point of acceptance.
7 For bituminous material used in direct application on the road, samples shall be taken from
each shipping container at the time of discharge into distributors or other conveyances on the
project.
8 For bituminous material initially discharged into storage tanks on the project, samples shall
be taken from the line between the storage tank and the distributor or the asphalt plant after
each delivery. Samples shall be taken after a sufficient period of circulation has taken place
to ensure samples are representative of the material in the storage tank.
9 The manufacturer of bituminous materials shall test all materials produced and the test
results retained for reference. Each shipment of bituminous material delivered to the asphalt
plant shall be sampled. The samples shall be numbered consecutively and identified by
project, type and grade of bituminous material, date of delivery and use. Samples testing
frequency shall be based on LSA and the Engineer approval.
10 Each bitumen delivery and storage tank and its associated delivery pipe and control valve
must be independently and uniquely identified with the tank number.
11 Storage tanks must also display the grade of bitumen held in the tank.
12 Adequate and reliable means of gauging the bitumen tank contents and ullage must be
available at the discharge point.
13 Vent pipes must be fitted in bitumen tanks and located where they do not pose a risk to any
personnel or delivery vehicles and must be kept clear at all times.
ar
14 It is recommended that bitumen tanks should be fitted with a correctly designed drain valve to
enable the safe emptying of the tank for cleaning and maintenance. In the absence of a drain
at
valve, a specific risk assessment must be carried out prior to any uplift of product.
-Q
15 Samples must not be taken from the bitumen delivery vehicle or hoses at the delivery site
unless equipment is fitted to do so safely.
LL
16 If there is a requirement to take bitumen samples a purpose designed valve should be

permanently fitted to the tank (or corresponding pipework).
W
7.2 ASPHALT PLANTS PRODUCTION CONTROL

s
en
7.2.1 Factory Production Control (FPC)

m
1 The Organization shall establish and operate a permanent factory production control system
to ensure delivery of the quality requirements of the project specification whilst
e
maintaining a regime of continuous improvement and ensure the competence and

Si
training of staff and operators. The Organization shall document and maintain the FPC
system in which procedures, regular inspections and tests and/or assessments and the
use of the results to control raw and other incoming materials or components, equipment,
the production process and the product.
2 A sample plant inspection checklist, which includes the minimum items to be covered as part
of LSA inspection, Engineer inspection and producer internal audit system, is provided in
Appendix “C”.
7.2.2 Factory Production Control Quality Plan
1 The Organization shall establish and maintain FPC documentation for each asphalt
production site used to supply the works.
2 The FPC documentation shall include a means for identifying and detailing the specific
processes that directly affect the quality of the asphalt. This shall particularly address:
(a) Producer’s organizational structure relating to conformity and quality.

(b) Document control.
(c) Control procedures for constituent materials and purchaser supplied product.
(d) Process control
(e) Requirements for the handling and storage of the product.
(f) Plant calibration and maintenance.
(g) Quality control laboratory calibration and maintenance.
(h) Requirements for inspection and testing of processes and products.
(i) Procedures for handling non-conformity.
7.2.3 Organizational Structure
1 The responsibility, authority and inter-relation of all personnel who manage, perform and
verify work affecting conformity and quality shall be defined in the quality plan, particularly for
personnel who have authority to:
(a) Initiate action to prevent the occurrence of product non-conformity.
ar
(b) Identify and record any product quality problems.
at
2 The producer shall identify a person with appropriate authority, knowledge and experience to
-Q
supervise Factory Production Control and to ensure that the requirements of the quality plan
are implemented and maintained. The person identified may exercise such supervision over
a group of plants.
LL
3 The management structure shall be documented. Names, affiliations, and positions of

W
principal staff shall be listed. The organization chart shall clearly define relationships with
other partner organizations where applicable.
s
7.2.4 Internal Audits

en
1 The Organization shall carry out internal audits to verify which activities comply with the
m
planned arrangements and to determine the effectiveness of the Factory Production Control
system. Audits shall be scheduled on the basis of the status and importance of the activity.
e
The audits and follow up action shall be carried out in accordance with documented
Si
procedures. The results of the audits shall be documented and brought to the attention of the
personnel having responsibility in the area audited. The management personnel responsible
for the area shall take timely corrective action on the nonconformities found by the audit and
shall keep a record of the action taken.
2 The frequency of such audits shall be that each area of process is audited at least annually.
7.2.5 Management Review
1 The system shall be reviewed at least annually by management to ensure its continuing
suitability and effectiveness.
7.2.6 Document Control
1 The producer shall establish and maintain documented procedures to control all documents
and data that relate to the requirements of these specifications.
2 The producer shall maintain all documents related to daily production quality records, test
methods, practices, procedures, and specifications.
3 Records relating to Factory Production Control shall be maintained and accessible by the
Organization and shall be produced if requested by the Engineer or any authorized audit
body.
4 Management review, internal audits, 3rd party assessment, and inspection and testing of
finished asphalt shall be kept for a minimum of ten years. All other quality records shall be
kept until at least five years after the completion of the project, or longer as the Organization
requires.
7.3 PRODUCT REALISATION
7.3.1 Constituent Materials
1 Adequate supplies of constituent materials shall be available to ensure that the
ar
planned rates of production and delivery can be maintained.
at
2 The specification and tolerances for incoming constituent materials shall be established
-Q
and communicated to suppliers by appropriate traceable and confirmable means.
3 The control procedures shall verify that suppliers of incoming materials are capable of
providing the required quality of materials.
LL
4 Different material types or grades shall be transported and stored in such a manner
W
as to avoid intermingling, contamination or deterioration which may adversely affect the

quality of the product.
s
en
5 The general requirements of this clause shall be translated into more detailed plant
specific requirements within the FPC and include the following:
m
(a) Procedures for the control of aggregates delivered to a depot or plant site.
e
(b) Requirements for labelling of storage bays and silos.

Si
(c) Requirements for heating, temperature control and insulation of binder tanks, pipes
and pumps.
(d) Requirements for controlling delivery of binders into the correct tanks, including
stirrers/agitators and labelling of tanks, and the selection of the correct tanks for use.
(e) Requirements for the control of additives.
(f) Requirements for the manufacture of polymer modified binders at site by the
Organization or its supplier, where applicable.
7.3.2 Customer Supplied Product
1 Any constituent material supplied by the customer for inclusion in the asphalt shall be
handled, stored and maintained free of contamination by the Organization.
7.3.3 Process Control
1 The FPC quality plan shall include the following items of process control:
2 A description of the flow of materials and the processes carried out on them from receipt at
the plant to delivery to the job site. This shall incorporate a flow diagram.
3 A statement of the production control processes necessary to maintain and regulate the
quality of material in conformity with the specification. This will include the procedure for the
control of batching instructions.
4 A schedule for monitoring the performance of the process, which is shown in Table A-1 in
Appendix “A”, resulting in a record of plant performance against stated tolerances.
5 A detailed method statement for the production of polymer modified binder including storage
and quality control, and the procedure for the handling of nonconforming product.
7.3.4 Handling, Storage and Delivery
1 The FPC quality plan shall contain procedures to ensure that the asphalt mixture is handled,
stored, discharged and delivered at the specified temperature range, minimizing segregation
ar
and degradation.
at
2 The asphalt mixture shall be identifiable and traceable with regard to its production data and
-Q
can be referenced from information on the delivery ticket from its manufacture to its point of
installation. The quality plan shall however make clear the point to which the Organization’s
responsibility for handling storage and delivery extends.
LL
3 The quality plan shall describe the characteristics of any hot storage system and define its
mode of operation. The Organization shall ensure thorough checks, inspections and records
W
that such systems are used correctly and that bituminous mixtures maintain their suitability
for use.
s
en
4 Bituminous materials shall not be heated during the process of its manufacture or during
construction so as to cause damage to the materials as evidenced by the formation of
carbonized particles.
e m
7.3.5 Plant Calibration and Maintenance

Si
1 The FPC quality plan documentation shall identify those items of measuring equipment which
require calibration and the frequency of such calibration which shall comply with the
requirements of QCS 2014, or its revisions, and the contract specification.
2 Calibration procedures shall be provided, including the permitted tolerances for the
equipment to remain in service. The quality plan shall state the required accuracy of all plant
calibrations and shall identify any that require traceability to national reference standards (e.g.
mass or weight).
3 The plant shall be maintained to ensure that it continues to be capable of producing asphalt
to the required specifications and tolerances. Table A-2 gives guidance with regard to
schedules for calibration and checks.
4 The FPC quality plan documentation shall identify those items and areas of the plant where
constant use and wear will affect the quality of production including, but not limited to, the
dryer drum, hot elevator, screen deck and meshes, hot bins, weighing and mixing apparatus,
and state the inspection and maintenance schedules for these items in order to maintain
them to the condition necessary to ensure the quality of production.
5 A maintenance schedule shall be available and maintenance records shall be kept.
7.3.6 Plant Quality Control Laboratory
1 The asphalt plant shall have a quality control testing laboratory capable of conducting the
following tests:
(a) Sieve analysis (ASTM C117, C136, and D5444).

(b) Specific gravity for coarse and fine aggregates (ASTM C127, C128).
(c) Theoretical maximum specific gravity and density of asphalt mixtures (ASTM D2041).
(d) Quantitative extraction of asphalt binder from asphalt mixtures (ASTM D2172).
(e) Bulk specific gravity and density of compacted asphalt mixtures (ASTM D1188,
D2726).
2 The asphalt plant laboratory shall have the following:
ar
(a) Efficient quality management system.
at
(b) Qualified laboratory manager.
(c) Qualified technicians.
-Q
(d) Calibrated equipment.
LL
3 The asphalt plant laboratory shall have a database includes but not limited to the following:
(a) Production data.

W
(b) Testing data.

s
(c) Materials type and materials traceability to source data.

en
4 The plant laboratory shall keep records of materials and asphalt mixtures properties on a
daily basis.
e m
5 The laboratory shall maintain a position description for each technical operational position
shown on the laboratory’s organization chart. Position descriptions shall identify the position
Si
and include a description of the duties, required skills, and education and experience
associated with the position.
6 The laboratory shall maintain technical staff training records, qualifications, work experience,
licensure, certifications, and current position for each supervisory technical staff member.
7 The laboratory shall maintain a procedure which describes the methods used for laboratory
personnel training to perform tests in accordance with standard procedures. Records of
laboratory personnel training shall be maintained.
8 The laboratory shall maintain a procedure describing the method used to evaluate staff
competency to ensure that each test covered by the scope of this standard is performed in
accordance with standard procedures. This description shall include the frequency of
competency evaluations for each technician and indicate what position or employee is
responsible for evaluating staff competency and maintaining records. The procedure shall
ensure that each technician receives a performance evaluation for each test that technician
performs.
9 The laboratory shall calibrate, standardize, and check all significant equipment associated
with tests which the laboratory performs.
10 The laboratory shall have a procedure for the storage, retention, and disposal of test
samples.
7.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING
7.4.1 General
1 All necessary facilities, equipment and personnel shall be available to carry out the required
inspections and tests.
2 Inspection and testing shall be carried out at least as frequently as indicated in Tables A-3 to
A-7. Sampling shall be randomised so as not to introduce undue bias in the assessment of
compliance. Due care shall be taken to adequately cover both large and small volumes of
material.
ar
3 At least 10% of quality control tests related to constituent materials and finished mixtures
at
shall be carried out by an approved thirty party laboratory. Third party testing schedule shall
-Q
be liaised with the Engineer.
4 The results of all tests carried out on materials shall be recorded. Tests taken specifically for
the resolution of problems arising from process control shall be kept separately and need not
LL
be used for the purpose of calculating compliance with the technical specifications.
W
5 All sampling and testing shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant standard
procedures required by the specification.
s
en
7.4.2 Incoming constituent materials

m
1 Incoming constituent materials shall be inspected and tested using procedures detailed in the
quality plan and to a schedule complying with this clause and the requirements of QCS 2014,
e
or its revisions, and the contract specification.

Si
2 The required inspections of materials in storage shall be maintained to establish that no

deterioration has occurred.
3 Detailed requirements shall be as follows:
(a) Aggregates: see Table A-3.

(b) Filler: see Table A-4.
(c) Additive: see Table A-5.
(d) Binders: see Table A-6.
(e) Finished Asphalt Mixture: see Appendix “B”.
7.4.3 Finished Asphalt Mixture
1 The finished asphalt mixture shall be inspected and tested using procedures detailed in the
quality management system documentation and to a schedule complying with the
requirements of QCS 2014 and the contract specification.
2 Appropriate statistical records shall be maintained in order to monitor and verify process
capability and product characteristics.
3 Individual batch readings shall be recorded as part of the quality records. The plant
pyrometer shall be calibrated in accordance with ASTM E2847 and checked daily against a
calibrated laboratory thermometer, the record of which shall be maintained in the plant
control cabin/office. The temperature of the finished asphalt shall be the average load
temperature however no batch or part of the load shall exceed the maximum JSM
temperature for the mix. Measurement shall be in accordance with QCS 2014.
4 As a regular audit check on the efficacy of the plant quality control laboratory, 10% of
samples analysed for mix composition by the plant control laboratory shall have a duplicate
sample analysed in an independent laboratory, which is ISO17025 accredited in related tests.
The duplicate sampling may be done simultaneously as part of the Organization’s other
testing obligations conducted by an approved independent laboratory. The duplicate results
shall be regularly reviewed and any differences falling outside the reproducibility limits
published in the test standard applicable to the ASTM test methods employed shall be
ar
investigated.
at
5 The results of all tests carried out on materials shall be recorded. Tests taken specifically for
-Q
the resolution of problems arising from process control shall be kept separately and need not
be used for the purpose of calculating compliance with the technical specifications.
6 All sampling and testing shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant standard
LL
procedures required by the specification.

W
7 Sampling frequencies, operating compliance level (OCL) and test frequencies are provided in
Appendix “B”.
s
en
7.5 NON-CONFORMITY
m
7.5.1 General
e
1 The producer shall establish and maintain documented procedures to ensure that constituent
Si
materials or asphalt mixture which when identified by in-process inspection does not conform
to specified requirements is prevented from use or installation. This control shall provide for
identification, evaluation, separation from conforming product (when practical) and disposal
of the nonconforming material or asphalt mixture.
2 The non-conformance process shall include:
(a) Constituent materials upon arrival at the plant or storage site.

(b) Constituent materials in storage.
(c) The manufacturing process.
(d) Handling, storage and delivery of the finished product.
7.5.2 Non-conformity of Material or Asphalt Mixtures
1 Where non-conforming constituent materials or finished asphalt mixtures are identified, the
cause of the non-conformance shall be investigated and identified to effect appropriate
corrective actions to prevent a reoccurrence. Such corrective actions shall be incorporated
into the FPC quality plan.
2 Corrective actions may involve reworking the material, adjusting the process, redirection to
another use where it may be acceptable, recycling for further use or rejection and disposal.
3 The FPC quality plan shall identify the action to be taken in process control when non-
conforming product is identified from analysis.
4 The FPC quality plan shall state the process under which the installation contractor and the
supervising agency will be notified of non-conforming analysis results.
7.6 INSPECTION, MEASURING AND TEST EQUIPMENT
1 The Organization shall control, calibrate and maintain suitable measuring and test equipment
as required by this guidance document and QCS 2014.
2 To ensure the testing of incoming constituent materials and finished asphalt conforms to the
relevant test method specification, the Organization, or where an independent laboratory is
employed by the Organization to conduct its quality control testing, shall ensure within the
ar
FPC quality plan that the measuring and test equipment used is maintained in a known state
of calibration and maintenance.
at
3
-Q
The equipment control procedures shall demonstrate the following:
(a) Accuracy and frequency of calibration, which should be in accordance with the relevant
test standard.
LL
(b) Equipment is used in accordance with a documented procedure.

W
(c) Equipment is uniquely identified.

(d) Calibration records to be maintained.
s
en
7.7 PLANT GENERALLY

m
1 The machinery and tools used in constructing the various items involved in asphalt works
shall be in good working condition and free of oil and fuel leaks. The Contractor shall
e
maintain and preserve them for the whole duration of the work. The Engineer shall approve
Si
the machinery and tools before works begin and the Contractor shall supply adequate
quantities of such machinery in order to execute the work with due speed and precision.
Equipment approved for use shall not be removed from the Site without the approval of the
Engineer.
2 If required the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with the manufacturer's catalogues,
specifications and other published data for the equipment and machinery he proposes to use.
3 On first erecting an asphalt plant and at least once each three months thereafter, the plant
shall be calibrated by a calibration service organisation approved by the LSA. Production
shall not be permitted if the weigh batch calibration does not comply with the requirements of
ASTM D995-95.
4 The Engineer shall have the right to stop the use of any equipment or plant which he deems
to be inferior to the quality required or detrimental to the permanent works and to instruct the
removal of such equipment and to have it replaced by suitable equipment.
5 The Contractor shall immediately comply with such instructions without being entitled to any
indemnities or extensions as a result of such instructions. The Contractor shall not be
allowed to use any equipment or plant before obtaining the approval of the Engineer, and the
Contractor shall undertake to follow sound technical methods in operation and to engage
skilled and trained operators, mechanics and labour to carry out the works. The Engineer
shall have the right to expel any operators, mechanics or labour and to instruct suitable
replacement thereof at any time he deems such action is necessary.
6 The Contractor shall comply with any special plant requirements published by the concerned
authority.
7.8 ASPHALT PLANT
7.8.1 General
1 All plant used by the Contractor for the preparation of asphalt hot mixes shall be batch type
plants conforming to the requirements as detailed below.
ar
2 The Engineer may permit the use of continuous drier drum type asphalt plants after a fully
at
detailed technical submission by the Contractor itemising the differences from the
-Q
specification. In such cases after approval of the technical submission the Contractor shall
carry out a full scale laying trial with testing of the hot and laid mix and monitoring of the plant
operation by the Engineers staff to assess the suitability of the proposed plant.
LL
3 No laboratory verification or plant trial shall be carried out by the LSA unless an automatic
compaction apparatus is available at the producer’s laboratory.
W
7.8.2 Automatic Operation

s
en
1 The plant shall be designed, co-ordinated and operated so as to continually produce an

asphalt mix within the job mix tolerances specified.
m
2 The plant shall be equipped and operated so that the proportioning of the hot aggregate, filler
e
and bitumen, together with the dry and wet mixing cycles are all controlled automatically.
Si
Positive interlock shall be provided so that proportioning, mixing and discharge are
accomplished by one operation without manual control of the separate phase.
3 The use of manual and semi-automatic plants for the production of asphalt is not permitted
unless specific approval is given in writing by the Engineer.
7.8.3 Cold Bins System
1 The plant shall include a sufficient number of cold storage bins so that there is at least one
bin for each different stockpile of material being used.
2 Intermixing of material from different stockpiles in one bin or on the ground before putting into
the bin is prohibited.
3 The cold bins and loading equipment used shall be compatible to prevent overflow between
the bins. Baffle plates shall also be used between bins to prevent overflow of one bin into
another. Each cold bin shall include an accurate means for continuously feeding the required
amount of mineral aggregate so that uniform production is achieved. The settings on the cold
bins shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be checked and calibrated as often as he
may deem necessary to ensure their continued accuracy. Change of settings shall be made
only with the approval of the Engineer.
7.8.4 Drier
1 A drier of satisfactory design shall be provided. The drier shall be capable of uniformly drying
and heating the aggregate to the moisture and temperature required without leaving any
visible burned oil or carbon residue on the aggregate when discharged from the drier.
7.8.5 Dust Collector
1 The plant shall be provided with a dust collector designed to waste, or to return all or part of
ar
the material collected to the asphalt plant.
at
2 The asphalt plant shall have an efficient fugitive emission collection and control system to
-Q
control dust or fume emissions from the drying, screening, weighing and mixing operations.
The collection system shall be so designed to prevent the emission of dust and fumes into
the atmosphere in accordance with the environmental standards of Qatar.
LL
3 The collected dust from the drying process shall pass through a coarse collector which will
pass the coarse particles, substantially greater than 0.075mm, back to the hot elevator or to
W
a silo for the controlled return to the asphalt mix. The reclaimed dust substantially less than
0.075mm shall be collected and passed into a storage silo for the controlled return as mineral
s
filler to the asphalt mix through the filler weighbox or sent to waste.
en
4 The plant shall be equipped with a filler silo for recovered filler. An additional dry storage silo
m
shall be provided for imported mineral filler with a provision of a separate weighing hopper to
proportion this filler into the mix.
e
Si
7.8.6 Screens
1 Plant screens shall be capable of screening all aggregates to the specified sizes and
proportions. They shall have capacities equal to or greater than the maximum rated capacity
of the plant. They shall have an operating efficiency such that the aggregate deposited in any
bins shall not contain more than 10 % oversize or undersize material. This screen tolerance
shall not invalidate the job mix tolerances specified.
7.8.7 Hot Bins
1 The plant shall include at least three storage bins for hot aggregate of sufficient size to supply
the pugmill when it is operating at full capacity. They shall be arranged to ensure separate
and adequate storage of appropriate fractions of the aggregate. Each compartment shall be
provided with an overflow pipe that shall be of such size and at such location as to prevent
any backing up of material into other bins or against the screens. Bins shall be so
constructed that samples can be readily obtained therefrom. The hot bins shall be equipped
with continuous level indicators to provide information about the level of each ingredient of
the JMF and to avoid shortage or overflow of aggregate from one bin to another.
7.8.8 Asphalt Binder Storage
1 Tanks for storage of asphalt binders shall be equipped for heating the material using positive
and automatic control at all times, to a temperature within the specified range. The heating
shall be accomplished by hot thermal oil, electricity or other approved means such that no
direct flame shall come in contact with the bitumen or heating tank.
2 The circulating system for the asphalt binder shall be of adequate size to ensure proper and
continuous circulation during the entire operating period. Suitable means shall be provided
either by double jacketed steam or hot oil or other insulation for maintaining the specified
temperature of the bituminous material in the pipeline, meters, weigh buckets, spray bars,
and other containers and flow lines.
3 The storage tank capacity shall be sufficient for at least one day's operation. Circulation
return lines to the asphalt storage tanks should be submerged to the same elevation in the
storage tanks as the feeder line. Two or three vertical slots may be cut in the return line
above the high level mark to break vacuum when reversing the pump.
ar
4 The Contractor shall provide a sampling outlet in the asphalt binder feed line connecting the
at
plant storage tanks to the asphalt binder weighing or metering box. The outlets shall consist
-Q
of valves installed in such a manner that samples may be withdrawn slowly at any time during
plant operation. The locations of the sampling outlets shall be readily accessible and free
from obstructions. Drainage receptacles shall be provided for flushing the outlets before
sampling.
LL
7.8.9 Thermometric Equipment

W
1 An armoured thermometer reading from 38 C to 204 C shall be fixed in the bituminous feed
s
line at a suitable location near the discharge valve. Similar devices shall be fixed in the
en
heating and storage tanks.

m
2 The plant shall be further equipped with either an approved dial-scale, mercury-actuated
thermometer, an electric pyrometer, or other approved thermometric instruments placed at
e
the discharge chute of the drier and in the hot fines bin so as to register automatically or
Si
indicate the temperature of the heated aggregates. For better regulation of the temperature
of the aggregates, replacement of any thermometer by an approved temperature recording
apparatus may be required by the Engineer and he may further require that daily temperature
charts be submitted to him by the Contractor.
7.8.10 Control of Mixing Time
1 The Plant shall be equipped with positive means to govern the time of mixing and to maintain
it constant unless changed at the direction of the Engineer.
7.8.11 Pugmill
1 The batch mixer shall be an approved twin pugmill type, capable of producing a uniform
mixture within the job-mix tolerances. It shall be so designed as to permit a visual inspection
of the mix. The mixer capacity shall be not less than 600 kg per batch and shall be so
constructed as to prevent leakage of contents.
2 The bitumen system shall deliver an even flow of binder into the mixer to ensure an even
distribution of bitumen binder throughout the mix during the wet mixing cycle.
3 The mixer shall be fully enclosed with sufficient air extraction to prevent emissions of dust
and fumes. The mixing cycle shall be controlled such that from charging of the mixer until the
closing of the mixer door at the completion of the cycle there shall be no leakage of
aggregate, filler or bitumen from the weighing hoppers. The system shall permit a dry mixing
period, defined as the interval of time between opening of the weigh box gate and the start of
application of bitumen, if required by the mixing process.
4 The wet mixing period is defined as the interval between the discharge of the bitumen binder
into the mixer and the mixer gate is opened to discharge the mix, and shall be not less than
30 seconds. The wet mix time shall be capable of being incrementally set at intervals of not
more than five seconds up to a wet mix time of three minutes. A mechanical batch counter
shall register the completely mixed batches.
5 The mixer shall be equipped with a full set of mixer paddles in a suitable arrangement, in
ar
accordance with the manufacturer’s specification, to produce a proper and uniformly mixed
batch. All paddle arms and tips, and mixer liners shall be in good condition. Mixing shall
at
cease if any mixer arms or tips are missing, and shall not resume until replaced and
-Q
inspected.
7.8.12 Temporary Storage of Mix

LL
1 Plants may be equipped with skips or elevators for delivering batched mix to hoppers or silos
before discharging to hauling units. The skips or elevators shall not be sprayed with diesel or
W
other solvents; where necessary they may be sprayed with a minimum amount of lime water,
soap or detergent solution. Hoppers or silos shall be of such design that no segregation or
s
loss in temperature of the mix occurs.

en
7.8.13 Safety Requirements

m
1 Adequate and safe stairways to the mixer platform and guarded ladders to other plant units
e
shall be placed at all points required for accessibility to all plant operations. Accessibility to
Si
the top of truck bodies shall be provided by means of a platform or other suitable device to
enable the Engineer to obtain mixture temperature data. To facilitate handling scale
calibration equipment and sampling equipment, a hoist or pulley system shall be provided to
raise or lower the equipment from the ground to platform or vice-versa. All gears, pulleys,
chains, sprockets and other dangerous moving parts shall be thoroughly guarded and
protected. Ample and unobstructed passage shall be maintained at all times in and around
the truck loading space. This space shall be kept free from drippings from the mixing
platform.
2 Accessibility to the top of loaded truck body shall be provided by means of a platform to
enable obtaining asphalt mixture samples and temperature readings and to check truck body
condition. All necessary safety measures shall be provided for accessing the top of loaded
truck body.
7.8.14 Weigh-Box
1 The plant shall include means for accurately weighing each size of aggregate in a weigh-box
or hopper, suspended on scales, ample in size to hold a full batch without hand raking or
running over.
2 The weigh-box or hopper shall be so constructed that they will not be thrown out of alignment
or adjustment. All edges, ends and sides of weighing hoppers shall be free from contact with
any supporting rods and columns or other equipment that will in any way affect the proper
functioning of the hopper.
3 There shall also be sufficient clearance between hoppers and supporting devices to prevent
accumulations of foreign materials. The discharge gate of the weigh-box shall be so hung
that the aggregate will not be segregated when dumped into the mixer and shall close tightly
when the hopper is empty so that no material is allowed to leak into the batch in the mixer
during the process of weighing the next batch.
4 Weighing boxes and hoppers shall be free hanging and placed on high precision load cells or
strain gauges.
7.8.15 Scales or Meters
1 Scales or meters used for proportioning aggregates, mineral filler and bitumen shall be
ar
accurate to 1 % of the indicated quantity. Scales and meters shall be substantially
constructed. Scales and meters that require frequent adjustment shall be replaced. Scales
at
shall be constructed and located so as to prevent vibration in the dial pointer.
-Q
2 Weighing sequence of hot aggregates shall progress from coarse to fine.
3 Bituminous material shall be automatically proportioned by either weighing or metering. The

LL
minimum gradation shall be not more than 1 litre or 1 kg. Bituminous scales and weigh
buckets shall be such that the required amount of bitumen is provided in a single weighing
W
and delivered to the pugmill without loss due to overflow, splashing or spillage.
s
4 Bituminous weigh buckets shall be satisfactorily insulated to prevent loss of heat in the
en
bitumen or accumulation of bitumen in the bucket. Bituminous metering devices shall be

rotating positive displacement pumps and shall be capable of providing the designated
m
quantity of material for each batch.

e
5 All scales and meters shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be checked and calibrated
Si
as detailed in Clause 5.3. Production shall not be permitted if the weight batch calibration
does not comply with the requirements of ASTM D955-95.
7.8.16 Plant Control System
1 The asphalt plant operations shall be fully automated and connected to a centralized control
system. Preferably, the plant operating software shall be capable to store the detailed
production history.
APPENDIX “A”
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Table A-1: Process control minimum inspection schedule
Control Area Inspection/Test Purpose Minimum frequency

Identify
contamination,
Aggregate stockpiles As FPC quality plan Daily
intermingling, level
ground for tipping,
stock availability
Ensure correct
Cold feed bins As FPC quality plan feeding to plant and Weekly
maintenance of bins
Maintenance
inspection to ensure Monthly or as
Aggregate dryer As FPC quality plan FPC quality plan
effective heating and
drying
Dried Control for Continuously
Aggregate
heated temperature conformance in production
ar
aggregate
Identify mechanical Weekly or as
at
Aggregate screens As FPC quality plan
and physical defects
-Q FPC quality plan
As FPC quality plan Identify mechanical

and physical defects
Hot aggregate bins Weekly
Check screening
Hot bin gradations
efficacy
LL
Identify mechanical
and physical defect
W
Weighing apparatus As FPC quality plan Check weighing Weekly

efficacy against truck
s
scale
en
Check storage
m
Tank temperature Daily

conformance
e
Bitumen In accordance with

Binder properties As FPC quality plan
storage
Si
or in case of doubt
recommendations
Temperature Test of To ascertain the
monitoring accuracy equipment is
equipment for comparison Weekly
functioning correctly
drying/heating and with calibrated
asphalt mix reference
process thermometer
Each batch or
Asphalt mix Mix temperature Ensure temperature
continuously in
conformance
production
Table A-2: Minimum plant calibration and check requirements
Item of Plant Inspection/Test Purpose Minimum frequency

To ensure that
Visual inspection as
weighing equipment is Daily
described in procedures
Weighing
equipment To ensure accuracy 1
a) on installation
Testing of weighing within quality plan b) every 3 months
accuracy - calibration requirements c) in case of doubt.
To ensure that
First batch of the day
dispenser is
Organoleptic* inspection containing admixture
Admixture/additive functioning correctly
dispensers To ensure accuracy 1
a) on installation
Test for accuracy as
within quality plan b) every 3 months
described in procedures.
requirements c) in case of doubt.
Comparison of the actual To ensure accuracy 1

a) on installation
ar
Flow meters amount with the metered within quality plan b) every 3 months
amount by reconciliation requirements c) in case of doubt.
at
Comparison of actual -Q
mass of constituents in To ensure the batching 1
a) on installation
Batching system the batch with the accuracy in
b) every 3 months
(on batch plants) intended mass using the accordance with the
c) in case of doubt.
method prescribed in the quality plan
LL
quality plan
Comparison of actual
W
mass in a measured To ensure the 1

a) on installation
Proportioning period of time with the accuracy in
b) every 12 months
system (cold feed) intended mass using the accordance with the
s
c) in case of doubt.
method prescribed in the quality plan
en
quality plan
To ensure the
m
Visual as described in
equipment is Daily
procedures
e
Temperature
Test of accuracy To ensure the
Si
monitoring
comparison with equipment is Weekly
equipment
calibrated reference functioning correctly
(infrared
thermometer 1
pyrometer) To ensure correct a) on installation
Test of accuracy - temperatures are b) every 12 months
calibration recorded c) in case of doubt.
Temperature To ensure the

Visual as described in
monitoring equipment is Daily
procedures
equipment (contact functioning correctly
probe or 1
thermocouple for To ensure correct a) on installation
drying heating Test of accuracy - temperatures are b) every 3 months
process) calibration recorded c) in case of doubt.
Table A-3: FPC Inspection and test guidance for aggregate stockpiles
Inspection/Test Purpose Minimum frequency
To check suitability for As required by QCS 2014,

Tests for aggregate properties
intended use or its revisions
Each size: Weekly

Tests for aggregate consistency To check consignment quality Each consignment: in
by sieve analysis case of doubt
To check consignment is
Inspection of delivery ticket as ordered and from Each delivery
correct source
Table A-4: FPC inspection and test guidance for Filler
ar
Tests for filler properties To check suitability As required by QCS 2014,
for intended use or its subsequent revisions
at
Tests for filler consistency To check consignment Gradation: Weekly
or production quality
-Q
Plasticity: Weekly
Filler: Non plastic
LL
Appropriate tests to To confirm characteristics Each delivery or weekly

determine specified of product or check for reclaimed filler dust
W
properties compliance with

specification
s
Inspection of delivery ticket To check consignment is Each delivery

as ordered and from
en
correct source
e m
Table A-5: FPC inspection and test guidance for additives

Si
Appropriate tests to To confirm characteristics a) Source approval prior

determine intrinsic of product or check to initial use and
properties compliance with b) as stated in the quality plan
specification
Inspection of delivery ticket To check that consignment Each delivery
is as ordered and from the
correct source
Organoleptic* For comparison with Each delivery, if

check of normal appearance practicable; otherwise in
consignment accordance with quality
plan.
Table A-6: FPC Inspection and test guidance for bitumen binder

Tests for bitumen properties To check suitability for As required by QCS 2014 and
intended use project particular specification
Inspection of delivery ticket To check consignment is as Each delivery or production batch

ordered and from the correct
source
Temperature To check that binder is within (a) Each delivery or production
specified temperature limits batch
(b) Each tank recorded daily
Grade Properties (60/70) To assess compliance with 1 per 450 tons of binder delivered
specification in normal production
Grade Properties (PG76- 10) To assess compliance with 1 per 450 tons of binder delivered
specification in normal production
ar
Prior to production if stored for
at
more than 3 days without further
-Q deliveries or production batches
Organoleptic* Check For comparison with normal Each delivery or daily survey of
perceptible properties tanks
LL
Table A-7: FPC minimum inspection/test frequencies for product quality control
W

s
Organoleptic* check on For comparison with normal Every load

en
mixed asphalt appearance with regard to

grading, evenness of mixing
m
and adequacy of binder

coating
e
Si
Suitability of delivery To check adequacy of a) Prior to first use

vehicles by visual insulation b) In case of doubt.
assessment
Cleanliness of delivery To avoid contamination Every load prior to loading
vehicles by visual To control use of release agent
assessment
Mixed asphalt temperature To assess conformity a) As required under Table

1
b) Whenever samples
are taken
Grading and binder content To assess conformity In accordance with QCS
2014
Other characteristics included To assess conformity In accordance with QCS
in technical specifications 2014
* Organoleptic check: a broader evaluation made with the senses: sight, touch, smell, hearing etc. rather
than a visual inspection.
APPENDIX “B”
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
MINIMUM SAMPLING FREQUENCIES AND TOLERANCES FOR THE FACTORY PRODUCTION

QUALITY CONTROL OF FINISHED ASPHALT
General
1 This Appendix includes sampling frequencies and tolerances for mixture composition for use
in the evaluation of conformity of mixed asphalt during production. It is consistent with QCS
2014 but is specifically intended as guidance for the Organization (Asphalt Producer) to
maintain the quality control of the finished asphalt mixture at the point of manufacture and
does not impede on the requirements of QCS 2014, or its revisions, or the contract
specification. The sampling and frequencies are the minimum that should be considered for
control but it is to discretion of the Organization to ensure sufficient samples, tests and
assessments are made in order for the asphalt mixture conforms to specification
requirements.
2 The properties of asphalt mix characteristics shall conform to the requirements of QCS 2014
and the contract specification. Should these not properties be found not to conform to the Job
Mix Formula the design should be assessed.
ar
at
3 The guidance provides for three levels of minimum frequency. The minimum frequency which
shall be carried out for all production circumstances and higher frequencies which are
-Q
appropriate where it is necessary to give a greater assurance of consistency where the
measured level of conformity has decreased.
LL
4 A guide to assessment of production quality control test conformity is given.
Testing tolerances and conformity assessment

W
1 Asphalt mixture composition Job Mix Tolerances shall be in accordance with QCS 2014, as
indicated in Table B.1:
s
en
Table B.1: Job Mix Tolerances

m
Intermediate
Description Base Course Wearing Courses
Course
e
Aggregate retained on 4.75mm ±5% ±4% ±4%

Si
sieve or larger
Aggregate passing 4.75mm sieve
±4% ±3% ±3%
Aggregate passing 850m sieve
 3%  2%  2%
Aggregate passing 75μm sieve ± 1.5 % ± 1.0 % ± 1.0 %
Binder Content ± 0.3 % ± 0.2 % ± 0.2 %
Operating Compliance Level
1 The Operating Compliance Level (OCL) shall be applicable to each single plant and shall be
determined on an ongoing basis from the number of non-conforming compositional test
results within the last 32 analyses of all asphalt mixtures tested. In addition, the OCL shall
take into account the consistency of production with assessment of the mean deviation from
target as detailed in Table B.2.
2 In the event of 5 or more of the previous 32 results being non-conforming, and/or variance of
the mean deviation from target from the prescribed tolerances, the plant shall be subject to
an immediate and comprehensive review of equipment and procedures.
Mean Deviation from Target
1 For each analysis the deviation from target shall be determined for each of the sieves sizes
and binder content indicated in Table B.1. A running mean of the deviations for the last 32
analyses of each asphalt mixture shall be maintained.
2 Should the running mean of the deviations exceed the values stated in Table B.2, this shall
be deemed to be non-conforming asphalt mixture in accordance with Clause 25.4.2 and the
appropriate corrective quality control action taken. The Operating Compliance Level shall be
lowered by one level for as long as the mean deviation stays outside tolerance.
Table B.2: Mean deviation from target tolerances
Description Base Course Intermediate Wearing Course
ar
Course
Aggregate passing 19 mm ±4 ±3 -
at
Aggregate passing 12.5 mm - -Q ±3
Aggregate passing 9.5 mm ±4 ±3 ±3
Aggregate passing 4.75 mm
±3 ±2 ±2
(Superpave)
LL
Aggregate passing 2.36 mm

±3 ±2 ±2
(Marshall)
W
Aggregate passing 75 μm sieve ± 1.5 ± 1.0 ± 1.0

Soluble Binder Content ± 0.3 ± 0.2 ± 0.2
s
en
Test Frequency
m
1 The frequency for sampling shall be determined weekly and shall be maintained at the
e
operating compliance level minimum frequency indicated in Table B.3.

Si
Table B.3: Determination of Operating Compliance Level and Sampling Frequency
Number of nonconforming Operating Compliance

Minimum Sample Frequency
analyses in last 32 Level
0-2 A 1 per 250t per mix or part thereof
3-6 B 1 per 200t per mix or part thereof
≥6 C 1 per 100t per mix or part thereof
2 New plants commencing production, plants restarting after relocating, a major repair or
overhaul, or those recommencing commercial production after a period exceeding 3 months
cessation shall operate under OCL until 32 results have accumulated after which the
frequency shall revert to the OCL achieved.
APPENDIX “C”
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Table C-1: Sample of plant inspection checklist
Aggregate Stockpiles Yes No

Are aggregate stockpiles separated by walls or clear space
1 with signed labelling?
Are the stockpiles free of significant contamination and
2 segregation? (Plant drain-out aggregate is acceptable if the
aggregate size is similar and uncoated.)
Is the aggregate in good condition with no signs of degradation
3 on the stockpile due to vehicle/plant movements?
Is the truck tipping area at the stockpile level? (Non-level

4 surfaces can cause trucks to tip over.)
Do the aggregate delivery and test records conform to the
5 approved mix designs?
Have the aggregates been sampled and tested in accordance
6 with requirements?
ar
Aggregate Cold Feed
at
Has each aggregate size its own designated and labelled
1 bin/hopper?
-Q
Are bins/hoppers in good condition with no holes, with bin wall
2 divider plates between each?
Is aggregate overflow between hoppers being prevented by
LL
3 divider plates?
If meshes (grizzlies) are fitted over the bins/hoppers, are they
W
4 in reasonable condition and fit for purpose?

Are the feeder gates, feeder belts and vibrators in good
5 condition?
s
en
Are there no-flow paddles/sensors on each feeder and are

6 they working?
Date of the last feeder calibrations:
m
7
Is the aggregate collecting conveyor in good condition, with no
e
8 holes or splits, or evidence of tracking (side movement) and

Si
the belt scrapers are in good order?
Dryer
Is there any significant aggregate spillage under the dryer
1 conveyor, the dryer drum or around the base of the hot
elevator?
Are the dryer lifters and flights are in good condition without
2 undue bending or deformation and none missing. (when dryer
is cold and stopped)
Is the drum exit chute temperature pyrometer, thermocouple
3 or probe clean, working and in calibration?
4 Date of last pyrometer, thermocouple or probe calibration:
Has the drum exit chute Date:
temperature equipment been
checked recently with a Drum chute: °C
5 referenced laboratory probe?
Laboratory probe:
°C
Dust Collection
Does the pre-skimmer or knockout box return the collected
1 fine sand to the plant hot elevator?
a: returned to a silo for re-use?
Is the bag house b: directly fed back into the asphalt

2
extracted dust:- plant?
c: wasted?
Does the laboratory monitor the gradation of the coarse pre-
3 skimmer or knockout box fines and bag house filler?
4 Is there a dust emission monitoring system on the plant?
5 Date of last certified plant stack emission test?
Is the plant stack emission is visually clean with no obvious
6 dust or smoke??
Aggregate Screening
ar
1 Is there any spillage around the screen deck area?
at
2 Did the last screen inspection indicate any defects?
3 Date of last screen deck inspection:
-Q
Are there any signs of damage or wear, especially adjacent to
4 screen bearings or shafts?
Is there any significant dust emission from the screen housing
LL
5 lids, covers or doors?

Is there any evidence of holes, splits or tears in the screen
W
6 meshes and is there any apparent and significant pegging or

blockages?
s
Are there any loose screen meshes that need tightening or

7
en
support bars that are loose and need welding?

Is there evidence of side seal seepage which could
8 contaminate screened aggregate or wear other parts?
m
Hot Aggregate Bins

e
Is there any indication of hot bin oversize or undersize in hot

Si
1 bin drain-outs?
2 Bin 1 Aggregate size 0 / X mm
3 Bin 2 Aggregate size X / X mm
Are the individual hot stone bin overflow chutes/pipes blocked
8 or damaged?
Are there holes or damaged seams or welds in the hot bin
walls, especially in the corners and in the lower half of the
9
bins?
Do the hot stone bin doors stick or seize? Is there evidence of

holes in or leakage from the doors?
10
Weighing and Measuring Apparatus

Are the calibrations of the aggregate, filler and bitumen
1 weighing apparatus current and in date?
2 Aggregate weighing apparatus calibration date:
3 Bitumen weighing apparatus calibration date:
4 Filler weighing apparatus calibration date:
5 Mixed asphalt pyrometer calibration date:

Date:
Has the mixed asphalt pyrometer been
6 checked recently with a referenced Pyrometer: °C
laboratory probe? Laboratory probe: °C
Weighing efficacy:
Do the printed batch weights equal the weight indicators and
1 are total load batch weights similar to the truck scale net
weight?
ar
Does the bitumen bucket/kettle pass the static load test?
(Hold a fully weighed batch of bitumen for at least 30 seconds
at
2 and note any change in weight. Repeat when empty and note
any major change in tare) -Q
Does the aggregate and filler weighing apparatus pass the
3 static load test?
Is there any bitumen seepage or leakage from the charge and
LL
4 the discharge pipes, and the butterfly valve underneath on

direct gravity discharge bitumen bucket/kettle systems?
W
Is the bitumen bucket/kettle adequately insulated and heated?

Seepage or leakage from the charge and the discharge
5 pipes? Check the butterfly valve underneath for direct gravity
s
discharge systems.
en
Bitumen Storage and Pumping

Where fitted, are breather vents clear on the bitumen weigh
m
1 bucket/kettle and delivery pipe to the mixer?

e
Are the bitumen tanks and are all tanks clearly labelled
2
Si
according to the grade of binder stored?

Are stored binder tank temperatures compliant with
3 specification or supplier recommendations?
Where PMB is stored, are the stirrers operational and in good
4 condition?
Is there a supplier defined procedure for the storage and use
5 of polymer modified binders?
Are all tanks, pipes, pumps and flow meters properly
6 insulated and the surrounds clean and in good order?
Is there any evidence of excessive bitumen or oil
7 seepage/leaks from pump(s), valves or manifolds?
Are bitumen tank temperatures monitored and recorded daily
8 by the plant staff?
Are the bitumen binders tested for foaming when heated to
9 175°C?
Is there a control or procedure for tank/binder grade selection
10 according to asphalt mix recipe to avoid using the incorrect
grade?
Asphalt Mixing
Are the weighing apparatus and mixer external surrounds in
1 clean and good order with no apparent seepage or leakage of
aggregate, filler or bitumen?
Are inspection hatches secure and sealed to prevent dust
2 emission?
Are electric cables, hydraulic and air lines well maintained and
3 in good order?
Are all mixer arms, paddles and tips, liners and door seals
4 present and in good condition?
Is the aggregate weighing sequence, coarse size to fine size?
5
Is there excessive overflow from the aggregate overflow
6 chutes?
7 Check the required batch weights on the mix card.
Are batch deviations within acceptable guide tolerance?
8
ar
9 Batch aggregate component ±1.5% of total batch weight
at
10 Bitumen deviation ±0.1% of total batch weight
-Q
11 Mineral filler deviations ±0.1% of total batch weight
Are the in-flight adjustments being made automatically by the

12 plant control system?
LL
13 What is the delay time after aggregate discharge for bitumen: sec.
W
14 What is the delay time after aggregate discharge for filler: sec.
What is the total wet mixing time in seconds?
s
(From the complete discharge of the bitumen and filler to the

15 sec.
en
emptying of the finished batch)
On completion of the mixing cycle, does the mixer fully

m
16 empty?
e
On visually inspecting single batches of asphalt, is the

Si
17 appearance consistent from side to side and front to back,

and not segregated?
Does each batch conform to the mix temperature
18 specification requirement?
Does the plant indicated mixed asphalt temperature
19 correspond with a laboratory check?
Where used, is the skip hopper acceptably clean?
20
Are the empty hot storage silos acceptably clean without cold
21 asphalt sticking to the sides and corners?
Loading
Are all trucks acceptably clean prior to loading without any
1 evidence of diesel being used as a release agent?
Are all trucks equipped with load cover sheets or canvasses?

2
Are the loaded trucks free of significant segregation?
3
Is the asphalt temperature acceptably consistent and within

4 range tolerance throughout the load front to back?
Has the correct delivery ticket been issued to the driver with
5 accurate asphalt description, truck reference or number, site
address, driver name, and ticket number?
Is the plant sampling technician equipped with all necessary
PPE including safety helmet, steel-capped boots, overalls,
6 gloves, hi-visibility jacket, and protective eye glasses?
Are the plants sampling procedures being following by the

7 technician to ensure a representative sample?
(Ask for and retain a copy of the sampling procedures.)
Are plant sample details, including truck delivery details, are

8 recorded on each plant sample?
Request plant compliance rate for each product supplied to the

9 project or contract for record purposes.
ar
at
-Q
LL
END OF PART
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 08: Recycled and Stabilised Road Materials
8 RECYCLED AND STABILISED ROAD MATERIALS ............................................................ 2

8.1 GENERAL 2
8.1.1 SCOPE 2
8.1.2 REFERENCES 2
8.1.3 DEFINITIONS 3
8.1.4 SUBMITTALS 4
8.1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4
8.2 COLD STABILISED MATERIAL - GENERAL 4
8.3 MATERIALS 5
8.4 CEMENT TREATED BASE (CTB) 6
8.4.1 PREPARATION AND MIX DESIGN FOR CEMENT TREATED BASE 6
8.4.2 SITE TRIALS FOR CEMENT TREATED BASE AND BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIAL 7
8.4.3 INSITU STABILISATION AND COMPACTION OF CEMENT TREATED BASE 7
8.4.4 EXSITU PRODUCTION OF CEMENT TREATED BASE 9
8.4.5 LAYING AND COMPACTION OF CEMENT TREATED BASE 9
8.4.6 JOINTS IN CEMENT TREATED BASE 10
ar
8.4.7 SAMPLING AND TESTING - CEMENT TREATED BASE 10
8.4.8 EVENNESS AND LEVEL 12
at
8.5 BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIAL (BSM) -Q 12
8.5.1 PREPARATION AND MIX DESIGN FOR BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIAL 12
8.5.2 SITE TRIALS FOR BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIAL 13
8.5.3 INSITU STABILISATION AND COMPACTION OF BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIAL 13
8.5.4 EXSITU PRODUCTION OF BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIAL 14
LL
8.5.5 LAYING AND COMPACTION OF BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIAL 15

8.5.6 JOINTS IN BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIAL 16
W
8.5.7 SAMPLING AND TESTING - BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIAL 16

8.5.8 EVENNESS AND LEVEL 17
s
8.6 DETERMINATION OF THE FOAMING CHARACTERISTICS OF BITUMEN

en
(EXPANSION RATIO AND HALF LIFE) 18

8.6.1 SCOPE 18
8.6.2 DEFINITIONS 18
m
8.6.3 APPARATUS 18
8.6.4 METHOD 19
e
8.6.5 REPORTING 19
Si
8.6.6 SITE QUALITY CONTROL 20
APPENDIX ............................................................................................................................................ 21
GUIDANCE FOR THE DESIGN OF RECYCLED AND STABILISED MATERIALS (MIX DESIGNS)
8 RECYCLED AND STABILISED ROAD MATERIALS

8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes materials, equipment, mix design guidelines and other requirements for
the construction of insitu and exsitu recycled pavement layers.
2 Incorporation of stabilized or cement bound materials in pavement layers shall be based on

pavement structural design criteria such as layer(s) strength characteristics, load distribution,
layer(s) thickness equivalency, layers strength balance and the target level of pavement
performance.
3 Use of recycled and stabilized materials and their associated construction and quality
assurance and quality control processes shall be approved by the Engineer.
ar
at
Section 6 Part 1 General -Q
Part 3 Earthworks
Section 5
LL
Part 4 Water
8.1.2 References
W
AASHTO T180: ..........Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils

ASTM C150: ..............Standard Specification for Portland Cement
s
ASTM C977: ..............Standard Specification for Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil
en
Stabilization
ASTM C1097: ............Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Use in Asphalt Cement
m
or Bituminous Pavements
e
ASTM D422: ..............Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils

Si
ASTM D946: ..............Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for

ASTM D1556: ............Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1632: ............Standard Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement Compression
and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory
ASTM D1633: ............Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-
Cement Cylinders
ASTM D2216: ............Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water
(Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass
ASTM D2922: ............Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place
by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D4215: ............Standard Specification for Cold-Mixed, Cold-Laid Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
ASTM D4318: ............Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils
ASTM D4944: .............Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water (Moisture)
ASTM D4944: ............Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water (Moisture)
ASTM D6926: ............Standard Practice for Preparation of Bituminous Specimens Using
Marshall Apparatus
ASTM D6931: ............Standard Test Method for Indirect Tensile (IDT) Strength of
Bituminous Mixtures
ASTM D6938: ............Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil
ASTM D7382: ............Standard Test Methods for Determination of Maximum Dry Unit
Weight and Water Content Range for Effective Compaction of
Granular Soils Using a Vibrating Hammer
ASTM E2583: ............Standard Test Method for Measuring Deflections with a Light Weight
Deflectometer (LWD)
ar
MCHW Specification for Highways Works Series 900, UK
at
TG2 Technical Guideline: Bitumen Stabilised Materials: Asphalt Academy, South Africa
TRL 611: A Guide to the Use and Specification of Cold Recycled Materials
-Q
8.1.3 Definitions
LL
1 Stabilisation is the permanent modification of soils and aggregates, including recycling

existing pavements, to enhance the engineering properties thereby improving the load
W
bearing capacity and performance of a new pavement structure.
2 Aggregate: Granular material used in construction. Aggregate may be natural, manufactured

s
or recycled.
en
3 Primary Aggregate: aggregate extracted directly from the ground in quarries or pits, or
m
dredged from rivers or the sea. They can be either hard rock such as gabbro and limestone,
or sand and gravel.
e
Si
4 Secondary Aggregate: materials produced as a by-product of other mining or quarrying

activities or as a by-product of other industrial processes, e.g. blast furnace slag, incinerator
ash, or the ash from power stations.
5 Recycled Aggregate: materials produced by the recycling of construction and demolition

waste. These can be crushed concrete, bricks or glass, asphalt planings (i.e. the asphalt
layers of roads removed during roadworks, also known as RAP – Recycled Asphalt
Pavement).
6 Cold Stabilised Material (CSM): materials produced for pavement construction structural
layers using recycled or secondary aggregates.
7 Bitumen Stabilised Material (BSM): granular aggregate materials bound with foamed
bitumen or bitumen emulsions.
8 Cement Treated Base (CTB): granular aggregate materials bound with cement or hydrated
lime hydraulic binder.
9 Exsitu Stabilisation: mixing processes that are carried out away from the construction
location in a remote mixing plant.
10 Insitu Stabilisation: mixing processes that are carried out at the construction location by
specialised stabilisation equipment.
11 Optimum Moisture Content: the moisture content of soil at which a specific degree of
compaction will produce the maximum dry density when determined in accordance with the
AASHTO T180.
12 Maximum Dry Density: the dry density of soil obtained using a specific degree of compaction
at the optimum moisture content when determined in accordance with AASHTO T180.
8.1.4 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit recent test results for the proposed sources of materials for all
quality requirements of the Contract. The contractor shall submit a test certificate that proves
ar
that the raw materials that are purchased/used comply with specifications. The testing may
be performed by an approved private laboratory or by the laboratory associated with the
at
plant itself. -Q
2 The contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval method statements, which includes
but not limited to the following:
LL
(a) Quality assurance and quality control plans of all construction activities
(b) Material, handling, storage, identification and marking, traceability to source of
W
production and testing.

(c) Equipment suitability to fulfil all construction activities to the required quality
s
en
(d) Personnel capability

(e) Safety and environment preservation plans
m
3 The Contractor will be required to produce detailed method statements for the chosen
e
method of recycling rehabilitation and shall include all stages of the process for approval by
Si
the Engineer. This shall include the credentials and details of experience of the stabilising
contractor, the site investigation report, the stabilised material mix design and the equipment
to be used for the entire process. A separate method statement shall be submitted for each
of the production and construction activities of each layer.
1 If requested the Contractor shall arrange for the Engineer to visit the source of the materials
and jointly take samples for testing. The Contractor shall carry out testing as directed by the
Engineer.
8.2 COLD STABILISED MATERIAL - GENERAL
1 Cold Stabilised Material (CSM) comprises base and binder courses produced by the process
of in-place recycling (insitu) or in a fixed or mobile mixing plant (exsitu) where the aggregate
source shall be obtained by cold pulverisation of all, or part, of the existing road structure,
blended if necessary with other aggregate and bound with cementitious / hydraulic (CTB) or
bituminous binders (BSM), separately or in combination, or by the use of primary
aggregates.
2 Cold Stabilised Material (CSM) shall be designed and produced to form the foundation or
main structural layer of the road pavement.
3 For Bitumen Stabilised Material (BSM) the primary active binder (stabilising agent) shall be
foamed bitumen, with cement as an adhesion agent as required by the design. For Cement
Treated Base (CTB) the primary active binder shall be cement, hydrated lime or a blend of
both in accordance with the mix design. The aggregate grading may be adjusted by the
addition of inactive mineral filler.
4 Insitu and exsitu methods of stabilisation rehabilitation are permissible with the approval of
the Engineer on a site by site basis.
5 Stabilisation design and installation processes shall be in accordance with internationally

recognised standards and specifications, and shall meet the necessary pavement structural
design according to the appropriate traffic classification.
6 The Cold Stabilised Material shall be designed to achieve the specified level of the
ar
appropriate end performance property to the requirements of the total pavement design. The
minimum layer thickness shall be as required by the design method used, as approved by
at
the Engineer. -Q
7 The asphalt type and thickness above the CSM shall be as required by the pavement design
method and shall also be sufficient to prevent reflective cracking and early life trafficking, to
LL
8.3 MATERIALS
W
1 The method statement submitted by Contractor shall contain details of all aggregates to be
s
used in the CSM.

en
2 Aggregates may include:

m
(a) Material planed or excavated from a road or other paved area.

e
(b) Primary, secondary or recycled aggregate from other sources.

Si
(c) Mineral filler from primary or secondary sources.
3 The aggregate including added inactive filler shall not contain deleterious material that
adversely affects the performance of the mixture. This includes clay materials, friable
materials, organic and metallic materials, or other extraneous or detrimental material.
4 The aggregate gradation for CSM shall follow the requirements stated in the mix design
method, as approved by the Engineer, and shall generally follow the recommended
gradations in Table 8.1 Recommended Gradations for Cold Stabilised Materials.
5 For BSM, material passing the 0.425mm sieve shall have a maximum liquid limit of 25% and
the plasticity index shall not exceed 6.
6 Bitumen specified for use in BSM shall be 60/70 penetration grade in accordance with ASTM
D946 and shall only be obtained from approved sources. The temperature of the bitumen
prior to foaming shall be greater than 175°C but less than 195°C. Bitumen shall not contain
any additives which may suppress foaming.
Table 8.1 Recommended Gradations for Cold Stabilised Materials

Sieve Size Bitumen Stabilised Job Mix Control
Cement Treat Base (CTB)
(mm) Material (BSM) Sieve Tolerances
50 100 100 100 100 -2
37.5 85 100 87 100 ±5
25 72 100 77 100 -
19 60 100 67 99 ±8
12.5 50 100 67 90 -
9.5 42 90 48 80 ±8
6.3 35 80 40 62 -
4.75 30 72 35 56 ± 10
2.36 21 56 25 42 -
1.18 14 44 18 33 -
ar
0.6 9 35 14 28 ±5
at
0.425 7 31 12 26 -
0.3 5 27 10
-Q 24 -
0.15 2 21 7 17 -
0.075 2.0 18.0 4.0 10.0 ±3
LL
W
7 Cement specified for use in BSM and CTB shall be Portland cement in accordance with
ASTM C150 and shall only be obtained from approved sources. Sulfate resisting cement
s
shall be used if instructed by the Engineer.

en
8 Hydrated lime for use in BSM shall be in accordance with ASTM C1097 and for CTB shall be
m
in accordance with ASTM C977, and shall only be obtained from approved sources.
e
9 Water for use in CSM shall in accordance with Section 5 Part 4.

Si
8.4 CEMENT TREATED BASE (CTB)
8.4.1 Preparation And Mix Design For Cement Treated Base
1 The Contractor shall produce a detailed existing pavement investigation report and the
proposed stabilised material mix design which shall be submitted for approval by the
Engineer, in liaison with Qatar Quality Standards, at least 30 days prior to the
commencement of the stabilisation works. The pavement investigation report shall consist of
cores and trial pits excavated to the existing subgrade and include tests for, but not limited
to, California Bearing Ratio, Dynamic Cone Penetrometer, gradation, plasticity index and
liquid limit, and other tests required by the selected design method.
2 All equipment and method statements shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer at
least 30 days prior to commencement of works.
3 The mix design method for the CTB mix shall be as approved by the Engineer. Methods may
include that stated in this part, MCHW Specification for Highways Works Series 900: UK, or
other similar and equivalent recognised international design methods for cement or hydraulic
bound materials.
4 The CTB mix shall have a minimum individual 7 day compressive strength > 2.1 MPa with a
maximum average 7 day compressive strength of 4.2 MPa when tested in accordance with
ASTM D1633.
5 The mix design shall derive the gradation tolerance parameters of the pulverised material,
moisture content at the point of compaction and target flow rates for the active filler, binder
and added water at the point of mixing, appropriate to the production or stabilisation method
used for the approval of the Engineer.
8.4.2 Site Trials For Cement Treated Base And Bitumen Stabilised Material
1 The CTB mix design shall be subjected to full preliminary trials and testing at least 10 days
ar
prior to commencement of the full works and shall determine:
at
(a) The effectiveness of the production and laying plant for exsitu processes;
(b)
-Q
The number of passes of the stabilisation machine necessary to achieve uniform
pulverisation and mixing for insitu processes;
(c) The field moisture content control required to achieve specified compaction
LL
requirements;
(d) The compaction routine and rolling patterns necessary to meet the specified
W
compaction requirements;
(e) The reference density;
s
en
(f) The effectiveness of the contractor’s inspection and test plan.

m
2 The length of the trial section shall be at least 150 metres and the full width of the
carriageway proposed for stabilisation to ensure joints and full width compaction can be
e
achieved without excessive segregation or other significant defects.

Si
3 The trial area shall be sprayed with bituminous prime coat at a rate of 0.45 to 0.75 kg/m2
and allowed to cure for a minimum of 24 hours without trafficking unless otherwise
authorised by the Engineer.
4 Tests from the trial areas shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 3 days prior
to commencement of the works. No works may proceed until all tests and final method
statements have been submitted and approved by the Engineer.
5 Where materials and processes are demonstrably similar, mix designs and trials tests from
previous projects may be approved at the discretion of the Engineer, in liaison with Qatar
Quality Standards.
8.4.3 Insitu Stabilisation And Compaction Of Cement Treated Base
1 The insitu CTB stabilisation/recycling shall be produced by specialist equipment specifically

designed for the purpose of insitu recycling processes.
2 The material shall be pulverised and stabilised in a single layer if its compacted thickness is
300 mm or less. If the compacted thickness is greater than 300 mm, the material shall be
pulverised and stabilised in the minimum number of layers between100 mm and 300 mm
thick. Where more than one layer is required, the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that
the lower layer has achieved adequate stability before proceeding with the overlying layer.
3 Where required by the Engineer the stability of a layer in any area shall be assessed after a
curing period of at least 24 hours by channelled trafficking using a rigid three-axle tipper
truck loaded to a gross mass of 24 tonnes (assumed equivalent to three standard axles).
The vertical deformation shall be measured in all wheel-tracks at monitoring points on each
of 5 transverse sections set 1 metre apart after 5, 15, 30 and 40 passes of the truck. The
mean vertical deformations at the above trafficking increments shall be plotted against the
respective number of truck passes and the mean vertical deformation corresponding to 100
standard axles shall be interpolated. The layer shall be deemed acceptable if the mean
vertical deformation corresponding to 100 standard axles is less than 10 mm.
4 The active filler (cement/hydrated lime) shall be supplied to the recycler by a specifically
ar
designed and calibrated mobile slurry mixer to ensure the dustless addition of the
at
cement/hydraulic binder. The addition shall be continuously monitored with records taken to
confirm the target addition rate, ± 10%, according to the mix design.
-Q
5 Mixing uniformity shall be continuously inspected visually by the contractor and work shall
stop when the cement or hydrated lime is seen to agglomerate or not fully mix in during the
LL
production process.
6 Should either the slurry mixer supply to the mixer fail to operate or deliver the correct
W
proportions to the recycler, all work shall cease until this has been corrected. Prior to
resuming work, the process shall be checked fully by trialling in a short sacrificial trial strip
s
exceeding 50 metres to ensure the process is fully operational and under control.
en
7 The recycler shall proceed in a continuous operation to the full depth of the layer being
m
recycled as required by the pavement design.

e
8 The CTB moisture content prior to compaction shall be within ± 2 % of the target determined
Si
during the mix design procedure to achieve maximum density.
9 Initial rolling shall be carried out using a single-drum vibrating roller with a static mass that is
appropriate with the thickness of the layer being compacted. The vibration mode must be set
on high amplitude to achieve maximum penetration of compactive effort.
10 The rolling pattern should first concentrate on the middle section between the rear wheel
paths of the recycler, then across the full cut width to achieve uniform density. The travel
speed of the roller shall not exceed 3 km/h.
11 When initial compaction is complete, the surface shall be struck off to level by a grader and
the surface again checked for level and any defects or damage caused during the operation
which shall be corrected prior to final compaction.
12 Where the recycler has a screed finisher which achieves the required level, initial
compaction shall follow the recommendations of the recycler supplier.
13 Where a second adjacent strip is to be laid immediately an additional insitu stabilisation, the
recycler shall overlap the previously stabilised strip by 300mm, ensuring the strip is not
excessively over or under bindered, or watered.
14 Upon completion of compaction the surface shall be sprayed with bituminous prime coat at a
2
rate of 0.45 to 0.75 kg/m and allowed to cure for a minimum of 24 hours without trafficking
unless otherwise authorised by the Engineer. Where the surface is to be opened to traffic
prior to surfacing with asphalt, the prime coat shall be blinded with fine aggregate or sand
2
applied at a rate of 5.5 to 7.0 kg/m .
15 Traffic, including delivery vehicles shall not be permitted on the uncompacted or semi-
compacted recycled material. The exposed longitudinal joint shall be protected from damage
by construction plant and vehicles.
8.4.4 Exsitu Production Of Cement Treated Base
1 The exsitu production of CTB shall be produced by specialist recycling and stabilisation
ar
production equipment specifically designed for the purpose of exsitu processes.
at
2 The active filler (cement/hydrated lime) shall be supplied to the mixer by specifically
-Q
designed and calibrated weighing apparatus to ensure the correct addition of the
cement/hydraulic binder. The addition shall be continuously monitored with records taken to
confirm the target addition rate, ± 10%, according to the mix design.
LL
stop when the cement or hydrated lime is seen to agglomerate or not fully mix in during the
W
production process.
s
4 CTB shall not segregate significantly during production and all measures shall be taken to
en
avoid this occurrence.

m
5 CTB shall be conveyed from the mixer to its place in the Works as rapidly as possible in
covered vehicles which will prevent segregation or drying out and ensure that the material is
e
of the required workability and moisture content at the point of delivery to the paving
Si
equipment.
6 Where CTB is produced on an exsitu production plant, the material shall be laid and fully
compacted within 2 hours of production, ensuring that the moisture content is within the
required limits at the time of laying. CTB that exceeds 2 hours shall be rejected.
8.4.5 Laying And Compaction Of Cement Treated Base
1 Exsitu produced CTB materials shall be laid with paving machines and compaction plant as
detailed in Section 6 Part 5, but may include additional specialist equipment deemed
appropriate indicated in the detailed method statement.
2 The CTB moisture content prior to compaction shall be within ± 2 % of the target determined
3 Material shall be laid to a thickness that would result in layers not more than 150 mm thick
4 Final compaction for CTB shall follow the general requirements Section 6 Part 6 using a
combination of tandem steel wheeled rollers and pneumatic tyred rollers in accordance with
the approved method statement.
5 Where the surface of the recycled layer has been graded to level, it may be dampened with
a water spray prior to compaction. Care shall be taken not to use excessive watering.
7 Where a second adjacent strip is to be laid immediately by echelon paving of exsitu material,
the requirements of Section 6 Part 5 shall be followed.
8 After final rolling, the smoothness, levels, crossfalls, density and thickness shall be checked
ar
at
2
-Q
2
LL
8.4.6 Joints In Cement Treated Base

W
1 Transverse joints shall be made by cutting back at least 2 metres to the position of
conforming level and compaction, and cleaned to remove any loose material. The joint shall
s
be fully compacted and left level and smooth.

en
2 Longitudinal joints shall be formed as follows:

m
3 For paver laid materials, fresh joints may be formed by compacting 500mm at the edge of
e
the initial stabilised strip with a single roller pass and abutting the adjacent new strip prior to
Si
cross compaction. Joints are deemed to be fresh when the pavement materials on both
sides of the joint have been stabilised and are able to be compacted within 1 hour. The
500mm partially compacted strip together with the exposed edge shall be lightly moistened
prior to placement of the second strip.
4 For paver laid materials and where the stabilised layer has been laid previously or is deemed
unworkable, the existing strip shall be cut back by 150mm to its full depth and cleaned to
remove any loose material prior to paving the new adjacent strip.
5 Longitudinal construction joints in CTB shall always be formed at the lane line marking
positions where practically possible.
8.4.7 Sampling And Testing - Cement Treated Base
1 The Contractor shall produce an inspection and test plan for the complete process which
shall include daily production control and the finished stabilised pavement for approval by the
Engineer.
2 Bulk samples shall be taken from the stabilised material to the full depth of the layer.
3 Sample increments will be wrapped tightly in plastic bags to prevent moisture loss and
protected from the heat and sun in an ambient temperature of no greater than 20°C.
4 Samples shall be provided from the laid CTB before compaction, as approved by the
Engineer. One group of five samples shall be provided from five locations equally spaced
along a diagonal that bisects each 800m2 or part thereof laid each day. The number of
groups may be increased if required by the Engineer. Each group shall be combined to
provide samples for reference density, compressive strength and laboratory determined
moisture content.
5 For each group, 3 specimens for reference density and compressive strength testing shall be
compacted in accordance with AASHTO T180within 2 hours of the addition of the cement
and cured in accordance with ASTM D1632, and tested in accordance with ASTM D1633.
6 To determine the reference density of test specimens the mould shall be weighed prior to
making the specimen and the mass recorded. Immediately after completion of compaction,
the specimen and mould shall be weighed and the mass recorded. These masses together
with the nominal volume of the mould shall be used to derive the reference density of the
ar
specimen.
at
7 The in-situ density of a layer of cement bound material shall be taken as the average of the
densities at five locations equally spaced along a diagonal that bisects each 800 m2 or part
-Q
thereof laid each day. The in-situ density at each location shall be the average of two
readings obtained using a nuclear density gauge in compliance with ASTM D6938. Readings
LL
8 Testing for CTB shall be required as Table 8. 2 Sampling and Testing Requirements for
Cement Treated Base
W
s
Table 8. 2 Sampling and Testing Requirements for Cement Treated Base

en
TEST METHOD SAMPLE POINT SPECIFICATION FREQUENCY

m
Sieve Pre-Stabilised Pulverised 3

ASTM D422 Design mix gradation 1/1000m
Analysis Materials
e
Pre-Stabilised Pulverised Less than design mix

Si
3
Liquid Limit ASTM D4318 1/1000m
Materials determination
Plasticity Pre-Stabilised Pulverised Less than design mix 3
ASTM D4318 1/1000m
Index Materials determination
ASTM Compacted Stabilised 2
Field Density 100% reference density 5/800m
D1556/D6938 Material
Field
Pre-compacted Stabilised 2
Moisture ASTM D4944 ± 2% OMC 1/800m
Material
Content
Surface Compacted Stabilised 1 2
ASTM E2583 Report Values 5/800m
Modulus Material
Compressive Pre-compacted Stabilised Individual >2.1 MPa 2
ASTM D1633 1/800m
Strength Material Average of 3 <4.2 MPa
Reference Pre-compacted Stabilised 2
AASHTO T-180 - 1/800m
density Material
Moisture 2
ASTM D2216 Laid Stabilised Material ± 2% OMC 1/800m
Content
Note 1 – The surface modulus determined in accordance with ASTM E2583 shall be reported as
directed by the Engineer for data collection. It shall not form part of the acceptance or rejection
criteria.
8.4.8 Evenness And Level
1 The transverse regularity of the surface of the CTB shall be tested by means of a 4 metre
long straight edge. No irregularity in excess of 10 mm shall be permitted.
2 The longitudinal regularity of the surface of the CTB shall be tested by means of a rolling
straight edge. No irregularity in excess of 10 mm shall be permitted.
the designated grade levels to within ± 10 mm.
reshaping by adding or removing material as necessary, adding water if necessary and
recompacting the layer. The minimum length of rectification shall be 50 metres.
5 Acceptance of the stabilised pavement is subject to completion of all testing and inspection
requirements to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
ar
8.5 BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIAL (BSM)
at
8.5.1
-Q
Preparation And Mix Design For Bitumen Stabilised Material
1 The Contractor shall produce a detailed existing pavement investigation report and the
proposed stabilised material mix design which shall be submitted for approval by the
LL
Engineer, in liaison with Qatar Quality Standards, at least 30 days prior to the
commencement of the stabilisation works. The pavement investigation report shall consist of
W
cores and trial pits excavated to the existing subgrade and include tests for, but not limited
to, California Bearing Ratio, Dynamic Cone Penetrometer, gradation, plasticity index and
liquid limit, and other tests required by the selected design method.
s
en
2 All equipment and method statements shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer at
least 30 days prior to commencement of works.
m
3 The mix design method for the BSM mix shall be as approved by the Engineer. Methods
e
may include that stated in this part, or MCHW Specification for Highways Works Series 900:
(UK), or other similar and equivalent recognised international design methods for Bitumen
Si
Stabilised Material.
4 The aggregate gradation for BSM shall follow the guideline in Error! Reference source not
ound. unless otherwise stated in the approved alternative design method.
5 The Design Mixture for BSM shall have minimum bitumen content of 2.5% with an active
filler content no greater than 1%, by mass of total mix.
6 The Binder Expansion Ratio (ER) shall be greater than 10 times and the Binder Half Life
(T½) greater than 12 seconds.
7 The Indirect Tensile Strength dry (ITSdry - 100mmØ specimens) shall be greater than 225
kPa and the Indirect Tensile Strength wet (ITSwet - 100mmØ specimens) shall be greater
than 100 kPa when tested in accordance with ASTM D6931. The Tensile Strength Ratio
(TSR) shall be greater than 80%
8 The Unconfined Compressive Strength of the mixture shall be between 1200 and 3500 kPa
when tested in accordance with ASTM D1633.
8.5.2 Site Trials For Bitumen Stabilised Material
1 The BSM mix design shall be subjected to full preliminary trials and testing at least 10 days
prior to commencement of the full works and shall determine:
(a) the effectiveness of the production and laying plant for exsitu processes;
(b) the number of passes of the stabilisation machine necessary to achieve uniform
pulverisation and mixing for insitu processes;
(c) the field moisture content control required to achieve specified compaction
requirements;
(d) the compaction routine and rolling patterns necessary to meet the specified
compaction requirements;
(e) the reference density;
(f) the effectiveness of the contractor’s inspection and test plan.
2 The length of the trial section shall be at least 150 metres and the full width of the
carriageway proposed for stabilisation to ensure joints and full width compaction can be
ar
achieved without excessive segregation or other significant defects.
at
2
3 The trial area shall be sprayed with bituminous prime coat at a rate of 0.45 to 0.75 kg/m and
-Q
allowed to cure for a minimum of 24 hours without trafficking unless otherwise authorised by
the Engineer.
4 Tests from the trial areas shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 3 days prior
LL
to commencement of the works. No works may proceed until all tests and final method
statements have been submitted and approved by the Engineer.
W
5 Where materials and processes are demonstrably similar, mix designs and trials tests from
previous projects may be approved at the discretion of the Engineer, in liaison with Qatar
s
Quality Standards.
en
8.5.3 Insitu Stabilisation And Compaction Of Bitumen Stabilised Material

m
1 The insitu BSM stabilisation/recycling shall be produced by specialist equipment specifically

designed for the purpose of insitu recycling processes.
e
Si
2 The material shall be pulverised and stabilised in a single layer if its compacted thickness is
300 mm or less. If the compacted thickness is greater than 300 mm, the material shall be
pulverised and stabilised in the minimum number of layers between100 mm and 300 mm
thick. Where more than one layer is required, the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that
the lower layer has achieved adequate stability before proceeding with the overlying layer.
3 Where required by the Engineer the stability of a layer in any area shall be assessed after a
curing period of at least 24 hours by channelled trafficking using a rigid three-axle tipper
truck loaded to a gross mass of 24 tonnes (assumed equivalent to three standard axles).
The vertical deformation shall be measured in all wheel-tracks at monitoring points on each
of 5 transverse sections set 1 metre apart after 5, 15, 30 and 40 passes of the truck. The
mean vertical deformations at the above trafficking increments shall be plotted against the
respective number of truck passes and the mean vertical deformation corresponding to 100
standard axles shall be interpolated. The layer shall be deemed acceptable if the mean
vertical deformation corresponding to 100 standard axles is less than 10 mm.
4 The bitumen tanker shall a consistent flow of binder to the recycler. The addition shall be
continuously monitored with records taken to confirm the target addition rate, ± 10%,
according to the mix design.
5 The active filler (cement) shall be supplied to the recycler by a specifically designed and
calibrated mobile slurry mixer to ensure the dustless addition of the cement/hydraulic binder.
The addition shall be monitored with records taken to confirm the correct addition rate
according to the mix design.
stop when bitumen streaks or blotches are observed, or where cement is seen to
agglomerate or not fully mix in during the production process.
7 Should either the slurry mixer or the binder supply to the mixer fail to operate or deliver the
correct proportions to the recycler, all work shall cease until this has been corrected. Prior to
resuming work, the process shall be checked fully by trialling in a short sacrificial trial strip
exceeding 50 metres to ensure the process is fully operational and under control.
8 The recycler shall proceed in a continuous operation to the full depth of the layer being
recycled as required by the pavement design.
9 The BSM moisture content prior to compaction shall be within ± 2 % of the target determined
ar
10 Initial rolling shall be carried out using a single-drum vibrating roller with a static mass that is
at
appropriate with the thickness of the layer being compacted. The vibration mode must be set
-Q
on high amplitude to achieve maximum penetration of compactive effort.
11 The rolling pattern should first concentrate on the middle section between the rear wheel
paths of the recycler, then across the full cut width to achieve uniform density. The travel
LL
speed of the roller shall not exceed 3 km/h.
12 When initial compaction is complete, the surface shall be struck off to level by a grader and
W
the surface again checked for level and any defects or damage caused during the operation
which shall be corrected prior to final compaction.
s
en
13 Where the recycler has a screed finisher which achieves the required level, initial
compaction shall follow the recommendations of the recycler supplier.
m
14 Where a second adjacent strip is to be laid immediately an additional insitu stabilisation, the
recycler shall overlap the previously stabilised strip by 300mm, ensuring the strip is not
e
excessively over or under bindered, or watered.

Si
rate of 0.45 to 0.75 kg/m2 and allowed to cure for a minimum of 24 hours without trafficking
applied at a rate of 5.5 to 7.0 kg/m2.
16 Traffic, including delivery vehicles shall not be permitted on the uncompacted or semi-
compacted recycled material. The exposed longitudinal joint shall be protected from damage
by construction plant and vehicles.
8.5.4 Exsitu Production Of Bitumen Stabilised Material
1 The exsitu production of BSM shall be produced by specialist recycling and stabilisation
production equipment specifically designed for the purpose of exsitu processes.
2 The bitumen shall be supplied to the mixer by specifically designed and calibrated metering
apparatus to ensure the correct addition of the binder. The addition shall be continuously
monitored with records taken to confirm the target addition rate, ± 10%, according to the mix
design.
3 The active filler (cement) shall be supplied to the mixer by specifically designed and
calibrated weighing apparatus to ensure the correct addition of the cement/hydraulic binder.
The addition shall be continuously monitored with records taken to confirm the target
addition rate, ± 10%, according to the mix design.
stop when bitumen streaks or blotches are observed or where cement is seen to
agglomerate or not fully mix in during the production process.
5 BSM shall not segregate significantly during production and all measures shall be taken to
avoid this occurrence.
6 BSM shall be conveyed from the mixer to its place in the Works as rapidly as possible in
covered vehicles which will prevent segregation or drying out and ensure that the material is
of the required workability and moisture content at the point of delivery to the paving
equipment.
7 Where BSM is produced on an exsitu production plant, the material shall be laid and fully
compacted within 2 hours of production, ensuring that the moisture content is within the
ar
required limits at the time of laying. BSM that exceeds 2 hours shall be rejected.
at
8.5.5 Laying And Compaction Of Bitumen Stabilised Material
-Q
1 Exsitu produced BSM materials shall be laid with paving machines and compaction plant as
detailed in Section 6 Part 5, but may include additional specialist equipment deemed
appropriate indicated in the detailed method statement.
LL
2 The BSM moisture content prior to compaction shall be within ± 2 % of the target determined
W
3 Material shall be laid to a thickness that would result in layers not more than 150 mm thick
s
en
m
4 Final compaction for BSM shall follow the general requirements Section 6 Part 5 using a
combination of tandem steel wheeled rollers and pneumatic tyred rollers in accordance with
e
the approved method statement.

Si
5 Where the surface of the recycled layer has been graded to level, it may be dampened with
a water spray prior to compaction. Care shall be taken not to use excessive watering.
7 Where a second adjacent strip is to be laid immediately by echelon paving of exsitu material,
the requirements of Section 6 Part 5 shall be followed.
8 After final rolling, the smoothness, levels, crossfalls, density and thickness shall be checked
2
2
8.5.6 Joints In Bitumen Stabilised Material
1 Transverse joints shall be made by cutting back at least 2 metres to the position of
conforming level and compaction, and cleaned to remove any loose material. The joint shall
be fully compacted and left level and smooth.
2 Longitudinal joints shall be formed as follows:

(a) For paver laid materials, fresh joints may be formed by compacting 500mm at the
edge of the initial stabilised strip with a single roller pass and abutting the adjacent
new strip prior to cross compaction. Joints are deemed to be fresh when the pavement
materials on both sides of the joint have been stabilised and are able to be compacted
within 1 hour. The 500mm partially compacted strip together with the exposed edge
shall be lightly moistened prior to placement of the second strip.
(b) For paver laid materials and where the stabilised layer has been laid previously or is
deemed unworkable, the existing strip shall be cut back by 150mm to its full depth and
cleaned to remove any loose material prior to paving the new adjacent strip.
3 Longitudinal construction joints in BSM shall always be formed at the lane line marking
ar
positions where practically possible.
at
8.5.7 Sampling And Testing - Bitumen Stabilised Material-Q
1 The Contractor shall produce an inspection and test plan for the complete process which
shall include daily production control and the finished stabilised pavement for approval by the
Engineer.
LL
2 Bulk samples shall be taken from the stabilised material to the full depth of the layer.
W
3 Sample increments will be wrapped tightly in plastic bags to prevent moisture loss and
protected from the heat and sun in an ambient temperature of no greater than 20°C.
s
en
4 Samples shall be provided from the laid BSM before compaction, as approved by the
Engineer. One group of five samples shall be provided from five locations equally spaced
2
along a diagonal that bisects each 800m or part thereof laid each day. The number of
m
groups may be increased if required by the Engineer.

e
5 For each group, 3 specimens for strength based testing shall be compacted within 2 hours of
Si
the addition of the bitumen binder. Reference density and UCS shall be compacted and
cured in accordance with AASHTO T-180, and tested in accordance with ASTM D1633. ITS
testing shall be compacted in accordance with ASTM D6926 and tested in accordance with
ASTM D6931.
6 The foamed bitumen expansion ratio and half life shall be determined at the commencement
of works each day if required by the Engineer.
7 To determine the reference density of test specimens the mould shall be weighed prior to
making the specimen and the mass recorded. Immediately after completion of compaction,
the specimen and mould shall be weighed and the mass recorded. These masses together
with the nominal volume of the mould shall be used to derive the reference density of the
specimen.
8 The in-situ density of a layer of cement bound material shall be taken as the average of the
2
densities at five locations equally spaced along a diagonal that bisects each 800 m or part
thereof laid each day. The in-situ density at each location shall be the average of two
readings obtained using a nuclear density gauge in compliance with ASTM D6938. Readings
9 Testing for BSM shall be required as Table 8.3 Sampling and Testing Requirements for
BSM.
Table 8.3 Sampling and Testing Requirements for BSM

SPECIFICATION
TEST METHOD SAMPLE POINT FREQUENCY
LIMIT
Pre-Stabilised Design mix 3

Sieve Analysis ASTM D422 1/1000m
Pulverised Materials gradation
Pre-Stabilised 3
Liquid Limit ASTM D4318 Maximum 25 1/1000m
Pulverised Materials
Pre-Stabilised 3
Plasticity Index ASTM D4318 Maximum 6 1/1000m
Pulverised Materials
ASTM Compacted Stabilised 100% reference 2

Field Density 5/800m
D1556/D6938 Material density
ar
Field Moisture Pre-compacted 2
ASTM D4944 ± 2% OMC 1/800m
Content Stabilised Material
at
Surface Compacted Stabilised Report Test 2
ASTM E2583 1 5/800m
Modulus Material Values
-Q
Binder Pre-mixing/ 1/first 500
This Part:‎8.6 >10 times 2
Expansion Ratio stabilisation m /day
LL
Binder Half Life Pre-mixing/ 1/first 500

This Part:‎8.6 > 12 seconds 2
(τ½) stabilisation m /day
W
Unconfined
ASTM D1633 Pre-compacted 2
Compressive 1200 to 3500 kPa 1/800m
(150mmØ) Stabilised Material
Strength
s
en
Moisture Laid Stabilised 2

ASTM D2216 ± 2% OMC 1/800m
Content Material
m
Indirect Tensile ASTM D6931 Pre-compacted ITSdry >225 kPa 1/day if

2
Strength (100mmØ) Stabilised Material ITSwet >100 kPa >800m
e
Tensile Strength Pre-compacted 1/day if

Si
ITSwet / ITSdry > 80% 2

Retained (TSR) Stabilised Material >800m
Note 1 – The surface modulus determined in accordance with ASTM E2583 shall be reported as
directed by the Engineer for data collection. It shall not form part of the acceptance or rejection
criteria.
8.5.8 Evenness And Level
1 The transverse regularity of the surface of the BSM shall be tested by means of a 4 metre
long straight edge. No irregularity in excess of 10 mm shall be permitted.
2 The longitudinal regularity of the surface of the BSM shall be tested by means of a rolling
straight edge. No irregularity in excess of 10 mm shall be permitted.
the designated grade levels to within ± 10 mm.
reshaping by adding or removing material as necessary, adding water if necessary and
recompacting the layer. The minimum length of rectification shall be 50 metres.
5 Acceptance of the stabilised pavement is subject to completion of all testing and inspection
requirements to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
8.6 DETERMINATION OF THE FOAMING CHARACTERISTICS OF BITUMEN

(EXPANSION RATIO AND HALF LIFE)
8.6.1 Scope
1 The foaming characteristics of bitumen are defined by the Expansion Ratio and Half Life of
the bitumen in its expanded state. The expanded state of the bitumen is achieved when a
small percentage of water is introduced into hot bitumen. The objective is to determine the
ar
percentage of water required that will produce the best foam characteristics for a particular
at
source of bitumen. The aim is to produce foamed bitumen with the largest expansion ratio
with the longest half-life possible. -Q
8.6.2 Definitions
LL
1 The expansion ratio is a measure of the viscosity of the foam and provides an indication of
how well the binder will disperse in the mix. It is calculated as the ratio of the maximum
volume of foam relative to the original volume of bitumen. The half-life is a measure of the
W
stability of the foam and provides an indication of the rate of collapse of the foam during
mixing. It is calculated as the time taken in seconds for the foam to collapse to half of its
s
maximum volume.
en
8.6.3 Apparatus
m
1 The following equipment shall be required:

e
(a) For mix design only: Foamed Bitumen Laboratory Unit, capable of producing foamed
Si
bitumen at a rate of between 50g and 200g per second. The method of production
shall closely simulate that of full scale production of foamed bitumen on the recycling
machine. The apparatus shall have a thermostatically controlled kettle capable of
holding a mass of 10kg of bitumen at a constant temperature between the range of
160ºC and 200ºC, ± 5ºC. The unit shall have an expansion chamber similar to that on
the recycling machine in which cold water is injected into hot bitumen. Water injection
shall be variable from 0 to 5% (by mass of the bitumen) with an accuracy of 0.25%.
The plant shall capable of accurately discharging a predetermined mass of foamed
bitumen directly into the mixing bowl of an electrically driven laboratory mixer with a
minimum capacity of 10kg.
(b) Cylindrical metal container, 250mm diameter and at least 20 litre capacity.
(c) Calibrated Dip Stick, calibrated for the cylindrical metal container with 500g of bitumen
as 1 unit measure. Prongs are attached to the dip stick at every 5 or 6 times the unit
volume.
(d) A stop-watch with 60 second dial.
(e) Heat resistant gloves.
(f) An electronic balance to weigh up to 10kg, accurate to 1g.
8.6.4 Method
1 Preparation
(a) The foamed bitumen laboratory unit discharge rates are checked in accordance with
the manufactures specifications. If the unit is being used for the first time then the
pump rate and water flow rates need to be calibrated as per the manufactures
specifications. Check that 500g of bitumen is being discharged at the predetermined
settings.
(b) Ensure that the cylindrical metal container and dip stick are reasonably clean.
Discharge foamed bitumen, at least twice, into cylindrical metal container prior to
testing in order to pre-heat the container. Decant excess bitumen from the container
into a suitable waste receptacle.
2 Testing
(a) Heat the bitumen in the kettle of the foamed bitumen laboratory unit with the pump
ar
circulating the bitumen through the system until the required temperature is achieved
(normally starting with 160 °C). Maintain the required temperature for at least 5
at
minutes prior to commencing with testing.
(b)
-Q
Set the water flow-meter to achieve the required water injection rate (normally starting
with 2 % by mass of the bitumen).
(c) Discharge foamed bitumen into the preheated steel drum for the calculated spray time
LL
for 500 g of bitumen. Immediately after the foamed bitumen discharge stops, start a
stopwatch.
W
(d) Using the calibrated dipstick measure the maximum height the foamed bitumen
achieves in the drum. This maximum volume is recorded as the expansion. Continue
s
to measure the time in seconds that the foam takes to dissipate to half of its maximum
en
volume. This is recorded as the foamed bitumen’s half-life.

(e) Repeat the above procedures three times or until similar readings are achieved.
m
(f) The expansion and half-life are determined at different percentages of water.
e
Typically, values of 2 %, 3 % and 4 % by mass of bitumen are used.

Si
(g) Plot a graph of the expansion ratio versus half-life at the different water injection rates
on the same set of axes. The optimum water addition is chosen as an average of the
two water contents required to meet the minimum criteria. (Figure 7.1 Determination of
Optimum Foaming Water)
(h) If the required properties are not met at 160°C, further testing should be carried out
with the bitumen at higher temperatures (typically 170°C and 180°C).
8.6.5 Reporting
1 The foamed bitumen characteristics and optimum water content are reported as;
Optimum water content (%): Percentage by mass of bitumen;
Expansion (times): Ratio of maximum expansion to original volume of bitumen;
Half-life (sec): Time taken from maximum expansion to half this volume.
8.6.6 Site Quality Control

The above method may be used to determine the expansion ratio and half-life of foamed
bitumen dispensed by the production plant or recycler.
ar
at
-Q
Figure 7.1 Determination of Optimum Foaming Water
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
ar
APPENDIX
at
-Q
GUIDANCE FOR THE DESIGN OF RECYCLED AND STABILISED
MATERIALS (MIX DESIGNS)
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
8.7 GENERAL 23
8.7.1 PREPARATION OF SAMPLES FOR MIX DESIGN PROCEDURES 23
8.7.2 MIX DESIGN PROCEDURE FOR CEMENT STABILISED MATERIALS 25
8.7.3 MIX DESIGN PROCEDURE FOR BITUMEN STABILISED MATERIALS (BSMS) 27
8.7.4 DETERMINATION OF THE FLUID / DENSITY RELATIONSHIP 28
8.7.5 PREPARATION FOR STABILISING W ITH BITUMEN EMULSION (BSM-EMULSION) 29
8.7.6 PREPARATION FOR STABILISING W ITH FOAMED BITUMEN (BSM-FOAM) 29
8.7.7 MANUFACTURE OF 100MM DIAMETER SPECIMENS 32
8.7.8 DETERMINATION OF THE STRENGTH OF 100MM DIAMETER SPECIMENS 34
8.7.9 MANUFACTURE OF 150MM DIAMETER SPECIMENS 34
8.7.10 DETERMINATION OF THE STRENGTH OF 150MM DIAMETER SPECIMENS 36
8.7.11 STRENGTH TEST PROCEDURES 37
8.7.12 SELECTION OF THE AMOUNT OF BITUMEN TO BE ADDED FOR BSM 38
8.7.13 DETERMINATION OF THE SHEAR PROPERTIES OF BSM 40
8.7.14 DETERMINATION OF TRIAXIAL SHEAR PARAMETERS USING SIMPLE TRIAXIAL TEST 40
8.7.15 USING LABORATORY TEST RESULTS FOR ESTIMATING STRUCTURAL LAYER COEFFICIENTS 45
ar
8.7.16 PROFORMA REPORT SHEET FOR ITS TESTING 46
8.7.17 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS 47
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
8.7 GENERAL
The detailed procedures for carrying out stabilisation mix designs in a laboratory are
described below. Procedures for both cement (or lime) and bitumen stabilisation are
included as well as guidelines for interpreting the test results for bitumen stabilised materials
(BSMs). Comprehensive lists of laboratory equipment are provided. In addition, a chart has
been included showing how laboratory test results can be utilised to indicate the relevant
structural coefficient for a BSM (for use in the AASHTO 1993 pavement design method).
8.7.1 Preparation Of Samples For Mix Design Procedures
1 Field Sampling: Bulk samples are obtained from test pits excavated as part of the field
investigations. Each layer in the upper pavement (± 300mm) must be sampled separately
and at least 150kg of material recovered from each layer that is likely to be included in any
mix design procedure. Representative samples shall be obtained and prepared either from
the excavation process at source or by laboratory crushing and screening.
ar
2 Standard soil tests: Carry out the following standard tests on the material sampled from each
at
individual layer:
(a) Sieve analysis to determine the grading (ASTM D 422);
-Q
(b) Atterberg limits to determine the liquid limit and plasticity index (ASTM D 4318); and
(c) Moisture / density relationship (AASHTO T-180).
LL
3 Sample blending: Where necessary, blend the materials sampled from the different layers to
W
obtain a combined sample representing the material from the full recycling depth. The in-situ
density of the various components must be considered when blending materials, as
illustrated in
s
en
4 Figure 7.1 Determination of Optimum Foaming Water Repeat the standard soil tests
described above to determine the grading and plasticity index of the blended sample.
e m
Existing upper
Si
pavement structure
60mm Asphalt
3
(in situ density 2300 kg/m )
60mm Asphalt
Recycling depth 200mm
+
200mm Subbase =
3
140mm Gravel
(in situ density 2000 kg/m )
The materials are blended in proportion to layer thickness and insitu density as follows:
Per square metre Proportion by mass Per 10kg sample
Material
(kg) (%) (g)
0.06 x 2300 =
Asphalt (60mm at 2300 kg/m3) 138/418 = 0.33 0.33 x 10000 = 3300
138
0.14 x 2000 =
Gravel (140mm at 2000 kg/m3) 280/418 = 0.67 0.67 x 10000 = 6700
280
Total 418 1.00 10000
Figure 7.2 Example of Density Proportioning
5 Representative proportioning: Separate the material in the representative sample into the
following four fractions:
 Retained on the 19.0mm sieve;
 Passing the 19.0mm sieve, but retained the 12.5 mm sieve;
 Passing the 12.5 mm sieve, but retained on the 4.75mm sieve; and
 Passing the 4.75mm sieve.
Reconstitute representative samples in accordance with the grading up to the portion
passing the 19.0mm sieve. Substitute the portion retained on 19.0mm sieve with material
that passes the 19.0mm sieve, but is retained on the 12.5 mm sieve. The example in Table
8.4 Material Combination explains this procedure:
Table 8.4 Material Combination

Sieve analysis Quantity of material to be included in a 10kg sample
ar
Sieve
Percentage passing Passing 12.5mm Passing 19mm
size Passing 4.75mm
at
(from sieve analysis) Retained 4.75mm Retained 12.5mm
(mm)
19 90.5
-Q
((72.3-53.6)/100 x
(53.6/100 x 10000) ((100-72.3)/100 x 10000)
12.5 72.3 = 5360g
10000)
= 2770g
= 1870g
4.75 53.6
LL
W
If there is insufficient material (i.e. passing the 19mm sieve but retained on the 12.5mm
sieve) for substituting that retained on the 19mm sieve, then lightly crush the material
retained on the 19.0mm sieve to provide more of this fraction.
s
en
6 Sample quantities: The guidelines shown Table 8.5 Test Quantities should be used for the
quantity of material required for the respective tests:
e m
Table 8.5 Test Quantities

Si
Test Sample quantity required
Moisture / density relationship (AASHTO T180) 5 x 7kg

Unconfined Compressive Strength (150mm Ø specimens) 20kg per stabiliser content
Bitumen stabilisation mix design (100mm Ø specimens) Minimum 10kg per stabiliser content
Bitumen stabilisation mix design (150mm Ø specimens ) Minimum 20kg per stabiliser content
Determination of moisture content Approximately 1kg
7 Hygroscopic moisture content: Two representative air-dried samples, each approximately

1kg, are used to determine the hygroscopic (air dried) moisture content of the material.
(Note: Larger sample size should be used for more coarsely-graded materials.) Weigh the
air-dried samples, accurate to the nearest 0.1g, and then place them in an oven at a
temperature of between 105ºC and 110ºC until they achieve constant mass. The
hygroscopic moisture content (W air-dry) is the loss of mass expressed as a percentage of the
dry mass of the sample. Determine the hygroscopic moisture using equation 1:
W air-dry = (Mmoist – Mdry) / Mdry x 100 [Equation 1]
where: W air-dry = hygroscopic moisture content [% by mass]

Mmoist = mass of moist material [g]
Mdry = mass of dry material [g]
8.7.2 Mix Design Procedure For Cement Stabilised Materials
1 Determination of the Moisture / Density Relationship: This test is carried out using standard
compaction effort to determine the Optimum Moisture Content (OMC) and Maximum Dry
Density (MDD) of the cement stabilised material.
Step 1: Weigh out the required mass of stabilising agent for each of five 7kg samples
prepared as described in ‎8.7.1. The amount of stabilising agent required (expressed as a
percentage by mass of the dry sample) should be close to the anticipated optimum for the
material being treated. In the absence of previous tests, the following can be used as a
guideline:
ar
Subbase layers: 2% for coarse material (> 50% retained on 4.75mm sieve)
at
3% for fine material (< 50% retained on 4.75mm sieve)
-Q
Base layers: 4% for coarse material (> 50% retained on 4.75mm sieve)
6% for fine material (< 50% retained on 4.75mm sieve)
LL
Step 2: Add the stabilising agent to the raw material and mix immediately prior to the
addition of water. In order to simulate conditions on the road, compaction of the stabilised
W
material is delayed for one hour after mixing the untreated material with stabilising agent and
water. The mixed material is placed in an air-tight container to prevent loss of moisture and
is thoroughly mixed every fifteen minutes.
s
Step 3: Determine the OMC and MDD for the stabilised material in accordance with the
en
modified moisture-density relationship test procedure (AASHTO T-180).

m
2 Manufacture of Specimens for Strength Testing: The procedure described below is for the
e
manufacture specimens that are of 150mm in diameter and 127mm in height. These
Si
specimens will be used to determine the Unconfined Compressive Strength (UCS) and
Indirect Tensile Strength (ITS) of the material.
Step 1: Place the 20kg sample, prepared as described in ‎8.7.1, into a suitable mixing
container.
Step 2: Determine the dry mass of the sample using equation 2:
Msample = (Mair-dry/ (1 + (W air-dry x 100)) [Equation 2]
where: Msample = dry mass of sample [g]

Mair-dry = air-dried mass of the sample [g]
W air-dry = moisture content of air-dried sample [% by mass]
Step 3: Determine the required amount of stabilising agent using equation 3:
Mcement = (Cadd / 100) x Msample [Equation 3]
where: Mcement = mass of lime or cement to be added [g]

Cadd = percentage of lime or cement required [% by mass]
Msample = dry mass of the sample [g]
Step 4: Determine the percentage water to be added for optimum mixing purposes using
equation 4 and then the mass of water to be added to the sample using equation 5:
W add = W OMC - W air-dry [Equation 4]
Mwater = (W add / 100) x (Msample + Mcement) [Equation 5]
where: W add = water to be added to sample [% by mass]

W OMC = optimum moisture content [% by mass]
Mwater = mass of water to be added [g]
Mcement = mass of lime or cement to be added [g]
Step 5: Mix the material, cement and water until uniform. Allow the mixed material to stand
for one hour with occasional mixing, as described above, before compacting three 150mm
ar
diameter specimens using modified AASHTO (T-180) compaction effort. (Note: Two 150mm
diameter specimens are normally manufactured for each test.)
at
Step 6: Samples are taken during the compaction process and dried to a constant mass (at
-Q
105 to 110°C) to determine the moulding moisture content (W mould). Determine the moulding
moisture using equation 6:
W mould = (Mmoist - Mdry) / Mdry x 100)) [Equation 6]
LL
where: W mould = moulding moisture content [% by mass]

W

s
Steps 7 to 9: Repeat the above steps for at least three different stabiliser contents.
en
Step 10: Remove the specimens from the moulds either by dismantling the split moulds or, if
ordinary moulds are used, extruding the specimens carefully with an extrusion jack, avoiding
m
distortion to the compacted specimens.

Step 11: Record the mass and volume of each specimen and determine the dry density
e
using equation 7:
Si
DD = (Mbriq / Vol) x (100 / W mould +100) x 1000 [Equation 7]
where: DD = dry density [kg/m³]

Mbriq = mass of specimen [g]
3
Vol = volume of specimen [cm ]
W mould = moulding moisture content [%]
Note: With certain materials lacking cohesion, it may be necessary to leave the specimens in the
moulds for 24 hours to develop strength before extracting. When this is necessary, the
specimens in the moulds should be kept in a curing room or covered with damp cloth (hessian).
3 Curing the Specimens: Cure the specimens for seven days at 95% to 100% relative humidity
and at a temperature of 20ºC to 25ºC in a suitable curing room.
An alternative curing method is to place the specimen in sealed plastic bags and cure in an
oven at:
70ºC to 75ºC for 24 hours for cement; or
60ºC to 62 ºC for 45 hours for lime.

After the curing period, remove the specimens from the curing room (or plastic bags) and
allow to cool to ambient temperature, if necessary. Specimens for unconfined compressive
strength (UCS) tests should be submerged in water at 22°C to 25°C for four hours prior to
testing.
4 Strength Tests: The Unconfined Compressive Strength (UCS) test and the Indirect Tensile
Strength (ITS) test procedures are described under ‎8.7.11.
5 Determination of the Optimum Stabiliser Content: The ITS and UCS strengths achieved are
plotted against the percentage stabilising agent added using the average UCS or ITS of the
three specimens for each stabiliser content, ignoring any obvious incorrect result that may
have been caused by damage to the specimen before testing. The required application rate
of stabilising agent is that percentage at which the minimum required criteria are met.
8.7.3 Mix Design Procedure For Bitumen Stabilised Materials (Bsms)
ar
1 Active Filler Requirements: Bitumen stabilisation is normally carried out in combination with a
at
small amount (1% by mass) of active filler (cement or hydrated lime) to enhance the
dispersion of the bitumen and/or the breaking time (where bitumen emulsion is used as the
-Q
stabilisation agent). The PI of the material is used as an initial guideline for the use of
hydrated lime or cement in the mix:
LL
Table 8.6 Guide to Addition of Active Filler

W
Plasticity Index: < 10 Plasticity Index: > 10
Pre-treat with hydrated lime (ICL value)

Carry out Preliminary Level 1 tests
s
(The initial consumption of lime (ICL value)

(explained below) to determine the need to
en
must first be determined using the

add cement or hydrated lime.
appropriate pH test.)
m
Pre-treatment of material with a PI > 10 requires that the lime and water be added at least 2
hours prior to the addition of the bitumen emulsion or foamed bitumen. (The treated material
e
must be placed in an air-tight container to retain moisture and the moisture content checked
Si
and, if necessary, adjusted prior to adding the bitumen stabilising agent.) Such materials are
not subjected to “Preliminary Level 1” tests.
2 Preliminary Level 1 Tests: Where the PI < 10, the need for an active filler and the type of
active filler (cement or hydrated lime) that is appropriate for the material must first be
determined by carrying out “Level 1” tests on three different mixes. The same amount of
bitumen (residual bitumen for bitumen emulsion treatment) is added to all three mixes,
determined from the fractions passing the 4.75mm and 0.075mm sieves, as shown in Table
8.7 Suggested bitumen addition relative to key aggregate fractions.
Table 8.7 Suggested bitumen addition relative to key aggregate fractions

Percentage passing sieve size (%) Bitumen addition
(% of dry aggregate)
4.75mm 0.075mm
< 5.0 2.0
5.0 – 7.5 2.25
< 50
7.5 – 10.0 2.5
> 10.0 2.75
< 5.0 2.25
5.0 – 7.5 2.5
> 50
7.5 – 10.0 3.0
> 10.0 3.5
ar
The first mix contains no active filler, 1% cement is added to the second mix and 1%
hydrated lime is added to the third mix. 100mm diameter specimens are manufactured,
at
cured and tested to determine the relevant ITSDRY, ITSWET and TSR values as described
in ‎8.7.12.
-Q
Where the TSR value for the mix with no active filler added is in excess of 60%, the mix
design should be undertaken with no active filler. (This situation is usually confined to
materials consisting of good quality crushed stone, often including a high proportion of
LL
reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material.)

Where the TSR value of the mix with no active filler added is less than 60%, the mix with the
W
type of active filler that produces a significantly higher TSR value (> 5%) indicates whether
cement or hydrated lime should be used. If the TSR values for both active fillers are of the
s
same order (difference < 5%) then either type of active filler is suitable.
en
Note. Should cement and/or hydrated lime be not readily available and tests indicate the
need for an active, the use of 15% (by volume) quarry fine aggregate (5mm to 0mm) or
m
similar material with > 10% passing the 0.075mm sieve may be used as a substitute in the
e
mix designs.
Si
8.7.4 Determination Of The Fluid / Density Relationship

The Optimum Fluid Content (OFC) and the Maximum Dry Density (MDD) of the stabilised
material is determined using standard compaction effort.
Note: For foamed bitumen stabilisation, the OFC and MDD can be assumed to be the same
as the OMC and MDD, as determined for representative samples of the untreated material.
The OFC for bitumen emulsion treated material is the percentage by mass of bitumen
emulsion plus additional moisture required to achieve the maximum dry density in the treated
material. As described below, the OFC is determined by adding a constant percentage of
bitumen emulsion whilst varying the amount of water added.
Step 1: Measure out the bitumen emulsion as a percentage by mass of the air-dried material
for each of five prepared samples following the procedure described in ‎8.7.1. The
percentage of bitumen emulsion added is normally between 2 and 3% residual bitumen (e.g.
for 3% residual bitumen, add 5% of a 60% bitumen emulsion).
Step 2: The bitumen emulsion and water is added to the material and mixed until uniform
immediately prior to compaction.
Step 3: Determine the OFC and MDD for the stabilised material in accordance with the
modified moisture-density relationship test procedure (AASHTO T-180).
8.7.5 Preparation For Stabilising With Bitumen Emulsion (Bsm-Emulsion)

Step 1: Place the required quantity of sample into a suitable mixing container (10kg for the
manufacture of 100mm diameter specimens, or 20kg for the manufacture of 150mm
diameter specimens).
Step 2: Determine the dry mass of the sample using equation 1.
Step 3: Determine the required percentage of active filler (lime or cement) using equation 3.
Step 4: Determine the required percentage (by mass) of bitumen emulsion using equation 8:
Memul = (RBreqd / PBE) x Msample [Equation 8]
where: Memu = mass of bitumen emulsion to be added [g]

RBreqd = percentage of residual bitumen required [% by mass]
PBE = percentage of bitumen in emulsion [% by mass]
Step 5: Determine the amount of water to be added for optimum compaction purposes using
equation 9:
ar
Mwater = {((W OFC – W air-dry) / 100) x Msample} – Memul [Equation 9]
at
where: Mwater = mass of water to be added
-Q [g]
W OFC = optimum fluid content [% by mass]
LL
Memul = mass of bitumen emulsion to be added [g]

W
Step 6: Mix the material, active filler, bitumen emulsion and water together until uniform.
Immediately manufacture specimens following the relevant procedure for either 100mm or
s
150mm diameter specimens, as described in ‎8.7.7 and ‎8.7.9 respectively.

en
Repeat above steps for at least four mixes with different bitumen emulsion contents.
Recommended bitumen addition interval for different specimen sizes
m
Difference in amount of bitumen added (%) to

Specimen diameter (mm)
e
each mix
Si
100 (Level 1) 0.25

150 (Level 2) 0.1
For 100mm diameter specimens, use Error! Reference source not found. as a guideline
or the amount of bitumen addition that the material will require for effective stabilisation.
For 150mm diameter specimens, use the results of Level 1 tests from ‎8.7.8 as the maximum
addition of bitumen (i.e. the three other mixes will be in intervals of 0.1% less than this
value).
8.7.6 Preparation For Stabilising With Foamed Bitumen (Bsm-Foam)
1 Determination of the foaming properties of the bitumen: The foaming properties of each
bitumen type is characterised by:
Expansion Ratio. A measure of the viscosity of the foamed bitumen, calculated as the ratio
of the maximum volume of the foam relative to the original volume of bitumen; and
Half Life. A measure of the stability of the foamed bitumen, calculated as the time taken in
seconds for the foam to collapse to half of its maximum volume.
The objective is to determine the temperature and percentage of water addition that is
required to produce the best foam properties (maximum expansion ratio and half-life) for a
particular source of bitumen. This is achieved at three different bitumen temperatures (not
exceeding 195°C) with the following procedure:
Step 1: Heat the bitumen in the kettle of the Wirtgen WLB10 S laboratory unit with the pump
circulating the bitumen through the system until the required temperature is achieved
(normally starting with160°C). Maintain the required temperature for at least 5 minutes prior
to commencing with testing.
Step 2: Calibrate the discharge rate of the bitumen and set the timer on the Wirtgen WLB10
S to discharge 500g of bitumen (Qbitumen).
Step 3: Set the water flow-meter to achieve the required water injection rate (normally
starting with 2% by mass of the bitumen).
Step 4: Discharge foamed bitumen into a preheated (± 75°C) steel drum for a calculated
spray time for 500g of bitumen. Immediately after the foam discharge stops, start a
stopwatch.
ar
Step 5: Using the dipstick supplied with the Wirtgen WLB10 S (which is calibrated for a steel
drum of 275mm in diameter and 500g of bitumen) measure the maximum height the foamed
at
bitumen achieves in the drum. This is recorded as the maximum volume.
-Q
Step 6: Use the stopwatch to measure the time in seconds that the foam takes to dissipate
to half of its maximum volume. This is recorded as the foamed bitumen’s half-life.
Step 7: Repeat the above procedure three times or until similar readings are achieved.
LL
Step 8: Repeat steps 3 to 7 for a range of at least three water injection rates. Typically,
values of 2%, 3% and 4% by mass of bitumen are used.
W
Step 9: Plot a graph of the expansion ratio versus half-life at the different water injection
rates on the same set of axes (see the example in graph below). The optimum water
s
addition is chosen as an average of the two water contents required to meet these minimum
en
criteria.
Repeat Step 1 to 9 for two other bitumen temperatures (normally 170°C and 180°C).
m
The temperature and optimum water addition that produces the best foam is then used in the
mix design procedure described below.
e
Note: The absolute minimum foaming properties that are acceptable for effective
Si
stabilisation (material temperature of 25°C) are:

 Expansion ratio: 10 times
 Half-life: 12 seconds
2 If the minimum requirements cannot be met, the bitumen should be rejected as unsuitable
for use.
3 Prepare the material for foamed bitumen treatment as follows:

Step 1: Place 20 to 25kg of sample prepared as described in ‎8.7.1 into the Wirtgen WLM30
pugmill mixer.
Step 2: Determine the dry mass of the sample using equation 2.
Step 3: Determine the required percentage of active filler (lime or cement) using equation 3.
Step 4: Determine the percentage water to be added for optimum mixing moisture content
as calculated using equation 10. The amount of water to be added to the sample is
determined using equation 11.
W add = 0.75W OMC - W air-dry [Equation 10]
Mwater = (W add / 100) x (Msample + Mcement) [Equation 11]
where: W add = water to be added to sample [% by mass]

ar
Mwater = mass of water to be added [g]
at
Msample = dry mass of the sample -Q [g]
Step 5: Mix the material, active filler and water in the mixer until uniform.
LL
Note: Inspect the sample after mixing to ensure that the mixed material is not packed
against the sides of the mixer. If this situation occurs, mix a new sample at a lower moisture
content. Check to see that the material mixes easily and remains in a “fluffed” state. If any
W
dust is observed at the end of the mixing process, add small amounts of water and remix
until a "fluffed" state is achieved with no dust.
s
Step 6: Determine the amount of foamed bitumen to be added using equation 12:
en
Mbitumen = (Badd /100) x (Msample + Mcement) [Equation 12]

m
where: Mbitumen = mass of foamed bitumen to be added [g]

e
Badd = foamed bitumen content [% by mass]

Si

Step 7: Determine the timer setting on the Wirtgen WLB10 S using equation 13:
T = Mbitumen / Qbitumen [Equation 13]
where: T = time to be set on WLB10 S timer [s]

Mbitumen = mass of foamed bitumen to be added [g]
Qbitumen = bitumen flow rate for the WLB10 S [g/s]
Step 8: Position the mixer adjacent to the foaming unit so that the foamed bitumen can be
discharged directly into the mixing chamber.
Step 9: Start the mixer and allow it to mix for at least 10 seconds before discharging the
required mass of foamed bitumen into the mixing chamber. After the foamed bitumen has
discharged into the mixer, continue mixing for a further 30 seconds or until uniformly mixed.
Step 10: Determine the amount of water required to bring the sample to the OMC using
equation 14.
= (W OMC – W sample) / 100 x (Msample +

Mplus [Equation 14]
Mcement)
where: Mplus = mass of water to be added [g]
W sample = moisture content of prepared sample [% by mass]
Mcement = mass of lime or cement added [g]
Note: This moisture adjustment is to be carried out when 150mm diameter specimens are
to be manufactured. Where 100mm diameter specimens are to be manufactured, the
moisture content of the material is to be adjusted to 90% of OMC.
Step 11: Add the additional water and mix until uniform.
Step 12: Transfer the foamed bitumen treated material into a container and immediately
seal the container to retain moisture. To minimise moisture loss from the prepared sample,
manufacture the specimens as soon as possible following the relevant procedure for either
100mm or 150mm diameter specimens, as described in ‎8.7.7 and ‎8.7.9 respectively.
ar
Repeat the above steps for at least four mixes with different foamed bitumen contents.
at
Recommended bitumen addition interval for different specimen sizes
-Q
Difference in amount of bitumen added (%)
Specimen diameter (mm)
to each mix
LL
100 (Level 1) 0.25

W
150 (Level 2) 0.1

For 100mm diameter specimens, use Error! Reference source not found. as a guideline
s
or the amount of bitumen addition that the material will require for effective stabilisation.
en
For 150mm diameter specimens, use the results of Level 1 tests in ‎8.7.8 as the maximum
addition of bitumen (i.e. the three other mixes will be in intervals of 0.1% less than this
m
value).
e
8.7.7 Manufacture Of 100mm Diameter Specimens

Si
1 For Level 1 mix designs ITS tests are carried out on 100mm diameter specimens. Six
specimens are manufactured for each sample at the different bitumen contents. The two
primary objectives of undertaking the Level 1 mix design are to determine:
 the optimum bitumen content for the BSM, and
 the need for an active filler.
2 Specimens may be made using either Marshall or vibratory compaction methods.
3 Marshall Compaction shall be carried out as follows:

Step 1: Prepare the Marshall mould and hammer by cleaning the mould, collar, base-plate
and face of the compaction hammer.
Note: the compaction equipment must not be heated but kept at ambient temperature.
Step 2: Weigh sufficient material to achieve a compacted height of 63.5mm ± 1.5mm
(usually 1150g is adequate). Spade the mixture with a spatula 15 times around the perimeter
and 10 times on the surface, leaving the surface slightly rounded.
Step 3: Compact the mixture by applying 75 blows with the compaction hammer. Care must
be taken to ensure the continuous free fall of the hammer. Remove the mould and collar
from the pedestal, invert the specimen (turn over). Replace it and press down firmly to
ensure that it is secure on the base plate. Compact the other face of the specimen with a
further 75 blows.
Step 4: Take approximately 1kg representative samples after compaction of the second and
fifth specimen and dry a constant mass (at 105 to 110°C). Determine the moulding moisture
using equation 15:
W mould = (Mmoist – Mdry) / Mdry x 100 [Equation 15]
where: W mould = moulding moisture content [% by mass]

Step 5: After compaction, remove the mould from the base-plate and extrude the specimen
by means of an extrusion jack. Measure the height of the specimen and adjust the amount
material if the height is not within the required limits.
ar
Note: With certain materials lacking cohesion, it may be necessary to leave the specimen in
at
the mould for 24 hours, allowing sufficient strength to develop before extracting.
-Q
4 Vibratory Compaction shall be carried out as follows:
Step 1: Fix the mounting head and appropriate tamping foot to the vibratory hammer and fit
hammer onto guide rods. Place 5kg surcharge weight onto mounting head (total mass of
LL
assembly [Hammer + foot + surcharge] = 25kg) and fasten tightly. Using the pulley system
raise the vibratory hammer to an adequate height that will allow operator to work safely
W
beneath the vibratory hammer and lock in position.

Step 2: Clean the mould, collar and base plate. Fix the mould to the base of the compaction
s
frame.
en
Note: the compaction equipment must not be heated but kept at ambient temperature.
m
Step 3: Weigh sufficient material to achieve a compacted height of 63.5mm ± 1.5mm

(usually 1150g is adequate). Spade the mixture with a spatula 15 times around the perimeter
e
and 10 times on the surface, leaving the surface slightly rounded.

Si
Step 4: Lower the vibratory hammer into the mould, checking that the vibratory hammer is
perpendicular to the base of the mould. Apply 15 seconds of vibratory compaction to the
sample in the mould.
Step 5: Raise hammer to the safe position, remove mould, invert mould and secure to base.
Step 6: Lower vibratory hammer to surface of material in mould and ensure vibratory
hammer rests freely on sample and is perpendicular to the base of the mould. Apply further
15 seconds of vibratory compaction to sample in the mould.
Step 7: Take approximately1kg representative samples after compaction of the second and
fifth specimen and dry to constant mass (at 105 to 110 oC). Determine the moulding
moisture using equation 15.
Step 8: After compaction, remove the mould from the base-plate and extrude the specimen
carefully by means of an extrusion jack.
5 Curing procedure: Compacted specimens shall be cured by placing the specimens on a steel
mesh and curing in a forced-draft oven until a constant mass is obtained (normally 72 hours
at 40°C). Remove from oven after curing and allow to cool to ambient temperature.
6 When specimens have cooled to ambient temperature determine the bulk density for each
specimen:
Step 1. Determine the mass (Mbriq).
Step 2. Measure the height at four evenly-spaced places around the circumference and
calculate the average height (h).
Step 3. Measure the diameter (d).
Step 4. Calculate the bulk density using equation 16:
2
BD = (4 x Mbriq x h) x 1000 [Equation 16]
where: BD = moulding moisture content [kg/m³]

Mbriq = mass of specimen [g]
ar
h = average height of specimen [cm]
at
d = diameter of specimen [cm]
Note: Exclude from further testing any specimen whose bulk density differs from the mean
-Q
bulk density of the batch by more than 50 kg/m³.
7 The bulk density may alternatively be determined by using the “weigh-in air / weigh-in water”
LL
method for those specimens designated for soaked testing.

W
8.7.8 Determination Of The Strength Of 100mm Diameter Specimens
1 The 100mm diameter specimens are tested for indirect tensile strength under dry and
s
soaked conditions to determine the ITSDRY and the ITSWET values. To prevent moisture loss,
en
specimens should be tested as soon as they are prepared. The results are used to indicate
the optimum bitumen content and the need for active filler. In addition, these test results are
m
used as a guide for the classification of the BSM.

e
8.7.9 Manufacture Of 150mm Diameter Specimens

Si
1 Level 2 mix designs ITS tests are carried out on specimens that are 150mm diameter and
95mm in height. These specimens are cured to simulate the equilibrium moisture content
achieved in the field. This method of curing provides more realistic values for classification of
the bitumen stabilised materials.
2 The procedures described allow for the manufacture of four 150mm diameter specimens to a
compacted height of 95mm. If additional specimens are required, the sample quantity shall
be increased.
3 Specimens may be made using either Modified AASHTO (T-180) or vibratory compaction
methods.
4 MODIFIED AASHTO (T-180) compaction shall be carried out as follows:

Step 1: Prepare and treat at least 24kg of sample for each selected bitumen content.
Step 2: Where required, add sufficient moisture to bring sample to optimum compaction
moisture content and mix until uniform. Immediately after mixing, place material in an air-
tight container.
Step 3: Take approximately 1kg representative samples after compaction of the first and
third specimen and dry to a constant mass (at 105 to 110°C). Determine the moulding
moisture using equation 15.
Step 4: Compact at least 4 specimens using a 150mm diameter split-mould, applying
modified AASHTO (T-180) compaction effort (4 layers approximately 25mm thick, 56 blows
per layer using a 4.536kg hammer with a 457mm drop).
Step 5: Carefully trim excess material from specimens, as specified in the AASHTO T180
test method.
Step 6: Carefully remove the specimen from the spilt-mould and place on a steel mesh.
5 Vibratory compaction shall be carried out as follows:

Step 1: Fix the mounting head and appropriate tamping foot (150mm diameter) to the
vibratory hammer and fit hammer onto guide rods. Place 10kg surcharge weight onto
ar
mounting head (total mass of assembly [hammer + foot + surcharge] = 30kg) and fasten
tightly. Using the pulley system raise the vibratory to an adequate height that will allow
at
operator to work safely beneath the vibratory hammer and lock in position.
-Q
Step 2: Clean the 150mm diameter spilt mould, collar and base plate. Fix the mould to the
base of the compaction frame.
Step 3: Weigh sufficient material to achieve a compacted height of 47.5mm ± 1.5mm. An
LL
approximation of the quantity required can be calculated using equation 17. Spade the
mixture with a spatula 15 times around the perimeter and 10 times on the surface, leaving
W
the surface slightly rounded.

2
Mmix = ( x d x h / 4) x (MDD) /1000 [Equation 17]
s
where: Mmix = Mass of mixed material [g]

en

m
h = required height of layer (4.75cm for ITS) [cm]

MDD = maximum dry density [kg/m³]
e
Si
perpendicular to the base of the mould.

Apply 25 seconds of vibration for bitumen emulsion stabilised materials
35 seconds of vibration for foamed bitumen stabilised materials.
Step 5: Raise hammer to safe position.
Step 6: For the second layer, if necessary, adjust for the amount of material to be added
such that the final compacted thickness is 95mm. Using a chisel, scarify the entire surface
area of the top of the compacted layer to a maximum depth of 10mm. Add the required
amount of material and ensure the material is as level as possible.
perpendicular to the base of the mould.
Apply 25 seconds of vibration for bitumen emulsion stabilised materials
35 seconds of vibration for foamed bitumen stabilised materials.
Step 8: Raise hammer to safe position. Remove mould from base plate and open the split
mould to remove the specimen.
Step 9: Take approximately 1kg representative samples after compaction of the first and
third specimens and dry to a constant mass. Determine the moulding moisture using
equation 15.
6 Curing procedure: Place the specimens in an oven at 40°C for 24 hours (or until the moisture
content has reduced to at least 50% of OMC). Thereafter place each specimen in a sealed
plastic bag (at least twice the volume of the specimen) and place in an oven at 40°C for a
further 48 hours.
7 Remove specimens from the oven after 48 hours and remove the respective plastic bags,
ensuring that any moisture in the bags does not come into contact with the specimen. Allow
to cool to ambient temperature.
8 When specimens have cooled to ambient temperature determine the bulk density for each
specimen:
ar
Step 1: Determine the mass (Mbriq).
at
Step 2: Measure the height at four evenly-spaced places around the circumference and
-Q
calculate the average height (h).
Step 3: Measure the diameter (d).
Step 4: Calculate the bulk density using equation 16:
LL
Note: Exclude from further testing any specimen whose bulk density differs from the mean
bulk density of the batch by more than 50 kg/m³.
W
9 The bulk density may alternatively be determined by using the “weigh-in air / weigh-in water”
s
method for those specimens designated for soaked testing.

en
8.7.10 Determination Of The Strength Of 150mm Diameter Specimens

m
1 The 150mm diameter specimens are tested for indirect tensile strength under equilibrium
e
moisture content and soaked conditions to determine the ITSEQUIL and the ITSSOAK values. To
Si
prevent moisture loss, specimens should be tested as soon as they are prepared. The
results are used to refine the optimum bitumen content and amount of active filler that was
initially determined from the 100mm diameter specimens. In addition, these test results are
used to classify the BSM with additional confidence.
2 Additional ITS tests should be carried out using 150mm diameter specimens to determine
the sensitivity of the mix to minor variations in both the amount of added bitumen and active
filler.
If, for example, Level 2 test results indicated an optimum bitumen addition (OBA) of 2.2%
with an active filler addition of 1%, then the following further tests should be undertaken:
Step 1: To check the sensitivity of the bitumen addition, follow the Level 2 procedure in ‎8.7.9
to manufacture, cure and test the following mixes:
Added bitumen (%) Active filler (%)

2.2 (Level 2 OBA) 1
2.1 1
2.0 1
1.9 1
ITS test results will allow the optimal bitumen addition (OBA) to be refined.
Step 2: To check the sensitivity of the amount of active filler added, follow the Level 2
procedure in ‎8.7.9 to manufacture, cure and test the following mixes:
Added bitumen (%) Active filler (%)
OBA 0.9
OBA 0.7
OBA 0.5
ITS test results will indicate the minimum amount of active filler required in the mix.
8.7.11 Strength Test Procedures
ar
1 The Unconfined Compressive Strength (UCS) of a cement stabilised material is determined
at
by measuring the ultimate load to failure of a 127mm high and 150mm diameter specimen
-Q
that is subjected to a constant loading rate of 140kPa/s (153kN/min), as follows:
Step 1: Place the specimen on its flat side between the plates of the compression testing
machine. Position the specimen such that it is centred on the loading plates.
LL
Step 2: Apply the load to the specimen, without shock, at a rate of advance of 140kPa/s until
the maximum load is reached. Record the maximum load P in kN, accurate to 0.1kN.
W
Step 3: Immediately after testing a specimen, break the specimen up and take a sample of
approximately 1000g to determine the moisture content (W break). This moisture content is
s
used to determine the dry density of the material using equation 21.
en
Step 4: Calculate the UCS for each specimen to the nearest 1 kPa according to equation 18.
= (4 x P) / (  x d ) x 10000
2
m
UCS [Equation 18]

e
where: UCS = unconfined compressive strength [kPa]

Si
P = maximum load to failure [kN]

2 Indirect Tensile Strength (ITS) of a stabilised material is determined by measuring the

ultimate load to failure of a specimen (both 100mm and 150mm diameter specimens) that is
subjected to a constant deformation rate of 50.8 mm/minute on its diametrical axis, as
follows:
Step 1: Place the specimen onto the respective ITS jig for the 100mm and 150mm diameter
specimens. Position the sample such that the loading strips are parallel and centred on the
vertical diametrical plane.
Step 2: Place the load transfer plate on the top bearing strip and position the jig assembly
centrally under the loading ram of the compression testing device.
Step 3: Apply the load to the specimen, without shock, at a rate of advance of 50.8 mm per
minute until the maximum load is reached. Record the maximum load P in kN, accurate to
0.1kN.
Step 4: Immediately after testing a specimen, break it up and take a sample of

approximately 1000g to determine the moisture content (W break). This moisture content is
used in equation 21 to determine the dry density of the material in the specimen.
Step 5: Immediately after testing a specimen, measure the temperature of the broken face
using a digital thermometer. Record the temperature, accurate to 0.1°C.
Step 6: Calculate the ITS for each specimen to the nearest 1 kPa using equation 19:
ITS = (2 x P) / ( x h x d) x 10000 [Equation 19]
where: ITS = indirect tensile strength [kPa]

P = maximum applied load [kN]
h = average height of the specimen [cm]
Step 7: To determine the soaked ITS, place the specimens under water at 25°C ± 1°C for 24
hours. Remove specimen from water, surface dry and repeat steps 1 to 5.
Record the results and determine the following as required:
ar
100mm Ø specimens: ITSDRY = average of 3 specimens cured to constant mass
at
ITSWET = average of 3 ITSDRY specimens soaked for 24 hours.
150mm Ø specimens: ITSEQUIL = average of 2 specimens cured at equilibrium moisture
-Q
ITSSOAK = average of 2 ITSEQUIL specimens soaked for 24 hours
Step 8: Determine the Tensile Strength Retained (TSR). The TSR is the relationship
between the average soaked and unsoaked ITS values for a specific batch of specimens,
LL
expressed as a percentage using equation 20:

TSR = Average soaked ITS / Average unsoaked ITS x 100 [Equation 20]
W
Step 9: Using the moisture content determined in each test described above, calculate the
dry density using equation 21:
s
DD = (Mbriq / Vol) x (100 / (W break + 100) x 1000 [Equation 21]

en
where: DD = dry density [kg/m³]

m
Mbriq = mass of cured specimen [g]

e
3
Vol = volume of specimen [cm ]
Si
W break = moisture content of the specimen [%]

Report the results using the template sheet shown in ‎8.7.16 as a guide.
8.7.12 Selection Of The Amount Of Bitumen To Be Added For Bsm
1 Plot the results of the respective soaked and unsoaked ITS test results against the relevant
bitumen content that was added. The added bitumen content that best meets the desired
BSM classification is selected as the optimum amount of bitumen to be added, as shown in
the example below (Figure 7.3 Determination of BSM class and added bitumenFigure 7.3
Determination of BSM class and added)
Interpretation of ITS Tests
Test Specimen Ø BSM1 BSM2 BSM3 Purpose
Indicates the optimum bitumen

ITSDRY 100 mm > 225 175 to 225 125 to 175
content
ITSWET 100 mm > 100 75 to 100 50 to 75 Indicates need for active filler.
Indicates problem material where

TSR 100 mm N/A N/A N/A
TSR < 50 and ITSDRY > 400 kPa
Used for classifying the BSM and
ITSEQUIL 150 mm > 175 135 to 175 95 to 135 for optimising the bitumen and
active filler content.
ITSSOAK 150 mm > 150 100 to 150 60 to 100 Check value on ITSWET
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Figure 7.3 Determination of BSM class and added bitumen
2 The TSR value is useful for identifying problem materials. If the TSR is less than 50%, it is
recommended that active filler is used. If such treatment does not increase the ITSWET value
with a maximum application of 1% lime or cement, then the nature of the material being
stabilised should be investigated:
3 Where the material is granular, a TSR value below 50% combined with an ITSDRY value in
excess of 400 kPa suggests contamination (normally attributed to clay or deleterious
materials). In this situation, it is suggested that material is pre-treated with hydrated lime and
the Level 1 tests repeated.
4 Where the material is 100% RAP, a TSR value below 50% combined with an ITSDRY value in
excess of 500 kPa indicates that the treated material is partly stabilised and partly
continuously bound (cold mix). In this situation, the material probably requires blending with
crusher dust to ensure that the stabilisation process dominates the mix.
5 Level 2 testing using 150mm diameter specimens should be undertaken to verify the
relevant ITS values for BSM classification.
8.7.13 Determination Of The Shear Properties Of Bsm
1 Triaxial testing is carried out to determine the cohesion and angle of internal friction of BSM
specimens. Testing is normally carried out at the bitumen content selected from the results
of ITS tests carried out on 150mm diameter specimens (see above). Additional tests at
different bitumen contents can always be carried out to investigate the sensitivity of the
shear properties.
2 Specimens for triaxial testing shall be produced as follows:

Step 1: Prepare and treat 50kg of sample (adequate for manufacture of 4 specimens) with
either bitumen emulsion or foamed bitumen at the optimum bitumen content. Include any
active filler requirements.
Step 2: Where required, add moisture to bring sample to optimum compaction moisture
ar
content and mix until uniform. Place the mixed material in an air-tight container.
Step 3: Take approximately1 kg representative samples of each specimen to determine the
at
moulding moisture using equation 15. -Q
Step 4: Compact at least four (4) specimens using a 150mm diameter split mould with an
effective internal height of 300mm, using equation 17 to calculate the approximate quantity
for each layer.
LL
3 Specimens may be made using either Modified AASHTO (T-180) or vibratory compaction
methods.
W
4 Compaction using modified AASHTO (T180) shall be in 12 layers, each approximately 25mm
s
thick, compacted with 56 blows using a 4.536kg hammer with a 457mm drop. Carefully trim
en
any excess material from the specimen.

m
5 Compaction using vibratory compaction shall be in 5 layers, each approximately 60mm thick,
using a hammer assembly of 30kg total mass. Each layer is compacted for:
e

Si
25 seconds for BSM-emulsion, or

 35 seconds for BSM-foam
The height of each compacted layer is measured and, if necessary, an adjustment made for
the quantity of material used for the next layer to achieve the required height for the
respective layers.
6 The specimens shall be cured using the same procedure for 150mm diameter specimens.
8.7.14 Determination Of Triaxial Shear Parameters Using Simple Triaxial Test
1 This method describes the determination of triaxial shear parameters (cohesion and internal
angle of friction) of Bitumen Stabilised Materials by measuring the resistance to failure
(monotonic) of a cylindrical 150 mm diameter and 300 ± 2 mm height specimen prepared
according to Vibratory Hammer Compaction Procedure.
2 Apparatus:
(a) Triaxial Cell comprising a galvanised steel casing 5 mm thick comprising a ring handle
and simple mechanical clamps top and bottom, a base with bottom platen for sitting
specimen, top disk and a latex tube at least 320 mm in height.
(b) Testing System comprising a Material Testing System (MTS) or its equivalent system
must at least comprise of an actuator, reaction frame, a control panel and data
acquisition system. The system must be capable of providing ramp loads with
minimum loading capacity of 100 kN and a minimum stroke of 40 mm. The actuator
should be operated by a servo-controlled hydraulic pressure system with a closed loop
feedback system that is capable of both displacement and load controlled testing if
required.
(c) Measuring devices should include but not limited to a load cell (100 kN Capacity) for
measuring load, an actuator displacement transducer (> 40 mm stroke) for measuring
displacement (deformation) and pressure regulator, gauges, and valves for lateral
pressure.
ar
(d) Additionally air compressor, loading ram and silicon oil or grease.
at
3 The specimen must be prepared and cured according to Vibratory Hammer Compaction
-Q
Procedure as stated previously.
4 The triaxial testing of the specimens must be planned to take place within 48 – 72 hours after
LL
completion of the curing procedure. This delay must be kept as constant as possible. The
following steps describe the procedure taken to assemble specimen in the simple triaxial cell
and the cell in the loading frame:
W
(a) Place the specimens, casing with tube, top disk and base plate in a climate chamber
s
and condition them overnight at 25ºC.

en
(b) Lightly grease the sides of the top disk and base plate to reduce friction as much as
possible.
m
(c) Place the specimen in the middle of the base plate.

e
(d) Carefully introduce the casing, comprising the tube, around the specimen. Take care
Si
not to damage the edges of the specimen during this procedure.

(e) Clamp the casing in position on to the base plate using simple mechanical clamps on
the casing.
(f) Put the top disk on top of the specimen.
(g) Place the cell in the hydraulic loading frame; adjust actuator position until visual
contact is made with the loading ram.
(h) Connect the air supply to the cell; open the regulator and valve on the cell pressure
port until the cell pressure is stable at the desired level.
(i) Set monotonic test parameters on the MTS controller including displacement rate of
strain (2.1%), full-scale for the loading (10.0V = 98.1 kN) and half-scale for the
displacement (10.0V = 40mm), and run the test
5 Monotonic Triaxial Test: Select four specimens of comparable density, moisture content and
conditioned at 25°C. Assemble the specimen in the triaxial cell according to 4 ensuring the
tube is air tight.
(a) Operate the testing system in displacement control mode. Ensure that there is
sufficient space between the actuator and the reaction frame to accommodate the
triaxial cell. Place the triaxial cell in the hydraulic loading frame.
(b) Adjust the actuator position until visual contact is made with the loading ram. Monitor
the load cell reading to prevent loading of the specimen during this process. Connect
the air supply to the cell pressure port. Open the valve on the cell pressure port and
open the regulator until the cell pressure is stable at the desired level. The cell
pressures for a series of monotonic tests are 0 kPa, 50kPa, 100 kPa and 200 kPa.
(c) Test the first specimen without confinement pressure (0 kPa). Begin the test by
compressing the specimen at a constant rate of displacement of 2.1%. Record the
load versus displacement during the test with a minimum sampling rate of 10 Hz, as
well as the cell pressure, temperature and specimen identifier.
(d) Stop the test and the recording when the total displacement exceeds 18 mm (6%
strain) or when the specimen bulges excessively before the end displacement is
reached.
ar
(e) Repeat this procedure for other three specimens until all specimens have been tested
at
at the four levels of confinement pressures.
6
-Q
Remove the specimens after completion of test after completion of a test. Hold the actuator
to its current position, close the valve on the cell pressure port and release the cell pressure
by disconnecting the pressure supply tube to the cell (if possible speed up the pressure
LL
release by applying suction). Return the actuator to a position whereby the cell can easily be
removed from the loading frame. Remove the top disk. Clean the top disk and wipe off any
W
grease. Unclamp the casing and lift the casing with tube from the cell base. Clean the tube
from possible remains of the deformed specimen (it is not necessary to remove the tube
from the casing). Remove the tested specimen from the base plate. Place it in the plastic
s
bag and seal. Clean the base plate and wipe off any grease.
en
7 When all the specimens have been tested, remove the tested specimens one by one from
m
the plastic bags. Break the tested specimens up and sample between 500 and 1000 gr. of
material from the middle of the specimen. Use this sample to determine the moisture content
e
of each specimen.
Si
8 Calculations:
(a) Determine the applied failure load Pa,f for each specimen tested. The applied failure
load is defined as the maximum applied load during the test. Calculate the applied
failure stress σa,f :
σa,f
where: σa,f = applied failure stress [kPa]

Pa,f = applied failure load [N]
2 2
A = end area of a cylindrical specimen at beginning of [m ] or mm ??
test
(b) Calculate the major principle stress at failure σ1,f for each tested specimen:
σ1,f = σa,f + σdw
where: σ1,f = major principle stress at failure [kPa]

σa,f = applied failure stress [kPa]
σdw = pressure resulting from dead weight of top disk and [kPa]
loading ram
(c) The relationship between σ1,f and confinement stress (σ3)is determined by:
σ1,f = A.σ3+B
A
where:
Values of A and B can be determined by performing a linear regression analysis on the
ar
four combinations of σ1,f and σ3 per mix.
at
(d) Values of φ [°] and C [kPa] can be calculated as follows:
φ
-Q
where:
C
LL
9 Report the following in the table format as illustrated in

W
10 Table 8. 8 Format Report for Simple Triaxial Test below:

s
(a) Specimen number or identifier;

en
(b) Confinement pressure (σ3);

m
(c) Applied stress at failure (σa,f);

e
(d) Major principal stress at failure (σ1,f);

Si
(e) Cohesion, C [kPa];

(f) Angle of internal friction, φ [°]; and
2
(g) Coefficient of variance, R
11 Plot the Mohr Circles and the Mohr-Coulomb failure envelope as shown in Figure 7.4
Example of Mohr Circle Plot, noting:
(a) The centre of Mohr circle must be on the abscissa and is given by (σ1,f + σ3)/2;
(b) The radius of such circle is (σ1,f - σ3)/2;
(c) Angle of internal friction is the angle of the Mohr-Coulomb failure envelope (failure
line);
(d) The failure line intersects with ordinate at the cohesion value.
ar
at
Figure 7.4 Example of Mohr Circle Plot
-Q
LL
Table 8. 8 Format Report for Simple Triaxial Test

Applied Principle
Confining Internal
W
Specimen Stress at stress at Correlation

Pressure, Cohesion Friction
No. Failure Failure Coefficient
σ3 Angle
σa,f σ1,f
s
en
2
[kPa] [kPa] [kPa] [kPa] [°] [R ]
e m
Si
8.7.15 Using Laboratory Test Results For Estimating Structural Layer Coefficients
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Notes:
Si
The minimum Retained Tensile Strength (%) requirement should be 75%.

The following minimum compaction requirements are recommended:
Material Type BSM3 BSM2 BSM1
Percentage of Modified AASHTO

> 97% > 100% > 102%
compaction T180
 The material passing the 0.075mm sieve to be >2% for BSM-emulsion and >4% for
BSM-foam.
 The maximum recommended addition of cement (active filler) is 1% by mass.
 Materials with a Plasticity Index > 10 to be pre-treated with hydrated lime to reduce
the PI to <6.
8.7.16 Proforma Report Sheet For Its Testing

The report sheet shown below may be used for all ITS tests, regardless of whether the tests
were carried out for mix design purposes or for testing field samples.
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
8.7.17 Laboratory Equipment Requirements
1 Laboratory Equipment For Soils Testing
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
2 Additional Laboratory Equipment for Cement or Lime Stabilisation
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
3 Additional Laboratory Equipment for Bitumen Stabilisation
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
END OF PART
Part 09: Recycled Aggregate for Roadworks
9 RECYCLED AGGREGATE FOR ROADWORKS ................................................................... 2

9.1 GENERAL ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
9.1.1 Scope 2
9.1.2 References 2
9.1.3 Definitions 3
9.2 SOURCE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
9.3 APPLICATIONS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
9.4 RECYCLED AGGREGATE FOR EARTH WORKS RELATED TO ROADS ------------ 4
9.4.1 Requirements of Materials 4
9.4.2 Compaction of Fill Material 5
9.5 RECYCLED AGGREGATE FOR SUB-BASE MATERIAL ---------------------------------- 5
9.6 RECEYCLED AGGREGATE FOR BASE MATERIAL OF MINOR ROADS IN
VILLAGE AREAS AND TEMPORARY ROADS ----------------------------------------------- 6
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
9 RECYCLED AGGREGATE FOR ROADWORKS
9.1 GENERAL
9.1.1 Scope
1 The conditions of this part cover the requirements of recycled aggregate obtained from
demolition and excavation waste for use in roadworks.

Part 1, General
Part 3, Earthworks
Part 4, Unbound Pavement Materials
9.1.2 References
ar
1 The following standards are referred to in this Part :
at
ASTM C88 ..................Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of
-Q
Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM C131 ................Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Machine
LL
BS EN 933 Part 1 .......Determination of particle size distribution - Sieving method

Aggregates
W
ASTM C535 ................Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size

s
Machine
en
BS 1377 Part 4 ...........Methods of test for Compaction-related tests, California Bearing Ratio
(CBR) of Laboratory-Compacted Soils
m
ASTM D2419 ..............Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate
e
BS 1377 Part 3 ...........Standard Test Methods for Classification tests, Liquid Limit, Plastic
Si
Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

BS EN 933 Part 3. ......Methods of test for Determination of particle shape - Flakiness index
BS EN 933 Part 4. ......Methods of test for Determination of particle shape - Shape index
BS EN 933 Part 5 .......Methods of test for Determination of percentage of crushed and
broken surfaces in coarse aggregate particles.
BS EN 933-11:2009 ...Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates. Classification test for
the constituents of coarse recycled aggregate
BS EN 1097-2:2010...Tests for mechanical and physical properties of aggregates. Methods
for the determination of resistance to fragmentation
QS 29 / 2012 ..............The general Conditions For Recycled Aggregate Obtained From
Building Demolition
9.1.3 Definitions
1 Demolition Waste: Waste Material obtained from Excavated and/or demolished concrete
structures.
2 Concrete Demolition Waste : Waste Produced by demolition of concrete structures in

general.
3 Demolition Waste from Hard Concrete : Waste obtained from demolition of hard concrete
members such as columns, foundations and other mass concrete blocks.
4 Excavation Waste : Waste obtained from excavated materials.
5 Mixed Demolition Waste : Waste material obtained from both excavated and demolished
concrete structures.
6 Mixed Aggregate : Recycled fine and coarse Aggregate combined together.
ar
7 Recycled Aggregate: a materials produced by the reprocessing of reclaimed construction
and demolition waste. These include but are not limited to asphalt planings (i.e. the asphalt
at
layers of roads removed during roadworks, also known as RAP – Reclaimed Asphalt
Pavement), fill, selected fill, granular subbase and rock from construction excavations.
-Q
9.2 SOURCE
LL
1 The debris pieces of blocks collected from road demolitions in various places should be
stock piled at suitable location where different types of materials can be separated.
W
2 The clean, tough, hard, durable, free from organic material and uncoated particles containing
no harmful materials in quantities sufficient to adversely affect construction works shall be
s
stock piled separately according to the required nominal sizes. The material free from pieces
en
of steel, plastic and wood.

m
3 The sources of aggregate should be regularly and thoroughly investigated to ensure the
quality of material is satisfactory. The aggregate shall be non-plastic and chemically stable.
e
Si
9.3 APPLICATIONS
1 Carefully selected recycled aggregate can be used in many applications as shown below.
(a) For Non-structural Concrete (Grade SRC 20) for backing of kerbs, channels, edging
and quadrant in road work.
(b) For manufacture of Hollow & Solid Blocks and Paving blocks for pedestrians.
(c) For Earth works related to roads.
(d) For Aggregate of sub-base materials.
(e) For Minor Roads of village areas and temporary roads.
2 Recycled materials from construction or a construction process, or from existing pavement

layers shall be separated according to type for processing. The separate processed
materials shall be stored in stockpiles of no greater than 4000 tons and quarantined for
testing and approval by the Engineer prior to use.
3 Samples shall be taken of the recycled aggregate constituents for classification by hand-
sorting the coarse aggregate particles in accordance with BS EN 933-11. The test shall be
carried out by a suitably trained laboratory technician who has demonstrated competence in
classifying the constituent classes in accordance with the test method.
4 Testing frequency shall be according to parts 3 and 4 of this section unless otherwise stated
by the Engineer.
5 Recycled aggregate shall be free from non-aggregate constituents such organics and shall
have a minimum amount of deleterious material which may affect its reuse.
6 The Percentage use of recycled aggregate shall not exceed the following:
(a) A maximum of 50% of recycled fine, and/or coarse and/or mixed aggregates whether
obtained from Concrete or mixed waste can be used for concrete works of less than
20 MPa strength or any other construction works but not for asphalt layers.
(b) It is not allowed to use recycled Aggregate obtained from concrete or mixed demolition
wastes in asphalt mixes. Only Recycled Aggregate from excavated material can be
ar
used in asphalt mixes.
at
(c) A maximum of 100% of recycled aggregate obtained from excavated material can be
used in any of the above mentioned construction works.
-Q
9.4 RECYCLED AGGREGATE FOR EARTH WORKS RELATED TO ROADS
9.4.1 Requirements of Materials

LL
1 Recycled material shall be tested according to the relevant parts of BS 1377 and shall be
W
within the limits of following table:

Table 9.5
s
Specifications of Recycled Aggregate for use in

en
Earth Works Related to Roads

m
General Fill
Selected Fill
Requirement (Filling on low level
( Sub-grade)
e
areas)
Si
Grading Standard Standard

Particle Size Less than 75mm Less than 75mm
Organic Material (%) 2 max 2 max
Liquid Limit (%) 40 max 35max
Plasticity Index (%) 11 max 10 max
Material Passing 0.075 mm (%) 40 max 35 max
Water Soluble Salts (%) 5 max 5 max
Acid Soluble Salts (%) 10 max 10 max
Soaked CBR Value - More than 15
Swell (%) - 2 max
Tree and Plant Stumps Free Free
Perishable Materials Free Free
Materials Subject to Spontaneous
Free Free
Combustion
Material From Sabkha and Marshes Free Free
9.4.2 Compaction of Fill Material
1 All Fill materials shall be placed in loose layers within the effective range of compaction of
the approved plant. The maximum permissible loose layer thickness shall be limited to
200mm.
2 The fill material shall be watered and mixed as necessary to ensure that prior to compaction,
the moisture content of the whole layer ±3% of the optimum moisture content obtained at the
laboratory compaction test (LCT). The compaction of layer shall continue until a density of at
least 95% of the maximum dry density of LCT.
3 No layer shall be covered by the next layer until it has been tested, inspected and approved
by the Engineer.
9.5 RECYCLED AGGREGATE FOR SUB-BASE MATERIAL
1 The following table illustrates the material requirements for unbound materials for roadworks.
ar
Table 9.6
at
Requirements of Recycled Aggregate for Roadworks Unbound Layers
-Q
Raw Materials Production
Requirement Aggregate
LL
Fine Aggregate Coarse Aggregate

Sub-Base
W
Grading Standard Standard Class C

Particle Size Less than 4.75mm More than 4.75mm
s
OR Less Than 4.0mm More than 4.0mm

en
Organic Material (%) 0.5 max Free Free

Liquid Limit (%) –material
-
m
passing 0.425 or 0.500mm 25 max 25 max

Plasticity Index (%)–material
e
-
passing 0.425 or 0.500mm 6 max 6 max
Si
MaterialPassing0.075mm (%) - - -
Water Soluble Chlorides (%) - 1.0 max 1.0 max
Acid Soluble Chlorides (%) - 2.0 max 2.0 max
Water Soluble Sulphates (%) - 1.5 max 1.5 max
Acid Soluble Sulphates SO 3(%) - 3.0 max 3.0 max
Soaked CBR Value - - 80 min
Swell (%) - - 1.0 max
Tree and Plant Stumps - Free Free
Perishable Marshes - Free Free
Materials subject to
- Free Free
Spontaneous combustion
Material from Sabkha and
- Free Free
Marshes
Clay Balls Free Free Free
Ratio of Passing 0.075mm &
66 - -
0.425mm (%)
Flakiness Index (%) - 35 max 35 max
Raw Materials Production

Requirement Aggregate
Sub-Base
Elongation Index (%) - 40 max 40 max

Los Angeles Abrasion (%) - 40 max 40 max
Soundness - magnesium
- 20 max 20 max
sulphates, 5 cycles (%)
Sand Equivalent Value - - 25 min
2 Mix Designs
(a) The recycled aggregate shall be used in aggregate sub-base and base courses. The
fine and course aggregate shall be combined proportionately in order to achieve the
following class of grading:
ar
Table 9.7
at
Gradation of Recycled Aggregate for use in Subbase Layers
-Q
Percentage Passing
BS EN Sieve (mm) ASTM Sieve (mm) (by Weight)
LL
Class C
63.0 63.0 -
W
- 50.0 -
40.0 37.5 -
s
- 25.0 100
en
20.0 19 90-100
10.0 9.5 50-85
m
4.0 4.75 35-65

2.0 2.36 25-50
e
0.500 0.425 15-30

Si
0.063 0.075 5-15
3 Screening and Mixing

(a) Screening is required for recycled materials used in the road base and sub base to
ensure that the designated gradation is attained.
(b) Central Mixing plant is required for the mixing of materials.
9.6 RECEYCLED AGGREGATE FOR BASE MATERIAL OF MINOR ROADS IN

VILLAGE AREAS AND TEMPORARY ROADS
1 Recycled Aggregate for use in Asphalt layers of temporary and minor roads in village areas
shall be reclaimed from excavated natural soil which is mechanically and chemically stable
and of specifications in the following table:
Table 9.9
Specification of Recycled Aggregate for use in
Asphalt Layers for Village and Temporary Roads
Recycled Aggregate
Requirement
Grading Standard Standard
Particle Size Less than 2.36 mm More than 2.36mm
Organic Material - including wood and materials
0.5 max 0.5 max
prone to disintegration (%)
Water Absorption –Saturated surface dry (%) 2.0 max
Liquid Limit - -
Plasticity Index (%) 4 max -
MaterialPassing0.075mm (%) - -
Acid Soluble Chlorides (%) 2.0 max 2.0 max
Acid Soluble Sulphates SO 3 (%) 3.0 max 3.0 max
ar
Materials subject to Spontaneous combustion - Free
at
Materials from Sabkha and Marshes - Free
Clay Balls -Q Free Free
Flakiness Index (%) - 35 max
Elongation Index (%) - 40 max
Los Angeles Abrasion (%) - 40 max
LL
Crushing Value (%) 25 max

Soundness - magnesium sulphates, 5 cycles (%) 18 max
W
Sand Equivalent Value 30 min -

s
2 The different sizes of material shall be separated by screening and re-combined together to
en
produce the all-in Recycled crushed aggregate, which shall achieve the following grading
limits :
m
Table17.8
e
Gradation of Recycled Crushed Aggregate for use in

Si
Asphalt Layers for Village and Temporary Roads
BS EN Sieve (mm) BS Sieve (mm) Percentage Passing (by weight)

63.0 50.0 100
40.0 37.5 95-100
20.0 19.0 60-80
10.0 9.5 40-60
4.0 4.75 25-40
2.0 2.36 15-30
0.500 0.600 8-22
0.063 0.075 5-12
3 Recycled aggregate for use in Asphalt layers of minor roads in village areas and temporary
roads shall be non–plastic.
4 The material shall wet during transporting and spreading in order to avoid segregation.
END OF PART
Part 10: Vehicle Crash Barriers
10 VEHICLE CRASH BARRIERS ....................................................................... 2
10.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 2

10.1.1 Scope 2
10.1.2 References 2
10.1.3 Performance Requirements 3
10.1.4 Submittals 3
10.1.6 Maintenance 5
10.2 STEEL WIRE ROPE BARRIERS .................................................................. 5
10.2.1 General 5
10.2.2 Component Ropes 5
10.2.3 Tail Rope 6
10.2.4 Safety Check Rope 6
ar
10.2.5 Posts 6
10.2.6 Anchorage Frames 7
at
10.2.7 Other Components -Q 7
10.3 TENSIONED CORRUGATED BEAM SAFETY FENCE ................................ 9
LL
10.4 UNTENSIONED CORRUGATED SAFETY FENCE .................................... 10

W
10.5 OPEN-BOX BEAM SAFETY FENCE ........................................................... 11
10.6 TENSIONED RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTION SAFETY

s
FENCE ......................................................................................................... 12
en
10.7 MARKERS FOR BARRIERS ....................................................................... 12

e m
10.8 CRASH CUSHIONS AND TERMINALS ...................................................... 12

Si
10.9 VEHICLE BARRIER UNITS (VBU) .............................................................. 13
10.10 TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS ...................................................... 13
10.11 ALUMINIUM BRIDGE PARAPET ................................................................ 14

10 VEHICLE CRASH BARRIERS

10.1.1 Scope
1 This section of the specification covers the supply, installation and foundation requirements
of the following representative types of vehicle crash barriers. The definition of each type of
barrier is given in the relevant section of the specification.
(a) steel wire rope barriers.

(b) tensioned corrugated beam safety fence
(c) untensioned corrugated beam safety fence
(d) open box beam safety fence
(e) tensioned rectangular hollow section safety fence
ar
(f) permanent concrete barriers
at
(g) temporary concrete barriers
(h) aluminium bridge parapet.
-Q
2 This section of the specification does not cover the design criteria for deciding on the type of
barrier to be applied in a particular situation.
LL
3 Related Sections and Parts

W
This Section
Part 12 Fencing
s
en
Section 5 Concrete
10.1.2 References
e m
Si
BS 4............................Structural steel sections

BS 302........................ Wire ropes for cranes, excavators and general engineering purposes
BS EN 13411-1 ..........Specification for Thimbles for wire ropes
BS EN ISO 1461 ........Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
BS 970........................Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering purposes
BS 1449: Part 2 ..........Stainless and heat resistant steel plate sheet and strip
BS 1474......................Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for engineering purposes
BS 1490......................Aluminium and aluminium ingots for engineering purposes
BS EN ISO 2081 & BS EN ISO 2082, Electroplated coatings of cadmium and zinc on iron
and steel
BS EN 10264..............Round carbon steel wire for wire ropes
BS 3416......................Bitumen based coatings for cold application
BS EN 1011................MIG Welding of aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS 4320......................Metal washers for general engineering purpose
BS 4464......................Spring washers for general engineering and automobile purposes
BS EN ISO 3506 ........Corrosion-resistant stainless steel fasteners
BS 6579......................Safety fences and barriers for highways
BS EN 1317................"Highway parapets for bridges and other structures. Part 1.

Specification for vehicle containment parapets of metal construction
BS EN 10025..............Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels - Technical delivery
conditions.
DTP, Manual of contract documents for highway works - volume 1 specification series 400
DTP, Manual of contract documents for highway works - volume 3 standard details
ASTM D 1248 .............Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Moulding and Extrusion

Materials US, Department of Transportation Research Report NCHRP,
No. 230.
ISO 9002 ....................Quality assurance system for production and installation
10.1.3 Performance Requirements
1 The vehicle crash barriers shall present a continuous smooth face to an impacting vehicle so
that the vehicle is redirected without turning on its side or rolling over to a course that is
ar
nearly parallel to the barrier face and with a lateral deceleration which is tolerable to the
vehicle occupant. The vehicle shall be redirected without rotation about either its horizontal
at
axis (spinning out) or vertical axis (overturning) and the rate of lateral deceleration shall be
-Q
such as to cause minimum risk of injury to the passengers.
2 The vehicle shall be directed so that no part of the vehicle crosses the line parallel with and
4 m from the original alignment of the traffic face of the fence or barrier within a distance of
LL
10 m from the last point of initial impact in the direction of the adjacent traffic flow.
W
3 On impact the safety fence or barrier shall contain and redirect a vehicle of a certain mass
travelling at a certain velocity at an angle of incidence of 20 degrees to the fence or barrier.
s
en
4 The level of vehicle containment shall be lower, normal or higher as designated, with the
following value for vehicle mass and vehicle speed.
m
Containment Vehicle Mass, kg Vehicle Speed, km/h

e
Normal 1500 113

Si
Lower 1500 80
Higher 5000 80
The centre of gravity of the test vehicle prior to impact shall be 500 mm above the ground.
5 All the components of a vehicle crash barrier shall be designed to achieve a serviceable life
of not less than 20 years except for the use of temporary concrete barriers where the nominal
service life shall not be less than 10 years.
10.1.4 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit details of previous installations of the vehicle crash barrier over a
10-year period, indicating the system, its location and the type of highway.
2 For the particular crash barrier system proposed, the Contractor shall submit a detailed
report giving the results of vehicle impact tests, and may include photographs and video
recordings. The report shall be from an internationally recognised laboratory approved by the
Engineer. The report shall describe in detail the arrangements for the test including vehicle
weight, speed, impact area, full details of the test vehicle guidance and measuring systems
and speed measurements. The report shall include photographs showing the results of the
test. The report shall give full details of the actual vehicle speed, approach angle, vehicle
interaction and fence movement of vehicle and roll, yawl and pitch of the vehicle movement
after exit from safety fence. The report shall include details of the safety fence damage and
the vehicle damage.
3 Crash cushions and terminals. The Contractor shall make a detailed technical submission
that will include drawings indicating the layout for the system at different locations. The
Contractor shall also submit design calculations for the system for head on impact and side
impact. These calculations shall indicate the reduction in G force or all vehicles of specified
weight and speed. The submission shall contain the precise specification of the individual
elements of the system, installation procedures, fixing details and fully dimensioned scale
ar
layout drawings. The Contractor shall submit reports from the highway authority where the
at
particular barrier system has been used showing details of vehicle collisions and the results
of such collisions. -Q
4 The Contractor shall submit calculations to show that post foundations can withstand an
overturning moment of 6.0 kNm.
LL
5 The Contractor shall submit full technical details of the safety fence system proposed
including post to beam connection details of beam joints and post to beam connection details
W
of posts, and details of tensioning assembly.

s
6 The Contractor shall submit calculations showing the required size and details of the lifting
en
eyes for permanent and temporary concrete barriers for the designated barrier details.
m

e
1 Vehicle crash barriers shall have been tested by an approved Testing establishment such as
Si
the UK Transport and Research Laboratory. The Engineer shall decide what is an approved
Testing establishment.
2 The manufacturer shall operate an approved quality assurance system complying with ISO
9002 for the fabrication and supply of components used in the vehicle safety barriers. Only
components complying with the manufacturer’s specifications may be used.
3 The supplier shall submit certification showing that tensioned rectangular hollow section
safety fence systems have been tested in accordance with the requirements of the UK
Transport and Research Laboratory.
4 Crash cushion and terminal systems shall have been satisfactory tested following the
procedures set down in the US Department of Transportation Research Report NCHRP, No.
230. The installation of the system shall be supervised by a representative of the
manufacturer with a minimum of five years of experience in the use of the system.
10.1.6 Maintenance
1 For vehicle crash barriers, crash cushion and terminal systems the Contractor shall supply:
(a) four copies of the installation and maintenance manual

(b) a relevant spare parts list for the system showing the recommended set of spare parts
needed to restore one system to its original condition after a head on impact
(c) if specified elsewhere in the Contract the Contractor shall supply spare parts for the
system
(d) current prices of spare parts
(e) profile of a local agent
10.2 STEEL WIRE ROPE BARRIERS
10.2.1 General
ar
1 Steel wire rope safety fence barriers shall be supplied and installed in accordance with the
at
designated dimensions and details shown on the contract drawings. The post details,
spacing, anchorage, size shapes and general layout shall be as per the details shown on the
-Q
contract drawings.
2 Wire rope barriers shall consist of either two or four, tensioned, galvanised, steel-wire ropes.
LL
The type of system to be specified shall be as shown on the contract drawings.

W
3 Four wire rope barriers shall consist of two upper ropes located in a slot at the top of the steel
posts and two lower ropes interwoven along the fence between each pair of ropes. The
ropes shall be joined and tensioned by means of screws at the designated intervals.
s
en
4 The ends of the ropes shall be attached to anchor blocks and embedded in the ground.
Steel posts may be located in the ground either as driven posts or in concrete footings. In the
m
case of any obstruction, the Contractor shall propose an alternative steel post, surface
e
mounted to the equivalent of strain. Steel posts shall be removable and replaceable.
Si
5 The supply and installation of steel wire safety fence barriers is to be carried out in
accordance with BS 6579, except as modified herein.
10.2.2 Component Ropes
1 Component ropes shall consist of steel wire ropes fitted with end terminals.
2 The rope shall be 19 mm diameter, 3 x 7 (fill) galvanised wire rope generally to BS 302: Part
1 with a minimum breaking force of 173.6 kN. All wire used in the rope shall be to BS EN
10264 galvanised normal duty. Various galvanised wire finishes may be used by agreement
with the Engineer.
3 The rope shall be prestressed by applying a cyclic loading until all initial extension has been
removed. After prestressing the rope will exhibit a minimum modulus of elasticity of 8300
kg/mm2 based on an area of 283 mm2.
4 The complete component rope shall have terminals, one end right-hand thread and the other
left-hand thread.
5 The fittings shall be attached to the rope whose length measured over the extreme ends of
the threaded portion of the fittings shall be 153.35 m, -0/+25 mm. Other special lengths of
rope with identical construction may be detailed as necessary for specific applications.
6 All threaded terminals shall be made from steel to BS 970: Part I Grade 65SM13 and either
cadmium plated to BS EN ISO 2081 & BS EN ISO 2082 class B or alternatively galvanised to
BS EN ISO 1461.
7 A test will be carried out to destruction on a threaded terminal test piece consisting of a
terminal and a length of rope such that the minimum test length is 600 mm. This assembly
shall have a minimum breaking force of 164.6 kN.
10.2.3 Tail Rope
1 Tail ropes shall be short lengths of rope fitted with threaded terminals at both ends that are
used to connect component ropes to anchors. Tail ropes shall be supplied to the site
ar
prefabricated.
at
2 Tail ropes are of identical construction and specification to the component ropes but of
different overall length. These ropes must also be prestressed.
-Q
3 The length of the fitted rope measured over the extremities of the threaded portions of the
screwed terminals shall be 6 m  10 mm.
LL
4 Tail ropes shall be terminated in one of two ways using identical terminals to those specified
W
for component ropes: with right-hand terminations on both ends, or with a right-hand at one
end and a left-hand termination at the other.
s
10.2.4 Safety Check Rope

en
1 Safety Check Ropes are steel wire ropes fitted with end terminations. The rope itself shall be
m
8 mm diameter 6 x 19 (9/9/1) IWRC galvanised wire rope to BS 302 with a minimum breaking
e
force of 40.3 kN. All wires used in the rope shall be to BS EN 10264 grade normal duty,
Si
galvanised to class 'A' finish.
2 The rope shall have a galvanised heart-shaped thimble to BS EN 13411-1 capable of

accepting a 38 mm diameter pin fitted by using a pressed ferrule on one end and a forked
terminal on the other end.
3 The length of the rope between the centre of the 38 mm pin hole and the 9 mm pin hole shall
be 1.8 m –0/+20 mm.
10.2.5 Posts
1 There are three types of posts with variations for embedded style or surface mounting: line,
deflection and surface.
2 All posts shall be manufactured from 6 mm section cold rolled mild steel plate to BS EN
10025 grade Fe 50A, having a minimum yield strength of 355 N/mm2. All posts shall be
galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461. Dimensions and tolerances of the types of posts shall be as
designated.
3 Post foundations and anchor blocks shall be as per the dimensions and details designated by
the supplier.
10.2.6 Anchorage Frames
1 A range of anchorage frames must be available for various locations and applications. These
are: on the median, verge and for end/intermediate and embedded/surface mounted fixings.
The anchorage frames shall comply with the requirements of clause 4.3 of BS 6579.
2 End anchorage frames shall be constructed from weldable structural steel as defined in BS
EN 10025 Grade Fe 430A with steel plate to section 4, and steel bar to section 6. Rolled steel
channel to BS 4. All materials shall be galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461.
3 Intermediate anchorage frames are double sided frames. All materials and finishes shall be
as defined above.
4 The intermediate anchor frames may be surface mounted.
ar
10.2.7 Other Components
at
1 Sockets for post foundation shall be constructed from 3 mm steel to BS EN 10025 Grade Fe
-Q
430A. Galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461.
2 Excluders shall be produced from high-density polyethylene type iii class C Cat 4, ASTM D
LL
1248
W
3 Rigging screws shall be used to connect component ropes together and component to tail
ropes. The rigging screws shall be the body of a rigging screw manufactured to BS 4429.
s
Except for the threads which are to be right and left hand M24 x 3-7H. Each rigging screw
en
shall be hot dipped galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461.
4 Steel pins used in the fork terminal on the safety check rope shall be made from BS 970
m
Grade 045M10.
e
Si
5 Split cotter pins shall be in stainless steel 2.5 mm x 16 mm to BS 4320 and shall have a
retaining pin.
6 Nuts used to secure the threaded rope terminal to an anchor frame shall be M24 thread in
zinc electroplated condition. Steel washers shall be M 24 to BS 4320 and fitted over the
threaded terminal and between the nut and anchor frame.
7 Locating hooks shall be made in stainless steel to BS 970 Part I. Nuts (for hooks) shall be M6
to BS 3692 Grade A2.
8 Caps for posts shall be high-density polyethylene Type III class c cat 4, ASTM D 1248
9 Ordinary thimbles shall be size 9, fitted to safety check rope made to BS EN 13411-1.
10 The fork terminal shall be fitted to the safety check rope shall be made to BS 970 Grade
45 M10.
11 All ropes, terminals, rigging screws, posts and anchor frames are to be clearly marked with
the manufacturers identification and the date of manufacture and the standard of
construction.
10.2.8 Installation
1 Steel wire ropes safety fences shall not be used where
(a) the length of fence at full height would be less than 37.5 m
(b) on horizontal kerb at radius less than 600 m
(c) on vertical sag curves of radius less than 300 m
(d) on medians having a width of less than 3.14 m
(e) where the height of any kerb at the edge of the adjacent surface exceeds 100 mm
(f) where high mast lighting columns are situated within 10m of the edge of the paved
surface
ar
(g) where the fence has to be connected to any other fence or building
at
2 All components shall be suitably protected and supplied in packaging that prevents any
permanent damage particularly to threaded components. Damage to metallic coating shall
-Q
be prevented by appropriate means. Any damage found on inspection prior to installation
shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
LL
3 Component ropes and tail ropes shall be supplied on reels with a bar of diameter not less
than 450 mm.
W
4 Ropes shall not be twisted or kinked.

s
5 Driven line posts shall be installed to the alignment and level shown on the drawing without
en
damage to the slot on the top of the post.

m
6 The top of the post shall be capped with a black polypropylene excluder.
e
7 The length of the line rope between any two adjacent anchors shall be not greater than
Si
627m.
8 Tensioning between any two limits shall not proceed until the Engineer is satisfied that each
limit is anchored sufficiently securely to resist the load effects due to tensioning.
9 The tension shall be measured using a device approved by the Engineer.

10 The ambient air temperature shall be noted at the time of tensioning and adjusted as follows;
ROPE TENSION kN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C

14.00 45
16.75 40
19.50 35
22.25 30
25.00 25
27.75 20
30.50 15
33.25 10
36.00 5
ar
10.3 TENSIONED CORRUGATED BEAM SAFETY FENCE
at
1 Except as modified herein, tension corrugated beam safety fences shall comply with the DTP
-Q
Manual of Contract Documents for Highway Works Specification - Volume 1, specification
series 400.
LL
2 Tensioned corrugated beam safety fences are for use on high speed roads at the road edge
or on the central median in one of the following forms:
W
(a) Single sided for road edges.

(b) Double sided for medians.
s
en
(c) Dual single sides for medians .
3 In the event of an accident, the support post shall give away while the safety fence remains in
m
tension absorbing the impact energy while protecting the traffic on the opposite carriageway.
The angle of deflection shall be reduced and as the vehicle decelerates it shall be redirected
e
towards the carriageway.

Si
4 The barrier shall consist of a strong corrugated steel beam section mounted and tensioned
on steel universal posts. End posts shall be set in concrete and intermediate posts can be
driven or set in concrete.
5 Surface mounted posts may be used where there are obstructions. In all cases the end posts
which are attached to barriers must be set in concrete.
6 The layout and the positioning of the barrier shall be as shown on the contract drawings. The
details and sizes and spacing of the various components shall be as shown on the contract
drawings.
7 The height of the centreline of the barrier shall be 610 mm above the edge of the carriageway
unless shown otherwise on the contract drawings.
8 There is no maximum length for installation. Where the line of the barrier is interrupted for an
obstacle or gap, additional end anchorages shall be provided.
9 Where a barrier protects an individual short obstacle the barrier should extend from at least
30 m in front of the obstacle to at least 7.5 m or more beyond it. A minimum clearance of
1.2 m behind the barrier shall be allowed for deflection.
10 Circular installations shall be at a radius of not less than 120 m. Tighter radii than this shall
not be used without the written approval of the Engineer.
11 Tensioners shall consist of two longitudinal bulbs installed in brackets and shall be positioned
in intervals along the barrier and bolted to the corrugated beam.
12 Beams shall be connected by lap joints using screws nuts and washers. Beams shall be
spliced by lapping with the edge facing away from the direction of traffic. Longitudinal
clearance between screws and slotted holes in the beams shall be removed by prising apart
the beams. The nuts shall be tightened to a torque approved by the supplier.
13 Tensioning between any two limits shall not proceed until the Engineer is satisfied that each
ar
limit is anchored sufficiently securely to resist the load effects due to tensioning. Tensioning
shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the system manufacturer’s recommendations.
at
Adjustments to the tensioning shall be made for the ambient temperature at the time of
tensioning strictly in accordance with the system manufacturer’s recommendations.
-Q
14 The beam shall be completely formed, punched with holes for mounting and splicing and
ready for assembly when delivered. It shall be uniform corrugated section straight or curved
LL
sections, galvanising shall be carried out after fabrication and each element and end sections
shall be marked at the point of fabrication with the manufacturer’s name or trade mark,
W
gauge and heat ( steel batch ) number and with the coating lot referenced.
s
15 The barrier system shall be supplied with all required terminals and approach flares for the
en
particular installation situation.
16 Safety barriers shall be erected to present a flowing alignment, with the alignment in plan not
m
more than ± 30 mm from the prescribed alignment and no deviations in a 10 m length by

e
more than ± 15 mm from the prescribed alignment. The height of the beam shall not depart
Si
from the prescribed height by more than ± 30 mm nor deviate in any 10 m length from the
prescribed height by more than ± 10 mm.
10.4 UNTENSIONED CORRUGATED SAFETY FENCE
1 Untensioned corrugated safety fences shall meet the requirements of the tensioned
corrugated safety fence except as modified herein and the fence shall not be tensioned.
2 Untensioned corrugated safety fences can be used in low-speed situations to prevent

vehicles crossing median and for protection at the verge.
3 Beams shall be shaped so that there are no sharp edges protruding into traffic. Beams shall
be connected by lap joints made in the direction of the traffic flow. The beams shall be
formed from a 3 mm steel strip to give a corrugated cross-section. On curves less than 45 m
radius, the beam shall be provided in preformed curves, internal or external, without any
reduction in strength.
4 At terminations, the end rails shall be sloped down at a slope of approximately 1 in 6 to

terminate just above ground level. Anchorage shall be provided by an end post set in
concrete. Unless otherwise designated the centreline of the beam shall be 610 mm above
the edge of the carriageway or hard shoulder.
10.5 OPEN-BOX BEAM SAFETY FENCE
1 Open box beam safety fences shall meet the requirements of the DTP - Manual of contract
documents for highway works - volume 1 specification series 400 except as modified herein.
2 The open-box beam barrier shall be used on high-speed roads where a stiffer barrier than
the tensioned corrugated beam is required. The open-box barrier can be used for a double
sided installation in a median.
3 The layout, positioning, post spacing and all dimensions of the system shall be as
designated.
ar
4 The systems shall comprise a main traffic section rail element with a traffic face 150 mm
wide. This shall be ground mounted on relatively weak Z-section posts or with hexagonal
at
energy absorbing brackets bolted to a reinforced concrete wall or bridge pier. The traffic face
-Q
shall be set to a height of 610 mm at the centreline of the rail.
5 There is no limit to the length of the installation, but end rails shall be taken down to ground
level and bolted to end posts to form anchors which are set in concrete.
LL
6 Where the installed barrier exceeds 100 m in length, expansion joints are to be inserted in
W
the main rail.

s
7 The standard section length shall be 4.8 m unless otherwise designated, and this value shall
en
be used on curves of radii down to 335 m.

m
8 For radii between 335 m and 107 m special fish plates shall be used.
e
Si
9 For radii between 107 m and 50 m, 2.4 m rail lengths shall be used with special fish plates.
10 Z-section intermediate posts shall be connected to the main rail by shear bolts and clamp
plates into the back of the rail section.
11 Rail sections shall be butt jointed together connected by fish plates and bolted in connection.
12 Where a non-standard situation arises in the use of the crash barrier, the supplier shall obtain
recommendations from the UK Transport Research Laboratory.
13 In particularly hazardous locations where vehicles with a high centre of gravity are in use, the
open box barrier may be installed to a double height with two protective rails. The horizontal
centreline of the second rail shall be positioned 1 m above the adjacent carriageway. The
two box section rails shall be connected together with vertical straps or a single shear bolt in
the centre of each connection of the rails to longer intermediate posts.
10.6 TENSIONED RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTION SAFETY FENCE
1 Tensioned rectangular hollow section safety fences shall be installed as designated. The
position, layout dimensions and details shall be as designated.
2 The barriers shall be used where protection is required for bridge piers lighting columns and
other obstructions.
3 The size of the rectangular hollow section shall be 100 mm wide x 100 mm high or
100 mm wide x 200 mm high.
4 The minimum recommended curve for the barrier shall be 120 m radius. Tensioners shall be
fitted at a maximum spacing of 70.5 m and the first tensioner shall be within 50 m of the
anchorage.
5 When supplied the system shall include a detailed packing list with each component
ar
referenced and clearly marked to the standard of manufacture and the manufacturer’s name
and date of manufacture.
at
10.7 MARKERS FOR BARRIERS
-Q
1 To ensure that the vehicle crash barriers are clearly delineated, reflectorized markers shall be
LL
fixed to the barriers. The work shall consist of the fabrication supplied and fixing of
reflectorized markers to vehicle crash barriers and other road side obstructions.
W
2 Reflectorized markers shall consist of two retro-reflective faces of minimum area 4000 mm2
on a weather proof durable backing capable of being fixed to the barrier. All metal fixings and
s
fittings shall be galvanised or stainless steel and approved by the Engineer.

en
3 Reflectorized faces shall consist of a minimum of 210 glass beads set in a 3 mm thick tough
m
durable plastic backing. The two faces of the marker shall be of the colour specified in the
Qatar Traffic Manual unless shown otherwise in the drawing or instructed otherwise by the
e
Engineer.
Si
4 Reflectors shall be fixed to safety barriers and other structures where designated. Stainless
steel fixings complying with BS EN ISO 3506 grade A4 shall be used to attach markers to
concrete. Plastic isolation washers shall be used if the marker is galvanised.
10.8 CRASH CUSHIONS AND TERMINALS
1 Where designated, permanent or portable energy absorbing terminal systems shall be

provided for protection of traffic as shown on the drawings.
2 Proposed systems shall have a proven record of satisfactory performance of at least five
years in a number of locations.
3 The system shall be able to withstand head on and side impacts within the specified design
criteria. The system shall have the performance characteristics of a conventional metal
beam guard rail for strength durability and redirectional properties.
4 All of the components and materials of the system shall be suitable for use in the climatic
conditions of Qatar and shall not be liable to damage or deterioration in high temperatures or
by prolonged exposure to direct sunlight.
5 The system shall be such that most major components can be reused after a typical impact.
6 All metal work used in the system shall be galvanised or stainless steel.
7 All concrete used in the system shall meet the requirements of Section 5.
8 No work or fabrication of the system or ordering of the materials shall be carried out until the
Engineer has given formal approval in writing to the Contractor’s detailed submission.
10.9 VEHICLE BARRIER UNITS (VBU)
1 Vehicle barrier units and their foundations shall be as per the details and dimensions shown
on the drawings.
ar
2 Vehicle barrier units shall be mass concrete of grade C25
at
3
-Q
The barriers shall be cast in-situ in nominal 6 m length units unless designated otherwise.
4 All the concrete materials and procedures including any steel reinforcement for the barriers
LL
shall comply with Section 5.
5 Forms shall be smooth and tight-fitting which can be held rigidly to the line and grade during
W
the placing of concrete.

s
6 At the option of the Contractor, the barriers may be precast in sections not exceeding 6 m in
en
length. In such cases the barrier shall be reinforced to ensure that information technology can
be safely handled and have 2 no. lifting eyes of galvanised steel cast in at the top. The
m
method of casting, handling and placing of barrier sections shall be proposed by the
Contractor for approval by the Engineer.
e
Si
7 The joints between the barriers shall be as per the details shown on the drawings.
8 Vehicle barrier units shall be cast onto blinding concrete laid onto compacted subgrade
10.10 TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS
1 Temporary concrete barriers shall be used for traffic management at road diversions or
detours where there is slow moving traffic.
2 Temporary concrete barriers shall be as per the designated detailed dimensions. The
barriers shall be either double or single sided.
3 The barriers shall be cast in nominal 6 m length units unless otherwise designated.
4 Each barrier shall have cast in at the top two lifting eyes of galvanised steel.
5 Where adjacent barriers are put together two galvanised steel wire eyes shall be cast in to
the ends to allow a steel pin to be placed through the eyes and into the road surface to
secure the barrier laterally.
6 The Contractor shall propose the reinforcement in the precast barriers which shall be
adequate to resist the forces and moments induced during lifting and handling.
7 All the concrete work including any steel reinforcement for the barriers shall comply with
Section 5 of this specification.
8 The method of casting, handling and placing of barrier sections shall be proposed by the
Contractor for approval by the Engineer.
10.11 ALUMINIUM BRIDGE PARAPET
1 The aluminium alloy parapets for installation on the bridges and retaining walls shall be
designed to the requirements of BS EN 1317 "Highway parapets for bridges and other
ar
structures. Part 1. Specification for vehicle containment parapets of metal construction".
at
2 The parapet shall be designed for normal level of containment as defined by the standard i.e.
-Q
that required to resist penetration from the following vehicle’s impact characteristics:
Vehicle Saloon Car
Mass 1500 kg
LL
Height of centre of gravity 600 mm

Angle of impact 2 degrees
W
Speed 113 km/h

3 The parapet proposed for use shall be a three rail system of an established design the
s
prototypes of which have been subjected to full scale dynamic testing. The parapet design
en
which shall therefore be considered exempt from further dynamic testing shall be taken from
the list in Appendix G of BS EN 1317.
m
4 The parapets supplied to the project shall be certified by the supplier as a normal
e
containment system complying with one of the following.

Si
5 That it complies in all respects with the design of parapet that successfully met the
requirements of Clause 26.1 or 26.5 (concerning dynamic testing) of BS EN 1317 as
appropriate.
6 That any modifications that have been made to the tested design comply with Clause 26.6 or
26.7 of BS EN 1317 as appropriate.
7 The parapet construction materials shall be as follows:

Extruded sections Aluminium alloy 6082-T6 to BS 1474
Castings Aluminium alloy LM6M to BS 1490
8 The finish of the parapets shall be high quality defect free mill finish and as cast finish for
extrusions and castings respectively.
9 All aluminium welds shall confirm to BS EN 1011 and the requirements of BS EN 1317.
10 All setscrews and nuts are to be stainless steel to BS EN ISO 3506 material grade A4.
Setscrews are to be strength class 80. Washer material is to be stainless steel to BS 1449:
Part 2 conforming to grade A4 or A2 as defined in BS EN ISO 3506.
11 Rail attachment and rail joint screws are to be M12 x 30 long hexagon head each complete
with one spring washer to BS 4464 type B, and one plain washer to BS 4320 form A.
12 Holding down bolts are to be M20 hexagon head bolts of sufficient length to give the
engagement required in BS EN 1317.
13 Bottom mesh fixing screws if required, are to be to the M8 long hexagon head set screws
each complete with one spring washer, two plain washers and one M8 nut where appropriate.
14 The holding down arrangement shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 1317.
15 Loctite grade 270 (or similar approved) to be applied on erection to all rail joint and rail
attachment setscrews. At the holding down bolts, contact between the stainless steel and
ar
aluminium baseplate shall be avoided by the use of a suitable "top-hat" insert manufactured
from an inert material.
at
16 Underside of baseplates are to be given at least two coats of an alkali resistant bitumastic
-Q
paint or pitch complying with BS 3416.
17 Mesh, if required, shall be 10 gauge welded steel wire in accordance with BS EN 1317,
LL
where appropriate. It may be galvanised, or any other finish as directed by the Engineer.
W
18 Rivets shall consist of Avdel drive rivets, code 5141 or 06 37 or similar approved. Where
there is no substantial backing Avdel chrobert rivets, code 1125 06 13 with sealing pins code
s
1182 06 07 or similar approved, shall be used.

en
19 Full details of the proposed supplier with his technical specification in English covering
materials, main dimensions and sizes shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before
m
the Contractor places an order.

e
Si
20 Two copies of detailed shop drawings shall be submitted and the Engineer's approval
obtained before manufacture is commenced.
21 During erection, parapets shall be securely held in their correct position until all connections
and fastenings are complete and the post fixings have attained adequate strength to the
Engineer's approval.
22 The finished parapets shall be true to line and level throughout their length.
23 Panels and members shall be free from twist, and posts shall be truly vertical.
END OF PART
Part 11: Kerbs, Footways and Paved Areas
11 KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS............................................................ 2

11.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
11.1.1 Scope 2
11.1.2 References 2
11.1.3 Submittals 2
11.2 KERBS .................................................................................................................... 3
11.2.1 General 3
11.2.2 Materials and Manufacture 3
11.2.3 Laying 5
11.3 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS ............................................................. 6
11.4 LAYING PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS ............................................... 7
11.5 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLABS ................................................................ 8
ar
11.6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PAVED AREAS....................................................... 9
11.7 BITUMINOUS PAVED AREAS ................................................................................ 9
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
11 KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 Scope
1 Highway kerbs, edging kerbs for footways and other paved areas. Precast concrete paving
slabs and precast interlocking concrete block areas.
2 Related Sections and Parts:

This Section
Part 3 Earthworks
ar
Section 5, Concrete
at
Section 13, Masonry
11.1.2 References
-Q
LL
BS 812........................Testing Aggregates
BS 1377......................Methods of test for soil for civil engineering purposes
W
BS 7533......................Code of practice for laying precast concrete units

BS 7533-3 ..................Laying precast concrete paving blocks
s
BS EN 197-1 ..............Cement composition specifications and conformity criteria for

en
comments cements
BS EN 1338................Precast concrete paving blocks
m
BS EN 1339................Concrete paving flags

e
BS EN 1340................Concrete kerbs unit

Si
BS EN 12620..............Aggregates for concrete

BS EN 12878..............Pigments for the colouring of building materials
11.1.3 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit samples of the various types of concrete kerbs and other
pavement materials for approval by the Engineer before beginning the work.
1 Tests shall be carried out on the concrete mix before beginning manufacture of precast kerbs
and other items to ascertain the strength and surface finish requirements can be met. If the
required strength and surface finish are not obtained, the Engineer may order revisions to be
made in order to achieve the designated requirements.
2 The Engineer shall, at all reasonable times, have access to the place where paving blocks
and other items and their constituent materials are manufactured and stored, for the purpose
of examining and sampling the materials and finished blocks, inspecting the process of
manufacture and marking the blocks.
3 The laying of paving blocks shall comply with the requirements of the Code of Practice for
Laying Precast Concrete Block Pavements and BS EN 1338 except where otherwise
designated.
11.2 KERBS
11.2.1 General
1 The following are the types of precast kerbs to be constructed where designated together
with associated channels, edgings and quadrants:
(a) Non-mountable.
ar
(b) Dropped.
at
(c) Flush. -Q
2 The dimensions and shapes of the different kerb types shall be as per the details in BS EN
1340 unless otherwise shown on the drawings or designated in the contract.
LL
3 The bedding and support for such units shall be as shown on the drawings.
W
4 Except as modified in this Part, all precast concrete kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants
shall be hydraulically pressed complying with BS EN 1340.
s
5 Kerbs shall be laid and bedded in accordance with BS 7533 on the concrete pavement slab,
en
a mortar bed, the road base, or on a concrete foundation while it is still plastic or after it has
set. All precast units shall be backed with concrete as per the designated details.
m
6 The use of cast-in-situ concrete for kerbs will not be permitted except with the express written
e
approval of the Engineer.

Si
11.2.2 Materials and Manufacture
1 Constituent concrete materials for kerbs shall conform to the requirements designated in
Section 5. Kerbs shall be prepared with a concrete mixture containing not less than 400
kg/m3 of sulphate resisting Portland cement.
2 Testing of concrete kerbs shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS EN
1340.
3 The aggregate shall meet the designated requirements and conform to the following
gradation.
Table 11.1
Aggregate Gradation for Kerb Concrete
Sieve mm % Passing by Weight
19 100
13.2 76-100
9.50 60-80
4.75 40-60
2.36 22-42
1.18 12-32
0.6 7-23
0.3 4-15
ar
0.15 2-10
at
0.075 0-2
-Q
4 The 28-day compressive strength of the concrete shall be not less than 30 N/mm2
determined on 150 mm cube specimens, and not less than 75 % of this figure after seven
LL
days.
W
5 Non-mountable kerb, dropped kerb, flush kerb and heel kerb elements shall only be precast
from concrete produced in a fully automatic batching plant.
s
6 Before approval of elements of commercial manufacture, cores shall be taken from a random
en
sample to ascertain that the concrete strength is not less than 25 N/mm2 at 7 days.
m
7 Elements shall be manufactured to the designated dimensions as standard 900 mm lengths

unless specified otherwise in the contract documents.
e
Si
8 Non-mountable and dropped precast kerbs shall be formed by elements 500 mm long where
required to be laid in straight lines but may be reduced to 250 mm long where required to be
laid to curves, depending on the radii of the curves.
9 The finished product shall be of solid appearance with clean planar faces, be free of
segregation, honeycombing, pits, broken corners or other defects and there shall be no
evidence of external rendering.
10 Bull-nosed and curved faces shall be of constant radius with a smooth change from radius to
straight.
11 Tolerances of manufacture shall be 3 mm in any one dimension and end faces shall be truly
perpendicular to the base.
12 Transverse strength requirements shall be assessed in accordance with BS EN 1338

appendix B. The loads at failure shall not be less than the appropriate value given in Table
11.1A.
Table 11.1A
Transverse strength of kerbs, channels and edgings
Depth as tested Width as tested Load at failure
(mm) (mm) (kN)
150 305 22.2
125 150 8.0
125 255 13.3
50 255 5.1
ar
50 205 4.5
at
50 150 -Q 3.3
Dropper kerbs
125 255 to 150 10.3
LL
W
13 Water absorption requirements shall be assessed in accordance with BS EN 1338 appendix

C. The water absorption shall not exceed the appropriate value given in Table 11.1B.
s
Table 11.1B
en
Water absorption of kerbs, channels and edgings
Water absorption in % by mass

e m
Kerbs, channels and quadrants Edgings

Si
3.0 3.6
11.2.3 Laying
1 Elements shall be set on to the designated lines and grades. Under no circumstances shall it
be permitted for levels to be set by direct measurement from pavement layers.
2 Unless otherwise indicated, elements shall be laid either directly onto a wet-concrete base or
onto a sand/cement (3:1) mortar bedding, 25 mm thick, on a previously laid concrete base or
approved subbase. The dimensions of the base and concrete class shall be as designated.
3 After kerb units have been laid, a contiguous backing of concrete shall be poured for the
elements using steel forms, unless otherwise designated. Lateral resistance shall be
provided to the kerbs by placing dowel bars in the backing concrete in not more than 500mm
intervals.
4 No pavement layers shall be laid against kerbing until such time as the backing is completed,
backfilled and approved by the Engineer.
5 Joints between kerbs, shall have a width of 4 mm. These joints shall be filled completely with
fluid sand cement mortar approved by the Engineer and the joints shall be formed again.
6 Immediately after any concrete is in place, and for seven days thereafter, the kerbs, base,
and backing shall be fully cured and protected from drying out and against the harmful effects
of weather, including rain and rapid temperature changes. The method of protection shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval. The use of coloured curing membranes will not be
permitted. Concrete not properly cured and protected will be rejected and shall be removed
from the site.
7 At every 10 m interval movement joint 20 mm thick shall be formed through the concrete bed
and backing. The joint filler shall be bitumen impregnated cork board. The filler shall extend
through the kerb, bed, backing and channel, and shall be trimmed to the finished shape of
the kerb and channel.
ar
at
8 At access points, the kerbs, including the bed backing shall be dropped to show a face of
25 mm or as otherwise designated. -Q
9 At the termination of any kerb run, the end kerb section shall be sloped down to ground level,
if applicable, and angled away from the road at 30 degrees in accordance with BS 7533.
LL
10 All kerbs shall be thoroughly cleaned of all extraneous materials.

W
11 Kerbs shall be laid within a tolerance of  3 mm, at each end of an element, to the designated
s
lines and grades.

en
11.3 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS

m
1 Standard rectangular precast concrete paving blocks shall have a work size length of 200
e
mm and a work size width of 100 mm. Paving blocks of any other shape may be made
Si
provided they fit within a 295 mm square co-ordinating space. The preferred work size
thicknesses are 60 mm, 80 mm and 100 mm for all types of paving blocks.
2 The actual sizes of the paving blocks as determined in accordance with BS EN 1338 shall not
deviate from the work size dimensions by more than the following tolerances:
Length  2 mm
Width  2 mm
Thickness  3 mm
3 The binder used in making the paving blocks shall be Ordinary Portland Cement, Sulphate
Resisting Portland Cement or Moderate Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement which complies
with BS 4027 or ASTM C150; respectively.
4 The aggregates used in making the paving blocks shall be Gabbro, and they shall comply
with section 5 of QCS.
5 The water used in the manufacturing of the blocks shall be of drinking quality or shall be in
conformance with section 5 of the QCS.
6 The pigments, which are used to give colour to the paving blocks, shall comply with BS EN
12878.
7 The average tensile splitting strength of 16 paving blocks tested in accordance with BS EN
1338 shall not be less than 3.6MPa and the strength of any individual block shall not be less
than 2.9MPa and the failing load not lower than 250N/mm.
8 The average water absorption of three tested samples shall not exceed 5% and no individual
block shall have a water absorption greater than 6%.
11.4 LAYING PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS
1 The paving blocks shall be laid generally in accordance with BS 7533-3 and to a pattern
ar
2 A laying course consisting of fine aggregates (sand), which complies with the corresponding
at
grading requirement given in Table 11.2, shall be constructed. The fine aggregates shall be
-Q
placed in a moist but not a saturated condition and shall be compacted so that a laying
course thickness of 50 mm approximately is formed. This sand layer shall be placed on a
compacted aggregate subbase or base as indicated in the project specifications/drawings.
LL
3 The paving blocks shall be laid on the laying course and compacted using a plate compactor
with a plate area of not less than 0.25 m2, transmitting an effective pressure of not less than
W
75 kN/m2 of plate at a frequency of vibration in the range of 75 Hz to 100 Hz.

s
4 A maximum deviation for the block paving from design levels of  6 mm shall be maintained.
en
5 The joints between the paving blocks shall be filled with dry jointing sand by spreading it over
m
the surface and brushing it into the joints. The dry sand shall be natural and shall comply with
the corresponding grading requirement given in Table 11.2. The block paving shall be
e
vibrated to ensure that the joints have been completely filled.

Si
Table 11.2
Grading for laying course & jointing sand
% Passing
Sieve Size
Laying Course Sand Jointing Sand
10 mm 100
5 mm 90-100 100
2.36 mm 75-100 95-100
1.18 mm 55-90 90-100
600 m 35-70 55-100
300 m 8-35 15-50
150 m 0-10 0-15
75 m 0-3 0-3
11.5 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLABS
1 Precast concrete paving slabs shall be hydraulically pressed, complying with BS EN 1339.
2 The dimensions of precast concrete paving slabs shall be as per Table 3 of BS EN 1339
unless shown otherwise on the contract drawings.
3 Where permitted by the Engineer as an alternative, slabs 450 mm x 450 mm and smaller
may be bedded on a layer of clean sharp sand complying with BS EN 12620 Grading C or M,
25 mm  10 mm thick.
4 On circular work where the radius is 12 m or less, all slabs shall be radially cut on both edges
to the required line.
5 Transverse strength and water absorption requirements shall be assessed in accordance

with BS EN 1339 - appendix B and appendix C; respectively. The loads at failure shall not be
ar
less than the appropriate value given in Table 11.3 and the water absorption shall not exceed
the limit given in the aforementioned Table.
at
Table 11.3 -Q
Transverse strength and water absorption of flags
Minimum load at failure for thickness
Maximum water
(kN)
LL
Flag type absorption in %

by mass
50 mm 60 mm 63 mm 65 mm 70 mm
W
A 8.3 - 12.7 - -
s
B,C,D 11.1 - 16.9 - -

en
E 9.6 - - - 18.8 4.0

F 9.1 - - 15.4 -
m
G 9.6 13.8 - - -
e
Si
6 The mortar bed shall be spread only after the base has been approved by the Engineer. The
subbase shall be tested for density and the minimum density shall be greater than 95% of the
maximum dry density.
7 Slabs shall be laid in accordance with BS 7533 to the designated cross-section and with
joints at right angles to the kerb.
8 Slabs shall be bedded on a sand/cement (3:1) mortar bedding not less than 10 mm and not
more than 40 mm thick.
9 Unless designated elsewhere paving slabs shall be laid with close joints of between 2 to 4
mm. After laying the joints shall be filled with sand complying with clause 8.3.3.
10 Where designated paving slabs shall be laid with open joints of between 5 to 10mm laid in
11.6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PAVED AREAS
1 Cast-in-place concrete for footways and paved areas shall only be permitted for small areas
where it is awkward or impractical to use one of the alternative paving materials specified in
this part of the specification.
2 The use of steel reinforcement bars or mesh in cast-in-place concrete slabs is not permitted.
3 Paving shall be cast in sizes to avoid the formation of shrinkage cracks. The actual maximum
size of area to be cast at one time will be advised by the Engineer based on the mix design
and layer thickness shown on the drawings. The Contractor may be permitted to cast larger
areas at one time if non-metallic fibres are added to the concrete mix to eliminate cracking. In
such cases the maximum pour size shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
4 Cast-in-place concrete for footways and paved areas shall be mixed, laid and cured as
described in Section 5.
ar
5 The grade of concrete, layout, thickness, position of joints and surface finish shall be as
at
designated. -Q
6 Cast-in-place concrete shall be laid on a designated sub-base in accordance with Part 4.
11.7 BITUMINOUS PAVED AREAS

LL
1 Flexible surfacing for footways and paved areas shall be made and laid in compliance with
W
Part 5.
s
2 The type of mix and the surface treatment/finish to the paving will be as designated..
en
3 Surfacing shall be laid to true levels and crossfalls and be of the designated thickness.
m
4 Surfacing shall be laid on a designated sub-base in accordance with Part 4.

e
Si
END OF PART
Part 12: Fencing
12 FENCING ....................................................................................................... 2
12.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

12.1.1 Scope 2
12.1.2 References 2
12.1.3 Submittals 3
12.2 FENCING GENERALLY ................................................................................ 3
12.3 CHAIN LINK FENCING.................................................................................. 4

12.3.1 General 4
12.3.2 Materials 4
12.3.3 Gates 5
12.3.4 Finish to Components 6
12.3.5 Construction 6
ar
12.4 STRAINED WIRE FENCING ......................................................................... 7
at
12.4.1 General 7
12.4.2 Materials 8
-Q
12.5 PEDESTRIAN GUARD-RAIL ....................................................................... 11
LL
12.5.1 Aluminium Guard Rails 11

12.5.2 Galvanised Steel Rails 12
W
12.5.3 Materials and Fabrication 12

s
en
e m
Si
Part 12: Fencing
12 FENCING
12.1 GENERAL
12.1.1 Scope
1 This part of the specification covers the materials and installation requirements for the
following permanent fence types. The definition of each type is given in the relevant section
of the specification.
(a) chainlink fencing.

(b) strained wire fencing.
(c) pedestrian guard-rail.
ar
This Section
at
Part 1 General -Q
Part 10 Vehicle Crash Barriers
Section 5, Concrete
12.1.2 References
LL
BS 4............................Structural steel sections

BS 970........................Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering purposes
W
BS 1449: Part 2 ..........Stainless and heat resistant steel plate sheet and strip
BS 1474......................Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for engineering purposes
s
en
BS 1490......................Aluminium and aluminium ingots for engineering purposes

BS 1722-2 ..................Strained wire fences
m
BS 1722, Part 1 ..........Chain link fences

e
BS 1722, Part 2 ..........Rectangular wire mesh and hexagonal wire netting fences
Si
BS 4102......................Specifications for steel wire and wire products for fences

BS 4320......................Metal washers for general engineering purpose
BS 4464......................Spring washers for general engineering and automobile purposes
BS 4652......................Specifications for zinc rich priming paint
BS EN 1011................Welding
BS EN ISO 1461 ........Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
BS EN ISO 3506 ........Corrosion-resistant stainless steel fasteners
BS EN 10210-2 ..........Hot finished structural hollow sections of non alloy and fine grain steels
BS EN 10244-2 ..........Steel wire and wire products
ASTM A53 ..................Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A193 ................Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High-Temperature
Part 12: Fencing
ASTM A240 ................Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels
ASTM B108 ................Specification for Aluminium-Alloy Permanent Mould Castings
ASTM B221 ................Specification for Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes,
and Tubes
ASTM D4364 ..............Practice for Performing Accelerated Outdoor Weathering of Plastics
Using Concentrated Natural Sunlight
ASTM Dl499 ...............Standard practice for filtered open-frame carbon-arc exposure of
plastic
ASTM G152................Standard practice for operating open flame carbon-arc light apparatus
for exposure of non-metallic materials
ASTM G153................Standard practice for operating endorsed arc light apparatus for
exposure of non-metallic materials.
ASTM G23..................Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type)
With and Without Water for Exposure of Non-metallic Materials
ar
at
AASHTO M181...........Chain link fence
-Q
USA Federal Salt Spray Test (Test Standard 141 Method 6061)
12.1.3 Submittals
LL
1 For all fencing systems, the Contractor shall submit the following for the Engineer’s approval,
W
before an order is placed with the manufacturer:
(a) Name and address of the factories at which the required materials will be
s
manufactured.
en
(b) Technical submittals accompanied by a completed specification in the English

language, catalogues and a tabulation showing the overall dimensions of each type
m
and size of the required materials.

e
(c) Programme of delivery certified by the manufacturer and supplier.

Si
(d) Detailed drawings.

(e) Material composition certificates.
(f) Technical information for the materials and system.
2 The submittals shall clearly show the standard to which the material complies. All materials
shall meet the requirements of the relevant BS. The Engineer may accept materials that
comply to a comparable international standard if the contractor demonstrates that the
standard is equivalent.
12.2 FENCING GENERALLY
1 All permanent fencing, unless otherwise designated shall be erected to present a flowing
alignment both in plan and elevation following approximately the level of the finished ground
along the line of the fence. The Contractor shall trim or fill the ground along the line of the
fence when required. The fencing shall be neatly and effectively joined to existing fences and
to other structures and parapets.
Part 12: Fencing
2 Where designated, existing fences, gates and stiles, with posts shall be carefully taken down,
laid aside, removed or later re-erected. Fences, gates, stiles and posts which are to be re-
erected shall be handled carefully to avoid any damage.
12.3 CHAIN LINK FENCING
12.3.1 General
1 This work consists of the supply and installation of all plastic coated chain link fencing
complete with all necessary hardware and appurtenances as designated and in conformity
with the lines and grades directed by the Engineer.
2 All materials to be furnished and installed shall conform to all requirements of BS1722: Part 2
except as otherwise designated.
12.3.2 Materials
1 The base metal for the manufacture of posts and braces shall conform to the requirements of
ar
BS1722: Part 1, except that the carbon content of steel posts shall not be more than 0.4 % if
welding is required. Posts and braces shall be galvanised in accordance with BS EN ISO
at
1461.
2
-Q
Fence posts and braces and gate frames shall be pipe conforming to the requirements of
Table 12.1 unless otherwise designated:
LL
Table 12.1
Fence posts and braces and gate frames requirements
W
Location Minimum O.D., mm Minimum Weight, kg/m

s
End, Corner, Pull Posts 60.3 5.43

en
Line Posts 48.3 4.05

m
Braces 42.2 3.38

e
Si
3 Posts for each side of gates shall be pipe conforming to the requirements of Table 12.2:
Table 12.2
Post dimensions for chain link fences
Gate Opening, m Minimum O.D., mm Minimum Weight, kg/m
1.5 60.3 5.43

4.0 73.0 8.62
4 All fence and gate posts (including all end and corner posts) shall be fitted with plastic or vinyl
coated aluminium tops designed to fit securely over the posts and crowned to shed water.
5 Changes in line where the angle of deflection is 15° or more shall be considered as corners
and corner posts shall be installed.
Part 12: Fencing
6 Extension arms, stretcher bars, and other required fittings and hardware shall be steel,
malleable iron or wrought iron and shall be hot dipped galvanised. All required fittings and
hardware shall be fastened to the posts in the proper manner.
7 Chain link fence fabric shall be galvanised steel fabric conforming to the BS1722: Part 1. The
base metal for the fabric shall be medium high carbon hot-dip galvanised steel wire. All chain
link fence fabric shall be woven into approximately 50 mm mesh such that in a vertical
dimension of 600 mm along the diagonals of the openings there shall be at least 7 meshes.
8 Between posts, chain link fabric shall be fastened to a top and bottom tension cable. The
tension cable shall be 10 gauge galvanised steel.
9 Tie wires and post clips shall be at least 9 gauge galvanised steel.
10 Turnbuckles and truss tighteners shall be fabricated of steel, malleable iron, or wrought iron
and shall be hot dipped galvanised. The truss tighteners shall have a strap thickness of not
ar
less than 6 mm.
at
11 The class of concrete for post footings shall be as designated.
-Q
12.3.3 Gates
1 Gate frames shall be constructed of not less than 42.2 mm galvanised pipe weighing
LL
3.38 kg/m and conforming to ASTM A53. Gate frames shall be cross trussed with 9 mm
W
adjustable truss rods. The corners of gate frames shall be fastened together and reinforced
with a malleable iron fitting designed for the purpose or by welding. All welds shall be ground
smooth.
s
en
2 Chain link fence fabric designated for the fence shall be attached to the gate frame by the
use of stretcher bars and the tie wires as designated for fence construction, and suitable
m
tension connectors shall be spaced at approximately 300 mm intervals.

e
3 The gates shall be hung by at least two steel or malleable iron hinges not less than 80 mm in
Si
width, so designed as to securely clamp to the gate post and permit the gate to be swung
back against the fence. The bottom hinge shall have a socket to take the bail end of the gate
frame.
4 Gates shall be provided with a combination steel or malleable iron catch and locking
attachment of approved design. Stops to hold gates open and a centre rest with catch shall
be provided where required.
5 All gates shall be provided with standard hardware and heavy duty padlocks with four keys
each, the type and details of which shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Part 12: Fencing
12.3.4 Finish to Components
1 All posts, gate frames, rails and similar materials shall have a coating thickness of 254 to 356
micron of a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) which has been chemically bonded to the metal surface
with an appropriately cured primer. Final finish colour shall be as designated.
2 Chain link fence fabric shall have a vinyl coating of minimum wall thickness of 0.559 mm over
the galvanised substrate. The vinyl coating shall be continuously extruded (not sprayed or
dipped) over the galvanised steel wire by the thermal extrusion process under pressures to
352 kg/cm2 to ensure a dense and impervious covering free of voids, having a smooth and
lustrous surface appearance.
3 The wire shall be vinyl-clad before weaving and shall be free and flexible at all joints.
4 Colours shall be stabilised and have a light fastness that shall withstand a minimum
WEATHER-O-METER exposure time of 4000 h without any deterioration in accordance with
ar
ASTM Dl499 and G23, Type E. Alternatively a sample of fencing may be subject to an
at
exposure time of 2000 h at 85 °C humidity in a humidity oven. The sample shall exhibit no
colour loss, cracking, peeling, blistering or other deterioration.
-Q
5 The vinyl-clad wire shall withstand an accelerated ageing test of 2000 hours at 62 °C without
cracking or peeling.
LL
6 The vinyl covering shall, in addition, resist attack from prolonged exposure to dilute solutions
W
of most common mineral acids, sea water and dilute solutions of most salts and alkali.
s
7 The pipe resin formulation shall meet the standard ASTM D4364, minimum 5000 h
en
WEATHER-O-METER requirement without cracking, blistering, or loss of adhesion. The

protective resin coating shall withstand an impact resistance test (Gardner Test Method) of a
m
minimum of 1850 mm/kg. Certified abrasion resistance shall be in excess of a ten minute
blast of 5.6 kg/cm2 at 305 mm at 25 °C with S230 shot at an impingement angle of 90 °
e
without exposing the steel substratum.

Si
8 It shall not support combustion and shall be self-extinguishing; and shall withstand a salt
spray test (Federal Test Standard 141, Method 6061 of greater than 10,000 h with no
perceptive deterioration to coating or evidence of metal corrosion for unscored samples. For
scored samples after exposure of 1000 h, under-cutting shall not exceed 5 mm. The
protective resin coating shall exhibit a chemical resistance after prolonged exposure at 24 °C
to fumes.
12.3.5 Construction
1 Line posts shall be spaced at not more than 3.0 m intervals, measured from centre to centre
of posts, in general, in determining the post spacing, measurement will be made parallel to
the slope of the natural ground, and all posts shall be placed in a vertical position, except in
unusual locations where the posts shall be set perpendicular to the ground surface if so
directed by the Engineer.
2 All posts shall be set in concrete footings conforming to the designated details.
Part 12: Fencing
3 End, corner, pull and gate posts shall be braced to the nearest line post with galvanised
diagonal or horizontal braces used as compression members and galvanised 9 mm steel
truss rods with turnbuckles or truss tighteners used as tension members.
4 Pull posts shall be placed at locations agreed by the Engineer. They shall be placed at 200 m
intervals between posts to which the ends of the fabric are clamped or midway between such
posts when the distance is greater than 40 m but less than 200 m.
5 Chain link fabric shall be fastened on the side of the posts designated by the Engineer.
6 The fabric shall be stretched and securely fastened to the posts, and between posts the top
and bottom edges of the fabric shall be fastened to the tension wires. Tension wires shall be
stretched tight, the bottom tension wire shall be installed on a straight grade between posts
by excavating at the high points of ground and in no case will filling of depressions be
permitted.
ar
7 The fabric shall be fastened to end, corner and gate posts tall with minimum 10 mm diameter
steel stretcher bars and not less our than 3 mm by 18 mm stretcher bar bands spaced at
at
maximum or 300 mm intervals. The fabric shall be fastened to line posts ends and tension
-Q
wires with tie wires or post clips. The fasteners shall be spaced at maximum intervals of 500
mm.
LL
12.4 STRAINED WIRE FENCING

W
12.4.1 General
1 Strained wire general and dropper fences shall be as designated and they shall comply with
s
BS 1722-2 with the following amendments.

en
2 This part of the specification covers the requirements for materials and workmanship for
m
strained wire fences of the general pattern and of the dropper pattern. Droppers are defined
as intermediate and vertical stiffeners between some or all of the wires that are used to
e
maintain the spacing of the wires. The droppers are not connected to the ground.
Si
3 Strained wire fences comprise of tensioned horizontal steel wires fixed between vertical
straining posts with support angle struts and connected to intermediate posts. Posts shall be
constructed of either steel or precast reinforced concrete and anchored in concrete
foundations.
4 Wire dropper fencing shall be provided at locations where it is necessary to restrict the
access of vehicles, and camels and wandering animals.
5 Strained wire general and dropper fences shall be of one of the types shown in Table 12.3
6 The strained wire fences shall be coded according to the type dependant on the number of
line wires, whether droppers are used, material used for the posts, these type references are
given in Table 12.3. The first letter indicates that it is either a general pattern or a dropper
pattern strained wire fence, the second letter indicates the type of posts that are used, the
numbers give an indication of the height of the fence e.g. DC90 indicates a 0.9m high fence
with concrete posts and droppers.
Part 12: Fencing
7 For the sake of uniformity quoted heights of those to the top wire and exclude any variation in
ground clearance to the base, the third letter where present indicates the number of line
wires.
Table 12.3
General Characteristics of Strained Fences - Fence Types
With Concrete Height of
With Steel Posts With Wooden Posts Spacing between
Posts Top Wire &
horizontal wires,
General Dropper General Dropper General Dropper Number of
from the top wires
Pattern Pattern Pattern Pattern pattern Pattern Wires
m No. mm
DC 90 SS90 DS90 SW90 DW90 0.90 3 330,330
SC105A DC105A SS105A DS105A SW105A DW105A 1.05 5 250,250,230,150
250,250,230,150,
SC105B SS105B SS105B DS105B SW105B DW105B 1.05 6
100
250,250,230,150,
ar
SC120 DC120 SS120 DS120 SW120 DW120 1.20 6
150
at
250,250,230,150,
SC135A DC135A SS135A DS135A SW135A DW135A 1.35 7
-Q 150,150
250,250,230,150,
SC135B DC135B SS135B DS135B SW135B DW135B 1.35 8
150,150,100
DW135 250,225,225,150,
SC135C DC135C SS135C DS135C SW135C 1.35 9
LL
C 125,125,100,75
225,225,200,175,
W
DC180 DS180 DW180 1.80 11 175,175,150,150,

125,100
100,100,100,100,
s
DC210 DS210 DW210 2.10 16

100
en
m
12.4.2 Materials
e
Si
1 The sizes stated for components are the minimum requirements and it is permissible to use
larger sizes except where this would adversely affect the fit of the components or where
replacement parts need to match those already present.
2 Line wire shall comply with BS 4102 and shall be one of the following:
3 Zinc coated low carbon steel with a nominal wire diameter of either 4.5 or 5mm
4 Zinc coated high tensile wire with a nominal wire diameter of 3.15mm
5 Plastic coated high tensile wire having a tensile strength of 1050 N/mm2 with a Zinc coated
core of 3.15mm nominal core diameter and a 4 .0mm overall diameter.
6 Stirrup wire shall comply with BS4102 and shall be of zinc coated low carbon steel with grade
A plastic coated low carbon steel and should have a nominal wire core diameter of 2.5 mm.
7 Barbed wire shall comply with BS 4102, shall be zinc coated and made from either low
carbon steel or high tensile steel wire.
Part 12: Fencing
8 The materials, protective treatment, tolerances on size and general construction details of
steel posts and struts, for strained wire fences shall comply with the requirements for chain
link fences, except that components shall not be plastic coated unless specifically required
under the contract documentation.
9 The materials and tolerances on precasting of all concrete components shall comply with the
relevant parts of section 5.
10 The minimum concrete grade for posts shall be C25 and the minimum cement content
should be 350 kg.
11 The mixing, placing and compaction of the concrete shall be as per Section 5.
12 All inserts and holes cast into precast concrete components with posts shall be adequate for
the bolts or appurtenances to be fitted.
13 All holes shall be free from obstructions and accurately positioned.
ar
14 The minimum grade of concrete to be used for posts shall be C25 and the minimum cover to
at
embedded steel in posts shall be 50mm. -Q
15 The dimensions of concrete fence posts and struts shall be as given in Table 12.4.
16 Posts shall be reinforced with 4 steel reinforcing bars of the size given in Table 12.4.
LL
17 Straining posts and struts shall not be tapered.

W
18 The dimensions and details of the foundations shall be as shown in the contract drawings.
Concrete for foundations for the bases of posts and struts shall comply with the requirement
s
of section 5 of the specification and shall be grade C15.

en
19 Straining posts shall be provided with a firm bearing struts at a point within the top of the
m
length of the string posts, measured above the ground level.

e
20 Straining posts shall be provided with holes for the attachment of straining fittings.
Si
21 Where line wires are to be passed through them, struts shall be provided with either holes or
slots.
22 Intermediate posts shall be tapered to 75mm x 75mm at the top and shall be holed to allow
the attachment of line wires.
23 High bolt strain shall consist of bolts of 250mm overall length, not less than 9.5mm diameter
with an eye at one end. They should be threaded and fitted with nuts and washers.
24 2 way eye bolt strainers shall be fitted with ring nuts. They shall be hopped and galvanised to
BS EN ISO 1461. Widening brackets intended for attachment to the post shall be
manufactured from mild steel flat not less than 25mm x 3mm and shall be fitted with a
widening bolt 12mm minimum diameter with a friction type ferrule or ratchet winder.
25 Hair pin staples shall be of not less than 3mm diameter round wire or sectional wire of the
same cross sectional area and shall have a zinc coating complying with BS EN 10244-2.
Part 12: Fencing
26 Droppers shall be at least 65 mm longer than the distance between the top and bottom wires
covered by them and shall be made of steel of the section not less than 0.0066 kg/m or steel
wire or galvanised in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461.
Table 12.4
Concrete Fence Posts and Struts
Intermediate Posts Strain Posts Struts

Height
Reinf. Reinf. Reinf.
Length Section Length Section Length Section
Dia. Dia. Dia.
mm x mm x mm x
m m mm m mm m mm
mm mm mm
100 x 100 5 75 x 75
0.90 1.57 100 x 100 1.57 or or 1.50 or 6
125 x 125 8 100 x 75
100 x 100 5 75 x 75
1.05 1.72 100 x 100 1.87 or or 1.83 or 6
ar
125 x 125 8 100 x 75
1.20 1.87 125 x 125 2.02 125 x 125 8 1.98 100 x 75 6
at
1.35a
2.02 125 x 125 2.17 125 x 125 8 2.13 100 x 75 6
and b
-Q
1.35c 2.17 125 x 125 2.32 150 x 150 10 2.13 100 x 75 6
1.80 2.62 125 x 125 2.77 200 x 200 12 2.73 100 x 100 8
LL
2.10 2.92 125 x 125 3.07 200 x 200 12 3.03 100 x 100 8
12.4.3 Installation
W
1 Droppers shall be securely fixed to all the line wires covered by them and be of sufficient
s
strength to maintain the spacing of the line wires and spread the load between them in use.
en
2 The post shall be adequately braced in both directions after insertion into the wet concrete
m
and support shall be maintained till the concrete is fully hardened.

e
3 Excavation for foundations for post and struts shall be of the minimum stipulated dimensions
Si
at the base of the hole.
4 When erecting fence posts the concrete shall be placed in position before the
commencement of the initial set.
5 The entire foundation hole shall be filled with concrete, the use of partly backfilled holes shall
not be permitted. Straining posts shall be provided at the ends and corners of changes of
direction or acute variations in level and at intervals not exceeding 150m for mild steel line
wire or 300m for high tensile line wire in straight lengths of fence.
6 Struts shall be provided at each straining post.
7 Where there is a change in plan direction of the fence two struts shall be provided.
8 Intermediate posts shall be provided at intervals measured centre to centre of posts not
exceeding 3.5m.
9 The number of line wires shall be as given in Table 12.3.

Part 12: Fencing
10 The top wire shall be secured with approximately 75mm below the top of the posts, each line
wire shall be strained tightly and secured to each straining posts by either widening brackets
attached to the post with fixing bolts or high bolt strainers passing through a hole in the post
and secure with a nut and washer.
11 If barbed wire is specified it shall be attached to the straining posts and intermediate posts by
the same method as the line wire.
12 Attachment to intermediate posts with the exception of the high tensile line wire for which
stirrups are not permitted each line wire shall be secured to each intermediate posts by one
of the following means;
13 A wire stirrup pass through a hole in the posts secured to the
14 a hairpin stapled post through a hole in the post and the ends twice bent over
15 A line wire pass through a hole in the post
ar
16 Small areas of hot dipped galvanised coating damaged by welding cutting or by excessively
at
rough treatment during the transit and erection shall be renovated either by the use of melting
point zinc alloy repair rods or powders made specifically for this purpose or by the use of at
-Q
least 3 coats of good quality zinc paint as per BS 4652. Sufficient material shall be applied to
provide a zinc coating at least equal in thickness.
LL
17 Droppers shall be attached after all wires have been strained and secured in position.
W
18 The interval between dropper and the posts or between adjacent droppers shall not exceed
the following:
s
(a) For full length droppers 2m.

en
(b) For sectional droppers, bottom wires 2m.

m
(c) Top wires 2.5m.

e
19 Where sectional droppers are used the ends of all droppers or adjacent levels of wire shall
Si
be fixed to at least one wire common to both levels.
20 When measured within 14 days of erection the settled tension in the line wire between
straining posts at 100 m apart shall be at least 1.6 kN
21 The method of approximately measuring the tension shall be as described in appendix F to

BS 1722-2.
12.5 PEDESTRIAN GUARD-RAIL
12.5.1 Aluminium Guard Rails
1 This Sub-section covers the requirements for the supply and installation of aluminium
pedestrian guard-rails and accessories.
2 Guard-rails shall be constructed to the designated line and grade and shall not reflect any
unevenness in the founding construction. Unless otherwise designated, railing posts shall be
vertical. For bridges, railing shall not be placed on a span until centring or falsework has been
removed, rendering the span self-supporting.
Part 12: Fencing
3 The foundation details for the fence shall be as per the designated details and dimensions.
12.5.2 Galvanised Steel Rails
1 Galvanised steel pedestrian guard rails shall comply with the strength requirements of BS
3049 Clause ‘A’ and shall be fabricated to the dimensions shown on the drawings from hot
rolled steel section and bars to BS EN 10210-2 and BS 4360, Grade 43C.
2 The following Minimum steel section thickness shall be used:

Rails - Sealed hollow section : 2.5 mm
Other sections : 4.0 mm
Posts - Sealed hollow sections : 3.0 mm

Other sections : 5.0 mm
3 Joints shall be welded by metal arc welding to BS EN 1011 except where shown otherwise on
the drawings.
ar
4 The guard rails and components shall be fabricated such that no burrs or sharp edges occur,
at
that the finished work is free from distortion and cracks and that welded joints are fully
-Q
bonded, form accurate fit and are finished smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
5 The guard rail components shall be fixed to the posts at the lower joints by 12 mm diameter,
80 mm long galvanised steel bolts with one galvanised steel washer through 40 x 40 x 6 mm
LL
cleats. End units shall be purpose made to project over the posts with a rounded end.
W
6 Posts shall be closed at the top with a 6 mm plate having two 12.5 mm, 25 mm long dowels
welded thereto. The holding down plate at the bottom of the post shall be a minimum of 20 x
s
100 x 6 mm thick.
en
7 All steel posts shall be hot dip galvanized both inside and outside to BS EN ISO 1461. “-end
of specification addition.
e m
12.5.3 Materials and Fabrication

Si
1 Material for cast aluminium guard-rail posts shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M193 and ASTM B108, alloy S7A - T4 (A444 - T4).
2 Aluminium alloy extruded rail shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B221 alloy, 6061-T6
or 6351-T5 with a minimum yield strength of 2466 kg/cm2, a minimum tensile strength of
2677 kg/cm2 and an elongation of 10 % in 50 mm.
3 Stainless steel hardware for aluminium railings shall be machine bolts or cap screws
conforming to ASTM A193, grade B8, Class 2.
4 Stainless steel flat washers and lock washers shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
A240, Type 302.
Part 12: Fencing
5 Material 12.7 mm thick or less may be cut by shearing, sawing or milling. Material over 12.7
mm thick shall be sawed or milled. Cut edges shall be true and smooth and free from
excessive burrs or ragged breaks. Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted by drilling before cutting.
Flame cutting will not be permitted. Material may be heated to a temperature not exceeding
240 °C for a period not exceeding 30 minutes to facilitate bending unless cold bending is
required to retain the original mechanical properties of the material furnished.
6 Rivet and bolt holes shall be drilled to finished size or stub punched smaller than the nominal
diameter of the fastener and reamed to size. The amount by which the diameter of a stub
punched hole is smaller than that of the finished hole shall be at least one-quarter the
thickness of the piece. The finished diameter of circular holes shall be not more than 7 %
greater than the nominal diameter of the fastener. Slotted bolt holes to take care of
expansion shall be provided as designated. Anchor-bolt holes may be up to 25 % greater
than the nominal bolt diameter with a maximum of 12.7 mm greater than the nominal bolt
diameter.
ar
12.5.4 Installation
at
1 The Contractor shall co-ordinate and space the rail posts to miss any items which may be
-Q
furnished and installed under this Contract. The Contractor shall also co-ordinate and space
the rail posts to miss lighting poles and any other existing obstructions.
2 Where aluminium alloys come in contact with other metals, except stainless steel, the
LL
contacting surfaces shall be thoroughly coated with an aluminium-impregnated caulking

compound, or a synthetic rubber gasket may be placed between the two surfaces. Aluminium
W
alloys shall not be placed between the two surfaces. Aluminium alloys shall not be placed in
contact with copper, copper base alloys, lead or nickel.
s
en
END OF PART
e m
Si
Part 13: Traffic Signs, Markings and Studs
13 TRAFFIC SIGNS, MARKINGS AND STUDS ................................................. 2
13.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

13.1.1 Scope 2
13.1.2 References 2
13.1.3 Definitions for Reflective Traffic Studs 2
13.1.4 Submittals 3
13.2 TRAFFIC SIGNS ........................................................................................... 3
13.2.2 Sign Foundations 4
13.2.3 Traffic Sign Materials 5
13.2.4 Installation Requirements for Traffic Signs 7
13.2.5 Advance and far Advance Directional Signs 8
13.3 PAVEMENT MARKINGS ............................................................................. 10
ar
at
13.3.2 Materials for Pavement Markings -Q 10
13.3.3 Application of Thermoplastic 12
13.3.4 Performance Requirements and Testing 13
13.3.5 Protection of Pavement Markings 14
LL
13.4 TEMPORARY ROAD MARKING ................................................................. 14

13.4.1 ROAD MARKING PAINT 14
W
13.4.2 ADHESIVE ROAD MARKING STRIP 15

13.4.3 REMOVAL OF ROAD MARKINGS 15
s
en
13.5 REFLECTIVE STUDS ................................................................................. 15

13.5.1 General 15
m
13.5.2 Reflectors 16
13.5.3 Reflectivity 17
e
13.5.4 Installation of Reflective Studs 18

Si
13.6 NON-REFLECTIVE STUDS ........................................................................ 19

13.6.1 General 19
13.6.2 Materials and Manufacture 20
13 TRAFFIC SIGNS, MARKINGS AND STUDS
13.1 GENERAL
13.1.1 Scope
1 This Part covers the supply and installation of traffic signs (complete with posts and
foundations), thermoplastic road marking, road marking paint for temporary roads and
diversions, reflectorised studs and non-reflective studs.

This Section
Part 16, Traffic Signals
Section 5, Concrete
ar
13.1.2 References
at
1 The following manuals and standards are referred to in this Part:
-Q
Qatar Traffic Control Manual
BS 381C .....................Colours for identification purposes

LL
BS 873........................Road traffic signs

BS 1470......................Wrought aluminium for general engineering purposes; plate sheet and
W
strip
BS 1474......................Wrought aluminium for general engineering purposes; bar, extruded
s
round tubes and sections

en
BS 1490......................Aluminium and aluminium alloy ingots for general casting purposes

BS 2000, Part 58 ........Determination of softening point of bitumen (ring and ball)
m
BS 3262,(Part 1) l989 .Hot applied thermoplastic road marking materials

e
BS 6088 1981.............Solid glass beads for Road Marking

Si
BS EN ISO 591-1 .......Titanium dioxide pigments

BS EN ISO 1461 ........Hot dipped galvanising
ASTM A307 ................Steel anchor bolts

ASTM C373 ................Standard test methods for water absorption
ASTM C424 ................Test methods for crazing resistance
CML 14-97..................Standard Method of test for determination of appearance, shape,

dimensions
and compressive strength of ceramic non-reflecting road studs.
TRL Road Note 27 .....Skid resistance portable tester.
13.1.3 Definitions for Reflective Traffic Studs
1 Entrance Angle: The angle in the horizontal plane between the direction of incident light and
the normal (perpendicular) to the leading edge of the stud.
2 Observation Angle: The angle at the reflector between observer's line of sight and the
direction of the light incident on the reflector.
3 Specific Intensity (S.I.): The candle-power of the returned light at the chosen observation and
entrance angles for each foot candle of illumination at the reflector on a plan perpendicular to
the incident light.
13.1.4 Submittals
1 Within three weeks of acceptance of the manufacturer's tender, the Contractor shall submit
for approval working drawings for signs posts and base plates. Fabrication shall not begin
until approval has been given.
2 The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings of the foundations proposed for traffic signs.
3 The Contractor shall submit samples of the proposed materials for approval on request by
the Engineer before delivery to Site, at his own cost.
ar
4 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval three copies of his working drawings
at
for all traffic sign faces both in Arabic and English. Size and style of lettering shall be as
-Q
designated. No order shall be placed without written agreement of the Engineer and the
Concerned Authorities.
5 Before proceeding with drilling holes for sign foundations, the Contractor shall submit to the
LL
Engineer for approval; the type of plant proposed for drilling holes, details of any temporary
metal casings, proposed method of concreting and the proposed method of conduit
W
installation.
s
13.2 TRAFFIC SIGNS

en
13.2.1 Scope of Work

m
1 This work shall consist of furnishing and installing road signs and posts assemblies as
e
designated. All sign faces and lettering shall be in accordance with the Qatar Traffic Control
Si
Manual. The required post sizes for different sign sizes shall be as tabulated in the Qatar
Traffic Control Manual. Where in this section of the specification the term “designated” is
used, this refers to the contract drawings and the Qatar Traffic Control Manual.
2 The minimum depths and sizes for sign foundations shall be as per the requirements of the
Qatar Traffic Control Manual. For each of the signs the Contractor shall submit design
calculations for the proposed foundations.
3 The following documents should be specifically referred to for this work;
(a) BS 873
(b) Qatar Traffic Control Manual
4 Permanent traffic signs shall be reflectorised or non reflectorised illuminated and shall, in
respect of quality, comply with the requirements of the latest editions of;
(a) BS 873
(b) Qatar Traffic Control Manual
5 In the case of conflict with these specifications and the above documents, the matter shall be
referred to the Engineer.
6 All foundations, framing and fixings for information signs shall be suitable for local conditions.
The design calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The wind loads shall
be calculated based on the wind speed provided in Section 1 part 1 clause 1.5.2.
7 A positive system of identification of signs, posts and all fittings shall be adopted. The
reference number of the sign together with the date of manufacture shall be indicated by self-
adhesive numbers on the reverse side of the sign in the bottom left hand corner and in a
consistent and readily visible position on all posts and fittings. The manufacturer's name of
trademark will not be permitted on the face of the sign. It may be affixed on the back of the
sign, provided approval to the size and colour of the mark has been obtained from the
Engineer. Any previously marked reference number should be transferred to new signs on
replacement.
8 All road signs shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against any defect in material and
ar
workmanship for a period of five years from the date of completion of the Works under the
Contract. If any defect should arise due to poor material or workmanship, it shall be rectified
at
by the Contractor. -Q
13.2.2 Sign Foundations
1 Sign foundations shall either be reinforced concrete columns in drilled holes or shallow
LL
reinforced concrete spread footings. The dimensions and details of the foundations shall be
as designated.
W
2 The number of anchor bolts and bolt locations and anchor bolt dimensions shall be as
s
designated. All anchor bolts nuts and washers shall be hot dipped galvanised to BS EN ISO
en
1461. Any protruding parts to the bolt thread or nut shall be further protected by the
application of a wax or grease impregnated tape. Any conduit cast into the foundation for
m
cable access shall be mild steel, hot dipped galvanised after fabrication to BS EN ISO 1461.
The minimum bend of conduit shall be 600 mm radius.
e
Si
3 All concrete and reinforcing steel used in the sign foundations shall be of the designated
grade and type and shall comply with the requirements of Section 5. Anchor bolts shall
2
comply with the requirements of ASTM A307 with a minimum tensile strength of 414 N/mm .
4 Each bolt shall be supplied with two hexagonal nuts for levelling purposes complete with
washers.
5 If an obstruction is encountered whilst drilling the foundation hole the Contractor shall inform
the Engineer. The Contractor may elect to bore or drill through the obstruction depending on
its nature or may propose to reallocate the signs slightly to avoid the obstruction subject to
the approval of the Engineer. In either case the work is deemed to be included in the scope
covered by this Part.
6 The sides of excavation shall be vertical and any additional excavations carried out beyond
that designated, for the particular post and sign being erected, shall be filled with concrete or
granular material as directed by the Engineer.
7 The reinforcement cage shall be securely fixed centrally about the axis of the foundation, any
electrical conduit shall be securely fixed in position as designated before replacement of
concrete.
8 The top of the concrete foundation shall be finished with a steel trowel to a smooth finish.
9 The top of the concrete foundation shall not extend more than 100 mm nor less than 50 mm
above the finish grade level unless otherwise designated.
10 All backfilling and compaction shall be completed before the erection of any sign on the
structure.
11 All excavations shall be approved by the Engineer before the sign is erected and before
backfilling with fill or concrete as designated.
13.2.3 Traffic Sign Materials
ar
1 Sign plates shall be manufactured either from sheet aluminium to BS 1470, SIC - 1/2H, NS3-
3/4N, NS-1/2H or HS 30-WP with a minimum thickness of 3 mm (11 swg) or from extruded
at
aluminium plank sections to BS 1470, HE 9-WP, HE 9P or HE 30-WP or extruded aluminium
-Q
alloy plank sections to BS 1474, HE 9 TE and HE 30 TF. However information signs shall be
constructed in extruded aluminium planks, which will either be self-locking or rear fixing, and
the aluminium shall be BS 1470, BS 1474 or BS 1490 or other approved equivalent
LL
International standard.
2 All sign plates shall have clean, smooth edges cut to the required shape of the sign, and shall
W
be etched and degreased to the sign sheeting manufacturer's specifications before

application of the sheeting.
s
en
3 Illuminated signs shall be covered with "Super Engineering Grade" reflective sheeting.
m
4 Reflective signs shall be covered over the whole front face with "High Intensity" reflective
sheeting. The sheeting shall be of the designated colour and shall have a manufacturer's
e
guarantee of not less than five years. The rear faces shall be non-reflective grey and should
Si
give a similar life span to the sign face.
5 The reflective sheeting shall be fixed to the sign plate either with a heat activated adhesive
using vacuum applicator or with a pressure sensitive adhesive using a pressure roller in
accordance with the sheeting manufacturer's instructions.
6 Sign faces shall be formed from a single piece of reflective sheeting, but if for any reason the
sign face must be fabricated from more than one piece of material all joints in the material
shall be overlapped by not less than 6 mm and where sheeting is applied to extruded
sections it shall extend over the top and bottom edges of the sections by not less than 3 mm.
No butt joints shall be permitted and in horizontal joints the overlap shall be from the top.
7 The corners of all direction signs shall be rounded to a radius of 75 mm.
8 Signs constructed of aluminium sheet shall, when recommended by the Traffic Signs Manual,
be framed on all edges using hot dipped galvanised steel angle or angle-channel of
equivalent section.
9 Signs constructed from extruded aluminium plank sections are to present the same flanged
appearance on all edges of the sign by fitting an aluminium end capping to the exposed ends
of the plank section on both sides of the sign.
10 Where the designated sign width requires the use of more than one length of plank section,
support beams shall be provided and positioned as approved by the Engineer.
11 For plank type signs supported on two posts the plank rails and support beams shall be
manufactured from one length of extruded aluminium section. One tie bar shall be fitted
between the bottom two plank rails (or the plank rail and support beam) at the centre of the
span between the mounting posts.
12 Where plank type signs are supported on more than two posts, and the designated sign
width is wider than the plank rail and support beams, the plank rail and support beam may
comprise two or three lengths provided butt joints occur at an inner post. One tie bar shall be
fitted between the bottom plank rail and support beam at the centre of the span between the
mounting posts.
ar
13 All stiffening and framing shall be continuous and shall prevent the sign from twisting.
at
14
-Q
All rivets or other devices fixing sign plates to their framework shall be of non-staining steel or
other material approved by the Engineer and shall have a sufficient cross-sectional area to
prevent failure from thermal stresses or wind pressure or such other stresses as may be
designated.
LL
15 All rivet and bolt holes shall be edge-sealed with clear lacquer after the application of the
W
plastics sheeting.
s
16 Rivets shall be spaced at not more than l50 mm apart, around the outside edge of the sign
en
plate and on cross braces the spacing shall be not more than 300 mm.
17 Any rivet brought through the sign face shall be coloured to match the sign face. Any rivet or
m
other device fixing sign plates to their frame work shall have a protective washer of nylon or
e
other approved insulating material inserted where they would be in contact.

Si
18 All brackets, clips, screws, bolts, nuts and washers used for mounting sign plates to support
posts shall be manufactured from stainless steel. For plank type signs, brackets and clips
shall be extruded aluminium alloy section.
19 Saddles shall be aluminium alloy or other material approved by the Engineer and shall be
provided with a nylon strip or other approved insulating material.
20 There shall be full adhesion of all sheeting material including letters, symbols and borders
and there shall be no air bubbles, creases or other blemishes.
21 All panels, cut-out letters, numbers, borders, symbols and back grounds on reflective
sheeting shall be carefully matched for colour at the time of sign fabrication to provide
uniform appearance both by day and night. The sheeting manufacturer's recommendations
on colour matching methods shall be observed. Non-uniform shading or undesirable contrast
between reflective sheeting on any one sign will not be accepted.
22 The edges of all applied sheeting materials including edges of all plates which make up a
sign, letters, symbols and borders shall be sealed as designated by the manufacturer.
23 Where required by the sheeting manufacturer the face of the sign plate shall have a coat of
clear lacquer of a type designated by him.
24 The top of sign support posts shall be capped with a plastic cap.
13.2.4 Installation Requirements for Traffic Signs
1 All sign faces shall be of the designated type, colour and size.
2 Signs delivered for use in the project shall be in new and unused condition, except where
otherwise designated; and shall be stored off the ground and under cover in a manner
approved by the Engineer. Any sign damaged, discoloured or defaced during transportation,
storage or erection shall be rejected.
3 The position and mounting height of each sign shall be as designated.
4 Designated post lengths are approximate only. When progress of the work is at the
ar
appropriate stage the Engineer will authorise the location of each sign, with the chainage and
offset distance from the edge of the road pavement. The Contractor shall be responsible for
at
determination of the exact post lengths to provide the designated vertical clearance. Field
-Q
cutting of posts shall be performed by sawing. Welded posts will not be permitted.
5 All posts shall be erected vertically and where two or more posts are provided for any sign
the faces of these posts shall be lined up and their deflection angle checked for compliance
LL
with this Part before concreting in.

W
6 For a period of 14 days after concreting in position, all posts shall be suitably braced to
prevent movement. Sign faces should not be fixed to posts until after the bracing has been
s
removed and the Engineer has inspected and approved the post stability and foundations.
en
7 All posts shall be of the designated type and shall be protected against corrosion by hot dip
galvanising to BS EN ISO 1461.
e m
8 Unless otherwise designated, all signs shall be erected so that the edge and face of the sign
are truly vertical and the face is at an angle of 95  to the centreline; that is, facing slightly
Si
away from the centreline of the lane which the sign serves. Where lanes divide or are on
sharp curves, the Contractor shall refer the orientation of the sign face to the Engineer for his
instruction.
9 All sign supports shall be plumbed vertical.
10 The distance between the lower edge of the signs and the road surface shall be as
designated.
11 Signs shall be fastened to sign supports in accordance with the designated requirements and
the recommendations of the sign manufacturer to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
12 The Contractor shall at his own expense, immediately after erection and approval by the
Engineer cover the sign in order to prevent misleading information being displayed. The
covering shall be close weave hessian securely fixed over the face of the sign using a lacing
of nylon cord so as not to damage the sign. The Contractor shall maintain such coverings in
good order until receipt of the Engineer's instruction for their removal.
13 Signs shall be thoroughly cleaned immediately before being handed over. The type of
detergent used shall be approved by the Engineer.
13.2.5 Advance and far Advance Directional Signs
1 The face of the sign shall be completely covered with 3M Diamond Grade or similar approved
reflective material complying with the following Table 13.1A for retro-reflectivity.
Table 13.1A
Minimum Coefficients of Retro-Reflection
2
(a) 4° Entrance Angle
1
Observation Angle
0.2° 0.33° 0.5° 1.0°

White 430 300 250 80
ar
Yellow 350 250 200 65
at
Red 110 75 60 20
Green 45 33 25 10
-Q
Blue 20 15 10 4.0
LL
2
(b) 30° Entrance Angle
W
1
Observation Angle
0.2° 0.33° 0.5° 1.0°

s
White 235 150 170 50

en
Yellow 190 130 140 40

Red 60 30 40 13
m
Green 24 18 19 5
e
Blue 11 7 7 2.5
Si
2
(c) 90° Orientation, 40° Entrance Angle
1
Observation Angle
0.2° 0.33° 0.5° 1.0°

White 150 85 35 20
Yellow 125 75 30 17
Red 40 25 10 6
Green 15 8 3.5 2.0
Blue 6 4 1.5 0.7
1
Observation (Divergence) Angle – the angle between the illumination axis and the
observation axis
2
Entrance (Incidence) Angle – The angle from the illumination axis to the retroreflector axis
the retroreflector axis is perpendicular to the retroreflective surface.
3
Values for screened red colour on white sheeting may be significantly lower.
2 The material also shall satisfy the requirements of the following Tables 13.1B & 13.1C with
regard to colourimetric and photometric performance.
Table 13.1B
Chromacity factors
1 2 3 4 Limit Y (%)
Colour X Y X Y X Y X Y Min Max
White .035 .305 .355 .355 .335 .375 .285 .325 40 -
Yellow .487 .423 .545 .454 .465 .534 .427 .483 24 45
Red .690 .310 .595 .315 .569 .341 .655 .345 3 15
ar
Green .030 .398 .166 .364 .286 .446 .201 .794 3 9
Blue .078 .171 .150 .220 .210 .160 .137 .038 1 10
at
-Q
Table 13.1C
Minimum Luminance Factors
LL
Colour Factor
Red 0.03
W
Yellow 0.24
Blue 0.01
s
White 0.40
en
Green 0.01
m
3 All plastic sheeting shall be fixed in accordance with the sheeting manufacturer’s instructions.
e
Si
4 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, sign faces shall be formed from a single piece of
plastic sheeting.
5 Where, with the agreement of the Engineer, more than one sheet is used the number of
sheets shall be kept to a minimum.
6 Only vertical and horizontal joints shall be permitted and all joints in plastics sheeting shall be
overlapped by not less than 6 mm. The overlap on the horizontal joints shall be from the top;
but joints in plastics sheeting shall not be permitted. The number of joints shall be kept to
minimum.
7 Where sheeting is applied to extruded sections by pressure roller, it shall extend over the top
and bottom edges of these sections by not less than 3mm.
8 All materials comprising the sign face, including the background, border and legends shall be
carefully matched for colour at the time of sign fabrication to provide uniform appearance
both by day and night. The sheeting manufacturer’s recommendations on colour matching
methods shall be observed.
9 Letter, numerals, symbols and borders shall be of material compatible with the sheeting to
which they are applied. They shall be applied in accordance with the sheeting
10 Sheeting materials including letters, numerals, symbols and borders shall be fully adhered
with a pre-coated heat activated adhesive using a vacuum applicator equipped with a
temperature controller and there shall be no air bubbles, creases, cracks or other blemishes.
Application of the material shall be made using equipment specifically designed and
manufactured for the purpose by the sheeting manufacturer and maintained according to his
instructions. Where the sheeting manufacturer requires the assembly materials to be
provided with a coat of clear lacquer, it shall be uniform and continuous. All lacquer shall be
applied at the time of fabrication of the sign face and shall be of a type specified or supplied
by the sheeting manufacturer.
11 Details of the graphic designs, Arabic and English legends to be used on directional and
certain informatory signs are given on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall submit
design drawings detailing the proposed layout of all such signs for the approval of the
ar
Engineer prior to their manufacturer. Otherwise, the signs shall be in accordance with the
specified regulatory, warning and informatory signs detailed in the Qatar Traffic Manual,
at
Volume 1. -Q
13.3 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
LL
1 This Work shall consist of the supply and application of thermoplastic road marking paint for
W
marking of the pavement as outlined herein. It shall include the marking of the centreline, the
shoulder strip or edge, the barrier lines, the cross walks and any other markings required on
s
the pavement for the control and direction of the traffic.

en
2 Where designated, thermoplastic road marking paint shall be used in the construction of
m
rumble strips and jiggle bars. In such cases the requirements of this Part will apply except
that the thickness and profile of the thermoplastic will be as per the designated details.
e
Si
3 The pavement markings shall be painted on the road to the dimensions and in the locations
designated on the drawings as per Qatar Traffic Control Manual.
4 The Contractor shall set out the markings and obtain the Engineer's approval before
beginning the work.
13.3.2 Materials for Pavement Markings
1 The material used shall conform to the superimposed type British Standard Specification for
Road Marking Materials BS 3262: Part 1. Where the materials do not conform to the BS
the deviations shall be clearly given in reference to the relevant tables and paragraphs of BS
3262: Part 1.
2 Ballotini shall comply with the requirements of BS 6088.
3 The material shall consist of light coloured aggregate, pigment and extender, bound together
with hard wearing resins, plasticised with oil as necessary in approximately the proportions by
weight as Table 13.1.
Table 13.1
Composition of Thermoplastic
Material Composition
Aggregate 40 %
Ballotini 10 - 20 %
Pigment and Extender 20%
Binder 20 %
4 The Contractor shall be responsible for blending the material to ensure that the performance
requirements of this part of the specification are met. This approximate composition of the
material as indicated above shall include the sprayed on ballotini.
5 The grading of various ingredients shall be such that the final product, when in a molten
state, can be sprayed on the surface at a nominal 1.5 mm thickness.
ar
6 The aggregate shall consist of white silica sand, crushed calcite, calcined flint or quartz, or
at
other approved aggregate, and the colour shall comply, with the requirements laid down in
paragraph 4b of BS 3262: Part 1.
-Q
7 Ballotini incorporated in the mixture shall be reasonably spherical, and free from flaws and
not less than 80 % shall be transparent glass. The grading of the ballotini shall be as stated in
LL
BS 6088.
W
8 The pigment shall be titanium dioxide in accordance with paragraph 6a (I) of BS 3262: Part 1
and shall be not less than l0 % by weight of the mix.
s
en
9 The extender shall be whiting in accordance with paragraph 6b of Part 1 of BS 3262.

m
10 For yellow material sufficient suitable yellow pigment in accordance with BS 3262 shall be
substituted for all or part of the titanium dioxide to comply with the performance requirements
e
of this specification.
Si
11 The binder shall not contain more than 5 % of resin or other acidic material. It shall consist
mainly of hydrocarbon resins plasticised with mineral oil.
12 The resins used shall be of a colour at least as pale as Grade WG resin. It shall have an acid
value not greater than 2, and must pass the heat stability test described below.
13 The oil used as plasticiser shall be a mineral oil with colour and viscosity as defined in
paragraph 7a (ii) of BS 3262: Part 1; i.e., at least as pale as grade 4 on the P-R-S- Shellac
and Varnish "A" Disc, and 1/2 to 3 1/2 poises at 25 C viscosity. In addition, when heated for
16 hours at 150 C it shall not darken excessively.
14 The softening point of the binder shall be used only as a guide to quality control, and the
behaviour of the thermoplastic shall be judged from the performance tests described below.
15 The viscosity of the melted binder at the spraying temperature must be such as to produce a
thermoplastic mix of the required spraying properties.
16 The temperature limits imposed by BS 3262: Part 1 for materials based on resin shall not
apply. Temperatures up to 220 C may be used; at these temperatures the material shall not
discolour in the time required for its use.
17 Containers shall be made of a material which does not contaminate the contents and will
protect the contents from contamination.
18 The capacity of each container shall be not less than 25 kg or more than 100 kg.
19 Each container shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, batch number and
date of manufacture.
20 Testing for the composition of the material and the grading of the aggregate shall be carried
out in accordance with the methods in BS 3262 except as modified by this part of the
specification. The composition of the laid material as found on analysis shall comply with
Table 13.2 & Table 13.3;
ar
Table 13.2
Proportion of Constituents
at
-Q Percent by Weight
Constituent
Minimum Maximum
Binder 18 22
LL
Aggregate, pigment and extender and ballotini 78 82

W
s
en
Table 13.3
Grading of Combined Aggregate Pigment and Extender
m
Percent by Weight
BS Sieve (mm)
Minimum Maximum
e
Si
0.850 100 -
0.600 75 95
0.300 35 65
0.075 25 35
13.3.3 Application of Thermoplastic
1 Application shall be by mobile sprayer, either hand-propelled or self-propelled.
2 The road surface shall be dry, and free of loose, detritus mud, or other extraneous matter.
3 All existing markings of more than 1 mm thick shall be removed completely before new
markings are applied.
4 A tack coat should not be necessary when the thermoplastic is applied to carriageways.
Where it is considered necessary to use a tack coat, this shall be rubberised type
recommended by the manufacturers of the thermoplastic material.
5 In addition to the ballotini included in the mix, an additional quantity of glass beads shall be
sprayed on to the hot thermoplastic line at the time of application. The rate of application
2
shall be at the rate of about 0.5 kg/m .
6 The thermoplastic material shall be applied in intermittent or continuous lines of thickness

1.5 mm  0.3 mm.
7 For special lettering, arrows or symbols the material shall be applied by hand methods.
8 The finished lines shall be free from raggedness at all edges and be true in place with the
road surface.
9 The upper surface shall be level, uniform and free from streaks, blisters, lumps and other
defects.
13.3.4 Performance Requirements and Testing
ar
1 The thermoplastic material shall meet the requirements of Table 13.4:
at
Table 13.4
-Q
Properties of Thermoplastic Material
Property Minimum Maximum
LL
3
Density, g/cm 2.0 approx. -
Open flashpoint °C 230 -
W
Softening point (ring and ball BS 2000 Part 58), °C 95 105

Luminance 65 -
Luminance (Yellow) 45 -
s
Flow resistance No Slump -

en
Flow resistance after 48 h at 40 °C - 25

Abrasive wear 9/100 revs - 0.3
m
Skid resistance 45 -
e
Si
2 Testing of thermoplastic material shall be as described below. All specimens shall be

prepared by carefully heating a representative sample to a temperature of (softening point +
50 C) whilst stirring thoroughly to avoid segregation. The molten material shall be used
without delay.
3 Heat Stability Luminance Test: The material shall be cast on to a suitable flat, glossy surface
coated with a colourless release agent to give a slab 100 mm square by 3 mm thick. The
luminance of the cast face, with reference to that of a block of magnesium oxide (luminance
factor l00) shall be measured with the sample illuminated by a tungsten light source at an
angle of 45  viewed at right angles by a selenium barrier layer photoelectric cell.
4 Flow Resistance Test: The material shall be cast into a conical mould having an apex angle
of 60  and a vertical height of 100 mm. After cooling and setting for 24 h the cone shall be
removed from the mould, placed on a flat level surface and maintained at a temperature of
23 C ± 2 C for 48 h.
5 Impact Test: A 3 mm thick coating of material shall be prepared as a screed on a Monel alloy
panel 1.25 mm thick, previously coated with rubberised bitumen emulsion. The impact
instrument, a 4.7 kg weight, shall be dropped vertically through 250 mm on to the surface of
the panel, striking the surface with a hemispherical indentor of radius of 6 mm. The panel
shall be retained by a metal block drilled to allow the indentor to strike the panel, with the
depth of indentation limited to 2 mm. Five panels shall be tested and no fracture shall result
from impact. A crack not longer than 2 mm will be accepted provided there is a smooth
indentation in the material.
6 Abrasive Test: A 3 mm thick coating of material shall be screeded on to a Monel alloy panel
and subject to wet (water lubricated) abrasion at 23 C on a Taber Model 503 standard
abrasion tester using H-22 Calibrade wheels, refaced between tests. The loss in weight after
two successive tests of 100 revolutions shall be recorded and the average taken as the
abrasive wear. The abrasive wear shall be less than the figure in Table 13.4.
ar
7 Skid Resistance: A 100 mm wide line of material 1.5 mm thick shall be screeded on to a flat,
at
level base for a minimum length of 800 mm. After cooling to ambient temperature the skid
-Q
resistance shall be measured using the TRRL Portable Tester as described in Road Note 27.
Measurements shall be made on different parts of the specimen, corrected for temperature
effects, and the average recorded.
LL
13.3.5 Protection of Pavement Markings

W
1 The Contractor shall control the traffic in such a manner as to protect the freshly marked
surface from damage. The traffic control shall be so arranged as to give minimum
s
interference to the travelling public. Signs, barricades, flagmen and control devices shall be
en
supplied by the Contractor and a system of spaced warning flags or blocks shall be used to
protect the fresh marking until it has dried as required. Any lines, stripes or markings which
m
become blurred or smeared by the traffic shall be corrected by the Contractor.

e
13.4 TEMPORARY ROAD MARKING

Si
13.4.1 ROAD MARKING PAINT
1 The use of road marking paint shall be restricted to traffic diversions or for other uses as
2 Road marking paint shall be by an approved manufacturer. It shall be suitable for applying by
brush or mechanical means to cement, concrete or bituminous pavement to give a
chemically stable film of uniform thickness and shall be chlorinated rubber, one pack epoxy
or alkyd based.
3 White paint shall contain not less than 6 % by mass of titanium dioxide as a pigment,
conforming to type A (anatase) or type R (rutile) specified in BS EN ISO 591-1
4 Yellow paint shall be standard colour BS 381C No. 355, except where an alternative shade
has been designated, and contain not less than 6 % by mass of a suitable yellow pigment.
5 The paint shall be supplied fresh and ready for use in sealed containers and stored in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The paint shall be applied without the use of
thinners or other additives.
6 Paint shall be applied at a covering rate recommended by the manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer.
7 Where markings are to be reflectorised with ballotini it shall be sprayed uniformly on to the
2
wet paint film at the rate of 400-500 g/m . Ballotini shall be graded to comply with the
8 Road marking materials shall only be applied to surfaces which are clean and dry. Markings
shall not be ragged at their edges and shall be uniform and free from streaks. Carriageway
lane and edge lines shall be laid by approved mechanical means to a regular alignment.
13.4.2 ADHESIVE ROAD MARKING STRIP
ar
1 For temporary diversions the use of self adhesive proprietary marking strips will be permitted.
at
2 Self adhesive proprietary road marking strips shall be of the details and dimensions shown
-Q
on the drawings.
3 The strips shall have a metallic backing that peels of and shall have reflective properties by
the incorporation of ballotini.
LL
13.4.3 REMOVAL OF ROAD MARKINGS

W
1 Where it is necessary to remove existing thermoplastic road markings the material shall be
s
completely removed by sand blasting or other abrasive methods.

en
2 Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the wearing course surface during this operation.
m
3 Any damage caused to the wearing course shall be made good to the satisfaction of the
e
engineer.
Si
4 The painting over of old road markings with black paint shall not be permitted.
13.5 REFLECTIVE STUDS
13.5.1 General
1 Reflective road markers shall be smooth, pressure moulded aluminium alloy, complying with
BS 1490 with lenses to meet the performance requirements of this specification. They shall
be capable of withstanding the climatic conditions of Qatar and be maintained free. A
performance guarantee of five years is required.
2 The Road stud shall measure 130 mm x 115 mm x 25 mm when seated on the road surface.
Exact size of the road stud shall be as designated.
3 The shaft shall be "Anti-Twist/Hot-Tite", 76 mm long.
4 The slope of the reflecting face shall be 20.

5 The enveloping profile of the head of road studs shall be smooth and the studs shall not
present any sharp edges to traffic.
6 The body of the stud shall be constructed in one integral part.
7 The anchorage part of the stud shall consist of a circumferential ribbed shank with parallel
flats, the flats on the alternative ribs being at 90  to each other to prevent rotation of the stud
when located in the road surface.
8 The studs shall be constructed in aluminium alloy to BS 1490 to provide a robust and durable
location for the lenses. The alloy shall have the characteristics listed in Table 13.5.
Table 13.5
Composition of Alloy for Road Studs
Composition Minimum (%) Maximum (%)
Copper - 0.1
ar
Silicon - 13.0
at
Iron - 0.6
Manganese - -Q 0.5
Nickel - 0.1
Zinc - 0.1
Lead - 0.1
LL
Tin - 0.1
Titanium - 0.5
W
Aluminium - Remainder
The Contractor shall submit mill certificates for the material showing the actual composition.
s
9 Reflective studs mechanical and physical properties shall comply with the Table 13.6
en
requirements:
m
Table 13.6
Mechanical and Physical Properties of Reflective Studs
e
Si
Mechanical Properties Minimum

2
0.2 proof stress test, N/m 120
2
Tensile Strength, N/mm . 280
Elongation, mm 2-5
Physical Properties Minimum
Specific gravity 2.65

Method of Casting Injection
Corrosion rating Excellent
Brinell hardness number 55 - 60
13.5.2 Reflectors
1 The reflectors shall be rectangular in shape. The rectangular reflective unit shall be firmly
located into a recess within the body of the stud such that the reflective face is established at
the correct orientation. A sample of the proposed reflective studs shall be submitted for the
Engineer’s approval.
2 The Optical Performance (specific intensity) of each crystal reflecting surface shall not be
less than the values listed in Table 13.7.
Table 13.7
Optical Performance of Reflectors
Observation Angle, ° 0.3 0.5 1.0 2.0
Entrance Angle, ° 5 10 10 15
Specific Intensity 160 100 27 3
Specific Intensity 120 72 20 2
3 For yellow reflectors the specific intensity shall be 50% of the value for crystal. For red and
green reflectors the specific intensity shall be 20% of the value for crystal.
4 The colour limits of the reflector(s) when illuminated by CIE standard illumination A, with an
ar
entrance angle V= 0 , H= 5  L or R, and an observation angle of 0.3  shall comply with the
requirements given in the following paragraphs.
at
5
-Q
White (uncoloured) reflectors shall not produce a selective reflection; that is to say, the
trichromatic co-ordinates X and Y of the standard illuminant A used to illuminate the reflector
shall undergo a change of more than 0.91 after reflection by the reflector.
LL
6 Red reflectors shall have chromaticity co-ordinates which lie within the area formed by the
straight lines defined by the following pairs of points, 1 and 2, 2 and 3, the spectrum locus,
W
and the line joint the ends of the spectrum locus:

Co-ordinate Point 1 Point 2 Point 3
s
X 0.665 0.657 0.730

en
Y 0.335 0.335 0.262

7 Amber reflector shall have chromaticity co-ordinates which lie within the area formed by the
m
straight lines defined by the following pairs of points, 1 and 2, 2 and 3, 3 and 4, and the
e
spectrum locus:-
Si
Co-ordinates Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4

X 0.330 0.228 0.321 0.302
Y 0.385 0.351 0.493 0.692
8 Compliance with the colorimetric requirements shall normally be verified by means of a visual
comparison test. If any doubt remains after this test, compliance shall be verified by the
determination of the trichromatic co-ordinates as defined in the proceedings of the 1951
meeting of the International Commission (CIE).
13.5.3 Reflectivity
1 A sample of the road stud shall be submitted by the Contractor and relevant technical
information, catalogues supplied by the manufacturers shall accompany the sample.
2 The reflectivity of the stud when new shall well exceed minimum standard as laid down in BS
873 and meet typical values as shown below:
Table 13.8
White Reflectors Tested to BS 873
CIL Value CIL Value
(mod/1x) (mod/1x)
Orientation
Typical Minimum
Observation angle 2  Entrance Angle 15  L and 15  R. 5-7.5 2

Observation Angle 2  Entrance Angle 10  L and 10  R 26.5-30 10
Observation Angle 0.5  Entrance Angle 10  L and 10  R 59-93 15
Observation Angle 0.3 Entrance Angle 5  L and 5  R 100-190 20
Table 13.9
Amber Reflectors Tested to BS 873
CIL Value CIL Value
ar
Orientation (mod/1x) (mod/1x)
Typical Minimum
at
Observation angle 2  Entrance Angle 15  L and 15  R.
-Q 3-4 1.0
Observation Angle 1  Entrance Angle 10  L and 10  R. 10-20 5.0
Observation Angle 0.5  Entrance Angle 10  L and 10  R. 20-50 7.0
LL
W
Table 13.10
s
Red Reflectors Tested to BS 873

en
CIL Value CIL Value

(mod/1x) (mod/1x)
Orientation
m
Typical Minimum
e
Observation angle 2  Entrance Angle 15  L and 15  R 1.5-2.0 2.0

Si
Observation Angle 1  Entrance Angle 10  L and 10  R 4.5-7 10.0

Observation Angle 0.5  Entrance Angle 10  L and 10  R 10-20 15.0
13.5.4 Installation of Reflective Studs
1 Reflective studs shall be installed and anchored to the pavement as follows:
(a) Drill a hole into the asphalt pavement to the dimensions recommended by the
manufacturer. Ensure that the hole is free of dust and also the pavement surface
within a radius of 200 mm of the hole is free from debris and dust.
(b) Fill the hole to overflow with the two part epoxy adhesive of the type specified in clause
10.6.2.
(c) Immediately after pouring the grout, the road stud shall be inserted into the hole and
the reflective face aligned to the oncoming traffic. The road stud shall be firmly
embedded into the ground ensuring a good bed of grouting compound under the road
stud and solid fixing. Protect the installed marker until the epoxy adhesive has
completely set.
(d) Clean off any surplus grouting and protect the road stud from traffic for approximately
60 minutes.
13.6 NON-REFLECTIVE STUDS
13.6.1 General
1 Non-reflective road studs shall be ceramic and of approximately 100 mm diameter at the
base, the studs shall consist of a heat-fired, vitreous ceramic base and a heat fired opaque
smooth matte surface.
ar
2 The colour of the studs shall be white unless otherwise designated. The base of the stud
shall have a rough surface to ensure a good bond to the road.
at
3 The adhesive used for the installation of non-reflective ceramic studs shall be a two part
-Q
epoxy or other material recommended by the manufacturers and tested under the climatic
and traffic conditions prevalent in Qatar.
LL
4 The non-reflective ceramic studs shall conform to the dimensions and shapes shown on the
drawings and shall be installed at the location indicated on the drawings or where designated
W
by the Engineer.
5 The studs shall be ceramic manufactured and shall consist of a heat-fired, opaque, glazed
s
surface. The glazed surface shall not be present on the bottom of the studs which will be
en
cemented to the road surface. The outer surface of the studs shall be smooth except for
purpose of identification, and all edges exposed to traffic must be convex and the radius
m
nearest the edge may be less. Any change in curvature shall be gradual. The bottom
surface of the marker shall be of a roughness comparable to at least that of a fine grade of
e
sandpaper, and shall be substantially free form gloss or substance that may reduce its bond
Si
to the adhesive.
6 The body of the marker shall be white.
7 Brightness will be measured with equipment conforming ASTM E97 using a Brightness
Standard of 75%. The minimum weight of the marker shall be 125 grams.
8 A random sample of 5 buttons shall be subjected to the compressive load test. The average
compressive strength of the 5 buttons shall not be less than 680 kg and no individual button
shall have a compressive strength less than 544 kg. The button shall be centered base
down, over the open end of a vertically positioned hollow metal cylinder. The cylinder shall
be 25.4 mm high, with an internal diameter of 76.2 mm and a wall thickness of 6.4mm. A
load necessary to break the button shall be at speed of 2.5 mm per minute to the top of the
button. In the event that the bottom of the marker is dimpled, a 2 mm layer of wood shall
insert between the base of the maker and the hollow cylinder. Should any of the samples
tested for strength fail to comply with this specification, 10 additional samples will be tested.
The failure of any one of the additional samples shall be cause for rejection of the entire lot or
shipment represented by the samples.’
13.6.2 Materials and Manufacture
1 The studs shall be produced from a combination of intimately mixed clays, shales, flints,
feldspars or other inorganic material which will ensure the required properties are met. All
studs shall be thoroughly and evenly matured and free from defects which affect appearance
or serviceability.
2 The studs shall be of uniform composition and free from surface irregularities cracks,
chipping, peeling spoiling, crazing and any other physical damage. The studs shall be precast
in the form of a single based spheroidal segment terminating in a rounded or squared
shoulder.
3 The height of the studs above road level shall be between 18 mm and 20 mm.
4 Compliance of the studs with respect to appearance, shape, dimensions and compressive
strength shall be determined in accordance with CML Method 14-97. In particular, they shall
exhibit an average compressive load at failure for each sample of 5 studs of not less than
ar
680 kg and no individual value shall be less than 544 kg. Furthermore, the water absorption
at
shall not exceed 1.0% when tested in accordance with ASTM C373. And the glazed surface
of the stud shall not craze, spell, or peel when subjected to one cycle of the Autoclave test at
-Q
250 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C424.
5 The adhesive for reflective studs and non-reflective studs shall be a two component epoxy.
LL
Each component shall be supplied in separate clearly marked containers and the time of use
the contents of the two parts shall be thoroughly redispersed by mixing. Only complete
W
containers of each part shall be used and these shall be mixed thoroughly until a uniform
colour is achieved with no streaks of individual colours. The blend of the two components of
epoxy thoroughly mixed together shall meet Table 13.11.
s
en
Table 13.11
Specification for Epoxy Adhesive
e m
Property Value
Si
Gel time 5 to 30 minutes
Minimum Tensile strength of 1.6 mm film between steel blocks cured 2

7 N/mm
24 h at 21 °C tested at 21 °C
Shore hardness on 24 h sample at 21°C 70 to 80
Shore hardness on 24 h sample at 49 °C 30 minimum
Deformation temperature, °C 49 minimum
6 The Contractor shall submit recent test results that confirm the above properties of the
supplied adhesive are met.
7 The epoxy shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation for
storage preparation, mixing and application. Any differences from the manufacturer’s
recommendations and this specification shall be referred to the Engineer.
8 The final colour of the epoxy adhesive shall be uniform grey unless designated otherwise.
13.6.3 Installation
1 All sand, dirt and extraneous material shall be removed from the mark location and the
surface cleaned and abraded. Cleaning shall be by compressed air. In the case of adhering
material the application of heat or sand blasting will be required.
2 The surface shall be completely dry for the application of the adhesive.
3 The base of the supplied stud shall be free of any wax or grease from the manufacturing
process. Any such wax or grease shall be sanded off the bottom of the marker.
4 The adhesive components shall be stored at the temperature recommended by the

manufacturer both before use and during application. The two components of the adhesive
shall be added to each other just before use, any unused mixed adhesive shall be discarded
when catallic actions cause stiffening and reduction of workability or balls of gelled resin
ar
formed in the container.
at
5 The mixed adhesive shall be applied to the prepared pavement area to be covered by the
-Q
marker and the stud pressed onto the adhesive so as to squeeze out a small bead of
adhesive around the periphery of the stud.
6 The Contractor shall carry out a trial outside of the permanent works to establish the
LL
approximate amount of adhesive required per marker and application on the works shall be
carried out to this quantity.
W
7 The studs shall not be fixed to the pavement where asphalt has been laid within the last 14
s
days unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The studs shall be spaced and aligned as
en
designated or as per the Qatar Traffic Control Manual. The tolerance for placing shall be not
more than  10 mm.
m
8 Where studs are to be applied to pavement where the road is to be opened to public traffic
e
shortly after placing, the preheating of the roadway surface to permit a rapid set is permitted.
Si
In such cases, the procedure followed shall be as recommended by the supplier of the epoxy
adhesive and as approved by the Engineer.
9 On roadway sections that are not opened to public traffic no preheating of the studs or road
2
surface is required as long as the required bond strength of 12 kg/cm can be achieved in
less than 3 h.
END OF PART
Part 14: Works in Relation to Services
14 WORKS IN RELATION TO SERVICES ........................................................ 2
14.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

14.1.1 Scope 2
14.1.2 References 2
14.1.3 Submittals 2
14.1.4 Notification to Service Authorities & Statutory Bodies 3
14.2 SERVICES GENERALLY .............................................................................. 3
14.2.1 General 3
14.2.2 Safety 4
14.2.3 Marking Services 4
14.2.4 Location of Existing Services 5
14.2.5 Protection of Services 5
14.2.6 Relocation of Services 6
ar
14.2.7 Services Ducts 7
14.2.8 Excavation for Ducts 7
at
14.2.9 Bedding and Laying of Ducts -Q 8
14.3 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 8
14.3.1 Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation, Electricity Networks
Affairs, QGEWC (ENA) 8
LL
14.3.2 Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation, Water Networks

Affairs, QGEWC (WNA) 10
W
14.3.3 Telecom Provider 10

14.3.4 Qatar Petroleum (QP) and Qatar Gas 12
s
14.3.5 PWA, Storm water and Groundwater 13

en
e m
Si
14 WORKS IN RELATION TO SERVICES

14.1 GENERAL
14.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes the provision of new services and the seeking, protection, diversion and
relocation of the existing services for the following service authorities:
Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation (QGEWC)
Telecom Provider
Qatar Petroleum (QP) and Qatar Gas
Public Works Authority (PWA)
Urban Planning and Development Authority (UPDA)
Local Municipality
ar
at
Part 3 Earthworks
Part 17 Road Drainage -Q
Section 1 General
Section 5 Concrete
LL
Section 20 Drainage Works For Buildings

14.1.2 References
W
1 The following standards and reference documents are referred to in this Part:
s
BS 1377......................Methods of tests for soils for civil engineering purposes

en
BS 2484......................Straight concrete clayware cable covers

m
BS 2782......................Methods of testing plastics.

e
Si
14.1.3 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit records and sketches showing position, levels and
types of each existing service including manholes, joint boxes, inspection chambers and
connections. These records shall be maintained in the form of a daily diary.
2 The Contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings for utility protection work and obtain
the approval of the appropriate Authority before beginning construction.
3 Samples of proposed ducts shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval beforehand.
4 The Contractor shall prepare and maintain up-to-date drawings for each service authority
giving details of each duct laid including precise location, level, number and type, and these
drawings are to be submitted to the Engineer.
5 The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the arrangement, positions and details of all
works constructed by him as Record Drawings. The details, format, extent and procedures
for the preparation and submission of the record drawings shall be in accordance with
Section 1.
14.1.4 Notification to Service Authorities & Statutory Bodies
1 All works in relation to services shall be carried out by a contractor or subcontractor

prequalified and approved by the concerned service authority. Proof of such approval shall be
required in writing before the start of Works on the Site. The name of any subcontractor to be
used shall be as designated.
2 No work concerning services will be started without having first informed and obtained
approval of the concerned service authorities. Before opening the ground for any purpose,
the Contractor must notify all concerned parties by issue of formal "Notice of Intent" and must
obtain information by formal notice regarding the location of all services. The complete
responsibility for obtaining this information rests with the Contractor. "Notices of Intent" shall
be circulated to all concerned parties including those listed in Clause 11.1.1:
Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation (QGEWC)
Telecom Provider
Qatar Petroleum (QP) and Qatar Gas
ar
Public Works Authority (PWA)
Urban Planning and Development Authority (UPDA)
at
Local Municipality
3
-Q
Prior to commencing any work on excavation in a roadway the Contractor shall obtain the
approval of the Traffic Police. All excavations in a roadway shall be carried out in accordance
with PWA road opening procedures.
LL
4 Drawings and notices shall be sent in duplicate one of which shall be retained by the
addressee and the other returned to the sender duly marked to show underground services.
W
"Notice of Intent" will be given 14 days in advance of starting the proposed Works. In the
event that the work is not started within eight weeks of the date of the "Notice of Intent", it will
s
be deemed to have lapsed. A further Notice of Intent will then be submitted. The Contractor
en
shall furnish copies of the above Notices of Intent to the Engineer.

m
5 The Contractor's attention is particularly drawn to the procedures to be followed concerning

existing services and service diversions laid down in all current administrative orders of the
e
service authorities.
Si
14.2 SERVICES GENERALLY
14.2.1 General
1 The Contractor shall acquaint himself with the position of all existing services and shall obtain
clearance from the concerned service authority before commencing any work in a particular
area. Written evidence of such clearance shall be provided to the Engineer by the Contractor.
2 The position, types of ducts, pipes, cables, manholes and related structures are designated,
but the final location will be determined on site by the Contractor and submitted to the
Engineer for approval after having consulted with the concerned service authorities.
3 All concrete works shall conform to the requirements of Section 5.
4 The Contractor will be fully responsible for ensuring observance of the requirements of this
clause by his subcontractors.
5 Where any utility or service works are to be constructed under a separate contract by the
Engineer within the Site and concurrent with the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall
co-operate with the other contractor and shall co-ordinate his construction operations to avoid
interference with the other contractor's operations.
6 Any public or private service for water, electricity, drainage, or other utility, affected by the
Works shall not be interrupted without the written permission of the Engineer. Such
permission will be withheld until suitable approved permanent or temporary alternative
services have been provided by the Contractor or by the owner of the utility or his agents.
7 For temporary traffic diversions as may be required for the construction of road crossings, full
liaison with the Municipality and Police shall be required as well as compliance with the
requirements of the PWA road opening procedures.
8 The Contractor shall be responsible for following each service authorities inspection and
testing procedures.
ar
9 The Contractor shall be responsible for liaison with each service authority to obtain their
approval for the completion of the works.
at
14.2.2 Safety
-Q
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for public safety during execution of work. He shall take
all measures, including, where necessary, the provision of ropes, picket fences, and other
LL
temporary barriers on the sides of trenches and excavations with warning lights.
W
2 The Contractor shall arrange for night watchman and any other measures required to ensure
the safety of the public.
s
en
3 The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to property or injury to persons due
to his negligence. Any instruction from the Engineer concerning the safety aspects of the
work must be carried out immediately, but the Contractor shall remain responsible for the
m
adequacy of the safety measures.

e
Si
4 The Contractor shall take into account the current laws regarding the safety of service lines,
together with any amendment or additions thereto. The Contractor shall be responsible for
locating or verifying the location of existing services, liaison with the various service
authorities and complying with the above.
14.2.3 Marking Services
1 All services shall be provided with continuous warning tapes with the requirements of the
following paragraphs.
2 The Contractor shall install approved warning tapes during backfilling work over buried pipes,
cables, conduits and ducts, as required. Warning tapes shall be coloured and inscribed for
identification according to the requirements of the concerned service authority.
3 Warning tape shall be approved high quality, acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene film
250 mm wide, and with a minimum thickness of 150 microns. Tape shall have a minimum
tensile strength of 125 kg/cm2 longitudinally and 105 kg/cm2 laterally with an elongation
factor of 350 %.
4 Tape shall be printed with 50 mm high black lettering, alternatively in Arabic and English. The
complete wordings shall be repeated every 2 m along the tape. The colours shall be vivid,
glossy and permanent with a life expectancy of 40 years.
5 Warning tapes shall be placed with the inscriptions facing upwards. The level of the tape
relating to the top of service shall be in accordance with the requirements of the concerned
service authority.
6 Warning tapes over non-metallic services shall be backed with aluminium foil to facilitate
detection.
14.2.4 Location of Existing Services
1 The positions of all designated public and privately owned services have been based on the
records of various service authorities and must be regarded as approximate.
ar
2 The positions designated for existing services are for informational purposes only and do not
necessarily show exact locations, depths, spacings, or the presence and location of smaller
at
services such as house connections which are not normally designated.
3
-Q
The Contractor shall verify this information and satisfy himself as to the exact nature and
position of all such apparatus. The Engineer does not guarantee the accuracy of the
designated information, and no warranty is given or implied.
LL
4 The Contractor shall verify the position of services by digging trial trenches and pits. If ducts,
W
pipes, cables and manholes which are not designated are found, the Engineer and the
concerned service authority shall be informed as soon as possible. The concerned service
authority will then instruct on the action to be taken, if any.
s
en
5 The Contractor shall excavate by hand, take trial pits at regular distances and also at all road
intersections to locate existing services, their number, depth and route direction. As these
m
services are located the Contractor shall prepare record drawings indicating the
aforementioned information which shall be submitted to the Engineer.
e
Si
14.2.5 Protection of Services
1 The Contractor shall take any and all measures reasonably required by any public or
concerned service authority for the support and full protection of all mains, pipes, cables and
other apparatus during the progress of the Works, and shall construct and provide to the
satisfaction of the concerned service authority, all works necessary for the prevention of
damage or interruption of services.
2 The protection of the existing services shall be carried out before the earth work starts in the
vicinity of the services to be protected.
3 If some services have already been protected by the various Departments, no protection will
be carried out under this Contract, but such protection can be extended or upgraded as
instructed by the Engineer on Site after having consulted with the concerned service
authority.
4 If in the execution of the Works, by reason of any subsidence caused by, or any act of
neglect or default of the Contractor, any damage to any apparatus or any interruption of, or
delay to, the provision of any service is caused, the Contractor shall report it to the Engineer
immediately and bear and pay the cost reasonably incurred by the service authority
concerned in making good such damage and shall make full compensation to the authority
for any loss, sustained by reason of such interruption or delay.
5 All protected services, existing ducts found or newly laid ducts shall be marked with markers
of approved of size and type as designated. The location of markers shall be as designated.
No asphalt course will be laid unless the ends of the ducts or protected services have been
exposed and marked with markers.
6 The Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of the works, afford facilities to properly
accredited agents of any concerned service authority for access to all or any of their
apparatus situated in or under the site, as may be necessary for inspecting, reporting,
maintaining, removing, renewing or altering such apparatus in connection with the
construction of the Works or any other purpose whatsoever.
ar
14.2.6 Relocation of Services
at
1
-Q
The Contractor shall relocate certain utilities to service reservation areas as designated. This
work may only include constructing necessary protective housing such as box culverts, slabs,
and concrete encased sleeves in the service reservation areas for utility lines to be relocated.
Or this work may include necessary protective housing as described above and, in addition,
LL
the relocation of specific utility lines to the service reservation areas.

W
2 In both cases the Contractor shall complete the necessary survey to establish the lines and
levels, prepare shop drawings and submit them to the Engineer for his review. The
s
Contractor shall obtain approval from the concerned service authority before commencing
en
this work.
m
3 After existing services, according to the Engineer's instruction, have been exposed and if
according to the opinion of the Engineer and after approval of the concerned service
e
authorities it is found necessary to proceed with the lowering or diversion thereof, the
Si
Contractor shall proceed with the relevant excavation in co-ordination with the said
authorities.
4 The Contractor shall maintain records of such excavation in a form acceptable to the
Engineer. Two copies of such records shall be submitted to the Engineer on a weekly basis
or as agreed with by the Engineer.
5 All materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor as designated.
6 When directed by the Engineer, all such excavations shall be backfilled with suitable material,
placed and compacted as designated.
7 The Contractor shall place fill material and compact with care to avoid damage to the existing
services. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damages caused by his
construction operations.
8 The works relevant to the lowering of existing services will be started as soon as, according
to the Engineer, all the necessary precautions have been taken to prevent any injury to
person or damage to property or services.
9 The excavation for lowering existing services shall be performed by hand down to the
elevation indicated by the Engineer and the concerned service authority.
10 At all times the Contractor shall provide and maintain access to the adjoining properties to
14.2.7 Services Ducts
1 Service ducts shall be provided as designated so that future services can pass through them
without disturbing road construction.
2 The Contractor shall supply, unless otherwise designated, and install all the necessary
service ducts required for the project. The duct material shall be as designated.
3 Road crossing ducts shall extend beyond the road or shoulder line at each side of the road
as designated.
ar
4 To prevent earth blocking the ducts, the openings at both ends are to be protected with
appropriate blanking caps.
at
5 In general, all duct laying work is subject to the approval of the Engineer and any particular
-Q
requirements of the concerned service authority.
6 The Contractor shall after completing each duct, make the necessary arrangements with the
LL
service authority for testing and acceptance of the work. As a minimum this shall involve the
verification of the duct by rodding or pulling through a mandrel.
W
14.2.8 Excavation for Ducts

s
1 The trench shall be excavated to the designated width and depth.

en
2 When appropriate, the excavation for the road crossing and laying of ducts, concreting and
m
related work shall only be carried out on half the width of the road at one time, the other half
e
being left available for traffic. In this case the necessary traffic warning signs on self-
Si
supporting tripods or cones shall be provided well ahead of the duct crossing work and all
care and attention exercised to avoid risk of traffic accidents during preparation and
execution of the work.
3 All trenches and other excavation shall be maintained in a dry condition and the Contractor
shall arrange a suitable dewatering system for any dewatering involved, in agreement with
the Engineer, to keep the working place clean and dry.
4 The sides of pits and trenches shall be vertical and adequately supported at all times.
Excavations may if considered necessary be battered with a safe slope, but only with the
Engineer's written permission.
5 Where ducts are laid under any area of the road construction, the bottom of the excavation
shall be completed to a density of 95 % of the maximum dry density, as determined by BS
1377 Test 13 or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.
6 Excavated material shall, if found unsuitable as defined in Part 3 of this Section, be disposed
of to an approved tip and replaced with suitable material. All surplus suitable excavated
material shall be used in road construction or disposed of in an approved manner.
7 Where split ducts are required for existing services crossing the Works, hand excavation
shall be carefully undertaken until the position of the service to be protected is fully exposed.
14.2.9 Bedding and Laying of Ducts
1 As soon as possible after trench excavation, ducts of the required diameter shall be laid and
jointed as designated and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2 Ducts shall be laid to the designated lines and levels with the required depth of cover. Where
the designated minimum cover cannot be achieved, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer,
they shall be bedded and surrounded with 150 mm of grade 20 concrete.
3 Unless surrounded in concrete, ducts shall be bedded on a 150 mm thick layer of well graded
sand of maximum particle size 5mm and fully surrounded with sand to a depth of 150 mm
above the duct barrel, well packed and tamped. Filling with suitable material above this level
shall be free from large stones. For multiple ducts, the spaces between ducts are to be filled
ar
with compacted sand and the ducts surrounded to a depth of l50 mm above the uppermost
at
layer. Trench backfill shall be compacted to the designated requirements.
4
-Q
Ducts shall be cut by the Contractor as necessary only at right angles to their length using a
saw in a simple cutting guide. The inside cut edges Shall be thoroughly rounded off or
dressed before installation to prevent damage to cables drawn through the ducts.
LL
5 In kerbed areas of new roadway duct markers shall be used. Duct marker shall be of
concrete construction, in-situ or precast depending on the location, as per the designated
W
details complete with approved abbreviation cast thereon. The finished product shall be solid
in appearance, free of segregation, honeycombing broken edges and other defects.
s
en
14.3 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS

m
14.3.1 Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation, Electricity Networks Affairs, QGEWC
(ENA)
e
Si
1 All of the works associated with electricity supply shall be carried out in accordance with the
latest specifications for materials, excavation and backfill, cable laying and jointing, as issued
by the QGEWC (ENA). Contractors are deemed to be in possession of the latest QGEWC
(ENA) specifications.
2 All QGEWC (ENA) MV, HV and EHV works shall be carried out by a Contractor or
subcontractor prequalified and approved by the QGEWC (ENA). Proof of such approval shall
be required in writing before the start of Works on the Site, and the name of any
subcontractor to be used shall be as designated. All cable jointers to be used on the Contract
shall be required to undertake and pass a trade test conducted by QGEWC (ENA).
3 The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the Police Department for marking,
lighting and protecting excavation. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain the
requirements of the Police Department and to comply fully with these requirements.
4 Where carriageway works and road crossings are performed the Contractor shall provide
steel plates of sufficient size and quality to permit the safe passage of traffic and the plates
shall be so placed (and if necessary fixed) to permit reasonable traffic flow.
5 All doorways, gates and entrances shall be kept clear with full access. Where excavations
impede pedestrian access crossing boards shall be provided. Crossing boards shall be 1250
mm wide with a handrail on both sides 1 m in height and guard-rails on both sides at
vehicular and pedestrian access to premises. Ducts will not be installed at entrances to
premises except on the express instruction of the Engineer.
6 Materials excavated shall be placed so as to prevent nuisance or damage. Where this is not
possible, the material shall be removed from site and returned for backfilling on completion of
cable laying. In cases where the excavated material is not to be used for backfilling trenches
it must be removed from site on the same day as it is excavated.
7 QGEWC (ENA) will require to carry out inspections at the following stages:
(a) Completion of excavations.

(b) Completion of bedding of trench before cable installation.
(c) Cable installation.
ar
(d) Completion of surround over cables and installation of cable tiles.
at
(e) Upon completion of reinstatement.
8
-Q
The Contractor must not progress from one stage to the next of the above without the
approval of QGEWC (ENA) and the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
arranging inspections by QGEWC (ENA) to suit his programme of works.
LL
9 Where materials are to be supplied by the Contractor, the requirements described in the
following paragraphs shall apply.
W
10 Materials shall be ordered in accordance with the specifications issued by QGEWC (ENA).
s
en
11 For works involving the use of high voltage overhead cables Contractors shall comply with
the requirements of QGEWC circular no 6.
m
12 Specifications and the details of the proposed supplier shall be submitted to QGEWC (ENA)
e
for approval before a firm order being placed.

Si
13 On delivery of materials to Qatar, QGEWC (ENA) inspectors shall be given the opportunity to
inspect the materials before their use.
14 The Contractor shall supply all cables and jointing materials for the works unless expressed
stated to the contrary in the contract documentation. Cleaning materials, protection tiles,
warning tape, and other materials shall be supplied by the Contractor.
15 The Contractor is responsible for all liaison with QGEWC (ENA) in respect of programming
the installation and commissioning of the complete electrical system. He shall ensure that
QGEWC (ENA) are at all times kept informed of the current progress of the civil works on the
Site and that his approved electricity supply subcontractor programs the cable laying works in
the designated sequence in accordance with the approved programme.
16 The Contractor shall provide and install concrete cable tiles over all 66 kV cables. The cable
tiles shall be of the designated size and form. Samples must be provided for approval by
QGEWC (ENA) and the Engineer, and satisfy a test of impact strength in accordance with BS
2484.
17 For cables of 132KV and above the measures for protection of the cable shall be as per the
requirements of QGEWC.
18 Cable tiles shall be installed over all 11,000 volt cables. Cable tiles shall be manufactured
from recycled polyethylene or similar with a minimum thickness of 12 mm, length 1 m, width
(minimum) 24 mm, tensile strength 8.40 N/mm2 as per BS 2782, Method 320 C.
19 The tiles shall be marked as designated. The cable tiles must be supplied complete with any
pins, pegs or other devices for jointing tiles together. Samples must be supplied to QGEWC
(ENA) and the Engineer for approval before use.
20 The Contractor shall liaise directly with QGEWC (ENA) regarding the removal of existing
cables and shall not, under any circumstance, commence removal of cables until QGEWC
(ENA) have verified such apparatus as being redundant.
21 Removal of cable shall only be carried out in the presence of a QGEWC (ENA) engineer.
ar
22 The Contractor shall arrange uplift of empty cable drums from QGEWC (ENA) Stores and
at
shall return all recovered cables neatly coiled on the drums provided.
23
-Q
Ducts are to be supplied by the Contractor. They shall be of high impact resistant PVC of
internal diameter 150 mm or 100 mm as designated, minimum wall thickness 3.6 mm (for
150 mm) or 2.4 mm (for 100 mm). Samples must be provided for approval by the Engineer
LL
before use.
W
14.3.2 Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation, Water Networks Affairs, QGEWC
(WNA)
s
en
1 All of the works associated with water supply shall be carried out in accordance with the
latest General Specifications for Main Laying Contracts and Main Laying Materials, as issued
m
by the QGEWC (WNA) except as modified in this Part. Contractors are deemed to be in
possession of the latest specifications.
e
Si
2 All QGEWC (WNA) Works shall be carried out by a Contractor or subcontractor prequalified
and approved by the QGEWC (WNA). Proof of such approval shall be required in writing
before the start of Works on the Site and the name of any subcontractor to be used shall be
as designated.
3 The supply of the materials required to carry out the Works shall be as designated in the
contract documents. The Contractor will be responsible for the conveyance of all materials to
the site of the works.
14.3.3 Telecom Provider
1 All Telecom Provider works shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the Telecom
Provider Standard Specifications Telecom Provider WRK 4001 Underground Duct Laying
And Associated Works. Contractors are deemed to be in possession of the latest version of
the specifications.
2 All Telecom Provider works shall be carried out by a Contractor or subcontractor approved by
Telecom Provider. Proof of such approval shall be required in writing before the start of
Works on the Site and the name of any subcontractor to be used shall be as designated.
3 Telecom Provider will supply as 'free issue" all ducts for Road Crossings projects only. Other
projects will be charged for the ducts. All other materials required for any type of project shall
be supplied by the Contractor.
4 Trenches for Telecom Provider ducts through rock fill shall be lined with geotextile, complying
with the requirements of Part 16, Geosynthetics.
5 The Telecom Provider specification S. 006 shall be modified as described in the following
paragraphs.
6 The Supervising Officer shall mean the Civil/Cable Engineer from Telecom Provider, for the
purpose of superintending the work, or, where the context permits, the representative of such
officers.
7 The concrete quality classes specified in Clause 202 of the Telecom Provider specifications
shall be of the comparable classes in Section 5 as designated by the Engineer.
ar
8 Clause 105 of Telecom Provider Standard Specifications Telecom Provider WRK 4001
‘Underground Duct Laying And Associated Works’ should be read as:
at
105 (a) “Backfill materials” means earth free from stone or loose earth, compacted in
-Q
two equal layers above the protection dune sand, and shall not leave voids to
form a water course.
LL
105 (b) “Sand bed and surround” means dune sand, 75 mm below, above and around
the duct.
W
9 The Contractor shall consult Telecom Provider not less than one month before it is proposed
s
to commence work to ascertain whether any underground installations will be affected by the
en
proposed works, in which event the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with
Telecom Provider to safeguard the installations.
m
10 The Contractor shall give at least one week's notice in writing to Telecom Provider of the
e
dates upon which it is intended to operate plant or equipment or carry out any work for which
Si
permission has been given in writing by Telecom Provider. Such operations of work shall only
be carried out in the presence at Telecom Provider unless notice shall be obtained in writing
from Telecom Provider that they do not require to be present.
11 Telecom Provider may require work to be executed on their installations during the period of
the Contract. The Contractor shall allow access to Telecom Provider’s Contractor or
workmen until their diversion work is complete. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the work of
Telecom Provider and his own activities and when necessary shall amend his programme of
working to suit all requirements of Telecom Provider in connection with their diversion work
and shall keep the Engineer informed in writing of all arrangements made.
12 The Contractor shall locate and mark with suitable posts all Telecom Provider underground
installations that are within the area of the Works and shall ensure that such markers are
maintained in their correct positions at all times. The Contractor shall advise Telecom
Provider’s agent of any installation not found where designated, or found but not shown or
found damaged or subsequently damaged.
14.3.4 Qatar Petroleum (QP) and Qatar Gas
1 All of the works associated with Qatar Petroleum and Qatar Gas shall be carried out in
accordance with their latest specifications except as modified in this Part. Contractors are
deemed to be in possession of the latest specifications. Before beginning any work the
Contractor shall approach Qatar Petroleum and Qatar Gas and obtain a copy of their latest
specification relating to the Works.
2 All Qatar Petroleum and Qatar Gas Works shall be carried out by a Contractor or
subcontractor prequalified and approved by Qatar Petroleum and Qatar Gas. Proof of such
approval shall be required in writing before the start of Works on the Site and the name of
any subcontractor to be used shall be as designated.
3 When working near existing QP Gas/Oil facilities the following conditions shall be adhered to.
All notices to be given to the Contractor shall be in writing and delivered by hand.
4 A permit to work must be obtained for all work within fifteen (15) meters distance from all
ar
boundaries of existing facilities. These permits can be obtained from QP and twenty four (24)
hours notice should be given to prevent delays.
at
5
-Q
Mechanical or hydraulic rock breakers shall not be used adjacent to gas, oil or NGL pipelines.
6 Should jackhammers be required within two (2) meters of any buried pipelines and between
any pipelines running in the same easement all round pipe protection must be provided
LL
before commencement
W
7 Pilot holes to locate existing lines shall be dug by hand tools only, before allowing mechanical
equipment to operate within five (5) meters of a QP live gas, oil or NGL pipelines.
s
en
8 Prior to exposure of any live pipeline the Contractor shall erect a suitable and substantial
barrier to prevent any damage to QP pipelines. This is particularly important where there are
heavy vehicles in the vicinity and the possibility that removal of the bond for trenching
m
operations opens up an illegal vehicle crossing.

e
Si
9 When backfilling an exposed section of pipeline, naturally occurring soft dune sand shall be
used and the pipeline shall be covered and re-bedded all round with 150 mm minimum of
sand. The remaining height of the bund will be made up of selected desert fill with particle
size not exceeding 150mm from organic material. QP engineer shall witness the backfill
work, particularly the soft sand bedding operations.
10 When trenching between pipelines in the same easement, vehicle access between the
pipelines must be maintained.
11 The maximum length of exposed unsupported pipeline must not exceed seven (7) meters.
When it exceeds five (5) meters, a central substantial wooden support shall be installed
within a minimum 10 mm thick rubber “shoe” contacting the pipe.
12 When the bund is removed from any existing line its buried route shall be clearly indicated by
pegs and warnings.
13 Any damage to the pipe external protecting wrapping caused by the Contractor will be
repaired in strict accordance with QP procedures at the Contractor’s cost.
14 Provision of a permit-to-work by QP does not release the Contractor from obligation of

obtaining relevant permits to expose or work near utilities/facilities not under QP area of
responsibility. Examples – QGEWC, Telecom Provider etc.
14.3.5 PWA, Storm water and Groundwater
1 This subclause of the specification covers; stormwater and groundwater drainage, foul water
drainage and treated sewage effluent systems.
2 All of the material submission, inspection & testing, preparation of record sheets, preparation
of record drawings for works associated with PWA shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of this part of the specification.
3 Where it is necessary to make a connection to an existing water service this shall be in

accordance with Part 14 of this Section.
4 Works shall be in accordance with the latest PWA standard details except as modified in this
ar
Part. Contractors are deemed to be in possession of the latest standard details. Before
beginning any work, the Contractor shall approach PWA and obtain a copy of their latest
at
specification & standard details relating to the Works.
-Q
5 All work shall be carried out by a contractor or subcontractor prequalified and approved by
PWA. Proof of such approval shall be required in writing before the start of Works on the
Site and the name of any subcontractor to be used shall be as designated.
LL
W
END OF PART
s
en
e m
Si
Part 15: Road Lighting
15 ROAD LIGHTING .................................................................................................... 4

15.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 4
15.1.1 Scope of Works 4
15.1.2 References 5
15.1.3 Approved Contractors 6
15.1.4 Supply of Materials 6
15.1.5 Programme of Work 7
15.1.6 Technical Requirements 7
15.2 APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT ................................................................................. 7
15.2.1 General 7
15.3 STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT .............................................................. 9
15.4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 9
15.5 HIGH MAST LIGHTING ......................................................................................... 10
15.5.1 General 10
ar
15.5.2 High Mast Column 10
at
15.5.3 High Mast Head Frame 11
15.5.4 High Mast Luminaire Ring 11
-Q
15.5.5 Multi Core Mast Rising Cable 12
15.5.6 Raising and Lowering Equipment 12
15.5.7 Raising and Lowering Winch System 13
LL
15.5.8 Finish 14
15.5.9 High Mast Luminaires 14
W
15.5.10 High Mast Distribution Equipment 15

15.5.11 Aircraft Obstruction Light 15
s
15.5.12 Earthing and Lightning Protection 16

en
15.5.13 High Mast Foundations Construction Requirements 16

m
15.5.14 High Mast General Requirements 16

15.5.15 High Mast Approval 17
e
15.5.16 Maintenance Requirements 17

Si
15.5.17 High Mast Portable Cage for Maintenance 17

15.5.18 High Mast Lighting Performance 18
15.6 LIGHTING COLUMNS ........................................................................................... 18
15.6.1 General 18
15.6.2 Design Criteria for Columns 18
15.6.3 Details of Column 18
15.6.4 Details of Bracket 19
15.6.5 Doors and Base Compartments for Columns 20
15.6.6 Details of Base Flange Plate 20
15.6.7 Details of Column Foundation 21
15.6.8 Passively Safe Lighting Columns 21
15.6.9 Decorative Lighting Columns 23
15.7 LIGHTING UNITS .................................................................................................. 24
15.7.1 General 24
15.8 CONTROL GEAR .................................................................................................. 25
15.8.1 General 25
15.9 LAMPS .................................................................................................................. 25

15.9.1 General 25
15.10 LIGHTING SYSTEM FOR UNDERPASSES .......................................................... 26
15.10.1 General 26
15.10.2 Vehicular Underpass 26
15.10.3 Pedestrian Underpass 26
15.10.4 Animal Underpass 26
15.10.5 Lantern Construction for use in Vehicular, Pedestrian and Animal Underpasses 27
15.10.6 Underbridge or Undercrossing Lantern and Installation 28
15.10.7 Underpass, Underbridge and Undercrossing Lantern Control Gear and Lamps 29
15.10.8 Underpass, Underbridge or Undercrossing Isolating Box 30
15.11 LED LIGHTING UNITS .......................................................................................... 30
15.11.1 Lighting Units 30
15.11.2 Lighting Performance 31
15.11.3 Thermal Management 32
ar
15.11.4 Testing 33
at
15.11.5 In Situ Temperature Measurement Test (ISTMT) 34
15.11.6 Control Gear 34
-Q
15.11.7 LED Lamps 36
15.11.8 Quality Criteria for LED Lighting 37
LL
15.11.9 LED manufacturers data 38

15.12 OVERHEAD SIGN GANTRY LANTERN AND INSTALLATION ............................. 38
W
15.12.1 General 38
15.12.2 Sign Gantry Lantern 39
s
15.12.3 Sign Gantry Lantern Control Gear and Lamps 40

en
15.12.4 Sign Gantry Isolating (Safety) Switch, Conduit and Associated Cables 41
15.13 PHOTO ELECTRIC CONTROL CELL ................................................................... 41
m
15.13.1 General 41
e
15.14 ROAD LIGHTING COLUMN CUTOUT / ISOLATORS ........................................... 42

Si
15.14.1 General 42
15.15 FEEDER PILLAR ................................................................................................... 43
15.15.1 General 43
15.15.2 Cabinet 43
15.15.3 Components of Feeder Pillars 44
15.16 ROAD LIGHTING CABLES ................................................................................... 45
15.16.1 Underground Cables 45
15.16.2 Packing of Cables 45
15.16.3 Insulated PVC Sheathed Circular High Temperature (85°C) 46
15.17 MARKER TAPE FOR UNDERGROUND POWER CABLES .................................. 46
15.17.1 General 46
15.17.2 Material & Quality 46
15.18 MARKER POSTS .................................................................................................. 46
15.18.1 General 46
15.19 EARTHING ............................................................................................................ 46

15.19.1 General 46
15.20 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................... 47
15.20.2 Temporary Lighting 48
15.20.3 Removal of Existing Columns 48
15.20.4 Detailed Drawing for RCC foundation 49
15.20.5 Road lighting Column/Lantern Installation 49
15.20.6 Road lighting Feeder Pillar Installation 50
15.20.7 Road lighting Cable Installation 50
15.20.8 Road Crossing Ducts 51
15.20.9 Backfilling and Re-instatement 52
15.20.10 Road lighting Cable Terminations and Testing 52
15.20.11 Electrical Power Supply 53
15.21 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ON SITE ......................................................... 53
ar
15.21.1 General 53
at
15.21.2 Electrical Tests 53
15.21.3 Photometric Performance Testing 54
-Q
15.22 RECORD DRAWINGS .......................................................................................... 55
15.22.1 General 55
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
15 ROAD LIGHTING
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 Scope of Works
1 Work related to the road lighting installation provided for in this specification shall include the
supply, installation, testing, commissioning and putting into satisfactory operation any or all of
the following systems as required by the project drawings.
(a) Road lighting (L.V) cables and terminations.

(b) Road lighting Feeder Pillar and internal associated control equipment including
photocell control.
(c) Road lighting column/lantern assemblies.
(d) High mast lighting mast/lantern assemblies.
ar
(e) Roadway Lighting System control, adaptive, smart or remotely managed
at
(f) Lighting network earthing, including electrical grounding.
-Q
(g) Installation testing including lighting performance verification.
(h) Provision of equipment technical and maintenance data.
LL
2 The Contractor shall provide the shop drawings and supporting calculations required by the
specification, as well as the provision of all required supporting technical literature and
W
samples in connection with the approval of proposed equipment.
3 The equipment supplied shall include all necessary items for a complete installation
s
according to the specification requirements in order to provide for satisfactory operation, not
en
withstanding errors and omission. The equipment listed in the Contract documents are,
therefore, indicative and not limitative.
m
4 On satisfactory completion and commissioning of the lighting installation the Contractor shall
e
be responsible for the maintenance of the whole system for a period of 400 days. This will
Si
include for the free replacement of any component or lamp that fails during that period of
time. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for the rectification of any fault that
occurs within the cabling network. As part of this rectification work no cable joints will be
permitted.
5 All of the works associated with the road lighting installation shall be carried out in
accordance with the "Regulations for the Lighting of Roads for Motorised Traffic" and the
latest specifications issued by the PWA including The Qatar General Electricity & Water
Corporation “KAHRAMAA” Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical
Equipment.
6 The Contractor is deemed to be in possession of these regulations and the latest

specifications.
7 The luminaire shall be suitable for connection to the low voltage single phase supply of the
main network grid in The State of Qatar.
15.1.2 References
ANSI/IESNA RP-008 ..Roadway Lighting
BS HD 60269-2 ..........Low Voltage Fuses. Supplementary requirements for fuses by
authorized persons (fuses mainly for for industrial application)
BS 302........................Specification for higher breaking load ropes
BS 791........................Solid-stem calorimeter thermometers
BS 1011......................Process of arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels
BS 2484......................Straight concrete clayware cable covers
BS 4343......................Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes
BS 4360......................Weldable structural steels
BS 4533......................Luminaires
BS 4800...................Colour chart
ar
BS 5467......................Cables with thermosetting insulation for electricity supply for rated
voltages of up to and including 600/1000 V and up to and including
at
1900/3300 V -Q
BS 5486......................Low voltage switch gear and control gear assemblies
BS 5489......................Road lighting
BS 5649......................Lighting columns
LL
BS 5972......................Photoelectric Control Units for Road Lighting

BS 6121......................Mechanical Cable Glands for Elastomer and Plastic Insulated Cables
W
BS 6141......................PVC insulated PVC sheathed circular flexible cables

s
BS 6346......................PVC-insulated Cables for electricity Supply

en
BS 6360......................High conductivity stranded copper shaped conductor with XLPE

insulation
m
BS 6622......................Cables with extruded cross-linked polyethylene or ethylene propylene

rubber insulation for rated voltages from 3800 / 6600 V up to 19 000 /
e
33 000 V
Si
BS 6746......................Extruded black PVC over sheath

BS 6977......................Specification for insulated flexible cables for lifts and other flexible
connections
BS 7430......................Code of practice for earthing
BS 7671......................Requirements for electrical installations
BS EN 40.................Lighting Columns
BS EN 295..................Vitrified clay pipes, fittings and pipe joints for drains and sewers
BS EN 1011................Welding
BS EN ISO 1461 ........Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles
BS EN1559-1 ............Founding. Technical conditions of delivery. General.
BS EN1559-4 ............Founding. Technical conditions of delivery. Additional requirements for
aluminium alloy castings.
BS EN1676.................Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Alloyed ingots for remelting
BS EN 10137..............Plates and wide flats made of high yield strength structural steels
BS EN 10210..............Hot-finished hollow sections

BS EN 12767...........Passive Safety of Support Structures
BS EN 60529..............Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
BS EN 60898..............Miniature and moulded case circuit breakers
BS EN 60947-3 ..........Air-break switches, air-break disconnectors, air-break switch
disconnectors and fuse combination units for voltages up to and
including 1000 V ac and 1200 V dc.
BS EN 62305..............Protection against the lighting
IEC 60598 ..................Luminaires for roadway lighting
CIE 126-1997 ............Guidelines for minimizing sky glow.
EN62262:2002 ..........(IEC62262:2002) Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for
electrical equipment against external mechanical impacts.
The Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation “KAHRAMAA” Regulations for the
Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air Conditioning Equipment.
ar
The Qatar Highway Design Manual (QHDM). Current edition.
at
WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC).
-Q
RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC).
LL
Institution of Lighting Engineers (ILE), Code of Practice for Electrical Safety

W
Institution of Lighting Engineers (ILE), Technical Report No 7 ‘High Masts for Lighting and
CCTV’
s
ISO 9001, Quality Management Systems

en
Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE), Wiring Regulations

m
State of Qatar, Qatar Wiring Regulations

e
Si
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) “Roadside

Design Guide”
15.1.3 Approved Contractors
1 All road lighting works shall be carried out by a contractor or sub-contractor approved by the
PWA. Proof of such approval shall be required in writing prior to the works commencing on
site and the name of any sub-contractor to be engaged shall be entered in appropriate forms
during tender submittal.
15.1.4 Supply of Materials
1 The Contractor shall supply all the materials required to carry out the Works as specified in
the Contract Documents and Drawings. No materials will be supplied by the Owner or the
PWA.
15.1.5 Programme of Work
1 The Contractor is responsible, with the agreement of the Engineer, for all liaisons with the
respective department within PWA, in respect of programming the installation and
commissioning of the complete road lighting system. In addition to the Engineer, he shall also
ensure that relevant departments within the PWA are at all times kept informed of the current
progress of the road lighting works on site and that his approved sub-contractor programme
works are in the specified sequence in accordance with the overall approved Works
programme.
15.1.6 Technical Requirements
1 All works carried out on the installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of these
specifications so that their true meaning and intent are fulfilled. Minor deviations from the
drawings may be made to accomplish this but no change shall be made without written
approval of the Engineer and in consultation with the relevant departments within the PWA.
ar
2 In addition to all the regulations, codes of practice and standards referred to within this
specification, all the lighting and associated electrical works shall comply with the current
at
Qatar wiring regulations and the requirements of PWA.
-Q
3 Where applicable, any associated work involving other authorities in the State of Qatar their
relevant standards and specifications, as issued by them, shall be complied with.
LL
4 All equipment and materials supplied for the project shall be manufactured in strict
compliance with the latest standard of BS, IEC, EN their equivalent AASHTO or other
W
standards and regulations specifically referred to in this specification. Here in after they are
referred to as the “Standards”.
s
en
5 Acceptance tests shall conform to those referred to in the above mentioned “Standards”.
m
15.2 APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT

e
15.2.1 General
Si
1 All materials shall be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible to
ensure that, where applicable, for nominated items of equipment only the type and
manufacturer approved by the PWA, as detailed in their List of Approved Manufacturers are
submitted for incorporation into the works. In addition, written approval must be obtained
from the PWA, prior to ordering. Contractors shall note that only products with a proven
record of performance, efficiency and long life will be considered for approval.
2 The Contractor shall not order any equipment for the incorporation into the Works before
receipt of formal approval in writing. The approval procedure shall be as follows:
(a) The Contractor shall submit four copies of his equipment proposals to the Engineer.
This submission shall be comprehensive and clearly state any manufacturer’s
deviations from the specification. Manufacturer’s literature associated with the
submission shall be originals and not photocopies. Specific reference to the
compliance of certain specification requirements shall be identified.
(b) The Engineer shall review this submission. The Engineer’s approval shall be as
follows.
(i) With the Engineer’s comments and recommendations attached, a copy of the
submission shall be forwarded to the departments concerned within the PWA, to
obtain their approval.
(ii) Where minor deviations exist from the specifications but do not affect the
performance of the equipment or installation the Engineer’s recommendations to
accept such deviations, his approval together with a copy of the submission
shall be forwarded to the departments concerned within the PWA, to obtain their
approval.
(iii) Approval shall be transmitted to the Contractor in writing once the approval of
the relevant departments within the PWA, has been given.
3 All submissions shall give clear, unambiguous details and performance data of the
equipment proposed, together with all supporting calculations where necessary. Clear
catalogue identification references shall be provided. Documents shall be in English.
4 The Engineer reserves the right to direct the Contractor to provide equipment of a make and
ar
type that is essential to achieve the Contract design criteria.
at
5 Approval of samples by the Engineer in consultation with the relevant departments within the
PWA, does not in any way relieve the Contractor of his contractual obligation in respect of the
-Q
suitability of the equipment or their final performance once installed, and the co-ordination
with all the elements of the lighting works into a fully operational installation.
LL
6 After receipt of equipment the Contractor shall arrange for them to be examined and
approved by the Engineer’s Representative in consultation with the relevant department
W
within the PWA, prior to installation.
7 Column and Mast Fabrication Requirements

s
en
In paved or walkways areas Enclosure plate is required. The Enclosure plate shall be cast
Aluminium or Galvanized steel, comprising two removal halves per base with size matching
m
the base plate. It shall be painted to match pole finish. Provided with backup plate to one
halve of Enclosure Plate and with tapped holes to accept stainless steel screws countersunk
e
into other half of Enclosure Plate.

Si
8 Specific Requirements for Columns
The gap between base plate and top of foundation shall be grouted. Means of discharging
any accumulated moisture shall be provided at the pole base and provision shall be made for
adequate drainage.
9 Testing and Factory Visits
The contractor shall facilitate authorised Engineer representatives, and/or their appointed
representative, to examine the test and manufacturing facilities and witness
manufacturing processes and sample testing related to the luminaire and associated
components submitted for evaluation, at no cost to Ashghal or their appointed
representative.
10 Saving Energy Lamp’s Luminaire specification data sheet arrangement or each model of
luminaire the manufacturer shall produce a data sheet providing a detailed and
comprehensive description of the luminaires characteristics and component parts. The data
sheet will contain adequate information for the reader to select and specify a particular model
from the luminaire range. This will include;
(a) luminaire diagram external dimensions, weight and windage

(b) optical arrangement (lens and reflectors types and settings)
(c) driver type (drive current, system power consumption)
(d) luminaire output (lm)
(e) luminaire efficiency (lm/W)
(f) glare rating
(g) control and switching options (photocell, programmed stand alone, CMS, etc.)
ar
15.3 STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
at
1
-Q
All plant and equipment shall be stored off the ground under weatherproof cover ready for
incorporation in the works. All electrical apparatus shall be examined and cleaned before
installation. All open conduit ends shall be fitted with plastic caps or suitable protective
LL
covering to prevent the ingress of foreign matter. All drums with cables shall be protected
from direct sunlight.
W
15.4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

s
1 All notices from the Contractor shall be in writing and delivered by hand.
en
2 The Contractor shall consult the Engineer not less than one month before it is proposed to
m
commence work to ascertain whether any underground installations will be affected by the
proposed work, in which event the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with
e
the Engineer to safeguard the installation. It will be the Contractors responsibility to liaise with
Si
the utility authorities and to arrange for all road opening notices
3 The Contractor shall give at least one week's notice in writing to the utility authority’s
Engineer of the dates upon which it is intended to operate plant or equipment or carry out any
work for which permission has been given in writing by the utility authority’s Engineer. Such
operations of work shall only be carried out in the presence of the utility authority’s Engineer
unless notice shall have been in writing from the utility authority’s Engineer that they do not
require to be present.
4 The utility authorities may require work to be executed on their installation during the period
of the Contract. The Contractor shall afford all facilities to the utility authority’s contractors or
workmen until their diversion work is complete. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the work of
the utility authorities and his own activities and when necessary shall amend his programme
of working to suit all requirements of the utility authorities in connection with their diversion
work and shall keep the Engineer informed in writing of all arrangements made.
5 The Contractor shall locate and mark with suitable posts all the utility authority’s underground
installations that are within the area of the Works and shall ensure that such markers are
maintained in their correct positions at all times. The Contractor shall advise the utility
authority’s agent of any installation not found where shown on the Drawings, or found but not
shown or found damaged or subsequently damaged.
15.5 HIGH MAST LIGHTING
15.5.1 General
1 This work shall consist of the supply, installation upon prepared foundations, connections,
commissioning and putting into satisfactory service the high masts complete with the
operating mechanisms, luminaire support ring or bracket, luminaries, control gear, wiring and
distribution equipment.
2 The mast luminaire support ring shall be designed to provide for the appropriate distribution
of lighting either in one direction or in many directions thus making it possible to concentrate
ar
the required number of luminaires on any zone and fix them rigidly in any direction desired.
at
Prepared foundations are specified in other sections of this specification.
15.5.2 High Mast Column

-Q
1 The high mast column shall be of the height specified on the Drawings, hot dipped
LL
galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 or BS 791 of multi-sided cross-section with a continuous

taper made of formed sheet steel in accordance with BS 4360 grade 43C and electrically
welded. They shall be delivered to the site in manageable sections of not greater than 12
W
metres and be joined by means of pressure over-lapping or slip-joints, which shall have a
minimum length of 1.5 times diameter of the joint. Site welding will not be allowed.
s
en
2 The walls of the masts shall have a minimum thickness of 6mm for the base section, 5mm
for the central section and 4mm for the top section. The steel used shall have tensile strength
m
between 490 and 630 MN/sqm and minimum yield strength of 355 MN/sqm.
e
3 The mast cross-sections shall be so designed that once installed and fully equipped, it shall
Si
have safety factors in accordance with Technical Report No. 7 of the Institute of Lighting
Engineers – London and shall be capable of withstanding wind load resulted from the wind
speed provided in Section 1 Part 1 Clause 1.5.2, and blowing in the most unfavourable
direction at a height of ten meters above ground level. Appropriate reinforcement shall be
provided where necessary to increase the strength. Its behaviour under wind induced
oscillation shall be such that it shall not fail due to fatigue and the design should ensure that
these oscillations be damped to a minimum of zero.
4 The maximum deflection at the top of the mast shall not exceed 2.5% of the mast height at
the minimum wind speed provided in Section 1 Part 1 Clause 1.5.2.
5 A steel flange plate of adequate thickness and free from laminations shall be welded above
and below the base of the mast developing fully the strength of the section. In addition
supplementary gussets shall be provided between bolt holes if deemed necessary.
6 An access door shall be provided in the base of the mast of adequate dimensions to permit
clear access to the back plate installed for the mounting of the circuit breaker assembly and
junction box, winch, etc. The backboard shall be made of steel or other non-hydroscopic
material. The door shall be completely weatherproof fitted with a hidden hinge and a heavy
duty lock. The door area shall have appropriate reinforcement.
7 A stainless steel earthing 12mm diameter bolt shall be welded inside the mast near the
access door and shall be complete with stainless steel washers and nuts.
15.5.3 High Mast Head Frame
1 The head frame shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel attached to the mast by means of a
steel slip-fitter and secured by at least four stainless steel set screws. It shall be composed of
spun aluminium or other approved weatherproof cover, housing the required number of steel
cable sheaves and associated accessories for the operation and powering of the luminaire
ring.
ar
15.5.4 High Mast Luminaire Ring
at
1 The high mast luminaire support ring or carriage shall be constructed of hot dipped
-Q
galvanized steel channel fitted with the appropriate number of luminaires, lamp gear
mounting brackets, wiring chamber and mounting plate. It shall be in two halves joined by
bolted flanges to permit removal from the erected mast. The luminaire shall be mounted on
the luminaire rings by means of either a specially designed bracket allowing it to be swiveled
LL
in any desired direction or rigid bracket arm assembly. It shall be possible to lock each
luminaire firmly in position, thus preventing any rotation or falling while moving the luminaire
W
ring.
s
2 The carriage assembly shall be arranged to locate firmly against stops when in the secure
en
position and these shall be of adequate strength to ensure that they cannot be damaged by
over winding of the winch.
m
3 A shaped protective aesthetic canopy, designed to give a coordinated appearance of head

e
frame with the luminaire ring, shall cover the head frame.
Si
4 For masts fitted with a mobile luminaire ring, rollers with a centering mechanism shall be
provided to ensure a perfect alignment of the luminaire ring both axially and in azimuth, while
ascending or descending the mast. Rollers shall be made of water resistant non-marking
composition material with oil-impregnated bronze brushings. All shafts and washers shall be
stainless steel.
5 A weatherproof wiring chamber or terminal box shall be provided constructed from a

corrosion resistant material or aluminium alloy and installed on the luminaire ring. It shall be
equipped with the high temperature shrouded terminal blocks and neutral bar or block and
shall include facilities on the luminaire ring to allow testing of luminaires while in the lowered
position. The wiring chamber shall be fitted with an earthing stud accessible from inside and
out for earthing connections. The housing shall be completely weatherproof.
6 The cables installed in the luminaire ring connecting each luminaire to the wiring chamber
shall be factory pre-wired avoiding the need for field wiring, and shall have single core copper
conductors with neoprene or cross-linked polythene or approved equivalent insulation and
2
sheath. Cables shall be either single core or 3 core 2.5mm with copper conductors and
colour coding of the different phases being in conformity with the relevant cabling standards.
7 Cables from the terminal box shall run in PVC duct or metal duct fixed to or within the
luminaire carriage to each luminaire from the wiring chamber.
15.5.5 Multi Core Mast Rising Cable
1 The cable connecting the MCCB assembly at the base of the mast to the wiring chamber on
the luminaire ring, shall be a flexible multicore copper cable with conductors and neoprene or
approved equivalent high temperature resistant insulation and sheath in accordance with BS
6977.
2 The colour coding of the different phases of the cable shall conform to the relevant cable
standards. Each luminaire shall have its own neutral conductor connected to the neutral bar
or block.
3 The mast cable shall consist of a circular multi core cable to BS 6977 600/1000V grade.
Each conductor core shall be insulated with ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) and the
complete core is sheathed with heavy duty polychloroprene (PCP).
ar
4 A multicore electrical power cable shall be provided terminating in the base compartment with
at
a special multi-pin plug and socket coupler fitted with a guard, and at mast head connected
-Q
to the wiring chamber fixed to the luminaire ring. It shall be suitable for the bending, flexible
and load carrying stresses involved.
5 The cable shall be fitted with a correctly rated multi pin weatherproof plug and socket within
LL
the base compartment of the mast which will enable the cable to be disconnected before
lowering the luminaire carriage. The socket must be connected to the supply side of the
W
circuit and may either be free cable coming from the fuse box or be fixed to the fuse box in
the base compartment.
s
en
6 The wiring shall be such that the plug and socket can be isolated before disconnecting.
7 The cable shall be suitably restrained to prevent its own weight from causing the terminal box
m
to energise the lanterns.

e
Si
15.5.6 Raising and Lowering Equipment
1 The pulleys located within the headframe shall be of non- corrosive cast aluminium alloy
material grooved to exactly suit the steel rope and cable diameters, and fitted with stainless
steel shafts. The pulleys shall be housed in a chassis integral with a sleeve, which slopes
over the top of the mast and is secured axially and in azimuth. The complete chassis
assembly shall be hot dipped galvanized. A guard is to be provided for the separation of the
wire rope and power cable before entering in the pulley and the locating of the steel wire rope
and power cables in their groves when operating either loaded or slack. An arrangement
shall be provided to ensure that the electric and steel cables are separated before passing
over their respective pulleys, and close fitting guides shall ensure that the cables cannot
disengage the pulley during operations.
2 The luminaire carriage shall have the provision made on it for supporting and gripping the
weight of the supply cable without damage of the cable sheath.
3 The luminaire ring shall be supported by 3 steel ropes coupled to 2 steel ropes and
suspended from the double drum winch by means of a manufactured steel coupling unit. A
divider bar shall ensure the separation of the steel ropes during raising and lowering.
Si
em
en
s
W
LL
-Q
at
ar
8 An MCCB providing overload protection shall be incorporated to stop the ring when the effort
required by the winch becomes superior to the nominal load.
9 The winch shall be fitted with suitable equipment to allow the winch to stop in a safe manner,
without damage to the mast finish, in the event of a supply failure to the power tool. The
winding mechanism should then be capable of being operated by hand.
10 Each winch supplied shall be uniquely identified. In addition it shall have its own individual
test certificate recording the safe working load. Lubrication details shall also be permanently
recorded on its housing for future maintenance purposes.
15.5.8 Finish
1 All welds shall be smooth with the splatter removed and the interior and exterior surface of
the mast and ring shall be cleaned by pickling or blasting and shall be free of any grease.
2 All components shall be hot dipped galvanized by total immersion in a bath of molten zinc
ar
after completion of the fabrication. No further levelling up, finishing or modifications shall be
carried out after completion of the galvanizing process. The minimum thickness of zinc
at
coating shall be 450 gm/sqm on the inside and outside surfaces of the mast and ring. The
-Q
galvanizing shall conform to BS EN ISO 1461.
3 Any damage to the galvanizing shall be rectified during erection by wire brushing the affected
area and treating with an approved zinc restorative. Sufficient materials shall be applied to
LL
provide a zinc coating at least equal in thickness to the galvanized layer.

W
4 If required by the Engineer the underside of the flange plate and internal surface of the mast
to a height of 0.5m shall be given a coat of heavy duty bitumen paint prior to erection.
s
en
15.5.9 High Mast Luminaires
1 The high mast luminaire shall have a ‘cut off’ distribution. It shall be of the side entry
m
mounting type, with toughen a flat glass protector and integral control gear suitable for the
e
operation of either a 400W with lumens per watt rating of no less than 48,000, or 600W with
Si
lumens per watt rating of no less than 88,000, 220-240V, 50Hz. High Pressure Sodium
tubular lamp of E-40 base, as defined for the contract.
2 The luminaires to be adopted shall be high performance street lighting lanterns currently
used for conventional roadway lighting routes to BS 5489 or equivalent suitable for use at a
mounting height of 25 or 30 metre. It shall comply with IEC 60598 or other approved
equivalent norms. The body shall be made of die-cast aluminium and shall be divided into
two separate compartments.
3 The first compartment of the luminaire shall house the optical system with polished and
anodized pressure aluminium reflector. The second compartment shall contain the electrical
accessories (control gear) cable feed terminals and side entry mounting socket. This
separation shall protect the electrical accessories from the direct radiant heat emitted by the
lamp. The optical compartment shall be protected by a toughened flat glass protector and
shall be dust and watertight to a protection rating of IP65.
4 The access to the optical compartment shall be by tilting the protector frame around the
hinge without tools. A heat resistant gasket fitted on the frame shall ensure the tightness of
the optical compartment. The accessories such as ballast, ignitor, and capacitor shall be re-
wired and pre-assembled by a metallic plate that is mounted and fixed into the rear
compartment. Special care shall be taken to allow easy maintenance and quick replacement
of the accessories and to minimise the risk of falling.
5 The cable feed terminal and the earth-screw shall be fixed to the metallic compartment, a
cable holder shall be mounted near the terminals. The side entry mounting sockets should
accept a 125 mm. long spigot and 50 mm diameter OR adjustable from 42 to 60 mm dia.
Exterior side of both compartments should be with grey colour in finish.
15.5.10 High Mast Distribution Equipment
1 The high mast base compartment shall be fitted with a power control and distribution
assembly installed in a pre-wired weatherproof box opposite the access door inside the base
of the mast.
ar
2 The assembly shall consist of a surface mounted sheet steel weatherproof box with a cover
at
enclosing: -Q
(a) One 3-pole main 60Amp MCCB together with a neutral link for luminaire circuits. The
ratings of the MCCB shall be in accordance with the QGEWC regulations and suitable
to the connected load and cable.
LL
(b) One single pole 20 Amp MCB with neutral link for each luminaire circuit of a suitable
current rating.
W
(c) One-pole MCCB with neutral link connected to the incoming supply and serving a 16A-
s
250 V DIN socket outlet complete with 3-pin plug to suit the raising and lowering
en
mechanism.
(d) A multi-pin plug and socket outlet with guard fitted with cable outlet for connection to
m
the multi-core electric power cable provided from the MCCB to the luminaire ring wiring
chamber.
e
Si
3 The MCCB’s shall be de-rated and calibrated to provide over-current and short circuit
protection when used in an ambient temperature of 50oC and shall have the required
breaking capacity. The incoming side of the triple pole MCCB with the neutral links shall be
fitted with a 4-way, line-tap type terminal block, with each terminal capable of accepting 2 x
2
35mm copper conductors.
4 The multi-pin coupler for supply to the portable raising and lowering power tool shall be
connected to the MCCB via a flexible connection to ensure accessibility.
5 Where an high mast assembly supplies a ground sign lighting unit or equivalent it shall be
equipped with an additional 15 Amps circuit breaker to supply the sign lighting installation.
The circuit breaker shall be installed inside the mast distribution box.
15.5.11 Aircraft Obstruction Light
1 Where required by Civil Aviation Authorities, two red luminaires within cast aluminium bodies
shall be fitted at the top of each high mast attached to the movable luminaire ring with a
purpose made bracket and arranged to project through the canopy.
2 The luminaires shall be provided with a change over relay such that, in the event of lamp
failure, the second lamp is automatically connected. Lamps shall be GLS Rough Service 100
watt suitable for an E.S. (E27) lampholder.
3 The obstruction lights shall be wired on a separate circuit protected by a separate SP & N
circuit breaker with terminals to accept separate incoming cables.
15.5.12 Earthing and Lightning Protection
1 All masts shall be provided with a separate system for earthing as a protection against
lightning. This shall comply with BS EN 62305.
2 High masts shall be equipped with an air terminal of the correct height to provide the required
zone of protection for the mast head frames and fixtures. The air terminal shall be bonded to
the mast to ensure the discharge is dissipated via the earth ground terminal without damage
to the steel winch ropes or electrical cables.
ar
3 Separate earthing shall be provided for each item of control equipment within the mast
assembly and connected to a central earthing point.
at
4
-Q
A 12mm diameter stainless steel or brass stud with nuts and washers in the base
compartment connected to the main body of the mast structure shall be provided.
15.5.13 High Mast Foundations Construction Requirements

LL
1 High masts shall be installed on concrete bases as detailed on the Drawings. The foundation
W
design and construction shall be as based on the high mast manufacturers recommendations
according to the ground and climatic conditions that exist at the site location. The erection of
s
high masts and the assembly of the luminaire, head frame with raising and lowering gear
en
shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions. The Contractor
shall before commencement of the construction work confirm by means of structural
calculations that the foundations proposed are suitable for use with the high mast installation
m
he proposes to install. Holding down bolts and plumb adjustment nuts, washers, locknuts or
e
nyloc nuts shall be galvanized steel or cadmium plated.

Si
2 The holding down bolt/nuts complete with the anchor plate for casting into the foundation
shall be provided by the high mast manufacturer together with a mild steel anchor bolt
template with tube holes to ensure correct vertical and precision made horizontal bolt
alignment.
3 The anchor bolts shall be of guaranteed performance high tensile steel.
4 All buried external surface of the high mast foundation shall be protected by brush painted
tanking membrane and hard board protection.
15.5.14 High Mast General Requirements
1 Final setting and adjustment of the luminaires shall only be carried out after all the masts
along a route, junction or interchange are complete and operational.
2 Each high mast metal work shall be bonded to a separate earth rod as indicated on the
Drawings and also to the separate earthing cable connected to the distribution system earth
bar.
3 The high mast shall be of specified height carrying luminaires as indicated on the Drawings.
Each luminaire shall be fitted with the specific lamp or lamps arranged to be separately
oriented to give the correct illumination at designated locations along the road surfaces.
15.5.15 High Mast Approval
1 For the approval of the Engineer before manufacturing commences the Contractor shall
submit detailed calculations and supporting data to show that the mast meets the design
criteria detailed and shall include the following information:
(a) The deflection at the top of the mast at the designed wind speed.
(b) The neutral frequency of the mast.
(c) The critical wind speed for resonance.
(d) The damping characteristics of the mast.
(e) The steel stressed under resonant conditions.
ar
(f) The acceleration at the top of the mast under resonant conditions.
at
(g) Welding procedure.
(h)
-Q
Procedure to ensuring that the flange plate is not laminated.
(i) Details of the joints between the mast sections and between the bottom section and
the flange.
LL
(j) Details of the base compartment with the method of reinforcement at the door area
and means adopted for making the door weather and tamperproof.
W
15.5.16 Maintenance Requirements

s
en
1 The following items must be provided for the Engineer at the time of the commissioning of
any high mast assembly:
m
(a) Power tools – 1 No.

e
(b) ‘L’ hooks – 6 No.

Si
(c) Operating handles – 2 No.

(d) Foundation Bolt/Nut and Head frame Nut/Bolt Spanners – 2 No. Sets.
15.5.17 High Mast Portable Cage for Maintenance
1 The high mast system shall incorporate a mobile luminaire ring such that it is suitable for
utilising a purpose made portable cage for maintenance purposes.
2 The cage shall be obtained from the high mast supplier and shall be capable of carrying two
persons plus servicing equipment.
3 A safety system shall be provided for use with the cage according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. One safety cage per project shall be allowed within the pricing structure
offered by the Contractor for the future use of the Engineer.
15.5.18 High Mast Lighting Performance
1 The Contractor must provide guaranteed lighting performance data as part of his technical
submission to confirm the minimum light values that will be maintained at each location and
where specifically identified by the Engineer or representatives from the relevant departments
within the PWA.
2 The minimum light levels that must be obtained shall be:

Horizontal illumination 30 LUX
Diversity Factor (Ave/Min) 4:1
15.6 LIGHTING COLUMNS
15.6.1 General
1 All columns and brackets shall be produced by ISO 9001 certificated lighting column
manufacturers registered and certified for the manufacture, supply and certification of lighting
ar
columns under their quality assessment schedule.
at
2 All columns of the same mounting height and with the same arrangement shall be identical in
-Q
construction.
3 Road lighting columns shall be hot dip galvanized steel, octagonal, multisided, tubular and
LL
stepped shape, of height as detailed in the Contract specification and drawings, complete
with bracket of outreach, number of arms and of shape all again as detailed in the Contract
W
specification or on the drawings.
15.6.2 Design Criteria for Columns

s
en
1 For all columns and masts the stress and deflection calculations shall be based on the
maximum bracket and luminaire projection, on the bracket arm, with projected area, length
m
and weight as designated.

e
2 In still air conditions, loaded with the designated luminaire positioned in any of the variable
Si
locations, there shall be no appreciable deflection of the column.
3 The maximum permissible deflection in the column or mast shall be 1° in any 1m length with
4 Columns must be designed to withstand the wind force.
5 The "K" factor for columns over 8 m in height shall be 2.2.
6 Columns shall be designed to support lanterns with the data given by the Engineer.
15.6.3 Details of Column
1 The column shall be made from hollow sections to BS EN 10210 in steel to BS 7613 grade
43C or any approved equivalent norms. The hollow sections shall have a minimum tensile
strength of 430 N/mm² and minimum yield strength of 255N/mm².
2 Columns shall be in one piece tubular (round), stepped shape or multi-sided sheet steel and
be of the flanged (bolted) type.
3 Columns should be designed in accordance with BS 5649 in steel and finished with hot dip
galvanized internally and externally with no other treatment in accordance with BS EN ISO
1461 or equivalent.
4 The jointing of the column shall be carried out by reducing the diameter of the base section to
form an interface fit with the bore of the upper section. The upper section shall be heated and
pushed over the lower section. The thermal shrinkage shall ensure a complete bond over the
full area of the joint and develop the full strength of column at the transition. The final
operation is to weld the lower section to the upper section and dress the weld to a smooth
profile. Welding shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1011.
5 Strengthening shall be provided at the door opening. Care shall be taken to ensure that
rounded edges are provided at the corners of the door opening to avoid stress
concentrations.
6 The top of the column should be designed and provided as suitable to fix the bracket arm
collar with the top of the column as shown in the Contract drawings.
ar
7 All dimensions for the column shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of the
at
PWA, and, if applicable, as detailed on the drawings. Modifications to suit the particular
-Q
foundation/support details proposed by the manufacturer shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval prior to incorporation.
15.6.4 Details of Bracket

LL
1 Brackets shall be formed of hollow sections to BS EN 10210 in steel to BS EN 10137 Grade

W
43C or equivalent.
s
2 The column bracket arms and spigots shall be so designed that when assembled with the
en
shaft the design altitude of the arm and projection shall be as detailed in the contract
requirements.
m
3 Welding on bracket arm shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 1011.

e
Si
4 Brackets shall be hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 or equivalent. The bracket arm shall
be so designed that when assembled on the column shaft the altitude of the arm and spigot
shall be 5° above the horizontal unless otherwise stated in the Contract documents.
5 Length of the luminaire fixing spigot unless otherwise designated to suit the luminaire shall be
150mm, outside diameter of spigot shall be 42mm, thickness shall, be 4mm.
6 The securing arrangement of the bracket arm to the column shall be positive so as to ensure
that the arm does not rotate and shall be such that the bracket can be fixed in any of four 90
degree positions in relation to the column door opening. 8 No. socket set screws of size M10
x 16mm or approved equivalent arrangement shall fix the bracket onto the columns using
stainless steel screws.
7 The luminaire shall be securely fixed to the mounting post or bracket by means of a
clamping system that will prevent movement in high winds. All component parts shall be
manufactured from non-corrosive materials.
15.6.5 Doors and Base Compartments for Columns
1 Each column and mast shaft shall have a base compartment large enough to offer easy
access to the equipment therein.
2 The weatherproof door provided for each opening which shall be interchangeable between
columns of the same mounting height. To avoid accidental spillage of water from irrigation of
flooding the bottom of the door shall be at least 0.5m above the top of the foundation.
3 A stainless steel durable non-corroding tamper-proof lock device shall be provided of the
triangular headed screw type, unless designated otherwise. Where applicable, door lock
recess shall incorporate adequate drainage such that they are unlikely to become blocked
and so form a water trap.
4 Door openings are to be kept to the minimum size consistent with the cable termination units
and any control gear.
ar
5 When installing lighting columns on a single carriageway the column doors shall be located at
90° to the kerb line and in such a location that the maintenance operative faces the oncoming
at
traffic and to ensure that the door can be opened at all times without encroaching onto the
-Q
highway. In the case of installing lighting columns within the central median the column door
shall be located perpendicular to the road such that the maintenance operative will be facing
across the line of the carriageway. The door openings shall be free from any irregularities
and burrs.
LL
6 Keys are to be provided with the first consignment of columns at the rate of 10 % of the total
W
number of columns.
s
7 A baseboard of non-hygroscopic hardwood, minimum thickness 15 mm, shall be securely

en
fixed in each compartment and shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the cable
termination unit.
m
8 Single purpose earth terminals shall be provided in a readily accessible position, preferably
e
on the left hand side of the opening and on the column door.
Si
9 The baseboard shall be fixed using brass or stainless steel nut and bolt arrangement.
10 All door lock hinges and catches shall be greased before handover.
15.6.6 Details of Base Flange Plate
1 The base flange plate shall be manufactured from steel plate that is free from laminations.
The main shaft of the pole shall penetrate the full depth of the base plate and is to be welded
above and below using a semi automatic MIG shielded arc process. Additional strength shall
be provided by gusset plates located between hole positions.
2 4 No. slots allowing for adjustment shall be provided in the flange plate of suitable size so as
to accommodate the foundation bolt specified to fix the column on the RCC foundation.
15.6.7 Details of Column Foundation
1 The manufacturer of the road lighting column shall submit the dimensions and specification
of his proposed foundation including the steel reinforcement details to the Engineer for
approval.
2 The foundation shall accommodate 4 No. holding down bolts of size 25mm x 800mm for
columns up to 10 metres high and 33mm x 900mm for 12 and 16 metres high columns,
supplied with two nuts and two washers to each bolt.
3 Foundations shall be constructed such that they avoid being a hazard to pedestrians
and bicyclists on footways and shared use paths. The top surface of concrete column
foundations on pathways shall not be higher than ground level, and shall not be higher than
50 mm above ground level on all other surfaces.
15.6.8 Passively Safe Lighting Columns
ar
1 Design Criteria
at
(a) All Passively Safe lighting Columns shall comply with BS EN 12767 – Passive safety of
support structures for road equipment – requirements, classification and test methods,
-Q
2007 or all road lighting columns within the clear zone (as AASHTO Roadside Design
Guide Table 3.1 or Chapter 10 Roadside Safety Urban or Restricted Environments)
shall be protected by an approved barrier system.
LL
(b) Each Passively Safe Lighting Column shall be anodized aluminium or galvanized steel
as specified in the Contract Documents. Design of aluminium columns shall
W
comply with BS EN 40, Part 6 and its incorporated references. Design of steel
columns shall comply with BS EN 40, Part 5 and its incorporated references.
s
en
(c) In addition to section 15.6.2-1 the passively safe columns in still air conditions, loaded
with the designated luminaire positioned in any of the variable locations, there shall be
no appreciable deflection of the column. The maximum permissible deflection for
m
passively safe poles shall not exceed 4% of the total length of the pole when furnished
e
with bracket arm, and 2% of the total length of pole with no bracket arm. Columns
Si
must be designed to withstand a base wind speed of 30 metres/second. Columns

shall be designed to support lanterns with the data given by the Engineer.
(d) Per BS EN 12767, Annex F, passively safe tubular hollow section steel or
aluminium posts provided shall have a nominal diameter less than or equal to 89
mm, and a nominal wall thickness of 3.2 mm. Where steel poles are specified in the
Contract Documents, steel grade S355J2H shall be provided.
(e) Aluminium columns shall be finish coated with an anodized aluminium finish
providing resistance to fading, peeling, cracking or corrosion. The guarantee provided
by the manufacturer shall be a minimum of 10 years against fading, peeling, cracking
or corrosion of the finish.
(f) The maximum mass of combined luminaire support and fixtures attached to
breakaway supports shall be limited to 450 kg and the maximum column height shall
not exceed 18.0 metres.
(g) Where slopes are greater than 6:1, no passively safe support shall be used without the
approval of the Engineer. Passively safe supports shall not be used on any
columns mounted on median barriers, concrete or otherwise. No slip base
mechanisms may be used on Qatar roadways.
(h) Columns shall be certified by the manufacturer to comply with BS EN 12767 and shall
achieve the Passive Safety Performance Classes as indicated in Table 15.1.
Table 15.1 – Passive Safety Performance Classes
Pole Support Requirement
Roadway Posted Impact Speed Class*/ Energy
Location
Speed Absorbing Type / Occupant
Safety Level**
(a) 70:HE:1-3
(b) 100:HE:1-3
≤ 40 kph All
(c) 70:LE:1-3
(d) 100:LE:1-3
CBD 100:HE:1-3
Other 100:NE:1-3
˃ 40 kph Where columns may fall
ar
on other carriageways 100:HE:1-3
below (i.e. flyovers).
at
-Q HE – High Energy Absorbing
Term Descriptions CBD – Central Business District LE – Low Energy Absorbing
NE – Non-Energy Absorbing
* Poles shall be procured in order of class per availability from the manufacturer.
LL
** The Occupant Safety Level (OSL) provides for increasing levels of safety by reducing impact
severity. The preferred level of safety is OSL 3 and shall be procured as first choice when
available from the manufacturer.
W
(i) Certification of breakaway support shall be collected from the manufacturer and
s
submitted for Engineer approval prior to procurement. Certification documentation

en
shall confirm the Impact Speed Class, Energy Absorbing Type and Occupant Safety
Level of the supplied luminaires.
m
2 Related Equipment
e
(a) The column shall be rated to support Cloth Banners up to the length, width and height
Si
as required in the Contract Documents. Each column shall be provided with a

240V earthed outlet rated for outdoor conditions in compliance with Section 21 Part
10.2.2 herein.
(b) When required by the provisions of the Contract Documents, all poles, whether
aluminium or steel in type, shall be supplied with a frangible element or
breakaway base tested and certified to provide passive safety elements as to
be in compliance with BS EN 12767, with special attention to National Annex
(informative) to BS EN 12767:2007.
3 Lighting System Requirements
(a) Work related to the Passively Safe Lighting Column installation provided for in
this specification shall include the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
putting into satisfactory operation all systems as required by the Contract Documents
and the Specification.
(b) Electrical connections for lighting columns shall be quick disconnect type at ground
level, such that they provide for electrical isolation within 0.4 seconds upon impact of
the lighting pole, and be furnished as required by BS EN 12767:2007 NA.8.
(c) Prior to procurement, the Contractor shall provide shop drawings and supporting
calculations required by the Specification, as well as the provision of all required
supporting technical literature and samples in connection with the acceptance of
proposed equipment approved by Ashghal’s authorized representative.
(d) Due to the long lead times of such equipment, the Contractor shall order the poles
within 1 week of shop drawing approval. The equipment supplied shall include all
necessary items for a complete installation in accordance with the Specification and
other Contract Documents in order to provide for specified luminaire operation.
(e) Contractor shall provide all necessary accessories, wiring and equipment from lamp to
base, feeder pillar to last luminaire, to complete a functional lighting system
regardless of their inclusion in the Contract Documents.
4 Lighting Equipment
(a) Lighting Columns

(i) The Passively Safe Lighting Columns shall be procured from an Ashghal-
ar
approved manufacturer. The manufacturer shall submit no less than three
references for contact on past performance, supplying previous installed
at
contract’s contact person, title, agency or company name, phone number and
-Q
e-mail address to Ashghal Design’s and Ashghal Operation and
Maintenance’s authorized representatives as part of the approval process.
(ii) Columns shall be constructed with their anchor bolts at no more than 100 mm
LL
above ground level. Anchor bolts furnished with the column support shall be
galvanized steel or stainless steel in type.
W
(b) Luminaire
(i) Each luminaire fitted on the Passively Safe Lighting Columns shall meet all
s
illumination requirements set forth by Ashghal and the photometric specifics as

en
outlined in the Contract Drawings.

m
(c) Foundations
(i) Contractor shall submit the dimensions and specification of proposed
e
foundations for support of the Passively Safe Lighting Columns. Drawings

Si
and specifications shall be prepared and sealed by a licensed structural

engineer. The structural engineer shall provide certification that the proposed
foundation design supports the performance of the breakaway mechanism, and
is designed properly to prevent movement or rotation in the surrounding soil.
15.6.9 Decorative Lighting Columns
1 Decorative lighting systems are non-standard, themed luminaire and pole styles. The
luminaires range from ornate globes known as acorns to four-sided glass fixtures having a
distinct character. The luminaires are mounted on the decorative lighting columns in a post-
mounted arrangement or with a bracket arm. The Contractor shall coordinate final
decorative lighting column and foundation placement with the Engineer to avoid problems
related to the placement of trees, other street furniture and underground utilities.
2 Each Decorative Lighting Column shall be anodized aluminium or galvanized steel as

specified in the Contract Documents. Design of aluminium columns shall comply with
BS EN 40, Part 6 and its incorporated references. Design of steel columns shall
comply with BS EN 40, Part 5 and its incorporated references. Galvanized steel
columns shall be supplied with aluminium cladding sufficient to provide the decorative
features when detailed as such in the Contract Documents.
3 Galvanized steel columns shall be supplied with aluminium cladding sufficient to

provide decorative features when detailed as such in the Contract Documents.
15.7 LIGHTING UNITS
15.7.1 General
1 Road lighting luminaires (light fitting) shall be semi cut-off or cut off and side entry mounting
type complete with bowl and integral control gear of rating 100W, 150W, 250W, or 400W,
220-240V, 50Hz as specified in 15.9.
ar
2 All types of lamps shall be energy saving lamps (LED (light emitting diode), Induction lamps)
at
manufactured according to International Electrotechnical Commission IEC or International
-Q
Standards, and accepted or approved by Qatar Standards.
3 The luminaires for roadway lighting shall be to IEC 60598 and shall be capable of achieving
LL
the lighting performance specification requirements set out in the Contract specification in
accordance with BS 5489 , EN 13201 and ANSI/IESNA RP-008 at the mounting heights
identified within the Contract.
W
4 Luminaires shall be side entry mounting and semi cut-off or cut off type with integral control
s
gear for use with either 1x 100W, 1x 150W or 1 x 250W, 220- 240V, 50Hz, high pressure
en
sodium tubular lamp of E-40 base. The E-40 lamp shall have a porcelain skin. The lamp
supports shall ensure that the lamp position in respect of the optical system remains fixed
m
throughout its operation. The body shall be made of die cast aluminium and shall be divided
into two compartments.
e
Si
(a) The first compartment shall house the optical system with a pressed high purity one
piece aluminium reflector that is anodized and polished. The positioning of the reflector
shall be such that should it nsslished. Tt lector
5 The accessories such as ballasts, starters, capacitors etc., shall be pre-wired and pre-
assembled in the rear compartment on a detachable metallic gear tray fixed securely to the
main body of the luminaire in such a way as to ensure effective earth continuity.
6 Special care shall be taken to allow easy maintenance and quick replacement of the
accessories and to minimise the risk of falling.
7 The incoming cable feed terminal block and the earth-screw shall be fixed to either the gear
tray or metallic compartment. A cable restraining device shall be mounted near the incoming
terminal block. All metal parts shall be effectively earthed to the luminaire earth-screw that
shall be readily visible and accessible once access is obtained to the rear compartment. The
spigot entry socket of the luminaire shall be compatible with the column bracket and able to
accept a 125mm long by 50mm diameter or adjustable from 42mm to 60mm diameter spigot.
15.8 CONTROL GEAR
15.8.1 General
ar
1 All items of control gear shall be fitted with shrouds over all terminals to prevent accidental
at
contact during lamp replacement or routine equipment maintenance. All control gear shall
-Q
have a clearly marked circuit diagram to show its terminal connections in relation to all other
components. Control gear (choke, capacitor, ignitor etc.) shall be suitable to withstand
temperatures up to 86°C and shall have a purpose made earth terminal. Internal connections
LL
shall be with heat resistant non-hydroscopic insulated stranded copper conductors, cleated
and with porcelain connectors.
W
2 Ballast (choke) shall be closed type polyester filled can. It shall be suitable for single phase
voltage operation and silent in operation. All tappings shall be brought to suitably marked
s
standard terminals to which the lamp and supply connections shall be made.
en
3 The capacitor shall give a minimum power factor of 0.85 lagging. They shall have a tolerance
m
of + or – 10% of its marked value. Where non-metallic capacitors are offered these shall be
supplied with a fixing band that shall not damage the capacitor when fitted. Where the
e
capacitor has an aluminium body it shall be provided with a separate earth terminal.
Si
4 Ignitors shall be mounted within the control gear compartment of the luminaire. Each ignitor
shall be fitted with a device that will detect the presence of a faulty lamp and automatically
limit the generation of HV pulses. The ignitors shall be suitable for use with the lamp, ballast
and power factor correction capacitor included within the control gear circuit.
15.9 LAMPS
15.9.1 General
1 Lamps shall be energy saving lamps with clear tubular hard glass envelope with E-40 base
suitable for use on 220 - 240 V, 50Hz, AC. Lamps shall be manufactured according to
International Electrotechnical Commission IEC or International Standards, and accepted or
approved by Qatar Standards.
2 Energy saving lamps ( that have a minimum of 50% energy saving than the standard high
pressure sodium vapour gas lamps)shall be:
(a) High Intensity Discharge (HID) ,

(b) Induction lamp types;

(c) Light Emitting Diodes (LED)
(d) and any other types of energy saving lamps accepted and approved by Qatar
Standards .
3 These lamps shall either have a built in or an external ignitor. Initial Lumen output for High
Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps shall be no less than 4,500 lumens/watt for the 50 watt
lamps, no less than 6,500 lumens/watt for the 70 watt lamps, no less than 12,500
lumens/watt for the 100 watt lamps, no less than 17,500 lumens/watt for the 150 watt lamps,
no less than 33,150 lumens/watt for the 250 watt lamps or no less than 48,000 lumens/watt
for the 400 watt lamps,
15.10 LIGHTING SYSTEM FOR UNDERPASSES
15.10.1 General
ar
1 The basis for the lanterns for use within both the lighting of the vehicular, pedestrian and
animal underpasses pertains to lanterns designed for cornice surface mounting within each
at
underpasses, complete with lamp, fuse and associated control gear. The lighting
-Q
arrangement within each type of underpass shall be based on the use of a common lantern
designed such that it can incorporate either a multi lamp or single lamp luminaire
arrangement of a variable wattage.
LL
15.10.2 Vehicular Underpass

W
1 The lanterns for vehicular underpasses shall consist of either 1x 150 Watt SON/T (no less
than 17,500 lumens/watt) and 1 x 250 watt SON/T (no less than 33,150 lumens/watt) high
s
pressure sodium vapour luminaires, LED lamps or energy saving lamps with Lumen/Watt
en
equivalent to the above wattages, complete with all materials as specified herein and in the
Contract Documents and as required to provide a complete lighting installation.
m
15.10.3 Pedestrian Underpass

e
Si
1 The lanterns for pedestrian underpasses shall consist of either 1x 70 Watt (no less than
6,500 lumens/watt) or 100 Watt SON/T (no less than 12,500 lumens/watt) high pressure
sodium vapour luminaires, or Lumen/Watt-equivalent LED lamps or energy saving lamps,
complete with all materials as specified herein and in the Contract Documents and as
required to provide a complete lighting installation.
15.10.4 Animal Underpass
1 The lanterns for animal underpasses shall consist of either 1x 70 Watt (no less than 6,500
lumens/watt) or 100 Watt SON/T (no less than 12,500 lumens/watt) high pressure sodium
vapour luminaires, or Lumen/Watt-equivalent LED lamps, or energy saving lamps complete
with all materials as specified herein and in the Contract Documents and as required to
provide a complete lighting installation.
15.10.5 Lantern Construction for use in Vehicular, Pedestrian and Animal Underpasses
1 An underpass lantern shall consist of housing, front cover, reflector, socket, lamp, fuse,
control gear, wiring, latches, screws, washers, pins and other parts composing a complete
unit. The lantern shall provide illumination, be mechanically strong and easy to maintain. Its
optical housing shall have protection against the ingress of moisture and dust to degree IP55
of IEC529 under all operating conditions.
2 The optical seal which shall include the reflector mounting shall be adequate to maintain this
degree of protection. With the exception of the reflector, lamp holder mounting and
associated cable all other equipment shall be housed at the rear of the optical system and
shall be readily accessible by access through the lantern front plate. These components shall
include the lantern control equipment, associated cable and isolating fuse. The cable
connections to the lampholder within the lantern shall be of the heat resistant type with
silicon, glass fibre or other approved insulation.
3 The housing and front cover shall be made of stainless steel.
ar
4 The reflector shall be made of aluminium sheet of such grade and quality that :
at
(a) The reflecting surface shall have a specular finish.
-Q
(b) The reflecting surface shall have a dense protective coating of oxide not less than 1.2
2
mg/cm , applied by the anodic oxidisation process.
LL
5 The reflector shall be of such material and construction as to provide low brightness and
minimize glare. The latches, nuts, screws, washers, pins and other parts shall be made of
W
non-corrosive metals or of metals with non-corrosive finishes as approved by the Engineer.

The seal of the optical system shall be accomplished with a gasket material that will not
s
deteriorate with age. This gasketing shall be continuous and shall ensure a heat and
en
weatherproof seal. Suitably located knockouts to suit the cable conduit shall be provided in
the housing. The lamp socket shall be provided with grips or other suitable means to hold the
m
lamp against vibration.

e
6 The fascia plate of the lantern shall be manufactured from toughened glass protected, if
Si
necessary due to a high incidence of vandalism by means of the manufacturers purpose

made wire mesh guard.
7 Between adjacent luminaries a stainless steel ‘in fill’ plate shall be provided such that the
whole assembly gives the appearance of a continuous cornice arrangement. The main sub
circuit cables interconnecting each underbridge luminaire from the underpass isolating
control box shall be routed between fittings within the luminaire or ‘in fill’ plate by means of a
purpose made cable tray arrangement. Within the structure the cabling shall be routed via
galvanized steel conduit cast within the underpass walls and soffit of size suitable to
accommodate the number of single core or multicore cables required whilst maintaining the
stipulated space factor according to the relevant regulations. The cabling shall be either
single core or multi core 6mm² copper conductors within high temperature grade double
insulated or flexible cable.
15.10.6 Underbridge or Undercrossing Lantern and Installation
1 The lantern for use within both the underbridge and undercrossing lighting shall be designed
for directly mounting immediately above the kerb edge of the carriageway and shall be
complete with lamp, fuse and associated control gear. The lighting arrangement shall be
such that it can incorporate either a single lamp of a variable wattage.
2 The underbridge or undercrossing lantern shall consist of housing, cover, reflector, socket,
lamp, fuse, control gear, wiring, latches, screws, washers, pins and other parts composing a
complete unit. The lantern shall provide illumination, be mechanically strong and easy to
maintain. Its optical housing shall have protection against the ingress of moisture and dust to
degree IP55 of IEC529 under all operating conditions.
3 The optical seal which shall include the reflector mounting shall be adequate to maintain this
degree of protection. With the exception of the reflector, lamp holder mounting and
associated cable all other equipment shall be housed at the rear of the optical system and
shall be readily accessible by access through the lantern front plate. These components shall
ar
include the lantern control equipment, associated cable and isolating fuse. The cable
connections to the lampholder within the lantern shall be of the heat resistant type with
at
silicon, glass fibre or other approved insulation.
-Q
4 The housing and front cover shall be made of stainless steel.
5 The reflector shall be made of aluminium sheet of such grade and quality that :
LL
(a) The reflecting surface shall have a specular finish.

W
(b) The reflecting surface shall have a dense protective coating of oxide not less than 1.2
2
mg/cm , applied by the anodic oxidisation process.
s
en
6 The reflector shall be of such material and construction as to provide low brightness and
minimize glare. The latches, nuts, screws, washers, pins and other parts shall be made of
m
non-corrosive metals or of metals with non-corrosive finishes as approved by the Engineer.

The seal of the optical system shall be accomplished with a gasket material that will not
e
deteriorate with age. This gasketing shall be continuous and shall assure a heat and
Si
weatherproof seal. Suitably located knockouts to suit the conduit shall be provided in the
housing. The lamp socket shall be provided with grips or other suitable means to hold the
lamp against vibration.
7 The fascia plate of the lantern shall be manufactured from toughened glass protected, if
necessary due to a high incidence of vandalism by means of the manufacturers purpose
made wire mesh guard.
8 The main sub circuit cables interconnecting each underbridge or undercrossing luminaire
from the underbridge or uncrossing isolating control box Within the structure the cabling shall
be routed via galvanized steel conduit cast within the underbridge or structure walls and soffit
of size suitable to accommodate the number of single core or multicore cables required whilst
maintaining the stipulated space factor according to the relevant regulations. The cabling
shall be either single core or multi core 10mm² copper conductors within high temperature
grade double insulated or flexible cable.
15.10.7 Underpass, Underbridge and Undercrossing Lantern Control Gear and Lamps
1 The control gear shall be designed to operate the lamp of the power rating and type indicated
and it shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient temperatures up
to +55°C. The choke shall be tropicalised and have terminals to accept 240 V supply voltage.
Each terminal shall be brought out to a separate shrouded termination. Multi-lamp gear
operating more than one lamp shall not be employed.
of +/– 10% of its marked value. Where non-metallic capacitors are offered these shall be
supplied with a fixing band that shall not damage the capacitor when fitted and, if metallic,
shall be provided with a separate earth terminal. The permitted operating temperature of the
capacitor shall be marked on its case.
3 Each lamp shall operate using only one choke and one capacitor. Any combination of two or
more capacitors having the equivalent value of capacitance will not be accepted.
ar
4 Chokes and capacitors shall comply with the relevant British Standard Specification or an
acceptable International equivalent and shall be fully compatible with the complete
at
associated operation lamp circuit. -Q
5 The ignitor for energy saving lamp shall be of the electronic solid state type and shall be
arranged so that the ignitor circuit stops working after the lamp has started. It shall be totally
enclosed. The circuit shall include a shunt capacitor to isolate the mains from high frequency
LL
start pulses; this capacitor may also be used for power factor correction. The length of wiring
between the ignitor and the lamp shall not exceed that recommended by the Manufacturer for
W
satisfactory lamp ignition and re-ignition of an extinguished lamp.

s
6 The control gear shall meet the following specifications:

en
(a) It shall be suitable for 50 Hz, 240 V AC + 10% operation. .

m
(b) It shall regulate the output power to 12% for the input voltage noted above.
e
(c) It shall have an overall power factor of at least 0.85 when operated under rated lamp
Si
load.
(d) It shall operate the lamp without affecting adversely the lamp life and performance as
specified herein.
(e) It shall withstand a 2500 V dielectric test between core and windings.
(f) The choke shall be encapsulated in an approved resin compound and totally enclosed.
7 The lamps for vehicular underpasses shall consist of either 1x 150 Watt SON/T (no less than
17,500 lumens/watt) and 1 x 250 watt SON/T (no less than 33,150 lumens/watt) high
pressure sodium vapour luminaires, LED lamps or energy saving lamps with Lumen/Watt
equivalent to the above wattages, complete with all materials as specified herein and in the
Contract Documents and as required to provide a complete lighting installation.
8 The lamps for pedestrian or animal underpasses shall consist of either 1x 70 Watt (no less
than 6,500 lumens/watt) or 100 Watt SON/T (no less than 12,500 lumens/watt) high pressure
sodium vapour luminaires, LED or energy saving lamps with Lumen/Watt-equivalent,
complete with all materials as specified herein and in the Contract Documents and as
required to provide a complete lighting installation.
15.10.8 Underpass, Underbridge or Undercrossing Isolating Box
1 At each underpass, underbridge or undercrossing location an isolating box assembly shall be

provided to control and isolate the respective lighting. This assembly shall be constructed
from either galvanized steel or stainless steel with a hinged vandal resistant lockable front
cover complete with sealing gasket protection against the ingress of moisture and dust to
degree IP54 of IEC529 under all operating conditions providing. A three phase mcb isolator
shall be located within this housing to control the power supplies to each lighting sub circuit.
The galvanized steel conduit providing the cabling routing within the structure shall be
secured at the isolating box assembly by means of a locknut arrangement.
15.11 LED LIGHTING UNITS
15.11.1 Lighting Units
1 The degree of Ingress Protection provided by the luminaire, including the facility for a
switching device, shall be rated at least IP66 in accordance with EN60529 (IEC529).
ar
Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code). This shall be
at
certified by an independent IP testing and examination laboratory accredited by UKAS or
equivalent accreditation body. -Q
2 The degree of Impact Protection provided by the luminaire against external mechanical
impact shall be rated at least IK10 (metals and plastics) and IK08 (glass) in accordance with
LL
EN62262:2002 (IEC62262:2002) Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical

equipment against external mechanical impacts (IK code). This shall be certified by an
W
independent IK testing and examination laboratory accredited by UKAS or equivalent

accreditation body.
s
3 The luminaire assembly shall be tested and approved by an independent ENEC

en
(European Norms Electrical Certification) national Certification Body and awarded the
ENEC mark or equivalent international standards. Contractor shall provide verifiable
m
certificate featuring contact information of Certification Body.

e
4 The luminaire shall be designed and suitably rated to ensure correct operation and
Si
continuous trouble free service under the prevailing climatic conditions. The luminaire
shall be designed to withstand the effects of direct sun exposure during the day and dusty
weather conditions including the occasional sandstorm. The luminaire manufacturer shall
guarantee the performance and life time claims of lumen maintenance and luminaire
life of the luminaire under the stated climatic conditions.
5 The luminaire housing shall be constructed from corrosion resistant marine grade
aluminium alloy conforming to BS EN 1676, 1559-1, 1559-4 and 1706 and powder
coated by an Akzo Nobel approved applicator, or equivalent, conforming to EN12206-1:2004
Paints and varnishes. Coating of aluminium and aluminium alloys for architectural
purposes. Coatings prepared from coating powder.
6 The manufacturer shall supply a RAL colour chart depicting the range of powder coat colours
available for the external finish of the luminaire. Luminaire colour shall be specified at the
time of ordering.
7 The optical assembly and control gear components shall be integral to the luminaire
body.
8 For maintenance the luminaire shall allow tool-less access and incorporate quick
disconnect features and universal fittings. All component parts shall be easily accessible and
securely mounted to prevent accidental falling and manufactured from corrosion
resistant materials or treated to prevent corrosion. The luminaire cover shall include an
optional security feature to enable locking by means of a tool. The cover shall also
incorporate a safety switch to disconnect power on opening and any upward rising
hinged canopy shall be secured in an open position by means of a brace to prevent
accidental closing.
9 The luminaire shall be procured from a prominent luminaire manufacturer that publishes
product specifications measured in compliance with the IEC/PAS performance
requirements or equivalent.
10 The complete luminaire shall be at least 98% recyclable.
11 The luminaire shall be vandal resistant. The ingress of insects through any system vent or
aperture shall be prevented by means of a filter.
ar
12 The luminaire shall be compliant with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
at
(WEEE) Directive (2002/96/EC) and the Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous
-Q
Substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS) Directive (2002/95/EC).
13 Each luminaire shall have a barcode securely attached internally within the gear
compartment identifying the luminaires reference/catalogue number, total wattage and
LL
LED current setting and other attributes as required by Ashghal and as required of the
Enterprise Asset Management System (EAMS). The barcode type shall be compatible with
W
the handheld device authorized for use by Ashghal.

s
14 All internal and external wiring of the luminaire shall comply with EN60598-1:2008
en
Luminaires, General requirements and tests and shall be flexible and suitably rated and
insulated to withstand the voltages and temperatures encountered in service.
m
15 Any luminaire wiring passing through metal shall have suitable grommets or otherwise be
e
protected to avoid abrasion of the insulation.

Si
16 All luminaire terminals and supply connections shall comply with EN60598-1:2008. The
conducting material of any terminal block shall be made of brass and shall have screw down
plates bearing on the wires. Terminals where screws bear down directly on wires will not be
acceptable.
17 Luminaires shall be earthed in accordance with EN60598-1:2008. An earth terminal forming

part of the luminaire body shall be provided. All parts of an earth terminal shall be made of
brass.
18 Luminaires shall be “future proofed” by allowing the LED modules to be upgraded easily in
situ, as LED efficiency improves. Upgrading of luminaires, or replacement of faulty
components, with manufacturer approved components shall not have any detrimental
impact whatsoever on the luminaires’ manufacturer warranty. Prototypes shall not be
accepted.
15.11.2 Lighting Performance

1 Highway luminaires shall be suitable to achieve the lighting class standards as detailed in the
Qatar Design Management Manual, as referenced in ANSI/IESNA RP-008, and as applicable
to Primary, Secondary and Tertiary roads in The State of Qatar, under the control of Ashghal
and other areas as required.
2 The luminaire shall be compliant with EN60598-1:2008 Luminaires. General

requirements and tests, and EN60598-2-3:2003 Luminaires. Particular requirements.
Luminaires for road and street lighting.
3 The luminaire shall be able to restrict glare and control obtrusive light in accordance with the
full “cut-off” and “semi cut-off” concepts and associated luminous intensity classes defined in
ANSI/IESNA RP-008 or an equivalent, Ashghal-authorized standard. Individual project
contract drawings and design specifications shall detail the luminous intensity class
requirement.
4 The luminaire shall control light output to limit light pollution and minimise sky glow in
accordance with Commission Internationale de l'Éclairage (CIE) 126-1997 Guidelines for
ar
minimizing sky glow and meet the requirements therein for maximum permissible
upward light output ratio (ULOR) expressed as the percentage of luminous flux
at
acceptable in each of four different Environmental Zones.
-Q
5 The efficacy of the luminaire is given by the total lumen output divided by the power into the
system and shall be equal to or greater than 100 lm/w (lumens per watt) operating within the
climate conditions as stated herein. The contractor shall obtain a statement from the
LL
luminaire manufacturer declaring that quoted performance figures correspond to the stated
ambient air temperature and ensure that the specifics of operating in the Qatar environment
W
are written into any applicable section of the manufacturer’s warranty agreement.
s
15.11.3 Thermal Management

en
1 The luminaire shall be capable of withstanding severe climate conditions, as stated in

m
Section 21, Part 1. General Provisions for Electrical Installation, clause 1.1.14.
e
2 As a minimum, manufacturers shall use 50 ˚C as the night time ambient temperature

Si
with 95% humidity.
3 The luminaire shall be designed to provide satisfactory heat dissipation for any powered
component parts and maintain safe operating temperatures at all times under the stated
climatic conditions. Heat dissipation shall be by passive thermal management, active or
mechanical cooling is not acceptable.
4 All materials used in the luminaire shall be resistant to high temperature UV (ultra violet)
exposure and be 90% UV-stable.
5 The luminaire shall incorporate a passive thermal management system, active cooling such
as fan assisted systems will not be accepted. The manufacturer shall demonstrate that the
luminaire is suitable for continuous operation in the Qatar environment. Within the stated
climate conditions the LED junction temperatures shall be shown to remain within the range
required to limit the risk of accelerated degradation of the LEDs based on the stated life
expectancy of the luminaire.
6 Junction temperature cannot be measured directly and must be derived using calculation
formulae and temperature measurements read from a thermocouple device attached to a
series of defined reference points (thermal pads) on the outer casing (package) of the LED.
Thermal verification testing is carried out as a laboratory based operation with ambient
conditions simulated.
7 The luminaire manufacturer shall submit a statement declaring that quoted LED
performance figures correspond to the stated ambient air temperature and ensure that the
specifics of operating in the Qatar environment are written into any applicable section
of the warranty agreement.
8 The maximum allowable ambient temperature for the LED lighting shall be stated, in
which the LED lighting can operate without adversely affecting any components life,
luminaire light output or colour stability. This shall take into consideration the maximum case
temperature of the driver and the design LED junction temperature.
9 Manufacturers shall state the predefined critical temperature level at which the dim down and
ar
switch off protection events occur and relate to junction temperature and ambient
temperature. The luminaire shall be constructed in such a way that this protection
at
method shall not occur during climate conditions stated within this specification.
-Q
15.11.4 Testing
1 LED Luminaire lighting performance shall be measured using an independent

LL
photometric testing laboratory accredited by UKAS or equivalent accreditation body. The test
procedure and measurements shall be carried out in accordance and compliance with
W
IES_LM-79-08 Approved Method: Photometric Measurements of Solid State Lighting

Products. The photometric test report shall list all significant data for each SSL product
s
tested together with performance data and also pertinent data concerning conditions of
en
testing, type of equipment, and reference standards. The photometric test procedure shall
also be used to calculate correction factors in allowance of the stated climate conditions.
m
2 Photometric data for each luminaire optical setting shall be available in electronic file
e
format in accordance and compliance with IES_LM-63-02 Standard File Format for
Si
Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information and EN13032-

1:2004+A1:2012 Light and lighting. Measurement and presentation of photometric data of
lamps and luminaires. Measurement and file format. The photometry files shall be
compatible for use with industry recognised road lighting design software packages or as
requested by Ashghal and include applied correction factors specific to the declared
ambient conditions.
3 Lighting performance of the LED luminaire in terms of design spacing’s relative to a

specified road lighting class should be comparable to a modern HID lamp based
luminaire with similar lumen output.
4 The luminaire manufacturer shall submit a statement declaring that quoted photometric
performance figures correspond to the stated ambient air temperature (not LED junction
temperature) and ensure that the specifics of operating in the Qatar environment are
written into any applicable section of the warranty agreement.
5 The luminaire shall be tested in accordance and compliance with EN62471:2008

(IEC62471:2006) Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems or an equivalent
standard. Any assumptions made during testing shall be clearly stated.
6 The luminaire LED light source shall be tested in accordance and compliance with
IES_LM-80-08 Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. The
LM-80-08 test report produced for the LED light source shall meet the eligibility
criteria necessary for submission to the U.S Department of Energy (DOE) Energy Star
Program Requirements for Solid State Lighting Luminaires.
15.11.5 In Situ Temperature Measurement Test (ISTMT)
1 In order to relate the LM-80 test to the luminaire and stated climatic conditions, testing shall
be completed that simulate this application. This shall be achieved by In Situ
Temperature Measurement Test (ISTMT) which follows ANSI/UL 1598-2004 Luminaires.
2 The luminaire manufacturer shall provide a written undertaking to the satisfaction of

Ashghal\s authorized Engineer to warranty the materials and performance as follows:
(a) LED arrays shall have a written warranty for a minimum of 50,000 hours at the ambient
temperature specified herein and shall be replaced on a one for one basis upon failure.
ar
An LED array will be deemed to have failed when:
at
(b) equal to or greater than 10% of the individual LED chips in an array has failed or an
array does not provide the required lumen maintenance (L70).
-Q
(c) Drivers shall have a written warranty for a minimum 50,000 hours and shall be
replaced on a one for one basis.
LL
(d) Luminaire housing and all external components such as; lenses, gaskets & fastenings
and the fixture finish shall have a written warranty for a minimum twenty (20) years
against the deterioration of, but not limited to, mechanical failure, UV degradation,
W
corrosion, yellowing, blistering, chalking, cracking, peeling or fading.

s
(e) The Warranty shall be transferable without limitations in its entirety to Ashghal, Public
en
Works Authority, Qatar.
3 Equivalent or more onerous standards can be proposed, by the manufacturer, as an

m
alternative to the detailed standards, with the exception of Qatar documents. Evidence shall
be submitted detailing the equivalent or more onerous sections that deviates from the
e
intended standard.
Si
15.11.6 Control Gear
1 The luminaire control gear (driver) shall be produced by a prominent manufacturer of

semiconductor components and comply with IEC 62384 DC or AC supplied electronic
control gear for LED modules - Performance requirements. The manufacturer shall
confirm that the packaged driver assembly is fabricated from high quality integrated
circuit components including long-life electrolytic capacitors and provide data relating to the
reliability of the device, in the climatic conditions stated in this specification.
2 The drivers shall be encapsulated / potted and Class II double insulated (IEC61140) and
have a minimum energy efficiency of 85% and power factor ≥0.9 (full load). The control gear
shall feature Surge Protection Device (SPD) for lightning strikes (IEC62305), short-circuit
protection and transient overvoltage protection (IEC61643-1 / IEC61000-4-5).
3 The LED drivers shall be housed on a removable gear tray accessible with the luminaire
cover open and be compatible with the Qatar power supply. The supply cable shall pass
through the mounting post, or bracket, directly into the luminaire through an M20 cable gland
located at the base of the luminaire mounting socket.
4 For protection in the event of temperatures reaching predefined critical levels, both
LEDs and drivers shall have thermal protection, which will initially dim down and
eventually switch off the light. Manufacturers shall state the predefined critical
temperature level at which the dim down and switch off protection events occur and
relate to junction temperature and ambient temperature. The luminaire shall be
constructed in such a way that this protection method shall not occur during climate
conditions stated within this specification.
5 The driver system shall be compatible with Lighting Control Systems / Lighting
Management Systems (LMS), using both analogue (1-10V) and Digital Addressable
Lighting Interface (DALI) protocols including WiMAC or other similar Ashghal-approved
driver system. The driver system shall also be capable of being configured for
ar
single, and multi-stage, stand-alone dimming configurations when not connected to a
CMS.
at
6
-Q
The drivers shall be programmable and permanently configured to operate under the
principle of “constant flux” output or maintenance factor harvesting or similar, Ashghal-
approved configuration method. During this process light output is initially dimmed to an
equivalent end of life level value and then the operating current is gradually increased
LL
throughout service life to compensate for lumen depreciation and maintain a constant
lighting level. The advantage of this system is to give energy savings and improve LED
W
life and reliability. The manufacturer shall provide details of how this facility is maintained
following replacement of a faulty driver or LED array.
s
en
7 The driver shall be capable of operating within the climate conditions previously
described and shall have documentation and certification supporting the claimed
m
minimum life expectancy of 50,000 hours in the stated conditions within this
specification.
e
Si
8 The driver manufacturer’s device data sheet will provide specification details and the
maximum permissible ambient temperature range in which the driver can operate (free air
convection) at the defined driver current. The luminaire manufacturer shall
demonstrate that the LED driver is suitable for continuous operation in the Qatar
environment. Within the stated climate conditions the driver compartment enclosure shall be
shown to remain within the range required to limit the risk of driver failure during
operation based on the stated life expectancy of the luminaire.
9 The luminaire manufacturer shall submit a statement declaring that quoted driver
performance figures correspond to the stated ambient air temperature and ensure that the
specifics of operating in the Qatar environment are written into any applicable section
of the warranty agreement.
10 The luminaire shall conform to CE marking directives including the European

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive EN 61000-3-2:2009 (IEC 61000-3-
2:2009) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limits - Limits for harmonic
current emissions (equipment input current ≤ 16 A per phase)
15.11.7 LED Lamps
1 The LEDs shall be produced by a Ashghal Approved manufacturer of solid state lighting
(SSL) components and comply with the related standards and guidelines set by the
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) and the JEDEC Solid State
Technology Association and approved by Qatar Standards.
2 The light source is required to control light output with the aim of optimising luminaire
performance and efficiency in relation to the specific lighting application. The luminaire, or
luminaire series, shall provide the facility for varying luminous flux output ranging from 5klm
up to at least 40klm using an appropriate number of LEDs and a suitable control method for
each different lumen package.
3 The luminaire LED module shall comply with International Electrical Commission
Publicly Available Specification IEC/PAS62717 LED modules for general lighting –
Performance requirements.
ar
4 The LED arrays shall be capable of operating within the climate conditions previously
described and shall have documentation and certification supporting the claimed minimum
at
life expectancy of 50,000 hours at L70 in the stated conditions as within this specification.
-Q
5 Technical details shall be provided of the light source optical system and range of optics or
optical settings available for each model of luminaire including performance
characteristics. The optical system is required to control light output with the aim of
LL
optimising luminaire performance and efficiency in relation to the specific lighting

application. The system should meet the lighting requirements of most rights of way
W
types and configurations and maximise the “light output ratio” (LOR) of the luminaire.
s
6 The inadvertent failure of any LEDs during the life of the luminaire shall not bring about any
en
reduction in uniformity of light output. Therefore, the multi-layer method of light distribution
shall take precedence over multiple spot methods.
m
7 Diffuser systems may be required for some lighting applications to eliminate the effect of
e
multiple-source shadows.
Si
8 Chromaticity tolerance and associated colour consistency of luminaire LED modules

shall be measured in terms of the CIE 1931 chromaticity diagram and the CCT
quadrangles defined by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C78.377-
2008 Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products for Electric Lamps.
The ANSI quadrangle is made up by smaller quadrangles, commonly referred to as bins. The
x y chromaticity components of each LED module shall be enclosed by one bin and the bin
size shall not exceed a 4-step MacAdam ellipse. The binning process shall be in compliance
with National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) SSL 3:2010 High-Power
White LED Binning for General Illumination.
9 The chromaticity shift shall be measured and reported in accordance with IES_LM-80-08
Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
10 For highway lighting the Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT) of the light emitted from the
luminaire shall be in the range ≥4000K with a Colour Rendering Index (CRI) of ≥60. The
manufacturer shall state the CCT ranges available with a ±275K warranted window. The CCT
and CRI shall include the effects of colour shift over the life of the luminaire. Other CCT
ranges may be applicable to individual projects and manufacturers shall be notified as
required.
11 Lumen maintenance (L) is the luminous flux emitted by the light source at any specified time
during its operational life and is expressed as a percentage of the luminous flux
emitted at the start of life (L%). The rated lumen maintenance life of the LED light source
shall not exceed L70, or 30% lumen depreciation at the specified temperature conditions.
12 The luminaire manufacturer shall define the estimated service life of the light source in terms
of operating hours and rated lumen maintenance. The minimum standard expected shall be
50,000 operating hours at L70 at the temperature conditions specified herein.
13 The method of deriving rated lumen maintenance life beyond the limits of lumen
ar
maintenance determined from actual measurements shall be demonstrated. The method for
projecting the lumen maintenance of LED light sources from the data obtained by the
at
procedures found in IES document LM-80-08 shall be in accordance and compliance
-Q
with IES_TM-21-11 Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
14 In combination with rated life predications the reliability of the LED modules shall also be
expressed in terms of the percentage (fraction) of failures in accordance with IEC/PAS
LL
62722-2-1:2011 Luminaire performance - Part 2-1: Particular requirements for LED

luminaires. The failure fraction (Fy) corresponds to the percentage of LED‟s that fail
W
before end of rated life. This failure fraction expresses the combined effect of all
components of a module including mechanical, as far as the light output is concerned. The
s
effect of the LED could either be less light than claimed or no light at all.
en
15 The failure fraction shall also be expressed in terms of its component parts, gradual failure
m
fraction (By) and abrupt failure fraction (Cy). The reliability curve relative to operating hours is
calculated using statistical formulae and data gathered under test conditions during luminaire
e
monitoring periods.
Si
16 Luminaire maintenance factors (LMF) to follow model used in BS5489-1:2003+A2:2008

Annex D Table D1 with figures extrapolated to extend cleaning cycle interval up to 6
years and also adjusted to take account of environmental conditions specified herein.
17 Lamp flux maintenance factor (LFMF) shall be calculated by the manufacturer in accordance
with calculated lumen depreciation relative to a predefined cleaning cycle interval. Currently
the perceived cleaning interval is biannually due to the intense dust laden atmosphere.
15.11.8 Quality Criteria for LED Lighting
1 Manufacturers shall submit data in accordance with IEC/PAS 62717 Performance

requirements – LED modules for general lighting and IEC/PAS 62722 Performance
requirements – LED luminaires for general lighting.
15.11.9 LED manufacturers data
1 Manufacturer shall provide a standardised set of quality criteria, measured in

compliance with the appropriate standard. The performance claims shall be matched against
traceable data. The performance data required is summarised below and shall be headed
Quality Criteria:
(a) Rated input power (in W)

(b) Rated luminous flux of the luminaire (in lm)
(c) luminaire efficacy (in lm/W)
(d) Luminous intensity distribution
(e) Photometric code
(i) Rated Colour Rendering Index (CRI)
(ii) Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT in K)
ar
(iii) Rated chromaticity co-ordinate values (initial and maintained)
at
(iv) Maintained luminous flux
(f)
-Q
Rated life (in h) of the module and the associated rated lumen
(g) maintenance (Lx)
(h) Failure fraction (Fy), corresponding to the rated life of the module in the
LL
(i) luminaire
W
(j) Ambient temperature (ta) for the luminaire

(k) Power Factor
s
en
(l) Intensity Distribution

(m) Drive Current
m
(n) Optical Risk Group

e
2 This data shall be submitted on an Ashghal-approved form. Forms shall be submitted to

Si
Ashghal for approval prior to submitting data for consideration. Further data shall be
provided to evidence compliance with all aspects of this specification. Additional data shall be
provided as and when requested by Ashghal.
15.12 OVERHEAD SIGN GANTRY LANTERN AND INSTALLATION
15.12.1 General
1 The basis for the lanterns for use on the overhead sign gantries or bridges for the illuminating
of overhead guide signs mounted on the sign support structure or on the gantry sign walkway
supported on the gantry sign support brackets. The lanterns shall be complete with lamp,
isolating fuse and associated control gear.
15.12.2 Sign Gantry Lantern
1 The lanterns shall be LED type and shall be rated per lamp at 2 x 50 watt (no less than 4,500
lumens/watt), 2 x 70 watt (no less than 6,500 lumens/watt), 2 x 100 watt (no less than 12,500
lumens/watt), 2 x 150 watt (no less than 17,500 lumens/watt) and 2 x 250 watt (no less than
33,150 lumens/watt) LED lamps and shall consist of housing, cover, reflector, refractor,
socket, lamp, fuse, control gear, wiring, latches, screws, washers, pins and other parts
composing a complete unit. At half life, the maintained luminous flux shall be a minimum of
75% of the initial luminous flux.
2 The lantern shall provide efficient illumination, be optically sealed, mechanically strong and
easy to maintain.
3 The reflector mounting, wiring terminals and control gear components shall be readily
accessible. When closed for operation, the optical assembly shall be sealed to provide
protection against the ingress of moisture and dust to degree IP55 of IEC529 under all
operating conditions.
ar
4 The seal between the refractor and the housing shall be adequate to maintain this degree of
at
protection. The refractor shall be held in such a manner as to allow for expansion and
-Q
contraction of the refractor. Cable connections to the lamp holder within the lantern shall be
of the heat resistant type with silicon, glass fibre or other approved insulation.
5 The optical system shall consist of a hydroformed aluminium primary beam reflector which
LL
shall be precisely profiled and contoured to distribute light across the inner surface of the
refractor. The prismatic refractor shall be of moulded borosilicate thermal shock-resistant
W
glass. The inner surface shall have an intricate array of prisms to direct light across the face
of the sign. The outer surface shall be smooth to facilitate self-cleaning. The reflector shall be
s
of a retro-dispersing type designed to eliminate the halo of excessive luminance to assure

en
more uniform sign luminance.

m
6 The terminal board shall be located beneath the reflector at the conduit entry and shall
2
accommodate 10 mm electric cables.
e
Si
7 The reflector shall be fastened to the housing by means of a minimum of four stainless steel
screws with keyhole slot to facilitate easy removal and replacement. Levelling pads are to be
provided on the inside and bottom of the main housing to permit accurate installation.
8 There shall be mounting within of the stainless steel housing to permit the lantern to be
mounted directly to the supporting structure.
9 The refractor shall be form-fitted to the stainless steel door frame and shall have a single
piece gasket with a sealing pad to effectively seal the assembly and housing. The assembly
shall be fastened to the housing by means of separable hinges at the front and spring
tempered, stainless steel at the rear. The lamp socket shall be provided with grips or other
suitable means to hold the lamp against vibration.
10 The terminals of all ballasts, capacitors and control gears shall be shrouded.
11 Each sign lighting system shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Particular attention
shall be given to the mechanical strength of all components, and to the security of their
method of the sign supports.
15.12.3 Sign Gantry Lantern Control Gear and Lamps
1 The control gear shall be designed to operate the lamp of the power rating and type indicated
and it shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient temperatures up
to +55°C. The choke shall be tropicalised and have terminals to accept 240 V supply voltage.
Each terminal shall be brought out to a separate shrouded termination. Multi-lamp gear
operating more than one lamp shall not be employed.
of + or –10% of its marked value. Where non-metallic capacitors are offered these shall be
supplied with a fixing band that shall not damage the shell and be provided with a separate
earth terminal. The permitted operating temperature of the capacitor shall be marked on its
case.
3 Each lamp shall operate using only one choke and one capacitor. Any combination of two or
more capacitors having the equivalent value of capacitance will not be accepted.
ar
4 Chokes and capacitors shall comply with the relevant British Standard Specification or an
acceptable International equivalent and shall be fully compatible with the complete
at
associated operation lamp circuit. -Q
5 The control gear shall meet the following specifications:
(a) It shall be suitable for 50 Hz, 240 V AC + 10% operation.

LL
(b) It shall regulate the output power to 12% for the input voltage noted above.
W
(c) It shall have an overall power factor of at least 0.85 when operated under rated lamp
load.
s
(d) It shall operate the lamp without affecting adversely the lamp life and performance as
en
specified herein.
(e) It shall withstand a 2500 V dielectric test between core and windings.
m
(f) The choke shall be encapsulated in an approved resin compound and totally enclosed.
e
Si
6 The lamps shall be LED type and shall be rated per lamp at 2 x 50 watt (no less than 4,500
lumens/watt), 2 x 70 watt (no less than 6,500 lumens/watt), 2 x 100 watt (no less than 12,500
lumens/watt), 2 x 150 watt (no less than 17,500 lumens/watt) and 2 x 250 watt (no less than
33,150 lumens/watt) LED lamps and shall consist of housing, cover, reflector, refractor,
socket, lamp, fuse, control gear, wiring, latches, screws, washers, pins and other parts
composing a complete unit. At half life, the maintained luminous flux shall be a minimum of
75% of the initial luminous flux.
15.12.4 Sign Gantry Isolating (Safety) Switch, Conduit and Associated Cables
1 At each sign gantry location an isolating (safety) shall be provided at walk way level of the
structure. It shall be fabricated galvanized steel complete with a vandal resistant hinged
access door. A three phase mcb isolator shall be located within this housing to control the
power supplies to each lighting sub circuit. The galvanized steel conduit, secured to the
gantry structure by means of purpose made saddles to suit the size of conduit, providing the
cabling routing within the structure shall be secured at the isolating box assembly by means
of a locknut arrangement. The size of the conduit shall be suitable to accommodate the
number of single core or multicore cables required whilst maintaining the stipulated space
factor according to the relevant regulations. A 3-phase mcb isolator shall be located within
the isolating (safety) switch to control the lighting sub circuit upon each gantry structure. The
cabling shall be either single core or multi core 10mm² copper conductors within high
temperature grade double insulated or flexible cable.
15.13 PHOTO ELECTRIC CONTROL CELL
ar
15.13.1 General
at
1 Photo electric control cells shall comply with the requirements of BS 5972 and offer a Class II
-Q
protection from electric shock as defined in IEC 60598.
2 Unit must be completely weatherproof, hermetically sealed against the ingress of moisture. It
LL
shall be resistant to vibration or change in temperature. It shall be housed in a strong impact

resistant low profile translucent housing, the surface of which shall be non- oxidizing and
W
impervious to deterioration.
3 The photo electric control unit (PECU) shall be guaranteed for a period of not less than six
s
years, failures within that period of time to be replaced free of charge.

en
°
4 They will be capable of working in an ambient temperature of up to + 60 C.
m
5 The operation level should be preset to ON 80/100 Lux the ratio of ON to OFF should be
e
approximately 1:2. There shall be no means of manual adjustment to the PECU’s calibration
Si
and it shall not need to be orientated to operate as required.
6 There should be a minimum 15 second delay to prevent the unit from functioning due to short
period high illumination such as lightning etc.
7 The power supply to the PECU shall be 240V 50Hz. A.C with a contact output rating of 30A at
240V (resistive).
8 The PECU and associated relay or switching device shall have pre matched responses and
housed in the same envelope. The contact rating shall be 1500-Watts (1800 V.A) and should
be fitted with a snap action to prevent chatter. In the case of the load to be switched then the
PECU can switch directly, a contactor shall be used.
9 The photocell shall be located within the road lighting feeder pillar such that it can be easily
removed. It shall be housed within a small compartment with an acrylic fascia plate set into
the surface of the feeder pillar for the satisfactory operation of the photocell. The control
circuitry for the correct switching of the road lighting will be housed within the adjacent feeder
pillar. The associated specification requirements will be dealt with within that section of the
specification.
10 The upper LED luminaire cover shall have the facility for installation and wiring of one of the
following devices: an integral miniature photocell, NEMA socket (detachable photocell),
telemetry device. This facility shall be included within the IP testing.
15.14 ROAD LIGHTING COLUMN CUTOUT / ISOLATORS
15.14.1 General
1 Cutouts in columns shall be phenolic moulded, three phase, and suitable for looping two 4
Core 25 mm XLPE/SWA/PVC cables.
2 Cutouts shall :
(a) Incorporate miniature circuit breakers complying to BS EN 60898 with a minimum

breaking capacity of 4kA.
(b) Be of the combined single phase and neutral type.
ar
(c) Incorporate an earth terminal.
at
(d) Be suitable for concentric or PVC armoured cables of up to 25mm2 cross-sectional
area with capacity for looping in and out. -Q
(e) Have all metal parts tinned.
(f) Be provided with a minimum of 2 fixing screws.
LL
(g) Be manufactured from material which is non-hygroscopic and non-tracking.

W
3 Terminals and contacts shall have a rating of not less than 40 Amp and be suitable for the
use of miniature circuit breakers 6 A, 10A or16 A ratings, selected from the Table 15.2 below:
s
Table 15.2
en
Ratings of Miniature Circuit Breakers

Wattage 50W 70W 100W 150W 250 W 400 W
m
For 1 Lamp 6 6 6 6 10 10
e
Si
For 2 Lamps 6 6 6 10 16 16
4 The cutouts shall comply with the 16th Edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations.
5 A cutout used as a means of isolation shall have the facility for padlocking.
6 The service cutout shall have a moulded enclosure, offering a minimum protection of IP22,
capable of withstanding severe impact.
7 Separate terminals shall be provided for live, neutral and earth conductors complete with
terminal shields to prevent accidental contact with all live conductors.
8 Cutouts shall be sized to accommodate the designated cables, but with a minimum of
25mm2 cables.
9 Cable armouring shall be bonded as an integral part of the cutout, and complete with cable
armour clamp shrouds.
10 The cutout shall be suitable for mounting on a wooden backboard or DIN rails.
11 Where there is a requirement for the use of an isolator they shall incorporate in-built fused
loop terminals for the feeds to signs, bollards etc.
12 All isolating devices shall be double pole for single-phase systems and four poles for three
phase systems.
13 All isolators shall be rated to suit the local environmental conditions of Qatar where these
differ from those stated in BS EN 60947-3
15.15 FEEDER PILLAR
15.15.1 General
1 Road lighting feeder pillars shall be totally enclosed weatherproof with fibreglass reinforced
polyester cabinet of ground mounting type complete with accessories suitable for mounting
outdoor..
ar
15.15.2 Cabinet
at
1 The feeder pillar cabinet, unless previously approved by the Engineer, shall be of fibreglass-
-Q
reinforced polyester and ultra violet ray resistant. The cabinet surface shall be totally weather
and corrosion resistant with a completely smooth exterior. The outer 0.5mm - 1.0mm should
consist of pure polyester. The colour of the cabinet shall be grey. The colour shall be
completely light stabilised and impregnated from the surface through the thickness of the
LL
material.
W
2 Pillars shall be ground mounting type by means of a steel frame with concrete foundation.
The cabinet shall have a base frame with a minimum ground clearance of 200mm between
s
the body and the mounting area (bottom). The base frame shall have at least four holes to
en
bolt down the pillar to the concreted steel frame. The cabinets base frame shall be
removable. The feeder pillar shell shall incorporate lifting devices for the safe movement of
m
the feeder pillar.

e
3 The cabinet top (canopy) shall be arranged so as to prevent the ingress of rainwater and
Si
provide air circulation.
4 The cabinet shall be provided with a front door complete with internal hinges and fixing
screws fixing at top and bottom. A tamper proof lock will be provided centrally and all locks
shall operate by a standard master key. Two keys for each pillar shall be provided. The door
closing will have a perfect weatherproofing arrangement. The enclosure shall have a
designated IP rating of IP54 in accordance with IEC 60529.
5 Approximate cabinet size shall be 1000mm high by 620mm length by 300mm width..
6 Natural ventilation shall be provided to limit the temperature rise to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Such ventilation shall not reduce the stated IP rating of the cabinet and
shall be screened to prevent the entry of vermin. Where recommended by the manufacturer
dust filters shall be provided.
7 A data plate shall be fixed to the inside of the pillar detailing information as deemed
necessary by the PWA and/or the Engineer.
8 Detailed distribution board schedules are to be provided within the each feeder pillar these to
be located on the inside of the cabinet and stored in a weather protected plastic pocket
securely fixed to the shell of the housing.
15.15.3 Components of Feeder Pillars
1 1 No. 200Amp mains breaker (MCCB) of three phase 415V - interrupting capacity according
to BS 3871:
240V – 85kA
415V – 35kA
A facility to lock off the assembly in the open position shall be provided.
2 1No. 200Amp 4 pole magnetic contactor, three phase with coil voltage of 240V within an IP
54 enclosure. The contacts of the contactor shall be fitted with a snap action to prevent
chatter.
3 A control circuit shall be provided connected to the control coil of the contactor. The circuit
ar
shall be protected by means of a 4A HRC control fuse within a weatherproof enclosure. The
control circuit shall be such that in the event of a failure of the photocell control unit a time
at
switch identified below will override the operation. In addition a manual override switch shall
be provided to operate the road lighting at times outside the periods during which the lights
-Q
are normally operational.
4 The time switch shall be a 24-hour dial time switch motor driven single phase 30 Amp. 220 -
LL
240V 50 Hz. with a clock accuracy of + or – 5minutes/year and shall have a 48-hour
synchronous spring reserve to maintain clock operation and output switching during power
W
supply failure or disconnection. Time switch should be protected with a HRC fuse or MCB.
Arrangement for connecting a photoelectric control switch shall also be made within the pillar.
s
5 A 3-phase MCB metal clad or plastic distribution board complete with single pole 240V
en
MCB’s of interrupting capacity according to BS EN 60898. The number and size of the
outgoing circuits shall be as per the feeder pillar schedules. Terminations shall be capable of
m
accommodating sub circuit cable of size 25mm2. There shall be at least 25% spare outgoing
e
circuit capacity.
Si
6 MCB’s and protective devices shall be rated to withstand a minimum short-circuit current of
9kA.
7 Neutral terminal bar shall be provided separately. Neutral conductors shall be insulated from
earth to allow use on TN-S systems. The neutral connections shall have separate
connections for each outgoing cable. Where a neutral busbar is provided it shall be mounted
in parallel with the phase busbars and arranged so that each neutral connection is physically
identified with the appropriate circuit. A separate earth bar shall be provided at the bottom of
the feeder pillar and shall be of sufficient length to accommodate a connection for each
circuit including 25% spare capacity. The neutral busbar shall be coloured black and the
earth busbar coloured green and yellow.
8 Busbars shall be of full rating having taken into account any holes, they shall be constructed
from high conductivity copper and mounted on insulators and mounted at the rear of the
feeder pillar. Busbars shall be insulated with non-hydroscopic, non-tracking insulation. All live
parts shall be screened.
9 Insulated dividing barriers shall be provided between both phase contact assemblies and
between phase and neutral.
10 Each feeder pillar shall accommodate at least 1No. brass cable gland with locknut, earth tag
and PVC shroud for the incoming supply cable together with individual brass cable glands
25mm CW gland according to BS 6121 complete with lock nuts, earth tags and PVC shrouds
for all outgoing cables, including an allowance for spare capacity, for stranded copper cables
up to 25mm² 4 core XLPE SWA PVC.
11 Colour-coded leads shall identify all wiring for phase and neutral cables. Outgoing circuits
shall be labelled with the circuit reference and circuit breaker rating. Wherever possible all
internal wiring shall be enclosed in trunking or conduit.
15.16 ROAD LIGHTING CABLES
15.16.1 Underground Cables
ar
1 Underground road lighting cable shall be copper stranded 10/16/25mm² x 4 core XLPE SWA
PVC cable of stranded copper conductor 600/1000 VAC.
at
2
-Q
Cables shall be low tension 600/1000 volt multi core stranded copper conductors, insulated
with XLPE compound, core laid-up, extruded PVC tape bedded, steel wire armoured and
PVC sheathed overall underground cables to BS 5467: 1977.
LL
3 The cable shall be capable of withstanding vigorous climatic conditions of ambient

temperature up to 50°C (the temperature can be accompanied by a relative humidity of up to
W
100% at 30°C).
s
4 It should also be noted that cables can be buried in sand and laid partly in ducts at a depth of
en
up to 600mm in footpaths and 750mm in roadways. The ground temperatures can vary from
35-40°C in summer to 8-12°C in winter. Cable drums may be stored in the open for up to 1
m
year and will be exposed to direct sunlight. Accordingly, cables shall be designed to withstand
such conditions without deterioration of the electrical or mechanical properties.
e
Si
5 Cables shall have the following construction details:
(a) Conductors: High conductivity stranded copper - shaped conductors shall

comply with BS 6360: 1981 with XLPE insulation.
(b) Bedding: Bedding shall be an extruded layer of XLPE compound.
(c) Colour of Cores: Red, Yellow, Blue and Black.
(d) Armouring: Single layer of galvanized steel wire.
(e) Finish (over sheath): Extruded black PVC over sheath which conforms to BS 6346:
1987 for thickness and to BS 6746: 1987 for properties. The
external surface shall be embossed with the voltage
designation, cable size and manufacturers name
15.16.2 Packing of Cables
1 Underground cables shall be packed in sealed wooden cable drums each of 500 metres
length with a plate stating the following details:
(a) Manufacturer's name and country of origin

(b) Cable type and size

(c) Length of cable per drum
15.16.3 Insulated PVC Sheathed Circular High Temperature (85°C)
1 Flexible cable should be of conductors of high conductivity copper stranded wires, 2.5 sq.
mm, insulated with high temperature PVC compound, three cores, green or yellow, blue and
brown, twisted together, filled and sheathed with high temperature PVC compound,
300/500V.A.C. according to BS 6141, Table 15 or equivalent norm.
15.17 MARKER TAPE FOR UNDERGROUND POWER CABLES
15.17.1 General
1 Marker tape shall be installed wherever cables are to be directly buried in the ground to warn
of the presence of power cables.
ar
15.17.2 Material & Quality
at
1 The marker tape shall be of low density polyethylene, of thickness at least 100 micron. Its
-Q
width shall be 40cm and be yellow in colour, with black marking indicating the presence of
road lighting cable in both English and Arabic. Its location in respect of the cable position is
identified within the Contract documentation.
LL
2 The material shall be colour fast, and resistant to chemical action in typical ground conditions
W
experienced in Qatar. These may vary from extremely wet to extremely dry, and with very
high salinity. The ground temperature may vary from 0 to 40°C.
s
3 The material shall be mechanically durable. The manufacturer shall demonstrate the
en
samples complying with this specification have been tested for compliance with BS 2782,
Part 3, Method 326A to 326C or an equivalent standard.
m
15.18 MARKER POSTS

e
Si
15.18.1 General
1 Where instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall install marker posts and slabs. These
shall be of reinforced concrete, steel or heavy duty plastic of an approved type suitable for
use in Qatar. Unless instructed otherwise pre-cast reinforced concrete or equally approved
marker posts or slabs shall be installed at intervals of not more than 50m along all
underground cable routes, joint pits (if any), at all changes of direction and at both ends of
road crossings.
15.19 EARTHING
15.19.1 General
1 The integrity of the earthing system within the road lighting network shall be maintained.
2 Each item of equipment shall be individually effectively earthed within each lighting assembly
and feeder pillar by means of a dedicated earth to a central earthing point. This shall be
regardless of any other terminals available. All connections shall use crimped terminations.
2 2
3 For circuit conductors of 16mm and 25mm a circuit protective conductor of cross-section
2
not less than 16mm shall be incorporated.
4 All removable metal doors or metal frames shall be earth bonded.
5 Within the feeder pillar the central earthing point shall be connected to the incoming earth
provided by QGEWC.
6 At each feeder pillar location an earth rod shall be installed complete with an approved earth
pit and cover plate. It shall have a resistance to true earth of not more than 10 ohms. The
size of the earth rod shall be 16mm by 2.5m in length. It shall be driven to a depth that
penetrates the summer water table by at least 1m. It shall be connected to the central
earthing point of the feeder pillar via a bare stranded copper conductor of cross-sectional
2
area 70mm .
7 At the end of each lighting sub circuit an additional earth electrode as detailed above shall be
connected to the central earthing point within the last lighting column base compartment. The
ar
connection between the earth electrode and the column central earth terminal shall be via a
2
bare stranded copper conductor of cross-section 16mm .
at
8
-Q
Routing of the earth cable to the ground conductor within the last column of each feeder pillar
outgoing subcircuit shall be via a 100mm. PVC duct within the column foundation.
15.20 INSTALLATION
LL

W
1 The Contractor is responsible for all liaisons, through the Engineer, with the departments
s
concerned within the PWA, in respect of programming the installation and commissioning of
en
the complete road lighting system. He shall also ensure through the Engineer that the
relevant departments within the PWA are at all times kept informed of the current progress of
m
the work. Throughout the road lighting installation works the engineering representative from
the relevant departments within the PWA, must be invited to carry out periodic inspections of
e
the works. The Contractor shall ensure that his approved subcontractor programmes works
Si
are in the designated sequence in accordance with the approved programme. On completion
of each phase of the works progress to the next phase will be subject to the approval of the
Engineer’s Representative and/or the relevant departments within the PWA.
2 A qualified person having a thorough experience in road lighting and associated equipment
shall supervise the execution of all electrical work.
3 Only workmen who have had experience in the erection of road lighting shall be employed on
the work of erection.
4 Before carrying out any electrical works to existing services, authorisation must be obtained
in writing from all relevant authorities.
5 The Contractor shall carry out all electrical tests and ensure satisfactory results as set out in
the ILE Code of Practice for Electrical Safety.
6 Where an existing installation has been extended the relevant parts of the existing system
and equipment earthing shall be inspected and tested for compliance with the IEE Wiring
Regulations.
7 A completion certificate as detailed in the IEE Wiring Regulations shall be issued following
the inspection and testing of the installation and any corrective action found necessary.
15.20.2 Temporary Lighting
1 Where the existing installation is to be disconnected during the Contract Period, temporary
lighting shall be provided. Any temporary lighting proposals must have the approval of the
PWA prior to installation.
2 At no time shall design road lighting standards be lower than those existing prior to the start
of the Contract.
3 The Engineer must approve any form of temporary lighting and associated lighting levels.
4 Temporary lighting shall not be removed or disconnected until the permanent installation has
been inspected and approved by the Engineer and has been energised.
ar
15.20.3 Removal of Existing Columns
at
1 Prior to any work being undertaken the Contractor shall obtain from the relevant departments
within the PWA a copy of the latest revised record drawing of the existing lighting network
-Q
within the contract limits. The Contractor is to identify from these records those columns
affected by the Contract and require removal or relocating. A copy of any record obtained
shall be forwarded to the Engineer for his use.
LL
2 Existing columns shall be removed under supervision of the Engineer’s Representative in

W
consultation with the relevant department within the PWA. Existing cables shall be
disconnected, made safe and protected to the satisfaction of the Engineer in consultation
s
with the relevant departments within the PWA prior to removal of the columns.
en
3 No existing road lighting shall be switched off, dismantled or removed without the prior
approval of the Engineer and the relevant departments within the PWA. Where the existing
m
road lighting has been removed the Contractor, to ensure safe vehicular and pedestrian
e
movement within the designated area, shall provide necessary temporary lighting complete at
Si
his cost. Existing signs shall also be relocated at the Contractors cost to ensure compliance
with the current traffic regulations.
4 All lamps, luminaries and fittings shall be removed before excavating around the column prior
to its removal. Tie ropes shall support the columns at all times.
5 The Contractor shall carefully excavate existing material from around the column base,
including concrete taking care not to damage any adjacent cables or services. No assembly
shall be removed until it has been fully excavated.
6 The columns shall be lifted from the foundation by means of a crane approved by the
Engineer. The foundation shall be backfilled with suitable approved material and temporarily
reinstated.
7 All columns, cables, lamps and luminaries to be removed under the Contract shall be taken
to store as directed by the Engineer and remain the property of the PWA. Where such items
are instructed to be taken to the stores of the PWA, proof of delivery should be obtained by
means of a signed receipt from the relevant departments within the PWA and witnessed by
the Engineer’s representative.
8 Existing road lighting, where it is to be relocated within the Contract, shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant sections of the contract specifications, as if new. Prior to re-
installing all equipment it shall be inspected and any damage reported to the relevant
departments within the PWA, via the Engineer.
15.20.4 Detailed Drawing for RCC foundation
1 The foundation for the 3 metre to 12 metre lighting columns shall be in accordance with the
details provided within the Contract Documents. The reinforcement detail shall be detailed by
the Contractor based on the recommendations of the column manufacturer to meet the
column assembly design criteria detailed in paragraph 15.6.7 of this specification. Contractor
shall consider the use of augured foundations in areas where soil and lighting utility
reservation necessitate it, as per the Contract Documents.
2 The foundation detail for the lighting columns or masts between 16 metres to 30 metres will
be as recommended by the column manufacturer for the climatic conditions applicable to the
State of Qatar taking due consideration of the equipment to be supported. Contractor shall
ar
consider the use of augured foundations in areas where soil and lighting utility reservation
necessitate it, as per the Contract Documents.
at
3
-Q
Final configuration of the proposed foundation will be subject to the approval of the Engineer
and the PWA.
15.20.5 Road lighting Column/Lantern Installation

LL
1 Road lighting columns shall be erected on pre-constructed bases offset from the
W
carriageway, as defined in the contract Specification, via anchor bolt arrangement.

s
2 Prior to erection of the lighting pole no bracket arm or lighting fixtures shall be mounted on
en
the column shaft.
3 Only purpose made cranes with nylon slings will be accepted for the purpose of lifting the
m
columns onto the anchor bolts. Metal chains are not acceptable.
e
Si
4 The bottom securing nut/washer arrangement or shims shall be used to align the lighting
column vertical. The location of the base compartment door shall be agreed prior to the
installing of the column shaft, but unless notified otherwise the door opening shall be located
such that any operative working within the column shall face the on-coming traffic.
5 Once installed, the final alignment and verticality of the column shall be checked in two
directions at 90 degrees to each other by theodolite or other approved method. The final
verticality is to be approved by the Engineer’s Representative prior to the column bracket and
luminaire as specified being installed and commissioned.
6 The underground cables shall be terminated into the cut-out/isolator assembly mounted
within the lighting pole base compartment. An additional length of 500mm shall be allowed at
each incoming cable termination and shall remain underground for future reconnections.
7 Wiring between the terminal block in the luminaire and the components in the base of the
column or each unit shall be using high temperature 3 core, green or yellow, blue and brown,
2.5mm2 copper flexible cables to BS 6141.
8 All installation requirements described in the ILE Code of Practice Clause 11 shall apply.
9 A double insulated 6.0mm2 stranded copper earth wire with clamped tag bonded to earth lug
on column and the column door earth terminal shall be provided.
10 All cable routes shall be clear of control gear and limited to horizontal and vertical runs.
Cables entering terminals shall show no bare wire nor shall the insulation be taken into the
electrical conducting part of the terminal. All cable shall be neatly bunched together and
securely taped.
11 Terminal blocks shall be clearly marked and the wiring shall be so arranged that the
luminaire can be dismantled, for purposes of routine cleaning and lamp replacement, without
any electrical wiring disconnections.
12 After installation each lighting column shall be identified by a reference number in

accordance with the requirements of the PWA.
15.20.6 Road lighting Feeder Pillar Installation
ar
1 The road lighting feeder pillar shall be erected on pre-constructed base off set to the
carriageway, as defined in the Contract specification, via anchor bolt arrangement.
at
2
-Q
Prior to erection no internal equipment shall be installed which could be damaged either in
transit to site or during the erection phase.
3 The bottom securing nut/washer arrangement or shims shall be used to align the feeder pillar
LL
vertical.
W
4 The electrical installation within the feeder pillar shall be undertaken as detailed elsewhere in
the specification.
s
en
5 All underground cables when terminated shall allow for a minimum length of 500mm to be left
underground to allow for future reconnections
m
15.20.7 Road lighting Cable Installation

e
Si
1 The installation of all cables shall be in accordance with the requirements of QCS Section 21.
2 2
2 Excavation of Road lighting Cable trenches for cable size from 10mm to 35mm x 4 core are
to be of the following dimension:
Depth: 600mm
Width: 500mm
3 Cable trenches shall be cleared of all stone and sharp projections and shall be drained. All
cables shall be laid on a bed of 150mm approved fine aggregate sand or quarry scalping.
Cabling to and between columns will be by means of copper stranded 4core
XLPE.SWA.PVC cable. (Size as indicated and based on the connected electrical load and
length of cable from power source) and shall be at the depth of 450mm. A layer of 150mm
dune sand or quarry scalping is to cover the cable. No joints in Cable shall be permitted.
4 LV cables laid shall be laid straight between lighting columns with an allowance for 500mm
spare underground cable adjacent to each column. Cables can be placed in the same trench
with a lateral spacing between cables of 50mm. In the event of HV cables being placed in the
same trench then there shall be a separation of at least 300mm. All cables shall have a
clearance of at least 300mm from all other services including telephone or communication
cables.
5 The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of the cable, trenches and cable installations by
the Engineer’s Representative, in conjunction with the relevant departments within the PWA
prior to backfilling.
6 All cables shall be handled, installed and terminated in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. The manufacturer’s recommended ambient temperature limitations for
the handling of cables shall be strictly adhered to.
7 All cables, once removed from the cable drum, shall be immediately laid in position. No cable
shall remain laying on the surface for more than is practicably possible.
ar
8 Cabling is to be looped into each column and terminated by means of an approved lighting
at
column cut out. -Q
15.20.8 Road Crossing Ducts
1 Underground ducts shall be provided where cables

LL
(a) Cross roads or other paved areas with vehicular access.

W
(b) Cross unpaved areas regularly used by vehicles.

(c) Enter buildings.
s
en
(d) Vehicular entrances to properties.

(e) Pass through corrosive soils or elsewhere as designated, they shall be drawn into
m
underground pipe ducts.

e
2 A steel draw wire or nylon or polypropylene cord shall be inserted in each duct run
Si
immediately after its installation. A 2m surplus shall be left at each end of each run, neatly
coiled and attached to a crossbar preventing the wire or cord from being drawn into the duct.
3 Underground pipe ducts shall be heavy gauge unplasticised PVC (high impact resistant PVC,
3.6mm wall thickness) conduits with tapered sleeve or spigot and socket joints encased in
concrete as detailed in the Contract drawings and in accordance with the requirements of the
PWA.
4 All ducts shall have a nominal internal diameter of 150 mm unless designated otherwise.
5 The internal diameter of ducts used to provide cable entries into structures shall have a
space factor less than 25 %, unless otherwise designated.
6 All dual systems shall be installed so that no undue strain is placed on cables when pulled in.
Cable manufacturer’s recommendations shall be followed.
7 All underground cable ducts shall, so far as possible, be run in straight lines.
8 Duct runs crossing roads shall be straight and, wherever possible, perpendicular to the axis
of the road. They shall be laid at a depth of 800mm backfilled and reinstated in accordance
with QCS.
9 Except in the case of short isolated duct runs such as road crossings, underground cable
duct runs shall terminate in suitable drawpits.
10 Cable ducts passing under roads carrying heavy vehicles shall be completely surrounded
with concrete of grade SRC 30 as per the standard detail.
11 Ducts shall be laid so as to drain naturally towards one or both ends, where adequate
provision for drainage shall be made. Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent the
cable duct system acting as a stormwater or groundwater drainage system. A minimum fall of
1 in 200 shall be provided for drainage purposes.
12 Any work carried out requiring the use of split ducts shall be carried out in such a manner as
to preserve the withdrawability of the cables concerned.
ar
13 Notwithstanding the type of duct to be used generally, cable ducts laid in ground which is
at
liable to subsidence shall be of heavy gauge PVC with spigot and socket joints, and shall be
-Q
installed on a concrete bed as designated above, but without concrete surround.
14 If two or more cables are to be installed in the same duct, the aggregate of their cross-
sectional areas shall not exceed 30 % of the cross-sectional area of the duct.
LL
15 All trenches excavated for the laying of cable ducts shall be completely backfilled and
W
rammed before cable installation work begins.

s
16 Immediately following the installation of any duct run, the interior of the duct shall be
en
thoroughly cleaned by twice drawing through the ducts a mandrel, once in each direction.
Following this, the ends of each run shall be sealed with a suitable hardwood or plastic
sealing plug which shall be left in position until cable laying is about to begin.
e m
17 The polished hardwood mandrel shall be 300mm long having spherical ends and a diameter
Si
6mm less than the nominal duct diameter.
15.20.9 Backfilling and Re-instatement
1 All trenches and pole pit/foundations shall be backfilled, compacted and re-instated in
accordance with the QCS requirements.
15.20.10 Road lighting Cable Terminations and Testing
1 Unless otherwise designated, cable glands shall be of brass and comply with BS 6121 where
applicable, and shall be of a design appropriate to the type of cable being terminated.
2 Glands for cables with metallic inner sheaths shall incorporate a bonding connection.
3 Except where it is impracticable to do so, the cable cores shall be taken through the
terminating box directly to the terminals of the equipment, without crosses, and shall be
made off with sweated cast brass cable sockets, or an approved type of hydraulically crimped
socket.
4 Terminations for armoured cable shall incorporate a method of rating off the armour which
ensures a permanent earth bond between the cables terminated to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The cable armour shall be bonded to the earth terminal block in each column.
5 All cable sealing boxes shall be marked on the outside with 15 mm diameter painted discs, in
the appropriate colours, to indicate the disposition of the phase and neutral conductors within
them.
6 Compression glands installed externally shall be classified IP66 and be provided with close-
fitting PVC shrouds.
15.20.11 Electrical Power Supply
1 Upon the completion of the associated work, arrangements will be made via the Engineer to
provide the electrical power to each road lighting feeder pillar based on a 415V 50Hz supply.
Once available, and after inspection, the lighting system shall be tested prior to connection.
The Engineer shall arrange for full consultation with the relevant departments within the PWA
ar
during this phase of the lighting works.
at
15.21 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ON SITE -Q
15.21.1 General
1 In addition to the requirements of the Contract Specific Specification all testing and
LL
commissioning shall be carried out according to the requirements of the relevant BS , CP,
IEE regulations, or other standards and regulations as may be stated or implied in this
W
Specification.
s
2 Each completed system with the installation shall be tested as a whole under operating
en
conditions to ensure that each component functions correctly in conjunction with the rest of
the installation.
m
3 The Contractor shall afford access at all times to the relevant departments within the PWA to
e
enable them to inspect work during and after erection and to be present at all tests.
Si
15.21.2 Electrical Tests
1 As soon as is practicable after the completion of installation the tests described below,
together with such other tests and measurements to prove compliance with the contract
requirements shall be made.
2 An insulation tester shall be used to measure the insulation resistance between each
conductor and the remaining conductors and between each conductor and the metallic
sheath (if any) and armouring. The test voltage to be applied shall be at least 1000 V.
3 The above tests shall be carried out both before and after any pressure tests and the
insulation resistance shall not be less than the figures in the appropriate BS.
4 A voltage test of 15 minutes duration shall be applied in accordance with BS 5467 Appendix
88, BS 6622 Appendix C8 or BS 6346 Table 5, as applicable.
5 Proposals for the appropriate test in respect of other types of cable shall be submitted for
approval.
6 An earth continuity test shall be carried out to verify that the cable armouring and metal
sheath, if any, have been properly bonded to earth.
7 Phase rotation and phase correspondence shall be tested to prove that the cables have been
correctly connected.
8 Where a new cable has been jointed to an existing cable with the express permission of the
Engineer, the voltage test designated above may be carried out at a reduced voltage if the
existing cable has been in service for more than five years. In such a case the test voltage
shall be determined by applying a factor K to the value given in the appropriate British
Standard as referred to above.
9 The Contractor shall afford access at all times to the representatives of QGEWC and the
relevant departments within the PWA to enable them to inspect work during and after
erection and to be present at all tests.
10 Upon completion of laying and terminating underground cable runs, the Contractor, in the
ar
presence of the Engineer or his duly authorised representative, shall carry out pressure tests
in accordance with relevant British Standards. The Contractor shall provide all apparatus and
at
labour required for such tests and within a reasonable time thereafter shall present the
-Q
Engineer with certificates of the tests.
15.21.3 Photometric Performance Testing

LL
1 A certificate of Initial Lighting Performance of Installation shall be issued when tests have
been passed as follows:
W
(a) The initial photometric tests shall be made after the installation has been in lighting
operation for between l00 and 150 hours
s
en
(b) The location of test positions shall be distributed along the length of the installation and
shall be as directed by the Engineer. All service tests throughout the testing period
m
shall be made at these positions.

e
2 Readings shall be taken with a portable calibrated luminance meter holding a current valid
Si
calibration certificate. The measurements in accordance with the procedures laid down by the
CIE and shall be taken by a qualified lighting engineer who shall confirm that the lighting
performance data as identified in the contract specification has been satisfactorily obtained.
3 Measurement of the supply voltage at adjacent lighting columns and posts shall be taken at
the time of each test and the illumination measurement shall be adjusted for any variation
from the supply voltage value declared in the contract specification. Allowance shall be made
for the use of control gear taps if necessary immediately before the initial tests are made.
The lamps and all components of the luminaire that may affect the optical performance shall
be cleaned and correctly adjusted.
4 The Engineer shall witness all photometric testing, unless otherwise notified in writing. A
minimum of 7-days’ notice shall be given to the Engineer before testing begins. After testing
the certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Representatives from the
relevant departments within the PWA shall be invited to witness the lighting performance
testing.
15.22 RECORD DRAWINGS
15.22.1 General
1 Within thirty days from the date of completion of the whole or any section of the lighting works
the Contractor shall provide fully detailed "as built" drawings and schedules in respect of all
sections of work completed together with all relevant operating and maintenance instructions.
The drawings shall: -
(a) Fully indicate with accurate dimensions the sizes, types and position of equipment,
cables, ducts, joints, feeder pillars etc., with particular regard for the need to accurately
locate buried cables after completion.
(b) Show the circuit arrangements for the relevant section of the road lighting installation.
(c) Show full details, ratings and function of each item of equipment.
(d) Include any other relevant information to ensure the safe and satisfactory operation of
ar
the particular section of the road lighting works.
2 The Contractor shall submit, within the time stated above, two copies of the Record Drawings
at
for the approval of the Engineer. Upon and after receipt of such approval the Contractor shall
-Q
provide records in both digitised and hard copy format of reproducible transparent negative
drawings, and two sets of prints on paper to the Engineer for his retention.
LL
3 In addition to the foregoing, the Contractor shall provide in each feeder pillar and distribution
unit a good quality print on paper showing the road lighting distribution line diagram of that
particular section. These prints shall be mounted on the inside of the door of each feeder
W
pillar and distribution unit and shall be covered in clear plastic to prevent undue deterioration.
s
4 In order to achieve accurate Record Drawings all relevant information relating to the lighting
en
works shall be entered on to the stated drawings and kept for immediate use once the work
has been carried out. The marked prints shall be available for inspection at the Contractor's
m
site office at any reasonable time during the progress of the lighting works.
e
END OF PART
Si
Part 16: Traffic Signals
16 TRAFIC SIGNALS ......................................................................................... 2

16.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
16.1.1 Summary 2
16.1.2 References 2
16.1.3 Submittals 2
16.1.6 General Project/Site Conditions 4
16.1.7 Warranties 4
16.2 SUPPLY OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT .............................................. 4
16.2.1 General 4
16.2.2 Identification of Equipment 5
16.2.3 Traffic Signal Posts 5
16.2.4 Traffic Signal Gantries 5
ar
16.2.5 Three-Aspect Traffic Signal Heads 6
at
16.2.6 Two-Aspect Pedestrian Signal Heads 7
16.2.7 Traffic Signal Controllers 8
-Q
16.2.8 Pedestrian Operated Push-Buttons 10
16.2.9 Flexible Traffic Signal Cable 10
LL
16.2.10 Armoured Traffic Signal Cable 10

16.2.11 Loop Cables 11
W
16.2.12 Loop Feeder Cables 11

16.2.13 Pulling Chamber Cover 11
s
16.2.14 Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC-U) Ducts 12

en
16.2.15 General Compatibility 12

16.3 INSTALLATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT ................................. 12
m
16.3.1 General 12
e
16.3.2 Poles, Gantries and Signal Heads 12

Si
16.3.3 Installation of Traffic Signal Controller 13

16.3.4 Cabling 13
16.3.5 Circuit Protection and Earthing Requirements 14
16.3.6 Permanent Electrical Power Supply 15
16.3.7 Inductive Loops for Vehicle Detection 16
16.4 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING .............................................................. 20
16.5 GUARANTEED MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL
EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................... 21
16.5.1 General 21
16.5.2 Operational Maintenance 21
16.5.3 Emergency Maintenance 23
16.5.4 Contractor’s Vehicles 23
16.5.5 Contractor’s Equipment 23
16 TRAFIC SIGNALS
16.1 GENERAL
16.1.1 Summary
1 This Part includes the provision of traffic signal equipment and related street furniture at
controlled roadway junctions and pedestrian crossings.
2 Related Sections
Section 1 General
Section 5 Concrete
Section 10 Instrumentation, Control and Automation
Section 21 Electrical Works
ar
16.1.2 References
at
The following standards are referred to on this Part:
BS 1361......................Cartridge fuses for a..c circuits in domestic and similar premises
-Q
BS 381C .....................Specifications for colours for identifications
BS 5493......................Code of practice for protective coatings of iron and steel structures
against corrosion.
LL
BS 7430......................Code of practice and regulations for earthing

BS 7671......................Requirements for electrical installations
W
BS 88..........................Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000 Vac and 150 Vac
s
BS EN 1011................Process of arc welding carbon and carbon manganese steels

en
BS EN 12368..............Road traffic signals

BS EN 13108..............Fine cold asphalt
m
BS EN 60529..............Degrees of protection provided by enclosures

e
BS EN ISO 146 ..........Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
Si
AASHTO Standard specification for supports for highway signs, luminaires, traffic signals
DIN 40050 ..................Enclosures for electrical equipment

DIN 6163 Part 5..........Diffusion lenses for traffic signals
QGEWC (E) Regulations for Electrical Installations

QGEWC (E) Regulations for Protective Multiple Earthing
16.1.3 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit to the engineer for approval shop drawings for each type of
signal pole, gantry and mounting frame for signal heads to be provided under the Contract
along with structural calculations. The drawings shall show materials specification and
finishes for each component proposed for use. All weld types and sizes shall be identified on
the shop drawings.
2 The Contractor shall submit to the engineer for approval design calculations for the proposed
signal poles and gantries. The design calculations shall be carried out in accordance with the
AASHTO Standard specification for supports for highway signs, luminaires, and traffic signals
3 The Contractor shall propose a design for the foundations for each type of signal pole and
gantry and shall submit design calculations and drawings to the Engineer for approval.
4 The Contractor shall submit to the engineer for approval a schematic wiring diagram for all
the installations. The Contractor shall also submit a wiring layout drawing for the cable loops
and the cross-sectional details of the cut in the road surface.
1 Contractors for the works shall be experienced specialists in the field of traffic control
systems with a minimum of 5 years experience of the installation, commissioning and testing
of such systems in a similar environment.
ar
2 The Contractor shall submit a technical submission for the proposed subcontractor giving
at
details of previous installations date installed, client, technical data for proposed materials,
and experience record of proposed installation staff, supervisors and management.
-Q
3 Installation of traffic signal equipment shall only be conducted by approved specialist
subcontractors. The specialist subcontractors shall be approved by the PWA.
LL
4 The performance and design requirements work shall be in compliance with QGEWC
Regulations for Electrical Installations.
W
5 All equipment supplied shall, in general, conform to the same style, colours and functions as
s
that already in place in Qatar. The supplier may be required to provide, at his own expense,
en
samples of his proposed equipment.

m
6 All equipment and installation shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Qatar
Traffic Manual. For all signalled intersections and pedestrian signal control crossings the
e
timing sequence of signals displayed to drivers during phases shall be as per information
Si
given by the PWA and/or Traffic Police.
1 Before delivering a traffic signal controller to site, the Contractor shall arrange a factory
acceptance test in his workshop. The programmed and internally complete controller shall
be connected to a labelled light board capable of simulating all traffic signal aspects
controlled by that particular controller. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment and
devices are available to show that the controller fully complies with operational requirements.
The factory acceptance test shall consist of the following checks:
(a) visual check of internal wiring and controller assembly

(b) operation of green conflict monitor
(c) intergreen times
(d) group times
(e) detector logic (where applicable)
(f) stage to stage change logic
(g) lamp switching.
2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the delivery of all items to the project site or to any
site as required by the Engineer.
16.1.6 General Project/Site Conditions
1 All equipment and associated components shall be designed and suitably rated to ensure
proper maintenance, continuous trouble free service under the prevailing climatic conditions.
All equipment and installation shall operate satisfactorily in a temperature range of 0 C to
+55 C and under humidity conditions ranging from 10 % to 100 %.
16.1.7 Warranties
1 All warranties and guarantees for traffic signal equipment shall commence from the day of
commissioning. The warranty period shall be that as designated by the manufacturer but
shall in any case not be less than 400 days
ar
16.2 SUPPLY OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
at
16.2.1 General -Q
1 It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all equipment supplied is approved.
The Engineer will advise on approved suppliers.
LL
2 It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to honour the designated warranty periods..

W
3 The Contractor, shall make himself aware of any lead times required for delivery of
equipment and programme his works accordingly. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
ensure that equipment is available as needed, any delays to works resulting from the
s
en
unavailability of equipment shall be deemed to be the responsibility of the Contractor.
4 The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct delivery, storage and handling and
m
storage of all equipment up to the time it is commissioned.

e
5 All equipment shall comprise of units of a type that have been used successfully in other
Si
installations in a similar environment, from a minimum period of six months and shall be
subject to approval of the engineer. Particular attention shall be given in the selection and
design of equipment and components to the exclusion of water, moisture and dust.
6 Components and materials that may perish and deteriorate in the climatic conditions of Qatar
shall be avoided. All equipment shall be so constructed as similar units that shall be readily
available and completely interchangeable both mechanically and electrically.
7 The location layout of each installation and the number of phases and stages for each traffic
controller shall be as designated Controllers shall provide the signal sequences and phasing
designated for each installation.
8 The structural design and traffic signal posts and traffic signal gantries shall be in accordance
with provisions of AASHTO standard specification, Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires,
Traffic Signals, or an approved alternative.
16.2.2 Identification of Equipment
1 The Contractor shall mark or clearly label all modules, units and main parts of a system with
a functional code or title, type number, serial number as approved by the Engineer.
2 Marking shall maintain legibility throughout the life of the equipment under the prevailing
environmental conditions.
3 The labelling system shall comply with the GIS system (as defined in the data dictionary)
used by the Government of Qatar and the PWA.
16.2.3 Traffic Signal Posts
1 Traffic signal poles shall be of the tubular steel type with a flanged base, having an internal
electrical termination point accessible through a lockable inspection window. The supply of a
traffic signal pole shall include; holding down bolts, nuts, washers and shims required for
erection; pole; terminal block; locking cover for inspection window complete with three sets of
ar
keys; all grommets; glands and cable anchor points.
at
2 Traffic signal poles shall have dimensions conforming to those given in the contract
-Q
Drawings.
3 The traffic signal poles shall be of mild steel construction. Corrosion protection shall be
through the use of a hot dipped galvanised coating conforming to the requirements of British
LL
Standard BS 5493 and BS EN ISO 1461, depth of galvanised coating shall be 85 microns.
All welded connections shall conform to British Standard BS EN 1011.
W
4 The termination point shall consist of a terminal block positioned internally within the traffic
s
signal pole. The terminal block shall be fully accessible through a lockable inspection
en
window. The terminal block shall be securely fixed to the traffic signal pole.
5 The terminal block shall be electrically isolated from the traffic signal pole and shall have a
m
minimum capacity of 2 x 20 No. connectors. Each connector shall have a minimum rated
e
capacity of 100 watts at 240 volts.

Si
6 The connectors on the terminal block shall be in compliance with the requirements of the
QGEWC.
7 The traffic signal pole shall have the facility to secure incoming cables at a point prior to them
being connected to the terminal block
8 The traffic signal pole shall be fitted with an electrical earthing stud, such that at least four
earth connections can be made to it.
16.2.4 Traffic Signal Gantries
1 Traffic signal gantries shall be of the tubular steel type with a flanged base, having an internal
electrical termination point accessible through a lockable inspection window. The supply of a
traffic signal gantry shall include: holding down bolts, nuts, washers and shims required for
erection; pole caps; terminal block; locking cover for inspection window complete with three
set of keys; all grommets, glands and cable anchor points. Traffic signal gantry shall be
styled in accordance with Contract Drawings.
2 The traffic signal gantries shall have minimum dimension conforming to those given in the
Drawings. The design of the gantries is open to submission by the supplier.
3 The supplier shall provide full details of the materials used and the method of construction
employed when quoting for this item, this shall include workshop fabrication drawings,
material specifications and calculations pertaining to the structural design of the gantry. The
gantry shall be capable of supporting three aspect traffic signal heads, each having a total
weight of 25 kg, inclusive of mountings. The number and position of heads are to be as
designated.
4 With regard to termination points, cable anchor points and earthing points, these shall be as
specified in Section 6 Part12 of this Specification
5 The supplier shall furnish full details of the foundation requirements for his proposed gantry,
this shall include details of dimensions, reinforcement, quality of concrete and fixings.
Anchor bolts shall be Grade 8.8 and shall be hot-dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
ar
6 The gantry and foundation design shall be such that the gantry is completely detachable from
the foundation, should this be required.
at
7
-Q
The gantry shall have a system such that it can be adjusted subsequent to installation, to
allow for leveling and turning.
8 The supplier shall furnish full details of the proposed foundation for his proposed gantry, this
LL
shall include details of dimensions, reinforcement, quality of concrete and fixings. The gantry
and foundation design shall be such that the gantry is completely detachable from the
W
foundation, should this be required. Anchor bolts shall be Grade 8.8 and shall be hot-dip
galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461. The gantry shall have a system such that it can be adjusted
s
subsequent to installation, to allow for levelling and truing.

en
9 The electrical termination point shall consist of a terminal block positioned internally within
the gantry. The terminal block shall be fully accessible through a lockable inspection window.
m
The terminal block shall be securely fixed to the gantry.

e
Si
16.2.5 Three-Aspect Traffic Signal Heads
1 Three-aspect traffic signal head dimensions shall be as designated. The Contractor shall
submit drawings of the proposed units.
2 Signal heads shall comprise of a polycarbonate body containing three traffic signal aspects,
coloured red, amber and green and shall include:
(a) lamps
(b) reflectors
(c) lenses
(d) transformers
(e) visors
(f) anti-phantom devices (if designated)
(g) brackets, frames and all fixtures and fittings required for mounting
(h) backing board.
3 Signal heads shall be constructed, in as far as is possible, out of high quality polycarbonate
plastic. Any metal fittings shall be suitably protected against corrosion.
4 The design and construction of signal heads shall allow for all of the following features:
(a) hinged lens panels to allow quick access to the lamps

(b) flexible, detachable visors
(c) easily adjustable mounting system
(d) capability of internally fitting optical arrow mask.
5 The signal heads shall use, for each aspect, a 10 volt halogen lamp of type SIG 64015/1 -
50W or SIG 64015 - 50W. The lamp holder and connectors shall be compatible with the type
of lamp used. The lamps shall conform to BS EN 12368. The supply voltage to the signal
head shall be 240 volts ( 5 %) and shall be converted to the lamp voltage by the use of a
standard design transformer (El Type). Each aspect shall have an individual transformer,
these transformers shall be fitted with noise suppression equipment. The transformers will be
ar
required to operate in ambient temperatures up to 60° C. The transformers shall have a
at
minimum operational life of five years with an effective switch-on ratio of 3300: 4380.
6
-Q
Signal heads shall be capable of being mounted on the traffic signal pole or gantry as
designated or, in the case of traffic signal gantry, as may be proposed by the Contractor.
The mounting system used shall be such that no predrilling or permanent attachment of
LL
brackets to the signal pole or gantry is required. The mounting system shall be such that the
signal head shall be capable of being adjusted through an arc of 30 degrees about its vertical
W
axis. It shall be possible to mount two three-aspect traffic signal heads side by side on a
single pole such that the vertical faces being presented to oncoming traffic of each head
remain in the same plane. It shall be possible to mount the signal heads asymmetrical from
s
the centreline of the pole. The signal head shall be rendered splash proof by means of an
en
lP54 enclosure. The item description covering signal heads shall include, where necessary,
extra mounting brackets to enable the above facilities.
m
7 The optical reflector shall be made of a high grade aluminium, mirror finished. Diffusion
e
lenses shall be constructed with an internal cobweb pattern and shall be coloured red, amber
Si
or green as defined by the colour limits laid down in the DIN Standard DIN 6163 Part 5.
16.2.6 Two-Aspect Pedestrian Signal Heads
1 Two-aspect pedestrian signal heads shall have the designated dimensions. The Contractor
shall submit drawings of the proposed units.
2 Signal heads shall comprise of a polycarbonate body containing two pedestrian signal
aspects, coloured red and green and shall include:
(a) lamps
(b) reflectors
(c) lenses
(d) transformers
(e) visors
(f) anti-phantom devices (if designated)
(g) brackets, frames and all fixtures and fittings required to mount the signal head.
3 The material, electrical and mounting requirements for the signal head shall be the same as
the requirements for the three aspect traffic signal head.
4 The optical requirements for the signal head shall be the same as the requirements for the
three aspect traffic signal head with the additional requirement that each aspect of each two
aspect pedestrian signal head be supplied with a 'Walking Man' and 'Stopping Man' optical
mask.
16.2.7 Traffic Signal Controllers
1 Traffic signal controllers shall be microprocessor based and capable of meeting all the
designated requirements. The Contractor shall submit drawings of the proposed units.
2 Supply shall include:
(a) basic control hardware including relays housings and cabinets

(b) all required additional modules and circuits
ar
(c) all internal wiring
at
(d) all detector modules and control circuits-Q
(e) plates, fixings and fastenings, glands, seals and clips.
3 The controller shall be provided with the following operational modes:

LL
(a) computer control

W
(b) standby co-ordinated

(c) local mode with multi-plan operation
s
(d) flashing
en
(e) manual mode

m
(f) signal on/off mode.

e
4 Means will be provided within the controller housing to select and to test each of these
Si
modes of operation.
5 For pedestrian crossings the controller shall be capable of showing a green flashing man
before the end of each pedestrian phase.
6 All controllers shall include a dimming feature.
7 Controllers shall be of a manufacturers type approved by the PWA and/or Traffic Police.
8 All equipment supplied shall be compatible with the existing traffic signal controllers in use in
the state of Qatar.
9 Where the supplier cannot provide evidence of his equipment having been previously
successfully used with the above traffic signal controllers, he shall be required to
demonstrate, at his own expense, the compatibility of his equipment.
10 Traffic signal controllers shall be programmed as designated and as agreed with the
Engineer. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide competent personnel to
programme the controller.
11 Each controller shall be supplied with full documentation which shall include :
(a) wiring diagrams

(b) timing charts
(c) intergreen tables
(d) stage diagrams
(e) any other relevant information relating to the operation.
Three copies of the documentation shall be supplied with each controller.

12 The controller shall be housed in the cabinet of sufficient size to accommodate the controller
and all other associated equipment and shall provide easy access for maintenance and test
purposes. The controller and associated equipment shall be arranged within the cabinet so
that they will not interfere with the entry and exit cables. The cabinet to house signal
controllers shall be constructed of aluminium sheet of thickness 3 mm in accordance with BS
ar
EN 12368 or with non-metallic materials where the properties for abrasion resistance,
exposure to the elements are equal or better than aluminium cabinet. Cabinets shall be
at
painted to a colour and specification agreed by the Engineer. The cabinet shall be
-Q
weatherproof, rain proof and dust proof and be able to maintain proper operation of
equipment. The Contractor shall construct a suitable foundation for the cabinet. and it shall
allow for the entry and exit of all cables. The cabinet shall be secured to the foundation by
anchor bolts.
LL
13 The traffic signal controller shall be micro-processor based and capable of meeting all the
W
requirements of the operational Specification and any further requirements as specified by

the Engineer. The supply of a traffic signal controller shall include for: the basic control
s
hardware including relays housings and cabinets, all additional modules and circuits required
en
to meet the operational Specification, all internal wiring, all detector modules and control
circuits, plates fixings and fastenings glands, seals and clips.
m
14 Traffic signal controllers shall be of an approved type and supplied by an approved

e
manufacturer taken from the most recent list prepared by the Public Works Authority.
Si
15 Traffic signal controllers shall be programmed according to the operational Specification and
as agreed with the Engineer. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide competent
personnel to programme the controller.
16 The traffic signal controller shall also have the following capabilities:
(a) To give a flashing red pedestrian man before switching to a red man at the end of
pedestrian cycle.
(b) The controller shall include a timing feature.
(c) The controller shall support two power supply inputs coming from two different
substations. The purpose is to continuously operate the controller in case of power
failure on one substation by automatically transferring to the other power supply input.
(d) The controller shall be made to ensure that the dual power supply input is stabilized at
240 volts.
(e) The controller can be operated manually.
(f) The controller shall be capable of providing flashing green before switching to
yellow/amber at the end of vehicle green phase
(g) The controller shall be capable of providing continuous flashing yellow/amber in the
channelized island.
17 Each traffic signal controller shall be fully documented, this shall include: wiring diagrams,
timing charts, intergreen tables, stage, diagram and any other relevant information relating to
the operation. Three (3) No. copies of the documentation shall be supplied with each
controller.
16.2.8 Pedestrian Operated Push-Buttons
1 Pedestrian operated push-buttons shall comply with the requirements and regulations of the
QGEWC.
2 The push-button shall include traffic signs as per the Qatar Traffic Control Manual either as
an integral part, or be mounted separately on the traffic signal pole or gantry.
ar
3 Push-buttons shall comprise of a metal or plastic body containing a push-button switch and
at
an illuminated text panel in Arabic and English.
-Q
4 The unit shall have a light that provides confirmation after a pedestrian has pushed the
button.
LL
5 The dimensions and position of the push-buttons shall be proposed by the supplier and
W
6 Push-buttons shall be constructed of metal or high grade plastics.

s
en
16.2.9 Flexible Traffic Signal Cable

m
1 Flexible traffic signal cable shall comprise of four cored, PVC coated, internal core PVC
coated, cable. The cable shall be PVC sheathed wiring, catalogue description being NYM-J,
e
page 2/3 or equivalent.

Si
2 The cable shall be of a rated voltage and current carrying capacity suitable for the proposed
cable runs. The Contractor shall submit calculations showing the voltage drop for the cable.
3 Cable shall be supplied in 500 metre lengths and wound onto a suitable cable drum.
4 Cable shall have a minimum cross-section area of the conductor in each core of 1.5 mm2
and the overall diameter of the cable shall be 11 mm. The individual core may be either solid
or stranded. Each core shall be uniquely identifiable by coloured PVC sheathing.
16.2.10 Armoured Traffic Signal Cable
1 Armoured traffic signal cable shall comprise of a multi-cored (number of cores as specified),
PVC coated, copper wire armoured, internal core PVC coated, cable. Catalogue description
being, PVC-CWA-PVC or equivalent.
2 Cable shall be supplied in 500 m lengths, wound onto a suitable cable drum.
3 Cable may be supplied in three sizes, 7 core, 12 core or 19 core. The minimum area of the
conductor in each core shall be 1.5 mm2. The individual cores may be either solid or
stranded. Each individual core shall be uniquely identifiably by either having a uniquely
coloured PVC sheathing or by its PVC sheathing having a unique, repetitive marking.
16.2.11 Loop Cables
1 Loop cables shall consist of a heat resistant coated core cable. Loop feeder cables shall
comprise of a communication type cable, PVC coated having six pair of individually coated
cores. The Loop shall be manufactured by Never Fail Loop Systems, USA (local
representative Traffic Tech (Gulf), P.O. Box 9377, Telephone Number 4621814) or similar
approved.
2 Loops shall be constructed from polypropylene conduit with 9.5mm inside diameter and
16mm outside diameter. Conduit shall be filled with hot rubberised asphalt which allows the
loop to remain flexible once cooled to prevent incursion of moisture and set the turns of wire
firmly in place. Loops shall have 127mm expansion/contraction joints at intervals along the
ar
loop to allow for movement. Each expansion/contraction joint shall have a 229mm long
at
schedule 80 polypropylene cover slide to be placed over the joint.
3
-Q
Lead-in wires shall be encased in a non-conductive 2250 psi flex hose constructed with a
seamless extruded polyester fiber braid reinforcement and a non-conductive, seamless
extruded urethane non-perforated jacket. Fill lead-in hose completely with hot rubberised
LL
asphalt. Twist wires in all lead-ins with a minimum of three turns per 305 mm for the entire
length of the lead-in. Attach lead-ins to loop heads with a sch. 80 CVPC tee.
W
4 Loop cable shall have one individual core, the conductor of which shall have a cross-
sectional area of 1.5 mm2. The loop cable such that the coating is able to withstand direct
s
application of temperatures up to 175 °C.

en
16.2.12 Loop Feeder Cables

e m
1 Loop feeder cable shall have six pairs of individual cores, each of which having a conductor
of cross-sectional area of 0.6mm2. Each individual core shall be uniquely identifiable by
Si
either, having a uniquely coloured PVC-U sheathing or by its PVC-U sheathing having
unique, repetitive marking.
2 The use of alternative types of cable may be permitted with the express written permission of
the Engineer.
3 Each individual core shall be uniquely identifiable by either having a uniquely coloured PVC
sheathing or by its PVC sheathing having a unique, repetitive marking.
16.2.13 Pulling Chamber Cover
1 Pulling chamber covers shall be of ductile iron.
2 The pulling chamber covers shall have a square opening of the dimensions shown on the
project drawings.
3 The pulling chamber covers shall be inscribed with wording to identify the type of service and
the system reference. The exact wording shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
16.2.14 Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC-U) Ducts
1 Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride shall be supplied in two different sizes, 2 inches diameter or
4 inches diameter (50mm or 100mm). The colour shall be dark gray. The PVC-U shall be
either encased burial type or direct burial type. Catalogue description being, PVC-U
Electrical Conduit & Tubing and Utility Duct, NEMA TC-6 or NEMA TC-8 or equivalent.
2 Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride ducts shall be supplied in 6 metre lengths with solvent weld
socket on one end. The minimum wall thickness shall be 1.52 mm for 2 inches diameter and
2.08 mm for 4 inches diameter.
16.2.15 General Compatibility
1 All equipment supplied shall, in general, conform to the same style, colours and functions as
that already in place in Qatar. The supplier may be required to provide at his own expense,
samples of his proposed equipment. These samples shall become the property of the PWA,
ar
whether or not an order is placed.
at
2 All equipment supplied shall be compatible with the approved traffic signal controllers and
supplied by an approved manufacturer according to the most recent approved list of the
-Q
PWA.
3 Where the supplier cannot provide evidence of his equipment have been previously used
LL
successfully with the above mentioned traffic signal controller, he shall be required to
demonstrate, at his own expense, the compatibility of his equipment.
W
16.3 INSTALLATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

s
en
16.3.1 General
1 It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all traffic signal installation work is
m
conducted by skilled, competent personnel.

e
Si
2 The Engineers approval of any subcontractor or individual personnel in no way relieves the
Contractor of his responsibility to ensure that traffic signal equipment is correctly installed.
3 The Engineer shall reserve the right to inspect and approve all installation practices.
4 Installation of traffic signal equipment shall only be conducted by approved companies taken
from the most recent list prepared by the PWA.
16.3.2 Poles, Gantries and Signal Heads
1 Signal posts and gantries shall be installed onto their prepared foundations, using two
levelling nuts or an appropriate fixing method approved by the Engineer. The pole or gantry
shall be plumbed square, irrespective of the orientation of surrounding features.
2 The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent damage to the pole or gantry's
protective coating, during installation. Where the protection is damaged or breached the
Contractor shall take immediate action to make repairs.
3 Where designated, posts and gantries where necessary shall be painted with an approved
paint, colour grey (BS 381C) before installation of signal heads and push-buttons..
4 Signal heads and push-buttons shall be installed as shown on the contract drawings. Final
positioning and fixing shall not be undertaken without the Engineer’s approval.
5 Signal heads, once fixed, shall be covered with an opaque protective material such that it is
clear to motorists that the signals are not in operation.
16.3.3 Installation of Traffic Signal Controller
1 The Contractor shall install the controller housing in the position defined by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall ensure that the housing is positioned so that when the access doors are
opened to their fullest extent they will not obstruct the sidewalk or cause a danger in any way
to members of the public. The housing shall not be positioned adjacent to the kerb as to
render it liable to damage by vehicles or so that the safety of persons working on the
controller is not endangered.
ar
2 The Contractor shall organise the connection of the electricity supply to the controller housing
at
and any other peripheral equipment requiring an electricity supply by direct liaison with the
-Q
QGEWC (E) Consumer Section. The Contractor shall ensure that the power supply is
contained within its own separate duct, up to the point at which it enters the controller
housing. The electrical supply shall at no point share the same ducts or chambers as the
traffic signal cabling. The Contractor, where necessary, shall be responsible for providing any
LL
housings required for QGEWC apparatus. Where a separate housing is required it shall be
positioned directly adjacent to the controller housing.
W
3 The Contractor shall endeavour to complete as much of the internal wiring of the controller as
s
possible inside his workshop, such that on-site work within the controller housing are kept to
en
a minimum. All external cables terminating within the controller shall be clearly labelled as to
their function, destination and nominal voltage. These cables shall, on entering the controller
m
housing, be clamped and supported such that any stress or strain on the cables themselves
shall not be transmitted to the controllers internal components. Spare or redundant cables
e
entering the controller housing are to be terminated in such a fashion that they do not
Si
interfere in any way with access to the controllers internal components. The conductors of
these cables are to be electrically isolated and sealed against the ingress of moisture.
4 It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide all competent personnel and specialist
equipment to enable the controller to be programmed.
16.3.4 Cabling
1 The Contractor shall install all cables in the ducts as designated. He shall take all reasonable
care to ensure that no undue stress or strain is placed on the cable during installation and
shall adhere to the cable manufacturer’s published data with regard to allowable minimum
radius of curvature. The Contractor shall ensure that duct drawstrings remain in place
subsequent to cable installation.
2 A single dedicated cable shall service each individual traffic signal pole. This cable shall be of
the designated size and shall have a minimum of 10 % spare capacity. On entering the signal
pole the cable shall be firmly anchored to the pole. At least 3 m of spare cable shall be
allowed for within the signal pole, over and above that length which is required to reach the
termination block.
3 Spare or redundant cores within the cable shall be terminated at the termination block and
labelled 'Spare'. The core acting as earth protection shall be connected directly to the body
of the signal pole by means of the pole’s earthing stud. The cable armouring shall not be
used as the protective earth conductor.
4 With the exception of loop cable to loop feeder cable connections, the jointing of cables shall
not be permitted. Where jointing of the cables is permitted, this shall be undertaken using a
suitable jointing kit of an approved type which allows the integrity of the protective earth
conductors to be maintained. Loop cable to loop feeder cable joints shall only be located
within an access chamber.
16.3.5 Circuit Protection and Earthing Requirements
1 The Contractor shall provide protection against dangerous earth-leakage currents by the use
of fuses or excess-current circuit breakers compliant with the QGEWC (E) Regulations for
Electrical Installations. The Contractor shall ensure that all installations shall be such as to
allow for the operation of the protective devices to operate upon the occurrence of a fault
ar
within the time period specified for fixed equipment installations and that all non-current
at
carrying metallic parts shall be connected to the earth terminal in such a manner as to ensure
that a hazardous voltage cannot exist on exposed conductive metalwork. All cabinets, posts
-Q
and other metal hardware comprised by the traffic signalling equipment shall be bonded via
protective conductors to the main earth terminal with an earthing conductor to the main
terminal by a protective conductor.
LL
2 The main earthing terminal or bar shall comply with QGEWC (E) Regulations for Electrical
W
installation and shall be connected to the earthing point provided by the QGEWC (E) with a
copper earthing conductor in accordance with the Regulations. It shall have a minimum
s
cross-sectional area of 6.00 mm2 and shall be green/yellow stripe coded. The earthing
en
conductor is defined as a protected conductor connecting a main earthing terminal or bar of

an installation to an earth electrode of other means of earthing. Where a residual current
circuit breaker is used, the cross sectional area of the earthing conductor shall comply with
m
the requirements of QGEWC (E) Regulations.

e
Si
3 The connection to metalwork shall be made internally to a secure terminal on a part of the
enclosure which is a permanent fixture. The terminal shall be constructed of a material which
will minimise chemical corrosion resulting from contact with the protective conductor or other
metal part. Conductor terminations shall be by the use of soldered or crimped connectors or
screwed terminations, or other approved methods.
4 Earth and other protective conductors shall be selected and installed so that they comply with
the QGEWC (E) Regulations for Electrical Installations, the BS 7430, BS 7671 and the
Regulations for Protective Multiple Earthing where appropriate. All protective conductors
shall be colour coded green/yellow stripe. Where protective conductor is part of a multicore
cable and a green/yellow stripe colour coded core is not available, the Contractor shall
ensure that the protective conductor is adequately identified. Each cable shall enter the
controller housing via a stuffing gland in the gas plinth gland plate. The stuffing gland shall be
so designed as to prevent the diffusion of gas and support the cable. The earth stud of the
cable terminator shall be correctly bonded to the earth bar in accordance with the QGEWC
(E) Regulations, using a 6.00 mm2 conductor (2.50 mm2 for loop feeder cables).
5 The earthing requirements at the head of each traffic signal pole shall be as follows:
(a) the earth terminal of the gland, shall be connected to the earth terminal of the pole
with a protective earth conductor correctly terminated with crimp connectors and
having a minimum cross-sectional area of 6.00 mm2
(b) the protective conductors from each signal head, pedestrian head, push-button unit or
other equipment shall be connected together at the head of each pole and connected
to the earth terminal in the controller housing by means of one dedicated core of the
armoured signal cable servicing that pole
(c) the earth connection at the head of the pole specified in (b) above, shall be connected
to the earth stud of the pole with a bonding conductor having a minimum area of
6.0 mm2 and by means of a crimped connector, or similar
(d) push-button units fixed to a signal pole shall be earthed to the earth stud of the pole
with a separate protective conductor terminated with crimp connectors and having a
minimum cross-sectional area of 6.00 mm2
(e) There shall be electrical connections by means of conductors having a copper
ar
equipment cross-sectional area of not less than 6.00 mm2 between the earthing
at
terminal and all metal structures, metal pipes and other metalwork (not being
metalwork forming part of a telegraphic, telephone or signalling circuit) which
-Q
(i) are, or may reasonably be expected to become, in electrical contact with the
general mass of earth
(ii) are so situated that simultaneous contact may reasonably be expected to be
LL
made by any person with such structures, pipes or other metalwork (or any
metalwork in electrical contact therewith).
W
These connections shall be made as near as practicable to locations where users or

maintenance staff approach the facility.
s
16.3.6 Permanent Electrical Power Supply

en
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for liaison with QGEWC (E) to provide a power supply to
m
the traffic signal controller and shall be responsible for all works required to provide this
e
supply.
Si
2 The electricity supply shall be 240 V AC 50 Hz single phase.
3 The Contractor shall organise, with the approval of QGEWC (E), one of the following earthing
systems:
(a) TN-S System. Where QGEWC (E) will provide an earthing point which affords a
continuous metallic return path to the earth of the supply system. The Contractor’s
earthing conductor shall be connected to this point
(b) TN-C-S System (PME). Where QGEWC (E) will provide a combined neutral earth
supply. The earthing Contractor’s earthing terminal and a lead from the earth terminal
shall be left available for the QGEWC (E) to connect to the incoming supply. A similar
neutral conductor lead shall also be left available for the same purpose
(c) TT System. Where a means of earthing will not be provided by the QGEWC (E) the
earthing terminal will be connected to an effective earth electrode compliant with the
QGEWC (E) Regulations for Electrical installations. Where the TT System is provided
by the QGEWC (E) the Contractor shall install an earth leakage circuit breaker to
comply with the QGEWC (E) Regulations.
4 The Contractor shall ensure that the equipment complies in all respects with the regulations
and requirements of the QGEWC (E).
5 The Contractor shall be responsible for all cable laying and jointing.
6 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to inform the Engineer of the earliest date when
he will be ready for the QGEWC (E) to make the service connections.
7 The Contractor shall supply the equipment to be terminated to the QGEWC (E) service with
phase and neutral conductors of not less than 4 mm2 and earthing conductor of not less than
6 mm2. The QGEWC (E), shall connect the controller conductors and earth conductor to the
terminal provided by the QGEWC (E).
8 The QGEWC (E) cut-out shall incorporate a high breaking capacity fuse carrier and fuse to
BS 88 or BS 1361 of the correct rating. The rating shall be specified by the Contractor to
comply with the type requirements of the QGEWC (E) Regulations. The maximum
permissible earth fault loop impedance shall be those stated in the QGEWC (E) Regulations.
ar
16.3.7 Inductive Loops for Vehicle Detection
at
1
-Q
Slot cutting shall be carried out by a specialist subcontractor. The Contractor shall be
responsible for marking out all slot configurations and shall supervise the work of the
subcontractor. The slot cutting subcontractor shall make arrangements to provide an
adequate water supply to enable him to carry out the necessary works. The approximate
LL
position of inductive loops and route of feeder cables will be as designated. The Contractor
shall specify the loop configurations at each site, the detailed layout of individual loops and
W
the number of turns per loop. This information shall be supplied to the Engineer. When loop
configurations are specified by the Engineer, such information as required will be supplied to
s
the Contractor. In order to obtain a high standard of installation, the Contractor's staff and
en
subcontractors shall be fully briefed by the Contractor and given written instructions
describing the technical requirements of this specification and method of installation. This
m
shall cover depth and preparation of slots, backfilling, jointing, ducting under kerbs, earthing
and commissioning of equipment.
e
Si
2 Subsurface detector housings for loop detection equipment are not acceptable to the
Engineer. Detector housings shall be positioned so as to reduce the possibility of damage in
the event of a road traffic accident and shall not present an obstruction or visual intrusion. In
cases of doubt, the advice of the Engineer shall be sought. Positions of detector housings
shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Where a remote detector housing is used, each one
shall be connected to the controller by 'Twinflex' cable. The cable will be ducted to the
controller unless the Engineer's agreement is obtained to cutting a slot in the carriageway.
Voltages on this cable shall not exceed 50 V AC or 120 V DC whether between conductors or
to earth. The Contractor shall provide two sets of keys to all equipment housing supplied as
initial issue. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing all surplus materials from site
at the completion of the works.
3 The cable specified may in exceptional circumstances be replace with an armoured multicore
cable (i.e.. triple vehicle extensions with speed discrimination) double vehicle extensions with
speed assessment. The cable specified shall be terminated at the controller with a cable
gland or castellated bar approved by the Engineer. The gland shall be bonded to the earth
point using a 4 mm2 flexible earthing cable terminated with crimp connection tags. The
remote end of the cable shall be connected to the plate and 4 mm2 flexible earthing cable
terminated with crimp connection tags or by other means approved by the Engineer. In
addition one core of the armoured cable shall be used as an earth continuity conductor and
shall be bonded to the earth point on the controller and to both the equipment earth and the
metalwork of the housing at the remote end of the cable. The cable specified shall be
provided with a minimum of 25 percent spare conductor capacity (armoured and non-
armoured multicore cables only).
4 The detector shall operate satisfactorily with a feeder up to 100 metres in length. The feeder
is defined as the cable between the loop tails and the detector housing. Where adjustments
are required to sensitivity and presence time, these shall be made during initial setting-up and
no further adjustments shall be necessary. The equipment, including loop and feeder, shall
ar
operate correctly within all carriageways of reasonable condition without any reduction in
at
performance as follows:
(a) air temperature (-10°C to 60°C)

-Q
(b) relative humidity up to 100 % (non-condensing)
(c) carriageway flooded under 1 cm water, or dry
LL
(d) carriageway subjected to continued heavy use by buses and heavy goods vehicles
W
(e) sidewalk and kerbs subjected to misuse by vehicles

(f) feeder assumed to be buried in soil or sand which may be dry or wet
s
en
(g) the detector shall not operate from electrical noise pick-up on the loop or feeders.
5 Slot-cutting operations shall not be conducted in wet weather. Wet weather to be defined as
m
such conditions where the Engineer considers it would be unsafe to carry out slot cutting
operations. Slots shall be cut using a motorised machine fitted with a diamond saw blade.
e
The layout of the loop configuration shall avoid areas of poor reinstatement in the road
Si
surface caused by other roadworks or works. Slots shall be cut at least one metre from any
such disturbance. Slots shall be cut at least one metre from any ferrous objects such as
manhole covers. In concrete road surface, the Contractor shall not cut slots less than 1.5
metres from transverse joints between adjacent concrete sections. The depth of loop slots
shall be (50 + 7.0 n) mm with a tolerance of + 10.0 mm / - 0.0 mm. In concrete surfaces the
depth shall be (25 + 7.0 n) mm with a tolerance of + 5.0 mm / - 0.0 mm where 'n' is the
number of cables and the first figure is the minimum depth of cover. The depth of each slot
shall be checked with a depth gauge along the whole length of the slot. The Contractor shall
ensure that there are no irregularities in the base of the slot. Where an angle more acute
than 13 degrees in formed at the junction of two adjacent loop slots, then the slot junction
shall be truncated with a saw cut at the apex of the junction; i.e., one blade thickness from
the inside edge of the slot corner, and this cut shall be to the same depth as the adjoining
slots. The junction shall not be truncated with a cold chisel. Slots cut for feeder cables shall
be 20 mm wide (core cables 25 mm) with a tolerance of 3 mm, to give a cover of 65 mm in
bituminous surfaces (45 mm in concrete surfaces) with a tolerance of + 10.0 mm / -0.0 mm.
Only one feeder cable shall occupy each slot.
6 The loop feeder cables shall take the most direct route to the indicated cable chamber. This
slot is specified as being 20 mm wide, therefore care shall taken not to obliterate any road
markings in whole or part. In the first instance the most direct route from the loop position to
the kerb line shall be taken. The loop feeder cables shall be joined in the carriageway only
with the approval of the Engineer. The joint slot shall be 10 mm wider and 10 mm longer than
the overall dimensions of the completed joint. The depth of the slot shall be sufficient to give
a minimum 40 mm cover above the joint. The joint slot shall be positioned either at a traffic
lane boundary or at crown of the road so that it is not subjected to the maximum stresses
exerted by road vehicles. Each loop shall be separated from adjacent loops by a minimum of
100 mm. The Contractor's supervisory staff shall check the quality of workmanship before
laying cable and backfilling. All debris and slit shall be cleared from the base of the slot and
the slot blown dry with compressed air before cable laying.
7 For laying loop cables the cable shall be dry before installation. The Contractor shall ensure
that the cable lies evenly in the bottom of the slot, and shall secure the cable in such a
position if necessary. Sharp implements shall not be used to seat the cable in the slot. Loop
tails shall not extend more than 20 metres from the loop before being joined to the feeder
ar
cable. Loop tails shall be twisted. Each twisted tail shall have a dedicated slot to the joint with
at
feeder cable. Loop tails shall normally be joined to the feeder cable within cable inspection
chambers. Cables shall not be bent to a radius of less than 12 times their diameter or less
-Q
than a radius recommended by the manufacturer whichever is the greater. Where cables
enter the sidewalk a small area of carriageway is to be excavated and a uPVC duct laid
through the kerbs for each feeder cable. The duct shall be level with the base of the slot from
LL
which the feeder cable emerges. The excavated area shall be backfilled with fine aggregate
concrete to the duct invert level. The cables shall then be backfilled with compacted fine cold
asphalt and hot oxidised bitumen R85/40. The kerb stone shall be reinstated. Feeder cables
W
in soft verge or beneath sidewalks are to be laid in ducts at a minimum depth of 500 mm
below ground level unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. Feeder cables laid unducted
s
in trenches shall be laid on a 75 mm bed of sand free from stones and other sharp materials
en
with a further 75 mm of similar sand placed over the cable. Where feeder cables are laid
unducted in soft verges, the cable position shall be indicated with a plastic warning tape laid
m
at a depth of 150 mm to 200 mm from ground level and vertically above the cable. The tape
shall be printed with suitable warning message repeated at one metre intervals. Where
e
feeder cables are required to cross French drains or other coarse bed materials in central
Si
reservations, the cable shall be looped and protected with flexible plastic ducting. Ducting is
to be provided by the installation Contractor.
8 Cable joints shall be approved by the Engineer. Feeder cables shall be electrically connected
to the loop tails with insulated crimp connector using a ratchet type of crimping tool. The
Contractor shall ensure that the cable conductor has been correctly crimped by visually
checking the cable and also by applying a vigorous pull test to the cable on either side of the
joint. The electrical connectors shall be encased in a joint approved by the Engineer and the
Contractor shall ensure that the connectors are staggered to avoid the possibility of any short
circuits. The Contractor shall ensure that any instructions issued by the cable joint
manufacturer are provided in writing to his installation and supervisory staff. These
instructions shall form part of this specification. The Contractor shall ensure that the joint is
waterproof before backfilling. With the exception of cable joints between loop and feeder
cables, no other joint shall be permitted in the loop/feeder configuration. Cables shall be
terminated in the controller or detector housing using terminal connection blocks which are
adequate in size for the diameter of conductors used. Screws shall not bear directly onto
conductors, either a protective leaf in the terminal or a crimped pin on the end of the
conductor shall be used.
9 Immediately before backfilling, the Contractor shall ensure that all slots are clean and dry and
that all silt and debris has been removed from the base of the slot. Loop slots shall be
backfilled with a low viscosity epoxy resin, approved by the Engineer, to give a minimum of
10 mm cover above the uppermost cable. The resin specified shall be poured at a viscosity
of between 500 and 1000 pascal seconds. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer
documentary evidence from the resin manufacturer of the temperature necessary to achieve
this viscosity. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer, before epoxy resin operations
commence, that the specialist subcontractor’s on-site equipment is able to raise the epoxy
resin and maintain it at the temperature necessary to achieve the viscosity specified. The
remaining volume of loop slot shall be backfilled with blown grade hot oxidised bitumen to the
level of the road surface. Feeder cable slots shall be backfilled with fine cold asphalt
compacted around the cable. The upper 20 mm of the slot shall be filled with hot oxidised
bitumen. Joint slot shall be backfilled with epoxy resin to a level 10 mm above the completed
joint. The remaining volume shall be filled with hot oxidised bitumen. The hot oxidised
bitumen specified shall be heated to a pouring temperature of 185 °C and shall be poured
from an enclosed container which shall be preheated before use. The fine cold asphalt
ar
specified shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 13108. The asphalt shall be soft and
easily worked when applied, and shall be hand compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
at
Alternative compounds proposed by the Contractor shall be approved by the Engineer.
-Q
10 The contractor shall be responsible in determining the exact location of the loops and shall
supervise the work of the sub-contractor. The sub-contractor shall mark the locations of the
performed inductive loops. Each shall be separated from adjacent loops by a minimum of
LL
100mm and shall be laid on top of the road base or 230mm form the road surface.
W
11 The cable shall be dry before installation. The sub-contractor shall lay the performed
inductive loops and stretch it as per the marked locations. The T-joint of the loops shall be
s
positioned to the nearest chamber/pull box/detector hand hole. The loops shall be fixed by
en
using a clamps and nails to achieve the desired shape
12 The loop wires from the preformed loop to the adjacent chamber/pull box/detector hand hole
m
shall be twisted together into a pair with minimum of three turns per 305mm and encased in
e
polypropylene conduit and/or 2250 psi hydraulic hose between the performed loop and the
Si
adjacent chamber/pull box/detector hand hole. Lead-in conduit shall be 100% injected with
hot asphalt sealant to prevent the entrance of water at the chamber/pull box/detector hand
hole.
13 Asphalt shall be manually laid around the loops to protect it from the pavement
machine/equipment.
14 Upon completion of the installation works, the Contractor shall lay the asphalt on the entire
carriageways by using the approved pavement machine.
15 Each loop shall be tested sequentially by three methods: by megger (measured by mega
ohms), by resistance (in ohms), by inductance (measured in micro henries).
16 In case of existing pavement, a groove shall be cut by using a slot cutting machine. The
frames and home-runs shall be placed into the cuts. The cuts shall be filled with hot melted
asphalt-rubber sealant conforming to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
17 All the installation works shall conform to the manufacturer’s specifications.

16.4 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1 Before delivering a traffic signal controller to site, the Contractor shall arrange a factory
acceptance test in his workshop. The programmed and internally complete controller shall
be connected to a labelled light board capable of simulating all traffic signal aspects
controlled by that particular controller. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment and
devices are available to show that the controller fully complies with operational requirements.
The factory acceptance test shall consist of the following checks:
(a) visual check of internal wiring and controller assembly

(b) operation of green conflict monitor
(c) intergreen times
(d) group times
(e) detector logic (where applicable)
(f) stage to stage change logic
ar
(g) lamp switching.
at
2 All traffic signal equipment shall be commissioned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
-Q
3 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to supply all equipment and personnel required
to commission the traffic signal equipment.
LL
4 On completion of installation, and before commissioning, the Contractor shall undertake the
W
following tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in accordance with the QGEWC (E)
Regulations.
s
(a) visual inspection

en
(b) continuity test of all protective conductors

m
(c) insulation resistance test; insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 megaohms
e
(d) polarity check

Si
(e) earth loop impedance test.
5 Where a residual current circuit breaker is installed, tests in accordance with the QGEWC
(E) Regulations shall be complied with. The Contractor shall provide the equipment
necessary to complete the tests and shall provide all other test equipment to demonstrate
that the installation is compliant.
6 After the traffic signal and controller equipment is installed on site and after it is connected to
all its associated equipment, the Contractor shall arrange for a site acceptance test. The site
acceptance test will recheck all the points covered in the factory acceptance tests and in
addition shall include visual and electrical tests on all posts, gantries, heads, push-buttons
and cabling. The Contractor shall ensure that the area of site covered by the installation
being tested is cleared of all debris, plant and machinery. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the supply of any personnel required to conduct the site acceptance test. The
Contractor shall provide any vehicles required to conduct the site acceptance test. The
Contractor shall ensure that all equipment and devices are available to show that the
controller fully complies with the operational requirements.
7 Each loop and feeder configuration of the vehicle detection system shall be tested as follows
and the results given in a test certificate for the loop installation. This certificate shall include
all pertinent information for the testing. The Contractor shall submit a pro-forma certificate to
the engineer before carrying out the commissioning.
(a) With the loop circuit disconnected from the detector, the impedance to earth of the
two loop and feeder conductors shall be measured at a test voltage of 500V DC
applied for at least one minute. This shall not be less than 10 megaohms. The two
ends of the loop circuit shall be connected together for this test
(b) With the armouring of the feeder cable disconnected from the earth point, the
impedance to earth of the armouring shall be measured at a test voltage of 500V DC
applied for one minute. This shall not be less than 10 megaohms
(c) With the armouring of the feeder connected to the earth point of the equipment
housing, the impedance to earth of the armouring shall be measured. This impedance
shall not be greater than 0.5 ohms
(d) The inductance of the loop and feeder circuit shall be measured. This shall be
ar
comparable with the theoretical value previously supplied to the Engineer
at
(e) The frequency of operation of each configuration shall be measured. Where two loop
-Q
circuits share a common feeder cable their frequency of operation shall be separated
by at least 5 kHz
(f) The Contractor shall adjust the sensitivity and presence time of each detector to the
LL
requirements specified by the Engineer. The Contractor shall demonstrate correct

operation of the detector at the sensitivity specified
W
(g) The Contractor shall ensure that an inductance change caused by vehicles in one
loop shall not induce spurious observations in any adjacent loop system.
s
en
8 Any loop or feeder which fails these tests shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
9 Upon satisfactory completion of the factory acceptance and site acceptance tests, and when
m
the Engineer is fully satisfied that correct installation and adherence to the operational
e
requirements has been attained. The PWA will issue a final commissioning certificate. The
Si
installation, or any part thereof shall not be opened to general traffic until this certificate is
received.
16.5 GUARANTEED MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
16.5.1 General
1 During the initial maintenance period complete record of component failures shall be kept by
the Contractor in order to provide information on the reliability of various components.
16.5.2 Operational Maintenance
1 The Contractor shall provide full operational maintenance coverage for a period of 400 days
subsequent to the issuance of the final commissioning certificate.
2 The Contractor shall use only maintenance contractors approved for this work by the PWA.
3 During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing coverage for
the following:
(a) Replacement or repair and installation of any failed equipment

(b) Daily corrective maintenance
(c) Quarterly maintenance
(i) Check the cycle length, green time, intergreen time and all other signal timing
parameters as given in the timing chart.
(ii) Check the timings of the different signal programmes and test the switch over
them manually and by time clock.
(iii) Test loop detectors for activation and re-tune if necessary.
(iv) Test ELCB and any other circuit breakers.
(v) Replace any items that show significant wear and/or are operating outside of the
manufacturer’s tolerances.
(vi) Test operations of pedestrian push buttons
(vii) Check timing of Flashing Units
(viii) Service controller in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications
ar
(ix) All signal heads, reflectors, optical lenses and backing boards shall be cleaned
(both internally and externally) in accordance with the manufacturer’s
at
specifications
(d) (Bi-annual maintenance - The following works are to be carried out in addition to those
-Q
described in section (c)
(i) All protective earth conductors shall be inspected and tested.
(ii) All lamp fittings and connectors shall be dismantled and cleaned.
LL
(iii) Signal heads shall be checked for correct alignment and all brackets and
clamps tightened.
W
(iv) All electrical connectors are to be checked and cleaned where necessary.
(e) Annual maintenance - The following works shall be carried out in addition to those
described in sections (c) and (d)
s
en
(i) All signal poles and gantries shall be painted and renumbered. The signal poles
and gantries shall be coated with primer, red-oxide, and two coats of colour grey
paint. The paint specification/colour shall be approved by the Engineer.
m
(ii) All inspection chambers shall be cleaned properly.

(iii) Timings for all signals shall be altered as directed by the Engineer at the
e
beginning and end of the month of Ramadan.

Si
(iv) Minor changes to the controller’s operational configuration (Changing of phasing

/staging, green times and intergreen times) as deemed necessary by the PWA’s
traffic signal engineer.
4 The Contractor shall ensure that personnel are available to maintain equipment such that
failed equipment shall be replaced or repaired within four hours of notification of the fault.
Where controller configuration changes are required, the Engineer shall allow a reasonable
period for the Contractor to respond.
5 Failed equipment shall be replaced/repaired within 4 hours of notification of the fault.
6 Where controller configuration changes are required, the Engineer shall allow a reasonable
period for the Contractor to respond.
16.5.3 Emergency Maintenance
1 In the case of accidental damage or 'knock downs' or any other equipment failure deemed to
be outside of the Contractor’s control, shall not be required to take responsibility for repair or
replacement. However it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide the immediate on-
site response to a police or the PWA request.
2 Upon the PWA having effected a remedy to any emergency maintenance requirement, it
shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all repairs or replacements have been
conducted to a standard such that no warranties become invalid.
3 If the Contractor feels that any repair or replacement is not of sufficient standard to maintain
his warranty he shall notify the PWA with 14 days of any such repair or replacement having
been conducted.
16.5.4 Contractor’s Vehicles
ar
1 The Contractor shall arrange a vehicle mounted hydraulic platform with boom and any
additional vehicle for the use of his staff whenever required throughout the maintenance
at
period. -Q
2 The vehicles shall be provided with a flashing amber roof light array.
3 The contractor shall be responsible for any cost associated with the vehicles.
LL
4 The hydraulic platform shall be capable of performing the required vertical and horizontal
W
manoeuvres safely and satisfactorily, including adequate platform capacity and boom
articulation.
s
en
5 The contractor shall gain approval from the Engineer as to the vehicle acceptability prior to
supplying the said vehicle.
m
16.5.5 Contractor’s Equipment

e
Si
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying any regular or special equipment or tools
required for the satisfactory undertaking of the works. In particular this shall include, but not
limited to:
(a) Specialised commission/testing equipment for all the current traffic signal (Siemens,
Futurit, Peek and Tyco) controllers to allow Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) and Site
Acceptance Tests (SAT).
(b) Portable keyboard interfaces to allow interrogation and on-site programming of micro-
processor signal controllers for all the traffic signal systems.
(c) Workshop based aspect simulators to allow for Factory Acceptance Tests.
END OF PART
Part 17: Road Drainage
17 ROAD DRAINAGE.................................................................................................... 2
17.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... 2
17.1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................... 2
17.1.2 References ............................................................................................................... 2
17.1.3 Quality Assurance..................................................................................................... 3
17.1.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling ................................................................................ 3
17.2 DRAINAGE PIPES & PIPELINES ............................................................................. 3
17.3 EXTENDING PIPELINES ......................................................................................... 4
17.4 ROAD GULLIES ....................................................................................................... 4
17.5 MANHOLE COVERS AND GULLY GRATINGS ....................................................... 4
17.6 SOAKAWAYS .......................................................................................................... 5
17.7 SOAKAWAY BOREHOLES ...................................................................................... 6
17.8 TESTING AND CLEANING SURFACE WATER DRAINS ........................................ 7
ar
17.9 TRENCH SOAKAWAYS ........................................................................................... 7
at
17.9.1 General..................................................................................................................... 7
17.9.2 General..................................................................................................................... 7
-Q
17.9.3 Pipe .......................................................................................................................... 7
17.9.4 Geotextile Fabric ...................................................................................................... 8
17.9.5 Single Sized Coarse Aggregate ................................................................................ 8
LL
17.9.6 Catchpit Chambers ................................................................................................... 9

17.9.7 Road Crossings ...................................................................................................... 10
W
17.9.8 Geocellular Stormwater Attenuation / Soakaway Trenches .................................... 10

17.9.9 The maximum installation depth, to base of units, shall normally not exceed the
s
height of Reinstatement above Trenches ............................................................... 10

en
17.9.10 Testing.................................................................................................................... 10
m
17.10 GEOCELLULAR TANKS ........................................................................................ 10

17.10.1 Geocellular Units .................................................................................................... 10
e
17.10.2 Geocellular Tank Arrangement ............................................................................... 10

Si
17 ROAD DRAINAGE
17.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes:
(a) stormwater drainage works draining the road carriageway and directly adjacent areas,
including:
(i) road and other pavement gullies and gully pots
(ii) pipes of minimum 150mm diameter including bedding materials used to connect
gully pots to inspection chambers and intermediate manholes
(b) groundwater drainage using filter drains within the road corridor
ar
(c) soakaways specifically related to road stormwater and groundwater collection and
disposal
at
(d) connections to stormwater drainage systems including culverts, open channels and
-Q
closed stormwater drainage pipelines.
(e) Geocellular attenuation and soakaway trenches and tanks.
LL
This Section
W
Part 18 Geosynthetics
s
Section 5 Concrete
en
Section 8 Drainage Works

Section 20 Drainage Works for Buildings
m
Part 3 External Drainage Works

e
Si
17.1.2 References

BS EN 124 ..................Gully tops & manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas
BS 4962 ......................Plastic pipes and fittings for subsoil drainage

BS 5911 ......................Concrete pipes ancillary concrete products
BS ISO 14654 ............Epoxy coated steel
ISO 9001 ....................Quality assurance in production and installation
BRE digest 365 - Soakaway Design

1 The manufacturer of all manholes and gully gratings shall be accredited to a third party
quality system such as ISO 9001. The supplier shall submit a copy of his accreditation
showing the scope of products covered.
1 All manhole covers and gullies shall be clearly marked with the technical standard of
manufacture, the loading class, the name identification mark of the manufacturer and the
mark of the certification body.
17.2 DRAINAGE PIPES & PIPELINES
1 The materials, manufacture, finish, installation inspection and testing of all drainage pipes
and fittings for roadworks shall comply with the requirements of Part 3 of Section 20, except
as modified by this section of the specification.
ar
2 The type of pipe to be used and the diameter shall be as designated on the drawings or in the
at
project specification.
3
-Q
Pipes may be of vitrified clay, concrete, glass reinforced plastic or UPVC. Each of these pipe
types shall meet the designated requirements for standards, materials, manufacture,
strength, length and dimension of tolerances joints, workmanship and finish, inspection and
basis of acceptance given in Part 3 of Section 20.
LL
4 Unless designated otherwise only one type of pipe shall be used within any individual drain or
W
service duct between consecutive chambers.
5 The Contractor shall ensure that plastic pipes are not subject to deterioration due to
s
exposure to sunlight between manufacture and installation in the ground.

en
6 The excavation, bedding, laying and backfilling around pipelines shall be carried out in
m
accordance with Part 2 of Section 8.

e
7 Soft spots below the bottom of an excavation shall be removed as directed by the Engineer
Si
and the resulting void backfilled with granular material to the approval of the Engineer.
8 Any additional excavation below the bottom of the line required shall be made good with
granular material.
9 The pipes shall be laid at the designated levels and gradients. The deviation in level from
that designated at any point shall not exceed 20 mm unless agreed otherwise by the
Engineer.
10 Pipes shall be laid so that each one is in contact with the bed throughout the length of its
barrel.
11 Parts and fittings shall be examined for damage and shall be cleaned immediately before
laying. Any pipes that are damaged shall not be used in the works.
12 Measures shall be taken to prevent soil or other material from entering pipes and to anchor
each pipe to prevent moving before the work is complete.
13 The pipe bedding material shall be as designated on the project drawings or in the contract
documents.
17.3 EXTENDING PIPELINES
1 Where it is designated that existing drains are to be extended and connected to new drain
chambers or channel, the connections shall be made during the construction of the new
drain. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing of the proposed position for the
connection and the detail of the connection. The position of the connection shall be recorded
by the Contractor on a drawing.
2 The new connecting pipe shall be aligned such that the angle between the existing pipe and
the new pipe is not greater than 60 %.
3 Before entering or breaking into an existing drain, the Contractor shall obtain approval from
the authority responsible for the pipeline.
17.4 ROAD GULLIES
ar
1 The type, position, dimensions and clear openings of gullies will be as designated on the
drawings or in the project specifications.
at
2 Gullies shall be constructed so that no part of the spout or trap has a cross sectional area
-Q
less than 2/3 that of the outlet.
3 Precast concrete gullies shall comply with BS 5911 Part 2.

LL
4 Cast iron and steel gully gratings shall be kerb type gullies complying with BS EN 124 unless
W
otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.

s
5 The upper surface of gully gratings shall be flat except where otherwise designated. Slots in
en
gratings or between gratings and frames shall not be orientated parallel to the direction of
traffic, except where the slots are less than 150 mm long or less than 20 mm wide.
m
6 The frames shall be bedded on a 1 to 3 cement sand mortar.

e
Si
7 Backfilling to precast gullies shall be carried out to formation level with general fill. Where
mechanical compaction is impractical, the backfill shall be concrete of the designated grade.
8 Gully connections shall be constructed of minimum 150mm diameter Unplasticised

PVC (PVC-U) pipes in accordance with BS 4660 or ESVC pipes in accordance with BS EN
295. Where required by the Engineer, these shall be bedded and surrounded with concrete
with movement at the joints permitted by the insertion of compressible material which shall
extend to the outside of the concrete surround.
17.5 MANHOLE COVERS AND GULLY GRATINGS
1 Manhole covers and gully gratings shall be formed from ductile iron with an element of
graphite spheres to produce a molecular structure that gives the required tensile strength and
shock load resistance.
2 Drainage products may be produced from grey iron and shall be hard wearing, inherently
stable and highly resistant to flexing.
3 The type of manhole cover; i.e., square, rectangular, double triangular, single cover shall be
as designated on the drawings.
4 During installation the frames shall be properly bedded and levelled to prevent rocking or any
lateral movement of the frame.
5 Covers and frames shall be kept together as a supplied unit and interchangeability between
various covers and frames shall not be permitted.
6 All castings shall be supplied with a black epoxy coating finish.
7 The tops of all manhole covers shall have a non-slip surface to provide adequate grip.
8 When so designated, the supplier shall arrange for specific lettering to be cast into the top of
the covers. The lettering shall be up to a maximum of 4 letters or digits.
9 Manhole covers and gullies shall meet the requirements of BS EN 124, European Standard
ar
for access covers of gully tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas.
at
10 All manholes covers and gullies supplied shall have been verified as being manufactured to
BS EN 124 by third party assessment body for both quality procedures and technical
-Q
requirements.
11 The manholes’ covers or gullies shall meet one of the loading categories specified in BS EN
LL
124.
W
Table 17.1
s
Loading Categories for Manhole Covers on Gullies

en
Class Loading, Tonnes

m
A 15 1.5
B 125 12.5
e
C 250 25
Si
D 400 40
12 For a manhole entry to sewer and surface / ground water manholes a minimum of 750mm
square clear opening shall be provided. For entry to TSE chambers a minimum of 675mm
square opening shall be provided.
13 For manholes situated in the carriageway a three point cover seating shall be adopted to
prevent any movement or rocking.
14 Where hinged gully gratings are installed the edge with a hinge shall face the traffic to ensure
the cover closes if inadvertently left opened and hit by traffic.
17.6 SOAKAWAYS
1 Soakaways shall be constructed using precast concrete rings. Concrete works shall comply
with the requirements of Section 5 of the specification. Concrete shall be Grade C50 for the
precast concrete rings and the cover slab, using Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement.
2 The cover slab shall be of the dimensions and contain the reinforcement as shown on the
drawings or detailed in the Project Specifications.
3 The structural concrete shall be designed for durability and shall include as a minimum the
following specification:
(a) minimum cover 40mm

(b) all surfaces to be painted with an epoxy protective coating meeting the requirements of
Section 5 Part 14 of the specification. The protective coating shall be factory applied
to precast elements.
4 The soakaways shall have an internal diameter of 1.8 m unless otherwise designated and
shall be of a minimum depth of 3 m unless otherwise designated.
5 The precast concrete rings shall be at least 150 mm thick and shall have three evenly spaced
lifting points.
ar
6 No permanently embedded metal parts shall be left with a cover less than 40 mm from the
at
surface. The precast rings shall be constructed with 50 mm diameter holes at 400 mm
-Q
centres in rows spaced 300 mm apart. The holes shall be alternately offset.
7 The bottom ring shall be founded on insitu blinding concrete 200 mm deep.
LL
8 The soakaway shall be surrounded by granular material which shall infill the whole void
W
between the soakaway and the undisturbed ground around the excavation.
s
9 The granular material shall be laid in tamps in 150 mm layers and shall nowhere be less than
en
225 mm in width.
m
10 The granular material shall be clean durable, sharp-angled fragments roughly cubical or
e
pyramidal in shape, of un-weathered rock of uniform quality graded and tested in accordance
Si
with Tables 17.3 and 17.4, from a source approved by the Engineer.
11 Cast iron covers and frames shall be to BS EN 124 of the designated loading class.
12 Geotextile material lining to the outside of the soakaway excavation shall be in accordance
with Table 17.2 of this Section. The placing and laying of the material shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions and Part 15 of this Section.
13 The geotextile material shall not be left exposed to the sun for a period greater than 7 days
before burying.
17.7 SOAKAWAY BOREHOLES
1 The Contractor shall drill soakaway boreholes at the locations shown on the drawings. Unless
designated otherwise the boreholes shall be 150mm diameter.
2 Boreholes shall be initially taken to a depth of 20 m. At this depth the borehole shall be
thoroughly flushed clean using compressed air and clean water.
3 The borehole shall then be completely filled with clean water and the rate of dissipation
recorded. If the rate of dissipation is found to be less than required by the design criteria
given in BRE digest 365 - Soakaway Design then the bore holes shall be deepened in 5 m
depth increments and flushed until a satisfactory rate of dissipation is recorded. At the
Engineers discretion the rate of dissipation maybe verified by a constant head permeability
test using proprietary equipment to monitor and record the flow rate and the variation in water
level within the borehole.
17.8 TESTING AND CLEANING SURFACE WATER DRAINS
1 Before completing of the road drainage part of the Works the Contractor shall systematically
clean the whole road drainage system, in accordance with Section 8, Part 10, including
gullies, connecting pipes and soakaways. The entire system shall be clear of debris and silts
and in a sound working order.
2 Cast iron covers shall be freed from surfacing materials and pivot points shall be greased.
ar
The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning up any silting of the surface water drainage
system caused by other Contractors working within the Site and the approval of the
at
Employer.
-Q
3 A CCTV survey shall be carried out of the completed system in accordance with Section 8,
Part 10 of QCS.
LL
17.9 TRENCH SOAKAWAYS

W
17.9.1 General
1 Trench soakaways shall be constructed in accordance with the dimensions and grades
s
shown on the Drawings. The trench soakaway consists of a perforated pipe or geocellular
en
units laid in a trench. A geotextile fabric lines the trench or surrounds the geocellular units,
with the remaining voids being filled with single sized coarse aggregate.
e m
2 Reinstatement of trench soakaways shall be in accordance with the Contract drawings.

Si
17.9.2 General
1 Excavation for the trench shall be in accordance to the requirements of Part 3 of this Section.
17.9.3 Pipe
1 The pipe shall be a 300mm UPVC for installations outside the carriageway and 300mm
ESVC for installations within the carriageway, perforated pipe supported on single-size
coarse aggregate bedding. Pipe perforations shall be 10mm diameter in staggered rows
around the circumference of the pipe with a pitch of 40degrees. The longitudinal spacing
between each row of holes shall be 200mm.
2 The manufacture, distribution, laying and jointing of perforated pipes shall generally be in
accordance with the requirements of Section 8.
17.9.4 Geotextile Fabric
1 Filter fabric material lining shall be non-woven geotextile manufactured from UV stabilised,
high tenacity, virgin polypropylene fibres that have been both mechanically and thermally
bonded and in accordance with Table 17.2.
2 The placing and laying of the material shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and Part 15 of this specification.
3 The geotextile material shall not be left exposed to the sun for a period greater than 7 days
before burying.
Table 17.2
Properties of Geotextile Material
Mean Value
Property Test Method Unit (Applied
(a)
Tolerance )
ar
Tensile Strength EN ISO 10319 kN/m 8.0 (-0.8)
at
Tensile Elongation -Q EN ISO 10319 % 60 (±20)
CBR Puncture Resistance EN ISO 12236 N 1500 (-150)

LL
Cone Drop EN ISO 13433 mm 38 (+6)
Pore Size – Mean AOS EN ISO 12956 µm 75 (±20)

W
2
Permeability – (H50) EN ISO 11058 l/m s 90 (-27)
s
2
Weathering 50MJ/m Exposure (1 month EU) EN 12224 % >90
en
Microbiological resistance EN 12225 % No loss

m
Resistance to acids & alkalis EN 14030 % No loss

e
Si
Oxidation at 85 days (100 years) EN 12226 % >90
Thickness @ 2kPa EN ISO 9863-1 mm 1.1

(a)
Note: Applied tolerances are based on 95% Confidence limits
17.9.5 Single Sized Coarse Aggregate
1 The trench shall be filled by granular material, which shall infill the whole width of the trench
between the undisturbed ground trench sides, or between the geocellular units and the
undisturbed ground, as shown on the drawings. The granular material shall be laid and
tamped in 150 mm layers using mechanical plate compactors. For geocellular unit trenches
the backfill shall be brought up in even layers such that the backfill material does not differ by
more than 150mm in level between sides.
2 Where geotextile fabric is required to interface between the trench side walls and subgrade
and the soakaway trench fill material, the width of the geotextile must include sufficient
material to conform to trench perimeter irregularities and for a 150mm top overlap. When
overlaps are required between rolls, the uphill roll should lap a minimum of 500mm over the
downhill roll in order to provide a shingled effect. Care shall be exercised to prevent natural
or fill soil from intermixing with the trench granular material. All contaminated granular fill
shall be removed and replaced with clean material.
3 The granular material shall be clean, durable, sharp-angled fragments roughly cubical or
pyramidal in shape, of un-weathered rock of uniform quality and meet the grading limits in
Table 17.3. The materials source shall be approved by the Engineer based upon the
properties of the materials in accordance with the testing requirements as per Table 17.4.
No reactive carbonate rock or sources with indication of local ground water contamination
shall be used.
Table 17.3
Grading Limits for Granular Material
BS sieve size (mm) % passing by weight
37.5 100
20 60 - 90
ar
14 5 - 30
at
10 2 - 10
5
-Q 0-2
Table 17.4
Grading Limits for Granular Material
LL
Item
Requirement Test Methods Permissible limits
W
No.
1 Grading BS EN 933-1 Table 17.3

s
en
2 Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C142 1% max
3 Lightweight pieces ASTM C123 0.5% max

m
4 Water absorption (SSD) ASTM C128/127 2.0% max

e
Si
5 Shell content BS EN 933-7 3% max
6 Soundness (5 cycles by MgSO4) ASTM C88 15% max
7 Loss by Los Angeles abrasion ASTM C131/C535 30% max
17.9.6 Catchpit Chambers
1 Catchpit chambers shall be constructed to the dimensions and at the spacing shown on the
drawings.
2 Chambers shall consist of rectangular precast concrete sections with internal dimension 800
x 1500mm. All concrete works shall comply with the requirements of Section 5 of the
specification. Concrete shall be Grade C50. Sulphate Resisting Cement shall be used.
Chambers shall also conform in all respects to the requirements for surface water drainage
manholes in Section 8.
3 All surfaces to be painted with an epoxy protective coating meeting the requirements of
Section 5 Part 14 of the specification. The protective coating shall be factory applied to
precast elements.
17.9.7 Road Crossings
1 Where the trench soakaway crosses a road then non-perforated pipe shall be used extending
1.0 meters beyond the road kerb line.
17.9.8 Geocellular Stormwater Attenuation / Soakaway Trenches
1 Loads on modular geocellular unitsThe permanent vertical loads to be carried by the units
shall be determined by the designer
(a) Lateral loads

(b) Maximum installation depth
17.9.9 The maximum installation depth, to base of units, shall normally not exceed the height
ar
of Reinstatement above Trenches
at
1 Reinstatement material above the trenches shall be of suitable fill, cement bound granular
-Q
material, foamed concrete pavement materials or asphalt, or as appropriate in accordance
with the Contract drawings, and shall be constructed in accordance with QCS Section 6.
LL
17.9.10 Testing
W
1 On completion of each length of trench soakaway the Contractor shall carry out an infiltration
test. The test shall be carried between completed catchpit chambers. The 2 No. upstream
outlet pipes within the catchpit chamber shall be sealed and the chamber filled with water to a
s
minimum depth of 1.5 metres. The depth of water shall be recorded each hour for the first
en
twelve hours of the test and subsequently at time intervals as directed by the Engineer.
m
2 The Contractor shall record the results of the test on a standard proforma and present these
to the Engineer on completion.
e
Si
17.10 GEOCELLULAR TANKS
17.10.1 Geocellular Units
1 Geocellular units used to form storm water attenuation tanks and soakaway tanks shall be in
accordance with clause 17.9.8.
17.10.2 Geocellular Tank Arrangement
1 Locations for geocellular tanks

Geocellular tanks made up of geocellular units are suitable for installation in the following
locations:
(a) Public open spaces: beneath landscaped areas and paths. The landscaping scheme
for the park shall be considered when assessing the loads upon the tank.
(b) The vehicular access to the tank shall be restricted so as to exclude large vehicles, in
excess of the design vehicle load, from the area above the tank.
2 Loads on modular geocellular units

The design of tanks constructed using modular geocellular units shall:-
(a) take account of all applied loads, including accidental loading

(b) be based on appropriate laboratory tests
(c) use appropriate factors of safety
(d) analyse all appropriate limit states (or failure modes)
The determination of the loads to be carried by the geocellular units shall be determined in
accordance with the requirements of BD 31/01.
3 Permanent loads.
4 Accidental loads
The risk of accidental loading occurring shall be assessed in the design process. Public
ar
parks may be occasionally inadvertently trafficked by HGVs and landscaped area can be
used to park cars. Hard paved area shall be assumed liable to support such occasional
at
accidental loading and geocellular tanks shall be designed to support accidental loading
-Q
without risk of collapse.
LL
Location Risk
Landscaped area in Specialist vehicles used for maintenance of geocellular tank and
W
public park any separation system upstream of the tank

Illegal parking of private vehicles
s
Movement of delivery vehicles to kiosks in parks

en
Large vehicles used for routine maintenance within park

m
Specialist vehicles used for erection / maintenance of lighting

systems
e
Erection of marquees / tents / stages / portable cabins for public

Si
events
Large vehicles delivering equipment for public events
Cranes for installation of equipment
Generators used for public events
Planned parking of private vehicles during public events
Access for emergency vehicles – fire engines
If the tank has not been designed to carry accidental loading then special precautions may be
required to prevent it occurring. In public parks, the area above a tank shall be fenced off or
have other barriers / landscaping to prevent vehicle access. Warning signs shall be provided
to state that there is an area with limited load bearing capacity and restricted access for
vehicles.
The location of the tank and any loading restrictions shall be clearly identified in the operation
and maintenance manual for any facility.
5 Lateral loads
The lateral loads on the units due to earth and water pressure shall be assessed and allowed
for by the designer in accordance with the requirements for the design of retaining walls
given in BS 8002:1994.
6 Flotation or uplift
Where the tank system is located below the water table, the uplift force shall be resisted by
the dead weight of fill above the tank. Other surcharges that are not permanent shall not be
included in the assessment.
The minimum factor of safety against flotation shall be 1.25.
7 Minimum cover
The minimum cover to units shall be as follows:
ar
Landscaped areas: a minimum of 1.0m to allow for suitable planting over the tank.
at
The design of landscaping should be undertaken at the same time as the design of the tank
-Q
so that the impact of tree roots can be considered. Trees should not be located closer than
the canopy width at mature height from the tank. Trees should not be planted directly over a
tank or in such a position where maintenance work would require the removal of the tree.
LL
8 Maximum installation depth

W
The maximum installation depth, to base of units, shall normally not exceed the height of
three units, plus the cover as assessed in Sub-Clause 15.
s
en
9 Limit state design

m
Modular geocellular tanks shall be designed as structural components, using limit state
structural design theory in accordance with Section 4.1 of CIRIA Report C680 and BD 31/01.
e
The design philosophy shall follow the requirements for geotechnical design practice as
Si
described in Eurocode 7 (BS EN 1997-1:2004).
END OF PART
Part 18: Geosynthetics
18 GEOSYNTHETICS ........................................................................................ 2
18.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL GEOSYNTHETICS ........................ 2

18.1.1 Scope 2
18.1.2 References 2
18.1.3 Submittals 3
18.1.5 Guarantees and Warranties 4
18.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR GEOTEXTILES ....................................................... 4
18.2.2 Drainage Applications 5
18.2.3 Earthworks Applications 6
18.3 GEOGRIDS ................................................................................................... 7
ar
18.3.1 General Requirements for Geogrids 7
18.3.2 Material Requirements for Geogrids 8
at
18.3.3 Installation of Geogrids -Q 9
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
18 GEOSYNTHETICS
18.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL GEOSYNTHETICS
18.1.1 Scope
1 This part of the specification covers the use of geotextiles and geogrids for the;
(a) reinforcement of unbound aggregates for roads, hard standing and airfield pavements
(b) reinforcement of embankment foundations over soft or weak soils
(c) reinforcement of steep earthwork fills
(d) reinforcement of retaining walls and bridge abutments
(e) repairs to earthworks embankment failures and landslides
(f) for erosion control of slopes
ar
(g) for subsoil and sub-base drainage.
at
2 Related Sections and Parts: -Q
This Section
Part 3 Earthworks
LL

18.1.2 References
W
1 The following Standards and other documents are referred to in this part:
s
ASTM D 751 ...............Test Methods for Coated Fabrics

en
ASTM D 5034 .............Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics
(Grab Test)
m
ASTM D 5035 .............Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics
e
(Strip Method)
Si
ASTM D 4533 .............Test Method for Trapezoidal Tearing Strength of Geotextiles
BS 8006......................Code of practice for strengthened/reinforced soils and other fills

BS 2782......................Method of testing plastics
BS 3502......................Symbols for plastics and rubber materials
BS 4618......................Recommendations for the presentation of plastic design data
BS EN ISO 10321 ......Geosynthetics
DIN 54307 ..................CBR Test

DIN 53854 ..................Weight Test
DIN 53855 ..................Thickness Test
ISO 9001 ....................Quality Management and Quality Assurance Standards
Published Document (PD) 6533, Guide to Methods for Assessing the Durability of
Geotextiles, British Standards Institute.
18.1.3 Submittals
1 The manufacturer shall submit comprehensive test results for the geosynthetic for the
designated tests, which shall clearly indicate whether the values are mean values measured
in current production or minimum values which the property does not fall below.
2 The manufacturer’s submittal shall clearly state:
(a) the type of material, (whether a polyethylene, propylene or other)

(b) its structure whether (a monofilament, multifilament or other)
(c) the element of manufacture by one or combination of the following processes:
(i) Heat bonding.
(ii) Chemical resin bonding
(iii) Mechanical bonding.
3 If the Contractor wishes to propose a material that has been tested to alternative standards,
ar
the Contractor shall submit correlation tests showing the comparable values of the two test
methods. These test results shall be comprehensive giving full details of the sample
at
conditioning, preparation, method of test and criteria for assessment.
4
-Q
The manufacturer shall submit comprehensive information of previous applications of the
material in similar conditions and environments. This information shall include the project
name, contract details, type/grade of material used, quantity of material used, name of the
LL
contract, client, consultant, and main contractor.

W
1 The geotextile shall be supplied by a manufacturer who is certified to the ISO 9001. The
s
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a copy of the ISO 9001 certificate that clearly states
en
the scope of the certification.

m
2 The geotextile shall be supplied by a manufacturer who provides technical assistance on the
suitability for the application and installation for the material. For the initial use of the material
e
on site, the Contractor shall arrange for the technical representative of the manufacturer to
Si
be present to demonstrate the correct use of the material.
3 Where feasible the jointing of geosynthetics shall be as prefabricated joints manufactured

under factory controlled conditions. Joints made during the execution of the work shall be
kept to a minimum.
4 Joints shall be tested by the same test methods used for the main material.
5 All joints used in permanent structures designed to carry loads shall be tested in accordance
with BS EN ISO 10319 Part 1 or BS EN ISO 10321.
6 In situations where relatively small tensions are developed and, if permitted by the Engineer
overlapping joints may be used. These joints shall not be used in the primary tensile direction
of reinforced soil structures but can be in secondary tensile directions only.
7 Joints where geotextiles are sewn together shall be with one of the methods showing in
figure 5 of BS8006. These joints shall meet the performance characteristics shown in Table
8 BS8006.
8 Prior to delivery of the material to site the Contractor shall submit a sample of a sawn joint.
9 Bodkin joints shall have sufficient cross sectional area and strength to avoid excessive
deformation. A bodkin joint shall not be so large so as to distort the material causing stress
concentrations, bodkin joints shall be pretensioned prior to loading to reduce joint
displacement as the components lock together.
10 Any cuts, tears, splits and perforations to geosynthetics during installation shall be made
good. The method of remedial work shall be prepared and proposed by the Contractor for
11 The geosynthetics shall be suitable for use in the ambient soil temperature in the State of
Qatar.
12 Geosynthetics that are able to ravel shall be heat treated or bonded with an adhesive tape at
the cut. The proposed method of sealing the edges of geotextiles shall be proposed by the
Contractor and shall fully identify the geotextile material, type of scene, stitch configuration,
ar
stitch density, sowing thread and sowing machine to be used.
at
18.1.5 Guarantees and Warranties -Q
1 The Contractor shall submit a ten-year guarantee for the geotextile material and the
workmanship. The guarantee shall be worded to reflect the required performance of the
material and shall be approved by the Engineer.
LL
18.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR GEOTEXTILES

W

s
en
1 All geotextiles shall be supplied in manageable roll or unit sizes and shall be robust enough
to withstand handling and any treatment received during the installation process.
m
2 The geotextile shall comply with the minimum properties for geotextile serviceability in Table
e
18.1 below. The Engineer will direct as to the category that the geotextile shall meet; i.e., very
Si
high, high, moderate or low.

Table 18.1
Minimum Properties for Geotextile Service Ability
Very
Property High Moderate Low
High
Grab Strength ASTM D 5034 1200 800 600 400

Puncture Strength Modified ASTM D-751/3787, N 500 340 180 135
Burst Strength 3.0 2.0 1.5 1.0
Trapezoidal Tear ASTM D-4533 340 225 180 135
These are the minimum required values below which no test result on production material
should fall.
3 The Engineer may require the Contractor to carry out tests to different standards, in addition
to the test methods designated above or in the following clauses:
(a) the manufacturer’s recommendations concerning the installation process shall be

strictly adhered to
(b) all geotextiles shall be suitable for use in the environmental conditions in the State of
Qatar
(c) geotextiles shall be resistant to deterioration on degradation from acids alkalis,
bacteria, brackish or saline water. The manufacturer shall submit comprehensive
results of tests carried out to demonstrate the durability of the materials under such
conditions. These tests shall involve checking the strength properties of the material
before and after prolonged exposure to typical groundwater conditions in the State of
Qatar
(d) all geotextiles shall be protected from direct sunlight by storing inside the building or
covering with heavy tarpaulins. Geotextiles shall not be exposed to direct sunlight for
a duration longer than 48 h
ar
(e) joints in Geotextiles shall be sewn where load transfer is required
at
-Q
18.2.2 Drainage Applications
1 Geotextiles for drainage applications shall be needled polypropylene and meet the
LL
performance specifications given in Table 18.2. The performance shall be assessed based
on regular tests on the production material. Unless a permitted variation is stated in Table
W
18.2, the mean test values shall meet the values in the Table.
s
en
Table 18.2
Performance Specifications for Geotextiles for Drainage Applications
e m
International Classification
1 2 3 4
Si
According to CBR Test
CBR test (DIN 54307)
mean value 10 % 780 1335 2695 4400

mean value minus standard deviation
10 % 700 1200 2450
deformation % 30 50 60 65
Tensile strength (ASTM D 5035)
longitudinal direction kN/m 10 % 3 7 12 25
longitudinal direction kN/m 10 % 3 8 14 35

International Classification
1 2 3 4
According to CBR Test
elongation at rupture % 35/45 50/60 45/55 90/65
Fall cone test hole diameter BS EN ISO

50 32 18 6.5
10319
Water permeability at 2 kPa mech. load

-2 -2 -2 -2
permeability coefficient cm/s 9 x 10 8 x 10 13 x 10 15 x 10
at 10 cm water column l/secm 30 %

2
150 90 80 45
ar
Pore size (unvibrated)
at
d 50%
-Q80 60 45 30
d 90% 110 85 65 40
LL
2
Weight DIN 53854 g/m 100 140 250 500
W
s
en
Thickness DIN 53855 mm 0.6 0.95 1.5 3.4

e m
2 The manufacturer shall clearly identify to which international classification category the
Si
geotextile conforms according to the CBR test.
3 The pore size of the geotextile shall be small enough to prevent the significant loss of soil
particles from the retained soil, yet have adequate permeability to allow water transmission
normal to the plain of the geotextile.
4 The manufacturer shall submit test results that demonstrate the ability of the geotextile to
avoid clogging during water flow due to fine particles. Test results for the US Corps of
Engineers gradient ratio test or similar type of test shall be submitted. The test shall be
carried out using soil of the type where the geotextile is to be installed. Gradient ratios
derived from the test shall be less than 3.
18.2.3 Earthworks Applications
1 Geotextiles for earthworks reinforcement or base use shall be woven polyester multi-filament
or multi-filament fabrics with a high rupture strength and low axial strain. The geotextile shall
have an adequate high tensile strength in all directions to resist loading imposed by uneven
filling.
2 The geotextile shall possess the strength for the required design life with minimal increase in
strain over time. The average geotextile strain shall be limited to 5 %.
3 Where installed between a sub-base and the underlying soil, the geotextile shall prevent the
granular material being pressed into the subsoil and also prevent an intrusion of fines from
subgrade into the sub-base.
4 The water permeability of the geotextile shall prevent build up of water pressure under the
separation layer. The short- and long-term permeability of the geotextile must be equal to or
greater than that of the subsoil. The geotextile must not become blocked.
5 The geotextile shall possess high puncture resistance and a high tearing resistance.
6 Where used as base stabilisation for embankments the type of construction equipment used
for spreading and compacting initial fill layers shall be suitable so as to avoid damage to the
geotextile. The initial layer of fill placed on the geotextile shall be free from sharp angular or
pointed material that may puncture the geotextile.
ar
at
7 Trucks shall not be permitted to drive over the geotextile. The laying of the material shall be
co-ordinated to ensure that trucks do not damage the material.
-Q
18.3 GEOGRIDS
LL
18.3.1 General Requirements for Geogrids

W
1 The geogrid shall be identified as either uniaxial for single dimension loading or biaxial for
two dimensional loading.
s
2 The design of all geotextiles or geogrid applications shall be based on an appropriate in soil
en
temperature for the state of Qatar.

m
3 The type of geogrid to be used shall be as shown on the drawings or as described elsewhere
in the contract documents.
e
Si
4 The type of polymer used in the manufacture of the geogrid shall be clearly stated.
5 The design shall take into account any possible damage to the material during site
installation and a factor shall be introduced into the design.
6 Prior to installing the geosynthetic the Contractor shall prepare a construction trial outside of
the permanent works. The construction trial shall utilise similar ground conditions from
materials and other factors as the permanent works.
7 If directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall arrange for geotechnical investigation to be
carried out in the area where the geosynthetics are to be installed. The range and details of
the tests and investigations to be performed shall be directed by the Engineer.
18.3.2 Material Requirements for Geogrids
1 Geogrids shall be manufactured from a continuous sheet of polyethylene or polypropylene

which is punched with a regular pattern of holes. The sheet shall be heated and stretched so
that randomly orientated long chain molecules are drawn into an order and align state to
increase tensile strength and tensile stiffness.
2 The bars or ribs of the geogrid transverse to the direction of primary loading shall provide a
series of bearing points or anchors such that stress is transferred to the grid by surface
friction and also interaction.
3 The ribs of the geogrid in both the longitudinal and transverse direction shall be
manufactured to a near vertical face to provide good bearing surface for interlocking fill
particles.
4 Geogrids shall be resistant to deterioration by aqueous solutions of acids, alkalis and salts,
petrol, and diesel fuel.
ar
5 Geogrids shall not be susceptible to hydrolysis, environmental stress, cracking or micro
at
biological attack. -Q
6 The manufacturer shall supply test results for load against strain for the material identifying
all test conditions including strain rate and temperature of materials tested and test method.
LL
7 The Contractor shall submit full technical details of the geogrid proposed for use in the works.
These details shall include the following:
W
(a) grid dimensions

s
(b) thickness of longitudinal and transverse ribs

en
(c) strength of the material determined as stress strain, at strains of 2 and 5% both
(d) transverse and longitudinally in accordance with BS EN ISO 10319
m
(e) weight in kilograms per metre squared for material

e
(f) the supplied roll of dimensions

Si
(g) the minimum amount of carbon black tested in accordance with BS 2782 Part 4
(h) the approximate peak strain , expressed as a percentage
(i) the creep of the material under load determined in accordance with BS EN ISO 10319
for strain shall not exceed 10%
(j) the cross sectional shape of the ribs and of the rib joints.
All test results shall be expressed as a lower 95% conference limit in accordance with ISO
2602.
8 The Contractor shall submit test results for the durability of geogrids. Tests shall be in
accordance with PD 6533, - Guide To Methods for Assessing the Durability of Geotextiles.
9 The Contractor shall submit laboratory test results for prolonged exposure tests at similar
temperatures.
10 For each batch or delivery of the geosynthetic the Contractor shall submit the production
quality control test results shall be clearly related to batches delivered to site.
18.3.3 Installation of Geogrids
1 Prior to placing geogrids the Contractor shall prepare a detailed method statement for the
sequence of operations.
2 The methods employed shall ensure that the geosynthetic does not suffer deterioration
during placing and that any joints are formed effectively.
3 The handling and placement and installation of geogrids shall be carried out strictly in
4 Where the geogrid has been protected by a wrapping resistant to ultraviolet lights attack no
further protection against sunlight is necessary.
5 For geogrids, jointing shall be by a bodkin whereby two overlapping sections are coupled
together using a bar passed through the aperture of the grid. Joints shall be formed at the
highest mechanical and durability efficiency possible.
ar
6 If necessary the Contractor shall construct a temporary access road to the site location at a
at
convenient location close to the works, the Contractor shall prepare a clean working platform
-Q
in storage area to accommodate geosynthetic materials.
7 The geogrid shall extend across the full width of the embankment or area being treated in
one continuous piece and no part bits of rolls shall be used. This shall be accommodated by
LL
increasing the lap lengths.

W
8 Prior to installation of the geogrid , the site shall be cleared in accordance with part 2 of this
specification
s
en
9 Before placing geogrid any abrupt changes in ground profile should be levelled.
10 Any regulating layer of fill placed shall not impair the vertical hydraulic conductivity of the
m
natural ground.
e
11 Geogrids supplied in rolls shall be supported at a minimum of 2 points to prevent excessive

Si
bending unless a central steel tube is used for support.
12 Site handling of geogrids shall ensure that damage to the product such as surface abrasions,
splitting, notching or tearing is prevented.
13 The installation of the geogrid shall be consistent with the direction of major stress.
END OF PART
19 MISCELLANEOUS ........................................................................................ 2
19.1 STONE PITCHING ........................................................................................ 2

19.1.1 Scope 2
19.1.2 References 2
19.1.3 Submittals 2
19.1.4 Materials 2
19.2 GABIONS & PROTECTION MATTRESS ...................................................... 3
19.2.1 Scope 3
19.2.2 References 3
19.2.4 Specific Requirements for Gabions 5
19.2.5 Specific Requirements for Protection Mattress 5
ar
19.3 BOLLARDS .................................................................................................... 6
at
19.3.1 Scope -Q 6
19.3.2 References 6
19.3.3 Concrete Bollards 6
19.3.4 Steel Bollards 7
LL
19.4 RUMBLE STRIPS .......................................................................................... 7

19.4.1 Scope 7
W

19.4.3 Construction 7
s
en
19.5 SPEED CONTROL HUMPS .......................................................................... 8

19.5.1 Scope 8
m
19.5.2 General 8
19.5.3 Construction of Speed Humps 9
e
Si
19 MISCELLANEOUS
19.1 STONE PITCHING
19.1.1 Scope
1 Stone pitching slope treatment shall consist of the placement and grouting of stone pitching
on slopes at the designated locations or at the locations directed by the Engineer to the
designated lines, grades, thickness and cross-sections or as directed by the Engineer.

This Section
Part 3 Earthworks
19.1.2 References
1 The following standards are referred to in this Subpart:
ar
AASHTO T96 .............Resistance to Abrasion by Use of the Los Angeles Machine
at
-Q
BS 812 Part 2 .............Testing Aggregates - physical properties
BS 1881......................Methods of testing concrete
LL
19.1.3 Submittals
W
1 Samples of the stone to be used shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before
any stone is placed. These samples shall be kept on site and used for reference purposes for
the quality control of delivered material during the work.
s
en
19.1.4 Materials
m
1 Stone for pitching shall be hard, sound, durable, erosion resistant rock or cobbles.
e
2 The nominal weight of the stones shall be between 3 to 4 kg (corresponding to a size of

Si
about 240mm x 140mm x 100mm). The maximum weight of the stones shall be between 32
kg (corresponding to a size of about 420mm x 230mm x 200mm).
3 Tests for specific gravity and absorption, shall be determined in accordance with BS 812 part
2 Testing Aggregates - physical properties. The minimum apparent specific gravity shall be
2.5 and the maximum absorption shall be 3 %.
4 The stone shall not have an abrasion loss greater than 45 % when subjected to five hundred
(500) revolutions in a Los Angeles Abrasion Machine in accordance with AASHTO T96.
5 The size and shape of the stones shall be such to allow for proper placement. The widths of
the stone shall be not less than one and one-half times their respective thickness and lengths
of not less than two times their respective widths.
19.1.5 Installation
1 The bed upon which the stones are to be placed shall be excavated to the designated grades
and lines or as directed by the Engineer.
2 Prior to commencing any stone pitching operations the Contractor shall prepare a trial laying
of not less than 2 m by 2 m using the materials and methods proposed for the work. The trial
laying shall establish the aesthetic appearance of the work and shall be used for comparison
purposes for acceptance of the final work.
3 A footing trench shall be excavated along the toe of the slope as designated or as directed by
the Engineer. All footing trenches and excavations shall be approved by the Engineer before
placement of stones or concrete.
4 Subgrade or base shall be firm and well compacted and approved by the Engineer. A 50 mm
thick layer of mortar shall be laid on the subgrade as bedding for the stones.
5 Stones shall be placed so as to provide a minimum number of voids; larger stones shall be
placed in the footing trench and on the outside surface of the slope. The flattest face of the
stone shall be laid uppermost parallel to the slope. Spaces between larger stones shall be
filled with the smaller stones.
6 The surfaces of the stone shall be cleaned of adhering dirt and clay and shall be moistened
immediately prior to grouting.
ar
7 The space between stones of stone pitching shall be filled with mortar consisting of one part
at
Portland cement and three parts of fine aggregate, and one-fifth part of hydrated lime with
sufficient water to produce a workable mix as approved by the Engineer.
-Q
8 Sand and cement shall comply with the requirements of Section 5. The compressive strength
of the mortar shall not be less than 15 MPa when tested in accordance with BS 1881 Part
LL
108.
9 Immediately after placing, the mortar shall be spaded and rodded into place with suitable
W
spades, trowels or other approved method. All the voids between stones shall be completely
filled.
s
en
10 The exposed surface of the rocks shall project not less than 1 cm and not more than 4 cm
above the mortar surface. The mortared stone pitching shall be cured by an approved
method for a minimum period of four days. Immediately after the expiration of the curing
m
period, the exposed surfaces shall be cleared of all curing mediums.

e
11 Joints will be provided at a maximum interval of 12 m. Joints shall comprise a gap in the
Si
stone pitching of 15 mm. The method of forming the gap shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
19.2 GABIONS & PROTECTION MATTRESS
19.2.1 Scope
1 This work shall consist of supplying, building and placing of stone-filled gabions or protection
mattress as slope or watercourse channel protection.

This Section
Part 3 Earthworks
19.2.2 References
1 The following standards are referred to in this Subpart:

BS EN 10244..............Testing zinc coatings on steel wire and for quality requirements
BS EN ISO 1461.........Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles

BS 1052......................Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes
BS 1722 Part 16 .........Organic powder coating to be used as a plastics finish to components
and mesh
ASTM G152 and G153-----Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc

Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
1 Gabion boxes and protection mattress shall be made of a hexagonal woven mesh of double
twisted hot dip galvanised steel wire. The nominal mesh size shall be 80mm x 100mm.
Details of type of mesh proposed for use shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
2 Wire shall be coated with a minimum thickness of 0.55 mm of dark green or black PVC
complying with BS 1722 Part 16 Organic powder coating to be used as a plastics finish to
components & mesh.
ar
3 Wire shall be capable of resisting the effects of immersion in sea water, exposure to
at
ultraviolet light and abrasion, when tested for a period not less than 3000 h in accordance
with ASTM G152 and G153. -Q
4 The cages of gabion panels and protection mattress panels shall be selvedged to prevent
unravelling of the mesh. Steel wire core used for selvedges shall have a nominal diameter of
not less than 3.0 mm. Lacing wire shall have a nominal diameter of not less than 2.2 mm for
LL
the wire core. Wire for selvedges and lacing shall otherwise comply with the same
specification for the wire used in the mesh.
W
5 Non-metallic material such as extruded polypropylene for gabion boxes may be proposed, for
the Engineer's approval. Samples and manufacturer's certificates shall accompany the
s
proposal. The Contractor shall demonstrate that non-metallic materials are suitable for use in
en
the climatic conditions of Qatar.

m
6 Gabion and protection mattress dimensions shall be as designated. A tolerance of 5 % on

width and height, and 3 % on length shall be allowed.
e
Si
7 Gabions and protection mattress shall have diaphragms at 1 m centres.
8 Wire used in the fabrication of the gabion and protection mattress shall be mild steel to BS
1052 having an average tensile strength, before coating, of 380 to 500 MPa. The core wire
diameter shall be 3.0 mm before galvanising. Galvanising shall comply with BS EN 10244.
9 Non-metallic gabion and protection mattress cages of proprietary type shall be constructed
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
10 All the fixing and binding wires shall be coated with PVC layer complying with BS 1722 Part
16.
11 All Gabions and mattresses shall be laid over a layer of geotextile membrane Grade 3000 at
all times.
19.2.4 Specific Requirements for Gabions
1 Stones for gabion filling shall be hard, sound, durable and highly resistant to erosion. The
stone size distribution in each individual box shall be as shown in Table 16.1:
Table 16.1
Stone Size Distribution of Gabions
Size of Stones mm % of Total (by number)
80 - 125 7 maximum
125 - 200 88 maximum
200 - 250 5 maximum
ar
2 Gabions shall be placed and built to the designated lines, levels and patterns on a prepared
horizontal foundation surface, excavated as required and compacted as directed by the
at
Engineer.
3
-Q
Gabion cages shall be securely wired together at comers and cages, and where there is
more than one course of gabions, the upper course cages shall be laced to the lower course.
Before filling, the cage shall be in its permanent position and laced to adjoining previously
filled cages.
LL
4 Stones shall be packed by hand inside the cages as tight as practicable with the minimum of
W
voids. Tie wires shall be fixed inside the compartments and the units tensioned in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
s
5 The cages shall be overfilled with stones to allow for subsequent settlement and the lid laced
en
down with binding wire to the top of each of the four sides and to the top of the diaphragm
panels.
m
19.2.5 Specific Requirements for Protection Mattress

e
Si
1 The material shall be supplied as a large sheet with partition panels at 1 m centres to form a
cellular structure with the sheet turned up to form the sides. A separate sheet shall form the
lid.
2 The cages of protection mattress panels shall be selvedged to prevent unravelling of the
mesh. Steel wire core used for selvedges shall have a nominal diameter of not less than 3.0
mm. Lacing wire shall have a nominal diameter of not less than 2.2 mm for the wire core.
Wire for selvedges and lacing shall otherwise comply with the same specification for the wire
used in the mesh.
3 Stones for protection mattress filling shall be hard, sound, durable and highly resistant to
erosion.
4 The stone size distribution in each individual box shall be dependent on the design thickness
of the mattress as shown on the contract drawings.
5 The protection mattress shall be a special type of rectangular gabion with a large plan area to
thickness ratio that is divided into compartments by partition panels fixed to the base.
6 The thickness of the protection mattress, the installation slope and the panel size shall be as
designated. The Contractor may elect to use a manufacturer’s standard size of mattress that
is thicker than that designated.
7 Protection mattress shall be placed and built to the designated lines, levels and patterns on a
prepared foundation surface, excavated as required and compacted as directed by the
Engineer.
8 Protection mattress cages shall be securely wired together at comers and cages. Before
filling, the cage shall be in its permanent position and laced to adjoining previously filled
cages. Several assembled units should be placed in position and wired together at their
edges with the wire passed continuously through each mesh in turn with a double turn at
every second mesh.
9 Stones shall be packed by hand inside the cages as tight as practicable with the minimum of
voids. Tie wires shall be fixed inside the compartments and the units tensioned in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
19.3 BOLLARDS
ar
at
19.3.1 Scope
1
-Q
Short metal or precast concrete bollards for traffic control in roads or pedestrian areas.
2 Related Sections
LL
Section 5 Concrete
19.3.2 References
W
1 The following standard is referred to in this Part:

s
BS EN ISO 1461 ........Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles.
en
19.3.3 Concrete Bollards

m
1 The use of cast in-situ concrete bollards will not be permitted.

e
Si
2 Precast concrete bollards shall be constructed with the dimensions and details shown in the
drawings. The surface finish and colour of the bollards shall be as shown in the drawings, in
the Project Specification, per the designated details or as directed by the Engineer.
3 All concrete and steel materials and procedures for the precast concrete bollards shall
comply with the requirements of Section 5.
4 The minimum grade of concrete for bollards shall be C40. Bollards shall be constructed using
OPC cement to BS EN 197-1.
5 The minimum cover to all embedded steel items in the bollards shall be 50mm with a
tolerance of -0 mm and + 10 mm.
6 Where precast concrete bollards are specified the Contractor shall design the bollards such
that the durability is ensured for a period of ten years. The Contractor shall submit a
performance guarantee for the bollards for a period of ten years. The guarantee shall provide
for the replacement of the bollard in the event of any deterioration due to exposure to the
elements.
7 The supplier shall verify this by a design submission covering the concrete mix design,
special admixtures additives, cover to reinforcement type of reinforcement and protective
coating. The engineer shall approve the material and design for the bollard based on the
particular exposure of the location proposed for use.
8 Prior to production of the precast bollards the Contractor shall cast a trial bollard for approval
by the Engineer.
19.3.4 Steel Bollards
1 Metal bollards shall be constructed of steel tube with the dimensions, details, wall thickness
and height shown on the drawings or provided in the Project Specification.
2 The top of the bollard shall be ground free of any rough edges and fitted with a tight durable
ultraviolet light resistant plastic top.
3 All metal parts shall be hot dipped galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 after fabrication.
ar
4 All metal parts shall also be painted to the colours and pattern as shown on the drawings or
at
directed by the engineer. The paint system shall be compatible with the hot dipped
-Q
galvanising and shall provide a service free life for five years.
5 Where designated, bollards shall be removable. This shall be achieved by casting a 4 mm

LL
thick PVC pipe sleeve into the pavement. The bollard shall be a tight fit into this sleeve. If so
designated or directed by the Engineer a locking facility shall be incorporated with the
removable bollard.
W
19.4 RUMBLE STRIPS

s
en
19.4.1 Scope
m
1 Rumble strips to provide warning to drivers of vehicles that accidentally stray out of the
carriageway.
e
Si
2 Related Parts
This Section
Part 5 Asphalt Works.
1 The Contractor shall arrange for a trial installation of a rumble strip to demonstrate the
methods and equipment to be used. Approval to proceed with the construction of the rumble
strips will only be permitted after the Engineer has approved this trial in writing.
19.4.3 Construction
1 Rumble strips shall comprise of shallow formed depressions in the wearing course of the
road shoulders. The depth, plan size and layout of the rumble strips shall be as designated or
2 Rumble strips shall be formed by one of the following methods:

(a) cold planing
(b) Removal shutter boards.

3 Cold planing of indentations in the wearing course in the shoulder shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of the cold planing of Part 5. Edges shall be square and
true and free from any loose material.
4 Rumble strips may also be formed by the use of removable shutter boards. The boards shall
be rigidly located on the base or binder course prior to laying the wearing course. The
method of fixing the strip shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The laying of the
wearing course shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Part 5. Care shall
be taken to ensure full compaction of material around the edges of the shutter boards. The
shutter boards shall be carefully removed not earlier than three days after the laying and
compaction of the asphalt.
19.5 SPEED CONTROL HUMPS
19.5.1 Scope
ar
1 Speed control humps to limit the speed of vehicles.
at
2 Related Parts
-Q
This Section
Part 5 Asphalt Works.
LL
Part 9 Kerbs, Footways & Paved Areas.

19.5.2 General
W
1 Speed control humps shall only be installed at the locations designated on the project
drawings or specified elsewhere within the contract documents.
s
en
2 All speed humps shall be identified by markings on the road surface. The layout of these road
markings shall be as the Qatar traffic control manual or as shown on the project drawings or
m
elsewhere in the contract documentation.

e
3 The profile of the speed hump shall be as shown on the project drawings.
Si
4 The profile shall represent a smooth gradual rise in elevation.
5 Speed humps shall be constructed of the same asphalt mix design as the asphalt wearing
course.
6 The use of prefabricated rubber section speed humps or steel checker plate filled with
concrete speed humps is not permitted.
7 Speed humps shall be designated as one of two types; for low speed pedestrian areas and
for high speed roads. Low speed pedestrian areas speed humps shall comprise of a ramp
within elevated section constructed of interlocking concrete paving blocks.
19.5.3 Construction of Speed Humps
1 The dimensions and construction details of speed hump shall be as shown on the drawings.
2 Prior to installation of the speed hump the surface of the wearing course shall be scabbled or
abraded to a rough irregular finish to ensure bond with the speed hump. Tack coat shall be
applied at the base.
3 Wearing course shall be hand laid for the speed hump. The wearing course shall be
compacted and finished to a smooth profile.
4 All the asphalt work for the speed hump shall comply with the relevant clauses in part 5 of the
specification. The final profile speed hump shall comply to the profile on the drawings to
within  6mm.
5 Heavy traffic or construction plant shall not be permitted to drive over speed humps until
7 days after the construction unless the engineer permits otherwise.
ar
at
END OF PART
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
QCS 2014 Section 07: Green Constructions Page 1
1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 2
1.1 GREEN CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Green Construction and Sustainability 2
1.1.2 Reference 2
1.1.3 Green Construction Regulations and Environmental Assessment Tools 2
1.1.4 Green Building Definition 2
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 GREEN CONSTRUCTION
1.1.1 Green Construction and Sustainability
1 Buildings, infrastructure and the environment are inextricably linked. Energy, water, materials
and land are all consumed in the construction and operation of buildings and infrastructure.
These built structures in turn become part of living environment, affecting living conditions,
social well-being and health. It is important to explore environmentally and economically
sound design and development techniques in order to design buildings and infrastructure that
are sustainable, healthy and affordable, and encourage innovation in buildings and
infrastructure systems and designs.
2 The concept of sustainability in building and construction has evolved over many years. The
initial concept was on how to deal with the issue of limited resources, especially energy, and
ar
on how to reduce impacts on the natural environment. Emphasis was placed on technical
issues such as materials, building components, construction technologies and energy related
at
design concepts. Recently non-technical issues become appreciated such as economic,
-Q
social sustainability and cultural heritage aspects of the built environment. Also, there are
greater attention to create more green buildings by upgrading the existing buildings through
the application of new developments or the invention and use of innovative technologies for
LL
energy and material savings.
1.1.2 Reference
W
1 The following documents are referred to in this section:

s
en
Global Sustainability Assessment System (GSAS) - v2.1 2013, Gulf Organization for
Research and Development, Qatar, formerly known as (QSAS) (Note: QCS reference shall
m
be limited only to this particular version of GSAS and non-other)

e
1.1.3 Green Construction Regulations and Environmental Assessment Tools

Si
1 Many countries have developed their own standards for green building or energy efficiency
for buildings and Building Environmental Assessment tools. Now there are many of building
rating systems tools and guidelines in the world currently in use. A new sustainability
assessment system known as GSAS (GLOBAL Sustainability Assessment System) is
referred to herein in this document.
1.1.4 Green Building Definition
1 Green building is the process through which buildings are designed, constructed and
operated to reduce natural resources consumption, eliminate environmental degradation and
enhance social and economic aspects of humans.
END OF PART
Part 02: QCS Green Building
2 QCS GREEN BUILDING ......................................................................................... 2

2.1 SCOPE .................................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1 General 2
2.1.2 References 2
2.2 QCS GREEN BUILDING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 3
2.2.1 Types of Buildings 3
2.2.2 QCS Green Building Categories & Criteria 3
2.2.3 Submittal Requirements 5
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
2 QCS GREEN BUILDING
2.1 SCOPE
2.1.1 General
1 This section specifies minimum environmental performance requirements that apply to the
design, construction and operations of new buildings.
2 The minimum environmental performance requirements apply to 8 building typologies only

(Section 2.2.1) and have been specified for eleven environmental performance criteria (Table
1).
3 The environmental performance criteria apply to all new buildings for those building
typologies specified and shall apply to:
ar
(a) Buildings under design but not yet constructed (i.e. pre-construction);
at
(b) Buildings under construction; and
(c) Buildings constructed prior to hand over.
-Q
4 For buildings under construction or constructed and not handed over, the minimum
environmental performance requirements shall apply as far as is reasonably possible without
LL
the need to undertake a major re-design and retrofit. Where building owners, designers or
contractors, etc. judge that any re-design or retrofit to meet the environmental performance
W
requirements specified herein is not reasonable, the relevant Qatari authorities / government
agencies reserve the right to ask for a justification to explain such a decision.
s
5 The Engineer shall specify the applicable Green Building Assessment System for the QCS’s
en
Building typologies and to assess compliance with QCS’s Green Building Requirements.
m
6 The minimum environmental performance requirements specified herein have been derived
from the Global Sustainability Assessment System (GSAS) v2.1-2013.
e
Si
7 The Engineer shall ensure compliance with QCS’s minimum sustainable building
requirements or higher specified by the relevant authorities or the Engineer.
8 QCS 2014 encourage the use of any environmental or sustainability performance criteria in
addition to those environmental performance criteria specified to help design, construct and
operate better buildings.
2.1.2 References
Global Sustainability Assessment System (GSAS) v2.1-2013, Gulf Organisation for Research
and Development, Qatar
2.2 QCS GREEN BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
1 The values listed herein for the Commercial, Health Centres, Education, Mosques, and Light
Industries Schemes and Typologies shall be considered as the minimum requirements for
the applicable criteria (Table 3).
2.2.1 Types of Buildings
1 COMMERCIAL: Types include Spaces that Serves various functions such as offices,
2
conference rooms, foyers, retail spaces, and ancillary areas, with built up area of 10000 m
or more.
2 GOVERNMENTAL BUILDINGS: Types include Capitol, Diplomatic Buildings, Statehouses,

Courthouses, Municipalities, Post offices, etc.
3 PUBLIC BUIDLINGS: Types include:
ar
(a) RAIL BUILDINGS: Types include spaces that serve various functions of a railway
station such as but not necessarily limited to platform/concourse, offices, station
at
control room, ticketing, retail, food/beverage areas, and ancillary areas.
-Q
(b) SPORTS: Facilities include indoor or outdoor competition areas, fitness suites, locker
facilities, retail spaces, offices, restaurants, and common areas
(c) EDUCATION BUILDINGS: Types include educational facilities for students in
LL
th
kindergarten through 12 grade as well as college and university facilities. This
includes classrooms, libraries, auditoriums, cafeterias, kitchens, offices, and other
W
spaces that are part of academic buildings.

(d) MOSQUES AND OTHER RELIGIOUS BUILDINGS: Types include the building
s
containing the congregational worship areas.

en
(e) HOSPITALS AND HEALTH CENTERS BUILDINGS: Types include specialist

hospitals, general hospitals, out-patient hospitals, and primary care health centres.
e m
4 LIGHT INDUSTRIES BUILDINGS: Types include both operational and office areas as well as
the general building as a whole.
Si
2.2.2 QCS Green Building Categories & Criteria
1 The minimum QCS’s requirements unless other values specified by the relevant authorities.
Table 1: Green Building Categories & Criteria
QCS Category Criteria Minimum Requirements * Building Typologies
Commercial, Governmental
Energy Demand
Education, Mosques &
Performance
ENERGY EPC ≤ 1.0 other religious buildings,
Energy Delivery Light Industry, Health
Performance Centres, Railways, Sports
WPC ≤ 1.0
Commercial,
Governmental, Education,
WATER Water Consumption Mosques, Light Industries,
Health Centres,
Railways, Sports
QCS Category Criteria Minimum Requirements * Building Typologies
Commercial, Light Industry,

PMV ≤ 2.0
Governmental
80 ≤ ADPI Education, Mosques
Comply with ASHRAE
Health Centres
Standards
Thermal Comfort Comply with ASHRAE
Railways
Standards
PMV ≤ 2.0 office spaces
worst case heat load ≤ 1.6 Sports
Exposed Spectator Seating
Commercial,
Natural Ventilation Can be
Governmental, Education,
Utilized(x)
Mosques,
0 < X ) month of the year(
Light Industry
INDOOR
ENVIRONMENT Comply with ASHRAE
Natural Ventilation Health Centres
ar
Standard
Natural Ventilation Can be
Utilized(x) Sports
at
0 < X (month of the year)
Comply with ASHRAE
-Q
Standard
Railways (above ground)
no existence of equipment Commercial, Education,
with efficiency less than Mosques,
Mechanical Ventilation
specified in ASHRAE 90.1- Light Industry
LL
2010 Health Centres, Railways

Education,
W
Mosques,
Low-Emitting Materials VOC_emi_total ≤100%
Light Industry
Health Centres, Sports,
s
Railways
en
% of Construction Expenditure Education,
Support of National Benefiting National Economy Mosques,
m
(GCC) Economy (x) Light Industry

CULTURAL & 20 ≤ X Health Centres, Railways,
e
ECONOMIC Sports
Si
VALUE Commercial, Governmental

Education,
Cultural Identity & To be defined & assessed by
Mosques,
Heritage Certification Authority
Light Industry
Health Centres, Railways
Education,
MANAGEMENT Recycling Management Plan Mosques,
Recycling Management
& OPERATION demonstrates Compliance Light Industry
Health Centres, Sports,
Railways
Education,
Performance Indicator (X) Mosques,
MATERIALS Regional Materials
X < 30 Light Industry
Health Centres, Railways,
Sports
2.2.3 Submittal Requirements
1 Building owners, designers or contractors, etc. shall provide the relevant authorities with a
report that shows how the minimum environmental requirements have been met. The report
shall include:
(a) All raw data used to performance calculations;

(b) All calculations used to derive results against the environmental criteria specified (and /
or copies of relevant GSAS calculator tools where appropriate);
(c) All specifications where relevant of construction materials, equipment, fixtures and
fittings, etc;
(d) Details of suppliers / service providers with evidence that purchases have been made
or services commissioned, etc.
(e) All other information necessary to demonstrate how the environmental performance
requirements have been met.
ar
at
END OF PART
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 03: Energy
3 ENERGY [E] ............................................................................................................ 2

3.1.1 Scope 2
3.1.2 Reference 2
3.1.3 Abbreviations 2
3.2.1 Scope 3
3.2.2 Description 3
3.2.3 Measurement Principle 4
3.2.4 Measurement ( EPCnd) 4
3.2.5 Score ( EPCnd) 4
3.3.1 Scope 4
3.3.2 Description 5
3.3.3 Measurement Principle 5
3.3.4 Measurement (EPCdel) 5
3.3.5 Score (EPCdel) 6
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 03: Energy
3 ENERGY [E]
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
1 The Energy category consists of factors associated with energy demand of buildings, the
efficiency of energy delivery, and the use of fossil energy sources that result in harmful
emissions and pollution.
(a) Impacts: Negative impacts resulting from energy use and unsustainable practices
include:
(i) Climate Change
(ii) Fossil Fuel Depletion
(iii) Air Pollution
ar
(iv) Human Comfort & Health
at
(b) Mitigate Impact: Factors that could mitigate environmental impacts due to energy use
-Q
include:
(i) Designing the building to lower its energy demand
LL
(ii) Selecting efficient building systems

(iii) Lowering the demand on non-renewable sources of energy thereby reducing
W
harmful emissions and depletion of fossil fuels

(iv) Minimizing the amount of harmful substances produced by the energy delivery
s
systems and the energy supply network

en
(c) Energy is sub-categorised as follows:

m
(i) Energy Demand Performance

e
(ii) Energy Delivery Performance

Si
3.1.2 Reference
Global Sustainability Assessment System (GSAS) – V2.1 2013, Gulf Organization for
Research and Development , Qatar (Note: QCS reference shall be limited only to this
particular version of GSAS and non-other).
3.1.3 Abbreviations
1 The following abbreviations are defined for use in this section.

 EPC Energy Performance Coefficient
 EPCnd Energy Demand Performance
 EPCdel Energy Delivery Performancet
 EPCp Primary Energy Performance
 fop Operation factor for a particular Building category
Part 03: Energy
 Edelivery The delivered energy is defined as the supplied energy To the

technical building systems through the system boundary, to satisfy
2
the uses of the building in KWh/m /yr.
 Eref_del The reference value used in the GSAS scoring method for the
2
Delivered energy for the building type in KWh/m /yr.
 EP
2
The total primary energy consumed for the building in KWh/m /yr.
 Eref_p the reference value used in the GSASscoring method for primary
2
Energy for the building type in KWh/m /yr.
 CO2
2
The emitted mass of CO2 in g/m /yr. calculated from the net
delivered Energy and emission coefficient. The emission
coefficient includes the CO2 emissions associated with the primary
energy consumed for the building.
 CO2ref the reference value used in the GSASscoring method for CO2
emissions for the building type in g/m2/yr.
 Qdesign
2
the building thermal energy demand in kwh/m /yr. which takes into
account the energy losses (transmission and ventilation), heat
ar
gains (solar, internal and system heat losses), and the dynamic
parameter (loss utilization factor).
at
 Qref_nd the reference value used in the GSAS Scoring method for energy
2
demand for the building type in kwh/m /yr.
-Q
 NOX,SOX
2
The emitted masses of NOX & SOX in gm./m /yr. calculated from
the net delivered energy and emission coefficients.
 NOXref,SOXref the reference values used in the GSAS scoring method for NOX &
LL
2
SOX emissions for the building type in gm./m /yr.
W
3.2 ENERGY [E.1] ENERGY DEMAND PERFORMANCE
3.2.1 Scope
s
en
1 The energy demand performance shall be measured for the following categories of
buildings:
m
Table 1: Building Typologies

e
Si
Commercial
Governmental
Education
Mosques & other religious buildings
Light Industry
Health Centres
Railways Buildings
Sports
3.2.2 Description
1 Establish energy demand performance levels for the building in order to reduce
environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use.
Part 03: Energy
3.2.3 Measurement Principle
1 The Engineer shall Calculate Building performance in relation to the baseline as specified
below. All calculations will adhere to the GSAS Energy Application document.
3.2.4 Measurement ( EPCnd)
1 The Engineer shall calculate the EPCnd value based on building data and cooling energy
needs of the project as per the energy performance standard calculation tool (EPSCT).
2 Calculated EPCnd = Qdesign / Qref_nd The Qdesign is calculated according to the GSAS Energy
Application document.
3 Commercial & Governmental (with baseline reference) Qref_nd = 125 [kWh/m²/yr].
4 Education: With Baseline reference Qref_nd = 122* fop.education [kWh/m²/yr]. where fop.education is
the operation factor for education typologies. The Qdesign and fop,school are calculated according
ar
to the GSAS Energy Application document.
at
5 Mosques & other religious buildings: With Baseline reference Qref_nd = 170 [kWh/m²/yr] . The
Qdesign is calculated according to the GSAS Energy Application document.
-Q
6 Health Centers: The Qref_nd are area weighted average calculated according to the reference
guidelines document.
LL
7 Railways: The Qref_nd are area weighted average calculated according to the refference
W
guidelines document.
8 Sports : the Engineer shall determine energy demand performance in two steps. Step 1, the
s
project will use the Energy Performance Calculator to determine the Energy demand (Q nd.fc,I)
en
for each functional component (FC) of the project. Step 2, the project will enter the Qnd,fc,I for
each FC in the composition sheet in the energy calculator to determine the aggregated
m
criterion score for the entire sports facility.

e
Si
9 Light Industry : With Baseline reference Qref_nd = 475 [kWh/m²/yr.]
3.2.5 Score ( EPCnd)
1 The Recommended minimum requirement * value for EPCnd shall be as per table 2:
Note : (*) minimum QCS’s requirements unless other values specified by the relevant
authority
Table 2: EPCnd Values
EPCnd Value 0.8 < EPCnd ≤ 1.0
3.3 ENERGY [E.2]: ENERGY DELIVERY PERFORMANCE
3.3.1 Scope
1 The energy delivery performance shall be measured for the following categories of buildings:
Part 03: Energy

Commercial
Governmental
Education
Light Industry
Health Centres
Railways Buildings
Sports
3.3.2 Description
ar
1 The Engineer shall establish delivered energy performance levels of the project in order to
reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use.
at
-Q
1 The Engineer shall calculate the building performance in relation to the baseline as specified
below. All calculations will adhere to the GSAS Energy Application document.
LL
3.3.4 Measurement (EPCdel)

W
1 The Engineer shall complete the Energy Performance Standard Calculation Tool (EPSCT) to
s
determine the EPCdel value based on building data, HVAC specifications, lighting system,
en
and DHW system and energy generation.
2 Calculated EPCdel =Edel / Eref_del the Edel is calculated according to the GSAS Energy
m
Application document.
e
Si
3 Commercial & Governmental : with Baseline reference Eref_del = 89 [kWh/m²/yr].
4 Education With Baseline reference Eref_del = 88* fop_education [kWh/m²/yr]. where fop_education is the
operation factor forEducation Typologies. The Edelivery and fop,education are calculated according
to the GSAS Energy Application document.
5 Mosques & other religious buildings: With Baseline reference Eref_del = 82 [kWh/m²/yr]. The
Edelivery is calculated according to the GSAS Energy Application document.
6 Light Industry: With Baseline reference Eref_del = 165 [kWh/m²/yr].
7 Sports Facilities: The Engineer shall determine energy delivery performance in two steps.
Step 1, the Engineer shall use the Energy performance calculator to determine the delivered
energy (Edel,fc,i) for each functional component (FC) of the project. Step 2, the Engineer shall
enter the Edel,fc,I for each FC in the energy score calculator to determine the aggregated
criterion score for the entire sports facility.
Part 03: Energy
3.3.5 Score (EPCdel)
1 The Recommended minimum requirments* EPCdel value shall be categorised as per table
4.
authority
Table 4: EPCdel minimum required value
EPCdel Value 0.8 < EPCdel ≤ 1.0
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 04: Water
4 WATER [W] .............................................................................................................................. 2

4.1.1 SCOPE 2
4.1.2 REFERENCE 2
4.2.1 SCOPE 2
4.2.2 DESCRIPTION 3
4.2.3 MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE 3
4.2.4 MEASUREMENT (WPC) 3
*
4.2.5 SCORE 4
6 RAILWAY TEMINALS 5
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 04: Water
4 WATER [W]
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 The Water category consists of factors associated with water consumption and its
associated burden on municipal supply and treatment systems.
(a) Impacts: Environmental impacts resulting from water consumption and unsustainable
practices include:
(i) Water depletion
(b) Mitigate Impact: Factors that could mitigate environmental impact and lower demand
on water include:
(i) Specifying efficient plumbing fixtures
ar
(ii) Creating a system for the collection and storage of rainwater
at
(iii) On-site treatment of water for later reuse
-Q
(iv) Designing a landscaping plan that minimizes the need for irrigation.
The recommended criteria is Water Performance Coefficient (WPC) [W.1]

LL
4.1.2 Reference
W

Global Sustainability Assessment System (GSAS) - V2.1 2013, Gulf Organization for
s
Research and Development, Qatar (Note: QCS reference shall be limited only to this
en
particular version of GSAS and non-other).

m
4.2 WATER CONSUMPTION [W]

e
Si
4.2.1 Scope
1 The Water consumption will be measured for the following categories of buildings listed in
table 1:
Commercial
Governmental
Education
Light Industry
Health Centres
Railways Buildings
Sports
Part 04: Water
4.2.2 Description
1 Minimize water consumption in order to reduce the burden on municipal supply and
treatment systems.
1 The Engineer shall demonstrate conservation in the use of water in relation to the baseline
and targets outlined in the Water Consumption Calculator.
4.2.4 Measurement (WPC)
1 The Engineer shall determine cumulative water consumption [Water Performance Coefficient
(WPC)] using the Water Consumption Calculator. Cumulative water consumption is
determined by several input parameters including:
(a) The project site area and the number of full time staff, students, or residents and
ar
visitors occupying the building
at
(b) Specifications for plumbing fixtures
(c) Landscaping and irrigation plan
-Q
(d) Rain and storm water collection and reuse plan
(e) Grey and black water treatment and reuse plan
LL
2 Based on input parameters provided by the project, the application conducts multiple
W
calculations to determine the building’s estimated water consumption. Three estimated

calculation values, Water Consumption for occupants (WCcal_occupant), Water Consumption for
irrigation (WCcal_irrigation), Water Supply from reuse strategies (WScal_reuse) are computed by
s
en
the calculator. The annual net water demand is calculated by subtracting water supply
(WScal_reuse) from the summation of water consumptions (WCcal_occupant + WCcal_irrigation). Then,
the net water demand is compared against the summation of the two reference water
m
consumption values (WCref_occupant + WCref_irrigation) to generate the Water Performance

e
Coefficient (WPC).
Si
3 For each building type, the equations to calculate reference values apply to all buildings
regardless of operating duration, occupancy density and site area. A different reference
value will be calculated for project buildings with varying site and operational characteristics,
and the resulting WPC will therefore be applicable across the entire spectrum of each
building type.
(a) The Referenced Water Consumption for Occupants is:
WCref_occupant = A x Operating Hours x Occupants
Where:
Operating Hours = 8 (hours per day) x 20 (days per month) x 12 (months per year)
Part 04: Water
Occupants = The total number of full time employees per day + the total number of
visitors per day
(b) The Referenced Water Consumption for irrigation is:
2
WCref.,irrigation = B x 365 (days per year) x 24 (hours per day) x Site Area (m )
Reference values A and B can be found for the different typologies in the following table:
Table 2: Reference values A and B

A B
Commercial &
0.006519 0.000034
Governmental
Education 0.008423 0.000001
Mosques & other
0.003888 0.000002
religious buildings
Light Industry 0.005355 0.000004
ar
Sports N/A N/A
at
These typologies have multiple occupant reference values which are listed in further detail
-Q
in the following sections.
4 Education
LL
(a) Additional input parameters required:

(b) Number of staff and students occupying the building
W
5 Mosques:
s
Additional input parameters required:

en
* Number of worshippers visiting the mosque, both on a daily basis and during times of
m
full occupancy.
e
(a) The Referenced Water Consumption for Occupants is:

Si
WCref_occupant = A× No. Operating Hours_d × No.Occupants_d) + (No. Operating

Hours_f x No. Occupants_f)
Notes:
(i) Where ‘No.Occupants_d’ is the number of daily worshippers, ‘No.Occupants_f’
is the number of occupants during full occupancy.
(ii) ‘No.Operating Hours_d’ are normalized as 6 (hours per day) x 30 (days per
month) x 12 (months per year)
(iii) ‘No.Operating Hours_f’ are normalized as 2 (hours per day) x 30 (days of
Ramadan) + 52 (Friday prayers per year)
6 Light Industry
Additional input parameters required:
Number of full time employees and visitors occupying the building
*
4.2.5 Score
The minimum Requirement values by QCS for Water Performance Coefficient shall be:
Part 04: Water
authority
1 COMMERCIAL & GOVERNMENTAL

Table 3: minimum score for commercial Typology
WPC(X) Value 0.87 < X ≤ 1.0
2 EDUCATION
Table 4: minimum score for Education Typology
WPC(X) 0.85 < X ≤ 1.0
3 MOSQUES
ar
Table 5: minimum score for Mosques Typology
at
WPC(X) -Q 0.89 < X ≤ 1.0
4 LIGHT INDUSTRIES
Table 6: minimum score for Light Industry Typology
LL
WPC(X) 0.84 < X ≤ 1.0

W
5 HEALTH CENTRES
s
en
Table 7: minimum score for Health Centres Typology

m
WPC(X) 0.84 < X ≤ 1.0

e
6 RAILWAY TEMINALS
Si
Table 8: minimum score for Railways Typology
WPC(X) 0.84 < X ≤ 1.0

7 SPORTS FACILITIES
Table 9: minimum score for Sports Typology
WPC(X) 0.0 ≤ X < 0.5
END OF PART
QCS 2014 Section 07 : Green Constructions Page 1
Part 05 : Indoor Environment
5 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT [IE] ................................................................................................. 2
5.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................ 2

5.1.1 SCOPE 2
5.1.2 REFERENCE 2
5.2 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT [IE.1] THERMAL COMFORT ........................................................ 3

5.2.1 SCOPE 3
5.2.2 DESCRIPTION 3
5.2.4 MEASUREMENT (THERMAL COMFORT) 3
*
5.2.5 SCORE 4
5.3 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT [IE.2] Natural Ventilation ............................................................... 5

5.3.1 SCOPE 5
5.3.2 DESCRIPTION 5
5.3.4 MEASUREMENT (NATURAL VENTILATION) 6
ar
5.3.5 SCORE* 6
at
5.4 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT [IE.3] : Mechanical Ventilation ...................................................... 7
-Q
5.4.1 SCOPE 7
5.4.2 DESCRIPTION 7
5.4.4 MEASUREMENT (MECHANICAL VENTILATION) 7
LL
*
5.4.5 SCORE (MECHANICAL VENTILATION) 8
5.5 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT [IE.4] Low-Emitting Materials ........................................................ 8

W
5.5.1 SCOPE 8
5.5.2 DESCRIPTION 8
s

en
5.5.4 MEASUREMENT (VOC) 8

5.5.5 SCORE (VOC) 9
e m
Si
5 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT [IE]
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
1 The Indoor Environment category consists of factors associated with indoor environmental
quality such as thermal comfort, air quality, acoustic quality, and light quality..
(a) Impacts: Impacts resulting from ineffective control and design of the indoor
environment include:
(i) Climate Change
(iii) Air Pollution
(iv) Human Comfort & Health
ar
(b) Mitigate Impact: Factors that could improve indoor environmental quality include:
at
(i) Monitoring air temperature and quality and adjusting or calibrating as
-Q
appropriate
(ii) Maximizing the time period that the building can utilize natural ventilation
(iii) Designing an adequate mechanical ventilation system
LL
(iv) Ensuring adequate illuminance levels for visiual performance and comfort
W
(v) Maximizing the use of natural lighting in interior spaces

(vi) Providing for occupant comfort by minimizing glare
s
en
(vii) Maximizing views to the exterior for all occupants

(viii) Controlling the amount of noise produced by or transferred from the building
m
interior and exterior

e
(ix) Specifying materials with low VOC levels

Si
(x) Controlling indoor pollutants and sources of airborne contamination

(c) The QCS’s requirements for Sub-Indoor Environment criteria Includes:
(i) Thermal Comfort
(ii) Natural Ventilation
(iii) Mechanical Ventilation
(iv) Low-Emitting Materials
2 The Public and Government Buildings are to be considered as commercial for the purpose of
Indoor Environment calculation as applicable.
5.1.2 Reference

Global Sustainability Assessment System (GSAS) - v2.1 2013, Gulf Organization for
Research and Development (GORD), Qatar (Note: QCS reference shall be limited only to
this particular version of GSAS and non-other), And American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
5.2 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT [IE.1] THERMAL COMFORT
5.2.1 Scope
1 The Indoor Environment for Thermal Comfort shall be measured for the following categories
of the buildings:
Table 1: Building Typology
Commercial
Governmental
ar
Education
at
Light Industry
-Q
Health Centres
Railways Terminals
LL
Sports Facilities
W
5.2.2 Description
s
1 The Project shall provide a thermaly comfortable environment to ensure the comfort and
en
health of building occupants.

e m
1 The Engineer shall calculate the system capacity and either PMV or ADPI Values for the
Si
hottest hour of the year for the worst case for all applicable occupied spaces
2 Sport Facilities.
The Project shall also Calculate the heat loads for all critical seats for the hottest outdoor
conditions for scheduled events.
5.2.4 Measurement (Thermal Comfort)
1 The Project shall complete the Thermal Comfort Calculator (Considering GSAS Assessment
System or any other recommended system) in order to compute PMV or ADPI values and
demonstrate that system Capacity can meet the peak cooling loads for the worst case for all
typical occupied spaces.
(a) System Capacity : The capacity of the system should be properly sized to meet the
peak cooling loads of critical spaces. All projects will calculate the peak cooling loads
for the hottest hour of the year.
(b) PMV values: The project will evaluate all critical spaces and perform thermal comfort
assessment for the hottest hour of the year. Calculate PMV values of different
positions in critical spaces such as different positions relative to window and diffuser
locations and select the worst PMV value for assessment.
(c) ADPI values: The project will evaluate the selected worst case for each typical space
and perform thermal comfort assessment for the hottest hour of the year in terms of
Air Diffusion Performance Index.
2 The following table outlines the measurement type and typical spaces used in the calculation
according to the appropriate typology:
Table 2: measurement type and typical spaces
TYPOLOGY MEASUREMENT TYPE TYPICAL SPACES
ar
Commercial PMV Office, Reception Areas
at
Education ADPI -Q Classrooms, Offices, Special
Functional Spaces.
Mosques ADPI Prayer Halls

LL
Light Industry PMV Office , Operational Areas

W
Health Centres PMV Typical Occupied Spaces

s
en
Sports PMV or ADPI for the worest Office spaces (a),Exposed

case Heat Load Spectator Seating (b)
e m
*
5.2.5 Score
Si
Note: (*) minimum QCS’s requirements unless other values specified by the relevant
authority
1 The score values for Commercial, Light Industry Typologies

Table 3: Commercial & Light Industry Typologies
PMV 1.5 < PMV ≤ 2.0 Under the system capacity meeting the peak load
2 The score values for Education, Mosques Typologies

Table 4: Education, Mosques Typologies
ADPI 80 ≤ ADPI< 85 Under the system capacity meeting the peak load
3 The score values for Health Centres Typology

Table 5: Health Centers
The Building will Comply with ASHRAE Standards- Design Manual for Hospital and Clinics
4 The score values for Sports Typology

Table 6: Railways Typology
a. for office spaces (a)
PMV 1.5 < PMV ≤ 2.0 Under the system capacity meeting the peak load
b. for Exposed Spectator Seating (b)
ADPI 1.185 < b ≤ 1.600 worest case heat load
ar
at
5.3 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT [IE.2] NATURAL VENTILATION
-Q
5.3.1 Scope
1 The Indoor Environment for Natural Ventilation shall be measured for the following
LL
categories of the buildings.

W
Commercial
s
Governmental
en
Education
m
Light Industry
e
Health Centres
Si
Rail Buildings
Sports
5.3.2 Description
1 The Project shall encourage effective natural ventilation strategies in conjunction with
mechanically ventilated systems.
1 The Engineer shall maximize the number of days that the building can utilize natural
ventilation, either through user operable windows or through controlled opening
5.3.4 Measurement (Natural Ventilation)
1 All projects using operable windows will complete the Natural Ventilation Calculator to
determine the number of months that all typical spaces can utilize natural ventilation by
verifying minimum fresh air supply to guarantee indoor air quality as recommended in
ASHRAE 62.1-2010. All projects using mechanical ventilation systems will demonstrate
thorough calculation and/or simulations the number of months a project can utilize natural
ventilation. Exclude all circulation areas from this measurement.
2 The following table outlines the typical spaces used in the calculation according to the
appropriate typology:
Table 7: Typical Spaces for Natural Ventilation
Typology Typical Spaces

M
Commercial Office, Reception areas
ar
Education Classrooms, Libraries
Mosques Prayer Halls
at
Light Industry Office areas -Q
Health
Staff areas, Library/Seminar rooms, Dining rooms
Centres
(a) LIGHT INDUSTRY
LL
(i) Operational Areas associated with the industrial process are not included as
part of this criterion.
W
(b) HEALTH CENTRES

s
(i) All Projects will undertake a full thermal model analysisto calculate the air flow
en
provided by the natural ventilation to determine if each typical space can

gurantee indoor air quality as recommended in ASHRAE 62.1-2010.Circulation
m
areas and Clinical areas can be excluded from this calculation in line with
guidance HTM 03-01.
e
(ii) Typical Spaces to be assessed against the ASHRAE Standards include: Satff
Si
areas , Office accommodation, Library /Seminar rooms , Dining rooms .Natural

ventilation in accordance to ASHRAE must achieve fresh air rates of 5
l/s/person.
5.3.5 SCORE*
1 The recommended minimum Score for the QCS,s Targeted Typologies :

(*) minimum QCS’s requirements unless other values specified by the relevant authority
Table 8: Commercial,Governmental,Sport, Education , Mosques,Light Industry Typologies

Number of Months Natural Ventilation Can
0 < months of the year ≤1
be Utilized
Table 9: For Health Centres, Rail Terminals

The Building will Comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2010 Standards- Design Manual for Hospital
and Clinics
5.4 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT [IE.3] : MECHANICAL VENTILATION
5.4.1 Scope
1 The Indoor Environment for Mechanical Ventilation shall be measured for the following
categories of the buildings
Commercial
Governmental
Education
Mosques
Light Industry
ar
Health Centres
at
Railways -Q
5.4.2 Description
1 The Project shall provide effective mechanical ventilation to ensure occupant comfort and
LL
health.
W

s
1 The Engineer shall ensure that mechanical ventilation in all primary occupancy areas meets
en
the minimum requirements of ASHRAE 62.1-2010 and the system requirements in ASHRAE
90.1-2010.
m
5.4.4 Measurement (Mechanical Ventilation)

e
Si
1 The mechanical system shall meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE 62.1-2010,
ASHRAE 90.1-2007. These requirements include, but are not limited to:
(a) Mechanical equipment must meet minimum Efficiency standards, and be properly
verified and labeled.
(b) Mechanical systems must have proper control systems, including the use of zoning,
proper dead bands, off-hour controls, and automatic shut-offs.
Note: In the Calculation of the required fresh air supply, both EN-ISO and ASHRAE should
be used, and the larger of the two standards should be used in the verification of over
ventilation.
2 MEASUREMENT
(a) LIGHT INDUSTRY
(i) Operational Areas associated with the industrial process are not included as
part of this criterion.
(b) RAILWAYS
This Criteria applies to both underground or overground stations.
*
5.4.5 Score (Mechanical Ventilation)
1 The Recommended minimum Requirements by QCS as shown in (Table 11):

Note: (*) minimum QCS’s requirements unless other values specified by the relevant
authority
Table 11: Minimum Value
≥ 15 % of ASHRAE 62.1-2010 requirement;
Outdoor Air Volume (X) AND no existence of equipment with efficiency less than
specified in ASHRAE 90.1-2010
5.5 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT [IE.4] LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
5.5.1 Scope
1 The Indoor Environment for Low-Emitting Materials shall be measured for the following
ar
categories of the buildings.
at
Commercial
-Q
Governmental
LL
Education
Mosques
W
Light Industry
Health Centers
s
en
Railways
Sports
m
5.5.2 Description
e
Si
1 The project shall meet the minimum emissions targets for indoor materials and finishes to
ensure the comfort and health of occupants and installers.
1 The Engineer shall choose materials and finishes that minimize Volatile Organic Compounds
(VOC) emissions.
5.5.4 Measurement (VOC)
1 The Engineer shall complete the Low-Emitting Materials Calculator to evaluate the measured
VOC contents of specified indoor materials.
2 The Engineer shall develop a plan to specify materials with low VOC emission rates as found
in the Low-Emitting Materials Calculator.
Exclude materials used in spaces that are exposed to the exterior.
3 RAILWAYS: This Criteria applies to both underground and overground stations.
5.5.5 Score (VOC)
1 Recommended minimum Requirements by QCS as shown in (table 6)

Table 13: VOC score value
VOCemi,total (X) 85% < X ≤ 100 %
(*) minimum QCS’s requirements unless other values specified by the relevant authority
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
QCS 2014 Section 07: Green Building Page 1
Part 06: Cultural & Economic Value
6 Cultural & Economic value [ce] ................................................................................................ 2
6.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................ 2

6.1.1 SCOPE 2
6.1.2 REFERENCE 2
6.2 CULTURAL & ECONOMIC VALUE- SUPPORT OF NATIONAL gcc ECONOMY [ce.1] ....... 2
6.2.1 SCOPE 2
6.2.2 DESCRIPTION 3
6.2.4 MEASUREMENT (SUPPORT OF NATIONAL GCC ECONOMY) 3
6.2.5 SCORE 3
6.3 CULTURAL & ECONOMIC VALUE - Heritage & Cultural Identity [ce.2] ................................ 3
6.3.1 SCOPE 3
6.3.2 DESCRIPTION 4
6.3.4 MEASUREMENT (HERITAGE AND CULTUAL IDENTITY ) 4
ar
6.3.5 SCORE 4
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
6 CULTURAL & ECONOMIC VALUE [CE]
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
1 The Cultural and Econmic Value category consists of factors associated with cultural
conservation and support of the local economy.
(a) Impacts: Impacts resulting from lack of cultural conservation and economic planning
include:
(i) Loss of Cultural Identity

(ii) Economic stagnancy or decline
(b) Mitigate Impact: Factors that could mitigate impact include:
(i) Encouraging designs to align with cultural identity and traditions
ar
(ii) Designing for a seamless integration into the existing cultural fabric
at
(iii) Planning for the use of local materials and workforce
-Q
(c) The recommended sub-criteria Includes:
(i) Support of National Economy
LL
(ii) Heritage & Cultural Identity

W
6.1.2 Reference
s

en
GSAS (Global Sustainability Assessment System) - v 2.1-2013, Gulf Organization for

Research and development, Qatar (Note: QCS reference shall be limited only to this
m
particular version of GSAS and non-other), [Refer to Section 7 Part 1 for the entire list of
reference]
e
Si
6.2 CULTURAL & ECONOMIC VALUE- SUPPORT OF NATIONAL GCC

ECONOMY [CE.1]
6.2.1 Scope
1 The Cultural & Economic Value for Support of National Economy will be measured for the
following categories of the buildings.
Commercial & Governmental
Education
Mosques
Light Industry
Health Centers
Sports
Railways
6.2.2 Description
1 The Project shall maximize the percentage of construction expenditures for goods and
services originating from the national GCC economy (Gulf Cooperation Council- GCC)
1 The Engineer shall maximize the percentage of construction expenditure benefitting the
national GCC economy.
6.2.4 Measurement (Support of National GCC Economy)
1 The Engineer shall complete the Support of National GCC Economy Calculator to determine
the amount of construction expenditure benefitting the national economy, as a percentage of
total construction costs. Construction expenditures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
ar
(a) Laborers/Contractors
(b) Building Materials
at
(c) Construction Materials -Q
(d) Construction Tools/Equipment
(e) Temporary Facilities/Rental Spaces
LL
2 RAILWAYS: This criteria applies to both underground and overground stations

W
6.2.5 Score
s
1 The recommended minimum score by QCS for % of Construction Expenditures Benefitting

en
National Economy is as follows (Table 2).

Table 2: Recomended Minimum Score for QCS Building Typologies
m
% of Construction Expenditures Benefitting X ≥ 30%

e
National Economy (X)

Si
6.3 CULTURAL & ECONOMIC VALUE - HERITAGE & CULTURAL IDENTITY

[CE.2]
6.3.1 Scope
1 The Cultural & Economic Value for Heritage and Cultural Identity shall be measured for the
following categories of the buildings.
Commercial
Governmental
Education
Mosques
Health Centers
Sports
Railways
6.3.2 Description
1 The Project shall encourage design expression that will align with and strengthen cultural
identity and traditions.
1 The Engineer shall develop a concept brief outlining design strategies. The Qatar Heritage
organization and/or an independent expert panel assigned by the Certification Authority will
assess the design and determine whether the project meets the goals outlined in the mission
statement.
6.3.4 Measurement (Heritage and Cultual Identity )
1 All projects shall develop a concept brief to demonstrate the following through drawings and
descriptions of the design strategy:
ar
(a) Enhancement, strengthening and reflection of cultural identity and traditions
(b) Harmonization with cultural values of the region
at
The compliance range will be defined by an Expert Heritage Panel assigned by the
-Q
Certification Authority
2 RAILWAYS: This criteria applies to both underground and overground stations

LL
6.3.5 Score
W
Table 4: Recomended Minimum Score for QCS Building Typologies
To be defined by Certification Authority

s
en
END OF PART
e m
Si
Part 07: Management & Operations
7 MANAGEMENT & OPERATION [MO] ..................................................................................... 2
7.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................ 2

7.1.1 SCOPE 2
7.1.2 REFERENCE 2
7.2 MANAGEMENT & OPERATION - [MO.1] RECYCLING MANAGEMENT .............................. 3

7.2.1 SCOPE 3
7.2.2 DESCRIPTION 3
7.2.4 SCORE 3
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
7 MANAGEMENT & OPERATION [MO]
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Scope
1 The Management and Operations Category consists of factors associated with building
design management and operations
(a) Impacts: Environmental impacts resulting from ineffective building management and
operations include:
(i) Climate Change

(iii) Water Depletion
(iv) Materials Depletion
ar
(v) Land use and Contamination
at
(vi) Water Pollution -Q
(vii) Air Pollution
(viii) Human Comfort & Health
LL
(b) Mitigate Impact: Factors that could mitigate impact include:

W
(i) Creating a Commissioning plan to meet all the sustainable goals of the project
(ii) Providing facilities for the collection ,storage ,and proper removal of organic
s
waste
en
(iii) Providing facilities for the collection ,storage ,and proper removal of recyclables
(iv) Providing leak detection systems
m
(v) Providing energy and water use sub-metering systems

e
Si
(vi) Providing an automated building control system to optimize building

performance
(vii) Managing hospitality resources to reduce waste and support sustainable food
sources
(viii) Promote and educate users about the sustainable initiatives of the building
(ix) Providing a beneficial legacy to the community
7.1.2 Reference

Global Sustainability Assessment System (GSAS) - v 2.1-2013, Gulf Organization for
Research and development, Qatar (Note: QCS reference shall be limited only to this
particular version of GSAS and non-other), [Refer to Section 7 Part 1 for the entire list of
reference]
7.2 MANAGEMENT & OPERATION - [MO.1] RECYCLING MANAGEMENT
7.2.1 Scope
1 Recycling Management shall be measured for the following categories of the buildings:
Table1: Building Typology
Commercial
Governmental
Education
Light Industry
Health Centers
Sports
Railways
ar
7.2.2 Description
at
1 The Project shall encourage space planning to designate containment facilities for the
-Q
building’s recyclable waste streams in order to minimize waste taken to landfills or
incineration facilities.
LL
1 The Project shall develop and implement a Recycling Mangement Plan for the collection,
W
storage, and removal of recycling.Measurement

s
2 The Engineer shall demonstrate that a central sorting and storage area is located close to a
en
truck loading area, and that sufficient storage has been provided for the recyclable material
produced. The sorting and storage area must be properly isolated and ventilated to reduce
m
negative health impacts for users and visitors on the site. Outline the collection procedures
for recyclable materials in the project to demonstrate that recyclable materials will be easily
e
collected and sorted. The Engineer shall also demonstrate how recyclable materials will be
Si
handled at an off-site facility.
7.2.4 Score
Table 2: Recommended minimum Requirement for QCS’s Building Typologyies
Recycling Mangement Plan Shall demonstrate Compliance
End of Part
Part 08: Materials
8 MATERIALS [M] ....................................................................................................................... 2

8.1.1 SCOPE 2
8.1.2 REFERENCE 2
8.2.1 SCOPE 2
8.2.2 DESCRIPTION 3
8.2.4 MEASUREMENT 3
8.2.5 SCORE 3
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 08: Materials
8 MATERIALS [M]
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Scope
1 The Material category consists of factors associated with material extraction, processing,
manufacturing, distribution, use/reuse, and disposal.
(a) Impacts: Environmental impacts resulting from material use and unsustainable
practices include:
(i) Material depletion
(ii) Climate Change
(iii) Fossil Fuel Depletion
ar
(iv) Air Pollution
(b) Mitigate Impact: Factors that could mitigate environmental impact due to material use
at
include: -Q
(i) Using local Materials to reduce transportation needs
(ii) Using responsibly sourced materials
LL
(iii) Using materials with high recycled contents

(iv) Recycling and Reusing materials, on-and off-site
W
(v) Reusing structural elements, on-and off-site

s
(vi) Designing for ease of disassembly and reuse/recycling

en
8.1.2 Reference
m

e
Global Sustainability Assessment System (GSAS) - V2.1 2013, Gulf Organization for
Si
Research and Development, Qatar (Note: QCS reference shall be limited only to this
particular version of GSAS and non-other),
8.2 MATERIALS [M.1] REGIONAL MATERIALS
8.2.1 Scope
1 The Regional Materials shall be measured for the following categories of the buildings
Commercial
Governmental
Education
Mosques
Light Industry
Health Centres
Sports
Railways
Part 08: Materials
8.2.2 Description
1 Encourage the use of regionally manufactured and assembled building elements and
materials in order to reduce the carbon footprint of the materials
1 All projects shall use materials that are regionally manufactured and assembled
8.2.4 Measurement
1 All projects shall complete the Regional Materials Calculator to compute a Performance
Indicator based on the weight and sourcing distance of all applicable materials. Materials
sourcing distance can either be regional (less than or equal to 200 kilometres) or external
(over 200 kilometres). All projects will only consider materials permanently installed in the
project. Exclude mechanical, electrical, and plumbing assemblies, as well as specialty items
and equipment.
ar
8.2.5 Score
at
Table 2: Recommended minimum Score for QCS’s Building Typologies
-Q
Performance Indicator (X) 20 ≤ X  30
LL
END OF PART
W
s
en
e m
Si
QCS 2014 Section 08: Drainage Works Page 1
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1 SUMMARY .............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Scope 2
1.1.2 References 2
1.1.3 Definitions 2
1.1.5 Submittals 3
1.1.7 Site in Private Lands 5
1.1.8 Inspection and Handover Procedure 5
1.2 TESTING OF MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 5
1.2.1 Materials Generally 5
1.2.2 100 Day Acid Test 6
1.3 IMPLEMENTATION ................................................................................................. 7
ar
1.3.1 Site Information 7
1.3.2 Health and Safety 7
at
1.3.3 Setting Out of the Works -Q 10
1.3.4 Inspection of Works 10
1.3.5 CCTV Survey 11
1.3.6 Compensation for Damage to Property 12
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Section includes specifications for the construction and rehabilitation of sewerage,
surface water drainage and treated sewage effluent pipelines, piping, pipeline appurtenances
and sewage treatment plants.
2 This Part includes general requirements basic to this Section and common to its Parts.

This Section
Part 10, Pipeline Cleaning and Inspection Survey
ar
Section 1, General
Section 5, Concrete
at
Section 6, Roadworks -Q
Section 10, Instrumentation, Control and Automation
Section 21, Electrical Works.
LL
1.1.2 References
W
1 Documents of the following agencies are referred to in this Section:

s
American National Standards Institute, ANSI

en
American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM

American Water Works Association, AWWA
m
British Standards Institution, BS

Euro Norms, EN
e
Ministry of Municipal Affairs & Agriculture, Roads Department, Highway Maintenance Section
Si
National Joint Health and Safety Committee for the Water Services, UK
International Organization for Standardization, ISO
Swedish Standards Commission, SS
Water Research Centre, WRC, UK
2 The following standards or revised/updated versions and other documents are referred to in
this Part:
BS 6100 ......................Glossary of building and civil engineering terms
BS 8010 ......................Pipelines
BS EN 752 ..................Drain and Sewer Systems outside buildings
1.1.3 Definitions
1 The following definitions apply generally to this Section. These and other definitions included
in this Section are based, where applicable, on BS 6100, Part 2.
(a) Surface water: Water that flows over, or rests on, the surface of buildings, other
structures or the ground; the definition is extended to include groundwater.
Part 01: General
(b) Sewage: Contents of a sewer that does not solely convey surface water.
(c) Treated sewage effluent (TSE): Effluent from a sewage treatment works following
completion of treatment of sewage and disinfection of the treated sewage effluent to
attain a water quality standard suitable for reuse for selected purposes.
1 Unless otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Specification, designated in the Project
Specification, or directed by the Engineer, the material, equipment and systems to be
provided under this Section shall:
(a) be capable of providing the required level of service

(i) under the climatic conditions in Qatar as stated in Section 1
(ii) in handling the process fluids and materials of the prevailing and indicated
(iii) quality and quantity and variations thereof
ar
(iv) under the prevailing and indicated characteristics and quality of the natural and
at
(v) process environments and process materials
(b)
-Q
comply with the provisions of BS EN 752, BS 8010, and BS 8301.
1.1.5 Submittals
General
LL
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval all drawings and data including
W
samples, calculations, schedules, certificates and other submittals specified in Section 1, this
Section, the Project Specification, and required by variations. Submittals shall be in
accordance with the procedures specified in Section 1, in this Part and in the other Parts of
s
this Section.
en
2 The Contractor, shall be responsible for preparing final record drawings relating to the civil,
m
structural and architectural aspects of the Works. Mechanical, Electrical and ICA record
e
drawings shall be provided by the Contractor as required by Section 1 Part 21.

Si
3 During the course of the Works, the Contractor shall maintain a detailed record of all
changes in order to facilitate accurate preparation of record drawings and to ensure that
these drawings are in all respects a true record of the installation.
4 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer or his nominated representative drawings and a
photocopy of each schedule correctly and neatly modified in red ink to truly represent the
Works constructed. These shall be submitted to the Engineer or his nominated
representative for approval before the contract completion date.
5 If any drawing is not approved, it shall be returned to the Contractor with marked indications
of the additional information required.
6 In addition the Contractor shall complete the Drainage Affairs Network Record Sheets in the
prescribed format but not necessarily limited to, the following Record Sheets as applicable in
both hard copy and electronic copy in a widely used Data Exchange Format (DXF) textual
(i.e. .mdb, .xls or similar approved) format. Electronic format record sheets shall be obtained
from the Engineer or his nominated representative.
Part 01: General
PIPE LINE AND APPURTENANCES PUMPING STATIONS

a) Manhole Record (2 pages) a) Pumping Station Well Inventory Sheet
b) Discharge Chamber Record (2 b) Pumping Station Hoist Inventory Sheet

pages)
c) Sewer Record c) Pumping Station Motor Inventory Sheet
d) Valve Inventory d) Pumping Station Penstock Inventory Sheet
e) Valve Chamber Survey (3 pages) e) Pumping Station Data Sheet
f) TSE Pipeline Record f) Pumping Station Pump Inventory Sheet
g) Rising Main Record g) Pumping Station Shaft Inventory Sheet
h) TSE Tower Record h) Pumping Station Valve Inventory Sheet
i) TSE Distribution Chamber i) Pumping Station Ventilation Inventory Sheet
ar
j) Overflow Pipe Record j) Pumping Station Fan Inventory Sheet
at
k) TSE/Rising Main Fittings Record k) Pumping Station Generator Sheet
-Q
l) House Connection Record l)Pumping Station Control Panel Inventory
Sheet 1
m) Pumping Station Record m) Pumping Station Control Panel Inventory
LL
Sheet 2
n) Gully Record n) Pumping Station Control Panel Inventory
Sheet 3
W
o) CCTV record sheet and video tape o) Pumping Station Actuator Sheet
s
p) Pumping Station Air Conditioner Sheet

en
7 The Contractor shall be deemed to have included all provisions within his Tender should the
m
above list be altered by PWA from time to time.

e
8 Individual Record Sheets shall be prepared for each length of sewer, TSE pipeline, rising
Si
main and overflow pipe, each manhole and house and gully connection, and shall be
submitted to the Engineer or his nominated representative for approval after which they shall
become the property of the Employer.
9 Record sheets for pipelines (c, f, g, i, j, k, l & n above as appropriate), and record sheets for
any other work that is to be covered up, shall be presented for approval prior to covering up
the works. Backfilling will not be permitted prior to the record sheets being approved.
10 Record sheets for work of an exposed nature that can be later verified by the Engineer or his
nominated representative may be submitted up to 14 days after the work has been carried
out.
11 Photocopies of record sheets relating to work carried out since the previous valuation shall
be submitted with each interim valuation application.
12 No valuation of sections of work will be considered in the absence of completed record

sheets for the work in question.
Part 01: General
13 A Certificate of Completion will not be issued until a complete set of Record Sheets endorsed
by the Engineer’s Site Representative has been presented to the Engineer.
14 Blank hard copy Record Sheets, as detailed in sub-clause 6 above will be supplied by the
Engineer.
15 The Contractor shall accurately locate by co-ordinates to the Qatar National Grid, the centre
of all covers of manholes and chambers constructed under this project or to which any work
whatsoever has been undertaken under this project. The Contractor shall also locate by co-
ordinates the position of buried bends and fittings on pressure mains. Where pipelines are
not laid to straight lines between chambers or fittings the co-ordinates of every pipe joint shall
be recorded prior to covering up the pipeline. Where flexible pipes are used coordinates
shall be at 10m intervals.
16 All Survey works shall be undertaken by Survey Company approved by Engineer.
ar
1 Materials and products shall be furnished by approved suppliers as designated in the
at
Contract and Project Specifications. -Q
2 Survey work for obtaining record sheet data and the compilation of the data shall be carried
out by approved prequalified surveying companies designated in the Contract or Project
Specification.
LL
1.1.7 Site in Private Lands

W
1 The Employer will serve the necessary notices to permit pipelines to be constructed in private
s
land in accordance with the agreed programme of work. The Contractor shall not enter those
en
lands without the Engineer’s permission. The Contractor shall temporarily fence the Site in
private lands to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Contractor’s operations shall be
confined within the fenced area. The Contractor shall use the Site for the purposes of
m
constructing the Works only.

e
Si
1.1.8 Inspection and Handover Procedure
1 The inspection and handing over of the Works to the Employer shall be in accordance with
the procedure specified in Section 1, and, Clauses 1.3.4 and 1.3.5 of this Part.
1.2 TESTING OF MATERIALS
1.2.1 Materials Generally
1 All materials to be used in contact with sewage or its atmosphere must be shown to
withstand corrosion. In the absence of satisfactory evidence of equivalent testing results,
materials will be required to pass the 100 day acid test as detailed in Clause 1.2.2 of this
Part.
Part 01: General
1.2.2 100 Day Acid Test

General
1 Based on the results at 100 days, materials shall be deemed to be unsuitable for use in
contact with sewage or sewer atmosphere in the opinion of the Engineer the tested samples
fail to satisfy any of the following requirements:
withstand corrosion and in the absence of satisfactory evidence of equivalent testing results
will be required to pass successfully the 100 day acid test as detailed in this Specification.
The test shall be carried out by an approved laboratory, experienced in undertaking the test.
withstand corrosion. Such materials may be divided into two categories:
4 Category 1 Materials - material which serve a purpose other than protection (e.g. pipes and
pipe jointing materials)
ar
5 Category 2 Materials – materials which protect other (usually structural) corrodible materials
at
(e.g. coating to step irons, GRP manhole liners, acid resistant mortar).
-Q
6 Sample preparation and testing shall, as far as is possible, simulate the conditions to which
the materials will ultimately be subjected.
LL
7 Samples shall be taken and prepared in a manner to be approved by the Engineer. Care
shall be taken in preparation of samples of non-homogenous materials to ensure that only
W
the face that will be exposed to the corrosive environment in the sewer is exposed to the acid
during the testing.
s
(a) Samples in Category I materials shall be cut from pipe/pipe joint samples selected by
en
the Engineer and cut ends adequately protected by a gel coat.

m
(b) Samples of Category II materials shall be generally prepared by coating a corrodible

material with the protective coating to be tested.
e
Si
8 For each test two samples shall be prepared and indelibly marked with an identifying number.
9 One sample shall be partially immersed in 10% V/V sulphuric acid maintained at a
º
temperature of 50 C for 100 days. The concentration of acid shall be maintained by
preventing evaporation. In addition the strength of the acid shall be regularly checked and
the level and strength adjusted as necessary. The second sample shall be kept as a control.
10 The test sample shall be visually inspected at weekly intervals. Interim reports on the
condition of the sample shall be submitted to the Engineer by the laboratory following visual
inspections of the samples after 25, 50 and 75 days. Such reports shall include reference to
any changes in surface condition and colour of the samples, changes in colour of the liquid,
and any presence of any particles in the liquid.
11 If the interim report after 75 days is satisfactory the Contractor may request the Engineer’s
approval to use of the material prior to completion of the 100 day acid test. Such approval
shall be solely at the discretion of the Engineer, and the use of the materials shall be entirely
at the Contractor’s risk. Any costs associated with the replacement of such materials, should
they subsequently fail the acid test, shall be borne by the Contractor.
Part 01: General
12 On completion of the test period, the sample tested in sulphuric acid shall be split or the
coating removed to determine the internal condition of the sample. The final test report shall
give full details of:
(a) The test procedure adopted.

(b) The surface condition of the samples before, during and after testing, listing the times
at which significant changes in appearance were noted.
(c) The internal condition of the sample.
(d) Any changes in the solution.
13 Materials shall be deemed to be unsuitable for use in acid environments if the acid tested
samples fail to satisfy any of the following requirements:
(a) Category 1 Materials - the surface of the samples shall not be significantly different in
texture from the non-immersed control sample.
(b) Category 2 Materials -the underlying corrodible material shall not show any sign of
ar
corrosion.
at
14 The surfaces of the samples shall not be significantly different in texture from the non-
-Q
immersed control sample. No change in surface hardness will be permitted, and no splits,
cracks, blisters or delamination will be allowed.
1.3 IMPLEMENTATION
LL
1.3.1 Site Information

W
1 Notwithstanding any relevant information included or referred to in the Project Specification

s
or furnished by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining his own
en
information on ground and subsoil conditions at the Site and the locations of all pipelines and
services within or near the Site.
m
2 The Contractor shall complete a services information sheet for each section of the Works
e
and shall submit the completed sheet for the Engineer’s approval at least seven days before
Si
work is due to begin on that section. Work shall not begin on that section until the respective
services information sheet has been approved by the Engineer.
3 Blank services information sheets will be provided by the Engineer.
1.3.2 Health and Safety
1 The requirements of this Clause are pursuant to or in addition to the health and safety
requirements in Section 1 and Section 11. Safety requirements in relation to specific classes
of work are specified in other Parts of this Section.
2 The recommendations contained in ”Working with Sewage – The Health Hazards” Pbulished
by the Health & Safety Executive – http://www.hse.gov.uk/pubns/indg198.htm shall be
adhered to in respect of all work to be carried out in operational sewers, pumping stations
and sewage treatment works.
Part 01: General
3 Arrangements shall be made with Drainage Operation and Maintenance Department, Public
Works Authority before entering in or working on existing sewers and associated works. A
Permit to Work must be obtained from Asset Affairs Drainage Operations and Maintenance
Department prior to any works taking place .
4 The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the hazards involved in working in confined spaces
including sewers, manholes, inspection chambers, wet wells, pumping stations and ancillary
structures. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that adequate precautions are
taken to ensure safe working conditions as well as the availability of safe tools and facilities.
The Contractor shall issue his risk assessment to the Engineer for his approval prior to
applying for a Permit to Work at the site. This risk assessment shall meet but not be limited
to the requirements of this Part of this Section.
5 The Contractor shall appoint a Safety Officer who shall be suitably qualified and experienced.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Safety Officer is available on Site during the mobilisation
period and thereafter to train the Contractor’s personnel in safety operations. The work shall
not proceed unless such training has been accomplished to the Engineer’s approval.
ar
6 The Safety Officer’s main responsibilities shall be to
at
(a) ensure that all the Contractor’s employees follow the agreed safety procedures
-Q
(b) ensure that all employees are supplied with the appropriate safety/protective
equipment and that it is used and maintained as per agreed procedures
LL
(c) assist in carrying out of refresher safety training courses for working in confined
spaces
W
(d) investigate all accidents and dangerous occurrences, and where applicable, submit
reports recommending actions to be taken to prevent a recurrence.
s
en
7 The Contractor shall provide and erect approved safety barriers around all unattended open
manholes and trenches. All manholes shall be covered with suitable temporary steel sheets.
m
Advance warning notice road signs shall be erected at least 50 m either side of areas where
work is in progress.
e
Si
8 The need for adequate protection to the general public in the vicinity of the Works is
stressed.
9 Care must be exercised when working in or near live sewers, and tests must be made to
verify that no hydrogen sulphide or other toxic gases are present, before anyone enters an
existing manhole or confined space.
10 Particular attention is drawn to the dangers of poisoning, asphyxiation or explosion while

working in, or near, or inspecting pipelines, manholes, chambers, treatment units, pumping
stations, or any confined space. In this connection the Contractor must obtain appropriate
safety equipment and acquaint all personnel with the dangers involved, and precautions to be
taken, and shall regularly discuss with the Engineer's Representative the sufficiency of safety
precautions on site.
11 The following minimum precautions must be taken before entry into a manhole, chamber or
other confined space:
(a) Sufficient numbers of covers of manholes or chambers upstream and downstream of

the entry point shall be removed to ensure adequate ventilation.
Part 01: General
(b) The manhole or confined space must be thoroughly ventilated by mechanical air
blower prior to entry.
(c) Before entering the confined space the atmosphere shall be checked for the presence
of toxic gases, flammable gases, and oxygen level.
(d) The mechanical air blower must be kept close by the manhole or confined space that
has been entered.
(e) No naked lights, matches or lighters shall be used in a sewer or in close proximity to
an open manhole or chamber. All equipment shall be intrinsically safe.
(f) The hydrogen sulphide level in the manhole or confined space must be continually
monitored. If the level rises the manhole or confined space must be evacuated
immediately.
(g) All persons entering a manhole or confined space must wear a safety harness properly
rigged to the lifting frame.
(h) At least two top men must be available to operate the air blower and lifting tackle in the
ar
event of an emergency. The top men shall keep in touch with the men in the sewer,
manhole, chamber or confined space by calling or signalling to them at frequent
at
intervals. No person shall enter the confined space alone.
-Q
12 Before entering any confined space, the atmosphere shall be checked for the presence of
toxic gases, flammable gases and oxygen level. The Contractor shall have on site in working
order, sufficient calibrated gas monitors to continually monitor the atmosphere in all confined
LL
spaces and in all areas adjacent to sewage where men are working.
W
13 The Contractor will not be permitted to work in manholes, pipelines, or pumping stations if
such gas monitors are not in use.
s
14 The following equipment is to be made available throughout the Contract at each and every
en
entry point to a confined space.

m
Safety Harness (not a safety belt) and ropes 1 No.

Lifting frame and tackle for safety harness 1 No.
e
Gas monitor 1 No.

Si
Mechanical air blower with compressor and generator 1 No.
15 Gas monitors shall incorporate the following features:
(a) (a) Continuous monitoring of oxygen level, with visual and audible high and low level
alarms.
(b) (b) Continuous electrochemical monitoring of Hydrogen Sulphide with indication of the
gas concentration, and audible and visual alarms under the following conditions:
(i) Time weighted average providing 8 hours exposure at the threshold limit value.
(ii) Time weighted average providing 10 minutes of exposure at short term
exposure limit, or ceiling value.
(iii) Exposures to ten times the threshold limit value.
(c) (c) Continual monitoring for flammable gas at intervals not exceeding 2 minutes.
Part 01: General
1.3.3 Setting Out of the Works
1 The following requirements are pursuant to or in addition to the requirements in Section 1.

The Contractor shall locate, by co-ordinates to the Qatar National Grid, the locations of the
elements of the Works. Pipelines shall be located by the position of the centre of manholes
and chamber covers. Pressure pipelines shall be located by the position of bends and fittings.
2 The execution of surveys, recording of data and preparation of record sheets shall comply
with the following requirements:
(a) surveys shall be based on Qatar National Grid survey control points
(b) co-ordinates shall be located to within 0.1 m
(c) co-ordinates shall be determined by radial (polar) observations using theodolite and
electronic distance measuring (EDM) equipment. The co-ordinates shall be checked
by independent methods and the error shown to be within acceptable limits
(d) if required, additional temporary control points may be established as follows:
ar
(i) observations for additional temporary control points shall consist of at least two
at
(ii) rounds of angles (on two faces) with a different zero setting for each round.
-Q
(iii) where applicable, distances shall be determined by trigonometric methods and
(iv) at least two rounds of vertical angles (on two faces) shall be observed.
LL
(v) positions of additional temporary control points shall be determined by

(vi) reference to not less than three Qatar National Grid survey control points and
W
shall be proven to have standard errors of not more than  0.08 m.

s
en
3 On completion of work, all observations, computations, sketches and any other

documentation used in determining the co-ordinates shall be submitted to the Engineer. A
m
daily log giving the number of additional control stations and manholes surveyed shall be
maintained and submitted. A comprehensive report on the work carried out including
e
methods used, problems encountered, solutions used and a full summary of the results shall
Si
be submitted.
4 The Engineers approval of the setting out shall be obtained before work on each element
commences.
5 The Contractor shall be deemed to have included all provisions within his tender for the
‘topographical survey information which should include: - features (fittings), manhole
chamber co-ordinates/levels in a widely used Data Exchange Format (DXF), accurate
positional survey drawings (i.e. either.DWG or.DXF) layout files together with equally widely
used DXF textural (i.e. xls, .txt or similar approved).
1.3.4 Inspection of Works
1 The Contractor shall provide a safe and convenient means of access to the Works to enable
the Engineer’s inspections to be carried out.
2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer notice of work requiring inspection on a
completed Notice of Inspection Required form not less than 24 hours before requiring
inspection of those works. Blank forms will be provided by the Engineer.
Part 01: General
3 Requests for inspection by the Engineer shall be submitted for the following:
(a) setting out

(b) formation level of excavation
(c) pipelaying, bedding and testing
(d) base slabs
(e) manhole precast chamber rings in place before internal linings and external coatings
are applied
(f) manhole concrete surround
(g) formwork and reinforcing steel before concreting
(h) before backfilling of permanent Works
(i) before reinstatement
(j) any other constructional operation that the Engineer may require.
ar
4 Works covered up or in any way made unavailable for inspection before the submission of
at
the Notice of Inspection Required form or the Engineer’s approval to proceed shall be
uncovered at the Contractor’s expense.
-Q
5 Prior to inspection, the Contractor shall submit his Quality Control plan (QC plan) / Inspection
and Test Plan (ITP) in accordance with Section 1 Clause 7.6.3.
LL
1.3.5 CCTV Survey

W
1 The Contractor shall on written instruction of the Engineer undertake a CCTV survey on
designated lengths of pipelines laid during the execution of the Works, including pipeline
s
en
cleaning where necessary and submission of a Survey Report, as part of the final inspection
of the Works.
m
2 The Certificate of Completion for the Works or part thereof shall not be issued until the CCTV
e
Survey, including provision of the Survey Report, and any subsequent sewer remedial works
Si
have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3 Should any length of the surveyed between adjacent manholes, or the manholes indicate
failure to comply with the requirements of the Contract, the whole cost of any pipeline
cleaning, the CCTV Survey, Survey Report and any subsequent remedial works carried out
to the satisfaction of the Engineer shall be borne by the Contractor.
4 The CCTV Survey shall be carried out by an approved specialist subcontractor designated in
the Project Specification. The subcontractor shall provide suitable documentation to verify
previous experience in undertaking CCTV Surveys to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5 Pipeline cleaning and CCTV surveys and reporting shall be carried out as specified in Part 10
of this Section.
Part 01: General
1.3.6 Compensation for Damage to Property
1 Before commencing any work on site, the Contractor shall undertake an extensive condition
survey of all properties adjacent to the proposed works. A detailed report including sketch
plans, schedules of defects and photographs shall be submitted to the Engineer for
agreement.
2 The Contractor shall not mark boundary walls to properties in any way whether deliberately
for identification purposes or accidentally. All markings, howsoever caused, shall be repaired
and repainted. Sufficient area of wall shall be repainted to avoid a patchy appearance.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 02: Earthworks
2 EARTHWORKS ............................................................................................. 2
2.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

2.1.1 Scope 2
2.1.2 References 2
2.1.3 Definitions 2
2.1.4 Trial Holes 3
2.1.5 Services Co-ordination 3
2.2 EXCAVATIONS ............................................................................................. 3
2.2.1 General 3
2.2.2 Surfaces 3
2.2.3 Materials 4
2.2.4 Excavations to be Kept Dry 5
2.2.5 Access 5
ar
2.2.6 Trench Excavations 6
2.2.7 Appurtenant Structures for Pipelines 8
at
2.2.8 Excavation in Roads -Q 9
2.2.9 Excavation in Areas Other Than Road Reserves 9
2.2.10 Support of Excavations 10
2.2.11 Slips and Falls and Excess Excavation 10
LL
2.2.12 Trimming and Levelling 11

2.2.13 Excavations Not to be Left Open 11
W
2.2.14 Dewatering of Excavations 12

2.3 BACKFILL .................................................................................................... 13
s
2.3.1 Pipe Bedding 14

en
2.3.2 Pipe Surround 16

2.3.3 Geotextile Filter Membrane 16
m
2.3.4 Backfilling Excavation 17

e
2.3.5 Backfilling Excavations with Cement-Bound Granular Material 19

Si
2.3.6 Backfilling Excavation with Flowable Fill (Foamed Concrete) 21

2.3.7 Backfilling Next to Pipeline Structures 22
2.3.8 No-Fines Concrete as Trench Backfill 22
2.4 REINSTATEMENT OF SURFACES ............................................................ 22
2.4.1 Reinstatement within the Highway 22
2.4.2 Reinstatement of Surfaces Other Than in the Highway 22
2.5 EXISTING SERVICES ................................................................................. 23
2.6 BLASTING ................................................................................................... 24
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ...................................................................................... 26

2.7.1 Service Ducts 26
2.7.2 Formation of Bunds and Embankments 26
Part 02: Earthworks
2 EARTHWORKS
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes earthworks for pipelines including, excavation, granular pipe bedding,
concrete protection of pipe, backfill and compaction, and service protection ducts to protect
existing utilities.

This Section
Part 1, General
Part 3, Pipeline Installation
Part 9, Trenchless Pipeline Construction
Part 10, Sewer Rehabilitation
ar
Part 12, Vacuum Sewerage System
at
Section 1, General
Section 3, Ground Investigation -Q
Section 5, Concrete
Section 6, Roadworks
Section 12, Earthworks Related to Buildings
LL
Section 28, Landscaping.

W
2.1.2 References
s
1 The following standards and other documents are referred to in this Part
en
BS 410........................Test sieves
BS 1924......................Stabilised materials for civil engineering purposes
m
BS 6031......................Code of practice for earthworks

e
BS EN 12620..............Aggregates for concrete

Si

BS EN ISO 11058 ......Geotextiles and geotextile-related products
BS EN ISO 12956 ......Geotextiles and geotextile-related products
Ministry of Municipal Affairs & Agriculture, Roads Department, Highway Maintenance

Section, Code of Practice and Specification for Road Openings in the Highway
2.1.3 Definitions
1 Trench excavation means excavation in all materials of whatever nature encountered for
trenches into which pipes, ducts or cables are to be laid, or manholes, chambers and
appurtenances constructed, and the term pipe shall mean pipe of all kinds and for whatever
purposes.
Part 02: Earthworks
2.1.4 Trial Holes
1 Trial holes for determining the location of existing services shall be excavated well ahead of
the trench excavation to such depths as necessary to determine and confirm the alignment
for the trench and the soil condition. The Contractor shall arrange for the refilling and
reinstatement of trial holes to be carried out immediately after the required information is
obtained. The reinstatement of trial holes shall be carried out to the approval of the Engineer.
2.1.5 Services Co-ordination
1 In addition to the requirements of the relevant Parts of Section 1 and Part 1 of this Section,
the following paragraphs shall apply to services co-ordination for pipeline excavations.
2 Notwithstanding any relevant information furnished by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be
responsible for ascertaining from his own inspection of the Site and the respective Utilities
Service Departments and private landowners the position of all mains, pipes, cables, and
other services and facilities whether underground or overhead within or near the Site.
ar
3 Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall make arrangements necessary for
at
carrying out the Works with the various Utilities Service Departments and private landowners.
-Q
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused as a result of his omission in this
respect, and for any damage caused by his failure to notify the Engineer’s representative and
the agencies concerned immediately any service is encountered in the excavations.
LL
4 Work on existing services is specified in Subparts 2.4, 2.5 and 2.7 of this Part.
W
2.2 EXCAVATIONS
s
2.2.1 General
en
1 The Contractor shall be deemed to have obtained additional site information in accordance
m
with Clause 1.3.1 of this Section.

e
2.2.2 Surfaces
Si
1 Before the surface of the area to be excavated is disturbed the Contractor shall take and
record levels of the area in the presence of the Engineer. At least two days notice shall be
provided to the Engineer.
2 The demolition of existing works shall be in accordance with Section 2.
3 Except as otherwise designated in the Project Specification or directed by the Engineer,

breaking out and restoration of existing surfaces and works shall be done in accordance with
the Code of Practice and Specification for Road Openings in the Highway published by the
Highway Maintenance Section, Civil Engineering Department, Ministry of Municipal Affairs
and Agriculture.
4 Surface materials shall be carefully stripped or otherwise removed and set aside for reuse,
restoration, or replacement as directed by the Engineer.
Part 02: Earthworks
5 Where the trench excavation crosses surface barriers such as fences and walls the
Contractor shall
(a) obtain the written approval of the Engineer before breaching the barrier
(b) minimise the size of the opening, where possible using a short heading
(c) carefully dismantle the barrier as necessary for reuse, replacement, or reinstatement
(d) provide temporary fencing for any removed parts of such barriers as directed by the
Engineer.
2.2.3 Materials
1 Selected excavated material shall be the most suitable portions of the excavated material
free from matter harmful to other materials in the works and which is capable of being
compacted to the specified density to form stable fill. The material shall also conform to the
requirements mentioned in Clauses 3.3.2, 3.3.3 and 3.3.5 of Section 6.
ar
2 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate suitable borrowed or imported fill
material which may be necessary and to carry out such tests as the Engineer may require to
at
demonstrate the suitability of the fill to be supplied. Imported fill shall be from a source
-Q
approved by the Engineer. Imported fill shall have the following properties
(a) maximum stone size of 150 mm except as specified in Clause 2.3.2 of this Part
LL
(b) liquid limit less than 35 %

(c) plasticity index of not more than 10.
W
3 Excavated material unsuitable for use in the Works shall not be stockpiled on the Site.
s
en
4 Disposal of excavated material not used in the Works shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be at a location approved by the relevant government agency.
m
5 Excavated material shall not be stockpiled on road reservations nor at other locations
e
designated in the Project Specification. The Contractor shall confine his operations to the
Si
working areas available to him for the construction of the Works particularly where this is
located in roads or in other places to which the public has free access.
6 Stockpiling materials on the Site or off the Site, as necessary, shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor. The stockpiling of surplus excavated material or other debris on site is not
permitted. All surplus excavated material shall be removed from site to approved disposal
sites. All dump trucks transporting waste shall be fully covered to prevent discharge of the
contents.
7 Any temporary storage alongside the trench excavation shall be to stable slopes and heights
and deposited in such a manner that no damage and as little inconvenience as possible is
caused. Backfilling materials shall be fenced off and continuously irrigated with water to avoid
dust and pollution.
8 Where the nature of the excavated material is suitable, the Contractor’s temporary storage
as aforesaid shall include for separate storage as the Engineer may direct of the various
grades of materials hereinafter specified for the refilling and surface reinstatement of trench
or structure excavation, namely, soft material, coarse material, hard material and topsoil. The
Contractor is to agree a screening location with the concerned municipality.
Part 02: Earthworks
9 The screening of trench excavated material will not be permitted on site without the written
10 The Contractor shall post signs indicating proposed use of material stockpiled. Post signs
shall be readable from all directions of approach to each stockpile. Signs should be clearly
worded and readable by equipment operators from their normal seated position.
11 The Contractor shall not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities,
adjacent property, or completed work, if weight of stockpiled material could induce excessive
settlement.
12 The Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals for the sites of borrow pits and quarries.
All borrow pits shall be left in a tidy and regular state. The Contractor shall ensure that pits
are self-draining at all times and do not constitute a nuisance and danger to the public.
2.2.4 Excavations to be Kept Dry
ar
1 The Contractor shall keep excavations free of water, sewage, and other liquids whether
affected by tides, floods, storms, or otherwise so that the Works shall be constructed in dry
at
conditions. -Q
2 The Contractor shall keep the subsoil or accumulated water or sewage at a level lower than
the bottom of the permanent work until trench backfilling is complete or for such other period
LL
3 Measures taken by the Contractor for the control of water shall conform with the
W
specifications of this Part.

s
2.2.5 Access
en
1 A minimum clear carriageway width of 3 m shall be maintained for vehicular traffic unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
e m
2 Excavations in roads shall be organised to reduce to a minimum the interval between

Si
opening up and backfilling excavations.
3 The Contractor shall supply, post and display at all entrances to all properties a Notice of
Excavation before any excavation is undertaken in front of or in the vicinity of the property.
The notice shall be in the form of a self- adhesive glossy sticker which shall be easily
removable. A typical sample is shown in Section E of the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall remove the label after all the excavation has been backfilled.
4 Should cess-pits of other artificial obstructions be encountered in the excavation either above
or below ground level the Contractor shall forthwith advise the Engineer’s Representative
thereof and execute at his own cost such work as may be ordered.
5 The Contractor shall allow for laying pipes through any cess pits or septic tanks encountered
along the route. Pipes shall be laid such that joints occur either side of the structure or in a
manner approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
Part 02: Earthworks
2.2.6 Trench Excavations
1 The Contractor shall provide the necessary support of excavations. Details of excavation
support systems shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval at least sixty (60)
days before any excavation work commences.
2 Support of excavations shall be provided in accordance with BS 6031, except as otherwise

specified in this Part.
3 The term “necessary support of excavations” covers all normal methods of temporary
support including timber, concrete, steel sheet piling, steel trench sheeting or other materials
as may be approved by the Engineer. Where excavation is carried out near or under an
existing structure or any portion of the Work, the Contractor shall prevent damage due to
subsidence with methods approved by the Engineer.
4 The maximum trench width shall be as given in Table 2.1 unless otherwise shown on the
drawings. The width of the excavation shall be increased if necessary to provide space for
ar
the trench support system; undercutting of the trench sides will not be permitted.
at
Table 2.1 – Maximum pipe trench width at 300mm above pipe crown
Nominal Bore Maximum Trench Nominal Bore
-Q Maximum Trench
mm Width mm mm Width mm
100 550 600 1350
150 600 800 1550
LL
200 800 1000 2000

W
300 900 1200 2300

400 1000 1400 2500
s
500 1250 1500 2700

en
If the Contractor exceeds these trench widths he shall provide plain or reinforced concrete
cradles and /or reinforced concrete arches to the requirements shown on the drawings and to
m
the approval of the Engineer at no additional cost. When directed by the Engineer, supply
and install strong and sufficient shoring to support excavations at no additional cost.
e
Si
5 No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for working in a confined space or if the
position of the Works precludes the use of mechanical excavators or the storage of
excavated materials next to the excavations.
6 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of all temporary works and trench support
systems or proprietary manufacturers’ catalogues detailing his proposed methods of
construction at least one month prior to starting excavations. The shop drawings shall be
complete with all details, design calculations, and description of construction methods. The
Engineer’s approval of the Contractor’s submittal shall not relieve the Contractor from
obligations under the Contract.
7 Except as otherwise precluded by the Project Specification, the Contractor may propose to
excavate with battered side slopes. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
three copies of a report which shall include relevant calculations and method statement
demonstrating the adequacy of the proposals.
Part 02: Earthworks
8 In the event of any trench being excavated with battered or stepped sides, that portion of the
trench which extends from the formation to a point not less than 300 mm above the crown of
the pipe when laid in its correct position shall be formed with vertical sides. Support shall be
provided to the vertical trench sides to prevent ground movement. Where temporary trench
supports are provided they shall be such that no ground movement occurs on removal.
9 Where battered sides are proposed, no excavation work shall begin until the Engineer’s
approval has been obtained. The Engineer’s approval shall not relieve the Contractor from
his obligations under the Contract.
10 The line and level of trenches shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall be maintained in
accordance with the following procedure:
(a) before beginning trench excavations, the route of the pipeline shall be surveyed and
set out accurately and the existing ground level shall be agreed with the Engineer
(b) sight rails shall then be fixed and maintained at each change of gradient, and at as
many intermediate points as may be necessary. The centreline and the level to which
ar
the excavation is to be carried out shall be marked on the site rails and the rails shall
at
not be more than 20 m apart
(c) alternate methods to maintain line and level of excavations shall be subject to the
-Q
11 Trench excavation shall be carried out as follows:

LL
(a) trench excavation shall be carried out by such methods and to such lines, dimensions
and depths as shall allow for the proper construction of the Works
W
(b) trench widths shall conform with the limits shown on the Drawings, or ,in the case of
flexible pipes, to the widths stated in the Contractor’s approved methods statement.
s
Where trench widths do not conform to the limits shown on the Drawings, the Engineer
en
will direct the Contractor as to the measures to be taken to remedy the situation. Such
remedial works shall be carried out by the Contractor as an obligation under the
m
Contract at no additional cost to the Employer

e
(c) rock encountered in trench excavations shall be so excavated that the clearance
Si
between the pipe, when laid, and the rock sides and bottom of the trench is kept to
the minimum limits necessary to provide for the specified thickness of bedding and
where provided the concrete protection of the pipe
(d) bell holes and holes and depressions for couplings, valves and the like shall be
excavated the same distance below these installations as specified for the pipe.
(e) When the trench width measured 300mm above the crown of the pipe exceeds the
maximum allowable shown on the drawings for granular surround the Contractor shall
proceed as Clause 4.3.2 of this Section.
12 Limitations on the lengths of opened trenches shall be as follows:
(a) no length of trench excavation shall begin until the pipes and fittings to be laid in the
length of excavation are available at the Site.
(b) the Engineer reserves the right to direct the Contractor on the lengths of trench
which shall be excavated at any one time
(c) the Contractor shall not be permitted to excavate trenches in more than one location
in any road at a given time without the Engineer’s approval
Part 02: Earthworks
(d) in areas accessible by the public, the maximum length of open trench in any one
section shall not exceed 100 m. In other areas the trench shall be dug only so far in
advance of pipe laying as the Engineer shall permit.
13 The Contractor shall at his own expense remove from the Site all unsuitable and excess
material resulting from excavations beyond that required for the foundation, lining or bedding
and shall make good the same with concrete or suitable fill material as may be required by
the Engineer.
14 The Engineer will inspect ground condition, or trench formation level and may direct the
Contractor to remove additional material and to refill the excavation with concrete or other
approved material. Should any acceptable native material at the foundation level
subsequently become unsuitable the Contractor shall remove it and replace it with concrete
or other suitable material as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Employer.
15 If utility obstructions are encountered during excavation and cannot be diverted, the
Contractor shall make the necessary changes to the design drawings and submit to the
ar
Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall not make any deviation from the specified lines
or grade of the tunnel without written approval from the Engineer.
at
16 Excavation shall be carried out to the dimensions, depths or levels in such a manner as to
-Q
avoid excavation of or disturbance of material below grade.
17 Pipes of greater strength or the use of superior pipe bedding may be used in lieu of
LL
maintaining the maximum trench widths shown in Table 2.1 or specified for various pipe
diameters, subject to the Engineer’s prior written approval.
W
18 The Contractor shall excavate trenches to the levels that will allow for the pipe wall thickness
and bedding thickness.
s
en
19 The Contractor shall leave a clear space as approved by the Engineer, between the edge of
the excavation and the inner toes of the spoil banks.
e m
20 The Contractor shall grade the trench bottom with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed
material, and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth. Allow space for
Si
bedding material if shown on the design drawings or as specified.
21 The Contractor shall remove soft sub-grade that may cause pipe settlement and replace with
suitable backfill compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm.
22 The bottom of excavations for permanent structural works shall be free from mud and water,
trimmed clean, protected from the effects of the weather and consolidated to achieve the
required bearing capacity prior to the placement of structural work or construction materials
within the excavation.
2.2.7 Appurtenant Structures for Pipelines
1 The Contractor shall carry out the necessary excavations to accommodate appurtenant
structures such as manholes, chambers and thrust blocks. The requirements for the
completion of excavations and handling of excavated material shall be as specified above for
trench excavations shall apply.
Part 02: Earthworks
2.2.8 Excavation in Roads
1 In addition to the foregoing and the provisions of Section 1, pipeline excavation in roads and
highway reserves including the provision of public safety facilities including barriers and
enclosures shall be in accordance with the Code of Practice and Specification for Road
Openings in the Highway published by the Highway Maintenance Section, Roads
Department, Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture (MMAA).
2 Where trenches are excavated open cut in roads, the asphalt shall be saw cut along the
edges of the trench, prior to excavation.
3 In the lanes of the road that remain open to traffic, road drains and channels shall be kept
free from construction materials, debris and obstruction at all times.
4 Normally trench excavation along roads shall be located in the service reserves or verges
adjacent to the road rather than in the carriageway itself. Trench excavation shall wherever
practicable be carried out in such a way that every part of the excavation is at least 1 m clear
ar
of the existing edge of the carriageway. The Contractor shall obtain information regarding
utilities reservations from the Planning Department of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs &
at
Agriculture and refer to their publication entitled Road Hierarchy: General Guidance for Road
-Q
Cross-Sections and Utilities Disposition.
5 The Contractor shall take special precautions, which includes the continuous support of the
sides of the excavation, from the start of excavation until the refilling and compaction of the
LL
trench backfill material is completed.

W
6 The Engineer may direct the trench excavation to be realigned from that shown on the
Drawings to facilitate the flow of traffic.
s
en
7 Where trench excavation or any other part of the Works obstructs any footpath or right-of-
way, or property access, the Contractor shall provide, at his own cost, a temporary access
m
around the obstruction to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where applicable, this temporary
access shall include stout wooden bridges with hand rails and kick boards or other approved
e
construction across any open trench. Suitable steel road plates shall be provided and
Si
maintained where vehicle access is deemed necessary.
8 No excavated material shall be permitted to be deposited or stockpiled in grassed or planted

areas. The Contractor shall immediately remove excavated material to a temporary storage
area and import selected approved materials for the trench filling operations.
9 Where excavated material has temporarily been deposited on a verge, the verge shall on
completion of backfill be restored to its original condition and left free from debris.
2.2.9 Excavation in Areas Other Than Road Reserves
1 Areas other than road reserves shall include but not be limited to cultivated areas,
undeveloped areas, footpaths, verges, non-asphalt roads, lanes, alleys, and all private lands.
2 The Contractor shall take measures to prevent access of unauthorised persons, the general
public and animals to areas in which there are open excavations, access routes and steep or
loose slopes arising from the Contractor’s operations.
Part 02: Earthworks
3 The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary barriers and fencing. When necessary,
barriers and fencing shall be illuminated.
4 Temporary barriers and fencing shall not be removed without the Engineer’s written
permission, which will not normally be given until the trench excavation has been refilled and
reinstated.
2.2.10 Support of Excavations
1 The Engineer reserves the right to direct the Contractor to take measures to augment the
Contractor’s proposals for the support of excavated surfaces. If, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the support proposed by the Contractor is insufficient, the Contractor shall modify
his proposals and provide trench support as directed by the Engineer. The absence of the
Engineer’s direction, or action by the Contractor in accordance with the direction of the
Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the Contract.
2 Shoring shall be properly maintained until in the opinion of the Engineer the permanent work
ar
is sufficiently advanced to permit the shoring to be removed. The removal of shoring shall be
carried out only under the personal supervision of a competent foreman. If the Contractor
at
proposes not to remove the shoring on completion of the permanent work he shall obtain the
-Q
Engineer’s prior written approval.
3 All temporary works supporting the faces of excavations shall be removed during backfilling
with the approval of the Engineer. Where removal is impracticable and with the approval of
LL
the Engineer, temporary works shall be left in place. Temporary works left in place shall be at
no additional cost to the Employer.
W
4 When, in the opinion of the Engineer, temporary supports need to be left in excavations to
s
support existing structures or the permanent Works, the Engineer may direct that temporary
en
supports be left in place. Temporary supports left in place shall be at no additional cost to the
Employer.
m
5 Underpinning, supports and other protective measures that are required for buildings,
e
structures and apparatus in or adjoining excavations shall be provided by the Contractor.

Si
Such permanent or temporary works shall be of adequate design and construction. When
directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit his methods statement for such work
for the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer’s approval shall not relieve the Contractor
from his obligations under the Contract.
6 Damage to the Works and any consequential damages caused by the removal of shoring are
the responsibility of the Contractor. Permission or approval by the Engineer to remove
shoring shall not relieve the Contractor from this responsibility.
2.2.11 Slips and Falls and Excess Excavation
1 Slips and falls in trenches shall be prevented as follows:
(a) the Contractor shall effectively support the sides of all trench excavation to prevent
slips and falls of material in the excavation. Support may include the use of closed
sheeting or steel sheet piles, where necessary, to prevent any fall or run from any
portion of the ground outside the excavation into the trench and to prevent settlement
of or damage to existing services and structures next to the excavation
Part 02: Earthworks
(b) any excavation carried out by the Contractor to prevent slips and fall, or should
portions of trench walls slip or fall away, the Contractor shall at his own expense take
all necessary remedial measures including the excavation removal and reinstatement
of all the ground thereby disturbed
(c) in all cases where the voids so formed when backfilled would provide support for the
permanent Works or adjacent structures and services, such voids shall be filled
with Grade 20 SRC concrete at the Contractor’s expense. In all other cases the voids
shall be filled with selected excavated material compacted as specified in this Part.
2.2.12 Trimming and Levelling
1 No excavation shall be filled in or covered with concrete until it has been inspected by the
Engineer.
2 Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer, a layer of blinding concrete
shall be placed to the required thickness to protect the formation and provide a clean working
ar
surface.
at
3 The Contractor shall compact the formation before placing the blinding concrete, when in the
-Q
opinion of the Engineer the formation density can be improved by compaction.
4 When excavating to specified levels for trench excavation for pipelines, or to specified limits
LL
for the face of any thrust block or other structure required to abut or to rest upon undisturbed
ground, excavations shall be trimmed as follows:
W
(a) the Contractor shall not excavate the last 150 mm until immediately before beginning
construction work except where the Engineer permits otherwise. Should the
s
Contractor have excavated to within 150 mm above these specified levels or to within
en
150 mm of these specified limits before he is ready or able to commence the

construction work he shall where required by the Engineer excavate further so as to
m
remove not less than 150 mm of material immediately before commencing the
construction work and any such further excavation and additional foundation material
e
ordered by the Engineer shall be at the cost of the Contractor. The last 150 mm shall
Si
be hand excavated
(b) the bottom of excavations shall be carefully boned in and trimmed true to grade with
the aid of a straight-edge.
2.2.13 Excavations Not to be Left Open
1 Trench excavation shall be carried out expeditiously in the following manner:
(a) the refilling and surface reinstatement of trench excavations shall begin and be
completed as soon as reasonably practicable after the pipes have been laid and
jointed
(b) the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent flotation of pipes in locations where
open trench excavations become flooded, and these precautions shall include the
partial refilling of the trench leaving pipe joints exposed for tests of the joints
Part 02: Earthworks
(c) if the Engineer considers that the Contractor is not complying with the foregoing
requirements, The Engineer will not permit further trench excavation until he is
satisfied with the progress of laying and testing of pipes and refilling of trench
excavation.
2.2.14 Dewatering of Excavations
1 For construction dewatering refer to Section 1 Part 24 Construction Dewatering.
2 The Contractor shall submit methods statements including drawings and data showing the
intended plan for dewatering operations. Details of locations and capacities of dewatering
wells, well points, pumps, sumps, collection and discharge lines, standby units, water
disposal methods, monitoring and settlement shall be included. The methods statement shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval not less than 30 days before the start of
dewatering operations. The Engineer reserves the right to reject the proposal if he is not
satisfied with measures.
ar
3 The Contractor shall satisfy himself on the scope of dewatering necessary for the
construction of the Works and shall make the necessary investigations to obtain the required
at
data and information. -Q
4 Where necessary, the Contractor shall divert natural and artificial waterways encountered at
the Site until the Works are completed.
LL
5 The Contractor shall perform dewatering as necessary to ensure that

W
(a) the Works are installed on dry areas and excavations, including without limitation the
construction of all structures and underground piping
s
(b) dewatering is carried out only to a depth sufficient for the required excavation
en
(c) during construction, no groundwater shall come into contact with any concrete surface
or reinforcement
m
(d) structures shall be capable of withstanding any hydrostatic pressure to which it may
e
be subjected during construction and until completed.

Si
6 The Contractor’s dewatering operations shall be conducted so as not to endanger the

foundations or stability of the Works or any adjacent structures. Damage caused by the
Contractor’s operations shall be made good by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
Employer.
7 Discharge of groundwater from excavations to the sea, into surface storage ponds or deep
well recharge shall require the approval of the Ministry of Environment.
8 Water removed from excavations shall first pass through settlement tanks and on-site
treatment prior to discharge.
9 Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, wellpoint dewatering systems shall be provided
on both sides of trenches.
Part 02: Earthworks
10 The static water level shall be drawn down a minimum of 300 mm below the bottom of the
excavation so as to maintain the undisturbed state of the foundation soils and allow the
placement of any fill or backfill to the required density. The dewatering system shall be
installed and operated so that the groundwater level outside the excavation is not reduced to
the extent that would damage or endanger adjacent structures or property.
11 The Contractor shall, where extensive dewatering is required, be fully qualified to perform the
dewatering operations or shall furnish the services of an experienced, qualified, and
equipped dewatering subcontractor to design and operate the dewatering and groundwater
recharging system required for the work, all subject to the Engineer’s approval.
12 When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall establish a specified number of
groundwater level monitoring stations at each site which shall be observed during the work.
These shall be located as directed by the Engineer and consist of acceptable open tube
piezometers. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide settlement gauges
to the approval of the Engineer and monitor settlement of new and existing facilities.
ar
13 Dewatering shall not result in the flow of water along the pipe zone material. Full
consideration should be given to the use of cut-off walls to reduce the potential for
at
groundwater flow along pipe trenches. The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s
-Q
approval, details of his proposed method of working and temporary works installations to
achieve this.
14 If the use of drainage conduits, channels or subdrains is approved by the Engineer and are to
LL
be left in place below the level and within the width limits of permanent Works they shall be
structural capable of providing support. Ballast filled subdrains to be left in place under
W
concrete shall be covered with a geotextile membrane. Subdrains left in place shall be filled
with Grade 20 SRC concrete or an approved cementitious grout.
s
en
15 The release of groundwater to its natural static level shall be performed so as to maintain the
undisturbed state of the natural foundation soils, prevent disturbance of compacted fill or
m
backfill and prevent floatation or movement of structures, pipelines and sewers.

e
16 No dewatering system shall be removed until infiltration testing is completed nor without the
Si
approval of the Engineer. Monitoring and settlement measurement systems shall be

maintained in operation until removal is approved by the Engineer. With the approval of the
Engineer, wellpoints and like items may be abandoned in place.
17 Partially completed permanent works shall not be allowed to become flooded and the
Contractor shall allow for additional standby pumps and equipment required to ensure this. A
pump operator shall be on site 24 hours per day to supervise pumping equipment.
18 In the event of partially completed trenches becoming flooded, the Contractor shall re-
excavate to formation level and re-lay the pipes.
19 The Contractor shall provide a silt-trap in any temporary drain which he may construct and
prior to discharge into any permanent drain which he may wish to use for the removal of
water during the construction period. The Contractor shall keep both temporary and
permanent drains clear of silt to the satisfaction of the Engineer until the completion of the
Contract. Any silting up of the watercourses arising from the Contractor’s failure to comply
with this Clause shall be remedied at his expense whether within the Site or not.
2.3 BACKFILL
Part 02: Earthworks
2.3.1 Pipe Bedding
1 Pipe bedding shall be provided as shown on the Drawings or stated in the Contractor’s
approved methods statement.
2 Pipe bedding shall be well compacted to a minimum void ratio to provide a high load-bearing
capacity and a stable base below the pipe and shall completely fill the whole width of the
trench excavated. Compaction requirements equivalent to at least 90 percent of the Standard
Proctor Maximum Dry Density shall be achieved. Additional bedding necessary to fill voids
created by over excavation shall be provided entirely at the Contractor’s expense.
3 Pipe bedding shall consist of granular material and shall shall conform with the following
requirements:
(a) shall be free of organic and deleterious matter and shall consist of strong durable
crushed un-weathered rock or stones having roughly cubical or pyramidal shaped
fragments, graded and tested from a source approved by the Engineer. No reactive
ar
carbonate rock or sources with indication of local groundwater contamination shall be
used.
at
(b) pipe bedding material for rigid pipes shall be according to the following grading limits
-Q
giving in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2 – Gradation Requirements for Pipe Bedding, Rigid Pipes

LL
<300 300 - 800 >800

W
Sieve Size % by Mass % by Mass % by Mass

Passing Passing Passing
s
25mm - - 100
en
20mm - 100 90 - 100

14mm 90 - 100 80 - 100 50 – 80
m
10mm 50 - 85 60 - 85 40 – 70
e
5mm 10 - 40 20 - 55 25 – 60
Si
2.36mm 0 - 10 10 - 30 10 – 40
0.300 - 0 - 10 0 - 15
(c) The minimum thickness of pipe bedding material below the barrel of the pipe is given
in Table 2.3.
Table 2.3 – Minimum thickness of bedding material below barrel of pipe
Uniform Soil
Nominal Bore
Hand Finished Machine Dug Rock
(mm)
Trench Bottom Trench Bottom
100 & 150 100 150 200
200 - 500 150 200 250
600 - 800 175 225 275
1000 & above 200 250 300
(d) Pipe bedding and backfill to French drains shall be in accordance with Section 6, Part
14, Clause 14.9.5.
Part 02: Earthworks
(e) The total loss factor for the granular material used in French drains using the ten
minute rotational test shall not exceed 10%.
(f) Chloride and sulphate levels for bedding materials shall conform to BS EN 10319.
4 Pipe bedding material for flexible pipes be accoding to the following grading limits given in
Table 2.4.
Table 2.4 – Gradation Requirements for Pipe Bedding, Flexible Pipes
Pipe Diameter (mm)
Sieve Size <300 ≥300
% by Mass Passing % by Mass Passing
14mm - 90 - 100
10mm 50 - 85 50 - 85
5mm 10 - 40 0 - 10
2.36mm 0 - 10 0 - 10
ar
The minimum thickness of granular bedding material around the barrel of the pipes shall be
100mm. Should the Contractor exceed the trench widths given in Table 2.1 he shall precede
at
as Clause 4.3.2 of this Section. -Q
5 The design of GRP and PE pipes and bedding is specified in Parts 3 and 4 of this Section.
Granular bedding materials for GRP pipe shall be 10mm nominal size according to the
grading limits given in Table 2.4 and also meet the manufacturer’s requirements.
LL
6 After trimming and compaction of the formation, granular bedding material shall be spread in
W
the trench bottom.

s
7 Cut-off walls shall be formed in granular bedding and surround to pipes to prevent the
en
bedding acting as a subsoil drain. Cut-off walls shall be provided at a maximum spacing of
40 m with one at each manhole and structure and at least one cut-off wall between two
adjacent manholes and structures.
e m
8 Cut-off walls shall be made from an impervious fine grained clay mixture, prepared with
Si
addition of water where necessary, to suitable trench spoil if available, or imported. Concrete
cut-off walls shall be Grade 20 SRC concrete. Cut-off walls shall be installed across the full
cross-section of the granular bedding material and shall be at least 300 mm wide along the
axis of the pipeline.
9 Concreting to the pipeline shall be either bed or bed and surround or encasement or backfill
as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer and shall be of Grade 20 SRC
concrete placed as follows:
(a) concrete shall not be placed until the joints at each end of the pipe have been
completed
(b) each pipe to be encased shall be supported on at least two purpose made precast
concrete blocks, which shall be left in place
(c) concrete encasement shall be placed to the required depth in one operation and pipes
shall be prevented from floating or otherwise moving during concreting
(d) continuity of concrete backfill or encasement to pipe with flexible joints shall be
broken at each joint, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer
Part 02: Earthworks
(e) flexible joints in concrete beds and surrounds to pipes shall be formed as shown on
the Drawings with suitable compressible fibrous board or other similar approved
material
(f) compaction shall be carried out with approved mechanical vibrators. The maximum
period of time between mixing of the materials and final compaction of any given
material shall be kept to a minimum.
10 Where unstable ground conditions are met which are likely to cause undue settlement in the
pipeline, the Contractor shall submit a report including site data and the Contractor’s proposal
for remedial works including structural calculations for the approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall carry out the following remedial works as directed by the Engineer.
(a) improvement of mechanical properties of the soil

(b) replacement of soil by other soil or blinding concrete
(c) pile foundations
(d) reinforced concrete slab foundation.
ar
2.3.2 Pipe Surround
at
Pipe surround shall be provided as shown on the Drawings or stated in the Contractor’s
1
-Q
approved method statements.
2 When concrete cradles are used, all concrete shall have attained adequate strength before
LL
backfilling of the excavation commences between the completed structure and sides of
excavations.
W
3 Material for pipe surround and to the first 300mm above the top of the pipe, shall be granular
material as specified in Clause 2.3.1. The material shall be free from sharped edged stones
s
or other material which may cause damage to the permanent Works.

en
4 Material for pipe surround shall be placed in layers of not greater than 150mm compacted
m
thickness and thoroughly rammed with suitably shaped rammers working alternatively on
either side of the pipe until the fill has been carried up at least 300mm above the top of the
e
pipe. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to the pipe, coating or sheathing.
Si
5 Compaction requirements equivavlent to at least 90 percent of the Standard Proctor

Maximum Dry Density shall be achieved.
2.3.3 Geotextile Filter Membrane
1 Geotextile filter membrane for surround to granular material for ground water drainage shall
conform with the requirements of Section 6 Part 15 Clause 15.1 and shall be used in the
zone extending downwards from 1.5m above the long term water table. The long term water
table is to be determined on the basis of observations made on site of the initially
encountered water table in the excavations. The placement of Geotextile is then to be
directed by the Engineer. Geotextile membrane for structural support to pipe surround in soft
ground shall be wrapped round the granular bedding as shown on the Contract drawings.
2 For both of the above applications the geotextile properties shall be:
(a) mean peak strength BS EN ISO 10319 8kN/m

(b) elongation at peak strength BS EN ISO 10319 28%
(c) CBR puncture resistance EN ISO 12236 1500N
Part 02: Earthworks
(d) pore size (O90) EN ISO 12956 0.15mm

2
(e) permeability (50cm head) EN ISO 11058 100l/m .s
3 The fabric shall be woven or non-woven consisting of long chain polymeric filaments or yarns
formed into a stable network such that the filaments or yarns retain their relative position to
each other.
4 The fabric shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals and chemical properties of the
soil and water. Geotextile fabric shall surround the granular bedding as follows:
(a) the surface to receive the fabric shall be formed to a relatively smooth condition free
of obstruction, depressions, and debris. The geotextile fabric shall be laid loosely.
(b) if the proposed area for fabric requires more than one panel width of fabric, the
panels shall be overlapped a minimum of 15 percent of the panel width
(c) to prevent slippage of the overlapping fabric, the areas of overlap shall be stabilised,
as approved by the Engineer, with pins, anchor blocks, or piles of aggregate
ar
(d) fabric damaged or displaced before or during installation or during placement of
at
backfill material shall be repaired or replaced
2.3.4 Backfilling Excavation

-Q
1 All concrete shall have attained adequate strength before backfilling of the excavation
commences between the completed structure and sides of excavations.
LL
2 Selected fill material for trench backfill in open areas, shall be suitable material selected from
W
the excavated material as specified in Clause 2.2 of this Part. Stones larger than 150 mm in
size may be allowed, provided in the opinion of the Engineer, the required densities can be
s
achieved.
en
3 Selected fill material for trench backfill under paved areas, shall be suitable material selected
m
from excavated materials meeting the following requirements:

e
(a) maximum stone size of 75m

Si
(b) the material passing the 0.063 sieve shall be less than 15%
(c) the liquid limit shall not exceed 35% and the plasticity index shall not exceed 6%
(d) the uniformity coefficient shall not be less than 10
(e) the total water soluble / acid soluble salt content (for sulphate and chloride) shall not
exceed 2%
(f) organic content shall not exceed 2%
(g) the CBR value shall not be less that 15% at 95% maximum dry density at the formation
level. The test procedure shall be as Section 6, Clause 3.10 of the specification.
4 The trench backfill material shall be placed in layers of not greater depth than 200mm
thickness and be thoroughly compacted to 95 percent of the Standard Proctor Maximum Dry
Density by approved mechanical compaction equipment. In roads and footpaths, the coarse
filling is to be carried up to the level at which surface reinstatement is to begin; elsewhere, to
such level as with the surface reinstatement of the whole of the topsoil will leave the finished
work sufficient to allow for future settlement to the original ground level.
Part 02: Earthworks
5 The moisture content of the material before compaction shall not vary by more than ±2% of
the optimum moisture content (BS 1377 Part 2:1990, Test 3.2). If in the opinion of the
Engineer, the fill is too dry, it shall be watered at the expense of the Contractor in an
approved manner during refilling as may be directed by the Engineer.
6 Any nuclear density measurement (NDM) tests undertaken shall be performed only by
persons or companies holding a valid Authorised User Certificate issued by the Materials
Central Laboratory. Each NDM device shall have a valid Calibration Certificate, also issued
by the Central Materials Laboratory.
7 The Contractor shall provide the necessary testing apparatus for monitoring soil properties
and shall maintain the apparatus in good working order. A daily log of tests carried out shall
be provided to the Engineer. Testing of soil properties shall be carried out by an approval
laboratory.
8 Tests to determine the optimum dry density of the fill material shall be carried out as directed
on site, the frequency depending on consistency of material and test results.
ar
9 Unless directed otherwise, testing for density and moisture content shall be at the rate of:
at
(a) one test per backfill layer for each structure such as manholes, chambers, and thrust
-Q
blocks
(b) one test per backfill layer for every 30 m of pipeline trench.
LL
10 Should the backfilling material being placed become unacceptable to the Engineer due to
W
(a) exposure to weather

(b) flooding
s
(c) having become puddled, soft, segregated

en
(d) otherwise unacceptable during the progress of work

m
the Contractor shall at his own expense remove such damaged, softened or
segregated material and replace it with fresh approved material.
e
Si
11 To permit the proper consolidation of backfill into the voids behind trench sheeting and
supports, trench sheeting shall be withdrawn gradually as backfill progresses in depth and
along the trench.
12 On no account shall any excavated material be dozed back when filling trenches in roads and
no filling shall be carried out unless in the opinion of the Engineer, sufficient mechanical
compactors are in operation on that portion of the work.
13 Where in the opinion of the Engineer sufficient supplies of the suitable material for trench
backfilling cannot reasonably be obtained from excavations the Engineer may order the
Contractor to:
(a) carry out such work as may be necessary to screen out stones
(b) borrow excavate material from suitable borrow areas on the Site or off the Site and
transport it to the length of trench to be filled to the approval of the Engineer.
All costs for borrow material shall be borne by the Contractor.
Part 02: Earthworks
14 Trench backfilling shall be carried out expeditiously as soon as practicable after the pipeline
has been laid, tested and approved.
15 Trench bottom shall be free of any foreign material or backfill contaminated with foreign
material from the trench bottom.
16 Check grade and correct irregularities in bedding material. Loosen top 25-50 mm of
compacted bedding material with a rake or by other means to provide a cushion before laying
each section of pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank.
17 Place backfill material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of pipe and, if applicable, between
pipes, conduit, cables, and duct banks installed in the same trench.
(a) Pipes up to and including 250 mm in diameter: First lift of backfill less than or equal to
1/2 pipe diameter.
(b) Pipe over 250 mm in diameter: Maximum 150 mm lifts.
ar
18 Thoroughly tamp each lift, including the area under haunches, with handheld tamping bars
supplemented by “walking in” and slicing material under haunches with a shovel to ensure
at
that voids are completely filled before placing each succeeding lift.
-Q
19 After the full depth of the pipe zone material has been placed as specified, compact the
material by a minimum of three passes with a vibratory plate compactor only over the area
between the sides of the pipe and the trench walls.
LL
20 Do not use power-driven impact compactors to compact pipe zone material.

W
21 Backfill used above pipe zone shall be processed to meet specified gradation requirements.
s
Adjust moisture content as necessary to obtain specified compaction.

en
22 Do not allow backfill to free fall into the trench or allow heavy, sharp pieces of material to be
placed as backfill until after at least 600 mm of backfill has been provided over the top of the
m
pipe.
e
Si
23 Do not use power driven impact type compactors for compaction until at least 1.2 m of
backfill is placed over top of pipe.
2.3.5 Backfilling Excavations with Cement-Bound Granular Material
1 Backfilling excavations with cement-bound granular material shall be used for filling
excavations at manholes, access shafts, pipe line structures in roadways, underneath
exposed existing pipelines or as approved by the Engineer.
2 Cement-bound granular material shall consist of crushed, hard, clean, durable rock or
washed sand or a combination thereof. The material shall be sufficiently well-graded to
ensure a well-closed surface finish and have a grading within the range shown in Table 2.4
Table 2.4 – Grading for cement-bound granular material
BS 410 sieve size Percentage by Mass Passing

50 mm 100
37.5 mm 95 - 100
20 mm 45 - 100
Part 02: Earthworks
10 mm 35 - 100
5 mm 25 - 100
600 m 8 - 65
300 m 5 - 40
75 m 0 - 10
3 The granular material shall be mixed with sufficient cement to provide the crushing strength
specified in Paragraph 12 of this Clause. The material shall be mixed in a paddle or pan type
mixer which may be batch or continuous type. Where a batch mixer is used, the mixing times
shall not be less than one minute unless the Engineer approves a shorter time subject to the
results of preliminary trials. Where a continuous mixer is used, the paddles, baffles and rate
of feed of materials shall be adjusted to provide a uniformly mixed material. Where a spray
is used for distributing water into the mixer, it shall be adjusted to provide a uniform moisture
content throughout the mix.
4 The moisture content of the mixed material shall not exceed 2 % above the optimum as
ar
determined in accordance with the Vibrating Hammer Test of BS 1924.
at
5 The Contractor shall carry out preliminary tests on trial mixes to attain the specified crushing
strength.
-Q
6 Plant-mixed material shall be transported to the site by vehicles which shall have capacities
suited to the output of the mixing plant and site conditions, and be capable of clean
LL
discharge. Mixed material shall be immediately transported to its required location and shall
be suitably protected from the prevailing climatic conditions during transportation and the
W
period before tipping.
7 All mixed material shall be placed and immediately spread evenly in one layer such that after
s
compaction the thickness does not exceed 150 mm.

en
8 Compaction in trenches shall be carried out immediately after the material has been spread
m
and completed within two hours of the addition of cement.

e
9 Compaction shall be carried out to achieve a density equivalent to 95 % of the average

Si
density of the set of five cubes required for testing in paragraph 12 of this Clause.
10 Any layer of cement-bound granular material not covered within two hours shall, immediately
on completion, be cured for a minimum period of 7 day unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer or the surface is covered by permanent works. Surface curing shall be achieved by
covering with impermeable plastic sheeting until the next permanent layer is laid. The plastic
sheeting shall be adequately secured to the surface and joints shall be have a minimum
300 mm overlap, set to prevent egress of moisture.
Part 02: Earthworks
11 Samples of the mixed material shall be taken from the site immediately before compaction of
the material. A batch of five random samples shall be taken from each layer or such other
area as decided by the Engineer. From each sample a cube test specimen shall be
prepared, cured and tested using the procedure in BS 1924. The specimens shall be
compacted to be within 95 % of the cube density when compacted by vibratory hammer. The
specimens shall then be cured at constant moisture content within the range of curing
temperatures stated in BS 1924 for a period of 7 days. The specimen shall then be weighed,
the dimensions checked and tested in unconfined compression. A representative portion of
the crushed material from each specimen shall then be retained for a moisture content
determination in accordance with BS 1924 and the dry density of each specimen determined
using mass, dimensions and the moisture content of the material.
12 The average 7 days crushing strength for each batch of five test specimens made and tested
in accordance with the method described herein shall be not less than 3.5 MPa for cubes. In
addition to complying with the minimum strength requirements, the root mean square of the
coefficient of variation of the crushing strength of five successive batches of five test
specimens of the cement-bound granular material shall not exceed 25 %. If an area or layer
ar
of cement-bound granular material represented by these specimens fails these tests, the
defective material shall be removed and replaced with new material at the Contractor’s
at
expense. -Q
13 The cement-bound granular material shall in no case be less than 150 mm thick from the
outside barrel of the pipe to the nearest point of the shoring, and the greatest care shall be
LL
exercised to ensure complete filling of all voids and thorough consolidation of the concrete.
The Contractor shall allow in his prices for the additional concrete used in excess of the net
requirement.
W
14 Cement – Bound Granular Material discharged from truck mounted drum type mixer into
s
trench shall:
en
(a) Placed in lifts as necessary to prevent uplift (flotation) of new and existing facilities.
m
(b) In travelled areas, fill entire trench section to pavement finish grade for a temporary
driving surface, and screed off excess and finish with a float.
e
Si
(c) In other areas, fill the trench section as shown on the Contract Drawings.
2.3.6 Backfilling Excavation with Flowable Fill (Foamed Concrete)
1 Backfilling excavations with flowable fill shall be used for filling excavations at manholes,
trenches, access shafts, pipeline structures in roadways, underneath exposed existing
pipelines or as approved by the Engineer.
2 Flowable fill may be placed by chutes, conveyors, buckets or pumps depending upon the
application and accessibility.
3 For trench backfill, flowable fill shall be placed continuously. To contain the flowable fill along
long open trenches or open ended structures in stages, the end points shall be adequately
bulkheaded to prevent movement.
4 Flowable fill shall be placed in a manner to prevent flotation or displacement of the

embedded item.
Part 02: Earthworks
5 The 28-day compressive strength of the flowable fill shall be 5 MPa with a unit density of
3
between 1600 – 2000 kg/m . Accelerators may be used subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
2.3.7 Backfilling Next to Pipeline Structures
1 Fill materials adjacent to structures such as manholes and chambers shall be placed in
accordance with Clause 2.3.4 above.
2 Fill material next to structures other than pipeline structures shall be carried out as Specified
in Section 12.
2.3.8 No-Fines Concrete as Trench Backfill
1 Except where otherwise noted in this Clause, the design, manufacture, use and testing of no-
fines concrete shall comply with the requirements of Section 5 Part 6.
ar
2 All material shall be placed and spread evenly. The full width of the excavated trench shall be
filled; formwork other than that required for temporary constructions joints will not be
at
permitted. The Contractor shall be responsible for the use of any extra material required to fill
-Q
the trench beyond the maximum trench widths detailed on the drawings. The no-fines
concrete shall generally be brought up to a height no higher than the level of undisturbed rock
on either side of the trench.
LL
3 Compaction shall be carried out with approved mechanical vibrators. The maximum period of
time between mixing of the materials and final compaction of any given material shall be kept
W
to a minimum.
s
4 Any layer not covered within 2 hours by another layer of no-fines concrete shall, immediately
en
on completion of compaction, be cured for a period which shall not be less than 7 days
unless the Engineer agrees otherwise. Curing shall be achieved by covering until the next
layer is laid with impermeable plastic sheeting, adequately secured from being blown off the
m
surface and with joints overlapped at least 300mm and set to prohibit egress of moisture.
e
Si
2.4 REINSTATEMENT OF SURFACES
2.4.1 Reinstatement within the Highway
1 All reinstatement of roadworks to be carried out in the public highway shall be carried out in
accordance with the latest “Code of Practice and Specification of Road Openings in the
Highways”.
2.4.2 Reinstatement of Surfaces Other Than in the Highway
1 Unless provided in the Project Specification, surfaces shall be restored to a condition

conforming to the requirements for the particular surface described in the relevant section of
this Specification. Where no specification exists, restoration shall be to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
2 All surfaces, gardens or lawns shall be restored to a condition equal to the original surface to
the satisfaction of all Authority requirements, the Engineer and the owners/occupiers.
Part 02: Earthworks
3 Any reinstatement shall be fully maintained by the Contractor until such time that a Taking-
Over Certificate has been issued for the Works or for the Part of the Works containing the
reinstatement.
2.5 EXISTING SERVICES
1 The requirements of this Subpart are in addition to the general requirements specified in
Clause 2.1.5 of this Part.
2 The Contractor shall be required to submit in advance to the various Utilities Services
Departments and to the relevant Municipality where the Works affect the trees and plants
and a weekly programme of the pipelines he intends to lay in order that the various
departments can expose or advise on the location of their respective services.
3 Except as otherwise designated in the Project Specification, the Contractor shall be

responsible for maintaining all services and utilities including but not limited to waterways,
sewers, drains, gas and oil mains, water mains electricity and telecommunication cables and
ar
all other services, structures, trees, and plants encountered during the construction of the
at
Works and for any remedial measures necessary to make good any damage caused thereto.
4
-Q
Where designated in the Project Specification, work on services shall be carried out by the
relevant Utility Service Department. The Contractor shall co-ordinate his work with the work
of the Utility Service Department, and carry out his work so as not to interfere with or damage
LL
their services.
5 Where work is carried out close to or across the line of existing services, the Contractor shall
W
where necessary provide temporary supports or slings. Where service is interfered with or
damaged, the Contractor shall immediately notify the relevant Utilities Service Department
s
and shall not undertake repairs without their authorisation and approval. Unless otherwise
en
authorised and approved, repairs shall be undertaken by the Utilities Service Department and
the cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall reimburse
m
the Utilities Service Department its account for performing such work.
e
6 Where specified on the Drawings or by the relevant Utility Service Departments split ducts,
Si
conforming with the requirements of Clause 2.7.1 of this Part shall be provided for the
permanent support and protection of services.
7 The Utility Service Department and the Engineer shall determine whether or not a service
requires to be permanently diverted, temporarily diverted or supported.
8 Where existing services have to be permanently or temporarily diverted as the unavoidable

result of the construction of the Works, such diversions shall be carried out either by the
Contractor or the Utilities Service Department as directed by Engineer.
9 Safety shall always be maintained in all work in the vicinity of existing services in accordance
with particular requirements of Utilities Service Department and the requirements of Section
1 and Part 1 of this Section.
10 In addition to the provisions of the above paragraphs, when carrying out pipelaying
operations in the vicinity of existing gas or oil pipelines, the following requirements shall
apply:
Part 02: Earthworks
(a) the minimum clearance between the bottom of the oil or gas line and the top of the
pipeline being constructed is to be 600 mm
(b) a hand excavated pilot hole shall be dug to determine the gas or oil line invert level
and position prior to any trench excavation in gas or oil pipeline reservation
(c) the excavation for the pipeline under construction must be carried out by hand up to
(d) 2.0 m either side of the existing gas or oil pipeline
(e) manually operated jack hammers may be used within 5.0 m of the buried pipeline
only after completion of item (c) above
(f) the use of mechanical or hydraulic rock-breakers shall not be allowed within 5.0 m of
the buried pipeline
(g) before the exposure of live pipeline the Contractor is to erect a suitable substantial
barrier to prevent damage to the exposed pipeline.
(h) on completion of the concrete surround to the pipelines under construction, the
ar
existing gas or oil pipeline shall be rebedded with a minimum of 150 mm of naturally
occurring soft dune sand bed and surround. The remaining backfill and bund shall be
at
made up of selected desert fill with a particle size not exceeding 150 mm which shall
be free from organic matter. The Qatar Petroleum (QP) (onshore) Engineer shall be
-Q
notified a minimum of 24 h in advance, to witness the backfilling operation
(i) damage to the external protective wrapping to the gas or oil pipeline shall be reported
promptly to the QP who will arrange for the damage to be inspected and repaired
LL
in strict accordance with QP (onshore) procedures at the Contractor’s cost

W
(j) the Contractor is to provide constant competent supervision whilst work is carried out
next to the existing gas or oil pipelines
s
(k) when the works reach 15 m from the existing gas or oil pipeline, the Contractor shall
en
contact the QP (onshore) Engineering Superintendent, who will arrange the necessary
permit to work. QP (onshore) will require a minimum of 48 h notice before work begins
m
(l) a QP (onshore) permit to work does not in any way make QP (onshore)
responsible for any of the Contractor’s work, nor does it absolve the Contractor from
e
his responsibilities for complying with the above, but only allows the Works to be
Si
carried out in accordance with the agreed working methods and practices. QP
(onshore) reserve the right to visit the site regularly to observe that the agreed
methods and practices are being adhered to and to stop the work and withdraw the
permits to work should they consider there is adequate justification to do so
(m) the requirements of QP (onshore) may vary from and are not necessarily limited
to the foregoing.
2.6 BLASTING
1 The Contractor shall not use any explosives in the construction of the works without the prior
written approval of the Engineer and such approval shall be contingent upon the Contractor
being authorised by the Civil Defence Department and the Police.
Part 02: Earthworks
2 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in advance about the types and quantities of
explosives needed. Explosives shall be obtained and used in accordance with the regulations
and procedures of the relevant Government Department. The Contractor shall be deemed to
have copies of relevant documentation and to be knowledgeable of relevant practices. The
Contractor shall provide copies of relevant documentation to the Engineer for the Engineer’s
inspection.
3 Notwithstanding the requirements of this Clause, the Contractor is responsible for the safe
and correct transport, handling and use of explosives.
4 Except as otherwise provided in the relevant regulations and procedures the handling of
explosives shall be carried out to conform with the requirements stated in the following
paragraphs.
5 Except as otherwise permitted by the Government, all unused explosives, or explosive

accessories shall be destroyed at the end of each day’s work.
ar
6 Explosives and detonators shall be carried in separate vehicles during transport. The
vehicles must be clean and in a good state of repair and be of sufficient capacity to convey
at
the explosives safely. The Police may refuse to issue explosives if vehicles do not meet
-Q
those standards. A red flag must be clearly displayed by all vehicles when carrying
explosives.
7 The Contractor must appoint in writing at least one shotfirer who is in possession of a Qatar
LL
Shotfirer’s Certificate of Competence to carry out all work with explosives on behalf of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall present and provide copies of such certification to the
W
Engineer for inspection.

s
8 The Contractor must establish simple safety rules covering the handling and use of
en
explosives. A copy of these rules will be given to the concerned shotfirer, who will sign a
receipt book kept for this purpose by the Contractor.
m
9 The safety rules shall specify:

e
(a) the places where explosives are to be used

Si
(b) times of blasting

(c) measures to be taken to contain the products of blasting
(d) method of initiation
(e) posting of warning notices, yellow blasting flags and sentries; and audible warning, if
applicable
(f) actions to be taken in the event of any unusual occurrence or accident
(g) any other safety aspects relating to the use of explosives
(h) any special instructions concerning transport
(i) instructions relating to the limitation of blast vibrations, where appropriate.
10 The Contractor shall submit a copy of the safety rules to the Engineer.
Part 02: Earthworks
11 Shotfirers shall be responsible to the Contractor for ensuring that all explosives and
accessories are safely and carefully handled and used, in accordance with the regulations
and procedures of the Government, and his own knowledge of correct shotfiring procedure.
12 Where so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide and operate suitable
instruments to monitor and record the blast vibrations at no additional cost to the Employer.
13 Where blasting vibration could cause nuisance; e.g., in close proximity to buildings, pipelines
or other structures, the Contractor shall ensure that careful attention is given to the vibration
levels to minimise nuisance.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS
2.7.1 Service Ducts
1 The Contractor shall furnish and install new protection ducts of split PVC-U pipes, concrete
encased, to protect existing utility mains or cables where new pipelines are to cross such
ar
utility mains or cables.
at
2 After the split PVC-U pipe has been placed around the existing utility mains or cables, the
-Q
pipe shall be wrapped twice with polyethylene film, 150 m thick, to prevent fresh concrete
from entering the duct. The protection ducts shall be supported on suitable non-corrosive
spacers before placing the concrete encasement.
LL
3 All concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 5 and concrete
encasement shall be with Grade 20 SRC concrete.
W
2.7.2 Formation of Bunds and Embankments

s
en
1 The material used in the formation of embankments bunds and other areas of fill shall be
obtained by the Contractor from sources approved by the Engineer. The material shall
m
equate to selected excavated material or similar.

e
2 Bund and embankment material at the optimum moisture content shall be built up evenly
Si
over the full width and compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm in compacted depth. The
moisture content of material may require adjustment to that required to attain maximum
density. Material which contains insufficient moisture to obtain the desired compaction will
require the incorporation of additional water by the use of approved sprinklers and mixing.
3 Layers more than 300 mm below road formation levels shall be compacted to 90 % of the
maximum dry density. Layers less than 300 mm below road formation level shall be
compacted to 95 % of the maximum dry density. Maximum dry density shall be determined in
accordance with CML 12-97
4 The Contractor shall ensure that material laid immediately next to a structure, concrete wall
or thrust block is well compacted. Hand operated vibrating plate compactors vibro-tampers
or power rammers shall be used. In other cases, compaction shall be carried out by vibrating
compactors smooth wheel or pneumatic tire rollers of types approved by the Engineer.
5 In forming bunds and embankments, the Contractor shall make allowance for consolidation
and shrinkage in attaining the dimensions of bunds and embankments shown on the
Drawings.
Part 02: Earthworks
6 The Contractor shall make due allowance for consolidation and settlement of embankments
and bunds both in width and height. Any subsidence that may occur during the period of
maintenance shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost and to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
7 Round tops of cut slopes in soil to not less than a 1.8 m radius, provided such rounding does
not extend offsite or outside easements and rights-of-way, or adversely impacts existing
facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 03: Pipes and Fittings Materials
3 PIPES AND FITTINGS MATERIALS ....................................................................... 3

3.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................3
3.1.1 Scope 3
3.1.2 References 3
3.1.4 Submittals 5
3.1.5 Delivery, Handling and Storage 6
3.1.6 Pipe Materials 9
3.2 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES AND FITTINGS ..............................................................................10
3.2.1 Standards 10
3.2.2 Manufacture 10
3.2.3 Inspection and Testing 11
3.2.4 Repair Couplings for VC Pipes 11
3.3 CONCRETE PIPES AND FITTINGS ......................................................................................11
ar
3.3.1 Standards 11
3.3.2 Pipe Materials 11
at
3.3.3 Manufacture -Q 12
3.3.4 Plastic Lining 13
3.3.5 Epoxy Coating 13
LL
3.4 GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (GRP) PIPES AND FITTINGS ..........................................14

3.4.1 Standards 14
W
3.4.2 Design 16
3.4.3 Pipes and Fittings Manufacture 17
s
3.4.4 General 17
en
3.4.5 Buried GRP 17

3.4.6 Exposed GRP 23
m

e
3.5 PVC-U PIPES AND FITTINGS ...............................................................................................25

Si
1.1.1 Standards 25
3.5.3 Joints 27
3.6 ACRYLONITRILE BUTADIENE-STYRENE (ABS) PIPES AND FITTINGS ..........................28
3.6.1 Standards 28
3.6.3 Joints 28
3.7 DUCTILE IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS .................................................................................28
3.7.1 Standards 28
3.7.2 Exposed Joints 28
3.7.3 Buried Joints 29
3.7.4 Internal Lining 29
3.7.5 External Coating and Wrapping, Use and Materials 29
3.7.6 Factory Application of Tape Wrapping 31

3.7.7 Factory Applied Extruded Polyethylene Coating 31
3.8 FLANGE ADAPTERS AND FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS ...........................................................32
3.8.1 General 32
3.8.2 Flange Adapters 32
3.8.3 Flexible Couplings 33
3.9 PIPES FOR OTHER USE .......................................................................................................33
3.9.1 Copper Tubes and Fittings 33
3.9.2 Hose and Appurtenances 33
3.9.3 Stainless Steel Pipes, Tubes and Fittings 33
3.9.4 Carbon Steel Pipes and Fittings 34
3.10 MEDIUM AND HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPES .......................................34
3.10.1 Applicable Standards 34
ar
3.10.3 Fittings 37
at
3.10.4 Pipes and Fittings for Gravity Applications 38
3.10.5 Testing of MDPE and HDPE Pressure Pipes and Fittings
-Q 38
3.11 POLYESTER RESIN CONCRETE (PRC)-PIPING SYSTEMS FOR NON-PRESSURE
DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE ...............................................................................................41
LL
3.11.1 General 41
3.11.2 Resin 41
W
3.11.3 Minimum strength 41

s
en
e m
Si
3 PIPES AND FITTINGS MATERIALS
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes the manufacture, factory testing and supply of pipes and appurtenances of
different materials for use in pipelines.
This Section
........................ Part 1 General
........................ Part 4 Pipeline Installation
........................ Part 5 Valves, Penstocks and Appurtenances
........................ Part 6 Miscellaneous Metal Works
ar
........................ Part 7 Miscellaneous GRP Works
........................ Part 8 Protective Coatings and Painting
at
........................ Part 11 Sewer Rehabilitation
-Q
........................ Part 12 Vacuum Sewerage System
Section 5 Concrete
LL
Section19 Plumbing Works

Section 20 Drainage Works to Buildings.
W
3.1.2 References
1 The following standards or revised/updated versions are referred to in this Part:

s
en
ANSI B16.3.................Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings

ANSI B16.5.................Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
m
ANSI B16.9.................Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings

e
ANSI B16.11...............Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welded and Threaded

Si
ANSI B16.28...............Wrought Steel Butt Welding, Short Radius Elbows and Returns
ANSI B 36.19..............Stainless Steel Pipe
ASTM A53 ..................Standard specifications for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc-
coated Welded and Seamless
ASTM A105 ................Standard specifications for Forging, Carbon Steel, for Piping
Components
ASTM A182 ................Standard specifications for Forged or Rolled Alloy-steel Pipe Flanges,
Forged Fittings, Valves and Parts for High Temperature Service
ASTM A234 ................Standard specifications for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel
and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures
ASTM A240 ................Standard specifications for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-
Nickel Stainless Steel Plated, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels
ASTM A312 ................Standard specifications for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Pipes
ASTM A403 ................Standard specifications for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping
Fittings
ASTM A774 ................Standard specifications for As-Welded, Wrought Austenitic Stainless
Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate
Temperature
ASTM A778 ................Standard specifications for Welded Unannealed Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubular Products
ASTM D1000 ..............Standard Test Methods for Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive-Coated

Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications
ASTM D1004 ..............Standard Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and
Sheeting
ASTM D2412 ..............Standard Test Methods for External Loading Characteristics of Plastic
Pipe by Parallel Plate Loading
ASTM D2584 ..............Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins
ar
ASTM D3681 ..............Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of “Fiberglass” (Glass-
Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe in a Deflected Condition
at
-Q
AWWA C209 ..............Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections,
Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines
LL
BS 65:1991.................Vitrified clay pipes, fittings and ducts, also flexible mechanical joints for
use solely with surface water pipes and fittings
W
BS 864........................Capillary and compression tube fittings of copper and copper alloy

BS 2494......................Elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and pipelines
s
en
BS 2782......................Methods of testing plastics

BS 3063......................Dimensions of gaskets for pipe flanges
m
BS 3396......................Woven glass fibre fabrics for plastics reinforcement

e
BS 3532......................Method of specifying unsaturated polyester resin systems

Si
BS 3749......................“E” Glass fibre woven rovings for the reinforcement of polyester and
epoxy resin systems
BS 4027......................Specification for Sulphate-resisting Portland cement
BS 4346......................Joints and fittings for use with unplasticised PVC pressure pipe
BS 5391...................... Acrylonitrile butadiene-styrene (ABS) pressure pipe
BS 5392...................... Acrylonitrile butadiene-styrene (ABS) fittings for use with ABS
pressure pipe.
BS 5556......................General requirements for dimensions and pressure ratings for pipe of
thermoplastic materials
BS 5911......................Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products
BS 5955......................Code of practice for plastic pipework (thermoplastic materials)
BS 6076......................Tubular Polyethylene film for use as protective sleeving or buried iron
pipes and fittings
BS EN 197..................Cement
BS EN 295..................Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and sewers
BS EN 545..................Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water
pipelines - Requirements and test methods
BS EN 598 ----------- ...Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for sewer
pipelines - Requirements and test methods
BS EN 639..................Common requirements for concrete pressure pipes including joints
and fittings
BS EN 642..................Prestressed concrete pressure pipes
BS EN 1057................Copper and copper alloys
BS EN 1092................Flanges and their joints
BS EN 1401................Plastic piping systems
BS EN 12620..............Aggregates for Concrete
BS EN 13244..............Plastic piping systems
BS EN 14020..............Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass rovings
BS EN 14118..............Reinforcement. Specifications for textile glass mats
ar
BS EN 14364 & BS EN 1796 ---- Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP)
BS EN ISO 1456 ........Metallic and other inorganic coatings
at
-Q
DIN 30674-3 ...............Coating of ductile cast iron pipes; zinc coating with protective covering
ISO 4179 ....................Ductile Iron Pipes for Pressure and Non-Pressure Pipelines,
LL
Centrifugal Cement Mortar Lining, General Requirements

ISO 4633 ....................Rubber Seals - Joint Rings for Water Supply, Drainage and Sewage
W
Pipelines - Specification for Materials.

s

en
1 Pipes and fittings, except for those used in treated sewage effluent pipelines, shall be
m
suitable for carrying sewage at temperatures of up to 45C with hydrogen sulphide

concentrations up to 400 mg/l.
e
Si
2 Treated sewage effluent pipelines shall be suitable for chlorine concentration up to 15 mg/l.
3 Pipes shall be suitable for immersion in corrosive groundwater conditions typically exhibiting
the following characteristics unless otherwise specified:
SO3 Content : 1.7 g/l
Cl Content : 1.07 g/l
pH : 8.6
Conductivity : 4000 µs/cm
4 The Contractor's attention is drawn to the stringent limits on infiltration detailed in Clause
4.5.2 of this section.
5 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a jointing system as recommended by the
pipe manufacturer that enables the installation and use of the designated pipeline systems.
3.1.4 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall order materials to suit the construction programme and obtain the
Engineer’s approval of submittals before placing orders. The Contractor shall submit two
copies of the following documents for the approval of the Engineer:
(a) product data

(i) originals of catalogues and engineering data sheets for manufactured items.
Each item and option to be provided shall be clearly marked and each item not
to be provided shall be deleted
(ii) literature to show that products provided meet the requirements for material,
construction, operation, and tests
(iii) information on the following items as a minimum:
 pipes
 flexible couplings
 gaskets
 isolating joints
 sealant systems
 linings and protective coatings
ar
(iv) manufacturer’s installation instructions for all items
at
(v) certified reports for all tests and inspections designated herein, signed and
-Q
sealed, showing full compliance with referenced standards
(vi) maintenance requirements and procedures
(vii) period of guarantee for products
LL
(viii) Manufacturer’s test reports for hydrostatic proof testing, sustained pressure
W
testing and burst strength testing.

(b) shop drawings
s
(i) Piping material, class, grade and joint type, thickness or schedule, seam or
en
seamless, coating information if applicable.

(ii) fittings, couplings, and joints
m
(iii) for concrete pipes, details of reinforcement, concrete and joints for straight
e
Si
(iv) pipes, specials and connections

(c) design data
(i) If glass reinforced plastic (GRP) pipes with a stiffness exceeding designated
values by more than 30 percent are proposed, the Contractor shall include in his
submittal complete structural design calculations indicating the effect of the
proposed variation in pipe stiffness of the deformation modulus of the bedding
material or any other related aspect
3.1.5 Delivery, Handling and Storage
1 Each pipe, fitting and special appurtenance shall be marked with permanent identification
which shall include but not necessarily limited to the following:
(a) nominal diameter

(b) name or trade mark of manufacturer
(c) serial number
(d) class of pipe, pressure rating in compliance with referenced standards
(e) date of manufacture

(f) type of service
(g) details on fittings such as angle of change and taper
(h) circular concrete pipes with asymmetrical reinforcement shall have the letter "T" clearly
marked on the inside and outside to indicate the top of the pipe when laid.
2 The acceptability of the pipes and fittings on delivery to the Site will be based on the results of
tests carried out by one or more of the following:
(a) the manufacturer at the place of manufacturer

(b) the Engineer
(c) a third party on behalf of the Engineer
3 The Engineer shall be permitted at all reasonable times to visit places of manufacture to
witness tests.
ar
4 The Engineer may require checking of the dimensional accuracy of GRP pipes and fittings at
at
the place of manufacture, the cost of such verification shall be borne by the Contractor.
5
-Q
Transport, handling and storage of pipes and fittings shall be carried out as follows:
(a) in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations subject to the approval of the
LL
Engineer
(b) effective precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the pipe and fittings.
W
6 During transport
s
(a) pipes and fittings shall be well secured and adequately supported along their length
en
(b) bolsters and binding of approved type shall be used

m
(c) nesting of pipes (placing a smaller pipe inside a larger) may be permitted for pipes of
certain materials and size provided that methods statements demonstrate that
e
effective precautions will be taken to protect all pipe surfaces and coatings from
Si
damage
(d) no pipe shall overhang the end of a vehicle
(e) pipes and fittings of plastic materials shall be covered.
7 Handling shall be carried out as follows:
(a) pipes should be lifted singly and not handled as bunches

(b) pipes shall be handled only by means of
(i) approved hooks, of the type having a plate curved to fit the curvature of the
inside of the pipe, on ends of sections
(ii) fabric slings not less than 250 mm wide
(iii) other methods approved for the pipe used
(c) use of wire rope, chains and fork lift trucks will not be permitted
(d) for strings of pipe longer than the standard length precautions shall be taken to avoid
curvature and longitudinal stress in excess of allowable limits
(e) pipes and fittings of plastic materials

(i) smaller than 300 mm diameter may be handled manually, larger than 300 mm
diameter and greater than 4 metres in length shall be lifted using fabric lifting
straps or large diameter rope slings positioned at a quarter of the pipe length
from each end
(ii) there should be enough slack in the slings to keep the hook approximately
600 mm over the pipe
(iii) steel chain or hooks shall not come into contact with the pipe
(f) VC pipes and fittings shall be transported in pallets and handled only with suitable
equipment
(g) pipes and fittings shall not be dropped or bumped
(h) pipes shall not be dragged over the ground
(i) if rolled, pipes shall be rolled only over adequate timber bearers to prevent damage
ar
(j) where necessary, chocks shall be used to prevent lateral movement of pipes.
at
8 All pipes, fittings and materials shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's
-Q
recommendations and the following:
(a) pipes may be stored in the open on a flat level area and raised above the ground on
LL
timber bearers so that the lowest point of any pipe or fitting is not less than 150 mm
above the ground
W
(b) timber bearers not less than 200 mm wide and 75 mm thick to be provided at 4 m
intervals maximum
s
(c) if on pallets or crated, on the pallets or in their crates until required

en
(d) if not on pallets or not crated, stacked one above the other as follows:
m
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations but not to a greater number

of tiers than the following:
e
........................ pipes  900 mm diameter

Si
2 tiers
........................ < 900 mm  600 mm diameter 3 tiers
........................ < 600 mm diameter 4 tiers
(i) suitable protective packing shall be placed between tiers to the approval of the
Engineer
(ii) wrapped pipes shall not be stacked
(e) if spigot and socket, stacked so that successive pipe layers have sockets protruding
at opposite ends of the stack
(f) with pipes of different sizes and thickness stacked separately
(g) with maximum height of stacked pipes not exceeding 2 m, or that recommended by
the supplier if less than 2 m.
9 Pipes and fittings of plastic materials including GRP shall be:
(a) stored under cover and out of direct sunlight

(b) adequately supported along their length
(c) provided with a free flow of air around the pipe.
10 Storage of jointing materials shall be as follows:
(a) under cover

(b) rubber ring gaskets shall
(i) be stored in their original packing
(ii) not be exposed to sunlight
(iii) protected from exposure to greases and oils
(c) gasket lubricants shall be stored so as to prevent damage to the container.
11 Pipes and fittings shall be protected in storage to the approval of the Engineer by means of
an impermeable membrane which shall cover the pipes and fittings and separate them from
the ground on which they are supported. The membrane shall be strong and durable in the
prevailing climate conditions.
ar
12 Pipes and fittings shall be subject to visual inspections after off-loading at site and before
at
installation.
13
-Q
The following procedures shall be followed for dealing with damaged pipes and fittings:
(a) pipes and fittings damaged during transportation handling and storage shall be set
LL
aside and the damage brought to the attention of the Engineer

(b) pipes or fittings that show signs of corrosion or deterioration during storage shall
W
immediately be treated to arrest and prevent the corrosion or deterioration or

removed from Site, as the Engineer directs
s
(c) proposals for repair shall be submitted in writing for the Engineer’s approval
en
(d) no attempt shall be made to repair damage without the Engineer’s approval
m
(e) if in the Engineer’s opinion the nature of any damage is such that the condition of a
pipe has been impaired and cannot be repaired the pipe concerned shall not be
e
incorporated in the Works

Si
(f) all rejected pipes shall be immediately removed from the Site
(g) damaged pipe shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor at his expense and such
repairs shall be to the approval of the Engineer
(h) the Engineer may require that any GRP pipe or fittings found to be damaged to be
subjected to a further hydraulic test which shall be carried out by the Contractor, at the
Contractor’s expense, in accordance with the requirements of Subpart 4.5 of this
Section.
3.1.6 Pipe Materials
1 For the purposes of this specification the following shall apply:
(a) Pipes of steel, glass reinforced plastic (GRP), PVC-U and polyethylene shall be
deemed to be flexible pipes.
(b) Pipes of concrete, vitrified clay and ductile iron shall be deemed to be rigid pipes.
3.2 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES AND FITTINGS
3.2.1 Standards
1 Pipes and fittings for foul sewerage and surface water applications shall be manufactured to
BS EN 295.
2 Pipes and fittings for land drainage applications shall be manufactured to BS 65.
3 Sealing rings shall be to BS 2494 or ISO 4633.
3.2.2 Manufacture
1 Pipes and fittings shall comply with the following:
(a) pipes shall have spigot and socket type joints.

(b) pipes shall be glazed both internally and externally.
ar
(c) all pipes shall be free of cracks, blisters, broken ends and other imperfections.
at
(d) vitrified clay pipes shall have the minimum strength requirements shown on Table 3.2
-Q
Table 3.2 – Minimum Strength Requirements
LL
Min. Crushing Strength (FN) kN/m

Nominal Bore
W
(mm)
Foul / SW Land Drains
(Non-Perforated) (Perforated)
s
100 28 28
en
150 28 28
200 40 28
m
300 60 34
e
400 64 44
Si
500 80 60
600 96 -
800 96 -
1000 95 -
2 Joints shall be as follows:
(a) Pipes and fittings shall be supplied with flexible mechanical joints of the spigot and
socket type joints.
(b) Sealing rings shall be of elastomeric material suitable for foul sewerage and
surfacewater drainage works, as the case maybe, conforming to BS 2494 or ISO 4633.
(c) Acceptance of VC pipes on delivery is dependent upon the Contractor demonstrating
that the joints are capable of meeting the water test requirement of Clause 4.5.2 of this
Section.
(d) Polypropylene sleeve couplings shall not be used.
3 Fittings shall be capable of withstanding the same load as the adjacent pipes or shall be
provided with concrete surround.
3.2.3 Inspection and Testing
1 Barrel impermeability, straightness, crushing strength and bending moment resistance and
chemical resistances tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 295 at the
frequency designated for the crushing strength test.
3.2.4 Repair Couplings for VC Pipes
1 Repair couplings shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer and shall consist of a
moulded synthetic elastomeric sleeve which is fastened over the pipe ends by stainless steel
clamping bands and be complete with a stainless steel shear ring. The repair coupling shall
be suitable for use with vitrified clay pipes and shall include a bushing adapter when joining to
a pipe of the same nominal bore but of a different outside diameter.
ar
2 Repair couplings shall comply with the joint performance requirements of BS 65 and be
capable of withstanding an external water pressure of 60 kPa without leaking.
at
3
-Q
Sleeves and bushes shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 681-1. Clamping bands
and shear ring shall be made from 300 series austenitic stainless steel.
3.3 CONCRETE PIPES AND FITTINGS

LL
3.3.1 Standards
W
1 Except as otherwise designated, concrete pipes and fittings shall conform to the
s
requirements of this Subpart following standard specifications:

en
(a) reinforced and unreinforced, BS 5911

m
(b) prestressed non-pressure concrete pipes, BS 5911.

e
2 The strength requirement and other features of particular application shall be as specified in
Si
this Subpart or designated in the contract specific documentation.
3.3.2 Pipe Materials
1 Cement used for manufacturing pipes and fittings shall be Ordinary Portland cement
conforming to BS EN 197-1.
2 Aggregate shall conform to BS 882.
3 Reinforcement shall conform to BS 4449 or BS 4483 as appropriate.
4 Admixture shall be used only with the written permission of the Engineer. The methods of use
and the quantities of admixtures used shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Admixture containing calcium chloride will not be permitted.
3.3.3 Manufacture
1 Pipes and Fittings:
(a) Storage of concrete materials, mixing, curing and testing of concrete shall be in
accordance with the appropriate Clauses in Section 5. Any deviation from these
clauses shall be made only with the approval of the Engineer
(b) unless stated otherwise crushing strengths of pipes shall not be less than those
designated in BS 5911 for the designated classes of pipes.
(c) Reinforced concrete pipes shall have a minimum effective length of 2.5 m except as
otherwise designated or required for special purposes such as curves, closures or
built in pipes.
(d) Steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the concrete wall. The placement of
all steel shall not vary from the designated position in the pipe wall by more than
 6 mm from the nominal position. In no case shall the cover to the reinforcement be
less than 25 mm.
ar
(e) The planes of the ends of the pipes shall be perpendicular to their longitudinal axis.
at
2 Joints
-Q
(a) except as specified in other Parts of this Section, pipe joints shall be supplied with
flexible mechanical joints of the spigot and socket type in accordance with BS 5911,
LL
double collar or sleeve type

(b) gasket stock shall
W
(i) comply with BS 2494.

(ii) be a synthetic rubber compound in which the elastomer is exclusively neoprene.
s
en
(iii) solid compound shall contain not less than 50 % by volume of neoprene and
shall not contain reclaimed rubber or deleterious substances.
m
(iv) stock shall be extruded or moulded and cured in such a manner that
e
cross-sections are dense, homogeneous and free from porosity, blisters, pitting
Si
and other imperfections.

(v) stock shall be extruded or moulded with smooth surfaces to the designated size
within a tolerance of  6 % measured on joint cross-section dimensions.
(c) the sealing ring shall be confined in a contained groove on the spigot face of each
pipe section to properly position and confine the rubber gaskets in the annular space
(d) each joint shall contain a neoprene ring gasket as follows:
(i) the gasket shall be the sole element depended upon for watertightness of the
joint.
(ii) the gasket shall be of circular cross-section unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
(iii) the length and cross-sectional diameter of the gasket, the annular space
(iv) provided for the gasket, and all other joint details shall be such as to produce a
watertight joint which shall not leak when pulled 13 mm over and above the
initial jointing allowance.
(e) the initial jointing allowance is the gap between the spigot and the shoulder of
the socket measured parallel to the centre of the pipeline and shall not be less than
6 mm or greater than 12 mm.
(f) Joints shall be capable of maintaining water tightness up to an angular deflection of 2°
from true, in any direction.
3.3.4 Plastic Lining
1 Where designated concrete pipes shall be lined with polyvinyl chloride plastic (PVC) liner
plate. The PVC liner plate material shall be as specified in Section 5 Part 14.6. The liner plate
shall be securely fixed to the formwork before pouring concrete and all in-situ welding of the
liner plate shall be carried out by skilled labour using the methods specified by the
manufacturer. Purpose made units shall be used where required; e.g., at junctions.
ar
2 The installation of liner plates in concrete pipes or structures, and the sealing and welding of
at
joints, shall be carried out in strict compliance with all applicable specifications, instructions
and recommendations of the plastic liner plate manufacturer. All welding of liner plate shall
-Q
be carried out by properly trained and approved workmen.
3 Once cast into the pipe, the liner shall be permanently and physically attached to the concrete
LL
by the locking mechanism and shall not rely on an adhesive bond.

W
4 The lining shall withstand a 100 kPa hydrostatic back pressure applied to the under surface
of the lining without losing anchorage or without rupture.
s
5 Damaged liner plate shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer’s

en
recommendation and to the approval of the Engineer.

m
3.3.5 Epoxy Coating

e
1 All exterior surfaces of concrete pipes shall be coated by the pipe manufacturer with a heavy
Si
duty, solvent free epoxy suitable for application to fresh concrete as specified in Section 5. A
minimum of two coats shall be applied to attain a minimum total dry film thickness of 400 m.
1 Inspection procedures and tests shall be carried out at the place of manufacture. Pipes and
joints shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with BS 5911.
2 The performance of pipes shall be verified by the testing of random sample pipes in
accordance with the type of inspection and batch size mentioned. The pipes shall be subject
to rejection on account of non-compliance with the following:
(a) failure to pass hydrostatic test

(b) failure of the longitudinal concrete surfaces of joints to meet dimensional tolerances
(c) fractures or cracks
(i) passing through the shell, except that a single end crack that does not exceed
the depth of the joint shall not be cause for rejection; however
(ii) if a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint exists in more
than 10 % of the pipes inspected, the defective pipes shall be rejected
(d) defects that indicate defective mixing and moulding
(e) surface defects indicating honeycomb or open texture
(f) spalls
(i) deeper than one half the depth of the joint
(ii) extending more than 100 mm around the circumference
(iii) smaller than one half the depth of the joint or less than 100 mm around the
circumference exist in more than ten percent of the pipes
(g) insufficient cover to the reinforcement.
3.4 GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (GRP) PIPES AND FITTINGS
ar
3.4.1 Standards
at
1 All activities relating to this section of the particular specification shall comply with the
following or approved equal standard. The latest version of the standard indicated shall
-Q
apply.
Statutory provisions shall always apply as amended from time to time.
LL
Generally applicable standards:

BS EN 681 .................Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in
W
water and drainage applications.

BS EN 14364 .............Plastic piping systems for drainage and sewerage with or without
s
pressure. Glass reinforced-thermosetting plastics (GRP) based on

en
unsaturated polyester resin (UP). Specification for pipes, fittings and

joints
m
BS EN 1796................Plastic piping systems for water supply with or without pressure –

e
Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) based on unsaturated

polyester resin (UP)
Si
CEN TS 14632 ...........Plastics piping systems for drainage, sewerage and water supply,
pressure and non-pressure - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics
(GRP) based on unsaturated polyester resin (UP) - Guidance for the
assessment of conformity
ISO 25780 ..................Plastic piping systems for pressure and non-pressure water supply,
irrigation, drainage or sewerage – Glass-reinforced thermosetting
plastics (GRP) systems based on unsaturated polyester (UP) resin –
Pipes with flexible joints intended to be installed using jacking
techniques
ISO 3126 ...................Plastic pipes. Measurement of dimensions wall thickness table.
ISO 4633 ...................Joint rings for water supply, drainage and sewerage pipelines:
Specification for materials
ISO 1172 ....................Textile-glass-reinforced plastics, prepregs, moulding compounds and
laminates - Determination of the textile-glass and mineral-filler content
- Calcination methods
DIN 16 869 - Part 1 ...Centrifugally cast and filled glass fibre reinforced polyester resin pipes
- dimensions.
DIN 16 869 - Part 2 ...Glass-fibre reinforced polyester resin pipes (UP-GF) – Centrifugally
cast – filled Part 2: General quality requirements, testing.
DIN EN ISO 178 ........Plastics – Determination of flexural properties (ISO 178:1993)
DIN EN ISO 527-1 .....Plastics – Determination of tensile properties – Part 1: General
principles
DIN EN ISO 527-2 .....Plastics - Determination of tensile properties - Part 2: Test conditions
for moulding and extrusion plastics
ISO 15306 ..................Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes — Determination
of the resistance to cyclic internal pressure
ISO 10952 .................Plastics piping systems — Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics
(GRP) pipes and fittings — Determination of the resistance to
chemical attack for the inside of a section in a deflected condition
ISO 10928 ..................Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics
(GRP) pipes and fittings - Methods for regression analysis and their
use
ar
DIN 16966 -6 ..............Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF) pipe fittings and joint
assemblies; collars, flanges, joint rings, dimensions
at
DIN-16945 .................Testing of Resins, Hardeners and Accelerators, and Catalyzed Resins
-Q
DIN-16946 - Part 1 ....Cured casting Resins - Testing DIN-16946- Part 2 Cured casting
Resins - Types
DIN EN ISO 75 ..........Plastics – Determination of temperature of deflection under load
LL
DIN EN ISO 527-4 .....Plastics – Determination of tensile properties – Part 4: Test conditions
for isotropic and orthotropic fibre-reinforced plastic composites
W
DIN EN ISO 10468 ....Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes – Determination

of the long-term specific ring creep stiffness under wet conditions and
s
calculation of the wet creep factor (ISO/DIS 10468:1999)

en
DIN EN ISO 14828 ....Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes – Determination

of the long-term specific ring relaxation stiffness under wet conditions
m
and calculation of the wet relaxation factor (ISO/DIS 14828:1999)

e
DIN EN 681-1 ............Elastomeric seals – Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in
water and drainage applications – Part 1: Vulcanized rubber
Si
DIN EN 1119 .............Plastics piping systems – Joints for glass-reinforced thermosetting

plastics (GRP) pipes and fittings – Test methods for leak tightness and
resistance to damage of flexible and reduced articulation joints
ISO 10466 .................Plastics piping systems — Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics
(GRP) pipes — Test method to prove the resistance to initial ring
deflection
ISO 7685 .................... Plastics piping systems — Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics
(GRP) pipes — Determination of initial specific ring stiffness
ISO 8513 ....................Plastics piping systems — Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics
(GRP) pipes — Determination of longitudinal tensile properties
ISO 8521 ....................Plastic piping systems — Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics
(GRP) pipes — Test methods for the determination of the apparent
initial circumferential tensile strength
DIN EN 1447 .............Plastics piping systems – Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics
(GRP) pipes – Determination of long-term resistance to internal
pressure
ISO 7509 ....................Plastics piping systems — Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics

(GRP) pipes —Determination of time to failure under sustained
internal pressure
ASTM D2997 .............Standard Specification for Centrifugally cast “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
EN ISO 2078 ..............Textile glass — Yarns — Designation (ISO 2078)
ASTM D 3517-01 .......Standard Specification for “Fiberglass“(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pressure Pipe
3.4.2 Design
1 The design of GRP pipes, fittings and bedding shall be carried out by the pipe manufacturer
to enable the pipe to meet the requirements of the Works. The following general
requirements shall prevail for pipes and fittings:
(a) they shall be designed to achieve a minimum working life of 60 years under all
applicable standard loadings, environmental and installation conditions
ar
2
(b) they shall have a minimum stiffness of 10,000 N/m
at
(c) Non-pressure pipes and fittings shall be designed for a nominal pressure rating of PN
-Q
01 (1 bar)
(d) Pressure pipes and fittings shall be designed for a normal operating pressure rating of
PN16 (16 bar) to pressure ratings in ISO 25780, EN 14364 or EN 1796.
LL
(e) they shall convey a liquid with a temperature up to 45C

W
(f) they shall be designed to withstand up to 5% long term deflection in their installed
conditions.
s
(g) all bends shall be long radius bends unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
en
(h) they shall be capable of withstanding a 95% lower confidence strain of 0.85% over 60
years without failure or cracking when tested in accordance with the strain corrosion
m
type test requirements specified herein.

e
(i) sewerage and drainage pipelines and fittings shall be designed to carry septic sewage
Si
having a maximum hydrogen sulphide concentration of 50mg/l at a temperature of

45C
(j) irrigation pipelines and fittings shall conform to the water supply standards
(k) The manufacturer shall provide a valid Certificate of Conformity to EN 1796, EN 14364
or ISO 25780 as applicable. The certificate shall be issued by an independent
certification body or authority.
(l) For direct jack GRP pipes, the allowable jacking force shall be based on the minimum
wall thickness measured at the bottom of the spigot gasket groove where the wall
cross section has been reduced, and the mean longitudinal compressive strength of
the pipe. A minimum factor of safety of 3.5 in accordance with ISO 25780 shall be
used for the jacking force on a straight alignment. A reduced jacking force shall be
used when jacking to a curvature.
(m) Direct jack GRP pipes can be used for pressure and non-pressure applications.
3.4.3 Pipes and Fittings Manufacture
1 The pipes and fitting shall conform to either EN 14364 or EN 1796 for sewage or water
supply pipes. Jacking pipes shall comply with ISO 25780. The referenced test standards
therein have to be fulfilled.
3.4.4 General
1 All GRP components shall be designed and fabricated by one manufacturer.
2 GRP pipes and fittings shall be manufactured by an approved process utilising a mandrel or
rotating mould incorporating equipment to accurately control the quantities and placement of
all resins, glass and aggregates.
3 Use resins, reinforcement and aggregates to produce pipes and fittings, which when
combined as a composite structure will satisfy the performance requirements of this section
of the specification.
ar
4 Internal and external surfaces shall be free from irregularities, which would impair the ability
at
of the component to conform to the requirements of EN 14364, EN 1796 or ISO 25780.
-Q
3.4.5 Buried GRP
1 The pipes and fittings shall be constructed using chopped and /or continuous glass filaments,
LL
strands or roving, mats, synthetic veils or fabric, and polyester / vinyl ester resin, aggregate
and fillers. If applicable, additives necessary to impart specific properties to the resin may be
W
used, subject to the approval of the Engineer.

s
2 Filament Wound (FW) GRP Pipes and Fittings

en
(a) Resins
m
Vinyl ester shall be used in the internal resin rich liner of the pipes and fittings.
Isophthalic or vinyl ester shall be used in the structural layer of the pipes and fittings.
e
Vinyl ester or isophthalic resin shall be used in the outer layer of the pipes and fittings.
Si
Resins shall be cured to achieve a minimum of 90% of the manufacturer’s

recommended Barcol hardness value.
(b) Additives
The use of additives such as fire retardants, UV inhibitors or coloured pigments or
dyes shall only be used for specific project based applications and their use shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(c) Glass reinforcement
The glass used for the manufacture of the reinforcement shall be type “E” (alumina-
calcosilicate glass), type “C” (alkali-calcium glass) or type “ECR” (alumina-borosilicate
glass).
The reinforcement shall be made from continuous drawn filaments of glass and shall
have a surface treatment compatible with the resin to be used. It may be used in any
form, e.g. as continuous or chopped filaments, strands or rovings, mat or fabric.
(d) Aggregates
Aggregates shall be clean, graded silica sand containing no impurities and a maximum
moisture content of 2%. The maximum particles size of the sand aggregate shall not
exceed 0.8mm.
The overall sand content of the pressure pipes and fittings shall not exceed 30% by
weight.
The overall sand content of the non-pressure pipes and fittings shall not exceed 60%
by weight.
(e) Fillers
Fillers (other than silica sand aggregate) shall only be permitted if required for a
particular project application and be subject to the approval of the Engineer following
satisfactory long term type tests (ISO 10952, ISO 10466), for a minimum of 10,000
hours.
(f) Wall construction
Lining Layer
(i) The inner lining layer shall comprise a minimum 2.0mm thick rich vinyl ester
layer suitably reinforced with C glass veil with a glass content not exceeding
10% by weight. The remainder of the lining shall consist of layers of vinyl ester
resin and powder bound ECR acid resistant glass chopped strand mat or roving,
ar
depending on the method of manufacture, with a glass content of between 25%
and 35% by weight.
at
(ii) Sand aggregate shall not be used in the lining layer.
-Q
Structural Layer
(iii) The structural layer shall comprise Type E or ECR glass reinforcement and a
LL
thermosetting isophthalic polyester resin with or without sand aggregate.

(iv) The layer shall be built up in layers of Type E or ECR acid resistant glass chop
W
roving or continuous roving.

(v) The manufacturing process shall ensure that no aggregate becomes embedded
s
in the internal resin rich liner layer.

en
Outer Layer
m
(vi) Pipes shall be provided with a resin rich layer with C glass veil reinforcement.
e
(vii) The resin used in the outer layer shall have a Glass Transition temperature of at
Si
least 75C.
(viii) The use of special finishes is permitted when the pipe or fitting is expected to be
exposed to extreme climatic, environmental or ground conditions. These may
include the provision of a sand layer, pigments or inhibitors for UV protection or
fire retardation, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(g) Bends and Fittings
Bends and fittings shall be equal or superior in quality and performance to the
corresponding pipes. Mitred bends and fittings shall be fabricated from pipes which
have been hydraulically tested successfully.
3 Centrifugally Cast (CC) GRP Pipes and Fittings
(a) Resins
Vinyl ester shall be used in the internal pure resin liner of the pipes and fittings.
Isophthalic or vinyl ester shall be used in the structural layer of the pipes and fittings.
Vinyl ester or isophthalic resin shall be used in the outer layer of the pipes and fittings.
(b) Additives
(c) Glass reinforcement
The glass used for the manufacture of the reinforcement shall be Type E or ECR
glass.
The reinforcement shall be made from chopped glass filament in long and short fibres
and shall have a surface treatment compatible with the resin to be used.
(d) Aggregates
exceed the lesser of 1/5 the total wall thickness of the pipe or fitting, or 2.5mm.
(e) Fillers
ar
at
hours. -Q
Lining Layer
LL
(i) The inner lining layer shall comprise a minimum 2.0mm thick pure vinyl ester
resin without glass reinforcement and sand aggregates.
W
(ii) The barrier and transition layers between the pure resin lining layer and the
structural layer shall be to suit the manufacturing process.
s
Structural Layer
en
(iii) The structural layer shall comprise glass reinforcement and a thermosetting
m
isophthalic polyester or vinyl ester resin with or without sand aggregate.

e
(iv) The layer shall be built up in layers of ECR acid resistant glass chopped fibres.
Si
(v) The manufacturing process shall ensure that no aggregate becomes embedded
in the inner pure resin liner layer.
Outer Layer
(vi) Pipes shall be provided with an outer layer formed of a mortar of resin and sand
aggregates with no glass reinforcement.
(vii) The resin used in the outer layer shall have a Glass Transition temperature of at
least 75C.
(viii) An outer protection layer shall be provided which has a minimum of 60% sand
for corrosion protection.
(ix) The use of special finishes is permitted when the pipe or fitting is expected to be
(x) The transition layers between the structural layer and the outer layer shall be to
suit the manufacturing process.
(g) Bends and Fittings

Bends and fittings shall be equal or superior in quality and performance to the
corresponding pipes. Mitred bends and fittings shall be fabricated from pipes which
have been successfully pressure tested.
4 Direct Jack GRP Pipes
(a) Resins
Vinyl ester resin shall be used in the internal pure resin liner of the pipes. Isophthalic
or vinyl ester resin shall be used in the structural layer of the pipes. Vinyl ester or
isophthalic resin shall be used in the outer layer of the pipes.
(b) Additives
ar
at
(c) Glass reinforcement -Q
The glass used for the manufacture of the reinforcement shall be Type E or ECR acid
resistant glass.
The reinforcement shall be made from chopped glass filament in long and short fibres
LL
and /or continuous glass filaments, strands or roving, mats, synthetic veils or fabric
and shall have a surface treatment compatible with the resin to be used.
W
(d) Aggregates
s
en
exceed the lesser of 1/5 the total wall thickness of the pipe or fitting, or 2.5mm.
m
(e) Fillers
e
Si
hours.
Lining Layer
(i) The inner lining layer shall comprise a minimum 2.0mm thick rich vinyl ester
layer suitably reinforced with C glass veil with a glass content not exceeding
10% by weight. The remainder of the lining shall consist of layers of vinyl ester
resin and powder bound ECR acid resistant glass chopped strand mat or roving,
depending on the method of manufacture, with a glass content of between 25%
and 35% by weight, when the filament wound manufacturing process is used.
(ii) The inner lining layer shall comprise a minimum 2.0mm thick pure vinyl ester
resin without glass reinforcement and sand aggregates when the centrifugal
manufacturing process is used.
(iii) The barrier and transition layers between the pure resin lining layer and the
structural layer shall be to suit the manufacturing process.
Structural Layer
(iv) The structural layer shall comprise glass reinforcement and a thermosetting
isophthalic polyester or vinyl ester resin with or without sand aggregate.
(v) The layer shall be built up in layers of Type E or ECR acid resistant glass
chopped fibres.
(vi) The manufacturing process shall ensure that no aggregate becomes embedded
in the inner pure resin liner layer.
Outer Layer
(vii) Pipes shall be provided with an outer layer formed of a mortar of resin and sand
aggregates with no glass reinforcement.
(viii) The resin used in the outer layer shall have a Glass Transition temperature of at
least 75C.
(ix) An outer protection layer shall be provided which has a minimum of 60% of sand
ar
for corrosion protection.
(x) The use of special finishes is permitted when the pipe is expected to be
at
-Q
(xi) The transition layers between the structural layer and the outer layer shall be to
LL
suit the manufacturing process.

(xii) The outer surface of the pipes shall be smooth with a resin rich topcoat 0.3mm
W
thick.
(g) Longitudinal Compressive Strength
s
en
Proof of compression strength shall be supplied by testing all pipe types using the
procedure set out in Annex A of ISO 25780.
m
The test results of compressive properties obtained from coupon or spool test
e
specimens may be used. As described in ISO 25780, the manufacturer shall show the
correlation of the results obtained from coupons or full spools by means of initial type
Si
tests. The pipes shall meet the following requirements for the initial longitudinal
compression properties:
Table 3.4.1 : Longitudinal compressive strength for direct jack GRP pipes
Mean
Minimum compressive
Specimen Pipe quality compressive
strength (single value)
strength
Rebated and grooved with filler 80 MPa 90 MPa

specimen
Coupon specimen with filler 90 MPa 100 MPa
Rebated and grooved without filler 70 MPa 80 MPa

specimen
Coupon specimen without filler 80 MPa 90 MPa

(h) Dimensions
The manufacturer shall confirm that the outside diameter of the pipe conforms to ISO
25780.
The outside diameter of the jacking pipe shall be compatible with the jacking machine.
The nominal length of the pipe shall preferably be 1m, 1.5m, 2m, 3m or 6m. Other
lengths shall be permitted to suit a particular project requirement.
The jacking force shall be transmitted face to face on the pipe joint without the use of
packer rings, unless required for a specific project application. The permitted deviation
from squareness across the joints external diameter shall be as tabled below:
Table 3.4.2 : Permissible deviation from squareness across a joint’s external diameter
Manufacturer’s declared outside Deviation of

diameter dOD mm squareness mm
dOD ≤ 300
ar
0.5
300 < dOD 1.0
at
-Q
(i) Marking of jacking pipes
Markings shall meet the requirements for the application and conform to ISO 25780.
LL
Designations to meet special quality requirements as item 6 below are permissible.

The marking of the pipe shall be visible on the external and internal surfaces of the
W
jacking pipe.
5 Wall thickness
s
en
The minimum total wall thickness, including the liner and outer protective layer shall be
declared by the manufacturer, which shall be complying with the standard performance
m
criteria.
e
The wall thickness at any point on the pipe and the spigot shall not be less than the
Si
manufacturer’s declared values.
6 Abrasion resistance
The pipes shall be resistant to abrasion when tested according to CEN TR 15729 over
100,000 cycles. There shall be no evidence of free glass fibres on the inner surface of the
pipe.
7 Markings
All pipes including cut lengths and all fittings before dispatch from the pipe manufacturer’s
works shall be indelibly marked as follows on the external and internal surfaces.
(a) The manufacturer's name, initials, or identification mark.

(b) The nominal internal diameter in millimetres.
(c) The length in metres.
(d) The classification i.e. pressure rating, stiffness.
(e) The date of manufacture and batch number.

(f) A stamp to show that they meet the required inspection requirements and hydraulic
tests at the point of manufacturer.
(g) Identification number stencilled on the inside and outside at each end. The same
number shall appear on all record sheets and documents relating to the manufacture
delivery and testing of that pipe.
(h) The manufacturing standard.
(i) The project or contract number.
8 Joints
Except where otherwise detailed on the Drawings, all buried pipes and fittings shall have non-
end-load-bearing flexible joints of spigot type or GRP sleeved couplers with EPDM rubber in
full faced elements or rings in accordance with BS / DIN EN 681; manufactured according to
the individual manufacturing technique and supplied as an integral part of the pipe or as
ar
separate fittings. The elastomeric sealing gaskets shall provide the sole means of
maintaining joint watertightness. The sealing gaskets shall be supplied by the pipe
at
manufacturer.
-Q
Joints in direct jack applications (non-pressure application) can also be of stainless steel
Grade 316 Ti (EN 1.4571) couplers with approximately the same outside diameter as the
pipe so that the joints are essentially flush with the pipe outer surface.
LL
The manufacturer shall declare the maximum draw for which each flexible joint type is
W
designed.
The manufacturer shall declare the maximum allowable angular deflection and the maximum
s
draw for which each locked joint type and flexible joint type are designed.
en
All joints shall remain watertight for all combinations of angular deflection and draw up to the
m
maximum allowable values. In addition, pipe joints for pipelines laid in open cut trenches
e
shall be capable of withstanding an external pressure differential equivalent to +10m head of

water without leakage in the straight, deflected and drawn positions.
Si
When a pipe is cut or turned down in order to form a joint, the exposed faces shall be fully
sealed with a continuous coating of vinyl ester resin with a minimum of 1.5mm thick.
Wrapped or cemented joints shall only be used subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.4.6 Exposed GRP
The use of GRP pipes and fittings for exposed service shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. The exposed pipes and fittings shall be designed to resist all bending stresses,
thrust forces, surge pressures, negative pressures, thermal and vibratory forces.
1 Exposed pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the same manner and with the same
materials as buried pipe, along with the following requirements unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
(a) An outer protective surface layer shall be provided consisting of a topcoat of UV

inhibitor and resin with or without glass reinforcement to form a resin rich layer with a
minimum thickness of 0.3mm. The outer protective surface layer shall be designed to
resist other project specific extraneous causes (atmospheric conditions, mechanical
damage and chemical stress etc.) as described in the project specification.
2 Exposed pipes and fittings inside treatment plant buildings, process structures, pumping
stations, and valve chambers shall use PN 16 flanged joints:
(a) Flanges shall be filament wound, tape wound, contact moulded, hot or cold pressed
with epoxy or vinyl ester resins only.
(b) All bolts shall be stainless steel grade 316.
(c) Flanges shall be drilled to BS EN 1092 (metric units) resp. DIN 16966-1 type PN16.
(d) Flanged pipe joints shall incorporate an annular gasket covering the full face of the
flange. Gaskets to be 3mm thick self-energised EPDM or nitrile rubber (NBR) with
embedded stainless steel inlay O rings. The gaskets shall have a shore hardness of
ar
60±5.
at
(e) When flanged joints are to be made, secure the bolts and the nuts initially to finger
tightness. Thereafter the final tightening of the nuts shall be effected by torque
-Q
spanners in such sequence that diametrically opposite nuts are tightened together to
achieve the manufacturers recommended torque.
LL
3 External exposed pipes and fittings shall use fixed laminated joints with expansion bellows
and be supported in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
W
4 The exposed pipeline shall be protected by bollards, lateral sand bunds etc. where there is a
risk of physical impact.
s
en

1 A pipe type test group consists of a range or family of products made such that the results of
m
the long-term type tests are applicable to all products in the group. A pipe type test group
shall be made of products:
e
Si
a) manufactured by the same process;

b) with the same material specifications;
c) with the same pipe wall construction (i.e. the sequence of layers, layer
compositions, material properties and design method for using the results of the
long-term type tests in determining the pipe wall for all combinations of DN, PN
and SN);
d) tested with the same loading condition (i.e. uniaxial or biaxial load).
2 The pipe manufacturer shall submit type test results according to EN 14364 or ISO 25780 for
each product group.
3 Strain corrosion tests shall be carried for each class and diameter range, where applicable,
according to ISO 25780 and ISO 10467, as a type test generally in accordance with ASTM
D3262 resp. ISO 10952. The strains shall be at levels at which failure can be predicted from
the strain corrosion type test results to occur at 100 hours and 1,000 hours. No failures shall
be below the lower 95% confidence limit of the type test regression line.
4 The calculated failure strain at 60 years from the results of the quality control test using the
least squares method shall not be less than 0.85%. In the event that a specimen fails the
strain corrosion test all pipes in that class and diameter range, where applicable, pertaining to
that batch which has been manufactured or installed shall be rejected.
5 The pipe manufacturer shall carry out the following Inspection Tests. The results of these
tests shall be made available to the Engineer who shall also be allowed to witness some or
all of the tests.
(a) One pipe in every 100 of each type and size of manufactured item shall be tested for
loss of ignition in accordance with ASTM D2584 resp. ISO 1172.
(b) The liner thickness of pipes, fittings and couplings shall be measured in accordance with
Section 6 of ASTM D3567 resp EN 3126. A liner check shall be carried out for one in
every 100 of each type and size of manufactured item. A minimum of one item of each
type and size shall be tested. The liner thickness shall not be less than 1mm at any
pitted point.
(c) Data for the above tests shall be submitted to the Engineer. The data shall be traceable
to the supplied pipes with a unique number as "Batch no", the test data shall hold all the
above mentioned tests samples results under this batch no. The batch no. shall be
clearly marked as ID on each length of produced pipes.
6 Checks will be carried out by the Engineer at Site. The Contractor shall destroy or indelibly
mark as rejected and remove from Site any pipes or fittings found at any time failing to meet
dimensional criteria or any of the following quality criteria:
ar
(a) scratches shall be no deeper than 0.3 mm and no reinforcing fibres shall be exposed
at
(b) no cracks shall be present on the inside of pipes. Hair cracks on the outside may be
permitted with repair if not longer than 200 mm circumferentially or 6 mm longitudinally.
-Q
Impact cracks shall not affect more than 3 % of surface area
(c) no delaminations shall be evident
LL
(d) no impact or other damage to pipe ends shall be evident. The end surface of pipe or
fitting shall be completely covered with resin and free from cracks, porosity, bubbles,
voids, exposed reinforcement or extraneous matter
W
(e) no protruding fibres permitted on jointing surfaces

(f) no other protuberances. Small globules or resin projections permissible if not more than
s
25 % of area is affected. Jointing surfaces shall be completely free of any such flaws.
en
Ridges formed by resin shall not exceed 1.5 mm in depth

(g) air voids, blisters, bubbles are not acceptable if greater than 5 mm diameter or 1 mm
m
depth. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, if less than 0.5% of internal areas are
e
affected, such defects may be ground out and repaired

Si
(h) not more than 5 % of the internal or 10 % of the external surface shall be affected by
pitting. No individual pit shall be more than 1 mm diameter or 0.5mm depth
(i) wrinkles and indentations shall not be more than 2mm deep and not more than 3 % of
surface area affected. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, if not more than 5 mm
deep and 0.5 percent of surface area is affected, such defects may be repaired
(j) any pipe which when resting freely on the ground and not subjected to any loads other
than its own weight exhibits a deflection of more than 2%, measured along the diameter,
shall be rejected and removed from the Site.
3.5 PVC-U PIPES AND FITTINGS
1.1.1 Standards
1 Except as otherwise indicated, materials and workmanship described in this section shall
conform to the latest editions of the following standards:
ASTM D1599 ..............Test Method for Short-Time Hydraulic Failure Pressure of Plastic Pipe,
Tubing and Fittings
AWWA M23 PVC Pipe - Design and Installation
BS 3505/3506 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pressure Pipe
BS EN 1401 - Plastic piping for non-pressurised underground drainage & sewerage

BS EN 1452................Plastic piping systems for water supply (UPVC)
DIN 8061 ....................Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride pipes - general quality requirements &
testing
DIN 8062: 1988 ..........Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U, PVC-HI) pipes – dimensions
DIN 8063: 1986 ..........Pipe joint assemblies & fittings for unplasticised polyvinyl chloride
(PVC-U) pressure pipelines
ISO 1452 ....................Pipes and fittings in PVC –U pipes for water supply
ar
2 The strength requirement and other features of particular application shall be as specified in
at
this Subpart or designated in the contract specific documentation.
3.5.2 Manufacture
-Q
1 UPVC pipe shall be provided in standard 6 metre lengths, unless otherwise specified,
LL
detailed or required on the approved plans. Shorter lengths, up to 3 metres, will be permitted
when authorised by the Engineer. Field cut lengths of pipe used as closures may not be
W
shorter than 0.75 metre in length and must be approved by the Engineer. Solvent welded
pipes may be permitted in sizes of 100mm and less.
s
2 For sewerage service, PVC-U pipes 200 mm in diameter may be supplied in lengths up to
en
4 m. PVC-U pipes 150 mm in diameter and less shall be supplied 50 percent in lengths not
exceeding 2 m and 50 percent in lengths not exceeding 4 m.
m
3 UPVC Pipes shall be SDR17 as a maximum and shall have be designed to withstand a
e
0 0
nominal operating pressure of PN16 at 25 C (equivalent to PN10 at 45 C) unless otherwise
Si
specified in the Contract Documents.
4 All joints for UPVC Pressure Pipe shall be integrally cast, spigot and socket joints, or plain
end with EPDM rubber ring couplings. Joints shall be of the same pressure rating as the pipe.
Solvent weld joints are not permitted for TSE Mains. Gaskets and lubricants shall be made
from materials that are compatible with the plastic material and with each other when used
together. They shall not support the growth of bacteria and shall not adversely affect the
potable qualities of the water that is to be transported. One elastomeric gasket shall be
furnished with each length of socket-end pipe.
5 Pipe shall have a minimum internal diameter equal to or greater than the pipe size shown on
the Drawings and Bills of Quantities. SDR shall be defined as outside diameter divided by
wall thickness. Acceptable PVC pipe shall have common profiles for interchangeability
between rough barrel dimensions, couplings, ends and elastomeric gaskets so as to facilitate
future repairs. When assembled, the pipe shall have only one gasket per socket and spigot
end.
6 Pipes delivered to site shall be no more than 12 months old. The Engineer reserves the right
to reject the pipes older than 12 months old.
3.5.3 Joints
1 Solvent welded joints shall not be permitted for sewerage pipelines and all jointing shall be by
socket and spigots with sealing rings which shall conform to BS 2494.
2 Unless otherwise designated, irrigation pipework up to 100 mm in diameter shall be solvent

welded in accordance with BS 4346 Part 1.
1 Inspection and testing for sewer pipes shall be in accordance with an approved inspection
and test plan.
2 Inspection and testing for irrigation pipes shall be in accordance with an approved inspection
ar
and test plan.
at
3 Test certificates shall be provided by the manufacturer.
-Q
4 All pipes may be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in accordance with the
provisions of the referenced standards as supplemented by the requirements herein. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of the manufacturing starting date not less than
LL
14 calendar days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture.
W
5 During the manufacture of the pipe, the Engineer shall be given access to all areas where
manufacturing is in process and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to
s
confirm compliance with the Specifications.

en
6 The Contractor shall perform said material tests in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents. The Engineer shall have the right to witness all testing conducted by
m
the Contractor, provided that the Contractor’s schedule will not be delayed for the
e
convenience of the Engineer.

Si
7 In addition to those tests specifically required, the Engineer may request additional samples
of any material for testing by the Engineer.
8 All expenses incurred in obtaining samples for testing shall be borne by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Contract.
1 All fittings shall be push-on joint with mechanical fittings. Fittings shall be in uPVC material
compatible with the above specified pipe and having the same minimum Class and Pressure
Rating. The fittings when connected to the main pipe shall provide an integral system
capable of withstanding the working and test pressure.
3.6 ACRYLONITRILE BUTADIENE-STYRENE (ABS) PIPES AND FITTINGS
3.6.1 Standards
1 Acrylonitrile butadiene-styrene (ABS) pipes and fittings for pressure pipes shall conform to
BS 5391 and BS 5392.
3.6.2 Manufacture
1 Unless otherwise designated, ABS pipes and fittings shall be class E and manufactured in
accordance with BS 5391 and BS 5392.
3.6.3 Joints
1 ABS pipes shall be provided with socket and spigot joints, sealed with elastomeric sealing
rings conforming to BS 2494.
ar
at
1 Inspection and testing for pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with BS 5391 and
-Q
BS 5392.
3.7 DUCTILE IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS

LL
3.7.1 Standards
W
1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents ductile iron pipes and fittings for pipes
shall comply with BS EN 545 and shall be suitable for an allowable operating pressure (PFA)
s
of 16 Bar and an allowable maximum operating pressure (PMA) of 20 bar.

en
2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, flanges on ductile iron pipework and
m
fittings shall comply with BS EN 1092-2 and shall be PN16.

e
3 All puddle flanges shall be cast integrally with the wall piece.
Si
3.7.2 Exposed Joints
1 Ductile iron flanged pipes shall be furnished with integrally cast flanges or screwed on flanges
faced and drilled to class designation. Steel bolts and nuts shall be supplied with two
washers per bolt. Bolt length shall be such that after the joints are made up, the bolts shall
protrude through the nut, but not more than 12 mm. Bolts shall be stainless steel grade to
BS 970 Grade 316 S31.
2 Gaskets shall be compatible with the fluid to be conveyed. For treated sewage effluent
pipelines, EPDM gaskets shall be used. Gaskets shall be able to withstand a pressure of
PN 16 for a 24 h test period. Thickness of gaskets shall be such that, when jointed in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, the joint shall provide a positive seal for the
range of pressures likely to occur in the pipeline under the maximum joint deflection
permitted.
3 Pipes and fittings in chambers and pumping stations shall have flanged joints unless detailed
otherwise. Flanges shall comply with BS EN 1092-2 and shall be PN16 unless a higher
pressure rating is detailed elsewhere.
3.7.3 Buried Joints
1 Pipes and fittings to be buried shall have flexible joints unless detailed otherwise.
3.7.4 Internal Lining
1 Pipes and fittings shall be lined internally with one of the following linings:
(a) Polyurethane lining minimum thickness 1,000 micron

(b) Fusion bonded epoxy powder lining minimum thickness 500 microns
(c) Ceramic epoxy lining minimum thickness 1,000 micron
2 All coatings shall be factory applied in strict accordance with the lining manufacturer’s
specification. Pipes shall be blast cleaned or ground to the equivalent of BS EN ISO 8501-1,
BS 7079:A1, SA 2.5 prior to application of the products.
3 All liners shall comply with the following standards:
ar
(a) adhesion to pipe (ASTM D4541) Min 10 MPa
at
(b) impact resistance (ASTM2794) Min 10 J -Q
(c) abrasion resistance (AST D4060, 1kg x 1000cycles) Max 100 mg
(d) vapour permeability (ASTM D1653, Wet cup method) 1.0g/m2/24hr
LL
(e) immersion test 20% sulphuric acid (ASTM D-714-87) No effect after 2 years
salt spray test (ASTM B117 – 1,000 hours) pass
W
(f)
(g) spark holiday test voltage V = 248T0.5, where T = thickness of lining in microns
s
(h) any defect found in the lining shall be repaired at the manufacturers plant before
en
shipment.
m
4 Internal socket end of pipes shall be protected with a minimum thickness of 300m of epoxy.
e
5 All pipes shall be clearly marked to indicate the type of lining as follows:
Si
(a) PU – Polyurethane
(b) FBE – Fusion bonded epoxy
(c) CE – Ceramic epoxy
3.7.5 External Coating and Wrapping, Use and Materials
1 External coatings for ductile iron pipes shall be factory applied to the approved pipe
manufacturer’s standards and conform to one of the following specifications.
Table 3.2 External DI Pipe Coating Systems

Applicable
Inner coat Middle Coat Final Coat
Standards
200g/m2 zinc 150m epoxy Black fusion or hot melt BS EN 598, BS 6076
adhesive bonded and ISO 8179-1
polyethylene sleeving
of nominal thickness
1000m
200g/m2 zinc 150m epoxy Black tape self BS EN 598, ISO 817,
adhesive bituminous AWWA C2009
resin on PVC backing
layer complying with
AWWA C2009 Section
24 Type 1. 55%
overlap.
ar
Nil Nil Polyurethane as Part 3 NF A48-851
– 3.7.4 minimum
at
thickness 2000m
-Q
2 Laminate tape shall have the following characteristics:
LL
Table 3.3 Laminate Tape Properties

W
Applicable Pipes Pipes

Parameter
Standard 600mm dia 600mm dia
s
en
Overall thickness ASTM D 1000 1.1mm 1.6mm
PVC backing thickness ASTM D 1000 0.3mm 0.7mm

m
PVC backing thickness if ASTM D 1000 0.5mm 0.5mm

fabric reinforcement in
e
bituminous layer
Si
Tensile Strength BS 2782 7.5N/mm 12.0N/mm
Elongation BS 2782 200% 200%
Tear Resistance ASTM D 1004 19N/mm 50N/mm
Adhesion to steel ASTM D 1000 1.0N/mm 2.0N/mm
Adhesion to self ASTM D 1000 1.8N/mm 1.8N/mm
Impact resistance (single DIN 30672 8.0Nm 10.0Nm

layer)
Dielectric strength BS 2872 25,000V 30,000V
Insulation resistance BS 2782 1,000,000 1,000,000

megohms megohms
Water vapour BS 2782  0.65  0.65
2 2
permeability g/m /day g/m /day
3 Spigot ends of pipes that are tape or polyethylene wrapped shall not be wrapped over the
depth of engagement of the spigot with the socket or mechanical coupling but shall be coated
with a minimum thickness of 300m of epoxy.
3.7.6 Factory Application of Tape Wrapping
1 Before primer application, all oil and grease shall be removed with an approved solvent.
Surfaces to be coated shall be cleaned by mechanical brushing to remove loose corrosion
products, welding slag, loose factory applied bituminous paint or any other foreign matter and
achieve a surface finish equivalent to mechanical scraping and wire brushing as specified in
Clause 8.3.5 of this Section. All surfaces shall be solvent wiped after blast cleaning.
2 Primer shall be applied to all surfaces to be wrapped immediately following completion of

surface preparation.
ar
3 Primer shall be allowed to dry before wrapping. Primer application shall be limited to the
amount that can be wrapped during the working day.
at
4
-Q
Tape shall be applied spirally to provide a 55 % overlap and with sufficient tension to result in
constant adherence without voids or wrinkles. On completion of the wrapping the surface
shall be smoothed to ensure completely sealed overlaps and the absence of air pockets
under the tape. The width of the tape shall be suitable to conform to the size and shape of
LL
the pipeline being wrapped.

W
5 On completion of the wrapping, all tape wrapping shall be checked for continuity by a
“Holiday” detection unit. Any Holidays detected shall be repaired by over-wrapping with tape
s
and the wrapping retested.

en
6 Bond/adhesion tests shall be carried out on all tape wrappings not more than 24 hours after
completion of wrapping.
e m
7 Test certificates shall be provided by the manufacturer.

Si
3.7.7 Factory Applied Extruded Polyethylene Coating
1 Extruded polyethylene coating shall be factory applied to preheated epoxy primed pipes and
fittings to provide a minimum finished thickness of 2.0 mm. The coating shall be resistant to
peeling, free from imperfections, and shall be tested for continuity using a minimum 10 kV
spark tester. The polyethylene coating shall be stabilised to prevent ultraviolet and thermal
degradation.
1 Inspection procedures and tests for DI pipes and fittings shall be carried out in accordance
with BS 4772.
2 The Contractor shall provide Manufacturer’s type and quality control test certificates to be
traced to the pipe cast number, heat number or lot number.
3 Manufacturer’s certificates shall state the relevant British or ISO standards to which the pipes
and fittings supplied comply.
4 The repairs to cement mortar linings, if permitted by the Engineer, shall comply with the
requirements of the designated thickness, minimum bore and surface conditions.
5 In addition to the prescribed testing, the pipes and fittings shall be subjected to visual
inspection at the place of manufacturer and at Site and will be rejected if the pipes are
incorrectly marked or have defects outside the ranges permitted.
3.8 FLANGE ADAPTERS AND FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
3.8.1 General
1 In addition to the types of joints typically designated for each type of pipe, flange adaptors
and flexible couplings may be designated particularly for pressure pipelines.
Flange adaptors and flexible couplings shall:
(a) be manufactured from rolled steel or other approved materials
ar
(b) be capable of withstanding the pressure test of the pipeline in which they are
at
incorporated
(c)
-Q
permit minimum angular deflection as shown below:
Table 3.3 – Minimum Angular Deflection

LL
Pipe diameter (mm) Deflection

W
0
450 6
0
450 – 600 5
s
0
600 – 750 4
en
0
750 – 1200 3
0
m
1200 -1800 2
0
>1800 1
e
Si
(d) be capable of accommodating a movement of 10 mm between ends of pipes they

connect.
2 Adaptors and couplings shall be joined as recommended by the manufacturer.
3 Where necessary to restrain movement at joints tied flange adaptors shall be used and the
deflection criteria shall not apply.
4 All fasteners shall be stainless steel to BS970 Grade 316S31.
3.8.2 Flange Adapters
1 Flange adapters shall be used on PVC-U, GRP, cast and ductile iron, and joints between
each of the materials as designated. Flanges shall be PN 16 rating and gaskets shall be to
BS 3063.
3.8.3 Flexible Couplings
1 Flexible couplings shall be used with PVC-U, GRP, cast and ductile iron, and between joints
between pipes manufactured from each of the materials.
3.9 PIPES FOR OTHER USE
3.9.1 Copper Tubes and Fittings
1 All tubes shall be clean, round, smooth and free from harmful defects and from deleterious
films in the bore. Copper tubing shall conform to BS EN 1057 and shall be half hard, light
gauge copper. Tubing shall be supplied in straight lengths by an approved manufacturer
whose identification mark shall appear on each tube at about 0.5 m intervals. Approved
dielectric isolation fittings or attachments shall be furnished where copper fittings, piping or
tubing are connected to ferrous fittings or connections.
2 Copper tubes for internal use shall be in accordance with Table X of BS EN 1057. Chromium
ar
plated copper tube shall be of plating quality in accordance with BS 1224, free of defects
at
such as blisters, pits, roughness, cracks or unplated areas. Fittings shall be of the
compression type complying with BS 864 Part 2 and shall be resistant to dezincification.
-Q
3 Copper tubes for external use shall be in accordance with Table Y of BS 2871 Part 1. Tubing
shall have a factory applied green coloured polythene sheath with a minimum thickness of
LL
1.0 mm. Fittings shall be of the compression or capillary type complying with BS 864 Part 2
and shall be resistant to dezincification. Joints shall be adequately protected with tape to the
W
3.9.2 Hose and Appurtenances

s
en
1 Hose and hose reel shall be furnished for designated hose bibbs. Hose shall be 25 mm
diameter minimum and provided with an adjustable nozzle. Hose pipes for wash water shall
m
be matched to the operating head of the supply system, be constructed for heavy duty and be
50m long. Hose pipes shall have a certified test pressure of 1.5 times the maximum
e
operating pressure. Hose pipes for fire fighting shall be in accordance with Section 23.
Si
2 Couplings shall be furnished for each size hose, one for each 25 m length of hose provided;
they shall be of cast brass quick fix type and shall have standard threads.
3.9.3 Stainless Steel Pipes, Tubes and Fittings
1 All stainless steel for pipes, tubes and fittings shall be Type 316L.
2 Stainless steel pipes and tubes shall conform to ASTM A312 and ASTM A688. Plate shall
conform to ASTM A240; diameters and wall thickness to ANSI B36.19.
3 Stainless steel fittings and specials shall be compression type conforming to ASTM A234.
Plate shall conform to ASTM A240; diameters, wall thickness and dimensions to ANSI
B36.19, ANSI B16.9.
4 Pipe sizes 50 mm and smaller shall be of Schedule 40 and above seamless stainless steel
with threaded ends, and shall conform to material specifications ASTM A312 and
dimensional specifications ANSI B36.19. Fittings shall be threaded, 2,000 pound forged
stainless steel, and shall conform to material specification ASTM A182 and dimensional
requirements of ANSI B16.11.
5 Unless otherwise designated, pipe sizes over 50 mm shall be Schedule 10 and above,
seamless stainless steel with bevelled ends for welding conforming to material specification
ASTM A312 and dimensional specification ANSI B36.19. Unless otherwise designated,
fittings shall be Schedule 10, seamless stainless steel with bevelled ends for welding and
conform to material specification ASTM A403 and to the dimensional requirements of
ANSI B16.9 and ANSI B16.28. Flanges shall be ANSI slip-on or welding neck type, with
150 pounds rating conforming to material specification ASTM A182 and to the dimensional
specifications ANSI B16.5.
3.9.4 Carbon Steel Pipes and Fittings
ar
1 Carbon steel pipes shall conform to :
at
2 ASTM A53, ASTM A106 for pipes, and ASTM A105 for fittings and flanges
-Q
3 Carbon steel fittings and flanges shall conform to ASTM A105.
3.10 MEDIUM AND HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPES

LL
3.10.1 Applicable Standards

W
1 MDPE and HDPE pipes shall conform to the latest editions of the following standards.
s
en
EN ISO 527 ................Plastics -- Determination of tensile properties

EN ISO 1133-1 ...........Plastics. Determination of the melt mass-flow rate (MFR) and melt
m
volume-flow rate (MVR) of thermoplastics.

e
EN 1519 .....................Plastic piping systems for soil and waste discharge (low and high
Si
temperature) within the building structure – Polyethylene (PE)

EN ISO 1167 ..............Thermoplastic pipes, fittings and assemblies for the conveyance of
fluids – Determination of the resistance to internal pressure
EN ISO 1183-2 ...........Plastics – Methods for determining the density of non-cellular plastics
– Part 2: Density gradient column method
EN ISO 2505 ..............Thermoplastics pipes – Longitudinal reversion – Test method and
parameters
EN ISO 3126 ..............Plastics piping systems – Plastic components – Determination of
dimensions
EN ISO 6259 ..............Thermoplastic pipes - Determination of tensile properties
EN ISO 9080 ..............Plastic piping and ducting systems – determination of the long term
hydrostatic strength of thermoplastics materials in pipe form by
extrapolation
EN 12099 ...................Plastics piping systems – Polyethylene piping materials and
components – Determination of volatile content
EN ISO 12162 ............Thermoplastic materials for pipes and fittings for pressure applications
- Classification and designation – Overall service (design) coefficient
EN 12201 ...................Plastic piping systems for water supply and for drainage and sewerage
under pressure – Polyethylene (PE)
EN 12666 ...................Plastic piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage and
sewerage – Polyethylene (PE)
EN ISO 13479 ............Polyolefin pipes for the conveyance of fluids. Determination of
resistance to crack propagation.
EN ISO 15512 ............Plastics – Determination of water content
EN ISO 16871 ............Plastics piping and ducting systems – Plastics pipes and fittings –
Method for exposure to direct (natural) weathering
ISO 18553 ..................Method for the assessment of the degree of pigment or carbon black
dispersion in polyolefin pipes, fittings and compounds.
ISO 4065 ....................Thermoplastic pipes – Universal wall thickness table
ISO 4427 ....................Plastics piping systems - Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings for water
supply
ISO 6964 ....................Polyolefin pipes and fittings – Determination of carbon black content
ar
by calcination and pyrolysis – Test method and basic specification
at
ISO 9624 ....................Thermoplastic pipes for fluids under pressure – mating dimensions of
flange adaptors and loose backing flanges
-Q
ISO 11357-6 ...............Plastics – Differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) – Part 6:
Determination of oxidation induction time (OIT)
ISO 11922-1 ...............Thermoplastic pipes for the conveyance of fluids – Dimensions and
LL
tolerances - Part: 1: Metric series

ISO 13761 ..................Plastics pipes and fittings – Pressure reduction factors for polyethylene
W
pipeline systems for use at temperatures above 20ºC

ISO 13953 ..................PE pipes and fittings – Determination of tensile strength and failure
s
mode of test pieces from a butt-fused joint

en
ISO 14236 ..................Plastics pipes and fittings – Mechanical joint compression fittings for
use with polyethylene pressure pipes in water supply systems
m
ASTM D638-10...........Standard test method for tensile properties of plastics

e
AWWA C224 ..............Standard for nylon-11 based polyamide coating system for the interior
Si
and exterior of steel water pipe, connections, fittings and special

sections
WIS 4-24-01 ...............Specification for mechanical fittings and joints for polyethylene pipes
for nominal sizes 90 to 1000 mm OD
WIS 4-52-01 ...............Specification for polymeric anti-corrosion (barrier) coatings
WIS 4-52-03 ...............Specification for anti-corrosion coatings on threaded fasteners
3.10.2 Manufacture
1 MDPE and HDPE (PE) pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin materials only.
Recycled, re-ground or re-generated materials shall not be used.
2 HDPE pressure pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from material conforming to polymer
classification PE100 having a minimum required strength value (MRS) of 10 MPa at 50 years
and 20ºC in accordance with ISO 4427. Design stress shall be 8 MPa. The pipe
manufacturer shall identify the manufacturer of the resin, the resin type and classification.
3 The HDPE pipe material shall be certified as meeting the requirements of the PE100+
Association.
4 HDPE pipes to be installed using trenchless technology applications shall be manufactured

from a PE100-RC material. Pipes manufactured from such material shall have undergone the
Notched Pipe Test at an independent 3rd party laboratory in accordance with ISO 13479 and
the time to failure shall have been a minimum of 8,760 hours (1 year). All other
characteristics shall comply with the PE100 requirements of ISO 4427 and this specification.
5 HDPE pipes shall have a standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 11 unless indicated otherwise by
the Engineer and shall have a pressure rating of 16 bar (PN16) at 20ºC (de-rated to 11.8 bar
at 40ºC, in accordance with Annex A of ISO 4427 Part 1) unless indicated otherwise by the
Engineer.
6 Pipes and fittings shall be designed to achieve a minimum working life of 50 years under all
applicable loads, environmental and installation conditions.
ar
7 MDPE pressure pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from material conforming to
polymer classification PE80 having a minimum required strength value (MRS) of 8 MPa at 50
at
years and 20ºC in accordance with ISO 4427. Design stress shall be 6.4 MPa. The pipe
-Q
manufacturer shall identify the manufacturer of the resin, the resin type and classification.
8 MDPE pipes shall have a standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 11 unless indicated otherwise by
the Engineer and shall have a pressure rating of 12.8 bar (PN12.8) at 20ºC (de-rated to 9.5
LL
bar at 40ºC, in accordance with Annex A of ISO 4427 Part 1) unless indicated otherwise by
the Engineer.
W
9 Pipes and fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign
s
inclusions, voids and other injurious defects.

en
10 The resin from which the pipes and fittings are manufactured shall comply with the
requirements of ISO 4427 Part 1 and be protected from UV attack by the addition of carbon
m
black in accordance with the standard.

e
Si
11 Straight lengths of PE pipe shall be supplied in standard lengths of 12m (-0/+50 mm)
measured at 23°C ± 2°C. Unless otherwise specified, coil length shall not exceed 100m.
Coiled pipes shall be coiled such that localised deformation is avoided and the minimum
internal diameter of the coil shall not be less than 20 x outside diameter. Prior to jointing the
degree of pipe ovality shall not exceed the permissible levels given in Table 1 of ISO 4427,
Part 2 and the Contractor shall, if required, use mechanical re-rounding equipment to meet
these requirements. Field cut lengths of pipe used as closures may not be shorter than 0.75
metre in length and shall be approved by the Engineer.
12 All pipes shall be indelibly marked at intervals of maximum 1m. The colour of the pipe
marking shall always contrast with the colour of the pipe. Markings shall include the following
information:
(a) Manufacturer’s name, trademark

(b) Material and designation i.e. PE100
(c) The nominal pressure (PN) of the pipe / fitting
(d) Dimension of the pipe (nominal outside diameter x nominal wall thickness)
(e) Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR)

(f) Production period (date / batch code)
(g) International Standard to which the pipe / fitting has been produced to
(h) Designation of the medium for which the pipe is produced for (water, gas, sewage)
(i) Stencilled in legible letters the pipe identification number on the outside at each end.
Ensure that the same number appears on all record sheets and documents relating to
the manufacture, delivery and testing of that pipe.
13 Pipes shall be delivered in wooden frames or similar arrangement to avoid movement

between pipes. Pipes shall not be stacked higher than 1m in each frame or packing
arrangement.
3.10.3 Fittings
1 Unless otherwise specifically approved by the Engineer, all PE pressure pipe fittings for use
ar
with pipes of up to 355 mm OD shall be injection moulded with the same polymer
classification, material type and pressure rating as the pipe to which they are to be
at
connected. All joints between PE pipes and fittings shall whenever possible be by thermal
butt fusion welding or electro-fusion welding process.
-Q
2 Connections of PE pipes and fittings to metallic fittings shall be made with PN16 backing
rings with a stainless steel stiffener insert or as recommended by the pipe or fitting
LL
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

W
3 Transition fittings used to join the pipe to flanged fittings and pipes made of other materials
shall be certified by an independent third party as being fully compliant with the Type 1 or
Type 2 requirement of WIS 4-24-01 i.e. they shall prevent the pull out of the pipe at their
s
rated operational and test pressures.

en
4 Metallic fittings shall be fully coated to provide protection against corrosion. The coating shall
m
be a factory applied fusion bonded epoxy or a nylon 11 based polyamide coating system,
e
have a minimum dry film thickness of 250 microns and comply with the requirements of
Si
either AWWA C224 or WIS 4-52-01. Any bolts, studs or nuts shall be of stainless steel
(grade 304 or better) or else be protected with a coating that complies with the requirements
of WIS 4-53-03. All buried metallic fittings shall be protected by petroleum impregnated
primer, paste and tape prior to back filling.
5 Where their use is approved by the Engineer, all compression fittings shall be certified by an
independent third party as being fully compliant with the requirements of ISO 14236. They
shall be tested and certified as being class 1 end load bearing fittings i.e. they shall prevent
the pull out of the pipe at their rated operational pressure. Only materials listed in Tables 1
and 2 of ISO 14236 shall be used in the manufacture of the fitting body.
6 Where the use of fabricated fittings has been specifically approved by the Engineer such
fittings shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the requirements of ISO
4427, Part 3, in particular Annex B. The pressure derating factors to be employed by the
fittings fabricator shall be in accordance with annex sections B3 and B5 unless they can
demonstrate that higher factors can be applied. The use of any higher factors shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to commencement of fitting fabrication.
7 All PE fittings shall, as a minimum, be indelibly marked with the following information:
(a) Manufacturer’s name, trademark

(b) International Standard to which the pipe / fitting has been produced to
(c) Material and designation i.e. PE100
(d) The nominal pressure (PN) of the pipe / fitting
(e) Outside diameter and Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR)
(f) Production period (date / batch code)
8 PE Fittings shall be individually packed in bulk, bag or individual protection against

contamination. Electrofusion fittings shall always be packed in a sealed bag or container. The
packaging shall, as a minimum, be labelled with the manufacturer’s name, quantity, type and
dimension.
3.10.4 Pipes and Fittings for Gravity Applications
1 Pipes and fittings for drainage applications shall be suitable for carrying potable water,
ar
treated sewage effluent, raw sewage and surface water at temperatures up to 40ºC as
dictated by the particular application and they shall comply with the requirements of EN1519
at
or EN 12666, as appropriate. -Q
3.10.5 Testing of MDPE and HDPE Pressure Pipes and Fittings
1 The raw material and pipe manufacturers shall document and certify all products and shall
LL
undertake all testing required by ISO 4427 and this specification.

W
2 Prior to delivery of any pipes or fittings the pipe manufacturer shall provide the Engineer with
a comprehensive Inspection and Testing Plan (ITP) for their approval. The ITP shall detail all
s
the certificates and documents that shall be provided by the pipe manufacturer, together with
en
details of the testing that they shall undertake, its frequency and associated test reports.
Where the pipe manufacturer cannot themselves undertake the required testing they shall
m
employ an independent third party laboratory to undertake the testing on their behalf.
e
3 Definition of material, pipe and fittings batches for the purposes of batch release testing:
Si
(a) A raw material batch shall be considered as a batch of material supplied by the resin
producer having an individual identification number or code. For the purposes of this
specification it shall also be the raw material used to manufacture a particular pipe
batch.
(b) A pipe batch shall be considered as a continuous production run of a particular pipe
OD and wall thickness manufactured from one resin type with no change in the
manufacturing process.
(c) A batch of fabricated fittings shall be considered as group of fittings of the same OD
and wall thickness.
4 The pipe manufacturer shall undertake the following minimum batch release testing.
Table 1 –Release tests to be undertaken on each raw material batch
Sampling No. of Tests or

Characteristics Reference
Frequency Inspections
Once per raw

Compound Density ISO 4427-1 section 4 1
material batch
Once per raw
Oxidation induction time ISO 4427-1 section 4 1
material batch
Once per raw
Melt mass-flow rate ISO 4427-1 section 4 1
material batch
Table 2 – Release inspections and tests to be undertaken on each batch of pipes
ar
Characteristics Reference Sampling No. of Tests or
at
Frequency Inspections
Appearance and colour ISO 4427-2 section 5
-Q Continuously -
Geometrical ISO 4427-2 section 6 Continuously -

LL
Marking This specification Each pipe or coil 1

W
Melt mass-flow rate ISO 4427-2 section 8 Once per pipe batch 1
s
en
Elongation at break ISO 4427-2 section 8 Once per pipe batch 1

m
Tensile strength at yield on a ISO 6259 (Tensile Once per pipe batch 1
sample cut from HDPE pipe strength to be ≥ 19MPa)
e
Tensile strength at yield on a ISO 6259 (Tensile Once per pipe batch 1
Si
sample cut from MDPE pipe strength to be ≥ 15MPa)

Longitudinal reversion ISO 4427-2 section 8 Once per pipe batch 1
Pipe wall thickness shall be measured and controlled on a continuous basis using and ultrasonic
thickness gauge or similar device that shall be regularly calibrated in accordance with the gauge
manufacturer’s recommendations.
5 In accordance with the recommendations of ASTM D 638, the maximum thickness of the
tensile strength test samples cut from the pipe wall shall be 14 mm. In the event of the pipe
wall being thicker than 14 mm the pipe manufacturer shall machine the test samples in
accordance with the Table 3.
Table 3 – Preparation of samples for tensile testing

Pipe Wall Thickness (WT) Test Sample Thickness No. of samples to be
(mm) (mm) taken from the pipe wall
≤ 14 WT 1
14 < WT ≤ 28 WT/2 2
28 < WT ≤ 42 WT/3 3
42 < WT ≤ 56 WT/4 4
56 < WT ≤ 72 WT/5 5
All testing shall be undertaken in accordance with ISO 6259 and all HDPE samples shall
achieve a minimum tensile strength at yield of 19 MPa in order for the pipe to successfully
pass the test. MDPE samples shall have achieved minimum tensile yield strength at yield of
15 MPa.
ar
Table 4 – Release inspections and tests to be undertaken on each batch of fabricated fittings
at
Characteristics Reference Sampling No. of Tests or
-Q Frequency Inspections
Appearance and colour ISO 4427-2 section 5 Continuously -
Geometrical ISO 4427-2 section 6 Continuously -

LL
Marking This specification Each fitting 1

W
o
Hydrostatic strength at 20 C, ISO 4427-3 Annex B Once per batch of 1 piece only
100hrs & 12.4MPa x ƒ HDPE fittings
o
s
Hydrostatic strength at 20 C, ISO 4427-3 Annex B Once per batch of 1 piece only
100hrs & 10 MPa x ƒ
en
MDPE fittings
The fabricated fitting to be hydrostatically tested shall be a tee or branch provided the batch
m
in question contains this type of fitting, otherwise a bend shall be tested.

e
6 In the case of injection moulded fittings the manufacturer shall issue a certificate confirming
Si
compliance with ISO 4427 and providing details of the type testing undertaken by an
independent third party in accordance with sections 7 and 8 of ISO 4427 – Part 3.
7 The pipe manufacturer shall provide the Engineer with a copy of the batch release tests i.e.
all those tests listed above, with each batch of pipes or fittings that is delivered to site.
8 Prior to delivery of pipes the pipe manufacturer shall provide the Engineer with copies of all
the test results and certification required by ISO 4427, this specification and the ITP, but
which are not covered by the above batch testing requirements. These documents shall
comprise the Type Test Report.
9 The Type Test Report shall include a copy of the raw material manufacturer's "Certificate of
Quality Control Testing" covering each batch of raw material used for manufacturing pipes
produced under this specification.
10 The pipe manufacturer shall ensure that all the applicable codes and standards are available
at their facility for the Engineer’s reference during any visit or inspection.
11 The pipe manufacturer shall provide full assistance and co-operation for any inspection,
when required by the Engineer or by an inspector appointed by the Engineer.
12 The Engineer may reject any item that does not successfully pass the required tests or fully
comply with the requirements of this specification. When a pipe or fitting is rejected, the items
manufactured immediately before or after shall be carefully examined and tested at the
direction of the Engineer. If further defects are found, the entire batch shall be rejected.
13 All pipes and fittings shall be visually inspected by the PE Welding Inspector before
incorporation in the Works.
14 In addition to those tests specifically required, the Engineer may request additional samples
of any material for testing by the Engineer and all expenses incurred in obtaining samples for
testing shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Contract.
3.11 POLYESTER RESIN CONCRETE (PRC)-PIPING SYSTEMS FOR NON-

PRESSURE DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE
ar
at
3.11.1 General
1
-Q
Polyester resin concrete is a mixture formed from aggregates and fillers which are bound
together using a polyester resin (also called Polymer concrete pipes), as defined in ISO
18672-1 or ASTM D 6783 with the amendments given below.
LL
2 Polyester resin concrete is permitted for use in infrastructure drainage and sewage systems
W
(pipes, manhalls, soakways).
3.11.2 Resin
s
en
1 The resin used in the pipe system and manufactured as per ISO 18672-1shall have a
temperature of deflection of at least 85 °C, when tested in accordance with Method A of
m
ISO 75-2 with the test specimen in the edgewise position. It shall also conform to the
applicable requirements of EN 13121-1.
e
Si
2 The resin used in the pipe system and manufactured as per ASTM D 6783 shall have a
minimum deflection temperature of 85°C when tested at 1.82 MPa following Test Method
D648. The resin content shall not be less than 7% of the weight of the sample as determine
by test method D2584
3.11.3 Minimum strength
1 The minimum strength classes for different pipe shapes are given below
Table 3.11.1
Minimum strength classes for pipes designated PRC-OC or PRC-TC
Strength class
Nominal size Sc
DN N/mm
PRC-OC PRC-TC
150 ≤ DN ≤ 500 180 180
600 ≤ DN ≤ 1000 145 160
1200 ≤ DN≤ 3000 120 145
Table 3.11.2
Minimum strength classes for pipes designated PRC-OE or PRC-TE
Strength class
Nominal width/height Sc
WN/HN
N/mm
PRC-OE PRC-TE
300/450 ≤ WN/HN ≤ 600/900 180 180
700/1050 ≤ WN/HN ≤ 1000/1500 145 160
1200/1800 ≤ WN/HN ≤ 1400/2100 120 145
ar
Table 3.11.3
— Minimum strength classes for pipes designated PRC-OK or PRC-TK
at
Strength class
-Q Sc
Nominal size
DN N/mm
PRC-OK PRC-TK
LL
800 ≤ DN ≤ 1000 145 160

W
1200 ≤ DN ≤ 1800 120 145

s
en
e m
END OF PART
Si
Part 04: Pipeline Installation
4 PIPELINE INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 3
4.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 3

4.1.2 References 3
4.1.3 Guidelines 4
4.1.4 Definitions 4
4.1.5 Submittals 4
4.1.8 Specialists, Inspection and Testing 5
4.1.9 Soil Corrosivity Study 6
4.1.10 Setting Out and Pipeline Alignment 6
4.1.11 Tools for Installation and Testing 6
4.1.12 Inspection During Installation 6
ar
4.1.13 Dewatering 7
4.1.14 Closures and Short Sections 7
at
4.1.15 Cutting of Pipes -Q 7
4.1.16 Stringing of Pipes 7
4.1.17 Inspection of Trench Formation 8
4.1.18 Overpumping and Flow Diversions 8
LL
4.1.19 Other Services 8

4.2 DUTILE IRON, PVC, CONCRETE, VITREOUS CLAY, ABS AND
W
GRP PIPELINE JOINTING ............................................................................ 8

4.2.1 Push-fit Joints 8
s
4.2.2 Mechanical Joints 9

en
4.2.3 Flanged Joints 9

4.2.4 GRP Joints 9
m
4.3 MDPE AND HDPE PIPELINE JOINTING .................................................... 10

e
Si
4.3.1 General 10
4.3.2 PE Welding Technicians 10
4.3.3 PE Welding Inspectors 10
4.3.4 PE Welding Equipment 11
4.3.6 Electrofusion Jointing 11
4.3.7 Electro-fusion Joint Inspection 12
4.3.8 Butt Fusion Jointing 12
4.3.9 Butt Fusion Joint Inspection 13
4.3.10 Testing of Fusion Joints 13
4.3.11 Anchorage 13
4.4 PIPE LAYING .............................................................................................. 14
4.4.1 General 14
4.4.2 Laying of Rigid and Semi-Rigid Pipes 15
4.4.3 Laying of Flexible MDPE and HDPE Pipes 16
4.4.4 Laying of GRP Pipes 16
4.4.5 Corrosion Protection of Ferrous Pipelines 18
4.4.6 Concrete Protection to Pipe 19

4.4.7 Deflection Criteria for Flexible Pipelines 20
4.4.8 Backfilling 20
4.4.9 Deflection at Joints 21
4.4.10 Wadi Crossings 21
4.4.11 Pipe Supports 22
4.4.12 Building-in Pipes to Structures 22
4.4.13 Cleanliness of Pipelines 23
4.4.14 Marker Tape 24
4.4.15 Pressure Pipeline Marker Posts 24
4.4.16 Valve Chamber Marker Posts 24
4.4.17 Abandonment of Pipelines 24
4.4.18 Abandonment of Structures 25
4.4.19 Corrosion Protection of Flexible Couplings and Ferrous Fittings 25
4.5 PIPELINE STRUCTURES AND APPURTENANCES .................................. 26
ar
4.5.1 Manholes for Foul Sewerage 26
4.5.2 Manholes for Surface Water Sewerage 28
at
4.5.3 Chambers -Q 28
4.5.4 Connections to Existing Pipelines 28
4.5.5 Anchor and Thrust Blocks 29
4.5.6 Property Connections Survey 29
LL
4.5.7 Future House Connections 29

4.6 TESTING OF PIPELINES ............................................................................ 30
W
4.6.1 General 30
4.6.2 Gravity Sewer Pipelines 31
s
4.6.3 Pressure Pipelines 32

en
4.6.4 Other Pressure Pipelines 33

4.6.5 MDPE and HDPE Pressure Pipelines 34
m
4.7 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS .......................................................................... 38

e
Si
4.7.1 Manhole Covers and Frames 38

4.1.2 Duct Covers and Frames 39
4.7.2 Hinged Aluminium Access Covers 40
4.8 FUTURE SEWER CONNECTION ............................................................... 40
4.8.1 General 40
4.9 INSITU LINING OF EXISTING MANHOLES ............................................... 41
4.9.1 General 41
4 PIPELINE INSTALLATION
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope of Work
1 This Part includes the installation of pipelines.

This Section
Part 1, General
Part 2, Earthworks
Part 3, Pipes and Fittings Materials
Part 5, Valves, Penstocks and Appurtenances
Part 6, Miscellaneous Metal Works
Part 7, Miscellaneous GRP Works
ar
Part 8, Protective Coatings and Painting
at
Section 1, General
Section 2, Demolition and Alterations
-Q
Section 3, Ground Investigation
Section 5, Concrete.
LL
4.1.2 References

W
BS EN 12620..............Aggregates from natural sources for concrete

s
BS 4872......................Approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not

en
required
BS 6072......................Tubular polyethylene film for use as a protective sleeving for buried
m
iron pipes and fittings

BS EN 752..................Drain and sewer systems outside buildings
e
BS EN 1092................Flanges and their joints

Si
BS EN 12007..............Gas supply systems - Pipelines for maximum operating pressure up to

and including 16 bar, Part 2: Specific functional recommendations for
PE
ISO 12176 ..................Plastics pipes and fittings — Equipment for fusion jointing polyethylene
systems, Parts 1 and 2
ISO 21307 ..................Plastics pipes and fittings — Butt fusion jointing procedures for
polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings used in the construction of gas
and water distribution systems
ISO 13953 ..................Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings - Determination of the tensile
strength and failure mode of test pieces from a butt fused joint
ISO 13954 ..................Plastics pipes and fittings - Peel decohesion test for polyethylene (PE)
electrofusion assemblies of nominal outside diameter greater than or
equal to 90 mm
SFS 3115:E ................Plastics Pipes Water Tightness Test for Pressure Pipelines (English
version of Finnish Standard)
WIS-4-08-02 ...............Specification for bedding and sidefill materials for buried pipelines
AWWA C200 ..............Steel Water Pipe 150 mm and Larger

AWWA C600 ..............Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances.
4.1.3 Guidelines
1 The following Guidelines are applicable to the installation and testing of HDPE pipes and
fittings:
DVGW GW330...........Installation & Welding of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes for
Gas & Water Applications
DVGW GW331...........Supervision of Installation & Welding of High Density Polyethylene
(HDPE) Pipes for Gas & Water Applications
DVS 2202-1 ................Imperfections in thermoplastic welded joints: Features, description,
evaluation
DVS 2203-1 ................Testing of welded joints of thermoplastic sheets and pipes: Test
methods – Requirements
ar
DVS 2207-1 ................Welding of thermoplastics: Heated tool welding of pipes, pipeline
components and sheets made of HDPE
at
DVS 2208-1 ................Welding of thermoplastics: Machines and devises for the heated tool
-Q
welding of pipes, pipe parts and panels
4.1.4 Definitions
LL
1 Pipes: circular tubes through which fluid can flow including manufactured lengths of pipes,
W
bends, fittings, junctions and other specials, joints and jointing parts.
2 Valves: manufactured devices for controlling the passage of fluids through pipes including
s
sluice gates, reflux valves, and air valves including associated joints, jointing parts, operating
en
gear and fittings.

m
3 Installation: material transport and handling, pipelaying including the complete operation of
laying jointing and testing pipes in trenches or elsewhere, and the construction of pipeline
e
ancillaries
Si
4 Pipeline: long, continuous line of pipes and fittings including valves and ancillary structures
and equipment used for transporting fluids; specifically, sewers and ancillary works for the
transport of sewage and surface water and similar pipelines for the transport of treated
sewage effluent.
4.1.5 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit the documents described in the following paragraphs.
2 Working drawings: Before commencing work the Contractor shall prepare working drawings
necessary for the construction and installation of facilities. The drawings shall be prepared to
A1 size or a size and scale as directed by the Engineer. The drawings shall be submitted to
the Engineer in an orderly manner and at periods which will permit adequate time for review
and approval by the Engineer. Five copies of drawings shall be submitted.
3 Detailed work programme with schedule for the delivery of pipes and fittings
4 Methods statements to supplement the working drawings, as follows:
(a) installation
(i) joints and couplings
(ii) measures to ensure integrity of interior pipe lining and exterior protective
coating at joints and couplings
(iii) installation and adjustment of pipe bedding and other supports
(iv) fitting of pipelines to valves.
(b) testing of sewer pipelines and pressure pipelines to the requirements described
in Subpart 4.5
(c) welding procedures and electrodes with drawings and schedules as may be
necessary
(d) safety procedures and protective equipment
ar
5 Quality assurance and control documents including
at
(a) certified copies of reports of required tests including:
(i) pipe pressure tests
-Q
(ii) dielectric joint tests
(b) copies of certificates relating to welder’s tests shall be made available to the
LL
Engineers on request

W
1 A suitably qualified and experienced safety officer shall be employed to ensure that all
Contractor’s employees follow safety procedures and are provided with appropriate safety
s
and protective equipment.

en
2 Welders employed on the fabrication and site welding shall have passed the welder approval
m
tests of BS 4872, Part 1 or other standard approved by the Engineer.

e

Si
1 Delivery, storage, and handling shall be as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
2 The Contractor shall replace or repair pipe damaged during handling and installation, to the
4.1.8 Specialists, Inspection and Testing
1 The Employer may employ the services of a specialist firm to assist the Engineer as he may
require in any matter connected with pipes, and fitting including the inspection of materials
and workmanship and the witnessing of tests at any stage during the execution and
maintenance of the Works.
2 Such independent tests may be carried out at any stage during the execution and
maintenance of the Works, but they shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under
the Contract.
3 To the extent ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide labour, plant, tools and
materials (but not special testing equipment) for direct assistance to the specialist firm in their
inspection and independent testing and for any further work, investigations, and repairs which
the Engineer considers necessary as a result of such inspection or testing.
4 The provision of labour, plant and materials as aforesaid shall be an obligation of the
Contractor where in the Engineer's opinion the inspection test or further investigation shows
that materials and workmanship provided by the Contractor do not comply with the
designated requirements.
4.1.9 Soil Corrosivity Study
1 Where designated in the Project Specification, the Contractor shall carry out a soil corrosivity
study along the route of proposed ferrous pipelines as directed by the Engineer and mark the
results on the pipeline layout plans.
2 Soil resistivities shall be undertaken using a low resistance, null-balance earth tester and a
four pin array, or any other equipment approved by the Engineer. Readings shall be
recorded in ohm-cm and shall be taken at 1.0 m incremental depths to a depth 1 m below the
pipeline invert levels. Readings shall be taken at a spacing along the route of the proposed
pipelines as required to reflect the changing soil conditions, but in no case shall the spacing
exceed 500 m.
ar
3 Soil samples shall be taken as directed by the Engineer along the route of the proposed
pipelines at a maximum spacing of 500 m. Soil samples shall be tested for sulphates,
at
sulphides, chlorides, pH, moisture content, and carbonates.
-Q
4.1.10 Setting Out and Pipeline Alignment
1 All sewers shall be laid accurately to the lines, and levels gradients shown on the approved
LL
drawings so that the pipeline is straight between successive manholes in the vertical and
horizontal planes.
W
2 Pressure pipelines shall be laid accurately to the lines levels and depths shown on the
approved drawings. Where changes of direction are required, deflections shall be made in
s
en
3 Manufactured bends shall only be used where shown on the Drawings or where otherwise
permitted by the Engineer’s Representative.
m
4 Where pipelines of constant gradient are to be laid, the Contractor shall provide, fix and
e
maintain at such points as may be directed by the Engineer’s Representative properly

Si
painted sight rails and boning rods of pre-determined measurement for the boning in of
individual pipes to correct alignment. The sight rails shall be situated vertically over the line of
pipes or immediately adjacent thereto and there shall at no time be less than three sight rails
in position on each length of pipeline under construction to any one gradient
5 If the Contractor wishes to propose an alternative method of controlling pipeline alignment,

he shall submit his proposed method to the Engineer’s Representative for approval
4.1.11 Tools for Installation and Testing
1 The Contractor shall supply all necessary tools for cutting, chamfering, jointing, testing and
for any other requirement for satisfactory installing the pipelines.
4.1.12 Inspection During Installation
1 Pipes and fittings including any sheathing, inside linings and outside coatings, shall be
inspected by the Contractor immediately before and after installation, and damage or other
imperfection shall be repaired by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer before
installation and in accordance with the following:
(a) Material required for the repair of pipe, sheathing, linings and coatings shall be
obtained by the Contractor and shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
(b) Without relieving the Contractor of any of his obligations, the Engineer may inspect
and test the pipe and appurtenances by any appropriate means, and damage
discovered by such inspection shall be repaired by the Contractor.
(c) The Contractor shall remove from Site any pipe or appurtenance which in the
opinion of the Engineer is so damaged as to be unfit for incorporation in the Works.
The obtaining of replacements for damaged pipes and fittings to the approval of the
Engineer shall be an obligation of the Contractor.
4.1.13 Dewatering
1 All pipeline installation work shall be carried out in the dry.
2 Dewatering shall be carried out as specified in Part 2 of this Section.
4.1.14 Closures and Short Sections
ar
1 For the purpose of reducing the angular deflections at pipe joints, and for closure sections,
at
the Contractor will be permitted to install pipe sections of less than standard length. Closing
lengths and short sections of pipes of all types shall be fabricated and installed by the
-Q
Contractor as found necessary at Site. Where closing pieces are required, the Contractor
shall make all necessary measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness thereof.
The Contractor shall be responsible for taking the measurements required to determine the
LL
lengths of cut portions of pipes for insertion as closing lengths in pipelines.
4.1.15 Cutting of Pipes

W
1 Where pipes are required to be cut on the Site the cutting shall be done by the Contractor in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in a manner approved by the
s
Engineer.
en
2 The pipe and methods of jointing shall be such that the locations of fittings and lengths of
m
pipe can be adjusted to suit Site conditions.

e
3 Cutting of reinforced concrete pipes will not be allowed. Special lengths of pipes shall be
Si
manufactured for closures as required. Other pipes such as GRP, ductile iron, vitrified clay,
MDPE, HDPE, PVC-U and cast iron pipes shall only be cut if approved by the Engineer.
4 The cutting of vitrified clay pipes, MDPE, HDPE, PVC-U, and ductile iron pipes for inserting
specials, fittings or closure pieces shall be carried out as follows:
(a) Cutting shall be carried out in a neat and workmanlike manner with an approved
cutting machine without damage to the pipe and so as to leave a smooth end at right
angles to the axis of the pipe.
(b) Cutting by hacksaw shall not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
(c) Only experienced men shall be employed by the Contractor on this work.
(d) The Contractor shall take every precaution to ensure that both the measurement
tolerances and the cutting of pipes are to the accuracy required. Should any errors
occur the Contractor shall correct the defects to the approval of the Engineer.
4.1.16 Stringing of Pipes
1 Pipes shall be distributed to installation site only in such quantities as can be installed in one
working day or as allowed by the Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall take pipes from the storage areas, unload and string along the route of
the proposed pipeline. Pipes shall be so strung as to cause the least practicable interference
with the use of the land.
3 After a pipe has been strung and immediately before being laid, it shall be cleaned out and
inspected for defects. Cast or ductile iron pipes shall be rung with a light hammer while the
pipe is suspended clear of the ground to detect cracks. Other pipes shall be visually
inspected. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be rejected. Any damage to the
lining or coating of the pipe shall be repaired or the pipe rejected as directed by the Engineer.
4 Plastic pipes shall not be strung along the pipe route but shall be stored in accordance with
Part 3 of this Section until required for laying and jointing.
4.1.17 Inspection of Trench Formation
1 After excavations have been completed to the designated levels and, trench formation
compacted, the Contractor shall issue a formal notice to the Engineer that the trench
formation is ready between designated points for inspection. The Engineer will without
unreasonable delay inspect the said trench formation, unless he considers it unnecessary
ar
and advises the Contractor accordingly. Any rejection of trench formation will be confirmed in
writing by the Engineer.
at
2 The formation will be re-inspected by the Engineer after replacement of any unsound material
-Q
with material as specified under Clause 2.2.3 of Part 2 of Section 8.
3 No bedding shall be placed until the Engineer’s Representative has given his approval to the
LL
trench formation.
4.1.18 Overpumping and Flow Diversions

W
1 Flow diversions shall be in accordance with Clause 10.4 of the Section.

s
en
4.1.19 Other Services
1 Where the Works requires the seeking, protection, diversion or relocation of existing services
m
the procedures set out in Section 6 Part 11 shall be followed.

e
4.2 DUTILE IRON, PVC, CONCRETE, VITREOUS CLAY, ABS AND GRP
Si
PIPELINE JOINTING
4.2.1 Push-fit Joints
1 Immediately before assembling each joint incorporating a rubber ring seal, the rubber shall
be inspected for cracks, every part of the ring being deformed by hand to about 150 mm
radius. If under this deformation any cracks are either revealed or initiated then the ring shall
be rejected, cut through completely to prevent inadvertent use, and the matter reported
forthwith to the Engineer. If more than three successive rings inspected in this way are
rejected the Contractor shall on the instruction of the Engineer stop all pipe jointing until the
cause of the defect has been proved and remedied to his satisfaction.
2 The rubber ring shall be placed in the groove on the socket or spigot ring. The groove shall
be free of deleterious material; e.g., dirt, moisture, oil, and grease. The inside surface of the
socket shall be lubricated with a compound recommended by the manufacturer which will
facilitate the telescoping of the joint. The spigot end of the pipe shall then be inserted into the
socket of the adjoining pipe using a suitable tool to push the spigot into the socket. The
position of the pipe and the gasket in the joint shall then be checked using a feeler gauge to
demonstrate proper jointing. When joints are not properly made, pipes shall be adjusted, or
removed and rejointed as necessary to ensure proper jointing. Care shall be taken to avoid
twisting or cutting the ring when jointing the pipe.
3 For pipes up to and including 700 millimetres nominal bore the joints shall be capable of
withstanding a deflection of not less than 1.5 degrees in any direction and for pipes over 700
millimetres nominal bore 0.5 degrees in any direction. All pipe joints shall be capable of
withstanding a “draw” of 13 millimetres over and above the initial jointing allowance. The
initial jointing allowance is the gap between the spigot and the shoulder of socket measured
parallel to the centre line of the pipeline and shall not be less than 6 millimetres or greater
than 13 millimetres.
4.2.2 Mechanical Joints
ar
1 Where mechanical joints are approved, installation shall be in accordance with the
at
manufacturer’s recommendations. The Contractor shall render the end of each pipe perfectly
smooth so as to allow the joint sleeve to slide freely and where necessary shall coat the pipe
-Q
ends with two coats of an approved quick drying sealing and protective compound. Buried
joints shall be wrapped using protective tape as specified in Clause 3.8.5 and applied as
clause 4.3.5.
LL
4.2.3 Flanged Joints

W
1 Flanged joints for ductile iron and cast iron pipes and specials shall be made with rubber joint
gaskets and steel bolts and nuts which shall include two washers per bolt. The use of jointing
s
paste or grease shall not be permitted. The gasket may be fastened to the bolts with cotton
thread. The bores of abutting pipes or fittings shall be concentric and no jointing material is
en
to be left protruding into the bore.

m
2 All nuts shall first be tightened by hand and nuts on opposite sides of the joint circumference
shall then be alternately and progressively tightened with a spanner so as to ensure even
e
pressure all around the joint.

Si
3 Buried joints shall be wrapped using protective tape as specified in Clause 3.8.5 and applied
as clause 4.3.5.
4.2.4 GRP Joints
1 Joints shall be of the “O” ring or rolling type, and shall incorporate a soft or flexible control
register to help to locate the joint.
2 GRP pipe joints shall be assembled in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for the
type of flexible joint provided.
3 Joints shall be capable of withstanding the various tests specified for the appropriate class of
pipe. Joints shall withstand, while maintaining the specified test pressure, a deflection of not
less than 1.5  in any direction or for pipes up to and including 600 mm nominal bore, and
0.5  in any direction for pipes over 600 mm diameter.
4 Rubber joint rings shall be made of EPDM SBR or nitrile rubber (NBR) and shall comply with
the relevant requirements of BS EN 681-1 for Type WG rings.
5 Flanged pipes, if required, shall incorporate an annular gasket and these gaskets shall cover
the full face of the flange and shall have holes cut in correspondence to the bolt holes in the
flanges. Flanges shall be drilled to BS EN 1092 type PN 16. Alternatively jointing system for
flanged pipes, incorporating rubber rings, may be approved by the Engineer. Stainless steel
backing rings shall be inserted between the bolt head / nut and the GRP flange to spread the
load.
4.3 MDPE AND HDPE PIPELINE JOINTING
4.3.1 General
1 The Contractor shall abide by the following guidelines with regards to jointing MDPE and
HDPE (PE) pipes and fittings unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
(a) PE pipes and fittings of 90 mm OD and above shall joined by butt fusion whenever
possible.
(b) PE pipes and fittings of less than 90 mm OD shall be joined together using electro-
fusion couplings and fittings.
ar
(c) Electro-fusion fittings may also be used to undertake repairs and install off-takes or
connections on existing pipelines. They may also be used for the joining together of
at
pipe strings where it is not practical to use a butt fusion welding machine.
-Q
(d) To join PE pipes to metal pipes and fittings such as valves, restrained mechanical
transition fittings and stub flanges shall be used.
(e) Restrained mechanical fittings may, with the permission of the Engineer, to undertake
LL
repairs and install off-takes or connections on existing pipelines.
4.3.2 PE Welding Technicians

W
1 All PE electro and butt fusion jointing, PE jointing to GRP and metallic valves and fittings shall
only be undertaken by a certified HDPE Welding Technician holding a valid Welder Licence.
s
en
2 The PE Welding Technician shall have attended a comprehensive course on the Installation
and Welding of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes. The minimum course length shall
m
be 5 days and the Technician shall have sat and passed an exam in accordance with the
GW330 standard of the German Technical and Scientific Association for Gas and Water
e
(DVGW) or an equivalent national body approved by the Engineer.

Si
3 The PE Welding Technician shall hold a valid GW330 Welder License or equivalent issued
by a national body approved by the Engineer, which shall be subject to annual renewal by
attending a re-examination course.
4.3.3 PE Welding Inspectors
1 A specialist PE Welding Inspector shall observe and supervise the handling, welding, jointing
to other materials and testing on site of all HDPE pipes and fittings.
2 The PE Welding Inspector shall have attended a comprehensive course on the Installation
and Welding of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes. The minimum course length shall
be 5 days and the Inspector shall have sat and passed an exam in accordance with the
GW331 standard of the German Technical and Scientific Association for Gas and Water
(DVGW) or an equivalent national body approved by the Engineer.
4.3.4 PE Welding Equipment
1 All welding machines and welding equipment shall fulfil the requirements of DVS 2208-1 or
the relevant part of ISO 12176. All welding machines shall be of an automatic or semi-
automatic design where the welding machine determines and controls the welding
parameters based on the pipe and fitting details entered by the operator. They shall also be
equipped with a data logging function that measures and records information listed in DVS
2208-1.
2 All machines shall undergo a yearly calibration and function test, carried out by a service
centre authorised by the machine manufacturer.
1 A detailed method statement for PE pipe jointing shall be prepared by the Contractor and
submitted to the Engineer for approval. The method statement shall include details of which
equipment shall be used and how the work will be performed to ensure compliance with the
recommendations of the pipe manufacturer and of this specification. It shall include, but not
be limited to:
ar
(a) Details of the equipment to be employed by the Contractor, together with procedures
at
for its operation, maintenance, periodic inspection and testing.
(b)
-Q
Details of the experience and certification of the pipe and fitting jointers that shall be
employed by the Contractor.
(c) Procedures for joint preparation, indicating method and degree of cutting, cleaning,
LL
drying, scraping, alignment, support, etc. of the pipe ends to be joined.

(d) Jointing procedures, specifying the equipment and tools to be employed, together with
W
all relevant parameters such as voltage, temperature, pressure, heating time and
cooling down time and the means by which jointing operations shall be controlled.
(e) Inspection and testing procedures together with proposals for the independent and on
s
site inspection and testing on welds on a regular basis.

en
(f) QA/QC procedures

m
(g) All safety precautions and procedures.

e
4.3.6 Electrofusion Jointing

Si
1 All electrofusion jointing shall be undertaken in accordance with this specification and the
guidance given in DVS 2207-1
2 Only barcode labelled electro-fusion fittings incorporating fusion indicators and complying
with the requirements of ISO4427, Part 3 shall be used. The electrofusion control unit shall
incorporate data input through the use of a bar code reader pen and a data retrieval facility to
allow historical fusion data to be read on the unit’s screen and to be exported to an external
computer or memory stick.
3 The electro-fusion control box shall deliver the correct fusion parameters to the electro-fusion
fitting. The power generator shall provide the power requirements of the control box, taking
into account the electrical characteristics of the control box.
4 Positioning tools including suitable alignment clamps shall at all times be used to minimise
misalignment and prevent movement during the fusion and cooling cycle of the joint. A
suitable shelter shall be used in cold, windy, dusty or wet weather conditions.
5 Prior to commencing the welding process the Contractor shall measure and ensure that the
ovality of the pipe or spigot end is within the limits given in Table 3 of ISO 4427, Part 3.
6 All pipework shall be cleaned with disposable alcohol impregnated wipes prior to undertaking
the pipe scraping, in order to remove any contamination. Prior to scraping the Contractor
shall measure and mark the area of the pipe or spigot end to be scraped in order to remove
the oxidized surface to a depth between 0.2 and 0.4 mm. The length of the pipe or spigot end
to be scraped shall be equivalent to the insertion depth of the electro-fusion joint plus a
distance of between 10 and 20 mm.
7 Only rotating mechanical scrapers or peelers, which are capable of cutting a continuous strip
or ribbon over the insertion length of the coupler or fitting, shall be used.
8 Only after preparation and scraping of the pipe end shall the fitting be removed from its
packaging and immediately inserted over the pipe end.
9 Each pipe or spigot end shall penetrate completely its relevant part of the electro-fusion
socket.
10 Alignment clamps shall not be removed before the appropriate cooling time has elapsed.
Abnormal displacement of the electric wire coils shall not occur. This shall be checked prior
to commencement of the fusion process.
ar
4.3.7 Electro-fusion Joint Inspection
at
1 All completed electro-fusion joints shall be inspected in accordance with the requirements of
-Q
Appendix B of EN 12007 Part 2. Should the joint contain any of the faults described in the
standard then the electro-fusion fitting shall be cut out and replaced.
LL
2 After completion of the fusion process, all fusion indicators shall be checked to ensure that
they are in the position indicated in the Manufacturer's instructions. If any fusion indicators
are not in the required position the electro-fusion fitting shall be cut out and replaced.
W
3 The Contractor shall, on a regular basis allow the Engineer to download the historical data
s
relating to the welds made by the unit through the data retrieval facility.
en
4.3.8 Butt Fusion Jointing

m
1 All butt fusion jointing shall be undertaken in accordance with this specification, the single low
pressure jointing procedure given in ISO 21307 and the guidance given in DVS 2207-1.
e
Si
2 Assign a unique joint number to each joint and have a data retrieval facility to allow historical
fusion parameters to be read on the unit’s screen and to be exported to an external computer
or memory stick
3 In the case of large diameter pipes having a high wall thickness in excess of 35 mm the
Contractor may propose to instead follow the single high pressure fusion jointing procedure
described in ISO 21307. Such a deviation from DVS2207-1 shall only be allowed with the
4 Only pipes and fittings of the same size, SDR and material are to be butt fusion jointed.
5 A dummy joint shall be made at the start of each welding session using pipe off cuts of the
same size, material and SDR as the pipe being installed. The normal trimming, bead up and
full heat soak cycles will be adhered to.
6 If the pipe size is changed during the day, if the heater plate is allowed to cool below 180°C
or if maintenance of the butt fusion equipment is carried out then a new dummy weld shall be
performed.
4.3.9 Butt Fusion Joint Inspection
1 All butt fusion joints shall be inspected in accordance with the requirements of Appendix B of
EN 12007 Part 2. Should the joint contain any of the faults described in the standard then the
joint shall be cut out and replaced. The inspection shall include the following points:
(a) The gap between the two single beads shall not be below the fusion surface.
(b) The displacement between the fused pipes must not exceed 10% of the pipe wall
thickness.
(c) The difference between two single bead widths shall not exceed 10% of the double
bead width.
(d) The weld beads shall be free from all contamination and have a smooth even surface
with no evidence of distortion, holes or bubbles
(e) At the direction of the Engineer external beads shall be removed with an approved tool
and inspected for contamination and defects. They shall also undergo bend back
testing. Beads should be solid and rounded with a broad root as hollow beads with thin
root and curled appearance can be indicative of excessive pressure or no heat soak.
ar
(f) Each removed bead shall be numbered with its corresponding joint number clearly
displayed and removed beads shall be retained for inspection by the Engineer.
at
(g) The width of each external bead width shall be measured using bead gauges and the
-Q
width of the bead shall be within the range given by the pipe and / or welding
equipment manufacturer.
(h) No signs of damage (such as scratches or deep impressions caused by clamps) shall
LL
be visible on either side of the joint.

(i) Any joints the do not comply with the above requirements shall be cut out and a new
W
joint made; the failed joint shall be handed over to the Engineer.
(j) Records of all tests and inspections shall be maintained by the Contractor and made
s
available for review and approval by the Engineer.

en
4.3.10 Testing of Fusion Joints

m
1 A minimum, 1 % of all butt fusion joints shall be cut out and destructively tested under
laboratory conditions in accordance with ISO 13953 by an approved testing organisation. The
e
joints to be tested shall be selected by the Engineer immediately upon completion of the
Si
welding process, whereupon they shall be cut out and delivered for testing.
2 A minimum of 1 % of all electro-fusion fittings shall be cut out and destructively tested under
laboratory conditions in accordance with ISO 13954 by an approved testing organisation. The
fittings to be tested shall be selected by the Engineer immediately upon completion of the
welding process, whereupon they shall be cut out and delivered for testing. They shall
comprise at least 1 of each type of electro-fusion fitting even if this requires more than 1 % of
all electro-fusion fittings to be tested. Note that the minimum test requirement is for one fitting
of each type i.e. bend, coupling, tapping saddle, tee etc. not one of each size and type.
3 All costs associated with the testing, together with any consequent rectification of faults and
retesting shall be borne by the contractor.
4.3.11 Anchorage
1 Anchorage lugs shall be provided for socket and spigot fittings and socket clamps and tie
rods used where there is a possibility of pulling the joint under pressure. Concrete thrust
blocks shall be used in lieu of the above where socket and spigot pipe is used below ground.
The Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer’s approval, working drawings and information
demonstrating the adequacy of anchorage systems other than thrust blocks or other systems
shown on the Contract Drawings.
4.4 PIPE LAYING
4.4.1 General
1 Except as otherwise specified in this Clause, pipe bedding shall conform with the
requirements specified in Part 2 of this Section.
2 The Contractor shall, after excavating the trench and preparing the proper bedding, furnish all
necessary facilities for properly lowering and placing sections of the pipe in the trench without
damage and shall properly install the pipe.
3 Each pipe shall be carefully lowered onto its prepared bed by means of appropriate slings
and tackle. A recess shall be left in the prepared bed to permit the sling to be withdrawn. If
the prepared bed is damaged, the pipe shall be raised and the bed made good before pipe
laying is continued.
4 No pipe shall be rolled into place for lowering into the trench except over suitable timber
planking free from roughness likely to damage any coatings.
ar
5 The section of pipe shall be fitted together correctly and shall be laid true to line and grade in
at
accordance with the bench marks established by the Contractor. The bench marks shall be
approved by the Engineer. -Q
6 The full length of the barrel of the pipe shall have a uniform bearing upon the bedding
material and if the pipe has a projecting socket, suitable excavation shall be made to receive
the socket which shall not bear on the subgrade.
LL
7 Pipes shall be laid with the class identification marks or the jointing marks shown by the
W
manufacturer in the uppermost position. Pipe sections shall be so laid and fitted together
that the pipeline will have a smooth and uniform interior. The pipeline shall be clean and
unobstructed at the time of its installation and shall be true to the required line and levels.
s
en
8 Spigot and socket pipes shall generally be laid upgrade without break from structure to
structure and with the socket end upgrade. Backlaying may be permitted as deemed
necessary and approved by the Engineer.
e m
9 Whenever work ceases on any pipeline the unfinished end of the pipeline shall be securely
closed with tight fitting plug or cover.
Si
10 Before any pipe is lowered into place, the bedding shall be prepared and well compacted so
that each length of pipe shall have a firm and uniform bearing over the entire length of the
barrel.
11 Pipes shall be laid in straight lines, both in the horizontal and vertical planes, between
manholes or, where directed in the case of pressure pipelines and larger diameter sewers to
regular curves. The placement of pipes shall comply with the following requirements:
(a) each pipe shall be plumbed to its correct line and directly and accurately sighted by
means of a laser positioning system or boning rods and sight rails fixed to secure
posts which shall be set up and maintained at each end of the sewer to be laid and
not more than 20 m apart. Sight rails shall be clearly painted in contrasting colours
and be not less than 150 mm deep, straight and level
(b) boning rods shall be of robust construction clearly painted and accurately made to the
various lengths required, the lower end being provided with a flat edged shoe of
sufficient projection to rest on the invert of the pipes as laid. The boning rod shall be
complete with a vertical spirit level
(c) boning rods and sight rails shall not be removed until the pipeline has been checked
and approved by the Engineer
(d) alternative methods of locating and levelling pipelines may be allowed subject to the
approval of the Engineer
(e) any pipe which is not in true alignment, both vertically and horizontally, or shows any
undue settlement after laying, shall be taken up and relaid correctly by the Contractor
(f) all adjustments in line and grade shall be made by scraping away or filling and
tamping in under the barrel of the pipe and not by wedging or blocking
(g) the trench shall be kept completely dry
(h) in no case shall pipes be jointed before being lowered into position
(i) the gasket should be positioned and lubricated.
12 Pipelines shall be tested in accordance with Subpart 4.5.
4.4.2 Laying of Rigid and Semi-Rigid Pipes
1 Each pipe immediately before being laid shall be carefully brushed out and inspected for
defects. In trench pipes with flexible joints except where concrete bed, bed and surround or
ar
protection is required shall be laid on a well compacted bed of granular material extending for
the full width of the trench and with sufficient material at the sides to permit the pipes to be
at
worked into the granular material and firmly supported to true line and level. Sufficient space
should be left to enable the joints to be made tested and inspected but the Contractor shall
-Q
ensure that at least three quarters of the pipe length is fully supported. After the pipeline has
been tested and approved by the Engineer the trench shall be carefully filled to 300 mm
above the crown of the pipe with granular material in accordance with the bedding
requirements specified in Part 2 of this Section and as shown on the Drawings.
LL
2 Vitrified clay pipes shall be installed in trenches which shall not exceed the maximum trench
W
width at 300mm above crown of pipe as shown in Table 2.1 of Part 3 of this Section.
3 Should the Contractor exceed the trench widths given in Table 2.1 he shall provide
s
calculations to show the loading on the pipe and bedding requirements and where required
en
he shall provide plain or reinforced concrete cradle or surround, to the approval of the
Engineer, at no additional cost. The same type of pipe bedding/surround shall be used for
m
the full sewer length between adjacent manholes.

e
4 Unless otherwise specified, pipe bedding shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.
Si
Notwithstanding the above, for Vitrified Clay pipe the special pipe bedding requirements as
Table 4.2 are to be provided in all cases whether or not shown on the drawings or indicated
in the bills of quantity.
Table 4.2 - Special Bedding Requirements for VC Pipes
Nominal bore Depth to Invert (D)

Bedding Type*
mm m
700-800 D>9.0 4.1.1.1.1 Plain concrete cradle
>900 4.0<D<5.0 4.1.1.1.2 Plain concrete cradle

Reinforced concrete cradle with minimum
>900 5.0<D<9.0
0.4% transverse steel
Reinforced concrete surround with minimum
>900 D>9.0
of 1% transverse steel.
(* as shown on drawings)
4.4.3 Laying of Flexible MDPE and HDPE Pipes
1 This clause does not apply to GRP pipes for which laying requirements are given in Clause
4.3.4 of this Section.
2 All operations involving the laying, bedding, jointing, backfilling etc. of pipes of plastic
materials shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations subject to
3 The pipeline shall be laid on a well compacted sand or granular material that shall extend
across the full width of the trench bottom. The pipe bed shall have a minimum thickness of
100 mm and be compacted to a minimum modified Proctor (AASHTO) density of 90% prior
to the laying of the pipeline.
4 After laying of the pipeline the Contractor shall place pipe surround material on both sides of
the pipe, ensuring that no cavities are left between the underside of the pipe and the trench
bottom or pipe bed. The pipe surround material shall be placed in layers of no more than 150
mm thick and compacted with hand tools across the width of the trench to achieve a
minimum Modified Proctor (AASHTO) density of 90%. The pipe surround shall extend to a
ar
minimum of 200 mm above the crown of the pipe.
at
5 Where pipes are laid in good quality ground conditions such as those native soils comprising
granular, sandy or rocky materials, the pipe bed and surround shall comprise clean dry sand
-Q
free from silty and foreign materials and particles of larger than 10 mm diameter.
6 The maximum particle size of the granular material shall also not exceed 10% of the pipe
LL
outside diameter.
7 Should the excavated native soil fail to meet the above requirements it shall be graded on
W
site in order to do so or be replaced with an imported sand or granular material complying

with the requirements of the UK WIS 4-08-02 or this specification.
s
en
8 Where pipes are laid in poor quality ground conditions such as those native soils comprising
soft or silty materials, the pipe bed and surround shall comprise an imported granular
material complying with one of the grades given in the UK WIS 4-08-02 or this specification.
m
9 Single sized aggregate shall not be used for the pipe bed and surround in conditions where
e
the native soil comprises of sandy, silty or soft material unless it is wrapped in a geotextile
Si
filter fabric to prevent migration of fine material from the surrounding soil in to the bed and
surround
o
10 When the grade at which the pipeline laid exceeds 10 trench breakers or clay dams shall be
installed to prevent the migration of bed and surround material due to the flow of water along
the trench.
4.4.4 Laying of GRP Pipes
1 During the mobilisation period the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval the
pipe manufacturer’s complete and detailed specification for the handling and installation of
pipe and fittings in open trench and such other methods of construction of pipeline specified
or proposed by the Contractor. This specification shall be submitted during the mobilisation
period irrespective of whether the data was submitted with the Tender.
2 The Contractor shall transport, store, handle and lay pipes in accordance with the approved
manufacturer’s handling and installation specification as approved by the Engineer.
3 The manufacturer’s handling and installation specification shall include details of the
manufacturer’s technical expert to be assigned to the Contract. The technical expert shall
have extensive experience of handling and installation of GRP and shall be fully familiar with
the manufacturer’s handling and installation specification.
4 The manufacturer’s technical expert shall provide comprehensive technical assistance to the
Contractor throughout the Contract and shall regularly monitor the Contractor’s handling and
installation operations.
5 Any instructions or advice given by the manufacturer’s technical expert to the Contract shall
be copied to the Engineer. In the event that the Contractor deviates from the approved
handling and installation specification, the manufacturer’s technical expert shall immediately
inform the Contractor and the Engineer.
6 All costs associated with the provision of a technical expert by the manufacturer shall be
borne by the Contractor.
7 GRP pipes shall, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, be laid on a special bedding
material. The space below the barrel of the pipes shall be filled with special bedding material
ar
to the full width of the trench in layers not exceeding 150 mm in thickness. After pipe laying,
further special bedding shall be placed and thoroughly compacted to fill the entire space
at
between the pipe and the undisturbed sides of the trench up to a depth of 150 mm above the
-Q
top of the pipe. The minimum thickness of the special bedding below the barrel of the pipe
shall be 250 mm or as directed by the Engineer. Where a manufacturer requires greater
thickness of special bedding below, around and over the pipes than those specified they shall
LL
be deemed to have been allowed for in the rates for bedding.
8 Where GRP pipes are built into a rigid structure; e.g., manhole or a pumping station, the first
W
100 mm of pipe at entry to the structure shall be surrounded by an approved flexible material.
Flexible joints shall be incorporated adjacent to structures, in accordance with Clause 4.2.4.
s
en
9 Where short GRP pipes are detailed these shall be factory made. Cut ends shall be sealed
with two layers of resin, the second layer being paraffin wax filled to ensure full cure.
m
10 Where GRP pipes are required to be surrounded with concrete, all necessary precautions
shall be taken to ensure that maximum allowable deflections are not exceeded. Adequate
e
precautions are to be taken to ensure that the pipe does not float during placing of the
Si
concrete surround.
11 At all times, backfilling shall be carefully carried out to ensure no voids or pockets of
unconsolidated material are present. The Contractor shall monitor the vertical deflection of
the pipes throughout the backfilling operation. No pipe shall exhibit more than 1.5% deflection
after placing and compaction of the granular bed and surround. In addition, after completion
of the trench backfilling, the average deflection of a length of pipe shall not exceed 1.5%, and
every pipe shall be demonstrated to exhibit no more than the manufacture’s calculated
allowable ‘Initial Deflection’, or 3.5% deflection, whichever is smaller. If any of these values
are exceeded, the affected pipes shall be exhumed and re-laid.
12 The deflection shall also be checked on each length between manholes or chambers before
commissioning to determine whether longer term deflections are within permissible limits.
The average deflection of a length of pipe shall not exceed 3%, and every pipe shall be
shown to exhibit a deflection no greater than 5%, or the calculated allowable deflection
consistent with the achievement of a long term deflection not exceeding 5%, whichever is
smaller, at any point. Pipes exhibiting greater deflections shall be exhumed and re-laid.
13 Pipes exhibiting a deflection greater than 8% or 1.6 times the calculated allowable long term
deflection, shall be exhumed, indelibly marked ‘REJECTED’, removed from the site and not
reused.
4.4.5 Corrosion Protection of Ferrous Pipelines
1 Where tape wrapping is wrapped at site it shall be applied by machine under factory
controlled conditions in accordance with Clause 3.7.6 of this Part.
2 Pipe joints shall be protected by continuing the tape wrapping, or by heat shrink polyethylene
tubes coated internally with thermoplastic adhesive. The profile of the pipe joint shall be
smoothed using bituminous mastic or preformed plastic foam sections taped in position.
Heat shrink sleeves shall be on pipes with extruded polythene coatings, and in all cases shall
be applied in accordance with the sleeve manufacturer’s and pipe coating manufacturer’s
instructions.
3 Joints within in-situ concrete chambers do not require heat shrinkable sleeve protection.
4 Damaged areas of protective coating or wrapping shall be repaired in a manner to be

approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
5 Ferrous pipelines shall be supplied with one of the following corrosion protection systems:
ar
(a) Cold applied self-adhesive laminate tape wrapping
at
(b) Extruded polyethylene coating
(c) Loose polyethylene coating
-Q
6 Extruded polyethylene coating shall be as Clause 3.7.7. Heat shrink sleeves shall be used
over joints in polyethylene coated buried pipes.
LL
7 Spigot ends of pipes coated in either of the approved manners shall not be coated over the
depth of engagement within the socket or flexible coupling, but shall be coated with epoxy,
W
polyethylene or polyurethane for pipes internally lined with these materials.
8 Where ductile iron buried pipe is designated to be encased in loose polythene sleeving,
s
installation shall be in accordance with BS 6076.

en
9 The pipe shall be supported by a central sling and a length of sleeving pulled over the spigot
m
end and bunched up to the sling.

e
10 The pipe shall then be rested on blocks placed at its extremities and the sleeving pulled up to
Si
the socket and folded and taped or tied in position. The sling shall then be replaced to
enable jointing to be carried out. A wide sling shall be used to distribute the weight and thus
obviate intense pressure on the sleeving. Care shall be taken to avoid damage when
removing the sling from the trench.
11 The sleeve shall not be drawn up over the pipe joints until the completion of the hydrostatic
testing. Immediately after making the pipe joint, the pipe trench shall be backfilled as
described hereinbefore in readiness for the hydraulic testing and to prevent damage to the
sleeving.
12 After completion of the hydraulic testing, the sleeving shall be drawn up over and fixed
around the pipe joints. A pad of sleeving shall first be placed around the joint to prevent
damage to the joint sleeve by the edges of the socket or by bolts. A length of sleeving shall
then be drawn over joint overlapping itself either side of the joint for a minimum of 300 mm
and this shall be tied or taped tightly in position.
13 Any pipe sleeving perforated during fitting shall be repaired by overlaying with a short sleeve
folded and secured with tape. Torn or damaged sleeving which is considered by the Engineer
as not repairable by this method shall be replaced by the Contractor.
14 Immediately after fitting the pipe sleeving the pipe trench shall be partly backfilled to prevent
damage to the sleeving.
4.4.6 Concrete Protection to Pipe
1 Where concrete protection to pipelines is specified or ordered by the Engineer’s

Representative a 75 mm thick Grade 20 concrete layer shall be laid over the full width of the
trench and never less than 150mm wider on each side than the barrel of the pipe and with its
top surface positioned as shown on the drawings.
2 This concrete shall be allowed to set and be thoroughly washed down before pipe laying is
started.
3 The length of pipeline laid in any one operation before concreting the pipeline shall be that
which in the opinion of the Engineer’s Representative permits accurate laying of the pipeline
and proper compaction of the fill.
4 Pipes up to 1200mm diameter shall be firmly supported on precast concrete blocks and
separated from them by 25mm thick saturated softwood packing.
ar
5 Pipes greater than 1200mm diameter shall be firmly supported on precast concrete blocks
at
and separated from them by saturated softwood packing 38mm thick.
-Q
6 Alternatively for pipes up to 300mm diameter a layer of concrete Grade 20 of minimum water
content can be laid on the 75mm concrete layer and the pipes worked into this concrete to
true line and level before it sets. Sufficient space shall be left to enable joints to be made,
LL
tested and inspected but the Contractor shall ensure that the barrel of the pipe is fully
supported for at least two thirds of the pipe length.
W
7 After the pipeline has been tested, and approved by the Engineer’s Representative, the
concrete shall be thoroughly washed down and additional concrete Grade 20 shall be
s
carefully placed and compacted thereon to avoid disturbing the pipes or joints until the
en
appropriate profile for the type of protection required has been reached.
Minimum thickness of
Nominal bore of pipe
m
surround
mm
mm
e
Si
Up to and including 500 150

500 – 900 250
1000 – 1100 300
1200 - 1400 350
>1400 400
8 Concrete protection to the pipelines shall be concrete cradle or concrete surround as detailed
on the Drawings and shall be of concrete Grade 20. The thickness of the concrete surround
below, to the sides and above pipes shall be as follows:
9 When support of excavation is provided building paper shall be placed against that support
before concreting to facilitate withdrawal of support.
10 In the case of spigot and socket pipes with flexible joints the concrete protection at each joint
shall be interrupted in a vertical plane at the edge of the socket by a strip of fibreboard or
other material approved by the Engineer’s Representative and of the following thickness:
Up to 300mm nominal bore - 13mm
Over 300 and up to 600mm nominal bore - 25mm

Over 600 and up to 1200mm nominal bore - 38mm
Over1200 and up to 2000mm nominal bore - 50mm
11 The protection and filling of headings shall be of mass concrete Grade 20 and may be carried
out in one operation.
4.4.7 Deflection Criteria for Flexible Pipelines
1 All flexible pipelines will be subjected to deflection measurements at Site. Sections of pipe
failing to meet the specified deflection criteria shall be removed from the trench and relaid,
provided the pipe is not damaged. This procedure shall be repeated until the pipeline is
found to be satisfactory. Removal from the trench and relaying shall be an obligation of the
Contractor. If the permanent set or deflection, after removal, exceeds the limits set out
below, the pipes shall be deemed to be damaged and will therefore be condemned. Pipes so
condemned shall be indelibly marked, removed from the Site, and replaced by the
Contractor.
ar
2 At all times, backfilling shall be carefully carried out to ensure that no voids or pockets of
unconsolidated material are present. The Contractor shall monitor the vertical deflection of
at
the pipes throughout the backfilling operation. No pipe shall exhibit more than 3.0 %
deflection after placing and compaction of the granular bed and surround. In addition, after
-Q
completion of trench backfilling, the average deflection of a length of pipes shall not exceed
3.0 %, and every pipe shall be demonstrated to exhibit no more than the manufacturer’s
calculated allowable initial deflection, or 5.0 % deflection, whichever is the smaller. If any of
LL
these values is exceeded, the affected pipes shall be dismantled and relaid.
3 MDPE and HDPE (PE) pipes may be bent or curved on site down to a minimum radius as
W
recommended by the manufacturer. In the event of the manufacturer providing no

recommendation, the minimum bend radius shall not be less than 25 times the pipe OD,
s
Where there are space restrictions the bend radius may be reduced down to 20 times the
pipe OD, but only with the written permission of the Engineer.
en
4 No electro-fusion or mechanical joints should be incorporated in the sections of PE pipework

m
which are to be bent. Instead a formed bend or elbow should be welded in the pipeline in
order to prevent excessive stress.
e
Si
5 The deflection shall also be checked on each length between manholes before
commissioning to determine whether longer-term deflections are within the specified limits.
The average deflection of a length of pipes shall not exceed 3 %, and every pipe shall be
shown to exhibit a deflection no greater than 5 %, whichever is the smaller, at any point.
Pipes exhibiting greater deflections shall be exhumed and relaid.
6 Pipes exhibiting a deflection greater than 8 % or 1.6 times the calculated allowable long term
deflection, shall be exhumed, indelibly marked “REJECTED”, removed from site and not
reused.
4.4.8 Backfilling
1 The requirements of Part 2 of this Section shall apply, except as otherwise specified in this
Clause.
2 After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the Engineer, the trench shall be carefully
backfilled to 300 mm above the crown of the pipe for rigid pipes with granular material.
Backfilling of the pipe trench should be carried out as designated, or shown on the Contract
Drawings.
3 Where concrete bedding or surround is required, the backfill shall not be placed before the
compressive strength of the site concrete has reached 15 MPa.
4 Where concreting to pipeline is specified, a blinding layer of Grade 20 SRC concrete shall be
placed over the full width of the trench or heading.
5 Pipes to be bedded on or cradled with concrete shall be supported on precast concrete

setting blocks, the top face of each block being covered with a separation layer.
6 Concreting to the pipeline shall be either bed or bed and surround as shown on the Drawings
and shall be of Grade 20 SRC concrete along such lengths as are shown on the Drawings or
ordered by the Engineer.
7 The pipe shall be prevented from moving during concreting.
8 Where concrete bed and surround is used with GRP and PVC-U pipes the maximum spacing
between pipe joints shall be 3 m. For other pipe materials the maximum spacing shall be as
ar
9 When support of excavations is provided, building paper shall be placed against that support
at
before concreting to facilitate withdrawal of the support. Building paper shall comply with BS
1521 Class ‘A2’. -Q
10 In the case of pipes with flexible joints, the concrete at each joint shall be interrupted in a
vertical plane at the edge of the socket by a strip of fibreboard or other material approved by
the Engineer and of the following thicknesses:
LL
Up to 300 mm nominal bore - 13 mm

W
Over 300 mm and up to 600 mm nominal bore - 25 mm

s

en
11 The protection and filling of headings shall be of Grade 20 SRC concrete.

m
12 Where concrete slab protection to GRP and PVC-U pipelines is required such protection
e
shall extend a minimum of 200 mm either side of the pipe trench. The slab shall be of
Si
reinforced concrete as shown on the Drawings.
4.4.9 Deflection at Joints
1 Where the Engineer orders or allows a change of direction to deflect pressure pipelines from
a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal planes to avoid obstruction or where long
radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that required
for satisfactory connection of the joint and shall be approved by the Engineer. Where a
change of direction cannot be made by deflection at the joints of ordinary straight pipes,
bends shall be used. The locations of such bends and other specials are shown on the
Contract Drawings and their exact positions will be determined by the Engineer on the Site.
4.4.10 Wadi Crossings
1 Work at any crossing of a wadi or other waterway shall be carried out as expeditiously as
possible to the satisfaction of the Engineer and any responsible Government agency or other
authority, with minimum interference to the free flow of water. Details of any temporary works
which may affect the flow of the wadi shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days
before starting work.
2 Where pipelines passes underneath a wadi, ditch, open surface water channel, or other
waterway, the pipelines shall be encased in concrete. The minimum thickness of encasement
shall be 150 mm. Unless otherwise designated, the depth of cover shall not be less than 600
mm from the bed of the water coarse to the top of the concrete.
3 The Contractor shall fill the trench in both banks with rock fill or concrete up to the designated
levels. The extent of this work may be varied to suit each individual crossing. Unless
otherwise ordered, the concrete encasement of the pipe shall extend at least to a section
vertically below the tops of the banks. Protection against erosion to the banks shall be
provided by means of stone pitching or riprap.
4.4.11 Pipe Supports
1 Pipe hangers and saddle supports shall be of standard manufacture as shown on the
Drawings and in compliance with the following general requirements:
(a) piping shall be supported independently from appurtenances to which it is affixed.

(b) all weight of piping and contained fluids shall be transferred to a structures or
foundation system through stools, brackets, pipe saddle supports, or overhead hanger
ar
systems.
at
(c) a support shall be provided for each pipe at or near the point where it is connected to
machinery or valves. A support shall be provided for each valve and special fitting.
-Q
(d) flexible joints shall be required at either ends of the support system.
(e) where necessary, expansion joints shall also be provided.
LL
(f) pipe hangers and supports shall generally be fabricated in Mild Steel. These shall be
galvanised and painted with coal tar epoxy.
W
2 For pipelines to be fixed in culverts, the Contractor shall prepare proposals for thrust and
anchor support and submit them to the Engineer for approval. Such approval shall not relieve
s
the Contractor from his responsibility for the adequacy of his proposal. Additional
requirements for both location and details of supports may be shown on the Drawings or
en
directed by the Engineer as the work proceeds to suit the actual conditions encountered.
m
4.4.12 Building-in Pipes to Structures

e
1 Pipes constructed into a concrete wall or structure shall be protected with a concrete
Si
surround integral with the external face of the structure as shown on the Drawings.
2 All internal and external protection membranes to the concrete shall be sealed around the
pipe openings as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. When the pipe is later
fixed, the remaining hole shall be re-formed and filled with non-shrink grout.
3 Any over-excavation adjacent to a structure or beneath the formation level of a pipeline,

either to be constructed under the Contract or in a future contract, shall be backfilled with
Grade 20 SRC concrete.
4 Pipes and pipe specials through concrete walls and floors shall as far as possible be
positioned and built in during construction. They shall be located exactly in the positions
shown in the Contract Drawings and shall be true to line and level. The Contractor shall take
particular care to ensure that fully compacted concrete is in contact with the pipe at all points.
5 Where it is impracticable to cast pipes and specials in the concrete, boxouts shall be
provided in the formwork. The box shall have six or eight sides, depending on the pipe
diameter, and shall be no larger in size than will give adequate clearance for the subsequent
positioning and grouting in of the pipe. The sides of the boxout shall be provided with a
tapered central annular recess to provide a positive key. The boxout shall be provided with a
grout hole and, at the top of the central annular recess a vent hole. The boxhole shall be
stripped with the main formwork and the concrete surface thoroughly cleaned and
roughened.
6 Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, where pipes pass through a concrete wall
or structure they shall be protected with a surround of Grade 20 SRC concrete integral with
the external face of the structure. For pipes of less than 500 mm diameter, the surround shall
extend from the wall or structure by 300 mm and the width and depth of the surround beyond
the outside face of the pipe at its horizontal and vertical diameters shall be a minimum of
300 mm or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. For pipes of 500 mm diameter or greater
the surround shall extend from the wall or structure by 500 mm and the width and depth of
the surround beyond the outside face of the pipe at its horizontal and vertical diameters shall
ar
be 500 mm or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
at
7 On socket and spigot pipelines except those of GRP or other plastic materials the socket end
of the pipe passing through the wall shall be flush with the outside face of the concrete
-Q
surround. On socket of spigot pipelines of GRP or other plastic materials the socket end of
the pipe passing through the wall shall protrude 300 mm from the concrete surround. A
protective synthetic rubber strip 6 mm thick and 150 mm wide shall be provided around the
LL
pipe at the limit of the concrete surround as shown on the Contract Drawings.
W
8 On all other flexibly jointed pipes the plain end of the pipe shall protrude from the concrete
surround by a maximum of 300 mm or that distance required to properly make the joint.
s
9 The first pipe that is clear of concrete surround beyond the external face of a concrete wall or
en
structure shall be a short length of either spigot and socket or double spigot to suit the flow
direction and pipe material. The effective length of this pipe shall be 1.5 times the nominal
m
bore or 600 mm whichever is the greater.

e
10 For mechanically jointed pipes the plain end shall protrude from the surround by a maximum
Si
of 300 mm or that distance required to make a proper joint.
11 Where the structure is tanked, Grade 20 OPC concrete shall be used and the tanking shall
extend to the concrete surround.
4.4.13 Cleanliness of Pipelines
1 Pipelines and manholes shall at all times be kept free of all silt, mortar, debris and other
obstructions. When work is not in progress the open ends of the pipeline shall be securely
plugged with an approved watertight plug or stopper firmly fixed to resist unauthorised
removal. Claw type plugs or any type liable to damage the pipe shall not be used. All such
stoppers, plugs or caps shall be provided with a vent incorporating a valve for the purpose of
testing whether the pipeline is under pressure or vacuum and to enable pressures to be
equalised before its removal.
2 The Contractor shall clear the inside of each fitting and pipe length immediately before
jointing and shall swab all fittings and pipe lengths to remove all dirt, sand or other matter that
may clog the pipeline or contaminate the fluid to be transported in the pipeline. After jointing,
the interior of the pipes shall be freed from any dirt, stones or other matter that may have
entered them. For this purpose, a rubber disc, brush, or other suitable implement that will not
harm the internal lining of the pipe shall be pulled through the pipe after jointing.
3 Pressure pipelines and treated sewage effluent pipelines shall be flushed and a swab passed
through. Large diameter pipelines shall be visually inspected internally to the approval of
Engineer.
4.4.14 Marker Tape
1 All trenches for pressure pipelines, shall be marked with a high quality acid and alkali-
resistant red non bio-degradable plastic tape with a minimum width of 150 mm placed during
backfilling 300 mm below finished surface or as directed by the Engineer. These tapes shall
2 2
have a minimum strength of 125 kg/cm in the longitudinal direction and 105 kg/cm
transversely with an elongation factor in the longitudinal direction of 350 percent. The text on
the tape shall be permanent black ink bonded to resist prolonged chemical attack by
corrosive acids and alkaline with message repeated at a maximum interval of two metres.
Tapes over non-ferrous pipes shall be detectable by electro-magnetic means using low
output generator equipment.
2 The tape wording and colour shall be as follows:
ar
WORDING COLOUR
DANGER : FOUL SEWAGE RED
at
CAUTION TREATED SEWAGE EFFLUENT -Q GREEN
SURFACE WATER GREY
WATER MAIN BLUE
LL
DANGER : FUEL PIPELINE BROWN
3 The tape shall be laid continuous over pipelines and at joints there shall be a minimum of one
W
metre overlapping. Tape shall be terminated inside valve boxes to allow clipping of detector
equipment to the tape.
s
en
4.4.15 Pressure Pipeline Marker Posts
1 Pipeline marker posts shall be provided at all points where the pipeline crosses boundaries
m
or changes direction and elsewhere at maximum intervals of 100m. Each marker post shall
be set over the centreline of the pipelines with concrete Grade 20 SRC concrete base
e
surround in accordance with the Contract Drawings. Marker posts shall incorporate a
Si
description of the pipeline and its service in Arabic and English to the approval of the
Engineer. Offset marker posts may also be used in areas where the post could not be
installed over the centreline of the pipelines.
2 Coloured marker plates shall be made from multi-layered plastic, green for TSE and orange
for foul sewage.
4.4.16 Valve Chamber Marker Posts
1 Valve chamber marker posts shall be installed at all chambers, indicating the type of
chamber, its reference number and distance from the marker post in Arabic and English to
2 Where the pipeline is in a footpath or verge, the marker post shall be installed against the
wall or property boundary and facing the chamber cover, with Grade 20 SRC concrete base
surround.
4.4.17 Abandonment of Pipelines
1 Pipelines and service connections to be abandoned shall first be emptied completely.

2 Pipelines and service connections to be abandoned shall be filled completely with a cement
slurry or concrete using a grout pan or an alternative method approved by the Engineer such
that the discharge slurry or concrete can be forced into the pipeline under pressure.
3 The Contractor shall ensure that all existing connections to the sewer to be abandoned have
been plugged or disconnected before beginning filling.
4 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of his intention to begin this operation and shall
obtain the Engineer’s approval in writing for the abandonment of each particular length before
beginning filling.
5 Upon completion of the above procedure, the Contractor shall undertake abandonment of
manholes inspection chambers and other structures. Where a pipeline or service connection
to be abandoned connects into a manhole or chamber to be retained, the connection shall be
plugged at the chamber wall and the associated channel in the benching of the manhole or
chamber shall be cleaned and filled with concrete Grade 20 SRC. The benching shall then
be covered with the appropriate protective lining to match the existing manhole lining.
6 Unless otherwise designated, existing pressure pipelines to be abandoned shall be emptied
ar
and sealed at each end of the pipeline with a removable expanding stopper to the Engineer’s
approval. The stopper shall include a valve for the purpose of venting and for the equalising
at
internal and external pressures removal. Any chambers located along the pipeline to be
abandoned shall be demolished and the pipeline ends sealed as specified.
-Q
4.4.18 Abandonment of Structures
LL
1 Where manholes, septic tanks, cesspits, soakpits and other structures are to be abandoned,
they shall be emptied of their contents to the approval of the Engineer. The contents
including sludge from these structures, whether undiluted or mixed with sand, shall be
W
disposed of off the Site by the Contractor to a location approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit in writing his proposals for emptying the contents and disposal. No
s
work shall begin on demolition until the structure has been completely emptied.
en
2 After desludging, the roof slabs and tops of walls of the structure shall be demolished to an
elevation not less than 500 mm below existing ground level. The fragments of demolished
m
structures may be used to partially fill the void. Voids shall be filled up with sand, watered and
well compacted up to the elevation of the underside of the cover slab. The frames and
e
covers of manholes and chambers shall be removed by the Contractor and delivered to the
Si
designated Employers’ stores and placed into storage.
3 If an existing service is found within a structure to be abandoned, the Contractor shall inform
the Engineer and carry out the Engineer’s instructions for ensuring that the service pipeline is
retained or restored. If a sleeve is to be provided, the sleeve shall extend for 100 mm on
either side of the structure. When backfilling or working around an existing service or sleeve,
the Contractor shall take all precautions to ensure that no damage occurs and that there is
no interruption of service.
4.4.19 Corrosion Protection of Flexible Couplings and Ferrous Fittings
1 Buried flexible couplings, including flange adaptors shall be protected as follows:
(a) Mastic paste filling (Denso paste or similar)

(b) Mastic tape wrapping (Denso tape or similar)
(c) and finished with cold applied self-adhesive laminate tape wrapping (or heat shrink
sleeving) in accordance with Clause 8.4.3.5
2 Couplings, including all associated nuts and bolts, within chambers or pumping stations shall
be polyamide powder coated (“Rilsan” or similar).
4.5 PIPELINE STRUCTURES AND APPURTENANCES
4.5.1 Manholes for Foul Sewerage
1 The Contractor shall prepare a standard record sheet for every manhole and structure and
shall submit to the Engineer for information only.
2 Manholes shall be constructed as shown on the Contract Drawings and at the locations
indicated thereon or at other locations directed by the Engineer.
3 The blinding concrete shall be mass concrete Grade 25 SRC concrete and the manhole base
slab, benching and insitu concrete walls shall be Grade C40 SRC concrete.
4 Precast concrete manhole rings shall be manufactured using Grade C50 SRC concrete. The
joint surfaces and outer face of the precast concrete rings shall have factory applied epoxy
coating in accordance with Part 8 Clause 8.3.15. The inner face of the precast manhole ring
shall be a prefabricated GRP liner at least 6mm thick bonded by lugs to the concrete. The
completed joints between precast concrete rings shall have an insitu applied sealing strip at
ar
least 6mm thick overlapping the GRP liner by a minimum of 150mm each side. The sealing
strip shall be capable of withstanding the full hydrostatic head of external ground water to
at
ground level and the maximum internal hydrostatic head, whichever is the greater.
5
-Q
The underside of the base and the external faces of insitu concrete bases and walls shall be
protected with a membrane tanking system. The necessary period for setting, as
recommended by the manufacturer, shall be allowed before beginning other works to
complete the construction of the manhole.
LL
6 The cover slab shall be surmounted by ductile-iron manhole cover and frame of the quality
W
specified. The covers in road and paved areas shall be accurately set on precast concrete
segments to the level and slopes of the roads or pavements.
s
7 In the case of shallow manholes, the cover and frame may be cast directly monolithic with the
en
reinforced concrete cover slab and projecting up by 50 mm as shown on the Contract

Drawings.
m
8 The interior face of manholes and access shafts shall be prefabricated GRP liners at least
e
6 mm thick permanent lining.

Si
9 Prefabricated GRP benchings and channels shall be preformed, inverted and filled with
Grade C40 SRC concrete. Alternatively, the GRP lining may be applied to the in-situ
concrete benching after constructing the benching.
10 GRP lining to walls shall incorporate lugs moulded onto the outside face at 500 mm centres
to allow bonding to the concrete surround. The lining shall have adequate strength to
withstand handling, and shall not buckle or distort during pouring of the concrete surround.
Internal bracing may be used during pouring of the concrete surround. Internal bracing may
be used during pouring to maintain circularity and verticality.
11 Cover slabs shall be precast using Grade C50 SRC concrete and shall incorporate a
preformed flat sheet of GRP on the soffit, bonded to a GRP tube to form the access opening.
Both linings shall incorporate lugs moulded onto the surface to allow bonding to the concrete.
The overall size of the lining to the soffit of the slab shall be 150mm greater than the internal
diameter of the manhole onto which the slab is to be placed.
12 In all cases, the outer surface of the GRP, exposed to the sewage atmosphere, shall consist
of a chemically resistant layer comprising vinyl ester resin suitably reinforced with a ‘C’ glass
or synthetic tissue veil. This layer shall be no less than 2mm thick, and shall have a resin
content by weight of approximately 90% at the exposed surface, reducing to 65% - 75% at
the inner surface. The remainder of the liner shall consist of vinyl ester or isophthalic resins
and “E” or “ECR” glass chopped strand mat. Fillers, such as silica sand and calcium
carbonate shall not be used. Loss of Ignition Test to BS 2782 (method 1002) shall be
conducted on random samples of GRP manhole liner to detect percentage of glass and the
presence of any silica sand filler.
13 Joints in the lining tubes of insitu concrete manholes shall not normally be permitted.
14 Joints between preformed GRP benchings and lining tubes shall be made using an external
sleeve 200 mm long bonded onto both units, and then bandaged using suitable resin and
chopped strand mat prior to casting the insitu concrete walls. Such bandaging shall extend
75 mm either side of the edge of the sleeve. On the inside face of the manhole, the joint
between the benching and liner tube shall be filled with vinyl ester paste to produce a smooth
finish.
ar
15 If GRP linings to benchings are to be formed in situ the surface of the wall lining tube shall be
at
lightly abraded over a height of 150 mm from benching level. A fillet of 50 mm radius shall
then be formed of vinyl ester paste at the junction of benching and wall. The GRP lining to
-Q
the channels and benchings shall then be built up by applying isophthalic or vinyl ester resin
to the whole of the benching, fillet and abraded wall lining. A layer of “E” or “ECR” mat shall
than be rolled into the resin using a suitable steel roller to exclude all air and provide
complete immersion of the glass fibre in the resin. After a period to allow pre-gel to a tacky
LL
state a second coat of resin shall be applied followed by a further layer of glass fibre mat.
This process shall be repeated until the total thickness of lining is approximately 4 mm. Vinyl
W
ester resin and “C” glass or synthetic tissue veil shall then be used to complete the lining.
s
16 Top surfaces of benchings shall incorporate silica sand to form a non-slip surface.
en
17 The precast cover slab shall be seated on the walls using sand/cement mortar. The joint
shall be raked out 15 mm deep on the inside face and pointed with an approved pitch
m
extended polyurethane sealant.

e
18 Ladders in structures where shown on the drawings shall be fabricated in stainless steel
Si
Grade S31 or GRP. All ladders shall comply with BS 5395: Part 3. All fixings shall be
stainless steel.
19 Intermediate the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a 10 year unconditional
guarantee against failure of all GRP linings whether caused by defective materials or
workmanship. The guarantee shall be valid from the date of completion of the installation
and must be handed to the Engineer before the issue of the Final Completion Certificate.
20 All manholes shall be watertight on completion and where leakage is discovered the
Contractor shall perform such work and provide all materials as are necessary to render such
faulty work watertight. The Contractor is warned that he should expect rubbish and debris to
be deposited in the manholes during the course of construction and he should take the
necessary measures to ensure that the manholes clean.
21 Backfilling around manholes in roads shall be carried out using granular material as
4.5.2 Manholes for Surface Water Sewerage
1 Bases and mass concrete manholes shall be cast using Grade 40 SRC concrete. Where
reinforced concrete manholes are specified they shall be constructed in accordance with the
drawings and have a GRP liner complying to Clause 4.4.1. The GRP liner shall extend to
300mm above the soffit of the outlet pipe of the manhole. The inner surface above the GRP
liner shall have an epoxy protective coating.
2 The benching and channels shall be GRP lined as Clause 4.4.1.
3 The underside of the base and the sides of insitu concrete bases and walls shall be protected
with a membrane tanking system as Clause 4.4.1.
4 Precast Grade C50 SRC concrete manhole rings may be used above the level of the GRP
inner liner. The precast rings shall have a factory applied epoxy protective coating to all
surfaces.
5 Cover slabs shall be precast using Grade 50 SRC concrete and shall have a factory applied
epoxy coating to all surfaces.
ar
6 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a 10 year unconditional guarantee against
at
failure of all GRP linings whether caused by defective materials or workmanship. The
guarantee shall be valid from the date of completion of the installation and must be handed
-Q
over to the Engineer before the issue of the Final Completion Certificate.
7 Ladders in structures where shown on the drawings shall be fabricated in stainless steel
LL
Grade S31 or GRP. All ladders shall comply with BS 5395: Part 3. All fixings shall be
stainless steel.
W
4.5.3 Chambers
s
1 The Contractor shall prepare a standard record sheet for every chamber for valves, meters,
en
inspection, washouts and other similar purposes for the approval of the Engineer.
2 Chambers shall be constructed in accordance with the Contract Drawings and at the
m
locations or at other locations directed by the Engineer.

e
3 The Contractor shall ensure that there is a minimum clearance of 300mm around all flanges
Si
and parts of valves built into chambers, including the handwheel.
4.5.4 Connections to Existing Pipelines
1 At locations shown on the Contract Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall connect the new pipelines to the existing pipelines or structures but not until the said
pipelines have passed the final tests.
2 The Contractor shall co-ordinate with Drainage Affairs, Maintenance Department staff to
make connections onto existing foul sewers and other drainage pipelines.
3 The Contractor shall be responsible for dealing with all flows while making connections to
existing sewers or drainage pipework by over-pumping the entire flow between manholes or
other approved bypassing methods. The Contractor shall retain a standby pump and fulltime
operator on site during pumping operations.
4.5.5 Anchor and Thrust Blocks
1 The Contractor shall construct anchor and thrust blocks at every bend and junction on
pressure pipelines and where otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings or instructed by the
Engineer. Each thrust block shall to have a sufficient bearing area and shall be placed to
safely transmit thrust to the surrounding original ground. If soft, spongy, unstable or similar
material is encountered upon which the thrust block is to bear this unsuitable material shall
be removed and replaced with Grade 20 SRC mass concrete as directed by the Engineer.
2 The excavation for the thrust block shall be carried out prior to laying the pipes except that a
trimming margin of not less than 150mm shall be left to be removed by hand excavation in
order to obtain a firm thrust face against undisturbed ground. This trimming margin shall only
be removed after laying and jointing of the pipes and the concrete for the thrust block shall be
placed on the same day as the removal of the trimming margin.
3 No pressure shall be applied to thrust blocks until the concrete has matured for at least
seven days.
4 "Rocker" pipes shall be installed adjacent to all concrete thrust blocks.
ar
4.5.6 Property Connections Survey
at
1
-Q
The Contractor shall complete and submit to the Engineer for approval a standard record
sheet of every property connection. The information shall be recorded on forms provided by
the Engineer.
LL
2 The Contractor shall survey and prepare individual plans for each property at a scale of 1:500
(or such other scale as may be agreed by the Engineer’s Representative). These shall show
existing plot boundaries, location of all buildings, location of all visible services and location
W
and level of all drainage services, including septic tanks. The plans shall indicate the nature
of each building, clearly identifying kitchen, mess areas, toilets, washrooms and the drains
s
serving these areas and gullies elsewhere. The plans shall identify the drains serving. The
en
plan shall be submitted on paper and AutoCAD compatible .dwg file. As a separate layer on
the dwg file the Contractor shall mark his proposals for the property connection, including a
cross-section and this shall be submitted to the Engineer’s Representative for approval. No
m
property connection work shall commence before approval to the proposed layout has been
received in writing from the Engineer’s Representative.
e
Si
3 In special cases only, an inspection chamber may serve more than one service connection.
Locations of inspection chambers and the layout of service connections shall be as approved
by the Engineer.
4 Service connections shall be laid at sufficient depths to allow for adequate gradient being
continued throughout the properly drainage system without the pipelines becoming too
shallow for adequate cover to be provided over the pipe.
4.5.7 Future House Connections
1 During the course of the Contract the Engineer’s Representative and the Contractor shall
agree on a programme regarding the positions and other details of the junctions to be left for
future house connections. Such branches and junctions shall in all cases terminate in an
approved stopper obtained from the pipe manufacturer.
2 The Contractor shall survey and prepare individual plans for each plot at a scale of 1:500 (or
such other scale as may be agreed by the Engineer’s Representative). These shall show
existing boundary walls or fences and ground level at each corner of the plot. The plan shall
be submitted on paper and AutoCAD compatible dwg file. As a separate layer on the dwg file
the Contractor shall mark his proposals for the property connection and this shall be
submitted to the Engineer’s Representative for approval. No property connection work shall
commence before approval to the proposed layout has been received in writing from the
Engineer’s Representative.
3 The Contractor shall produce accurate records of the exact location of all service connections
and shall include for these in his rates.
4.6 TESTING OF PIPELINES
4.6.1 General
1 The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval details of his proposed methods and
programme for testing (including details of test equipment) and shall arrange for all test to be
witnessed by the Engineer or other person appointed by the Engineer. Test equipment shall
ar
be approved by the Engineer and calibration certificates when requested by the Engineer
shall be submitted. The Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary for carrying out
at
testing and cleaning including pumps, gauges, piped connections, stop ends, and all other
-Q
temporary works. All water required for testing and cleaning the pipelines shall be from a
source approved by the Engineer.
2 Pipelines shall be adequately restrained before being put under test except as hereinafter
LL
detailed. No testing will be permitted until seven days after thrust blocks and other holding
down works have been completed. Trenches may not be left open at joints before testing
pipelines except as permitted by the Engineer who may lay down certain restricting
W
conditions. In addition to any tests of individual joints or other interim tests which may be
designated elsewhere, the Contractor shall submit all parts of the pipelines to a final test.
s
en
3 This and the following Clauses on testing pipelines do not apply to GRP pipes for which
testing requirements are given in the Project Specification where appropriate.
m
4 Pipelines shall be tested in lengths between manholes or valve pits with lengths not
exceeding 400 metres except by agreement with the Engineer’s Representative. Testing
e
shall not be against closed valves, and pipes of different diameters shall not be tested
Si
together in the same test. The arrangements for testing a pipeline shall include provision for
purging the air from the pipeline during the test.
5 In all pipelines which are constructed with mechanical joints or with joints which permit axial
movement, the joints shall be left open so that they may be inspected during hydraulic
testing. In such cases only the barrels of the pipes shall be backfilled prior to hydraulic testing
taking great care to avoid the joints and leaving sufficient space all round the joints to permit
inspection and to undertake remedial measures should the joint be found to leak under
hydraulic testing. After the successful completion of hydraulic testing, the joints shall, if
specified, be wrapped, coated or sleeved as appropriate, and then backfilled in the manner
specified elsewhere in this specification.
6 The final test shall be applied in the presence of the Engineer’s Representative.
7 The Contractor shall keep a record of all tests in a book which shall be available for
inspection and handed over to the Engineer’s Representative on demand. The Contractor
shall complete standard test record sheets as provided by the Engineer.
8 The section under test shall be properly sealed off with blank flanges or special stop end
caps held securely in position by adequate temporary anchorages, and filled with water. All
peak points of the pipeline shall be adequately vented during the filling operation using
temporary bleed valves. All air valves shall be removed and all other valves shall be set in the
open position.
9 Pipe joints, valves and fittings shall be checked carefully for loose bolts or connections which
might cause leakage and delay the execution of the tests.
10 Should any section fail to pass the tests, the Contractor shall determine the cause of the
failure and shall locate, excavate and repair any damage or leakage sustained by the pipeline
before or during the tests and retest the section. The cost of such repair work, additional
backfilling and reinstatement and abortive tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
11 Water for the test shall be disposed of in a manner to be approved by the Engineer.
Pumping water onto the site shall not be permitted.
12 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all test methods and procedures comply
with his Health and Safety Plan.
ar
13 The Contractor shall provide detailed method statements for his methods of testing access
at
shafts, manholes and pipelines. -Q
4.6.2 Gravity Sewer Pipelines
1 Each pipeline 600 mm or less in diameter shall be tested by air test. Should any pipe fail the
LL
air test, the Engineer may order a water test to be carried out. Acceptance of the pipeline will
then be based on the results of the water test. All pipelines up to and including 1200 mm
shall be tested by air test in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 752.
W
2 The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all equipment and materials for making the
s
tests. Each pipeline shall be tested before backfilling and also after backfilling before carrying
en
out road reinstatement or laying new road surfacing. Where the pipeline is located under a
new road alignment, the pipeline will be tested after sub-base compaction in complete. All
pipelines shall be subjected to pass infiltration tests as specified herein. All pipes are to be
m
clean and empty at the time of testing. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
e
Si
(a) Air Test:

(i) the Contractor shall plug all pipe outlets with suitable plugs, and brace each plug
securely where needed
(ii) air shall be pumped in slowly to the pipe until a pressure of 100 mm water gauge
is indicated on a manometer connected to the system. After the internal
pressure of 100 mm water gauge is obtained, 5 min shall be allowed for the air
temperature to stabilise within the pipe.
(iii) Air may be added to restore the pressure to 100 mm water gauge. During a
further period of 5 min, the pressure shall not fall below 75 mm water gauge
without further pumping.
(b) Water Test
(i) all the joints of the pipeline shall be able to withstand a pressure of a minimum
5m head of water, above the crown of pipe at the highest point of pipeline
without leakage. A layer of embedding soil equal to the diameter of pipe shall
be laid over the pipe to prevent the lifting of pipe while applying test pressure.
However, all the joints shall be left open for the purpose of inspection for
leakage if any. All branches and open ends shall be closed with stoppers,
secured with longitudinal braces/thrust block, before testing begins
(ii) water shall be filled from the lowest point and air allowed to escape through an
air vent fixed for the purpose at the high points of the pipeline section under test.
The diameter of air vent shall be about one and half times the diameter of water
inlet pipe to allow easy escape of air. No entrapped air shall remain in the
pipeline while testing
(iii) a pressure of 5 m head of water shall be maintained for one hour to allow initial
absorption of water. After that the test pressure shall be maintained for 15 min
and water added shall be measured. If water consumption in 15 min does not
exceed 0.1 l/m2 of wetted inner pipe surface and if there are no visible leakage
through joints, the pipeline shall be treated as passed.
(c) Infiltration Test
(i) the upper ends of the sewer and service connections shall be closed sufficiently
to prevent the entry of water and pumping of groundwater shall be discontinued
until the groundwater surface reaches its natural level before beginning the
infiltration test the dewatering system shall be stopped, but not be removed until
the infiltration test has been successfully completed or as otherwise permitted by
the Engineer the infiltration shall not exceed 6 litres per millimetre diameter per
ar
kilometre per day of the portion of sewer being tested, including the length of
service connection entering that section.
at
(ii) the total length tested in one section shall not exceed 400 m in length. This
-Q
length is dependent upon the type of deflection measuring equipment proposed
by the Contractor if flexible pipes are used.
(iii) no gravity pipeline will be accepted if the total infiltration exceeds the above
LL
mentioned limit and joints will not be accepted if during an internal inspection,
any infiltration is visible.
W
3 Prior to issue of a Certificate of Completion a CCTV survey shall, on the instruction of the
Engineer’s Representative, be carried out on a representative sample of no more than 12%
s
of the length of constructed pipelines. Should this survey indicate sections of pipeline which
en
fail to meet the specification requirements, the Contractor will be required to carry out
remedial works and undertake additional CCTV surveys at his expense.
m
4.6.3 Pressure Pipelines

e
1 The pipeline shall be tested between valve chambers or into sections not exceeding 400 m in
Si
length unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. The section tests shall be carried out as
follows:
(a) each pipeline or section thereof shall be filled with water and all air removed as far as
possible
(b) the pressure shall then be raised by pumping in water until the test pressure is
reached and shall be maintained at this level by further pumping until it is steady
(c) pumping shall then be stopped and the time taken for the observed pressure to fall by
1.0 m shall be recorded
(d) pumping shall then be resumed and the quantity of water pumped in order to restore
the test pressure shall be recorded
(e) if after three hours the test pressure has not fallen by 1.0 m, pumping shall be
resumed at that stage, the time being recorded as three hours
(f) the rates of loss shall then be calculated as the recorded quantity divided by the
recorded time
(g) the test pump and gauge shall be connected to the pipeline at a location other than
the highest point in the pipeline to facilitate release of air from the highest point
(h) the test pressure shall be such that the entire pipeline or section being tested is
subjected to 1.5 times the working pressure, 1.25 times the maximum surge pressure
or 800 kPa, whichever is the greatest
(i) the loss shall not exceed 0.02 litres per mm diameter per kilometre per 24 hours for
each 0.1 MPa of head applied
(j) if the pipeline fails to pass the test, the faults shall be located and repaired and the
pipeline retested until it passes the pressure test. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves
and joints shall be visually inspected during the tests.
2 When all sections have been joined together after completion of section testing, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer, the entire pipeline shall than be subjected to final test as
follows:
(a) all joints between individual test sections shall be left uncovered during this final test
(b) the final test shall be carried out using the same procedure as the section test
(c) in all cases of water tests, where the measured leakage rate exceeds the allowable,
the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make all necessary repairs and carryout
ar
additional testing until a satisfactory result is obtained
(d) before pressure testing is started the Contractor shall recheck pipes and valves for
at
cleanliness and shall recheck the operation of all valves. The "open" ends of the
-Q
pipeline or sections thereof) shall normally be stopped off by blank flanges or cap
ends additionally secured where necessary by temporary struts and wedges. All
anchor and thrust blocks shall have been completed and all pipe straps and other
devices intended to prevent the movement of pipes shall have been securely
LL
fastened
(e) since valves cannot be guaranteed to be perfectly drop-tight, testing against closed
W
valves which are connected to an existing system shall be prohibited; testing against
other closed valves (including air valves) not so connected, may be attempted if
desired, provided the valves are suitably anchored against thrust. No claims
s
whatsoever will be entertained on account of leaking valves, or any other difficulties

en
in closing off lengths of pipework for testing, which shall be entirely an obligation of
the Contractor
m
(f) on successful completion of the final test, the exposed joints shall be covered and the
trench backfilled as specified in the appropriate Clause 2.3 of this Section.
e
Si
3 The pipeline shall be tested for a period of at least 24 hours after which the test pressure
shall be restored by pumping and the quantity of water lost during the test measured.
4 Plastic irrigation drip pipe work shall be completely filled with water and visually inspected for
leakage. No section showing signs of leakage will be accepted. In addition, any length of pipe
which in the opinion of the Engineer or his designated representative is showing signs of
degradation through contact with sunlight shall be cut out and replaced.
4.6.4 Other Pressure Pipelines
1 Water Pipelines and Other Pressure Piping Carrying Liquids
(a) water pipelines and other pressure piping carrying surface water ground water and
treated sewage effluent excluding raw sewage pressure pipelines having socket and
spigot gasket joints shall be given a pressure and leakage test. Ductile iron or
PVC-U pipe shall be tested to AWWA C066 ; steel pipe to AWWA C066
(b) PVC-U treated sewage effluent pipework shall completely filled with water and
visually inspected for leakage. No section showing signs of leakage shall be
accepted.
2 Pressure Pipe, Flanged or Welded Joints
(a) PVC-U, steel, cast iron, ductile iron or other pipe material, with solvent welded,
welded, threaded, flanged, grooved end or flexible couplings and joints shall be
pressure tested. No leakage shall be permitted.
3 Pressure Air and Gas Piping:
(a) All piping carrying air or other gasses under pressure shall be given a pressure test.
No leakage is permitted. Low pressure air piping shall be tested pneumatically. Air
pressure of 140 kPa shall be applied to piping and fittings. High pressure air piping
shall be tested to 1400 kPa. There shall be no drop in pressure in a 24-hour period
(b) Leaks shall be located and repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Pressure
drops due to thermal contraction are acceptable if the pressure returns to the original
test pressure after 24 hours.
4 All piping, including valves, shall be field tested at the specified pressure with duration of two
hours minimum, for each pressure test. Piping conveying liquids between process tankage,
ar
not subject to pumping, shall be tested to the maximum possible pressure that can be
obtained under static conditions. Air piping shall be tested using air or nitrogen.
at
5 All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints shall be carefully inspected before
-Q
either being cast in concrete or during the open trench tests, or both. All defects discovered
shall be corrected by removal and replacement, as approved by the Engineer, and the work
then retested to demonstrate satisfactory performance.
LL
6 Where practical, no concrete encasement or backfilling of pipe joints will be permitted before
the satisfactory completion of the tests in any given section.
W
4.6.5 MDPE and HDPE Pressure Pipelines

s
1 Upon substantial completion of the pipeline or major sections, the line shall be cleaned and
en
hydrostatically tested to prove integrity of the pipeline section and to detect any leakage prior
to commissioning. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the Finnish Standard SFS
3115:E and the procedure described below. The Contractor shall supply all necessary fittings,
m
equipment and facilities required to undertake the testing.

e
2 The Contractor shall prepare a detailed Method Statement for the pressure test that shall
Si
follow the outline test procedure described below and be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
(a) Seal the pipeline. Fix all blank flanges. Remove air valves. Remove all on line
equipment that may be damaged by high pressure.
(b) Only test against blank flanges, do not attempt to test against closed valves.
(c) Cover the pipe with sufficient backfill to protect it from direct sunlight, leaving joints
exposed where practical.
(d) If backfilling is not practicable schedule the tests for early morning or evening.
(e) Fill the pipeline from the lowest point. Bleed the air from all high points and flange
points where it is possible and tighten once water begins to spill.
(f) When the line is full, close off the filling valve and check all flanges and the small
diameter test pipework for leaks.
(g) Phase1
Commence raising the pressure at the filling point to the operating pressure or a
pressure of 5 bar, whichever is higher. Hold this pressure for a period of 2 hours and
add water whenever the pressure drops by 0.2 bar in order to maintain a steady
pressure.
(h) Visually inspect the pipe length for leakage.

(i) Phase2
After two hours raise the pressure to 1.3 times the operating pressure or 6.5 bar,
whichever is higher, as quickly as is practical. Again maintain this pressure for two
hours by adding water whenever the pressure drops by 0.2 bar.
(j) Visually inspect the pipe length for leakage.
(k) Phase3
At the end of the second two hours release the pressure back down to the phase I
level i.e. the operating pressure or 5 bar, within a period of no more than 30 minutes
and as quickly as is practical, in a controlled manner.
(l) Phase3–Case1
If after one hour the pressure in the pipelines remains at or above the operational
pressure, the test is considered to be completed with the pipeline passing the
hydrostatic test.
(m) Phase3–Case2
If after one hour the pressure in the pipeline has fallen below the operational pressure,
ar
water shall be added to raise the pressure back to the operating pressure level, having
first noted the low pressure before adding any water.
at
(n) Phase3–Case2
Measure the added water by draining it off into a measuring cylinder. (i.e. reduce
-Q
pressure to the previously recorded low value and save the water bled off). The
measured quantity is then compared against the allowable quantity to determine if the
pipeline passes the hydrostatic pressure test.
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Figure 1 Graphical Representation of the Hydrostatic Test Process

Case 1 – Pipeline passes test without adding any make up water
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
Figure 2 Graphical Representation of the Hydrostatic Test Process

s
Case 2 – Water to be added to determine if the pipeline passes or fails

en
e m
Si
3 If during Phase 3 the pressure within the pipeline remains at or above the operational
pressure of the pipeline for a period of at least one hour, the pipeline is considered to have
passed the hydrostatic test.
4 If water needs to be added the pipeline is considered to have passed the hydrostatic test if
the quantity of water added in terms of litres of water per km of pipeline length per hour of the
phase 3 period is less than that given in the following expression and in Figure 3.
Q ≤ Di/50 – 1 (litres / km/ hour)
Q = added water in litres.
Di = internal diameter for the pipeline in mm.
Figure 3. Hydrostatic Test – Allowable Quantities of ‘Make Up’ Water
ar
at
-Q
LL
Hydrostatic Test
W
Pass
s
en
e m
Si
5 The pressure gauge shall be calibrated, certified and to accurate to 0.1 bar. It shall be
connected to the feed pipework.
6 The small diameter test pipework shall include a bleed valve at upper end of the pipeline and
at all high points together with feed pipework and valve at the lower end of the pipeline. The
feed pipework shall include a means of draining off the water in to a measuring cylinder that
shall have a capacity of at least 2 litres capacity, graduated to 100 mls.
7 The Contractor shall also have a thermometer for air and water temperature measurement.
8 Care should be taken not to over pressure the lower end of the system during testing.
Gauges should always be placed at the lower end of the length under test. As far as possible
the difference between the lower and upper end should be kept to one bar. It is recognized
that this may not always be possible when longer lengths are being tested, or where the
slope of the pipeline makes it impractical.
9 Where the phase II pressure is within the pressure rating of the pipe and test temperatures
O
are 30 C or less no adjustment of test pressure is necessary.
10 When ambient temperatures at the time of test are over 30ºC and test pressures are over the
pressure rating of the pipe then it may be necessary to modify the test pressure according to
the table below or as agreed with the pipe manufacturer.
Test Temp.
O 32 38 43 49 54 60
( C)
Multiplier 0.9 0.8 0.75 0.65 0.6 0.5
11 When undertaking the testing the Contractor shall also take in to account the following points.
(a) Care should be taken that any mechanical elements on the system are protected from
elevated pressure or completely removed from the pipeline.
(b) Do not subject the line to prolonged over-pressure. Always aim to complete the
procedure within one working day.
(c) During the summer make sure that the pipe is not subject to direct sunlight during
testing.
(d) During pressure testing pay full attention to the HSE aspects of the procedure. In
ar
particular keep the general public away from high pressure test areas.
at
(e) The test equipment must be capable of pressurizing the test length within a reasonable
time. If the procedure becomes protracted (beyond one working day) the test length
-Q
may be modified or reviewed. Extremely long test lengths may be subject to special
procedures.
4.7 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

LL
4.7.1 Manhole Covers and Frames

W
1 Manhole covers shall be made from ductile iron and comply with BS EN 124 which shall
include:
s
en
(a) Documentation confirming EN 29002 certification; or

(b) Documentation identified under Annex A to BS EN 124, concerning Independent Third
m
Party Inspection.
(c) Independent random sample testing at an approved testing facility to demonstrate full
e
compliance with all aspects of the code i.e. load testing and dimensional tolerances.
Si
(d) Production facilities shall be quality assessed in accordance with ISO 9000 or EN
29002 (BS 5750).
2 Where manholes are located in road carriageway, the covers shall be non-rock double
triangular Class D400 unless otherwise designated. The double triangular cover shall be
loosely coupled with stainless steel bolts. The frames for sewer and surface / ground water
manholes shall provide a minimum access opening of 750mm square. The frames for TSE
chambers shall provide a minimum access opening of 675mm square.
3 Manhole covers in paved areas, car parks, verges, roads within property boundaries, and
other areas accessible to pedestrians and light vehicles, shall be non-rock double triangular
Class B125 unless otherwise designated. The double triangular covers shall be loosely
coupled with stainless steel bolts plate. The frames for sewer and surface / ground water
manholes shall provide a minimum access opening of 750mm square. The frames for TSE
chambers shall provide a minimum access opening of 675mm square.
4 All castings shall be grit blasted and coated on all exposed faces with a zinc primer and coal-
tar epoxy paint finish in accordance with Part 8 of this Section which shall result in a smooth
coating, tough and tenacious when cold, and neither tacky nor brittle.
5 The covers and frames on foul sewers shall incorporate a removable self-sealing GRP or
similar corrosion resistant plate meeting the requirements of Part 7 of this Section. The plate
shall fit between the cover and the frame such that no surface area of the frame shall be
exposed to the atmosphere within the manhole. This shall be achieved by the inclusion of a
neoprene sealing ring or by a similar approved method. The plate shall be complete with a
lifting handle on the upper surface. The design of the frame and cover and plate shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer. A heavy grease seal is to be formed in all cases
between the cover and frame to prevent the ingress of sand.
6 Manhole covers for sewerage, surface water and treated sewage effluent systems shall have
the following words embossed in both English and Arabic, respectively:
(a) Sewerage: Drainage

Foul Sewer
(b) Surface water: Drainage
Surface Water
(c) Treated sewage effluent: Drainage
ar
Treated Sewage Effluent.
at
7 The size of lettering shall be approved by the Engineer.
-Q
8 The Contractor shall supply one pair of manhole keys or prying and lifting bar, as appropriate
with each 30 covers provided with a minimum of one tool for each type cover. Keys and
prying and lifting bars shall be of approved appropriate design to match the different cover
LL
configurations. Keyways in manhole covers shall be of the closed type.
9 Any manhole covers and frames on sewer or surface / ground water manholes that are
W
damaged or otherwise disturbed during the execution of the Works shall be replaced with
covers and frames with a minimum clear opening of 750mm square and incorporate a GRP
s
sealing plate. If the opening through the concrete cover slab is less than 750mm square, then
the concrete slab shall also be replaced.
en
10 Manhole covers for foul sewerage, surface water and treated sewerage effluent shall be
m
provided with inscriptions both in Arabic and English cast into the top surface of the cover.
The lettering shall conform to the details given elsewhere in these documents or to the
e
current details available from Drainage Affairs.

Si
4.1.2 Duct Covers and Frames
11 Duct covers and frames shall be of cast iron, galvanised mild steel or aluminium as shown on
the Drawings, and shall be waterproof, non-rocking and recessed for filling with concrete.
12 Cast iron duct covers and frames shall be obtained from an approved experienced
manufacturer, shall have machined seating faces and sloping mating faces to facilitate sliding
out of covers. The covers shall be capable of withstanding a 5 tonne wheel load when the
recesses are filled with Grade SRC 25 concrete, or such other load as may be shown
elsewhere in the Contract Document.
13 Galvanised steel covers and frames shall be obtained from an approved experienced
manufacturer. Covers shall have solid bases fitted with reinforcing rods and where detailed
on the drawings shall incorporate locking bolts. Covers shall be capable of withstanding a 5
tonne wheel load when filled with Grade SCR 25 concrete, or such other load as may be
shown elsewhere in the Contract Document. Covers shall generally be filled with concrete,
but finished with tiling to match the surrounding floor finish.
14 Aluminium duct covers and frames shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy Grade 6063-T6
or other such chemically resistant alloy which the manufacturer can demonstrate will
withstand aggressive atmospheres likely to be encountered. Covers shall have solid bases,
and shall incorporate reinforcing bars held in place in plastic clips. Those faces of the frame
which will come into contract with cement mortar or concrete shall be painted with two coats
of bituminous paint before installation of the frame.
15 All covers shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
16 Two complete sets of lifting keys including any necessary spanners shall be provided in each
room in which ducts covers are installed.
17 A heavy grease seal is to be formed between the cover and frame to prevent the ingress of
sand.
18 Multiple covers shall have removable intermediate beams.
4.7.2 Hinged Aluminium Access Covers
ar
1 Hinged aluminium access covers shall be fabricated from chequer or ribbed plate. The
2
covers shall be designed to carry a uniformly distributed load of 7.5 kN/m , and deflection
at
under this loading shall not exceed one percent of the span.
-Q
2 The frame shall be made from aluminium alloy complying with BS 1474 Grades 6063-T6 or
6082-T6.
LL
3 Where a cover is to be located within tiled areas, the frame shall be made from channel
sections. The outer vertical arm of the channel frame shall be set flush with the top of the
adjacent floor finishes. The inner vertical arm shall be shorter to allow the chequer plate to sit
W
the inner arm, while allowing the chequer plate cover to be flush with adjacent floor finishes.
The edges of the chequer plate cover shall be turned down into the channel section. Hinges
s
shall not stand proud of the cover and sealed lifting eyes shall be provided complete with two
en
lifting keys for each cover.
4 Where a cover is to be located on concrete upstands or flat concrete surfaces, the frame
m
shall be made from angle sections. The edges of the chequer plate cover shall be turned
down over the angle frame to provide a weatherproof cover. A lifting handle shall be provided
e
on the edge opposite the hinges and a hasp provided for locking the cover with a padlock.
Si
The frame shall be bolted down to the concrete below using a minimum of four 10 mm
diameter stainless steel acrylic resin anchors.
5 Fixings shall be of stainless steel. Gaskets shall be provided to isolate aluminium alloy from
other material.
4.8 FUTURE SEWER CONNECTION
4.8.1 General
1 All stub pipes and pipes built into manholes for future connections are to be sealed with an
approved stopper, obtained from the same manufacturer as the pipe.
2 Marker posts shall be provided at the ends of all pipes left for future connection except where
a single stub pipe is built into a manhole and are to be located as directed by the Engineer’s
Representative.
4.9 INSITU LINING OF EXISTING MANHOLES
4.9.1 General
1 Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall apply a GRP lining to all internal
surfaces of an existing manhole. The lining shall generally comply with the requirements of
Specification Clause 4.4.1.
2 The cover slab and manhole cover shall be removed. The slab shall be disposed to an
approved tip. The manhole cover and frame shall be thoroughly cleaned, treated with two
coats of bituminous paint and submitted to Drainage Affairs Store.
3 All surfaces to be lined shall be clean and dry, step irons and any unsound materials shall be
removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to the commencement of any lining or
sealing work.
4 For walls a preformed liner sized to fit in the existing manhole may be used. The joint
between the base of the liners and existing benching shall be sealed into a chase cut into the
ar
existing benching by a heavy duty epoxy resin based sealant approved by the Engineer,
which must be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The space
at
between the existing internal concrete wall of the manhole and the liner shall be filled using
an approved non-shrink cementitious grout. -Q
5 Alternatively an in situ wall lining may be used. The walls shall first be made good with 3:1
sand cement mortar and the surfaces to be lined shall be lightly abraded. An in-situ lining
6mm deep in compliance with Specification Clause 4.4.1.9 shall then be formed.
LL
6 On completion of the lining a new GRP ladder shall be installed in accordance with
W
Specification Clause 4.4.1.15, if shown on the Contract Drawings.
7 A new cover slab and manhole cover shall be provided. The cover slab shall comply with
s
Specification Clause 4.4.1.9. The manhole cover and frame shall comply with Specification
en
Clause 4.6.1.
8 The Contractor shall provide the Employer with a 7-year unconditional guarantee against
m
failure of all GRP linings whether caused by defective materials or workmanship. The
guarantee shall be valid from the date of completion of the installation and must be handed to
e
the Engineer before the issue of the Certificate of Completion.

Si
END OF PART
Part 05: Valves, Penstocks and Appurtenances
5 VALVES, PENSTOCKS AND APPURTENANCES ....................................... 3
5.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 3

5.1.1 Scope 3
5.1.2 References 3
5.1.3 Submittals 4
5.2 MATERIALS .................................................................................................. 6
5.3 SLUICE VALVES ........................................................................................... 7
5.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES ................................................................................... 8
5.5 REFLUX VALVES .......................................................................................... 9
ar
5.6 PLUG VALVES ............................................................................................ 10
at
5.7
-Q
SURFACE BOXES ...................................................................................... 10
5.8 VALVE OPERATING TEE KEYS................................................................. 11

LL
5.9 AIR VALVES ................................................................................................ 11

W
5.10 PRESSURE CONTROL AND RELIEF VALVES.......................................... 11

5.10.1 General 12
s
5.10.2 Pressure Reducing Valves 12

en
5.10.3 Pressure Relief Valves 12

5.10.4 Pressure Regulating and Sustaining Valves 12
m
5.11 PENSTOCKS ............................................................................................... 12

e
Si
5.11.1 General 12
5.11.2 Cast Iron Penstocks 12
5.11.3 Stainless Steel Penstock 14
5.11.4 Plastic Penstocks 14
5.11.5 Stoplogs 15
5.12 OPERATING DEVICES ............................................................................... 15
5.12.1 Lifts 15
5.12.2 Liftnut 16
5.12.3 Gear Lift 16
5.12.4 Handwheel 16
5.12.5 Stem Covers 16
5.12.6 Actuators 16
5.13 FLAP VALVES ............................................................................................. 17
5.13.1 Flap Valves (General Purpose) 17
5.13.2 Flap Valves for Sea Water Applications 17
5.14 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES .............................. 17

5.14.1 Ball Float Valves 17
5.14.2 Globe Valves 18
5.14.3 Quick Coupling Valves 18
5.14.4 Emitters 18
5.15 FITTINGS .................................................................................................... 18
5.15.2 Flanges, Gaskets, and Bolts 18
5.16 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS ....................................................................... 18
5.16.1 Grooved End Couplings 19
5.16.2 Flexible Couplings 19
5.17 FLOW CONTROL ........................................................................................ 19
5.17.1 Vortex Flow Control Devices 19
ar
5.18 INSTALLATION AND TESTING .................................................................. 20
at
5.18.2 Testing -Q 20
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
5 VALVES, PENSTOCKS AND APPURTENANCES

5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
1 This part includes the specification for the manufacture, testing and supply and installation of
valves, penstocks and appurtenances complete with frames, supports, anchor bolts, stems,
stem guides and other appurtenances.

This Section
Part 1, General
Part 4, Pipe Installation
ar
Part 6, Miscellaneous Metal Works
at
Section 1, General
-Q
Section 10, Instrumentation Control and Automation.
LL
3 All valves are to be fixed to the pipelines with adaptor flanges for easy removal or installation.
W
5.1.2 References
s

en
ANSI B18.2.1..............Square and Hex Bolts and Screws

ANSI B18.2.2..............Square and Hex Nuts
e m
ASTM B62 ..................Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

Si
ASTM D256 ................Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastics and Electrical
Insulating
Materials
ASTM D570 ................Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D638 ................Test for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D648 ................Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural
Load
ASTM D695 ................Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics
ASTM D696 ................Test Method for Coefficient Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics
ASTM D790 ................Standard Test Methods For Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D1784 ..............Specification for Rigid Polyvinylchloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Polyvinylchloride (CPVC) Compounds
ASTM D2000 ..............Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
AWWA C500 ..............Metal-Seated Gate Valves

AWWA C501 ..............Cast-Iron Sluice Gates

AWWA C507 ..............Ball Valves 150 mm Through 1200 mm
AWWA C510 ..............Double Check Valve Backflow-Prevention Assembly.
BS 4772......................Ductile iron pipes and fittings

BS 5163......................Predominantly key-operated cast iron gate valves for water works
purposes
BS 970 Part 1 .............General inspection and testing procedures and specific requirements
for carbon, carbon manganese alloy and stainless steel
BS 2872......................Copper and copper alloy forging stock and forgings
BS 2874......................Copper and copper alloy rods and sections (other than forging stock)
BS 3416......................Specification for bitumen based coatings for cold application
BS 4164......................Specification for coal-tar-based hot-applied coating materials
ar
BS EN 593..................Butterfly valves
at
BS EN 598 ------- Face-to-face valve dimensions
BS EN 1092................Flanges and their joints -Q
BS EN 1171................Cast iron gate valves
BS EN 1561................Flake graphite cast iron
LL
BS EN 1563................Founding. Spheroidal graphite cast iron

BS EN 1982................Copper alloy ingots and copper alloy and high conductivity copper
W
castings
BS EN 3196................Nuts, hexagonal, self-locking in heat resisting steel
s
BS EN 12334..............Cast iron check valves for general purposes

en
ISO 9000 ....................Quality Systems

e m
5.1.3 Submittals
Si
1 The Contractor shall obtain Engineer’s approval of submittals before placing order for the
following items.
2 Valves. Complete data for the supply and installation of all valves and appurtenances shall
be submitted as follows:
(a) Product data:

(i) for each type and model of valve, provide
 assembly instructions,
 preventative/corrective maintenance instructions
(ii) for each actuator, provide
 currents at the specified voltage corresponding to locked rotor,
 maximum seating torque,
 average running load, and speed and full information concerning actuator
dimensions and weights shall be provided
(iii) identification of valves and accessories by tag numbers, where applicable.
(b) The following detailed written procedures shall be submitted to supplement the above
data:
(i) installation procedures for fixing, supporting, and anchoring valves
(ii) test procedures for adjusting and testing valve assemblies.
3 Penstocks:
(a) Complete fabrication, assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with
detailed specifications and information covering performance and materials of
construction, power drive assembly, devices, and other accessories shall be
submitted as follows:
(i) Shop drawings, data and specifications for the equipment shall include, but not
limited to:
 anchor bolt placement in the concrete structure including projections from
concrete or other surfaces
 gate size, model numbers, opening sizes, elevations, locations, and
materials of construction
ar
 stem sizes including details of connections, thread directions, and stops, and
calculations for stem diameter and operators
at
 stem guide details and locations
 gear box types, model numbers, and ratios, including connections furnished
-Q
for each type
 wall thimbles
 motor data, including the motor manufacturer; minimum guaranteed
LL
efficiency and power factor at full load, 3/4 load, and 1/2 load; locked rotor
current in amps; full load current in amps; motor speed in rpm; and mounting
details
W
(ii) Factory Test Reports:

 Before shipment of any material specified herein, the Contractor shall submit
s
the results of all test reports for the approval of the Engineer.
en
4 Operations and Maintenance Manuals:

m
(a) The Contractor shall submit five copies of complete operation and maintenance
e
manuals for penstocks and valves written in English in accordance with Part 1 of this
Si
Section. Required operation and maintenance data shall include, but not limited to
(i) complete, detailed written operating instructions for each product or piece of
equipment. Manuals must be specific to the products supplied herein and the
application and operating conditions in Qatar. General manuals will not be
accepted
(ii) complete, detailed preventative maintenance instructions
(iii) a complete inventory of all parts and components
(iv) recommended spare parts lists and sources of supply for the parts
(v) all safety instructions relating to operation and maintenance procedures
(vi) name, address and phone number of manufacturer, manufacturer's authorised
service representative
(vii) troubleshooting instructions.
1 Valves, penstocks and appurtenances shall be supplied by approved manufacturers as

designated in the Project Specification. Production facilities shall be quality assessed in
accordance with ISO 9000 or equivalent.
1 Packaged items shall be stored in their original packing and wrappers until ready for
inspection by the Engineer. After inspection, all packaged items shall be repacked and
rewrapped such that the items are sealed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and stored until
ready for use or installation.
2 Valves and appurtenances shall be stored off the ground, protected from dirt and moisture,
and protected from foreign material entering the ends.
3 All equipment shall be stored and handled in such a manner to protect equipment, finishes,
and coatings, both internal and external.
ar
4 During storage, gates for penstocks shall be placed in a position to support and prevent
warping of gates and stems.
at
5.2 MATERIALS
-Q
1 Cast iron shall conform to BS EN 1561 minimum Grade 250 unless otherwise specified.
LL
2 Ductile iron shall conform to BS EN 1563 unless otherwise specified.

W
3 Aluminium bronze shall conform to BS 2872 Grade CA 104
4 Bronze shall conform to ASTM B62 Grade 1, except that the maximum zinc allowance shall
s
be seven percent and the maximum aluminium allowance be two percent, unless otherwise
en
specified.
m
5 Gun metal shall conform to BS EN 1982 Grade LG2

e
6 Stainless steel shall conform to BS 970 Grade 316 S 31 unless otherwise specified.
Si
7 Duplex stainless steel shall conform to BS EN 1.4507 unless otherwise specified.
8 Manganese steel shall conform to BS 970 Pt 1 Grade ISO M19.
9 Anchor bolts, assembly bolts, screws, nuts, and washers, including anchor bolts used in the
installation and assembly of each unit shall be stainless steel unless otherwise specified, and
of ample size and strength to safely withstand forces created by operation of the unit while
subject to the hydrostatic heads described herein. The quantity and size of fasteners shall be
as recommended by manufacturer, and as approved by Engineer. All bolt heads and nuts
shall be hexagonal. Anchor bolts shall be furnished with two nuts each to facilitate
installation and alignment.
10 All hand wheels, headstocks, foot brackets, guide brackets and thrust tubes shall be cast
iron. All other materials for valves, penstocks and appurtenances shall be as specified for
each item.
11 Unless otherwise stated Cast iron valves, penstocks and appurtenances shall be prepared
and painted in accordance with part 8 of this Section.
5.3 SLUICE VALVES

1 These specifications are applicable to all sizes of sluice valves larger than 80 mm diameter.
Sluice valves shall be of the following types.
(a) Potable and treated sewage effluent - 80mm diameter up to and including 300mm
diameter, to BS 5163 with resilient seating.
(b) All other uses other than (a) above, 80mm diameter up to and including 1,000mm
diameter to BS EN 1171metal seated.
2 Valves shall be of the double flanged cast iron wedge-gate type unless otherwise stated.
Valves shall be cast iron body with renewable gun metal faces on body and wedge and bolt-
on cast iron bonnet. All exposed valves shall be of the rising stem type unless otherwise
specified or shown on the Contract Drawing. Rising stem valves shall also incorporate a
combined yoke. Valves shall close clockwise.
3 Valves pressure ratings shall equal the class of pipe unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
ar
4 Valve stems shall be of stainless steel SS316 S31, machined all over, with a machine cut
robust trapezoidal or square form thread, operating in gunmetal.
at
5
-Q
Stem seals on valves of 350mm diameter and above shall be of the stuffing box and gland
form arranged for easy replacement of packing and seal and shall be accessible for
maintenance without removal of the valve from service. Stem seals on valves below 350mm
diameter may be stuffing box and gland or 'O' ring. If 'O' ring seals are provided they shall be
LL
arranged such that they can be replaced without removal of the valve from service. If 'O' ring
stem seals are provided, the Contractor shall provide with the valve, two replacement sets of
rings labelled with the project number, manufacturer, valve model reference and size of
W
valve.
s
6 Valves shall be provided with suitable handwheels as follows:

en
(a) diameter shall be adequate for the duty required

(b) gearing shall be supplied where necessary to ensure that the required operating force
m
applied by hand to the rim of the wheel does not exceed 250N (25Kgf)
e
(c) Handwheels shall have smooth rims and the direction of closing, which shall be
Si
clockwise, shall be cast on them.
7 The following shall apply to spindles :
(a) where possible and providing the valve is not subject to submergence, spindles shall
be of the non-rising type and a cast iron bridle piece, or similar, shall be incorporated
on valves of the rising spindle type for this purpose.
(b) for valves of 300mm bore and above, and for all motorised/actuated valves spindles
shall be of the rising type. Thrust tubes shall be provided between the valve and
headstock in order to absorb the thrust in both direction of operation. Thrust tubes
shall incorporate all necessary fixings brackets and spindle guide plates. Headstocks
shall incorporate a valve position indicator.
(c) where rising stem valves are subject to submergence the extension spindle shall also
be of the rising type with the threaded portion positioned above top water level.
(d) extended spindle installations shall include all necessary brackets, intermediate
supports etc.
(e) where extended spindles require to be operated at open flooring level, spindle guides
or guide brackets shall be provided close to flooring level.
(f) all spindles shall be of stainless steel Grade 316S31 and shall be compliant with the
requirements for valve stems.
8 Extension spindle couplings shall be of the muff type and shall be drilled with a nut and bolt
for securing the spindle to the valve stem, which will likewise be drilled to accept the bolt.
9 Vandal and weatherproof clear polycarbonate tube covers shall be securely fitted to protect
the threads of rising stems and spindles. Tubes shall be clearly and permanently engraved
to indicate the position of the valve.
10 Where valves are required to be operated by tee keys, spindle caps shall be fitted. The caps
shall be drilled and each provided with nut and bolt for securing to the spindle which shall
likewise be drilled to accept the bolt. Where caps are fitted they shall be supplied complete
with operating tee key. The extended spindle shall be such that the tee key will be operated
at 0.9 to 1.2 m above floor level.
11 Where sluice valves above 350 mm bore are mounted with the spindle in the horizontal
plane, valve bodies shall be fitted with renewable gunmetal machined gate slides and the
gates with renewable hard bronze shoes accurately machined to reduce sliding fraction.
ar
12 All sluice valves above 500 mm bore (300 mm if power actuated) shall be provided with
at
jacking screws. Valves above 350 mm bore where mounted in a horizontal pipeline shall be
provided with feet. -Q
5.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES
LL
1 Butterfly valves shall comply with BS EN 593 and be of the double flanged, non-wafer,
double eccentric (Offset) type. The valves shall be designed such that the body and disc seat
rings can be easily replaced.
W
2 Valves shall be suitably designed to protect the disc edge from the effects of corrosion and
s
erosion.
en
3 The valve body ends shall be double flanged and the flange dimensions shall comply with the
relevant requirements of BS EN 1092. The body shall be manufactured from close grained
m
cast iron lined with rubber unless otherwise specified. The body parts shall be circular and
the diameter not less than that of the nominal pipe bore. The valve body shall be provided
e
with suitable lifting lugs.

Si
4 The disc shall be designed to withstand the maximum pressure differential across the valve
in either direction of flow. The disc shall be contoured to ensure the lowest possible
resistance to flow and shall be suitable for throttling operation. Disc material shall be duplex
stainless steel.
5 The shaft shall be designed to withstand the maximum torque that will be imposed by the
operator. It may be in one piece or attached as two stub ends on opposite sides of the disc.
The stub end shall be of polygon profile type conforming to P3G or P4C. The means of
attachment of the shaft to the disc shall be by using fixings in a homogeneous corrosion-
resistant material of a pattern which precludes the assembly becoming loose in operational
service. Grub screws, pins (parallel or taper) or clamps shall not be acceptable. The shaft
material shall be stainless steel SS316 S31. Self-lubricating PTFE faced bearings with ‘O’
ring seals shall be provided.
6 The body seat shall be stainless steel SS316 S31 and the disc seat shall be one piece
moulded nitrile rubber. They shall be designed to be drop tight in either direction at
maximum differential pressure.
7 Valves shall be provided with suitable stops to prevent movement of the shaft beyond the
limits corresponding to fully open and fully closed position of the disc.
8 A suitable external locking device shall be provided on the non-drive shaft end, to enable the
geared unit to be removed with the valve remaining in service in the open or closed position.
9 Fasteners like nuts, bolts and washers of stainless steel shall be provided.
10 Unless otherwise specified each valve shall be provided with a suitable handwheel of
adequate diameter for the duty required and gearing shall be supplied where necessary to
ensure that the required operating force applied by hand to the rim of the wheel does not
exceed 25 kgf.
11 Extension spindles, headstocks and foot brackets shall be provided where specified.
Headstocks shall incorporate a valve position indicator.
12 The valve shall be closed by clockwise movement of an actuator or handwheel. Direction

arrows clearly indicating 'open' and 'closed' positions shall be provided on the actuator or cast
on the handwheel.
13 Valves shall be provided with a position indicator to show the positions of the disc, mounted
on the driven shaft end.
ar
14 All Valves above 350 mm diameter shall be provided with lifting lugs or eye-bolts
at
5.5 REFLUX VALVES
-Q
1 Unless otherwise specified Reflux valves shall be swing type, double flanged cast iron
conforming to BS EN 12334. Flange dimensions shall comply with the relevant requirements
LL
on BS EN 1092 PN16. Reflux valve shall have face-to-face dimensions in accordance with
BS EN 558.
W
2 The valves shall be of the quick acting single door type designed to minimise slam on closure
by means of heavy gunmetal-faced doors weighted as necessary. The valves shall be fitted
s
with renewable gunmetal door sealing faces which shall be positively fixed. The door hinge
en
pin/shaft shall extend through a sealing gland on the side of the body and be fitted with an
external lever to permit back flushing.
m
3 Glands shall be of the stuffing-box type with the exception that for valves below 450 mm bore
they shall be of the ‘O’ ring type.
e
Si
4 The valve door shall be weighted to suit the application and the lever shall be of the heavy
duty type designed for the additional of external weights should these be required at some
future date.
5 Where there is a likelihood of surge pressures being generated reflux valves shall be of the
low loss non-slam wafer type. They shall feature a spring action giving drip tight shut-off.
The movement of the sealing plate shall not lead to scuffing of the seat material.
6 All reflux valves shall be suitable for operating in the horizontal plane unless otherwise
specified.
7 Cover plates shall be of sufficient size to allow easy hand access for cleaning and service
and shall be supplied complete with tapped bosses fitted with air release cocks.
8 Valves above 350 mm bore shall be provided with feet.
9 The design of the valve body shall be such that there is adequate clearance around and at
the back of the door to minimise jamming by rags and debris. Stops shall be provided to limit
the back lift of the door and shall be positioned to prevent fouling.
10 The hinge pin/shaft shall be stainless steel SS316 S31 and preferably square in section to
ensure positive location of the door. If circular shafts are utilised the back flushing lever shall
be located on a squared section, the diagonal dimensions of which shall be equivalent to the
full diameter of the shaft. Both door and lever shall be positively and securely fixed to the
hinge pin/shaft. Grub screws, pins (parallel to taper) or clamps will not be acceptable. All
internal fixing devices shall be of stainless steel SS316 S31.
11 Reflux valves fitted to the delivery side of pumps shall be fitted with balance weights to
minimise slam. If specified, they shall be provided with a totally enclosed proximity switch
operated by an external cam fitted to the extended spindle. The proximity switch shall be of
the metal clad type with sealed actuator and cable entry. Cam operated micro-switches will
not be acceptable.
5.6 PLUG VALVES

1 Plug valves shall be eccentric and equipped with resilient faced plugs and be of non-
lubricated type capable of handling abrasive and raw sewage. The plug valves shall have
PN 16 flanged ends. Valves shall be furnished with manual operators as a unit. Each valve
plug shall rotate 90 degrees from the fully open to the tightly shut position and shall seat at an
ar
angle of 90 degrees from the pipe axis in which the valve is installed.
at
2 Valves shall be satisfactory for applications involving throttling service and for frequent
-Q
operation after long periods of inactivity. Valves with operators shall be suitable for operation
with flow in either direction.
3 Valves shall be non-lubricated, with non-shock pressure differential acting in either direction;
LL
at 175 kPa differential across the valve, the valve will provide drip-tight shut-off. Valves
75 mm diameter and above shall have bolted bonnet design. Bodies shall be of high carbon
cast iron or nickel iron having 1 % to 1.5 % nickel content. Valves shall have raised seats
W
and all surfaces in contact with the plug face shall have 90 % pure nickel or coating. Valves
shall have an average tensile strength of 240 MPa. Port areas of valves sizes greater than
s
100 mm shall be at least 75 % of full pipe area. Flanged valves shall be faced and drilled
en
minimum PN 16 standard and shall have face-to-face dimensions of standard sluice valves.
Valves shall have balanced plugs to assure low torque and drip-tight shut-off.
m
4 Valves shall be equipped with resilient plug facing to provide drip-tight shut-off without use of
sealing lubricants. Even if small solids are trapped between the plug and seat, the resilient
e
facing shall provide tight shut-off and prevent seat damage. Resilient plug facings shall be
Si
neoprene, ethylene propylene terpolymer, or other suitable materials capable of handling

abrasives and raw sewage.
5 Valves shall have heavy-duty upper and lower guide bearings capable of resisting corrosion
and lubricated by the liquid being handled.
6 Valves shall be actuated by means of lever for valves under 80 mm in size and by enclosed
gear and handwheel operator for valves 100 mm and longer. All valves shall be supplied with
operators which required less than 10 N/m torque for operation. Chain wheels with guides
shall be furnished on all valves located 2 m or more above floor levels with stainless steel.
7 Valves operating devices shall be as specified in Clause 5.12 herein.
5.7 SURFACE BOXES

1 Surface boxes and covers shall be adjustable cast iron of the slip type and fitted to the sizes
and depths of valves as shown on the Drawings. Covers and frames shall be heavy duty and
be suitable for wheel loads up to 11.43 tonnes.
2 Surface boxes shall be coated by dipping or other equivalent means using a hot applied coal
tar based material complying with BS 4164 or cold applied bitumen material complying with
BS 3416. No coating shall be applied to any casting until its surfaces are clean dry and free
from rust oil and deleterious material.
5.8 VALVE OPERATING TEE KEYS

1 Valve operating keys shall have a 50mm square socket. The length of the key shall enable
the valve to be operated with hands at waist height. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract
Documents one tee key per ten valves that are to be tee key operated, shall be provided for
each site.
5.9 AIR VALVES

1 Air and gas relief valves shall be of the double orifice pattern with grey or ductile cast iron
bodies. The inlet flange shall be faced and drilled in accordance with BS EN 1092 PN16. Air
valves for TSE or potable water shall be of the water type. Air valves for all other waste
water work shall be of the sewage type.
ar
2 The valve shall be adequately sized for the release of gas from the pipeline (or other
at
container) without restriction of rate of filling or flow due to back pressure and also to allow
admission of air during pipeline emptying at a rate sufficient to prevent excessive depression
-Q
of pressure in the pipe.
3 Valves shall be designed to prevent the operating elements being in contact with the pipeline
liquid by approved means such as the provision of an auxiliary float and chamber sufficiently
LL
large to isolate the orifice valves and seats throughout the rated operational range.
W
4 In applications where the pipeline characteristics may lead to liquid column separation with
consequent possibility of surge a vented non-return valve shall be provided which allows air
to enter freely on separation but controls explosion of air/gas as the liquid column re-joins.
s
en
5 In applications where the hydraulic conditions are such that pressures fall below atmospheric
pressure during normal operation and where air inflow at that time could induce surge
conditions, an air inflow check valve shall be incorporated.
e m
6 All air and gas relief valves and associated isolating valves shall be works tested and capable
of withstanding the same test pressures as the pipeline or vessel on which they operate.
Si
7 Air valves and operating linkages that are not made stainless steel shall be pure epoxy resin
coated in accordance with Part 8 of this Section.
8 Air valves shall be vented wherever possible directly into the wet well. In cases where this is
not possible the Contractor shall provide suitable odour removal for the air expelled from the
valve.
9 Where air may be drawn into the valve that contains dust, sand etc. means shall be provided
for trapping/filtering this.
10 Air valves shall be installed in such a manner that routine maintenance can be carried out.
11 Air valves shall be fitted with an isolating sluice valves and gearing shall be provided where
necessary to facilitate operation.
5.10 PRESSURE CONTROL AND RELIEF VALVES

5.10.1 General
1 The valve body shall be of cast iron conforming to BS EN 1561 with flanges conforming to
BS EN 1092 PN16 or BS 10. The valve shall be extra heavy construction throughout. The
valve interior trim shall be bronze as well as the main valve operation. All working parts shall
be easily removed from the valve body for ease of maintenance. All controls and piping shall
be of non-corrosive construction.
5.10.2 Pressure Reducing Valves
1 Pressure reducing valves shall maintain any desired downstream-delivery pressure for which
the reducing pilot valve is adjusted provided the upstream head does not drop below a
determined head. During low flow conditions, a resilient rubber valve seat shall ensure drop
tight sealing. The valve shall be completely piped ready for installation.
5.10.3 Pressure Relief Valves
1 Pressure relief valves shall maintain constant upstream pressure by bypassing or relieving
excess pressure, and shall maintain close pressure limits without causing surges. The main
ar
valve shall be a hydraulically operated, diaphragm-actuated, globe or angle pattern valve. It
shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc. The downstream pressure setting shall be
at
adjusted by compression of the spring via the adjusted screw.
-Q
5.10.4 Pressure Regulating and Sustaining Valves
1 Pressure sustaining valves shall open and close in modulating action as required to maintain
LL
constant system pressure. On pressure reversal valve shall close tightly. Operation shall be
completely automatic with only one adjustment required to change the pressure setting.
Adjustable pressure range from 1.0 bar to 8.5 bar. The valve shall be "Y" pattern globe
W
diaphragm actuated with pilot control. The diaphragm shall be made of reinforced neoprene
and the pilot shall be bronze and all tubing copper.
s
en
5.11 PENSTOCKS
5.11.1 General
e m
1 Each item of equipment shall be furnished and installed complete with all supports, anchor
bolts, stems, stem guides, and appurtenances ready for operation. All mechanisms and parts
Si
shall be amply proportioned for the stresses which may occur during operation or for any
other stresses which may occur during fabrication and erection. Individual parts furnished
which are alike in all units shall be alike in workmanship, design, and materials and shall be
interchangeable. Penstock in sewage pumping stations shall be stainless steel/cast iron with
gun metal seating suitable for corrosive environment.
5.11.2 Cast Iron Penstocks
1 Penstocks shall be suitable for their application, and shall be installed and positioned in such
a manner as to allow ease of operation and maintenance.
2 Penstocks shall carry identification marks and brass name plates in accordance with BS EN
12334, which identify the penstock number and function.
3 Penstocks shall be clockwise closing.
4 Penstocks shall be watertight under the conditions stated for head and direction of flow.
5 All materials used in manufacture of the penstocks shall conform to the following minimum
standards unless otherwise specified:
Cast Iron BS EN 1561 Grade 250

Gunmetal BS 1400 Grade LG2
Aluminium Bronze BS 2872 Grade CA104
Stainless Steel BS 970 Pt. 1 Grade 316 S31
High Tensile Brass BS 2874 Grade CZ114
(Manganese Bronze)
Manganese Steel BS 970 Pt. 1 Grade ISOM19
Phosphor Bronze BS 2574 Grade P13
6 Fixing nuts and bolts supplied by the manufacturer shall be of stainless steel.
7 Each penstock shall be provided with a suitable handwheel of adequate diameter for the duty
required. Gearing shall be supplied where necessary:
(a) to ensure that the required operating force applied by hand to the rim of the wheel
does not exceed 250N (25Kgf)
(b) if the handwheel cannot be readily accessed, extension spindles, headstocks and foot
brackets shall be provided where specified
(c) where possible, the extension spindle shall be of the rising type with the threaded
ar
portion position above top water level
at
(d) headstocks for non-rising spindle installations shall incorporate a position indicator.
-Q
8 Handwheels shall have smooth rims and the direction of closing which shall be clockwise
shall be cast on them. Vandal and weather proof clear polycarbonate tube covers shall be
LL
securely fitted to protect the threads of rising stems and spindles. Tubes shall be clearly and
permanently engraved to indicate the position of the valve.
W
9 The frames and doors of cast iron penstocks shall be made from close grained grey iron.
The penstocks shall be designed so as to ensure tight closure while maintaining freedom of
door movement during operation and minimising sliding wear of the sealing faces. They shall
s
incorporate adjustable wedges or swivelling cams and actuating pegs manufactured from a
en
non-corrodible material.
m
10 Headstocks and foot brackets shall be provided for non-rising spindle penstocks where the
latter are specifically called for. Guide brackets shall however be provided where necessary.
e
Non-rising spindles shall be fitted with thrust collars and arranged so as to transmit the thrust
Si
arising due to the operation of the penstock directly to the penstock frame. Where
headstocks are required on non-rising spindle installations they shall incorporate a penstock
position indicator.
11 Penstock spindles shall be of forged stainless steel SS316 S31 , machined all over, with a
machine cut robust trapezoidal or square form thread, operating in a gunmetal nut.
12 Extension spindles shall be of stainless steel SS316 S31and shall be compliant with the
requirements for penstock spindles. Extension spindle couplings shall be of the muff type
and shall be drilled and provided with a nut and bolt for securing the spindle to the penstock
spindle, which shall likewise be drilled to accept the bolt.
13 Extended spindle installations of the rising type shall be provided for valves of 300 mm bore
and above, and for all motorised/actuated penstocks. These shall be of stainless or
manganese steel or manganese bronze. Thrust tubes shall be provided between the
penstock from and headstock in order to absorb the thrust in both directions of operation.
Thrust tubes shall incorporate all necessary fixing brackets and spindle guide plates. All
handwheels, headstocks, foot brackets and guide brackets shall be of cast iron.
14 Where penstocks are required to be operated by tee keys, spindle caps shall be fitted. The
caps shall be drilled and each provided with nut and bolt for securing to the spindle which
shall likewise be drilled to accept the bolt. Where caps are fitted they shall be supplied
complete with operating tee key. The extended spindle shall be such that the tee key will be
operated at 0.9-1.2 metres above floor level.
15 Where penstocks are provided with greasing nipples, these shall be fitted with extension
tubes to facilitate lubrication from a nearby walkway or other readily accessible location.
16 Non-ferrous metal sealing faces shall comprise accurately machined gunmetal or bronze
strips bedded and fixed to machined recesses in the frame and door. The strips shall be
secured by non-corrodible countersunk screws. The faces of the strips shall then be brought
together in the operation position and hand scraped to a watertight finish.
17 Handwheels, headstocks, foot brackets and thrust tubes shall be of cast iron.
18 Cast iron penstocks and headstocks shall be coal tar epoxy coated in accordance with Part 8
of this Section.
ar
5.11.3 Stainless Steel Penstock
at
1 Where indicated on the drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, penstocks for use
in aggressive environments shall be manufactured from corrosion resistant materials as
-Q
follows:
(a) Metal parts exposed to the atmosphere shall be manufactured from stainless steel to
LL
BS 970 Part 1, Grade 316 S31.

(b) The frame shall be fixed to the wall using nuts and bolts Grade 316 S31 stainless
W
steel.
(c) The door of the penstock shall be manufactured from corrosion resistant plastic or
stainless steel (Grade 316 S31). Plastic shall also be totally resistant to ultra-violet
s
light. Asbestos shall not be used in any filling materials within plastic gates.
en
(d) The seals used on corrosion resistant penstocks shall be suitable for the medium in
which the penstock is immersed. Flexible rubber seals shall not be used on penstocks
m
immersed in raw sewage for example, where sharp objects and grit may destroy the
seal at the high velocities experienced when opening and closing the doors.
e
Si
2 All other requirements shall be as specified in Clause 5.11.2 herein.
5.11.4 Plastic Penstocks
1 Plastic penstocks shall be of the flush invert type and the underside sealing face shall consist
of high resilient material securely bonded into a channel or similar section forming the invert
of the frame into which the bottom of the door shall effect a watertight seal.
2 The door of plastic penstocks shall be made from sheets of approved rigid cellular polymer
sandwiched between sheets of approved rigid compressed composite plastics. The linear
PVC or GRP materials shall be used. The doors thus formed shall have sufficient strength to
withstand the required working pressure without deflection or distortion that would affect the
operation of water-tightness of the penstock. Totally enclosed steel matrix shall be
incorporated in the door construction to ensure adequate rigidity.
3 The sealing faces and side guides shall be EPDM having a high resistance to sliding wear
and shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The sealing strips shall be securely fixed to the
inner faces of the frames and adjusting devices or other means of ensuring freedom of
movement without loss of seal shall be provided. The adjusting devices and fasteners shall
be of stainless steel conforming to BS 970 Part 1 Grade SS 316 S31.
4 Spindle operating nuts shall be of gunmetal or manufactured from an approved ultra-high

molecular weight polyethylene material. The operating nuts for the spindle retaining blocks
shall be fixed in a visible position inside a separate gate lifting bracket bolted on to the top of
the door with stainless steel fasteners. The operating nut or spindle retaining block shall not
be contained within the door.
5 All plastic materials shall be non-toxic ultraviolet stabilised and shall have fire resistance as
specified in BS 475 and be to Class P and Class I of Part 5 and 7 thereof respectively.
6 All other requirements shall be as specified in Clause 5.1.3 Clause 5.11.2 herein.
7 Plastic penstocks shall only be used when indicated in the Contract Documents and
5.11.5 Stoplogs
1 Stoplogs shall be fabricated from reinforced composite plastic material which is non-toxic and
stabilised against ultraviolet light. Asbestos shall not be used in the manufacture of the stop-
logs.
ar
2 Plastic logs of 300 mm and 400 mm depths shall be furnished to provide closure of stoplog
at
openings. Full depth gates shall not be acceptable.
-Q
3 Each log shall be provided with a stainless steel eye bolt at each end which fits into a recess
in the under surface of the next log. Two lifting poles fitted with hooked ends for engaging
the eye bolts shall be furnished for each facility and shall be mounted locally on a handrail
LL
supported pole rack. Poles and racks shall be constructed of aluminium and bolts of
stainless steel.
W
4 Stoplogs shall provide a high degree of sealing with a leakage rate of less than 0.04 l/sqm of
seating perimeter. Stoplog frame shall be for insertion in a wall and invert recess.
s
en
5 Anchor bolts shall be stainless steel.
6 Frames shall be manufactured from stainless steel BS 970 or BS 1449 Grade 316. All frames
m
shall be suitably reinforced and include corner gussets where necessary. All fasteners shall
be stainless steel.
e
Si
7 Frames shall be fitted with seals which are molecularly incompatible with the closure
material. Where necessary, the seals shall be fixed with corrosion resistant retaining strips
and stainless steel fasteners.
5.12 OPERATING DEVICES
5.12.1 Lifts
1 Lifts shall be designed to operate the gate of the specified head with a maximum of 25 kg
force applied to the device. The lift shall be a liftnut for tee key operation or gear/handwheel
lift as designated.
5.12.2 Liftnut
1 The liftnut shall be hexagonal, gunmetal and internally threaded to fit the stem. The housing
shall be cast iron and suitable for mounting in the head angle, gate frame extension or wall
mounted bracket. The liftnut shall be flanged to maintain position in the housing and to
accommodate the thrust developed during gate operation. Each lift shall be furnished with a
bronze stop nut. The nut lift shall accept a T-bar operator or handwheel. Suitable T-bar
operators shall be furnished.
5.12.3 Gear Lift
1 The gear lift mechanism if required shall be of the crank operated type with either a single or
double gear ratio, depending on the lift load. Each type shall have a cast bronze liftnut
threaded to fit the operating stem. Ball thrust bearings shall be provided above and below
the flange on the liftnut to take the load developed in opening and closing the gate. Gears
shall be of cast iron or steel, accurately machined with cut teeth, and smooth running with
suitable shafts running in gunmetal sleeve bearings or roller bearings of ample size. All
geared lifts shall be suitable for auxiliary motor operation. All gears and bearings shall be
enclosed in a cast iron housing. Fittings shall be provided so that all gears and bearings can
ar
be periodically lubricated. The removable cast iron crank shall be fitted with a rotating
handle. The lift mechanism shall be supplied with a cast iron pedestal, machined and drilled
at
to receive the gear housing and suitable for bolting to the thrust tubes, operating floor or wall
bracket. The maximum crank radius shall be 400 mm. The direction of rotation to open the
-Q
gate shall be indicated on the lift mechanism. A cast iron stop nut shall be provided for each
lift. All exposed cast iron shall be coated according to Part 8 of this section.
LL
5.12.4 Handwheel
1 The housing shall be cast iron and shall be suitable for mounting on the head angle or pipe
W
frame extension. The lift nut shall be flanged to maintain position in the housing and to
accommodate maximum thrust developed during gate or valve operation. The lift nut shall
s
be bronze and internally threaded to mate the stem. Each lift shall be furnished with a bronze
stop nut. The steel or cast iron handwheel shall have a solid rim and shall be smooth and
en
free of sharp edges and an arrow and the work "OPEN" shall be cast in the rim or attached to
the handwheel. Handwheels generally shall be positioned on a headstock 750 mm above
m
operating level.
e
5.12.5 Stem Covers

Si
1 Stem covers shall be provided on all valves or gates with rising stems. Stem covers shall be
clear butyrate with Mylar decals indicating open and close gate position and of sufficient
length to totally enclose the stem when the gate is fully open. The top shall be closed and
the bottom shall screw into a cast iron housing mounted on top of the gate operator. The
inside of this housing shall be bored to the exact diameter of the stem cover to assure
accurate alignment of the cover.
5.12.6 Actuators
1 Actuators are specified in Section 21.

5.13 FLAP VALVES
5.13.1 Flap Valves (General Purpose)
1 The seat shall be one-piece cast iron conforming to BS EN 1561 Grade 250 with a raised
section around the perimeter of the waterway opening to provide the seat. The raised
section shall provide a seating plane diverging, top to bottom, from the plane of the mounting
flange to assist in positive closure of the cover. The seat shall be shaped to provide two
bosses extending above the top of the waterway opening for mounting the top pivot lugs.
Pivot lug bosses shall be drilled and tapped for mounting studs. The flap shall be designed
to be either butted to the face of a wall or to the outlet flange of a discharge pipe. The flaps
shall be operable at a head of 10 m.
2 The cover shall be one-piece cast iron conforming to BS EN 1561 Grade 250 with
necessary reinforcing ribs, with a lifting eye for manual operation, and with bosses to provide
a pivot point connection with the links. Bosses shall be designed to place the hinge bolts in
double shear when gate is assembled.
3 Each pivot lug shall be one-piece cast iron. Lugs shall have double bosses to place the top
ar
hinge bolts in double shear when they are assembled through the links. The lugs shall be
adjustable in the horizontal plane without removal of the cover from the gate links. The
at
adjustment shall allow the top pivots to be moved toward the gate seat for reduced sensitivity
-Q
of the cover, or moved away from the gate seat to provide opening with a minimum
differential head. Two studs shall be used to connect each pivot to the gate seat.
4 The links connecting the cover and pivot lugs shall be one-piece heavy duty cast iron. Each
LL
link shall be provided with bronze bushings at each pivot point. The bottom of the links shall
be provided with an adjusting screw to properly align seating faces on the cover with respect
to the seat. The links shall be designed to limit the double hinge action, preventing the cover
W
from rotating sufficiently to become wedged in the open position.

s
5 Cast iron work shall be coated before delivery with a bituminous compound as specified in
en
Clause 8.5.16.2 of QCS.
5.13.2 Flap Valves for Sea Water Applications

m
1 Flap valves frames including fixings for sea water and other aggressive applications shall be
e
of stainless steel conforming to BS 970 Part 1. Sealing faces shall be phosphor bronze
Si
conforming to BS 2874.
2 Flap valves manufactured from corrosion resistant materials will also be acceptable for
general purpose applications.
3 Flap valves above 1500 mm square shall be of the double door type.
4 Doors shall be of reinforced natural rubber compound of sufficient flexibility to maintain an

efficient seal under minimal seating head conditions.
5 Door hinges shall be continuous across the full width of the door and manufactured from
homogeneous polypropylenes, polyurethane or similar non-ageing material.
5.14 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
5.14.1 Ball Float Valves
1 Ball float valves shall comply with BS 1212. Flanges shall conform to BS EN 1092.
2 PVC ball valves 50 mm and smaller shall be of the true union socket weld type, and valves
75 mm and larger shall be of the flanged type. Valves shall be rated at 1000 kPa at 50 °C
unless otherwise specified.
3 Metal ball valves 60 mm and larger shall have brass balls with carbon steel bodies, and
valves 50 mm and smaller shall have brass bodies. Valves shall have a Teflon seal and
seat. Valves shall be rated at 1000 kPa at 100 °C unless otherwise specified.
4 Stainless steel ball valves shall be flanged with stainless steel body, ball and stem. Valves
shall be rated at 1000 kPa at 100 °C unless otherwise specified.
5.14.2 Globe Valves
1 Globe valves shall be low-zinc bronze body type with tapered discs permitting close
regulation of flow. Valves 75 mm and larger shall be flanged, Class 125 conforming to ANSI
B16.1 in drilling and dimensions. Valves 60 mm and smaller shall be 1,000 kPa, and shall
have screwed joints.
5.14.3 Quick Coupling Valves
ar
1 Quick coupling valves shall be of robust construction consisting of a cast bronze body and
at
dust cap with machined bronze valve cage and seat. The valve washer shall be neoprene
-Q
rubber with stainless steel packing washer and fixing screw. The stem seal ring shall be
neoprene rubber.
2 Double lug keys with swivel hose ells and standard 20 mm diameter hose connectors of the
LL
same manufacturer shall be supplied to the Employer’s stores at the rate of one key for every
five hose points. Each part shall be cast or machined bronze with neoprene rubber seals.
The cost of supplying these keys complete shall be included in the rates for valves.
W
5.14.4 Emitters
s
en
1 Bubble emitters shall be brass with 12 mm BSP thread designed for adjustable flows.
m
5.15 FITTINGS
e
1 All flanges, fittings, coupling, valves, and appurtenances shall be rated for the pipeline
Si
pressure, except as noted on the Drawings.
5.15.2 Flanges, Gaskets, and Bolts
1 Flanges shall be PN 16 rating or as otherwise designated. Flange gaskets shall be ring type.
Thickness shall be 1.5 mm for pipes 250 mm and smaller, and 3 mm for larger pipes.
Flange assembly bolts shall be standard hexagon head machine bolts with heavy hot
pressed, hexagon nuts and shall conform to BS EN 1092. Bolt length shall be such that after
the joints are made up, the bolts shall protrude through the nut, but not more than 12 mm. All
anchor bolts shall be stainless steel.
5.16 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS

5.16.1 Grooved End Couplings
1 Couplings shall engage and lock the grooved or shouldered pipe ends allowing some degree
of contraction, expansion, and angular deflections. Coupling housing shall be of ductile iron
or malleable iron and shall consist of two or more segments held securely together by at least
two steel bolts. Sealing gasket shall be of such design that internal pressure in the pipe
increases the tightness of the seal and shall be of materials suitable for the intended service.
The coupling shall have a rated working pressure not less than the pressure rating of the
pipe.
2 Corrosion protection shall be applied in accordance with the requirements specified in Clause
5.16.2 herein.
5.16.2 Flexible Couplings
1 Flexible (sleeve) couplings of the full sleeve type, split sleeve type, or flanged adapter type
shall provide the requisite pipe flexibility without jeopardising pipe joint integrity due to
hydraulic thrust, and shall have the same pressure rating as the pipe. Couplings shall have
all metal bearing surfaces and shall be provided with galvanised steel bolts and nuts.
ar
Flexible couplings shall be restrained unless the Engineer has given his approval to omit this
feature for specific cases. Specific requirements for each type are as follows:
at
(a) full sleeve type couplings shall be properly gasketed and shall be of a diameter to
-Q
fit the pipe. Each coupling shall consist of a steel middle ring, two steel followers, two
gaskets, and the necessary steel bolts and nuts to compress the gaskets. Stepped
couplings of this general type shall be used when stepping from one pipe material to
another of the same nominal diameter
LL
(b) split sleeve type couplings shall consist of one gasket, two housing clamps, and two
W
bolts and nuts to obtain the flexibility for connecting the piping. Steel shoulders shall
be provided and welded to the pipe ends to accommodate the couplings
(c) flexible flanged coupling adapters shall be of the sleeve type, consisting of steel
s
middle ring, steel followers, gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts to compress the
en
gaskets. The couplings shall contain anchor studs of strength adequate to hold the
pipes together under a pull equal to the longitudinal strength of the pipes.
m
2 Couplings to be installed underground shall, in addition to any factory applied paint coating,
e
site have one of the following corrosion protection systems:

Si
(a) hot pour moulding with enamel complying with BS 4164 type IV Grade 105/8, to give
a minimum of 20 mm thickness around all parts of the fittings
(b) laminate tape coating after priming and profiling with mastic
(c) paint coating with high build coal tar mastic to give a minimum dry film thickness of
500 m in at least three coats.
3 Step couplings used in force mains with flexible pipes shall be provided with a restraint
system where necessary to prevent longitudinal movement between the flexible pipe and the
coupling. The restraint system shall be as shown on the Drawings or approved by the
Engineer.
4 No joints shall be coated until hydrostatic testing of the joints is successfully completed.
5.17 FLOW CONTROL
5.17.1 Vortex Flow Control Devices
1 Where indicated on the drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Vortex Flow
Control Devices shall be manufactured from corrosion resistant materials as follows:
(a) stainless steel to BS 970 Part 1, Grade 316 S31.

(b) the device shall be fixed using nuts and bolts of Grade 316 S31 stainless steel.
5.18 INSTALLATION AND TESTING
5.18.1 Installation
1 The Contractor shall obtain the necessary installation drawings from the manufacturer and
shall store, transport, handle and install the valves, penstocks, stoplogs, and appurtenances
in strict accord with the manufacturer’s drawings and recommendations. Care shall be taken
during mounting of gates and logs to avoid warping the frames and to maintain clearance
between seating faces.
2 All ferrous surfaces shall be finish coated in accordance with Part 8 of this Section.
5.18.2 Testing
1 Factory Testing. Penstocks shall be factory-tested for a seat clearance check in accordance
ar
with the applicable provisions of AWWA C501. Penstocks that do not conform with the
testing requirements of AWWA C501 shall be made satisfactory or rejected and replaced.
at
Before shipment of the gates, the Contractor shall submit certified copies of test reports to
the Engineer for review. -Q
2 Site Testing. Following completion of the installation of the penstock, the Contractor shall
furnish the services of the authorised representative of the manufacturer to adjust and
operate the gates of directed by the Engineer. Adjustment shall be made so that the gates
LL
operate smoothly, seat properly, and are installed to the tolerances recommended by the
manufacturer. After the equipment has been tested and adjusted, the Contractor shall
W
perform a field leakage test on each gate in the presence of the Engineer in accordance with
the applicable provisions of AWWA C501. Both seating and unseating heads shall be tested
as applicable. If any of the equipment fails to meet the above test, it shall be modified as
s
required and retested to conform with specifications, until the maximum allowable leakage,
en
per AWWA C501, is not exceeded. Modifications or adjustments required to meet the test
shall not impair the smooth operation of the equipment.
m
END OF PART
e
Si
QCS 2014 Section 08: Drainage works Page 1
Part 06: Miscellaneous Metal Works
6 MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS ............................................................. 2
6.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

6.1.1 Scope 2
6.1.2 Reference 2
6.1.3 Submittals 2
6.2 MATERIALS .................................................................................................. 4
6.2.1 Steel 4
6.2.2 Stainless Steel 4
6.2.3 Aluminium 4
6.2.4 Iron 4
6.2.5 Welded Anchor Studs 4
ar
6.2.6 U Channel Concrete Inserts 4
6.2.7 Concrete Anchors 5
at
6.3 COATINGS .................................................................................................... 5
-Q
6.3.1 Galvanising 5
6.3.2 Anodising 6
6.3.3 Factory Painting 6
LL
6.4 FABRICATION AND ERECTION ................................................................... 7

W
6.4.1 General 7
6.4.2 Staircases 8
s
6.4.3 Ladders 9
en
6.4.4 Step Irons 10

6.4.5 Handrails and Railings 10
m
6.4.6 Chequer Plate 11

e
6.4.7 Gratings and Open Mesh Flooring 12

Si
6 MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS

6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
1 This part includes the specifications for the design, fabrication and erection of ladders,
staircase assemblies, open mesh flooring, chequer plate, gratings, handrailing, step irons,
supports, anchors, and other appurtenances.
2 Related Sections and Parts are as follows

This Section
Part 1, General
Part 7, Miscellaneous GRP Works
ar
Section 1, General
Section 16, Structural Metalwork
at
Section 17, Metalwork. -Q
6.1.2 Reference

LL
BS 970........... Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering purposes

W
BS 1470......... Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes;
plate, sheet and strips
s
Drawn Tube
en
forging stock
m
BS 1474......... Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes -
bars, extruded round tube and sections
e
BS 4211......... Specifications for permanent fixed ladders

Si
BS 4592......... Industrial type metal flooring, walkways and stair treads.

BS 5395......... Stairs, ladders and walkways
BS 5493......... Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures against
corrosion
BS EN 1561... Founding Gray Cast Iron

BS EN 1563... Found spheroidal graphite cast iron
BS EN 1993... EURO code 3, Design of steel structures
BS EN 13101. Manhole steps
BS EN ISO 2560 Welding consumables - Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding
of non-alloy and fine grained steels
EN 124 .......... Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas – Design
requirements, type testing, marking, quality control
ISO 9000 ....... Quality System
6.1.3 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit complete data as described below.

2 Product Data:
(a) the Contractor shall provide manufacturers’ specifications, load tables, dimension
diagrams, anchor details and installation instructions for products to be used in the
manufacture of metal fabrications.
3 Design Calculations and Shop Drawings:
(a) the Contractor shall provide design calculations and shop drawings for the
fabrication and erection of all assemblies of metal fabrication work which are not
completely shown by manufacturers’ data sheets, including anchorage and accessory
items. Plans and elevations at metric scales not less than 1:10 scale, and details of
sections and connections at not less than 1:5 scale shall be included
(b) detailed drawings shall show material type, thickness grade/class dimensions, and
construction scheme. The submittal shall include catalogue pages, erection
description, manufacturers’ data/instructions and templates.
4 Where structural steelwork is to be provided the Contractor shall submit duplicate copies of
ar
dimensioned shop drawings for approval by the Engineer’s Representative. If drawings are
not approved, one copy shall be returned to the Contractor marked up indicating the
at
alterations required. Upon final approval one copy of the drawing, stamped ‘Approved’ by the
Engineer’s Representative, shall be returned to the Contractor. Four further copies of the
-Q
approved drawings shall then be submitted to the Engineer’s Representative. No shop
fabrication may commence before receipt of the relevant shop drawings.
5 The shop drawings shall become record drawings on the completion of steelwork erection
LL
and the original drawing and one ISO size A2 (495 & 420) negative of each shall be supplied
to the Engineer. If there were any changes to the steelwork during erection these should be
W
supplied together with the original and the size A2 signed negative.
6 WPS and PQR

s
en

m
1 Fabricated metal products and materials shall be provided by experienced and approved
manufacturers and fabricators as designated in the Contract document to the written
e

Si
2 Where welding/brazing is required the Contractor shall:
(a) submit for approval welding procedure specification (WPS) and procedure qualification
record (PQR) in conformance with AWS D1.1(steel structures), ASME IX (piping and
pressure vessels) and BS EN 288 part 4 (Aluminium) and BS EN ISO 1101-8 (Iron) as
appropriate;
(b) submit for approval welder qualifications which shall be in conformance with the above
codes and or BS EN ISO 9606-2 (aluminium alloys),
(c) assign a CSWIP 3.1 or AWS QC qualified welding inspector, who shall be subject to
the Engineer’s approval, to witness all welding.
1 Metal works shall be stored off the ground, protected from moisture, until ready for use or
installation.
2 Metal works shall be stored and handled in such a manner to protect finishes.
3 Metal works shall be stored and handled to prevent bending under its own weight and
superimposed loads.
6.2 MATERIALS
6.2.1 Steel
1 Steel rolled shapes, plates and bars shall conform to the requirements of Section 16 unless
otherwise specified in this Part.
2 Bolts and nuts shall be of standard commercial quality steel conforming to Section 16, and
shall be galvanised when used with galvanised work.
AWS D 1.1 - Steel Structure Welding Code

ASME VIII Div. 1 - Pressure Vessel welding
ASME IX - Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section IX Welding & Brazing
ASME B31.3 - Process Pipe
6.2.2 Stainless Steel
1 Stainless steel shall conform to BS 970 and shall be Grade 316 S31 unless otherwise
ar
designated.
at
2 Stainless steel bolts, hexagonal cap screws, and studs shall be BS 970 Grade 316 S31
unless otherwise designated. -Q
3 All stainless steel to be welded shall be BS 970 Grade 316L.
6.2.3 Aluminium
LL
1 All aluminium plate, pipe and structural shapes shall conform to BS EN 12020, and BS 1472
W
with BS EN 485 Grades 6036-T6 or 6082-T6 or such other chemically resistant alloy that the
manufacturer can demonstrate to be suitable for use in aggressive atmospheres likely to be
encountered in sewage pumping stations. All aluminium items embedded in concrete shall
s
have two coats of bituminous paint. Where aluminium surfaces are in contact with concrete
en
surfaces or with dissimilar metals, PVC-U gaskets shall be used to isolate the aluminium.
m
6.2.4 Iron
e
1 Ductile Iron. Ductile iron shall be in accordance with BS EN 1563.

Si
2 Grey Cast Iron. Cast iron shall be in accordance with BS EN 1561.
3 Malleable Iron. Malleable iron shall be in accordance with BS EN 13101.
6.2.5 Welded Anchor Studs
1 Headed anchor studs (HAS) or threaded anchor studs (TAS), as indicated on the Contract
Drawings:
(a) Carbon Steel: BS EN ISO 898, either semi-killed or killed aluminium or silicon
dioxidation, unless indicated otherwise.
(b) Stainless Steel: BS EN ISO 3506, Grade SS 316, Condition CW, where indicated.
6.2.6 U Channel Concrete Inserts
1 Rolled: BS EN ISO 9445 Type 316 stainless steel, 2.7 mm thickness, 40 mm width by 35
millimetres depth, with stainless steel anchors at 250 mm maximum spacing, Styrofoam
fillers, and end cap.
2 Nut and Bolt Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel, 16 mm minimum diameter, unless
indicated otherwise. Manufacturer’s standard to match insert.
6.2.7 Concrete Anchors
1 For concrete anchor spacing less than 12 anchor diameters and edge distances less than
six anchor diameters, make reduction in allowable pullout and shear values.
2 Allow for thermal movement resulting from the maximum range in ambient temperature in
design, fabrication, and installation of handrails to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, over
stressing of components, connections and other detrimental effects. Base design calculation
on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and night time sky
heat loss. Temperature change is difference between high or low temperature and
installation temperature.
3 Use approved service load allowable values for size, length, embedment, spacing, and edge
distance to match required loads shown in calculations.
6.3 COATINGS
ar
at
6.3.1 Galvanising
1
-Q
Galvanising shall be executed after all fabrication has been completed and shall be carried
out in accordance with BS 5493:1977. The articles shall be pickled in dilute sulphuric or
hydrochloric acid followed by rinsing in water and pickling in phosphoric acid. They shall be
thoroughly washed, stoved and dipped in molten zinc and brushed so that the whole of the
LL
metal shall be evenly covered and the coating thickness after dipping shall not be less than
the BS 5493 System Reference Number recommended for the particular conditions and in
W
any case not less than 85 microns.
2 Unless otherwise specified, all ferrous metals shall be galvanised in conformance with
s
reference standards according to the nature of the work. Factory fabrication shall be
en
complete before galvanising. Galvanised coatings that have been marred or damaged
during erection or fabrication shall be repaired using designated touch-up material.
m
3 Surfaces of exterior units which have been galvanised after fabrication and are intended for
e
bolted or screwed field connections shall not be welded, cut or abraded.

Si
4 Galvanised coatings marred or damaged during erection or fabrication shall be repaired

conforming to BS 5493 and in accordance with the coating manufacturer's instructions.
5 Unpainted galvanized surfaces shall not be used in an immersed condition within three
months of hot dip galvanizing and/or before an adequate protective patina has formed.
6 All mild steel parts unless otherwise stated, are to be heavily galvanised by the "hot dip"
process, or other methods as agreed by the Engineer, after fabrication. Where large units are
concerned, an approved metal spraying process to BS specifications may be used subject to
the approval of the Engineer. With the exception of the metal flooring to be supplied
unpainted, the whole of the galvanised mild steel parts and metal sprayed parts are to be
treated with a zinc phosphate primer before leaving the place of manufacture. (No lead oxide
or iron may be used in priming the galvanised parts.) Painting shall be in accordance with
the Schedule A [Work Requirements], Part 5 [Warranted Project Data], 5.1 [Drawings] or as
selected by the Engineer.
7 All steel and ironwork of whatever kind to be galvanised shall be thoroughly de-scaled by shot
blasting to clear metal to BS 4232 second quality, to clean the surfaces of all dirt, weld
spelter, grease, slag, oil-paint or other deleterious materials, and immediately after is to be
galvanised by a hot dip process, followed by quenching in water. The molten zinc in the
galvanising bath shall contain not less than 98.5 percent of zinc by weight. All articles are to
be immersed in the bath only for a time sufficient for them to attain the temperature of the
bath and they are to be withdrawn at such a speed that a coating of 90 microns thickness is
achieved, or such other practicable maximum thickness for the article defined in BS 729, Part
"Hot dip galvanised coating on iron and steel." The galvanising is to be done in all cases after
machine work, chipping, trimming, filling, fitting, drilling or bending is completed. Every article
is to be covered evenly on all sides.
8 The zinc coating shall consist of a uniform layer of zinc free from abrasions, creeks, blisters,
chemical spots or other imperfections, and so applied that it will adhere firmly to the surface
of the steel.
9 The galvanising shall be applied in such a manner that the spelter will not peel off. The
coating of the finished product shall be even, smooth and uniform throughout. Machine work,
dye work, cutting, punching, bending, welding, drilling, thread cutting and other fabrication
ar
shall all be done, as far as practicable, before galvanising.
at
10 The galvanising shall have no adverse effect on the mechanical properties of the articles so
treated. Variations in dimensional properties shall be kept to a minimum.
-Q
11 The work of surface preparation and galvanising shall be carried out, for any one article, on
the same working day.
LL
12 Galvanising on steelwork where required is to be carried out after fabrication and assembly.
W
13 Light gauge metal work is to be galvanised by the hot dip process as specified in BS 3083 or
BS 2989.
s
14 Contact between galvanised steel members and aluminium surface is to be prevented by

en
means of a layer of "Densochrome" or similar approved tape.

m
15 All necessary care and precautions are to be taken in shipping and transporting the
galvanised or metal sprayed units to avoid damage to the coating. Where damage proves to
e
be extensive in the opinion of the Engineer, the whole unit shall be recoated.
Si
16 Where galvanised parts are to be bolted or riveted together, the joint shall be made with an
approved barium or zinc chromate paste.
17 Where the metal parts are too big to be hot dip galvanised, approval of the Engineer shall be
sought for the steel parts to be shot blasted to BS 4232 second quality and then immediately
zinc sprayed to a minimum thickness of 0.1 mm in accordance with BS 2569 Part 1.
6.3.2 Anodising
1 All aluminium members shall be anodised after fabrication in accordance with Sections 16
and 17.
2 All aluminium and aluminium alloy materials shall be anodised after fabrication to a thickness
of grade AA 20 and subsequently sealed against corrosion. After anodising, the aluminium
surfaces shall not be painted but left self-finish. Anodising of aluminium shall comply with the
6.3.3 Factory Painting
1 All protective coatings and painting shall be carried out as specified in Part 8 of this Section.
2 Before leaving the factory, ferrous metals not designated to be galvanised shall be given one
coat of primer as specified in Clause 8.2 of Part 8. Portions to be embedded in concrete or
masonry shall not be painted.
6.4 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
6.4.1 General
1 Stairs, ladders and walkways provided shall conform to BS 4211 and BS 5395.
2 Fabrication and erection shall be performed by approved specialist subcontractors

experienced in work of equivalent magnitude. Shop drawings shall be prepared by the
Contractor based on the details shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall
(a) verify all measurements and shall take all site measurements necessary before
fabrication
(b) be responsible for correctness of detailing, fabrication, and for the correct fitting of
structural members
ar
(c) not substitute sections
at
(d) not modify connections.
-Q
Members and connections, for any part of the structure, not shown on the Drawings shall be
the Contractor’s responsibility.
3 The Contractor shall use materials of the size and thickness shown on the Drawings, or if not
LL
shown, of the required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in the
finished product for the intended use.
W
4 All work at the factory shall be preassembled to the greatest extent possible to minimise field
splicing and assembly of units at the Site. Units shall be disassembled only to the extent
s
necessary to comply with transportation limitations and shall be clearly marked for
en
reassembly and proper installation. Ladders shall be supplied as preassembled units.

m
5 For the manufacture of metal fabrications which will be exposed to view, only materials which
are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled
e
trade names and roughness shall be used. Any such blemishes shall be removed by
Si
grinding, or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating and application of finishes
including anodising and galvanising. Smoothness shall be required all round for handrails
and ladders.
6 Exposed work shall be formed true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight sharp edges. Exposed edges shall be rounded to a radius of approximately 1 mm
unless otherwise designated.
7 Exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth shall be formed using
concealed fasteners wherever possible. Exposed fasteners shall be flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts. Bolt and screw holes shall be predrilled for attachment of metal fabrication
work and for the attachment of adjacent materials.
8 Welding shall be carried out by experienced tradesmen, and made with designated
electrodes or submerged arc conforming to BS EN ISO 2560. The following procedures shall
be carried out:
(a) before fabrication, all steel shall be thoroughly wire brushed, clean of all scale and
rust, and thoroughly straightened by approved methods that will not injure the
materials being worked on
(b) welding shall be continuous along the entire line of contact except where tack or
intermittent welding is permitted
(c) where exposed, welds shall be cleaned of slag and ground smooth.
(d) All stainless steel welding shall be gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW)or shield metal
arc welding (SMAW) processes using stainless steel type 316L consumables
conforming to the requirements of the under-mentioned codes / AWS A5.9 (GTAW) or
AWS A5.4 (SMAW).
(e) All aluminium welding shall be undertaken using GTAW process using consumables
under 5356 classification of AWS A5.10.
(f) Welding to be undertaken in accordance with the applicable code as follows:
General guidance for arc welding BS EN ISO 1101 –1
Arc welding of ferritic steels BS EN ISO 1101 – 2
Arc welding of stainless steels BS EN ISO 1101 –3
Arc welding of aluminium BS EN ISO 1101-4
Welding of cast iron BS EN ISO 1101 -8
Steel Structures AWS D1.1
ar
Pressure vessels ASME VIII Div 1
at
Piping ASME B31.3
9 Fixing shall be carried out as follows:
-Q
(a) the Contractor shall fabricate and install anchoring devices with spacing as required
to provide adequate support for the intended use of the work
LL
(b) fastenings to wooden plugs will not be permitted

(c) All nuts and bolts shall be threaded in accordance with BS 3643 “Isometric series
W
threads” part 2 “Limits and tolerances for coarse pitch threads” and fitted with 3mm
thick washers beneath bolt and nut.
s
(d) Regardless of the materials being fixed all bolts, nuts, washers and anchor plates shall
en
be of stainless steel Grade 316 S31 to BS 970 and shall remain unpainted. PTFE
washers shall be fitted beneath stainless steel washers for both bolthead and nut.
m
(e) Drilled anchor fixings for use on concrete structure shall be of a type approved by the
Engineer’s Representative. The positions of all drilled anchors shall be approved by
e
the Engineer’s Representative and any Contractor proposing to use such fixings shall
Si
be deemed to have undertaken to supply, mark off, drill and fit.

(f) All exposed bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal and the length of all bolts shall be
such that when fitted with a nut and tightened down, the threaded portion shall fill the
nut and not protrude from the face thereof by more then half the diameter of the bolt.
(g) All jointing material shall be provided by the Contractor.
10 Dissimilar materials shall be separated by gaskets.
6.4.2 Staircases
1 Metal staircases shall be constructed to the overall dimensions detailed on the Drawings and
shall be prefabricated in marine quality mill finished aluminium alloy or galvanised steel.
Staircases shall be designed to span longitudinally from wall to wall and shall be designed to
carry a live load of 5 kPa. Stringers shall be of adequate size to support dead and live loads.
2 Treads shall be of non-slip surface and shall have adequate stiffness to carry a point load of
1.8 kN at the centre.
3 Landings shall not exceed 3 m.

4 Kicker plates shall extend to a minimum of 100 mm above flooring and open sides. The
risers shall not exceed 200 mm.
5 Chequer plates shall be as specified in Clause 6.4.6 wherein.
6 Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, furnish flush type abrasive nosing on
stairs.
7 Nosing Components:
(a) Homogeneous epoxy abrasive, with minimum 50 percent aluminium oxide content,
formed and cured upon an extruded aluminium base.
(b) Epoxy abrasive shall extend over and form curved front edge of nosing.
(c) Base of Nosing: Extruded aluminium alloy, 6063-T5, heat-treated complying with BS
EN 12020.
(d) Anchoring System: Double-set anchors consisting of two rows of integrally extruded
anchors.
ar
(e) Size: 75 mm wide by 6 mm to 10 mm thick by length as shown.
Colour: Selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colour range.
at
(f)
6.4.3 Ladders
-Q
1 Galvanised steel ladders shall be to the form and dimensions shown on the Drawings, and as
specified below:
LL
(a) ladders shall comply with BS 5395, Part 3.

W
(b) ladders greater than 6000 m shall be provided with an intermediate platform
(c) stringers shall be solid flat sections of minimum size 65 mm by 13 mm where extended
stringers are provided they shall be radiused over the top for walk-through access and
s
shall be not less than 600mm apart.

en
(d) fixing brackets shall be at maximum 2500 mm centres

m
(e) rungs shall be

e
(i) solid sections of minimum 20 mm diameter

Si
(ii) at 300 mm centres

(iii) minimum 380 mm wide between stringers
(iv) minimum 200 mm from adjacent walls
(v) capable of withstanding a point load of 5000 N applied at the centre of the rung
and close to one end
(f) when supported horizontally over a span of 1.0 m with the climbing face uppermost
and with a load of 1000 N applied at the centre of the span, the ladder shall not
deflect more than 15 mm at the point of application of the load and shall show no
permanent deflection after removal of the load. Each ladder fixing shall be capable of
withstanding shear and pull-out loads of 5000 N
(g) safety cages shall be provided where indicated and where the distance between
landings exceeds 3500 mm. These shall be constructed of three vertical flat sections,
minimum size 50 mm by 8 mm supported by flat hoops with a diameter of 750 mm.
The hoops shall be at a maximum of 900 mm centres and the first hoop shall be
2400 mm above lowest platform level. No single hoop shall be used
(h) all welds shall be ground flush and smoothed and ladders hot-dip galvanised after
fabrication. Connections to concrete or masonry walls shall be secure with accurately
positioned stainless steel anchor bolts. Ladders shall be mounted to produce a
finished appearance that is plumb, straight and true to dimensions.
2 Stainless steel ladders shall generally be of dimensions as designated for galvanised steel
ladders except that all materials shall be of stainless steel.
3 Aluminium ladders shall be to the form and specified dimensions shown on the Drawings,
and as specified below:
(a) the spacing of stringers, rungs and safety hoops shall be as galvanised steel ladders.
(b) material shall be aluminium alloy to BS EN 573 grade EN AW-6082.
(c) ladders shall be of all welded construction. Stringers shall be drilled to receive rungs
which shall be welded into position from the outside of the stringers. Welds shall not
be proud of the outside of the stringers
(d) rungs shall be of substantial section serrated tube to enable sure hand and foot holds
ar
(e) fixings shall be of stainless steel. Gaskets shall be provided to isolate aluminium alloy
from other materials
at
(f) all other requirements shall be as specified for galvanised steel ladders
-Q
(g) ladders shall be obtained from approved suppliers.
6.4.4 Step Irons

LL
1 Step ironing rising main valve chambers shall be galvanised malleable cast iron, shall
conform to BS EN 13101, and shall be of general purpose type. The tail length shall be 230
W
mm unless the well into which the tail is to be cast is less than 290 mm thick.
2 Step irons in house connection chambers shall comply with BS EN 13101 and be the
s
general-purpose type manufactured of galvanised malleable cast iron. The tail length shall be
en
115mm. The step irons shall be epoxy coated with a material compatible with a galvanised
surface and finished with a two part, acrylic polyurethane topcoat as detailed below and
applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
m
Epoxy Coating 50 DFT

e
Two Part Acrylic Finish 50 DFT

Si
6.4.5 Handrails and Railings
1 Handrailing shall be obtained from an approved experienced manufacturer and shall be

GRP, circular hollow section, marine quality mill finished aluminium alloy (BS EN 573 grade
EN AW-6082) in pre-fabricated lengths complete with fixings or shall be stainless steel
circular hollow section (BS970 Grade316S31). Site welding will not be accepted. All welded
parts to be completed during manufacturing fabrication with approved WPS by Engineer in
accordance with Clause 6.1.4 of this Part. Handrails and railings fabricated from mild steel,
stainless steel, or aluminium as shown on the Drawings and meet the following requirements:
(a) brackets, bolts and fastening devices shall be provided as required for
complete installation
(b) handrailing and railings shall be provided with smooth bends and welded joints
ground smooth and flush
(c) installed railings and supports shall withstand a 1100 N load applied at any point,
downward or horizontally or 740 N/m along the top rail, whichever is greater
(d) the deflection of both rails and standards shall to exceed 2 % of the span/height under
a horizontal load of 360 N/m on the top rail.
2 Galvanised steel handrailing shall be provided in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) stanchions shall have a nominal bore of 40 mm and a minimum wall thickness of
3.25 mm
(b) stanchions on steel stringers shall have base plates or angles welded to bottom of
pipe and bolted to stringer
(c) rails shall have a nominal bore of 32 mm and minimum wall thickness of 4 mm
(d) horizontal handrails shall be 1,100 mm high with an intermediate rail 550 mm high
(e) railings shall be
(i) mounted so as to produce a finished appearance that is plumb, straight, and
true to dimension, free from kinks, twists, and abrasions
(ii) curves, where indicated on the Drawings or necessary, shall be bent to a radius
of not less than 100 mm. Where shown on the Drawings, or directed by the
Engineer, removable sections shall be provided
(f) toe plates shall be provided where railings are not mounted on stanchions
ar
(g) welds shall be ground flush and smooth and handrailing hot-dip galvanised after
at
fabrication
(h)
-Q
sleeves shall be provided for setting by other trades where embedded
(i) connections to concrete or masonry wall surfaces shall be secure with accurately
positioned stainless steel anchor bolts, or with cinch anchors and bolts
LL
(j) where expanding anchor bolts are used on concrete surfaces, the bases shall be
bedded on a mastic sealant as approved by the Engineer to prevent ingress of water
W
(k) at ladders and other openings, 12 mm minimum galvanised steel safety chains with
eyebolt and harness type snap attachments shall be installed.
s
3 Stainless steel handrailing shall generally be as designated for galvanised steel handrailing
en
except that all materials shall be of stainless steel Grade 316 S 31, including stainless steel
safety chains and attachments.
m
4 Aluminium handrailing shall generally be as designated for galvanised steel handrailing

e
except as modified below:

Si
(a) handrailing shall comprise double line handrails made from minimum 43 mm
outside diameter 9 SWG tube to BS 1474 Grades 6036-T6, 6082-T6 unless otherwise
designated
(b) fixings shall be of stainless steel
(c) at ladders and other openings, two stainless chains shall be installed which shall be
fixed to hand rail standards or ladder stringers using suitable aluminium alloy hooks.
5 All joints shall be made within standards and shall consist of a dowel to provide rigidity fixed
within the handrailing using countersunk stainless steel grub screws. Where removable
lengths of handrails are detailed half lap joints shall be used.
6 Make provisions for handrails in the exterior and interior installations subject to high humidity
to drain water from railing system.
7 Posts mounted handrails in concrete, bends and elbows occurring at low points, drill weep
holes of 6 mm diameter at lowest possible elevations, one hole per post or rail. Drill hole in
the plane of the rail.
6.4.6 Chequer Plate

1 General
2
(a) all chequer plate shall be designed to support uniformly distributed loads of 7.5 kN/m .
The loading shall be considered a minimum requirement. Where an item of
equipment demands larger loading, the loading shall be increased accordingly.
(b) maximum deflection shall be 0.2 % of the span under maximum loading
conditions for steel flooring and one per cent for Aluminium
(c) plate sections shall
(i) have a minimum thickness of 6 mm, excluding the raised pattern
(ii) Plates shall be reinforced with angle sections of the same material to meet the
above loading and deflection requirements.
(iii) be of diamond shaped pattern at the top and have an angled and opposed
pattern which shall be non-slip type
(d) joints shall be provided at the centre of all openings unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings
ar
(e) joints and openings shall be reinforced with additional stiffeners where necessary
at
to provide the required load carrying capacity and deflection criterion.
-Q
2 Galvanised steel chequer plate and frames shall be hot dip galvanised after fabrication, and
all fasteners shall be stainless steel. Where specified on the drawings galvanised chequer
plate flooring shall in addition be epoxy coated.
LL
3 Aluminium chequer plate and frames shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy to BS EN 755-
9, Grade 6082-T6, and all fasteners shall be stainless steel A4. Gaskets shall be provided to
W
isolate aluminium alloy from other materials.

s
4 Flooring shall be provided in sizes suitable for removal by one man and with the appropriate
en
cutouts to permit its removal without disturbing or dismantling spindles, supporting brackets
or pipe work. Intermediate supporting members shall be provided and fixed, the cost of which
shall be deemed to be included in the cost of the flooring.
m
5 Chequer plate flooring covering openings in concrete or brickwork shall be set flush in frames
e
of the same material fixed as shown on the drawings.

Si
6.4.7 Gratings and Open Mesh Flooring
1 General
(a) all flooring and walkways shall be designed to support uniformly distributed loads of 7.5
2
kN/m
(b) gratings and open mesh flooring shall be welded, rectangular opening type, bar
gratings with seat angles, anchors and supports of the same material
(c) grating up to and including 1.0 m shall be furnished in pieces approximately 1.0 m in
width and all gratings for pans greater than 1 m shall be furnished in pieces 0.8 m in
width
(d) openings required in gratings shall be banded where openings are provided and shall
be strengthened as necessary
(e) installed units shall be true to plane and free of warps and irregularities
(f) units shall be divided for ease of installation and removal
(g) bearing bars shall be serrated and have a minimum size of 45 mm deep by 5 mm
thick
(h) the edges of all flooring and platforms shall be finished with approved kerbs, which
shall be provided by the flooring supplier and shall be fitted with fish tail lugs for
building into the concrete work
(i) the pattern, design thickness and finish shall be approved by the Engineer. The
pattern of open type flooring shall be rectangular and shall match between adjacent
panels
(j) flooring and walkway supports shall be independent of bearing supports to prevent the
setting up of oscillations and noisy vibrations
(k) all clips and bolts shall be stainless steel
(l) all supporting metal work shall be provided on large area openings to provide
support for the flooring
(m) the faces of flooring which come into contact with cement mortar concrete shall have
two coats of bituminous paint before installation of the frame.
2 Galvanised steel gratings and open mesh flooring shall be hot dipped galvanised after
fabrication.
ar
3 Aluminium gratings and open mesh flooring shall be manufactured in approved structural
aluminium BS 1471, BS 1472 or BS 1474, Grade 6063-T6 or 6082-T6 unless otherwise
at
designated and all fastens shall be stainless steel. Gaskets shall be provided to isolate
-Q
aluminium alloy from other materials.
4 Stainless steel gratings and open mesh flooring shall be manufactured of Grade 316S31 to
BS 970.
LL
5 Flooring shall be removable and set flush in frames of the same material. Frames shall be
fixed as shown on the drawings.
W
6 The deflection under maximum load shall not exceed 0.2 per cent of the span for steel
s
flooring and one per cent for aluminium.

en
7 Flooring shall be provided in sizes suitable for removal by one man and with the appropriate
cut-outs to permit its removal without disturbing or dismantling spindles, supporting brackets
m
or pipe work. Intermediate supporting members shall be provided and fixed, the cost of which
shall be deemed to be included in the cost of the flooring.
e
Si
8 Steel angle support frames to be embedded in concrete shall be stainless steel,

BS EN 10272:2000 Type 316, unless indicated otherwise.
9 Welded anchors for stainless steel support frames shall also be stainless steel.
END OF PART
Part 07: Glass Reinforced Plastics
7 GLASS REINFORCED PLASTICS ................................................................ 2
7.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

7.1.1 Scope 2
7.1.2 Related Sections and Parts 2
7.1.3 References 2
7.1.4 Submittals 2
7.1.6 Warranty 3
7.2 MATERIALS .................................................................................................. 3
7.2.1 GRP 3
7.3 FABRICATION AND ERECTION ................................................................... 3
ar
7.3.1 GRP Ladder 3
7.3.2 GRP Handrails and Balustrades 4
at
7.3.3 GRP Gratings and Open-Mesh Flooring -Q 4
7.3.4 GRP Lining for Pump Station Wet Wells 4
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
7 GLASS REINFORCED PLASTICS

7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Scope
1 This part includes the specifications for all work in connection with glass reinforced plastics
(GRP) ladders, safety cages, handrails, balustrades, gratings, open-mesh flooring, and
linings for pump station wet wells.
7.1.2 Related Sections and Parts

Section 1 - General
This Section
Part 1 General
ar
Part 4 Pipe Installation
Part 6 Metal Works
at
7.1.3 References -Q
LL
ASTM E84 ..................Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
W
BS 3532......................Method for specifying unsaturated polyester resin systems

BS 3749......................E glass fibre woven roving fabrics for the reinforcement of polyester
s
and epoxy resin systems.

en
m
BS EN 14118..............Reinforcement. Specifications for textile glass mats

e
Si
7.1.4 Submittals
1 Manufacturers’ Literature:
(a) the Contractor shall provide manufacturers’ specifications, load tables, dimension
diagrams, anchor details and installation instructions for products to be used in
GRP works.
2 Design Calculations and Shop Drawings:
(a) the Contractor shall provide design calculations and shop drawings for the
fabrication and erection of all assemblies of GRP which are not completely shown in
manufacturers’ data sheets, including anchorage and accessory items
(b) plans and elevations in metric dimensions not less than 1:20 scale, and details of
sections and connections at not less than 1:10 scale shall be included. Detailed
drawings shall show material type, thickness grade/class dimensions, and construction
scheme
(c) the submittal shall include catalogue pages, erection description, manufacturers’ data
and instructions and templates where appropriate.
1 Fabricated GRP products and materials shall be provided by experienced approved

manufacturers and fabricators as designated in the contract specific documents and
manufactured to approved patterns.
7.1.6 Warranty
1 The Contractor shall provide the Employer with a 7-year unconditional guarantee against
failure of all GRP products whether caused by defective materials or workmanship. The
guarantee shall be valid from the date of completion of the installation and must be handed to
the Engineer before the issue of the Certificate of Completion.
7.2 MATERIALS
7.2.1 GRP
ar
1 GRP material for ladders, safety cages, handrails, balustrades, grating and open-mesh
flooring shall be fabricated from structural quality fibreglass shapes with chemical and
at
ultraviolet resistance. Resin shall be all vinyl ester. Glass shall be all ECR and GRP
-Q
thickness shall be a minimum 5 mm. The top surface shall be provided with a non-slip silica
sand finish. The structural components shall have Class I fire retardance, with an ASTM E84
flame spread rating of 25 maximum. Fibreglass components shall have an ultimate tensile
LL
strength of 207 MPa, an ultimate compressive strength of 207 MPa, a modulus of elasticity of
20.7 GPa, and a Barcol hardness of 50.
W
2 All cut or trimmed edges of the GRP ladder and braces shall be flow coated with an approved
vinyl ester resin. Glass fibres shall not be exposed.
s
en
7.3 FABRICATION AND ERECTION

m
7.3.1 GRP Ladder

e
1 GRP ladders shall be obtained from an approved experienced manufacturer and shall be
Si
purpose made to suit the depth of each installation as shown on the drawings. The ladders
shall be drilled for wall fixing at both ends and additional intermediate fixing connections shall
be provided at centres not greater than 1.5 metres. Rungs shall be at 300mm centres and at
a distance of not less than 200mm from the wall. Rungs if tubular shall be no less than
30mm outer diameter, and stringers shall be of a rectangular or channel section no less than
70mm x 25mm in size.
2 The wall thickness of the laminate shall be not less than 5 mm at any point and there shall be
no sharp edges. The support fixing brackets shall be GRP continuously moulded with the
main lamination and they shall be not more than 500 mm apart (every 2 steps/rungs). The
rungs shall be 250 mm apart with the upper face finished with a non-slip surface.
3 The support fixing brackets shall be put through the liner wall, and be designed to be totally
encapsulated by concrete. The ladder brackets shall be laminated to the outside of the liner.
4 Each rung shall be able to withstand a point load of 5000 N.

5 When supported horizontally over a span of 1.0 m with the climbing face uppermost and with
a load of 1000 N applied at the centre of the span the ladder shall not deflect more than 15
mm at the point of application of the load and shall show no permanent deflection after
removal of the load. Each ladder fixing shall be capable of withstanding shear and pull-out
loads of 5000 N.
7.3.2 GRP Handrails and Balustrades
1 GRP handrails and balustrades shall be white (or near white) in colour and shall be obtained
from an approved experienced manufacturer.
2 The resin, glass and synthetic fibres used in the manufacture of handrails shall be chosen to
produce a chemically resistant product with a resin-rich surface layer suitable for use in
aggressive atmospheres likely to be encountered in sewers and sewage pumping stations.
3 Standards shall be no smaller than 45 mm square, and shall be 1100 mm high. Base fixing
shall be as shown on the drawings. Where installed on concrete surfaces using expanding
ar
anchor bolts, the bases shall be bedded on an approved mastic sealant to prevent ingress of
water to the bolt holes.
at
4
-Q
Handrails shall be no smaller than 50 mm square, and shall be located 550 and 1100 mm
above finished floor level on standards spaced no more than 1500 mm apart. Deflection
under vertical loads shall be no greater than deflection under the same horizontal load.
LL
5 The complete installation shall be capable of withstanding a horizontal force at top rail level of
740 N/m. The deflection of both rails and standards shall not exceed 2 % of the span/height
W
under a horizontal load of 360 N/m on the top rail.

s
6 At ladders and other openings, two removable stainless steel chains, shall be installed which
en
shall be fixed to handrail standards or ladder stringers using stainless steel (316 S31) hook
bolts.
m
7.3.3 GRP Gratings and Open-Mesh Flooring

e
Si
1 GRP grating and open-mesh flooring shall have the same overall dimensions and design
criteria as designated for steel grating and open-mesh flooring in Part 6 of this Section except
as modified below.
2 The grating shall be of one piece compression moulded continuous fibreglass strand bar type
grating and other requirements shall be as designated for GRP ladders. The colour and
pattern of the grating and open-mesh flooring will be selected from the available
manufacturer’s standards and to the approval of the Engineer.
7.3.4 GRP Lining for Pump Station Wet Wells
1 GRP linings to pumping station shall consist of a chemically resistant layer comprising vinyl
ester resin suitably reinforced with a “C” glass or synthetic tissue veil. This layer shall be no
less than 6 mm thick, and shall have a resin content by weight of approximately 90 % at the
exposed surface, reducing to 65 % - 75 % at the inner surface. The remainder of the liner
shall consist of vinyl ester or isophthalic resins “ECR” glass chopped strand mat. The lining
shall be at least 6 mm thick and shall be white (or near white) in colour.
2 All linings shall consist of preformed sheets and tubes with moulded on lugs to allow bonding
to concrete. Joints between sheets shall be bandaged on the hidden face, with the
bandaging extending 150 mm either side of the joint. On the inside (exposed) face the joint
shall be filled with vinyl ester paste to produce a smooth finish. Where joints form angles, a
50 mm radius fillet shall be formed using vinyl ester paste prior to bandaging.
3 Where the Engineer permits the use of GRP lining to upper surfaces, and other areas where
casting in of preformed sheets in inappropriate, lapping of in-situ work onto preformed work,
and application of in-situ lining shall be carried out as follows:
(a) at the junction between preformed linings and in-situ linings, the preformed lining shall
be lightly abraded to a distance of 150 mm from the junction
(b) a vinylester paste fillet of 50 mm radius shall be formed at internal angles which are
to receive an in-situ lining
(c) the in-situ lining shall be built up by applying isophthalic or vinyl ester resin to the
whole of the surface to be lined, the fillet and the abraded strip of the preformed lining
ar
(d) a layer of “E” or “ECR” mat shall be rolled into the resin using a suitable steel roller to
at
exclude all air and provide complete immersion of glass fibre in the resin
(e) after a period to allow pre-gel to a tacky state a second coat of resin shall be applied
-Q
followed by a further layer of glass fibre mat. This process shall be repeated until the
total thickness of the lining is approximately 4 mm
vinylester resin and “ECR” glass or synthetic tissue veil shall than be applied in layers
LL
(f)
to complete the lining
W
(g) where linings are applied to inverts of channels subject to high fluid velocities of 5 m/s,
the GRP lining shall be mechanically fixed to the substrate using stainless steel screws
s
and washers. After building up approximately 60 % of the required thickness of lining,

en
stainless steel round headed screws 50 mm long and stainless steel washers 25 mm
diameter shall be used at 500 mm centres (by drilling and plugging) to fix the lining to
the concrete. Particular attention shall be paid to edges of sheets where the flow of
m
sewage will tend to lift the lining. The remaining layers of GRP shall then be built up
e
over the screw heads and washers.

Si
4 The top surface of benchings and platforms shall incorporate silica sand to form a non-slip
surface.
END OF PART
Part 08: Painting and Protective Coatings
8 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS .................................................. 2
8.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

8.1.1 Scope 2
8.1.2 References 2
8.1.3 Definitions 3
8.1.5 Submittals 4
8.1.8 Warranty 5
8.1.9 Safety 6
8.2 MATERIALS .................................................................................................. 6
8.2.1 Coating and Painting Materials 6
ar
8.2.2 Coating and Painting Systems 7
8.2.3 Abrasive Blasting Materials 13
at
8.3 WORKMANSHIP ......................................................................................... 13
-Q
8.3.1 General 13
8.3.2 Manufacturer’s Recommendations 14
8.3.3 Mixing and Thinning 14
LL
8.3.4 Items Not to be Painted During Coating and Painting Operations 14

W
8.3.6 Application of Protective Coatings and Paint 18

8.3.7 Maintenance of Prepared Surfaces 19
s
8.3.8 Environmental Conditions 19

en
8.3.9 Spray Application 20

8.3.10 Brush Application 20
m
8.3.11 Shop Coatings 20

e
8.3.12 Site Painting of Manufactured Items 20

Si
8.3.13 Site Application 21

8.3.14 Epoxy Coating Work 21
8.3.15 Epoxy Coatings for Concrete and Rendered Surfaces 22
8.3.16 Galvanising and Other Finishes of Metals 22
8 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS

8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Scope
1 This part includes the specification for the Provision of protective coatings and painting to
protect the surfaces of structures, materials and equipment in interior, exterior, process,
operating, and maintenance service environments as classified in this Part.

This Section
Part 1, General
Part 5, Valves, Penstocks and Appurtenances
Part 6, Miscellaneous Metal Work
ar
Section 1, General
at
Section 5, Concrete
Section 6, Road works -Q
Section 16, Structural Metalwork
LL
Section 17, Metalwork

Section 21, Electrical Works
W
Section 26, Painting and Decorating.

8.1.2 References
s
en
ASTM C97 ..................Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of
m
Dimension Stone
e
Si
BS 245........................Mineral solvents (white spirit and related hydrocarbon solvents) for

paints and other purposes
BS 1336......................Knotting
BS 1710......................Identification of pipelines and services
BS 4232......................Surface finish of blast-cleaned steel for painting
BS 4652......................Zinc-rich priming paint (organic media)
BS 4756......................Ready mixed aluminium priming paints for woodwork
BS 4800......................Paint colours for building purposes
BS 5493......................Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures
against corrosion
BS 6150......................Code of practice for painting of buildings
BS 7079......................Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related
products
BS 7956......................Specification for primers for woodwork
BS EN 10300..............Bitumen-based hot-applied coating material for protecting iron and

steel, including suitable primers where required
BS EN ISO 1461 ........Hot dipped galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
SIS 055900.................Rust grades for steel surfaces and preparation grades prior to
protective
coating
8.1.3 Definitions
1 Paints, protective coatings, and coatings: paints, enamels, stains, varnishes, lacquers,
sealers, fillers and other types of coatings whether used as primers, intermediate or finish
coats.
1 For purposes of identifying protective coating and painting systems to be applied as specified
ar
in this Part, service environments are classified in Table 8.2.
at
2 The classification of areas and surfaces to be coated or painted shall be as designated in the
Project Specification. -Q
3 Painting in unclassified areas shall be carried out as specified in Section 26.
4 Surfaces to be Coated or Painted. In general, the following surfaces are to be coated or

LL
painted:
W
(a) all exposed piping and other metal surfaces, interior and exterior
(b) all submerged metal surfaces
s
(c) all structural and miscellaneous steel work, including tanks

en
(d) interior of tanks, chambers and wet wells that are not protected with GRP or PVC
liners
m
(e) exterior above ground concrete as Table 8.5 unless otherwise designated in the
e
Project Specification
Si
(f) exterior above ground brick masonry as designated in the Project Specification
(g) interior of structures as designated in the Project Specification.
(h) equipment furnished with and without shop finished surfaces, except as specified in
Clause 8.1.8
5 Surfaces Not to be Painted or Coated. The following surfaces in general shall not be coated
or painted unless otherwise designated:
(a) plastic surfaces

(b) non-ferrous metal (Galvanised metal shall not be considered a non-ferrous metal)
(c) mechanical equipment with approved, designated shop finish
(d) electrical equipment with shop finishes designated in the contract specific
documentation
(e) piping to be galvanised as designated in the Project Specification
(f) chain link fencing.
6 In no case shall any concrete, wood, metal, or any other surface requiring protection be left
unpainted unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or designated in the Project
Specification.
8.1.5 Submittals
1 Manufacturer’s Data. The manufacturer’s specifications and application instructions for paint
materials and systems, including certifications, verification of specified thickness and other
data to show compliance with these specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer.
2 Painting Programme. A detailed painting programme including method statements shall be

submitted for the Engineer’s approval. This programme shall be prepared on the basis of
service environments, surfaces, surface preparation, types of paint materials, types of
primers and sealers, and number of coats. The brand name of the product of the
manufacturer for each use shall be listed.
3 Samples. When required by the Engineer, samples for colour and texture as hereinafter
listed shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval. The Contractor shall be responsible for
compliance with all other requirements.
ar
4 Letter of guarantee required under Clause 8.1.8 of this Part.
at
-Q
1 Protective painting shall be carried out only by approved prequalified subcontractors as
designated in the Project Specification. Protective coating shall be carried out by specialist
LL
subcontractor as designated in the Project Specification.
2 Applicator Qualifications: The Contractor shall provide information demonstrating that

W
applicators have successfully completed coating system applications similar in material and
extent to those included in the Works. Only applicators for which such information has been
s
provided shall be employed.

en
3 Single-Source Responsibility: The Contractor shall provide primers and undercoat material
produce by the same manufacturer as the finish coats for each type of coating. Only thinners
m
recommended by the manufacturer shall be used, and only within the manufacturer’s
recommended limits.
e
Si
Field Samples: Where required by the Engineer field samples shall be provided as follows:
(a) Sample Boards. The Engineer’s colour chips on 300 mm by 300 mm hardboard shall
be matched with colour, texture and sheen duplicated to simulate actual conditions.
Sample boards shall be resubmitted as necessary for selection by the Engineer.
(b) Sample Areas. Where required by the Engineer, partial areas shall be prepared and
finished as directed by the Engineer, using selected 300 mm by 300 mm sample
boards as a guide for final approval of colour, texture and sheen. After approval, the
sample areas shall serve as the standard for workmanship, appearance and materials
for similar areas throughout the project.
4 All epoxy coating work shall be carried out by a specialist firm or contractor approved by the
Engineer. The specialist firm shall be required to submit a letter of guarantee that the
product it proposes to supply when applied in accordance with this specification and any
additional specifications which shall be quoted by the firm will withstand the environmental
service conditions to be encountered. The Contractor shall provide a guarantee of at least
three years in relation to this coating from the time of application of the coating.
1 Except as otherwise specified in this Part, delivery storage and handling of coating and paint
material shall be carried out as specified for paint material in Section 26.
2 Coating and painting materials and apparatus shall be stored in areas approved by the
Engineer. When not in use, storage areas shall be kept locked and inaccessible to those not
employed in protective coatings and painting work. Each storage space shall be provided
with fire extinguishers.
3 Coating and paint containers shall be opened only when required for use. Unless otherwise
specified in this Part, no materials shall be reduced, changed, or used except in accordance
with the manufacturer’s label or tag on container.
4 All coating materials and thinners shall be furnished by the Contractor in original, unopened
containers bearing the manufacturers label and instructions. For materials having a limited
shelf life, the date of manufacture and the length of life shall be shown. The oldest paint of
each kind shall be used first.
ar
5 All coating materials shall be stirred in a container with a power mixer before use to
thoroughly remix the pigments and vehicles. Only thinners specified by the manufacturer
at
shall be used. Mixing and thinning directions as furnished by the manufacturer shall be
followed unless modified by the Engineer’s Representative.
-Q
6 Mixing in open containers shall be done in a well ventilated area. When use of thinner is
permitted, thinner shall be added during the mixing process.
LL
7 If a coating material requires the addition of a curing agent, the pot life under application
conditions stated on the container label shall not be exceeded. When the pot life limit is
W
reached, the spray equipment shall be emptied, remaining material discarded, the equipment
cleaned and the new material prepared.
s
en
8 For paints and thinners, records shall be kept of:
(a) Date of manufacture.

m
(b) Shelf life.

e
(c) Date of use.

Si
(d) Daily usage of thinners.
9 Preparation of the paint for application shall be as BS 5493 and the Manufacturers
recommendations.
10 Coating materials, other than thixotropic materials, which have livered, gelled or otherwise
deteriorated shall not be used.
11 No paint shall be used on expiry of the manufactures recommended shelf life nor when the
paint solids cannot be dispersed by mixing after a maximum of 5% thinners has been added.
8.1.8 Warranty
1 Before beginning coating and specialist paint work, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
with a letter of guarantee from the specialist subcontractor that the products proposed for use
when applied in accordance with the specifications of this Part and the manufacturer’s
instructions will withstand the environmental service conditions to be encountered for a
period of 10 years.
8.1.9 Safety
1 The implementation of manufacturer’s recommendations concerning health and safety

aspects of paints approved by the Engineer for use on the works shall be mandatory.
2 Respirators shall be worn by all persons engaged in, and assisting in, spray painting. In
addition, workers engaged in or near the work during sandblasting shall wear eye and face
protection devices meeting the Engineer’s approval for sandblasting operations and
approved air-purifying, half-mask or mouthpiece respirator with appropriate filter.
3 Where ventilation is used to control potential exposure to workers, ventilation shall be

adequate to reduce the concentration of the air contaminant to such safe limits that a hazard
to the worker does not exist. Methods of ventilation shall meet with the approval of the
Engineer.
4 Cloths and cotton waste that may constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal
containers or destroyed at the end of each work day.
8.2 MATERIALS
ar
at
8.2.1 Coating and Painting Materials
1
-Q
Epoxy coating and painting materials shall be as follows:
(a) Primer
(i) solvent-free low viscosity
LL
(ii) (ii two or three pack

W
(iii) compatible with and have complete intercoat adhesion with the first coat of high
build epoxy paint
s
(b) Protective coats

en
(i) high build straight aromatic amine cured epoxy

m
(ii) two or three pack

(iii) solvent free type
e
Si
(iv) completely resistant to the corrosion conditions to be encountered.

Certain types of coal tar epoxy may also be approved by the Engineer for this purpose
in which case the Contractor shall state the type of coal tar and the curing agent to be
used and the percentage content of coal tar.
2 Stone Paint. Stone paint to be used on exposed external concrete surfaces shall be single
component silane siloxane based water repellent system with not more than 1% water
absorption when tested in accordance with ASTM C97.
3 Fungus and Mould Resistant Finishes. Where a fungus and mould resistant surface is
designated, the surface shall be treated with a fungicide paint in accordance with the
4 Varnish: Varnish shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS EN ISO 150.
5 Where a surface is to receive more than one type of coating or painting material, each
different material used on that particular surface shall have a different colour in order to
facilitate inspection. Colour schedules for coating and painting materials shall be prepared by
the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval.
6 The list of manufacturers of all paints/coatings/corrosion control systems shall be submitted

for approval by the Engineer.
7 All materials for lining/multiple coat work, e.g., priming, undercoat and finishing coat shall be
obtained from the same manufacturer and shall be suitable for using together and for the
surface concerned.
8 All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
9 Manufacturer's samples of all paints, varnishes, etc., shall be submitted, free of cost, in
sealed containers to the Engineer for approval before bulk deliveries are made and before
any paintwork is started.
8.2.2 Coating and Painting Systems
1 The materials, application and use of coating and painting systems are specified in
Tables 8.1 to 8.5. Surfaces in Location A shall receive a total paint thickness of not less than
200 micron and the surfaces in Location B, C and D shall receive a total paint thickness of
not less than 300 micron. The first coat of paint to be applied not more than 4 hours after
ar
substrate preparation. Subsequent coats of paint to be applied within 48 hours of previous
coat. Approval to factory application of this final coat to be sought from the Engineer where
at
delay in application is liable to cause adhesion problems.
-Q
2 Formulate paints with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials that might
be affected by presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at Site.
LL
3 Identification of pipelines shall be generally in accordance with the Contract Drawings or

Specification or as selected by the Engineer.
W
4 Pipelines shall be identified by the colours in Table 8.6. These shall be applied as follows:
(a) Painting the basic identification colour on the pipe or duct over the whole length and
s
super-imposing the colour code identifications at intervals; or

en
(b) Painting the pipe or duct in bands.

m
5 Where banding is adopted, the decorative or protective colour along the rest of the pipe or
duct shall not be any of the basic identification colours.
e
Si
6 The basic identification colours shall be placed at all junctions at both sides of valves, service
appliances, bulkheads, wall penetrations and any other place where identification is
necessary.
7 Any information regarding the fluid such as pressure, temperature, etc., shall be placed on
the basic identification colour or next to the basic identification colour band. The names,
abbreviations or chemicals symbols shall be either in black or white in order to contrast
clearly with the colour of the pipe or with the basic identification colour. The direction of flow
of the fluid shall be indicated by an arrow situated in the proximity of the basic identification
colour and painted black or white in order to contrast clearly with basic identification colour.
8 For closed circuits, the flow and return pipes shall be indicated by the use of the word "Flow"
on the one pipe and the word "Return" on the other.
Table 8.1
Schedule of Paints and Film Thickness per Coat (DFT)
DFT
Ref. Description
microns
Zinc phosphate epoxy corrosion resistant primer
P1 50
Two pack polyamide cured.
P2 Zinc Chromate ditto 50
P3 Zinc phosphate epoxy prefabrication primer. Two pack 50
P4 Zinc chromate ditto 50
T-wash pretreatment for galvanised
T 50
surfaces as described in BS 5493
Epoxy micaceous iron oxide. Two pack.
U1 125
Polyamide cured.
U2 Pure epoxy resin. Two pack. Amine adduct cured. 125
U3 Coal tar epoxy. Two pack. Polyamide cured 125
U4 Epoxy tie coat -
ar
F1 Silicone alkyd enamel 25
at
F2 Urethane. Two pack. -Q -
X Hot dip bitumen solution to BS 4147, Type 1 Grade D* -
Y Aluminium sealer. Single pack -
LL
Table 8.2
Key to Preparation and Painting Schedule
W
Item Locations
s
Surfaces above process liquid level and not liable to splashing. Non-aggressive
A
atmospheres.
en
B Surfaces in contact with untreated or treated water for potable use.

Surfaces below process liquid level or liable to splashing. Non aggressive
m
C
solutions and/or atmospheres.
e
D Surfaces in contact with aggressive solutions and/or atmospheres.

Si
Table 8.3
Preparation Standards for substrates
Item Preparation Standards for substrates
GB Grit blast to Swedish Standards Sa 2 1/2

Z Clean and degrease
Pickle and hot dip galvanise to BS 729 (applied to items which may be pieced
G
sufficiently small and excludes stainless steel).
Table 8.4
Preparation and Painting Schedule for Metal Surfaces (Not Buried Pipes)
Item Item Item Factory Operations
Location Assembly Prep. Coatings
Completed at 1st 2nd
Steel and Ferrous metal parts A Factory GB P1 (a) or P2 (a) U1 (b)
or G - -
Site GB P3 (a) or P4 (a) -
B Factory GB P1 (a) U2 (b)
or G - -
Site GB P3 (a) -
C Factory GB P1 (a) or P2 (a) U3 (b)
or G - -
ar
Site GB P3 (a) or P4 (a) -
at
D G T and P1 -
Cast iron and cast steel A
-Q GB P1 (a) or P2 (a) U1 (b)
including headstocks B GB P1 (a) U2 (b)
C GB P1 (a) or P2 (a) U3 (b)
LL
Non-ferrous metal (except A Z P1 (a) or P2 (a) U1 (b)

W
copper) B Z P1 (a) U2 (b)

C Z P1 (a) or P2 (a) U3 (b)
s
Steel pipes A/B/C/D G - -

en
Iron and steel A/C/D Z - X

m
B GB P1 (a) U2 (b)
Penstocks and valves of A/C/D Z - X
e
Si
cast iron B GB P1 (a) U2 (b)

Steel stairways and
supporting
Structures A/B/C/D G - -
Bridge rail and pin rack rail
Water Towers (Exterior) D Site GB P1 (a) U1 (b)
Table 8.4 (Cont’d)

Preparation and Painting Schedule for Metal Surfaces (Not Buried Pipes)
Item Site Operations and Coatings
Item
Item Assembly
Location 1st 2nd 3rd 4th
Completed at
Steel and Ferrous metal parts A Factory F1 F1 - -
- - - -
Site P1 (f) or P2 (f) U1 (b) F1 F1
B Factory U2 (c) - - -
- - - -
Site P1 (f) U2 (b) U2 (b) -
C Factory U3 (c) - - -
- - - -
ar
Site P1 (f) or P2 (f) U3 U3 (b) -
at
D -Q P1 (f) U3 U3 (b) -
Cast iron and cast steel A F1 F1 - -
including Headstocks B U2 (c) - - -
C U3 (c) - - -
LL
Non-ferrous metal (except A F1 F1 - -

W
copper) B U2 (c) - - -
C U3 (c) - - -
s
Steel pipes A/B/C/D - - - -

en
Iron and steel A/C/D Y Y F1 F1

m
B U2 (b) - - -
e
Penstocks and valves of A/C/D X - - -

Si
cast iron B U2 (c) - - -

Steel stairways and supporting
Structures A/B/C/D - - - -
Bridge rail and pin rack rail
Water Towers (Exterior) D Site U4 F2 - -
Qualifying Notes:
(a) To be applied not more than 4 hours after substrate preparation.
(b) To be applied within 48 hours of previous coat.
(c) Approval to factory application of this final coat to be sought from the Engineer’s
Representative where delay in application is liable to cause adhesion problems.
(d) Refer to Clause 8.3.5.35
Table 8.5
Preparation and Painting Schedules for Surfaces Other Than Metal
Surface Location Finish Particular Primer Final Treatment
Preparation
Hard Wood and Interior Gloss Sand down Q.D. Acrylic Alkyd undercoat
Soft Wood Treat Knots Wood primer Alkyd topcoat
(primed or
unprimed) Exterior Gloss Sand down Lead free Alkyd undercoat
Treat Knots Wood primer Alkyd topcoat (2 coats)
Plaster Interior Flat Degrease Emulsion thinned to High opacity acrylic
(including Sand down manufacturer's emulsion (2 coats)
Plasterboard) instructions
Interior Gloss Ditto Alkali resistant Alkyd undercoat
ar
primer Alkyd topcoat
at
Interior Multi- Ditto Primer Multi-colour wall finish
colour
-Q
Cement Interior Flat - Emulsion thinned to High opacity acrylic
Rendering, manufacturer's emulsion (2 coats)
LL
Concrete - instructions
W
(fair-faced), Interior Gloss - Alkali resistant Alkyd undercoat

Brickwork primer Alkyd topcoat
s
Immersed & splash (Refer to the clause entitled Epoxy Coatings for Concrete and
en
zone Rendered Surfaces)

Aggressive
m
atmospheres
e
Exterior Masonry Stiff brush Stabilising primer Textured emulsion

Si
masonry
paint paint (2 coats)
Hardboard Interior Flat Zinc chromate High opacity acrylic High opacity acrylic
spot primer to emulsion emulsion (2 coats)
screw and nail
heads
Interior Gloss Ditto Stabilising primer Alkyd undercoat
Alkyd topcoat
Table 8.6
Standard Colours
The following colours to BS 4800 shall be used for mechanical and electrical equipment. For
equipment not listed the colour shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Material / Equipment Properties Colour
(a) External machinery 18 E 53 Green-Yellow
(b) Motors and Pumps 14 E 53 Green – Yellow
(c) Panels 14 E 53 Green – Yellow
(d) GRP Covers 08 B 15 Yellow-Red
(e) Sewage Pipework 00 E 53 Black
(f) Airlines 20 E 51 Light Blue
(g) Sewage valves 00 E 53 Black
ar
(h) Airline Valves 20 E 51 Light Blue
at
(j) Water Pipework 12 -Q D 45 Green
(k) Water Valves 12 D 45 Green
(l) Potable Water/Pipes/Valves 12 D 45 Green/18 E 53

LL
Auxiliary Blue
W
(colour code)
(m) Surge Vessels 08 E 51 Yellow

s
en
(n) Fire Extinguishing Systems 04 E 53 Red
(o) Bulk Storage Tanks Aluminium

m
(p) Electrical Services 06 E 51 Yellow-Red

e
Si
(q) Cranes 08 E 53 Yellow
(r) Control Panels, relay 14 E 53 Green-Yellow

panels, Instrumentation
enclosures, fuse switches,
distribution boards,
marshalling cubicles etc.
8.2.3 Abrasive Blasting Materials
1 The abrasive employed in blasting shall be grades steel grit, ball shot, silica safe sand or
similar and shall be such that it will provide a surface roughness complying with the one
specified by the manufacturer for the primer concerned. The abrasive shall be dry, clean and
free from soluble contaminants and shall be selected as specified in BS 4232.
2 The type and size of abrasive used for blast cleaning shall comply with the requirements of
BS 4323 Table 2. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out a series of
tests using various sizes of abrasives smaller than the maximum defined in BS 4232 Table 2
to determine which gives the best profile. This size of abrasive shall be used for all
subsequent blast cleaning. The grading of abrasives for equipment which uses abrasives
more than once shall be checked at regular intervals and fresh abrasives added to ensure
that the correct grading is maintained.
3 The roughness of blast cleaned surfaces measured at the amplitude by any of the methods
defined in BS 4232 shall not exceed 75 microns.
ar
4 The pH value shall not be less than 4 or greater than 10 when mixed in neutral water. The
material shall not contain soluble chloride.
at
5 The level of trace toxic contaminants shall meet Government regulations.
-Q
6 Dune sand shall not be used.
8.3 WORKMANSHIP
LL
8.3.1 General
W
1 Unless otherwise specified in this Part, the preparation coating and painting of surfaces shall
be carried out as specified in Part 26 and in accordance with the recommendations of
s
BS 6150 subject to the approval of the Engineer.

en
2 All coatings and paint shall be applied in a workmanlike manner to produce a uniform film of
m
the specified thickness. Edges, corners, crevices, and joints shall receive special attention to
ensure that they have been thoroughly cleaned and that they receive an adequate thickness
e
of paint. The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush
Si
marks, and variations in colour, texture, and finish.
3 Before beginning coating and painting work, the Contractor shall take precautions to protect
the Works and existing facilities from damage or disfigurement. Where necessary, the
Contractor shall protect equipment by providing clean cover sheets. If in the opinion of the
Engineer the precautions are inadequate, the Contractor shall at his own expense make such
improvements as the Engineer directs.
4 The specified film thickness shall be attained. Particular attention shall be paid to the
attainment of specified film thickness on edges. In hot weather, additional precautions shall
be taken as necessary to ensure the attainment of specified film thickness. Film thickness
shall be checked with a paint inspection gauge furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor
shall calibrate the gauge for the thickness range to be checked at least twice a day. When
measured film thickness is less than specified, additional coats shall be applied as necessary
to attain compliance.
5 Manual grit blasting equipment shall be approved by the Engineer before use. Air
3
compressors shall be capable of supplying a continuous air volume of at least 6 m /min at a
maximum pressure of 7 MPa to each blasting nozzle. The compressed air supply shall be
free of water and oil. Adequate separators and traps shall be provided. Accumulations of oil
and water shall be removed from air receivers by regular purging.
6 On completion of the works, which may have become spotted or touched with paint shall be
cleaned down and all left clean to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
8.3.2 Manufacturer’s Recommendations
1 Unless otherwise specified, the coating and paint manufacturer’s written recommendations
and instructions for storage, thinning, mixing, handling, surface preparation, protection of
other surfaces, application and protection of coated and painted surfaces and for all other
procedures for providing protective coatings and painting shall be strictly observed. No
substitution or other deviation will be permitted without the written permission of the Engineer.
8.3.3 Mixing and Thinning
1 Coating materials and paint shall be mixed only in designated rooms or spaces in the
presence of the Engineer.
2 Paint and coating materials shall be protected from exposure to extreme weather, and shall
be thoroughly stirred or agitated, strained, and kept at a uniform smooth consistency during
application. Materials shall be prepared and handled in a manner to prevent deterioration and
ar
inclusion of foreign matter.
at
3 Paint and coating materials of different manufacturers shall not be mixed together.
-Q
4 Packaged paint and coating materials may be thinned immediately before application in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions. Only thinners recommended by the paint and
coating manufacturer shall be used.
LL
8.3.4 Items Not to be Painted During Coating and Painting Operations

W
1 Hardware, hardware accessories, name plates, data tags, machined surfaces and similar
items in contact with coated surfaces shall not be coated and shall be removed or masked
s
before surface preparation and painting operations. Following completion of coating of each
en
piece, removed items shall be reinstalled. Such removal and reinstallation shall be done by
workmen skilled in the trades involved.
m
2 That portion of steel to be embedded in concrete or masonry shall not be painted and shall
be cleaned as designated for steel surfaces before fixing.
e
Si
1 General
(a) The specified standard of surface preparation shall be attained. Surface preparation
shall have no detrimental effect on the material being protected and shall not be
prejudicial to subsequent coating and painting operations.
(b) In addition to complying with the specifications of this Clause and the manufacturer’s
instructions the Contractor shall take such other measures needed to ensure that all
surfaces are clean, and free of deleterious material including but not limited to dirt,
grease, and oil, before the application of primer and between coats.
(c) All surfaces prepared for coating and painting shall be prepared to the specified
standard and approved by the Engineer before coating and painting work begins.
(d) Cleaning and painting shall be so arranged that dust or spray from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. The sharp edges of steel surfaces
shall be dulled, rough welds made smooth and weld splatter removed. Hardware,
electrical fixtures and similar accessories shall be removed or suitably masked during
preparation and painting, or shall be suitably protected. Equipment adjacent to walls
shall be disconnected and moved to permit cleaning and painting of wall surfaces, and
shall be replaced and reconnected after the painting has been completed.
Notwithstanding anything in this Section, all surfaces shall be prepared in strict
accordance with the approved paint manufacturer's recommendations.
(e) Do not apply paint in temperatures or moisture conditions outside of manufacturer’s
recommended maximum or minimum allowable.
(f) Overcoating intervals recommended by the paint manufacturer must be strictly
adhered to. The manufacturer must be consulted if and when there is a necessity for a
change in overcoating intervals.
(g) Where a high quality finish is required, the surfaces shall be filled with an approved
filler 24 hours after the final priming coat has been applied. When the surface is hard
the whole shall be rubbed down with wet and dry abrasive paper to a uniform flat
ar
surface and left clean and free of abrasions and powdered filler.
(h) All surfaces are to be completely dry and above a temperature of 4 degrees C. No
at
painting shall be carried out during damp or inclement weather.
(i)
-Q
When required by equipment specifications, such equipment shall be primed and finish
coated in shop by manufacturer and touched up in field with identical material after
installation.
Where manufacturer’s standard coating is not suitable for intended service condition,
LL
(j)
Engineer may approve use of a tie-coat to be used between manufacturer’s standard
coating and specified field finish. In such cases, tie-coat shall be surface tolerant
W
epoxy as recommended by manufacturer of specified field finish coat. Coordinate

details of equipment manufacturer’s standard coating with field coating manufacturer.
s
2 Metal
en
(a) Except as otherwise specified in this Clause, preparation of metal surfaces shall be in
accordance with the relevant provisions of BS 4232, BS 5493, BS 7079, and
m
SIS 055900.
e
(b) Steel to be embedded in concrete, other than reinforcing steel, shall be cleaned to SIS
Si
055900 St. 2 and shall not be primed.

(c) Surfaces shall be clean and dry before application of coatings and paint. If coating or
painting takes place over a zinc rich shop primer which has been exposed for an
extended period, the entire coated surface shall be sweep blasted to remove “white
rust” and other contaminants before application of the first coat.
(d) After the surface has been prepared as specified, the surface shall be further cleaned
by vacuum, clean and dry compressed air, or by clean brush to remove accumulated
grit, shot and dust leaving the surface clean, dry and free of scale, rust and other forms
of contamination.
(e) In the event that rusting occurs after the completion of the surface preparation, the
surface shall again be prepared to the specified standard.
(f) When items are to be shop primed or shop primed and finish coated in the shop,
surface preparation shall be as specified herein. The Engineer shall have the right to
witness, inspect, and reject any sandblasting or other surface preparation done in the
shop.
(g) Blast Cleaning. Blast cleaning shall not be carried out
(i) on surfaces that are wet or damp surfaces, or may become wet or damp before
the application of primer,
(ii) when metal surface temperatures are less than 3 C above the dew point
(iii) or the relative humidity exceeds 80 percent.
(iv) In close proximity to subsequent coating operations or near other surfaces
susceptible to dust or particle contamination.
(h) In the event of shot or grit blasting not being possible due to interference, the steel
surface may, with the prior written approval of the Engineer, be thoroughly cleaned by
mechanical means in accordance with BS EN ISO 8504-3 to remove all loose rust and
mill scales and primed with one coat of an alkyd type zinc phosphate primer to
60 microns dry film thickness.
(i) Where blast cleaning is to be carried out outdoors at an exposed (not under cover)
location, preliminary blast cleaning may be done at night with the prior approval of the
Engineer, provided that all surfaces so treated shall be reblasted during daylight hours
to the specified standard before coating or painting materials are applied. This
paragraph does not apply where automatic centrifugal or manual grit blasting is carried
out under adequate cover, provided the specified preparation standard is attained.
(j) Oil or grease contamination shall be removed by solvent wash before blast cleaning. If
ar
necessary, contaminated areas shall be rewashed and reblasted until contamination is
removed.
at
(k) When sandblasting is carried out on Site, care shall be taken to prevent damage to
structures and equipment. Pumps, motors, and other equipment shall be shielded,
-Q
covered, or otherwise protected to prevent the entrance of sand and dust. No
sandblasting shall commence before the Engineer inspects and approves the
protective measures.
LL
(l) After sandblasting, dust and spent sand shall be removed from the surfaces by
brushing or vacuum cleaning.
W
(m) Blast cleaned surfaces that are later to be joined by welding and where shop primer is
to be applied shall not be primed to a distance of 100 mm from the area to be welded.
After welding, the area shall be reblasted and primed as specified.
s
en
(n) Areas that are blast cleaned and shop primed before fabrication and are later welded
on Site shall be reblasted to remove all weld slag and splatter and any other foreign
elements and reprimed as specified.
m
(o) Fabricated metal work shall not be blast cleaned in the shop until machining and
e
fabrication has been completed, including continuous welds, with all exposed surfaces
Si
accessible for subsequent treatment. All slag and spatter shall be removed from the
area of the welds by chipping hammer before blast cleaning.
3 Concrete and Rendered Surfaces for Epoxy Coatings
(a) Concrete and rendered surfaces shall be thoroughly cured, thoroughly dry and free
from moisture before the application of epoxy filler, primer or paint.
(b) Areas of concrete contaminated with substances deleterious to the application of
epoxy coatings including machine oil or grease for example shall be cut out as
necessary to remove all traces of such substances. The voids so created shall be
filled with an approved epoxy mortar. Areas contaminated with form release agent
shall be scrubbed with suitable emulsion cleaners. Mould growth shall be treated
using a water soluble fungicide. All surfaces so treated and any other water soluble
substances on the surface, such as salt, shall be rinsed with potable water until clean.
(c) Where membranes have been used for the curing of concrete these must be removed
and the surfaces thoroughly cleaned before the application of painting and protective
coatings.
(d) All concrete and rendered surfaces to be coated shall be lightly blast cleaned to
remove the cement rich surface layer. Grit and detritus shall be removed by vacuum
immediately prior to priming.
(e) Blow holes and honeycombed areas in the concrete which in the opinion of the
Engineer are not capable of being levelled at the primer stage shall be filled with epoxy
mortar supplied by the coating manufacturer to obtain a smooth uniform surface. Such
mortar shall be knifed into the surface to level the area and leave no excess.
4 Preparation of Plaster, Brickwork and Concrete Surfaces for Coatings and Paint other than
Epoxy
(a) Efflorescence present on the surface of plaster, brickwork and concrete shall be
removed by scraping and brushing before any paint is applied. When efflorescence
has been removed surfaces shall be left for at least three days before priming.
Priming shall be deferred repeatedly, if necessary, until three days after any further
efflorescence which has appeared is removed.
(b) Plaster surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned down smooth as necessary and all
cracks filled in with stopping for plaster. Filling shall be carried out for the entire
surface before paint is applied to the surface.
(c) Brickwork, blockwork and concrete surfaces shall be cleaned of contaminating matter
before being primed. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, large holes which would
ar
cause a break in the paint film shall be filled with mortar and the surface rubbed down
to match the surrounding areas.
at
5 Wood -Q
(a) Wood surfaces shall not be painted when the moisture content of the wood measured
with an electric moisture meter exceeds 12 % for interior surfaces and 18 % for
exterior surfaces.
LL
(b) Hardwoods or softwoods shall be rubbed down with abrasive paper to give a smooth
surface free of contaminating substances, scratches and other imperfections.
W
(c) Surfaces which are to be painted shall be rubbed down to remove all contaminating
substances and imperfections which would be visible in the finished paint film. The
surfaces of knots and resinous streaks shall be painted with two coats of knotting, the
s
first being allowed to dry before the second is applied. Knotting shall conform with
en
BS 1336.
(d) The surfaces of timber treated with waterborne preservative by an impregnation
m
process shall be rubbed down and dry-brushed to remove all traces of efflorescence
e
before the primer is applied.

Si
(e) Where surfaces are suspected of being infected with mould, they shall be treated with
a fungicide.
6 Galvanised Surfaces
(a) Dirt and other adhering contaminating material shall be removed by wire brushing,
brushing with bristle brushes, or by other methods approved by the Engineer. Cleaning
shall not damage the galvanising. Zinc corrosion products remaining shall be removed
by washing with potable water and scrubbing with hard bristle brushes.
(b) After being cleaned and degreased, galvanised surfaces shall be etched with T-wash
as described in BS 5493. If any surface fails to turn black, the cleaning, degreasing,
etching, and T-wash processes shall be repeated as often as necessary.
7 Damaged Surfaces
(a) Factory prepared surfaces, other than galvanised surfaces, during handling, site
fabrication or erection shall be treated as follows:
(i) all slag and spatter shall be removed from areas of welds by chipping hammer
(ii) all areas of damaged primer or other coat shall be thoroughly mechanically wire
brushed and given one priming coat as detailed in Table 8.3
(iii) the priming coat shall be applied by brush taking care to completely cover
uneven
surfaces particularly those of welds
(iv) subsequent coats shall be applied as specified in this Part.
8.3.6 Application of Protective Coatings and Paint
1 All paint and coating materials shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed
specifications or instructions; where these differ from the specification of this Part, the more
stringent requirements shall apply. The Contractor shall issue copies of appropriate data
sheets and of the relevant parts of this specification shall be issued to all supervisory
personnel. Where such instructions conflict with this specification a ruling shall be sought
from the Engineer’s Representative.
2 Unless in conflict with the manufacturer’s printed instructions or otherwise specified, the
Contractor may use brush, roller or air spray. Application by spray painting shall be with the
prior approval of the Engineer. Rollers for applying enamel shall have a short nap. Areas
inaccessible to spray coating or rolling shall be coated by brushing or other suitable means.
ar
3 The Contractor shall ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, bolts, and other areas, as
determined by the Engineer, receive a film thickness equivalent to that of adjacent coated
at
surfaces and not less than the specified thickness.
-Q
4 On beams and irregular surfaces, edges shall be stripe coated first and an extra pass made
later.
LL
5 Application of paint and condition of work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and with BS 6150 and BS EN ISO 12944.
W
6 The designated dry film thickness (DFT) shall be attained for each coat.
s
7 Each coat shall be applied evenly, at the proper consistency, and be free of brush marks,
en
sags, runs, and other evidence of poor workmanship. When these occur, they shall be
brushed out immediately or the materials shall be removed and the surface recoated.
Finished coated surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes.
m
8 Care shall be exercised to avoid lapping paint on glass or hardware. Coatings shall be
e
sharply cut to lines. Whenever two coats of a dark coloured paint are designated, the first
Si
coat shall contain sufficient powdered aluminium to act as an indicator of proper coverage, or
the two coatings shall be of a contrasting colour.
9 All coatings shall be cleaned as specified by the manufacturer before the next coat is applied.
10 Manufacturer’s recommended time between coats shall be strictly complied with. Sufficient
time shall be allowed to elapse between successive coats to permit satisfactory application of
subsequent coats. Once begun, the entire coating operation shall be completed without
delay. Without specific permission of the Engineer, no additional coating of any structure,
equipment, or other item designated to be painted shall be undertaken until the previous
coating has been completed for the entire item. Piping shall not be finish coated until it has
been pressure tested and approved. Exposure of intermediate coats of paint for periods in
excess of a few days shall not be permitted except in the case of work delivered to the Site in
a primed condition and suitably protected.
11 Final coats shall not be applied until after other trades whose operations would be detrimental
to finish painting have finished their work in the area to be painted, and the areas have been
released for final painting.
12 All parts such as pipe supports, seatings and cleats, and back-to-back sections which will
become inaccessible after fabrication shall be treated on both surfaces with the full paint
system before final assembly.
13 Touch-up of all surfaces shall be performed after installation, and all surfaces shall be clean
and dry at the time of application.
14 All paints shall be prepared and applied in strict accordance with the manufacture
instructions. Copies of appropriate data sheets and of the relevant parts of this specification
shall be issued to all the supervisors and foremen concerned with surface preparation and
coating. Where such instructions conflict with this specification a ruling shall be sought from
the Engineer’s Representative.
15 Except where otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer’s Representative all priming
paints shall be applied by brush. Airless spray application only shall be used for painting pipe
lining and is the preferred method for the application of epoxy resin based paint.
16 The dried films shall be free from bloom, shrinkage, sheeriness, wrinkling, sagging,
curtaining, discolouration and extraneous matter.
ar
17 Any primer coat exposed to freezing, excess humidity, rain, dust etc. before drying, shall be
at
permitted to dry and the damaged area of primer shall be removed and surface again
prepared and primed.
-Q
18 Bolted site connections other than facing surfaces of Grip Bolts shall be brought together wet.
LL
8.3.7 Maintenance of Prepared Surfaces
1 Primer or other initial coat shall be applied to all prepared surfaces before deterioration or
W
oxidation of the surface. In the case of metals, primer or other initial coat shall be applied
within one hour or such shorter period of time which may be recommended by the
manufacturer, but always before the metal temperature drops to less than 3 C above the
s
en
dewpoint and before any rusting occurs. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer for
surfaces other than metal, primer or other initial coat shall be applied within 4h of completion
of surface preparation. No prepared surfaces shall be allowed to remain uncoated overnight.
m
8.3.8 Environmental Conditions

e
Si
1 Coatings and paint shall be applied in a dry and dust-free environment. Coatings and paint
shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces or when, in the opinion of the Engineer,
application or drying of paint is likely to be adversely affected.
2 No exterior or exposed paint work shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions; i.e.,
during rain, mist, windstorms, sandstorms, or when the relative humidity exceeds 80 %. Paint
and coatings shall not be applied when it is expected that the relative humidity will exceed
80 % within 18 hours after the application of the coating or paint. Dew or moisture
condensation should be anticipated and if such conditions are prevalent, application of paint
and coatings shall be delayed to be certain that the surfaces are dry. The paint or coating
shall be completed well in advance of the probable time of day when condensation is
expected to occur.
3 During application, painting shall insofar as practicable be shaded from direct sunlight to
prevent wrinkling and blistering. Exterior painting shall be carried out in shade during the
day.
8.3.9 Spray Application
1 All equipment for spray application shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before
application begins. Spray guns hoses and pumps shall be clean before new material is
added. Adequate moisture and oil traps shall be installed between the air supply and each
application unit.
2 Suitable pressure regulators and gauges shall be provided for the air supply to the application
units. Spray equipment and operating pressures shall comply with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3 Heavy pigments which are likely to settle shall be kept in suspension during application by the
use of power driven, continuous agitator.
4 The spray gun shall be held at right angles to the surface. Each pass shall overlap the
previous one by approximately 50 %.
8.3.10 Brush Application
ar
1 When coatings are applied by brush, brushes shall be pure hair bristles and shall be of a
style and quality that will permit proper application of the material. Flat brushes shall not be
at
more that 100 mm wide. Brushes shall be approved by the Engineer. Extending handles
-Q
shall not be used.
2 Brushing shall be affected so that a smooth coat, as nearly uniform in thickness is obtained.
There shall be no deep or detrimental brush marks.
LL
3 Paint shall be worked into all corners and crevices. When applying solvent type coating, care
shall be taken to prevent lifting of previous coats.
W
8.3.11 Shop Coatings

s
en
1 Electrical and mechanical equipment shall be coated and painted as specified in this Part and
in Section 9. The location of coating and painting; i.e., in the shop or on Site, shall be as
specified in Section 9.
m
8.3.12 Site Painting of Manufactured Items

e
Si
1 Steel pipework or fabrication shall be works cleaned and painted in accordance with
Tables 8.1 through 8.4. Total dry film thickness shall be in accordance with the location of
surfaces of painted as specified in Table 8.2
2 Steel, cast or ductile iron encased in concrete (chamber walls and anchor blocks) shall be
prepared and coated as specified under Tables 8.1 through 8.4.
3 Non-ferrous parts shall be protected using the same finishing system as that specified in
Tables 8.1 through 8.4 for the adjacent ferrous metal structure.
4 When any coating which has been applied at a manufacturer’s works is considered by the
Engineer to be unsound or incompatible with the specified system, it shall be rejected. The
surfaces shall be recoated to a finish satisfactory to the Engineer.
5 When the Engineer’s Representative does not require the removal of the manufacturer’s
coating the equipment shall be solvent cleaned.
6 Hard baked finishes shall be abraded or softened by application of a strong solvent.

7 All polished and bright parts shall be coated with an approved rust preventative before
despatch and during erection, and this coating shall be cleaned off and the parts polished
before being handed over.
8 Manufactured items such as pumps motors, compressors, air vessels, conduits, etc. shall be
coated at works to the specification laid down for the environment in which they are to
operate. If this is impractical they may be paint coated to the manufacturer’s standard but
when on site the Contractor shall apply a sealing paint and top coats specified in Table 8.1 to
Table 8.4. Final site painting shall be in accordance with Table 8.1 to Table 8.4. The site
coating shall be 150 microns minimum dry film thickness (DFT).
9 Pre-treatment and primers shall be suitable for the metal concerned and to BS 5493. Dry
film thickness shall be a minimum of 200 microns for all conditions.
8.3.13 Site Application
1 Protective coverings shall be used to protect surfaces, fixtures, and equipment. Care shall be
exercised to prevent paint from being spattered onto surfaces from which such paint cannot
be removed satisfactorily. Surfaces from which paint cannot be removed satisfactorily shall
ar
be painted or repainted as required to produce a finish satisfactory to the Engineer.
at
2 Upon completion of the work, staging, scaffolding and containers shall be removed from the
site in an approved manner. Paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be
-Q
removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No paint, solvents, rags or other materials used
by the Contractor shall be disposed of in any manner or location except as approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor is specifically cautioned to prevent paint of solvents to be in
LL
contact with plants or liquid streams.
8.3.14 Epoxy Coating Work

W
1 In addition to the general requirements of this specification the following shall apply to epoxy
s
coating works:
en
(a) illumination at work site the satisfaction of the Engineer’s Representative

(b) forced draught ventilation to the approval of the Engineer shall be used wherever
m
required for the needs of personnel or for drying out surfaces

e
(c) operatives shall work in pairs.

Si
2 The Contractor shall demonstrate his methods equipment and materials before any work
commences. Samples areas of substrate shall be prepared and coated as required by the
Engineer and for his approval.
3 There shall be strict control of surface cleanliness between primer and epoxy coating and
between coats of the same type. Vacuum removal of dust and sand shall be employed and
contamination shall be removed as specified in appropriate surface preparation clauses
herein. Dirt or dust trapped in the painted surface shall be removed with suitable abrasive
paper. The surface being painted shall be completely dry and free of visible moisture
throughout the operations.
4 The paint shall be applied only to clean dry primed or previously coated surfaces. Any thick
runs or collections of paint shall be removed before they harden.
5 Not less than two coats shall be applied over the primer by airless spray; not less than three
by brush.
6 Each coat shall be distinctly different in colour from the primer or previous coat. The colour
of the final coat shall be as required by the Engineer. Each coat shall be seen to have
completely covered the preceding coat without “misses” or pinholes or any areas visibly low
in thickness. A high voltage pinhole detector shall also be used to determine the integrity of
the coats.
7 The manufacturer of the coating shall stipulate primer and epoxy recoat intervals for all
curing temperatures likely to be encountered and these shall be adopted with a maximum
tolerance of +4 h. Where this is exceeded, the surfaces to be recoated shall first be suitably
abraded to remove gloss and provide a key.
8 Wet thickness gauges shall be used by the coating operators continually to check that
sufficient paint is being applied to achieve the desired dry film thickness.
8.3.15 Epoxy Coatings for Concrete and Rendered Surfaces
1 No priming shall commence until the moisture content of the cementitious surface is less
than 5 % measured by instruments approved by the Engineer.
ar
2 Similarly moisture measurements over the primer or any epoxy intercoat shall not exceed
1 % on the concrete scale of the instrument when the probe tips are held against such
at
painted surfaces just prior to recoating. -Q
3 The primer shall be applied by suitable nylon bristle brush or spray over the whole area to be
coated at such thickness that it may then be squeezed into the pores of the concrete.
Excess shall be removed by the most suitable means before application of the high build
LL
epoxy.
4 The Engineer may approve an alternative application method where the Contractor can
W
demonstrate a suitable technique.

s
5 The total dry film thickness of the paint layer shall have a minimum value of 0.75 mm.
en
6 Whenever the Paint Inspection Gauge has been used and wherever the coating has been
otherwise damaged for 50 mm around such damage the surface shall be abraded and the
m
area touched in with not less than two thick applications to restore the coating integrity and
thickness to that specified.
e
Si
7 Adhesion tests will be carried out on the cured coating surface using the test equipment
supplied under the Contract in accordance with the best practice. The resulting test
specimens shall show no indication of poor adhesion to the substrate, residual laitance or
intercoat adhesion weakness.
8 Where required in the Project Specification or on a written request by the Engineer, the
following instruments shall be provided for the Engineer sole use for the duration of the
Contract:
2
(a) one adhesion tester (0-35 kg/cm )
(b) one DC high voltage Holiday detector No. 105
(c) one paint inspection gauge
(d) one moisture meter.
8.3.16 Galvanising and Other Finishes of Metals
1 Galvanising and other finishes of metals shall be carried out as specified in Parts 3 and 6 of
Section 8.
1 The Contractor shall conduct dry film thickness (DFT) measurements and other inspections
of all painted work, on completion of which the Engineer will make his own measurements,
examinations and inspections. If painted works are found unsatisfactory, the contractor shall
carryout remedial works as necessary at his expense and the works shall be retested by the
Engineer until such time the works are found satisfactory.
2 The Contractor shall provide and maintain two sets of the following inspection devices in
good working condition until final acceptance of painting and coating. One set shall be for
the Contractor’s use and the other for the sole use of the Engineer. On final acceptance of
painting and coating, the inspection devices will be handed back to the Contractor.
(a) Svensk Photographic Standard in accordance with SIS 055900

(b) non-destructive magnetic-type DFT gauge
(c) wet fill thickness combs
(d) surface profile meter
ar
(e) non-destructive type electrical holiday detector
at
(f) low-voltage detector of the wet-sponge type and a non-sudsing type wetting agent, for
testing discontinuities and voids in epoxy and thin film coatings
-Q
(g) high-voltage, low-current, spark type detector for electrical inspection of coal-tar
enamel only
(h) maximum and minimum thermometer
LL
(i) hygrometer
W
(j) flow cup type B No. 4 and timer.
END OF PART
s
en
e m
Si
Part 09: Trenchless Pipeline Construction
9 TRENCHLESS PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION ................................................ 3
9.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 3

9.1.1 Scope 3
9.1.2 Related Sections and Parts 3
9.1.3 References 3
9.1.4 Definitions 3
9.1.6 Submittals 3
9.1.7 Specialist Subcontractor 5
9.1.9 Site Conditions 5
9.2 TRENCHLESS PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY ......................... 5
9.2.1 Scope 5
ar
9.2.2 Surveys and Setting Out 5
9.2.3 Monitoring Lines and Levels 6
at
9.2.4 Temporary Site Facilities -Q 7
9.3 MATERIALS .................................................................................................. 7
9.3.1 Pipes 7
LL
9.3.2 Joint Packing 10

9.3.3 Lubricant 10
W
9.3.4 Joint Sealant 10

9.3.5 Grout 10
s
en
9.4 THRUST AND RECEPTION SHAFTS ......................................................... 11
9.5 PIPEJACKING ............................................................................................. 12

m
9.5.1 General 12
e
9.5.2 Tunnelling Shields for Pipejacking 12

Si
9.6 MICROTUNNELLING .................................................................................. 12

9.6.1 General 12
9.6.2 Contractor Responsibilities 13
9.6.3 Safety and Environment 13
9.6.4 Performance Requirements 14
9.6.5 Micro-tunnel Design Elements 15
9.6.6 Design Checking 17
9.6.7 Finite Element (FE) and Finite Difference (FD) Models 17
9.6.8 Verification of Results 18
9.6.9 Design Parameters for the Calculations 18
9.6.10 Design Loadings 18
9.6.11 Design Submissions 19
9.6.12 Certification Procedure 20
9.6.13 Contractor’s Documents 20
9.6.14 Construction Responsibilities 21
9.6.15 Quality Assurance/Control 21
9.6.16 Materials 22
9.6.17 Temporary Works 22
9.6.18 Construction Preparation 22
9.6.19 Pipeline Installation 23
9.6.20 Construction Execution 24
9.6.21 Working in Compressed Air 24
9.6.22 Ground Pre-treatment 25
9.6.23 Drainage During Construction 25
9.6.24 Disposal of Tunnel Seepage and Waste Water 26
9.6.25 Testing 26
9.6.26 Grouting 26
9.6.27 Surface and Building Settlement Monitoring 27
9.6.28 Contractor’s Obligations 28
9.6.29 Microtunnelling Machine 28
9.7 THRUST SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 28
ar
9.8 LUBRICATION HOLES................................................................................ 29
at
9.9 RECORDS ................................................................................................... 29
-Q
9.10 TESTING ..................................................................................................... 29
9.10.1 General 29
LL
9.10.2 Watertightness 30
W
s
en
e m
Si
9 TRENCHLESS PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION

9.1 GENERAL
9.1.1 Scope
1 This part includes the specification for the construction of pipelines by microtunnelling,
pipejacking or other trenchless methods approved by the Engineer.
9.1.2 Related Sections and Parts

This Section
Part 1, General
Part 2, Earthworks
ar
Section 1, General
Section 5, Concrete
at
-Q
9.1.3 References
LL
BS 2494,.....................Materials for elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and pipelines

W
BS 5228,.....................Code of practice for noise control on construction and demolition sites

BS 6164,.....................Code of practice for safety in tunnelling in the construction industry.
s
9.1.4 Definitions
en
1 Pipejacking: technique for constructing pipeline by thrusting pipes or other permanent lining
m
of preformed units progressively into the ground by means of jacks or similar equipment
while excavation proceeds at the leading end.
e
Si
2 Microtunnelling: small diameter tunnelling technique employing mechanical excavation

methods usually within a non-man entry guided tunnel boring machine with primary lining
inserted behind by jacking.
3 Shaft: excavated thrust and reception pits used for tunnelling operations.
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the pipes including joints to meet the
requirements of the method of construction.
9.1.6 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit complete data and details for the trenchless pipeline construction
for the Engineer's approvals follows:
(a) Structural design calculations for the trenchless pipeline and temporary works:
(i) the description and specification of pipes and design calculations.
(ii) details of the permitted angular deflection and draw for the proposed pipes.
(iii) the Contractor shall submit full details of the pipes together with details of
previous works undertaken using similar pipes.
(iv) details of proposed manufacturer of pipes with relevant literature and details of
manufacturer's Quality Control system.
(v) anticipated jacking loads.
(vi) structural design of thrust walls.
(b) Shop drawings.
(c) Materials Specifications.
(d) Method statements which shall include:
(i) details of the specialist sub-contractor's qualifications and experience in micro-
tunnelling together with project references including previous employers' names
and current contact details and a curriculum vitae of the proposed tunnelling
machine operator including details of relevant experience in Qatar and the
Middle East.
(ii) detailed procedure for the Works.
ar
(iii) a description of tunnelling equipment with relevant literature and a statement
at
from the tunnelling machine manufacturer detailing a delivery schedule for spare
parts and consumables for the proposed tunnelling machines.
-Q
(iv) preconstruction activities (geotechnical investigations including test pits).
(v) safety procedures.
LL
(vi) handling and fixing of the inner pipe in the case of pipe jacking with larger
diameter pipes.
W
(vii) programme of work, including proposed production rates.

(viii) bentonite injection system details.
s
(ix) detailed method statements for all other aspects of micro-tunnelling work.
en
(x) where appropriate for the size of machine proposed, details of man access into
the tunnel and tunnel boring machine.
m
(e) Designs of thrust and reception shafts and detailed drawings.

e
(f) Dewatering arrangements and disposal of groundwater.

Si
(g) Methods for dealing with different ground conditions.

(h) Equipment layout at the thrust and reception shafts.
(i) Details of sleeving system.
(j) Ventilation.
(k) Lighting and communications.
(l) Disposal of surplus excavated material:
(i) details of the spoil separation process to produce clean slurry for recirculation to
the tunnel boring machine.
(ii) details of the containment of the excavated material to prevent water and slurry
draining from the Contractor's designated working area or wagons. Lagoons for
storage and settlement of slurry from the micro-tunnelling process will not be
permitted.
(iii) details of the purpose made tanks for settlement of slurry shall be provided.
(iv) details of the solid waste disposal procedure to an approved tip in a manner
which does not cause spillage of slurry, mud or any other solid or liquid waste on
the carriageway.
(v) disposal of surplus water, once all solids have been removed, to an approved
surface/ground water outfall, if locally available, or removed by tanker to an
approved point of disposal.
(m) Pilot bore.
(n) Plan at 1:50 scale showing working plant positions, spoil removal faculties, materials
storage facilities, launch and reception shafts, fencing, offices, discharge lines, ground
water removal facilities, etc.
2 The Contractor shall not procure materials or begin construction of the Works until the
Engineer has approved all submittals. The Engineer’s approval shall not relieve the
Contractor of his obligations under the Contract.
9.1.7 Specialist Subcontractor
1 The Contractor shall employ an approved specialist subcontractor experienced in trenchless

methods for the pipeline construction.
ar
1 The Contractor shall employ an approved prequalified specialist subcontractor as designated
at
in the contract specific documentation. All personnel in the employment of the subcontractor
shall be experienced and competent in their respective tasks and shall work only under the
control of a qualified supervisor.
-Q
9.1.9 Site Conditions
LL
1 The Contractor shall carry out additional geotechnical site investigations which he considers
necessary. The results of such investigations and laboratory testing together with the factual
W
and interpretive reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The Engineer’s
approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the Contract.
s
9.2 TRENCHLESS PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY

en
9.2.1 Scope
m
1 Where a pipeline is designated in the Contract documents to be constructed by a trenchless

e
method, the Contractor shall not be permitted to adopt open trench methods and shall
Si
confine his surface operations to working shafts and the area immediately adjacent to such
shafts. In locations where construction of pipelines is not indicated to be by trenchless
method, the Contractor may elect to construct additional lengths of pipelines by a trenchless
method in accordance with this specification, subject to the Engineer’s approval.
9.2.2 Surveys and Setting Out
1 Before commencing the excavation of any shafts for pipejacking or microtunnelling, the
Contractor shall
(a) establish at least four adequately protected bench marks comprising steel pins
embedded in a block of concrete adjacent to the shaft to facilitate the setting out of
the underground works
(b) record the initial levels for pipelines beneath or across roads and submit a copy of
these to the Engineer
(c) record and report with supporting photographs of the condition of structures, roads,
footpaths and other paved areas that are located over and beside all jacking or
microtunnelling routes.
2 During construction of a drive between any two working shafts, the Contractor shall observe
levels on predetermined cross-section points at regular intervals to determine if there is any
subsidence.
Temporary benchmarks shall be set up along the centre of the pipe at 15 metre intervals
between the shafts and at 5 and 10 metres offsets. Levels shall be taken along the centre of
the pipeline and at offsets of 5 metres and 10 metres each side of the pipeline at 15 metre
intervals between shafts. Levels shall be taken and recorded on all of the above points at
daily intervals during micro-tunnelling works, again one week before issue of a Completion
Certificate, and finally at the end of the 400 day period of maintenance.
3 Immediately following completion of the drive between any two working shafts, the Contractor
shall
(a) repeat the level survey of the ground surface along the centreline of the drive as
described above
(b) record and report to the Engineer with supporting photographs any changes to the
condition of roads, footpaths and other paved areas.
ar
4 Before the completion of the whole of the Works and again before the expiry of Period of
Maintenance, the Contractor shall repeat the surveys and inspections as described above for
at
all of the trenchless pipeline construction.
-Q
5 The Contractor shall determine the location of all working shafts having due regard to
existing services, minimising disruption to traffic and pedestrian movements and achieving
the required system layouts, as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall prepare
LL
suitably scaled working drawings for the setting out of the Works, including the location of
existing services and all other relevant details and submit these for the Engineer’s approval.
W
6 As-built surveys of each micro-tunnel drive shall be undertaken. For all micro-tunnel drives
of internal diameter 800 mm or more, including any permitted sleeves of this size, the
Contractor shall employ an approved independent survey company to undertake an as-built
s
survey of the drive. Coordinates and levels shall be provided for every pipe joint. For steel
en
sleeves, coordinates and levels shall be provided at 5 metre intervals. Each completed drive
shall be surveyed immediately after completion of the drive. No further micro-tunnel drives
m
may be commenced until the survey results have been submitted to and approved by the
Engineer. No pipes may be installed within sleeves until the survey results have been
e
submitted to and approved by the Engineer.

Si
9.2.3 Monitoring Lines and Levels
1 A laser guidance system shall be used for the control of the pipe alignment. The shield/tunnel
machine shall be fitted with a calibrated laser target, robustly constructed and rigidly secured
to the shield/tunnel machine.
2 The setting of the laser and target and the alignment of the tunnel relative to the laser beam
shall be checked frequently at intervals as directed by the Engineer. In addition, the
Contractor shall verify the accuracy of the laser guidance system by conventional theodolite
and level control methods to the approval of the Engineer.
3 The invert level of the finished pipeline at the drive shaft shall be within ±10mm of the
required level shown on, or interpolated from, the Contract drawings.
The invert level and line of the pipeline shall at no point deviate from the design by more than
the following:
Pipe Bore Vertical Horizontal
D mm mm mm
D < 600 ± 20 ± 25
600 ≤ D ≤ 1000 ± 25 ± 40
1000 < D ≤ 1400 ± 30 ± 100
D > 1400 ± 50 ± 200
4 The pipe manufacturer’s stated permitted draw or angular deflection shall not be exceeded at
any individual joint.
5 If the line and levels of any section of pipeline deviates from the design alignment within the
tolerances the shield/tunnel machine shall be steered in a manner that ensures a gradual
ar
return to the correct alignment.
at
6 If the deviation in the lines and levels exceeds the tolerance specified above, the Contractor
shall stop work and immediately inform the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit proposals
-Q
to rectify the deviation. Work shall be resumed only on the written instruction of the Engineer.
7 Where micro-tunnelled sewers are required to connect into existing pipelines or pipelines
previously completed under this project, due allowance for the tolerance shall be made prior
LL
to commencing the drive to ensure that the finished pipeline profile does not require the pipe
contents to flow uphill.
W
9.2.4 Temporary Site Facilities

s
1 In addition to the provisions of Section 1, the Contractor shall provide the following at each
en
thrust shaft as a minimum:
(a) air-conditioned mobile office

m
(b) telecommunication between the mobile office and the work crews
e
(c) adequate ventilation

Si
(d) approved gas detectors and oxygen meters

(e) first aid kit.
1 The Contractor shall adopt safe working practices for tunnelling in accordance with BS 6164.
Only authorised personnel shall be allowed access to the Site.
2 The Contractor shall ensure that a suitably qualified safety officer is present during tunnelling
operations.
9.3 MATERIALS
9.3.1 Pipes
1 Pipe material and the lining and coating shall be as designated in the Project Specification. If
the use of other pipe material or lining and coating is proposed, technical details and
justification shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
2 Pipes shall be designed to withstand the maximum axial thrust with a factor of safety of four
based on the full effective area of the pipe and the ultimate compressive strength of the pipe
material. For reinforced concrete pipes the full effective area at the joint shall be used. The
pipe design shall take into account both permanent service loads and temporary loads
encountered during installation.
3 Where GRP or similar material pipes with concrete surround are proposed the concrete shall
be regarded as sacrificial. The concrete surround shall be designed to withstand the
maximum jacking force. The design shall also ensure that the GRP or similar material pipe
is not subjected to forces during installation. Vitrified clay pipes shall be in accordance with
Clause 3.2 of this Section.
4 The Contractor’s submittals shall describe the measures to be taken to avoid the
development and transfer of grout shrinkage and expansion stresses to the pipe and to avoid
any adverse chemical reaction between the pipe and the concrete, grout or other materials
comprising the pipeline. The pipe manufacturer shall guarantee that the crushing and beam
strength of the pipe are sufficient for their intended use.
5 Joints in pipes shall be designed to avoid projections which could obstruct the travel of the
ar
pipe. Joints shall be watertight under axial loading and at the permissible deflection of the
pipes. Quality control tests at the factory shall include subjecting the pipe joints, at maximum
at
permissible deflection, to a hydrostatic pressure of 0.2 MPa.
-Q
6 Standard pipes shall generally be of 2.0 m in length. Where required, pipes shall incorporate
lubricant injection holes spaced equally around the circumference. Concrete pipes with a
liner shall only be permitted to have lubricant injection holes in the concrete. Lubrication
LL
holes shall be clear of joints and shall be plugged on completion of the work. Pipes may
incorporate lifting holes and fixing holes for securing temporary apparatus; all such holes
shall be threaded to enable plugs to be screwed into the sockets to withstand external water
W
pressures.
7 Joints which shall be used in conjunction with a resilient packing and shall be capable of
s
accepting repeated angular deflections as recommended by the pipe manufacturer without

en
(a) damage to pipe or loss of structural integrity

m
(b) the ingress or egress of water or lubricant under the maximum test pressures
e
(c) the ingress of either or both soil or groundwater onto the bearing surfaces.
Si
8 Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer the joint design for concrete pipes shall be such
that areas available for transmitting the maximum permitted thrust force will be sufficient to
ensure that with an angular deflection of 1  and with resilient packing material in place, the
maximum pressure applied to the joint bearing surface will not exceed 23.5 MPa for drives up
to 100 m in length and 21.0 MPa for drives in excess of 100 m in length.
9 Unless Authenticated independent test results acceptable to the Engineer are available, two
consecutive axial load tests incorporating a 1  angular deflection with the application of
double the maximum permissible thrust force (or, if greater, of the greatest thrust force that
the proposed thrust equipment can apply) shall have been successfully conducted without
visible crushing, cracking or spalling of the pipe being evident, before pipes will be accepted
for use. The tests shall be extended to record the loading at which visible signs of failure
become evident, and shall be carried out in an approved manner to simulate actual working
conditions. Pipes which have been submitted to the proof load test will not be permitted in
the Works.
10 Where the Contractor elects to construct certain sections within larger diameter pipes and
grout the annular space, the external pipe may be of steel. The difference between the
external face of the inner pipe and the internal face of the outer pipe shall not be less than
150 mm. The steel pipe and the grout shall be regarded as sacrificial and the inner pipe shall
be designed as a stand alone pipe, capable of withstanding installation forces and soil, traffic
and groundwater loads.
11 Where the Contractor elects to construct certain sections not within larger diameter pipes,
pipe installation by trenchless methods shall continue until at least one additional length of
pipe beyond the limit of trenchless construction is exposed. The condition of the exposed
pipe and its exterior coating will be inspected by the Engineer. Where in the opinion of the
Engineer the pipe or coating has been excessively damaged during installation, the
Contractor shall submit a proposal for review by the Engineer, for demonstrating the
adequacy of the pipeline installed by trenchless methods and for rectifying defects. The
proposal shall also include jacking out of defective pipes.
12 Concrete jacking pipes shall comply with the provisions of BS EN 1916 and BS 5911-1.
13 Collars shall be manufactured from weldable stainless steel plate Grade 316 Ti (EN 1.4571).
ar
They shall be provided with suitable stainless steel lugs or anchors to enable them to be cast
into the body of the pipe, if applicable.
at
14 Joints in concrete jacking pipes shall be in-wall flexible joints of the fixed collar type. They
-Q
shall be designed to include one or more joint seals. All joint surfaces which will transmit
load during installation shall be plane and free from irregularities that could cause high local
concentrations of stress.
LL
15 The nominal internal bore of the micro-tunnelling pipes shall be as indicated on the Drawings
or as specified by the Engineer. The Contractor shall select an appropriate external diameter
W
for the pipe which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
16 The design of the jacking pipes and determination of acceptable pipe fabrication tolerances
s
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Maximum compressive stresses applied to the
en
pipe shall not exceed 33% of the design compressive strength of the pipe and shall not
exceed the pipe manufacturer’s recommended allowable stresses.
m
17 Pipes for installation by micro-tunnelling shall be fit for purpose and shall be one of the
e
following:
Si
(a) Concrete designed specifically for jacking to BS EN 1916:2002 and BS 5911-

1:2002+A2:2010 with a GRP pipe lining in accordance with Section 8 Part 3 Clause
3.4. . The GRP lining pipe shall incorporate watertight joints between adjacent pipes
and shall accept no longitudinal load during jacking. The joint between adjacent pipes
shall be designed to ensure concentricity of adjacent pipes and shall prevent
application of any lateral forces to the GRP pipe. The coarse aggregate used in the
manufacture of the pipes shall be crushed Gabbro rock. The external surface of the
pipe shall be coated with at least 300 DFT abrasion resistant epoxy. Pipes shall be
factory manufactured by an approved experienced manufacturer. Pipes shall not be
manufactured on-site.
(b) Concrete designed specifically for jacking to BS EN 1916:2002 and BS 5911-
1:2002+A2:2010 with a polymer lining as described in Section 5 Part 14 Clause 14.6.
The coarse aggregate used in the manufacture of the pipes shall be crushed Gabbro
rock. The external surface of the pipe shall be coated with at least 300 DFT abrasion
resistant epoxy. Pipes shall be factory manufactured by an approved experienced
manufacturer. Pipes shall not be manufactured on-site.
(c) Direct jack GRP pipes to BS ISO 25780:2011 shall be in accordance with Clause 3.4
of this Section.
(d) The joint between adjacent jacking pipes shall be designed to ensure concentric
alignment of adjacent pipes and uniform transfer of jacking forces from one pipe to the
next. The pipe joint shall consist of a substantial external stainless steel guide ring to
achieve this requirement. The joint shall also incorporate one or more EPDM or other
approved elastomeric sealing gaskets.
9.3.2 Joint Packing
1 Packers shall be incorporated into each joint in concrete jacking pipes in order to distribute
the jacking pressure and avoid point loads and to prevent damage to the ends of the pipes
during the jacking process. The packers shall not extend over the full joint width, a gap to the
inside surface should be left to prevent localised spalling, in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations.
2 The material used for packing shall withstand all imposed loadings applied during the
installation of pipes for each completed length without showing signs of deterioration or
distress. The initial thickness of the packing shall be such that the final joint gaps achieved
upon completion of the pipeline are a normal width of 8 mm.
ar
3 The material proposed for the joint packing and its mechanical properties shall form part of
the pipe design submission from the Contractor.
at
9.3.3 Lubricant
-Q
1 Lubricant shall always be used. Lubricant shall be polymer or bentonite-based slurry
approved by the Engineer. It shall be stored and mixed in a manner recommended by the
LL
supplier and tested before use. Sufficient quantity of the lubricant material shall be kept
available at Site.
W
9.3.4 Joint Sealant
1 The joint sealant for the jacking pipe shall be of the elastomeric ring type complying with
s
BS 2494. Joint sealants shall be stored in a manner recommended by the supplier.

en
9.3.5 Grout
m
1 Grout used for slurry replacement shall

e
Si
(a) consist of either ordinary or sulphate-resisting cement and water as determined by

geotechnical data and directed by the Engineer
(b) have nominal strength at least equivalent to the requirement for Grade 20 concrete.
(c) have admixtures only if tests have shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that their
use improves the properties of the grout, such as by increasing workability or slightly
expanding the grout.
Full details of the proposed grout mix including admixtures shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval.
2 Grout used for annular space filling shall
(a) be a low-strength foam concrete placed at low pressures.

3
(b) have a mix density in the range 900-1200 kg/m
(c) have free water/cement ratio not greater than 0.6.
The internal pipe shall be filled with water to avoid floatation forces, hydration temperatures
and to resist forces during grouting. A 5 m high free vented standpipe shall be used. A free
venting standpipe of not less than 100 mm diameter shall be installed on the grout injection
feed to restrict grouting pressures to a maximum of 0.1 MPa. GRP carrier pipe and joints
shall be protected from the possible adverse physical or chemical effect of grout, and
compressible material shall be wrapped around the pipe.
9.4 THRUST AND RECEPTION SHAFTS

1 The dimensions of thrust and reception shafts shall be the minimum necessary to construct
the Works.
2 Excavations shall comply with the requirements in Part 2 of this Section. Dewatering, if
necessary, shall be conducted at a rate which will minimise the inducement of settlements at
the ground surface. The shafts shall be kept dry at all times.
3 The thrust wall of the thrust shaft shall be normal to the proposed line of thrust. The thrust
wall shall be sufficient to accept repeatedly the maximum permitted thrust force without
ar
movement. The Contractor shall not thrust directly from permanent parts of any shaft, or
walls of other structures. The thrust wall shall not be joined to the jacking rig base concrete.
at
4 Shaft base slabs shall be capable of withstanding external uplift pressure from groundwater,
-Q
if any, in addition to other imposed loads.
5 Any tail tunnel which has been used as a reaction surface shall pass the designated
LL
watertightness test at a time not less than 14 days after the load has been removed.
6 The design of the thrust wall and any other associated temporary works shall be such as to
W
prevent damage to any part of the permanent works.

s
7 Any void between the soil face used to provide a reaction to the thrust force and the thrust
wall shall be grouted up.
en
8 Where the excavation is in water-bearing ground, the Contractor shall provide means of
m
checking whether any solids are being removed with the water from excavation. Regular
checks shall be made to compare the volume of solids removed with the calculated volume
e
as a safeguard against excessive loosening or loss of material beyond the shaft dimensions.
Si
9 The Contractor shall select the location of the drive and reception shafts. These locations
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. These shafts may be incorporated as part of
the permanent works. All modifications to the shafts converting them into access manholes
shall be completed at the Contractor's own expense. Details of the modifications shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall conform to those shown on the Contract
drawings.
10 Prior to commencing work at a shaft, the Contractor shall provide details of the shaft support
system, working plant position, spoil facilities, material storage facilities, dewatering
arrangements, etc. The details shall include a sketch of all the working facilities at the head
of the shaft.
11 Access down into the shaft for personnel and equipment shall be approved by the Engineer.
Hand railing set at a height of 1 100 mm above ground level together with toe boards and
protective netting to prevent equipment falling into the shaft shall be provided at each shaft.
Fencing shall be erected around each shaft site establishment to prevent the entry of
unauthorised persons.
12 The dimensions of shafts shall be the minimum necessary to safely construct the Works.
13 Backfilling of shafts shall be undertaken in accordance with Section 8 Part 2 Sub-Clause

2.3.3.
9.5 PIPEJACKING
9.5.1 General
1 The maximum lipping between edges of adjacent jacked pipes shall not exceed the
maximum tolerance given in Clause 9.2.3 of this Part.
2 The horizontal drive rate shall be maintained equal to the excavation rate throughout the
operation.
3 Where dewatering is required it shall incorporate standby facilities and shall have been in
operation sufficiently in advance to attain stable groundwater levels before beginning
tunnelling. If, during the course of the work, the shaft face becomes unstable through water
ingress, it shall be immediately sealed and made safe.
ar
4 Damaged pipes shall be replaced either by pushing through to the end of the line or broken
out and replaced by pushing up adjacent pipes.
at
5 The Contractor shall ensure that oil and lubricant spillage is minimised. Any spillage of oil or
-Q
lubricant shall be cleared as soon as is practicable and the inside of the pipes shall be
cleaned on completion of the pipejacking.
9.5.2 Tunnelling Shields for Pipejacking

LL
1 Where considered necessary, the Contractor shall provide and maintain a shield suitable for
W
excavating in the ground conditions as envisaged by him and in accordance with his chosen
method of excavation. In determining the type of shield and method of excavation to be
used, the Contractor shall take account of the need to ensure that the face of the excavation
s
is adequately secured at all times such that ground loss is kept to a minimum and is
en
controlled to prevent excessive ground loss. The shield shall be removed on completion of
the tunnelling operation.
m
2 Rotating excavating heads fitted to shields shall be capable of rotating clockwise and
e
counter-clockwise.
Si
3 The shield shall be equipped with steering jacks and such beads, ploughs and copy cutters
as may be required for adjusting the alignment of the pipes.
4 Multiple lubricant injection points shall be provided within the shield in order to provide
immediate ground support when necessary.
9.6 MICROTUNNELLING
9.6.1 General
1 Micro-tunnelling shall be defined as a method of installing pipe or casing by jacking the pipe
or casing behind a remotely controlled, laser guided, steerable, guided tunnel boring machine
which fully supports the excavated face with fluid and/or earth pressure balance at all times.
2 Micro-tunnelling pipe is defined as pipe or casing capable of withstanding installation jacking

and any other construction loads in addition to permanent live and dead loads.
3 The method to be employed for micro-tunnelling shall be selected by the Contractor to suit
ground conditions and ground water pressure. The Contractor shall submit a detailed
method statement which shall be approved by the Engineer prior to commencing micro-
tunnelling.
9.6.2 Contractor Responsibilities
1 The Contractor shall carry out, and be responsible for, the detailed design of:
(a) The micro-tunnel;

(b) All associated works (including shafts, connections, etc.).
2 The design shall be prepared by qualified design engineers or other professionals who
comply with the criteria stated in the Specifications. The Contractor warrants that he, his
designers and design sub-contractors have the experience and capability necessary for the
design. The Contractor undertakes to ensure that the designers shall be available to attend
discussions with the Engineer at all reasonable times.
3 The Contractor shall satisfy himself that he has sufficient geotechnical details before
ar
commencing the detailed design. If available, a copy of existing geotechnical investigation
reports shall be provided to the Contractor. These reports are provided for information only
at
and the Contractor is advised to corroborate the details provided and commission any
additional site investigation works he deems to be necessary.
-Q
4 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that he avails himself of all necessary
utilities information, existing and proposed, prior to commencement. Where available, a copy
LL
of existing utilities information shall be provided by the Engineer. These reports are provided
for information only and the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the information
collected is the most recent and factual record of existing and proposed services in the
W
project area. The Contractor shall utilise appropriate equipment and methods to aid him in
the determination of the line and level of existing utilities apparatus. This may be undertaken
either by the Contractor’s own staff or by specialist sub-contractors.
s
en
5 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all approvals/consents required for the
disposal of excavated material/spoil that is surplus or unsuitable for incorporation in the
m
permanent works. The Contractor may propose, subject to the approval of the Engineer,
remedial measures to be taken for the improvement of earthwork arisings, which are not
e
suitable in the as-dug condition, for use in the permanent works.

Si
6 The Contractor shall allow the Engineer full access to real time micro-tunnelling data any time
during construction.
9.6.3 Safety and Environment
1 The Contractor shall carry out all works to the requirements outlined in all current appropriate
Regulations, Codes of Practice. The following recognised documents shall form the basis for
guidance and development of the safety plan and site procedures:
(a) UK Health and Safety at Work Act including the provisions of BS 5228, Parts 1 and 2;
(b) BS 6164: Safety in Tunnelling (Code of Practice);
(c) Guide to Best Practice for the Installation of Pipe-jacks and Micro tunnels.
2 The Contractor shall develop a safety plan to encompass all aspects of safety and
environmental requirements prior to commencement of the work. This plan shall be a
working document and be subject to continuous review throughout the period of the contract.
3 All machinery, including hoists shall be suitable for quiet and efficient operation and shall be
installed and maintained to an acceptable safety standard.
4 A site safety culture shall be instigated on-site prior to work commencing and be developed
throughout the course of construction. The culture will comprise of the use of key
management tools by the site management (and outlined in the site safety plan) in educating
the site operatives in all aspects of best safety practice and awareness in their work. An
induction session shall be given to all operatives and staff irrespective of their discipline and
experience. This should, in particular outline all local requirements relating to the contract,
actions to be taken in event of emergencies, and an overview of the Site and its personnel.
The content of the induction may be varied to suit the recipients. Each operative shall
receive training, together with any appropriate examination or documentation, to ensure he is
completely aware of the requirements of each aspect of his job and the hazards which are
inherent in its execution.
5 The Contractor shall produce a risk/hazard analysis of the key elements of the pipe-jacking
operation and utilise the results of the analysis in reducing such risks that remain to a
minimum. Such hazards shall be communicated to workers through induction, tool box talks
and the like.
6 The Contractor shall develop and implement a plan for immediate underground evacuation in
the event that the presence of toxic/inflammable gas is identified in the excavation. In such
ar
case the Contractor shall identify and take appropriate action to rectify such hazard prior to
allowing work to recommence.
at
7 Appropriate training and certification shall be given to all operators of plant. This shall be
-Q
carried out only by engineering staff competent in the use and hazards associated with the
particular item of plant concerned.
LL
9.6.4 Performance Requirements
1 The micro-tunnelling system shall be selected by the Contractor to suit local ground and
W
groundwater conditions. The Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement for
approval by the Engineer prior to starting micro-tunnelling work.
s
2 Micro-tunnelling operations shall be carried out in a manner that minimizes ground

en
movement in front of and surrounding the pipeline. Settlement of the ground surface shall be
minimized. Damage to structures and utilities above and in the vicinity of the underground
m
operations shall be prevented.

e
3 The ground shall be continuously supported in a manner that prevents loss of ground and
Si
maintains the stability of the tunnel face and perimeter at all times.
4 A full work force shall be maintained on a continuous basis (24 hours per day) during any
emergency or work stoppage that could endanger the tunnel excavation, sub-surface
infrastructure and surface facilities.
5 Dust, noxious gasses or other atmospheric impurities shall be actively controlled in

accordance with the relevant Qatar occupational health and safety legislation. Approved
instrumentation for monitoring air quality in work areas and pipelines accessed by personnel
shall be provided. This environmental control and associated procedures to be followed in
monitoring shall be fully documented in the Contractor’s Safety Plan.
6 All micro-tunnelling and underground construction work shall be performed in accordance

with the relevant Qatar occupational health and safety legislation and the approved
Contractor’s Safety Plan. This Plan shall include safe procedures to mitigate risks associated
with the work, including identification and logging of any and all visitors into and out of the
underground works and prevention of unauthorized entry. Safe procedures shall also be
established for personnel entering the tunnel to carry out maintenance or for other purposes.
9.6.5 Micro-tunnel Design Elements
1 Tunnel Pipe Design
(a) The watertight lining pipe shall be installed by single pass pipe jacking using a remote
controlled tunnelling operation to the alignments and grades shown on the drawings.
Remote controlled tunnelling operations apply to trenchless pipe installation by micro-
tunnelling where the carrier pipe is installed directly behind the tunnelling machine and
the machine provides support to the excavation face at all times.
(b) All jacking pipes, including special designs, shall be sufficiently reinforced with steel to
withstand all stresses induced by handling, jacking, earth and water pressures and all
working loads at the depths at which they are to be used without cracking, spalling or
distortion. A load factor of not less than 1.5 shall be used in the calculations to
determine the strength of the pipes required. The clear cover to any steel
reinforcement shall not be less than nominal 50 mm. The pipes are designed and
calculated in according ATV 161 (Technical Standard of pipe jacking).
(c) The strength of the pipes shall be tested by a three edge bearing test. When
subjected to the design load in such a test, the maximum crack developed on the pipe
ar
shall not exceed 0.25 mm. If this test not possible an equivalent quality control and
security system has to be developed.
at
(d) All pipes shall be manufactured by a supplier approved by the Engineer. The process
-Q
of manufacture may be by centrifugal or vertical casting subject to submission and
approval by the Engineer. All pipes shall be cast with a minimum of 3 grout holes
equally spaced around the pipe wall. A steel threaded insert (¾ to 1 BSP minimum
dimension) shall be cast in each hole. All pipes shall be of spigot and socket design
LL
with an integral steel collar cast on the socket or trailing end. The collar shall be
suitably and securely fixed to the reinforcing cage of the pipe prior to the pipe being
cast. Each pipe shall have a 75 mm dia lifting hole or lifting anchor cast in the top
W
centre to facilitate a lifting device. All pipes shall have their date of manufacture clearly
and indelibly marked on them. All pipes shall be fully cured and have reached the
s
designed concrete strength prior to delivery.

en
(e) The Contractor shall submit full details of his proposals for the pipes, giving detailed
drawings showing sizes, reinforcement and jointing arrangements, all cast in items and
m
concrete design including specifications for all component materials. A full set of
design calculations including the parameters adopted for the design shall also be
e
submitted.
Si
(f) The name of the manufacturer, place of manufacture and manufacturing process shall
be identified at an early stage and provision made for inspection of such facilities by
the Engineer for his approval.
(g) The jacking equipment including any required intermediate jacking stations shall have
a capacity of not less than 20 per cent greater than the calculated theoretical
maximum jacking load.
(h) The design of the tunnel shall take into account the required life span, the proposed
use, the ground conditions, the sequence and timing of construction and the local
existence of adjacent structures. Relaxation of stresses in front of boring machine and
excavation, installation and water-tightness of lining pipe should be considered. The
required life span is 100 years. 100-year durability design shall meet the requirements
of BS 8110.
(i) Numerical methods shall be used to evaluate the loading on the lining pipe. Results of
the numerical calculations shall be used to assess surface settlements. The
Contractor shall specify, justify and explain the model he intends to use. The
Contractor shall also submit two licensed English versions of the software including all
manuals, to the Engineer.
(j) The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of the numerical model and
the assumptions necessary to fully simulate the anticipated ground and the tunnel
excavation within it, the installation of any support measures and the construction of
the permanent tunnel lining system. The Contractor shall provide in his Design
Submission numerical simulations which are applicable to and reflect the work and
construction stages proposed by him. State of the art modelling techniques, material
properties, simulation procedures and material definition, shall be applied. In addition
the Contractor shall at least consider the requirements as outlined below for the
modelling process:
2 Tunnel Access Shaft
(a) The positions of the micro-tunnel shafts and tunnel are shown on the Contract
Drawings. The Contractor may suggest alternative positions to suit his equipment and
works programme. The final depth and position of the shafts and tunnel however shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(b) The working shaft shall be designed to withstand the force applied by the main jacking
station and of adequate dimensions to fully cater for the underground installation of all
necessary pipe-jacking equipment. This will include the jacking frame and thrust ring
ar
assembly, slurry pumping equipment, electrical isolation box and guidance system.
Consideration must also be given to safe access and working space for the pit bottom
at
crew. The design of the shaft base shall incorporate the requirements of a thrust block
for the jacking frame to bear upon and a tunnel launching eye and sealing ring through
-Q
which the TBM is launched. The design of these structures will depend on the type of
ground and jacking pressures envisaged. They are normally considered to be
temporary structures, being removed on completion of the drive, but consideration may
be given to incorporating them in the permanent works wherever possible.
LL
(c) Requirements for launching the TBM assembly, which may comprise multiple units of
W
varying length, shall also be taken into consideration when deciding upon the overall
size of the shaft base.
(d) Micro-tunnel shafts shall be placed at main road intersections to take drainage from
s
the surrounding areas.

en
(e) Micro-tunnel shafts shall be built to Employer’s standards and requirements. The
Contractor may propose alternative designs subject to the approval of the Engineer.
m
(f) Shaft openings shall be located within the central reservation or footway areas. No
e
openings shall be accepted within the highway carriageway.

Si
(g) The design of the tunnel shafts shall take due account of the following:
(i) Need to provide a structurally sound and stable reinforced concrete shaft wall
and superstructure that shall comply with all relevant BSI standards. Design
calculations and materials shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer prior
to any construction work being undertaken.
(ii) All shafts shall be watertight.
(iii) All shafts for sewerage applications shall be full lined internally with GRP in
accordance with Part 4, Clause 4.4.1.
(iv) All shafts for surface water / ground water applications shall have a combination
of GRP lining and epoxy protective coating internally in accordance with Part 4,
Clause 4.4.2. .
(v) Where practical, the underside of the base slab and external faces of the walls
shall be protected by a membrane tanking system. Where this is not possible,
the Contractor shall propose a protection system for approval by the Engineer.
(vi) All ladders, platforms and handrails, where shown on the Contract Drawings,
shall be to QCS Section 8, Part 6, Clauses 6.4.1 to 6.4.7. Platforms shall be
provided at maximum distances of 6 metres and shall be positioned to allow
maintenance equipment to be lowered unhindered to the base of the shaft.

Ladders shall terminate at platforms and be staggered between platforms.
(vii) Down-pipes shall be secured by stainless steel brackets to the inside of walls.
9.6.6 Design Checking
1 All drawings and calculations intended for incorporation into the design package shall be
checked by an approved Independent Checker. Evidence of the extent and scope of
checking carried out on each set or subset of calculations shall be provided either in the form
of parallel calculations or by marking up the calculation sheets or by providing a summary on
the cover sheet.
2 All drawings shall be checked with due consideration for the following:
(a) completeness;
(b) compliance with the relevant requirements of the Contract Documents;
(c) consistency between calculations, schedules, reports, drawings, specifications;
ar
(d) compliance with standards, codes, regulations and statutory requirements;
(e) dimensional accuracy and presentation.
at
3
-Q
With his approval the Independent Checker confirms that the relevant documents are in
compliance with the Employer’s requirements, relevant local and international standards and
designed correctly.
LL
9.6.7 Finite Element (FE) and Finite Difference (FD) Models

W
1 A numerical analysis shall be carried out and fulfil the following geometrical requirements:
(a) Notwithstanding the requirements as listed below the mesh layout shall be such that
s
numerical accuracy is guaranteed. If required, the Contractor shall perform sensitivity

en
studies with different levels of mesh refinement.

(b) Width of mesh shall extend at least two tunnel diameters beyond the limits of the
m
tunnel lining.
e
(c) The model used for the design at the ground sections of the tunnel shall be capable of
Si
considering the joint system and joint properties of the ground strata, by either explicitly
modelling joint systems or applying suitable models with equivalent properties.
2 Element size around excavation contours shall not be larger than those elements that
correspond to an angle of 10 degrees along the arch. Infinite elements shall be used along
the border of the mesh or a suitably large mesh shall be proposed so that the influence of
boundary of mesh is negligible for FE models: The practical limit of the aspect ratio of zones
should be kept to approximately 1:4 or less in order to achieve reasonable solution accuracy.
The practical limit for FD models of the aspect ratio of zones should be kept to approximately
1:1 or less in order to achieve reasonable solution accuracy.
3 Each computation shall be accompanied by a report that shall at least include a description
and interpretation of:
(a) definition of the mesh;

(b) selection of design sections;
(c) definition of geological strata;
(d) selected input parameters;
(e) material models used;
(f) results including surface settlements and expected deformations in the tunnel;
(g) dimensioning of the tunnel lining.
9.6.8 Verification of Results
1 Numerical calculations for the design of the lining shall be verified using different analytical
methods.
9.6.9 Design Parameters for the Calculations
1 Parameters required for the design and not defined in this document shall be established by
the Contractor. All details on these parameters shall be provided by the Contractor in his
Design Basis Report subject to the consent of the Engineer.
2 The results of site investigations carried out are to be summarised in the Data Reports and
the Contractor shall conduct supplementary site investigations within the project area as
designated and/or where considered appropriate. The interpretation of all site investigation
data, including the interpretation of the Data Reports and of the bore logs shall be the
ar
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall justify and explain the derivation of all
his geotechnical parameters in his geotechnical interpretative report. The geotechnical
at
parameters used for the design require the consent of the Engineer. The worst credible
ground parameters as identified in the site investigation data shall be used to check the
-Q
micro-tunnel lining (at the ultimate limit state).
9.6.10 Design Loadings

LL
1 The Contractor shall include for the following loads in his calculation of the stresses and
strains induced in the installed pipeline:
W
(a) Ground/Rock Loads;

(b) Water Loads: Groundwater levels with sufficient safety margins for the design shall be
s
determined from groundwater observations. The design calculations shall be carried

en
out both for an upper bound and a lower bound of the ground water level subject to the
consent of the Engineer;
m
(c) Live Loads: For underground structures under a roadway, a live load as defined in BS
5400, Part 2 for highway bridges considering type HA loading combined with 45 units
e
HB loading shall be allowed for in the design;

Si
(d) Surcharge Loads: For all underground structures and in locations where live loads as
specified above do not apply, a surcharge load of 22.5 kN/m² applied at ground level
shall be allowed for in the design;
(e) All other loads.
2 The Contractor shall take into account any other loading criteria which may be applicable to
achieve the full performance of the micro-tunnel, including water pressures under operational
conditions within the lined tunnel.
3 In addition to the design sections as defined above the Contractor shall carry out case
studies of all relevant and possible combinations of geological, hydrogeological and
geometrical conditions as necessary for his design and construction. The Contractor shall
also provide calculations in accordance with the soil /rock classification proposed by the
Contractor and based on the Contractor’s geotechnical interpretation. The Contractor’s
calculations shall cover all possible geotechnical conditions anticipated over the entire tunnel
length. Notwithstanding the calculations as requested above, the Contractor shall consider
within his design submissions one numerical simulation of the tunnel construction of at least
every 400 m of the bored tunnel section. Within the Preliminary Design Submission the
Contractor shall propose these calculation sections which shall be subject to the consent of
the Engineer.
9.6.11 Design Submissions
1 The Contractor shall submit his proposed detailed design report to the Engineer for approval,
not less than four weeks prior to his intended construction start date for this element of work,
or as specified by the Engineer. The submission should include, but not be limited to, the
following :
(a) Summary of all subjects addressed in the design stages;

(b) Summary of the design criteria adopted in the design stages;
(c) Final hydraulic model for overall drainage system including all input and output data;
(d) Final hydraulic design and calculations for overall drainage system including
connections;
(e) Final hydraulic design and calculations for the temporary pumping station if required.
2 For the purpose of obtaining all necessary approvals on completion of the detail design
stage, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following:
ar
(a) 4 no. complete sets of detail drawings-paper prints (A1) to include:
(i) The modified positive surface water drainage system and micro-tunnel plans at
at
1:1000 scale based on survey sheets and incorporating coordinate grid,
proposed sewers connections, access and maintenance shafts, invert, cover
-Q
and ground levels. Key plan of the proposed system plans including coordinate
grid, contract area, sewer connections, main building and road/street names,
and layout plan of the temporary pumping station sites at 1:100 or 1:50 scale if
required.
LL
Sections of micro-tunnel and the modified positive surface water drainage system at
W
1:1000 horizontal and 1:100 vertical scales. Sections are to be related to each the
system plan and include chainages, access and maintenance shafts number, invert,
cover and ground level, tunnel diameter, gradient, terrain crossed, major service
s
crossings and any connecting branch sewer details.

en
Standard drawings for the modified positive surface water drainage system, micro-
m
tunnel cross section, access and maintenance shafts and miscellaneous details to
appropriate scales based on Employer’s standards.
e
(b) 4 no. complete sets of the detailed construction specification;

Si
(c) 4 no. Bills of Quantities, containing the principal items;

(d) The submittal of the detail design for approval shall also be accompanied by 4 copies
of a comprehensive “Engineering Report” including the design calculations, which will
detail revisions and amendments to the design subsequent to the approvals given for
design. The report shall include copies of the comments made on the design and
corresponding actions taken;
(e) Drawings, designs, documents and reports submitted for approval will not be accepted
if there is no evidence of internal, qualified, checking; or if the quality of the contents of
the Drawings and documents clearly indicate that they have not been checked
thoroughly;
(f) Partial submittals will not be accepted.
If significant changes are required to the above original document submissions, the
Contractor shall re-submit to the Engineer.
9.6.12 Certification Procedure
1 The entire design of the Bored and any Cut and Cover Tunnels (layout design, structural
design and geotechnical design) shall be checked by the Accredited Checker. On
completion of the design and check the respective certificates shall be submitted to the
Engineer in accordance with the UK DMRB BD 2/02.
2 The Contractor shall provide a certificate of assurance from a reputable TBM manufacturer
or refurbisher to warranty that the proposed TBM is fit for purpose to carry out the intended
works.
3 At least four weeks before the commencement of any tunnel excavation works, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer test certificates concerning all material properties and
characteristics as defined in the relevant sections herein and/or used for tunnel design
purposes from an independent and acknowledged source.
9.6.13 Contractor’s Documents
1 The Contractor’s Documents shall comprise, but not be limited to the following:
ar
(a) Safety Procedure Manual (Project Specific Safety Plan);
at
(b) Risk mitigation plan; -Q
(c) Contingency plan;
(d) Pre-construction inspection reports of adjacent properties and utilities;
LL
(e) List of drilling team (Names, qualifications, experience, training, etc.) and management
control.
W
2 Full details of the micro-tunnelling system shall be supplied with the above submittals,
including:
s
(a) Type(s), number(s) and model reference of proposed micro-tunnelling system.

en
If not from single source, detail main elements of the system.

(b) Written confirmation from manufacturer (with company seal) that the machine
m
configuration is suitable for the external diameter of pipe proposed.

e
(c) Cutter face details, including tooling and face port opening dimensions.
Si
(d) System of alignment control and steering control and activation.

(e) Full details and justification for excavation and spoil disposal method(s).
(f) Hydraulic jacking system maximum capacity and method of limiting to maximum
jacking pipe capacity.
(g) Details of any intermediate jacking stations.
(h) Electrical system and on-site power supply.
(i) Proposed communication system between the MTBM (Micro-Tunnel Boring Machine)
and operating personnel on the surface.
3 Full and comprehensive details of the procedures and resources that will be used to perform
the work shall be provided, including;
(a) Machine launch and reception;

(b) Pipe handling and connections;
(c) Supplementary alignment surveying;
(d) Excavation and spoil disposal;
(e) Closure of any intermediate jacking stations;
(f) Emergency procedures;

(g) Ventilation of tunnel, including gas monitoring.
(h) All materials, including slurry, lubricants;
(i) Location of approved spoil disposal facility;
(j) Drawings showing layout, temporary equipment locations and complete jacking set-up
in typical jacking shaft.
4 Daily logs shall be used to record the micro-tunnelling work and any associated delays. The
log shall be submitted to the Engineer for record purposes on a weekly basis. The basis of
the log shall be the electronic data recorder that operates with the micro-tunnelling system.
The log shall include:
(a) MTBM alignment deviation data and applied jacking load shall be recorded at intervals;
(b) Alignment deviation shall not exceed 0.3 m in 5 minutes;
(c) The commencement and completion of jacking of each pipe section;
(d) The operating pressure if pressure balanced system is used;
ar
(e) Quantities of lubricant injected;
at
(f) Air quality monitoring results; -Q
(g) Unusual events.
9.6.14 Construction Responsibilities

LL
1 During construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for:
(a) Providing a temporary and secured drainage system for the Works (N.B. restricted
W
access, safe and dry working environment, etc.);

(b) Taking all necessary precautions to protect the tunnel and/or adjacent properties from
s
flooding (e.g. groundwater may be problematic in the area);

en
(c) Provision of a temporary wall, if required, to enable the executed tunnel section to
serve as temporary storage.
m
2 The Contractor shall provide temporary pumping facilities to the extent required to avoid
e
delays to the construction programme and quality of the work. The Contractor shall also
Si
indicate any EFA sites (Emergency Flood Area) if required for flood alleviation works during
the construction works and confirm the availability of the land. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the fencing, safety and security of any temporary EFA areas. Any fuel and/or
power sources shall be provided as appropriate. All facilities/connections in this respect shall
comply with standard regulations regarding their storage and/or use.
3 The Contractor however shall be responsible at his cost for providing temporary submersible
pumps to evacuate any flooded tunnel sections and discharge to an acceptable outfall point.
9.6.15 Quality Assurance/Control
1 All pipes delivered to site shall be the subject of inspection and approval by the Engineer
before they can be incorporated in the Works. Any and all rejected pipes shall be immediately
removed from site and replaced with pipes acceptable to the Engineer. Pipes and pipe
gaskets shall be stored or stacked on-site in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2 Every jacking shift shall be supervised by at least one person with previous experience of
micro-tunnelling work. Operators of the micro-tunnelling system shall have prior knowledge
and ability in its proper operation and shall run test the system after set-up and before
starting the drive. The Contractor shall follow manufacturers’ instructions when operating the
complete system and operational manuals shall be available to site operational personnel at
all times.
3 The installed pipeline shall be subject to visual inspection. Visible leaks (flowing or dripping
water) in pipes, pipe joints, manholes and structures shall be repaired even if leakage test
requirements are satisfied.
9.6.16 Materials
1 Pipe repair materials shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer as suitable for the intended
purpose and applied strictly in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s instructions. Water
used for lubricant or grout shall be of neutral pH and shall be clean, fresh and free from oil,
organic or other deleterious matter. Polymers shall be non-toxic and grout for filling voids
outside the installed micro-tunnel pipeline shall be designed by the Contractor and submitted
for approval. The pipe material shall be reinforced concrete (RC) or GRP subject to the
ar
at
2 The Contractor shall also submit a sample of the pipe wall section, joint band and gasket
seal. This wall section shall be completely fitted with the proposed grout bush and flush
-Q
fitting plug to be watertight.
3 The Contractor shall obtain the pipe manufacturer’s warranty that the pipe conforms to the
LL
specifications and shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
9.6.17 Temporary Works

W
1 The Contractor shall develop his temporary works design taking into account all site
s
constraints identified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall provide
en
clear method statements detailing all stages of the temporary works including supporting
calculations for the temporary works. These method statements shall be issued to the
Engineer before works can commence. Calculations shall be included where relevant, e.g.
m
as part of settlement checks on adjacent structures. A “Detailed Safety Plan” identifying

hazards and mitigating measures shall also be included in the Temporary Works Method
e
Statements.
Si
9.6.18 Construction Preparation
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for:
(a) the means and methods of micro-tunnelling and pipe jacking operations and shall be
solely responsible for and shall ensure the safety of the work, his site personnel, the
public and adjacent property (public and private);
(b) maintenance of clean working conditions at all locations at all times;
(c) control and implementation of safety precautions for personnel entering pipeline;
(d) organizing equipment in all areas to ensure safe operation at all times;
(e) providing safeguards to prevent leakage of fuel or lubrication oils from micro-tunnelling
system equipment. Hydraulic oils used by the Contractor’s plant shall be bio-
degradable and non-flammable.
9.6.19 Pipeline Installation
1 The pipeline shall be placed within 50 mm of the vertical and 200 mm of the horizontal
alignment shown on the Drawings. Steering corrections shall be made to the pipeline so that
the joint to joint angle of any two adjacent pipes does not exceed 0.5 degrees. The
Contractor shall submit daily records of deviations.
2 Each section of pipe shall be jacked forward as the excavation progresses in such a manner
that complete and adequate ground support is provided at all times and such that joints
maintain their integrity and the pipe train continuity is maintained.
3 The Contractor shall ensure that jacking loads do not exceed the manufacturer’s safe jacking
capacity by effective management of the pipe jacking alignment and pipe lubrication controls
(intermediate jacking stations).
4 No damaged pipes shall be permitted to be used in the permanent works. Pipes damaged in
the casting and handling process in the factory shall not be permitted on-site. Repairs to cast
pipes, either in the factory or on-site shall be confined to minor cosmetic repairs only. All
repairs shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and carried out to an approved
ar
procedure. Any pipes identified as being unfit for use in the tunnel shall either be removed
from site and destroyed or clearly marked and quarantined for later inspection and possible
at
repair. -Q
5 A proprietary seal of rubber or EPDM shall be incorporated in each pipe joint, including joints
between pipes and inter-jacks / TBM. The design of the seal shall be commensurate with the
detailing of the pipe joint. Seals may be fitted either at the place of manufacture or on-site
LL
prior to placing of the pipe below ground. In either case the seals shall be fitted in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions. Seals shall be inspected for damage by the surface
crew immediately prior to pipe use and any damaged seals replaced. Pipe seals shall be
W
suitably lubricated with a soap solution or other such compound in the pit bottom immediately
prior to closing the joint with the jacking frame.
s
6 A minimum of 30 mm thick Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF) packer shall be fitted to the
en
socket face of each pipe prior to the pipe being used in the tunnel. The packer, comprising
several segments to form the 360% annulus, shall be firmly glued to the socket end and in
m
such manner as to be 25 mm inset from the intrados of the pipe. These packers may be
fitted on either at the factory or on-site, however it should be noted that in wet weather
e
conditions suitable protection may be required in cases of lengthy exposures.

Si
7 Pipes shall only be lifted on-site using the cast in lifting hole or lifting anchor and a purpose
made lifting device. Such device shall be fully tested and carry relevant certification. Pipes
shall be stored in an orderly fashion in a designated area, not more than two pipes high and
on purpose made timber supports.
8 Pipes shall be power lowered by crane or gantry down the working shaft and set on a
purpose made cradle comprising the base of the jacking frame assembly. The cradle shall
have been set true to line and level prior to commencement of the jacking and secured to the
shaft bottom. The thrust wall assembly behind the jacking frame shall also be set at right
angles to the line of drive to ensure that no misalignment occurs at the pipe joint on closure.
The lifting device shall be removed from the pipe prior to the joint being closed and jacking of
the pipeline recommenced. The lifting hole shall be sealed with a precast concrete plug and
rapid setting mortar prior to the hole location passing through the eye seal. Jacking of the
pipeline shall be carried out in such manner as to limit any deflection at a joint to the
manufacturer's recommended maximum. Pipe loadings shall normally be limited to 50% of
the design load (or similar as agreed) whereupon an inter-jack assembly shall be installed.
9 On completion of a drive the line shall be fully inspected for damage or leaking joints. The
Contractor shall propose remedial works in such cases. Holes used for injection of lubricants
shall be filled with an approved mortar to a smooth finish at the intrados of the pipe.
9.6.20 Construction Execution
1 All excavation works shall be properly set out to the line, level, curve or slope required within
accepted tolerances. Survey stations, centre lines, bench marks and grade lines shall be
clearly marked in paint on the tunnel walls. Chainages at 10 metre intervals shall also be
clearly marked by appropriate permanent means.
2 Internal tunnel marking shall be done prior to jacking any “lining” pipes. This method can be
used to mark the exact location of any problem areas during the jacking operation.
3 The Contractor shall establish and maintain reference control lines and grades for the Works,
which shall be used to exactly locate the pipeline and structures. The primary control for the
micro-tunnelling system shall be checked at least once per week or not more than 60 metre
intervals of constructed pipeline.
9.6.21 Working in Compressed Air
1 Provisions shall be made on the tunnelling machine to facilitate entry into the face of the
machine under compressed air for inspections and maintenance. These provisions shall
ar
comply in all respects with all relevant statutory regulations governing work in compressed
air. The airlocks and other equipment fitted to the machine shall comply with the
at
requirements of CENprEN12110. -Q
2 All equipment and personnel necessary to perform such interventions for inspection or
maintenance shall be available throughout the pipe-jacking operations.
LL
3 The Contractor shall submit details of the compressed air installation for the Engineer’s
approval, along with details of the qualification and previous experience of lock attendants,
medical lock attendants, compressor attendants and supervisory staff.
W
4 In highly permeable ground where air losses might be excessive, arrangements shall be
s
made to inject thick bentonite slurry into the face prior to an intervention to form a cake on
en
the exposed face in order to limit air loss.
5 Air compressors shall have a standby capacity of at least 50% and be powered by an
m
independent power source.

e
6 All essential parts of the compressed air system, including pipelines carrying compressed air
Si
to the face, shall be duplicated. All pipework, valves, gauges, etc. must be protected from
impact damage. Where flexible hoses are used to carry the compressed air through the pit
bottom jacking arrangement they shall also be protected from entrapment. In the event of
failure of one part of the system it should be possible to isolate that part without interrupting
the air supply.
7 A safety valve shall be fitted to free air side of the pressure bulkhead of the tunnelling
machine. This safety valve shall be set to relieve at marginally above the working pressure
and shall be of adequate size to match the installed capacity of the air compressors. Prior to
any work in compressed air the system should be tested to working pressure.
8 Any airlock fitted to the tunnelling machine shall be at least 1.5 meters diameter. The air lock
should be designed as a pressure vessel, subjected to a hydraulic test and issued with an
appropriate test certificate. Air lock doors should be at least 500 millimetres by 400
millimetres. Doors should normally be kept closed by the air pressure but the door opening
to the front of the tunnelling machine should also be able to be locked shut whilst persons are
being decompressed in the lock. The airlock should be comprised of two chambers to allow
access into the working chamber in case of emergency. For use at pressures above one bar
the lock should be fitted with seating for the persons being decompressed. Where the
working pressure is above 0.7 bar a medical lock shall be provided which shall be manned by
a medical lock attendant whenever work in compressed air is in progress and for twenty four
hours afterwards. If necessary the quality of the compressed air supplied to the working
chamber shall be improved by coolers and filters to ensure compliance with the specified
requirements. The supply of compressed air to the working chamber shall be sufficient to
ensure that the level of any contaminant shall not exceed 10% of the short term exposure
level when measured at atmospheric pressure. Air quality should be monitored at least once
per day.
9 The Contractor shall appoint a registered medical practitioner experienced in compressed air
work to advise on decompression methods to be adopted and on all other aspects of health
ar
relating to the work in compressed air. All employees will be medically examined prior to
working in compressed air. Records will kept of all medical examinations and details of each
at
compressed air exposure including working pressure, working time, decompression
procedures, etc. No person shall be allowed to work in compressed air if the Contractor has
-Q
reason to suspect that person is under the influence of drink or drugs such that his capacity
is impaired. No one shall be allowed to enter the compressed air working chamber alone.
10 An experienced lock attendant shall be on duty at the free air side of the air lock at all times
LL
when there are persons in the compressed air working chamber. All valves gauges and
controls at the lock attendant’s station shall be clearly marked with their function and method
W
of operation.
11 Smoking shall be banned in compressed air and no person shall take smoking materials into
s
compressed air. As far as is practicable no combustible material shall be taken into the air
en
locks and or the working chamber. The use of burning or welding equipment should be
strictly limited and shall be subject to a permit to work system. Fire extinguishers shall be
m
provided in the air locks and the working chamber whenever work in compressed air is in
progress.
e
Si
9.6.22 Ground Pre-treatment
1 Pre-treatment of the ground, where applicable, shall be applied in advance of the tunnel
excavation to provide sufficient stability of the excavated area. Execution of such works shall
not commence before consent has been given to the design of such works by the Engineer.
The surface settlement monitoring shall be installed, initialised and baselined prior to any
ground modification work.
9.6.23 Drainage During Construction
1 The Contractor shall supply, install, operate and maintain sufficient pumps and pipe work to
control and remove water from any part of the underground works. Standing water shall not
be allowed. The capacity of pumps installed where required, including at launch/reception
pits, shall always be at least twice the normal volume of the inflow of water plus the volume of
flushing water if drilling equipment is used. The minimum capacity of the pumps shall be 20
l/s.
2 The Contractor shall store or immediately have available standby pumps in good working
conditions of the same capacity. This equipment shall be maintained properly and tested
frequently.
3 The Contractor shall provide settlement tanks or other decontamination facilities before the
water is discharged. The Contractor shall submit his design for these facilities as part of his
method statement. The Contractor shall remove all accumulated slurry, silt or other debris
from the Works on an ongoing basis.
9.6.24 Disposal of Tunnel Seepage and Waste Water
1 Tunnel seepage and wastewater arising from the Works shall be collected and discharged
via a settlement tank. Seepage and wastewater shall not be discharged into the public
drainage system unless it meets the standards listed below. Where necessary, the water
shall be treated to achieve these standards.
2 The Contractor shall comply with BS 6031:1981 Code of Practice for Earthworks or
equivalent, regarding the general control of site drainage and the requirements of the
Relevant Authority. The Contractor shall ensure that water which may have come into contact
with contaminated material shall be disposed of in an appropriate manner. The Contractor
shall have to apply for consents and approvals as follows:
(a) obtain and complete standard “permit application form” for proposed discharge into a
ar
PWA system.
(b) before any discharges can be permitted into a PWA pipeline, written approval shall be
at
obtained from the relevant department of the PWA. Failure to obtain the permit can
-Q
result in immediate closure of the Works.
3 The Contractor shall make provisions that all hazardous substances including oil drums or
containers on-site are controlled in accordance with the relevant legislation and are properly
LL
stored so that no oil or their contaminants are allowed to reach watercourses or groundwater.
9.6.25 Testing
W
1 The Contractor shall provide all apparatus, assistance, documents and other information,
s
electricity, equipment, fuel, consumable, instruments, labour, materials, and suitably qualified
en
and experienced staff, as are necessary to carry out the specified tests efficiently. The
Contractor shall agree, with the Engineer, the time and place for the specified testing of any
plant, materials and other parts of the Works.
m
2 The Engineer may vary the locations of details of specified tests, or instruct the Contractor to
e
carry out additional tests. If these varied or additional tests show that the tested Materials or
Si
workmanship is not in accordance with the Contract, the cost of carrying out this Variation
shall be borne by the Contractor, notwithstanding other provisions of the Contract.
3 The Contractor shall promptly forward to the Engineer duly certified reports of the tests.
When the specified tests have been passed, the Engineer shall endorse the Contractor’s test
certificate, or issue a certificate to him to that effect.
9.6.26 Grouting
1 As soon as each section of pipeline has been installed, its periphery shall be grouted using a
cement based grout with a minimum 48 hour compressive strength of 345 kPa (50psi) and
minimum 28 days compressive strength of 1380 kPa (200psi). Every effort shall be made by
the Contractor to place the grout even when it is known that the periphery contains polymer
or other lubricant and shall demonstrate that grout is not being taken before the grouting
operation is terminated.
2 The grouting pressure shall be sufficient to move the grout to fill the annulus along the pipe
but shall not be greater at the injection nozzle than the pressure limit set by the pipe
manufacturer. The injection points shall be placed at not more than 6 metre intervals along
the pipeline. Grouting shall be carried out around pipelines at launch and reception shafts as
soon as the pipeline is placed at these locations to prevent water and soil from entering the
shafts. Additional grouting shall be carried out at the Contractor’s expense, if required to
ensure that the joints are watertight.
3 The micro-tunnel shall be adequately lit and ventilated for safe access, egress and for
working. If open flames are to be used where combustible gasses may enter the air, tests for
combustible gas shall be conducted continuously during the work. The tunnel workers shall
carry a gas meter that automatically records the level of combustible gas. Particular care
shall be taken that pipe repairs are carried out in accordance with approved ventilation and
safety procedures.
4 Infiltration Acceptance Test of the installed pipe, which shall be witnessed by the Engineer,
shall be in accordance with ASTM C969. The internal inspection of the completed pipeline
shall be the subject of approval by the Engineer.
ar
9.6.27 Surface and Building Settlement Monitoring
at
1 The Contractor shall submit, for the consent of the Engineer, the detailed proposal for
positioning of ground and building monitoring points and other instruments and the frequency
-Q
of the measurements. Excavation works shall not start until the consent of the Engineer to
that submission has been obtained. During construction the Contractor shall review
monitoring frequencies depending on settlement trends, the extent of construction activity in
LL
an area and the behaviour of the structures.
2 The monitoring data shall be copied to the Engineer on the same day that the readings are
W
taken, followed by hard copies with analysis within 24 hours. In addition to carrying out all the
normal surveying requirements for carrying out a pipe-jack the Contractor shall set-up
surface settlement monitoring points at suitable intervals along the projected pipeline. The
s
spacing of such points may be as close as 10 metres in sensitive areas however may vary
en
according to the depth and location of the jack.

m
3 In addition to monitoring over the centre line of the drive readings shall be taken at suitable
lateral distances to the centreline at each monitoring chainage. In roads these cross sections
e
shall extend the full width of the road corridor.

Si
4 Settlement monitoring points shall also be installed at the corner of each building or structure
within a recognised distance from the tunnel centreline. The distance shall normally be
equivalent to the depth to invert of the proposed pipeline with a minimum of 20 metres.
5 A full record of existing ground and structure levels shall be taken and agreed prior to
commencement of pipe-jacking operations.
6 A photographic record of existing damage and faults to all adjacent surface structures shall
be made by the Contractor and agreed prior to commencement of pipe-jacking operations.
7 During the jacking operation between any two shafts the Contractor shall survey the levels of
the appropriate monitoring points on a daily basis.
8 Monitoring shall be carried out on any particular section of points when the tunnel face is
within 20-50 metres of that section dependent on the tunnel depth and ground conditions.
Monitoring shall continue at each section until the tunnel drive has been completed or in the
case of excessive settlement until the settlement has ceased or the rate of settlement
becomes acceptable.
9 If during jacking operations the actual movement of the ground reaches 90% of the predicted
value the Contractor shall immediately review his predictions and if appropriate revise his
operational procedures accordingly. Where such movement occurs suddenly and adjacent
to the tunnel face the Contractor shall not proceed with the jacking operation until a revised
method has been agreed with the Engineer.
9.6.28 Contractor’s Obligations
1 The Contractor shall carry out the Tests on Completion in accordance with this Clause after
providing the “As-Built” documents for the part to be tested.
2 Unless otherwise stated in the Particular Conditions, the Tests on Completion shall be carried
out in the following sequence:
(a) Pre-commissioning tests per stage, which shall include the appropriate inspections
and pressure tests to demonstrate that each item of the stage is acceptable and that
the Works can safely proceed to the next stage
(b) Commissioning tests, which shall include the specified operational tests to
demonstrate that the Works or Section can be operated safely and as specified, under
ar
all available operating conditions.
at
3 For all tests described in sub-paragraph (a) and (b) the pipe and joints shall be considered
watertight if water infiltration is so low that it can only be detected as damp patches without
-Q
flowing or dripping water. Likewise, the tests described in sub-paragraph (a) and (b) shall be
used to confirm that the pipeline remains equally watertight throughout the leak testing.
LL
4 As soon as the Works, or a Section, have passed each of the Tests on Completion described
in sub-paragraph (a) and/or (b), the Contractor shall submit a certified report of the results of
these tests to the Engineer.
W
9.6.29 Microtunnelling Machine

s
en
1 A remote control tunnelling machine shall be used and it shall include a closed circuit
television (CCTV) camera which transmits a picture of the laser beam on the target together
with other machine information (such as jacking force, face pressure, length, roll, pitch,
m
steering attitude, temperature valves open or closed) to a microprocessor console on the

surface from where the system is operated.
e
Si
2 The tunnelling machine shall be steerable, incorporating hydraulic rams to move the
articulated cutting head. The line and level control shall be achieved by a laser beam
transmitted from the jacking shaft to a target mounted in the tunnelling machine
3 The design of the tunnelling machine shall ensure no rotation or rolling during installation.
4 The tunnelling machine shall be capable of operating under groundwater conditions where
encountered. The hydrostatic balance shall be not less than 3 m head of water.
9.7 THRUST SYSTEM

1 The thrust system shall distribute the force to the pipes through a thrust ring and packing.
The jacks shall be capable of applying the thrust symmetrically to the thrust ring. Intermediate
jacking stations may be used at the discretion of the Contractor where frictional resistance or
obstructions result in unacceptable thrust forces.
2 A purpose made compressible packer of hard board or other approved material shall be
included between the thrusting surfaces. Pushing blocks shall not be in direct contact with
the pipe or preformed unit, which shall be protected by means of a steel ring, template or
other approved method. Damaged pushing blocks shall not be used.
3 Spacer blocks, if used, shall be true and free of distortion.
4 Thrust rings shall be free from distortions and sufficiently stiff so as to transfer the load from
the jacks uniformly to the packing.
5 Except at the shield, each group of jacks shall be interconnected hydraulically to ensure that
the load is evenly distributed to the thrust ring. Each jack shall incorporate a load cell.
6 At the rig and at intermediate station, automatic thrust recording equipment monitoring load
cells incorporated in each jack shall be provided together with a pressure metering device.
Other continuous records, including cutter torque, rate of progress, slurry pressure, slurry
flow, pitch, roll, and earth face pressure shall be provided. Copies of these records shall be
submitted daily to the Engineer.
7 The thrusting force shall not exceed the maximum permissible force stated in the method
statement. Thrust pressure shall be monitored and controlled to ensure that the pipe joint
deflection does not exceed the maximum permitted angular deflection of 1 .
9.8 LUBRICATION HOLES
ar
at
1 Lubrication holes shall be threaded to enable plugs to be screwed into the socket and to
withstand external pressure. A non-return valve shall be fitted where opening a lubrication
-Q
hole would permit ground loss. Upon completion of grouting, the plugs shall be covered with
material similar to that of the pipes. The pressure of the lubricant shall be maintained until it
is replaced by grout.
LL
9.9 RECORDS
W
1 The Contractor shall maintain and submit to the Engineer after each day a log which records
the following information:
s
(a) location of drive, between manholes

en
(b) strata encountered

(c) position and orientation of the pipes
m
(d) thrusting pressure used on both main and interjack rams during driving of each pipe
e
(e) line and levels of pipeline constructed including details of angular deflection at joints
Si
(f) roll of pipejacking shield

(g) average length of pipeline constructed per shift
(h) thrust from ground on face of machine
(i) readings of oxygen, methane and hydrogen sulphide gas at the excavating face
(j) volume of excavated materials removed
(k) volume of grout used, the points of injection and pressure at the points of injection
(l) Contractor’s operating personnel.
9.10 TESTING
9.10.1 General
1 Upon completion of the permanent construction of the pipeline, it shall be tested for
watertightness, alignment, condition and soundness, and all other designated requirements.
2 In the event of the Works failing a test, the Contractor shall take such remedial action as is
necessary, subject to the Engineer’s approval of the methods proposed. The Works shall
then be retested until such time as the Works pass the test.
9.10.2 Watertightness
1 Leakage tests shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 4.5.4 of this Section.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 10: Pipeline Cleaning and Inspection Survey
10 PIPELINE CLEANING AND INSPECTION SURVEY .................................... 2
10.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

10.1.1 Scope 2
10.1.2 References 2
10.1.3 Submittals 2
10.1.4 Specialist Subcontractor 3
10.1.5 Programme of Work 3
10.1.6 Topographic Survey of Sewers 4
10.2 SEWER CLEANING ...................................................................................... 6
10.2.1 Scope 6
10.2.2 Cleaning of Sewer Pipelines 7
10.2.3 Jetting 8
ar
10.2.4 Winching 9
10.2.5 Bucketing 9
at
10.2.6 Balling or Kiting and Pipeline Internal Gauging -Q 9
10.2.7 General Cleanliness of Areas during Sewer Cleaning 9
10.3 SEWER INSPECTION - CCTV SURVEY AND SONAR SCANNING .......... 10
LL
10.3.2 Survey Requirements 10

10.3.3 Survey Equipment 11
W
10.3.4 Survey Vehicle 13

s
10.3.6 Site Coding Sheets 14

en
10.3.7 Excavation 15
10.3.8 Survey Reporting 15
m
10.4 OVERPUMPING AND FLOW DIVERSION ................................................. 16

e
10.4.1 Source of Flow 16

Si
10.4.2 Pipe Stoppers 17

10.4.3 Stopping Off Flow 17
10.4.4 Pumping Plant 17
10.4.5 Sewage Flooding 17
10.4.6 Overpumping of Flow 18
10.4.7 Temporary Diversion of Flow 18
10.4.8 Entrances to Private Properties 18
10.4.9 Odour and Noise Control During Flow Diversion and Overpumping 18
10.5 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE .............................. 18
10 PIPELINE CLEANING AND INSPECTION SURVEY

10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes the specification for all work necessary to clean and carry out inspection
surveys of sewerage pipelines. The specification applies equally to the cleaning and
inspection survey of surface water and ground water pipelines.

This Section
Part 1, General
Part 2, Earthworks
Part 11, Sewer Rehabilitation
ar
Section 1, General.
at
10.1.2 References
-Q
1 The following document is referred to in this Part:
Water Research Centre (WRC) Manual of Sewer Condition Classification
LL
Water Research Centre (WRC) Sewer Rehabilitation Manual

10.1.3 Submittals
W
1 The Contractor shall submit complete data and details for pipelines cleaning and inspection
s
survey for the Engineer’s approval as follows:

en
(a) programme of work, detailed method statement, and schedule of equipment to be

used on the project, general plant and specialist equipment
m
(b) proposed methods of flow diversion and overpumping

e
(c) specific data for the proposed specialist equipment before beginning any sewer
Si
cleaning and inspection as follows:

(i) original catalogues for all the proposed specialist equipment, which complying
with the Specifications. These catalogues shall be considered as an integral
part of the Contractor’s method statement. All equipment to be provided for
sewer cleaning and closed circuit television (CCTV) survey and sonar scanning
shall be reliable and in good working condition
(ii) typical video recordings preferably on CD ROM of similar work carried out
previously by CCTV camera and sonar scanner. Such recordings, if acceptable,
will be retained by the Engineer as the standard for appraisal of subsequent
recordings
(iii) video graphic printer
(iv) still pictures in digital format (Tiff, JPEG) for computer data storage and
retrieving
(d) specific data to be submitted while carrying out and at the completion of the work:
(i) site coding sheets as designated under Clause 10.3.6 in this Part
(ii) the master and a copy of each video recording as designated in Clause 10.3.2 in
this Part
(iii) still colour pictures using video graphic printer of the inside of sewers,
manholes, inspection chambers, and grease and oil interceptors, and the
interior of pumping stations as required and as specified in Clause 10.3.5 of
this Part.
2 The Contractor shall submit a method statement to the Engineer for approval four weeks in
advance of commencing activity on site. The method statement shall comprise but not
necessarily be limited to:
(a) Equipment set-up and locations of proposed access points

(b) Anticipated cut off periods for services
(c) Procedures for notifying affected residences and businesses
(d) Procedures for verification of active services
(e) Procedures for complying with traffic control
ar
(f) Procedures for seeking permits to work.
(g) Safety procedures in particular working with scaffolding and entering confined spaces.
at
10.1.4 Specialist Subcontractor
-Q
1 The Contractor shall employ an approved specialist subcontractor designated in the contract
document.
LL
2 The Contractor shall provide the following information on sewer cleaning and inspection
survey contracts carried out by the proposed subcontractor during the last five years:
W
(a) project location

s
(b) name and address of client

en
(c) start and completion dates

(d) cost of the works undertaken by the subcontractor
m
(e) length, diameter and material of sewers

e
(f) reference letter from the client or engineer

Si
(g) a sample document of the reports produced for at least two projects.
3 All operators employed by the subcontractor shall be fully skilled in the specified works.
4 The operator for interpreting the video recordings and preparing the site coding sheets shall
be fully conversant with picture interpretation, defect coding and classification. A copy of the
operator’s current certificate of qualification for sewer surveys and fault classification issued
by Water Training International of the U.K. or an equivalent body for the types of sewers to be
inspected shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before beginning the survey. If the
Engineer determines that the Operator’s qualifications and experience are not acceptable,
the Contractor shall provide an acceptable replacement before beginning the survey.
10.1.5 Programme of Work
1 The sewage pipelines may be frequently surcharged and ready access to them may not be
available. The Contractor shall make due allowance for such disruptions in his programming
of operations. The Contractor shall cause minimum disruption to the utilisation of the
pipelines and the period of overpumping shall be kept to the minimum necessary. Before
starting the cleaning and inspection survey in any sewer length, the Contractor shall submit
an applications to CED Drainage Division O & M Section for a permit to work in the sewers.
10.1.6 Topographic Survey of Sewers
1 A topographic survey of the pipelines to be cleaned shall be carried out by the Contractor and
a schedule provided to the Engineer. Some manhole covers may be buried under
landscaping, debris, or the surface of roads, footpaths, or other pavements. These manholes
shall be located by the Contractor on the basis of the Employer’s record drawings using
appropriate techniques and apparatus. The topographic survey of the sewer system shall
include resurveying where affected by any rehabilitation works on completion of the sewer
cleaning and inspection surveys as directed by the Engineer.
2 The survey shall include details of manholes, chambers, and oil and grease interceptors
including topographic levels of covers and inverts, locations and co-ordinates.
3 The Contractor shall locate accurately and survey all junctions and lateral connections into
manholes, or directly into sewers, whether or not the existence or location of such junctions
and lateral connections are shown on the Employer’s record drawings.
4 The Contractor shall survey the original ground surface, taking levels at 50 m intervals or as
directed by the Engineer along the route of the sewer, determine existing pipe diameters and
ar
invert levels, and the details shall be recorded in a schedule to the Engineer’s approval.
These details shall, when finally and mutually agreed, be signed by the Contractor and
at
authorized by Engineer as truly representing the configuration of the particular areas.
-Q
1 The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the hazards involved in working in confined spaces
LL
including sewers, sewer manholes, inspection chambers, wet wells, pumping stations and
ancillary structures. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that adequate
precautions are taken to ensure safe working conditions.
W
2 The Contractor shall give evidence of having carried out training in avoiding the following
s
risks associated with working in confined spaces in sewerage pipelines:

en
(a) presence of toxic, flammable and explosive gases

(b) persons falling
m
(c) falling objects

e
(d) drowning
Si
(e) infection.
3 Training shall include the following:
(a) definition of confined spaces

(b) atmospheric hazards
(c) purpose and practical use of gas monitoring equipment
(d) practical use and maintenance of safety equipment such as breathing apparatus,
safety harnesses, life lines and lifting frames
(e) personal protective equipment such as hard hats, gloves and safety boots
(f) health hazards
(g) hygiene procedures
(h) basic first aid procedures
(i) pre-entry procedure
(j) entry procedure
(k) exit procedure

(l) rescue procedure.
All training courses shall involve both class room instruction and hands-on practical training
which should include both entry and rescue drills.
4 Safety and Protective Equipment. The Contractor shall safeguard his work force against
physical injury caused by falling or being struck by falling objects. Precautions shall include,
but are not limited to, the provision of the following equipment for each person working in
confined spaces:
(a) safety helmet with chin guard

(b) safety boots
(c) safety harness
(d) PVC gloves/gauntlets
(e) overalls
ar
(f) rubber boots
at
(g) ear, eye, and face protection, where applicable.
-Q
5 In addition to the above, each gang working in a confined space shall have with them:
(a) four sets of 15 m life lines with spring shackle one end, eye at other
LL
(b) portable ladder

(c) lifting frame complete with ropes and shackles for hand operation
W
(d) powerful hand lamp, explosion proof (intrinsically safe)

(e) ventilation blower together with portable generator and flexible ducting
s
en
(f) position pressure respiration face masks with associated portable compressor or air
line system supplying air via compressed cylinders
m
(g) gas detectors capable of detecting both high and low oxygen, hydrogen sulphide and
methane gas explosion proof (intrinsically safe).
e
6 All safety and protection equipment shall be regularly maintained and inspected by a
Si
competent person. Gas monitors shall be calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and a certificate issued with the date of calibration.
7 Each group of workers engaged in working in sewers, manholes, pumping stations and
ancillary structures shall be provided with, and shall be familiar with the operation of gas
testing equipment suitable for checking hydrogen sulphide, combustible gases, and lack of
oxygen. Before entering confined spaces the atmosphere within such spaces shall be tested
and certified as safe for entry by the responsible person to ensure that there is no build up of
hydrogen sulphide or combustible gases, nor lack of oxygen. When working in sewers where
accumulation of sludge or silt exists, the Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact that, when
disturbed, sludge may release toxic gases. Adequate ventilation facilities shall be provided
and continuous monitoring shall be made while work is in progress in live sewers or
structures containing sludge or silt.
8 Should anyone working in a confined space complain of nausea or dizziness, all personnel
shall be removed from that location immediately. Work may resume only when it is certified
safe to do so, using breathing apparatus if necessary.
9 The Contractor shall safeguard his work force against health hazards while working in sewers
and inform his work force of the dangers of bacterial infection while working in a sewage
contaminated environment, and shall impress upon them the importance of personal
hygiene. All members of the work force shall be fit, and everyone who will be expected to
work in sewers shall not suffer from:
(a) Any heart defect.

(b) Any history of fits or blackouts.
(c) Deafness or loss of balance.
(d) Claustrophobia.
(e) Recurrent back ailments.
(f) Shortage of breath on light exertion.
10 All members of the work force shall be vaccinated against tetanus, typhoid, paratyphoid,
hepatitis A and B and cholera, and shall each carry an up-to-date medical record on their
person. The Contractor shall provide a medical certificate of fitness for all his personnel.
ar
11 The Contractor shall keep personal hygiene and emergency equipment within easy access of
at
each working group. Emergency equipment which shall include but not be limited to:
-Q
(a) Barrier cream.
(b) Disinfectant.
(c) First-aid kit with eye bath.
LL
(d) Stretcher.
W
(e) Life lines 15 m long with spring shackle one end, eye at other.
(f) Lifting harnesses.
s
(g) Two sets of breathing apparatus with air bottle.

en
12 The address and telephone number of the nearest hospital with emergency facilities shall be
m
posted in each working location.

e
13 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for liability for any claim or legal action arising as a
Si
result of an accident and shall not be absolved of any liability under the Contract for his
having conformed to the above requirements.
14 The Contractor shall provide and erect approved safety barriers around all unattended open
manholes and cover them with suitable temporary steel sheets. Advance warning notice road
signs shall be erected at least 50 m in front and behind the area being worked in one day. At
the end of each day works all manhole covers shall be replaced.
10.2 SEWER CLEANING
10.2.1 Scope
1 The cleaning of sewer pipelines and appurtenances includes but is not limited to the following
elements:
(a) location of manholes and chambers using suitable detection techniques and removal
of overburden where necessary
(b) cleaning of manholes and chambers with either or both water jetting or wire brushing
or other means approved by the Engineer
(c) removal of any grit and debris from manhole bases and benching
(d) providing cutoff walls and overpumping where necessary

(e) water jetting including vacuum suction of debris
(f) bucket and winch dredging, balling, kiting, pipeline internal gauging, or any other
cleaning process as approved by the Engineer
(g) flushing with water
(h) removal of all sand, grit and debris jetted or dredged from the sewers and disposal of
same to a disposal site required by the Engineer
(i) controlling of odour and nuisance arising out of rehabilitation works, flow diversion or
overpumping.
10.2.2 Cleaning of Sewer Pipelines
1 Cleaning of sewers and manholes before inspection surveys shall include one or more of the
above operations. The Contractor should note that pipelines, manholes, may have structural
defects cracks etc., and may have been completely filled with sand, grit, sediment and other
debris and the requirement to accurately measure the vertical inside diameter of the sewer
ar
necessitates that the invert of the sewer to be free of all sediment. The Contractor shall allow
for the removal of all such material and disposal of same to a disposal site approved by the
at
Engineer. Cleaning of sewers shall progress downstream.
-Q
2 Sewer cleaning shall be thorough and shall only be carried out by methods approved by the
Engineer to remove all deposits, foreign matter, solid or semi-solid and hard intruding
material and all other debris including sand, silt, slime, sludge, sediment, grease, roots, loose
LL
flaky or soft pipe wall materials, loose concrete from walls and underside of cover slabs and
benching of manholes from within sewers and manholes. The liquid biological element of the
sludge may be returned to the sewer system after suitable filtering methods to be agreed with
W
the Engineer.
s
3 Where cast iron junction pieces have been used, the Contractor shall ream out or grind off
en
the corrosion products to produce a pipe of diameter equal to the adjacent pipes. Care shall
be taken to grind off all burrs which may otherwise puncture in-situ lining tubes during
subsequent renovation works.
m
4 Pump station wells shall be cleaned where necessary to permit pipeline cleaning.
e
Si
5 The designated sewer/manhole sections shall be cleaned using hydraulically propelled, high-
velocity jet, or mechanically powered equipment. The equipment and methods selected shall
be satisfactory to the Engineer. The equipment shall be capable of removing dirt, grease,
rocks, sand, and other materials and obstructions from the sewer lines and manholes. If
cleaning of an entire section cannot be successfully performed from one manhole, the
equipment shall be set up on the other manhole and cleaning again attempted. If, again,
successful cleaning cannot be performed or the equipment fails to traverse the entire
manhole section, it will be assumed that a major blockage exists and the cleaning effort shall
be temporarily abandoned until further notification by the Engineer.
6 If the Contractor’s cleaning equipment becomes lodged in a sewer it shall be removed by the
Contractor at his own expense. This shall include excavation, repair of sewer, backfill and
surface restoration.
7 All sludge, dirt, sand, rocks, grease, and other solid or semi-solid material resulting from the
cleaning operation shall be removed at the downstream manhole of the section being
cleaned. Passing material from manhole section to manhole section, which could cause line
stoppages, accumulations of sand in wet wells, or damage pumping equipment, shall not be
permitted.
8 Roots shall be removed in the designated sections where root intrusion is a problem. Special
attention should be used during the cleaning operation to assure almost complete removal of
roots from the joints. Procedures may include the use of mechanical equipment such as
rodding machines, bucket machines and winches using root cutters and porcupines, and
equipment such as high-velocity jet cleaners.
9 All solids or semi-solids resulting from the cleaning operations shall be removed from the site
and disposed of at an approved off-site disposal facility. All materials shall be removed from
the site no less often than at the end of each workday. Under no circumstances will the
Contractor be allowed to accumulate debris, etc., on the site of work beyond the stated time,
except in totally enclosed containers and as approved by the Engineer.
10 Acceptance of sewer line cleaning shall be made upon the successful completion of the
television inspection and shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If CCTV inspection
shows the cleaning to be unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall be required to reclean and
reinspect the sewer line until the cleaning is shown to be satisfactory.
10.2.3 Jetting
ar
1 Jetting shall be carried out using motorised jetting vehicles specially designed for the work
involved and complete with an integral water tank. Jetting shall be carried out at an
at
appropriate water pressure such that no damage to pipes occurs. The jetting pump shall
have the capability to vary the water pressure at the jetting nozzle and be equipped with a
-Q
sufficient length of suitable armoured bore hose and jetting heads to accommodate all
possible working conditions and pipe size in the sewer system. Jetting pressure to be
LL
2 Brackish water shall not be used for cleaning. Treated sewage effluent may be used subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
W
3 The hose shall be mounted on a power operated drum reel having variable speed and
s
direction controls and a meterage indicator. The hose shall be equipped with a variety of
nozzles totalling 15 to 30 including rear jets only, rear plus forward jets, rear plus side jets,
en
and other such configurations necessary to ensure adequate cleaning of the pipeline.
Manhole jacks and hose guide rollers shall be used to prevent damage to the hose.
m
4 During all jetting operations the channel of the downstream sewer manhole shall be provided
e
with a cut off wall and all decumulated grit and debris shall be removed.
Si
5 Hydraulically propelled equipment shall be of a movable dam type and be constructed in such
a way that a portion of the dam may be collapsed at any time during the cleaning operation to
protect against flooding of the sewer. The movable dam shall be the same diameter as the
pipe being cleaned and shall provide a flexible scraper around the outer periphery to ensure
removal of grease. Sewer cleaning balls or other equipment which cannot be collapsed shall
not be used.
6 Mechanically powered rodding machines shall be either a sectional or continuous rod type
capable of holding a minimum of 200 m of rod. The rod shall be specifically heat-treated
steel. To ensure safe operation, the machine shall be fully enclosed and have an automatic
safety clutch or relief valve. Buckets, scrapers, scooters, porcupines, brushes and other
mechanical equipment may also be utilised.
7 All equipment and devices shall be operated by experienced personnel so that sewer lines
are not damaged in the process of cleaning. When hydraulically propelled tools (which
depend upon water pressure to provide their cleaning force), or tools which retard the flow in
the sewer line are used, all necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the water
pressure created does not damage or cause flooding of property being served by the sewer.
When possible, the flow of sewage in the sewer shall be utilised to provide the necessary
pressure for hydraulic cleaning devices. When additional water from water mains is
necessary to avoid delay in normal work procedures, the water shall be conserved and not
used unnecessarily.
10.2.4 Winching
1 The jetting machine shall incorporate a power-driven cable drum having not less than 200 m
of 13 mm steel cable. The cable drum shall be mounted on an A-frame, fixed to the vehicle
or trailer high enough off the ground to allow the bucket to be lifted above ground level. The
backpull machine shall incorporate a power-driven cable drum with not less than 200 m of
nylon rope or light steel cable. The working machine shall have a swinging arm fixed to the
top of the A-frame. The swinging arm shall be capable of lifting the bucket clear of the ground
and rotating it away from the manhole for emptying. A chute with rollers and a shaker bar
ar
may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer.
at
10.2.5 Bucketing -Q
1 A range of bucket sizes shall be provided to suit the various pipe diameters. The buckets
shall be cylindrical in cross-section with bails at each end having centre eye lugs and shall be
of the clam shell type with the bottom made of two hinged halves such that when the bucket
LL
is pulled in the reverse direction, bottom first, the jaws open permitting debris to pass
through. When the bucket is pulled forward the jaws shall close, thereby retaining any
material in the bucket or which subsequently enters. Both ends of the bucket shall be able to
W
dig into and scrape sediments and debris from the sewer invert.
s
10.2.6 Balling or Kiting and Pipeline Internal Gauging

en
1 Balls shall be of inflatable rubber or other material approved by the Engineer having an
outside spiral thread and a swivel connection. With a hydraulic head differential of
m
approximately 0.6 m, the ball shall rotate rapidly and produce a scouring jet on its periphery.
e
2 Suitable cable or rope shall be attached to the swivel connection fed from a cable drum
Si
mounted on an A-frame complete with braking facilities. A manhole jack and cable guide
roller shall be used to feed the cable into the sewer. If the flow in the sewer is insufficient to
produce adequate scouring velocity, the Contractor shall provide the additional supply of
water to overcome the deficiency.
3 Kites may be used as an alternative to balls for sewers 600 mm diameter and above.
4 Pipeline internal gauges shall not be used unless attached to lines in both upstream and
downstream manholes.
5 During all balling, kiting or gauging operations, the channel of the downstream manhole shall
be provided with a cut off wall and accumulated debris removed.
6 Sewer cleaning balls or other equipment which cannot be collapsed shall not be used.
10.2.7 General Cleanliness of Areas during Sewer Cleaning
1 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that during the sewer cleaning
operations there is no spillage of sewage and debris onto the streets and other areas. When
spillage occurs, the Contractor shall immediately remove all spillage and clean all surfaces to
their original condition.
10.3 SEWER INSPECTION - CCTV SURVEY AND SONAR SCANNING
1 CCTV survey and sonar scanning shall be carried out only after satisfactory cleaning of the
pipeline as specified in Clause 10.2 of this Part. The CCTV survey and sonar scanning shall
include but not be limited to:
(a) Production of colour video tape recording on compact disc (CD) and coding.
(b) Accurate profiling of the cross-section of sewers and measurement of deflections.
(c) Still colour pictures from a video graphic printer of the inside of sewers and manholes,
inspection chambers and grease and oil interceptors, as directed by the Engineer.
(d) Recording the complete survey on a computer database in accordance with WRC
Manual of Sewer Condition Classification.
(e) Pictures to be printed in a digital format (Tiff) for computer data storage and retrieval.
ar
10.3.2 Survey Requirements
at
1 The rate of travel of the camera shall be such as to enable all details to be extracted from the
video tape recording.
-Q
2 The axis of the camera shall be arranged to coincide with the centreline of the pipe.
LL
3 The picture transmitted by the CCTV scanning camera (a scanning camera which can view
lateral connections to sewers) and sonar scanner shall be free from interference and loss of
vertical and horizontal hold. The picture shall be in focus, properly illuminated, of good
W
contrast and without distortion. If vision is obscured at any time by the fouling of the lens, or
lighting system, or if travel is impeded by obstructions, the camera shall be withdrawn and the
defect rectified immediately.
s
en
4 The Contractor shall record the complete survey on a video tape format conforming with the
recording equipment manufacturer’s specification. The recording shall provide a continuous
m
display of data on the monitor screen comprising the following information:

e
(a) automatic update of camera meterage

Si
(b) date, day, month and year

(c) direction of survey - upstream or downstream
(d) gradient of sewer
(e) nominal diameter of sewer and the actual measured horizontal, vertical and diagonal
diameters at close intervals as directed by the Engineer
(f) manhole/pipe type length reference number
(g) sewer use
(h) time of start of survey
(i) location reference.
5 The video recording shall be stopped whenever the camera is stationary for more than
5 seconds and shall have manual override capability.
6 The completeness of the video tapes shall be an accurate record of the sewer system which
identifies and locates sewer defects, provides information that permits accurate analysis of
the cause, extent, nature and severity of sewer deterioration and the measurement of
horizontal, vertical and diagonal diameters of sewer and their locations.
7 Portions of video tape marred by interference, or otherwise unacceptable shall be erased and
the relevant portion of sewer shall be resurveyed and rerecorded. The Engineer’s decision as
to the acceptability of any video recording shall be final.
8 Still colour photographs as designated under Clause 10.3.5.
9 The photographic negatives, the master video tapes, and a copy of the video tapes shall be
handed over to the Engineer and shall become the property of the Employer.
10 If a self-propelled camera is used, it shall incorporate features to enable it to be winch drawn

without affecting the quality of the video recording.
11 The location of any conditions that may result in a limitation of rehabilitation techniques that
could be used and/or prevent proper installation of designated rehabilitation materials in the
pipelines shall be noted. The Contractor shall propose corrective measures and/or alternative
methods of rehabilitation for the approval of the Engineer.
10.3.3 Survey Equipment
ar
1 The CCTV survey and sonar scanning equipment shall be modern and of advanced design
and shall be tested and calibrated immediately before beginning work. The equipment shall
at
be tested as designated herein by the manufacturers or an approved independent test
laboratory at intervals of not more than 6 months. Original certificates of compliance with the
-Q
specifications of this Part shall be submitted to the Engineer before beginning work. The
equipment shall include but not limited to the following:
LL
(a) CCTV camera and sonar scanner suitable for mounting on the same trolley as and
when required
W
(b) colour TV camera with swivel, lift and radial device and able to focus on points of
interest
(c) camera light head assembly with sufficient illumination for the diameter of sewer
s
pipes
en
(d) camera wheeled/tracked crawler assembly, self-propelled/flexible-shaft driven and

remotely operated with forward, reverse, left, right stop and load indication
m
(e) cable reel of minimum 200 m cable length with fully automatic and microprocessor
e
controlled cable handling facility

Si
(f) power winch with either lockable or ratcheted drums

(g) CCTV/Sonar central control units
(h) colour TV monitor
(i) high-resolution scanning device including high speed pipe profiler and software to
interpret the signals
(j) video cassette recording system with audio video information system
(k) all standard and optional accessories recommended by the manufacturers.
2 The picture quality of the camera shall be tested using the Marconi Resolution Chart No. 1 or
equivalent clearly defined with no tinting to show white, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red,
blue and black.
3 The quality of the CCTV electronics, camera and monitor shall be such that the following
criteria are satisfied and if any of the criteria are not met during the survey the lengths of
sewer so affected shall be resurveyed at the Contractor’s expense:
(a) Shades of Grey. The grey scale shall show equal changes in brightness ranging from
black to white with a minimum of five stages
(b) Colour. With the monitor control adjusted for correct saturation, the six colours plus
black and white shall be resolved with the primary and complementary colours in
order of decreasing luminance. The grey scale shall appear in contrasting shades of
grey with no tint
(c) Linearity. The background grid shall show squares of equal size, without
convergence or divergence over the whole picture. The centre circle shall appear
round and have the correct height/width ratio within 5 %
(d) Resolution. The live picture shall be clearly visible with no interference and capable
of registering a minimum number of TV lines/picture height lines. The resolution shall
be checked with the monitor colour control turned down. For tube type cameras this
shall be 350 lines and for CCD type cameras it shall be 250 lines
(e) Colour Consistency. The colour on the live picture and that on the video picture shall
be consistent with that described for the Marconi Resolution Chart No. 1.
4 The camera shall be capable of taking clear pictures in any direction; i.e., 90  to the left and
90  to the right (total 180  in horizontal axis) and also 360  in the circumference of the pipe
without using extra revolving mirror attachment.
ar
5 The camera shall continuously transmit distance at each meter length, electronically matched
to the movement of the camera with a maximum tolerance of  0.1 % on the control TV
at
monitor and the resultant video tapes. -Q
6 The camera shall indicate the degree of inclination of the sewer line with tolerance of 0.2 %
on the TV monitor with a printout of the slope.
LL
7 The camera crawler assembly shall be adjustable for deployment in sewers of varying
diameters. When required, both sonar scanning and CCTV equipment shall be mounted on
W
the same crawler assembly.
8 The video tape recording of the transmission for CCTV and Sonar scanning units shall be
s
provided to accurately record on video tapes, of quality approved by the Engineer. In the
en
central control unit, the operator shall have remote facilities to control the camera, the cable
drum and power winch.
m
9 Each unit shall carry sufficient number of guides and rollers to ensure that, when surveying all
e
bonds are supported away from pipe and manhole structures and all CCTV cables and lines
used to measure the camera’s location within the sewer are maintained in a taut manner and
Si
set at right angles, where possible, to run through or over the measuring equipment.
10 At the start of each and every working shift, the camera shall be positioned centrally and at
right angles to the test card at a distance where the full test card just fills the monitor screen,
ensuring that the edges of the test card castellation coincide with the edges of the horizontal
and vertical scan (raster). The card shall be illuminated evenly and uniformly without any
reflection. The illumination shall be to the same colour temperature as the colour
temperature of the lighting that will be used on the CCTV survey equipment in the pipe. The
test shall be recorded for subsequent use by the Engineer, the recording time to be at least
30 seconds. The type of camera used is to be identified on the test recording. The recording
must show the camera being introduced into the test device and reaching its stop position.
Other test devices may be used subject to approval by the Engineer.
11 The Contractor shall note that the Engineer may periodically check both the live and recorded
picture colour consistency against the colour bar. Any differences will necessitate re-survey
of the lengths affected at the Contractor’s expense.
12 The adjustment of focus and iris shall allow optimum picture quality to be achieved and shall
be remotely operated. The adjustment of focus and iris shall provide a minimum focal range
from 50mm in front of the camera’s lens to infinity. The distance along the pipe in focus from
the initial point of observation shall be a minimum of twice the vertical height of the pipe. The
illumination must be such as to allow an even distribution of the light around the pipe
perimeter without the loss of contrast, flare out of picture or shadowing.
13 Where the CCTV survey equipment is towed by winch and bond through the pipe, all winches
shall be stable with either lockable or ratcheted drums. All bonds shall be steel or of an
equally non-elastic material to ensure the smooth and steady progress of the CCTV survey
equipment. All winches shall be inherently stable under loaded conditions.
10.3.4 Survey Vehicle
1 The CCTV and sonar scanning vehicles shall be equipped with the following three separate
compartments:
(a) driver’s cabin

(b) operator and viewer’s compartment (seating for minimum three persons)
ar
(c) Camera and sonar scanner equipment storage compartment.
at
2 The operator and viewer’s compartment shall be insulated against noise and extremes in
-Q
temperature and be provided with means of controlling external and internal sources of light
in a manner capable of ensuring that the monitor screen display complies with the specified
requirements.
LL
3 The equipment storage compartment shall have adequate space for equipment, both
operational and stored. Equipment used in sewers shall not be stored in compartment.
W
4 The vehicle shall be equipped with air-conditioner for the driver’s cabin and the operator’s
room. A wireless communication system between the operator inside the vehicle and the
s
helper outside the vehicle shall be provided.

en
5 The vehicle shall be complete with all equipment and apparatus necessary to carry out a
m
complete sewer inspection survey. Colour monitors, a sonar processor unit, replay and on-
board reporting, video recorders, video printers, computers and computer printers to
e
generate survey reports and data base shall be provided. The operator/viewer’s compartment
shall be designed for optimum productivity.
Si
6 The vehicle shall be equipped with the following road safety equipment:
(a) a minimum of two amber regulation flashing beacons fixed at diagonal corners of the
vehicle, which shall operate continuously while the vehicle is stationary on the
highway in a working situation
(b) traffic signs and cones, which shall be displayed in accordance with the
recommendations of the Traffic Police Section, with a minimum of:
(i) four reflective boards: Arrow
(ii) two reflective boards: Men Working (in English and Arabic)
(iii) two reflective boards: Road Narrows (in English and Arabic)
(iv) 20 reflective cones
(v) 12 battery operated flashing road lamps.
(c) a sufficient number of bright coloured overalls with fluorescent over-jackets or belts,
which shall be worn by all operatives while working on roads.
7 Relevant safety equipment specified in Clause 10.1.7 shall be made available.

10.3.5 Photographs
1 After sewer cleaning and in parallel with the CCTV inspection, excellent quality still colour
photographs 90 mm x 130 mm with the date and submitted in TIFF format an album with
captions providing a detailed description, the precise location and reference numbers as
designated shall be taken of:
(a) the inside the sewer to show the typical conditions for each length of sewer. A
minimum of three photographs per manhole length shall be taken at every junction
piece, faulty joint, broken pipe, and other points of interest as directed by the
Engineer
(b) the interior of each manhole, chamber and grease/oil trap. A minimum of three
photographs shall be taken of each structure showing the general extent of corrosion
to the structure’s walls, bases, benching and the underside of cover slabs as directed
by the Engineer
2 Photographs shall be taken of the internal condition of the pipes at the beginning of a defect,
at service connections and such other places as the Engineer shall direct. Where defects
exist at adjacent points, photographs should not be taken at intervals of less than 2m unless
ar
absolutely necessary to show the second defect. Where photographs are not otherwise
required, a general condition photograph shall be taken at every l0m.
at
3 Photographs must clearly and accurately show what is displayed on the monitor which shall
-Q
be in proper adjustment.
4 Photographs shall be clearly identified in relation to the location (minimum requirement

LL
manhole start and finish numbers or pipe length reference numbers) survey direction,
chainage, photograph number, and date when the photograph was taken. The annotation
shall be clearly visible and in contrast to its background, shall have a figure size no greater
W
than 5mm, and be type printed. The annotation shall be so positioned as not to interfere with
the subject of the photograph.
s
5 Hard copy of the photographs shall be supplied in suitable A4 sized plastic holders and
en
bound in ring binders or lever arch files. The photographs shall be presented in chronological
order and each file shall contain a contents page providing clear cross-referencing to the
m
report. The minimum requirements of the contents page shall be locations (district, street
name and road number), photograph numbers and dates when photographs were taken.
e
Si
10.3.6 Site Coding Sheets
1 Site coding sheets detailing the condition of each pipe length and manhole shall be
completed in the format of the WRC Manual of Sewer Condition Classification and as
approved by the Engineer. These sheets shall be submitted to the Engineer with the video
tape to which they refer. A draft copy of the coding sheets shall be submitted weekly to the
Engineer for his approval. When requested by the Engineer, more frequent reports of
selected parameters shall be submitted.
2 The site coding sheets shall be standardised to the approval of the Engineer to indicate the
following minimum requirements:
(a) location reference to sewer length concerned

(b) nominal diameter of sewer
(c) actual measured horizontal, vertical and diagonal diameters of sewer and their
locations, as a continuous computer printout at close intervals and as directed by the
Engineer
(d) date of survey
(e) direction of survey
(f) time of start of survey

(g) sewer gradient
(h) trial hole records
(i) coded reference to any defects encountered
(j) location of defects
(k) location of any junctions or laterals encountered
(l) location of any still photographs taken.
3 In addition to the final report and any interim reports on a section of the pipe as defined
above, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the following:
(a) One copy of the completed survey report coding forms at the end of each working
shift.
(b) One copy of sheets containing the pipe reference number, distance, orientation and
deflection measurements of the pipes surveyed at the end of each working shift.
ar
(c) One copy of photographs and recordings on a weekly basis as the work progresses or
at
as previously agreed with the Engineer in writing.
10.3.7 Excavation
-Q
1 When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate and expose sections of sewer
for examination.
LL
2 The Contractor shall carry out such excavations expeditiously and shall break or expose the
W
sewer section upon removal from the trench for detailed physical examination and testing.
3 Excavations shall be carried out in accordance with Part 2 of this Section.

s
en
4 When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall reinstall the sewer section or replace the
sewer section with new pipe of same size and material in a manner to completely conform to
the original installation and shall backfill, compact and reinstate the excavation in accordance
m
with Part 4 of this Section.

e
10.3.8 Survey Reporting

Si
1 The Contractor shall complete the CCTV survey and sonar scanning in appropriate lengths
as directed by the Engineer before handing over the records for that line. All records for a
particular length shall be handed over at one time unless directed otherwise by the Engineer
and all recordings on one tape shall be of the same length. The report shall include the
following, all as designated herein:
(a) site coding sheets

(b) correctly labelled video tapes of approximately one hour duration
(c) pictures on compact discs in a digital format (Tiff)
2 The report shall be completed using a computer based database with software that shall be
fully compatible with the Oracle database used by the Ministry of Municipal Affairs &
Agriculture’s ARC INFO GIS system and approved by the Engineer. One copy on a 3.5 inch
diskettes of all computer generated data shall be provided with the report. Four copies of
draft report shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval followed by final report incorporating
appropriate responses to the Engineer’s comments.
3 The Contractor shall enter the information obtained from the survey into a computer
database in accordance with the WRC manual of sewer classification which shall allow for
the storage, retrieval and analysis of this information. Furthermore the database shall link the
survey information with an electronic drawing of the pipeline which shall allow the viewing of
still images representative of the major problems identified by the survey.
4 The Contractor shall supply 2 copies of each recording in CD format.
5 The condition survey report shall include the following:
(a) Pipe condition classification in accordance with the WRC format.

(b) Manhole/pipe length reference numbers.
(c) Date of survey.
(d) Road name/location.
(e) Direction of survey.
(f) Time of start of survey.
ar
(g) Weather conditions.
at
(h) Pipe dimensions.
(i) Materials of construction.
-Q
(j) Depth of flow.
(k) Profiling of pipe cross sections to give a complete circumferential profile and
LL
deflections within the pipe.

(l) Clock position of all connections including meterage from manhole.
W
(m) Whether or not connections are dry and running.

(n) Location and description of obstructions, structural defects, missing pieces of pipe,
s
open and/or offset joints, ovality, leakage or evidence thereof, corrosion, erosion,
en
break-in connections, protruding connections, mineral deposits, roots, previous

repairs, sags and other abnormalities with respect to the pipeline’s condition with
counter distance in metres from the start manhole’s centreline.
m
(o) Photographs as specified herein.

e
(p) Recommendations, including options and alternative methods to extend the service life
Si
by a further 50 years by lining, replacement or other refurbishment.

(q) Estimated cost and programme for carrying out the recommendations.
6 If the Engineer requires separate survey reports for any section of the survey or requires
some or all of the section to be grouped together in a single survey report he shall notify the
Contractor accordingly.
10.4 OVERPUMPING AND FLOW DIVERSION
10.4.1 Source of Flow
1 Manholes and sewers being worked on shall be completely isolated and by-passed such that
they do not contain any sewage. This shall be achieved by plugging, pumping and bypassing
or diverting the flow.
2 When flow in a sewer line is plugged, pumped and bypassed or diverted sufficient
precautions must be taken to protect the sewer lines from damage that might result from
sewer surcharging. Further, precautions must be taken to ensure that sewer flow control
operations do not cause flooding or damage to public or private property being served by the
sewers involved.
3 The Contractor shall submit his proposed method of overpumping or flow diversion to the
Engineer for approval.
4 The Contractor shall co-ordinate and agree all his activities on live facilities with the Drainage
Affairs Maintenance Department staff responsible for upkeep of the drainage system. A
signed Permit to Work shall be obtained from Maintenance Department prior to the
commencing the work.
10.4.2 Pipe Stoppers
1 The flow shall be stopped off using pipe stoppers of a type approved by the Engineer. The
stopper shall be of circumferential compressible rubber rings fully inserted inside the pipe
before tightening. Inflatable type stoppers for sewers less than 300 mm diameter shall be of
a type approved by the Engineer.
2 Stoppers shall be suitable for the sizes and classes of pipe in which they are used and must
not cause damage to existing pipes. Stoppers must be able to withstand the maximum
possible differential head at each location and shall be fully restrained in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
ar
3 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for maintaining such stoppers in good working
at
condition and for the consequences of any failure thereof.
-Q
4 Where a section of the sewerage system is isolated for work involving man-entry to the
isolated area, a minimum of two stoppers shall be used at each boundary location isolating
the area from the main sewer and subsidiary sewers. At least one of these stoppers at each
LL
location should be of an approved pneumatic type.
10.4.3 Stopping Off Flow

W
1 For the length of sewer being surveyed, the Contractor shall plug off the outlet of the
s
downstream manhole and the inlet to the upstream manhole. The next upstream manhole
en
shall be used as a pumping sump with the outlet to that manhole also being plugged off.
2 All service connections discharging into the plugged off sewer shall be satisfactorily isolated
m
the overpumping system shall be provided to the approval of the Engineer.

e
1 Interruption of service will not be permitted.

Si
10.4.4 Pumping Plant
1 Overpumping shall be carried out using suitable mobile pump sets of adequate capacity and
head to the approval of the Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall provide sufficient number of standby pumps of adequate capacity.
Where required by the Engineer, a temporary sump shall be provided to prevent surcharging
of upstream sewers.
3 The pumps shall be controlled by suitable level controls installed to operate at levels to be
approved by the Engineer and shall be capable of dealing with the flow in the sewer and any
material likely to be transported in it without being blocked.
10.4.5 Sewage Flooding
1 Full-time attendance with mobile phone facilities shall be provided by the Contractor at each
pumping location such that in the event of mechanical breakdown, flooding or blockage,
immediate assistance will be summoned.
10.4.6 Overpumping of Flow
1 Pumped sewage flows shall be discharged to a manhole downstream of the sewer length
being cleaned or surveyed. The open end of the pump delivery pipe shall be laid in order to
minimise turbulence of the pumped flow. No sewage shall be dumped onto any surfaces
outside the sewer system.
2 The pump delivery pipe shall be of suitable armoured material which in all locations subject to
traffic flow shall be suitably protected with preformed steel plates bridging the pipe or by other
means approved by the Engineer. Such protection shall be adequate to allow passage of
vehicular traffic over the pipe.
10.4.7 Temporary Diversion of Flow
1 Where temporary sewer diversion is required the Contractor shall notify the Engineer
accordingly and submit his proposals for implementation of such diversion.
2 The Contractor shall obtain all other permissions and approvals from relevant authorities
prior to commencement of such diversion. On completion of temporary diversionary works
ar
the temporary pipelines shall be removed or be adequately sealed and inlet and outlet
manholes reinstated to their original condition.
at
10.4.8 Entrances to Private Properties
-Q
1 The Contractor shall not cause any obstruction to the access of private properties. If the
obstructions are unavoidable, the Contractor shall provide and maintain in good order
LL
alternative access to the approval of the Engineer.
10.4.9 Odour and Noise Control During Flow Diversion and Overpumping
W
1 The Contractor shall take necessary precautions for controlling odour and noise with
s
prescribed limits approved by the Engineer and for preventing nuisance and inconvenience to
en
the local residents and the public during the flow diversion and overpumping operations.
2 The Contractor shall include in his method statement, the measures to be taken for noise
m
and odour control.

e
3 The Contractor shall provide special measures to prevent the odour release to the approval
Si
of the Engineer.
4 The Contractor shall install temporary chemical dosing system to contain the odour release if
other measures fail.
5 For odour control, the measurement of hydrogen sulphide shall not be more than 1 ppm
measured at a distance of 1m from the point of discharge to the adjacent property.
10.5 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE

1 The Contractor shall operate a quality control system, to be approved by the Engineer, which
will effectively gauge the accuracy and consistency of the CCTV survey report produced by
the operator from the monitor picture.
2 The system shall be such that the accuracy of reporting should be a function particularly of:
(a) The number of faults not recorded (omissions).

(b) The correctness of the coding and classification of each fault recorded.
3 The minimum levels of accuracy to be attained shall be as follows:

(a) Header accuracy 95%

(b) Detail accuracy 85%
(c) Lowest acceptable tolerance 75%
4 The Engineer shall be entitled in accordance with Section 1 Part 8 and this section to audit
periodically the control system and be present when assessments are being computed.
5 When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall forward to the Engineer sufficient
details and information for this audit assessment.
6 Should any report fail to achieve the specified percentages for a particular pipe length, the
Engineer shall require the Contractor to re-code and re-submit the report. If the accuracy
check fails, the Contractor shall repeat the full quality control check on 10 surveys, 5 surveys
either side of the survey which has failed. If any further failures are found to be outside the
tolerances laid down above within these additional checks, the process will be repeated until
an acceptable standard is reached. Any reports that have failed will be re-coded by another
qualified surveyor and submitted to the Engineer to replace those in his possession.
ar
7 Quality selection is achieved by using two parameters:
at
(a) Population - the anticipated number of surveys carried out by one surveyor over a
period of time (normally I year). -Q
(b) Sample size - the number of surveys required to be checked to satisfy the quality
control validity.
8 The sample surveys for quality control are to be selected by the use of computer generated
LL
random numbers (ERNI) or other such equivalent method and shall be 5% of the total
population. Each surveyor shall have a different set of random numbers, which are sorted
W
into chronological order, and are renewed once the population size has been reached. The
random numbers shall not be disclosed to the surveyor until they have been used up.
s
9 On site the surveyor logs certain information on the surveys being carried out and in the order
en
in which they are surveyed.

m
10 The “in-office” staff then count, through the surveys that have taken place and copy those
reports that coincide with the random numbers.
e
Si
11 Copy of the relevant section of the recording shall also be made available.
12 Information on the recording and its contents are entered on a survey selection log.
13 Header information - All header information shall be checked to ensure that left and right
justified entries are correctly entered, alpha or numeric symbols are correctly used and all
compulsory boxes filled in. The percentage of accurate entries shall be ascertained and any
that fall below the value specified shall be rejected. All decimal percentage points shall be
rounded down to the nearest whole number.
14 Detail information - Each error/omission is treated on an equal basis whether or not it is a

minor or major error or omission. During the checking each error/omission is highlighted on
the report from which the following totals are calculated for each survey report:
(a) The number of actual entries that should have been made.
(b) The number of actual errors/omissions made.
15 These totals are entered on the right of the survey report being checked. Individual column
totals are also calculated and entered on to the survey accuracy log.
16 The accuracy of each survey is arrived at by taking the number of actual errors/omissions
away from the number of actual entries that should have been made and dividing the result
by the number of actual entries that should have been made and multiplying by 100 to create
a percentage.
17 This percentage is entered on the survey detail rating form.
18 The ongoing accuracy of the surveyor (the “confidence level”) is calculated by taking the
mean of 5 percentage results (each 5 representing one control unit).
19 Both the individual survey percentages and the mean results are entered onto the surveyor’s
accuracy graph which has two boundaries:
(a) Specified mean - the level of accuracy expected.

(b) Specified tolerance - the level to which the accuracy can fall before specific action is
taken.
20 Any surveyor whose quality control results fall below the specified mean on more than 2
occasions or the specified tolerance at any time shall be deemed to have failed his quality
ar
control criteria and shall be invalidated from acting as a team leader on this Contract until he
has attended and passed an approved course for pipe condition classification.
at
END OF PART
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 11: Sewer Rehabilitation
11 SEWER REHABILITATION ........................................................................... 3
11.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 3

11.1.1 Scope 3
11.1.2 References 3
11.1.4 Submittals 6
11.1.6 Warranty 9
11.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 9
11.2.1 Work Programme Review, Cleaning, Inspection 9
11.2.2 Safety 9
11.2.3 Preparation for Installation of Linings 9
ar
at
11.2.5 Annulus Grout -Q 11
11.3 SEALING OF PIPES AND MANHOLES ...................................................... 11
11.3.1 Scope 11
LL
11.3.2 Sealing Compounds 11

11.3.3 Joint Sealing of Pipes 12
W
11.3.4 Sealing of Manholes 14

11.4 SLIPLINING OF SEWERS .......................................................................... 15
s
en
11.4.1 General 15
11.4.2 Materials 15
m
11.4.3 Installation of Sliplining 16

e
11.5 DEFORMED PIPE LINER INSTALLATION ................................................. 18

Si
11.5.1 Scope 18
11.5.2 Materials 18
11.6 CURED-IN-PLACE LINER INSTALLATION (INVERSION METHOD) ......... 20
11.6.1 Scope 20
11.6.2 Materials 21
11.6.3 Installation of Cured-In-Place Liner 22
11.7 SPIRAL WOUND PROFILE LINER ............................................................. 23
11.7.1 Scope 23
11.7.2 Materials 23
11.7.3 Installation of Spiral Wound Profile Liner 25
11.8 PIPE CRACKING OR BURSTING ............................................................... 26

11.8.1 Scope 26
11.8.2 General 26
11.8.3 Materials 26
11.8.4 Installation Equipment 27
11.9 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPE LINES AFTER
REHABILITATION ....................................................................................... 29
11.10 MANHOLE REHABILITATION..................................................................... 30

11.10.1 Scope 30
11.10.2 General 30
11.10.3 Materials 30
ar
11.10.4 Rehabilitation of Manhole Walls and Bases 31
at
11.10.5 Rehabilitation of Manhole Shafts and Slabs 31
11.10.6 Manhole Cover, Frame and Sealing Plate Reinstallation or
-Q
Replacement 31
LL
11.11 MANHOLE LINING ...................................................................................... 32

W
11.11.1 Scope 32
11.11.2 Materials 32
s
11.11.3 Installation of Lining 32

en

e m
Si
11 SEWER REHABILITATION
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes the specifications for all work necessary to rehabilitate sewers, manholes
and chambers including, but not limited to:
(a) sealing of sewers and manholes

(b) manhole rehabilitation
(c) manhole lining
(d) sliplining of sewers
(e) deformed pipe lining
ar
(f) cured-in-place pipe (inversion method)
at
(g) spiral wound profile liner
(h) pipe cracking or bursting.
-Q
LL
This Section
Part 1 General
W
Part 2 Earthworks
Part 4 Pipeline Installation
Part 6 Metal Works
s
Part 7 Miscellaneous GRP Works

en
Part 8 Painting and Protective Coatings

Part 10 Sewer Cleaning and Inspection Survey
m
11.1.2 References
e
Si
ASTM C923 M ............Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete

Manhole Structures Pipes and Laterals [Metric]
ASTM D543 ................Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents
ASTM D618 ................Methods of Conditioning Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D638 ................Standard test method for tensile properties of plastics.
ASTM D746 ................Standard test method for brittleness temperature of plastics and
elastomers by impact.
ASTM D790 ................Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D883 ................Definition of Terms Relating to Plastics
ASTM D991 ................Standard test method for rubber property-volume resistivity of
electrically conductive and antistatic products.
ASTM D1238 ..............Standard test method for melt flow rates of thermoplastics by extrusion
plastometer.
ASTM D1248 ..............Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Moulding and Extrusion

Materials
ASTM D1505 .............Standard test method for density of plastics by the density gradient
technique.
ASTM D1525 ..............Standard test method for Vicat softening temperature of plastics.
ASTM D1600 ..............Abbreviations of Terms Relating to Plastic Pipes
ASTM D1693 ..............Test for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics
ASTM D1784 ..............Specification for Rigid PVC Compounds and Chlorinated PVC (CPVC)
Compounds
ASTM D2122 ..............Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermosetting Pipe and
Fittings by Acetone Immersion
ASTM D2152 ..............Test Method for Degree of Fusion of Extruded PVC Pipe and Moulded
Fittings by Acetone Immersion
ASTM D2240 ..............Standard test method for rubber property-Durometer hardness.
ar
ASTM D2412 ..............Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of
at
Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
-Q
ASTM D2444 ..............Test Method for Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
by means of a Tup (Falling Weight)
ASTM D2657 ..............Practice for Heat-Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
LL
ASTM D2837 ..............Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials
ASTM D3035 ..............Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastics Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on
W
Controlled Outside Diameter

ASTM D3350 ..............Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials
s
ASTM D3753 ..............Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes

en
ASTM D4703 ..............Standard practice for compression moulding thermoplastic materials

into test specimens, plaques or sheets.
e m
ASTM F412 ................Definitions of Terms Relating to Plastic Piping Systems

Si
ASTM F477 ................Specification for Elastomeric Seals for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM F585 ................Practice for Insertion of Flexible Polyethylene Pipe into Existing
Sewers
ASTM F714 ................Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on
Outside Diameter
ASTM F1216 ..............Rehabilitation of Existing Pipelines and Conduits by the Inversion and
Curing of a Resin-Impregnated Tube
ASTM F1248 ..............Standard test method for determination of environmental stress crack
resistance (ESCR)of polyethylene pipe.
ASTM F1533 ..............Standard specification for polyethylene (PE) pipe
ASTM F1606 ..............Standard practice for rehabilitation of existing sewers and conduits
with deformed polyethylene (PE) liner.
ASTM F1697 ..............Standard specification for poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) profile strip for
machine spiral-wound liner pipe rehabilitation of existing sewers and
conduits
ASTM F1698 ..............Installation of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Strip Liner and
Cementitious Grout of Rehabilitation of Existing Man-Entry Sewers
and Conduits
ASTM F1741 ..............Standard practice for installation of machine spiral wound poly (vinyl
chloride) (PVC) liner pipe for rehabilitation of existing sewers and
conduits.
ASTM F794 ................PVC Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings based on
Controlled Inside Diameter
BS 2494......................Materials for elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and pipelines
BS 4346......................Joints and fittings with unplasticized PVC pressure pipes
BS 5556......................Specifications for general requirements for dimensions and pressure
ratings for pipes of thermoplastic materials
BS 5955......................Code of practice for plastic pipe work
BS 8010......................Pipelines
ar
BS EN 752..................Sewerage
at
BS EN 1401................Plastic piping systems
-Q
BS EN 13244..............Polyethylene pipes (type 50) in metric diameter for general purposes
BS EN 1852-1 ............Plastic piping system for non-pressure underground drainage and
sewerage polypropylene (PP)
LL
CP 312, ......................Plastic pipe work

W
ISO 161 ......................Thermoplastic Pipes for the Transport of Fluids Nominal Outside
s
Diameters and Nominal Pressures

en
ISO 9000 ....................Quality Systems

ISO 9967 ....................Method for Determination of Long Term Ring Stiffness
m
WRc ...........................Sewer Rehabilitation Manual

e
Si
11.1.3 Definitions
1 The following terms have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the Contract
clearly renders these meanings inapplicable:
(a) Sliplining: insertion of a new liner pipe into an existing pipeline of larger diameter
followed by grouting of the annulus.
(b) Cured-in-place, inversion, in-situ or soft lining: the creation of a new pipe within an
existing pipeline by insertion of a resin impregrated polyester felt liner by inversion
under pressure lining inversion under pressure, the liner then being cured in-situ.
(c) Spiral wound profile lining: insertion of helically wound, profile walled thermoplastic
sections to form a liner, followed by grouting of the annulus.
(d) Deformed pipe lining: a continuous deformed pipe which reverts to its predeformed
shape after installation.
(e) Pipe cracking or bursting: replacement of an existing pipeline between manholes or

inspection chambers or a combination thereof with a new pipe of equivalent or
greater size whereby the new pipe is inserted behind the pipe breaking machine as
fragments of the existing pipe are displaced to the sides.
(f) Length of sewer: length of sewer pipe between two consecutive manholes or
inspection chambers.
(g) Service connection: the connection of the property sewer with the main sewer pipeline.
11.1.4 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit complete data and details of sewer rehabilitation for the
Engineer’s approval as follows:
(a) name and experience of specialist subcontractor

(b) a programme of work, detailed method statement, and schedule of plant to be used in
the Works, detailing the working practices, and specialist equipment.
ar
(c) proposed method of overpumping or flow diversion as applicable to undertake sewer
at
rehabilitation.
specific data for proposed materials and equipment for the Engineer’s approval 14
(d)
-Q
days prior to commencement of any sewer rehabilitation works as follows:
(i) test certificates and technical literature to show that the sealants, liners, and
LL
lining systems materials proposed meet the requirements stated in the

specifications
W
(ii) original catalogues specific to the requirement for all proposed equipment. All
equipment shall be suitable and made of such materials to withstand the
s
prevailing climatic conditions of Qatar and the corrosive environment.

en
(e) Specific data to be submitted while carrying out and at the completion of the work:
m
(i) records of sealing of sewers in each length of sewer, including joint sealing
verification results
e
(ii) CCTV video tapes, pictures in digital format (TIFF) and site coding sheets
Si
prepared in accordance with Part 10 of this Section showing the initial condition
and the completed work including the restored condition.
(f) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer following data for 15 sewer rehabilitation
projects carried out by the proposed subcontractor during the last five years:
(i) project location
(ii) name and address of client
(iii) start and completion dates
(iv) cost of the works
(v) length, diameter and material of pre-rehabilitated sewers
(vi) length, diameter and liner material for each type of rehabilitation system
(vii) reference letter from the client or the engineer.
2 The Contractor shall submit the following data to supplement (d) of this sub-clause:
(a) Sewer Liner

(i) Manufacturers name.
(ii) Suppliers name.
(iii) Installers name (Subcontractor)
(iv) Product name (if applicable).
(v) Product description.
(vi) Manufacturers technical data.
(vii) Test results or certificates.
(viii) Checked and approved liner pipe thickness design and stiffness calculations.
(ix) Storage instructions.
ar
(x) Installation instructions.
(xi) Installation records in the same project area
at
(xii) Proposed grout mixture where applicable.
-Q
(b) Manhole and joint sealing materials and manhole rehabilitation materials
(i) Manufacturers name.
LL
(ii) Suppliers name.

W
(iii) Installer name (Subcontractor)

(iv) Product name (if applicable).
s
(v) Product description.

en
(vi) Manufacturers technical data.

m
(vii) Test results or certificates.

e
(viii) Storage instructions.

Si
(ix) Application instructions.
3 The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for approval 4 weeks in
advance of commencing the site activity. These shall comprise but not necessarily be limited
to:
(a) Sewage bypass pumping and/or diversion plan which shall include an emergency
response plan to be followed in the event of a failure of the bypass pumping and/or
diversion plan.
(b) Detailed construction plan including:
(i) Equipment set-up and locations of proposed access points.
(ii) Anticipated cut off periods for services.
(iii) Procedures for verification of active service connections.
(iv) Procedures for notifying affected residences and businesses.
(v) Procedures for complying with traffic control.
(vi) Procedures to be adopted to obtain permits to work from the Drainage Affairs.
(vii) Safety procedures in particular working with scaffolding, entering confined

spaces and operations with hot media.
(viii) Sewer cleaning procedures.
(ix) Liner installation procedures.
(x) Procedures for sealing annular space between liner pipe and host pipe where
applicable.
(xi) Methods of sealing any annular space between liner pipe and host pipe at
manholes.
(xii) Procedures for manhole liner-pipe liner joint sealing.
(xiii) Procedures for manhole rehabilitation.
(xiv) Procedure for any required modifications (temporary or permanent) to existing
manholes (such as widening of access opening, removal of cover slabs,
removal of intermediate landings, ladders, removal of manholes benching etc).
ar
4 The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval in advance of
at
commencing the site activity. These shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
(a) Liner insertion locations.

-Q
(b) Sewage bypass pumping and/or diversion locations.
(c) Liner end sealing at manholes and GRP lamination to manhole wall and benching
LL
liners.
W
(d) Any required modification to existing manholes.
5 Representative samples, as agreed with the Engineer, must be submitted for at least the
s
following items before work commences.

en
(a) Proposed liner system.

m
(b) Liner to host pipe sealing materials.

e
(c) Manhole rehabilitation materials.

Si
(d) Manhole liner to pipe liner sealing materials.
1 The system shall be design to comply with the appropriate provisions of BS 2782, BS 3412,
BS 5556, BS EN 752 and BS 8010.
2 The Contractor shall employ approved prequalified specialist subcontractors designated in

the Project Specification.
3 The specialist subcontractor shall conduct this work in accordance with the quality
management procedures conforming to ISO 9000.
4 Key operators employed of the subcontractor shall be competent in the relevant sewer
rehabilitation methods and techniques.
11.1.6 Warranty
1 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a seven year unconditional warranty against
failure of all GRP manhole linings whether caused by defective materials or workmanship.
The warranty shall be valid from the date of completion of the installation and submitted to
the Engineer as a precondition to the issuance of the Certificate of Completion.
11.2.1 Work Programme Review, Cleaning, Inspection
1 When designated in the Project Specification, the Contractor shall allow in his programme of
work for the requirement that he shall work at many locations at any one time. However, at
least one team shall be fully engaged on each length of sewer, and shall finish all
rehabilitation works required on that length of sewer including manholes and chambers
before beginning work on a new length of sewer.
ar
2 The Contractor shall provide methods statements for each of the rehabilitation methods and
at
systems he proposes to use for each of the functional requirements designated in the Project
Specification. -Q
3 As cleaning and inspection work proceeds, the Contractor shall submit weekly sewer and
manhole condition reports to the Engineer. In the reports, the Contractor shall include his
LL
confirmation that his proposed method of rehabilitation meets the required performance
criteria. Should the originally proposed method not meets the performance requirements for
lengths of sewer, or manholes, the Contractor shall submit his proposals to meet the
W
performance requirements for such lengths of sewers or manholes to the Engineer for
approval.
s
en
4 The Engineer and the Contractor shall agree on the locations and systems to be used for
rehabilitation if necessary, and if necessary the Contractor shall review and revise his
m
programme of work and submit to the Engineer for approval. The Engineer’s approval shall
not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the Contract.
e
Si
5 Sewer cleaning, inspection and overpumping work shall be satisfactorily completed before
undertaking sewer rehabilitation.
11.2.2 Safety
1 The Contractor shall carry out all operations in accordance with the safety requirements
specified in Section 1 and Part 10 of this Section.
11.2.3 Preparation for Installation of Linings
1 The following installation procedures shall be adhered to unless approved otherwise by the
Engineer:
(a) before installing lining in sewers the Contractor shall ensure that the sewers are clean
of debris in accordance with Part 10 of this Section. Sewers shall also be gauged to
ensure that they can accommodate the liners.
(b) the Contractor shall inspect by CCTV the section or sections to be lined and shall
record salient features including any obstructions and service connections, in
accordance with Part 10 of this Section.
(c) the Contractor shall overpump the sewage flow around the section or sections of the
pipeline that are to be lined. The overpumping shall be carried at in accordance with
Part 10 of this Section. Leaks in the pipes due to groundwater infiltration shall be
stopped by grouting or other appropriate methods approved by the Engineer.
(d) the Contractor shall clear the pipeline of obstructions, solids, dropped joints, or tree
roots or collapsed pipe that will prevent the insertion of the liner. Where inspection or
gauging reveals an obstruction that is not at the location of the entry shaft, the
Contractor shall remove the obstruction by means of a cutting machine inserted into
the sewer line. Where this is not possible, the Contractor shall make an excavation to
expose and remove or repair the obstruction as directed by the Engineer.
(e) a temporary tie-in shall be made between the relined section and the existing system
and the bypass plug removed at the end of each working day.
ar
(f) Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor shall notify
the Engineer in writing in sufficient time to allow the Engineer the opportunity to inspect
at
and test the product and/or material prior to delivery.
-Q
(g) To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the Engineer a
minimum of 24 hours notice of carrying out the following activities on site.
(i) Sewer cleaning.
LL
(ii) CCTV survey.

W
(iii) Sewage bypass pumping and/or diversion.

(iv) Liner installation.
s
en
(v) Manhole rehabilitation.

(h) No lining work shall be permitted until the prepared sewer has been inspected and
m

e
(i) Where it is necessary to carry out any modification to existing manholes to enable
Si
manhole and/or sewer cleansing, CCTV survey or sewer rehabilitation, the Contractor
shall carry out any such modification to the Engineer’s approval. Following completion
of the works in a manhole, the Contractor shall return the manhole to its original or
better condition to the approval of the Engineer including reinstatement to surfaces
disturbed as a result of manhole modification/sewer rehabilitation. Modification to
manhole may include removal of manhole cover slab, intermediate landing slabs,
platforms and manhole benching. Removal of intermediate landing slabs/platforms
may be considered as permanent (i.e. may not necessarily be reinstated) provided the
GRP wall liner is extended to cover the exposed area due to slab removal and welded
to the existing liner, and the GRP ladder is adjusted and re-installed as a continuous
ladder throughout the manhole height.
(j) Unless specifically itemised and listed in the BOQ, modifications to manholes which
may be necessary to carry out the sewer rehabilitation and associated works shall be
deemed to be included in the sewer rehabilitation rates.
1 Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in accordance with the
manufacturers’ recommendations and the following provisions.
(a) Delivery storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a manner to avoid
product damage.
(b) The liner shall not come in contact with any sharp projections that may cause damage
during transportation loading and unloading. Cover liner during transportation.
(c) Store materials on a flat level area and raised above the ground on timber bearers.
(d) Store materials under opaque cover and out of direct sunlight at all times. Maintain a
free flow of air around materials at all times.
(e) The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and report any
damage to the Engineer.
ar
2 Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling shall be marked by the
Contractor and set aside.
at
3 Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer
-Q
for approval.
4 Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall be removed from
LL
site and replaced.

W
11.2.5 Annulus Grout
1 Low strength grout filling the annular space between the host pipe and the liner (where
s
applicable) shall be a cementitious mixture incorporating suitable admixtures as approved by

en
2
the Engineer and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 12N/mm .
m
2 Generally, the equipment shall be capable of performing the specified operations in lines
where flows do not exceed the maximum line flows for joint testing/sealing.
e
Si
11.3 SEALING OF PIPES AND MANHOLES
11.3.1 Scope
1 Complete or an initial step of rehabilitation by the remote sealing of sewer pipe joints using a
sealing packer. The materials specified herein shall also be applicable in sealing of man-
access sewers and manholes.
11.3.2 Sealing Compounds
1 The sealing material shall comply with BS 2494 and shall perform effectively in the intended
application and under expected field conditions.
2 Mixing and handling of sealing materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3 Chemical sealing compounds shall have the following properties and characteristics:
(a) while being injected, the chemical sealant shall be able to react/perform in the
presence of either, or both, surface water or groundwater, if present
(b) the cured material shall withstand submergence in either, or any combination of,
surface water, groundwater, sea water or sewage without degradation
(c) the resultant sealant formation shall prevent the passage of water through the sewer
pipe joint
(d) the sealant material, after curing, shall be flexible
(e) in place, the formed sealant shall be able to withstand wet/dry cycles without
adversely affecting the seal
(f) the formed sealant shall be non-biodegradable
(g) the cured sealant shall be chemically stable and resistant to the chemical constituents
sewage and the sewer environment
ar
(h) packaging of component materials shall
at
(i) be compatible with site storage and handling requirements
(ii) ensure worker safety
-Q
(iii) cause minimal spillage during handling
(i) mixing of the component materials shall be compatible with field operations
LL
(j) cleanup shall be effected without inordinate use of flammable or hazardous chemicals
W
(k) residual sealing materials shall be removed from the sewer to prevent any blockage of
the sewage flow.
s
en
4 Chemical resin for sealing pipe joints and manholes shall be a hydrophilic polyurethane
compound suitable for injection.
m
5 The material must be “salt-water” grade, able to react with saline ground water to form a
e
flexible seal.
Si
11.3.3 Joint Sealing of Pipes
1 Joints shall be sealed using the internal joint sealing method. Where bell cracks or chips are
evident from pipe section offset, sealing shall be undertaken where the offset is small enough
to allow proper seating of the sealing packer on both sides of the joint to be sealed.
Longitudinally cracked or broken pipe shall be replaced.
2 The sealing equipment shall comprise a CCTV survey system, chemical sealant containers,
pumps, regulators, injection sealing packers, hoses, valves and all other necessary
apparatus and tools required for sealing sewers of the various diameters. The packer shall
be cylindrical and shall be so sized and have cables attached at each end to enable it to be
pulled freely through the pipeline. The packer device shall be constructed in a manner to
allow an amount of sewage to flow as designated in the Project Specification.
3 Joint shall be sealed by injecting chemical sealing compound into or through faulty joints
using a system of pumps, hoses, and sealing packers. Jetting or driving pipes from the
surface that could damage the pipelines or impair their structural integrity will not be
permitted. Uncovering the pipe by excavation of pavement and soil will not be allowed. The
packer shall be positioned over the faulty joint by means of a measuring device and the
CCTV camera in the pipeline. The Contractor shall ensure that the packer is accurately
positioned over the joint. The packer ends shall be expanded using controlled pressure. The
expanded ends shall seal against the inside periphery of the pipe to form a void area at the
faulty joint which shall be completely isolated from the remainder of the pipeline. Sealant
compound shall be pumped into the isolated area through the hose system at controlled
pressures in excess of groundwater pressure, if any.
4 Upon completing sealing of each joint, the packer shall be completely deflated then reinflated
and the joint retested. Should the void pressure meter not read zero after deflation, the
Contractor shall clean his equipment of residual grout material or make the necessary
equipment repairs/adjustments to produce accurate void pressure readings. Joints that fail to
meet the specified test criteria shall be resealed and retested until the test criteria can be
ar
met.
at
5 Residual sealing materials protruding into the pipe shall be removed. The sealed joints shall
-Q
be left flush with the pipe surface. Excessive residual sealing materials which accumulate in
the pipeline shall be removed.
6 Records shall be kept of joints sealing performed in each length of sewer to identify the
LL
length of sewer in which joints were, the location of each joint sealed, and the joint sealing
verification test results.
W
7 Not more than one month before the expiration of the Period of Maintenance and as a
s
precondition to the Engineer’s issuance of the Maintenance Certificate for the Contract,
en
sewers shall be retested as follows:
(a) an initial retest area consisting of specific lengths of sewers will be selected by the
m
Engineer. Length of sewers to be retested shall be randomly selected throughout the

e
project area and shall be representative of the majority of the sealing work originally
Si
performed. The initial retest area shall consist of at least 5 %, but not exceed 10 %, of
the length contained in the Contract
(b) within the initial retest area, the Contractor shall retest all previously sealed joints as
specified. Any joints failing the retest shall be resealed at no extra cost to the Employer
(c) if the failure rate of the joints exceeds 5 % of the retested joints, an additional retest
area of equivalent size will be selected by the Engineer and all previously sealed
joints shall be retested. The additional testing and sealing, where necessary, shall
continue until a failure rate of less than 5 % is achieved
(d) additional testing or sealing required beyond the initial retest area shall be
accomplished at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall provide adequate
number of crews at Site so that the retesting will proceed at a rapid rate.
8 The pumping unit, metering equipment and the packer device shall be designed so that
proportions and quantities of materials can be regulated in accordance with the type and size
of the leak being sealed.
11.3.4 Sealing of Manholes
1 During cleaning and inspection work the condition of manholes shall be observed and their
structural soundness shall be evaluated by the Contractor and reported in the cleaning and
inspection reports. Sealing work shall only be carried out on manholes which the Engineer
considers structurally sound and which experience extraneous water leakage.
2 Cracks and openings to be sealed shall be marked out in detail on the concrete elements by
the Contractor and agreed with the Engineer before proceeding with sealing operations.
3 Sealing equipment shall consist of chemical sealant containers, pumps, regulators, injection
packers, hoses, valves, and all other necessary apparatus and tools. The chemical injection
pumps shall be equipped with pressure meters for monitoring pressure during the injection of
the chemical sealants. Where necessary, fluid bypass lines equipped with pressure-
regulated bypass valves shall be incorporated into the pumping system.
4 Structural cracks shall be repaired out as follows:
ar
(a) holes shall be carefully drilled close to the damaged section from within the manhole
at
and shall extend through the entire manhole wall
(b)
-Q
if leakage is occurring through cracks due to high groundwater table, fewer holes shall
be drilled provided all leakage is stopped from these holes. A watertight seal between
the holes and the injection device shall be provided. Hoses, shall be attached to the
LL
injection device from an injection pump. Chemical sealing materials shall then be
pumped through the hose until material refusal is recorded on the pressure gauge
mounted on the pumping unit or a predetermined quantity of sealant has been injected
W
(c) care shall be exercised during the pumping operation to ensure that excessive
s
pressures do not develop and causing damage to the manhole structure

en
(d) upon completion of the injection, the packers shall be removed and the remaining
holes filled with mortar and trowelled flush with the surface of the manhole walls or
m
other surfaces
e
(e) the mortar used shall be of the quick-setting type with non-shrinking characteristics
Si
(f) any GRP internal lining which has been disturbed shall be repaired in accordance with
5 Not more than one month before the expiration of the Period of Maintenance and as a
precondition to the Engineer’s issuance of the Maintenance Certificate for the Contract,
manholes shall be visually inspected by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
Sealing work that has become defective shall be repaired at no additional cost to the
Employer.
6 All manhole sealing shall be done during high groundwater conditions, unless the points of
leakage have been previously identified.
11.4 SLIPLINING OF SEWERS
11.4.1 General
1 The scope of work consists of rehabilitating sewers by the insertion of liner pipe into existing
sewers. The finished liner shall extend the full distance detailed in the project specific
documentation, which may be for localised repair, or extend the full sewer length. In either
case the lining shall be completely sealed and watertight.
2 Procedures set out in ASTM F 585 shall be followed, except as otherwise specified in this
Part.
3 The Contractor is not constrained on the type of lining method he puts forward, but the
Contractor will have to demonstrate, through previous project documentation, that the
proposed method has a proven track record and that it is fully applicable to the conditions to
be found in the Gulf region.
ar
4 The Contractor shall design the liner to support all combinations of imposed loads including
earth, traffic, hydrostatic etc and have a minimum service life of 50 years. For the purpose of
at
calculations, it shall be assumed the ground water table is at ground level. Host pipes shall
-Q
be considered to be fully deteriorated. The liner shall have a minimum allowable long term
2
stiffness of 2500N/m and be designed to have a factor of safety of 2.
LL
5 The normal requirement will be that the liner shall provide the least possible thickness or
decrease in diameter to meet the requirements of this section and consequently it is
preferable to be of the close fit type.
W
6 Liner shall be of a light colour to enhance Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) clarity for
s
inspection purposes.
en
7 Leak repair shall be carried out when required to create an environment to enable the
m
rehabilitation works to be executed successfully. If the rehabilitation method adopted can be

successfully implemented under wet conditions, the Contractor is not obliged to repair the
e
leaks.
Si
8 The finished liner shall be continuous over the entire length of an insertion run between two
manholes or access points and shall be free from visual defects.
9 The beginning and end of the liner pipe shall be sealed to the rehabilitated pipeline and to
manhole liner using a material that is compatible with the liner.
11.4.2 Materials
1 The sewer liner pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from a polyethylene compound
conforming to ASTM D1248 and meeting the requirements for Type II or III, Class B or C,
Grades P23 or P34, Category 5. Pipe made from this compound shall have a minimum long-
term hydrostatic strength rating of 8.6 MPa in accordance with ASTM D2837. When the
environmental stress crack resistance (ESCR) of the compound is measured in accordance
with ASTM D1693, Condition C, the compound shall withstand not less than 192h in 100 %
solution Igepal CO-630 at 38 C before reaching a 20 % failure point (F20).
2 The standard dimension ration (SDR), defined as the specified outside diameter (OD) divided
by the minimum wall thickness, shall be demonstrated by calculation to be sufficient to
support the worst combination of internal and external loads. The wall thickness tolerance
shall be within plus 12 %.
3 Liner pipe shall be provided with joints designed so that neither the outside diameter of the
pipe is increased nor the internal diameter of the pipe is decreased at the joint.
0
4 Liner pipes shall be suitable for use in ambient air temperatures up to 55 C and with sewage
0
up to 45 C.
11.4.3 Installation of Sliplining
1 Where excavations for insertion of liner are made, the Contractor shall locate the excavations
on the basis of the location of the sewers to be sliplined, pulling distances, and traffic
conditions subject to Engineer’s approval. Excavation locations shall be such as to minimise
traffic disruption, and the number of excavations reduced by inserting the pipe in both
ar
directions from a single opening. Insertion shafts shall be designed to avoid imposing a
bending radius of less than 35 times the outside diameter of the liner. Insertion shafts shall
at
be sloped gradually from the ground surface to the soffit of the sewer. The Contractor shall
-Q
provide sufficient sheeting and bracing to the excavation as required. The soffit of the
existing sewer shall be exposed and the crown of the pipe shall be removed as necessary for
insertion of the liner. Care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom portion of the existing
pipe.
LL
2 Jointing shall be by thermal butt-fusion welding in accordance with the manufacturer’s

W
recommendations. All fusion jointing shall be carried out by trained personnel with equipment
designed for butt-fusion welding of thermoplastic pipe.
s
en
3 Sections of liner shall be jointed above ground either at the Site or at a remote location.
m
4 Where the insertion shaft is not at a manhole the jointing shall be accomplished using a
stainless steel full-encirclement clamp. If such jointing cannot be achieved, then a new
e
manhole shall be constructed. Recommended minimum lengths of clamps to afford adequate

Si
pullout protection are given in Table 11.1.
Table 11.1
Minimum Length of Clamps
OD of Liner Pipe Minimum Length of Clamp
(mm) (mm)
90 190
115 250
135 250
170 380
180 380
220 380
270 500
OD of Liner Pipe Minimum Length of Clamp
325 500
340 500
405 760
455 760
475 760
560 760
661 760
5 Alternative pipe jointing methods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
6 The liner shall be inserted with a power winch and steel cable connected to the end of the
ar
liner using of an appropriate pulling head. Where necessary a second pulling head may be
attached to the other end of the liner for attachment of a tag line to pull the liner back out of
at
the sewer. -Q
7 Pulling shall be continued form start to completion without interruption, and precautions shall
be taken during insertion to protect the liner pipe so that any ragged edges of a broken sewer
pipe will not score the outside of the liner.
LL
8 The manufacturer’s recommendations regarding relaxation of the liner shall be followed

W
before sealing the annular space between the liner and existing sewer pipe. The annular
space between the polyethylene liner and the existing sewer shall be sealed using a method
s

en
9 Where an existing manhole is used as an entrance shaft the manhole shall be reinstated to
good condition or it shall be replaced with a new manhole in accordance with Part 4 of this
m
Section.
e
Si
10 Foam sealant shall not protrude into the manhole and the sealant shall be finished over with
a quick-setting, non-shrinking type of cement grout. Finishing inside the manhole shall be
accomplished using a quick-setting cement type grout to raise the manhole trough to the
invert of the liner pipe and reform the manhole benching as required. Exposed cement type
grout surfaces shall be protected against corrosion by lining with GRP in accordance with
Clause 4.4.1 of this Section.
11 Precautions shall be taken to prevent collapsing of the liner owing to excessive grouting
pressure.
12 The liner shall be secured in the upstream manhole. Each existing service connection shall
be excavated and reconnected to the new liner pipe using either polyethylene heat fusion
saddles or strap-on saddles as conditions require. A neoprene gasket shall be inserted
between the liner and the strap-on saddle. Saddles shall be secured to the liner pipe using
stainless steel bands. Connections of saddle fittings to existing service connections shall be
made using elastomeric boots, full-encirclement clamps, or other methods approved by the
Engineer.
13 Before backfilling any existing sewers that had been broken to open, the pipe shall be
repaired and the annular space between the existing sewer and the new liner sealed using
cement or expandable foam to the approval of the Engineer.
14 At locations where the liner pipe has been exposed, the pipe and fittings shall be encased in
Grade 20 SRC concrete.
11.5 DEFORMED PIPE LINER INSTALLATION
11.5.1 Scope
1 The scope of the work consists of rehabilitating sewers by the insertion of a deformed
thermoplastic pipe into existing sewers. The deformed pipe on the application of pressure
and temperature or on release of deforming stress induced by swaging reverts to its pre-
deformed shape to form a tight fit inside the host pipe without the formation of an annulus.
11.5.2 Materials
ar
1 The HDPE liner material shall be designed for use in gravity sewers and shall be in strict
at
conformance with all applicable sections of ASTM F1533.
-Q
2 The liner shall be made from High Density Polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D1248,
Type III, Grade P34 and Cell Classification PE 345434C, D or E per ASTM D3350. The
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval certified test results from the liner pipe
LL
manufacturer to verify that the resin material used for extrusions of the liner meets the
specified requirements, including the quality control records during the liner extrusion
W
process.
s
3 At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be inspected for defects with samples being
en
taken in accordance with ASTM D4703 and tested in accordance with ASTM D1693, ASTM
D2837 and ASTM F714.
m
4 For testing purposes a production lot shall consist of all liner having the same marking
e
number. It shall include all items produced during any given work shift and must be identified
Si
accordingly to differentiate it from previous or following production.
5 Each deformed liner coil in compliance with ASTM F1533 shall be clearly marked by the
manufacturer with the following information:
(a) ASTM F1533 designation.

(b) Nominal outside diameter.
(c) SDR.
(d) Approximate coil length.
(e) Standard material designation code.
(f) Manufacturer’s name.
(g) Manufacturer’s production code from which plant location, machine and date of
manufacture can be identified.
(h) The project or contract number.
6 Liner minimum wall thickness shall be determined by strength and minimum stiffness
requirements.
7 The liner shall be fabricated from materials which will be resistant to internal exposure to
sewage, sewage gases and reagents listed in Table 1 above, when tested in accordance with
the provisions of ASTM D543, to a temperature of 40°C.
8 The HDPE material used in the production of the liner shall meet, or exceed, the physical
properties given in Table 11.5 below.
Table 11.5
Deformed Pipe Liner Properties
Property Test Method Value
3
Density ASTM D1505 950kg/m
Flow rate ASTM D1238 8.0g/10min
ar
2
Tensile strength @ ultimate ASTM D638 30N/mm
at
2
Tensile strength @yield ASTM D638 20N/mm
Ultimate elongation
-Q
ASTM D638 600%
2
Flexural modulus ASTM D790 1000N/mm
LL
Environmental stress crack

resistance
ASTM D1693 10,000 hrs
W
F0, hours condition C

ASTM F1248 10,000 hrs
Compressed ring ESCR F0
s
0
Brittleness temperature ASTM D746 -117 C
en
0
Vicat softening temperature ASTM D1525 125 C
m
Hardness, Shore D ASTM D2240 50

e
15
Volume resistivity ASTM D991 10 ohm-cm
Si
0
Thermal expansion 0.20mm/m/ C
9 At the time of installation the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in colour, free
of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters and deleterious faults.
11.5.3 Installation
1 The Contractor’s method statement shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. In the
method statement the Contractor shall describe the means of deforming the liner in-situ and
of providing, maintaining, monitoring, and controlling the reforming environment until the liner
has reverted to its original circular shape and the temperature returns to the normal sewer
ambient temperature.
2 Calculations demonstrating the adequacy of the pulling capacity of the winch shall be
prepared and submitted by the Contractor for the Engineer’s approval.
3 The liner shall be positioned at the upstream manhole without excavation and shall be
winched directly from the coil through the upstream manhole and the host pipe.
4 Due care shall be exercised during winching to avoid damage to manholes and snagging.
Guides or rollers shall be used within the manholes to avoid the risk of snagging.
5 The pulling winch shall be equipped with a tension gauge capable of controlled operation at
variable speed.
6 The pipe shall be cut flush at manhole inlet and outlet points using a rotary cutter and the
joints sealed.
7 The Contractor shall adopt working practices for plastic pipes accordance with BS 5955.
8 The Contractor shall obtain detailed installation instructions and procedures from the
manufacturer for the actual installation of the deformed and reformed system. The
requirements of ASTM F1606 shall also be satisfied.
ar
9 When the deformed pipe liner is in place it shall be cut and the pipe end closing assembly
at
used for heat and pressure control within the liner shall be attached and secured at both pipe
ends. Temperature and pressure measuring instruments shall be attached to both ends of
-Q
the deformed HDPE liner to provide a continuous monitor of the temperature and pressure
being applied to the liner.
LL
10 Through the use of steam and air pressure the deformed pipe shall be reformed to conform
to the existing pipe wall.
W
11 The reformed HDPE liner shall be cooled in accordance with the manufacturer’
s
recommendations.
en
12 Temperatures and pressures shall be monitored and recorded throughout the installation
process to ensure that each phase of the process is achieved at the manufacturer’s
m
recommended temperature and pressure limits

e
Si
13 For each length of liner two samples shall be taken at locations determined by the Engineer.
The sampling method shall include the use of a former to replicate the host pipe. The
samples shall be clearly labelled with date taken and location. The samples shall be tested
for average inside diameter, average outside diameter and minimum wall thickness in
accordance with ASTM D2122, pipe stiffness at 5% deflection in accordance with ASTM
D2412 and for the properties given in Table 3. The stiffness so measured shall meet, or
exceed the stiffness requirements determined by calculation for that section of sewer line or
the minimum specified stiffness whichever is greater. Any material may be rejected for failing
to meet any of the requirements of this specification.
14 The water tightness of the liner shall be gauged throughout the forming process.
11.6 CURED-IN-PLACE LINER INSTALLATION (INVERSION METHOD)
11.6.1 Scope
1 The scope of work consists of rehabilitating sewers by the installation of a resin impregnated
flexible felt tube inverted into existing sewers. When cured, the new material shall extend
over the length of the inversion as a continuous, tight-fitting, watertight lining.
11.6.2 Materials
1 The liner material shall be designed for use in gravity sewers and shall be in strict
conformance with all applicable sections of ASTM F1216.
2 The felt liner tube shall be a thermoplastic polyester tube consisting of one or more layers of
flexible needled felt or an equivalent woven and/or non/woven material capable of carrying
resin, and with sufficient needling and crosslapping and strength to withstand the installation
pressures and curing temperatures.
3 The felt tube shall be compatible with the resin and catalyst systems to be utilised.
4 The finished liner shall consist of a felt layer (or layers) impregnated with a thermosetting
resin and fabricated to fit tight against the host pipe. An allowance shall be made for
circumferential stretching during installation where applicable.
5 Each felt liner tube shall be clearly marked by the manufacturer with the following
ar
information:
at
(a) Manufacturer’s name.
(b)
-Q
Manufacturer’s production code from which plant location, machine and date of
manufacture can be identified.
(c) The project or contract number.
LL
W
6 The lining technique shall comprise using a suitable preliner to prevent loss of resin.
7 The resin used shall be a general purpose, unsaturated, thermosetting, vinylester resin able
s
to cure in the presence or absence of water and a catalyst system compatible with the
en
insertion process that provides physical properties given in Table 11.6.

m
Table 11.6
e
Cured in Place Liner Properties

Si
Property Test Method Value
2
Flexural strength ASTM D790 31N/mm
2
Short term flexural modulus ASTM D790 1724N/mm
2
Long term flexural modulus ASTM D790 862N/mm
2
Tensile strength ASTM D638 21N/mm
8 The installed and cured liner shall be chemically resistant to exposure to sewage and sewage
gases as experienced with the high temperatures in Qatar.
9 At the time of installation the liner shall be free of all visible tears, holes, cuts, foreign
materials and other defects.
10 The liner shall be fabricated to a size that when installed will neatly fit the internal
circumference of the sewer being renovated. Allowance shall be made for circumferential
stretching during insertion. The minimum length shall be that deemed necessary by the
Contractor to effectively span the distance from inlet to outlet of the respective manholes
unless otherwise designated in the contract specification. The Contractor shall verify the
lengths on Site before impregnation. Individual inversion runs may be made over one or
more lengths of sewer as determined on Site by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
11.6.3 Installation of Cured-In-Place Liner
1 The following installation procedure shall be adhered to unless otherwise proposed in the
Contractor’s method statement and approved by the Engineer:
(a) the Contractor shall designate a location or locations where the reconstruction tube will
be vacuum impregnated before installation. The Contractor shall allow the
Engineer to inspect the materials and wet-out procedure. A catalyst system
ar
compatible with the resin and reconstruction tube shall be used
at
(b) the Contractor shall provide facilities to control the temperature of the wet-out
reconstruction tube to prevent premature setting of the resin
-Q
(c) the wet-out reconstruction tube shall be inserted through an existing manhole or
other approved access by means of an inversion process and the application of an
inversion medium of sufficient pressure and volume sufficient to fully extend it to the
LL
designated or termination point

W
(d) the inversion pressure shall be adjusted to be sufficient to cause the

impregnated tube to invert from manhole to manhole and hold the tube tight to the
pipe wall and to produce dimples at side connections and flared ends at the
s
manholes. Care shall be taken during the elevated curing temperature so as not to
en
overstress the felt fibre

(e) after inversion is complete, the Contractor shall provide a suitable curing
m
environment. Monitoring and control equipment shall be provided to permit

e
observation and maintenance of the curing environment. Temperature and other

Si
factors of the curing environment shall be those recommended by the resin

manufacturer
(f) should excessive infiltration into the sewer be present, a preliner shall be inserted
into the sewer line to prevent washout of the resin.
2 Initial curing shall be deemed to be completed when inspection of the exposed portions of
cured pipe appear to be hard and sound and the remote temperature sensor indicates that
the temperature is of a magnitude to realise an exotherm. The curing period shall be that
recommended by the resin manufacturer, as modified for the cured-in-place inversion
process, during which time the Contractor shall maintain the quality of the curing environment
to the levels recommended by the resin manufacturer.
3 The Contractor shall cool the hardened liner to a temperature below 38 C before relieving
the pressure. Cooling may be accomplished by the introduction of cool water into the
inversion standpipe to replace water being drained from a small hole made in the
downstream end. Care shall be taken in the release of the static head so that a vacuum will
not be developed that could damage the newly installed liner.
4 Where the new liner fails to make a tight seal due to broken or misaligned host pipe at the
manhole wall, the Contractor shall apply a seal at that point. The seal shall be of a resin
mixture compatible with the liner and the host pipe.
5 After the new liner has been cured in place, the Contractor shall reconnect existing active
service connections as directed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise designated in the contract
specific documentation, shall be done without excavation. In the case of non -man-entry
pipes from the interior of the system by means of CCTV cameras and a cutting devices that
re-establish the service connection and seal the joint at the point of entry of the service
connection.
6 The Contractor shall obtain detailed installation instructions and procedures from the
manufacturer for the actual installation of the cured in place liner system. The requirements
of ASTM F1216 shall also be satisfied.
7 The section of pipeline to be lined shall have been cleaned, surveyed and repaired to the
requirements of this section of the standard specification prior to liner installation.
ar
8 For each length of liner two samples shall be taken at locations determined by the Engineer.
at
Sampling method shall include the use of a former to replicate the host pipe. The samples
-Q
shall be clearly labelled with date taken and location. The samples shall be tested for
average inside diameter, average outside diameter and minimum wall thickness in
accordance with ASTM D2122, pipe stiffness at 5% deflection in accordance with ASTM
D2412 and for the properties given in Table 2. The stiffness so measured shall meet, or
LL
exceed the stiffness requirements determined by calculation for that section of sewer line or
the minimum specified stiffness whichever is greater. Any material may be rejected for failing
W
to meet any of the requirements of this specification.

s
9 The watertightness of the pipe shall be gauged while curing and under a positive head.
en
10 The beginning and end of the liner pipe shall be sealed to the rehabilitated pipeline and to the
m
manhole liner using a material that is compatible with the liner.

e
11 Wrinkles in the finished pipe which exceed 5% of the pipe diameter are unacceptable and the
Si
liner shall be removed and a replacement liner installed to the approval of the Engineer.
11.7 SPIRAL WOUND PROFILE LINER
11.7.1 Scope
1 The scope of work consists of rehabilitation of sewers by the installation of helically wound,
profile walled thermoplastic pipe.
11.7.2 Materials
1 The physical properties of the PVC-U material used in the production of the liner shall
conform to the cell classifications 12454C or 1236C, as defined by ASTM D1784.
Notwithstanding this requirement, the material shall meet or exceed the following physical
properties, as given in Table 11.2:
Table 11.2
Physical Properties of PVC-U Material
Property Value
Flexural Modulus (Short Term) 2400 MPa

Flexural Modulus (Long Term) 800 MPa
Tensile Strength (Short Term) 45 MPa
Tensile Strength (Long Term) 20 MPa
Heat Distortion Temperature 70 C
Specific Gravity 1.4
Allowable Long-term Strain 2%
Hardness (Shore D) 80
ar
at
2 The base material for the liner shall consist of a profile walled strip, extruded from PVC-U or
other thermoplastic material, approved by the Engineer in accordance with ASTM F 1697. All
-Q
materials shall be resistant to internal exposure to potable water, sea water, sewage, sewer
gases, and reagents listed in Table 11.3, when tested in accordance with the provisions of
ASTM D543, to a temperature of 35 C:
LL
W
Table 11.3
Resistance of Liner Material
s
en
Reagent Concentration
Nitric Acid 5%
m
Phosphoric Acid 10 %
e
Sulphuric Acid 10 %
Si
Detergent 0.1 %
Soap 0.1 %
3 Where high liner stiffness is required to resist external loads, the strength of the liner may be
enhanced by the provision of plastic-coated stainless steel reinforcement wound into the liner
at the time of installation. The steel reinforcement shall consist of stainless steel type 316L
and shall be coated with a low density polyethylene coating or other material approved by the
Engineer, not less than 1 mm thick. The steel shall meet or exceed the following physical
properties given in Table 11.4:
Table 11.4
Physical Properties of Steel
Property Value
Tensile Strength 250 MPa

Modulus of Elasticity 195 GPa
9 x 10 / C
-6
Coefficient of thermal expansion
4 For each length of liner a sample shall be prepared prior to the winding machine being placed
into the manhole. A length of pipe shall be formed from the same batch of material to be
used in the installation. The length of sample shall be such that three lengths may be cut and
tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 for pipe stiffness at 5% deflection and for the
properties given in Table 4. The stiffness so measured shall meet, or exceed the stiffness
requirements determined by calculation for that section of sewer line or the minimum
specified stiffness whichever is greater. Any material may be rejected for failure to meet any
ar
of the requirements of this specification.
at
5 Each liner shall be clearly marked by the manufacturer with the following information:
-Q
Manufacturer’s name
Manufacturer’s production code from which plant location, machine and date of manufacture
can be identified
LL
The project or contract number

W
6 At the time of installation the liner shall be homogenous throughout, uniform in colour, free of
cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters and deleterious faults.
s
7 This method may only be used for pipes of 250mm diameter or greater.
en
11.7.3 Installation of Spiral Wound Profile Liner

m
1 The installation of spiral wound liner shall follow the recommendations of ASTM F-1698.
e
Si
2 Spirally wound profile liners shall be installed using a winding machine placed at the bottom
of the manhole, with the liner being introduced at a diameter of approximately 25 mm less
than the minimum diameter of the pipeline to be rehabilitated. After the liner has been
installed, the annular gap shall be filled with a cementitious grout or the liner shall be
expanded until it comes into intimate contact with the host pipe.
3 Jointing of the liner shall be accomplished by the use of an adhesive material suitable for use
with the liner material. The adhesive shall be fully resistant to the corrosive sewer
environment and shall be applied to the strips at temperatures of 35 to 50 C. Alternatively
the liner shall be joined using a mechanical locking strip. The strip shall have mechanical and
chemical resistance properties that are not less than those of the liner material. The joint
shall be continuous and watertight for the full length of the sewer. The interface between the
liner and manhole shall be sealed with material specified in Clause 11.10.3.
4 Grouting of the annulus shall be carried out using the differential pressure method. The liner
shall be filled with water and maintained at a constant pressure that is greater than the
grouting pressure. Failure to maintain pressure in the pipeline will indicate that a defect
exists. The water pressure shall be monitored via a gauge fitted to the grout plug, whereas
the grouting pressure shall be monitored via a gauge fitted at the end of the grout hose.
When water direct from a potable supply is used, an anti-siphon device shall be used to
prevent contamination. Grouting shall be continued until there is a consistent flow of grout at
the upstream manhole. Should grout pressure build up, before a show of grout is observed,
the injection shall be stopped immediately to prevent damage to the liner. A sample of the
grout shall be taken during grouting and its curing time monitored.
5 Alternative grouting methods that are specific to a particular lining system will be allowed only
with the approval of the Engineer.
11.8 PIPE CRACKING OR BURSTING
11.8.1 Scope
ar
at
1 Rehabilitation of sewers by the replacement of existing pipes with polyethylene (PE) or
polypropylene (PP) pipes by breaking the existing pipes, expanding the hole size and
-Q
inserting the replacement pipes in one operation with a minimum of disturbance to the
surrounding ground and no surface disruption.
LL
11.8.2 General
1 The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the pipe bursting procedures will not have
W
detrimental effects on adjacent utilities or structures, particularly from vibration arising from
use of pneumatic bursters. The Contractor shall be responsible for such damage and shall
s
bear the cost of rectification.

en
2 The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of service authorities and shall be
m
deemed to have identified the location of services which may be affected by the Works.
Unless otherwise required by the service authorities, where services are known to be located
e
within one meter of the pipe to be burst, the Contractor shall expose the service in advance
Si
of pipe bursting. A minimum free space of 500 mm shall be created beneath the service over
a length to be agreed between the Contractor and the service authorities.
11.8.3 Materials
1 The materials used for replacement of the existing pipes shall be polyethylene or
polypropylene unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.
2 The method of jointing the pipes shall be as the manufacturer’s recommendations for the
application. Unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer pipe joints shall be
designed to be watertight against external water pressure assuming that groundwater
extends to the ground surface.
11.8.4 Installation Equipment
1 Pipe bursting equipment shall be hydraulically or pneumatically powered incorporating an

expander at the nose of the machine which will fragment the existing pipe and expand the
space uniformly to a diameter sufficient to allow the replacement pipe to be inserted. The
annular space between the expander and the replacement pipe shall not exceed 20 mm
unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
2 The method of inserting the replacement pipe shall be such that stresses transmitted to the
replacement pipe shall not damage the pipes or exceed the tensile capacity of the
replacement pipe.
3 Pipe bursting equipment shall be capable of
(a) Working from existing manholes so that they can be used as launch and reception
shafts wherever possible. Provision shall be made for remote starting and stopping.
(b) Dealing with small quantities of unreinforced concrete of maximum 150 mm nominal
ar
thickness found surrounding pipes, joints, saddles and service connections and for
at
bursting pipes laid on a concrete cradle without being deflected off line and level.
(c) Working under a hydrostatic pressure of groundwater.
-Q
(d) Operating at maximum depth of 10.0 m from surface level.
(e) Operation without jamming of moving parts or other malfunction due to the ingress of
LL
groundwater or sand particles.

W
4 Where the Contractor has not previously used the equipment or demonstrated the pipe
bursting technique to the satisfaction of the Engineer then he shall demonstrate the suitability
of the equipment as follows:
s
en
(a) construct in open ground at a location approved by the Engineer, a 50m long
temporary section of pipe of the same bore and material as the sewer to be
m
rehabilitated at similar depth, complete with unbenched chambers at each end;

e
(b) backfill the excavation;

Si
(c) demonstrate the pipe bursting procedure.

(d) on completion of the pipe installation flood the site to artificially bring the water table to
the ground surface and demonstrate that infiltration requirements of Part 4 of this
Section are met.
5 Should difficulties be encountered in completing the trial installation the Contractor shall
modify his proposal for approval by the Engineer before recommencing work.
6 Measures shall be taken to ensure that the replacement pipe does not become separated
from the pipe expander should the system employ an insertion technique which allows the
replacement pipe to slide within the pipe expander.
11.8.5 Installation
1 Shafts for launch and reception shall be existing manholes and excavations made over
existing inspection chambers and service connections where the latter are proposed to be
reconnected to the pipeline. Service connections to be abandoned or redirected to upstream
or downstream chambers or manholes shall not be excavated.
2 Unless specifically approved by the Engineer pipe bursting shall not be carried out by
constructing shafts adjacent to manholes. Where necessary, the channel, benching and
walls of existing manholes shall be altered to receive the pipe bursting equipment. All
manhole alterations shall be made good.
3 The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the potential problems arising from the inflow of
groundwater and loss of ground from the outside of manholes. His proposed method of
working shall take these into consideration and shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval
and shall ensure that no inflow of groundwater or loss of ground occurs. Where manholes
are located in roads, the Contractor shall obtain permission from the Roads Division prior to
carrying out any wellpoint dewatering operations around the manhole. In the event that
means of stabilising the ground around the manhole and connecting pipelines are not
approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall not use pipe bursting methods at that location
unless any other alternative method is approved by the Engineer.
4 Existing service connections shall be disconnected from the existing pipeline in advance of
pipe bursting and reconnected on completion of the installation of the replacement pipe. In
ar
the interval, the Contractor shall maintain service by temporarily connecting service
connections to the sewerage system downstream of the section, by overpumping, or by such
at
other method the Contractor may propose for the Engineer’s approval.
-Q
5 Sewer lengths to be rehabilitated shall be checked for the presence of collapses occurring
subsequent to cleaning by gauging between shafts. Where a collapse is detected its position
shall be determined and an additional shaft shall be excavated if the debris cannot be
LL
removed.
W
6 Pipe bursting shall not commence unless sufficient lengths of replacement pipes are
available on Site to complete the length of pipe to be rehabilitated.
s
en
7 Where pipe bursting is delayed for a period exceeding 7 days following cleaning, the pipeline
shall be reinspected.
m
8 Winching shall conform to the following requirements:

e
Si
(a) Details of the proposed winching method shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval at least 7 days before the insertion date
(b) Winches shall be of the constant load type fitted with a direct reading load gauge. At
the end of each day’s work, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a copy of
the winching loads recorded at the start of any pull and during the pull at increments of
20 m of winching distance and at any restart following temporary stops
(c) Winches shall be fitted with an automatic device to disengage when the load
exceeds a preset maximum load.
(d) The Contractor shall supply sufficient cable in one continuous length to ensure the
pull is continuous between approved winching points
(e) Winches, cables and cable drums shall be provided with safety cages and supports
(f) The Contractor shall provide a system of guide pulleys and bracings at each manhole
(g) Nose cones fixed to the head of pipe expanders shall be fitted with a swivel attachment
to prevent twist transmission between the winch cable and the nose cone
(h) Where the Contractor proposes to use a lubricant to ease the pull, the type of
lubricant, method of introduction, removal and quantity to be used shall be submitted
for the Engineer’s approval before beginning winching
(i) Trench sidewall support in the insertion trench shall remain completely separate from
the pipe support system and shall be designed so as not to be in contact with the pipe
or the winch cable.
9 Replacement pipe shall be inserted in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) the maximum force shall be within the stress limit of the pipe
(b) continuous length pipelines shall not be used. The maximum pipe length for insertion
shall be 1.5 m where pipe bursting is undertaken between excavated shafts and either
700 mm or 800 mm where pipe bursting is undertaken from manhole to manhole
(c) where a device is employed to exert force on the rear of the inserted pipe lengths, the
force applied to the inserted pipe shall be evenly distributed around the wall of the
pipe
ar
(d) Where lengths of pipe are joined and a device is employed to exert force to the rear of
at
the inserted pipe lengths, precautions shall be taken to ensure that no buckling,
crushing, twisting, or damage to the joint of the pipe takes place. Where, in the
-Q
opinion of the Engineer, excessive deformation of the pipe has taken place, the pipe
shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
Where the lining is to be joined using ‘Snap-Lock’ or similar fittings, the Contractor shall
LL
10
comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations for jointing. Means of verifying the critical
dimensions of the joints shall be provided on site by the Contractor. The joint shall be fitted
W
with a suitable sealing ring and shall be designed to be watertight against an excess external
water pressure of 20 metres head.
s
en
11.9 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPE LINES AFTER REHABILITATION

m
1 The completed sewer shall meet the leakage requirements of pressure tests or air tests as
specified in Part 4 of this Section.
e
Si
2 After completion of each length of sewer, the Contractor shall flush the pipeline and
undertake a CCTV and deflection survey and provide video tapes, pictures on digital format
and site coding sheets to the Engineer.
3 Where necessary the Contractor shall remove any debris and carry out any remedial work
identified. Upon completion of remedial work and removal of debris the section shall be
resurveyed and the Engineer provided with the latest CCTV video tapes. Further additional
CCTV surveys resulting from the need to again clean or carry out further remedial work shall
be at no additional cost to the Employer.
4 The rehabilitated sewer shall be returned to service only after the written approval of the
Engineer.
5 During the guarantee period any defects which will affect the integrity or strength of the pipe
shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense, in a manner mutually agreed by the Engineer
and the Contractor.
11.10 MANHOLE REHABILITATION
11.10.1 Scope
1 The scope of work consists of the materials and types and methods of repair for the
rehabilitation of manholes.
11.10.2 General
1 Manhole rehabilitation shall comprise but not be limited to any combination of the following:
(a) Rehabilitation of walls or bases by plugging, patching, and removing, providing or

replacing mortars, coatings, sealants and liners, to improve structural condition,
prevent infiltration, provide corrosion protection or external tanking protection.
(b) Repair of shaft and cover slab and reconstruction to the required level
(c) Reinstallation or replacement of manhole frame and cover
ar
(d) Installation of manhole sealing plate.
at
11.10.3 Materials -Q
1 Materials used shall be suitable proprietary materials for manhole rehabilitation and the
specific application in which they are used. The materials shall be supplied in factory-labelled
containers. All materials shall be mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s
LL
instructions.
W
2 Materials used for plugging holes and stopping infiltration in manholes shall be either:
s
(a) Premixed hydraulic cement consisting of Portland cement, graded silica aggregates,
en
special plasticising and accelerating agents with a set time of approximately 50 s and
a 10 min compressive strength of approximately 3.5 MPa and free of chlorides,
gypsum, plasters, iron particles, or gas-forming agents
m
(b) Siliconate-based liquid accelerator mixed with neat Portland cement with a set time of
e
approximately 50 s.
Si
3 Materials used for patching, filling and repairing non-infiltration holes, cracks, and breaks in
concrete and masonry manholes shall comprise a premixed Portland cement-based
hydraulic cement consisting of Portland cement, graded silica aggregates, special plasticising
and accelerating agents with a set time of approximately 3 min or 15 min to suit application
and a one-hour compressive strength of approximately 4.2 MPa. It shall not contain
chlorides, gypsum, plasters, iron particles, or gas-forming agents.
4 Materials used for waterproofing membrane, corrosion protection, and strengthening of

concrete and block work manholes shall be:
(a) liquid polymer modified water based waterproof coating which shall provide a secure
mechanical and chemical bond with a curing time of approximately 1.5 h and a
cured compressive strength of approximately 40 MPa. The coating shall be applied
with a brush to surfaces without cracks or voids wider than 1.5 mm
(b) 100 % solids, three-component system consisting of a two-component epoxy resin

and a special blend of fillers which shall provide a secure mechanical and chemical
bond with an initial curing time of approximately 4 h and a cured compressive
strength of approximately 76 MPa. The resin with fillers shall be applied with a trowel
to a thickness of 3 mm to 12 mm. Epoxy resin (without fillers) used for waterproofing
and corrosion protection shall be applied with a brush.
5 Remove all defective linings together with 100mm of adjoining good lining in existing
manholes and other structures, including areas of lining covering leakage points.
6 Break out defective concrete to sound concrete surface.
7 Apply approved epoxy bonding agent and reinstate concrete using an approved concrete
repair material.
ar
11.10.4 Rehabilitation of Manhole Walls and Bases
at
1 Surfaces of manhole walls and bases shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all loose
material and surface contaminants. Cleaning shall be accomplished by pressure jetting,
-Q
sandblasting, or applying a 10 % solution of muriatic acid or hydrochloric acid. Where an acid
solution is used the surface shall be thoroughly rinsed and neutralised before the application
of mortars and coatings.
LL
2 After surface preparation and before the application of mortars and coatings, infiltration shall
W
be stopped by sealing as specified in Clause 11.3.4.
11.10.5 Rehabilitation of Manhole Shafts and Slabs

s
en
1 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent debris from damaging the
manholes and the sewer.
m
2 Shafts and cover slabs shall be repaired and rehabilitated with suitable sound materials
e

Si
3 Rings shall be provided as appropriate to reconstruct the shaft to the required elevation.
11.10.6 Manhole Cover, Frame and Sealing Plate Reinstallation or Replacement
1 The Contractor shall remove covers, frames, and sealing plates. Where the Engineer
determines that cover, frames and sealing plates are to be replaced, the Contractor shall
dispose of them.
2 The Contractor shall adjust the level and slope of the manhole cover as required. The
manhole shall be raised by building precast concrete rings.
3 Covers and frames determined by the Engineer to be in good condition shall be grit blasted
and coated on all exposed faces with a zinc primer and coal-tar epoxy paint finish as
specified for System C in Part 8 of this Section. Replacement covers, frames and sealing
plates shall be as specified in Part 6 of this Section.
4 The Contractor shall reinstall or replace the manhole cover and frame using either of the
following methods in accordance with the Contract Drawings and clause 4.4 of this Section.
5 Sealing plates shall be installed as specified in Part 6 of this Section.
1 Completed rehabilitation works shall be visually inspected in the presence of the Engineer.
Work that has become defective shall be redone at no additional cost to the Employer.
11.11 MANHOLE LINING
11.11.1 Scope
1 The scope of work comprises structural rehabilitation of manholes by the installation of in-situ
glass fibre reinforced manhole liners.
ar
11.11.2 Materials
at
GRP liner materials shall be as specified in Part 7 of this Section.
-Q
11.11.3 Installation of Lining
1 The cover slab and manhole cover shall be removed and disposed of off Site. The manhole
LL
cover and frame shall be thoroughly cleaned, treated with two coats of bituminous paint and
delivered to CED store and placed into storage.
W
2 Step irons shall be removed and the walls made good and prepared with 3:1 sand/cement
s
mortar.
en
3 Concrete surfaces to be lined shall be cleaned and lightly abraded prior to the application of
the GRP. The GRP lining shall be built up by applying isophthalic or vinyl ester resin. A layer
m
of ECR glass mat shall then be rolled into the resin using a suitable steel roller to exclude all
e
air and provide complete immersion of the glass fibre in the resin. After a period to allow pre-
Si
gel to a tacky state, a second coat of resin shall be applied followed by a further layer of glass
fibre mat. This process shall be repeated until the total thickness of lining is approximately
4 mm. Vinyl ester resin and “C” glass veil shall then be used to complete the lining.
4 Top surfaces of benching shall incorporate silica sand to form a non-slip surface.
5 The precast cover slab shall be seated on the walls using sand/cement mortar. The joint shall
be raked out 15 mm deep on the inside face and pointed with an approved pitch extended
polyurethane sealant.
6 GRP ladders of an approved pattern as specified may be purpose made to suit the depth of
each manhole. Fixings for ladders shall be approved stainless steel stud anchors. Fixing
holes shall be grouted with epoxy mortar and sealed as above. Rungs or treads shall be
ribbed to provide a non-slip surface.
1 After the manhole lining has been installed, the manhole shall be visually inspected in the
presence of the Engineer and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2 Before the expiration of the Period of Maintenance, the Contractor shall visually inspect the
lined manholes in the presence of the Employer or Engineer. Work that has become
defective shall be redone at no additional cost to the Employer.
END OF PART
ar
at
-Q
LL
W
s
en
e m
Si
Part 12: Vacuum Sewerage System
12 VACUUM SEWERAGE SYSTEM .................................................................. 2
12.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

12.1.1 Scope 2
12.1.2 References 2
12.1.5 Submittals 3
12.1.7 Warranty 4
12.1.8 System Operation 4
12.1.9 Commissioning 5
12.1.10 Maintenance 5
12.2 SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE .................................................... 5
ar
12.2.1 General 5
12.2.2 Design of the System 5
at
12.2.3 Design of Vacuum Station -Q 6
12.2.4 Design of Collection Chambers 7
12.2.5 Design of Vacuum Pipelines 7
12.3 PRINCIPAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS ......................................................... 8
LL
12.3.1 General 8
12.3.2 Vacuum Pipelines 8
W
12.3.3 Collection Chamber 9

12.3.4 Interface valves 9
s
12.3.5 Controller 10
en
12.3.6 Sensor 10
12.3.7 Vacuum Vessel 10
m
12.3.8 Vacuum Pumps 11

e
12.3.9 Forwarding Sewage Pumps 11

Si
12.3.10 Motor Control Centre 11

12.3.11 Telemetry Outstation 12
12.3.12 Discharge Pipelines 12
12.4 INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEM ............................................................. 12
12.4.1 Pipelines 12
12.4.2 Pipe Joints for Vacuum Pipelines 12
12.4.3 Pumps, Motors and Instrumentation 13
12.5 TESTING ..................................................................................................... 13
12.5.1 General 13
12.5.2 Testing of Interface Valves, Controllers and Sensors 13
12.5.3 Testing of Pipelines 13
12.5.4 Testing of Pumps, Motors and Instrumentation 14
12.6 TRAINING OF EMPLOYER’S PERSONNEL............................................... 14
12 VACUUM SEWERAGE SYSTEM

12.1 GENERAL
12.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes the specifications for the design and provision of vacuum sewerage
systems.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Earthworks
ar
Part 4 Pipe Installation
Part 5 Valves, Penstocks and Appurtenances
at
Part 6 Miscellaneous Metalwork
Part 8 Protective Coatings and Painting
-Q
Section 1, General
LL
Section 21, Electrical Works

Section 22, Air Conditioning, Refrigeration and Ventilation.
W
12.1.2 References
s
BS 5500, welded pressure vessels

en
European Standard CEN/TC 165, Vacuum sewerage system outside buildings.

m
12.1.3 Definitions
e
1 The following definitions of vacuum sewerage system apply to this Part:

Si
(a) Batch Volume: volume discharged from a collection sump during one normal cycle of
the interface valve and is equivalent to the volume of the sump within the operating
range of the sensor.
(b) Collection Chamber: interface between the vacuum sewerage system and the
collection sewers consisting of a collection sump and interface valve pit.
(c) Collection Sump: storage capacity provided to store flows of sewage until sufficient
volume has accumulated to activate the interface valve. Storage may also be provided
to reduce the risk of flooding if there is a system failure.
(d) Controller: device which, when activated by the sensor, opens the interface valve and,
after the passage of sewage and air, closes the valve.
(e) Forwarding Pumps: pumps installed at the vacuum station to pump the sewage from
the vacuum system to the trunk sewer.
(f) Interface Valve: valve which admits the flow of sewage and air into the vacuum sewer
through the service connection.
(g) Isolation Valve: valve installed to isolate a particular section in the vacuum sewer
network.
(h) Lift: up-grade section between two down-grade sections of a vacuum pipeline. The lift
height is the difference in sewer invert levels between two successive down-grade
sections. The static lift is the increase in the hydraulic grade line at a lift and is
generally the increase in invert level minus the internal diameter.
(i) Sensor: device which senses the presence of sewage in the collection sump and
activates the controller to open the interface valve.
(j) Service Connection: that part of the vacuum pipeline which connects a single collection
chamber to the vacuum sewer.
(k) Vacuum Generator: equipment installed at the vacuum station to generate a vacuum.
(l) Vacuum Pipeline: pipeline under negative pressure.
(m) Vacuum Pump: pump that creates the vacuum in the vacuum pipeline.
ar
(n) Vacuum Recovery Time: time taken after the operation of an interface valve for the
negative pressure at the valve to be restored to its original value.
at
(o) Vacuum Sewer: the major part of the vacuum pipeline into which the service
-Q
connections discharge.
(p) Vacuum Station: vacuum generators, vacuum vessel (or sewage sump), forwarding
pumps and system controls.
LL
(q) Vacuum Vessel: negative pressure vessel connected to the vacuum pump. The
vacuum sewer discharges into the vacuum vessel and the forwarding pumps pump
W
sewage from the vessel. The vacuum pumps maintain a negative pressure in the
vessel. When the vacuum generator is an ejector pump, the vacuum vessel is
s
replaced by a sewage sump a

QCS 2014 Complete PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

QCS 2014 Complete PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QCS 2014 Contents Page 1

Part 16 Traffic Diversions

Part 18 Other Contractors

Part 21 Final Inspection and Handover Procedures

Part 24 Construction Dewatering

SECTION 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 3 GROUND INVESTIGATION

SECTION 4 Foundations and Retaining Structures

Part 6 Property Requirements

Part 13 Inspection and Testing Of Hardened Concrete

Part 14 Protective Treatments for Concrete

Part 10 Vehicle Crash Barriers

SECTION 7 GREEN CONSTRUCTIONS

Part 4 Pipeline Installation

Part 6 Miscellaneous Metal Works

Part 7 Miscellaneous GRP Works

Part 9 Trenchless Pipeline Construction

Part 11 Sewer Rehabilitation

Part 12 Vacuum Sewerage System

SECTION 9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Part 15 Settlement Tank Equipment

SECTION 10 INSTRUMENTATION, CONTROL AND AUTOMATION

SECTION 12 EARTHWORKS RELATED TO BUILDINGS

Part 5 Installation of Protective Membranes

Part 2 Mortar and Grout

SECTION 15 SECTION 15 INSULATION OF BUILDINGS

SECTION 16 STRUCTURAL STEELWORKS

Part 2 Wood Treatment

Part 4 Architectural Timber (Finished Carpentry, Millwork)

Part 6 Fasteners and Adhesives

Part 7 Ironmongery (Hardware)

SECTION 19 PLUMBING WORK

Part 2 Water Distribution

SECTION 20 DRAINAGE WORKS FOR BUILDINGS

SECTION 21 ELECTRICAL WORKS

Part 22 Earthing and Bonding

Part 25 Electrical Identification

Part 27 Battery and Battery Charger

Part 28 Small Enclosures

Part 30 Duct Bank and Manholes

Part 31 Power Distribution Transformers

SECTION 22 AIR CONDITIONING, REFRIGERATION AND VENTILATION

SECTION 23 FIRE FIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS

Part 3 Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Systems

SECTION 24 FINISHES TO BUILDINGS

Part 4 Glazed Curtain Walling System

Part 2 Surface Preparation for Painting

Part 4 Wall Coverings of Decorative Papers/Fabrics

SECTION 27 EXTERNAL WORKS

We welcome any observations, suggestions or additions for future issues.

Description Issue Date

Qatar Construction Specification Original Issue April 2000

Qatar Construction Specification 2002 Revision I November 2002

Qatar National Construction Standards 2007 Revision II July 2007

Qatar Construction Specifications 2014 Revision IV October 2014

Dr. Mohammed Saif Al-Kuwari Eng. Khalid Al-Emadi

Ministry of Environment Ministry of Environment H/ of the Documents Editing

Sharif Mohamed Gareth Thomas Ehab G Saleh

Sub Committees Members

Srinivasan Samiappan Subrato Mukherjee Tom Baines Yasser Berzan

Technical Committee for Preparing and Development of QCS

QUALITY CONCRETE ROADS GREEN BUILDING DRAINAGE SAFETY RAIL

By post: The Coordinator